Blog - CSEP http://stg.csep.org Centre for Social and Economic Progress Tue, 07 Oct 2025 09:19:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://i0.wp.com/stg.csep.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/cropped-faviconcsep.png?fit=32%2C32 Blog - CSEP http://stg.csep.org 32 32 182459418 India’s Quality Control Orders: Understanding Key Trends http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-quality-control-orders-understanding-key-trends/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-quality-control-orders-understanding-key-trends http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-quality-control-orders-understanding-key-trends/#respond Wed, 24 Sep 2025 09:54:21 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=904306 A key challenge in evaluating QCOs has been the lack of systematic mapping between QCO regulations and their corresponding Harmonized System (HS) codes. To address this gap, an exercise was undertaken to map QCOs to unique HS codes. This blog by Prerna Prabhakar provides a snapshot of key QCO trends.

The post India’s Quality Control Orders: Understanding Key Trends first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The global economy is undergoing rapid shifts, with one of the key drivers being the uncertainty surrounding U.S. tariff policy. What role can India play in navigating these developments?

While the government is working on short- to medium-term responses, India must, in the long run, focus on reforming its manufacturing sector to ensure global competitiveness. As highlighted in a recent CSEP study, India continues to lag behind its Asian peers in manufacturing competitiveness (Prabhakar et al., 2025). One of the critical reasons for this gap is India’s relatively high tariff barriers. As of 2024, the average tariff on non-agricultural goods in India stood at 13%, compared to significantly lower rates in China (6.5%), Malaysia (5.3%), and Vietnam (8.3%). These tariffs, combined with structural constraints, have adversely affected India’s ability to compete in global markets.

India’s protectionist approach has intensified in recent years. Tariffs began to rise sharply in 2018 and were reinforced in 2020 with restrictions on Chinese investments, along with the sustained use of anti-dumping duties to curb the inflow of cheap imports.

In parallel, the government has significantly expanded the use of Quality Control Orders (QCOs), especially since 2020. While these orders are designed by respective line ministries, their enforcement lies with the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). QCOs apply to both domestic producers and importers, although certain exemptions are provided for imports meant for re-exports. These orders mandate compliance with specific product standards, with consignments subject to testing. Based on the results, BIS issues certifications to producers or importers.

Although QCOs are intended to strengthen India’s manufacturing ecosystem, they have also generated supply chain disruptions

Although QCOs are intended to strengthen India’s manufacturing ecosystem, they have also generated supply chain disruptions. Certification delays, particularly affecting suppliers of critical components, have increased lead times for manufacturers and exporters. Lengthy testing procedures add further strain to production schedules.

A key challenge in evaluating QCOs has been the lack of systematic mapping between QCO regulations and their corresponding Harmonized System (HS) codes. To address this gap, an exercise was undertaken to map QCOs to unique HS codes. Drawing on this newly developed database, this blog provides a snapshot of key QCO trends.

Growth in QCOs over years 

As of December 2024, India had implemented 765 QCOs—up sharply from just 88 in 2019

As of December 2024, India had implemented 765 QCOs—up sharply from just 88 in 2019 (Figure 1). This surge in QCOs has unfolded alongside a broader shift in India’s trade and investment policy landscape. Since 2017, tariff levels have risen significantly, climbing from 13.5% in 2017 to 17.1% in 2018. In 2020, restrictions were introduced on Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) from China, followed by a sharp decline in overall FDI inflows—from a peak of US$ 64.4 billion in 2020 to just US$ 28.1 billion in 2023. In parallel, the government rolled out the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) schemes.

Taken together, these measures reflect a deliberate policy shift away from import dependence and toward strengthening self-sufficiency in manufacturing, both to meet domestic demand and to build competitiveness in foreign markets.

Figure 1: Growth in India’s QCOs

Source: Author’s analysis based on Goyal and Goyal (2025).

Sectoral Decomposition of QCOs 

A sectoral analysis of QCOs shows that metals, machinery and electronics, textiles, chemicals, plastics and rubber, and footwear are among the most affected industries

A sectoral analysis of QCOs shows that metals, machinery and electronics, textiles, chemicals, plastics and rubber, and footwear are among the most affected industries (Figure 2). 

Notably, sectors with a high incidence of QCOs also tend to display significant firm concentration. Acharya and Chauhan (2023) report that as of 2021, the top five business groups accounted for 68% of total assets in the Manufacture of Basic Metals sector and 26% in the Manufacture of Chemicals. This concentration, combined with the prevalence of QCOs, suggests a strong overlap between sectors with greater market power and those subject to more stringent regulatory measures.

Figure 2: Sectoral Composition of QCOs (Per Cent), 1987–2025

Source: Author’s analysis based on Goyal and Goyal (2025).

QCO decomposition across the category of goods

Majority of QCOs apply to intermediate goods (45.7%), raising concerns about potential disruptions to domestic supply chains

Notably, the majority of QCOs apply to intermediate goods (45.7%), raising concerns about potential disruptions to domestic supply chains (Figure 3). For instance, viscose staple fibres—widely used in synthetic garment production—and steel fasteners—critical inputs in the automotive industry—are both covered under QCOs. Such measures risk exacerbating existing challenges to India’s manufacturing competitiveness, an area where the country already lags behind its peers (Prabhakar et al., 2025).

Figure 3: Distribution of QCOs Across Supply Chain Stages

 

Source: Author’s analysis based on Goyal and Goyal (2025).

 

Key Takeaways and Road Ahead 

Overall, the assessment of the QCO database reveals a sharp surge in its imposition by line ministries and the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). This expansion has coincided with broader policy shifts toward import protection and self-reliance. The sectors most affected by QCOs are also those characterised by a high concentration of market power and domination by large firms. Most importantly, QCOs are concentrated in intermediate and capital goods—the backbone of domestic supply chains. This poses significant risks to the competitiveness of India’s industrial output.

Given these trends, it is important to adopt a calibrated approach to QCO implementation, particularly in the selection of products brought under these orders. QCOs should be imposed strictly on quality-related grounds, and not for protectionist purposes—especially in the case of capital and intermediate goods that are not produced in sufficient quantities within India.

At the same time, compliance procedures need to be streamlined to ease the burden on Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs), which often face significant challenges in meeting complex certification requirements. Finally, regulatory bodies should carefully monitor the potential for QCOs to create pricing power and reinforce concentration in already concentrated sectors, thereby limiting adverse effects on competition in the Indian industry. 

The post India’s Quality Control Orders: Understanding Key Trends first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-quality-control-orders-understanding-key-trends/feed/ 0 904306
China in South Asia: Three Things I Learned From Our Project http://stg.csep.org/blog/china-in-south-asia-three-things-i-learned-from-our-project/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=china-in-south-asia-three-things-i-learned-from-our-project http://stg.csep.org/blog/china-in-south-asia-three-things-i-learned-from-our-project/#respond Wed, 03 Sep 2025 10:49:07 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=904177 Constantino Xavier shares three broad learnings from his collaborative work with Jabin Jacob from a project over the past three years; the 2023 report 'How China Engages South Asia: Themes, Partners and Tools' to the 2025 report 'How China Engages South Asia: In the Open and Behind the Scenes'.

The post China in South Asia: Three Things I Learned From Our Project first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
We still know too little about China’s rising influence in South Asia: beyond Beijing’s push factor, there are also important pull factors at play from countries in the region.

Jabin Jacob and I recently released the second edited report of our China in South Asia project at CSEP. How China Engages South Asia: In the Open and Behind the Scenes (2025) features twelve case studies of Chinese influence in the region, from Afghanistan to Myanmar and from Nepal to Sri Lanka. Sectors examined include civil society and culture, economy and governance, conflict mediation, defence and security, and influence operations. This is the follow up to our 2023 report How China Engages South Asia: Themes, Partners and Tools.

This report is the most recent outcome of a multi-year research project that we jointly directed together with support from Shivshankar Menon, Shruti Jargad and – most importantly – over twenty regional experts who offer an in-depth perspective on the instruments and partners that China engages in and around the Indian subcontinent.

There are many important reasons to invest in a more granular understanding of how China operates in South Asia. For some, especially in India, the relevance will be to better deter or counter China and preserve New Delhi’s predominance. Others will be concerned about the authoritarian nature of the Chinese party-state and its impact on South Asia’s democratic and pluralist regimes, especially on policy-making accountability and transparency.

But in our introduction to the report, Jabin Jacob and I also refer to other, equally important reasons. For example, we argue that “there is also much to learn from Chinese diplomatic practices and outreach regarding effective engagement strategies.” China’s rise in the region in recent years has been formidable, as an economic actor (major trade partner and source of investments), as well as a security and political actor that is engaging different public and private actors, from political parties to the military, civil society and sub-national units.

All this is not something that can be achieved merely through the power of capital and coercion: Beijing wields several softer instruments of statecraft and diplomatic approaches that hold important lessons for India and other major powers. In what follows here, I share three broad learnings from my collaborative work on this project over the past three years.

Beijing wields several softer instruments of statecraft and diplomatic approaches that hold important lessons for India and other major powers

First, I noticed a significant knowledge gap about China across the region. There are still far too few scholars who specialise on China and even fewer have experience in China or the required language expertise to access primary materials and conduct interviews with Chinese government or company officials. The number of South Asian students going to China has risen fast in recent years – and in some cases (such as Bangladesh) that flow is now larger than those choosing India for higher education. It will take some time for this outflow to translate into a return “brain gain” in the form of cutting-edge research on China. But there are already positive indications, including the Araniko Project led by two of our contributors from Nepal.

The same holds true for the broader policy ecosystem, whether bureaucracy or industry: they are engaging in more frequent interactions with their Chinese counterparts, but that has not yet led to a critical mass of former technocrats or corporate leaders who are experts on China. There is a lag effect: China is engaging fast and deep with countries in the region but – unlike in other regions such as Southeast Asia or Europe – overall China literacy here remains limited. This knowledge gap naturally brings risks. As Jabin and I emphasise in the report’s introduction, “at the very least, the lack of such understanding—of China’s priorities and primary interests—will constrain countries engaged in negotiations with the Chinese from achieving better terms.”

There is a lag effect: China is engaging fast and deep with countries in the region but – unlike in other regions such as Southeast Asia or Europe – overall China literacy here remains limited.

One final note: India is not necessarily ahead of the Sinology curve when compared to its neighbour countries. The gap has been articulated repeatedly by Jabin Jacob, Madhavi Thampi, Arunabh Ghosh, and Tansen Sen, who have mapped the field of China studies in India and beckoned for more support. As Shruti Jargad and I argue in a forthcoming CSEP working paper that unpacks Chinese official discourse on the region: “Governments, particularly that of India, should increase investment in China studies programmes at universities, think tanks, and diplomatic training institutions. Strengthening policy-oriented research will ensure better decision-making and more accurate assessments of China’s regional role.”

I have interacted with several researchers who consider writing assessments about China in their respective countries to constitute a risky or “sensitive” task – except, of course, if it is to laud the BRI and portray the “middle kingdom” in a positive light.

My second, related learning from this project is that there are still significant concerns for scholars in the non-India neighbourhood to write about China. I have interacted with several researchers who consider writing assessments about China in their respective countries to constitute a risky or “sensitive” task – except, of course, if it is to laud the BRI and portray the “middle kingdom” in a positive light. One gets the same feeling during conferences and workshops I attend in Kathmandu, Dhaka, or Colombo: here, speakers frequently and comfortably criticize India or “the West” but when it comes to discussing the less rosy effect of Beijing’s political interference or governance conditionalities, the room often goes eerily silent.

The sad result of this is a balkanization of the research ecosystem across the region, as different groups of think tanks and scholars align with different geopolitical camps and funding sources. The effect is that critical, independent and evidence-based work suffers: with reference to China, this also leads to a subcontinental partition between two extremes; on the one hand, those who demonise China (the predominant tone in India) and, on the other hand, those who glorify China (the predominant tone in other countries).

Congrats and kudos to the 20+ scholars from across this region who agreed to contribute with empirically rich and well researched articles that compose our two CSEP reports. They understood and trusted our project’s objective: evidence-based, judgement-free case studies on China’s influence in different domains across the subcontinent. They offer a unique, local perspective that should inform future research and policymaking.

we sometimes overrate China’s influence because in several instances it is less about the push factor (from Beijing) and more about the pull factor (from South Asian countries).

My third and final learning: we sometimes overrate China’s influence because in several instances it is less about the push factor (from Beijing) and more about the pull factor (from South Asian countries). In one example, of what Shivshankar Menon calls “anticipatory compliance,” political leaders across the region take actions in expectation of – or hoping to curry favour with – China. They also do so as an attempt to increase bargaining power over India. Finally, they may also signal proximity to (and initiatives with) China to expand their political support base at home, especially during electoral periods or when recently voted into power.

Ironically, this is not always in Beijing’s interest. But it is a good example of smaller states’ geopolitical agency which transcends the India-China dimension and often also involves a third country or block (the US, Europe, Japan, Australia). Leaders are learning to play the different sides of this strategic triangle: through such dynamic balancing they seek to maximise their time in power and their country’s interests across economic, security and other indicators. So even if Beijing is presently not interested to cooperate or fails to reciprocate, from their perspective, the mere attempt to engage offers dividends: in game theory parlance, this is China’s shadow of the future across the subcontinent today.

As Nicolas Blarel and I show in this article on “reinventing non-alignment” with case studies on Nepal and the Maldives, South Asian countries have had different levels of success in achieving this. This depends on varying levels of state capacity (including leadership acumen and bureaucratic expertise) and on degrees of electoral instability and consequent incentives to politicise foreign policy.

Our China in South Asia project is continuous work in progress and relies on a growing regional research collaborative. Through workshops, we had the opportunity to also develop a comparative dimension with some of the world’s top Sinologists who work on China’s influence in other regions, including Southeast Asia, Europe, and Africa. Two areas interest me, in particular: 1) China’s legal influence in shaping governance through standards and regulations; and 2) China’s military diplomacy, with a focus on operational doctrines, training and new domains of warfare (for example: cyber). I look forward to more learnings!

The post China in South Asia: Three Things I Learned From Our Project first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/china-in-south-asia-three-things-i-learned-from-our-project/feed/ 0 904177
Decarbonising the Asian Giants: Comparing Indian and Chinese Models of Climate Action http://stg.csep.org/blog/decarbonising-the-asian-giants-comparing-indian-and-chinese-models-of-climate-action/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=decarbonising-the-asian-giants-comparing-indian-and-chinese-models-of-climate-action http://stg.csep.org/blog/decarbonising-the-asian-giants-comparing-indian-and-chinese-models-of-climate-action/#respond Mon, 01 Sep 2025 08:50:50 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=904154 This blog by Pooja Ramamurthi and Tejal Atul Karad compares the national climate policies and goals set by the two countries and explores differences in governance and implementation models pursued by India and China.

The post Decarbonising the Asian Giants: Comparing Indian and Chinese Models of Climate Action first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
China and India Matter for Global Decarbonisation

The pathways and technologies that India and China use to produce energy for their future development play a major role in global efforts to mitigate carbon emissions. This blog compares the national climate policies and goals set by the two countries and explores differences in governance and implementation models pursued by the two countries. The blog also seeks to understand how both countries operationalise their climate goals, and processes of policy co-ordination between difference levels of governance. The blog concludes with the policy challenges being faced by both countries, and the potential of learning from each-other for improved policy implementation.

Today, China is the world’s largest emitter, accounting for 31.5% of total emissions, while India is third at 8.1%. While both countries are significant contributors to emissions, a comparison of per capita emissions provides a more differentiated picture. Despite their comparable population, China’s per capita carbon emissions are around 9.24 metric tonnes, four times higher than India’s 2.07 metric tonnes, with the world average sitting in between at 4.69 metric tonnes.

Realising their critical role in combatting climate change, both countries have announced strong national climate goals.

Realising their critical role in combatting climate change, both countries have announced strong national climate goals. China has committed to peaking carbon emissions before 2030 and achieving carbon neutrality by 2060, while India aims to reach net-zero by 2070, without mentioning a peaking year. These targets not only reflect India and China’s climate ambition but also the scale and complexity of implementation required which is in turn shaped by their governance models.

Decarbonisation Targets in India and China

Table 1 below presents a comparison of India and China’s key climate targets, including their commitments on carbon neutrality, renewable energy capacity, and emissions intensity reductions.

Table 1: Climate Targets of India and China

Set Targets India China
Emission Intensity Reduction

 

 

Reduce emission intensity (CO2 per unit GDP) by 45% by 2030 (from 2005 levels)

 

Reduce emission intensity (CO2 per unit GDP) by 60-65% by 2030 (from 2005 levels)
 

Non-Fossil Installed Capacity

 

 

Install 500 GW of non-fossil fuel-based installed capacity by 2030, which is an increase of 106% from today’s capacity of 242.8 GW. Install 2500 GW of non-fossil fuel-based installed capacity by 2030, which is an increase of 25% from today’s capacity of 2000 GW.

 

Solar and Wind Installed Capacity Combined solar and wind capacity target of 420 GW by 2030. Out of this 280 GW is from solar and 140 GW from wind. The 2030 solar target is 2.4 times and wind 2.7 times  2025 capacity. Combined solar and wind capacity target of 1,200 GW by 2030 which had been met six years in advance.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bioenergy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ethanol blending in petrol

 

20% (E20)[1] by 2030. Target achieved by 2025. 10% (E10)[2] nationwide mandate  by 2020. Failed to meet target. Currently at 1.8%, and no explicit target.
Biodiesel blending 5% by 2030 Not explicitly targeted
Total bioenergy use No national volume target 30 billion m³ by 2030
Hydropower No explicit target. No explicit target.

 

Nuclear Energy 100 GW by 2047, a 11 times increase from 2025 capacity.

 

120–150 GW by 2030, 200 GW by 2040, a 3.3 times increase from 2025 capacity.

 

Afforestation / Forest Carbon Sink Create additional 2.5–3 billion tonnes of CO₂ equivalent carbon sink by 2030 through forest and tree cover from 2005 levels.

 

Plant and conserve 70 billion trees by 2030;

Increase the forest stock volume by 6 billion cubic meters from the 2005 level by 2030

 

Source: Author compilation from multiple sources

Graphs 1 and 2 illustrate the installed capacity and share of electricity generation from different energy sources in India and China respectively. These graphs help us understand how the two countries are progressing toward their clean energy targets and transitioning away from fossil fuels.

The first graph shows us the differences in the installed capacity of India and China. China’s significantly larger renewable and overall capacity reflects its ability to deploy large amounts of infrastructure in short spans of time. India’s smaller but growing capacity also highlights progress in solar and wind capacity, albeit at a lower scale. We can see that by 2024, China had already exceeded its 2030 targets for wind and solar.  In contrast, India’s annual run rate for adding wind and solar places it behind schedule for its 2030 targets.

Graph 1: Total Installed Capacity (in GW) in India and China in 2024

The second graph shows us that both countries have similar shares of solar (~6 percent) and natural gas (~3 percent). Hydropower (~13%) and wind (~9%) play greater role in China’s energy mix, while India has a higher share of coal (~75%). However, the existing electricity mix[3]  of both countries reveals that their current high dependence on coal makes energy transitions a key determinant to achieving their net-zero policies.

Graph 2: Percentage Share by Source in Electricity Generated in  India and China in 2023

Policy Frameworks in India and China

In this section, we analyse what policy measures and subnational strategies both countries have sought to operationalise and implement their climate policies.

India

The Indian government launched the National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC) in 2008, which includes eight national missions.[4] These missions were designed to guide climate action across the country and are implemented primarily through state governments, allowing for region-specific adaptation and solutions. Based on the national missions, each state develops its own State Action Plan on Climate Change (SAPCC). This reflected India’s bottom-up approach, where the central government provides the framework, and the actual planning and action are led at the state level. For example, in their SAPCC’s Odisha has focused on reducing electricity losses, Sikkim prioritised protecting its Himalayan water sources, and Himachal Pradesh proposed payments for maintaining forest ecosystems. Through these plans, states aim to connect their specific local issues with the national climate agenda.

Although India does not currently have a formal National Adaptation Plan (NAP) under the UNFCCC, different national and sub-national actors have integrated adaptation across several missions and state-level plans . For instance, the Ahmedabad Heat Action Plan focuses on reducing the health impacts of extreme heat through early warning systems and community outreach. The Chennai’s Water Resilience Strategy targets urban flooding and water scarcity through integrated water management. The Mumbai Climate Action Plan outlines sets 24 strategies across six sectors, including energy, mobility, waste, and flood management, to cut emissions and build climate resilience. Importantly, India has announced that it will submit its first official NAP at COP30 in November 2025. This marks a significant step in strengthening national-level coordination on adaptation, especially for vulnerable sectors like agriculture, water, and health.

China

To operationalise its climate policy China has created a ‘1+N’ framework also known as “working guidance” . ‘1’ stands for one big national plan that sets the two main national climate goals – cutting carbon emissions by 2030 and becoming carbon neutral by 2060, while ‘N’ is a series of supporting documents which includes policy measures and action plan for key sectors and industries. While each province is free to create its own climate action plan that reflect its characteristics , it is still bound to follow the national goal. For example, Shanxi focuses on cutting coal use, while Jiangsu works on measuring carbon in products. Jiang Xiaoqian, project manager of the climate and energy programme at WRI China quotes “The central government would dissect the goals and pass them down to provinces. Provinces would dissect the goals again and pass them down to prefectures, which would then do the same”. State owned enterprises along with the provincial governments are also key implementing bodies of China’s climate agenda. This reflects a multi-level implementation model, with strict coordination and accountability mechanisms.

In addition to mitigation plan, China also introduced its National Climate Change Adaptation Strategy 2035, which outlines a long-term plan to strengthen resilience across sectors like agriculture, health, water, and infrastructure. It emphasises early warning systems, regional risk assessments, and the integration of adaptation into local development. Together, these strategies show how China’s climate approach combines centralised planning with localised execution, backed by evaluation and performance metrics.Top of Form

Comparing India and China’s policy frameworks

China’s provinces are not only expected to follow national climate goals but are also required to develop sector-specific action plans tailored to their local economic and environmental characteristics. These provincial plans often include region-specific targets and strategies, making them more detailed and performance driven. China’s climate policy includes both binding targets enforced through cadre performance evaluations and more flexible, aspirational targets.  The binding targets are associated with specific targets and timelines, ,while the aspirational goals are non-binding and envision ambitious scenarios. In contrast, India’s State Action Plans on Climate Change (SAPCCs) are guided by the National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC) but remain non-binding in nature. Each Indian state creates its own SAPCC based on local priorities, and while many include adaptation planning, the absence of a single, unified national adaptation strategy like China’s Climate Change Adaptation Strategy 2035 makes coordination more difficult.

An important difference between India and China’s climate policy implementation lies in how progress is tracked and enforced. China has a well-structured evaluation system where provincial and local governments are assessed using a ‘Cadre Performance Matrix’ system. Provincial and local governments are assessed using a form of bureaucratic accountability that links environmental targets with the career progress of local officials. This ensures that provinces are under direct pressure to meet carbon, energy, and pollution targets, making climate goals legally and politically binding. China also uses internal performance standards for state-owned enterprises, and in recent years has introduced renewable energy consumption quotas similar to India’s Renewable Purchase Obligation (RPO) system.

In India, an important enforcement tool for promoting renewable energy adoption is the Renewable Purchase Obligation (RPO), which legally requires electricity distribution companies (DISCOMs) and large energy consumers to purchase a certain percentage of their electricity from renewable sources. RPO targets are set by the central government and monitored by state electricity regulators. On the other hand, India does not have a unified, nationwide evaluation matrix that monitors the implementation of SAPCCs or holds states accountable for climate performance. As a result, while policies exist, enforcement is weaker, and implementation varies widely across states.

Together, these systems reflect a key contrast, while China enforces climate progress through centralised performance reviews and political accountability mechanisms, India relies more on policy tools like RPOs and state-driven reporting, which are often uneven in practice.  This may be a reflection of the federal political structure in India. India could benefit from developing a structured, transparent monitoring and evaluation framework that strengthens inter-state accountability and suits democratic governance.

Challenges in Implementation

While China has set ambitious climate targets and built massive renewable capacity, it still faces serious structural and regional challenges in implementation. One major issue is energy curtailment when renewable energy is generated but not used due to overcapacity, poor grid integration or lack of transmission infrastructure. Although the West-to-East Corridor Project has improved connectivity, gaps such as poor provincial coordination and transmission bottlenecks persist. This is partly caused by provincial competition, where local governments race to build energy projects to meet targets or attract investment, often without proper coordination. As a result, resource-rich regions in China’s interior, such as Xinjiang or Inner Mongolia, produce surplus energy but lack the infrastructure to transmit it efficiently to demand centres in the east. These regions also tend to be economically less developed, creating a mismatch between energy generation and local development

While renewable energy capacity is expanding rapidly in the western and southern states, India’s coal-rich but underdeveloped areas, particularly in the central and eastern regions lag behind. As India plans its clean energy transition, it must ensure that it doesn’t repeat China’s mistakes in creating transmission bottlenecks. The social and economic consequences of coal phaseout, including job loss and regional disruption, need to be carefully managed through transition policies. By learning from China’s experience, India can aim for more balanced, long-term outcomes while avoiding some of the structural inefficiencies that could potentially hamper China’s progress.

Despite their different political systems, both India and China rely heavily on decentralised planning and implementation to drive their climate actions. Both countries have recognised the importance of involving regional and local governments in climate governance

Conclusion

Despite their different political systems, both India and China rely heavily on decentralised planning and implementation to drive their climate actions. Both countries have recognised the importance of involving regional and local governments in climate governance. China is a bit more top-down model with strong oversight and performance tracking while India has tended to use a more bottom-up approach rooted in state-level flexibility.

As they move forward, strengthening local capacity, improving accountability, and learning from each other’s systems can help both countries turn their climate promises into lasting progress.

Importantly, both nations have set clear climate targets. China aims to peak emissions before 2030 and reach carbon neutrality by 2060, while India targets net-zero by 2070 with strong renewable energy goals. Their climate ambitions are bold and necessary, given their global roles in emissions and development. As they move forward, strengthening local capacity, improving accountability, and learning from each other’s systems can help both countries turn their climate promises into lasting progress.

Finally, it is important to note that while both countries have started the journey towards net-zero, Chinese industries have sufficient domestic capacity to supply raw materials and technologies required to undergo their transition. Whereas, India is still at a nascent stage in developing its clean industries, still having an import dependence on China to meet its needs.

 

The authors would like to thank Rahul Tongia for his valuable comments.

The post Decarbonising the Asian Giants: Comparing Indian and Chinese Models of Climate Action first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/decarbonising-the-asian-giants-comparing-indian-and-chinese-models-of-climate-action/feed/ 0 904154
India’s Climate Finance Requirements – Steel and Cement Overwhelm Power http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-climate-finance-requirements-steel-and-cement-overwhelm-power/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-climate-finance-requirements-steel-and-cement-overwhelm-power http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-climate-finance-requirements-steel-and-cement-overwhelm-power/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 13:00:40 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=904112 This blog is based on Janak Raj and Rakesh Mohan's latest study "India’s Climate Finance Requirements: An Assessment”.

The post India’s Climate Finance Requirements – Steel and Cement Overwhelm Power first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India faces a pressing challenge of aligning its developmental aspirations with a sustainable and low-carbon path, necessitating immediate and targeted climate action. Various studies have estimated the climate finance requirements of India in the range of $160-$288 billion annually up to 2030. All these estimates are model-based and have followed top-down approaches that fail to address granular and sector-specific climate finance requirements.

The overall estimated climate finance or additional capex for India’s four key CO2 emitting sectors is estimated at $467 billion from 2022 to 2030, with an annual average capex of $54 billion or 1.3 percent of India’s GDP

Our new study,India’s Climate Finance Requirements: An Assessment,” adopts a bottom-up approach, focusing on four key carbon-emitting sectors – steel, cement, power and road transport – that together accounted for over half of India’s carbon emissions in 2023. The study assesses the additional capital expenditure (capex) India would require to decarbonize these sectors, beyond the capex projected under a business-as-usual (BAU) scenario up to 2030.

Our study employs two distinct methodologies for the four sectors. For the power and road transport sectors, climate finance is estimated as the additional capital expenditure required for a progressive transition from fossil fuel-based sources to renewables (power) and from internal combustion engine vehicles to electric vehicles (road transport). For the steel and cement sectors, climate finance is estimated as the total capital expenditure required to mitigate existing as well as incremental carbon emissions that will arise in these two sectors up to 2030. In addition, the study also examines the macroeconomic consistency of estimated climate finance requirements and evaluates the fiscal space for financing climate action by the public sector.

Estimating Climate Finance Needs in Key CO2 Emitting Sectors

The overall estimated climate finance or additional capex for India’s four key CO2 emitting sectors is estimated at $467 billion from 2022 to 2030, with an annual average capex of $54 billion or 1.3 percent of India’s GDP (Figure 1). In other words, India would require $467 billion in additional climate finance to decarbonize just these sectors by 2030.

Note: The period covered is 2022-2030 for the steel and cement sectors, 2024-30 for the power sector and 2023-30 for road transport.
Source:
Authors’ calculations.

Thus, contrary to the common narrative, the power sector does not entail large additional capex for abating carbon emissions in India when compared to steel and cement. Ironically, power is the sector that has received the most attention in mitigating the impacts of climate change.

Of the total estimated additional capex requirements, $392 billion alone is estimated for two high-emitting sectors, viz., steel ($251 billion) and cement ($141 billion). India’s steel sector faces large capital requirements because of rising production levels and carbon-intensive production methods. The sector is projected to grow by over 80 percent by 2030, i.e., from 125 million tons in 2022 to 225 million tons by 2030. India’s carbon emission intensity (tons of CO2 produced per ton of steel) of 2.4 significantly exceeds the global average of 1.85.

India’s cement sector requires $141 billion additional capex, driven mainly by its dependence on coal for power generation and kiln operations, despite using efficient dry process technology. While the sector has a lower carbon intensity of 0.44 compared with the global average of 0.6, a sharp increase of 82 percent in projected cement production, from 370 million tons in 2022 to 674 million tons by 2030, significantly drives up the capex required for decarbonizing the sector. Both steel and cement are hard-to-abate sectors where reducing emissions is particularly challenging. Decarbonizing these sectors requires mainly the use of carbon capture and storage (CCS) –  the only feasible technology at this stage, but it is expensive to deploy.

India is estimated to require capex of about $57 billion for the power sector up to 2030. This also includes energy storage costs (battery storage costs and pumped storage costs) for renewable energy, which are estimated to entail capex of $10 billion. Thus, contrary to the common narrative, the power sector does not entail large additional capex for abating carbon emissions in India when compared to steel and cement. Ironically, power is the sector that has received the most attention in mitigating the impacts of climate change.

It is the steel sector which emerges as the most critical in terms of additional capex, followed closely by the cement sector. These findings underscore the substantial investment challenges in these hard-to-abate sectors, primarily driven by their carbon-intensive production methods and/or large production levels

India is also estimated to require $10 billion for switching over from internal combustion engine vehicles (ICEVs) to electric vehicles (EVs), and additional capex of $8 billion to develop the charging infrastructure for EVs. Thus, additional capex for road transport is estimated at $18 billion up to 2030.

Based on the above estimates, decarbonization of the four sectors would result in a large reduction in the use of fossil fuels – 291 million tons of coal and 72 billion liters of petrol and diesel – and mitigation of 6.9 billion tons of CO2 in the power, steel and cement sectors. The road transport sector could not be included in CO2 mitigation estimate as the relevant data was not readily available.

Conclusion

Our study presents a distinct perspective compared with existing research on India’s climate finance needs by estimating additional capex requirements in addition to capex already planned for the economy in the BAU scenario. The study disapproves the common narrative that the power sector needs large climate finance. It is the steel sector which emerges as the most critical in terms of additional capex, followed closely by the cement sector. These findings underscore the substantial investment challenges in these hard-to-abate sectors, primarily driven by their carbon-intensive production methods and/or large production levels.

The need for climate finance has arisen at a time when India is stepping up efforts to accelerate its growth rate by emphasizing physical infrastructure development and promoting manufacturing. As our findings demonstrate, India will need to manage its resources skilfully, balancing the competing demands of growth priorities and decarbonisation of the economy.

India will need to manage its resources skilfully, balancing the competing demands of growth priorities and decarbonisation of the economy.

Furthermore, India’ saving rate has declined in the recent period. Therefore, the key focus of policymaking needs to be on improving the saving rate of the general government (by reducing dissaving) and of the household sector. This would help India navigate the challenges of pursuing development goals and achieving the country’s environmental and sustainability targets without complicating macroeconomic management.

The post India’s Climate Finance Requirements – Steel and Cement Overwhelm Power first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-climate-finance-requirements-steel-and-cement-overwhelm-power/feed/ 0 904112
Fencing, Security and Border Management: The Indian experience http://stg.csep.org/blog/fencing-security-and-border-management-the-indian-experience/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fencing-security-and-border-management-the-indian-experience http://stg.csep.org/blog/fencing-security-and-border-management-the-indian-experience/#respond Tue, 19 Aug 2025 13:19:44 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=904076 This blog by Sushovan Chakraborty and Roya Sinha examines the evolving state of implementation of border fencing with India’s neighbours – an issue that remains an understudied but crucial aspect of border management.

The post Fencing, Security and Border Management: The Indian experience first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In September 2024, India’s Cabinet Committee on Security (CCS), gave in-principle approval for fencing and road construction along the 1,643 km long India-Myanmar border over the next ten years, at an estimated cost of Rs.31,000 crore. This decision comes in the backdrop of evolving security challenges arising from the ongoing civil war in Myanmar, including a surge in refugee inflows, and burgeoning illegal narcotics trade. This fencing project – third along India’s land borders – constitutes a key component of New Delhi’s evolving border management approach to regulate cross-border movement and mitigate emerging security threats through an infrastructure-led approach.

India’s vast land border has faced five wars and experienced other security threats such as illegal migration, cross-border human and narcotics trafficking, cattle smuggling, proliferation of fake currency notes, etc. Over the last three decades, the Indian state has sought to address this challenge through a calibrated mix of physical infrastructure, institutional mechanisms and development programs. Initiatives such as the setting up of  Department of Border Management (2004) in the Ministry of Home Affairs, expansion of the Border Area Development Programme (BADP, 1986-87), and the more recent Vibrant Villages Program (2023), reflect a growing policy consensus that securing borders requires not only fencing but increased state presence. Border Fencing is a part of the GoI’s  Border Infrastructure and Management (BIM) Scheme.

This blog examines the evolving state of implementation of border fencing with India’s neighbours – an issue that remains an understudied but crucial aspect of border management.

This blog examines the evolving state of implementation of border fencing with India’s neighbours – an issue that remains an understudied but crucial aspect of border management. Although border fencing defies uniform characterisation – ranging from barbed wire enclosures to concrete walls – it fundamentally refers to a physical infrastructure along an international boundary that restricts or regulates movement.

The blog also delves into the institutional architecture and political economy of border fencing, highlighting the decision-making structure at the center and state levels. It, however, does not assess the effectiveness of fencing as a border management tool. The focus is confined to India’s land borders and excludes the maritime domain, which is governed by a distinct maritime security framework.

Current Status: How Much of India’s Border Has been Fenced?

While the fencing project across the Myanmar border is in the initial stages, work on the other two border fences has been around for a long time and is at various stages of completion (Table 1).

Table I: Status of India’s Border Fencing

S. No Neighbouring Country Length of actual border (in Km)[1] Length of border fenced (Km) (data as of year) % of border fenced
1 Pakistan 3,323 2041 (2021)[2] 61.4%
2 Bangladesh 4,096 3232(2025)[3] 78.9%
3 Myanmar 1,643 30 (2024)[4] 1.8%

Source: author’s compilation using data from PIB, MHA Annual Report and media reports.

Note: % of unfenced border includes non-feasible stretches and disputed areas as well.

Notwithstanding some common border security threats that India faces along its various borders, each border also comes with its own set of challenges.

At the India-Bangladesh border, the primary concern has revolved around issues such as illegal immigration and cattle smuggling. The Border Security Force (BSF) estimates that about 20 lakh heads of cattle are smuggled out of India into Bangladesh annually. Fencing along this border was initiated in 1986, following the Assam Accords of 1985. Since then, 78.9% of the border has been fenced along stretches in Assam, West Bengal, Meghalaya, and Tripura.

India’s border with Pakistan presents a different security calculus, rooted in issues such as cross-border terrorism and drug smuggling. Fencing at this international border (IB), particularly along the Punjab, Jammu and Rajasthan borders, preceded the Kargil War and has since been fortified further, standing at 61.4%. This border has also seen technological upgrades, such as night vision cameras, motion sensors, etc., as part of an integrated security and surveillance architecture. Since the launch of Operation Sindoor in May 2025, the MHA has also approved a ‘comprehensive upgrade’ of the India-Pakistan border, combining surveillance with anti-infiltration technology such as night-vision cameras and motion sensors.

In contrast, fencing along the India-Myanmar border remains minimal, with only 30 kms of the border fenced (less than 2%) including a significant 10 km stretch in Moreh (Manipur). The complex security situation, marked by the effective control of the border areas by Ethnic Armed Organizations (EAOs) like the Arakan Army, and sensitivities around illegal cross-border movements, has pushed New Delhi to expedite its fencing project. The Free Movement Regime was also scrapped in February 2024 citing such concerns. However, recognising the shared deep ethnic linkages across the border, New Delhi in December 2024, allowed a new arrangement for cross-border movement for people living within 10 km of the Myanmar-Manipur border that would be regulated from 43 designated border crossing points where Assam Rifles (AR) personnel will issue ‘border passes’ to regulate entry and exit.

The AR, tasked with guarding this border, face a unique set of  challenges emanating from difficult topography, including dense forests that make patrolling an uphill task and create a breeding ground for drug trafficking, insurgent movement, and narco-terrorism. These conditions have necessitated a more nuanced, multi-layered approach to border management in the Northeast.

Lastly, along India’s other land borders, fencing has not been undertaken along the border with China due to differing perceptions of the Line of Actual Control (LAC) and related agreements. Likewise, the borders with Nepal and Bhutan remain unfenced, a reflection of long-standing treaty-based open-border regimes and relatively low levels of traditional border threats.

Institutional Framework: Who Fences the Border? 

Border fencing effort from India is a complex undertaking that involves multiple stakeholders, within the broader framework of border management. While the primary mandate lies with India’s Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), the implementation of fencing involves coordination across several ministries, state governments and ground-level agencies.

Border fencing effort from India is a complex undertaking that involves multiple stakeholders, within the broader framework of border management. While the primary mandate lies with India’s Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), the implementation of fencing involves coordination across several ministries, state governments and ground-level agencies.

The institutional foundation was strengthened following the recommendations of the Kargil Review Committee report. Following this, in April 2000, GoI set up a Group of Ministers (GoM) on Border Management to review the national security system in its entirety. Based on the recommendations of the GoM, the Department of Border Management was formed in 2004. The department comprises two divisions – Border Management (BM) I and II. BM-1 manages infrastructure in the border areas including construction of fence, floodlighting, roads and BOPs. BM-II is tasked with the implementation of schemes like BADP, Vibrant Villages Scheme, coastal security schemes, etc. It also exercises oversight over the Land Port Authority of India (LPAI).

The administrative control of the Centrally Armed Police Forces (CAPFs) also lies with the MHA. The CAPFs include the BSF, AR, Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP), and Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB) that guard India’s different borders under the overall principle of ‘one border one force.’

In addition to the MHA, several other stakeholders play an important role. The state governments (including the state police), other ministries (such as the Ministry of External Affairs and Ministry of Defence), district administration and central/state agencies (Border Roads Organisation, Central Public Works Department, etc.) are key stakeholders that support the decision making, execution and maintenance of border fencing. The role of the state governments is critical, particularly due to land acquisition requirements, which is a major bottleneck in fencing projects.

At the grassroots level, the border communities also remain key, albeit often under-acknowledged, stakeholders. Their livelihood, mobility and security are directly shaped by fencing decisions.

Key Trends: How is India’s Border Fencing Strategy Evolving?

A review of the different border fencing initiatives across India’s land borders indicates four key trends.

  1. Differentiated fencing priorities based on threat perception: New Delhi adopts a tailored approach to border fencing, determined by an assessment of the nature and intensity of threat perception, as well as strategic necessity, by the policymakers.

New Delhi adopts a tailored approach to border fencing, determined by an assessment of the nature and intensity of threat perception, as well as strategic necessity, by the policymakers.

For instance, the border with Nepal and Bhutan remains un-fenced due to treaty arrangements and minimal border security. The India-Nepal Treaty of Peace and Friendship (1950) and the India-Bhutan Friendship Treaty (2007) institutionalise open borders that reflect mutual trust and shared socio-cultural affinities. Conversely, borders with Pakistan, Bangladesh and Myanmar, where cross-border threats such as terrorism, smuggling or insurgency are viewed as more acute, have seen significantly higher levels of border fencing.

However, threat prioritisation or perception is not static. India’s recalibration of the FMR with Myanmar in 2024, shows how the approach to border management is also responsive to geopolitical and security flux.

  1. Centralised decision making structure: The border fencing decision making architecture in India is highly centralised, led by the MHA. While states and local administrations are operational partners, playing an important role in land acquisition and village rehabilitation, they remain subordinate to national security imperatives determined by the Centre. While top-down, in some ways this structure can also accommodate local, socio-economic concerns of the border communities and border areas. One case in point is the Punjab Police’s initiative on the deployment of advanced anti-drone technology in a bid to check cross-border drug and arms trafficking while working in tandem with the BSF, which guards the India-Pakistan border. While such attempts are occasionally made towards a bottom-up approach to border management in general and fencing in particular, the decision-making apparatus, nonetheless, remains predominantly top-down in nature.
  1. Regional sensitivities and neighbourhood perceptions: India’s fencing efforts, particularly when undertaken unilaterally, are not always perceived as friendly gestures by neighbour country governments and other political actors. For instance, in May 2025, the National Unity Government (government in exile) of Myanmar has urged India to suspend border fencing as it is “unilateral” and undertaken in “areas where the boundary remains unresolved”. Bangladesh has also objected , arguing that India’s attempts at fencing violate bilateral agreements, including 1975 Joint India-Bangladesh guidelines that prohibit construction of any defensive structures within 150 yards of the international border. India, however, does not regard wired fences as a defense infrastructure. These diverging interpretations lead to frictions, both at diplomatic and operational levels. Such concerns have also been recognised in parliamentary responses, and pose a persistent challenge to India’s border management objectives.
  1. Supporting conventional fencing with technology: India’s border security has also incorporated technological solutions, to support the conventional barbed wired and physical barriers infrastructure. Advanced surveillance systems, as exemplified by the increasing use of UAVs (Unmanned Aerial Vehicles), CCTVs, motion sensors, underground sensors, Hand-Held Thermal Imager (HHTI), Night Vision Device (NVD), Twin Telescope, Unmanned Aerial Vehicles (UAV) act as a force multiplier to secure the borders. This is particularly important in terrains contained by topographical challenges, such as those along the India-Myanmar border.

This has also led to cross-learning among the CAPFs. For instance, the successful deployment of laser fences by the BSF along the India-Pakistan border inspired the SSB along the India-Nepal border to propose a similar venture in the Sonauli check post (UP) with a possibility of further extension. Institutional best practices are thus often replicated, which enables cross-fertilisation of ideas and better border management overall.

Enhancing multi-sectoral and multi-stakeholder border management

Fencing is an integral component of border management and plays an important role in securing India’s borders. As physical barriers increasingly become a part of national boundaries globally, India’s fencing project carries not just security implications, but also diplomatic and socio-economic consequences, particularly for the border communities.

As a high-impact and sensitive intervention, border fencing must be analysed both horizontally (across institutions and sectors) and vertically (from national to local levels) to inform responsive and resilient policymaking.

Given the high stakes, border fencing demands a nuanced, evidence-based approach, grounded in multi-sectoral and multi-stakeholder research. Furthermore, research on innovative practices, such as the BSF’s use of beehives on smart fences to offer the border communities an alternative source of income, needs to be encouraged for further replication. Strengthening research on smart fencing with a focus on technological gaps, can further enhance the operational capacity of India’s border guarding forces. Finally, these initiatives also require New Delhi to invest in diplomatic engagements with the neighbouring countries to overcome perception challenges.

As a high-impact and sensitive intervention, border fencing must be analysed both horizontally (across institutions and sectors) and vertically (from national to local levels) to inform responsive and resilient policymaking

The post Fencing, Security and Border Management: The Indian experience first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/fencing-security-and-border-management-the-indian-experience/feed/ 0 904076
Treading the Grey Zones of International Law: India’s Responses after the Pahalgam Attack http://stg.csep.org/blog/treading-the-grey-zones-of-international-law-indias-responses-after-the-pahalgam-attack/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=treading-the-grey-zones-of-international-law-indias-responses-after-the-pahalgam-attack http://stg.csep.org/blog/treading-the-grey-zones-of-international-law-indias-responses-after-the-pahalgam-attack/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 12:38:45 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903995 This blog by Abhinand Siddharth examines India’s decision to put the IWT in ‘abeyance’ and exercise its ‘right to respond’ to terrorist attacks from Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied Jammu and Kashmir (PoJK). This analysis concludes that India has strategically engaged international law through implied rather than explicit legal reasoning.

The post Treading the Grey Zones of International Law: India’s Responses after the Pahalgam Attack first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
On the afternoon of 22 April 2025, the tourist town of Pahalgam in the Indian Union Territory of Jammu and Kashmir witnessed one of the deadliest terrorist attacks. The armed terrorists targeted 25 Hindu and Christian tourists, while one local Muslim pony operator was also shot dead. In its response, India resorted to a military campaign, called Operation Sindoor, against the terrorist infrastructure reportedly operating from Pakistan’s territory. The situation escalated when Pakistan responded to Operation Sindoor with drone attacks and India’s counter-response, which targeted Islamabad’s military installations. Eventually, a both sides agreed to stop all firing and military action on 10 May 2025.

As a result of the attacks, India suspended procedural cooperation under the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT) of 1960 until the treaty is renegotiated and Pakistan ceases its support for cross-border terrorism on Indian soil. Second, India asserted that it will no longer tolerate future terrorist attacks, and any cross-border terror attack will be considered an ‘act of war’. New Delhi’s actions reflect a strategic utilisation of the grey zones in international law to convey political messages to Pakistan.

New Delhi’s actions reflect a strategic utilisation of the grey zones in international law to convey political messages to Pakistan.

This blog examines India’s decision to put the IWT in ‘abeyance’ and exercise its ‘right to respond’ to terrorist attacks from Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied Jammu and Kashmir (PoJK). This analysis concludes that India has strategically engaged international law through implied rather than explicit legal reasoning. While avoiding formal legal claims, India’s actions nonetheless carry normative implications—reflecting a cautious effort to balance operational flexibility with the risks of setting precedents that could be used by other states.

 Abeyance of the IWT

 The IWT, facilitated by the World Bank in 1960, represents one of the most robust water-sharing agreements globally. The agreement divides six rivers of the Indus system, where India has exclusive rights over the eastern rivers, the Sutlej, the Beas, and the Ravi. Pakistan has similar rights over the western rivers, the Indus, the Jhelum, and the Chenab. The institutional framework of the IWT established a Permanent Indus Commission to oversee the treaty’s implementation and an elaborate dispute settlement mechanism to resolve any differences that may arise. Remarkably, Article XII of the IWT, which deals with general provisions, does not permit unilateral suspension, termination or withdrawal from state parties. In this context, India’s decision to place the treaty in ‘abeyance’ deviates from the provisions of the IWT.

By putting the treaty in ‘abeyance,’ India has neither withdrawn from the IWT nor altered the course of the Indus rivers. Instead, New Delhi will stop exchanging data concerning the IWT’s operation, withhold technical cooperation and notification, and refrain from participating in the dispute resolution mechanisms.

While the term ‘abeyance’ connotes a state of temporary inactivity, it is not a legally recognised term in international law. Neither the IWT nor the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, 1969 (VCLT) refer to ‘abeyance’ as a mechanism to suspend treaty obligations.

Without formally denouncing the IWT, India has circumvented the treaty’s suspension procedures, which require the consent of both parties to suspend or terminate the treaty under Article XII. India has also skilfully embraced procedural ambiguity by invoking the doctrine of rebus sic stantibus under Article 62 of the VCLT. Simply put, this refers to a fundamental change in circumstances, which permits a party to the treaty to terminate or withdraw from the treaty. The official notification addressed to Pakistan identifies altered population dynamics and the advancement of clean energy development as fundamental changes in circumstances, necessitating renegotiation of the treaty.

By putting the treaty in ‘abeyance,’ India has neither withdrawn from the IWT nor altered the course of the Indus rivers. Instead, New Delhi will stop exchanging data concerning the IWT’s operation, withhold technical cooperation and notification, and refrain from participating in the dispute resolution mechanisms. In addition, procedural cooperation is suspended until the IWT is renegotiated and Pakistan ceases its support for cross-border terrorism. While India has been trying to renegotiate the IWT since 2023, Pakistan is unwilling to come to the table. So, the IWT’s suspension becomes crucial as Pakistan relies heavily on the Indus river for its agriculture and economy. The information about the flow of the Indus enables Pakistan plan for its agricultural and economic growth.

India faces a significant threshold when invoking rebus sic stantibus. For instance, in the Gabčíkovo-Nagymaros Project case of 1977 Hungary and Slovakia jointly notified the International Court of Justice (ICJ) about certain differences on the Budapest Treaty of 1977 regarding the implementation and termination of the Gabčíkovo-Nagymaros Barrage System.  The ICJ rejected Hungary’s claim of fundamental political and economic changes (para. 104) as it was unrelated to the Budapest Treaty’s object and purpose. Similarly, the court dismissed the claim of new developments in environmental law and environmental knowledge, considering them as probable changes in the future (para. 104). The high threshold set by the ICJ in the Gabčíkovo-Nagymaros Project case would make it difficult for India to argue population dynamics and advancement of clean energy as fundamental changes.

Nevertheless, it is implausible that the issue of the IWT would go before the ICJ. The dispute resolution mechanism under the IWT does not reference settling any differences before the ICJ. Instead, the IWT establishes a graded system, which involves submitting disputes to the Indus Water Commission, subsequently to a neutral expert, and finally to a court of arbitration if the issue remains unresolved. Due to India’s non-participation in the Permanent Court of Arbitration proceedings and plans to exit the World Bank’s neutral expert proceedings, the dispute mechanisms under the treaty are currently in limbo.

Right to Respond and Pre-empt Cross-Border Attacks 

 India’s utilisation of the grey areas of international law is further exemplified by the statements it made following Operation Sindoor on 7 May 2025.  The military campaign targeted four locations in Pakistan and five locations in PoJK reportedly housing terrorist infrastructure. Following the success of Operation Sindoor, India’s Foreign Secretary asserted that India exercised its ‘right to respond’ to ‘pre-empt’ and deter cross-border attacks. In addition, India briefed members of the United Nations Security Council (UNSC), barring Pakistan, about the actions that it had taken against the terrorists. While this suggests a subtle reference to the right of self-defence as outlined in Article 51 of the United Nations Charter (UNC), India seems to refrain from making this suggestion explicit. Four crucial points may be noted in this regard.

First, India did not categorise the Pahalgam incident as an armed attack. This is could arguably be on two grounds. First, due to uncertainty on whether an armed attack carried out by a non-state actor may invoke the doctrine of self-defence, as discussed below. Second, due to the high threshold of what constitutes an armed attack. As per the ICJ in the Nicaragua Case, 1986 (paras. 191 and 195), self-defence may be invoked against the most grave forms of force, which are determined by the gravity of the attack, measured by the scale and effects of the use of force. The Pahalgam attack, which led to the death of 26 individuals, may arguably not meet this high threshold established by the ICJ. A counterargument is that the Pahalgam attack should not be analysed in isolation. It should be assessed in the context of the numerous other attacks by Pakistani terrorists on Indian soil, including the Pulwama attack, the Uri attack, the 26/11 attack and the 2001 Parliament attack. In this regard, the accumulation of events theory (Tams, at 288) posits that small-scale attacks could collectively constitute an armed attack for self-defence. Although contentious, the ICJ has alluded to the accumulation of events theory in the Oil Platforms Case (para. 64) and the Armed Activities Case (para. 146). However, India has not relied on the accumulation of events theory to justify its actions.

Second, the attribution of the actions of The Resistance Force (TRF), an offshoot of the Pakistani terrorist group Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), to Pakistan is missing. The TRF initially claimed responsibility for the Pahalgam attack and later rescinded it. To overcome the breach of territorial sovereignty, jus ad bellum, or the conditions under which states may use force, requires a victim to attribute the activities of a non-state actor to a state to invoke self-defence. As per international jurisprudence, a state should either have ‘effective control’ (Nicaragua Case, 1986, paras. 105 – 110) or ‘overall control’ (Tadic Case (Appeal Judgment), paras. 116 – 123) of the actions of the non-state groups. Attribution of the conduct of non-state actors under the effective control test is based on a high threshold, requiring the state to direct or control specific operations. In contrast, the overall control allows attribution when a state organizes, supports and coordinates the activities of a non-state actor, even if it does not control every aspect of the operation. In addition, attribution under Article 8 of the Responsibility of States for Internationally Wrongful Act requires a state to provide instructions, direction or have control of the actions by the non-state group. So, attribution either requires clear evidence that a state directed or controlled specific operation in question or coordination of activities with a non-state actor. Mere harbouring or ideological sympathy – without proof – is insufficient to justify self-defence. While the link between Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence with the LeT has been previously established, India still needs to attribute the acts of the TRF with Pakistani government entities. Compounding this challenge is that the terrorists responsible for the Pahalgam attack were killed by Indian forces on 28 July 2025 in what is labelled as ‘Operation Mahadev’ without any interrogation. Against this context, while India was shaming Pakistan for cross-border terror attacks, it has not directly attributed the attacks to the Pakistani army or government. India’s Foreign Secretary has asserted that India’s response to the Pahalgam terrorist attack was directed towards non-civilian, non-military targets; and confined to terrorist camps. The specific use of these terms implies that India does not view its initial military operations against terrorist infrastructure in Pakistan through the prism of self-defence, which may violate Pakistan’s territorial sovereignty.  It was only when Pakistani armed forces started attacking Indian territory, New Delhi resorted to attacking military targets in the subsequent days.

By not explicitly relying on the UNC framework on self-defence, India seems to be using the grey areas of the law on self-defence to carry out its long-standing objective of dismantling terrorist infrastructure in Pakistan. This is important in light of India’s recent assertion that any future terrorist attack emanating from Pakistan will be considered an ‘act of war’.

Third, India veiledly referenced the ‘unable or unwilling doctrine’ without explicitly invoking it. General international law imposes certain obligations on states regarding non-state actors within their territory. States are obliged to refrain from assisting non-state actors in carrying out armed activities against another state and ensure that their territories are not used to conduct armed attacks against another state. If the state is unable or unwilling to take effective action against the non-state actors, forcible action against the non-state actors in self-defence may be permissible. This doctrine is not only subscribed to by the United States, the United Kingdom and Australia, but also endorsed in the Chatham House Principles (at 969), the Leiden Policy Recommendations (para. 42) and the Bethlehem Principles (Principles 11 and 12). Although the Pahalgam incident would be a clear-cut exemplification of the unable or unwilling doctrine, India stated that “there has been no demonstrable step from Pakistan to take action against the terrorist infrastructure on its territory or on territory under its control.” India’s unwillingness to explicitly subscribe to the unable or unwilling doctrine aligns with its previous positions. As noted by Burra, although India was informed of its right to self-defence by the United States after the Balakot strikes in 2019, it risked being accused of committing an act of aggression instead of invoking the unable or unwilling doctrine. Similarly, the official categorisation of the military operations of 2016 is referred to as surgical strikes.

Fourth, the contours of India’s briefing to the members of the UN Security Council (UNSC) following Operation Sindoor remain ambiguous. Article 51 UNC offers no guidance on the obligation to report self-defence claims to the UNSC. However, state practice from the Congo (S/2004/489), Iran (S/1999/781), and Israel (S/2010/21) suggests that the language of Article 51 plays a crucial role in invoking the right to self-defence. India has reportedly informed 13 out of 15 members of the UNSC (barring Pakistan and Sierra Leone) about the targeted, measured and non-escalatory measures aimed at deterring and pre-empting further terror attacks. Yet, the language employed does not reflect its reliance on the argument of self-defence under Article 51.

By not explicitly relying on the UNC framework on self-defence, India seems to be using the grey areas of the law on self-defence to carry out its long-standing objective of dismantling terrorist infrastructure in Pakistan. This is important in light of India’s recent assertion that any future terrorist attack emanating from Pakistan will be considered an ‘act of war’.

India could adopt a dual-track strategy. While retaining flexibility in bilateral and operational contexts, it can begin clarifying its legal views in selective multilateral forums—such as the UN General Assembly or other multilateral debates—on issues like treaty adaptability, attribution standards for non-state actors, or the threshold for self-defence.

Understanding India’s Actions under International Law

India’s response to the Pahalgam terror attack reflects a carefully calibrated engagement with international law—one that leverages legal norms without fully committing to unsettled doctrines. By invoking ideas like rebus sic stantibus and the ‘right to respond’, India signals a willingness to act within a legal frame while avoiding rigid precedent that might constrain future policy.

Arguably, this strategic ambiguity is not without consequence. Even when not formally claimed, legal reasoning can contribute to precedent and shape international expectations. Two risks may be noted: weakening the clarity of legal standards India itself might wish to invoke in the future; and opening the door for other states to adopt similarly ambiguous approaches in ways India may oppose.

To address this, India could adopt a dual-track strategy. While retaining flexibility in bilateral and operational contexts, it can begin clarifying its legal views in selective multilateral forums—such as the UN General Assembly or other multilateral debates—on issues like treaty adaptability, attribution standards for non-state actors, or the threshold for self-defence. Doing so would allow India to shape evolving norms while preserving space for context-driven responses.

India has the opportunity to engage more assertively in shaping international law in areas aligned with its security and development interests. By contributing to normative clarity where it matters most, India can safeguard its strategic autonomy while reinforcing its role as a responsible actor in the international legal order.

The post Treading the Grey Zones of International Law: India’s Responses after the Pahalgam Attack first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/treading-the-grey-zones-of-international-law-indias-responses-after-the-pahalgam-attack/feed/ 0 903995
Election Dataset Documentation (India, 1991–2023) http://stg.csep.org/blog/election-dataset-documentation-india-1991-2023/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=election-dataset-documentation-india-1991-2023 http://stg.csep.org/blog/election-dataset-documentation-india-1991-2023/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 11:55:04 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903936 This dataset by Mohd Danish and Sadan Khan compiles comprehensive electoral data for both state-level legislative assembly elections and national-level general (Lok Sabha) elections in India.

The post Election Dataset Documentation (India, 1991–2023) first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

DOWNLOADS

1. Overview

This dataset compiles comprehensive electoral data for both state-level legislative assembly elections and national-level general (Lok Sabha) elections in India. It covers all 29 Indian states(Present 28 states and a former state Jammu & Kashmir) and parliamentary constituencies from 1991 to 2023. The dataset is structured as a balanced panel, with one row per State × Year (or Nation × Year, in the case of parliamentary elections), enabling longitudinal analysis of political trends, incumbency dynamics, and electoral outcomes across time and space.

All data have been meticulously compiled from the official Election Statistical Reports published by the Election Commission of India (ECI).


2. Unit of Observation

  • For state elections:
    One row = One Indian state × One calendar year
  • For national elections:
    One row = India-wide outcome × One calendar year

Time period: 1991 to 2023


3. Variables

Variable Name Description
State Name or identifier for each of the 29 Indian states
Year Calendar year (1991 to 2023)
Whether_Election_Year A binary variable equal to 1 if elections were held in that state/year, and 0 otherwise
Ruling_Party Party that formed the government after the election. If the government is a coalition, this refers to the party with the highest seat share in that coalition. If a single party wins outright, it is both the ruling party and the majority winner.
Winning_Party/Alliance Party or alliance that achieved the majority mark (more than 50% of seats) in the election. This may be a coalition or a single party.
Votes_Won_by_Ruling_Party Total number of votes won by the winning entity (Winning_Party/Alliance) in absolute terms. In case of coalitions, votes are taken only for the highest seat share holding party.
Who_Lost Outgoing party that held office prior to the election but lost. This is the previous Ruling_Party if elections occurred in that year.
Votes_Won_by_Previous_Party Total number of votes won by the incumbent party that lost the election (absolute values)
Total_Votes_Cast Total number of valid votes cast in the state (or at national level, for Lok Sabha elections) in absolute numbers

4. Special Cases and Coding Decisions

  • Coalition governments:
    • Winning_Party/Alliance = Full name of the alliance (e.g., “INC+NCP”)
    • Ruling_Party = Largest party within that alliance (e.g., “INC”)
  • President’s Rule:
    • Ruling_Party = “President Rule”
    • All other election-related variables for that year are left blank
  • General (Parliamentary) Elections:
    • The same structure and variables are applied to national-level data
    • State is coded as “All India” for these entries

5. Data Source

All data are extracted from the Election Commission of India’s Election Statistical Reports, available in the public domain. These are official documents that include constituency-level results and aggregate summaries for every Indian state and parliamentary election.


6. Structure and Data Quality

  • Dataset is balanced: 30( all 29 states + India) × 33 years (1991–2023) = 990 observations at the state level
  • Consistent formatting and spelling for all party and alliance names
  • All vote figures are in absolute numbers, not percentages
  • Handles edge cases like mid-term elections, early dissolutions, and President’s Rule uniformly

7. Public Use and Research Applications

This dataset is intended for open-access academic and public research. It enables a wide range of empirical investigations into the political economy of Indian elections. Researchers may use it to study incumbency advantage, the effect of party competition on vote shares, or the evolution of regional vs. national parties over time. It can be readily merged with fiscal, demographic, or policy datasets to support econometric modeling, event-study analysis, and comparative political research. The dataset’s panel structure, organized by state and year, enables rigorous empirical analysis of temporal and cross-sectional variation. The staggered scheduling of elections across states introduces natural variation over time, allowing for the identification of dynamic patterns and potential causal relationships in electoral and policy-related outcomes.

The post Election Dataset Documentation (India, 1991–2023) first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/election-dataset-documentation-india-1991-2023/feed/ 0 903936
What Future for India-Bangladesh Connectivity? http://stg.csep.org/blog/what-future-for-india-bangladesh-connectivity/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=what-future-for-india-bangladesh-connectivity http://stg.csep.org/blog/what-future-for-india-bangladesh-connectivity/#respond Thu, 07 Aug 2025 00:52:42 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903950 This blog by Sushovan Chakraborty and Roya Sinha suggests four ways that New Delhi can prepare for a functional connectivity with Dhaka.

The post What Future for India-Bangladesh Connectivity? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Introduction

August 5, 2025, will mark a year since a student-led uprising reshaped Bangladesh’s political future. The ‘monsoon revolution’ of 2024 resulted in the ousting of Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina after 15 years in power. Nobel Laureate, Prof. Muhammad Yunus, stepped in as Chief Advisor to the interim government. The effects of this transition have been felt closely in the South Asian region, particularly by India, Bangladesh’s closest neighbour.

Once at the core of India’s ‘Neighbourhood First’ and ‘Act East’ policies, Bangladesh was the largest recipient of Indian Lines of Credit (US$ 7.2 billion), among the top-five export destinations in Asia, and the largest source of India’s tourist exports. It was also a vital link in New Delhi’s regional connectivity ambitions, with road, rail, energy, and digital networks being stitched together across borders with Dhaka as a willing partner.

However, in the past year, political turbulence has affected this momentum. Bilateral ties have grown unpredictable. Non-tariff barriers have crept in, stalling trade flows and frustrating businesses on both sides. Connectivity linkages have been disrupted, with trade and transshipment rights suspended. The unease in bilateral relations deepened with the inaugural China-Pakistan-Bangladesh trilateral summit in Kunming on June 19, 2025. For New Delhi, the symbolism of that meeting was hard to ignore. Bangladesh’s growing comfort with Beijing and Islamabad presents a strategic and economic challenge for India, particularly for the connectivity projects.

That said, all is not lost. New Delhi recently provided medical support for burn victims in the tragic air crash in Dhaka. Earlier, Dhaka had extended ‘mango diplomacy’ and both countries exchanged Eid greetings. This offered a sliver of thaw in an otherwise frosty year. But the hard truth remains that until a permanent government takes charge when elections are held in Bangladesh, relations between the two countries will likely remain politically difficult. India’s challenge is not just to wait for political stability in Dhaka, but to adapt.

…until a permanent government takes charge when elections are held in Bangladesh, relations between the two countries will likely remain politically difficult. India’s challenge is not just to wait for political stability in Dhaka, but to adapt.

Against this backdrop, this blog explores how India can work towards functional connectivity with Bangladesh after elections are held. To influence the future contours of connectivity with Bangladesh, India must act now. From recalibrating its regional strategy to leveraging subnational channels, this blog outlines four actionable pathways for New Delhi to keep the connectivity agenda pragmatic.

Current state of connectivity projects

After investing heavily towards multi-faceted connectivity with Dhaka during a phase of relations that was described as Sonaali Adhyay (golden chapter), bilateral relations witnessed a tumult. Connectivity projects both physical like railway lines, and ones related to digital connectivity have been stalled and indefinitely suspended in many cases (Table 1).

Recent developments have underscored the extent to which cross-border connectivity and economic integration in South Asia remain highly susceptible to political relations. For India, the experience with Bangladesh illustrates that even well-structured connectivity and trade initiatives can be compromised when bilateral political trust is eroded.

Recent developments have underscored the extent to which cross-border connectivity and economic integration in South Asia remain highly susceptible to political relations. For India, the experience with Bangladesh illustrates that even well-structured connectivity and trade initiatives can be compromised when bilateral political trust is eroded.

Tensions began to overtly surface following India’s decision to provide political refuge to the former Bangladeshi Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina. While initial diplomatic friction was anticipated, a series of subsequent measures and public statements from Bangladesh’s interim administration, particularly concerning trade and connectivity, have further strained the relationship. A notable inflection point was the statement made by Chief Advisor Prof. Muhammad Yunus during a visit to China in March 2025, wherein he referred to India’s Northeast region as landlocked and promoted Bangladesh as the “only guardian of the ocean for all this region.” In April, India withdrew transshipment rights previously granted to Bangladeshi goods transiting through Indian territory. Tension further exacerbated after reports surfaced in May about China aiding Bangladesh in reviving an old air base at Lalmonirhat, located just 12 km from the Indian border.

Such measures, combined with the other trade restrictions imposed subsequently (Table 2), have raised concerns about the broader implications for regional economic cooperation. The suspension of land-route transshipment has had a tangible economic impact on Bangladesh, particularly its export-driven garment sector. According to recent reports, India’s restrictions on land-port imports from Bangladesh may affect trade worth approximately USD 770 million, amounting to nearly 42% of total bilateral trade.

Table 1: Status of Select Connectivity Project between India and Bangladesh

S.No Connectivity details Previous status Current status

(as of July 28, 2025)

Significance of the project
1 Agartala-Akhaura rail link Inaugurated in November 2023 Work suspended Aimed to reduce the distance between Agartala and Kolkata, slashing travel time from 31 hrs to 10-12 hrs.
2 Khulna-Mongla rail link Inaugurated in November 2023 Work suspended Mongla, the second largest port of Bangladesh where India secured operational rights for a terminal in 2024, gets connected with the broad-gauge railway network via this project
3 Freight train from Gede to Darshana, through Chilahati and Haldibari, up to Hasimara (Indian border town near Bhutan) via the Dalgaon (Assam, India) railhead MoU signed in June 2024 No progress Enhanced connectivity, reduced freight charges, sub-regional economic integration
4 Cross-border passenger train

(Maitree, Mitali and Bandhan Express)

Suspended Increased people-to-people ties, medical tourism, etc.
5 Dhaka-Tongi-Joydebpur rail expansion project Announced in July 2012 New Delhi approved cost variation of US$301 million Funded under Indian Line of Credit (LoC). Aimed at increasing connectivity and capacity in central Bangladesh, particularly around Dhaka.
6 Khulna-Darsana &  Parbatipur-Kaunia rail lines New Delhi & Dhaka signed consultancy contracts in 2022 Under scrutiny for suspension Both projects were funded by Indian LoC. They were significant in improving the railway infrastructure in Bangladesh and connecting to India’s NER.
7 Integrated Check Post (ICP) Petrapole Operational since 2016 Operational, albeit imports through land ports restricted ICP Petrapole accounts for 30% of overall land trade and 76% of apparel imports into India from Bangladesh.
8 ICP at Sabroom Foundation stone laid in September 2021. Not operational Offers direct connectivity with Bangladesh’s Chittagong Port via the Maitree Bridge on River Feni.
9 Maitri Setu Bridge Inaugurated in 2021 Non-operational Enhanced connectivity between the Northeast and Kolkata via Chittagong and Mongla ports
10 India Bangladesh Friendship Pipeline (IBFP) Extension Inaugurated in 2023 Indefinitely suspended Provides long-term energy connectivity; links energy security of the two neighbors, positions India as a reliable supplier of energy.
11 Border Haats MoU signed in 2011 Suspended Supported the livelihood of border economies.
12 Inland container terminal in Ashuganj Designated as a river port in 2010 Construction ongoing Inland waterways trade, reduced freight cost, alternate trade route for North-East India
13 India-Bangladesh Maitree Satellite Stalled Boost India-Bangladesh space cooperation, expand avenues of engagement.  Was part of a slew of initiatives under ‘India-Bangladesh Shared Vision for Future: Enhancing Connectivity, Commerce and Collaboration for Shared Prosperity’ released during Sheikh Hasina’s visit to New Delhi in June 2024
14 Internet Transit Deal Requested in 2023 Temporarily suspended Transit point to supply internet to India’s Northeast
15 Early operationalisation of the Bangladesh-Bhutan-India-Nepal (BBIN) Motor Vehicle Agreement MoU signed in 2015 Stalled Sub-regional connectivity and transportation grid, regional integration
16 Nepal-India-Bangladesh Trilateral Power Cooperation Announced in 2023 Inaugurated in November 2024 This is South Asia’s first tripartite power sharing agreement wherein Nepal exports 40 MW of power to Bangladesh via Indian grid.
17 Power connectivity between Tripura and Bangladesh Commenced in 2016 Ongoing, however financial challenges remain Important for sub-national power connectivity. 100 MW of power supply from Palatana, Tripura to Comilla in eastern Bangladesh, gradually increased to 165 MW.

Source: Prepared by authors using various sources, including MEA, PIB and news articles. Note: The table covers projects that were affected after August 5, 2024.

Apart from hiccups in the physical connectivity linkages, India and Bangladesh have also taken steps to restrict bilateral trade and transshipment (Table 2)

Table 2: Trade and Transit Restrictions between India and Bangladesh since August 2024

Theme Development Status/Timeline Impact/Remarks
Transshipment Rights Transshipment rights for Bangladesh through Indian territory Extended in 2020 → Withdrawn Affects Bangladesh’s exports to third countries via Indian ports, previously facilitated through Indian territory.
Trade Restrictions Ban on Indian yarn imports by land in Bangladesh April 2025 Part of a broader set of Bangladesh’s trade restrictions on India.
Import bans on Indian goods (e.g., paper, tobacco, fish, powdered milk) April 2025 Restricts Indian exports to Bangladesh.
Transit fee imposed by Bangladesh on Indian cargo (Taka 1.8 or ₹1.25 per tonne/km) May 2025 Raises cost of Indian goods transiting through Bangladesh.
Bangladesh Customs forms Investigation, Research and Management Unit at Benapole ICP January 2025 Enhances inspection and scrutiny of Indian cargo.
Recommendation to close Chilahati, Daulatganj, Tegamukh land ports; suspend Balla port March 2025 Limits cross-border land trade points.

Source: Prepared by authors using various sources.

The suspension of cross-border passenger trains, for instance, has undercut one of New Delhi’s most valuable tools in bilateral diplomacy – people-to-people ties.

India’s connectivity ties with Bangladesh are undergoing a phase of uncertainty, marked by suspended linkages, limited economic cooperation, and rising competition from China. The suspension of cross-border passenger trains, for instance, has undercut one of New Delhi’s most valuable tools in bilateral diplomacy – people-to-people ties. Consequently, medical tourism, which emerged as another pillar of India-Bangladesh relations, takes a hit. Bangladesh accounts for nearly 50% of India’s medical tourists, a statistic that underscores both the demand for Indian healthcare services and the broader economic value of this sector.

Additionally, amid the deterioration of connectivity, reports have emerged about China trying to attract medical tourists from Bangladesh. Recent reports also suggest that China is trying to take over Indian port projects in Bangladesh.

Such developments warrant urgent policy recalibration from New Delhi, particularly in preparation for engagement post elections in Bangladesh.

The Way Forward for New Delhi

This blog suggests four ways that New Delhi can prepare for a functional connectivity with Dhaka.

  1. Focus on low-visibility, high-impact connectivity projects

Rather than large, politically sensitive infrastructure ventures that may trigger domestic opposition within Bangladesh, India can focus on less visible but economically vital projects.

Rather than large, politically sensitive infrastructure ventures that may trigger domestic opposition within Bangladesh, India can focus on less visible but economically vital projects. For example, the extension of the India-Bangladesh Friendship Pipeline, which was stalled due to political unrest, can be restarted. This pipeline transports diesel critical for powering Bangladesh’s textile industry, a key driver of its economy. Projects like these are mutually beneficial.  Additionally, India has already seen a positive turn with the resumption of freight train services in February 2025 after a nine-month pause. Building on this momentum by extending similar trade facilitation and logistical support projects can slowly rebuild trust and functional interdependence.

Lastly, India should also consider deepening cross-border power cooperation. The inauguration of the region’s first trilateral power agreement between Nepal – India – Bangladesh came in the midst of a turbulent political situation between New Delhi and Dhaka. A similar power cooperation agreement is being pursued with Bhutan, while bilateral power cooperation continues between Tripura in Northeast India and Comilla in eastern Bangladesh, despite financial challenges (Table 1). Strengthening such energy partnerships can enhance regional energy security and serve as a mutually beneficial pathway.

This would also embed Bangladesh more firmly in a regional cooperation framework led by India.

      2. Engaging Like-Minded Countries: Toward Triangular Cooperation

India should also expand its strategic bandwidth by further engaging with like-minded countries like Japan. Japan already has a strong institutional presence in Bangladesh through projects like the Matarbari deep-sea port. By developing triangular cooperation or coordination models, such as co-financing development projects, India can regain strategic influence without bearing the full financial or diplomatic burden alone. A case in point is Japan’s USD 641 million loan via Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) for the modernisation of the Joydebpur-Ishurdi railway, a vital segment of the Trans-Asian Railway connecting Bangladesh with Kolkata. India can indirectly further its own connectivity goals through such engagements.

India could explore the possibility of leveraging Quad-based cooperation, albeit in flexible, issue-specific permutations. This could take the form of digital infrastructure, health diplomacy, or regional connectivity…

Finally, India could explore the possibility of leveraging Quad-based cooperation, albeit in flexible, issue-specific permutations. This could take the form of digital infrastructure, health diplomacy, or regional connectivity, areas where India and its Quad partners, Japan, the US, and Australia, share long-term interests.

     3. Strengthen people-to-people ties and developmental partnership

With Bangladesh, complementing the narrative of shared history as well as shared future, India needs to expand on its developmental assistance for Dhaka. India has funded over 90 High Impact Community Development Projects (HICDPs) cumulatively worth over USD 50 million so far that includes the construction of student hostels, academic buildings, cultural centres, orphanages, and others. Additionally, Border Haats between India and Bangladesh need to be restarted. The imperative to undertake such projects is more now when India needs to find ways to reengage with Dhaka.

To solidify long-term linkages, the Ministry of External Affairs can perhaps increase the Indian Technical and Economic Cooperation (ITEC) slots from the current 800 annually (in 2024) and ensure regular budgetary support for existing scholarships to Bangladeshi students. Capacity Building programs and training programs for Bangladeshi civil service officers, judicial officers and judges, police officers need to continue unimpeded as it lies in New Delhi’s interests to foster deeper institutional linkages with various quarters of the Bangladeshi polity. Such initiatives need to be sustained from the Indian side to gain strategic advantage. The cancellation of judicial officials’ training in India scheduled for February this year when juxtaposed with the 2025 Bangladeshi Diplomats Training Program offered by China accentuates the point.

New Delhi often emphasises shared history, cultural and familial linkages that connect the two neighbours in bonds that far transcend the logic of strategic relations.

New Delhi often emphasises shared history, cultural and familial linkages that connect the two neighbours in bonds that far transcend the logic of strategic relations. India’s expression of interest to restore filmmaker late Satyajit Ray’s ancestral property in Mymensingh as part of a “shared cultural heritage” helps underline the message of both neighbors being co-custodians of Bengali heritage and culture.

     4. Engage via paradiplomacy/ sub-national engagements

Para-diplomacy as a strategy of engagement needs to be further explored. States like Tripura and West Bengal can take the lead due to their geographic proximity, linguistic and cultural affinities with India’s eastern neighbour. Such initiatives can complement national efforts, while also keeping the engagement relatively insulated from the political sensitivities that often characterise central-level diplomacy. For instance, Assam’s successful para-diplomacy push with Bhutan, including through high-level visits from both sides can serve as a replicable model for Agartala and Kolkata. Politically contentious issues like Teesta, however, need to be avoided. The Centre though not directly involved, can facilitate the engagement via vital inputs and assistance of its various agencies (such as the Land Port Authority of India). Additionally, other bordering states, including Meghalaya, Mizoram, and Assam, should be encouraged to explore similar engagement models, thereby contributing to a more decentralised and resilient framework for subregional cooperation in India’s eastern neighbourhood.

The recent political tensions have strained relations between New Delhi and Dhaka and disrupted the hard-won connectivity gains of the last two decades. Yet, the foundations of the relationship remain strong and are worth reinvesting in. While the current sensitivities may limit India’s ability to initiate or implement connectivity initiatives, this interim period leading up to election in Bangladesh in early 2026, offers India a crucial period to prepare. Over the next 6–12 months, New Delhi must focus on doing its groundwork, including identifying priority areas, strengthening internal coordination, and building the institutional and delivery capacity needed to act decisively once a new elected government takes office in Dhaka and is ready to re-engage.

The post What Future for India-Bangladesh Connectivity? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/what-future-for-india-bangladesh-connectivity/feed/ 0 903950
India’s Auto Paradox: Competitive, Capable, but Still Circling the Home Track http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-auto-paradox-competitive-capable-but-still-circling-the-home-track/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-auto-paradox-competitive-capable-but-still-circling-the-home-track http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-auto-paradox-competitive-capable-but-still-circling-the-home-track/#respond Tue, 05 Aug 2025 03:55:44 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903933 India remains a marginal player in global automobile exports. While its cars are affordable and capable, they do not reach far-flung markets. This paradox, of world-class potential constrained by an inward-looking industrial strategy, raises important questions about incentives, trade policy, and the role of the state, explain Baran Pradhan and Sanjay Kathuria.

The post India’s Auto Paradox: Competitive, Capable, but Still Circling the Home Track first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

India’s automobile industry is one of its stars. It has scale, cost competitiveness, and engineering depth, supported by a large and growing domestic market.

 

India’s automobile industry is one of its stars. It has scale, cost competitiveness, and engineering depth, supported by a large and growing domestic market. Passenger vehicle (PV) production surpassed 5 million units in 2024–25, placing India third globally in total PV output. It leads the world in two-wheeler production and ranks second and third in bus and medium-to-heavy commercial vehicle output, respectively.

Despite these achievements, India remains a marginal player in global automobile exports. While its cars are affordable and capable, they do not reach far-flung markets. This paradox, of world-class potential constrained by an inward-looking industrial strategy, raises important questions about incentives, trade policy, and the role of the state in shaping competitiveness.

A Thriving Domestic Market, But a Missing Export Engine

India’s domestic market is one of the largest in the world, with demand rising steadily, driven by urbanisation, income growth, and aspirational consumption. Domestic sales of passenger vehicles crossed 4.3 million units in 2024–25, up from 2.77 million in 2019–20, reflecting a growth of 48 percent. By contrast, exports grew by only 16 percent over the same period, from 0.66 million units to 0.77 million units. These trends have led automakers, both domestic and foreign, to focus overwhelmingly on the domestic market.

Table 1: Passenger Vehicle Sales

Category 2019-20 2020-21 2021-22 2022-23 2023-24 2024-25
Production Trends 3,424,564 3,062,280 3,650,698 4,587,116 4,901,840 5,061,164
Sale Trends 2,773,519 2,711,457 3,069,523 3,890,114

 

4,218,750 4,301,848
Export Trends 662,118 404,397 577,875 662,891 672,105 770,364

Source: Society of Indian Automobile Manufacturers

This highlights the core issue: although the fundamentals such as vendor depth, labour skills, and cost structure are in place, the incentives to build globally competitive businesses remain weak, almost inert.

…although the fundamentals such as vendor depth, labour skills, and cost structure are in place, the incentives to build globally competitive businesses remain weak, almost inert

A Protective Tariff Regime, and “Water in the Tariff”

India’s auto tariffs are among the highest in the world. The applied most-favoured-nation (MFN) tariff on passenger vehicles is around 125%, compared to 15% in China, 9.8% in Germany, and around 27.5% in the United States, where it was previously around 2.5% before President Trump’s 2025 announcements (see Table 2).

Why does the industry require such high tariffs? Surely these levels are not essential for its survival. What explains its resistance to lower rates? Put differently, why insist on such high “water in the tariff”, meaning tariff redundancy, where domestic prices remain well below what tariff-based pricing would suggest?

Table 2: Comparative Import Tariffs on Passenger Vehicles

Country MFN simple Average (2023)
India 125%*
Germany 9.82%
USA 2.5%*
South Korea 8%
Japan 0%
China 15%

Source: WITS

Note: After President Trump’s latest announcements, the US tariff has increased to 27.5% and India’s tariff has been reduced to 70%-110% in 2025. In both cases, the previous tariff rates are presented to allow for a clearer comparison(SIAM 2025)(Palmer & Desrochers 2025).

High tariffs, along with restrictions on used vehicle imports and local content requirements, have long been used to nurture fledgling car industries. However, the Indian automobile sector is no longer in its infancy, having enjoyed nearly eight decades of protection. Such tariffs enable price-cost markups, dull innovation, and discourage global ambition.

…tariffs enable price-cost markups, dull innovation, and discourage global ambition.

Moreover, incumbent firms operating in protected environments begin to view such protection as integral to their business model. Whether domestic or foreign, once firms invest under the promise of tariff protection, they naturally resist its removal. This was clearly seen in Australia, where GM, Ford, and Toyota lobbied aggressively to delay tariff reductions, a pattern echoed globally.

When high tariffs are combined with a large, under-penetrated domestic market (car ownership in India is only 57 per 1,000 people compared to 322 in China and 670 in Japan (Table 3)), it is unsurprising that many capable automakers prefer to focus on meeting domestic demand. As a result, Indian carmakers have made limited investments in building global brands, aligning with international standards, or developing export-oriented platforms. Consequently, India exports only 16.62 percent of its car production, down from 2019, compared to 93 percent in Germany, 62 percent in Japan, and 59 percent in South Korea (Table 3). Even China and the United States, with far larger domestic markets, export a greater share of their output.

It is instructive to look at the case of Brazil, a large car market and producer. In 2011, Brazil hiked import duties on cars by about 30 percentage points, hoping to boost domestic production (Magalhaes & Alerigi Jr 2025). In the short-term, production did increase, to a peak of 3.7 million vehicles in 2013. In 2024, production was only 2.55 million vehicles, down about a third from the peak. While Brazil suffers from several other economic problems, high protection for its car industry has created inefficiencies and lowered demand.

Table 3: Comparative analytics

Country Comparative Price Index of a Vehicle (2017-2021) Car per 1,000 People (Latest Available Year) (% of Production exported)
India 69.77 57 16.62
Germany 113.16 627 93.14
United States 105.15 850 23.20
South Korea 89.1 530 58.98
Japan 107.59 670 61.89
China 84.3 231 21.19

Source: International Organization of Motor Vehicle Manufacturers, World Population ReviewThe Global Economy, UNCOMTRADE

Could Car Prices be an Issue?

No, that hypothesis does not hold water. India’s car prices are globally competitive. The comparative vehicle price index for India is just under 70, one of the lowest in the world, with the world average benchmarked at 100 (Table 3).

Some cars with identical specifications, like the Suzuki Swift, clearly highlight India’s cost advantage. In India, the Swift is a popular hatchback, with base models starting at around ₹5.9 lakh and better variants costing ₹8–9 lakh including GST. In the UK, the same car (albeit with stricter safety specifications) is priced at approximately £15,000–£17,000, or about ₹20 lakh including 20% VAT—more than double the Indian price. Even in Japan, Suzuki’s home market, the Swift typically costs ¥1.5–2 million, equivalent to ₹10–13 lakh, still notably higher than in India (Kitamura 2023) (Srithar 2023) (Adams and Walton 2025).

Could Car Quality be an Issue?

The answer to this question is also no, although there are nuances.

India exports cars to a wide range of markets, including both emerging economies and developed countries. The United States and Germany have historically been major destinations. In 2019, the US and Mexico each imported nearly a billion dollars worth of Indian vehicles. Since then, exports to these markets have declined sharply, first due to the disruptions caused by COVID-19 and more recently because of rising protectionist policies across key importing nations (OEC 2025).

The point is that India cannot export to exacting markets unless it meets their safety and emission standards, so the capability to meet those standards exists.  Moreover, India has introduced upgraded standards – including the Bharat New Car Assessment Program (NCAP) for crash testing in 2023, aligning in protocol with the Global NCAP; and the Bharat VI emission norms, introduced in 2020, equivalent to Euro 6 standards.  Where India remains behind is on scope, scoring and enforcement. There are fewer testing facilities and less rigorous testing protocols. Domestic standards are somewhat weaker in some protocols, but the bigger gap lies in enforcement and test scores (Das 2023) (Jadhav et al. 2024).

Electric Vehicles: New Opportunities and Challenges

The global shift to electric vehicles (EVs) offers India both opportunities and challenges. A major hurdle is the global dominance of Chinese EVs, driven by China’s leadership in battery manufacturing. India’s strength lies in the size and growth potential of its domestic market, which is just beginning to embrace EVs.

Continued policy support, such as the 5 percent GST on EVs and subsidies for charging infrastructure, can help Indian manufacturers scale up, lower costs, and invest in research and development. These scale-driven advantages could provide a strong base for Indian EV makers to compete in global markets.

Trade Negotiations: The Auto Sector as a Stumbling Block

Domestic carmakers argue that steep tariff cuts could hurt local manufacturing and investment. The auto sector remains a key hurdle in India’s trade talks, especially with the EU, which has demanded significant tariff reductions as a condition for a deal (TOI Business Desk 2025) (Mishra 2025)

It is not realistic to expect that automobiles will continue to enjoy such high levels of protection that the sector has been used to. And this is not just about the United States and its recent trading strategy.

The world in general does expect much more reciprocity in trade, especially from a major partner like India that is now exporting more than $800 billion in goods and services (Kathuria 2025).

This defensiveness seems increasingly anachronistic. Countries such as South Korea and Japan did not succeed by permanently shielding their markets, but by gradually opening them to competition while supporting their exporters. India, too, needs to pivot, using trade policy not merely as a shield but as a lever to enhance competitiveness.

To complement tariff rationalization, India will need to deepen global engagement through free trade agreements, foster technological development, and enhance regulatory quality to reverse its declining competitiveness (Prabhakar et al. 2025).

The Way Forward

For India’s auto industry to become more export-oriented and dynamic, several steps are essential. Tariffs should be rationalized to reduce redundancy and sharpen competitive pressures. Even countries with protected markets, like Brazil, maintain car tariffs at “only” 35 percent. As free trade agreement partners push for lower duties, India would benefit from a more flexible stance on auto-sector commitments. Aligning domestic regulations more closely with global safety and emission standards, and improving enforcement, would enhance the industry’s international competitiveness. Most importantly, firms must view exports not as a risk but as a strategic goal. This shift will require long-term investment and a willingness to move beyond domestic comfort zones. Government backing, including incentives for research and development, and calibrated support for branding, and market access, can help nurture this ambition.

Conclusion

A typical car firm in India produces a reliable and respectable quality product that, especially in the smaller segments, is very competitively priced. It benefits from a strong auto components sector to support its growth. But it also enjoys unusually high protection from foreign competition, arguably more than any counterpart firm in other major markets. Since the firm’s domestic market is large and growing, it does not feel any pressure to cater to consumers in overseas markets. It does export a relatively small share of its output, typically to markets where meeting regulatory standards and catering to customer preferences is less demanding.

India has built cars for itself. Now it must build them for the world.

The real challenge for this firm lies not in capacity but in vision and ambition. Exporting is demanding since it requires long time horizons, openness to feedback, and the resolve to meet rigorous standards. Yet exporting fosters valuable learning and will also help the firm to compete better in its home market, especially once protection declines. The firm should remember that all world class firms are strong players not only in their respective home markets, but also significant players in multiple international markets.

India has built cars for itself. Now it must build them for the world.

The post India’s Auto Paradox: Competitive, Capable, but Still Circling the Home Track first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-auto-paradox-competitive-capable-but-still-circling-the-home-track/feed/ 0 903933
The $23 Billion Gap: How India Lost Japan’s Capital http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-23-billion-gap-how-india-lost-japans-capital/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-23-billion-gap-how-india-lost-japans-capital http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-23-billion-gap-how-india-lost-japans-capital/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 09:28:44 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903851 There is gap highlights how rapidly Japanese capital can shift toward business-friendly environments and how India’s policy frictions can undermine its market advantages, Chandler Compton explains in this blog.

The post The $23 Billion Gap: How India Lost Japan’s Capital first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India’s Lost Momentum

In 2008, Japanese direct investment to India and ASEAN were nearly equal at $5.6 billion and $6.3 billion, respectively. While total FDI in India increased from 2008 to 2024, Japanese inflows were volatile and underperformed relative to ASEAN. In 2024, Japanese investment in ASEAN surged to $28.7 billion, more than five times the $5.3 billion invested in India (Japan External Trade Organization, 2025). The gap highlights how rapidly Japanese capital can shift toward business-friendly environments and how India’s policy frictions can undermine its market advantages.

Between 2008’s near parity and 2024’s disparity, India did not lose its share of Japanese capital to China, but to Southeast Asia.

The divergence in Japanese capital allocation stemmed partly from global disruptions such as the 2008 financial crisis and the COVID-19 pandemic, but primarily from India’s protectionist turn aimed at China amid rising security tensions. Throughout the 2010s, India introduced a range of non-tariff trade barriers, including anti-dumping investigations leading to duties on Chinese industrial inputs critical to Japanese supply chains, investment restrictions, and expanded technical standards for imported products.

Japan’s stagnant FDI into India reflects the unique vulnerabilities of Japanese firms to India’s trade restrictions targeting China. Unlike many international firms whose Indian operations focus on services or consumer goods, Japanese manufacturers produce complex, parts-intensive products reliant on Chinese inputs that local Indian suppliers can rarely provide.

Despite India’s efforts to reduce Chinese economic influence, its industrial ecosystem remained dependent on Chinese industrial components for scale, cost, and variety. Between 2007 and 2022, India’s industrial imports from China tripled, accelerating at twice the pace of imports from other nations as the country’s industrial growth outpaced its domestic supply capacity (Global Trade Research Initiative, 2025). The contradiction left Japanese manufacturers caught between India’s anti-China restrictions and their continued need for Chinese components, creating a climate of supply chain disruptions and regulatory uncertainty. Rather than emerging as a reliable investment alternative to China for Japanese capital, India has become a complicated one.

Rather than emerging as a reliable investment alternative to China for Japanese capital, India has become a complicated one.

From Convergence to Collateral Damage

Rising security tensions and global shifts away from China led India to implement restrictive measures targeting Chinese economic inputs and investments in the 2010s and early 2020s. India’s tariff increases were relatively modest in the period. Average applied tariffs rose modestly from 13-14% in the early 2010s to 15.9% by 2024. India’s tariff rates on Chinese industrial inputs between 2008 and 2024 also saw only modest increases (World Bank, 2025a; World Bank, 2025b). The key disruption to Japanese investment came from India’s surging use of non-tariff measures on Chinese imports and capital.

India’s 185 anti-dumping investigations into Chinese imports between 2014 and 2024 struck at the heart of Japanese manufacturing operations. The investigations are targeting steel, machinery, chemicals, and other critical manufacturing inputs, leading to duties that generated compliance costs and sourcing uncertainty (Directorate General of Trade Remedies [DGTR], 2025). The impact was stark: 76.4% of Japanese companies in India cited the ‘absence of suppliers that meet quality and technical capability requirements’ in 2024—over 24 percentage points higher than the ASEAN average of 52.2% (Japan External Trade Organization, 2024). India’s anti-dumping actions handed ASEAN the advantage of more reliable and efficient industrial ecosystems for Japanese manufacturers.

India compounded its operational challenges by layering on investment restrictions. In April 2020, the Indian government introduced Press Note 3, a regulation mandating cabinet-level approval for foreign investments originating from countries sharing a land border (Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade, 2020). Over the four years that followed, authorities had approved only 124 proposals, rejected 201, and left more than 200 proposals stalled in bureaucratic limbo (Economic Times, 2024). Japanese firms with any Chinese equity stakes, joint ventures, or sourcing relationships were indirectly in Press Note 3’s crosshairs. Meanwhile, ASEAN countries were streamlining investment pathways and maintaining openness to foreign capital, a contrast that gave Japan an obvious choice.

In the competition for Japanese capital, India retains fundamental advantages over its regional competitors, but there is a narrowing window of opportunity to close ASEAN’s lead.

India also increased technical standards for foreign products entering its market. The Bureau of Indian Standards Act of 2016 enabled India to sharply increase mandatory certifications across sectors central to Japanese manufacturing, such as electronics, steel, and machinery (Government of India, 2016). Data collected in 2022 revealed that India had 4,618 coded non-tariff measures enforced by 38 different institutions, compared to Japan’s 1,278 measures across just 12 institutions (Sarmeen & Sundaram, 2022; Nabeshima & Obashi, 2022). While intended to promote quality and safety, India’s expanding standards system created compliance burdens that could make entering the Indian market unprofitable. When combined with sourcing disruptions and investment restrictions, the product scrutiny created a cumulative effect that pushed Japanese investors toward markets with smoother operations support, transparent processes, and regulatory predictability.

An Open, But Narrowing Window of Opportunity

Capitalizing on India’s strengths will require business-friendly reforms that ease regulatory processes, foster integrated manufacturing ecosystems, and strengthen institutional partnerships with Japan.

In the competition for Japanese capital, India retains fundamental advantages over its regional competitors, but there is a narrowing window of opportunity to close ASEAN’s lead. Capitalizing on India’s strengths will require business-friendly reforms that ease regulatory processes, foster integrated manufacturing ecosystems, and strengthen institutional partnerships with Japan. India’s next moves will determine whether it reclaims Japanese capital as a strategic pillar of Indo-Pacific growth, or allows ASEAN to consolidate its lead for good.

In Part Two, we examine a three-pillar strategy for turning the tide, focusing on policy predictability, operational support, and innovation diplomacy. Each will be key to restoring Japan’s confidence in India as a long-term investment partner.

The post The $23 Billion Gap: How India Lost Japan’s Capital first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-23-billion-gap-how-india-lost-japans-capital/feed/ 0 903851
Closing the Gap: How India Can Revive Japanese Investment http://stg.csep.org/blog/closing-the-gap-how-india-can-revive-japanese-investment/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=closing-the-gap-how-india-can-revive-japanese-investment http://stg.csep.org/blog/closing-the-gap-how-india-can-revive-japanese-investment/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 09:19:13 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903845 To win back Japanese capital, India must pursue a policy agenda that addresses the specific regulatory friction and supply chain challenges that drove Japanese manufacturers to ASEAN, while leveraging Japan’s unique strengths in technology and infrastructure development explains Chandler Compton in this blog.

The post Closing the Gap: How India Can Revive Japanese Investment first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In 2024, ASEAN captured $28.7 billion in Japanese investment compared to India’s $5.3 billion. The fivefold disparity reflects a profound shift from 2008, when Japanese capital flowed in nearly equal measure to India and ASEAN (Japan External Trade Organization, 2025). The barriers that drove this shift, including regulatory uncertainty, supply chain disruptions, and compliance challenges, transformed India from a competitive destination for investment into a complicated one, but the trends are reversible.

The barriers to investment and business operations that led Japanese investors to shift from India to ASEAN after 2008 and created the fivefold investment gap seen today are reversible. To win back Japanese capital, India must pursue a policy agenda focused on streamlining regulation, supporting business growth, and developing deeper institutional partnerships.

To win back Japanese capital, India must pursue a policy agenda that addresses the specific regulatory friction and supply chain challenges that drove Japanese manufacturers to ASEAN, while leveraging Japan’s unique strengths in technology and infrastructure development.

Streamlining Regulation

India can start to address its business environment’s regulatory challenges by developing industry-integrated roadmaps that outline industrial policy targets and timelines at five- to ten-year intervals. Singapore’s Industry Transformation Maps are a proven model that offers investors a clearly defined regulatory direction through specific targets and timelines (Singapore EDB, 2022). Future-facing policy frameworks with explicit commitments and progress reviews would provide Japanese stakeholders with the predictability needed to sustain investments.

Regulatory harmony between governments will also prevent overlapping red tape from increasing compliance costs for Japanese firms. Mutual Recognition Agreements (MRAs) similar to those established between Japan and the European Union have prevented duplicate testing of Japanese equipment sold in Europe and simplified market access for Japanese firms (European Commission & Government of Japan, 2001). A similar understanding between Indian and Japanese standards authorities focusing on high-value sectors of the future could align certification processes for the semiconductors, advanced batteries, and green technologies, where India-Japan collaboration has enormous potential.

India must combine regulatory clarity and harmony with speed. India has proven solutions in place, but they need to scale. The National Single Window System, launched in 2021, enables foreign investors to monitor their approval processes through a single, consolidated interface (Press Information Bureau, 2021). At the state level, Maharashtra’s Maha Parwana scheme offers companies investing over $5.8 million blanket approval within 48 hours, with the remaining clearances guaranteed to be completed within 30 days or automatically approved if delayed (Economic Times, 2020). Scaling these digital reforms nationwide would prove to Japanese investors that India can match ASEAN’s operational efficiency.

Building Integrated Supply Networks

India must create an environment that attracts Japanese capital while facilitating the growth of Japanese firms.

India must create an environment that attracts Japanese capital while facilitating the growth of Japanese firms. A critical untapped opportunity lies in Japanese small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) that have largely avoided the Indian market to date. Unlike in Southeast Asia, where Japanese firms typically bring networks of smaller firms, large Japanese companies in India have primarily worked with local suppliers and subcontractors. While this approach has reduced costs for major firms, it also means that Japanese SMEs lack the necessary support infrastructure to enter India’s market (Pajon & Saint-Mézard, 2018). The absence of integrated Japanese supply networks perpetuates the sourcing challenges that initially drove Japanese investment toward ASEAN.

India could build supplier parks that co-locate Japanese companies with their supply chains. Vietnam’s Thang Long Industrial Park exemplifies the potential of this model. It houses 106 Japanese companies that manufacture at both small and large scales while employing over 60,000 people (Japan Bank for International Cooperation, 2023). India can replicate this success by establishing Japanese-designed supplier parks near existing manufacturing clusters in Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, or Maharashtra, states that are already home to Japanese operations, including Toyota Tsusho’s facilities in Gujarat (Toyota Tsusho, n.d.). Suppliers positioned near existing clusters would provide Japanese SMEs with viable entry points into India.

To complement these industrial clusters, India should partner with Japan to expand logistics networks by inviting Japanese development agencies to co-finance rail links and logistics hubs in the Chennai–Bengaluru corridor. Japan has already demonstrated its commitment: Japan holds a 26% stake in the Delhi–Mumbai Industrial Corridor and pledged $12 billion for the Ahmedabad–Mumbai high-speed rail line (Pajon & Saint-Mézard, 2018). The initiatives are delivering results for India beyond infrastructure, as high-speed rail construction alone provided over 90,000 jobs in India in 2024 (JETRO, 2024). Expanding this model would strengthen India’s supply chains and deepen Japan’s manufacturing footprint, thereby creating the jobs and logistics infrastructure India needs to support its growth. 

Fostering Innovative Partnerships

India and Japan should co-launch joint R&D centers that combine India’s engineering talent with Japan’s technical expertise. To staff R&D facilities effectively, expanding bilateral fellowship programs focused on technology development and exchange would facilitate the cross-trained talent pipeline these innovation hubs require.

A revitalized bilateral innovation fund and startup exchange could deepen commercial ties between India’s tech ecosystem and Japanese investors. The original Japan-India Startup Hub initiative, launched in 2018, stalled during the COVID-19 pandemic and has potential for expansion. Targeted seed capital, accelerator programs, and regulatory fast-tracks could catalyze cooperation in future technologies and increase Japanese SME participation in India (Pajon & Saint-Mézard, 2018). India’s vibrant startup scene, combined with Japan’s capital-rich enterprises, could accelerate innovation and attract billions of dollars in Japanese venture capital to India’s tech sector.

Sustained bilateral partnerships require a pipeline of cross-trained professionals who understand both markets’ technical requirements and business practices. India should proactively invite Japanese universities and research institutes to create satellite campuses or co-branded innovation centers in its technology hubs. The University of Tokyo, Waseda University, and Kyoto University offer proven partnership models that Indian research organizations can replicate to cultivate bilingual talent, foster joint patents, and align Japanese capital with India’s research ambitions. Japanese universities would gain access to India’s engineering talent pipeline for joint research projects, while Indian partnerships would help them compete with Chinese universities for Southeast Asian students and research funding.

The Path Forward

India has a narrow window to implement these reforms and transform from a challenging to a reliable destination for Japanese capital.

India has a narrow window to implement these reforms and transform from a challenging to a reliable destination for Japanese capital. The barriers to investment and business operations that pushed Japanese toward ASEAN after 2008 are reversible, but only through decisive action across all three pillars: streamlining regulation to provide predictability, supporting business growth through integrated supplier parks and infrastructure partnerships, and developing the long-term partnerships that will sustain cooperation.

Success would close the $23 billion investment gap while establishing India as Japan’s strategic anchor in Indo-Pacific economic integration. India’s path will decide whether it reclaims its position in Asia’s high-value manufacturing networks, or watches ASEAN’s investment lead become insurmountable. India’s economic future depends on seizing the moment.

The post Closing the Gap: How India Can Revive Japanese Investment first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/closing-the-gap-how-india-can-revive-japanese-investment/feed/ 0 903845
Understanding the Importance of Trade Integration for India’s Green Transition: An Analysis of Trade in Green Goods http://stg.csep.org/blog/understanding-the-importance-of-trade-integration-for-indias-green-transition-an-analysis-of-trade-in-green-goods/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=understanding-the-importance-of-trade-integration-for-indias-green-transition-an-analysis-of-trade-in-green-goods http://stg.csep.org/blog/understanding-the-importance-of-trade-integration-for-indias-green-transition-an-analysis-of-trade-in-green-goods/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 11:33:12 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903813 Examining India’s current position in the global green goods market, its comparative advantages, and its tariff policies provides a good starting point to assess the country’s readiness to emerge as a global leader in this vital space. This blog by Nancy Gupta and Prerna Prabhakar attempts to do so by analysing India’s trade in Green Goods (GGs).

The post Understanding the Importance of Trade Integration for India’s Green Transition: An Analysis of Trade in Green Goods first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India envisions becoming a Viksit Bharat (Developed India) by 2047, while simultaneously committing to its Net Zero Emission target by 2070. Trade integration will play a critical role in this journey. The economic reforms initiated in 1991, which liberalised India’s trade and investment policies, led to a surge in exports and foreign direct investment, reflected in the high GDP growth rates that peaked during 2005–2007. However, in recent years, this momentum has stalled. India’s share in global merchandise exports has largely remained stagnant, hovering around 2 %, largely due to high tariffs and non-tariff barriers imposed on its trading partners.

With India’s plan to transition towards a greener economy, it is time once again to revamp trade and investment policies, especially for green goods and technologies that can enable this transition.

With India’s plan to transition towards a greener economy, it is time once again to revamp trade and investment policies, especially for green goods and technologies that can enable this transition. In this context, integrating into Global Value Chains (GVCs) for green goods presents a strategic opportunity, as India moves towards its net zero targets.

Key trends in India’s trade in green goods

Green goods—such as solar panels, wind turbines, water purification systems, and energy-efficient appliances—are critical for advancing a low-carbon economy and improving access to green technologies. Examining India’s current position in the global green goods market, its comparative advantages, and its tariff policies provides a good starting point to assess the country’s readiness to emerge as a global leader in this vital space. This blog attempts to do so by analysing India’s trade in Green Goods (GGs)[1].

The scope of green goods considered here is not limited to final green products alone but also includes intermediate goods and essential inputs which are not necessarily green. For instance, solar energy technologies include key components such as solar PV modules and PV cells, and upstream materials like silicon wafers and polysilicon, which form the backbone of solar panel manufacturing. Similarly, wind energy systems rely on components such as rotors, generators and towers, which are not green but support green manufacturing.

Figure 1 presents India’s exports and imports of GGs as a share of its total exports and imports over the past decade. In 2024, GGs accounted for 4.5% of India’s total exports growing at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 9% over the past decade, more than double the 4.4% CAGR of non-GG exports. On the import side, GGs constituted 5% of total imports in 2024, with a decade-long CAGR of 7.8%, compared to 5.8% for other goods. While the volume of GG imports has consistently exceeded exports (Figure 2) over the decade, the higher growth rate of GG exports signals a promising trend. In 2024, India imported 42% of the total GG goods from China, followed by the United States (6%) and Germany (5%).

Figure 1: Share of Green Goods in India’s Total Exports and Imports (in per cent)

Source: World Integrated Trade Solutions (WITS)

Figure 2: Trade Volume of Green Goods (GGs) in India, 2015–2024 (in USD Billion)

Source: World Integrated Trade Solutions (WITS)

Distribution of green goods trade across the supply chain stages

In terms of various supply chain stages, India’s exports and imports of green goods are analysed for four product categories – raw materials, intermediate goods, capital goods, and consumer goods, in line with the World Integrated Trade Solution (WITS) classification [2].

India exhibits relative export strength in Intermediate goods, being a net exporter in nearly half (45%) of them (22 out of 49). However, it remains significantly import-dependent in other categories, particularly raw materials and capital goods category wherein India is a net importer in around 76% and 68% of products respectively (Figure 3).  This suggests that while India is building capacity in Intermediate goods, it still relies heavily on imports of key capital-intensive green technologies which are important for supply chain integration, and high value addition.

Figure 3: Distribution of India’s Net Green Trade Position by Product Type, in 2024

Source: World Integrated Trade Solutions (WITS)

India’s share in global green goods exports and imports

While India’s share in global exports of green goods increased between 2017 and 2024, it is still less than 1%.

While India’s share in global exports of green goods increased between 2017 and 2024, it is still less than 1%.  On the import side, India’s share in global imports stood at around 2.5% in 2024, and it rose at a higher rate as compared to exports, highlighting rising domestic demand for environmentally friendly technologies and products. A large share of green goods (107 out of 182) in which India is a net importer suggests that the country is actively building domestic capacity in these sectors. In this context, being a net importer need not be seen as a weakness. Rather, imports of green technologies and intermediate goods can play a constructive role in the early stages of capacity development, enabling technology transfer, and the creation of backward linkages that support domestic industry growth.

Figure 4: India’s Share of Global Trade in Green Goods (2017-2024) (in per cent)

Source: World Integrated Trade Solutions (WITS)

To corroborate the findings on India’s share in global GG exports, a Revealed Comparative Advantage (RCA) analysis was conducted. The RCA index measures a country’s relative advantage or disadvantage in exporting a particular product, compared to the world average. An RCA value above 1 indicates comparative advantage, while a value below 1 suggests disadvantage[3]. Revealed comparative advantage assessment reveals that India lacks a comparative advantage in 71% of traded green goods. This gap narrows when compared to specific countries—India trails China in 54% of GGs, Germany in 44%, South Korea in 42%, and Vietnam in 34%.

India’s tariff policies for green goods

The above assessment of India’s global standing in green goods reveals that the country still has a long way to go in this space and needs supportive policies to effectively integrate into green global value chains (GVCs). In this regard, lowering tariffs emerges as a fundamental policy decision to enhance India’s competitiveness and facilitate greater participation in green GVCs.

The tariff on GGs rose from 8.04% in 2012 to 11.41% in 2023, paralleling the increase in tariffs on all goods (from 13.30% to 14.82%). This protectionist approach may shield the domestic industry in the short term, but it risks inflating costs for downstream users and delaying the adoption of clean technologies.

While global trends reflect a steady decline in overall tariffs[4] to promote freer trade, India’s average tariff levels have been rising (Figure 5 and 6), raising the cost of final products where domestic production remains limited.

The tariff on GGs rose from 8.04% in 2012 to 11.41% in 2023, paralleling the increase in tariffs on all goods (from 13.30% to 14.82%). This protectionist approach may shield the domestic industry in the short term, but it risks inflating costs for downstream users and delaying the adoption of clean technologies. A more liberal tariff policy on GGs could play a critical role in fostering a competitive, affordable, and sustainable green economy in India.

Figure 5: Average effectively applied tariff on Green Goods: Global vs. India (2014–2023) (in %)

Source: World Integrated Trade Solutions (WITS)

As the international trade ecosystem evolves with rising demand for greener goods, it is important that India positions itself as an active player in this new trade paradigm. India must align its trade policy with its climate goals and adopt a proactive, strategic approach to green integration.

  1. The government should create and officially recognise an internal list of green goods mapped to relevant HS codes.
  1. Develop an official green goods list: The government should create and officially recognise an internal list of green goods mapped to relevant HS codes. This list should be derived through extensive industry stakeholder consultations to ensure practical identification of products critical for India’s green transition.
  2. Reduce tariffs on essential Green Goods (GGs): Tariffs on green goods that India heavily imports—such as components for solar panels, water treatment systems, and other clean technologies—should be progressively reduced to lower costs and accelerate domestic adoption. Free trade agreements (FTAs) offer an ideal platform to negotiate lower import duties on these key green inputs.
  3. Create a conducive investment ecosystem: India should establish a supportive environment to strategically attract foreign direct investment (FDI) in green technology, renewable energy, and clean manufacturing. This requires continued improvements in the ease of doing business.
  4. Boost private sector R&D in green manufacturing: Indian private enterprises need to significantly ramp up their investments in research and development focused on green technologies, processes, and products to build long-term competitiveness.
  5. Strengthen MSME participation in green goods: Targeted support—through financing, training, technology access, and capacity building—must be provided to micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs) in the green goods space to ensure their effective participation and foster inclusive green growth.

The post Understanding the Importance of Trade Integration for India’s Green Transition: An Analysis of Trade in Green Goods first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/understanding-the-importance-of-trade-integration-for-indias-green-transition-an-analysis-of-trade-in-green-goods/feed/ 0 903813
Economic Security in the Indo-Pacific: India-Japan Cooperation on Critical Minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/economic-security-in-the-indo-pacific-india-japan-cooperation-in-critical-minerals/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=economic-security-in-the-indo-pacific-india-japan-cooperation-in-critical-minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/economic-security-in-the-indo-pacific-india-japan-cooperation-in-critical-minerals/#respond Thu, 12 Jun 2025 06:54:03 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903514 This article by Anindita Sinh explores the evolution of the India-Japan economic relationship, Japan’s domestic and international policies in the critical minerals sector, the evolution of India and Japan’s critical minerals cooperation, and the pathways for enhancing this partnership.

The post Economic Security in the Indo-Pacific: India-Japan Cooperation on Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The launch of India’s National Critical Minerals Mission (NCMM) in January 2025 and Japan’s 7th Strategic Energy Plan (SEP) in February 2025, places emphasis in each country, on securing supply chains for critical minerals. The initiatives indicate growing strategic convergence and the potential to elevate bilateral relations. This moment provides a timely opportunity to reimagine India–Japan cooperation as a key pillar of Indo-Pacific economic security, especially in a world increasingly shaped by resource diplomacy.

In November 2024, India and Japan convened their inaugural Economic Security Dialogue, emphasising a shared resolve to deepen strategic cooperation in the face of growing geopolitical volatility and technological competition. The statement recognised  that “both sides underscored the need for closer collaboration to protect economic interests, and build resilient supply chains…by way of policy facilitation for business and academic partnership between relevant actors in India and Japan.”

Japan and India have been partnering in the rare earth elements (REEs) space as far back as 2012 but these recent developments signal a shared sense of urgency: both democracies recognise that reliable access to minerals like lithium, cobalt, nickel, copper, rare earths and others is essential for clean-energy goals, industrial growth, and economic security.

This article explores the evolution of the India-Japan economic relationship, Japan’s domestic and international policies in the critical minerals sector, the evolution of India and Japan’s critical minerals cooperation, and the pathways for enhancing this partnership.

Geostrategic convergences underlining the India-Japan partnership

The India–Japan partnership is anchored in a broader partnership of shared values and economic ties. Both nations elevated their relationship to a Special Strategic and Global Partnership in 2014, built on democratic governance, rule of law, and civilisational links. Economically, their ties are institutionalised by landmark agreements. The 2011 India–Japan Comprehensive Economic Partnership Agreement (CEPA) is among India’s most comprehensive free-trade pacts, covering goods, services, and investment. This has liberalised over 94% of bilateral trade and spurred investment. India and Japan also coordinate through multiple joint forums. For example, the Industrial Competitiveness Partnership (launched in 2021) and the Clean Energy Partnership (CEP, launched in 2022) are agreements that foster joint ventures and financing in energy, steel, textiles, and advanced manufacturing. Japan pledged ~JPY 5 trillion (USD 42 billion) of public and private Japanese investment over five years for projects in India.

Concrete projects underline this industrial collaboration. Indian and Japanese firms are already working together on rare earths and clean energy. In the minerals sector, for example, Toyota Tsusho (a trading arm of Toyota Group) partnered with India’s Indian Rare Earths Limited (IREL) as far back as 2012, to separate and refine rare earths mined in India. This collaboration paved the way for Toyota Tsusho’s subsidiary, Toyotsu Rare Earths India, which processes thousands of tons of Indian rare earth oxides and purifies them for export back to Japan. Such ventures help Japan’s industries (automotive, electronics, defence) secure supply of magnet-grade rare metals, while giving India value-added industrial capacity. In clean energy, Japanese companies are also active partners. For instance, in 2022 DENSO Kirloskar Industries (a Japanese-Indian JV) installed solar-powered water-pumping systems in rural Karnataka to recharge aquifers and promote carbon-neutral water supply. This illustrates how Japanese expertise in green tech and manufacturing supports India’s sustainable infrastructure.

These ties are underpinned by shared multilateral interests. Both India and Japan are founding members of the Quad. They also coordinate in forums like the International Solar Alliance (ISA), the Mission Innovation, and the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF) with partner countries. Under the Quad’s 2023 Summit, the leaders even launched the Quad Investors Network (QUIN) – a forum of major institutional investors and companies from each country – to co-invest in “critical technologies” and strengthen resilient supply chains.

India–Japan relations are deep and diverse: grounded in shared values and democracy, backed by agreements like CEPA, and exemplified by joint projects such as rare-earth refining with IREL amongst various other industrial and business level collaborations. This broad partnership provides a strong foundation for jointly tackling the challenges of critical mineral security.

Japan’s domestic ecosystem for energy security

Japan’s evolving strategy on critical minerals is deeply shaped by both past disruptions and forward-looking priorities. The 2010 incident with China, when rare earth exports were curtailed, served as a turning point, prompting Tokyo to strengthen the institutional role of the Japan Organization for Metals and Energy Security (JOGMEC) formerly called Japan Oil, Gas and Metals National Corporation. This allowed the agency to directly invest in overseas mining projects and secure access to vital inputs. Within a decade it slashed its reliance on Chinese rare earths from about 90% to roughly 58%. Japan invested in overseas mining projects, built strategic stockpiles, and supported new recycling and substitution technologies. For example, Japan’s Shin-Etsu Chemical has long operated world-class facilities for rare-earth separation, using advanced solvent-extraction methods since the 1960s. The momentum intensified after subsequent crises, notably the 2011 Fukushima disaster and, more recently, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine—both of which exposed Japan’s vulnerability due to its high dependence on imported energy and minerals.

In response, Japan’s domestic policy has become more assertive and structured (see Table 2). The approval of the 7th Strategic Energy Plan (SEP) in February 2025 reflects a major shift in how Tokyo approaches critical mineral security. The plan identifies copper and battery materials as essential for the country’s green transition, setting the tone for new initiatives. Financial tools and public-private partnerships are being deployed to support Japanese companies in acquiring overseas mining assets, while domestic capabilities are being enhanced through mineral recycling and exploration of seabed resources, especially in areas near Japan’s coastline that have shown promising reserves.

At the same time, Japan is paying closer attention to the environmental implications of deep-sea mining, with sustainability principles increasingly guiding its domestic exploration strategy. Taken together, these developments signal a broader effort by Japan to build greater technological autonomy and supply chain resilience, while remaining open to strategic international partnerships to meet its long-term critical mineral needs.

…these developments signal a broader effort by Japan to build greater technological autonomy and supply chain resilience, while remaining open to strategic international partnerships to meet its long-term critical mineral needs.

Strategic Alignment: India–Japan cooperation for critical minerals

India and Japan share a large majority of critical minerals in their official lists, with over 20 minerals in common (see Table 3), reflecting strong alignment in their strategic focus areas for technology, energy, and security.

The history of India–Japan cooperation in resources and clean energy goes back decades and has accelerated in recent years. Their partnership has evolved from general development aid to strategic joint initiatives. For example, Japan’s Official Development Assistance (ODA) to India originally focused on infrastructure (e.g. the Delhi–Mumbai Industrial Corridor and Mumbai–Ahmedabad bullet train), but has expanded to high-technology and green growth. Likewise, institutional mechanisms such as the India–Japan Energy Dialogue (est. 2006) and Steel Dialogue (est. 2020) integrate discussions of resource inputs and efficiency. Under the Clean Energy Partnership (CEP), Japan has extended over ¥300 billion (US$2.7 billion) loans for solar and wind projects. These ongoing frameworks mean that resource security is not a side issue, but a core part of planning: access to minerals like lithium for batteries or rare earths for wind turbines is built into energy and industrial planning.

These ongoing frameworks mean that resource security is not a side issue, but a core part of planning: access to minerals like lithium for batteries or rare earths for wind turbines is built into energy and industrial planning.

Within this context, rare-earth collaboration is a flagship example. The IREL–Toyota Tsusho joint venture demonstrates a long-term, sustained engagement. After the 2012 MoU and launch of Toyotsu Rare Earths India, both sides continue exploring further steps. But the cooperation can go beyond a single commodity. Japan’s can shared its newly developed deep-sea mining technology with India’s nascent efforts, dovetailing with India’s own Deep Ocean Mission. Meanwhile, India’s ambition to build gigafactories and expand EV production creates demand for Japanese battery technology and minerals. In both cases, joint labs and Research and Development (R&D) can be established. For example, partnerships between Japan’s National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science & Technology and Indian Institutes for Technology or the various labs under the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research, could be considered.

India–Japan mineral collaboration is already woven into a larger tapestry of industrial development and infrastructure investment.

Thus, India–Japan mineral collaboration is already woven into a larger tapestry of industrial development and infrastructure investment (see Table 1). Japanese investment and technology help build up India’s renewable energy capacity and semiconductor labs, both of which hinge on reliable mineral inputs. Conversely, India’s growing manufacturing base and resource potential allow Japan to mitigate supply risks. Together, they are turning the shared strategic vision of a diversified, resilient Indo-Pacific economy into concrete action – from tying supply chains in Quad initiatives to implementing the ambitious Clean Energy Partnership loans. All these efforts not only address energy transition goals, but also strengthen economic security: by ensuring neither country can be easily cut off from the minerals needed to sustain its industries and clean-tech future.

Table 1: India-Japan cooperation in the critical minerals sector

Year Policy Key Highlights
2024 India-Japan Dialogue on Economic Security, Strategic Trade, and Technology The inaugural round of this dialogue in November 2024 focused on building resilient supply chains, industrial and technological resilience, and collaboration in research and application of key technologies, including critical minerals.
2023 Japan-India Semiconductor Supply Chain MoC India and Japan signed a Memorandum of Cooperation (MoC) to strengthen collaboration in the semiconductor supply chain, recognising the critical role of minerals and materials in electronics and digital technologies.
2022 India-Japan Clean Energy Partnership This partnership covers areas such as electric vehicles, battery storage, and recycling of materials from batteries and electronics, all of which rely on critical minerals. The partnership also supports joint research and public-private collaboration in clean energy and resource efficiency.
2021 QUAD Agreement on Rare Earths Japan, India, the US, and Australia (QUAD) signed an agreement for cooperation in procuring rare earths, reinforcing multilateral supply chain resilience and Indo-Japanese collaboration in critical minerals.
2021 Virtual Meeting on Rare Earths A virtual meeting between India’s Department of Atomic Energy (DAE) and Japan’s Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (METI) included discussions on rare earth minerals, highlighting ongoing collaboration in this area.
2018 India-Japan Digital Partnership (IJDP) While not exclusively about critical minerals, this partnership launched new initiatives in science, technology, and ICT, and set the stage for deeper collaboration in supply chains for advanced technologies.
2015 Joint Statement post Summit Meeting During the 2015 India-Japan Energy Dialogue, both countries acknowledged the Sale Purchase Agreement between IREL and Toyotsu Rare Earths India Pvt. Ltd., a subsidiary of Toyota Tsusho Corporation, for the supply of mixed rare earth chloride. They agreed to continue discussions to enhance cooperation in the rare earth sector and expedite the commencement of commercial production.
2014 Commercial Contract: IREL-Toyota Tsusho Indian Rare Earths Limited (IREL) and Toyota Tsusho Corporation (TTC) signed a commercial contract for exploration and production of rare earths, aiming to supply raw material to a Japanese rare earth production unit in Vizag. The deal was part of efforts to reduce Japan’s dependence on China for REEs.
2012 MoU on Rare Earths Cooperation India (Department of Atomic Energy) and Japan (Ministry of International Trade and Industry) signed an MoU to cooperate in the field of rare earth minerals. This laid the foundation for joint technology and supply chain efforts.
2010 Joint Statement: Vision for India-Japan Strategic and Global Partnership in the Next Decade Noted the importance of REEs and decided to pursue bilateral cooperation in the development, recycling and re-use of rare earths and rare metals, as well as further research into their industrial substitutes.
2007 India-Japan Energy Dialogue Under the larger umbrella of Strategic and Global Partnership, the two acknowledged the importance of ensuring stable energy supply essential for both economies and discussed the issues of energy security and environmental protection.

Source: Authors compilation based on various sources. Not exhaustive.

Strengthening Ties

India emerged at the most promising destination for Japanese business investments according to a 2024 survey by the Japanese Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC) surpassing China and Southeast Asia. This potential of expanding investment in India could also find resonance within the emerging critical minerals sector. To realise the full potential of India-Japan cooperation on critical minerals, targeted and strategic interventions are essential. The following policy options outline key areas where bilateral collaboration can deliver long-term economic and strategic gains.

  1. Leverage the QUIN: India and Japan could channel QUIN’s funding into joint ventures for mineral processing in India, such as lithium or rare earth refineries. Harmonised export-credit and insurance support from Quad countries can enable long-term Japanese investment, framing these projects as strategic Quad-tech infrastructure.
  2. Pursue triangular cooperation in Africa: New Delhi and Tokyo may consider joint investments in mining and logistics infrastructure in Africa and Southeast Asia. Through mechanisms like the India-Japan Cooperation Initiative for Sustainable Economic Development in Africa, they can co-finance extraction and transport, pool technical expertise, and offer coordinated bids to reduce Chinese dominance in resource-rich regions.
  3. Promote a circular economy for minerals: India and Japan can assess opportunities to co-develop recycling technologies and urban mining capacities. Indo-Japanese R&D hubs and recovery plants for EV batteries or e-waste in India would strengthen domestic supply loops, reduce imports, and enhance sustainability.
  4. Collaborate on green extraction and processing technology: The two countries can consider launching a joint Clean Metals Research Hub to develop eco-friendly mining and processing methods. This could include robotic mining, zero-waste processing, or safe handling of radioactive materials, drawing on Japan’s tech expertise and India’s operational scale. It could be jointly funded by Japan’s Science and Technology Agency and India’s Department of Science and Technology, with industry partners co-financing.
  5. Invest in industry capacity-building and human capital: To ensure project success, Japan can consider investing in Indian training programs in mining and materials engineering, including expanding Japan-India Institutes for Manufacturing (JIMs) and technical exchanges. Building a skilled workforce and aligning operational standards will ensure long-term strategic compatibility for critical mineral partnerships.

By taking these steps, India and Japan would not only bolster their own economic security but also set an example of partnership. Joint processing hubs, co-financed mines abroad, circular-economy networks and collaborative labs would create redundancies and resilience in supply chains. Each suggestion is a concrete building block: they enable shared investments and technology exchange, reduce reliance on any one supplier (particularly China), and smooth the path of commodities from mine to factory. In an era where critical minerals power clean energy and digital industries, an India–Japan alliance makes strategic sense and reflects shared democratic values. Together, they can translate their growing Special Strategic and Global Partnership into tangible supply-chain security – strengthening both economies while supporting global efforts for a diversified, sustainable future.

Annex

Table 2:  Japan’s international partnerships and policy initiatives on critical minerals

Year Policy Highlights
2025 Japan – Republic of Korea First Japan-Korea High Level Dialogue on critical minerals. The two sides exchanged views on sharing policies for critical minerals between Japan and the ROK, cooperation in stockpiling of mineral resources, and joint production and off-take in third countries, as efforts to strengthen bilateral ties in the supply chain for critical minerals
2024 Japan-India Inaugural Economic Security Dialogue, including Strategic Trade and Technology where the two partners discussed issues of economic security – building resilient supply chains and critical infrastructure underscoring the importance of critical minerals.
2024 Japan – Democratic Republic of Congo Japan’s Organization for Metals and Energy Security (JOGMEC) signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with Gécamines, the DRC’s state-owned mining company, to develop the Lobito Corridor, focusing on copper cathode and cobalt hydroxide production. This collaboration aims to diversify and stabilize Japan’s supply of critical minerals.
2024 Japan – Brazil Japan- Brazil Agreement (Nickel-Cobalt) The Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC) signed an MoU with Vale S.A., a leading Brazilian mining company, to strengthen cooperation in the supply chain resilience of mineral resources, including nickel and cobalt. This agreement supports Japan’s efforts to secure stable supplies of raw materials for low-carbon steel production and other decarbonisation initiatives.
2024 Japan – Australia’s Northen Territory MoU signed by Minister for Mining Mark Monaghan and Mr Hiroshi KUBOTA, Executive Vice President of Metals Unit (JOGMEC), focuses on greater collaboration with critical mineral supply chains. Will be facilitated through the exploration, extraction, processing and supply of critical minerals such as nickel, cobalt, lithium, graphite and rare earth elements.
2023 Japan – Indonesia Japan–Indonesia Agreement (Nickel Focus) As Indonesia is the world’s largest nickel producer; Japan seeks to reduce over-reliance on China by securing stable nickel supply for EV batteries and green technologies.
2024 Japan – UK A partnership between the UK and Japan to support collaboration on resilient, transparent, and sustainable critical mineral supply chains.
2023 Japan – US Agreement to strengthen and diversify critical minerals supply chains and promote the adoption of electric vehicle battery technologies. To facilitate trade, promote fair competition and market-oriented conditions for trade in critical minerals, ensure robust labour and environmental standards, and cooperate in efforts to ensure secure, sustainable, and equitable critical minerals supply chains.
2023 Japan – Chile JBIC entered into an MoU with Corporación Nacional del Cobre de Chile (CODELCO) to strengthen cooperation in critical minerals and decarbonisation sectors. This partnership supports Chile’s National Lithium Strategy, with CODELCO playing a leading role in its implementation; Japan and Chile signed a Memorandum of Cooperation (MoC) focusing on the energy transition, including collaboration on hydrogen, ammonia, and critical minerals. This agreement aimed to enhance bilateral cooperation in energy and mineral resource development.
2023 Japan – EU The European Commission and Japan’s Organization for Metals and Energy Security (JOGMEC) signed an Administrative Arrangement on Cooperation in Critical Raw Materials Supply Chains. This agreement focuses on strengthening collaboration on critical mineral standards, traceability, and supply chain resilience.
2023 Japan – African Countries JOGMEC signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) with African countries in Republic of Zambia, and Scope of Work (SW) in Republic of Namibia and Democratic Republic of Congo in order to secure critical minerals.
2021 Strategic Energy Plan (6th Plan)

 

This plan prioritised securing critical minerals like lithium and nickel to support its green transformation.
2021 Japan – Quad Japan and India, along with other members of the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (QUAD), signed an agreement to cooperate on procuring rare earths. This collaboration aims to bolster both countries’ critical raw materials (CRM) supply security.
2021 Japan – ASEAN countries Under the ASEAN Minerals Cooperation Action Plan Phase III (AMCAP-III), Japan and ASEAN countries have been working together to promote sustainable mineral development. This includes initiatives to develop critical mineral value chains and increase mineral cooperation within ASEAN and with global partners.
2021 5-Year Action Plan (2021–2025) This plan focused on rare mineral stockpiling and recycling, aiming to enhance resource security.

It strengthened collaborations with ASEAN countries, India, and the European Union to secure critical minerals essential for advanced technologies and clean energy.

These partnerships include joint research initiatives, resource recycling programs, strategic stockpiling, and the development of sustainable, transparent supply chains to enhance resilience and reduce dependency on single suppliers.

2019 Japan – Canada The focus of the MoU with British Columbia shifted more toward the development of clean energy and critical minerals.
2018 Inclusion of Rare Earths in Strategic Energy Plan The aim was to enhance energy security and support electrified vehicles and renewable energy technologies.
 

2017

Japan – US The Japan–U.S. Strategic Energy Partnership (JUSEP) fostered collaboration on clean energy and infrastructure projects in the Indo-Pacific region, emphasising sustainable development and energy security
2017 Tax Incentives for Battery & Green Tech Component Producers It strengthened collaboration with Australia through JOGMEC-Lynas partnerships to enhance rare earth supply chain resilience and reduce overdependence on China.
2015 Critical Mineral Substitution and Processing Tech (R&D) It focused on R&D to develop alternative materials and advanced processing methods, aiming to reduce reliance on imported rare earths and strengthen industrial resilience.
2014 Japan – Chile A Letter of Intent (LOI) with CODELCO, Chile’s state-owned copper company, to strengthen strategic partnerships in mineral resource exploration and the application of Japanese advanced technology; MoU with COCHILCO, the Chilean Copper Commission, to enhance cooperation in metals and mining, focusing on information exchange regarding market trends, investment climates, and technological developments.
2013 Policy for Seabed Mining Development through JOGMEC This policy explored deep-sea rare earth and metal deposits within Japan’s Exclusive Economic Zone, enhancing resource self-sufficiency and reducing import reliance.
2012 Japan – Vietnam A Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) was signed between Vietnam’s Lai Chau-VIMICO Rare Earth Joint Stock Company and Japan’s Dong Pao Rare Earth Development Co. This MoU focused on the mining and processing of rare earth elements in the Dong Pao mine, located in Tam Duong district, Lai Chau province.
2011 Recycling Law for Small Home Appliances It mandated proper collection and recycling of devices like mobile phones and digital cameras to recover rare metals and reduce environmental impact.
2010 Japan – Vietnam During a summit in Hanoi, Japanese Prime Minister Naoto Kan and Vietnamese Prime Minister Nguyen Tan Dung agreed on a strategic partnership for rare earth exploration, mining, and processing in Vietnam. This decision was part of Japan’s initiative to diversify its rare earth sources following China’s export restrictions.
2010 METI’s Rare Earth Action Plan It aimed to reduce dependence on Chinese rare earths through supply diversification, and recycling
2010 Japan – Canada JOGMEC entered into memorandum of agreement for Rare Earth Elements
2010 Japan – Australia JOGMEC invested in Lynas Corporation’s Mount Weld rare earth project, securing a stable supply of REEs for Japan. This strategic partnership aimed to reduce Japan’s dependence on Chinese rare earth imports.
2009 Urban Mining Programs Launched It was established to recycle rare metals from electronic waste, reducing import dependence and boosting supply chain resilience amid growing global demand for critical minerals.
2004 JOGMEC formed by merging JOMEC and Japan National Oil Corporation It launched resource diplomacy via MoUs and strategic agreements to diversify supply chains and reduce China-dependence in critical minerals and rare earths.
1983 National Rare Metals Stockpiling Project It was established as a cooperative system between the government and private sector, to ensure natural resource security and economic security.
1981 Japan Oil and Metals National Corporation (JOMEC) established It was established to secure stable supplies of oil and non-ferrous metals through overseas exploration, financing and technical support.
1967 Japan Petroleum Development Corporation (JPDC) Ensure a stable, inexpensive supply of oil, to provide necessary funding and liability guarantees for overseas oil exploration.

 

 

Source: Authors compilation based on various sources. Not exhaustive.

 

Table 3: Critical Minerals on India and Japan’s lists (Updated as of June 2025)

Mineral Indian List Japanese List
Antimony ✅ ✅
Beryllium ✅ ✅
Bismuth ✅ ✅
Cadmium ✅ ❌
Cobalt ✅ ✅
Copper ✅ ✅
Gallium ✅ ✅
Germanium ✅ ✅
Graphite ✅ ✅
Hafnium ✅ ✅
Indium ✅ ✅
Lithium ✅ ✅
Molybdenum ✅ ✅
Nickel ✅ ✅
Niobium ✅ ✅
Phosphorous ✅ ✅
Platinum Group Elements (PGE) ✅ ✅
Potash ✅ ❌
Rare Earth Elements (REE) ✅ ✅
Rhenium ✅ ✅
Selenium ✅ ❌
Silicon ✅ ✅
Strontium ✅ ✅
Tantalum ✅ ✅
Tellurium ✅ ❌
Tin ✅ ✅
Titanium ✅ ✅
Tungsten ✅ ✅
Uranium ❌ ✅
Vanadium ✅ ✅
Zirconium ✅ ✅

Source: Author’s compilation based on various sources.

Note: The author would like to thank Tejal Karad, Research Intern, CSEP for her research assistance and Dr. Constantino Xavier, Senior Fellow, CSEP for his feedback..

The post Economic Security in the Indo-Pacific: India-Japan Cooperation on Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/economic-security-in-the-indo-pacific-india-japan-cooperation-in-critical-minerals/feed/ 0 903514
Defence Diplomacy in India’s Neighbourhood: Mapping Ministerial Visits Since 2014 http://stg.csep.org/blog/defence-diplomacy-in-indias-neighbourhood-mapping-ministerial-visits-since-2014/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=defence-diplomacy-in-indias-neighbourhood-mapping-ministerial-visits-since-2014 http://stg.csep.org/blog/defence-diplomacy-in-indias-neighbourhood-mapping-ministerial-visits-since-2014/#respond Thu, 05 Jun 2025 10:53:10 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903480 This blog by Sukirt Kaur discusses trends in bilateral visits by the Defence Ministers, explores the potential motivations behind these visits, and examines their broader implications for India’s regional interests.

The post Defence Diplomacy in India’s Neighbourhood: Mapping Ministerial Visits Since 2014 first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
While India invests in a more global defence diplomacy, the number of Defence Ministers’ visits to neighbouring countries remains limited.

Since 2014, India’s neighbourhood has witnessed a renewed push for engagement under New Delhi’s Neighbourhood First policy. As a result, there has been enhanced cooperation across various domains, ranging from infrastructure and connectivity to trade and defence. One indicator of the growing ties has been an increase in the frequency of high-level political engagements. For instance, Prime Minister Narendra Modi was the first leader in nearly two decades to visit Nepal and Sri Lanka in 2014 and 2015 respectively. This is significant as high-level ministerial visits often act as a tool to strengthen diplomatic ties and expedite agreements. Bilateral interactions between high level officials allow both countries to address issues faster compared to the standard bureaucratic processes, and can help pave the way for agreements between countries on a range of matters. For example, during Prime Minister Modi’s visit to Nepal in 2014, eight Memorandums of Understanding (MoUs) were signed between both sides across a diverse set of areas ranging from travel and connectivity to power and healthcare. Furthermore, a Line of Credit (LoC) worth US$ 1Billion was extended to the Government of Nepal and One Dhurv Advanced Light Helicopter (ALH) Mark III was handed over to the Nepal Army.

While India’s neighbourhood policy focuses on enhancing cooperation across various domains, this article focuses on India’s defence diplomacy with its neighbours. In particular, it maps the bilateral visits undertaken by Indian Defence Ministers between 2014 and 2024 to India’s immediate neighbourhood—Pakistan, Afghanistan, China, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh, Myanmar, Sri Lanka, and the Maldives—based on open-source data collated from India’s Press Information Bureau (PIB) and Ministry of Defence (MoD) Annual Reports. This blog uses the term, “bilateral visits” to refer to official visits made by the Defence Minister to a country outside the context of multilateral forums or regional summits; that is, visits undertaken specifically for bilateral engagement rather than as part of broader multilateral gatherings such as the ASEAN Defence Minsters Meeting or the Shanghai Corporation Organisation Defence Ministers Meet.

Additionally, while high-level bilateral visits are an important aspect of defence diplomacy, they do not capture all aspects of India’s defence ties with its neighbours. Therefore, the blog does not aim to use the number of bilateral visits as a proxy to capture the overall health of India’s defence ties with its neighbours. Instead, the article limits its scope to a preliminary survey to understand the balance between regional and global visits by Indian Defence Ministers. It discusses trends in bilateral visits by the Defence Ministers, explores the potential motivations behind these visits, and examines their broader implications for India’s regional interests.

Overseas visits by India’s Defence Ministers

Between 2014 and 2024, India’s defence ministers have undertaken 39 visits across 23 countries. Notably, the United States has been the most frequent destination, with six visits, followed by four to Russia and Japan and three each to France, and Singapore.

Map 1: Countries visited by Indian Defence Ministers Since 2014

Source: Made by author using MapChart.net using data collected from PIB and MoD annual reports

Out of the 39 [Defence Minister] visits that have taken place abroad since 2014, India’s neighbourhood has received only three of them

Out of the 39 visits that have taken place abroad since 2014, India’s neighbourhood has received only three of them. In April 2016, then Defence Minister Manohar Parrikar paid a two day visit to China followed by a visit to Bangladesh in November later that year. In May 2023, Rajnath Singh undertook a three-day visit to the Maldives. A fourth visit to Sri Lanka was scheduled to take place in November 2023. However, it was cancelled, reportedly due to the domestic political situation in Sri Lanka at that time and Indian concerns over a Chinese ‘research vessel’ being granted permission to dock in Sri Lanka

These high-level bilateral defence engagements and visits have typically focused on enhancing defence cooperation by promoting joint military exercises, capacity-building initiatives and training and exchange programmes.

Table 1: Defence Ministerial Visits to India’s Neighbourhood since 2014.

Defence Minister Date Country Duration (days)
Manohar Parrikar 18/04/2016 China 2 days
Manohar Parrikar 30/11/2016 Bangladesh 2 days
Rajnath Singh 01/05/2023 Maldives 3 days
Source: author’s compilation using data from PIB and MoD annual reports

Parrikar’s 2016 visit to Bangladesh – the first by an Indian defence minister since diplomatic ties were established in 1971 – came amid China’s increasing defence cooperation with Dhaka. Earlier that month, Bangladesh had accepted the delivery of two refurbished Chinese Type 035G Ming-class diesel-electric submarines. Furthermore, in October 2016, Chinese President Xi Jinping had visited Dhaka, during which Bangladesh-China relations were elevated to a “strategic cooperative partnership.” Parrikar’s timely visit signalled India’s intent to recalibrate its defence engagement with Bangladesh.

New Delhi’s decision to send Parrikar to Bangladesh in 2016 also signalled a shift in India’s regional defence strategy. Unlike the earlier engagements with a traditional focus on military training, joint exercises, and exchanges, this visit was notable for its emphasis on the defence industry and exports.

New Delhi’s decision to send Parrikar to Bangladesh in 2016 also signalled a shift in India’s regional defence strategy. Unlike the earlier engagements with a traditional focus on military training, joint exercises, and exchanges, this visit was notable for its emphasis on the defence industry and exports. A key outcome of the visit was the decision to work towards institutionalising defence engagement between both countries and enhancing collaboration in the defence industry.

The momentum carried into 2017, when Bangladesh Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina visited India. During this visit, New Delhi extended its first-ever defence Line of Credit (LoC) to Bangladesh, valued at $500 million, for the procurement of defence equipment from India. Additionally, both countries signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) on the framework for defence cooperation. The LoC and a new MoU reflected India’s evolving approach to regional defence diplomacy – anchored in industrial partnerships, strategic financing, and long-term collaboration.

Similarly, Rajnath Singh’s visit to the Maldives in May 2023 was pivotal in expanding the scope of India’s military and strategic engagement with Malé. During the visit, Rajnath Singh alongside his Maldivian counterpart, Mariya Didi, laid the foundation stone for the construction of  ‘Ekatha Harbour.’ The development of this naval facility at Sifavaru in Uthuru Thila Falhu (UTF) atoll is one of the biggest grant-in-aid projects of India. It is meant to be a repair facility for the Maldivian National Defence Force (MNDF) Coast Guard vessels. As per the agreement, the harbour would be developed over a period of 15 years during which India will provide professional, technical and logistical support to manage the harbour. Apart from this, Rajnath Singh also handed over a Landing Craft to the MNDF and both sides agreed to ramp up defence trade, people-to-people contacts and exchanges between the armed forces of both countries.

Limited visits to the neighbourhood

While India’s Defence Ministers have made relatively few visits to the neighbourhood, a closer look reveals two important paradoxes at play.

First, India’s neighbourhood is a politically sensitive region. As the largest country in the region in terms of area, population, economy, and military strength, India often struggles to shed the perception of being a ‘big brother.’ This dynamic has often contributed to growing anti-India sentiments in the region, as seen in Bangladesh (2024) and the Maldives (2023). In such contexts, high-level bilateral visits can attract intense public scrutiny and be politicised by local media and political actors. For instance, Rajnath Singh’s visit to the Maldives in 2023 was met with strong criticism from the opposition despite the emphasis on grant projects and people to people cooperation, which mounted an “India Out” campaign. They portrayed the development of the Ekatha Harbour – supported by India – as a veiled attempt to expand Indian military presence on the island, framing it as a threat to Maldivian sovereignty. The situation escalated when President Mohamed Muizzu formally requested the withdrawal of all Indian military personnel from the Maldives on 18 November 2023. In light of such sensitivities, India may have opted to limit Defence Minister-level visits to avoid fuelling controversy or provoking domestic backlash in host countries.

The infrequency of such visits does not imply an absence of defence engagement. In fact, India has maintained robust engagement [with its neighbourhood] through its military leadership.

However, the infrequency of such visits does not imply an absence of defence engagement. In fact, India has maintained robust engagement through its military leadership. Service chiefs often visit the region, suggesting a preference for low-profile, steady military-to-military ties rather than headline-grabbing ministerial diplomacy. In 2024 itself, the Chief of the Naval Staff (CNS) undertook a four day visit to Bangladesh and the Chief of the Army Staff (COAS) undertook a five day visit to Nepal, and in May 2023 the Chief of Air Staff (CAS) undertook a four day visit to Sri Lanka. These visits broadly focused on enhancing military to military ties and featured addresses by the Indian service Chief’s at the host nations military institutions including the Staff College and the National Defence College. This approach of managing relations through frequent visits by the service Chiefs allows India to sustain defence cooperation while sidestepping political sensitivities.

Second, in some cases, the limited number of visits could also reflect the stability and maturity of India’s existing defence relationships in the region. Historically, India has shared strong defence ties with many of its neighbours. For instance, the India-Bhutan Friendship Treaty of 2007 allows Bhutan to import arms, ammunition, and other defence equipment through India. Additionally, the Indian Military Training Team (IMTRAT), operational in Bhutan since 1961-62, trains personnel of the Royal Bhutan Army (RBA) and the Royal Bodyguard of Bhutan (RBG).

Such arrangements extend beyond Bhutan. India and Nepal maintain a longstanding tradition of awarding honorary General ranks to each other’s Army Chiefs. Similarly, India and Sri Lanka conduct annual joint military exercises under the “Mitra Shakti” framework, established in 2004. These examples highlight a broader trend – defence cooperation between India and its neighbours has remained consistent – largely through training programs, joint exercises, and officer exchanges. These ties are sustained through institutional links, largely managed at the service chiefs’ level. Historically, this has worked well and made frequent political engagement at the ministerial level less necessary.

India’s growing emphasis globally on defence manufacturing and exports, particularly since 2014, may push towards a more visible, political-level engagement with the neighbourhood.

Yet this model of quiet diplomacy may no longer be sufficient. India’s growing emphasis globally on defence manufacturing and exports, particularly since 2014, may push towards a more visible, political-level engagement with the neighbourhood. A key trend to watch will be whether India’s expanding defence production translates into more frequent ministerial visits and deeper bilateral outreach in the region. At the same time, the region’s sensitivities raise valid concerns: high-profile visits can be politically contentious, as seen in the case of the Maldives. Thus, two competing hypotheses emerge. One is that greater ministerial outreach will become necessary to support India’s evolving defence ambitions. The other is that such visits may remain rare, or even decline further due to increasing political risks and sensitivities. Both possibilities merit attention. How New Delhi manages to balance these imperatives amidst the changing regional landscape remains to be seen.

The post Defence Diplomacy in India’s Neighbourhood: Mapping Ministerial Visits Since 2014 first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/defence-diplomacy-in-indias-neighbourhood-mapping-ministerial-visits-since-2014/feed/ 0 903480
Karnataka can be a Leader for Primary Care and Elementary Schooling http://stg.csep.org/blog/karnataka-can-be-a-leader-in-the-making-for-primary-care-and-elementary-schooling/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=karnataka-can-be-a-leader-in-the-making-for-primary-care-and-elementary-schooling http://stg.csep.org/blog/karnataka-can-be-a-leader-in-the-making-for-primary-care-and-elementary-schooling/#respond Tue, 03 Jun 2025 09:32:18 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903452 In this blog, Priyadarshini Singh argues that the slew of initiatives on health and education in Karnataka over the last several months are limited in significantly improving the uptake of government's primary healthcare and elementary schooling. She makes policy recommendations to enable the emergence of new initiatives.

The post Karnataka can be a Leader for Primary Care and Elementary Schooling first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India’s rich states should lead the way in new policy ideas for social welfare. Karnataka is among the prime candidates. Blessed with a high per capita income, a health and education system better than the national average, an active civil society and a skilled workforce, the state ought to have high quality schools and primary health care centers which are used by all sections of society. Its wealth and intellectual prowess must be reflected in its policy ideas to strengthen elementary schooling and primary healthcare- two sectors without which the health and education systems become dysfunctional. Karnataka has recently witnessed a slew of policy actions. Increase in incentives for ASHA workers, enrolment drives for primary schools, push to fill critical health vacancies and steps to bring transparency in health staff transfers.

Are these enough for Karnataka to achieve high uptake of elementary schools and primary health care across all social and economic groups? Karnataka has a long distance away from this goal. Uptake of Urban Primary Health Care (UPHC) facilities in Karnataka is at a poor 7% (NFHS 5) and enrolment in class I in urban private schools a high 55% in 2021-22 for which data is publicly available as per the old school structure (UDISE). The initiatives seem few and far between in a context of low policy attention to these areas over the last decade 2014-2024.

Karnataka’s budget allocation for health and education – a crude indicator of the policy attention given to a particular sector – is low compared to other states. In 2025-26, the Health budget for the state was 4.9% while average across all Indian states was 6.2%. And education budget was at 10.8% which is lower than the average 15% across states (PRS budget analysis Karnataka 2025). Another way to understand state level policy focus is to look at state-level initiatives.   In primary care and elementary education for urban areas in the last decade (2014-2024) very few initiatives focus on strengthening UPHCs and urban elementary schools. Flagship programs such as the Karnataka Public School Program, Namma Clinics, Ayushmati Clinics focus on select facilities only. Most other initiatives focus on a small aspect of the school and primary care system- for example, classroom construction (Viveka Scheme), or medical helpline (Alpamitra Helpline). They improve schools and UPHCs but systemic issues remain neglected. This in turn keeps uptake of these facilities low even among the poor.

The impact on Karnataka’s health and education, particularly those at the level of primary care and elementary education are clearly visible. For many indicators, Karnataka’s performance is either marginally above national average or actually below it. For example, according to NFHS-5, immunization based on vaccination card in Karnataka is 88%, in India this is 89%.  OOPS for a delivery at a public facility in Karnataka is 4954 INR but the Indian average is 2916 INR. In elementary education, according to NAS 2021, the average Math competency in class VIII in Karnataka is 50% which is marginally higher than the Indian average of 46%.

What can be done? Karnataka needs higher budget allocation and more state-level initiatives which are designed and funded by the state and therefore under its own control and reflect Karnataka’s health and education priorities. It’s important that Karnataka’s own civil society groups, communities and political leaders own these initiatives within their own spheres of politics, community mobilization, and civic actions.

I propose four policy recommendations. Presently, health and education initiatives become part of election campaign narratives but seldom are political leaders engaged in ensuring outcomes. For enabling this, we need to create knowledge pathways. Health and education outcome data needs to be segregated assembly constituency wise and made publicly available. This data is needed for citizens and party workers to channel everyday challenges facing schools and UPHCs into an actionable political agenda. Second, we need to break the idea that government schools and UPHCs are the option of the last resort for the poorest of the poor. Unless we, as a society, need government provided health and education, there will always be dual standards: good schools for the Haves and rudimentary government schools for the Have-nots. To attract the middle classes, government schools need to reach the standards of the average private school. No one wants a costly school education. For this, a ‘Diversity Index’ needs to be created. Each assembly constituency must be ranked on health and education outcomes but also on the extent to which elementary schools/UPHCs are used by the non-poor people as well. This will provide a knowledge output for mobilisation for middle class constituents and create the knowledge to hold the bureaucracy accountable for ensuring standardisation between private and government schools, particularly in urban areas where the competition from low-cost private schools is very high. Third, government provided health, and education is not generosity towards the poor. It’s a constitutional commitment and fundamental for economic growth. Not just productivity, but bare bone growth. For a growing economy, you need consumption, for consumption people need money, and the less they spend on costly health and education, the more disposable income they have. This case needs to be made in raw numeric terms for Karnataka. How much can a household save when they use good government schools and UPHCs? And what does this mean for the economy? A government appointed commission which is answerable to the chief minister having representation from globally renowned economists and health and education experts needs to produce a report on contribution of government provided health and education to the economy.

Will it lead to an immediate increase in budget allocations and more state level initiatives on strengthening all schools and UPHCs emerge? No. But these are the essential first steps in pushing Karnataka to claim its rightful position as a leader in providing a visionary and socially irreplaceable health and education system. It needs to build on its long history of pathbreaking programs in Health (Yeshaswaini, Primary Health Care task force) and Education (Nalli Kalli).

The post Karnataka can be a Leader for Primary Care and Elementary Schooling first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/karnataka-can-be-a-leader-in-the-making-for-primary-care-and-elementary-schooling/feed/ 0 903452
Explainer | India at Work http://stg.csep.org/blog/explainer-india-at-work/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=explainer-india-at-work http://stg.csep.org/blog/explainer-india-at-work/#respond Tue, 03 Jun 2025 07:49:40 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903444 In this blog, Laveesh Bhandari explains the burning questions from his and Amaresh Dubey's discussion paper, India at Work: Employment Trends in the 21st Century

The post Explainer | India at Work first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
How does the government measure employment in India?

The National Sample Survey Organisation conducts large sample surveys across the country, querying households on the principal activity of each household member.  Individuals employed for the majority of the last 365 days are considered to be principally employed, and information is collected on what activity they undertake as well as their earnings.   In addition, data is also collected for those activities where a person may be employed for a minimum of 30 days, and this is termed as subsidiary employment.  It so happens that a large part of the subsidiary employment is work within the household enterprise including unpaid work.

What is the right way to measure employment in India?

Amaresh Dubey and I have argued repeatedly that the government should only consider principal employment as the core measure of employment in India.  And increasingly, other researchers are also coming to the same conclusion.  This is because subsidiary status employment is at best, additional work, and someone who does not have a principal status job for the last year but is employed in a minor subsidiary activity should not be considered to be employed.  The objective of economic policy is to ensure good quality, wholesome jobs, not those that are add-ons and pay little and therefore principal employment is the right metric.

Figure 1: Employment Growth between 1983 and 2023–2024

Source: NSS data are various rounds of EUS and PLFS from NSSO, GoI.

Is employment increasing in India? Since when?

Principal employment has been growing in India since the reforms period.  There has been no period since the early 1990s when jobs have not increased.  Moreover, principal employment has grown the most during the early 2000s and now during the period 2017-18 to 2023-24.  During these two periods, employment growth has been higher than population growth.  The period 2017-18 to 2023-24 has especially seen the highest growth in reported employment in the last few decades.

Figure 2: Annualised Growth of Population and Employment

Source: EUS and PLFS, NSSO, GoI, various rounds.

Are wages and salaries also growing?

Wages and salaries have also been growing; however, the growth has only been marginally higher than inflation.  Therefore, though employment has increased, the employed person’s ability to spend has not increased much.  There could be many reasons for this.  One factor may be related to productivity. Wages typically tend to grow most when productivity grows; therefore, if productivity growth is limited, wage growth is also curtailed. Another could be simply related to supply and demand dynamics, when the supply of workers is large, wages tend not to grow as much.  However, this is a short-term phenomenon; wages rise much faster than inflation in the long run when productivity increases are large.

What kinds of employment are growing the most?

The data are very clear: in the period 2017-18 to 2023-24, there has been consistent job growth across almost all major demographic and occupational segments.  However, there are some components where growth is much higher.  There is a very strong link between educational attainment and employment growth, in that the higher the educational level, the higher the employment growth.  Therefore, it was the lowest for the illiterates and highest for those with a graduate or higher degree.  Employment growth has also been very high for women and in urban areas.   All major age segments studied have seen a rise in employment, apart from children under 14 years, where it has been falling considerably.  Agriculture employment grew at 2.6 per cent annually, manufacturing at 2.8 per cent, services at 4.4 and construction at 5 per cent annually during this period.  However, within the agriculture sector, the bulk of the growth has been emanating from the non-cropping sector, such as livestock rearing.  Employment growth during this period has been in line with what one would expect in a modernising economy, where those with better education and skills find greater employment avenues.

Figure 3:  Annualised % of Employment Growth by Education Attainment Between 2017–2018 and 20232024

Source: PLFS, NSSO, GoI, various rounds.

Why is employment growth so high and deep in the period 2017-18 to 2023-24?

While high growth has been sustained for some time now, the greater growth in employment in recent years can be explained by greater government action.  Recent years have seen the institution of very large welfare schemes, plugging of leakages in those that existed before, and also programs aimed at supporting very small entrepreneurs.  On the welfare side, programs such as Jal Jeevan Mission and Ujjwal now cover the bulk of households in the country, and with access to tap water in the home and energy for cooking, and also electricity in every village, a significant part of the time of women has presumably been released from household work.  The spread of the PM Mudra scheme that disbursed upwards of Rs 5 lakh crore in 2023-24, and the loan disbursements to women’s SHGs were about 2.1 lakh crore.  In addition, the rise of Direct Cash Transfers in recent years would also have given a kickstart to local economies.  Taken together, self-employed in what is called own account work, those employing and also those employed would increase, as is seen.

Figure 4:  Growth of PMMY Loans

Source: Mudra (2024).

Will this employment growth continue?

Overall, employment has been growing for some time now, and there is a well-known and direct link between economic growth and employment opportunities.  Therefore, as long as we can sustain economic growth, some employment growth is expected to continue.   However, this is not a perfectly proportional relationship, and many other factors impact the extent of employment growth.  These include aspects such as the sectoral distribution of growth.   For instance, agriculture and related sectors, such as livestock and horticulture, create more employment, and so do construction and some types of services.  Organised sector growth, though desirable from many perspectives, tends to create fewer jobs than the unorganised sector.  Labour-intensive manufacturing creates such as garments, gems, and jewellery etc., creates far more jobs than other types of manufacturing.   Moreover, credit-driven employment growth can continue only for so long and will need both higher and more equitable economic growth for it to be sustained.

If employment growth for educated is so high, why are there so many educated unemployed?

Since the early 2000s, seats for higher education have grown substantially in India, leading to a very large number of those who are better educated.  Therefore, even if a job is available, many educated youth are not willing to work for a low wage.  In India, especially, those working in entry-level jobs in the government tend to get substantially greater compensation than those in the private sector.  This sets the expectations high for many youth who prefer not to take up a job with a lower wage.   Therefore, high employment growth and high unemployment can coexist if wages are not commensurate with expectations.

The post Explainer | India at Work first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/explainer-india-at-work/feed/ 0 903444
When the Sun Meets the Meter: Striking the Rooftop Balance http://stg.csep.org/blog/when-the-sun-meets-the-meter-striking-the-rooftop-balance/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=when-the-sun-meets-the-meter-striking-the-rooftop-balance http://stg.csep.org/blog/when-the-sun-meets-the-meter-striking-the-rooftop-balance/#respond Mon, 02 Jun 2025 08:31:29 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903414 Leveraging CSEP’s RTS Model and real-world cost, tariff, and subsidy data, the blog argues that smart meter-side tweaks, not megawatt-scale subsidies, will determine whether India’s 40 GW RTS target soars or stalls.

The post When the Sun Meets the Meter: Striking the Rooftop Balance first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Summary:

Gujarat’s rooftop-solar (RTS) boom exposes a policy tightrope: net metering delights households with four-year paybacks but slashes Discom revenue, gross metering safeguards utility coffers yet curbs adoption, while net billing—tuned to the right feed-in tariff—hits the sweet spot. Leveraging CSEP’s RTS Model and real-world cost, tariff, and subsidy data, the blog argues that smart meter-side tweaks, not megawatt-scale subsidies, will determine whether India’s 40 GW RTS target soars or stalls.

The Backdrop

Rooftop solar (RTS) offers distribution companies (Discoms) a win-win—easing local grid stress, postponing costly upgrades, and helping India stride toward its 500 GW renewables goal. With the launch of the PM Surya Ghar: Muft Bijli Yojana (henceforth PM Yojana), the government is redoubling efforts to spur household-level installations, with special emphasis on low- and middle-income families (PIB, 2024).

The scheme provides capital subsidies of up to Rs 78,000 (MNRE, 2024). Capital support helps, but the real determinant of viability is how exported solar power is metered and compensated. Net metering, net billing, and gross metering can swing a household’s payback period by years and can significantly impact distribution companies (Discoms) finances.

Gujarat, India’s RTS frontrunner with 3.3 lakh RTS installations (~1.23 GW) (TOI, 2025), shows what’s at stake. Using the CSEP RTS Model (Shanbog, Rao, & Tongia, 2025) we test three typical households under all three metering regimes, estimating:

  • Payback periods for consumers
  • Net-present-value (NPV) impact on Discom income

Here, Discom income captures the energy-charge impact under each metering regime. Fixed charges are excluded, since RTS customers continue to pay them.

Metering Made Easy: How Different Policies Credit Solar Exports

How is surplus RTS power credited? Whether a noon-time unit exported offsets a night-time withdrawal, is bought by the Discom at a discount, or is booked separately decides both household payback and utility revenue.

Before we turn to the Gujarat simulation, one question matters most: how is surplus RTS power credited? Whether a noon-time unit exported offsets a night-time withdrawal, is bought by the Discom at a discount, or is booked separately decides both household payback and utility revenue. India uses three templates—net metering, net billing and gross metering. Knowing how each works is crucial for expanding RTS while keeping Discom finances intact.

  1. Net Metering – Solar first meets the home’s load; any excess is credited 1-for-1 against later imports (typically at evening/night). Bills reflect only the net kWh over the month, with any surplus carried forward or cashed out at a preset feed-in-tariff (FiT) rate. This delivers the best payback for consumers, but—because it values daytime exports the same as costly evening imports—it can erode Discom revenue.
  2. Net Billing – Self-consumption still comes first, but all exports are metered separately and bought by the Discom at a fixed FiT that is lower than the retail rate. Consumers lose some savings compared to net-metering, yet Discoms recover more of their supply costs, making the arrangement fiscally fairer.
  3. Gross Metering – Every unit generated is sent to (and paid for by) the grid at a regulated FiT; the household buys all its power at normal tariffs. This clean separation shields Discom finances, but offers the weakest economics for consumers unless the feed-in tariff is set attractively high.

Three Households × Three Metering Rules

We modelled Gujarat’s RTS economics for three typical homes and three metering options.

Table 1: Profile of three types of households engaged in the study

Home Profile Rooftop Solar System Size (kWp) Annual electricity consumption (kWh)
Small 1 1,500
Mid-size 3 3,900
Large 5 6,000

Notes: Author’s RTS system design, calibrated to annual usage, achieves the fastest payback under net-metering

The model captures Gujarat-specific RTS realities – regulatory tariffs (GERC, 2024) plus market factors such as capital costs and loan terms. With the FY25 net-metering FiT fixed at Rs 2.25/kWh, we stress-test viability under net-billing and gross-metering across four export rates—Rs 2.25, 2.75, 3.25, and 3.75/kWh—to reveal how higher compensation can ensure better returns when the base FiT falls short.

Building on these tariff scenarios, the cost stack assumes capital outlays of Rs 65,000, Rs 1,87,500, and Rs 3,00,000 for the three system sizes, each with a 25-year life, standard module degradation, and an inverter swap in year 15. Central Financial Assistance under the PM Yojana is applied by capacity (Table 2), while annual household demand is set to rise 5–6 percent—faster for smaller users—mirroring real-world growth; all remaining parameters are detailed in Table 3.

Table 2: Central Financial Assistance under PM Yojana for the three rooftop solar system sizes

System Size (kWp) Central Financial Assistance (Rs) Total System Cost* (Rs) Central Financial Assistance (% of System Cost)
1 30,000 65,000 46%
3 78,000 1,87,500 42%
5 78,000 3,00,000 26%

Source: (MNRE, 2024)

Notes: *Total system-cost quotes from multiple Ahmedabad, Gujarat based integrators, averaged and rounded up.

Table 3: Values of other parameters used in the model

Sl. No. Technical Parameter Attribute Value
1 Daily Rooftop Solar Output (kWh/kWp)^ 3.75
2 Loan Tenure (years)# 10
3 Interest Rate (%)# 7% for 1kW and 3kW;

10% for 5kW

4 Margin Money# 10% of total system cost (1 & 3 kWp)

20% of total system cost (5 kWp)

5 Solar Module Degradation† 2% in the first year and 0.55% every year thereafter till 25 years
6 Discount Rate 10%
7 Inflation Rate 6%
8 O&M Cost 2.5% of total system cost
9 Inverter Replacement Cost‡ 1 kW – Rs 15,000

3 kW – Rs 17,900

5 kW – Rs 51,000

Notes: ^ Based on interactions with system integrators assuming a 3–4 kWh/kWp yield range;, results pertain solely to 3.75 kWh/kWp; #Loan terms from PM Yojana national portal; †Solar module degradation of 545 Wp Mono PERC module (Manufacturer: Waaree Energies Ltd. ) is considered; ‡ Price includes GST and is based on a Growatt make inverter, a comparable model is assumed for real-world installations.

Payback Clock: When do Solar Modules Pay for Themselves?

Net metering wins hands-down: 4 – 5 years across the RTS sizes because midday exports offset evening imports at the full retail rate. Every surplus unit is credited at the household’s own (often high-slab) tariff, maximising bill savings. The typical internal rate of return (IRR) for the systems is in the range of 21-28%.

Net billing stretches payback to 6 – 9 years (9-17% IRR) for different FiT rates simulated across RTS sizes; exports earn only the lower FiT instead of the retail rate, and households still pay the full fixed charges on their remaining grid purchases – unless they boost daytime self-consumption (we assume 45 % alignment) or FiTs rise, the gap stays wide.

Gross metering is the least attractive option for consumers: unless the FiT exceeds much beyond ₹ 3.75/kWh, payback stretches beyond 20 years. The reason is simple—every solar unit is sold to the grid at the FiT, while the household must repurchase all its electricity at the retail tariff much higher than FiT.

Table 4: Consumer payback and Internal Rate of Return for different metering policies for different FiT rates across different RTS sizes

Metering Policy Payback Period Internal Rate of Return (%)
Net Metering 4-5 years 21-28%
Net Billing 6-9 years 9-17%
Gross Metering >20 years <5%

Source: Author-calculated values based on the three metering methods and model parameters.

Utility Ledger: What Happens to Discom Revenue?

Net metering credits daytime exports at the customer’s top-tier tariff, erasing Discoms’ highest-margin sales. Bigger RTS systems magnify the hit—high-consumption households offset more of their peak-priced evening demand with cheaper mid-day solar hour exports, steadily deepening the revenue shortfall. As Figure 1 shows, across all system sizes, net-metering leaves the Discom worse off than either net-billing or gross-metering. The revenue hit grows sharply as rooftop capacity—and the customer’s annual consumption—increase.

Net billing Net billing strikes a middle path: prosumers self-consume and sell only their surplus at a fixed FiT that sits below the retail tariff, so there’s no one-for-one offset of their imports. This lets Discoms keep their full energy-charge billing, earn a positive margin even at modest FiTs, and puts far less strain on cross-subsidy and tariff structures than net metering.

Gross metering shields the discom’s balance sheet: every kilowatt-hour generated by the rooftop system is purchased at a fixed (and usually lower) feed-in tariff, while the customer still buys all of their electricity at the full retail tariff. This preserves the discom’s sales revenue and keeps its tariff structure intact.

Figure 1: Discom Income Net Present Value for the different metering policies for different RTS sizes and Feed-in Tariff rates

Source: Author-calculated values based on the three metering methods and model parameters.

Figure 2 compares Discom revenue for a 5 kWp rooftop system under the three metering regimes across a range of feed-in tariffs (FiTs). Two patterns stand out:

  1. Gross metering consistently delivers the highest revenue—outperforming net metering and net billing at every FiT level.
  2. Lower FiTs boost Discom income under both gross metering and net billing, reinforcing the inverse relationship between FiT level and utility revenue in these two models.

Figure 2: Discom Income Net Present Value with 45% solar aligned consumption for three metering policies for a 5 kWp RTS system

Source: Author-calculated values based on the three metering methods and model parameters.

Policy Take-aways

Getting Metering Right Is the Linchpin

Rooftop solar will scale only if both sides of the meter win.

  • Consumers move fastest when paybacks are short.
  • Discoms invest only when revenues remain whole.

Table 5: Metering Policy Showdown: Consumer Payback vs. Discom Income Impact

Metering Policy Consumer Payback Discom Income Impact
Net metering ★ Fastest (4-5 yrs) ▼ Largest hit
Net billing ● Moderate (6-9 yrs) ▲ Near-neutral / positive
Gross metering ▼ Slowest (>20 yrs unless high FiT) ★ Strongest

Source: Author’s analysis

Our Gujarat simulations show that no single metering scheme—net metering, net billing or gross metering—delivers both outcomes perfectly. The policy task, therefore, isn’t picking a winner. It’s mixing and matching—tailoring system-size limits and time-of-day FiTs, so that households still see an attractive return and Discom balance-sheets stay healthy. Craft that balance, and rooftop solar can evolve from a growing success to a cornerstone of India’s 500 GW renewable-energy journey.

The post When the Sun Meets the Meter: Striking the Rooftop Balance first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/when-the-sun-meets-the-meter-striking-the-rooftop-balance/feed/ 0 903414
Affordability and Health Insurance in India http://stg.csep.org/blog/affordability-and-health-insurance-in-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=affordability-and-health-insurance-in-india http://stg.csep.org/blog/affordability-and-health-insurance-in-india/#respond Wed, 21 May 2025 17:02:41 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903299 Alok Kumar Singh offers policy recommendations to ensure healthcare services for middle-income households in this blog.

The post Affordability and Health Insurance in India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The government of India has broadly pursued four strategies to improve access to healthcare services for the its entire population: first, by strengthening the government healthcare system through financing and organisational reform; second, by expanding mandated health insurance coverage for formal sector employees; third, through publicly funded health insurance for the bottom 40% of the population; and fourth, by expanding coverage through voluntary health insurance, primarily for the affluent segment of the population (Mahal, Tiwari, Reddy, & Kane, 2024). However, a significant proportion of the population (mainly in the third and fourth quintiles) lacks health insurance because they neither have jobs in the formal sector nor qualify for the targeted tax-funded public health insurance schemes. Furthermore, the premiums for private voluntary health insurance are high and may not be affordable for many in the third and fourth quintiles (Paul & Sarkar, 2023). 

Since UHC requires that everyone, everywhere should have access to quality and affordable healthcare – which ultimately ensures healthy lives (WHO, 2010) it is crucial for the government to ensure access to essential healthcare services for those without formal health insurance. 

Since UHC requires that everyone, everywhere should have access to quality and affordable healthcare – which ultimately ensures healthy lives (WHO, 2010) it is crucial for the government to ensure access to essential healthcare services for those without formal health insurance. 

Mahal et al. (2024) estimated that 125 million households are covered under Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (PMJAY), 45 million households are covered by states (extending to Above Poverty Line [APL] families), 34 million households are covered under social insurance schemes (Central Government Health Scheme [CGHS], Employees’ State Insurance Scheme [ESIS], Ex-Servicemen Contributory Health Scheme [ECHS])1 and 57 million households are covered under private insurance (both individual and group). Considering a total of 325 million households in India, around 68–80 million households will remain uncovered, given that there will be some level of overlap between the insurance schemes (Mahal, Tiwari, Reddy, & Kane, 2024). 

The Periodic Labour Force Survey (2022–2023) data indicates that 57.3% of the total workforce aged 15 and above were self-employed, primarily in the informal sector. As noted, informal sector workers are not covered by any existing health insurance schemes. Furthermore, a significant proportion of individuals in the formal sector may not have health insurance (Mahal, Tiwari, Reddy, & Kane, 2024). It has been suggested that this uncovered population (or a portion thereof) has the ATP for healthcare, and thus a contributory health insurance scheme2 may be appropriate for this segment (Kumar & Sarwal, 2021). However, it remains unclear how much they can afford to pay. Additionally, even if they can afford to pay, are they willing to pay the necessary amount? 

Ability to pay (ATP) in healthcare has largely been understood as the relationship between available resources at the household or individual level and the cost of treatment. The WHO assesses affordability by considering the number of days a lowest-paid unskilled government worker must work to cover the cost of treatment (Beal & Foli, 2020). According to Russell (1996), a common method for determining affordability is the ratio approach, where healthcare expenditure is analysed as a percentage of household income or expenditure. Successive HCESs indicate that 4%–6% of total household expenditure is the average expenditure ratio on healthcare, thus considered the affordable ratio. Using the ratio method, a 45-degree line (equality line) plots, for instance, a health expenditure ratio of 6%. Any point above the equality line is deemed affordable, as it is less than 6%. A simple visual representation of the ratio method is explained below: 

Figure 1 illustrates that households whose medical3 expenditure (as a percentage of household expenditure) is either on or above the equality line are spending less than or proportionate to their overall household expenditure or available resources. Those above the equality line can afford the medical expenditure, whereas those below cannot. However, this method does not account for whether those in the affordable region of the graph are incurring opportunity costs by reducing their expenditure on essentials such as food, shelter, and education below their minimum needs. 

Figure 1: Ratio Approach to Ability to Pay (ATP) 

Source: Adapted from Russell (1996). 

The core question in the debate on the ATP has been whether the cost of healthcare for a household should be the sole criterion for ATP or whether other factors influencing households’ healthcare decisions should also be considered. Geographic availability can impact ATP for healthcare services (Levesque, Harris, & Russell, 2013), as do indirect costs such as transportation (Doran & Hornibrook, 2014) and financial stress (Yakob & Ncama, 2016). Several studies highlight competing costs, such as those related to food, clothing, education, and electricity bills (Cunningham, 2011; Perumal‐Pillay & Suleman, 2017). Bead and Foli (2020) note that affordability in healthcare is subjective, transactional, and circumstantial. 

As discussed above, the ratio approach does not consider factors such as disposable income and costs associated with merit goods. Disposable income is the income that households have available to spend or save after deducting taxes and other mandatory expenses, such as pension and provident fund contributions (Hosier, 2004) 

The concept of affordability was redefined by Hancock (1993) in the context of housing prices. He argued that if a household spends a certain percentage of its total budget (or available resources) on housing, it should not reduce expenditure on other merit goods like education and healthcare below the socially desired minimum standards of consumption, usually determined by household survey data. 

Hancock’s concept has been extended to understand affordability in health insurance and healthcare (Glied, 2009; Russell, 1996). Unlike the ratio approach, Hancock suggested incorporating other merit goods into the affordability analysis. Given information on how much healthcare and non-healthcare goods are consumed by households, it is possible to determine who cannot afford healthcare expenditure.  

A household is said to afford healthcare expenditure if it is left with sufficient resources to meet the minimum expenditure for non-medical goods (food, housing, and education). The trade-off can be represented in a 2×2 matrix, as shown in Figure 2 below. 

Figure 2: Categorising Affordability (Based on Hancock, 1993) 

Source: Adapted from Hancock (1993)   

It is evident from the figure 2 that there are four possible combinations of the two categories of goods, namely non-healthcare and healthcare, that can be consumed by the household. 

  1. Region A: Minimal consumption. Households in this category do not meet the minimum standards of consumption for either type of goods.
    (P*H<P*H’ and P*Y<P*Y’)    
  2. Region B: Households in this category achieve minimum standards of consumption for both medical and non-medical goods
    (Total Household Expenditure – P*H’) > P*Y’ or (Total Household Expenditure – P*Y’) > P*H’ 
  3. Region C: Households in this category achieve minimum standards of consumption for medical goods, but the remaining resources do not enable them to meet minimum standards of consumption for non-medical goods.
    (Total Household Expenditure – P*H) < P*Y’ 
  4. Region D: Households in this category achieve minimum standards of consumption for non- medical goods, but the remaining resources do not enable them to meet minimum standards of consumption for medical care.
    (Total Household Expenditure – P*Y) < P*H’ 

The horizontal and vertical red lines in the figure 2 indicate the minimum expected expenditure on these goods by households. Point E on the figure represents the minimum consumption bundle expected to be consumed by households. This implies that if a household’s income is just sufficient to allow spending H’ on medical goods and Y’ on non-medical goods, the household will be able to reach point E. Extending a line from point E towards Y and H, this straight line represents the minimum budget required for all households to achieve point E (the budget constraint line). Therefore, all households on or above the budget constraint line (including the shaded areas in regions C and D) can achieve point E. This means that households in region A can not achieve minimum expenditure for both medical and non-medical goods. 

Hancock’s affordability concept has been applied using Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) data (2022–2023). An average medical expenditure of 6% of total household expenditure is set as the threshold for underconsumption of healthcare, while 52% of total household expenditure is the threshold for underconsumption of non-medical goods. 

Applying the four scenarios suggested by Hancock, the HCES data reveal that 30% of households in region A can neither afford minimum healthcare expenditure nor minimum expenditure on other merit goods, while 8% of households in the third and fourth quintiles in region B can afford minimum expenditure for both medical and non-medical goods. The remaining 62% of households face a complex decision because they must choose between two merit goods due to budgetary constraints. Overall, it was found that at least 39% of households (comprising Regions B, C, and D) can afford both goods, and a maximum of 66% of households in the third and fourth quintiles can afford the minimum consumption set. 

Table 1: Household Expenditure for Third and Fourth Quintiles 

Quintile  Mean Monthly Expenditure (INR)  Annual Medical Expenditure (INR) 
Household Expenditure   Non-Medical Expenditure  Lower-limit  Upper-limit 
Third  16,960  8,961  4,919  20,866 
Fourth  22,138  11,499  6,468  28,081 
Mean (Third and Fourth quintiles)  19,549  10,241  5,693  24,466 

Source: Author’s analysis using HCES data 2022–2023.   

Further, the affordability calculation (applying threshold criteria of 6% for medical and 52% of non-medical expenditure as percentage of total household expenditure) suggest that 30% of households in the third and fourth quintiles who spend less than 6% of their total household expenditure on healthcare can contribute a maximum of INR 5,693 per year for both inpatient and outpatient services (Table 1). Eight per cent of households with sufficient resources can contribute a maximum of INR 24,466 per year. For the remaining 62% of households, which can just afford to pay 6% of their household expenditure, the contribution ranges from INR 13,344 to 15,132 per year.   

The HCES data for 2022–2023 reveal that less than 10% of the total households in the third and fourth quintiles are able to meet the minimum level of expenditure for both medical and non-medical goods. Most households have to choose one merit good over others.

Way Forward 

The HCES data for 2022–2023 reveal that less than 10% of the total households in the third and fourth quintiles are able to meet the minimum level of expenditure for both medical and non-medical goods. Most households have to choose one merit good over others. It is found that about half of the total households cut back on medical expenditure to achieve more than the minimum level of expenditure for other merit goods such as food, housing, and education. 

The affordability analysis suggests that to provide comprehensive coverage to all households in the third and fourth quintiles (where 30% of households can pay a maximum of INR 5,693 per year), the government will need to contribute at least 50% of the premium amount.

The affordability analysis suggests that to provide comprehensive coverage to all households in the third and fourth quintiles (where 30% of households can pay a maximum of INR 5,693 per year), the government will need to contribute at least 50% of the premium amount. This is because the minimum health insurance premium for comprehensive coverage is INR 20,466 per year1 for a family of four, and such a contribution would encourage households to participate. 

The affordability analysis indicates that households in the third and fourth quintiles can pay an average of INR 5,693 per year for their healthcare needs, covering all outpatient and inpatient services.

This discussion suggests the following key takeaways:   

The affordability analysis indicates that households in the third and fourth quintiles can pay an average of INR 5,693 per year for their healthcare needs, covering all outpatient and inpatient services. Since comprehensive coverage of services under health insurance requires a higher premium, there are two possible pathways to ensure healthcare services for middle-income households: 

  1. Leveraging the ATP of households in the third and fourth quintiles to augment public financing and ultimately strengthen public facilities through policies such as user fees for all services received at public facilities by middle-income households. Currently, services at public facilities are provided at highly subsidised prices for households across all quintiles, regardless of their ATP. 
  2. Introducing a contributory health insurance scheme (with contributions from both the government and households) for middle-income households to provide comprehensive services, especially as private health insurance is both costlier and exclusionary in nature. A lower ATP (adjusted for opportunity cost) for a considerable proportion of households indicates that the government needs to contribute more than 50% of the total premium to encourage greater participation and achieve UHC in the longer term. 

The post Affordability and Health Insurance in India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/affordability-and-health-insurance-in-india/feed/ 0 903299
A Comparative Assessment of Competitiveness: India Trails its Asian Competitors http://stg.csep.org/blog/a-comparative-assessment-of-competitiveness-india-trails-its-asian-competitors/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=a-comparative-assessment-of-competitiveness-india-trails-its-asian-competitors http://stg.csep.org/blog/a-comparative-assessment-of-competitiveness-india-trails-its-asian-competitors/#respond Fri, 16 May 2025 11:00:31 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903228 For India, it is imperative to address core competitiveness issues—not only to face emerging challenges but also to seize potential opportunities, write Prerna Prabhakar, Sanjay Kathuria, and TG Srinivasan in this blog.

The post A Comparative Assessment of Competitiveness: India Trails its Asian Competitors first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The competitiveness question has become central in the current global landscape, marked by growing uncertainty around U.S. tariff policies. For India, it is imperative to address core competitiveness issues—not only to face emerging challenges but also to seize potential opportunities. The first step in this direction is a comprehensive assessment to identify and understand the existing gaps.

Competitive Index

A recent working paper by the Centre for Social and Economic Progress (CSEP) computes a Competitiveness Index (CI) that compares India with its key Asian peers—Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, and Vietnam. The index draws inspiration from Porter’s Diamond Model (PDM) and is structured around six core pillars: Factor Conditions, Demand Conditions, Related and Supporting Industries, Firm Strategy and Structure, Regulatory Quality, and Global Trade Policy. Each of these pillars is composed of relevant sub-components that align with the broader definition of the pillar. In total, the index includes 36 components, most of which are drawn from the World Bank’s Enterprise Survey, with additional data sourced from the ILO, WDI, WITS, and other relevant databases.

The CI analysis finds that, among the countries studied, India and Indonesia are the two least competitive countries.

CI Rankings

The CI analysis finds that, among the countries studied, India and Indonesia are the two least competitive countries. The top three spots are occupied by Malaysia, Vietnam, and Thailand (Figure 1).

Figure 1

Of the six pillars studied, India ranks poorly in two: firm strategy, structure, and rivalry; and global trade policy. India is among the lowest in three other pillars: “factor conditions”, “related and supporting industries” and “regulatory quality.”

  • Of the six pillars studied, India ranks poorly in two: firm strategy, structure, and rivalry; and global trade policy. India is among the lowest in three other pillars: “factor conditions”, “related and supporting industries” and “regulatory quality.”
  • The only pillar where India is not among the lowest rankers among the five countries studied is “demand conditions.”
  • In the factor conditions pillar, India performs poorly overall, with gaps evident in Research & Development (R&D), access to finance, and land.
  • India’s better performance in the demand conditions pillar is largely due to its large domestic market, which is a crucial subcomponent of this pillar.
  • In the related and supporting industries pillar, India’s low rank is attributable to high import tariffs on intermediate goods.
  • India’s low rank in the firm strategy, structure, and rivalry pillar is primarily driven by a high degree of firm concentration in Indian industry.
  • For the regulatory quality pillar, India’s low rank is due to issues with customs and trade regulations, and tax administration.
  • India’s lowest rank in global trade policy is primarily due to its high Most Favoured Nation (MFN) tariffs and its absence from major trade agreements.

Industry Discussion

These gaps, highlighted by the Competitiveness Index, are echoed by industry voices. Indian firms acknowledge their limited investment in R&D and an overreliance on domestic demand. For instance, the apparel sector remains focused on cotton-based garments, even as global demand increasingly shifts toward synthetic apparel. This inward orientation hampers innovation, limits economies of scale, and delays quality upgrades. Additionally, restrictive labour laws create disincentives for firm expansion, encouraging businesses to remain small, contributing to the persistent issue of a ‘missing middle’ in India’s industrial landscape.

Drawing on the findings of the Competitiveness Index and insights from industry consultations, the paper identifies key priority areas within the Porter’s Diamond Model framework that India must focus on to strengthen its export competitiveness (Figure 2).

Figure 2: Key Priorities for India’s Competitiveness Strategy

Sector Specific Priorities

Industry discussions also revealed sector-specific priorities that must be addressed for each sector to reach its full potential.

Apparel: Boost R&D for man-made fibre (MMF) innovation, diversify into Man-made fabrics (MMF) based apparel to meet global demand, liberalise import duties on MMF, and develop integrated local supply chains.

Auto-components: Scale up production, reduce import duties on critical inputs, and use FTAs to resolve international standards-related barriers.

Electronics: Expand beyond smartphone exports by scaling production of other electronic items; liberalise duties on parts and components.

Pharmaceuticals: Increase R&D investment for drug innovation, co-locate labs, companies, and training centres, and use FTAs to harmonise quality standards with trading partners.

To expand the manufacturing sector from 13 per cent to 25 per cent of GDP over 10 years, it needs to grow at 13.6 per cent per year. This growth cannot be achieved by serving only the domestic market, and Indian manufacturers have to rely on exports

Based on the identified priority areas, the paper outlines policy directions under four broad categories: lowering import tariffs, engaging in deeper FTAs, enhancing regulatory quality, and fostering technology adoption. While past policies have attempted to address these challenges, they have not delivered the desired outcomes for the manufacturing sector.

The current global landscape offers India a timely opportunity to correct its competitiveness deficits. More critically, it provides a chance to meaningfully integrate into global value chains—an area where India has historically lagged. To expand the manufacturing sector from 13 per cent to 25 per cent of GDP over 10 years, it needs to grow at 13.6 per cent per year. This growth cannot be achieved by serving only the domestic market, and Indian manufacturers have to rely on exports.

The post A Comparative Assessment of Competitiveness: India Trails its Asian Competitors first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/a-comparative-assessment-of-competitiveness-india-trails-its-asian-competitors/feed/ 0 903228
The Curious Case of VKM Measurement http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-curious-case-of-vkm-measurement/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-curious-case-of-vkm-measurement http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-curious-case-of-vkm-measurement/#respond Tue, 13 May 2025 04:27:38 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903201 In this blog, Shyamasis Das and Rahul Tongia talk about the importance of tracking Vehicle Kilometres in detail.

The post The Curious Case of VKM Measurement first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Why regular travel data are crucial

Road transport in India is one of the key pillars for the country’s economic growth. It accounts for about 87% of passenger traffic and 60% of freight traffic movement in the country. It also accounts for 12% of India’s energy-related carbon dioxide emissions and is a major source of criteria air pollutants.[1] The increasing demand for private motorised mobility and the transport of goods are likely to strain the existing road infrastructure, drive up energy consumption, and consequently transport-related emissions in a business-as-usual scenario. With the emergence of new energy vehicles driven by batteries or hydrogen, there is a rising need to invest in a very different format of support infrastructure in the form of charging and hydrogen refilling stations. Motorised road transport in India is growing and evolving and so must transport planning. This warrants meaningful analysis based on credible and granular transport data to produce insights that help in effective policymaking and planning.

Vehicle Kilometres (VKM) forms the empirical basis to carry out a wide gamut of analyses with several applications.

Vehicle Kilometres, an important parameter to track in detail

Obviously, when one talks about data, it essentially means monitoring and studying specific parameters that possibly helps understand the scenario. Distance travelled by vehicles is a critical information that leads to a parameter usually referred to as Vehicle Kilometres (VKM) or Vehicle Kilometres Travelled (VKT). It is the total distance travelled by motor vehicles in a given period. Although its meaning sounds simple, it is a versatile factor. It forms the empirical basis to carry out a wide gamut of analyses with several applications. These include but are not limited to:

  • Profiling vehicle-stock based on the degree of road usage. This helps, for example, identify the set of vehicles in terms of vehicle form factor, use-case or type of registration that currently utilises or requires road infrastructure more than others.
  • Understanding the energy or motor fuel consumption pattern by type of vehicle that can possibly be linked to contribution to emissions.
  • Getting a sense of the economic attractiveness of transitioning to new-age vehicle technologies like electric drivetrain as the cost-effectiveness of adoption depends on VKM travelled.
  • Planning new-age road transport infrastructure like charging stations and associated upstream electricity network and supply.

By studying multi-year VKM statistics, one would be able to decipher the change in pattern across all these issues. While analysing the data, it is paramount to take cognizance of the fact that motorised road transport has significant heterogeneity and so has VKM statistics.

It is paramount to take cognizance of the fact that motorised road transport has significant heterogeneity and so has VKM statistics.

Therefore, it is critical to collect and analyse the VKM-related data with due consideration of the diversity (in terms of vehicle form factor, use-case, registration, etc.) in the vehicle stock. There can be even other factors for divergence in the VKM value like the size of an urban agglomeration or the type of motor fuel used (since there are differences in fuel prices). Are the VKM statistics able to reflect such heterogeneities? This depends on the techniques employed to estimate.

Methods for VKM estimation

No direct measurement of annual VKM travelled has ever been tried; the available information consists of estimates based on various assumptions.

No direct measurement of annual VKM travelled has ever been tried; the available information consists of estimates based on various assumptions. The accuracy of the assumptions and the sampled data influence the reliability of the estimates. Historically, the importance of evaluating VKM travelled has been from the perspective of roadways planning and other non-energy-related areas. Understanding traffic density on key road stretches has been the focus.

There are two main conventional methods used to understand travel-distance data: the vehicle-count method and the fuel-consumption method. Both are indirect ways.[2]

Vehicle count method is the most widely used technique for estimating VKM travelled. This procedure assumes that VKM travelled during a year can be estimated by counting the traffic on a representative section of a roadway, usually between two major intersections, during short periods of time and extrapolating these results to the entire geography, be it state or country. The reliability of this monitoring is based on the equipment used, as well as on the location and the frequency of the counts. Equipment is extremely costly to use on an extensive network of roads. Moreover, the traffic flow differs significantly between urban, peri-urban, and rural roads.

Fuel-consumption method assumes that vehicle kilometres travelled in a year is a function of the total volume of fuel consumed by vehicles during the given year and the average fuel economy of vehicles. The simplicity of the method has some inherent flaws. On one hand, the data for fuel consumption by vehicles is not captured by type of vehicle. The origin of this data is usually the aggregate fuel sales figures reported by the fuel-refilling stations.[3] On the other hand, the average fuel economy values although can be disaggregated by vehicle form factor are usually based on lab tested conditions which differ from on-road vehicle performance.[4]

New-age VKM measurement technique

In addition to the conventional approaches, there is a potential new-age technique thanks to the digital footprint of human activities including travel. The ubiquitous mobile smart phones have turned out to be a novel and useful source of collecting granular travel data. The very feature of mobile smart phones, enabled by GPS[5], to check real-time vehicular road traffic on a map during travel can be utilised to get a sense of the travel pattern over a geography. From the pattern, VKM travelled by an individual all the way up to the population can be derived. However, there can be multiple challenges due to high uncertainty in mobile phones-generated distance travelled data. It is difficult to attribute GPS-based individual travel data to kilometres covered by a vehicle.[6] It is even more challenging to filter the data by vehicle form factor which effectively limits the usefulness of the derived VKM data. There are also concerns that use of real-time digital tracking of individual activity can be considered invasive in nature and hence, any analysis based on such data may face regulatory and public scrutiny.

Need for an out-of-box solution

While there are multiple ways to estimate VKM travelled, more often than not the captured VKM-data suffers from issues like questionable quality, expensive or time-taking process, less data-granularity restricting the scope for meaningful insights, over reliance on assumptions and extrapolations, and limited opportunity for time-series analysis. Also, the data available lack clear reference to the underlying measurement method which raises doubts about the validity of the data.

Considering these shortcomings, there is a need to look for alternative ways that produce more reliable data on VKM travelled in Indian context and are easy and cost-effective to employ. Why not leverage an existing monitoring system in India’s road transport sector?

A regular touchpoint between motor vehicles on road and the state machinery are the vehicle pollution testing centres that are commonly co-located with fuel refilling stations dotting major urban agglomerations across most parts of the country. As mandated by the Central Motor Vehicle Rules (CMVR), 1989, every motor vehicle has to come to an authorised pollution testing centre for periodic testing and obtaining PUC (Pollution Under Check) Certificate which usually has a validity up to 6 months.[7] With the current digital integration of the pollution data collection system with a national database managed by the Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH), it makes vehicle data recording and archiving easier. Apart from capturing pollutants-related parameters, a PUC Certificate has data fields concerning the vehicle such as registration number, date of registration, fuel type, etc.

Clearly the existing system of vehicle pollution testing at the PUC Certificate issuing centres can be piggybacked on to collect other useful vehicle data including VKM travelled.

The existing system of vehicle pollution testing at the PUC Certificate issuing centres can be piggybacked on to collect other useful vehicle data including VKM travelled.

How to record VKM data using the vehicle testing system

Every motor vehicle has an odometer that displays the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its purchase. This value is essentially the VKM travelled by the motor vehicle. The odometer reading (Figure 1) can be easily recorded using visual, photographic, or videographic method.

Further, currently it is mandatory to video record the testing process and upload the footage on the “PARIVAHAN” portal.[8]  This gives the opportunity to record the odometer reading of a vehicle when it comes for testing.[9] Adding this new data field essentially does not require a different step, a new technique or technology or re-training of the personnel at the pollution testing centres. The personnel at the testing centre just have to take the reading and feed to the new data field online that will subsequently get populated on the existing national database of MoRTH.

To formalise the VKM data collection exercise, an amendment of the existing testing norm allowing the recording of the odometer reading would suffice. This needs to be complemented by awareness-building through mass media about the new requirement.

How can the odometer readings be used to measure annual VKM?

The reading taken every time the vehicle goes for testing generates time-series data from which VKM travelled by the vehicle during the time intervals can be derived and in a span of a year i.e., after two consecutive 6-monthly testing, the annual VKM for the vehicle can be calculated. Linking with other information of the vehicle already captured, the VKM data thus collated can be analysed by filtering with different factors like vehicle type, registration, fuel, vehicle age (based on registration date), and geography (depending on the registering state or the location of the testing centres).

To allay any concern of the vehicle owner, the amendment should categorically mention that the collected odometer data will be available on PARIVAHAN portal at an aggregate level and not at an individual vehicle level. Also, the captured reading should not appear on the issued PUC Certificate to prevent individual-level attribution.

Key advantages

This ingenuous way of collating VKM data offers several advantages over the existing conventional methods. The proposed process:

  1. Ensures collection of far better quality of VKM data as it is a direct method and does not involve assumptions or low-confidence extrapolations.
  2. Allows logical segregation (filtering) of the data, thus capturing the heterogeneity of the road transport sector.
  3. Makes available updated data as the database will be a living repository. This helps track changes in mobility pattern.
  4. Provides a wide geographic coverage at state and national levels.
  5. Is simple and cost-effective to execute.
  6. Does not infringe into vehicle-owners’ privacy and data confidentiality.

Is there a possible challenge in the process? The suggested system would be effective as long as the pollution testing centres remain relevant in India. This implies that only a scenario when the vehicle stock (not sales) is dominated by new energy vehicles may potentially make the proposed data collection system obsolete. For India, this possibility is still far-fetched and distant.

Additional details

Fuel-consumption method

This method assumes that vehicle kilometres travelled in a year is a function of the total volume of fuel consumed by vehicles during the given year and the average fuel economy of vehicles. This means:

FC = Total fuel consumption by vehicles in a geography during a year;

FE = Average fuel economy of vehicles.

The advantage of this fuel-consumption based procedure is it neither requires any expensive, complicated instrument for monitoring nor involves a complex analytical method to derive the result. Both the fuel consumption data and the average vehicle fuel economy values at a broad level can be collated with relative ease. However, the simplicity of the method has some inherent flaws.

Vehicle count method

To express the estimation logic mathematically, as per this method total VKM travelled during a year is:

where

Ci,j = traffic volume (count) passing location i during period j;

Li = length of the representative section of the roadway where i is located;

wi = assigned weight (or expansion factor) to equate Li with the total set of roads it represents;

ti,j = assigned weight (or expansion factor) to equate the count during period j with the total annual count at location i.

There is no standardised sampling procedure to apply this technique.

The post The Curious Case of VKM Measurement first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-curious-case-of-vkm-measurement/feed/ 0 903201
Why we Need to Study Drivers of State-Level Initiatives for Health and Education: Unpacking the Case of Karnataka http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-we-need-to-study-drivers-of-state-level-initiatives-for-health-and-education-unpacking-the-case-of-karnataka/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=why-we-need-to-study-drivers-of-state-level-initiatives-for-health-and-education-unpacking-the-case-of-karnataka http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-we-need-to-study-drivers-of-state-level-initiatives-for-health-and-education-unpacking-the-case-of-karnataka/#respond Thu, 08 May 2025 06:57:32 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903191 What is driving the making of state-level initiatives? Why and when does a state make new initiatives for its health and education systems, irrespective of whether the initiatives end up improving the systems or not? Priyadarshini Singh explores these questions in her blog.

The post Why we Need to Study Drivers of State-Level Initiatives for Health and Education: Unpacking the Case of Karnataka first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Who would guess that a state widely recognised for strong social indicators would actually be a lagging one? Karnataka is one such example. Praised in important government studies such as the 15th Finance Commission report, NITI Aayog SDG report, on closer examination, Karnataka lags behind national averages in critical health and education indicators. For example, according to NFHS 5, for immunisation based on vaccination card for babies aged 12-23 months, the national average, is 89% and Karnataka stands at a lower point of 88%. More worryingly, there are chronic intra-state disparities even in the indicators in which it is doing well. For the example, in Karnataka women who were married before 21 is at 21.3% according to NFHS 5. In several districts of North Karnataka it is between 30-40% (HDR, 2022, p.133). The disparities are not just between the rich South Karnataka and the poor North Karnataka but also present within south Karnataka too. For example, immunisation (12 to 23 month olds) which is 88% for Karnataka is only 78% for the affluent Bangalore district. Low budgetary allocation to health and education, program design and inefficiencies in program implementation are frequently examined to understand why outcomes are not being achieved. This line of enquiry tells us the limitations of the existing system in getting the outcomes. We don’t have enough money or we are not spending the money in the right way or that we won’t have the right solutions and so on.

What is driving the making of state-level initiatives? Why and when does a state make new initiatives for its health and education systems, irrespective of whether the initiatives end up improving the systems or not? These questions would not tell us why outcomes are not being met. They will; however, tell us where the solutions are coming from and what kinds of solutions are being proposed. One may ask, why do we need to know what is driving the initiatives, so long as the initiatives themselves are solving the problems? Does it really matter if a solution to a health and education challenge is led by a junior level bureaucrat or an NGO leader or an MLA or a strategy consulting firm. Why is the ‘origin of intent’ for a policy, the raison d’etre, whose interest the policy meets important, if the idea is great? The answer is, in the short run, it should not matter but it does. In the long run, it most definitely does.

One may ask, why do we need to know what is driving the initiatives, so long as the initiatives themselves are solving the problems? Does it really matter if a solution to a health and education challenge is led by a junior level bureaucrat or an NGO leader or an MLA or a strategy consulting firm. Why is the ‘origin of intent’ for a policy, the raison d’etre, whose interest the policy meets important, if the idea is great?

The drivers of policy making impact the outcomes in four ways. First, perhaps the most obvious is that when outcomes are not being met and the new initiatives are not able to solve the problems, we need to know what’s preventing better initiatives from emerging. Second, the drivers of policy reflect the policy solutions proposed. For example, if a focus on governance challenges is driving new initiatives, the solutions may result in lesser community ownership of schools and poor connect between parents and frontline staff. A focus on hiring of staff at UPHCs may prioritise setting up of systems which make it easy to hire over identifying those candidates who are comfortable with working at the primary care level. If policy emerges only when a small group of stakeholders push for it, say only senior bureaucrats at the state level, or top politicians, or just civil society led social movements, without engagement with other groups, both the ideas in the policy and the support it gets in its implementation would miss out critical components. Third, the very process of policy making is not just about proposing a solution to a problem, it is also about building consensus on the ground level challenges which are to be prioritised. Every actor within health and education sector, from the poor parents to the local leaders of teacher’s associations to the state-level education secretary has different perspectives. New initiatives work when there is convergence, in ideal cases, consensus, on the problem priority. If none of these happen, there needs to be at least some kind of bargaining between opposing groups around their disagreements. If the drivers of new initiatives are not inclusive, both the implementation of the solution as well as its value in solving the problem becomes complicated. For example, if an initiative prioritises providing pre-school education while parents want English speaking classes, then the initiative would not enhance the value of government schools to parents. Fourth, policy-making, just like much of social and political life around the world, runs on institutional and long-established pathways. When new health and education challenges emerge, at times they don’t get addressed because the old pathways cannot bring new challenges to light. For example in the Health sector, Maternal and Child health have been a part of policy focus for decades. It is difficult for issues of geriatric care, non-communicable diseases to gain prominence (and funding) for new initiatives. In recent years, insurance has been widely accepted solution to achieve UHC and the cost of strengthening primary health care has received lesser focus.

To improve outcomes, policy discourse must not just focus on budgets and program implementation, but ask deeper questions, why is that big, system focused initiatives in a state like Karnataka are limited and largely driven by external pressures and a limited cohort high state level actors.   

What we see in Karnataka, during the decade of 2014-2024 is that there have been very few initiatives which focus on strengthening elementary education and urban primary health care which are led and/or financed by the state government on its own. The few which are there have emerged due to a policy push from the central government and the restrictions imposed by a local policy context. Due to this, it is less likely for new initiatives to emerge which require significant increase in the state health and education budget or deep structural changes in hiring or accountability framework for frontline bureaucracy to emerge. Initiatives which are populist in nature and which can be used to create visibility for local political leaders are the possible ones. It’s the senior bureaucracy and political leaders who push for new initiatives with other pathways and stakeholders being less prominent, such as internal bureaucratic feedback, social movements, electoral pressures and expert bodies and commissions.

This particular configuration through which new initiatives emerge in Karnataka provides some insight about why it is not a world leader in public primary health and elementary education. Karnataka is not a poor state, or one without local capacities for policy ideation and implementation. It is a state where the drivers of policymaking are such that primary health and elementary education have not been focused by the state political and bureaucratic leaders over the last decade.

To improve outcomes, policy discourse must not only focus on budgets and program implementation, but ask deeper questions, why is that big, system focused initiatives in a state like Karnataka are limited and largely driven by external pressures and a limited cohort of high state level actors.

The post Why we Need to Study Drivers of State-Level Initiatives for Health and Education: Unpacking the Case of Karnataka first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-we-need-to-study-drivers-of-state-level-initiatives-for-health-and-education-unpacking-the-case-of-karnataka/feed/ 0 903191
China’s Disaster Diplomacy in Myanmar http://stg.csep.org/blog/chinas-disaster-diplomacy-in-myanmar/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=chinas-disaster-diplomacy-in-myanmar http://stg.csep.org/blog/chinas-disaster-diplomacy-in-myanmar/#respond Tue, 29 Apr 2025 08:36:05 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903105 This blog by Shruti Jargad examines the relief efforts carried out by China in Myanmar, outlining the activities and institutional channels involved, and the messaging in media.

The post China’s Disaster Diplomacy in Myanmar first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
China’s extensive disaster relief efforts in Myanmar have important implications for India.

Two earthquakes of magnitudes 7.9 and 6.4 struck Myanmar on the afternoon of March 28, causing immense loss of life and property in regions of Sagaing, Mandalay, and Shan state. The effects of the disaster, which has now been labelled ‘the Big Mandalay Earthquake’ caused wreckage in the neighbouring Yunnan province of China and in Thailand.

India swiftly responded with emergency assistance to Myanmar under “Operation Brahma,” highlighting its role as the first responder in the region. Further, unlike in the past, India showed willingness and ability to collaborate with external partners to provide humanitarian assistance in its neighbourhood, in this case, the QUAD and ASEAN. It can be seen from the joint statement issued by the governments of India, US, Australia and Japan, that Humanitarian Aid and Disaster Relief (HADR) is a key component in achieving shared goals of regional stability and security in the Indo-Pacific.

China has also emerged as a major provider of HADR in South Asia in the recent decades, for instance in the aftermath of the 2015 earthquake in Nepal. In Myanmar, China was one of first countries to respond in the search and rescue operations which involved teams from 20 countries. Given the geo-political salience of disaster relief operations in the region, this blog examines the relief efforts carried out by China in Myanmar, outlining the activities and institutional channels involved, and the messaging in media. Effective implementation of Humanitarian Aid and Disaster Relief by China is not only a display of state capacity and soft power but also shows China’s growing influence in the region.

Effective implementation of Humanitarian Aid and Disaster Relief by China is not only a display of state capacity and soft power but also shows China’s growing influence in the region.

China’s Disaster Diplomacy

Disaster diplomacy refers to the strategic use of diplomatic efforts to address disasters, including natural calamities, pandemics, and environmental crises; and involves international cooperation to address humanitarian needs and rebuild communities. However, international aid and assistance in response to disasters is not a given. Research shows that there must pre-existing interest amongst those in power, before they are convinced to use their power to achieve disaster diplomacy goals.  China has both economic and strategic interests in Myanmar. It blocked a UNSC statement condemning the military coup in 2021 and since then has formally recognised the military regime, even providing financial and political backing. Following Operation 1027 and the joint resistance movement against the Junta launched by the Three Brotherhood Alliance, China had attempted to mediate and put an end to violence, particularly in the Rakhine state, where it has multibillion-dollar investments in infrastructure projects, particularly under the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI). China’s rising influence in Myanmar is thus based on various channels, of which disaster aid is one component.

…there must pre-existing interest amongst those in power, before they are convinced to use their power to achieve disaster diplomacy goals.

China’s response included search and rescue teams, eight batches of emergency and humanitarian supplies including medical kits, food, tents, foldable beds, mosquito nets, and disease prevention materials, as well as more than 1 Billion RMB in emergency humanitarian aid. A Chinese university developed a ‘DeepSeek-driven’ Chinese-Myanmar-English translation system, while a global network of volunteers collected distress signals and mapped the disaster updates to help rescue teams. There are also plans to assist Myanmar in post disaster reconstruction and preservation and repair of damaged cultural relics and buildings.

Institutional Channels

About 28 civilian and governmental rescue teams and a wide range of institutions were involved in the rescue efforts.

Central and Provincial Governments:  While coordinated by the central government, the initial emergency response was implemented by the provincial government and party committee in Yunnan, the province bordering Myanmar. There were four official rescue teams, including Yunnan Rescue Team, Ministry of Emergency Management’s China Search and Rescue team, China International Search and Rescue team, and  Hong Kong SAR’s rescue team.  The Chinese PLA and PLAF also provided personnel and transport services. Special cross border clearance mechanism was also put into place for swift clearance. The Chinese rescue forces worked with both local forces and the rescue team from Russia. Financial aid was dispensed by the China International Development Cooperation Agency (CIDCA), also known as China Aid. CIDCA is affiliated with the State Council and works under the supervision of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs in Beijing.

Foundations, Business Enterprises, and Civilian Volunteers: More than 15 civilian volunteer teams came from areas like Hunan, Zhejiang, Shenzhen, and Shanghai. Social organisations and businesses were also mobilised as an institutional channel for providing aid and relief work. These included the Red Cross Society of China which donated 1.5 million RMB to Myanmar Red Cross Society via the Chinese Embassy in Myanmar. Some agencies also provided relief supplies directly to people. For instance, the China Foundation for Rural Development’s Myanmar office[1] distributed relief packages to households in Mandalay. Chinese state-owned enterprises in Myanmar like CITIC (which is involved in the implementation of the planned Kyaukphu Special Economic Zone and deep-sea port under the Belt and Road Initiative), and business associations like the Myanmar Chinese Chamber of Commerce and General Association of Dian Entrepreneurs also provided support in logistics and translation services.

Messaging in media

The Chinese Embassy in Myanmar proactively provided updates about the rescue efforts on the Embassy website and via social media. The messaging shows two important trends – one, to highlight China’s as the first international response in the aftermath of the crisis; and two, to weave this narrative into the larger Chinese narratives of neighbourhood diplomacy, community with a shared future, etc.

The messaging shows two important trends – one, to highlight China’s as the first international response in the aftermath of the crisis; and two, to weave this narrative into the larger Chinese narratives of neighbourhood diplomacy, community with a shared future, etc.

In the reporting about the rescue efforts, there is focus on the swiftness, effectiveness, and scale of the relief efforts. The embassy website has multiple updates on rescue and relief activities, often with time stamps; example, every day between 29th March to 11th April, the sixth batch of emergency aid was delivered. Rescue of survivors with the use of state of the art technology and machinery was also reported in detail on Chinese news channels and the embassy news. Several reports emphasise that “China was the first to provide aid, to send rescue teams, and to pull survivors from the rubble.” Notably, in its press release on ‘Operation Brahma’, India has also asserted its role as the “first responder in the region” and reported its rescue team as the “first international assistance flights to Naypyitaw.”

China’s disaster relief activities have been framed as a remarkable display of age-old ‘Pauk-Phaw’ friendship between China and Myanmar. There are multiple references to building the “China-Myanmar community with a shared future” and neighbourhood diplomacy guided by principles of “amity, sincerity, mutual benefit, and inclusiveness.” The use of these terms while delivering aid and assistance have the effect of giving a concrete and positive reference to these concepts. They are also aimed at strengthening China’s image as a provider of public goods in the region.

Furthermore, Chinese embassy news highlighted the appreciation from Junta leader Min Aung Hlaing for the rescue efforts. The presence of regional leaders like Yangon Chief Minister U Soe Thein to receive emergency supplies also added to the spectacle of receptivity for Chinese aid and assistance. This is crucial as in the past, Myanmar junta has refused international aid and even banned news items of relief efforts by domestic and international actors. Presently, there have been reports of Myanmar’s military blocking aid to earthquake survivors, and firing warning shots at the Chinese Red Cross envoy delivering aid in a conflict zone. Displaying support from the people and political authorities is hence an indication of the success of China’s soft power in Myanmar.

What this means for India

China’s response to the March 28 earthquakes in Myanmar reflects a strategic use of humanitarian aid as a tool of regional diplomacy. Beyond the immediate humanitarian imperative, the scale, speed, and publicity of the relief efforts underscore Beijing’s interest in deepening its influence in Myanmar through a multifaceted approach that includes infrastructural investments, political engagement, and now disaster diplomacy. The coordination between central and provincial institutions, the mobilization of civilian and commercial actors, and the deliberate media messaging collectively signal a comprehensive effort to integrate humanitarian relief into China’s broader foreign policy goals. By framing its aid within narratives of “Pauk-Phaw” friendship and a “shared future”, China not only reinforces its presence in Myanmar but also seeks to project itself as a responsible regional leader and a provider of public goods.

The coordination between central and provincial institutions, the mobilization of civilian and commercial actors, and the deliberate media messaging collectively signal a comprehensive effort to integrate humanitarian relief into China’s broader foreign policy goals.

China’s growing influence has implications for India and its ambitions as a regional leader. In the past, HADR has been a tool for strengthening India’s ties with Myanmar. Through ‘Operation Brahma’, which is guided by the policies of Neighbourhood First, Act East and SAGAR, India has sought to efficiently provide material aid and relief. Improving co-ordination with state governments, civil society, and media could help extend the scale and reach of operations. Further, while collaboration with Quad partners denotes greater Indian comfort in letting the Quad come closer into its immediate neighbourhood, India could take charge in reviving regional cooperation through forums like BIMSTEC. Developing a doctrine of proactive humanitarian support, with a regional cooperation aspect, would help India deliver better and faster.

Note: The author would like to thank Dr. Constantino Xavier, Senior Fellow, CSEP and Dr. Jabin Jacob, Non-Resident Fellow, CSEP, for their feedback.

The post China’s Disaster Diplomacy in Myanmar first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/chinas-disaster-diplomacy-in-myanmar/feed/ 0 903105
India’s Heritage Diplomacy Database: Archaeology and Conservation Initiatives Since 2014 http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-heritage-diplomacy-database-archaeology-and-conservation-initiatives-since-2014/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-heritage-diplomacy-database-archaeology-and-conservation-initiatives-since-2014 http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-heritage-diplomacy-database-archaeology-and-conservation-initiatives-since-2014/#respond Mon, 21 Apr 2025 00:22:51 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902968 In the last decade, India has engaged with archaeology and conservation at various sites in other countries. The attached novel database of sites can pave the way for future research about India’s heritage diplomacy, writes Aleksandr Kuzmenchuk

The post India’s Heritage Diplomacy Database: Archaeology and Conservation Initiatives Since 2014 first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

DOWNLOADS

Key Takeaways 

  • The database includes 20 heritage projects and 4 potential projects, spanning 12 countries across 3 continents 
  • Funded by India’s Ministry of External Affairs (MEA), 14 projects of the 20 are fully or partially managed by the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI), a division of India’s Ministry of Culture (MoC), with the rest managed by different implementing partners 
  • Each site entry includes a brief description, information about the project’s budget and implementation, whether it is a United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation (UNESCO) World Heritage Site, and a timeline of events with sources 

India’s Heritage Diplomacy Database: Archaeology and Conservation Initiatives since 2014 attempts to collate sites abroad where India has engaged in heritage diplomacy in the domain of archaeology and conservation in the last decade.  Although such projects have recently become a more prominent part of India’s foreign policy, no other public database exists with all such projects as of March 2025.  So far, there are 20 sites included in the database and 4 potential project sites.  Although the scale remains small given the heightened importance of India’s “civilisational and cultural ethos” and “civilisational linkages,” the demand for more initiatives is likely to grow.   

Relevance 

This database contributes to bridging the gap in scholarship on India’s heritage diplomacy.  Identifying patterns in the process of India’s heritage diplomacy can help develop useful policy recommendations for the future.  Specifically, further research could evaluate how timelines for sites in certain countries compare against bilateral relations, or how patterns across countries show how the program has evolved over time. The data may also assist policymakers in identifying where to allocate resources, whether technical or financial, to increase India’s heritage diplomacy capacity for the future. This database can help understand one way by which India projects its influence and interests abroad as a civilisational power. 

The database is meant as a starting point for more detailed analyses from a variety of potential angles.    

Objectives 

  1. Develop a unique database mapping India’s archaeology and conservation projects abroad since 2014. 
  2. Present longitudinal data for each project along with other site-specific information such as a description, information about budget and implementation, and whether the site is on the UNESCO World Heritage List. 
  3. Pave the way for further detail-oriented research about India’s heritage diplomacy using this database.

Methodology 

Entries in this database include site-specific archaeology and conservation initiatives abroad which are funded by India’s Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) and have been engaged with since 2014.  First, most projects were selected from the annual reports of the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) and Ministry of Culture (MoC) based on keyword searches.  A few others—Bala Hissar citadel in Afghanistan, Prambanan and Borobudur temple complexes in Indonesia, and Wat Pakea temple in Lao PDR—were added based on mentions in other official documents or speech. 

Second, mentions in annual reports became the frameworks for timelines supplemented with other MEA and MoC sources and online reporting.  Annual report sources in the timelines follow a separate format and include year and page number, i.e., “MEA 2023-2024, 10.”  Timelines focus on the role and actions of the Government of India and its implementing partners and are not exhaustive histories of each site or of other countries’ conservation projects.   

Third, descriptions for each entry were added with India’s role and the site’s broad significance in mind.  Budget, implementation, and whether sites have been inscribed on the UNESCO World Heritage List were added as well.  In the case of conflicting information, timelines defer to official sources and then local reporting. 

The data should not be considered exhaustive in view of a few limitations.  Apart from a few cases, there is a strong bias in the evidence toward English-language sources.  There is also a reliance on information available online with minimal input from the involved organizations themselves.  Additionally, there is an inconsistency of publicly available information among online sources.  As a result, whereas External Affairs Minister (EAM) S. Jaishankar noted in 2021 that India had completed 60 conservation projects in 21 countries, and had 52 ongoing or planned projects in 12 countries, this database may come short of reporting all projects since 2014. 

 For the purpose of this database, the author has standardized certain transliterated spellings if they appear differently between different linked texts.  For example, under the Earthquake-Damaged Cultural Heritage entry, some disparate spellings were standardized as “Buddha,” “Mahavihar,” “Ghyang,” and “Chholing.” 

Initiatives List 

Afghanistan  Stor Palace 
Bala Hissar Citadel 
Bolivia  Tiwanaku Archaeological Site 
Cambodia  Preah Vihear Temple Complex 
Ta Prohm Temple Complex 
Ashram Maha Russei Temple 
Wat Raja Bo Pagoda 
Indonesia  Prambanan Temple Complex 
Borobudur Temple Complex 
Lao PDR  Vat Phou Temple Complex 
Wat Pakea Temple 
Maldives  Hukuru Miskiy (Friday Mosque) 
Maabadhige Archaeological Site 
Dhiyamigili Ganduvaru Palace 
Mali  Timbuktu 
Myanmar  Ananda Temple 
Bagan Pagodas 
Nepal  Pashupatinath Temple 
Earthquake-Damaged Cultural Heritage Sites 
Sri Lanka  Thiruketeeshwaram Temple 
Uzbekistan  Ancient Termiz 
Vietnam  My Son Sanctuary 
Dong Duong Monastery 
Nhan Tower 

Data Sources and Updates: The data used in this database is sourced from publicly available information including government reports, press releases, media reports and other secondary sources. The data collected is up to March 2025. 

Disclaimer: Maps, created using mapchart.net, are for illustrative purposes and do not imply the expression of any opinion on the part of CSEP concerning the legal status of any country or territory or concerning the delimitation of frontiers or boundaries. 

Acknowledgements: The author would like to thank Riya Sinha and Constantino Xavier for their review and the rest of the Foreign Policy & Security team at CSEP for their continued support.  He would also like to thank the Communications team for their contributions, especially Ayesha Manocha and Mukesh Rawat. 

The post India’s Heritage Diplomacy Database: Archaeology and Conservation Initiatives Since 2014 first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-heritage-diplomacy-database-archaeology-and-conservation-initiatives-since-2014/feed/ 0 902968
India-Australia Cooperation: Critical Minerals for Economic Security http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-australia-cooperation-critical-minerals-for-economic-security/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-australia-cooperation-critical-minerals-for-economic-security http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-australia-cooperation-critical-minerals-for-economic-security/#respond Thu, 17 Apr 2025 09:55:02 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=903034 India and Australia have intensified their engagement on critical minerals, recognising their strategic importance for economic and energy security, technology development, and industrial resilience, writes Anindita Sinh.

The post India-Australia Cooperation: Critical Minerals for Economic Security first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
As the global transition to clean energy accelerates and supply chain vulnerabilities become more pronounced, critical minerals have emerged as a focal point in international economic diplomacy. India and Australia, both key players in the Indo-Pacific, have intensified their engagement on critical minerals, recognising their strategic importance for economic and energy security, technology development, and industrial resilience. 

Minerals fuels, oils and products of their distillation are the top imports from Australia to India, standing at USD 11,021 billion in 2023-24. According to the Confederation of India Industry (CII), the critical minerals and the mining sector are poised to become key drivers towards enhancing the bilateral economic cooperation between the two countries in the coming years. India is Australia’s sixth largest trading partner and Australia is a key investment destination for India. 

The global trade arena is undergoing a significant transformation. As protectionist policies and geopolitical tensions escalate, supply chains are increasingly vulnerable to disruptions. One of the most consequential developments is the Trump administration’s imposition of reciprocal higher tariffs. Under this policy, imports from India in sectors such smartphones and solar photovoltaic modules, and could face a punitive 27% duty. However, critical minerals and other goods, like certain energy products, pharmaceuticals, and bullion, currently remain exempt from these duties. This patchwork of tariffs is set to intensify trade fragmentation and destabilise established global supply chains and raising alarms over ensuring economic security. 

In this era of economic uncertainty, international cooperation has never been more essential. The partnership between India and Australia stands as a strategic beacon amid this fragmentation as both countries move towards ensuring economic security. Australia, endowed with vast reserves of critical minerals such as lithium, cobalt, graphite, and gallium, is already a global powerhouse in resource production. Meanwhile, India, driven by its clean energy agenda and ambitious industrialisation goals, is rapidly emerging as one of the world’s largest consumers of these essential materials. 

India’s policy framework featuring initiatives like the National Critical Minerals Mission (NCMM), Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) schemes, and strategic auctions for mineral blocks, underscores its determination to secure a steady supply of raw materials for its booming manufacturing and renewable energy sectors. At the same time, Australia’s robust mining sector and forward-thinking policy landscape make it a natural supplier capable of meeting not just domestic demand, but also filling the supply gaps for key trade partners like India. For India, the depth and breadth of the critical minerals cooperation with Australia makes it the most advanced partnerships in this emerging and increasingly important sector. 

As countries reduce reliance on dominant suppliers like China, partnerships such as the one between India and Australia offer an opportunity to build robust and resilient supply chains.

In the wake of geopolitical uncertainties, such as disruptions in supply chains caused by conflicts and economic sanctions, securing access to critical minerals is now a matter of national security for both India and Australia. As countries reduce reliance on dominant suppliers like China, partnerships such as the one between India and Australia offer an opportunity to build robust and resilient supply chains. This article explores the evolution of the India-Australia economic relationship, Australia’s domestic and international policies in the critical minerals sector, the evolution of India and Australia’s critical minerals cooperation, and the pathways for enhancing this partnership. 

India-Australia Geoeconomic Engagement 

The India-Australia relationship has undergone a significant transformation over the past two decades, evolving from a limited engagement into a comprehensive economic and strategic partnership. This shift has been underpinned by shared democratic values, economic complementarities, and a common vision for a free and open Indo-Pacific. As India’s External Affairs Minister, S. Jaishankar stated in November 2023 India has “growing convergences with Australia, and at the heart of it is really, a shared commitment to a free, open, inclusive, prosperous and rules-based Indo-Pacific region, based on UNCLOS, as the constitution of the seas.” The two partners are committed to working together to enhance their bilateral partnership. 

This deep-rooted relationship was significantly formalised in 2020 when the two countries elevated their bilateral ties to a Comprehensive Strategic Partnership (CSP), marking a decisive step toward enhanced cooperation in defence, trade, and technology. The CSP not only recognised their shared commitment to a free and open Indo-Pacific but also set the stage for broad-based collaboration that has since expanded across multiple sectors. 

In 2022, the Economic Cooperation and Trade Agreement (ECTA) further strengthened these bonds by boosting trade and investment flows while reducing tariffs, thus providing a much-needed boost to industries ranging from energy to manufacturing. This agreement exemplifies the practical benefits of their partnership, offering a framework for increased economic interaction and market access that supports mutual growth. Building on the foundations of the ECTA, negotiations for a Comprehensive Economic Cooperation Agreement (CECA) are underway, which will further bolster the bilateral partnership. Moreover, the strategic dialogue within key regional forums—such as the Quad and the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF)—has underscored the critical role both nations play in maintaining a balanced and secure regional order.  

…this partnership is one of India’s most developed bilateral partnership in the critical minerals space.

Beyond formal agreements, the partnership has been reinforced by collaborative initiatives in defence and academic research. Joint ventures, technology transfer programs, and academic collaborations have contributed to a shared vision of innovation and resilience. The India-Australia Critical Minerals Research Partnership funds various collaborative research projects such as the Titanium-Vanadium Processing Project which aims to unlock processing technology for both these mineral reserves in the two countries. Showcasing that this partnership is one of India’s most developed bilateral partnership in the critical minerals space. Other programs such as the Maitri Fellowships and Grants under the Centre for Australia-India Relations and Quad Fellowship highlight the keen interest and political will between the two countries to develop closer ties. Such efforts have not only deepened the bilateral relationship but have also positioned India and Australia as key partners capable of shaping regional policies and contributing to a more secure global environment. 

These developments provide a robust framework for deeper cooperation in the critical minerals sector, where Australia’s resource wealth complements India’s manufacturing and technological ambitions. Creating a strong foundation to ensure economic security for both nations. 

Australia’s Critical Minerals Policy Landscape 

Australia has been at the forefront of developing a robust critical minerals strategy, both to strengthen its domestic industry and to position itself as a reliable global supplier. The country has leveraged its mineral-rich geography and strong policy framework to enhance international cooperation, diversify supply chains, and reduce dependence on dominant suppliers like China. Table 1 highlights some of the key domestic and international policy developments undertaken by Australia to position itself as a key supplier for critical minerals.   

Australia’s role as a major producer of lithium, cobalt, and rare earth elements makes it a key player in global supply chains. Through partnerships under frameworks like the Minerals Security Partnership (MSP), IPEF, and Quad, Australia has positioned itself as a stable and responsible supplier of minerals essential for clean energy and advanced technologies. Its collaboration with India, among other nations, is set to deepen as both countries align their strategies to build resilient supply chains. 

Table 1: Australia’s key policies in the critical minerals sector 

Year  Policy  Highlights 
2025  Information Toolkit for Safeguarding Against Foreign Interference in the Critical Minerals Sector  This toolkit is for Australian companies who want to understand, identify and report suspected acts of foreign interference in the critical minerals sector.  
2024  Australia’s Critical and Strategic Minerals List Updated  List updated to include nickel, bring the number of critical minerals to 31. 
2024  Future Made in Australia Plan  National strategy to boost innovation, science, digital capabilities, and renewable energy superpower projects related to critical minerals. 
2024  National Battery Strategy  Focuses on developing Australia’s battery industry for energy storage and electric vehicles. 
2024  Australia-Canada Joint Statement on Cooperation on Critical Minerals  The joint statement sets out shared priorities on critical minerals including the importance of robust environmental, social and governance credentials. 
2024  Australia-EU Partnership on Sustainable Critical and Strategic Minerals  Enhanced cooperation with the European Union for sustainable mineral supply chains. 
2024  Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF)   Boosted regional cooperation and trade facilitation in critical minerals through the Critical Minerals Dialogue and the Supply Chain Agreement. Coordination under pillars of IPEF such as Clean Economy and Fair Economy. 
2023  Critical Minerals Strategy 2023-2030  Long-term roadmap for securing critical mineral supply chains and investments. 
2023  Lists of Critical and Strategic Minerals   Two lists maintained by the Critical Minerals Office and updated every 3 years but can be updated as and when the need arises. 
2023  Australia-UK Strategic Critical Minerals Partnership  Strengthened coordination on supply chain resilience and joint mineral projects. Coordinated by the Australia-United Kingdom Joint Working Group on Critical Minerals. 
2023  Australia-South Korea Critical Minerals MoU  Facilitated trade and investment in battery materials and high-tech industries. Signed a MoU on Critical Mineral Supply Chains and agreed that the Korea-Australia Critical Minerals Working Group would lead joint research and more. 
2023  Australia – France Strategic Dialogue on Critical Minerals  Strengthens Australia-France cooperation on critical minerals supply chains. 
2023  Australia – US Climate, Critical Minerals, and Clean Energy Transformation Compact  Enhances US-Australia collaboration on clean energy and mineral security. 
2023  Quad Statement of Principles on Clean Energy Supply Chains in the Indo-Pacific  Partnership between Quad countries (Australia, India, Japan, US) on clean energy. 
2023  Australia – India Critical Minerals Investment Partnership  Investment collaboration for critical minerals between Australia’s Critical Minerals Office and India’s KABIL. 
2022  Australia – Japan Critical Minerals Partnership  Strengthens supply chain security and cooperation with Japan on critical minerals. 
2022  Sustainable Critical Minerals Alliance  International agreement promoting sustainable and ethical mineral sourcing. 
2020  Critical Minerals Office  Established to facilitate and support developments in Australia’s critical minerals sector. Nodal agency for all work on critical minerals.  
2020  Recycling and Waste Reduction Act 2020  National legislation to reduce waste and promote recycling. 
2019  Australian Critical Minerals Strategy  Outlined the government’s vision for securing and expanding critical mineral supply. Builds on Geoscience Australia’s Critical Minerals Report (2019) and Austrade’s Critical Minerals Prospectus. 
2019  Australia-US MoU on Critical Energy Minerals   First MoU under the Energy Resources Governance Initiative. Strengthened collaboration with the US to develop alternative supply chains, promote sustainable mining practices, promote industry connectivity and inclusion of financial institutions into the supply chain. 
2019  Critical Minerals Mapping Initiative   International collaborative effort between Australia, Canada and the US geological departments with the aim of building a diversified critical minerals industry by developing a better understanding of known resources.  
2019  Energy Resources Governance Initiative (ERGI)  Founded by Australia, Botswana, Canada, Peru and the United States goal of sourcing and disseminating best practices across the international mining sector. Launched by US State Department. 

Source: International Energy Agency critical minerals policy tracker database and other sources based on author’s compilation. Not exhaustive. 

India-Australia Critical Minerals Cooperation: Key Developments 

Among India’s bilateral initiatives on critical minerals, the cooperation with Australia stands out as the most advanced. At the launch of the Critical Minerals Investment Partnership in March 2023, Minister for Resources and Northern Australia, Madeline King stated:

“India’s goals to lower carbon emissions and boost electric vehicle production presents great opportunities and prospects for Australia’s critical minerals sector, for renewable exports and for building stronger supply chains. Working together, both the nations are committed to reduce emissions, guarantee energy security and diversify global markets for critical minerals and clean technologies.”

India’s partnerships with Australia in this sector is the most advanced and well established with tangible developments such as off-take agreements from Australian lithium mines, established joint research and collaboration hubs such as the India-Australia Critical Minerals Research Hub. 

The India-Australia critical minerals partnership is at a defining moment, poised to contribute significantly to global supply chain resilience and clean energy ambitions. With complementary strengths—Australia’s resource wealth and India’s manufacturing and technological capabilities—both nations stand to gain from deeper collaboration in mining, processing, and research.  

There are 24 common minerals between the lists identified by the two countries (see Table 4 under Annex). This reflects a strong alignment with the potential for collaboration between the two nations in securing and developing these essential resources. Table 3 highlights cooperation potential between the two partners on key critical minerals such as lithium, nickel and others. 

In 2022 the signing of the ECTA marked a significant milestone in boosting trade and investment flows by reducing tariffs and facilitating market access; the agreement is expected to substantially increase two-way trade, particularly benefiting sectors like energy, resources, and manufacturing. Both nations further solidified their commitment to supply chain resilience, especially in the realm of critical minerals and emerging technologies, under the Quad’s Critical and Emerging Technologies and Climate Working Groups. The Critical Minerals Dialogue established under the IPEF focuses on minerals security as a crucial area of cooperation. The two also actively participate in the different pillars of the IPEF and in the MSP further bolstering avenues for cooperation in this sector.  

This strategic alignment is complemented by India’s ambitious domestic initiatives, including the National Electric Mobility Mission Plan, PLI schemes, auctions of mineral blocks, and renewable energy targets, all of which align with Australia’s goal of being a reliable and responsible supplier of critical minerals. In 2022, the India-Australia Critical Minerals Investment Partnership was announced, focusing on joint ventures, technology transfer, and co-investment in the exploration and processing of critical minerals. 

Table 2: India-Australia Critical Minerals Cooperation 

Year  Policy/Agreement  Highlights 
2020  Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) on Critical Minerals  Established a framework through the setting up of a Joint Working Group, for increasing trade, investment, and R&D in critical minerals between Australia and India. Aimed to position Australia as a reliable supplier to support India’s manufacturing sector and its defence and space capabilities.  
2022  India-Australia Critical Minerals Investment Partnership  Allocated $5.8 million over three years to encourage Indian investment in Australian critical minerals projects. Focused on developing supply chains for emerging technologies in sectors such as defence, aerospace, automotive, renewable energy, telecommunications, and agri-tech.  
2022  India-Australia Economic Cooperation and Trade Agreement (ECTA)  Eliminated tariffs on various critical minerals and resources, including zirconium, titanium, manganese, copper, cobalt, nickel, aluminium, and tin ores. Aimed to enhance trade and investment in the critical minerals sector, supporting India’s clean energy ambitions and manufacturing plans.  
2023  Milestone in Critical Minerals Investment Partnership  Identified five target projects (two lithium and three cobalt) for detailed due diligence under the Australia-India Critical Minerals Investment Partnership. Aimed to build robust and sustainable supply chains between the two countries for key battery minerals.  
2023  India-Australia Critical Minerals Research Hub  Monash University signed MoUs with the Indian Institute of Technology Hyderabad and the International Centre for Excellence in Mining Safety and Automation. Established the Australia-India Critical Minerals Research Hub to foster collaborative research in mineral exploration, extraction, processing, and recycling.  
2024  India-Australia Critical Minerals Research Partnership and the India-Australia Minerals Scholars Network  Launched two R&D partnerships: the India-Australia Critical Minerals Research Partnership ($12.2 million) focusing on sustainable supply chains, and the India-Australia Green Steel Research Partnership ($10.4 million) aiming to reduce greenhouse gas emissions in steelmaking. The scholars network is a co-funding initiative that supports the two partnerships. 
2024  Renewable Energy Partnership  Announced plans to boost investment in renewable energy projects, including solar manufacturing, battery and mineral processing, green hydrogen, and green iron. Aimed to enhance cooperation in defence and maritime security, and train a rooftop solar workforce in India.  

Source: Author’s compilation based on various sources. 

India’s partnership with Australia represents its most advanced bilateral cooperation in the critical minerals domain, reflecting a shared commitment to resilient supply chains and clean energy transitions.

Pathways to Enhance Cooperation 

India’s partnership with Australia represents its most advanced bilateral cooperation in the critical minerals domain, reflecting a shared commitment to resilient supply chains and clean energy transitions. As India looks to diversify its sources and secure access to strategic resources, geoeconomic developments underscore the importance of deepening ties not only with established partners like Australia but also other resource-rich regions. Australia’s robust policy ecosystem and mature mining sector complement India’s large market, industrial ambitions, and climate goals, making the two natural partners in this space. Building on this strong foundation, there are several avenues through which the India-Australia critical minerals partnership can be further strengthened. Table 3 delineates some areas of cooperation between the two partners on some specific minerals. 

To strengthen India-Australia critical minerals cooperation, the following areas must be prioritised: 

  1. Furthering India’s Critical Minerals Mission: India’s recent policy focus on securing raw materials can be aligned with Australia’s export strategy to ensure long-term supply security. This includes aligning Australia’s abundant mineral resources with India’s manufacturing and clean energy ambitions, particularly in the context of its net-zero goals and the decarbonisation of industries. 
  1. Expanding Co-Investment in Mining and Processing: Encouraging Australian firms to partner with Indian stakeholders in mining and refining projects, particularly under the PLI schemes and strategic mineral auctions initiated by the Indian government. Thus, providing a boost for both the public and private sector to invest in the supply chains. Australia’s mining sector is one of the largest and most developed in the world and leveraging and incentivising the private sector. 
  1. Developing Recycling and Circular Economy Initiatives: Establishing joint research projects for advanced materials recycling to reduce dependence on virgin resources, ensuring that supply chains are not just robust but also sustainable. 
  1. Enhancing Technology Transfer: Promoting joint development of battery-grade materials and value-added products through collaborations between research institutions and industry players in both countries. The Critical Minerals Research Hub is and can further be leveraged to promote this sort of technology transfer and bolster capacity building initiatives. Concerns over Intellectual Property Rights can be covered within the ambit of the MoUs as has been the case in the 2020 MoU between the two countries.  
  1. Strengthening Academic and Industry Collaborations: Expanding research partnerships and training programs to build a skilled workforce in mineral processing, fostering innovation in sustainable mining technologies, and leveraging existing partnerships between universities and industry stakeholders. Focusing research agendas on future technologies to cultivate an ecosystem that is more forward-looking and resilient. Setups similar to the Critical Minerals Research Partnership can be undertaken where project funding is provided for joint R&D. 

By leveraging strategic initiatives, technological partnerships, and trade frameworks, India and Australia can solidify their role in the global critical minerals supply chain, ensuring long-term economic and strategic benefits for both nations.  

Table 3: Mineral specific cooperation potential 

Mineral  Australia’s Role  India’s Demand  Cooperation Potential 
Lithium  Major global producer  High demand for EVs and energy storage  Joint ventures in battery manufacturing 
Cobalt  Exporter with refining capabilities  Growing need for electronics and batteries  Collaboration in refining and supply chain integration 
Rare Earths  Leading supplier outside China  Demand rising for defence and technology sectors  Investment in refining and processing facilities 
Graphite  Emerging producer  High demand for battery anodes  Research on value-added processing 
Nickel  Large reserves  Increasing demand for stainless steel and EVs  Potential for trade and joint processing plants 

Source: Author’s compilation. 

The strategic alignment between India and Australia in the critical minerals space not only addresses immediate supply chain vulnerabilities but also sets the stage for long-term economic resilience and technological innovation.

As the world navigates an increasingly fragmented trade landscape marked by unilateral tariff impositions and shifting geopolitical alliances, the case for international cooperation has never been stronger. The strategic alignment between India and Australia in the critical minerals space not only addresses immediate supply chain vulnerabilities but also sets the stage for long-term economic resilience and technological innovation. Through robust policy coordination, targeted investments, and collaborative research initiatives, these two nations are uniquely positioned to lead the global transition to a secure and sustainable clean energy future. 

Annex: 

Table 4: Critical Minerals on India and Australia’s lists (Updated as of April 2025) 

Mineral  India  Australia  Common 
Antimony  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Arsenic  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Beryllium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Bismuth  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Cadmium  ✅  ❌  ❌ 
Chromium  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Cobalt  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Copper  ✅  ❌  ❌ 
Fluorine  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Gallium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Germanium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Graphite  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Hafnium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
High-purity Alumina  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Indium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Lithium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Magnesium  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Manganese  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Molybdenum  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Nickel  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Niobium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Phosphorous  ✅  ❌  ❌ 
Platinum-group elements (PGE)  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Potash  ✅  ❌  ❌ 
Rare-earth elements (REE)  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Rhenium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Scandium  ❌  ✅  ❌ 
Selenium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Silicon  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Strontium  ✅  ❌  ❌ 
Tantalum  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Tellurium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Tin  ✅  ❌  ❌ 
Titanium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Tungsten  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Vanadium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 
Zirconium  ✅  ✅  ✅ 

Source: Critical Minerals at Geoscience Australia, 26 March 2025, https://www.ga.gov.au/scientific-topics/minerals/critical-minerals  

Note: The author would like to thank Dr Constantino Xavier, Senior Fellow, CSEP for his feedback. 

The post India-Australia Cooperation: Critical Minerals for Economic Security first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-australia-cooperation-critical-minerals-for-economic-security/feed/ 0 903034
Addressing Widening Health Inequities: Urgent Need to Fix the Urban Healthcare System http://stg.csep.org/blog/addressing-widening-health-inequities-urgent-need-to-fix-the-urban-healthcare-system/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=addressing-widening-health-inequities-urgent-need-to-fix-the-urban-healthcare-system http://stg.csep.org/blog/addressing-widening-health-inequities-urgent-need-to-fix-the-urban-healthcare-system/#respond Sat, 22 Mar 2025 10:06:56 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902797 It is hoped that policymakers will take note of the urgent needs of cities, especially of the urban poor, write Indrani Gupta and Alok Kumar Singh in this blog.

The post Addressing Widening Health Inequities: Urgent Need to Fix the Urban Healthcare System first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

The inequity in the availability and accessibility of health facilities, especially for urban poor, had prompted the expansion of the National Urban Health Mission (NUHM) with a focus on primary healthcare services to serve the under-served.  However, despite 10 years of the implementation of NUHM, primary healthcare provisioning is not only highly inadequate but also fragmented in urban India.

Improving access to affordable and quality health services has been a major theme in health programmes and policies in India.  The National Rural Health Mission, subsequently subsumed under National Health Mission, has been instrumental in changing the rural health system positively, improving access, availability and affordability of services for rural India.  The inequity in the availability and accessibility of health facilities, especially for urban poor, had prompted the expansion of the National Urban Health Mission or NUHM with a focus on primary health care services to serve the under-served.  However, despite 10 years of the implementation of NUHM, primary health care provisioning is not only highly inadequate but also fragmented in urban India.  There is fragmentation in both financing and governance due to a complex multi-layered administrative structure that govern the running and funding of health systems in urban India.  This is in addition to the sparse funding for health in general and primary care in particular – with less than 2% of health expenditure out of the country’s GDP being spent on health.   

This analysis attempted to piece together the story of urban health by focusing on the extent of inequities in healthcare access and outcomes among the urban poor, drawing data from multiple databases, including the National Sample Survey (NSS), National Family Health Survey (NFHS), Longitudinal Ageing Study in India (LASI), and government health statistics, to compare and validate the results.  Additionally, a literature review was conducted on the availability and accessibility of health care in urban slums, especially for the urban poor.  Finally, the challenges of urban spaces during COVID-19 are explored using literature review method to understand their dynamics and role in determining health and health-seeking behaviour during the pandemic. 

While inequalities in health outcomes across economic categories are high in both rural and urban areas, the inequalities are higher in urban areas relative to rural areas. These inequalities seem to have increased somewhat over the years—the progress made by rural areas has been comparatively better.

The results indicate that while inequalities in health outcomes across economic categories are high in both rural and urban areas, the inequalities are higher in urban areas relative to rural areas. These inequalities seem to have increased somewhat over the years—the progress made by rural areas has been comparatively better. There are gaps that remain in service coverage, access, and health coverage in urban areas for some of the key parameters. Overall, the poor in urban areas are doing worse on all fronts compared to their rural counterparts.  

Inadequate attention has been paid over the years to administrative and governance structures that are required to address urban health.  The challenges have been compounded by the phenomenal growth in urban populations and the emergence of million-plus cities, resulting in the current and static health infrastructure being stretched beyond limits.

Inadequate attention has been paid over the years to administrative and governance structures that are required to address urban health.  The challenges have been compounded by the phenomenal growth in urban populations and the emergence of million-plus cities, resulting in the current and static health infrastructure being stretched beyond limits.  

Urban health requires a focus similar to the NRHM urgently, but accompanied by structural and administrative changes in how health inputs—like infrastructure and personnel—are supplied to different urban areas.  

If the NUHM is the main plank on which urban health planning has to be implemented, a new approach would be required.  All urban health facilities need to be brought under one umbrella, whether in an existing ministry or by creating a separate body for urban health. A unified administration can be responsible for planning, research, coordination, and implementation. The finances can be from a diverse set of sources, but the planning for the finances for urban health needs to be done in an integrated manner.   

Also, the allocations to NUHM have remained too modest to make any difference to the sizeable needs of cities and towns.  The four post-COVID budgets do not indicate any increase in government health spending out of the total spending of the government.  With this level of health financing, it seems unlikely that the situation will change anytime soon unless the state governments take the initiative and plan for urban health in a major way. 

It is hoped that policymakers will take note of the urgent needs of cities, especially of the urban poor.  Unless that happens, health outcomes and inequities can only widen between rural and urban areas and between the poor and the non-poor in the urban areas. 

The post Addressing Widening Health Inequities: Urgent Need to Fix the Urban Healthcare System first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/addressing-widening-health-inequities-urgent-need-to-fix-the-urban-healthcare-system/feed/ 0 902797
The Hidden Layers of Protection in India’s Import Policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-hidden-layers-of-protection-in-indias-import-policy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-hidden-layers-of-protection-in-indias-import-policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-hidden-layers-of-protection-in-indias-import-policy/#respond Fri, 21 Mar 2025 08:23:41 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902794 Since 2020, the government has also introduced sector-specific production-linked incentive (PLI) schemes to drive manufacturing growth further. However, despite these efforts, the sector’s contribution remains well below the targeted levels writes Prerna Prabhakar in this blog.

The post The Hidden Layers of Protection in India’s Import Policy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Launched a decade ago, the Make in India initiative aimed to increase the manufacturing sector’s share of GDP to 25% and generate 100 million additional industrial jobs (from about 60 million) by 2025. Since 2020, the government has also introduced sector-specific production-linked incentive (PLI) schemes to drive manufacturing growth further. However, despite these efforts, the sector’s contribution remains well below the targeted levels.

For manufacturing to expand from 13% to 25% of GDP over a decade—while the economy grows at 6.5% annually—the sector itself must achieve an annual growth rate of approximately 13.6%.

Importance of exports for a thriving manufacturing sector

For manufacturing to expand from 13% to 25% of GDP over a decade—while the economy grows at 6.5% annually—the sector itself must achieve an annual growth rate of approximately 13.6%. Achieving this scale of expansion cannot rely solely on domestic demand; a significantly stronger export performance will be essential.

To enhance India’s participation in Global Value Chains (GVCs) and boost its share in global manufacturing exports—currently at just 1.8% (2022), lagging behind even smaller economies like Vietnam (2%)—policy interventions are essential. A key enabler of GVC integration is the import of intermediate goods. However, a comparative analysis with leading Asian competitors reveals that India imposes significantly higher import duties (Table 1), both overall and specifically on intermediate goods, which hampers its competitiveness.

Table 1: Most Favoured Nation (MFN) tariff levels on total and intermediate goods (simple average)

 Country Tariffs on all goods (%) 2022 Tariffs on Intermediate Goods (%) 2022
China 7.4 7.0
India 17.7 15.0
Indonesia 8.0 6.5
Malaysia 4.9 5.0
Thailand 7.6 4.7
Vietnam 9.4 5.8

Source: Based on WITS, World Bank

Layers of import protection

An interesting fact is that import protection is not driven solely by customs duties but also by additional duties and cesses, which further increase the overall cost of imports. These include:

  • Anti-dumping duties

Dumping occurs when a country exports goods at prices lower than its domestic market cost to capture a larger share of the global market. Dumping causes harm to domestic producers of competing goods. To counter this, anti-dumping duties are imposed on such imports to bridge the gap between their export price and domestic price Article VI of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) authorizes the imposition of anti-dumping duties to address such unfair trade practices.

  • Cesses

The Social Welfare Surcharge (SWS), introduced in 2017-18, is levied at 10% on the aggregate customs duties of imported goods to fund the government’s social welfare schemes. However, certain products, such as gold, silver, platinum, specific medical devices, and essential imports, may be exempted. Additionally, imports under specific Free Trade Agreements (FTAs) may be exempt from SWC if the Basic Customs Duty (BCD) is waived under the agreement.

The Agriculture Infrastructure and Development Cess (AIDC), introduced in 2021, applies to certain imported goods, with the revenue generated being allocated to agricultural infrastructure and related development projects.

Composite Duty Calculation

To understand the impact of additional duties and charges on India’s imports, consider Alloy Steel Chisels/Tools and Hydraulic Rock Breakers—key machinery components. These products fall under the 6-digit HS Code 843149. Below is the key constituting of duties/cesses on these products.

  • BCD of 7.5 per cent
  • In 2024, India imposed ADD on imports of these products from South Korea and China to counter unfair pricing and protect domestic manufacturers. According to the government notification, the applicant for the anti-dumping investigation claimed that dumped imports from these countries were causing material injury to the domestic industry. As a result, the proposed duty rates range from 4.5% to 131.1% for China and 0% to 52.7% for South Korea (WTO, 2025).
  • SWS of 10 per cent of aggregate custom duties

The import value with only Basic Customs Duty (BCD) is approximately 22.2 per cent short of the import value with composite duty, highlighting that the actual protection on Indian imports is higher than BCD alone for products where anti-dumping duties are imposed.

Given the multiple layers of protection, it is essential to compute the composite protection. The following section analyses the total impact of various duties, cesses, and charges for USD 100. Given the wide range for ADD for both the partner countries, we assume a rate of 30 per cent for this calculation.

A = Total custom duty= (BCD + ADD) = 7.5 + 30 = 37.5

B = SWS = 0.10*BCD= 0.10*7.5 = 0.75

C =Composite duty = A + B = 38.25

Import value with composite duty = 100+38.25 = 138.25

Import value with only BCD = 100+7.5 = 107.5

The import value with only Basic Customs Duty (BCD) is approximately 22.2 per cent short of the import value with composite duty, highlighting that the actual protection on Indian imports is higher than BCD alone for products where anti-dumping duties are imposed.

NTMs add to the protection

The number of products under QCOs has surged from 106 in 2014 to 732 as of September 2024

In addition to the various kinds of duties and cesses, imports also face protection in the form of Non-Tariff Measures (NTMs), which are policy measures other than ordinary customs tariffs that can have an economic effect on trade. Technical barriers to trade (TBT) and Sanitary and Phytosanitary (SPS) measures are the two widely used NTMs. TBT includes measures such as labelling, standards on technical specifications and quality requirements, and other measures protecting the environment. SPS measures include restrictions on substances, ensuring food safety, and preventing the dissemination of diseases or pests. India has increasingly implemented Quality Control Orders (QCOs) to enforce product standards. The number of products under QCOs has surged from 106 in 2014 to 732 as of September 2024 (Indian Express, 2024). While these measures aim to ensure product quality and consumer safety, they also act as trade barriers.

High import barriers limit India’s ability to participate in GVCs and reduce its potential to capitalise on the ‘China Plus One’ strategy, where global firms seek to diversify supply chains beyond China.

This protectionist approach presents challenges to India’s integration into Global Value Chains (GVCs), which account for approximately 70% of global trade (ADB, 2018). High import barriers limit India’s ability to participate in GVCs and reduce its potential to capitalise on the ‘China Plus One’ strategy, where global firms seek to diversify supply chains beyond China.

References

Asian Development Bank. (2018). Key indicators for Asia and the Pacific 2018. Retrieved from

https://www.adb.org/sites/default/files/publication/443671/ki2018.pdf

Indian Express. (2024). Quality control orders now cover 732 products helping curb cheap quality imports: Goyal. Retrieved from

https://indianexpress.com/article/business/quality-control-orders-now-cover-732-products-helping-curb-cheap-quality-imports-goyal-9623979/

World Trade Organization. Trade Remedies Data Portal. Retrieved from

https://trade-remedies.wto.org/en/antidumping/measures

The post The Hidden Layers of Protection in India’s Import Policy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-hidden-layers-of-protection-in-indias-import-policy/feed/ 0 902794
India’s Heritage Diplomacy: The Case of Archaeology and Conservation http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-heritage-diplomacy-the-case-of-archaeology-and-conservation/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-heritage-diplomacy-the-case-of-archaeology-and-conservation http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-heritage-diplomacy-the-case-of-archaeology-and-conservation/#respond Wed, 12 Mar 2025 10:15:59 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902723 From the Maldives to Myanmar and Vietnam to Indonesia, India’s claim to civilisational power is driving efforts to conserve heritage sites abroad write Aleksandr Kuzmenchuk & Constantino Xavier.

The post India’s Heritage Diplomacy: The Case of Archaeology and Conservation first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
From the Maldives to Myanmar and Vietnam to Indonesia, India’s claim to civilisational power is driving efforts to conserve heritage sites abroad.

In 2020, news of the discovery of a 1,100-year-old Shiva lingam in Vietnam swept India: the symbol, a representation of the Hindu God, Shiva, was popularly hailed as proving the extent of India’s global influence. As the news broke on social media, External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar referred to the discovery as “reaffirming a civilisational connect” between India and Southeast Asia. As evidence of India as a civilisational state, the minister further qualified the finding as “a great cultural example of India’s development partnership.” The discovery came during post-2017 restoration work of the surrounding temple complex by the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI), a division of India’s Ministry of Culture (MoC).

The ASI project in Vietnam is part of a growing effort by the Indian government to engage in heritage conservation projects abroad. Besides the ASI, India’s Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) also allocates grant and other economic assistance for similar initiatives through other implementing partners. In 2020, the MEA created a separate division within its Development Partnership Administration (DPA) exclusively tasked with “conservation and restoration of temples in Southeast Asia, mural preservations, museology related works, iconographic survey, excavations and digital documentation of heritage sites.” In a recent example, Prime Minister Narendra Modi and Indonesia’s president Prabowo Subianto made a joint announcement that India will soon support the conservation of the Prambanan Temple complex in southern Java.

This article presents a new survey of India’s recent heritage diplomacy initiatives in the archaeological and conservation domain. We first contextualise the importance of such activities in India against the background of other countries’ efforts to use heritage conservation as a soft power instrument. Based on open-source evidence, we then map Indian initiatives since 2014, whether led by the ASI or the MEA in different countries and sectors. We conclude with a discussion of trends and policy challenges for India’s growing investment in heritage diplomacy.

Restoring a sense of self abroad

India has engaged in this type of archaeology and conservation diplomacy for decades, most famously at Angkor Wat in the 1980s. So far, the projects have primarily focused on Southeast Asian countries with which – Indian officials frequently emphasise – India has a long history of shared religions, languages, and cultures since 200 BCE. Over decades, other projects have targeted other countries with which India has close cultural connections, such as Nepal, Sri Lanka, Maldives, Bangladesh, Mauritius, and Bahrain. In some cases, Indian support has gone as far as Egypt and Angola.

As a rising power, with the world’s largest population and a growing economy, India is expanding its foreign policy interests and finding new ways to project power – from maritime to cyber and space security, as well as the protection of its overseas citizens or attempts to reform the United Nations and other multilateral institutions. Building a historical and cultural narrative of India as a civilisational state is one way by which its government officials have articulated the country’s quest for a more prominent, influential, and visible role in the world order.

Building a historical and cultural narrative of India as a civilisational state is one way by which its government officials have articulated the country’s quest for a more prominent, influential and visible role in the world order.

This is not just an attempt to popularise foreign policy for domestic consumption, feeding into the Indian perception that “our time has come” on the world stage, the euphoria about India’s G20 presidency or the International Yoga Day. Nor is it a mere ideological reflection of what has been termed a “Hindu nationalist” or “muscular” foreign policy. India’s sense of historical, religious and civilisational self has long shaped its foreign policy narratives, from the pre-independence period right up to the choice of national emblems and symbolic language used by its first Prime Minister, Jawaharlal Nehru.

Within the last ten years, archaeology and conservation efforts have played an increasingly prominent role in India’s foreign policy strategy.

However, within the last ten years, archaeology and conservation efforts have played an increasingly prominent role in India’s foreign policy strategy. For External Affairs Minister Jaishankar, these initiatives are driven by the country’s growing “sense of historical and civilisational responsibility.” Politically, the recurring idea of “civilisational linkages” with India’s neighbourhood has been useful for domestic audiences whose national pride and interest in foreign policy was higher than ever in the 2024 election cycle.

Cultural and civilisational linkages, Sanskriti evam Sabhyata, has been one of five pillars of the Modi government’s Panchamrit foreign policy since 2015. Target countries for archaeological diplomacy are also important to India’s Act East and Neighbourhood First policies. Indian officials thus refer regularly to shared history as a distinctive mark of India’s partnership with Southeast Asian countries. In the words of former foreign minister Sushma Swaraj, “ASEAN and India are natural partners that share geographical, historical, and civilisational ties.”

Heritage diplomacy may be another positive and promising element in the Indian toolkit.  According to one study, heritage conservation has already strengthened India’s relations with Southeast Asia by reaffirming shared cultural identities, building stronger diplomatic relationships, and even boosting bilateral trade and investment. These initiatives are intended to help India articulate its civilisational identity while also enriching regional linkages and rising as a global power. The resulting linkages could offer India benefits relating to all five Panchamrit principles: cultural recognition, economic prosperity, added security, dignity and pride in India, and greater engagement abroad.

Surveying Indian projects across three continents

Archaeology and conservation projects are one relatively small type of Indian foreign assistance, which is a program that has grown in importance in recent years. There are two main channels of engagement abroad. First, for projects implemented by the ASI and its local, regional and international partners, the MEA selects each site and allocates funding based on the foreign government’s requests. But the ASI remains the lead organisation for implementation, whether by deputing officials abroad or working in collaboration with its foreign counterpart.

Since 2014, the MEA and ASI have invested resources, time and expertise at fourteen sites across eight countries.

In a second channel, the MEA offers grant assistance directly to host governments or through implementing partners in the host country. This can sometimes also involve local, non-governmental organisations. The following data is drawn from official MEA and MoC sources, with an emphasis on annual reports, as well as online reporting. Given the inconsistency of public information, the survey is thorough but the data is not exhaustive. In the last decade, since 2014, the MEA and ASI have invested resources, time and expertise at fourteen sites across eight countries.

Table 1: Site-specific ASI initiatives for heritage conservation abroad (since 2014)

Country Site Action Start Status
Cambodia Ta Prohm Temple Complex Conservation January 2004 Ongoing
Ashram Maha Russei, Sambor Prei Kuk Temple Complex Conservation April 2022 Ongoing
Preah Vihear Temple Complex Conservation August 2022 Ongoing
Wat Raja Bo Pagoda Conservation November 2023 Ongoing
Lao PDR Vat Phou Temple Complex Conservation June 2009 Ongoing
Maldives Friday Mosque Conservation March 2021 Unclear
Myanmar Ananda Temple Conservation May 2012 Completed
Bagan Pagodas Conservation January 2020 Ongoing
Nepal Pashupatinath Temple Conservation (Surveyed 2015-16) Unclear
Sri Lanka Thiruketeeshwaram Temple Conservation August 2012 Unclear
Uzbekistan Ancient Termiz Conservation (Surveyed 2022-23) Unclear
Vietnam My Son Temple Complex Conservation February 2017 Ongoing
Dong Duong Monastery Conservation (Surveyed 2023) Unclear
Nhan Tower Conservation (Surveyed 2024) Unclear

 

Table 1 presents the projects of the first channel with ASI involvement. ASI expert teams have implemented conservation and restoration work at ten of the above sites. In Cambodia, ASI teams have been restoring the Ta Prohm temple complex since January 2004, the Ashram Maha Russei at Sambor Prei Kuk since April 2022, the Preah Vihear temple since August 2022 and the Wat Raja Bo pagoda since November 2023. In Myanmar, the ASI completed a conservation project at Ananda temple between May 2012 and 2018 and has been working on the conservation of the pagodas in Bagan since January 2020.

In Lao PDR, the ASI has been working on conservation of the Vat Phou temple complex since June 2009. In Vietnam, ASI has been working at the My Son temple complex since February 2017. The status of other projects is less clear. In Sri Lanka, ASI launched a conservation project at the Thiruketeeshwaram temple in August 2012. It was announced as being close to completion in 2016-2017 but does not appear to have be inaugurated. In the Maldives, ASI began conserving the Friday mosque in March 2021, with work reportedly ongoing as of March 2022.

Since 2014, the ASI has also begun surveys and promised conservation projects at four other sites. In 2015-2016, an ASI technical team visited Pashupatinath temple in Nepal and prepared a detailed conservation plan.  In 2022-2023, the MEA organised an ASI feasibility tour to Uzbekistan for possible excavation and conservation of the Fayaztepa and Karatepa temple complexes in the ancient Termiz heritage site. The ASI also conducted surveys in Vietnam at the Dong Duong monastery in April 2023 and the Nhan tower in January 2024 for potential new conservation projects.

 Table 2: Site-specific MEA Investments in Heritage Conservation (since 2014)

Country Site Action Grant Status
Afghanistan Stor Palace Conservation $5,700,000 Project Completed (July 2016)
Bolivia Tiwanaku Archaeological Site Renovation (Illumination) $31,000 Project Completed (June 2017)
Maldives Maabadighe Archaeological Site Renovation (Museum Construction) $340,000 (approx.) Ongoing
Dhiyamigili Ganduvaru Conservation Ongoing
Mali Timbuktu Revival $500,000 Funds Received (March 2017)
Nepal Pashupatinath Temple Renovation (Dharmashala Construction) $2,000,000 (approx.) Project Completed (August 2018)
Renovation (Sanitary Facility Construction) $300,000 (approx.) Unclear
Earthquake-Damaged Cultural Heritage (28 Sites) Reconstruction $50,000,000 Ongoing

 

Table 2, for the second channel, lists MEA grant assistance related to heritage conservation in five countries, either as government-to-government aid or through Indian or international implementing partners. For all seven initiatives, the MEA allocated the posted grant amount either to the foreign governments or to implementing partners. Most of these have been in India’s immediate neighbourhood. In Afghanistan, India contributed $4 million in grant assistance, and later an additional $1.7 million, to restore the Stor palace between January 2009 and July 2016. In the Maldives, India contributed MVR 5.24 million (about $340,000) in April 2022 to develop a museum of pre-Islamic heritage at the Maabadhige archaeological site and to the conservation of the Dhiyamigili Ganduvaru palace. Both projects appear to be ongoing.

In Nepal, India contributed NPR 220 million (about $2 million) for the construction of the Nepal-Bharat Maitri Pashupati Dharmashala at Pashupatinath temple from September 2016 to August 2018. The dharmashala, a building related to religious or charitable purposes, houses pilgrims visiting the temple area. India agreed to give an additional NPR 37.23 million (about $300,000) in June 2020 for the construction of sanitary facilities at the site, which appears ongoing. After the 2015 earthquake in Nepal, India allocated $50 million in grant assistance to the reconstruction of 28 cultural heritage sites. For 12 of the 28 projects, MEA appointed the Indian National Trust for Art and Cultural Heritage (INTACH) to provide design and project management consultancy services. For the remaining 16, MEA has funded Nepali government organisations directly. It is unclear whether ASI was consulted in any of the projects under the second channel.

There have also been a few instances of assistance further away, in South America and Africa. In Bolivia, India contributed $31,000 in development assistance for illuminating the Tiwanaku archaeological site, which was completed in June 2017. In Mali, India made a one-time cash donation of $500,000 to the government for the revival of the World Heritage Site at Timbuktu, delivered in March 2017.

Four modes of engagement

Based on our analysis, India’s projects are implemented through four modalities after signing government-to-government agreements. In the first modality, as in the cases listed in Table 1, the MEA deputes the ASI to implement projects, usually in partnership with local governmental organisations. Projects such as the conservation of Ta Prohm temple, where ASI partners with the Authority for the Protection and Management of Angkor and the Region of Siem Reap (APSARA), are funded by India and implemented under the supervision of both governments.

In a second modality, the MEA merely offers economic assistance for conservation projects which are implemented by the host government. For example, the MEA is funding the projects at the Maabadhige archaeological site and the Dhiyamigili Ganduvaru palace through the National Center for Cultural Heritage (NCCH), a department of the Maldivian government.

A third modality includes MEA-funded projects abroad that are managed jointly by the host government and an Indian non-governmental organisation. This may indicate a trend towards growing involvement of Indian NGOs and civil society expertise in MEA-led development cooperation partnerships abroad. For example, the reconstruction of 12 earthquake-damaged cultural heritage sites in Nepal is managed by INTACH, based in New Delhi.

Fourth, there are also MEA-funded archaeology and conservation projects implemented by international NGOs. In Afghanistan, for example, the Indian government funded the restoration of Stor palace with implementation by the Aga Khan Trust for Culture (AKTC), based in Switzerland.

There may be instances of a fifth modality where the MEA funds projects abroad that are implemented by local NGOs based in the host country. From our survey it is unclear to what extent local implementing agencies work alongside local NGOs.

The future of India’s heritage diplomacy

Our survey maps India’s growing footprint in archaeology and conservation efforts across three continents. There are new modalities of engagement, including a growing role for non-governmental organisations and new tie ups between the Indian government and international institutions. The creation of dedicated institutional and financial resources attests to the MEA’s growing interest and investment in being more active in this increasingly competitive dimension of foreign policy. In 2021, the MEA began quoting “aid for cultural and heritage projects” as a separate form of development assistance in its annual budget.

But more will be required to sustain India’s archaeology and conservation efforts abroad in the future. For example, India may face growing demand for such initiatives. On the one hand, within India, citizens are keen to see their country involved in more archaeology and conservation efforts abroad to support the increasingly popular idea of India as a civilisational power. The success of recent books such as William Dalrymple’s The Golden Road (2024) and Sanjeev Sanyal’s The Ocean of Churn (2016) indicate a growing interest in India’s civilisational ties and attempts to study and revive them. On the other hand, there will also be growing demand from abroad; especially in Southeast Asia and across the Global South, countries will likely seek more expertise and financial support from India for their own archaeological and conservation efforts.

To deliver, India will require greater capacity to plan and implement projects in accordance with international standards. India will also have to be able to sustain these projects under difficult political or security conditions in the host country. In the past, India had to pull funds from Afghanistan’s Bala Hissar citadel after the Taliban returned to power and there were significant delays in approval for the ASI to conserve Nepal’s Pashupatinath temple.

The MEA and ASI may also benefit from closer cooperation with Indian NGOs and the private sector. Besides INTACH, organisations like the Tata Trusts Art Conservation Initiative and the Mehrangarh Museum Trust are also active in the conservation of built heritage in India and may be interested in engagements abroad.

India’s archaeology and heritage diplomacy would also benefit from more scholarship. Universities which study this area, including Jawaharlal Nehru University, Delhi University, Banaras Hindu University, South Asian University and Nalanda University, can be further supported and encouraged to develop research partnerships abroad.

The policy discourse remains thin, although recent work by the Vivekananda International Foundation (VIF) has begun analysing India’s record of heritage conservation projects abroad. More research and policy engagement will be necessary to understand the relevance of India’s civilisational identity as it continues to uncover its ancient history and leverage it for international influence and interests.

As India’s technical, economic and diplomatic capabilities increase, the memory of its civilisational and trading past will add character and influence to its modern linkages with the rest of the world

As India’s heritage diplomacy expands, New Delhi should also beware of possible backlash. Based on the experience of other countries, foreign-funded archaeology and conservation initiatives can often be politicised in a negative way. For example, the Turkish Cooperation and Coordination Organisation has conserved heritage sites in the Balkans and Africa related to the Ottoman Empire which have been criticised as a revival of “Neo-Ottoman” ambitions. Similarly, Chinese heritage projects along the Silk Roads have come under scrutiny for their political and strategic objectives as part of the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).

Despite the importance of heritage conservation for India’s civilisational identity, we find that investments in this area remain small and there are many opportunities to grow and enrich India’s heritage diplomacy in the future. As India’s technical, economic and diplomatic capabilities increase, the memory of its civilisational and trading past will add character and influence to its modern linkages with the rest of the world. India stands to benefit by deepening and accelerating its efforts to preserve the sites where that memory lies today.

 

The post India’s Heritage Diplomacy: The Case of Archaeology and Conservation first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-heritage-diplomacy-the-case-of-archaeology-and-conservation/feed/ 0 902723
India and Southern Africa: Strengthening Partnerships for Critical Minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-and-southern-africa-strengthening-partnerships-for-critical-minerals/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-and-southern-africa-strengthening-partnerships-for-critical-minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-and-southern-africa-strengthening-partnerships-for-critical-minerals/#respond Thu, 06 Mar 2025 10:41:15 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902669 As New Delhi looks to diversify its Critical Minerals partnerships, the multidimensional relationship between India and the SADC must be honed further to establish resilient supply chains, Veda Vaidyanathan and Anika Vijapur write.

The post India and Southern Africa: Strengthening Partnerships for Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
As New Delhi looks to diversify its Critical Minerals partnerships, the multidimensional relationship between India and the SADC must be honed further to establish resilient supply chains.

The National Critical Minerals Mission announced on 29 January, 2025, consists of several key components to ensure a ‘sustainable, resilient, and self-reliant critical minerals value chain in India’.  One of the core elements of this mandate is the acquisition of critical mineral assets abroad. It recognises the need to leverage existing economic and political relations with resource rich countries to enter into Critical Mineral Partnership Agreements.

Focusing on this development, a study by Veda Vaidyanathan, titled ‘India, Africa and Critical Minerals: Towards a Green Energy Partnership,’ explains why, where, and how India can build strategic collaborations with mineral-rich countries in the African continent. It identifies African priorities, highlights Indian interests, and finds synergies, presented as nine policy pathways.

The paper recommends that the South African Development Community (SADC) is a “regional country cluster” that India should deepen its engagement with.

The paper recommends that the South African Development Community (SADC) is a “regional country cluster” that India should deepen its engagement with. This recommendation is in alignment with other studies that position the SADC region as a pivotal hub for critical mineral partnerships. According to the British Geological Survey (2024), in terms of regional distribution, countries in the SADC have produced the most critical minerals between 1970-2022.

Endowed with minerals such as graphite (Mozambique and Tanzania), platinum (South Africa), copper (Zambia), nickel (Botswana and Zimbabwe), cobalt (Democratic Republic of Congo, South Africa), and titanium (Mozambique and Madagascar), the region has received substantial attention from global investors. According to the United Nations Economic Commission for Africa (UNECA), “despite the low levels of geological exploration and mapping across the region, Southern Africa hosts an estimated 25 percent of the world’s critical energy transition minerals and mining is underway for these minerals at both small scale and large scale.

This blog maps India’s political and economic engagements with ten SADC countries over the past decade – South Africa, Tanzania, Malawi, Namibia, Botswana, Zambia, Zimbabwe, Mozambique, Madagascar and the Democratic Republic of Congo (referred to as DRC in this blog) – and evaluates their sufficiency in establishing resilient critical mineral partnerships.

The timeline of 2014-2024 was chosen because India-Africa relations have significantly strengthened during this period, marked by deliberate efforts to build stronger ties across Africa. In 2015, India hosted the third iteration of the India-Africa Forum Summit (IAFS III) with participation from all 54 African countries. In 2018, the Indian Prime Minister outlined ten principles that would guide India’s engagement with countries in the continent during his address to the Parliament in Kampala, Uganda, stating that “Africa will be at the top of our priorities”.  Since then, India has increased its diplomatic footprint across Africa by opening up 18 new Embassies and High Commissions in the last decade, and accelerating the number of incoming and outgoing high level visits.

As the global demand for critical minerals intensifies, major powers such as the United States, Japan, the European Union, among others, are diversifying their supply chains to include the SADC, driven in large part by the region’s mineral wealth, but also as an attempt to mitigate supply risks.

As the global demand for critical minerals intensifies, major powers such as the United States, Japan, the European Union, among others, are diversifying their supply chains to include the SADC, driven in large part by the region’s mineral wealth, but also as an attempt to mitigate supply risks.

For context, during the 2023 G20 Summit in New Delhi, the EU and the US announced a partnership to develop the Lobito Corridor, which provides the Southern regions of the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC), northwestern Zambia and Angola greater access to regional and global markets through Lobito port. This is the first strategic economic corridor launched under the Partnership for Global Infrastructure and Investment (PGII). The US also recently signed Memorandums of Understanding (MoU) with officials from the DRC and Zambia, two major producers of cobalt. The EU signed an agreement with Namibia in 2022 and MoUs with DRC and Zambia for a partnership on critical and strategic raw materials value chains in 2023. The UK has bilateral partnerships on critical minerals with South Africa and Zambia as well. In 2023, the Japan Organization for Metals and Energy Security (JOGMEC) signed an MoU with Zambia, and a Scope of Work (SW) with Namibia and DRC to secure critical minerals. Major actors from the Gulf too are in a quest for the region’s mineral wealth. The UAE signed a $1.9 billion USD deal with DRC’s state owned mining company, Sakima, to develop at least four mines. Saudi Arabia has also signed MoUs with DRC and Zimbabwe in the last two years.

China’s role in the African critical mineral ecosystem continues to grow. It processes and refines around two thirds of the world’s critical minerals, and its recent export bans on minerals including gallium, germanium and antimony as the tech trade war with the US escalates, raises concerns for major powers. Since 2019, China’s mine ownership in Africa has increased by 21.3%, while there was a drop in the number of mines controlled by the US, Canada and Australia. A large percentage of its outward foreign direct investment in Africa is already targeted at SADC countries and it has also stepped-up acquisitions of mines in the region. In 2018, Chinese controlled mines were mainly concentrated in South Africa, DRC and Zambia, but since 2020, China has been investing heavily in Zimbabwe’s lithium mines. Similarly, between 2005 and 2020, South African mines received $3.85 billion USD in Chinese FDI through both state-owned and private enterprises.

In this complex geopolitical landscape, India should develop targeted strategies for specific countries and minerals in Africa. This blog presents an examination of existing political and economic ties to guide Indian decision makers in prioritizing countries, deploying effective tools, scaling up engagement and crafting a roadmap for enhanced collaboration.

This examination of existing political and economic ties will guide Indian decision makers in prioritizing countries, deploying effective tools, scaling up engagement and crafting a roadmap for enhanced collaboration.

A first step towards this effort, the authors have chosen two indicators and analysed them over a period of ten years from 2014-2024. This analysis of existing relationships underscores the multifaceted nature of India’s current engagement and points to areas where strengthening ties is essential.

  1. Political Relations: Mapping high level visits – made by the President, Vice President, Prime Minister, and the External Affairs Minister of India, including both state visits and other outgoing visits – coupled with India’s diplomatic footprint in these countries, its development partnerships as well as the size of the Indian diaspora, serve as strong indicators of the political and strategic attention that New Delhi has placed on countries.
  2. Economic Relations: Analysing bilateral trade and Outward Foreign Direct Investment (OFDI) from India indicates the depth of economic engagement. A particular focus on existing mineral partnerships in the form of MoU’s, are indicative of the existing frameworks of cooperation that could possibly be strengthened.

Political and Developmental Partnerships

When it comes to political relations, South Africa, which houses the largest Indian diaspora in the region, stands out as the country with the most frequent high-level visits from Indian leaders. India also has the most number of diplomatic missions in the country.

Table 1: A snapshot of the political relations and diplomatic presence from 2014-2024

s.no Country High level visits

From India

Diplomatic Presence Diaspora
1 South Africa 6 High Commission of India, Pretoria
3 Consulates: Cape Town, Durban, Johannesburg
1.7 million, 3% of South African population (June 2024)
2 Namibia 2 High Commission of India, Windhoek 450 Indians/ NRIs/PIOs

(February 2024)

3 Mozambique 2 High Commission of India, Maputo
Honorary Consul in Nampula
20,000 PIOs and 3,000 Indian Nationals
(Aug 2024)
4 Tanzania 2 High Commission of India, Dar es Salaam

Consulate General of India, Zanzibar

40,000 Indian PIOs and 15,000 – 20,000 Indian nationals

(October 2023)

5 Malawi 2 High Commission of India, Lilongwe 8,000 PIOs and 2500 NRIs
(November 2022)
6 Zambia 1 High Commission of India, Lusaka 25,000 PIOs/OCIs

And 5,000 NRIs
(October 2022)

7 Botswana 1 High Commission of India, Gaborone 6,000 NRIs/PIOs
8 Zimbabwe 1 Embassy of India, Harare 9,000 PIOs

1000 expatriates
(November 2022)

9 Madagascar 1 Embassy of India, Antananarivo 17,500 persons of Indian origin, including 3000 Indian Passport holders

(Oct 2023)

10 DRC 0 Embassy of India, Kinshasa
Honorary Consulate, Bukavu (South Kivu)
10-15,000 Indian nationals

(Sept 2023)

Source: Compiled by the authors (MEA outgoing visits; MEA Indian Missions Abroad; MEA Bilateral Briefs)

However, these indicators of political connections fail to convey the entire picture. In the absence of overt diplomatic engagement, in the form of high level visits to most of the countries barring South Africa, the Government of India (GoI) has deployed developmental partnership instruments, including Lines of Credit (LoC), Capacity Building and Technical Assistance, Grants-in-aid and Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief, to sustain relations.

Take DRC, for example. There has been no high-level visit to the country. The First Foreign Office Consultations between India DRC was held on 10 April 2024 in New Delhi,  but it is the second largest recipient of LoC’s extended by the GoI, routed through the Export-Import Bank of India, among the ten countries. This credit is estimated to amount to more than $406 million USD in the last decade. These LoCs are provided on concessional credit terms, and are aimed at supporting a wide range of development projects in, including the installation of three Solar Photovoltaic Power Projects in Karawa, Mbandaka and Lusambo provinces, hydroelectric power plants, power transmission and distribution projects, among others.

Figure 1: India’s Line of Credits to Select countries in the SADC from 2014-2024

Line of credit figure by Anika Vijapur

*All figures are in USD Million
Source: Compiled by the authors (
EXIM Bank Government of India Line of Credit Statistics)

As Figure 1 points out, the largest recipient of India’s LoCs among the ten countries is Tanzania ($860.53 million USD), followed by DRC ($406.44 million USD), Mozambique ($383 million USD), Malawi ($239.18 million USD), Zimbabwe ($19.5 million USD) and Zambia ($18 million USD) in the last decade, from 2014-2024.

Beyond LoCs, and perhaps making up for the lack of political attention, are other forms of New Delhi’s development diplomacy in the region. Through the Indian Technical and Economic Cooperation Program (ITEC), a capacity building platform of the Ministry of External Affairs, many professionals from these SADC countries have received training. For example, in 2023, over 1,700 Namibian professionals and scholars, including more than 1,400 ITEC trainees, had benefited from the capacity building assistance from India. India has also provided considerable Disaster Relief to these states, prominently during the COVID-19 pandemic. An illustration of this is the donation of 100,000 doses and the supply of 1 million doses of Covishield under the COVAX programme, to Mozambique in March 2021.

Economic Relations as an indicator of engagement

True of Indian engagement across Africa, economic factors have shaped and propelled relations, even in the face of political passivity. India and the SADC first signed a MoU on Economic Cooperation in 1997. The broad areas of cooperation included the promotion of small and medium scale industries, non-conventional energy sources, diplomacy, and enterprises development through private sector involvement. A new MoU was signed in July 2024 reinforcing many of the areas of cooperation mentioned in the first MoU, including promoting trade and investment facilitation, private sector development, and a mutual interest in green growth.

Economic relations are measured through two primary indicators in this blog: bilateral trade and Outward Foreign Direct Investment (OFDI) from India. In terms of trade volume, South Africa has the highest bilateral trade with India, followed by Tanzania and Mozambique, with significantly higher figures compared to other countries. India’s key export items to the SADC are dominated by mineral fuels and pharmaceutical products, whereas major imports from the SADC include pearls, precious stones, and metals, followed by mineral fuels, oils, and its products.

Figure 2: India’s bilateral trade with select countries from the SADC from 2014-2024

Bilateral trade figure by Anika Vijapur

*All figures are in USD Million
Source: Compiled by the authors (MEA Dashboard; Ministry of Commerce and Industry Export-Import Database)

With respect to investments, or approved OFDI by the RBI, Mozambique emerges as the top destination for Indian FDI, followed by South Africa. Conversely, Namibia and Madagascar have seen the least inflow of Indian investments. The investment flows into Mozambique are largely driven by the strategic interests of Indian companies in its coal and natural gas sectors. For example, ONGC Videsh and Oil India Ltd. jointly acquired a 20% stake in Area 1 of the Rovuma gas block for over US$5 billion. FDI is a good indicator of relations between countries because it is not only a source of financing for the receiving country, but also helps transfer knowledge and build capacity.

Figure 3: India’s Approved Overseas Direct Investment to select SADC countries from 2014 – 2024

OFDI Figure by Anika Vijapur

*All figures in USD Million
Source: Compiled by authors (EXIM Bank; RBI ODI Statistics)

Within the SADC region, Indian companies have made major investments in manufacturing, mining, construction, and energy. From April 2010 to August 2022, 14.2% of India’s investments in the SADC region were in the agriculture and mining sector. For oil and energy companies, the quest for diversifying sources of supply has driven the intensity of these investments.

Within the broad spectrum of energy partnerships, the Ministry of Mines, Government of India, has signed MoUs on cooperation on mineral resources with five out of the ten countries, namely, Zimbabwe, Zambia, Mozambique, Namibia and Malawi. The common areas of cooperation highlighted in the documents include exchange of knowledge and technology, training and capacity building, promotion of private investment and business opportunities, and developing cooperative projects pertaining to exploration and extraction of mineral resources.

The Way Forward

As India begins to strengthen its supply chains overseas, it will be important to craft country and mineral specific strategies.

While India enjoys a multidimensional relationship with countries in the SADC, this preliminary analysis finds that current political and economic engagements are insufficient for establishing resilient critical mineral partnerships. The existing foundation of development projects, a significant diaspora, increased diplomatic presence, and economic ties must be harnessed more effectively to meet India’s growing demand for these resources.

Juxtaposing India’s relative disadvantages against a geopolitically charged landscape dominated by China, requires identifying nimble policy manoeuvres to remain competitive. A reimagination of how India’s political and economic instruments can be creatively utilised, including learning from the strategies adopted by other powers already active in the SADC region, would inform India’s National Critical Mineral mission and its ambition of building international partnerships with resource rich countries.

The disconnect between India’s strategic action and commercial activity also warrants attention. Crucial geographies, such as the DRC which produces over 80% of the world’s cobalt, presents a significant opportunity for India. However, this is not being fully realized, as evidenced by the slow progress of mineral cooperation agreements, absence of high-level visits, despite growing bilateral trade, and Indian investment. The mining related conflicts and the growing influence of armed groups in the region only complicates this further.

As India begins to strengthen its supply chains overseas, it will be important to craft country and mineral specific strategies. In this initial assessment, South Africa and Mozambique emerge as the strongest partners for India across most dimensions of engagement. Tanzania holds a high position as a trade partner and a recipient of India’s development assistance, while Zambia is one of the top three recipients of Indian outward FDI. Towards that end, future directions of inquiry for this research will include mapping the critical mineral landscape in these countries, including an overview of existing governance, regulatory frameworks and local content policies, and exploring the potential for bilateral, trilateral, and multilateral partnerships.

Juxtaposing India’s relative disadvantages against a geopolitically charged landscape dominated by China, requires identifying nimble policy manoeuvres to remain competitive. A reimagination of how India’s political and economic instruments can be creatively utilised, including learning from the strategies adopted by other powers already active in the SADC region, would inform India’s National Critical Mineral mission and its ambition of building international partnerships with resource rich countries.

The post India and Southern Africa: Strengthening Partnerships for Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-and-southern-africa-strengthening-partnerships-for-critical-minerals/feed/ 0 902669
Union Budget 2025-26: Long Road Ahead for India’s Critical Minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/union-budget-2025-26-long-road-ahead-for-indias-critical-minerals/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=union-budget-2025-26-long-road-ahead-for-indias-critical-minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/union-budget-2025-26-long-road-ahead-for-indias-critical-minerals/#respond Tue, 25 Feb 2025 08:57:28 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902615 The Union Budget 2025-26 has emphasised reforms in the mining sector. To ensure requisite availabilities of critical minerals, customs duty rates on 12 critical minerals have been brought down to zero along with cobalt powder, waste and scraps of lithium, lead and zinc, Rajesh Chadha and Karthik Bansal elaborate on this subject.

The post Union Budget 2025-26: Long Road Ahead for India’s Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

The Union Budget 2025-26 has emphasised reforms in the mining sector. To ensure requisite availabilities of critical minerals, customs duty rates on 12 critical minerals have been brought down to zero along with cobalt powder, waste and scraps of lithium, lead and zinc.

India, as part of its climate action strategy, has committed to meet net zero emissions by 2070 and aims to achieve 50% cumulative electric power installed capacity from clean energy sources by 2030. Such clean energy transition is fuelled by the use of select minerals, including copper, cobalt, graphite, lithium, nickel, neodymium and silicon, referred to as energy transition critical minerals. Apart from green technologies, critical minerals also play an important role in national defence, informational technology, aviation, and space research.While extraction of critical minerals has a high concentration in a few countries, processing concentration is even higher. In this piece, we analyse the recent developments in government policies that focus on improving the mining sector and the challenges that require further consideration. India must consider all its options and prepare its future path to ensure that it meets its promises on green transition. 

While extraction of critical minerals has a high concentration in a few countries, processing concentration is even higher. India must consider all its options and prepare its future path to ensure that it meets its promises on green transition. 

The Union Budget 2025-26 has emphasised reforms in the mining sector, including those for minor minerals. A policy design for the recovery of critical minerals from tailings has also been envisaged. India lacks in extraction and processing of such minerals. To ensure requisite availabilities of critical minerals, customs duty rates on 12 critical minerals have been brought down to zero along with cobalt powder, waste and scraps of lithium, lead and zinc. 

Critical minerals have been an important policy focus of the central government in recent years. In the earlier Union Budget, 2024-25, the government declared the intention of setting up a Critical Mineral Mission for boosting domestic production, recycling of critical minerals, and acquisition of critical mineral assets abroad with a mandate to include technology development, a skilled workforce, and suitable financing mechanisms. It was announced that the government would commence the auction of offshore blocks for mining. The customs duty on 25 critical minerals was reduced to zero. These minerals include, among others, copper, cobalt, lithium, nickel and rare earth elements. In addition, the basic customs duty rates on two more minerals, graphite and silicon, were reduced. 

In January 2025, the Union Cabinet approved the launch of the National Critical Mineral Mission (NCMM) to establish an effective framework for India’s self-reliance in the critical mineral sector with an allocation of Rs.16,300 crore. The PSUs are expected to contribute investment worth Rs.18,000 crore. The Mission will encompass all stages of the value chain, including mineral exploration, mining, beneficiation, processing, and recovery from end-of-life products. The aim is to intensify exploration, create fast-track post-lease regulatory approvals and offer financial incentives promoting the recovery of these minerals from overburden and tailings. The dual objectives of the NCMM align with CSEP’s work on India’s critical mineral supply chains: 

  1. To secure India’s critical mineral supply chains by ensuring mineral availability from domestic and foreign sources. 
  2. Strengthening the value chains by enhancing technological, regulatory, and financial ecosystems to foster innovation, skill development, and global competitiveness in mineral exploration, mining, beneficiation, processing and recycling. 

In the absence of abundant domestic production of these minerals, India has to rely on global supply chains. The primary challenges in accessing minerals are the concentration extraction and processing in a few countries at different stages of the supply chain. CSEP’s work on assessing the criticality of minerals identified 23 minerals critical for green technology transition in April 2023. Subsequently, the Ministry of Mines came out with India’s first list of 30 critical minerals in June 2023.  

Domestically, the auction regime has not encouraged investments in critical mineral extraction. Four tranches of critical mineral auctions during 2023-24, where 48 blocks were announced and only 24 of them were successfully auctioned.

A recent CSEP study on critical mineral supply chains highlights the challenges faced, both globally and locally, by policymakers in building resilient mineral supply chains for India. Domestically, the auction regime has not encouraged investments in critical mineral extraction. Four tranches of critical mineral auctions during 2023-24, where 48 blocks were announced and only 24 of them were successfully auctioned. The fifth tranche of critical mineral auctions was announced in January 2025 for 15 blocks. The recent auctions have been criticised due to irrationally high bids and a lack of interest in mining key critical minerals like lithium, nickel, cobalt and REE. With regard to the offshore minerals, the first tranche was announced in December 2024 for 13 blocks off the coast of Kerala, Gujarat and the Great Nicobar Islands. Conservation of marine environment in offshore mining areas cannot be overlooked and the government must implement strict regulatory norms in the region. 

The critical minerals mission must focus on reducing India’s dependence on the global supply chains as these are vulnerable to geopolitical risks, price fluctuations and the dominance of a few players, resulting in various bottlenecks. 

The critical minerals mission must focus on reducing India’s dependence on the global supply chains as these are vulnerable to geopolitical risks, price fluctuations and the dominance of a few players, resulting in various bottlenecks. Lowering custom duties on mineral concentrates, mid-stream products, and scraps can be beneficial for the sector, provided there are enough incentives for manufacturers to procure the raw materials domestically. Currently, there are no companies processing minerals at a large scale for clean energy technologies in India and hence, the manufacturers rely on imports. 

A recent report on Critical Energy Transition Minerals for India, a joint research project of CEEW, CSEP, ICRIER, IISD and SSEF, carries forward the message of the important role of Critical Energy Transition Minerals (CETMs) being essential for ensuring the availability of clean energy technologies, encompassing wind turbines, solar panels, batteries, EVs and the grid. The report further establishes that requisite supply chains must be resilient and sustainable so that the private actors and the government can meet the ambitious climate targets.  

India’s strategic actions can help mitigate risks and position the country as a leader in clean energy technology. Concerted efforts are required in domestic exploration, mining, processing, international cooperation, and the promotion of sustainable mining practices. India can thus secure its mineral future and support its broader energy transition goals while promoting environmental conservation and economic growth. 

The post Union Budget 2025-26: Long Road Ahead for India’s Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/union-budget-2025-26-long-road-ahead-for-indias-critical-minerals/feed/ 0 902615
Stalemate – How Consumers are Losing in the Fight Between the Regulator and Discoms in Delhi http://stg.csep.org/blog/stalemate-how-consumers-are-losing-in-the-fight-between-the-regulator-and-discoms-in-delhi/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=stalemate-how-consumers-are-losing-in-the-fight-between-the-regulator-and-discoms-in-delhi http://stg.csep.org/blog/stalemate-how-consumers-are-losing-in-the-fight-between-the-regulator-and-discoms-in-delhi/#respond Thu, 06 Feb 2025 09:57:46 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902500 Ashwini Chitnis, Aparajita Nair Dmonty & Daljit Singh examine the financial situation of Delhi’s discoms and draw lessons about the role of the regulatory commission in shaping these outcomes.

The post Stalemate – How Consumers are Losing in the Fight Between the Regulator and Discoms in Delhi first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Distribution companies (discoms) are the cornerstone of the electricity supply chain. As monopoly retail suppliers, they are responsible for operating and maintaining the state-wide distribution network and ensuring reliable supply quality at affordable prices for all consumers. Despite their importance, most Indian state discoms have long been financially stressed, operationally inefficient, and loss-making.

While Odisha’s first attempt failed, Delhi has demonstrated significant improvements in operational efficiency and supply quality. …However, the financial health of Delhi’s distribution sector continues to be a cause of concern.

So far, only Odisha and Delhi have opted for distribution privatisation as a reform measure to improve the discom’s financial health. While Odisha’s first attempt failed[1], Delhi has demonstrated significant improvements in operational efficiency and supply quality. For example, the aggregate technical and commercial (AT&C) losses in Delhi today are less than 6.5%, down from over 45%-60% at the time of privatisation. This is a remarkable achievement, considering that all-India average AT&C losses are still at 15%. The Delhi government’s power department website claims that the reform exercise has been a ‘great success’ and is a ‘showcase model’ for other states to follow. However, the financial health of Delhi’s distribution sector continues to be a cause of concern. Given this background, we examine the financial situation of Delhi’s discoms and draw lessons about the role of the regulatory commission in shaping these outcomes.

1.     A brief overview of Delhi’s distribution sector

In 2002, the Delhi Vidyut Board (DVB), a vertically integrated state-owned electricity supply agency, was unbundled into separate companies dealing with generation, transmission, and distribution. The distribution business was privatised, and three new discoms, i.e. BSES Rajdhani Power Limited (BRPL), BSES Yamuna Power Limited (BYPL), and Tata Power Delhi Distribution Limited (TPDDL, earlier NDPL), were formed.[2] The Government of the National Capital Territory of Delhi (GNCTD) holds 49% equity in the three discoms, with the respective private owners holding 51%. This blog only focuses on the three private discoms (BRPL, BYPL, and TPDDL) since they constitute the bulk of Delhi’s distribution sector (around 93%) and are of interest from a structural reform point of view.

As seen from Table 1, the Reliance group-owned discoms (BRPL and BYPL) cater to roughly 70% of the total consumers and 65% of the total sales. The New Delhi Municipal Council (NDMC) also manages distribution business in some areas. The Delhi Electricity Regulatory Commission (DERC) is the state regulator that oversees these entities, regulates all their operations and finances, and sets consumer tariffs. Delhi is a highly urbanised metropolitan area; most sales are to residential and commercial consumer categories. Figure 1 shows the sales mix of each discom. Barring the exception of TPDDL, sales to industrial consumers are 5% or less. As such, there isn’t much scope for cross-subsidisation. The average cost of power purchase is also high.[3] The retail tariff is the same across Delhi.

Table 1: A brief overview of the distribution companies in Delhi FY 2021-22

Discom  Total No of consumers (lakh)  Share in the total sales (%)  Details regarding the area of supply  Total Approved ARR (Rs Cr)  Avg cost per kWh of sales (approved) Rs/kWh  Avg cost of power purchase (approved) Rs/kWh 
BRPL 31  42%  22 divisions across the South and West areas of Delhi. (~ 700 sq km)  8,815  7.68  5.73 
BYPL  19  22%  14 divisions across South-East, North-East & Central Delhi (~200 sq km)  4,461  7.25  4.76 
TPDDL 20  30%  North and North-west Delhi (~510 sq km)  6,939  7.93  5.91 

 Source: (DERC, 2024a), (DERC, 2024b), (DERC, 2024c).

Figure 1: Category-wise energy sales (Actual) for FY 2022-23

Source: (BRPL, 2024), (BYPL, 2024) and (TPDDL, 2024).

2.     Tariff setting and creation of regulatory assets

Under the Electricity Act 2003 (EAct 2003), state Electricity Regulatory Commissions (ERCs) review discom expenditures, approving only prudent costs for recovery through consumer tariffs. While this aims to promote efficient spending, information asymmetries complicate prudence assessments. Moreover, the “cost-plus” regulation model can incentivise inflated capital expenditures, as discoms earn a fixed return (16% post-tax) on equity investments. ERCs must, therefore, balance efficiency with investment needs, as excessive cost disallowances can hurt discom performance. While ERCs hold significant powers, they are also accountable for their decisions. They must undertake a public process for crucial issues such as tariff determination, regulation formulation and license issuance. All regulatory orders must be reasoned and are open to challenge before  Appellate Tribunal for Electricity (APTEL) and the Supreme Court.

When approved costs require significant tariff hikes (e.g., over 12%-15%), ERCs may partially defer cost recovery by creating ‘regulatory assets’. This eases the immediate burden on consumers but shifts it to future consumers. This practice often triggers a cycle of rising losses and debt, delayed generator payments, increased borrowing, and reduced investments in network upgrades. While the creation of regulatory assets is strongly discouraged through policy guidelines (MoP, 2016) (MoP, 2023), the practice continues with reported regulatory assets for all discoms in the country standing at INR 97,000 crores in FY 2023 (PFC, 2024). The figure is likely to be an underestimate due to true-up delays and pending litigation.

In addition to the general problems with regulatory assets, Delhi’s case has a unique feature. Here, the DERC and the discoms disagree on the quantum of the regulatory assets.

In addition to the general problems with regulatory assets, Delhi’s case has a unique feature. Here, the DERC and the discoms disagree on the quantum of the regulatory assets. The discoms refer to such amounts, which, in their opinion, are legitimate but yet to be acknowledged by the DERC as ‘unrecognised regulatory assets’. Figure 2 shows the regulatory assets approved by the DERC till FY 2021-22 and the unrecognised regulatory assets projected discoms till FY 2023. DERC has approved INR 27,200 crore as regulatory assets for the three discoms, but including the unrecognised assets (INR 64,316 crore) brings the total to INR 91,516 crore—indicating that only a third of the claimed assets are recognised by DERC.

Figure 2: Recognised and Unrecognised regulatory assets of Delhi Discoms

Source: (BRPL, 2024) (BYPL, 2024) (TPDDL, 2024)

3.     Where do the unrecognised regulatory assets come from?

Like most Indian states, Delhi, too, has seen cycles of steep tariff increases followed by almost no tariff revision for a few years. Over time, the gap between the Annual Revenue Requirement (ARR) sought by the discoms and approved by the DERC started increasing. Between FY 2009-10 and FY 2021-22, DERC, on average, disallowed 15%-18% of the ARR projected by the discoms. Most disallowances were related to capex, power purchase and operational costs. In some years, the disallowances for the BSES discoms were as high as 30%-40% of the proposed ARR.

almost all the tariff orders since 2008 have been challenged in one or more fora. Barring a few exceptions, most are yet to achieve finality. …DERC has also challenged some of the APTEL judgements that overruled its decisions and delayed their implementation until there was a Supreme Court ruling. As a result of this litigation, establishing the “final” approved ARR for any given financial year has become incredibly difficult. 

Disallowed costs are ineligible for recovery through tariff. If the discoms have incurred the claimed costs, disallowance can adversely affect their balance sheets, profitability and ability to leverage funds. Unsurprisingly, they contest such regulatory decisions through appeals before the APTEL and the Supreme Court[4].  Table 2 shows that almost all the tariff orders since 2008 have been challenged in one or more fora. Barring a few exceptions, most are yet to achieve finality.

Table 2: Implementation status of DERC’s tariff orders

Tariff order year Status of orders for BSES discoms Status of orders for TPDDL
2008 Attained finality in 2021 Pending before the Supreme Court
2009 Attained finality in 2021 Attained finality in 2021
2011 Attained finality in 2021 Pending before the Supreme Court
2012 Attained finality in 2022 Pending before the Supreme Court
2013 Pending before the APTEL Unclear
2014 Attained finality in 2021 Pending before the Supreme Court
2015 Attained finality in 2021 Unclear
2016 Pending before the APTEL Pending before the APTEL
2017 Pending before the APTEL Pending before the APTEL
2018 Pending before the APTEL Pending before the APTEL
2019 Pending before the APTEL Pending before the APTEL
2020 Pending before the APTEL Pending before the APTEL
2021 Unclear Pending before the APTEL
2022 Unclear Pending before the APTEL

Source: (BRPL, 2024) (BYPL, 2024) (TPDDL, 2024).

Further, it’s not just the discoms that challenge the DERC orders. DERC has also challenged some of the APTEL judgements that overruled its decisions and delayed their implementation until there was a Supreme Court ruling. As a result of this litigation, establishing the “final” approved ARR for any given financial year has become incredibly difficult. Both discoms and the DERC assume that their contentions will be upheld until the highest authority strikes them down. This legal uncertainty is at the root of Delhi’s unrecognised regulatory assets.

4.     Cost of disputes and implementation delays

…out of the total unrecognised regulatory assets of INR 64,316 crore the principal is INR 22,247 crore or only 35%. The carrying cost is the remaining 65% or INR 42,069 crore. Further delays will likely lead to more carrying costs. When the litigation eventually ends, the consumer will have to pay all the allowed costs with interest. 

Figure 3 shows that out of the total unrecognised regulatory assets of INR 64,316 crore the principal is INR 22,247 crore or only 35%. The carrying cost is the remaining 65% or INR 42,069 crore. This is a shocking waste of public money. To put the carrying cost amount in perspective, it is around 66% of Delhi’s total budget expenditure in FY 2023 (GNCTD, 2024). Note that this is the status as of FY 2024. Further delays will likely lead to more carrying costs. When the litigation eventually ends, the consumer will have to pay all the allowed costs with interest. Unfortunately, they have little or no say in these matters.

DERC is perhaps the only ERC that has undertaken physical verification of assets created by the discoms through third-party independent audits. While the intent is commendable, the long delay in completing the exercise defeats the purpose.

DERC is perhaps the only ERC that has undertaken physical verification of assets created by the discoms through third-party independent audits. While the intent is commendable, the long delay in completing the exercise defeats the purpose. In May 2024, DERC issued orders to allow provisional relief to the discoms for capital expenditure undertaken from FY 2004-05 to FY 2015-16 (DERC, 2024). This implies a delay of around 8-18 years in approving the capex. Such a delay is hard to justify, especially given the cost it imposes on consumers.

Figure 3: Breakdown of the (Unrecognised) Regulatory assets projected by Discoms till FY 2022-23

 

 

 

 

Source: Compilation from the latest tariff and true-up petitions (BRPL, 2024) (BYPL, 2024) (TPDDL, 2024).

5.     Disagreement on the rules of the game

Another worrisome aspect is the extent of the disagreements between DERC and the discoms. They disagree not only on the cost claims but also on the regulations for tariff-setting including those for developing business plans.

Another worrisome aspect is the extent of the disagreements between DERC and the discoms. They disagree not only on the cost claims but also on the regulations for tariff-setting including those for developing business plans. Table 3 gives the details of the writs filed by TPDDL in this regard.  If the regulator and the utilities disagree on even the regulatory framework, it is no surprise that they are at loggerheads on cost approvals. Such an adversarial environment goes against the spirit of the adjudicatory process envisaged under the EAct 2003 and erodes institutional credibility.

Table 3: Details of Writs filed by TPDDL challenging DERC’s regulations.

Forum Case no Details
High Court WP 3573/2020 Petition challenging the legality and validity of Regulation 23 of the DERC (Business Plan) Regulations, 2019, about legal, professional and O&M expenses.
High Court WP 6724/2023 Writ Petition against DERC Business Plan Regulations 2023 against the issue of ROE (Reg 20 (1) and Reg 20 (2)), O&M (Reg 23(4), 23(5), 23(7), 23(10) and 23(11)) Expenses and Banking (Reg 29(3)).
Supreme Court C.A. 12287 /2016 Appeal against the judgment of the Delhi High Court in W.P. 203/2012, which challenged the 2nd MYT Regulations, 2011.

Source: (TPDDL, 2024, p. 13)

6.     Lessons and the way forward

Delhi’s experience shows that deep discord between the regulator and the utilities will ultimately hurt consumers the most. Plus, such endless litigation defeats the purpose of establishing a quasi-judicial regulatory institution tasked with speedily resolving matters transparently, using sound techno-economic reasoning and participatory processes. Remedial steps to limit the financial impacts on consumers of this apparent breakdown of the regulatory process are lacking.

Delhi’s fraught regulatory process and endless litigation should remind us that bringing in the private sector can improve efficiency but maintaining the financial health of the discom remains a challenge. Establishing a transparent and participatory regulatory process with regulators who are responsive to all stakeholders and sensitive to the sector’s needs remains a necessary condition for transforming discoms’ financial health. …Other states such as Uttar Pradesh that are about to undertake structural reforms should heed this crucial lesson from the experience in Delhi.

Additionally, the licenses of the three discoms will expire in March 2029, just four years from now (DERC, 2004). The massive quantum of regulatory assets can pose challenges in designing new frameworks for the next license period. The government and DERC must recognise this and act urgently.

More broadly, given the multitude of challenges faced by Indian state discoms, analysts and policymakers often advocate for privatisation as a solution. In Delhi’s case, it has indeed resulted in an unprecedented improvement in operational efficiency and supply and service quality. However, despite these significant benefits, the problems of under-recoveries of revenue and regulatory assets remain.

Delhi’s fraught regulatory process and endless litigation should remind us that bringing in the private sector can improve efficiency but maintaining the financial health of the discom remains a challenge. Establishing a transparent and participatory regulatory process with regulators who are responsive to all stakeholders and sensitive to the sector’s needs remains a necessary condition for transforming discoms’ financial health. Without this hard work of building and sustaining a robust and credible regulatory institution, just a change in ownership will be insufficient to bring about a financial turnaround. Other states such as Uttar Pradesh that are about to undertake structural reforms should heed this crucial lesson from the experience in Delhi.

References

BRPL. (2024, Nov). BRPL Petition for Truing-up upto FY 2022-23 & ARR for FY 2024-25. Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/sites/default/files/BRPL%20Petition%20for%20True-up%20of%20FY%202022-23%20and%20ARR%20for%20FY%202024-25.zip

BYPL. (2024, Nov). BYPL Petition for Truing-up upto FY 2022-23 & ARR for FY 2024-25. Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/sites/default/files/BYPL%20Petition%20for%20True-up%20of%20FY%202022-23%20and%20ARR%20for%20FY%202024-25.zip

Delhi Government. (n.d.). About Us page. Retrieved from Power Department, Government of NCT of Delhi: https://power.delhi.gov.in/power/about-us

Delhi SLDC. (2024). State Load Despatch Centre, Delhi . Retrieved from Annual report 2023-24: https://www.delhisldc.org/Resources/ANNUAL%20REPORT%202023-24.pdf

DERC. (2004). License issued to utilities BRPL, BYPL and TPDDL. Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/license-issued-to-utilities

DERC. (2024, May). Review of Capitalization and Physical Verification of assets of BSES Yamuna Power Ltd. for the Financial Year 2004-2005 to 2015-16 . Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/sites/default/files/O%20in%20PV_BYPL%20-%2003.0rder5.2024.pdf

DERC. (2024a, July). True Up Order FY 2020-21 for BSES Yamuna Power Limited. Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/sites/default/files/True-up%20of%20FY%202020-21_BYPL.pdf

DERC. (2024b, July). True Up Order FY 2020-21 for BSES Rajdhani Power Limited. . Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/sites/default/files/True-up%20of%20FY%202020-21_BRPL.pdf

DERC. (2024c, July). True Up Order FY 2020-21 for Tata Power Delhi Distribution Limited. Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/sites/default/files/True-up%20of%20FY%202020-21_TPDDL.pdf

GNCTD. (2024, Mar). Government of the National Capital Territory of Delhi (GNCTD) . Retrieved from Budget at a Glance: https://finance.delhi.gov.in/sites/default/files/Finance/generic_multiple_files/budget_at_a_glance_2024-25.pdf

MoP. (2016). National Tariff Policy 2016. Retrieved from http://powermin.gov.in/sites/default/files/webform/notices/Tariff_Policy-Resolution_Dated_28012016.pdf

MoP. (2023, Jul). The Electricity (Third Amendment) Rules, 2023. Retrieved from https://powermin.gov.in/sites/default/files/Electricity_third_Amendment_Rules_alongwith_relevent_previous_amendments.pdf

NDMC. (2022, Nov). True-up Petition for FY 2021-22. Retrieved from https://www.ndmc.gov.in/departments/Departments/Commercial/TrueupPetition2021-22.pdf

NDMC. (2024, Dec). NDMC Electricity II. Retrieved from https://www.ndmc.gov.in/departments/electricity_ii.aspx

PFC. (2024, Apr). Report on Performance of Power Utilities 2022-23 (updated up to April 2024). Retrieved from https://www.pfcindia.com/ensite/DocumentRepository/ckfinder/files/Operations/Performance_Reports_of_State_Power_Utilities/Report%20Database%202022-23%20-%20updated%20up%20to%20April%202024EntityApr.pdf

TPDDL. (2024, Nov). TPDDL Petition for Truing-up upto FY 2022-23 & ARR for FY 2024-25. Retrieved from https://www.derc.gov.in/arr-true-up-myt-petitions

The post Stalemate – How Consumers are Losing in the Fight Between the Regulator and Discoms in Delhi first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/stalemate-how-consumers-are-losing-in-the-fight-between-the-regulator-and-discoms-in-delhi/feed/ 0 902500
The Untapped Potential of Railways in India’s Connectivity Strategy http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-untapped-potential-of-railways-in-indias-connectivity-strategy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-untapped-potential-of-railways-in-indias-connectivity-strategy http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-untapped-potential-of-railways-in-indias-connectivity-strategy/#respond Thu, 06 Feb 2025 08:13:09 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902496 India’s efforts in this area have seen some progress in recent years, but the gains have been insufficient to unlock the true potential of cross-border railways as a game-changer for regional trade, writes Riya Sinha.

The post The Untapped Potential of Railways in India’s Connectivity Strategy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Cross-border railways are a critical neglected link in New Delhi’s connectivity strategy in its neighbourhood. With freight cost cheaper than roadways over longer distances, less time-consuming logistics and a greener mode of transportation, railways offer distinct advantages that other modes of transportation do not. India’s efforts in this area have seen some progress in recent years, but the gains have been insufficient to unlock the true potential of cross-border railways as a game-changer for regional trade.

India’s foray into railway connectivity over the past decade has been steered by geostrategic compulsions rather than economic dividends.

India’s foray into railway connectivity over the past decade has been steered by geostrategic compulsions rather than economic dividends.  In Eastern South Asia, six out of seven railway lines with Bangladesh have been revived. New railway lines connecting India and Nepal have been completed. In the Northeast Region (NER), railways are being constructed for the first time and extended to the border with Myanmar. Plans are also underway to develop five railway lines with Bhutan, including one to the Gelephu Mindfulness City. While these developments mark important milestones, the failure to address persistent ground level issues has rendered cross-border freight movement via railways limited at less than 4%.

Cross-Border Railway Connectivity Matters

A recent study by the Centre for Social and Economic Progress, Express Routes: India’s Railway Connectivity With South Asia, highlights the drivers behind India’s investment in cross-border railways. Economically, railways offer an opportunity to tap into the region’s burgeoning growth and enhance trade competitiveness. Politically, it aligns with India’s ‘Neighbourhood First’ and ‘Act East’ policies, fostering regional cooperation.

At the geostrategic level, railway connectivity provides New Delhi a counterbalance to China’s growing influence through infrastructure projects in South Asia under the Belt and Road Initiative. India’s expertise in railway development, particularly tunnelling in hilly areas, provides it with a competitive strategy to strengthen ties with its neighbours and project soft power in the region. While India has advanced railway links with Nepal such as the Jayanagar – Bijalpura link, comparatively, China’s rail project, including the Kerung (Tibet) – Kathmandu railway line, still at the feasibility stage. For India and its neighbouring countries, improving railway connectivity is not merely a logistical or environmental effort. It is also a testament to the evolving geopolitical landscape, strategic ambitions, and developmental imperatives of the region.

For India and its neighbouring countries, improving railway connectivity is not merely a logistical or environmental effort. It is also a testament to the evolving geopolitical landscape, strategic ambitions, and developmental imperatives of the region.

For years, studies by several multilateral, regional and national institutions have highlighted the potential of cross-border railways, including through UNESCAP’s ambitious Trans Asian Railway Network, adopted by countries including Bangladesh, India, Myanmar, Nepal, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, and Thailand in 2006. New Delhi’s own 2014 India Transport Report underscored the promise of leveraging railways to strengthen regional connectivity.

However, to fully utilise the potential of cross-border railway connectivity, several challenges need to be addressed. First, inadequate infrastructure remains a key problem. Existing railway infrastructure in many parts of South Asia is outdated and ill-equipped to handle modern cargo needs. Poor maintenance and limited investment in border facilities exacerbate inefficiencies. Second, the lack of harmonised Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) for cross-border rail operations creates delays and inefficiencies in trade flows. Standardisation is essential for seamless operations and cargo movement. Third, cross-border railway projects often face hurdles due to concerns about smuggling, terrorism, and other security risks. These concerns hinder trust and cooperation between countries. Finally, the private sector’s involvement in cross-border railway development and operations remains minimal, further restricting innovation and efficiency.

Enablers for Change

To unlock the potential of cross-border railways, India and its neighbours must focus on a range of enablers, both at the policy and ground-levels.

First, enhanced coordination between governments, railway authorities, and the security establishment is crucial to address policy bottlenecks, infrastructure development and streamline cross-border operations. In the security-sensitive border areas, joint patrolling and shared security protocols, for example, can foster trust and cooperation.

India’s strategic advantage in its neighbourhood lies in its capacity to undertake and execute infrastructure projects through robust development cooperation mechanisms, backed by financial tools such as grants and LoCs.

Second, New Delhi must leverage its development cooperation. India’s strategic advantage in its neighbourhood lies in its capacity to undertake and execute infrastructure projects through robust development cooperation mechanisms, backed by financial tools such as grants and LoCs. This should also extend beyond financial assistance to include transferring expertise, technology, and best practices in railway management and operations, and training programmes for railway staff and drivers, covering technical qualifications and language skills.

Finally, encouraging private sector investment through public-private partnerships and incentives can spur innovation and improve service delivery. Leveraging private sector expertise and funding would enable countries like Nepal and Bangladesh to reduce its reliance on geopolitical powers and create a more resilient and efficient railway network, which would, in turn, foster stronger regional connectivity and economic growth.

The post The Untapped Potential of Railways in India’s Connectivity Strategy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-untapped-potential-of-railways-in-indias-connectivity-strategy/feed/ 0 902496
Raising Female Employment in South Asia, One Step at a Time http://stg.csep.org/blog/raising-female-employment-in-south-asia-one-step-at-a-time/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=raising-female-employment-in-south-asia-one-step-at-a-time http://stg.csep.org/blog/raising-female-employment-in-south-asia-one-step-at-a-time/#respond Thu, 30 Jan 2025 06:03:13 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902464 Addressing safety, social networks, training, and hiring discrimination can help break barriers to women’s employment in South Asia, but shifting social norms remains crucial for lasting change.

The post Raising Female Employment in South Asia, One Step at a Time first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
South Asia’s female labor force participation today remains among the lowest in the world: More than 400 million working-age women in the region are outside of the labor force, which constitutes a significant output loss. South Asia’s working women face supply-side and demand-side obstacles, as well as unfavorable social norms.

A recent conference, co-hosted by the Centre for Social and Economic Progress (CSEP) and the World Bank, explored policies that could help raise female labor force participation in South Asia.

Read the entire blog here

The post Raising Female Employment in South Asia, One Step at a Time first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/raising-female-employment-in-south-asia-one-step-at-a-time/feed/ 0 902464
Strengthening India-US Cooperation on Critical Minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/strengthening-us-india-cooperation-on-critical-minerals/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=strengthening-us-india-cooperation-on-critical-minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/strengthening-us-india-cooperation-on-critical-minerals/#respond Sat, 21 Dec 2024 12:44:20 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902118 The two nations can build a resilient and diversified supply chain for critical minerals. India’s ambition to become a global manufacturing hub is advancing rapidly, driven by its renewable energy goals. Meanwhile, the U.S. brings technological expertise and significant financial resources to the table, Anindita Sinh writes.

The post Strengthening India-US Cooperation on Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Introduction

Critical minerals are a crucial part of the India-United States (US) bilateral partnership with developments such as the Initiative on Critical and Emerging Technologies (iCET) and the signing of the recent (October 2024) Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) on critical minerals supply chains. The MoU, which is one of few examples of India’s bilateral cooperation on critical minerals. It aims to leverage ‘the two countries’ complementary strengths to ensure greater resilience in the critical minerals sector’.

The India-US partnership is increasingly focused on developing closer ties through technology and clean energy cooperation in the critical minerals sector. Some priority areas of the MoU therefore include ‘identifying equipment, services, policies, and best practices to facilitate the mutually beneficial commercial development of US and Indian critical minerals’ along the global supply chains.

Growing demand for a clean energy transition is driving more countries to look for diversified supply sources for critical minerals. In the race to power a green economic future, critical minerals like lithium, cobalt, and rare earth elements are essential resources driving the global shift to clean energy, advanced technology, and defence innovation. Yet, the world faces a stark reality: China controls 60% of global rare earth mining and a staggering 80% of its processing capacity, creating an overdependence on a single nation. Recently, trade war tensions escalated between China and the US with the Biden administration’s crackdown on China’s semiconductor industry. In retaliation, Beijing banned exports of key critical minerals to the US, citing ‘dual-use’ concerns. This highlights the need to diversify supply chains to reduce reliance on a single dominant supplier.

As the second and third highest emitters global CO₂, both the United States (13%) and India (8%) are rapidly moving towards ensuring a green energy transition. For India, with its ambitious target of achieving 500 GW of renewable energy capacity by 2030 and electrifying 30% of its vehicles, the stakes couldn’t be higher. Meanwhile, the US, with over $17 million in investments to secure critical mineral supply chains, is ramping up efforts to counter China’s quasi-monopoly.

This is where an India-US partnership becomes not merely beneficial but a strategic imperative. The two nations can build a resilient and diversified supply chain for critical minerals. India’s ambition to become a global manufacturing hub is advancing rapidly, driven by its renewable energy goals. Meanwhile, the U.S. brings technological expertise and significant financial resources to the table. These strengths create the foundation for a strong and mutually beneficial partnership. Together, they can secure their energy transitions, boost bilateral trade (already at a record $191 billion in 2022), and create a powerful counterweight to China.

Together, they can secure their energy transitions, boost bilateral trade (already at a record $191 billion in 2022), and create a powerful counterweight to China.

The question, therefore, is less about why India and the US should partner on critical minerals—and more about finding ways of how they can turn this opportunity into a transformative partnership. After outlining the history of the India-US partnership, this article goes into laying out why the two should collaborate in the critical minerals sector, highlighting the 80% overlap between the lists of minerals for both countries. It discusses how critical minerals cooperation is and can be further embedded into the climate and energy partnership. It also gives some policy options to enhance collaboration in the sector.

Growing role of energy, tech and trade nexus in the India-US partnership

Critical minerals have emerged as a cornerstone of the growing India-US partnership, strengthening their energy, technology, and trade linkages. As India’s External Affairs Minister highlighted, both countries “value the strides we are making in our tech collaboration and economic partnership”.  This bilateral relationship is founded on shared interests, democratic values, strategic alignment, and economic potential, evolving into a robust partnership over three decades. Chietigj Bajpaee identifies three pillars: shared democratic values, countering China, and India’s economic growth.

India’s growing economy, projected to be the third largest by 2030, aligns with US ‘friendshoring’ strategies to reduce reliance on China. Shared goals include building resilient supply chains, expanding collaboration in emerging technologies like clean energy, semiconductors, and critical minerals, and tapping into India’s digital and information technology (IT) strengths. Despite challenges like infrastructure and protectionism, India’s aspirations as a manufacturing hub complement US interests, further strengthening this vital partnership. India’s growing influence in critical and emerging technologies also creates opportunities for collaboration with the US, particularly in high-value sectors like clean energy, semiconductors, and critical minerals.

India’s growing influence in critical and emerging technologies also creates opportunities for collaboration with the US, particularly in high-value sectors like clean energy, semiconductors, and critical minerals.

India and the US have witnessed a rapid evolution in their collaboration on energy, climate, and technology, driven by a convergence of strategic interests and shared global challenges. Key initiatives such as the U.S.-India Climate and Clean Energy Agenda 2030 Partnership and the Strategic Clean Energy Partnership (SCEP) reflect the growing alignment between the two nations on energy security and climate resilience. These frameworks emphasise joint efforts in clean energy innovation, decarbonisation technologies, and sustainable infrastructure, positioning the partnership as a critical pillar of bilateral cooperation. As both countries seek to mitigate supply chain vulnerabilities and reduce dependency on China for critical resources, this collaboration underscores the geopolitical importance of resilient, diversified supply chains in an increasingly multipolar world order.

A significant development reinforcing this trajectory is the Initiative on Critical and Emerging Technologies (iCET), launched in 2023. Designed to deepen bilateral ties in semiconductors, artificial intelligence, quantum computing, and critical minerals, iCET illustrates how technology-driven collaboration is central to ensuring economic security and strategic autonomy. By focusing on critical minerals, the initiative plays a vital role in enhancing supply chain resilience and fostering joint research and development efforts.

As the geopolitical landscape continues to shift, India and the US are well-positioned to leverage these growing areas of cooperation to enhance their influence in critical sectors shaping the 21st-century global economy. By aligning their priorities in critical mineral development, both nations are strengthening the foundation of their partnership and advancing shared goals in energy security, technological innovation, and economic growth.

Expanding India-US Collaboration on Critical Minerals

The partnership between India and the United States on critical minerals has evolved significantly, underscoring the importance of international cooperation in securing resilient supply chains. Despite shared ambitions for self-reliance, both countries have recognised that collaboration, not isolation, offers the best path to meeting the rising global demand for these strategic resources.

There are four factors driving India-US cooperation on critical minerals: (1) America’s deepening international partnerships in this sector, (2) the 80% overlap between the critical minerals identified by India and the US, (3) the shared history of India-US clean energy partnerships, and (4) the developing national security and technology collaborations between the two partners.

American policy thinking on critical minerals can be seen to develop after the 2010 Chinese export ban on Japan of crucial minerals needed for semiconductors and automobiles over maritime disputes. The 2010 incident can be considered the lynchpin that set off the strategic thinking and highlighted the policy need for ensuring reliable and secure access to critical minerals.

Policy development picked up more wind as the need for critical minerals became more apparent as did concerns over Chinese monopoly of supply chains. America has significantly focused on developing its domestic capacity on mineral mapping, mining, and processing. While much of the developments have focused on ensuring domestic capacity and stockpiling of critical minerals, at the same time, the US has also been on the front foot in recognising the significance of international cooperation for critical minerals (see Table 2). Not only has it inked various bilateral partnerships (e.g. Canada, Australia, Japan, South Korea, and India), the US has also been the shaping international cooperation frameworks such as the Minerals Security Partnership.

Out of the 50 critical minerals identified by the US in its list of critical minerals (2022), 40 of them overlap (see Figure 1) with India’s list of critical minerals (2023). There is an 80% overlap between minerals identified by both countries showcasing potential for cooperation, especially in third geographies such as Africa. This is because many of the minerals identified are Platinum Group Metals or Rare Earth Elements (REEs), which are geographically located in Africa. India also has deposits of various REEs such as thorium and light REEs such as neodymium, praseodymium, dysprosium, and terbium. International collaborations, such as the one between Indian Rare Earth Limited (IREL) and Toyotsu Rare Earth India Limited (subsidiary of Toyoto Tsusho Corporation, Japan), has significant potential for India and the US to further strengthen collaboration for mutual benefit.

Figure 1: Common minerals between India and US list of critical minerals
(also see Table 3 in Annex)

 

Source: Authors compilation based on Final list of critical minerals 2022, US Geological Survey, Department of Interior and India’s list of critical minerals 2023.

*Iridium, Palladium, Platinum and Ruthenium are listed under Platinum Group Metals in India’s 2023 list of critical minerals

** Cerium, Dysprosium, Erbium, Europium, Gadolinium, Holmium, Lanthanum, Lutetium, Neodymium, Praseodymium, Samarium, Scandium, Terbium, Thulium, Ytterbium, Yttrium are listed under Rare Earth Elements in India’s 2023 list of critical minerals

The US and India have a long history of collaboration on clean energy and climate projects, built on shared goals of energy security, sustainable development, and combating climate change (see Table 1). This established synergy in clean energy provides a strong foundation for deeper collaboration on critical minerals. As the building blocks for clean technologies like solar panels, electric vehicles, and semiconductors, critical minerals are essential to achieving net-zero targets.

This is reflected in the India-U.S. MoU on Critical Minerals Supply Chains (2024) and the India-US Initiative on Critical and Emerging Technologies (iCET). As well as through joint initiatives under the Minerals Security Partnership (MSP) such as the MSP Finance Network and Quad Principles on Clean Energy Supply Chains. With their shared experience in clean energy cooperation, strong bilateral frameworks, and complementary capabilities, the US and India are well-positioned to become strategic partners in ensuring global critical mineral security.

With their shared experience in clean energy cooperation, strong bilateral frameworks, and complementary capabilities, the US and India are well-positioned to become strategic partners in ensuring global critical mineral security.

Expanding cooperation in sectors like emerging technologies and artificial intelligence (AI) also underscores the involving cooperation on critical minerals. The iCET, which has been identified as a crucial policy development in furthering the India-US strategic partnership, is chaired by the key players in the national security establishment in the two countries. Showcasing that strategic thinking on critical minerals spills over into sectors beyond clean energy. Exemplifying this, India’s National Security Advisor, Ajit Doval has stated that there is “immense potential that is yet to be explored and harnessed in terms of deeper technology cooperation” between India and the US.

Table 1: Timeline of key India-US collaborations on climate change and clean energy

Year Policy/Initiative Key Highlights
2009 U.S.-India Partnership to Advance Clean Energy (PACE) Brings together U.S. government agencies to partner with India on a broad range of clean energy research and deployment activities.
2019 Revitalising QUAD Diplomatic partnership framework between India, US, Japan and Australia. Focuses on supply chain resilience, including critical minerals, as part of Indo-Pacific collaboration involving the US, India, Japan, and Australia.
2021 Quad Working Groups established Working groups on Climate and Critical and Emerging Technologies established. Critical minerals considered within the purview of these two working groups.
2021 U.S.-India Climate and Clean Energy Agenda 2030 Partnership High-level partnership for bilateral cooperation on clean energy and climate action. Has two main tracks: the Strategic Clean Energy Partnership and the Climate Action and Finance Mobilization Dialogue.
2021 US-India Strategic Clean Energy Partnership (SCEP) One of the tracks under the U.S.-India Climate and Clean Energy Agenda 2030 Partnership. Collaboration between the United States and India to increase clean energy innovation, energy security, and the transition to clean energy.
2023 Minerals Security Partnership (MSP) India becomes the 14th member of the US-led initiative to secure global supply chains for critical minerals, focusing on exploration, mining, and processing to counter China’s dominance. India was the first Global South country to join the MSP.
2023 India-US Initiative on Critical and Emerging Technologies (iCET) Launched the iCET initiative to strengthen collaboration on semiconductors, artificial intelligence, and supply chain resilience, including discussions on critical minerals.
2023 U.S.-India Roadmap to Build Safe and Secure Global Clean Energy Supply Chain Intend to elevate and expand bilateral technical, financial, and policy support to expand complementary U.S. and Indian manufacturing capacity for clean energy technologies and components and lay the groundwork for enhanced cooperation in third countries, with a focus on partnerships in African countries.
2023 Modi-Biden Joint Statement Highlighted critical minerals as a priority for bilateral cooperation during Indian Prime Minister Modi’s state visit to the US, focusing on resilient supply chains.
2023 Renewable Energy Technology Action Platform (RETAP) Enable lab-to-lab collaboration, pilot projects, testing of innovative technologies and capacity development
2024 India-US Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) to expand and diversify critical minerals supply chains Intends to expand and diversify the critical minerals supply chain, with an aim to reduce dependence on China. Signed during the 6th India-US Commercial Dialogue in Washington DC.

Source: Authors compilation based on various sources. Not exhaustive.

Ways Forward: Navigating Challenges

India-US cooperation on critical minerals is one of the most advanced bilateral policy frameworks India has in the critical minerals space. Despite the promising trajectory of India-US collaboration on critical minerals, several challenges could complicate their efforts. One key obstacle is their differing approaches, while the US prioritises extraction and mining (see Table 2), India focuses on research, recycling, and sustainable alternatives due to its limited domestic reserves (interviews with officials). These differences could require careful coordination to ensure mutually beneficial outcomes.

China’s dominance in the global critical minerals market poses a shared challenge, but diversifying supply chains will demand significant investments in infrastructure and technology. India’s evolving policy framework and potential US domestic resistance to prioritising foreign collaborations could hinder progress without clear funding and technology-sharing agreements.

Regulatory and environmental concerns also present hurdles. The US has stringent environmental laws that can slow down mining and processing projects, while India must balance industrial expansion with its climate commitments and domestic socio-environmental concerns.

To further build on the existing policy frameworks and address some of these challenges, the following steps can be considered.

  • Diversification of sources: Identify and jointly invest in resource-rich third countries such as Australia, Canada, and South Africa, which are politically stable and resource-abundant. Initiatives like the Minerals Security Partnership (MSP) can be leveraged to co-develop mines and processing facilities in these regions. India’s experience with Khanij Bidesh India Limited (KABIL) in securing resources in Latin America and its expanding footprint in Africa can be complemented by US technical expertise and financial backing for joint exploration and production.
  • Strengthening domestic capabilities: Developing local mining and processing capabilities in both countries by exchanging knowledge on advanced extraction and processing technologies, while focusing on reducing environmental impact. Joint research and development projects can be established under frameworks like the Strategic Clean Energy Partnership (SCEP) to explore new technologies for mineral recycling, substitutes, and processing efficiency. The US’s expertise in lithium extraction can be modelled in India to develop better resource processing for its own reserves.
  • Building secure and transparent supply chains: Collaborate to develop systems to track the origin, transit, and processing of critical minerals, ensuring ethical and conflict-free sourcing. India and the US can replicate the EU-US Trade and Technology Council’s work on supply chain transparency. This work could be undertaken under the iCET.
  • Harmonising standards and establishing norms: Important to reduce trade barriers though bilateral discussion and other cooperation frameworks. Multilateral forums like the Quad and the MSP, among others, can be utilised to harmonise sustainable mining practices, customs procedures, data-sharing, and logistics networks for critical minerals. The US-India MoU (2024) could evolve into or push for the development of a comprehensive trade framework that addresses export-import policies for critical minerals.
  • Promoting trilateral cooperation: Collaborate on infrastructure development and capacity-building projects in resource-rich countries in Africa and Latin America, ensuring fair revenue-sharing and ethical practices. The India, US and Tanzania are already working to accelerate renewable energy development in Tanzania. The US-India Roadmap to Build Safe and Secure Global Clean Energy Supply Chains can be leveraged to create joint mining infrastructure in Zambia or Chile, where India’s diplomacy and US financing can complement each other.
  • Establishing shared innovation platforms: Joint innovation platforms focused on emerging technologies such as AI-based resource mapping, geothermal brine extraction, and direct lithium extraction can be developed and promoted. Under the Renewable Energy Technology Action Platform (RETAP), lab-to-lab collaborations are already established and these networks can be further leveraged to co-develop innovative solutions for the clean energy and critical minerals space. India’s growing start-up ecosystem could collaborate with Silicon Valley firms on mining tech solutions.
  • Promoting circular economy: Focus on investing  in recycling and repurposing technologies to recover critical minerals from electronic waste (e-waste) and industrial by-products. Can consider establishing joint research hubs under programs like the iCET to develop cutting-edge recycling systems and make supply chains less reliant on primary mining. The US can share its expertise in e-waste management, while India can scale up recycling facilities using its cost-effective manufacturing ecosystem.

Annex:

Table 2: US Policies on critical minerals

Year Policy Key Highlights
1970 US Geological Survey Organic Act Established USGS to survey and map mineral resources, foundational for critical mineral research
1975 Minerals Mining and Processing Effluent Guidelines Regulates wastewater discharge from mineral processing, promoting environmentally responsible critical mineral extraction
2015 NETL Opportunities to Develop High Performance, Economically Viable, and Environmentally Benign Technologies to Recover Rare Earth Elements (REEs) from Domestic Coal and Coal By-products Funds research into recovering rare earth elements from coal by-products, supporting domestic supply
2017 Executive Order 13817: A Federal Strategy to Ensure Secure and Reliable Supplies of Critical Minerals Established a federal strategy for secure and reliable critical mineral supply chains
2018 Critical Minerals Mapping Initiative Maps domestic critical mineral resources, enhancing understanding of supply vulnerabilities and resource locations
2019 Strategic and Critical Materials Stockpiling Act Expands stockpiling of critical materials for national security, reducing reliance on imports
2020 Executive Order 13953: Addressing the Threat to Domestic Supply Chain from Reliance on Critical Minerals from Foreign Adversaries and Supporting the Domestic Mining and Processing Industries Addresses foreign reliance on critical minerals, promoting domestic mining and processing industries
2020 Energy Act of 2020 (Critical minerals provisions) Provides funding for domestic critical mineral extraction and processing technologies
2020 Canada-US Joint Action Plan on Critical Minerals Collaboration Strengthens collaboration with Canada for secure, resilient critical mineral supply chains
2021 Uyghur Forced Labor Prevention Act Bans imports of critical minerals sourced through forced labour, especially from the Xinjiang region
2021 Bipartisan Infrastructure Law Provides funding for various projects which aim to boost American economy. Provided and provides funding of a) domestic critical mineral development projects to bolster supply chains; b) battery production, recycling, and expanded supply chains for essential minerals in batteries; c) simplified permitting process for critical mineral projects, making domestic production more efficient; d) supported critical mineral projects that promote job creation in energy-dependent communities
2021 Executive Order 14017 of America’s Supply Chains Strengthens efforts to secure critical mineral supply chains across federal agencies
2021 Critical Minerals and Materials: US Department of Energy’s Strategy to Support Domestic Critical Mineral and Material Supply Chains Outlines steps to increase domestic resilience in critical mineral and material supply chains
2021 100-day reviews under Executive Order 14017: Building resilient supply chains, revitalizing American manufacturing, and fostering broad-based growth Identifies critical mineral supply chain gaps, proposing solutions to strengthen national security
2022 Sustainable Critical Minerals Alliance International collaboration aimed at promoting environmentally responsible critical mineral sourcing
2022 Minerals Security Partnership International partnership focused on securing global critical mineral supplies through cooperation
2022 Korea-US High-Tech Industry and Clean Energy Partnership MoU Strengthens critical mineral collaboration between U.S. and South Korea for clean energy technologies
2022 Interagency Working Group on Mining Reform Fundamental Principles Proposes sustainable mining reforms to reduce environmental impact of critical mineral extraction
2022 Inflation Reduction Act Provides incentives for using critical minerals in clean energy and domestic manufacturing [Sections on Effective and Efficient Environmental Reviews (Sec. 50301-3); Extension of the Advanced Energy Project Credit (Sec. 13501); Clean Vehicle Credit (Sec. 13401) and others]
2022 Final List of Critical Minerals Identified 50 minerals essential for U.S. economic and national security
2022 Defence Production Act Enables critical mineral mining expansion, focusing on domestic production and supply security
2022 Critical Minerals Research Program Request for Information Collects input to advance research in critical minerals and enhance national capabilities
2022 Biden-Harris Permitting Action Plan Streamlines permits for critical mineral projects, accelerating U.S. supply chain efforts
2022 Australia-US Net Zero Technology Acceleration Partnership Announced a joint partnership to accelerate critical mineral technologies for clean energy transition
2022 America’s Strategy to Secure Supply Chain for a Robust Clean Energy Transition Strategy for securing critical minerals essential to a clean energy transition
2023 Japan-US Agreement on Strengthening Critical Minerals Supply Chains Bilateral agreement to strengthen critical minerals security and supply chain resilience
2023 Quad Statement of Principles on Clean Energy Supply Chains in the Indo-Pacific Guiding framework supporting clean energy and critical mineral supply chains
2023 DOE Opportunity to Build Up Domestic Supply Chains for Critical Minerals DOE funding to reinforce domestic critical mineral supply chains and reduce dependencies
2023 DOE Funding Opportunity to Advance battery Recycling Technology Supports battery recycling innovations to conserve critical minerals and materials
2023 Australia-US Climate, Critical Minerals and Clean Energy Transformation Compact Strengthens cooperation on critical minerals, climate, and clean energy between Australia and the US.
2024 Section 301, Trade Act 1974 Addresses trade barriers affecting US critical mineral industries, enhancing domestic competitiveness
2024 Qualifying Advanced Energy Project Credit, Section 48C Inflation Reduction Act Offers tax credits for projects using critical minerals in advanced energy technologies
2024 Battery and Critical Mineral Recycling Grant Program Grant program incentivizing recycling to extend life of critical mineral resources
2024 India-US MoU to Strengthen Critical Minerals Supply Chains Agreement to strengthen collaboration on secure critical mineral supply chains
2024 Mineral Security Partnership Forum Platform for international coopertion to ensure critical mineral security and resilience

Source: International Energy Agency critical minerals policy tracker database and other sources based on author’s compilation. Not exhaustive.

Table 3: India and US list of critical minerals – identifying common minerals                     

United States of America Common Minerals India
Aluminium

Arsenic

Barite

Caesium

Chromium

Fluorspar

Magnesium

Manganese

Rubidium

Zinc

Antimony, Beryllium,

Bismuth, Cerium, Cobalt, Dysprosium, Erbium, Europium, Gadolinium, Gallium, Germanium, Graphite, Hafnium, Holmium, Indium, Iridium, Lanthanum, Lithium, Lutetium, Neodymium, Nickel, Niobium, Palladium, Platinum, Praseodymium, Rhodium, Ruthenium, Samarium, Scandium, Tantalum, Tellurium, Terbium, Thulium, Tin, Titanium, Tungsten, Vanadium, Ytterbium, Yttrium, Zirconium

Cadmium

Copper

Molybdenum

Osmium

Phosphorous

Potash

Promethium

Rhenium

Selenium

Silicon

Strontium

Source: Authors compilation based on Final list of critical minerals 2022, US Geological Survey, Department of Interior and India’s list of critical minerals 2023.

Note: The author would like to thank Dr Constantino Xavier, Senior Fellow, CSEP for his insightful feedback and comments.

The post Strengthening India-US Cooperation on Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/strengthening-us-india-cooperation-on-critical-minerals/feed/ 0 902118
Ethanol-Blended Petrol: Progress, Challenges, and Untapped Potential http://stg.csep.org/blog/ethanol-blended-petrol-progress-challenges-and-untapped-potential/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=ethanol-blended-petrol-progress-challenges-and-untapped-potential http://stg.csep.org/blog/ethanol-blended-petrol-progress-challenges-and-untapped-potential/#respond Wed, 18 Dec 2024 07:18:45 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=902086 In addition to its contribution to India’s energy security, ethanol may also help address environmental issues. However, some important challenges remain, such as food security concerns, inflation etc.

The post Ethanol-Blended Petrol: Progress, Challenges, and Untapped Potential first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India, the world’s third-largest oil consumer, accounted for approximately 5.05% of global oil consumption in 2022, according to the U.S. Energy Information Administration (EIA). It is also the third-largest importer of crude oil, with around 88% of its demand met through imports in 2023-24[1]. To reduce this import dependence, the Government of India has laid down a strategy to increase domestic production, adoption of biofuels and renewables, energy efficiency norms, improvement in refinery process and demand substitution (MoPNG, 2018). The Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP) programme has been considered as one major step in this direction, which aims at reducing oil imports and mitigating environmental impact. Under this programme, ethanol is blended with petrol which reduces the consumption of petrol and thus consumption and imports of crude oil. In addition to its contribution to India’s energy security, ethanol may also help address environmental issues. It is claimed to be a less polluting fuel as compared to conventional fuels like petrol, as 1 crore litre of EBP can save around 20,000 tons of CO2 emissions (MoPNG, 2021). However, some important challenges remain, such as food security concerns, inflation etc., which will be uncovered in the following section.

Ethanol is blended with petrol which reduces the consumption of petrol and thus consumption and imports of crude oil. It has played a key role in reducing crude oil imports, saving foreign exchange, and generating domestic revenues.

The Ethanol Blending Petrol Programme–Progress, Achievements and Challenges

The ethanol blending with petrol in India has increased from a mere 1.5% in the Ethanol Supply Year (ESY)[2] 2013-14 to 13% in the ESY 2023-24 (Table 1), indicating a significant increase in ethanol blending capacity. As per PIB (2024), this growth has helped reap several benefits including a reduction in crude imports by 181 lakh metric tons between 2014 and August 2024, which saved approximately ₹1,06,072 crore in foreign exchange. Although the resultant reduction in crude oil imports due to EBP accounts for just 0.80% of India’s total crude oil imports during this period, the increased blending capacity in recent years holds the potential for a significant reduction in crude oil imports in the future. Farmers reportedly have also earned ₹87,558 crore because of increased demand for feedstocks like sugarcane and grains, while distilleries generated around ₹1,45,930 crore in revenues during this period, indicating its role in boosting domestic manufacturing and employment. EBP programme is believed to have also reduced CO2 emissions by 544 lakh metric tons since 2014, demonstrating its environmental benefits (PIB, 2024). These benefits are expected to increase with the ambitious target of achieving 20% ethanol blending by ESY 2025-26.

Table 1: Ethanol Blending Rate and Foreign Exchange Savings in India

Ethanol Supply Year Blending Rate (%) Foreign exchange savings (Rs. crore)
2013-2014 1.5% 53,894*
2020-2021 8.2%
2021-2022 10.0%
2022-2023 12.1% 24,300
2023-2024 (Till August 2024) 13.0% 27,878

*India’s cumulative foreign exchange savings for the period ESY 2013-2014 to ESY 2021-2022.

Source: MoPNG (2023), PIB (2024)

EBP has raised challenges, such as its impact on food security and inflationary pressures on sugar and maize markets. Additionally, it may affect vehicle fuel efficiency, potentially imposing an additional burden on consumers.

But with increased blending also comes the challenges associated with higher ethanol production. The National Biofuel Policy 2018 facilitated the use of diverse feedstocks such as B-heavy molasses, sugarcane juice, and surplus or damaged grains for ethanol production (MoPNG, 2018). While these measures aim to boost ethanol production, they have raised concerns about their impact on food markets. To address the over-diversion of sugar usage for ethanol production, which is most significant when produced from sugarcane juice or syrup and least in C-heavy molasses, ethanol production from C-heavy molasses and maize has been incentivized (Mukherjee, 2023). This shift, however, has introduced challenges for the maize industry. The increased demand of maize for ethanol production along with the incentives has driven up its prices and reduced availability for other consumers (Saini, 2024). The All-India Poultry Breeders Association even reported domestic maize shortage of 5 million tonne in 2023 because of ethanol blending. In current year, India is set to become a net-importer of maize than being the net-exporter (Reuters, 2024). In addition, EBP may also impact vehicle fuel efficiency, as usage of E20 fuel in 4-wheelers (or 2-wheelers) which were designed for E0 and has been re-calibrated for E10 may drop the fuel efficiency by around 6-7% (3-4% in case of 2-wheelers). Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFVs) offers a solution to this issue, albeit at a cost. The engines of these vehicles are compatible to run on up to 84% ethanol blended petrol, but according to the Society of Indian Automobile Manufacturers (SIAM) FFVs are more expensive than the normal petrol vehicles, which may impose an additional burden on consumers (Sarwal et al., 2021).

Petrol Pricing in India and how Ethanol may shape them

In India, retail petrol prices are primarily influenced by two factors: international crude oil prices and the prevailing union (excise duty) and states’ levies (Value Added Tax) . The heavy dependence on imported crude oil implies that fluctuations in global crude oil prices will directly affect the petrol prices in India. Another major component of petrol price is the imposition of taxes, excise duty by the Union and Value Added Tax (VAT) by the respective State government. Trends in daily petrol prices in four metropolitan cities i.e. Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai, and Kolkata reveal that the latest major alteration to the petrol prices in India was on 14th March 2024 when petrol prices were reduced owing to lower international crude oil prices and also due to the union elections which began from April 19. Before that, other major price cuts were primarily driven by the Union lowering excise duty (May 2022 and November 2021) and VAT reductions (like Delhi’s VAT cut in December 2021). While the impact of changes in these two components on petrol prices has been evident, there has been no prominent impact of ethanol blending on petrol prices.

Ethanol blending with petrol in theory may lower the prices of petrol. This is because, ethanol in India presently costs significantly lower than petrol. One major reason behind this is the tax levied on ethanol compared to the tax on petrol. In the case of petrol, while taxes (excise duty and VAT) contribute to around 50% of the retail selling price, the only tax on ethanol is the GST equivalent to 5%. (Sarwal et al., 2021) also stated that since the excise on petrol is higher than GST on ethanol, it is keeping ethanol price lower than petrol’s. The cost at which the Oil Marketing Companies (OMCs) buy ethanol from the mills includes ex-mill ethanol price, GST and transportation charges (MoPNG, n.d.). Given that different feedstocks are used to produce ethanol which have varying prices, as per our computations the weighted average ex-mill price of ethanol is around Rs. 65.35/litre during ESY 2023-24 (Table 2). On top of it, the average GST depending on the feedstock used for ethanol production would be around Rs. 3.27/litre. Transportation charges on the ethanol supply during ESY 2023-24 range from as low as Rs. 0.273/litre for up to 75 km to Rs. 4.133/litre if the distance is 1100-1200 km. Assuming a higher transportation charge of Rs. 4.133/litre, the average cost of ethanol to OMCs would be around Rs. 72.75/litre (65.35+3.27+4.13), which is substantially lower than petrol.

Table 2: Average Cost of Ethanol to OMCs

Feedstock-type Share of Ethanol supplied to OMCs (Nov. 2023-June 2024) Ex-mill Ethanol price for ESY 2023-2024 (in Rs/litre) GST @5% (in Rs/litre)
Maize 34% 71.9 3.60
B-Heavy Molasses 24% 60.7 3.04
Damaged Food Grains 19% 64 3.2
Sugarcane juice/Sugar/Sugar Syrup 14% 65.6 3.28
C-Heavy Molasses 10% 56.3 2.82
Surplus Rice with FCI 0% 58.5 2.93
Weighted Average  65.35 3.27

Source: DoFPD (n.d.), Damodaran (2024)

In July 2024, India achieved a blending rate of 15.83% which could translate into a potential to reduce the petrol price by around Rs. 3.5 to Rs. 5.1/litre provided there are no other prominent unit costs for OMCs to blend the refined petroleum with ethanol.

In July 2024, India achieved a blending rate of 15.83% which could translate into a potential to reduce the petrol price by around Rs. 3.5 to Rs. 5.1/litre provided there are no other prominent unit costs for OMCs to blend the refined petroleum with ethanol (Table 3). Studies also indicate that EBP may help reduce the price of petrol, as a 10% ethanol blending with petrol can lower petrol prices by approximately Rs 3/litre (Mishra, 2021), while 20% blending could result in a Rs 8/litre reduction (CNBC TV18, 2021). However, retail petrol prices are yet to reflect these potential savings.

Table 3: Estimated Reduction in Petrol Prices for Around 15% Ethanol Blending

  Delhi Mumbai Kolkata Chennai
Fuel Type Ethanol Blending Rate

(A)

Fuel Price (Rs/litre)

(B)

Price build-up of EBP

(C)= (A)*(B)

Fuel Price (Rs/litre)

(D)

Price build-up of EBP

(E)= (A)*(D)

Fuel Price (Rs/litre)

(F)

Price build-up of EBP

(G)= (A)*(F)

Fuel Price (Rs/litre)

(H)

Price build-up of EBP

(I)= (A)*(H)

Ethanol 15.80% 72.75 11.5 72.75 11.5 72.75 11.5 72.75 11.5
Petrol 84.20% 94.72 79.8 103.44 87.1 104.95 88.4 100.75 84.8
Estimated Cost of EBP 91.2 98.6 99.9 96.3
Price Cut Potential 3.5   4.8   5.1   4.4

Note: 1. The Fuel Price of Ethanol is the average cost of Ethanol to OMCs, assuming no significant additional unit costs are incurred for blending petrol with ethanol.

  1. Petrol Price in four cities is the Retail Selling Price of Petrol as of October 1, 2024, sourced from PPAC.
  2. Estimated Cost of EBP is the combined contribution of ethanol and petrol to the price build-up of EBP.
  3. Price Cut Potential is calculated by subtracting the Estimated Cost of EBP from prevailing Petrol Prices.

Source: Authors’ computations

The evidences show that ethanol-blending program has played a key role in reducing crude oil imports, saving foreign exchange and generating domestic revenues. EBP has also emerged as a sustainable alternative to conventional fossil fuels. These benefits are expected to increase in the near future as India is set to achieve the target of a 20% blending rate in ESY 2025-2026. However, this will be coupled with the challenges like impact on food security, inflationary pressures on sugar and maize markets, etc., which must be addressed as well. The aforementioned computations show that while EBP has led to a cost-effective transition, its potential to reduce petrol prices remains untapped. With ethanol-blended petrol becoming more prevalent across India as 20% of PSU OMC outlets are already offering E20 petrol, the petrol prices in the country should reflect the impact of ethanol blending. This becomes even more important as consumers might be facing an implicit cost because of a drop in vehicular fuel efficiency. By addressing this pricing gap, and mitigating the challenges associated with increased ethanol blending, EBP can become a win-win for the economy, environment and consumers.

References

CNBC TV18. (2021, September 10). Here’s how ethanol-blended petrol could be answer to spiralling fuel prices. CNBC TV18. https://www.cnbctv18.com/energy/heres-how-ethanol-blended-petrol-could-be-the-answer-to-spiralling-fuel-prices-10688181.htm

Damodaran, H. (2024, July 29). Ethanol used in petrol now more from maize, damaged foodgrains than sugar. Indian Express. https://indianexpress.com/article/india/ethanol-used-in-petrol-now-more-from-maize-damaged-foodgrains-than-sugar-9481641/

Department of Food and Public Distribution. (n.d.). Sugar Policy. Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Food and Public Distribution. Retrieved December 13, 2024, from https://dfpd.gov.in/Home/ContentManagement?Url=sugar_policy.html&ManuId=3&language=1

Long Term Ethanol Procurement Policy under Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP) Programme 2019-2024. Retrieved December 9, 2024, from https://mopng.gov.in/files/uploads/Final_Ethanol_Procurement_Policy.pdf

Mishra, T. (2021, December 6). 10% ethanol blending with petrol can lower fuel price by ₹3/litre: Experts. The Hindu Businessline. https://www.thehindubusinessline.com/economy/10-ethanol-blending-with-petrol-can-lower-fuel-price-by-3litre-experts/article25208320.ece

MoPNG. (2021). Ethanol Growth Story- Fulfilling Aatmanirbhar Bharat Dream. https://mopng.gov.in/files/uploads/Ethanol_Booklet_english.pdf

MoPNG. (2023). Ethanol Growth Story- The Journey from Farm to Fuel (As on November 2023). https://mopng.gov.in/files/uploads/BPCL_Ethanol_Booklet_2023.pdf

Mukherjee, S. (2023, December 30). OMCs hike procurement price of ethanol produced from C-heavy molasses. Business Standard. https://www.business-standard.com/industry/agriculture/omcs-hike-procurement-price-of-ethanol-produced-from-c-heavy-molasses-123122900472_1.html

NATIONAL_POLICY_ON_BIOFUELS-2018, MoPNG (2018). https://mopng.gov.in/files/uploads/NATIONAL_POLICY_ON_BIOFUELS-2018.pdf

PIB. (2024, October 24). India’s Ethanol Push: A Path to Energy Security-Achieving 15% ethanol blending in 2024, India targets 20% by 2025. PIB. https://pib.gov.in/PressNoteDetails.aspx?NoteId=153363&ModuleId=3&reg=3&lang=1

Reuters. (2024, September 4). Ethanol push turns India into corn importer, shaking up global mkt. Business Standard. https://www.business-standard.com/economy/news/ethanol-push-turns-india-into-corn-importer-shaking-up-global-mkt-124090400327_1.html

Saini, S. (2024, September 12). For India, is there light at the end of this maize? Deccan Herald. https://www.deccanherald.com/opinion/for-india-is-there-light-at-the-end-of-this-maize-3187433

Sarwal, R., Kumar, S., Mehta, A., Varadan, A., Singh, S. K., Ramakumar, S. S. V., & Mathai, R. (2021). Roadmap for Ethanol Blending in India 2020-25. https://www.niti.gov.in/sites/default/files/2021-06/EthanolBlendingInIndia_compressed.pdf

The post Ethanol-Blended Petrol: Progress, Challenges, and Untapped Potential first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/ethanol-blended-petrol-progress-challenges-and-untapped-potential/feed/ 0 902086
Why Everyone Exaggerates “Climate Finance” http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-everyone-exaggerates-climate-finance/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=why-everyone-exaggerates-climate-finance http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-everyone-exaggerates-climate-finance/#respond Fri, 08 Nov 2024 06:45:36 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901765 Instead of just worrying about the quantity of finance, we must also worry about the quality of the finance. Too much is labeled climate finance, writes Rahul Tongia.

The post Why Everyone Exaggerates “Climate Finance” first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The upcoming annual UN conference on climate change, COP29, is informally dubbed a “climate COP”. Countries are aiming to set a finance goal, and also frameworks to manage market mechanisms (under Article 6 of the Paris Accord). But instead of just worrying about the quantity of finance, in a new Commentary titled “Why everyone exaggerates climate finance”, Rahul Tongia writes we must also worry about the quality of the finance. Too much is labeled climate finance.
Donors like to treat all funding as “climate finance”, even when it’s a market loan for a solar power plant (which is no longer climate action per se but simply business as usual, and cheap) while developing regions are asking for trillions in “climate finance” when much of it isn’t incrementally decarbonizing, but, rather, infrastructure buildout (independent of green) or business-as-usual green.

This isn’t just an abstract possibility for future finance, it has already happened. There was a pledge by the rich at COP15 in 2009 to help developing regions with $100 billion of annual climate support by 2020. While this has been reached a bit later than targetted, much of the support is a loan, often at market rates, and often for things like building a solar farm or a metro. This commentary explores these issues, and finds the good news that true additive climate finance requirements are lower than headline numbers.

Read the commentary here.

The post Why Everyone Exaggerates “Climate Finance” first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-everyone-exaggerates-climate-finance/feed/ 0 901765
Boosting Export Competitiveness of India’s Solar Photo Voltaic Sector http://stg.csep.org/blog/boosting-export-competitiveness-of-indias-solar-photo-voltaic-sector/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=boosting-export-competitiveness-of-indias-solar-photo-voltaic-sector http://stg.csep.org/blog/boosting-export-competitiveness-of-indias-solar-photo-voltaic-sector/#respond Wed, 23 Oct 2024 11:19:24 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901631 While India has not been able to fully exploit its manufacturing export potential, the sunrise sectors, like the solar PV industry, allow it to make its mark in the global export market. To become a competitive player in this segment, India needs to focus on the higher end of the supply chain like solar modules and panels and liberalise imports of raw materials like solar cells. Sustainability has become an integral part of economic policy decisions across the globe, reflected in gradual changes in production and consumption patterns, like the transition from Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) to electric vehicles.  Global […]

The post Boosting Export Competitiveness of India’s Solar Photo Voltaic Sector first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
While India has not been able to fully exploit its manufacturing export potential, the sunrise sectors, like the solar PV industry, allow it to make its mark in the global export market. To become a competitive player in this segment, India needs to focus on the higher end of the supply chain like solar modules and panels and liberalise imports of raw materials like solar cells.

Sustainability has become an integral part of economic policy decisions across the globe, reflected in gradual changes in production and consumption patterns, like the transition from Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) to electric vehicles.  Global integration, in the form of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) and trade flows, is also being driven by these sustainability choices. Analysis by GlobalData shows that between 2020 and 2023, renewable energy was the best-performing FDI category worldwide, attracting capital expenditure of USD 1.5 trillion between 2020 and 2023. On the trade front, solar PV-related products account for 0.6 per cent of total exported items, assessed at an 8-digit level, for 2023.  The trend implies that this segment is likely to be a key driver of global trade flows in the coming years.

The emerging green energy space offers India an opportunity to reposition itself as a global export leader and integrate into green Global Value Chains (GVCs).

While trade is an important engine for growth and job creation, India has not been able to leverage this opportunity and overall has a low share in trade, accounting for 2 per cent of global exports.  In this regard, this emerging green energy space offers an opportunity for India to reposition itself as a global export leader and integrate into green Global Value Chains (GVCs).

India’s solar Photo Voltaic (PV) segment is gaining strength, for instance, solar module exports increased 3 times within one year and went from USD 0.6 billion in 2022 to USD 1.8 billion in 2023, accounting for 3.3 per cent of its global exports. An assessment of India’s customs data reveals that top export firms in the electronics sector (HS code 85) consist of smartphone manufacturing firms occupying the topmost spots, followed by solar and wind energy companies. In the solar energy segment, it is possible that Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme for high-efficiency solar PV modules has made an impact in terms of its production and exports. At the global level, US tariff led trade diversion away from China has possibly added to this growth in India’s solar PV exports.

However, in terms of relative weight in India’s electronics export basket, the smartphone manufacturing segment takes the major pie. Out of the top 8 export firms in the electronics sector, the top 4 are smartphone manufacturers accounting for about 39 per cent of India’s exports from September 2023 to August 2024. On the other hand, Renewable Energy (RE)companies occupy the next 4 spots but account for only 5.3 per cent of electronics exports in the same period. This also gets translated in relatively low shares of India’s exports (in global exports) in the solar PV segment, as compared to key Asian economies. For instance, Malaysia, Thailand (in 2023) and Vietnam (in 2022) accounted for 5.4, 5.5, and 10 per cent, whereas India accounted for 3.3 per cent (in 2023) of global solar module exports.  It is important to identify the key steps to trigger India’s Solar PV manufacturing and exports.

The low export is driven by higher prices for solar modules made in India. For instance, in August 2024, the 540-watt mono solar modules were exported from India at a unit price of USD 117 while it was imported from other countries at a much lower price. This included China at USD 64.3 and Malaysia at USD 76. This is also reflected in the difference in the scale of exports from China and India. China’s export of solar modules (USD 73.5 billion) was around 22 times more than India’s export in 2023. How can Indian exports attain lower prices and better scale to lead the global export market for solar modules?

To enhance the competitiveness of India’s solar modules in the global market, it is imperative to lower the customs duties on solar cells, from the existing high levels.

It is important to ensure low input prices, which are way higher in India due to high import tariffs on key inputs for solar modules, like solar cells that carry a basic customs duty of 25 per cent. One of the important policy decisions that facilitated smartphone manufacturing in India was tariff reduction on key parts and components, with the recent announcement in January 2024, to reduce the duties from 15 per cent to 10 per cent.  To enhance the competitiveness of India’s solar modules in the global market, it is imperative to lower the customs duties on solar cells, from the existing high levels. While government of India offers duty drawback on the imported inputs used for exports, the rate for solar cells is just 1 per cent which is clearly insufficient to compensate for the high import bill for the PV module producers. Also, high import restrictions negate the export incentivising impact of schemes like PLI as it increases the overall domestic prices thereby pushing up the export prices as well, creating an anti-export bias.

It is difficult to compete with Chinese solar cell production due to their extremely low cost, and the Indian industry should focus on the higher end of the supply chain like solar modules and panels.

According to an industry expert, it is difficult to compete with Chinese solar cell production due to their extremely low cost, and Indian industry should focus on higher end of the supply chain like solar modules and panels. In this regard, lowering import tariffs on solar cells would help the entire supply chain. Even after obtaining cells at cheap price, attaining scale in module production is a challenge in India, due to the high energy and land cost. This needs to be resolved to attract foreign investments in the country. Additionally, as China has already championed silicon cell production, India needs to invest in innovation and R&D for alternate chemistry cells, to capture the global market, instead of putting its resources in incentivising cell production which is not going to provide competitive outcomes.

While this blog touched upon the solar PV sector, green manufacturing is a wide spectrum that includes eco-friendly packaging, sustainable textiles, electric vehicles, and so on, and according to the latest World Bank report on India’s trade opportunities, greening trade can speed up export diversification and growth for India.

The post Boosting Export Competitiveness of India’s Solar Photo Voltaic Sector first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/boosting-export-competitiveness-of-indias-solar-photo-voltaic-sector/feed/ 0 901631
Positioning Critical Minerals in the India-EU Partnership http://stg.csep.org/blog/positioning-critical-minerals-in-the-india-eu-partnership/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=positioning-critical-minerals-in-the-india-eu-partnership http://stg.csep.org/blog/positioning-critical-minerals-in-the-india-eu-partnership/#respond Wed, 16 Oct 2024 10:36:29 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901566 Anindita Sinh discusses the potential for India and the EU to cooperate towards resilient supply chains for critical minerals given their shared interests and broader economic and geopolitical convergence.

The post Positioning Critical Minerals in the India-EU Partnership first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Climate change and clean energy has emerged as a crucial sector for collaboration between India and the European Union (EU). As the third and fourth largest emitters of greenhouse gases respectively, both New Delhi and Brussels have undertaken various steps to address the issue amidst the ongoing climate crisis. As the backbone of the energy and technology transitions, access to critical minerals is essential for their respective climate policies.

As the global development narrative shifts towards the pressing need for economic development that is climate-centric, the need for lithium, cobalt, nickel, graphite and other minerals becomes fundamental. These are referred to as critical minerals, are essential components for a wide range of industries such as clean energy, modern technology, defence, and agriculture.

There is close to a 60% overlap between the critical minerals identified by both partners.

This article discusses the potential for India and the EU to cooperate towards resilient supply chains for critical minerals given their shared interests and broader economic and geopolitical convergence. There is close to a 60% overlap between the critical minerals identified by both partners. The EU and India are members of the Minerals Security Partnership (MSP). The establishment of the India-EU Trade and Technology Council (TTC) signals a growing interest in geoeconomic cooperation. And both partners have identified supply chain disruptions as threats given the emerging economic competition and geopolitical rivalries, most importantly with China.

Part of a series of publications on India’s international partnerships on critical minerals, this article a) discusses the growing scope of the India-EU bilateral relationship; b) surveys the EU’s critical minerals policies; and c) discusses the collaborative frameworks the EU has with India on climate and energy, arguing that it offers the foundation for a partnership on critical minerals. It concludes by identifying specific cooperation pathways for the two partners, including public private partnerships, trilateral partnerships and enhancing trade and investment ties.

Strategic convergence between India and the EU

India and the EU are increasingly viewed as natural partners in a shifting geopolitical landscape, where their shared democratic values and commitment to a rules-based international order provide a strong foundation for cooperation. As the economic and security interests of the two partners converge given the rising geopolitical tensions, supply chain disruptions, and growing competition between global powers, especially in the Indo-Pacific region, the scope of the partnership has been expanding in recent years.  Making the case for congruence between Brussels’ and New Delhi’s global agendas, India’s external affairs minister, S. Jaishankar emphasised that “India and the EU believe in a multi-polar global order, share a commitment to promoting effective multilateralism and are increasingly considerate to each other’s geopolitical, economic, strategic and security concerns.”

India and the EU are increasingly viewed as natural partners in a shifting geopolitical landscape, where their shared democratic values and commitment to a rules-based international order provide a strong foundation for cooperation.

India and the EU have a long-standing history of bilateral engagement, which has paved the way for deeper, more strategic collaborations. Since the early 1960s, both India and the European Union have nurtured a relationship that has steadily grown through trust and mutual benefit, culminating in the India-EU Strategic Partnership in 2004. This history of bilateral cooperation is now assuming a more expansive nature, with collaborations across sectors such as security, trade, climate action, and technology. This provides a strong foundation for expanding into new areas of cooperation, such as critical minerals supply chains.

India and the EU share similar outlooks on key areas such as building resilient supply chains to mitigate vulnerabilities and enhancing technological cooperation. Their strategic partnership also encompasses a growing global dimension, for example on sustainable development and climate action in third regions such as Africa. This convergence, coupled with their mutual interest in maintaining global stability and addressing challenges posed by China’s rise, positions India and the EU as important strategic partners in the evolving global order.

There are important motivations for both sides to deepen cooperation on critical minerals. For the EU, it is essential to realise that the future of its energy security in a decarbonised world depends on its capacity to expand and deepen its strategic partnerships with India and other countries. This involves mitigating risks in supply chains and co-developing policies for economic, climate, and ecological transitions. The EU must, therefore, frame its approach within the broader context of climate and environmental security to succeed in these efforts.

For India, in turn, it is essential to align its ambitious climate targets with EU policy frameworks such as the Green Deal and the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM). Collaborative efforts can focus on technology transfer, green finance, and joint projects in the renewable energy, electric mobility, and sustainable agriculture sectors. Additionally, India may benefit from participating in EU-led initiatives like the Global Gateway to secure critical minerals essential for clean energy transitions.

As both India and the EU strive to meet ambitious decarbonisation targets, their established partnership can play a pivotal role in diversifying supply chains and mitigating geopolitical risks posed by the monopolisation of critical minerals by a limited cluster of resource-rich countries and processing giants like China.

EU’s Emerging Policy Frameworks on Critical Minerals

The EU has implemented a series of policies to secure a resilient supply chain and mitigate the risks associated with their scarcity. Its policies are more advanced than India given that the EU’s engagement with critical minerals can be traced back to its Raw Materials Initiative, launched in 2008. Therefore, for an India-EU partnership to succeed, it is important to assess the positives and negatives of the EU’s experiences and its policies. This will help New Delhi identify the right entry points to engage with Brussels.

The EU’s Raw Materials Initiative (2008) aims to ensure a sustainable and undisturbed supply of raw materials, including critical minerals. One of the primary pillars of the initiative is the identification of critical raw materials, periodically updated to reflect the dynamic nature of global markets and emerging technologies. The identification of criticality is driven by outlining those resources that are of high economic importance and face a high supply risk. The fifth list of critical minerals was released in 2023 and has identified 34 minerals as being critical for the EU.

Table 2 lists some of the key policies undertaken by the EU that have shaped its approach towards this issue in light of the various geopolitical drivers. While the 2008 Raw Materials Initiative and the 2020 Action Plan on critical minerals provide frameworks for identification, supply diversification, innovation and domestic critical minerals production capacity in the EU, they have been unable to ensure supply security of critical minerals for the EU. Given this, the 2023 Critical Raw Materials Act provides a regulatory framework for the EU to strengthen and diversify its supply chains, monitor and mitigate current and future risks while ensuring sustainability and circularity, and leveraging the strengths and opportunities of the Single Market. The Act was adopted by the EU council in March 2024.

Regulatory frameworks have also been established to ensure responsible sourcing and sustainable extraction of critical minerals. The EU’s Conflict Minerals Regulation, implemented in 2021, aims to prevent the financing of armed groups through the trade of minerals, emphasising transparency and due diligence in supply chains. This regulation not only addresses ethical concerns but also contributes to the EU’s broader objective of fostering sustainable practices in the extraction and processing of critical minerals.

In addition to regulatory measures, the EU recognises the need for investment and innovation to enhance the resilience of its critical mineral supply chains. The EBA, launched in 2017, exemplifies this commitment by fostering collaboration between public and private stakeholders to develop a competitive and sustainable battery industry.

Table 1: Timeline of key EU policies on critical minerals

Year Policy Key Highlights
2008 European Raw Materials Initiative Strategic plan to ensure access of all non-fuel and non-agricultural minerals across the EU
2010 European Innovation Partnership on Raw Materials Actionable policy framework for the Raw Materials Initiative. A stakeholder platform designed to provide high-level guidance regarding tackling challenges of raw materials.
2011 Raw Materials Strategy Identified 14 critical minerals for priority action for the EU under the Raw Materials Initiative. Revised list produced every three years.
2017 European Battery Alliance (EBA) Aimed at making the EU a global leader in sustainable battery production.
2019 European Green Deal Industrial green growth strategy for Europe to meet its climate commitments of net zero by 2050. It also emphasises sustainable sourcing and environmental responsibility in mineral extraction.
2020 European Action Plan on Critical Raw Materials To increase EU’s resilience in critical raw materials. It includes the EU’s Critical Raw Materials List. It also announced the creation of the European Raw Materials Alliance, which aims to carry out the plan’s objectives.
2020 European Raw Materials Alliance A forum with the primary focus of supporting Europe’s raw materials industry.
2021 Global Gateway Initiative EU’s global connectivity strategy which specifically mentions developing resilient supply chains for critical minerals.
2022 REPowerEU Strategy for supporting green transition and reducing Europe’s dependence on Russian fossil fuels.
2023 Net-Zero Industry Act An initiative stemming from the Green Deal Industrial Plan which aims to scale up the manufacturing of clean technologies in the EU.
2023 Critical Raw Materials Club Collaboration initiative to work with like-minded countries to strengthen global supply chains of critical minerals for the EU. Enshrined in the Critical Raw Materials Act. Adopted into the Mineral Security Partnership Forum in 2024.
2024 Critical Raw Materials Act Strategic plan for the EU to ensure critical mineral security through domestic and international channels.

Source: Authors compilation based on various sources; not exhaustive.

Building on the foundation of climate and energy cooperation

In 2024, the European Commission adopted the Critical Raw Materials Act (initially announced in 2023), designed to highlight supply chain risks for materials deemed to be crucial for European industries and the green energy shift. India, on a similar track, identified 30 critical raw materials in 2023 with the aim to foster self-reliance. Both India and the EU have increasingly viewed these supply chain risks as “threats“, driving global competition for control over these key resources.

There is a significant overlap in the critical minerals identified by the two partners (see Table 2). Out of the 34 minerals identified by the EU, 20 overlap with India’s list of critical minerals (i.e. 59% of the minerals identified are similar). This may indicate a potential for partnership as it highlights shared strategic priorities and mutual interest in securing these resources.

Table 2: List of 34 critical minerals identified by the EU and the overlaps with India’s list of critical minerals

Antimony Arsenic Baryte Bauxite Beryllium
Bismuth Boron/Borate Cobalt Coking Coal Copper
Feldspar Fluorspar Gallium Germanium  Hafnium
Heavy Rare Earth Elements Helium Light Rare Earth Elements Lithium Manganese
Magnesium Natural Graphite Nickel Niobium Platinum group metals
Phosphate Rock Phosphorus Scandium Silicon Metal Strontium
Tantalum Titanium metal Tungsten Vanadium

Source: European Commission, 2023.

The minerals highlighted in green are those that are common between India and the EU based on their latest lists.

One possible answer lies in embedding critical minerals cooperation within the broader framework of their rapidly advancing climate and energy partnership.

Given the geoeconomic convergence between India and the EU, and that critical minerals have emerged as an area of overlapping interest, how can India and the EU partner more effectively? One possible answer lies in embedding critical minerals cooperation within the broader framework of their rapidly advancing climate and energy partnership.

India and the EU have taken on a prominent role in addressing climate change and working together more closely across public and private sectors. They have established partnerships in key areas such as clean energy, water management, and urban development. The EU is actively involved in supporting various Indian initiatives focused on climate action, sustainability, and clean energy. This includes projects on solar energy, offshore wind, promoting energy efficiency and investing in smart girds. Building on this foundation, ensuring resilient and stable supply chains of critical minerals is an emerging and pressing avenue where the two partners can look to collaborate.

Table 3 showcases some of the key policy collaborations between India and the EU on these areas. Yet, as India’s external affairs minister highlighted, cooperation on critical minerals is crucial to sustain and build on this cooperation.

Table 3: Timeline of key India-EU collaborations on climate change and clean energy

Year Policy Key Highlights
2004 India-EU Strategic Partnership Launch of the Strategic Partnership that  highlighted the need for cooperation on climate change, sustainable development, and clean energy.
2005 India-EU Joint Action Plan Defined goals for collaboration in environmental protection, renewable energy, and sustainability by establishing the India-EU Initiative on Clean Development and Climate Change.
2008 Joint Work Programme on Energy, Clean Development and Climate Change Adopted at the 9th India-EU Summit to promote joint activities, research and policy development for sustainable development.
2012 India-EU Joint Declaration for Enhanced Cooperation on Energy Strengthened cooperation on energy security, renewable energy, and energy efficiency technologies.
2016 India-EU Clean Energy and Climate Partnership Launched partnership to promote collaboration in renewable energy, energy efficiency, and climate action, with a focus on solar and energy storage.
2018 International Solar Alliance (ISA) EU became a partner organisation of the India led International Solar Alliance (ISA) to promote global solar energy deployment.
2020 India-EU Leaders’ Meeting – India-EU Strategic Partnership: A Roadmap to 2050 Discussed alignment of India’s renewable energy goals with the EU’s Green Deal, emphasising climate action and clean energy transition.
2021 India-EU Connectivity Partnership Focused on sustainable infrastructure development and green technologies, including renewable energy and electric mobility.
2021 India-EU High-Level Dialogue on Climate Action Addressed joint efforts on green hydrogen, offshore wind energy, and electric mobility for clean energy advancements.
2022 India-EU Trade and Technology Council (TTC) Enhanced collaboration on trade, technology, and clean energy transitions, including critical minerals and renewable energy technologies.

Source: Author’s compilation based on various sources; not exhaustive.

The establishment of the TTC has been a significant step in the bilateral relationship between the two countries. The second working group (WG) on green and clean energy technologies has identified three areas of cooperation: renewable and low-carbon hydrogen, batteries for electric vehicles, and standards. Addressing the need for critical minerals security is thus embedded within the TTC. The third WG (trade, investment and resilient supply chains) has the ambit of working on developing a framework for supply chain resilience, which can help address critical minerals. The TTC has held two ministerial meetings and one international workshop on WG-2 and has made significant progress on EV batteries and recycling, and resilient supply chains among other areas.

Improving trade relations between countries has been identified as a crucial step in de-risking supply chains. It aids in diversifying sources of critical minerals, reducing reliance on a single supplier or region. This enhances resilience against geopolitical tensions, market disruptions, and supply shortages, ensuring a steady flow of resources. Improved trade relations can foster economic growth by enabling the efficient exchange of goods, services, and resources, including critical minerals at competitive prices. While there have been disruptions in the India-EU Free Trade Agreement (FTA) negotiations in the past, the relaunching of the negotiations in 2022 has been a welcome step in advancing the bilateral relations.

Exploring convergences: What’s next?

With the EU’s comprehensive policy framework on critical minerals and the overlaps between India’s and the EU’s priority mineral lists, there is a strong foundation for deeper cooperation. Embedding this partnership into their climate and energy collaborations offers both sides a way to secure resilient supply chains, essential for clean energy transitions and technological advancements. There are several opportunities, obstacles and policy options that India and the EU must consider in order to enhance their cooperation on critical minerals.

  1. Balance Brussels and bilateral engagements: While India’s engagements with the EU have been significant and forward oriented, it needs to identify how and at what level it will engage with Europe on critical minerals. Will India continue to engage through EU-wide partnerships? Or will it, and should it move towards leveraging its bilateral relationships? This has been the case for India’s climate diplomacy with Europe, where it has inked Green Strategic partnerships with member countries such as Germany, Sweden, and Denmark alongside the EU, often leading to questions about the success of these partnerships.
  2. Coordinate via the Mineral Security Partnership: Beyond bilateral cooperation, the EU and India are also part of the MSP. Through sideline consultations, India and the EU should ensure coordination at the MSP to align priorities and build trust. The two partners should also work towards strengthen the MSP as the forum for ensuring resilient critical mineral supply chains.
  3. Develop public-private partnerships: India could look to adapt the EU policy model of public-private partnerships to build a strong critical minerals ecosystem. The EU has robust public-private partnership initiatives, the European Battery Alliance (EBA) being one, that allow for collaborations between governments, research institutions and industry towards addressing the challenges of critical minerals. For example, the Swedish company Northvolt received funding support to establish Europe’s first ‘gigafactory’ for lithium-ion batteries through the EBA. These have been instrumental in driving innovation, research, technological advancement and international collaborations in critical minerals exploration and processing.
  4. Establish knowledge partnerships: The EU has been working towards resilient supply chains for critical minerals longer than India as it identified its first list of critical minerals in 2008. Hence there are lessons India can learn from the successes and failures of the EU. Knowledge partnerships can help India to build a comprehensive policy framework (see Table 1) on ensuring secure and reliable access to critical minerals and a critical minerals strategy similar to that of the EU.
  5. Learn from the EU’s other partnerships: The EU has various other partnerships with countries such as the Australia, US and Japan on securing access to critical minerals and strengthening supply chains. Such as the Critical Minerals Agreement with the US which aims to build international partnerships, diversify supply chains, facilitate trade, improve sustainability and labour standards. Replicating and adapting a partnership given the context of the India-EU relationship could further strategic alignment and interests.
  6. Develop trilateral partnerships: India and the EU could consider trilateral partnerships  to ensure mineral security as they can pool resources, share expertise, and improve resilience against global disruptions. Both India and the EU have a growing focus on the African mining space and the potential for partnerships with Africa on critical minerals. This joint focus could be leveraged for potential trilateral agreements with African countries to ensure diversifying critical minerals supply chains.
  7. Diversify energy baskets: Currently, the EU has signed 14 partnerships on critical minerals and raw materials with resource rich countries, such as Uzbekistan, Rwanda, Norway and others,  aimed at diversifying its supply chains. India could consider looking at these partners to diversify its own energy basket.
  8. Link with trade and investment agendas: European companies seek greater market access and the integration of India into global supply chains. Shifting towards India-centred supply chains for sectors like EVs, technology, defence, and semiconductors, which are dependent on resilient supply of critical minerals, both India and the EU should broaden their approach to cooperation, embedding critical minerals more strategically within their overall economic partnership.
  9. Invest in science and technology (S&T) research: Leveraging the EU’s technical expertise in the field of S&T cooperation given the more expansive institutional experience it has, India may seek to develop a robust research ecosystem on critical minerals, especially in sectors like EVs and green technology. Drawing inspiration from initiatives such as Horizon 2020, India can foster collaboration with start-ups and encourage entrepreneurial investment in critical minerals research, enhancing its innovation capabilities in this field.
  10. Explore opportunities through Global Gateway: Through the Global Gateway initiative connectivity partnerships with India on sectors like energy, digital infrastructure, and transportation are already being explored. Building on this foundation, it can be further leveraged to develop resilient supply chains for critical minerals, similar to the EU’s approach with Chile, aligning with the broader strategic objectives of green and digital transitions for both regions.

*Note: The author would like to thank Constantino Xavier, Senior Fellow, CSEP for his insightful feedback and comments.

The post Positioning Critical Minerals in the India-EU Partnership first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/positioning-critical-minerals-in-the-india-eu-partnership/feed/ 0 901566
Beyond Self-reliance: India’s International Partnerships on Critical Minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-self-reliance-indias-international-partnerships-on-critical-minerals/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=beyond-self-reliance-indias-international-partnerships-on-critical-minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-self-reliance-indias-international-partnerships-on-critical-minerals/#respond Mon, 30 Sep 2024 10:03:43 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901438 This blog series maps and surveys the growing number of India’s international partnerships in the critical minerals space, providing readers with a repository of primary sources.

The post Beyond Self-reliance: India’s International Partnerships on Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
This blog series maps and surveys the growing number of India’s international partnerships in the critical minerals space, providing readers with a repository of primary sources. It examines various partnerships India has inked or is in the process of pursuing with key nations, international organisations, and intergovernmental frameworks. 
These engagements reflect India’s realisation that the quest for self-reliance and domestic initiatives to explore critical minerals must be complemented with a foreign policy focused on international cooperation.
These engagements reflect India’s realisation that the quest for self-reliance and domestic initiatives to explore critical minerals must be complemented with a foreign policy focused on international cooperation with key partners on sourcing, processing, and de-risking global supply chains. More than just a risk or challenge, some Indian policymakers see this as a lever to achieve the country’s 2047 Viksit Bharat development vision. For example, for B. V. R. Subramanyam, the CEO of the Indian government’s policy think tank, NITI Aayog, climate change offers an opportunity for India to become a leader in climate technology. As part of CSEP’s research informing an Indian strategy for critical minerals, under the verticals of Mining and Non-Fuel Minerals and Foreign Policy and Security studies, this  series of articles offers a) a comprehensive, accessible reference on how India is working with global partners to secure the minerals essential for its future; b) initial insights on the utility of these international partnerships for India to achieve its climate transition goals; and c) preliminary assessments of whether, where and how India should position itself in the global supply chain of critical minerals given its foreign and economic policy interests. As the global rush to secure critical minerals intensifies, nations are rapidly forming international partnerships to build resilient supply chains for these resources, which are essential for the green transition and technological advancements. Critical minerals like lithium, cobalt, and rare earth elements are vital for renewable energy technologies, electric vehicles, advanced manufacturing, and digital infrastructure. They are also emerging as crucial elements for national security. However, as demand for these materials surges, so does the geopolitical competition to control and secure sustainable supply chains. Given their significance, countries are now embedding access to these minerals into their economic security and foreign policy strategies.  For India, which has set ambitious goals for decarbonisation and green energy transition, securing these minerals is not just important but indispensable. With limited domestic reserves of critical minerals, India must rely on international cooperation to ensure steady, long-term access to these key resources. As part of its broader approach, India has entered various bilateral, minilateral, and multilateral agreements to strengthen critical mineral supply chains and foster resilience.  For nations like India, the path to becoming a leader in clean energy and technology requires reliable access to critical minerals. As countries rush to develop and join partnerships, it is important to take stock of what has already been done on this front. That, in turn, will help answer the necessary question of how countries can work with international partners to secure the flow of these vital resources. There is no universal definition for critical minerals as they are usually identified based on country-specific demands and needs. Yet, for most countries, minerals having high economic importance coupled with high supply risks are identified as critical minerals. Countries have undertaken various steps to ensure domestic mineral security, yet no country or region can become self-sufficient along the full range of the value chains of these minerals essential for the energy transition. International partnerships therefore become an important track to ensure viable and resilient access to these minerals. The Contested Geopolitics of Critical Minerals As emerging economies like India ramp up efforts to reduce emissions, they must also ensure that energy systems remain resilient and secure. Critical minerals, essential to a decarbonising energy landscape, are increasingly concentrated in a few geographic regions, such as Africa or Latin America, making them a source of geopolitical competition This concentration heightens the risk of supply chain disruptions, making policymakers confront new vulnerabilities, especially for countries lacking in reserves. Issues such as price volatility, supply security, and geopolitical tensions persist, even as energy systems move away from fossil fuels towards electrification and renewable technologies. Geopolitical development such as the COVID-19 pandemic, the Ukraine war, US-China geopolitical rivalry, and the shift towards protectionist industrial policies in various countries have exacerbated the urgency to secure supply chains. Coupled with the looming climate crisis and the drive towards net-zero, the need to ensure stable access to critical minerals has become even more pronounced.  Recognising Chinese dominance in mining and processing of many of these critical minerals, specifically Rare Earth Elements (REEs), graphite, manganese and others, has been one of the driving forces for countries to diversify supply chains. It presently accounts for approximately 60% of production and 85% of processing capacity of critical minerals globally. Similarly, countries like Australia, the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC), and Chile are the leading producers of lithium, cobalt, and nickel respectively. This concentration creates strategic vulnerabilities for other nations, especially those looking to build industries based on clean energy and technology. Supply disruptions through export bans such as the one China levied on REEs in 2010 during a diplomatic spat with Japan, can cripple entire sectors. The 2023 import restrictions levied on gallium and germanium also impacted economies in the European Union (EU). This demonstrated how access to these minerals can quickly turn into a tool of geopolitical leverage. As countries like India seek to secure their future industrial capabilities, they must reckon with this concentration of supply, making international cooperation all the more crucial. Countries are now weary of monopolisation of supply chains and are therefore pushing for diversification. Furthermore, the transition to renewable energy is set to intensify the global demand for critical minerals. The International Energy Agency (IEA) projects that the world’s demand for lithium could increase by over 40 times by 2040 if global climate goals are met. Similar surges in demand are expected for cobalt, nickel, and rare earth elements. The rapid increase in demand is expected to further strain supply chains, leading to increased competition between nations and potential market instability. To avoid being left behind, India must secure long-term partnerships with mineral-rich countries and international organisations that can provide stable access to these resources. India’s Growing International Engagements on Critical Minerals India has in recent years taken a series of significant steps to ensure its access to a resilient supply of critical minerals, which are essential for the country’s green energy transition and industrial growth. However, much of public policy attention and research has focused on the domestic landscape, reflecting the primary initiative of the Ministry of Mines. Less is known about the international dimension, where the Indian government has inserted critical minerals into different partnerships, including through related issue areas such as green technology, resilient supply chains, energy security, climate transition, trade and defence.
Less is known about the international dimension, where the Indian government has inserted critical minerals into different partnerships, including through related issue areas such as green technology, resilient supply chains, energy security, climate transition, trade and defence.
In June 2023, India announced its first list of 30 critical minerals (see Table 1). This development highlights India’s ambitions to position itself to address current and future challenges related to resource security, industrial growth, and sustainable development. This is a first, significant step that can help define domestic and international strategies for securing critical mineral supply chains, which are crucial to the country’s economic and climate ambitions.
Table 1: List of 30 Critical Minerals for India
Antimony Beryllium Bismuth Cadmium Cobalt
Copper Gallium Germanium Graphite Hafnium
Indium Lithium Molybdenum Niobium Nickel
Platinum Group Elements Phosphorus Potash Rare Earth Elements Rhenium
Selenium Silicon Strontium Tantalum Tellurium
Tin Titanium Tungsten Vanadium Zirconium
Source: Ministry of Mines (June 2023), “Critical Minerals for India”, Government of India. Domestically, one of the key initiatives has been the amendments to the Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act in 2023, which aimed to enhance private sector participation in the exploration and mining of critical minerals. These amendments have streamlined the auction process for mining rights, making it easier for private companies to participate in exploration and extraction, while also facilitating exploration of deep-seated and lesser-known mineral reserves through the introduction of Exploration Licenses. To further boost domestic exploration, India launched its first auction of blocs for critical minerals like lithium and rare earth elements, aiming to tap into untapped reserves and reduce dependency on imports. In 2024, the government also announced the Critical Minerals Mission, a focused initiative to coordinate efforts in securing access to critical minerals both domestically and internationally. This Mission will enhance resource mapping, expedite exploration activities, and promote the development of a resilient supply chain for critical minerals, ensuring India meets its long-term industrial and green energy targets. In her 2024 Union budget speech, India’s Finance Minister, Nirmala Sitharaman thus emphasised that this Mission will also focus on “overseas acquisition of critical mineral assets”. However, as the global demand for critical minerals continues to rise, securing resilient supply chains is no longer just a matter of national interest but a geopolitical necessity. For India, international cooperation is essential for not only ensuring access to these vital resources but also establishing itself as a major player in the global clean energy economy.
For India, international cooperation is essential for not only ensuring access to these vital resources but also establishing itself as a major player in the global clean energy economy.
India has formed Khanij Bidesh India Ltd. (KABIL), a joint venture established in 2019 to identify and acquire critical mineral assets overseas. KABIL has been working on securing access to mineral reserves in countries like Argentina, Chile, and Australia, particularly for lithium and cobalt. Additionally, India is looking to explore signed bilateral partnerships on critical minerals and has signed agreements with Australia to facilitate joint exploration, research, and development of critical mineral supply chains. Furthermore, India is a member of the U.S.-led Mineral Security Partnership (MSP) and is involved in forums like the Quad and the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF), all frameworks that are looking to ensure resilient and sustainable critical mineral supply chains globally. In other cases, India is beginning to engage its key international partners on issues indirectly relating to critical minerals, in different geographies and sectors, from trade to technology (see Table 2). Through these domestic reforms and international engagements, India is working to establish a secure and resilient critical mineral supply chain, essential for achieving its ambitious renewable energy, electric vehicle, and decarbonisation goals. Assessing the Potential and Limitations of International Partnerships This blog series explores India’s partnerships with various governments, regional groupings, and international bodies on critical minerals as surveyed below (see Table 2). It develops a comprehensive series of research and evidence-based primers on India’s recent engagements in the regional and global landscape. The goal is to create a repository on India’s current initiatives in the international arena of critical minerals partnerships and competition. By mapping India’s international partnerships on critical minerals, this series of review articles will provide preliminary insights on some of the following research questions that inform CSEP’s larger analytical study:
  • What steps has India taken together with different partners to ensure access to critical minerals? What is the focus and scope of these agreements and negotiations? What do they reflect in terms of India’s approach to balancing competing economic, geopolitical, and climate diplomacy interests?
  • How are India’s partner countries securing their critical mineral supply chains through domestic policy frameworks as well as bilateral, minilateral, and multilateral frameworks? And at what level is India seeking ways to engage?
  • What are the implications for countries excluded from these partnership frameworks, especially those in the Global South and that India seeks to engage with? What do these partnerships offer in terms of sustainability, particularly economic, social and governance standards on mining and processing?
  • How should India balance its engagements between multilateral efforts focused on global governance of critical minerals, on the one hand, and bilateral engagements focused more narrowly on securing access and resilient supply of critical minerals, on the other?
Table 2: India’s Existing and Potential Partnerships on Critical Minerals
Country/Institution Relevant engagements, stakeholders or policies
African Union (Zambia, Namibia, Congo, Ghana and others) African Union set up the African Minerals Development Centre (AMDC); Indian government through the Ministry of Mines reportedly in talks with African counterparts in Zambia, Namibia, Congo and Ghana for minerals such as copper, cobalt and others; African Development Bank work towards an African Green Minerals Strategy.
Argentina KABIL signed an exploration and development agreement with Argentina’s state-owned enterprise CAMYEN to explore and develop five lithium blocs. This is KABIL’s first overseas lithium exploration mining project.
Australia Critical Minerals Investment Partnership to support Indian investment into Australian critical minerals projects; Signed the Economic Cooperation and Trade Agreement (ECTA) that aims to promote growth in Australia’s minerals exports to India; India’s KABIL signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with Australia’s Critical Mineral Office (CMO), Department of Industry, Science and Resources (DISER) to carry out joint due diligence and further investment in lithium and cobalt; Indian Institute of Technology (Hyderabad) and Monash University set up the Critical Minerals Research Hub (AICMRH).
Bolivia India seeking opportunities to further lithium exploration with Bolivia.
Brazil Defence and foreign ministerial dialogue (2024) discussed expanding bilateral cooperation on critical minerals.
Canada Meeting between Indian Union Minister in charge of mines and Canadian delegation led by the Premier of Yukon to discuss strengthening critical minerals supply chains and enhance cooperation in the mining sector.
Chile KABIL signed non-disclosure agreement with state-owned company ENAMI for lithium exploration; Coal India Ltd. looking to explore lithium mining.
European Union EU-India Trade and Technology Council (TTC): working Group II on Green and Clean Energy Technologies and Working Group III on Trade, Investment, and Resilient Value Chains; India-EU Clean Energy and Climate Partnership.
G20 Under India’s presidency, the Delhi Declaration included “Voluntary High-level Principles for Collaboration on Critical Minerals for Energy Transitions” (2023); critical minerals and resilient supply chains were discussed under the Energy Transition Working Group (ETWG); various Think20 (T20) papers on securing access to critical minerals published.
G7 Five-Point Plan for Critical Mineral Security adopted (2023); Resilient supply chains for critical minerals emphasised by Indian Minister of Commerce and Industry at the G7 Trade Ministers meeting (July 2024).
Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF) India is part of the Pillar II on Supply Chains and Pillar III on Clean Economy. As Vice-Chair of the Supply Chain Council, India contributing to an action plan for critical minerals with a focus on batteries.
Japan Consultations through various working groups at the Quad, Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF) and the Supply Chain Resilience Initiative (SCRI). Japan’s METI developing an international resource strategy to secure rare metals.
Minerals Security Partnership (MSP) India became 14th member in June 2023, first developing country to join; MSP Principles for Responsible Critical Mineral Supply Chains; India is also a part of the MSP Forum.
Quad Working groups on Climate and on Critical and Emerging Technology (CET) focused on supply chains and green technology. Quad Statement (May 2023) of Principles on Clean Energy Supply Chains in the Indo-Pacific; Memorandum of Cooperation (MOC) between export credit agencies to increase business opportunities in areas such as critical minerals, clean energy, and critical and emerging technologies.
Supply Chain Resilience Initiative (SCRI) Launched in 2021 during the Trilateral Trade Ministerial between India, Australia and Japan.
United Nations India is a member of the Secretary General’s (UNSG) Panel on Critical Energy Transition Minerals (CETM) set up in April 2024; United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) leading work on just and equitable access to critical minerals.
United States of America US-India Initiative on Critical and Emerging Technology (iCET) to drive a partnership in supply chains for graphite, gallium, and germanium. One of the focus areas is to promote India’s role in the US-led Mineral Security Partnership on co-investments in Africa, South America and to diversify supply chains.
Source: Authors’ compilation based on various sources. *Note: The Author would like to thank Dr Constantino Xavier, Senior Fellow, CSEP for his insightful comments.

The post Beyond Self-reliance: India’s International Partnerships on Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-self-reliance-indias-international-partnerships-on-critical-minerals/feed/ 0 901438
India’s Triangular Cooperation Strategies – Not a One-size-fits-all Model http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-triangular-cooperation-strategies-not-a-one-size-fits-all-model/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-triangular-cooperation-strategies-not-a-one-size-fits-all-model http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-triangular-cooperation-strategies-not-a-one-size-fits-all-model/#respond Thu, 26 Sep 2024 07:16:32 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901407 India must see triangular cooperation as means to an end, of learning to strengthen its domestic cooperation capacity and strategy.

The post India’s Triangular Cooperation Strategies – Not a One-size-fits-all Model first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Triangular cooperation involves partnerships driven by the needs of Global South countries, aimed at implementing developmental solutions that are appropriate for local contexts. As defined by the United Nations (UN), this modality occurs via a facilitator, usually a Western country or multilateral agency working with a pivotal partner, an emerging economy for solutions in a third Global South country. While, triangular cooperation is not new to India, before 2014, efforts were scattered and not programmatic.

Over the past decade India has signed long-term triangular agreements on specific priority areas. These areas mainly include clean energy, health, disaster risk management, technology, innovation, food security and women’s empowerment. India’s engagement in triangular cooperation, a mechanism that it was once reluctant to partner in, aligns with India’s growing interest in increasing its economic and developmental footprint in the Global South. Further, India has been heralded as an effective bridge between Global North countries and a developing world that is becoming increasingly distrustful of current structures of Western-dominated international institutions.

India has been heralded as an effective bridge between Global North countries and a developing world that is becoming increasingly distrustful of current structures of Western-dominated international institutions.

For instance, the Indo-France Indo-Pacific Roadmap signed in 2023, mentions cooperation towards ‘a free, open, inclusive, secure and peaceful Indo-Pacific Region’. They add that the efforts will be taken to ‘build a balanced and stable order in the region’. As India evolves into an emerging economy, traditional partner countries have recognised that to continue meaningful engagement, they need to go beyond traditional donor-recipient relationships. Economic expansion into countries in the Global South, regional security and developing appropriate, low-cost solutions to address sustainable goals may best be facilitated through triangular coordination.

India has announced or signed triangular agreements with Japan, France, Germany, the United States of America (USA), the United Kingdom (UK) and the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP).

India’s triangular agreements, appear to be based on a strategy of strengthening relationships with countries and multilaterals that India has a history of bilateral cooperation with. Not all triangular agreements look similar or have met the same degree of speed and success.

India’s triangular agreements, appear to be based on a strategy of strengthening relationships with countries and multilaterals that India has a history of bilateral cooperation with. Not all triangular agreements look similar or have met the same degree of speed and success. In the case of Japan, the Asia Africa Growth Corridor (AAGC) is dormant, with no present talk of revival. Unlike with other partners, the focus was primarily based on economic diplomacy, rather than meeting developmental objectives. However, businesses were risk averse to invest under this scheme because there was no concrete plan of action. Further, the agreement was broad-based covering a range of sectors, without a clear understanding of how to approach such projects, and access local entrepreneurships or businesses. The UK and French agreements, while still active are slow to operationalise. This is because they involve the creation of a joint triangular fund, with contributions from both countries to scale-up business innovation in a third country. Creating the financial mechanisms required for both countries to jointly fund and select projects is proving to be time-consuming as India’s Ministry of External Affairs is not a funding agency. After much deliberation, a triangular fund has been set up within the State Bank of India Capital Markets Limited (SBICAPS) investment bank. Projects which have been successful are small-scale developmental pilots and capacity building exchanges as seen with Germany, UNDP and the US. Investments are often lower than USD 1 million, with a grass-root, community focus. These projects are easier to carry out as they do not require infrastructure or investments norms and regulation that meet both country standards, as needed for large-scale projects.

Analysing the regions with completed projects (Table 1), shows a diverse set of recipient countries. The focus appears to be on least developed countries (LDCs) and small island developing countries (SIDs). With the UNDP, India has had a broader geographic scope ranging from Latin America and the Caribbean, Africa and the Pacific Islands. A few projects have also been implemented in South-East Asia. It is interesting to note an absence of triangular projects in India’s immediate neighbourhood.

Table 1: Triangular Partnerships where projects have been completed

Source: Based on author’s compilation

The regions that India has chosen as recipient countries provide an insight into India’s strategy for triangular engagement.

As the country tries to build up its portfolio as a developmental partner, it is expanding its footprint in regions and countries where it does not have a strong diplomatic presence. This is both in terms of physical missions, and development cooperation experience.

As the country tries to build up its portfolio as a developmental partner, it is expanding its footprint in regions and countries where it does not have a strong diplomatic presence. This is both in terms of physical missions, and development cooperation experience. Leveraging on partners which already have networks in these regions, India is able to reach regions where it would not have been able to do on its own. India is not using triangular cooperation to engage the immediate neighbourhood. In fact, officials state that they prefer to bilaterally engage with South Asian countries, as they don’t want to impact established channels of diplomacy.

India must see triangular cooperation as means to an end, of learning to strengthen its domestic cooperation capacity and strategy.

India’s new avatar of triangular agreements sees differences compared to previous projects. The agreements are programmatic and long-term, with specific areas of focus. India does not merely play the role of carrying out a project in a third country on behalf of the facilitating partner. Rather, India is seen as an equal partner, carving out the agenda for cooperation. India is leveraging such agreements to further its strategic interests of expanding its diplomatic footprint in the Global South, showcasing its innovations and creating economic opportunities. On a cautious note, projects remain quite small-scale, and this modality is still at an experimental stage.  The extent to which India and its partners can create norms, standards and institutional mechanisms to work with each other and whether this modality can be scaled-up remains to be seen. Nevertheless, whatever the outcome, India must see triangular cooperation as means to an end, of learning to strengthen its domestic cooperation capacity and strategy.

The post India’s Triangular Cooperation Strategies – Not a One-size-fits-all Model first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-triangular-cooperation-strategies-not-a-one-size-fits-all-model/feed/ 0 901407
BIMSTEC and Security Cooperation in the Bay of Bengal http://stg.csep.org/blog/bimstec-and-security-cooperation-in-the-bay-of-bengal/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=bimstec-and-security-cooperation-in-the-bay-of-bengal http://stg.csep.org/blog/bimstec-and-security-cooperation-in-the-bay-of-bengal/#respond Tue, 27 Aug 2024 07:07:24 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901116 BIMSTEC’s name reflects its original mission, yet this original, flexible, sub-regional, technocratic and economic dimension has gradually withered away. How can it craft a productive cooperative in a difficult regional context?

The post BIMSTEC and Security Cooperation in the Bay of Bengal first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Founded in 1997, with the Bangkok declaration, BIMSTEC’s name reflects its original mission. First, this initial group of states was meant to be geographically focused on the Bay of Bengal (B) with an initial cluster of five littoral states (India, Bangladesh, Myanmar, Thailand and Sri Lanka). Second, it was conceived as a “sub-regional” initiative (I), connecting South and Southeast Asia, rather than a formal, inter-governmental, regional organisation. Third, and most importantly, its focus was conceived to be multi-sectoral (MS) with an emphasis on technical and economic cooperation (TEC).

Yet this original, flexible, sub-regional, technocratic and economic dimension of BIMSTEC, including an ambitious FTA that dragged on since 2004, has gradually withered away. For the last two decades, BIMSTEC has gone through various phases of expansion and reinvention. In 2004, the two landlocked Himalayan states of Nepal and Bhutan joined, giving the organisation an inland dimension. Many new sectors were added subsequently, bringing the total areas of cooperation to 14. This diluted the foundational focus on trade and economic integration. Finally, BIMSTEC also assumed a heavier, more formal profile, including a new secretariat in Dhaka (2014) and a charter giving it legal standing (2024).

Yet the most notable shift for BIMSTEC has been its growing focus on security cooperation, particularly since 2016, following the leaders’ retreat that India hosted in Goa. Since then, over the last eight years, there has been an expansion and deepening of security-related matters, including on intelligence and counter-terrorism, as well as a new security approach to energy, health and food. Four meetings have been held of the BIMSTEC “national security chiefs”. And a variety of official and track 1.5 dialogues have been established on security cooperation.

The late securitisation of BIMSTEC was however a rather unusual development given that regional organisations in South and Southeast Asia have traditionally either refrained from engaging in security cooperation, as in the case of SAARC, or taken several decades to build the requisite trust to do so, with far more robust institutions or under the umbrella of external powers such as China and the United States, as in the case of ASEAN.

Why has security cooperation been gaining ground within BIMSTEC over the last few years? There are several possible explanations. First, India’s attempt to add a security dimension to its Act East policy following geopolitical competition with China in the Bay of Bengal, for example on sea lines of communication. Second, while smaller member-states are increasingly keen to engage India as a regional security actor they may be more comfortable with a multilateral platform such as BIMSTEC than bilateral cooperation which carries the risks of politicisation and domestic opposition.

Finally, in what remains one of the least integrated and most conflictual regions of the world, member-states may also be more cognisant of how security cooperation is paramount to enhance political stability, institutional resilience and economic development.

Finally, in what remains one of the least integrated and most conflictual regions of the world, member-states may also be more cognisant of how security cooperation is paramount to enhance political stability, institutional resilience and economic development. The securitisation of BIMSTEC, beginning in 2016, coincided with one of the most peaceful periods of the region.

While we examine these possible causes in a longer study, as part of the Sambandh Initiative for Regional Connectivity at CSEP’s Foreign Policy and Security vertical, in this piece we focus on two separate tasks based on a survey of open-access sources. First, we empirically map the trend of how BIMSTEC has expanded its sectoral cooperation to both traditional and non-traditional security cooperation, from counter-terrorism to energy and food. And second, we discuss the possible consequences of BIMSTEC’s securitisation, including the major challenges for the seven member states to sustain and deepen security cooperation in the Bay of Bengal region.

Mapping the Shift Towards Security under BIMSTEC

Following the 2nd BIMSTEC Ministerial Meeting in 1998, the organisation identified a set of six priority sectors for cooperation. However, none of these sectors were directly related to security. In 2004, following discussion at the 8th BIMSTEC Ministerial Meeting, these sectors of cooperation were expanded to 14, with Counter-Terrorism and Transnational Crime being one of the seven additional sectors. However, there was still no specific sector for security-based cooperation.

The 2016 BIMSTEC leaders’ retreat, hosted by India at Goa, marked a turning point: for the first time, member states committed to formalising cooperation between their intelligence and security organisations.

The 2016 BIMSTEC leaders’ retreat, hosted by India at Goa, marked a turning point: for the first time, member states committed to formalising cooperation between their intelligence and security organisations. The following year was marked by the first meeting between National Security Chiefs from the seven member states, who referred to the Bay of Bengal as a “common security space”. Later that year, a Track 1.5 Security dialogue forum would also be held in India, addressing both traditional and non-traditional security. And in 2018, New Delhi also hosted the first BIMSTEC Think Tanks Dialogue on Regional Security.

The tides were shifting towards the securitisation of BIMSTEC, and this would subsequently be institutionalised. The 17th  Ministerial Meeting, held in 2021, would recommend a restructuring of sectors and subsectors to streamline the functioning of the organisation, with the 5th BIMSTEC summit formally approving these recommendations the following year. Seven sectors emerged, including one exclusively dedicated to security, led by India and with three sub-sectors: Counter-Terrorism and Transnational Crime, Energy and Disaster Management.

The sub-sector that has since then been most active is on Counter Terrorism and Transnational Crime, which has subgroups on human trafficking, combating financing of terrorism, countering radicalisation, legal and law enforcement issues, and prevention of illicit trafficking. There have also been a number of diverse expert groups focusing on cyber security, maritime cooperation, space security and Himalayan science. Perhaps the most influential initiative under this were the meetings of the National Security Chiefs conducted in 2017, 2018, 2019 and, after a hiatus, again most recently in July 2024, hosted by Myanmar.

Table 1: Key initiatives on BIMSTEC security cooperation

There has been an equal emphasis placed on non-traditional security areas like disaster management and energy. There is even a separate sector for agriculture and food security. Under the Disaster Management sub-sector, two joint exercises have been organised since 2018, which consisted of tabletop exercises, field training and information sharing. The BIMSTEC Centre for Weather and Climate, assisted by a Scientific Advisory Committee, has also engaged in disaster management cooperation. The Centre’s governing board met thrice between 2018 and 2023 to effectively oversee its functioning.

With pressing challenges from climate and the need to secure natural resources for growing economic demands, BIMSTEC has also deepened energy cooperation from a strategic and security perspective.

With pressing challenges from climate and the need to secure natural resources for growing economic demands, BIMSTEC has also deepened energy cooperation from a strategic and security perspective. The Energy sub-sector has focused on grid interconnection, overseen by the Grid Interconnection Coordination Committee, following a Memorandum of Understanding in 2018. In 2022, the Energy Ministers of BIMSTEC countries met after a 12 year long hiatus. The newly established Energy Centre based in Bengaluru defines energy trade in the region for “enhancing energy security” as one of its key functions.

Finally, the securitisation of BIMSTEC also found expression in more regular engagements beyond the official, governmental or military tracks. Starting in 2017, BIMSTEC hosted or supported a variety of track 1.5 and track 2 policy dialogues that involved think tanks and experts from across the Bay of Bengal region. These platforms emerged as an important auxiliary site for informal exchange of perspectives on the regional security environment. Among the most frequent topics were counter-terrorism, cyber and maritime security (see Table 2).

Slow Progress and Different Conceptions of Security

The fast emergence of security as an area of cooperation from BIMSTEC member states poses some significant challenges. In terms of finalising common legal instruments, the organisation has not been particularly efficient. The sub group on Legal and Law Enforcement issues oversees a number of security related conventions, having met nine times. Despite this, gaining consensus on a range of regional conventions has been a difficult process plagued by numerous delays.

The Convention on Cooperation in Combating International Terrorism, Transnational Organized Crime and Illicit Drug Trafficking (mainly calling for cooperation between law enforcement agencies) was signed back in 2009, but only came into force in 2021, having been ratified only by India and Bangladesh for a long time. Similarly, the Convention on the Transfer of Sentenced Persons and Convention on Extradition is still being drafted and negotiated.

In some areas, the security sector seems to have adopted excessively ambitious goals that were quickly abandoned or paused. For instance, the Expert Group on Space Security Cooperation has not held a single meeting, nor has the proposed Home Ministers’ Meeting ever taken place. The Expert Group on Cyber Security Cooperation has also only met once in 2022. The organisation thus needs to be more strategic about selecting and prioritising areas for security cooperation and member-states should also be more willing to abandon areas where there is limited scope or persistent challenges.

Operationally too there remains a lot to be desired in terms of the frequency and level of participation from member-states. Till date there has only been one multinational military field training exercise, where Thailand and Nepal were merely observers. Regular joint naval or counterinsurgency exercises will be essential to the future success of BIMSTEC’s security sector.

The Secretariat’s security division (headed by India) has no dedicated director, and as of 2024 has remained in the interim hands of the Bangladeshi director in charge of the Trade, Investment and Development division.

India, despite being the lead of the security sector, barely plays a substantive role in the secretariat. India’s involvement with the secretariat has remained severely lacking, despite the Secretary General currently being an Indian official. India has only had two directors as part of BIMSTEC, well below the time put in by directors from Bhutan. Between May 2020 to July 2022, there was no Indian director deputed to BIMSTEC, and this has again been the case since November 2022 up to mid-2024. Resultantly, the Secretariat’s security division (headed by India)  has no dedicated director, and as of 2024 has remained in the interim hands of the Bangladeshi director in charge of the Trade, Investment and Development division. While political will from New Delhi is important, it will be difficult for India to sustain and expand levels of security cooperation without allocating a full-time director and other resources to the BIMSTEC Secretariat.

Hosting meetings more consistently is critical to build rapport and trust among officials, especially when it comes to security cooperation on matters of “high politics” such as intelligence sharing or counter-terrorism.

Most importantly, member states need to utilise the organisation for more frequent engagements. Hosting meetings more consistently is critical to build rapport and trust among officials, especially when it comes to security cooperation on matters of “high politics” such as intelligence sharing or counter-terrorism. Sustaining this is a challenge but the socialisation element is important. For instance, the annual ASEAN foreign ministers’ meetings under the political-security pillar have taken place 57 times, with no hiatus in recent years (even through the COVID pandemic). Yet in the case of BIMSTEC, no National Security Chiefs meeting was held between 2019 and 2024.

Finally, BIMSTEC will also have to harmonise different perceptions of security among its member states. This gap is indicated by the wide range of different representatives at the NSC (see Table 3). The participants at the four meetings held so far include a mix of civilian, military, intelligence, and police representatives.

Political Instability and Security

After 2016, BIMSTEC has gone through a rapid trend of securitisation, with a variety of organisational changes and new initiatives. For the former Bangladesh defence and security advisor, Tariq Ahmed Siddique, BIMSTEC’s growing focus on “cooperative security” strived to collectively identify and combat shared security risks in the Bay of Bengal. With the region facing a variety of both domestic and transnational security challenges, both tradition and non-traditional, the stakes for BIMSTEC are high: will it be able to emerge as a site for deliberations, consultations and coordination, and maybe even as a platform for cooperative action?

The ambitious agenda started in 2016, and largely driven by India, is facing some significant headwinds from within its member-states. In 2021, a military coup in Myanmar ended its democratic experiment and the country has, since then, seen a spiral of new conflicts and instability. In 2022, Sri Lanka witnessed a massive political uprising and a financial default that severely curtailed its historical ambition to shape the Bay of Bengal into a regional economic and security commons anchored in BIMSTEC. And in 2024, Bangladesh plunged into political turmoil, ending fifteen years of political and economic stability that facilitated regional security cooperation. This is on top of other persistent conflicts between member-states, including Bangladesh-Myanmar tensions regarding Rohingya refugees with the potential of derailing or delaying BIMSTEC initiatives.

Rather than just formal cooperation structures, the organisations may play an important role as a platform for informal consultation on domestic, bilateral and regional security flashpoints.

How will BIMSTEC be able to craft a productive cooperative in such a difficult regional context? The way ahead will be rocky and require continued political investment from member states in BIMSTEC. The India-Myanmar-Thailand trilateral of July 2024, held at the side-lines of the BIMSTEC Foreign Ministers retreat, may be one among several possible solutions: rather than just formal cooperation structures, the organisations may play an important role as a platform for informal consultation on domestic, bilateral and regional security flashpoints. This would be an adaptation of the “ASEAN Way” on political and security issues in the Bay of Bengal region.

The post BIMSTEC and Security Cooperation in the Bay of Bengal first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/bimstec-and-security-cooperation-in-the-bay-of-bengal/feed/ 0 901116
Decoding Copper Cathode – Navigating Through the Indian Copper Market http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-copper-cathode-navigating-through-the-indian-copper-market/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=decoding-copper-cathode-navigating-through-the-indian-copper-market http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-copper-cathode-navigating-through-the-indian-copper-market/#respond Wed, 21 Aug 2024 10:41:59 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901069 To secure the copper supply chain, strategic investments, adherence to environmental standards, and robust public-private partnerships are crucial.

The post Decoding Copper Cathode – Navigating Through the Indian Copper Market first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Overview

Copper, a non-ferrous base metal, is highly valued for its exceptional conductivity, ductility, efficiency, corrosion resistance, machinability, and recyclability. Its extensive usage encompasses power generation, transmission, electricity distribution, and a myriad of end-use applications and consumer products.

Copper is used as a fundamental raw material across various industries, making it ‘Doctor Copper’, an important determinant of the economic health of any nation.

Beyond traditional sectors, copper is integral to energy transition technologies such as wind and solar power, storage batteries, and electric vehicles (EVs). The copper intensity for power generation from solar and wind sources is approximately twice that required for conventional power generation (International Energy Agency, 2022). Additionally, an EV necessitates two to three times more copper than an internal combustion engine vehicle.

The Criticality of Copper

Copper is essential for economic development and the green transition, leading major mining jurisdictions like the USA, Canada, Australia, and the EU to classify it as a critical and strategic mineral. The Ministry of Mines highlights copper’s high economic importance (Ministry of Mines, 2023). CSEP’s study on ‘Assessing the Criticality of Minerals for India’ assesses the criticality of 43 minerals based on their economic importance and supply risks (Chadha et al, 2023). The study points out that copper’s economic importance outweighs its supply risks. Its diversified supply sources, mature markets, and recyclability make it less risky on the supply side.

Economic Significance of Copper

To emphasise the economic significance, the latest ASI data (2021–22) indicates that the GVA by this sector amounted to Rs 6,80,944 lakh, representing approximately 11% of the GVA for the entire basic and non-ferrous metals manufacturing sector (Table 1). Based on the sectoral cathode consumption, it is estimated that approximately 10% of the country’s manufacturing GVA would be affected in the absence of effective substitutes if the cathode supply gets stalled. Copper cathode is extensively used as a critical raw material in various industries (Figure 1). A bulk portion of cathodes is consumed by copper product manufacturers and steel fabricators. Consequently, due to the widespread and diverse applications of copper across various industries, any disruption in the copper supply chain would have a substantial impact on the basic metals and metallurgical sectors. Moreover, cathodes serve as intermediary products not only to produce finished copper goods but also for other manufacturing industries, highlighting their crucial role in the economy.

Source: Annual Survey of Industries, 2021-22, MoSPI

In this emerging era of energy transition and economic growth, the annual global demand for refined copper is expected to reach 50 million tonnes by 2050, up from 26.1 million tonnes in 2022 (International Copper Association, 2023).

The Refined Copper (Cathode) Conundrum

The highest value addition in terms of purity occurs at the smelting and refining stage when copper concentrates are smelted into blister (90.5% Cu) and then refined into copper cathodes (> 99.99% Cu) which become available to the fabricators and downstream industries for end-use product manufacturing. Copper cathode is typically traded either through contracts or on-spot trading on the Commodity Exchange (COMEX) and London Metal Exchange (LME) and the cathodes’ price determines the prices of other embedded finished products.

Refined Copper Status: Production vs Consumption

Source: Indian Minerals Yearbook, IBM

The domestic production of copper cathode in India showed significant growth until 2017–18, followed by a sharp decline. While production saw a slight increase since 2020–21, it has not returned to pre-2017–18 levels (Figure 2). Globally, the average annual growth rate of refined copper production was 2% from 2013 to 2022 (International Copper Study Group, 2023). The domestic production of cathode has seen an average annual growth rate of just 0.01% over the past decade. For FY 2023–24, production was approximately 5.09 lakh tonnes, reflecting an 8% decrease from the previous year. Domestic consumption is computed by excluding each year’s exports of refined copper from the total domestic production and adding imported refined copper. Yearly trends in domestic consumption also reflect the demand for refined copper. Although demand dipped slightly in 2020–21, perhaps on account of the COVID-19 pandemic, it has been rising since 2021–22.

Until 2017–18, India was self-sufficient in meeting its domestic copper demand and exported a substantial amount of refined copper overseas.

However, Sterlite’s copper plant, with a production capacity of four lakh tonnes per year, has been shut down since 2018 due to environmental non-compliance and pollution concerns, drastically reducing domestic production afterwards (Yadav, 2024). As a result, the additional supply of refined copper is being met through imports, leading to a gradual increase in import volumes. The trade scenario is discussed in the following section.

Trade Scenario

Source: Ministry of Commerce https://tradestat.commerce.gov.in/eidb/default.asp

Since 2018–19, India has transitioned from being a net exporter to a net importer of copper. The inability of other domestic industries to pace up, combined with accelerating domestic demand, has exacerbated India’s reliance on copper imports, including refined copper (Figure 3).

Post-2018–19, the trade deficit has widened, with imports in FY 2023–24 increasing by 107% compared to the previous year.

Another factor contributing to rising imports, as reported by industries, is the reduction of duty rates to near-zero under Free Trade Agreements with Japan and ASEAN nations (Dhoot, 2015).

Closer Look at the Indian Copper Sector

Indian refined copper market faces a significant demand-supply gap. To address this critical challenge, we need to understand the loopholes and challenges faced by Indian copper processing and mid-stream processing industries, including smelters, refiners, and fabricators, as well as potential geopolitical challenges.

In the Indian copper scenario, three key players: Hindustan Copper Limited (HCL) from the public sector predominately engages in the mining and beneficiation of copper ore. In contrast, Sterlite Copper (a unit of Vedanta) and Hindalco from the private sector are mostly engaged in the processing, with a total installed smelting and refining capacity of nearly 10.28 lakh tonnes (Ministry of Mines, 2024).

The HCL produces copper ore and concentrates at their five operating copper mines. Moreover, HCL has two primary smelting and refining plants and a secondary copper smelter with a combined installed capacity of 0.68 lakh tonnes. However, since 2020, HCL has phased out its cathode production due to economic non-viability and entered a public-private partnership with Hindalco. Under this partnership, HCL will sell 60% of its concentrates to Hindalco for refined copper production, whereas the rest will be sold through open tender at LME-linked prices (Hindalco Industries Limited, 2020).

With HCL ceasing its copper cathode production, Hindalco and Vedanta remain the only dominant players in the refined copper market.

Hindalco operates a port-based custom copper smelter at Dahej, Gujarat, housing three smelters and three refineries with a combined installed capacity of 500 thousand tonnes, making it the second-largest smelter and sixth-largest refiner in the world. In FY 2022–23, it produced 407 thousand tonnes of cathode, exhibiting a growth rate of 13% over the preceding year (Hindalco Industries Limited, 2023). Hindalco meets more than 50% of domestic refined copper requirements, catering to diverse sectors such as railways, electrical equipment, consumer durables, automotive and transport.

Vedanta Ltd.’s Sterlite Copper used to contribute more than 36% of India’s demand for refined copper with an installed capacity of 460 thousand tonnes in their two operating units at Thoothukudi, Tamil Nadu and Silvassa, Daman and Diu (Ministry of Mines, 2024). However, in 2022–23, Vedanta recorded 148 thousand tonnes of cathode production from its only operational Silvassa plant, which has an installed capacity of 216 thousand tonnes per annum (Vedanta Limited, 2022–23). A study estimated the consolidated loss due to the closure of the Thoothukudi plant is approximately Rs 14,749 Cr which is about 0.72% of the state GDP of Tamil Nadu (Batra, 2022). Both companies rely on importing copper concentrates from their mines abroad or other overseas reserves (Ministry of Mines, 2024).

As an emerging player, Adani Enterprises’ subsidiary, Kutch Copper, has recently launched the first unit of its greenfield copper refinery at Mundra, Gujarat. With an initial investment of USD 1.2 billion, the first phase will establish a smelter with a capacity of 500 thousand tonnes, eventually expanding to one million tonnes per annum in the second phase, making it one of the largest port-based single-location custom smelters in the world (Adani Enterprises Limited, 2024).

Global Concerns of Processing

Copper processing is apparently more concentrated than copper mining, where China dominates approximately 44% of global refined copper production. In contrast, the top three countries in copper mine production are Chile (23%), Peru (12%) and the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) (11%) (Mineral Commodity Summary, 2024). Despite, being the largest extractor of copper, Chile produced only 8% of the world’s refined copper in 2023, down from 12% in 2015. A substantial portion of Chile’s copper concentrate is exported for refining, primarily to China (IEA, 2024).

In a usual copper business model, commissioning new projects involves long-term agreements between miners, semi-fabricators and refiners, as smelters require a guaranteed supply of copper concentrates as feedstock. However, there is a tightened supply of concentrates due to resource exhaustion in existing mines, diminishing grades, geotechnical and operational issues, limited discoveries, and delays in commissioning new mining operations. This constrained supply, combined with the expansion of smelting and refining capacity, will affect treatment and refining charges (TC/RCs)[1], leading to an increase in capital and operating costs. Most miners and smelters negotiate long-term contracts based on an annually agreed benchmark framework, where the first settlement between a major miner and a smelter typically sets the benchmark TC for the year ahead (Charlesworth, 2024). In November 2023, Chilean miner Antofagasta and Chinese smelter Jinchuan established the benchmark at USD 80 per tonne. The same rate was adopted by Freeport-McMoRan and Jiangxi Copper. This TC is 9% lower than the previous year’s USD 88 per tonne, marking the first drop in TCs in three years (Mining.Com, 2023).

[1] TC/RCs are the fees which the mining companies pay to the smelters to convert their semi-processed ore or concentrate into cathodes or finished metal.

This global plummeting of TCs/RCs adversely impacts Indian processors’ revenue as well as the entire copper supply chain, market, and investment. To offset this, domestic smelters must prioritise increasing value-added output over enhancing tonnage.

While Kutch Copper’s entry might boost production and ease the trade deficit, currently, only 50% of India’s mid-stream processing capacity gets utilised. Huge working capital requirements, complex raw material procurement, scarce availability of domestic ore and concentrates, and bulk imports of cathodes and other finished products have adversely impacted India’s primary and downstream copper industry. 

The Way Forward

Copper industries face several challenges in terms of global supply-chain vulnerabilities, import reliance, limited geopolitical presence, shutting down of major production units, scarce domestic ores, and insufficient exploration to convert resources into reserves and reserves into production.

Addressing these challenges requires strategic investments, adherence to environmental standards, and leveraging public-private partnerships to enhance production capacities. Building domestic processing capabilities, focusing on research and development, and technological innovation are essential to secure the copper supply chain. Given the capital intensity of the industry, incorporating copper mid-stream processors into India’s production-linked incentive scheme would incentivise domestic processors to attract further investments (Raizada & Moerenhout, 2024). However, providing such incentives is a short-term solution to an overall push to make the industry internationally competitive.

The strategic acquisition of mines abroad in copper-rich countries such as Chile, Peru, DRC, Australia, and South Africa, along with bilateral cooperation in copper processing ventures and knowledge-sharing through diplomatic and trade agreements, should be augmented. Alongside Khanij Bidesh India Limited’s (KABIL’s) government-to-government (G-to-G) negotiations, efforts should also be directed towards business-to-business (B-to-B) collaborations.

The exemption of customs duties on 25 critical minerals, as declared in the Union Budget 2024-25, will boost the domestic processing and refining sector, thereby enhancing competitiveness in the manufacturing sector (Press Information Bureau, 2024).

References

Adani Enterprises Limited. (2024). Adani’s copper unit in Mundra begins operations. Retrieved from https://www.adanienterprises.com/en/newsroom/media-releases/adanis-copper-unit-in-mundra-begins-operations

Chadha, R. Sivamani, G. and Bansal, K. (2023). Assessing the Criticality of Minerals for India: 2023 (CSEP Working Paper 49). New Delhi: Centre for Social and Economic Progress. Retrieved from https://csep.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Critical-Minerals-for-India-2.pdf

Charlesworth, L. (2024, June). Copper concentrate benchmark structure at risk in current market – Fastmarkets. Fastmarkets. Retrieved from https://www.fastmarkets.com/insights/copper-concentrate-benchmark-structure-at-risk/

Dhoot, V. (2015, October). As cheaper imports increases copper industry sends SOS to government. The Economic Times. Retrieved from https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/industry/indl-goods/svs/metals-mining/as-cheaper-imports-increases-copper-industry-sends-sos-to-government/articleshow/49344924.cms?from=mdr

Hindalco Industries Limited. (2020, September). Hindalco and Hindustan Copper sign MoU for supply of copper concentrate. Retrieved from https://www.hindalco.com/media/press-releases/hindalco-and-hindustan-copper-sign-mou-for-supply-of-copper-concentrate

Hindalco Industries Limited. (2023). Integrated annual report 2022–23. Retrieved from https://www.hindalco.com/upload/pdf/hindalco-annual-report-2022-23.pdf

IEA. (2024). Global Critical Minerals Outlook 2024, IEA, Paris. Retrieved from https://iea.blob.core.windows.net/assets/ee01701d-1d5c-4ba8-9df6-abeeac9de99a/GlobalCriticalMineralsOutlook2024.pdf

International Copper Association. (2023). COPPER—THE PATHWAY TO NET ZERO. In Copper—The Pathway to Net Zero: Summary. Retrieved from https://internationalcopper.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ICA-GlobalDecarb-Summary-A4-202302-R3.pdf

International Copper Study Group. (2023). The World Copper Factbook 2023. Retrieved from https://icsg.org/copper-factbook/

International Energy Agency. (2022). The role of critical minerals in clean energy transitions. https://iea.blob.core.windows.net/assets/ffd2a83b-8c30-4e9d-980a-52b6d9a86fdc/TheRoleofCriticalMineralsinCleanEnergyTransitions.pdf

Mineral Commodity Summary. (2024). U.S. Geological Survey, 64–65. Retrieved from https://pubs.usgs.gov/periodicals/mcs2024/mcs2024.pdf

Mining.Com. (2023, December). Copper miners, Chinese smelters agree on first drop in fees in 3 years – MINING.COM. Retrieved from https://www.mining.com/web/copper-miners-chinese-smelters-agree-first-drop-in-fees-in-3-years/

Ministry of Mines, Indian Bureau of Mines. (2024, April). Indian Minerals Yearbook 2022 (Part II: Metals and Alloys). Retrieved from https://ibm.gov.in/writereaddata/files/1715685346664347e2b0816Copper_2022.pdf

Ministry of Mines. (2023). Critical Minerals for India. Retrieved from https://mines.gov.in/admin/storage/app/uploads/649d4212cceb01688027666.pdf

Press Information Bureau. (2024, July). Reforms In Customs Duties Will Support Domestic Manufacturing and Promote Export Competitiveness. Ministry of Finance. Retrieved from https://pib.gov.in/PressReleasePage.aspx?PRID=2035601

Raizada, S., & Moerenhout, T. (2024). Securing India’s Copper Supply Challenges and the way forward. International Institute for Sustainable Development. Retrieved from https://www.iisd.org/system/files/2024-07/securing-india-copper-supply.pdf

Vedanta Limited. (2022-23). Integrated Report and Annual Accounts 2022-23. Retrieved from https://www.vedantalimited.com/uploads/investor-overview/annual-report/Vedanta-Limited-Integrated-Annual-Report-202022-23-VF.pdf

Yadav, K. (2024). SC junks Vedanta’s plea to reopen Sterlite Copper’s Thoothukudi plant. Mint. Retrieved from https://www.livemint.com/companies/news/setback-for-vedanta-as-sc-dismisses-plea-to-reopen-sterlite-copper-plant-in-tamil-nadus-thoothukudi-11709205833536.html

The post Decoding Copper Cathode – Navigating Through the Indian Copper Market first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-copper-cathode-navigating-through-the-indian-copper-market/feed/ 0 901069
The Cost Conundrum: How CBAM Could Affect the Competitiveness of EU Manufacturers http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-cost-conundrum-how-cbam-could-affect-the-competitiveness-of-eu-manufacturers/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-cost-conundrum-how-cbam-could-affect-the-competitiveness-of-eu-manufacturers http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-cost-conundrum-how-cbam-could-affect-the-competitiveness-of-eu-manufacturers/#respond Tue, 20 Aug 2024 11:27:26 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=901051 With more countries, including the UK, and Australia announcing their intention to implement similar CBAM mechanisms, thoughtful consideration of the potential impacts and trade-offs involved is essential.

The post The Cost Conundrum: How CBAM Could Affect the Competitiveness of EU Manufacturers first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In the global fight against climate change, nations are stepping up their efforts with commitments like net-zero targets and Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs). The European Union (EU) has been at the forefront of the fight against climate change. In 2005, it launched the Emissions Trading System (EU ETS) to reduce emissions of greenhouse gases in the territory, which is believed to have resulted in carbon leakage and hampered the competitiveness of EU manufacturers. As a part of the EU’s green deal, in 2023 Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) in its transitional phase has already been implemented, and starting January 2026, imports of targeted sectors i.e. aluminium, cement, iron and steel, fertilisers, electricity and hydrogen, would be subject to the carbon price on their embedded emissions. It has been touted as a solution to carbon leakage and level the playing field for EU manufacturers, who contend that their competitiveness is adversely impacted by foreign counterparts operating in less stringent regulatory environments.

Full implementation of CBAM would be coupled with the gradual phasing out of free allowances allocated to the EU manufacturers under EU ETS to ensure it complies with the World Trade Organization (WTO) rules.

With regard to the potential impacts of CBAM, concerns have been raised that it may further strain international trade. Numerous studies in the literature indicate that CBAM might hurt exporters of CBAM-targeted sectors to the EU, especially from countries like China and India, which have relatively higher carbon intensity in their production processes. In addition to that, CBAM which has been imposed with the intent of boosting the competitiveness of domestic manufacturers might not yield the anticipated benefits, especially in the case of manufacturers of downstream products. This is because, the imposition of carbon price on imports of select sectors by the EU and phasing out of free allowances may lead to an increase in the cost of production of downstream sectors, as these targeted sectors are not only consumed as a final product, but are also absorbed as intermediate products. As a result, carbon price might emerge as a significant factor for the increase in cost of production and may thus affect the international trade of the EU itself. Considering the potential implications of CBAM on prices of EU’s own manufactured products too, its closer scrutiny becomes imperative.

EU’s Relevance in International Trade

EU is a major player in international trade and ranks among the top three globally when it comes to the value of global exports and imports. In 2023, its share of world exports accounted for around 13.1% (Figure 1) which is the second largest in the world, next to China. To get a better understanding of the EU’s contribution to international trade, one may also look at the EU’s total exports i.e. the sum of intra-EU[1] exports and extra-EU exports, which account for around 36% of total exports globally. Figure 1 also shows that a significant portion of exports by EU member countries (64% of EU’s total exports) head to other EU members. This trend is more evident in case of CBAM sectors, as EU-27 imports most of these products from its member nations only (Table 1).

The top three sectors contributing most to the EU’s exports to the rest of the world include machinery and equipment, transport equipment, and chemical and chemical products, which in aggregate account for about 50% of the EU’s total exports to the rest of the world (Table 2). These are also the sectors which have huge dependence in terms of intermediate inputs on CBAM sectors such as Iron and Steel, Aluminium, Electricity, etc. for their production. The next section further examines the possible impacts of CBAM.

CBAM and its Unanticipated Impacts on EU Manufacturers’ Competitiveness

The implementation of CBAM will make it mandatory to pay the carbon price on emissions embedded in imports of targeted sectors while allowing a rebate for any carbon price paid domestically. The implementation and extension of CBAM to other sectors will be coupled with the gradual phasing out of free allowances given to certain domestic producers within the EU. In the case of Iron and Steel, Fertilizers, Cement and Electricity, almost 3/4th of imports of these targeted sectors by the EU come from its member states only (Table 1), suggesting that gradual removal of free allocation of allowances from these sectors might result into an increase in their production cost. Imports of these CBAM products from other trading partners like the UK, USA, China, India, etc. would experience imposition of carbon price under CBAM as scope and carbon prices under existing carbon pricing policies of UK, China or USA are not comparable with the EU’s carbon pricing policies.

The duo of imposition of carbon price on imports of select sectors and removal of free allowances is expected to push up the production cost and prices of targeted sectors in the European market.

Since these targeted products are also absorbed as intermediates for further processing, an increase in the price of these intermediates is expected to increase the cost of production of downstream sectors too, which in turn will have an impact on the cost of production of further downstream sectors.

As long as the scope of CBAM is not being extended to cover emissions embedded in downstream sectors, CBAM in its present form may hamper the competitiveness of EU manufacturers disproportionately. ​ADB (2024)​ also suggests that while CBAM may help fight against carbon leakage due to EU-ETS by bringing production back to the EU, downstream producers in the EU however may shift some of their production outside of the EU because of CBAM.
As per the TiVA 2023 database, the value added as a share of total production by the Transport equipment and machinery sectors within the EU was around 28% and 37% in 2020, highlighting the huge dependence of the two sectors on upstream sectors including CBAM sectors. To better understand how CBAM sectors like steel may impact the EU manufacturers in downstream sectors, we may further look into how steel is consumed across various economic activities in their production processes. As per ​EUROFER (2022)​, 19% of the finished steel was consumed by the automotive and other transport sectors, and almost 15% went to the mechanical engineering sector. These are also the sectors which contribute to the EU’s total exports the most (around half of the EU’s total merchandise exports to the world outside), suggesting that an increase in the price of steel due to CBAM and phasing out of free allowances is expected to have a significant impact on the cost of production and hence exports of sectors like automotive, mechanical engineering, etc. which in turn may hamper the competitiveness of manufacturers of these sectors. Since, the EU is among the world’s largest producers of Automotive ​(European Commission, n.d.)​ and the largest producer and exporter of machinery ​(European Commission, n.d.)​, and the two sectors contribute significantly to the EU’s value addition, output, employment, trade and have an important multiplier effect on the economy, an adverse impact of CBAM on manufacturers of these sectors may have huge ramifications.

While CBAM may offer protection to Europe’s green producers of select sectors by bringing their production back to the EU, downstream manufacturers are left vulnerable to the unintended consequences of higher costs, as they might have to face the prospect of soaring production costs, which may threaten their competitiveness. This analysis does not account for potential implication of the increasing efforts taken by the companies globally to decarbonise their production processes, which are expected to reduce emissions and, consequently, may lessen the impact of carbon price on targeted sectors due to CBAM and phase-out of free allowances. This suggests that the true impact of CBAM will also depend on the cost of mitigation. Although the actual effects of CBAM on EU manufacturers remain uncertain and are yet to be fully realised, as CBAM in its definitive regime[2] is going to be implemented, it is crucial to assess if the anticipated economic benefits of levelling the playing field for EU manufacturers will outweigh the potential adverse impacts. With more countries, including the UK, and Australia announcing their intention to implement similar CBAM mechanisms, thoughtful consideration of the potential impacts and trade-offs involved is essential.

 

References 

ADB. (2024). Asian Economic Integration Report 2024: Decarbonizing Global Value Chains. https://www.adb.org/sites/default/files/publication/945596/asian-economic-integration-report-2024.pdf 

EUROFER. (2022). EUROFER, 2022, European-Steel-in-Figures-2022-v2. https://www.eurofer.eu/assets/publications/brochures-booklets-and-factsheets/european-steel-in-figures-2022/European-Steel-in-Figures-2022-v2.pdf 

European Commission. (n.d.). Mechanical engineering. https://single-market-economy.ec.europa.eu/sectors/mechanical-engineering_en  

European Commission. (n.d.).  Automotive industry. https://single-market-economy.ec.europa.eu/sectors/automotive-industry_en  

The post The Cost Conundrum: How CBAM Could Affect the Competitiveness of EU Manufacturers first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-cost-conundrum-how-cbam-could-affect-the-competitiveness-of-eu-manufacturers/feed/ 0 901051
A Better but Still Insufficient MEA Budget for Indian Diplomacy http://stg.csep.org/blog/a-better-but-still-insufficient-mea-budget-for-indian-diplomacy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=a-better-but-still-insufficient-mea-budget-for-indian-diplomacy http://stg.csep.org/blog/a-better-but-still-insufficient-mea-budget-for-indian-diplomacy/#respond Fri, 26 Jul 2024 10:22:56 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=900754 For India to realise its 2047 Viksit Bharat ambition and pursue its strategies for an increasingly competitive and complex world, the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) plays a critical role. Yet as we cautioned in last year’s detailed budget analysis, the MEA’s capacity constraints have been posing significant obstacles.

The post A Better but Still Insufficient MEA Budget for Indian Diplomacy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
For India to realise its 2047 Viksit Bharat ambition and pursue its strategies for an increasingly competitive and complex world, the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) plays a critical role. Yet as we cautioned in last year’s detailed budget analysis, the MEA’s capacity constraints have been posing significant obstacles.

The Indian Foreign Service (IFS) remains understaffed, with approximately one thousand officers, which makes it one of the smallest diplomatic services relative to India’s economy and population globally. This is proving to be manifestly insufficient to oversee around two hundred diplomatic missions abroad, as well as the headquarters and many other nodal positions across the central government to facilitate foreign policy coordination.

Beyond human resources, there are also other significant capacity gaps that pose a risk of affecting India’s reputation and squander the potential of many new initiatives and commitments. Several African countries have shown interest to engage Delhi following its G20 presidency ambition to ‘lead’ the Global South—yet the hard reality is that the MEA’s financial firepower in terms of grants and loans is still far less than that of competitor China or several European countries.

To cope with rising ambition and expectations for India to move from domestic vision to international action, the MEA will need more than just a meagre budget. This is urgent given that new areas are emerging—from defence diplomacy to digital and technology partnerships—that require India to be represented in new international forums.

To cope with rising ambition and expectations for India to move from domestic vision to international action, the MEA will need more than just a meagre budget. This is urgent given that new areas are emerging—from defence diplomacy to digital and technology partnerships—that require India to be represented in new international forums with experts that can contribute to specialised, technical negotiations.

For instance, the MEA will have to empower its climate diplomacy, to complement and encourage the effort of other ministries. There is also increasing demand for India to play a more prominent role in global health governance, beyond the WHO. And with over twenty million citizens abroad, India’s diaspora diplomacy will also face new consular challenges, including more frequent and complex expatriate evacuation operations.

Overall, this year’s budget (2024–25) is a good indication that the MEA is on the way to receive more, albeit still insufficient resources to enhance its capacity to define and defend Indian interests abroad.  Two important dimensions stand out in the budget.

The MEA saw a budgetary increase of approximately 23%, compared to the previous year. This marks a notable change from the limited—and even negative—growth in the MEA’s budget estimates over the past five years.

First, the MEA saw a significant budgetary increase of approximately 23%, compared to the previous year, increasing from INR 18,050 crores (USD 2.1 billion) to INR 22,155 crores (approx. USD 2.6 billion). This marks a notable change from the limited—and even negative—growth in the MEA’s budget estimates over the past five years, including during the G20 presidency year (see Figure 1). The increased allocation partially delivers on the recommendations of the 21st report of the Parliamentary Committee on External Affairs for the MEA (2022–23) to strengthen the ministry’s capacity and resources to better serve India’s foreign policy objectives. However, stuck at a share of 0.4% of the total Union budget, the MEA budget still falls short of reaching the Committee’s recommended figure of 1%.

Source: MEA Budget Documents between 2020–2025

Second, there has been an 8% reduction in the budget allocated for ‘Technical and Economic Cooperation with other countries.’ This category encompasses various instruments of economic assistance to India’s neighbouring countries and other nations in the Global South, as well as contributions to regional and multilateral forums such as SAARC and BIMSTEC, and disaster relief assistance. Bhutan, the largest recipient of India’s assistance, saw a 14% decrease in budgetary estimates, dropping from INR 2,400 crore (approx. USD 290 million) last year to INR 2,068 crore (approx. USD 247 million) this year. Yet one should refrain from interpreting this as New Delhi being less interested in, or committed to Bhutan—a common mistake if one does a mere numerical analysis of yearly trends in economic assistance by country (see Figure 2).

For example, if one looks at other line items in the budget, this year saw a converse 29% increase for Bhutan under ‘Advances to Foreign Governments,’ which mainly includes highly preferential loans to develop various hydroelectric projects. After many decades of delays, these advances align with India’s regional connectivity strategy to develop an integrated energy grid and market with Bhutan, Bangladesh and Nepal (BBIN).

Source: MEA Budget 2024–25, P. 113–114
Note: The figures have been rounded.

India’s vision of a Viksit Bharat in 2047 will require a stronger, smarter and more capable state that can promote and protect Indian interests abroad. This year’s budget marks a positive step in the direction for the Ministry of External Affairs but far more is required to endow and prepare Indian diplomacy.

Additionally, the allocation in assistance for Bangladesh also decreased by 40% from last year. This reduction can be attributed to two main factors. First, several of India’s projects in Bangladesh, including the Akhaura–Agartala railway line, have been completed, reducing the need for further funding. Second, Bangladesh has become the largest recipient of India’s Lines of Credit (LoCs), with India extending USD 7.4 billion in LoCs to date for projects in sectors such as railways, roads, shipping, ports, and defence. This shift in the funding strategy for both Bhutan and Bangladesh reflects a broader trend in India’s development cooperation, moving from grants to low-interest loans. This also marks growing diplomatic alignments with the private sector, whether to build transportation and energy infrastructure with neighbour countries or to take India’s digital public infrastructure abroad.

India’s vision of a Viksit Bharat in 2047 will require a stronger, smarter and more capable state that can promote and protect Indian interests abroad. This year’s budget marks a positive step in the direction for the Ministry of External Affairs but far more is required to endow and prepare Indian diplomacy for both the known and unknown challenges of the next decades.

The post A Better but Still Insufficient MEA Budget for Indian Diplomacy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/a-better-but-still-insufficient-mea-budget-for-indian-diplomacy/feed/ 0 900754
Russia’s Rising Role in India’s Neighbourhood First Policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/russias-rising-role-in-indias-neighbourhood-first-policy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=russias-rising-role-in-indias-neighbourhood-first-policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/russias-rising-role-in-indias-neighbourhood-first-policy/#respond Thu, 11 Jul 2024 08:10:09 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=900582 The blog argues that common to most of the analysis on Russia-India relations is the restrictive tendency to focus on three pillars: arms, energy, and China. However, a closer review of the relationship shows how they have been expanding to new areas of co-operation in South Asia.

The post Russia’s Rising Role in India’s Neighbourhood First Policy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India-Russia relations go beyond just arms, oil, and China: New Delhi and Moscow are also engaging in South Asia.

Modi’s July 8th visit to Moscow marked the first bilateral visit of his third term, signalling the continued importance of the relationship. This was his first trip to Moscow since 2015 and the first India-Russia summit since the Ukraine war.

Going by the text of the rather bland joint statement, with few high-visibility deliverables, one may be tempted to term the visit as a failure. At best, this would suggest continuity of a plateauing relationship, driven by mere tactical interests to sustain defence ties, energy trade, and strategic signalling to China.

Both sides have been able to convert their high levels of trust into new areas of co-operation in countries such as Sri Lanka or Bangladesh, at the heart of the Indo-Pacific.

Yet going beyond the text, a closer examination of the India-Russia relationship in recent years shows how New Delhi and Moscow have been fleshing out new areas of co-operation in South Asia–India’s traditional sphere of influence. Much of this remains under the radar but it indicates how both sides have been able to convert their high levels of trust into new areas of co-operation in countries such as Sri Lanka or Bangladesh, at the heart of the Indo-Pacific.

How Many Pillars to the Partnership?

There has been a lively debate on what role Russia plays in India’s evolving strategic balance. For some, this is a relationship based on “mutual trust” and respect that continues to hold much promise for India and requires more, not less attention and investment – whether for New Delhi to symbolically demonstrate its strategic autonomy or to insure against possible over-reliance on the United States. For others, this is a plateauing, declining, or increasingly transactional partnership with growing limitations, suggesting that New Delhi tends to overrate Russia’s importance at the risk of complicating its convergence with the United States and other Western powers.

Common to most of the analysis on Russia-India relations, however, is the restrictive tendency to focus on only three pillars: arms, energy, and China. In one rather popular perspective, the India-Russia relationship is now reduced to a “single pillar” of defence co-operation and arms trade, albeit Moscow’s share in India’s arsenal is declining.

A second, economic pillar has also garnered much attention. Bilateral trade has boomed with Russian imports reaching nearly $65 billion (up from $11 billion in 2021), but the hard reality is that energy makes up roughly 85% of total trade. To put the economic dimension in context, India exports four times more to Bangladesh, seven times more to the Netherlands, and over twenty times more to the US than to Russia.

Finally, there is the highly debated geostrategic pillar and how Russia fits (or not) in Delhi’s evolving role in the US-India-China triangle. Given that India’s relations with China remain frozen and the convergence with the United States continues steadfast, Modi’s visit has been chalked up as a way to counter growing China-Russia bonds. Yet nobody in Delhi is under the illusion that a single visit will reverse the ‘No Limits Partnership’ between Moscow and Beijing.

This focus on defence, energy, and China risks blinding us to other, lesser-known dimensions of the relationship where India and Russia are seeking to broaden their bilateral ties. There is significant evidence that New Delhi and Moscow have been working towards bolstering regional and global pillars of co-operation.

For example, India and Russia are working together to set up alternative multilateral organisations such as BRICS, including the New Development Bank (NDB) and alternative finance and trade mechanisms to circumvent the US-led sanctions systems. To pursue its security interests in Central Asia, India has joined the Shanghai Cooperation Organization with Russian support and continues to work closely with Moscow on global counterterrorism. In Afghanistan after 2021, both countries have aligned positions and deepened security consultations. India and Russia are also deepening their co-operation on space exploration and in the Arctic.

Meeting Ground South Asia

One specific area to watch out for is the extent to which Russia has been consulting, coordinating, or co-operating with India in other countries in South Asia, barring Pakistan, of course. Successive Indian governments have defined this geographic periphery as their top strategic priority: for India this is a critical sphere of influence akin to Russia’s Near Abroad. Not surprisingly, there are significant parallels between Indian thinking on Bangladesh, Nepal, or Sri Lanka and Russia’s approach to Ukraine, Georgia, or Uzbekistan.

There are significant parallels between Indian thinking on Bangladesh, Nepal, or Sri Lanka and Russia’s approach to Ukraine, Georgia, or Uzbekistan.

In hosting the leaders of India’s smaller neighbour countries for his inauguration in the month of June, Modi reaffirmed the centrality of his ‘Neighbourhood First Policy.’ Strengthening these relationships is vital at a time when the ‘India Out’ campaign in the Maldives, Chinese influence in Nepal, and China’s acquisition of crucial infrastructure in Sri Lanka have been eroding India’s once predominant position in the region. Across the subcontinent, China’s influence through the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) has grown rapidly and that is pushing India to rethink ways to deliver more, faster, and better to its neighbour countries.

One of India’s responses has been through partnerships with extra-regional powers, including the United States, Japan, and Australia – which are all investing in energy, transportation, and other connectivity sectors to deliver joint alternatives to the BRI across South Asia. But India has also realised that its Quad partners are not always welcome by its smaller neighbours due to geopolitical sensitivities or Chinese pressure. For New Delhi, Russia thus comes in handy as an alternative partner which continues to garner much sympathy across the Global South. 

For Moscow, in turn, a growing profile in South Asia also aligns with its attempts to Look East and find diplomatic and economic opportunities beyond the West. This is largely welcome by India to craft a multipolar balance of power in Asia, suggesting that in New Delhi’s assessment Russia retains significant agency and should not (yet) be treated as China’s subordinate. Beckoning Moscow to explore congruences with Indian policies in Asia, India’s External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar thus emphasised in 2019 that “Russia is a Pacific Power which has Indian Ocean interests” and that India therefore “hoped” for a “Russian version of the Indo-Pacific.”

One may have expected the Russia-Ukraine war to have tempered such Indian expectations, but the reality shows that India and Russia have since then been able to further align and convert congruences into co-operation in South Asia. Three areas stand out: politics, energy, and infrastructure.

Political co-operation between India and Russia is driven by their default preference for non-interference, especially in face of Western values-based interventionism, economic sanctions, and other forms of coercion. A notable instance of Indo-Russia diplomatic alignment on regional issues occurred during the 2014 Bangladesh elections. The US strongly criticised the results yet both India and Russia remained reserved and may even have aligned their positions. Most recently, this was again apparent in Indian and Russian responses to the 2024 re-election of Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina, in contrast to sanctions and political pressure from the United States and its European allies.

India and Russia have also frequently shared positions at multilateral institutions, including scepticism about initiatives such as the Responsibility to Protect (R2P). In India’s neighbourhood, this manifested most recently when both countries abstained from a UN General Assembly resolution condemning the 2021 Myanmar coup. New Delhi and Moscow have found ways to engage the military regime despite US imposed sanctions. And at the UN Human Rights Council, India and Russia’s votes on Myanmar have also aligned more often with each other than with the United States or European countries.

A second dimension of India-Russia convergence is focused on financial and technical assistance to facilitate South Asia’s energy transition. The most significant example is that of Bangladesh and joint support for the Rooppur Nuclear Power Plant (RNPP) — the country’s first. Led by Rosatom State Nuclear Energy Corporation, the project is anchored in a 2018 tripartite agreement between Russia, Bangladesh, and India.

The complexity of the project requires close coordination between New Delhi and Moscow. The involvement of India’s Department of Atomic Energy attests to the high levels of trust between their strategic and scientific establishments when it comes to working together in a third country, building on decades of bilateral nuclear co-operation. The RNPP has contracted Indian firms for civil construction, its transmission lines are financed by an Indian line of credit, and Indian experts are also working directly on site, as well as training their Bangladeshi counterparts.

A third dimension of India-Russia co-operation focuses on offering developmental solutions to South Asian countries seeking to reach middle-income status amidst global economic headwinds. Many of these countries are seeking alternative partners after BRI investments and Chinese imports slowed down, and there were bitter experiences with China-financed ‘white elephant’ infrastructure projects that aggravated their debt exposure, fiscal resilience or state capacity.

The Russian and Indian capital are exploring joint ventures with state support to cater to such investment and financing demands across the region, particularly in Sri Lanka.

There are indications that Russian and Indian capital are exploring joint ventures with state support to cater to such investment and financing demands across the region, particularly in Sri Lanka. One notable example is the Mattala Rajapaksa International Airport in Hambantota, built on a $190 million high interest loan from China’s Exim Bank. However, after opening in 2013 it was soon dubbed the ‘World’s Emptiest Airport,’ sustained heavy losses and shut down.

The Indian government had been eyeing Mattala airport for several years, to develop it as an Maintenance, Repair and Overhaul (MRO) hub for its growing aviation industry, but was wary of forcing one of its notoriously inefficient public sector companies to take on the burden alone. Russia then emerged as a useful partner for a private sector-led initiative: in July 2024, the Sri Lankan cabinet announced that it would transfer the airport’s management for 30 years to a joint venture between India’s Shaurya Aeronautics and Russia’s Airports of Regions Management Company. Given both companies’ profiles and the strategic importance of Mattala to Indian interests in Sri Lanka, it is very likely that this joint venture is being developed with sanction or support from both governments. 

Limits and Opportunities  

The India-Russia convergence in South Asia is still tentative; part of a broader attempt by both India and Russia to expand the scope of their relationship. Whether it succeeds or not remains to be seen, but for now more study is required on where, when, and how New Delhi and Moscow are translating areas of congruence into practical co-operation.

India is concerned about Beijing’s growing leverage over Moscow and will continue monitoring whether Russia’s South Asia policy will resist submitting to hostile Chinese interests.

There will be significant headwinds: India is concerned about Beijing’s growing leverage over Moscow and will continue monitoring whether Russia’s South Asia policy will resist submitting to hostile Chinese interests. India will also be worried about Russia possibly using South Asia as another staging ground to attack American interests or irritate the far more advanced level of US-India co-operation in the region. Finally, Western sanctions have complicated Russia’s ability to conduct international business, including in Rooppur, which will make it more difficult for the Indian government to nudge its companies into joint ventures with Russian capital in third countries.

Moscow has either been in alignment or chosen to defer to New Delhi on regional policies, paving the way for more co-operation.

Yet Russia and India still share a close bond and their overall high levels of political trust offer multiple opportunities in South Asia. With the occasional exception of Pakistan, Moscow has either been in alignment or chosen to defer to New Delhi on regional policies, paving the way for more co-operation. Both India and Russia have also independently explored Nepal’s hydropower potential, and future joint ventures could include the takeover of Chinese owned projects. Russia could also work with India to leverage the USSR’s significant footprint in the region during the Cold War, including the Panauti Hydropower Station in Nepal, Ghorashal and Siddhirganj power plants in Bangladesh, or the Ceylon Steel, Tyre and Sugar Corporations in Sri Lanka. Joint production of military hardware, as well as the softer dimensions of training and defence diplomacy offer two further areas that India and Russia are likely to explore to engage countries in the Indian Ocean region. 

Modi’s visit to Moscow may have resulted in a rather anodyne joint statement but there is far more than meets the eye: India and Russia have been silently exploring new areas of co-operation and, at least in South Asia, there is significant evidence of success. 

The post Russia’s Rising Role in India’s Neighbourhood First Policy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/russias-rising-role-in-indias-neighbourhood-first-policy/feed/ 0 900582
What Differentiates Successful GVCs: Lessons for India http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-will-have-to-bear-higher-import-bill-to-integrate-into-gvcs/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-will-have-to-bear-higher-import-bill-to-integrate-into-gvcs http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-will-have-to-bear-higher-import-bill-to-integrate-into-gvcs/#respond Wed, 03 Jul 2024 10:35:57 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=900483 If India wants to use GVCs to strengthen its export flows, it will have to liberalise the entry of imported goods, specifically inputs/intermediate goods, by lowering the import tariffs.

The post What Differentiates Successful GVCs: Lessons for India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Global trade can be an important source of economic transformation for an emerging economy like India, through increased employment[1]. However, India has not been able to use this important tool to its potential, and, is facing challenges in sustaining the export journey that it started after its economic reforms in 1991. While India’s share in global exports increased at an impressive rate since 1991, the share has stagnated since 2011. Its share in global exports was 1.8 per cent in 2011, and has increased by merely 0.2 per cent, to reach a 2 per cent share in global exports, in 2022 (WITS, 2022).

Lack of Export Orientation

The export activities of the manufacturing firms in India can help to understand this national trend. In this regard, World Bank’s Enterprise survey[2] brings out the low weightage that Indian manufacturers give to the foreign market and demand, with only 9.2 per cent of Indian firms exporting (at least 10 per cent) of their sales directly, in comparison to 15.4 and 15.9 per cent for Vietnam and China (Table 1).

This survey-based information can be corroborated with the firms’ financial data derived from the CMIE Prowess database, according to which, out of the total manufacturing firms listed (47372), only 17 per cent of firms are exporting (8106), dominated by petroleum, gems and jewelry and automobile firms.

Only 9.2 per cent of Indian firms exporting (at least 10 per cent) of their sales directly.

Importing for Higher Exports

Given this trend of low export-oriented manufacturing in India, it is important to understand the wider picture of the export dynamics. An important driver of a country’s exports is the import of key inputs like raw materials, capital goods, and intermediate goods, which is determined by the import tariffs a country places on these imports.  This explains why countries like the US, China, and Germany, the global export leaders, are also top importing nations (Table 2). This relationship can also be observed at the product level, indicated by the commonality between top exporting and importing countries for the electronics and automobile sectors (Table 3). Even Vietnam, an emerging electronics hub, appears to be among the top exporters and importers of electronics items. These trends indicate the integration of these countries in the Global Value Chains (GVC) of respective products, wherein the countries import requisite intermediate goods, to add value and export the finished goods.

An important driver of a country’s exports is the import of key inputs like raw materials, capital goods, and intermediate goods.

In the case of India, GVC integration evidence is missing for important GVC items like automobiles and electronics, as India tries to be more self-reliant in sourcing production inputs, and hence has to bear the competitiveness cost, reflected in its low exports.
World Bank’s enterprises’ survey findings also substantiate India’s low GVC integration as only 6  per cent of firms reported using inputs of foreign origin for their production, which is the lowest among other competing countries, like China and Vietnam with 15 and 38 per cent respectively.

Firm-level Data Substantiates India’s Low GVC Integration

To understand the nuances of GVC integration, we resort to CMIE prowess database for details on the imported and domestic raw materials. Out of the 8106 exporting firms, there are around 3175 firms that report to be using raw materials, either imported or domestic. Out of these, 2608  firms use a combination of both, imported and domestic raw materials, and 14 firms rely only on imported raw materials and belong to sectors like autocomponents, household appliances, gems, sugar, and X-ray films. Of the 2608 firms that use domestic and imported raw materials, only 585 firms have a relatively greater dependence on imported raw materials, indicating weaker GVC integration from the input sourcing end.

Most of the imported or domestic raw materials go into production for domestic consumption.

An interesting insight from the analysis is that most of the exporting firms (except a few oil companies), that rely on the combination of domestic and imported raw materials, export only a proportion of the value of raw materials (Table 4 provides firm-specific trade data). [3] This implies that most of the imported or domestic raw materials go into production for domestic consumption.

The analysis revealed India’s low GVC integration,  driven by both import and export ends. The key implication that can be derived is that if India wants to use GVCs to strengthen its export flows, it will have to liberalise the entry of imported goods, specifically inputs/intermediate goods, by lowering the import tariffs.  Free Trade Agreements can be an important policy tool in this regard, wherein India can bilaterally engage with important economies to achieve mutually beneficial outcomes for respective economies.

References

The World Bank. (2022). World Integrated Trade Solution. Retrieved from https://wits.worldbank.org/

 

The post What Differentiates Successful GVCs: Lessons for India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-will-have-to-bear-higher-import-bill-to-integrate-into-gvcs/feed/ 0 900483
Falling Short of the Zero Hunger Target http://stg.csep.org/blog/falling-short-of-zero-hunger-target/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=falling-short-of-zero-hunger-target http://stg.csep.org/blog/falling-short-of-zero-hunger-target/#respond Thu, 06 Jun 2024 09:54:37 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=900183 While the determinants of declining consumption of overall cereal and food-related items need further investigation, it is useful to understand how undernutrition varies across income quintiles. 

The post Falling Short of the Zero Hunger Target first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Undernutrition continues to be a major cause of concern for children below five years of age in India. It makes the child vulnerable to physical and mental illnesses and poses a threat to life in the early years. Therefore, it is considered to be a silent killer.

In 2018, an estimated 6 lakh newborns died in India. According to the UNICEF Report 2018, India is the worst place for newborn babies among middle-income countries. As per the National Family Health Survey (NFHS) Report 2019-21, 25 out of 1,000 newborns died in the first month of life, 35 out of 1,000 infants died in the first year of life and 42 out of 1000 new-borns died in the first five years. Current trends highlight the need to accelerate reductions in neonatal mortality as this constitutes nearly two-thirds of infant mortality and around half of under-5 child mortality. Since undernutrition is part of the zero hunger target (SDG 2) under sustainable development goals (SDG), it is crucial to improve the nutrition status of both children and adults. As per the WHO report on SDG, India is lagging in achieving nutrition-related global targets for the year 2025 (Table 1).

Footnote [1]

There are several drivers of undernutrition, but the consumption of adequate and quality food is key among them. The recent household consumption expenditure survey 2022-23 points to the status of food intake and shows that household consumption of cereal and food-related items as a percentage of monthly per capita consumption expenditure (MPCE) has decreased significantly. It has been reported that there has been a consistent decline in household consumption expenditure on cereal and food-related items since the year 1999-2000.

In rural areas, household consumption of cereal reduced by 78%, and overall food items reduced by 22% since 1999-2000. In urban areas, household consumption of cereal reduced by 71%, and overall food items reduced by 19% since 1999-2000.

While the determinants of declining consumption of overall cereal and food-related items need further investigation, it is useful to understand how undernutrition varies across income quintiles.

Utilisation of ICDS Institution Determining Undernutrition

Children (under age 5 years) in the poorest quintile are most affected by stunting (46%), underweight (43%), and wasting (23%) comparing their counterparts in the richest quintile.

A quintile wise analysis of NFHS data 2019-21 suggests that children (under age 5 years) in the poorest quintile are most affected by stunting (46%), underweight (43%), and wasting (23%) comparing their counterparts in the richest quintile. A detailed analysis of successive NFHS data suggests that even though nutrition status and prevalence of infection have improved among children in the poorest quintile. Other diseases such as ARI and diarrhoea which are determinants of undernutrition – remained higher compared to the richest quintile.

To curb undernutrition and subsequently child health outcomes, India has taken various measures in terms of distribution of subsidised food through the public distribution system, free supplementary ration for women and children, free immunisation for women and children, and free monthly health check-ups at schools.

According to the guideline issued by the Ministry of Women and Child Development, children between the ages of 6 months to 3 years must receive take-home rations monthly. And children between the ages of 3 years to 6 years are to receive cooked meals for 300 days in a year under the Integrated Child Development Services (ICDS) program. Besides this, they must receive monthly health check-ups as well.

An analysis of NFHS data (2015-2020) suggests that the overall utilisation of ICDS institutions has increased during the period 2015 to 2020. More than 50% of the poorest children have benefitted from the ICDS program during 2019-20[2]. However, it does not reflect the true scenario in terms of the frequency with which children had benefitted from the program.

Actual expenditure under the umbrella ICDS program (Aanganwadi services, Poshan Abhiyan, and Scheme for adolescent girls) shows that expenditure has reduced by 11.4% from 2015-16 to 2022-23

A further examination of NFHS data (2015-2020) suggests that less than 30 percent of the children across all the quintiles received either cooked meals or take-home rations almost daily. In terms of monthly health check-ups, less than 50 percent of the children across all quintiles received this service. Thus, even though overall, a large number of targeted children may be accessing these programs, regular uptake is low.

Further, an analysis of actual expenditure under the umbrella ICDS program (Aanganwadi services, Poshan Abhiyan, and Scheme for adolescent girls) shows that expenditure has reduced by 11.4% from 2015-16 to 2022-23 (Figure 1).

To sum up, the successive NFHS survey data (2015-20) indicates that the progress in improving the nutrition status of children below 5 years of age has been slow. Even though there has been improvement in the aggregate nutrition indicators, the disaggregated analysis shows that the nutrition status of poor and poorest children is dismal. One of the reasons could be the frequency of utilisation of ICDS institutions and the associated decline in actual expenditure.

References

IIPS. (2015-16). National Family Health Survey. Intenational Institute for Population Sciences.

IIPS. (2019-21). National Family Health Survey. International Institute for Population Sciences.

Lawn, J. E., Blencowe, H., Oza, S., You, D., Lee, A., Waiswa, P., . . . Cousens, S. N. (2014). Every Newborn: progress, priorities, and potential beyond survival. The Lancet, 189-205.

Ministry of Finance. (2023, May 27). Budget Highlights (Key Features). Retrieved from Union Budget

NSSO. (2024). Household Consumption Expenditure Survey 2022-23 (Fact Sheet). Government of India, Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation.

Sachs, J. D., Lafortune, G., Fuller, G., & E, D. (2023). Sustainable Development Report 2023: Implementing the SDG Stimulus (Includes the SDG Index and Dashboards). Dublin University Press, 2023.

WHO. (2014, December 20). Global nutrition targets 2025: policy brief series. Retrieved May 27, 2023, from World Health Organization

The post Falling Short of the Zero Hunger Target first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/falling-short-of-zero-hunger-target/feed/ 0 900183
Examining the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism: Issues and Challenges http://stg.csep.org/blog/examining-the-carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism-issues-and-challenges/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=examining-the-carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism-issues-and-challenges http://stg.csep.org/blog/examining-the-carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism-issues-and-challenges/#respond Wed, 06 Mar 2024 08:23:49 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=899661 Effective implementation of the CCTS will enable Indian enterprises to demonstrate their commitment to low-carbon production processes using green technologies, which can reduce CBAM costs and expand green energy-intensive export opportunities in the EU market.

The post Examining the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism: Issues and Challenges first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In 2021, the European Union (EU) proposed the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) as a part of its “Fit for 55” package which aims to achieve a 55% decrease in overall greenhouse gas emissions by 2030. The EU-CBAM is a tool designed to establish fair prices for the carbon emitted during the production of carbon-intensive goods that are imported into the EU (European Commission, 2023a). The proposed mechanism applies to a limited number of goods which include iron and steel, aluminium, fertiliser, cement, electricity, and hydrogen. It commenced its transition phase in October 2023 and is set to move into its permanent phase starting January 1, 2026.

The EU-CBAM is a tool designed to establish fair prices for the carbon emitted during the production of carbon-intensive goods that are imported into the EU.

The primary objective of CBAM is to mitigate the risk of carbon leakage[1] and level the competitive field for European industries actively engaged in decarbonising their economy. These industries have been bearing the costs associated with domestic emissions, and CBAM seeks to ensure proper accounting and pricing of the carbon content in imported goods.  However, it is criticised as a trade-restrictive policy, particularly by developing countries because of the complexity of verifying the emissions embedded in imports which affects the competitiveness of energy-intensive trade-exposed (EITE) sectors.

While the EU-CBAM is proposed as an effort to address carbon emissions, it is important to scrutinise its effect across various dimensions and assess how it may shape the future of trade and economic development. This discussion will delve into the multifaceted issues of CBAM, examining its design and development in light of equity challenges, its compliance with international trade laws, and the broader implications for global trade and economies.

  • World Trade Organization Compliance

The CBAM’s compatibility with World Trade Organization (WTO) principles, including Most-Favoured-Nation Treatment (MFN)[2] (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade [GATT] Article I) and National Treatment[3] (GATT Article III) is a crucial aspect. While the EU claims that CBAM is compliant with these international trade regulations (European Commission, 2023b), the issue remains intricate and is expected to encounter challenges under international trade legislation. An example of this complexity lies in CBAM’s recognition of market-based carbon prices paid in exporting countries but not for equivalent carbon abatement costs imposed through regulatory measures. Additionally, the calculation of embedded emissions under CBAM relies on non-product-related processes and production methods (NPR PPMs) of goods manufactured outside the EU, conflicting with the principles of non-discrimination in GATT and its general exceptions. However, in the long run, as CBAM replaces the phased-out free allowances under the EU Emission Trading System (ETS), it could be viewed as compatible with WTO rules, as both domestic producers and importers would bear the full carbon cost of their products, which the EU has also stressed.

  • Equity and Development

The imposition of CBAM by the EU also raises concerns about potential violations of the Common but Differentiated Responsibilities (CBDR)[4] principle under the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC). CBAM aims to equalise carbon pricing regardless of its origin, imposing equivalent carbon policies globally. This inadvertently puts pressure on exporting nations, particularly developing and Least Developed Countries (LDCs) to adopt carbon policies equivalent to developed countries, pushing for equal rather than differentiated responsibilities. This shift introduces disparities in costs for exporters and intensifies trade imbalances for LDCs, creating a scenario commonly referred to as a “race to the bottom”.  This will result in significant welfare losses for LDCs. Studies show that developing economies, particularly countries from Africa and Persian Gulf Arab states could face considerable tariffs due to the high carbon emissions intensities linked to their products. In addition, the economies that are highly dependent on fuel exports, such as Cameroon, Egypt, and Nigeria, would be among the hardest hit by CBAM (Perdana and Vielle, 2022 and Zimmer and Holzhausen, 2020).

The revenues generated from the imposition of CBAM will contribute to the EU’s budget, effectively serving as a revenue-generating mechanism for the EU.

More importantly, the revenues generated from the imposition of CBAM will contribute to the EU’s budget, effectively serving as a revenue-generating mechanism for the EU. Although the legislation regarding EU CBAM has outlined intentions to utilise the collected revenue for decarbonising manufacturing industries in less-developed countries, the EU Member States did not endorse this proposal and instead proposed that only a part of revenue should be redistributed to low-income EU trading partners. This raises concerns about how the revenue will be utilised, rather than supporting developing countries in achieving their carbon reduction objectives; the revenue generated from exporting nations to the EU will reinforce the EU’s ambitious carbon reduction commitments.

  • Limited Climate Mitigation

The EU has proposed CBAM as an important climate measure because it is an extension of the EU ETS to imported goods, therefore, reducing carbon leakage and encouraging emissions reductions by countries with less efficient climate policies. Ex-ante studies show that carbon border adjustment policies can reduce carbon leakage and global CO2 emissions (European Parliament, 2020). However, the particular sectors covered by the EU CBAM consist of only a small proportion of global emissions. While addressing emissions from these product categories is a necessary step toward achieving net-zero goals, it alone is insufficient for a world committed to reaching carbon neutrality.

Furthermore, the potential of CBAM to contribute to global emission reduction only becomes significant when it garners support from domestic producers facing higher production costs due to carbon taxes and unfair competition from imports originating in regions without carbon taxes. Nevertheless, its impact remains limited, as countries subject to these tariffs can reroute their trade to alternative markets, and imports remain unaffected due to CBAM tariffs applying to only five specific groups of imported goods and specific to one region. Hence, it becomes evident that while CBAM holds promise as a tool to address carbon leakage and enhance competitive advantage, its potential to substantially reduce global emission trajectories is rather limited.

  • Trade and Other Economic Implications

Given that CBAM takes the form of an import tax, it is expected that it will have a negative effect on trade with considerable variations across countries. This is because carbon tariffs will be imposed on imports of carbon-intensive goods, which could curtail trading partners’ exports, affecting the welfare and employment of both the developed and developing countries.

Considering import volumes, India, Brazil, and South Africa stand out as the developing countries most vulnerable to CBAM, while Mozambique emerges as the most vulnerable least developed country.

Figure 1 shows the list of countries with the highest levels of imports to the EU for CBAM-affected sectors in 2022. From this view, China, Turkey, Switzerland, the Russian Federation and the United Kingdom are the top five countries most exposed to the mechanism. However, the effective impact of CBAM will depend on the level of carbon emissions embedded in trade and the carbon prices already paid in the countries of origin, if any. Considering import volumes, India, Brazil, and South Africa stand out as the developing countries most vulnerable to CBAM, while Mozambique emerges as the most vulnerable least developed country (LDC).

Figure 1: Imports of the European Union for CBAM sectors in 2022 (USD Billion)

Source: Authors’ computation using World Integrated Trade Solution, World Bank (2023)

While there is a divergence of opinions in the literature regarding the impact on India’s trade, numerous studies acknowledge that India is among the developing nations most vulnerable to the effects of CBAM. India’s major exports to the EU, such as Iron and steel (28.26%), aluminium (27.18%) and Cement (6.67%) will face significant threats due to carbon levies. Estimates according to Xiaobei et al. (2022), indicate a significant decline in India’s exports of iron and steel by up to 58.5%, alongside potential decreases of around 10 to 12% in exports of non-ferrous metals and chemicals. Whereas Majumder et al. (2023) present contrasting findings, suggesting marginal declines ranging from 0.004% to 0.62% in sectors such as fertilisers, cement, aluminium, iron, and steel. Additionally, the fact that India does not have an explicit domestic carbon tax also raises concerns regarding the potential loss of tax revenue to the EU.

Way Ahead

In essence, the EU’s CBAM is proposed as a forward-looking innovative instrument aimed at reducing carbon leakage and securing a level playing field, but it has the potential to reshape the way countries conduct international trade. It will not only influence international efforts to combat climate change and foster equitable and sustainable economic development but will also change the future pattern of trade. Despite its transformative potential, the development and associated issues discussed above underscore the importance of adopting a balanced and comprehensive worldwide strategy to ensure its efficacy while minimising legal complexities.

Effective implementation of the CCTS will enable Indian enterprises to demonstrate their commitment to low-carbon production processes using green technologies, which can reduce CBAM costs and expand green energy-intensive export opportunities in the EU market.

Meanwhile, the Indian government has already started preparing its own National Credit Market (NCM) through the Carbon Credit Trading Scheme (CCTS). It will serve as an efficient, market-driven incentive for the largest emitters and hard-to-abate industrial sectors to decarbonise. Moreover, effective implementation of the CCTS will enable Indian enterprises to demonstrate their commitment to low-carbon production processes using green technologies, which can reduce CBAM costs and expand green energy-intensive export opportunities in the EU market. In this context, Indian manufacturers must prioritise investments in energy-efficient technologies to minimise carbon emissions and adopt sustainable trade practices.

The author extends gratitude to Janak Raj, Senior Fellow, and Rajat Verma, Associate Fellow, CSEP, for their valuable comments and inputs.

References

European Commission. (2023a). Taxation and Customs Union. Retrieved from CBAM: https://taxation-customs.ec.europa.eu/carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism_en#:~:text=The%20EU’s%20Carbon%20Border%20Adjustment,production%20in%20non%2DEU%20countries

European Commission. (2023b). Regulation (EU) 2023/956: Establishing a Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism. Retrieved from https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/PDF/?uri=CELEX:32023R0956

European Parliament. (2020). Economic assessment of Carbon Leakage and Carbon Border Adjustment. Retrieved from https://www.europarl.europa.eu/RegData/etudes/BRIE/2020/603501/EXPO_BRI(2020)603501_EN.pdf

GATT. (1986). The text of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade. Geneva: World Trade Organization. Retrieved from General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade: https://www.wto.org/english/docs_e/legal_e/gatt47_e.pdf

Majumder, P., Mathur, S., & Pohit, S. (2023, August). Smoky Affair. EU’s CBAM is unfair in principle. Retrieved from The Hindu Businessline: https://www.thehindubusinessline.com/opinion/eus-cbam-is-unfair-in-principle/article67154996.ece

Perdana, S., & Vielle , M. (2022). Making the EU Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism acceptable and climate friendly for least developed countries. Energy Policy 170.

XIAOBEI, H., FAN, Z., & JUN, M. (2022). The Global Impact of a Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism. The Task Force on Climate, Development and the IMF.

Zimmer, M., & Holzhausen, A. (2020). EU Carbon Border Adjustments & developing country exports: Saving the worst for the last. ALLIANZ RESEARCH. Retrieved from https://www.allianz.com/content/dam/onemarketing/azcom/Allianz_com/economic-research/publications/specials/en/2020/november/2020_11_17_EU_CBAM_and_develping_country_exports.pdf

Bibliography

UNCTAD. (2021). A European Union Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism: Implications for developing countries. United Nations Conference on Trade and Development.

 

The post Examining the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism: Issues and Challenges first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/examining-the-carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism-issues-and-challenges/feed/ 0 899661
Critical Mineral Supply Chains: Trilateral Perspectives from Japan, India and France http://stg.csep.org/blog/order-and-disorder-in-the-indo-pacific-trilateral-on-policy-perspectives-from-japan-india-and-france/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=order-and-disorder-in-the-indo-pacific-trilateral-on-policy-perspectives-from-japan-india-and-france http://stg.csep.org/blog/order-and-disorder-in-the-indo-pacific-trilateral-on-policy-perspectives-from-japan-india-and-france/#respond Tue, 20 Feb 2024 09:10:57 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=899495 The Indo-Pacific countries should use their domestic capacities optimally and participate in global supply chains with a diverse range of partner countries in mining, processing, assembling, and final-use activities. India is currently discussing trilateral cooperation with France and Japan.

The post Critical Mineral Supply Chains: Trilateral Perspectives from Japan, India and France first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Backdrop

The countries of the Indo-Pacific region have prioritised climate action through their respective net-zero emissions programmes, which require installing low-carbon technologies fuelled by the availability of critical minerals. The extraction and processing of critical minerals are concentrated in a few countries, with China being a major player. The Indo-Pacific countries should use their domestic capacities optimally and participate in global supply chains with a diverse range of partner countries in mining, processing, assembling, and final-use activities. India is currently discussing trilateral cooperation with France and Japan.

The Indo-Pacific countries should use their domestic capacities optimally and participate in global supply chains with a diverse range of partner countries in mining, processing, assembling, and final-use activities. India is currently discussing trilateral cooperation with France and Japan.

Trilateral Cooperation

India has signed 12 trilateral agreements, starting with China and Russia in the 1990s and India-Brazil-South Africa in 2003. The more recent ones include India-France-Australia (2020), India-Japan-Italy (2021), India-Iran-Armenia (2023) and India-France-UAE (2023). The trilateral initiative with France and the United Arab Emirates (UAE) will focus on cooperation projects in solar and nuclear energy, hence the need for critical minerals. India has focused more attention on the Indo-Pacific region since 2011. Australia is included in three trilateral agreements, the United States (US) and France in two and Indonesia and the UAE in one each ( Malhotra & Fournol, 2023).

France started signing trilateral agreements in the 1990s. The FRANZ agreement with Australia and New Zealand was signed in 1992, which aimed at providing aid to the Pacific Island nations during natural disasters. In a recently signed India-France-Australia trilateral, the three countries “committed to advancing their shared values and working together to achieve a free, open, inclusive and rules-based Indo-Pacific”. The centrality of ASEAN has been highlighted, as has the ASEAN’s Outlook on the Indo-Pacific (Ministry for Europe and Foreign Affairs, 2021).

Japan has also entered multiple trilateral cooperation agreements. Apart from agreements including India, Japan initiated trilateral cooperation with Europe and the US in 2018 and with South Korea and the US as an Indo-Pacific dialogue in 2023 (USTR, 2020) (U.S. Department of State, 2024).

France, India, and Japan can collaborate trilaterally and work with the Mineral Security Partnership (MSP), the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (Quad), the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF), the European Union (EU) and the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) to ensure sustainable growth in the Indo-Pacific region, particularly with regards to ensuring the resilient supply chains of critical minerals.

France, India, and Japan can collaborate trilaterally and work with the Mineral Security Partnership (MSP), the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (Quad), the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF), the European Union (EU) and the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) to ensure sustainable growth in the Indo-Pacific region, particularly with regards to ensuring the resilient supply chains of critical minerals. While India and Japan are members of the Quad and the IPEF, all three countries are partners in the MSP. The IPEF constitutes Quad, Fiji, New Zealand and seven major countries of ASEAN.

Policies Promoting Resilient Mineral Supply Chains

Incentives for clean technologies in India

India has made significant commitments to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and achieve net zero by 2070. This clean energy transition is required for climate change mitigation efforts, energy security, and environmental preservation. India presented five elements of its climate action strategy at the 26th Conference of Parties held in Glasgow: installing a cumulative 500 gigawatt (GW) non-fossil energy capacity by 2030; generating 50% of its energy requirements from renewable sources by 2030; reducing projected carbon emissions by one billion tonnes by 2030; reducing the carbon intensity of the economy by 45% by 2030, over 2005 levels; and achieving the target of net zero emissions by 2070.

The Government of India has initiated various schemes that incentivise domestic manufacturing of low-carbon technologies. The Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme, introduced in 2020, provides reimbursement mechanisms that original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) can claim on their products’ sales.

The Government of India has initiated various schemes that incentivise domestic manufacturing of low-carbon technologies. The Production Linked Incentive (PLI)  scheme, introduced in 2020, provides reimbursement mechanisms that original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) can claim on their products’ sales (Invest India, 2024). In October 2022, India introduced its second phase of the High-Efficiency Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Modules production linked incentive (PLI) scheme to reach a domestic module manufacturing capacity of 48 GW by 2026 (Ministry of Power, 2023). The government has planned to provide incentive support of ₹19,500 crore (USD 2.4 billion) to encourage the domestic manufacturing of polysilicon, ingots, wafers, cells and modules (International Energy Agency, 2023). The government has increased import duties on PV modules and cells to incentivise domestic manufacturers further.

Similarly, the government has introduced various initiatives to encourage domestic consumption and manufacturing of electronic vehicles (EVs) (Ministry of Heavy Industries, 2023). The Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Electric Vehicles in India Phase II (FAME II) provides demand and production incentives wherein consumers and manufacturers can claim reimbursements from the government. FAME II was rolled out in April 2019 for five years with a budgetary allocation of ₹10,000 crore (USD 1.2 billion). The main focus of the policy is to increase the use of EVs in the public and commercial transport sectors (Department of Heavy Industries, 2019). Two other PLI schemes have enabled the domestic manufacturing of EVs and their related components: the PLI for the automobile and auto component (automotive) industry and the PLI for Advanced Chemistry Cells (ACC). The scheme for the automotive industry had an initial budget allocation from the government of about ₹25,938 crore (USD 3.2 billion). It incentivised further investments of ₹74,850 crore from approved OEMs for EVs and other components (Ministry of Heavy Industries, 2022).

Changes in India’s Mining and Minerals Policy Regime

The Ministry of Mines, Government of India, came out with the First List of critical minerals for India in June 2023.

CSEP identified a list of 23 critical minerals for India in April 2023 (Chadha, Sivamani, & Bansal, 2023). The Ministry of Mines, Government of India, came out with the First List of critical minerals for India in June 2023. The 2023 updates to India’s Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act brought in a new exploration licensing system and changes to the policies on exploring and mining minerals, previously not open to the private sector. Exploration Licences (Els) have been introduced for deep-seated and critical minerals (Ministry of Mines, 2023). Six minerals – beryllium, lithium, niobium, titanium, tantalum, and zirconium – have been omitted from the atomic minerals list of Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) (MMDR) Act, which were only allowed to be developed by government entities. A list of 24 critical and strategic minerals has been identified for auctions (Ministry of Mines, 2023). On November 29, 2023, the government launched its first tranche of critical mineral blocks for auction, consisting of 4 mining leases and 16 composite licenses (Ministry of Mines, 2023). The process is expected to be completed in early 2024.

Clean Energy and Minerals Supply Cooperation

India – France

The Indian Cabinet approved an India and France Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) on Renewable Energy Cooperation in 2021 to establish the basis for promoting bilateral cooperation in new and renewable energy covering solar, wind, hydrogen and biomass energy.

The Indian Cabinet approved an India and France Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) on Renewable Energy Cooperation in 2021 to establish the basis for promoting bilateral cooperation in new and renewable energy covering solar, wind, hydrogen and biomass energy (Government of India, 2021). Technology sharing and collaboration between government agencies of the two countries can help strengthen the objectives of the renewable energy cooperation. In 1988, Mineral Exploration Corporation Limited (MECL), India and Bureau de Recherches Géologiques et Minières (BRGM), France, signed an agreement for tin and tungsten exploration, mining and beneficiation (MECL, 1989). This agreement allowed MECL to use the expertise of BRGM in the beneficiation of quartz-tungsten pre-concentrates. In 2018, the French power company Electricite de France SA (EDF) and the Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited (NPCIL) signed an agreement to set up six nuclear power plants in Jaitapur (Maharashtra) with a total capacity of 10,000 MW (Department of Atomic Energy, 2018). The bilateral understanding has been strengthened further

after the recent visit of the French President as the Chief Guest at India’s Republic Day on January 26, 2024 (Ministry of External Affairs, 2024).

Industrial investment towards building resilient supply chains is at the forefront of India-France. Imerys, a leading minerals industry from France, supplies industry players globally with access to processed minerals required for various sectors, including construction, batteries, and pharmaceuticals (Imerys, 2024). In October 2022, Imerys set up its first calcium aluminate plant in India that would provide important raw materials for the construction industry and reduce India’s import reliance on such materials (Imerys, 2018).

Indian – Japan

India and Japan announced a Clean Energy Partnership (CEP) in March 2022 to promote bilateral energy cooperation through utilising diverse energy sources and technologies to ensure energy security, carbon neutrality and economic growth.

The Indian Government has initiated a ‘Deep Ocean Mission’ to explore minerals in the Indian Ocean. Given its expertise in deep-sea mining, it could benefit from collaborating with Japan (JOGMEC, 2020). In 2020, the Japan Organization for Metals and Energy Security (JOGMEC) developed a crust excavation technique to extract nickel and cobalt from the seabed  (The Hindu, 2019). India and Japan announced a Clean Energy Partnership (CEP) in March 2022 to promote bilateral energy cooperation through utilising diverse energy sources and technologies to ensure energy security, carbon neutrality and economic growth (METI, 2022). The CEP would strengthen Japan’s Asia Energy Transition Initiative (AETI). The cooperation under this partnership has broad coverage, including electric vehicles and charging infrastructure, solar and wind energy, green hydrogen, energy conservation, and clean coal technologies (METI, 2022).

Since 2015, Indian Rare Earths Limited (IREL) has had a supply agreement with Toyotsu Rare Earths, Japan, for refining rare earth oxide (monazite) concentrates in India and Japan (The Hindu, 2023). The Indian subsidiary, Toyotsu Rare Earths India Pvt Ltd, purifies the concentrates in India and does further beneficiation in Japan with an annual target of 4000 tons (Gateway House, 2022). Japanese companies have increased their efforts to become world leaders in the EV sector. These efforts have led to Musashi and Toyota (Japan) and Delta Electronics (Taiwan) entering into a joint venture in 2023 to manufacture and sell EV drive units for two-wheelers in India (Musashi, 2023). Green energy companies in India have also focused on increasing their investments in other Asian countries. In 2023, India’s Adani Group entered into a joint venture with Kowa Holdings Asia (Japan) to sell Adani’s green hydrogen across Asia (Business Standard, 2023).

Importance of the India-France-Japan Trilateral in the Indo-Pacific

Insufficient domestic production and bottlenecks in the mineral supply chains have resulted in increasing efforts for global cooperation. The Indo-Pacific region has some leading extracting and processing countries for various critical minerals. Australia, for example, is one of the largest producers of key green energy minerals like cobalt, lithium and manganese. China’s hegemony in processing cobalt, lithium, copper, manganese, and nickel necessitates ensuring the resilience of critical mineral supply chains in the Indo-Pacific region. Countries in the Indo-Pacific are trying to reduce their dependence on minerals processed in China.

Australia has been promoting domestic investment in the critical minerals sector and is collaborating with India, Japan and Indonesia for mineral processing and technology sharing. Japan has become an important country for processing minerals vital for manufacturing green technology equipment and semiconductors (Financial Review, 2023). Japan is one of the leading countries in processing selenium (20.3%), beryllium (16.9%), nickel (8.6%) and indium (8.2%) – (Table 1). These minerals are critical raw materials in manufacturing batteries, wind turbines and semiconductors (Table 2).

Table 1: Global Mineral Processing (%)

Both India and France have expertise in the processing of select minerals. India has a significant processing capacity for manganese (13%) and copper (3%), whereas France is leading the world in the processing of hafnium (49.3%) and indium (3.6%). France is one of the EU member countries. Some other EU member countries also process some of the critical minerals. For example, Finland processes cobalt and nickel, and Germany processes copper and selenium, thus adding value to the intra-EU supply chains.

Table 2: Trilateral Mineral Cooperation

The trilateral cooperation may focus on a select group of minerals based on each country’s mining and processing expertise. These minerals would be crucial for manufacturing semiconductors and green technology equipment, including solar panels, wind turbines, electric vehicles and batteries.

Trilateral cooperation between India, France, and Japan would help the three countries share technologies and expertise in mineral processing (Table 2). Similar agreements have already existed between India-France-Australia (2020) and India-Japan-Italy (2021). While France may provide a bridge to the EU, Japan and India provide a connection to the Indo-Pacific. Such a trilateral focus on the critical minerals supply chain would promote more collaboration between the EU and Indo-Pacific countries. The trilateral cooperation may focus on a select group of minerals based on each country’s mining and processing expertise. These minerals would be crucial for manufacturing semiconductors and green technology equipment, including solar panels, wind turbines, electric vehicles and batteries. Such cooperation would incentivise domestic companies to increase their investment, capitalising on the trilateral and fostering mutually advantageous conditions for all three countries.

The post Critical Mineral Supply Chains: Trilateral Perspectives from Japan, India and France first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/order-and-disorder-in-the-indo-pacific-trilateral-on-policy-perspectives-from-japan-india-and-france/feed/ 0 899495
Decoding India’s FTA Journey: What does the Future Hold? http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-indias-fta-journey-what-does-the-future-hold/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=decoding-indias-fta-journey-what-does-the-future-hold http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-indias-fta-journey-what-does-the-future-hold/#respond Tue, 30 Jan 2024 04:44:04 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=899316 As the global trade policy has moved away from World Trade Organisation (WTO) led multilateralism, towards Regional Trade Agreements, this blog tries to understand the evolution of India’s Regional Trade Agreement (RTA) strategy.

The post Decoding India’s FTA Journey: What does the Future Hold? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
International trade forms an important part of an economy’s growth profile, and the recent numbers by the World Bank indicate that trade as a percentage of the gross domestic product stood at 74 per cent in 2022. For India, this figure was about 49 per cent in the year 2022, and while it is lower than the substantive figure of 56 per cent in 2011, it is almost double the figure of 26 per cent in 2001 ( The World Bank, 2023). While India is ramping up its exports, it is yet to emerge as a global export leader. Data shows that 13.6 per cent of world exports is dominated by the United States followed by China (10 per cent), and Germany (5.6 per cent); in contrast, India constitutes just 2 per cent of global exports. As the global trade policy has moved away from World Trade Organisation (WTO) led multilateralism, towards Regional Trade Agreements, this blog tries to understand the evolution of India’s Regional Trade Agreement (RTA) strategy.

13.6 per cent of world exports is dominated by the United States followed by China (10 per cent), and Germany (5.6 per cent); in contrast, India constitutes just 2 per cent of global exports.

Data from the WTO shows that RTAs have demonstrated an unprecedented rise from 5 in 1970 to 361 in 2024, establishing their importance in global trade. India has 19 RTAs in place, till date. An RTA can take various forms. A free trade agreement (FTA)[1] implies elimination of tariffs on substantial trade between the partner countries. Other forms of bilateral agreements include Preferential Trade Agreement (PTA), Comprehensive Economic Partnership Agreement (CEPA) and Comprehensive Economic Cooperation Agreement (CECA). While FTAs ensure substantive trade coverage, PTAs imply elimination of tariffs on non-substantive trade. CEPA and CECA offer more integrated packages of goods, services and investment liberalisation, along with other areas like intellectual property rights.

Before embarking on its FTA journey in 1998, India had signed 3 PTAs. It had signed the Bangkok Agreement, in 1975, with Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and South Korea. This later developed into the Asia Pacific Trade Agreement (APTA), with the inclusion of China. Further, India signed the Global System of Trade Preferences (GSTP), in 1988, with 43 developing countries. Later, in 1993, India signed the South Asian Preferential Trade Agreement (SAPTA), with South Asian members, viz. Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka.

In 1998, India signed its first FTA with Sri Lanka, followed by the South Asia Free Trade Agreement (SAFTA), which was signed in 2004. In 2005, it signed a CECA with Singapore, and later, a wider FTA with the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) in 2010. India also signed CECAs with South Korea (in 2010), Japan (2011), and Malaysia (2011).

India opted out of the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP), citing concerns for the domestic industry, along with opening its market to cheap imports from China.

After that, there was a lull period from 2012 to 2021. A key development during this period was that India opted out of the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP), citing concerns for the domestic industry, along with opening its market to cheap imports from China (Ghosh, 2019). This dry spell of FTAs ended in 2021, when India inked trade agreements with Mauritius, Australia, and the United Arab Emirates (UAE). The plan is to continue this momentum and negotiate agreements with important trading partners like the United Kingdom (UK), the European Union (EU), the European Free Trade Association (EFTA), Canada and Israel.

The discussion below focuses on two broad aspects of India’s FTA journey–key changes in India’s FTA approach since 2011 and the impediments that still prevail and need to be addressed for ensuring optimal utilisation of FTAs.

1. Key Changes in India’s FTA Approach

It is important to uncover the elements of India’s FTA strategy over the years and identify the important changes in this regard. This section discusses three such factors – the choice of trade partners, focus on the services sector and non-tariff measures.

1.1 Trading Partners

India is now looking at the western countries for FTAs, as opposed to its “look east” FTA approach earlier. The new FTA partners appear in the top export destinations for India, that presents an opportunity for India to gain more market access for its competitive sectors. For instance, while India had a trade deficit of around USD 5 Billion in 2010, (at the time it signed an FTA with ASEAN), which rose to USD 26 Billion in 2021-22, it has already had a trade surplus with the UK (as of 2022), amounting to USD 1.6 Billion, and is looking forward to gaining greater market access for its competitive sectors like textiles and apparels.

1.2 Services Exports

The new age FTAs focus on services trade. For instance, under the India-Australia Economic Cooperation and Trade Agreement, India has agreed to lock in 49 per cent foreign equity for a range of Australian banking and insurance services, and Australian internet services businesses in India will also have more opportunities to expand their portfolio with a foreign equity limit of 74 per cent for commercial presence (Australian Government, 2022).

2. Resolving Issues of Non-tariff Measures

The India-UAE agreement has been the first of its kind to resolve the issue of mutual recognition as a step to address the problem of non-tariff measures. The agreement entails a commitment to fast-tracking product registrations for exporting Indian pharmaceutical products to the UAE that have received similar approvals from regulatory authorities in Australia, the EU, Japan, the UK, or the US (Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Government of India, 2022).

3. Way Ahead

India accounts for the least share of high technology exports in total manufacturing exports (around 11 per cent) as compared to countries like Vietnam (41.7 per cent) which dominates the electronics and textile and apparel sector in the global export market

To continue the momentum that India has gained through its recent agreements, there are certain important factors that should be considered for reaping the maximum benefits from future FTAs.

 3.1   Focusing on High Value-added Exports

The top items in India’s export basket are low value-added items, for instance, gems and jewellery and petroleum products. If India wants to reap the benefits of its FTAs, it should transition to high value-added goods, and in fact, FTAs can pave the way for this transition by offering the required know-how and technology transfer. Existing statistics suggest that among the key manufacturing countries, India accounts for the least share of high technology exports in total manufacturing exports (around 11 per cent) as compared to countries like Vietnam (41.7 per cent) which dominates the electronics and textile and apparel sector in the global export market (Table 1). A key driving force for this can be liberalising markets for the inputs, that will attract more technology investments in the country, eventually translating into high-tech exports. While India has reduced its input tariffs over the years, they are still high in comparison to some of the major global economies. If we see it in the context of some of India’s proposed FTA partners, the picture gets quite clear. The UK, with which India is currently negotiating, had a tariff of around 2.7 per cent on intermediate goods in 2021, as opposed to India’s 10 per cent tariff on the same category of goods.

Table 1: High-technology Exports (% of manufacturing exports)

Source: Based on World Integrated Trade Solutions (WITS), World Bank

3.2 Addressing Domestic Constraints

While there has been significant improvement in the infrastructure and regulatory environment, India needs to rectify the existing rigidities to attract more investment and manufacturing facilities. According to a leading agro-chemical firm of India, only 9 of their 22 manufacturing facilities are in India. The balance operates in other countries due to a smoother route to establishing a factory. All the formative procedures for setting up a factory, like acquiring land, environment clearances, add to the cost, and act as disadvantages. This is one of the major reasons for Vietnam attracting investment, as it extends benefits like tax holidays and ease of land allotment.

3.3 Industry Consultations

One of the concerns of the Indian industry regarding FTA negotiations is the lack of consultation with the industry on various aspects of FTA negation. As industry is the main impact bearer of the FTAs, it is imperative to formulate guidelines to consult the key industry players during FTA negotiations to achieve the most efficient outcomes. This will help policymakers in making informed decisions based on sectoral weaknesses and strengths.

Bilateral trade agreements are assuming an important place in the global trade policy space and offer immense opportunities to ensure mutual gains to trading partners. In this regard, it is important that India becomes a key player in the FTA game and adopts the correct approach to ensure maximum benefits to its domestic economy, in the form of competitive manufacturing, access to advanced technology and innovation, and better foreign market access to its goods and services exports.

References

Australian Government. (2022). Australia-India economic cooperation and trade agreement.

Ghosh, K. (2019). India opted out of RCEP to protect domestic industry from cheap imports: Piyush Goyal. Moneycontrol. Retrieved from https://www.moneycontrol.com/news/economy/policy/india-opted-out-of-rcep-to-protect-domestic-industry-from-cheap-imports-piyush-goyal-4607151.html

Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Government of India. (2022). Bilateral cooperation on pharmaceutical products. Annex 5A, comprehensive economic partnership agreement (CEPA) between the Government of the Republic of India and the Government of the United Arab Emirates (UAE).

The World Bank. (2023). World Bank open data. Retrieved from: https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NE.TRD.GNFS.ZS?locations=IN

 

The post Decoding India’s FTA Journey: What does the Future Hold? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-indias-fta-journey-what-does-the-future-hold/feed/ 0 899316
2024: Brazil’s G20 Year http://stg.csep.org/blog/2024-brazils-g20-year/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=2024-brazils-g20-year http://stg.csep.org/blog/2024-brazils-g20-year/#respond Thu, 18 Jan 2024 09:41:13 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=899277 Brazil gears up to lead the G20 with a three-point agenda focusing on combating hunger, poverty, and inequality; sustainable development; and global governance reform.

The post 2024: Brazil’s G20 Year first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Brazil has taken over the presidency of the G20 from India on December 1, 2023, ushering in a troika with three member countries from the Global South (India, Brazil and South Africa) that also comprise of the IBSA. India was preceded by Indonesia in 2022, and beginning a four-year effort to prioritise the needs of the Global South at a time when the world faces difficult challenges like climate change, geopolitical turmoil, inequality and indebtedness. While Indonesia and India made some progress on negotiations on climate action, inclusion of the African Union in the G20 and the reform of multilateral development banks (MDBs), much more action is essential.

The country has declared a three-point agenda, namely combating hunger, poverty and inequality; focusing on three dimensions of sustainable development (economic, social, and environmental); and the reform of global governance.

The onus is now on Brazil to take forward the global development agenda in 2024. The country has declared a three-point agenda, namely combating hunger, poverty and inequality; focusing on three dimensions of sustainable development (economic, social, and environmental); and the reform of global governance (G20 Brasil 2024). These topics have been chosen keeping the objective of reducing inequalities at the heart of the reform effort as is reflected in the motto of the Brazilian presidency, ‘Building a Just World and a Sustainable Planet’.

Brazilian President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva declared these priorities[1] at the Leader’s summit in India in September 2023 when he took over the reins of the G20 presidency from Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi. He emphasised the country’s commitment to the fight against food shortages and nutritional insecurity. To that end, Brazil has proposed to launch a taskforce called Global Alliance against Hunger and Poverty during its 2024 presidency. The task force will work on issues like low-carbon agricultural research and farming insurance reforms, especially in food-insecure countries, with financing support from other nations. Brazil hopes to leverage its experience from its flagship programme, Brazil Without Hunger Plan (Plano Brasil Sem Fome)—an initiative led by its Ministry of Development and Social Assistance, Family and the Fight Against Hunger (Ministério do Desenvolvimento e Assistência Social, Família e Combate à Fome/MDS).

By focusing on sustainable development, the country hopes to convince the G20 member countries to increase their financial contributions to tackle climate change and wishes to leverage its own green energy potential for the world to invest in. To achieve this, Brazil has proposed a taskforce called Global Mobilization against Climate Change. The taskforce will promote a high-level dialogue among governments, financial institutions, and international organisations to enhance global macroeconomic and financial alignment to implement the goals of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change and the Paris Agreement (G20 Brasil 2024).

By making the reform of global governance its third priority, Brazil hopes to encourage greater participation by emerging countries in the decisions of the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund. The World Trade Organisation (WTO) needs to be revitalised and its paralysed dispute settlement mechanism needs to start working again by reinstating a fully functional Appellate Body. The membership of the United Nations Security Council (UNSC) needs to be restructured to include more developing countries. The eagerness from various countries, to join the expanded BRICS is an indication of their wish to join a grouping from the Global South re-emphasises their call for the reform of the Bretton Woods institutions. Brazil can leave its imprint on the G20 by stirring discussions on the reform of the global governance architecture towards implementable consensus.

Brazil also hopes to advance the Indian G20 presidency’s work in strengthening MDBs, by following through with the roadmap laid out in the G20 Independent Expert Group’s (IEG) two volume-report, led by Lawrence Summers and NK Singh, that was aimed at creating ‘bigger, better and bolder MDBs’.

Brazil also hopes to advance the Indian G20 presidency’s work in strengthening MDBs, by following through with the roadmap laid out in the G20 Independent Expert Group’s (IEG) two volume-report[2], led by Lawrence Summers and NK Singh, that was aimed at creating ‘bigger, better and bolder MDBs’. Some of the recommendations of the report were: scaling up financial capacity, boosting joint action on climate, enhancing country-level collaboration, strengthening co-financing, and deepening MDBs’ ambition to cooperate to boost private capital mobilisation (World Bank, 2023). There is action on this agenda item already. At the IMF/World Bank Annual Meetings in Marrakesh, Morocco, in October 2023, 10 leading MDBs supported the IEG’s report’s recommendation to explore ways to expand their lending capacity with “an additional headroom of $300-400 billion in the next decade[3]”(African Development Bank Group, 2023).

In a first-time global leadership role of this stature, Brazil plans to execute its development mandate by convening over 100 working group and task force meetings and over 20 ministerial meetings that will culminate in the Leader’s summit on November 18-19, 2024 in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.

In a first-time global leadership role of this stature, Brazil plans to execute its development mandate by convening[4] over 100 working group and task force meetings and over 20 ministerial meetings that will culminate in the Leader’s summit on November 18-19, 2024 in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. The National Commission for the Coordination of the Presidency of the G20 by Brazil has been set up to coordinate and oversee the smooth functioning of the G20 presidency and it is being chaired by Mauro Vieira, Brazil’s  Minister of Foreign Affairs, and Fernando Haddad, Brazil’s Minister of Finance (G20 Brasil 2024).

Brazil has also introduced the G20 Social[5] to increase participation of non-governmental stakeholders in G20’s activities and decision-making processes. The G20 Social comprises of 13 engagement groups of the G20, namely C20 (Civil society); T20 (Think tanks); Y20 (Youth); W20 (Women); L20 (Labour); U20 (Cities); B20 (Business); S20 (Science); Startup20 (Startups); P20 (Parliaments); SAI20 (Supreme audit institutions); J20 (Supreme courts) and O20 (Oceans) (G20 Brasil 2024).

The clock is ticking, and the stage is set for Brazil to make its mark on the G20 process by delivering outcomes brought about by multilateral consensus. Supporters of global governance are rooting for Brazil’s success on its three-point development agenda, especially at a time when the world is facing a polycrisis and global negotiations and consensus building seem more far fetched than ever.

Brazil will need to manage the intense geopolitical divisions that currently exist in the G20’s membership if it hopes to release joint statements and end the year with a comprehensive Leader’s declaration, a feat that India succeeded in achieving, despite acute scepticism from critics.

Brazil is faced with an ambitious agenda, and there are several challenges in its path. Brazil will need to manage the intense geopolitical divisions that currently exist in the G20’s membership if it hopes to release joint statements and end the year with a comprehensive Leader’s Declaration, a feat that India succeeded in achieving, despite acute scepticism from critics. The Brazilian presidency will have to keep the  Israel–Hamas war, Russia’s war in Ukraine, global sanctions and the ongoing frictions between the United States (US) and China at the centre stage and manage sensitivities as it leads the G20 discourse. Other than governmental negotiations, Brazil will have to use back-channel diplomacy through its groupings like the expanded BRICS grouping (that previously only included Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa) and through its strategic partnerships with neighbouring countries in South America. The BRICS now also includes Argentina, Ethiopia, Egypt, Iran, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates (UAE). It will have to revitalise the IBSA to enable policy coordination between India, Brazil and South Africa. President Lula has an important role to play in balancing the powerplays emanating from these geopolitical interlinkages and divisions.

The next two years are a unique time for President Lula to exhibit to the world his leadership potential and Brazil’s ability to lead the global governance discourse.

The next two years are a unique time for President Lula to exhibit to the world his leadership potential and Brazil’s ability to lead the global governance discourse. It is interesting to note that Brazil’s G20 summit will be held in the same month (November 2024) as the US elections. The summit will also overlap with COP29. Negotiations at COP29 will pave way for COP30 in 2025 in Belem, Brazil. Brazil will also chair the BRICS grouping in 2025. This will overlap with South Africa’s G20 presidency in 2025, giving the troika of developing countries yet another chance to advance discussions on climate action, sustainability and development.

But what the troika needs is a serious infusion of well researched, action oriented and implementable policy ideas that can be tabled for the consideration of the G20 leaders. That is where global think tanks come in, sharing solutions to the world’s most complex problems through one of the G20’s official engagement groups, the Think20 network. The Think20 (T20), often referred to as the ‘ideas bank’ for the G20 is tasked with a crucial mandate this year under the Brazilian presidency, and that comes out clearly in its tag line for the year – ‘Let’s rethink the world’.

The T20 Brazil[6] process will fulfil its task through six task forces, whose recommendations, put forth in the form of policy briefs, will comprehensively address the three themes that President Lula has declared: 1) Fighting inequalities, poverty, and hunger; 2) Sustainable climate action and inclusive just energy transitions; 3) Reforming the international financial architecture; 4) Trade and investment for sustainable and inclusive growth; 5) Inclusive digital transformation; 6) Strengthening multilateralism and global governance.

The T20 Brazil process will then put forward policy recommendations to G20 officials involved in the Sherpa and Finance tracks and to the G20 leaders, in the form of a final T20 communiqué and the recommendations of the six taskforces.

With the support of the Think20 and a development mandate based on the needs of the Global South, Brazil will have to ensure that there is policy connectivity at the G20, for the group to be taken seriously and for its efforts to bear fruit. Having four emerging market economies as leaders of the G20 in a row, will surely make it easier. Else, as critics often say, the G20 will become a ‘talk shop’ or merely a global gathering of policymakers with no concrete or enforceable outcomes.

The stakes are high and now Brazil must lead the way in showing critics that the G20 is, not a talk shop and is in fact, the economic steering committee for the world, as it was intended to be at its inception.

The stage is set, and an ambitious task has been laid out for Brazil. While the priorities for the year were released in 2023 when Brazil officially took on from India, action on the ground will unfurl in 2024. The G20 foreign ministers will meet[7]  in Rio de Janeiro on February 21-22, 2024, followed by G20 finance ministers in Sao Paulo on February 28-29, 2024. The statements coming out of these two meetings will indicate whether Brazil will be able to bring back the concept of sustainable development to the centre stage of international discussions, especially since geopolitics, wars and regional powerplays have overtaken its mandate over the last few years. The stakes are high and now Brazil must lead the way in showing critics that the G20 is, not a talk shop and is in fact, the economic steering committee for the world, as it was intended to be at its inception.

References

African Development Bank Group. (2023, October 13). 2023 IMF/World Bank annual meetings: Multilateral development banks pledge stronger financing capacity for greater impact. https://www.afdb.org/en/news-and-events/press-releases/2023-imf/world-bank-annual-meetings-multilateral-development-banks-pledge-stronger-financing-capacity-greater-impact-65018

G20 Brasil 2024. Brazil’s G20 presidency: Understand the G20 and Brazil’s responsibilities.  https://www.g20.org/en/about-the-g20/ok_2411_ebook_workshopg20_eng.pdf/@@download/file

G20 Brasil 2024. (2023, December 1). A G20 with a Brazilian twist. https://www.g20.org/en/news/a-g20-with-a-brazilian-twist

G20 Brasil 2024. G20 social. https://www.g20.org/en/g20-social

G20 Brasil 2024. Task force for the global mobilization against climate change. https://www.g20.org/en/tracks/sherpa-track/climate-change#:~:text=The%20Task%20Force%20for%20the,on%20Climate%20Change%20and%20the

World Bank. (2023, October 13). Statement of the heads of multilateral development banks group: Strengthening our collaboration for greater impact. https://www.worldbank.org/en/news/statement/2023/10/13/statement-of-the-heads-of-multilateral-development-banks-group-strengthening-our-collaboration-for-greater-impact

The post 2024: Brazil’s G20 Year first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/2024-brazils-g20-year/feed/ 0 899277
Quad-ASEAN Technology Cooperation for Critical Minerals Supply Chains http://stg.csep.org/blog/quad-asean-technology-cooperation-for-critical-minerals-supply-chains/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=quad-asean-technology-cooperation-for-critical-minerals-supply-chains http://stg.csep.org/blog/quad-asean-technology-cooperation-for-critical-minerals-supply-chains/#respond Fri, 12 Jan 2024 09:04:32 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=899244 As a part of CSEP's ongoing work on securing critical minerals for India’s green technology and net-zero transition, this analysis incorporates emerging thoughts on Quad-ASEAN cooperation in creating resilient regional supply chains.

The post Quad-ASEAN Technology Cooperation for Critical Minerals Supply Chains first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Backdrop

The interaction between the two regional institutions, ASEAN and Quad, faces many questions regarding their respective complementarities and contradictions vis-à-vis divided ASEAN loyalties between China and the US.

The Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN)[1] has played a dominant political, diplomatic and economic role in the Indo-Pacific region over the last three decades. The rise of China facilitated the success of this role, as did the United States’ commitment to Indo-Pacific security and the avoidance of any direct US-China conflicts in the Indo-Pacific region during 1991-2010. However, during the 2010s, the region witnessed major reconfiguration with China’s growing influence, the US’s declining impact, and the increased likelihood of conflicts between China and the US. ASEAN has divided loyalties between China and the US. India and Japan wish for sustainable and stable growth of the Indo-Pacific region and have been collaborating with the US and Australia to strengthen the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (Quad). The interaction between the two regional institutions, ASEAN and Quad, faces many questions regarding their respective complementarities and contradictions vis-à-vis divided ASEAN loyalties between China and the US.[2]

Like the rest of the world, the Indo-Pacific region should be mindful of grave implications for regional, national, human, and ecological security. Most of the countries in this region have prioritised climate action through their respective net-zero emissions programmes. However, the lack of climate finance and geopolitical frictions may delay the decarbonisation transition. One aspect of climate security includes reliable access to low-carbon technologies needed for the net-zero transition – and critical minerals are the crucial raw material inputs required to manufacture this equipment. While there may be a view in favour of decoupling existing supply chains away from China to reduce the supply risks of relying on a single country for raw materials, this may not be feasible, given China’s massive dominance over the extraction and processing of several critical minerals required for the energy transition. Instead, it would be apt for ASEAN to make optimal use of their domestic capacities, further integrate supply chains within ASEAN, and, where required, participate in global supply chains with a diverse range of partner countries in mining, processing, assembly, and final-use activities.[3]

Quad countries have tried to integrate with some of the ASEAN member countries through a Quad-plus Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF), an open and inclusive Indo-Pacific framework launched in May 2022

Quad countries have tried to integrate with some of the ASEAN member countries through a Quad-plus Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF), an open and inclusive Indo-Pacific framework launched in May 2022. The IPEF comprises 14 economically and culturally diverse countries: four from Quad, seven from ASEAN (all barring Cambodia, Laos, and Myanmar), Fiji, New Zealand, and the Republic of Korea, covering high-income countries and emerging market economies.[4]

IPEF has four broad pillars: i) trade, ii) supply chains, iii) clean economy, and iv) fair economy.[5] While successful cooperation on these pillars would provide opportunities for transferring civilian technology on climate change and critical minerals between the Quad and ASEAN, it raises some challenges to its acceptance on account of the ASEAN centrality. Quad can, however, use this platform and direct engagements with ASEAN and its member states to provide financing support for infrastructure, collaborate on research and development and skilling, and invest in the mining and metals industries.

ASEAN Focus on Mining and Mineral Development

The 43rd ASEAN summit was hosted by Indonesia in September 2023, with the theme “ASEAN Matters: Epicentrum of Growth.”[6] The Chairman’s Statement reiterated ASEAN’s agreement with the COP-28 goals of global climate action at the regional, national, and sub-national levels. It also highlighted the importance of promoting sustainable infrastructure development. The Statement commended the efforts to reduce emissions and accelerate energy transitions and the increased focus on efficiency in energy-intensive sectors and electric vehicles (EVs).

ASEAN thus requires a resilient availability of critical minerals needed to manufacture the requisite low-carbon technologies to catalyse its growing mining sector, which has already helped bring socio-economic and infrastructure development to the region.

ASEAN thus requires a resilient availability of critical minerals needed to manufacture the requisite low-carbon technologies to catalyse its growing mining sector, which has already helped bring socio-economic and infrastructure development to the region. The minerals sector has been considered crucial in helping achieve the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC) goals in their Blueprint 2025.[7] This sentiment began at the first ASEAN Ministerial Meeting on Minerals (AMMin) in August 2005, when the ASEAN cooperation in the minerals sector was first institutionalised. This year also saw the adoption of the ASEAN Minerals Cooperation Action Plan (AMCAP) through the AMCAP-I (2005-2010), followed by the AMCAP-II (2011-2015). Most recently, the AMCAP-III was formulated in two phases, Phase 1 (2016 to 2020) and Phase 2 (2021 to 2025), as the blueprint for ASEAN minerals cooperation to enhance the dynamic development of the sector further.

Phase 2 (2021-2025) of AMCAP-III seeks to create an advanced and progressive ASEAN minerals sector for socio-economic prosperity and environmental well-being through “Promoting ASEAN as a Sustainable Minerals Investment Destination”.[8] It discussed promoting the region as an investment destination for sustainable and responsible mineral development, developing critical mineral value chains, and increasing mineral cooperation within ASEAN and with other global partners. One of the six broad topics discussed in the meeting included Fostering Mineral Cooperation with Partners, focusing on the ASEAN+3 countries – China, the Republic of Korea, and Japan (also a member of Quad).

An ASEAN internal Study on Building Policy Prospectivity: Defining Policy, Regulation and Governance Standards to Attract Exploration Investments, finalised in April 2022, has been a part of the project on Strengthening ASEAN Cooperation in Minerals supported by the ASEAN-Australia Development Cooperation Programme 2.0. While ASEAN AMMin meetings document fostering mineral cooperation with ASEAN+3 and some exploration cooperation sought from Australia, Quad-ASEAN mineral cooperation was not mentioned.

Mining Potential of ASEAN

ASEAN possesses reserves of some of the key critical minerals needed for the energy transition: 27% of global nickel (to manufacture EV and storage batteries), 32% of tin (used in solar panels), and 36% of rare-earth elements (for various applications, including permanent magnets in wind turbines). However, perhaps due to data unavailability and certain regulatory hurdles, exploration investments in the region have declined from nearly US$400 billion in 2016 to under US$300 billion in 2020. On the other hand, the minerals and metals sector has seen a significant increase in production in the same timeframe, outpacing the global increase in supply for certain minerals. For example, ASEAN produced only 0.64% of rare earths in 2015; in 2020, the share had risen to 9.35%.[9]

ASEAN also plays a significant role in processing these critical minerals, which involves extracting valuable metals from the waste material and converting them to a more usable form. Table 1 shows the global supply shares of extraction and processing of select critical minerals required for the green transition between ASEAN, Quad, and China. China dominates the supply chains of mining and processing. Indonesia and the Philippines are crucial in mining and processing nickel, with Indonesia being its largest producer globally. The Philippines is China’s biggest nickel ore supplier, replacing Indonesia after its ban on raw material exports.[10]

These countries also participate in the downstream green technologies value chains and are consumers of critical minerals in various forms. Vietnam and Malaysia are, respectively, the second and third largest manufacturers of solar photovoltaic modules (after China).[11] Thailand is a regional hub for automotive manufacturing, with other ASEAN countries looking to set up EV manufacturing industries. As ASEAN already produces various lithium-ion battery minerals (particularly nickel, manganese, and cobalt), there is scope for vertical integration in EV supply chains. Trade would be required for minerals not readily available in the region, such as lithium from Australia or China.

The Role of Quad in the Indo-Pacific

An early precursor to the Quad was the Tsunami Core: Australia, India, Japan, and the US provided coordinated assistance to the devastation caused by the 2004 tsunami in the Indian Ocean region. The first meeting of Quad officials was held in May 2007 on the sidelines of the ASEAN Regional Forum summit in the Philippines. After an intermission of around a decade, the next meeting was held in November 2017 for consultations on connectivity issues. The Quad is seemingly an informal intergovernmental Indo-Pacific organisation, which some view as a talk-shop, while others consider it a military alliance. Though Quad aims to ward off long-term security challenges from China to its members and the Indo-Pacific region, its informality lies in avoiding creating a formal security agreement.[12]

During the first two Quad Leaders’ Summits (QLMs), held in March and September 2021, various working groups were constituted to enable increased cooperation in several fields: vaccines, climate change (for which ASEAN has a Working Group too[13]), critical and emerging technology, infrastructure, space, and cyber issues.[14] The issue of providing technological cooperation to the ASEAN countries, earlier elaborated in the Quad 2021 summit meetings, was further highlighted during the QLM, along with the need to boost cooperation between the blocs on the issues of green technologies and critical minerals.

A ‘Quad Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation Package’ (Q-CHAMP) was launched during the Quad 2022 summit, which includes some activities delegated to the Working Group on Climate, such as strengthening clean energy supply chains and carbon recycling. The fifth QLM, held in May 2023, emphasised the focus on “regional countries’ priorities” and responding “to the region’s needs” in Southeast Asia, explicitly recognising that the ASEAN has its institutional singularity. A Clean Energy Supply Chains Initiative was also announced to support energy transition in the Indo-Pacific.[15]

India- and Quad-ASEAN Critical Minerals Cooperation

The criticality of 43 minerals has been assessed in a CSEP paper published in April 2023.[16] The Government of India released its first list of 30 critical minerals in June 2023.[17] Along with this declaration, several recommendations were made on how the country can ensure a resilient supply of these minerals. The report proposed increasing cooperation with Australia on research and development and establishing a wing in India’s Ministry of Mines, focusing on critical minerals supply chains. India also recently amended its mining legislation to encourage private-sector investments in the exploration and mining of critical minerals.[18] Additionally, Khanij Bidesh India Ltd. (or KABIL, a government organisation responsible for identifying strategic critical mineral assets abroad) has committed to investing US$25 million in lithium exploration projects in Argentina over the next five years.[19]

India, all other members of Quad, Canada, South Korea, and several European nations are also a part of the Minerals Security Partnership (MSP). This US-led international initiative seeks to “accelerate the development of diverse and sustainable critical energy minerals supply chains”.[20] To this end, the MSP functions along four tracks: (1) sharing information between partners, (2) promoting investing and financing, (3) elevating environment, social, and governance (ESG) standards, and (4) encouraging recycling.[21] Quad partners can use the MSP collaboration to find and invest in relevant projects in ASEAN to bolster critical mineral supply chains while underscoring environmentally and socially responsible mining practices.

The success of Quad-ASEAN cooperation would depend on avoiding any anti-China rhetoric. ASEAN would prefer to remain free from the aftermath of any US-China defence rivalry in the Pacific Ocean. The Quad has several technological capacities to offer to ASEAN through public goods, which refer to goods or services from which a large section of society can benefit. These include the vaccine and health security partnerships, access to infrastructure investments, cable connectivity and resilience to support undersea cable networks in the Indo-Pacific, digital public infrastructure, strengthening supply chain resilience, and improved regional digital connectivity through access to advanced telecommunications technology, including 5G networks.

[22]

For resilient mineral supply chains, ASEAN may determine a list of minerals critical to the member states and the region. Quad can invest in mineral exploration and support baseline geological data collection. Quad can finance the expansion of existing and new mining operations and support establishing ESG standards throughout the mineral supply chain.

For resilient mineral supply chains, ASEAN may determine a list of minerals critical to the member states and the region. Quad can invest in mineral exploration and support baseline geological data collection. Quad can finance the expansion of existing and new mining operations and support establishing ESG standards throughout the mineral supply chain. Minerals for which Quad countries have expertise in mining and processing of select critical minerals have been identified in Tables 2 and 3. For example, major copper mining countries, the United States and Australia, can share their expertise with Vietnam and the Philippines to help expand their mining operations. Japan and Australia can share their cobalt processing capabilities with the Philippines and Indonesia. Likewise, Quad countries can also gain from ASEAN countries, such as Indonesia, providing expertise on nickel mining for India to tap its mineral production. Both regions can participate in all elements of the mineral value chain, including R&D, skilling, and recycling, and the Quad Investors Network (QUIN) may become a mechanism to facilitate investments in strategic technologies, including clean energy, critical minerals, and semiconductors.[23]

The post Quad-ASEAN Technology Cooperation for Critical Minerals Supply Chains first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/quad-asean-technology-cooperation-for-critical-minerals-supply-chains/feed/ 0 899244
Diplomacy in a Changing World http://stg.csep.org/blog/diplomacy-in-a-changing-world/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=diplomacy-in-a-changing-world http://stg.csep.org/blog/diplomacy-in-a-changing-world/#respond Mon, 08 Jan 2024 05:43:43 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=899197 Shivshankar Menon explores the shifting tides of diplomacy. This piece examines the evolving landscape of international relations in a changing world.

The post Diplomacy in a Changing World first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
I. A Death Often Foretold

“My God! This is the end of diplomacy,” said Lord Palmerston, the British prime minister, when he received the first diplomatic telegram in 1860. He was not the first to express this sentiment, nor would he be the last.

With each advance in technology, and each generation’s conviction that they are better than those that came before and face an entirely new level of challenges, diplomacy’s death has been proclaimed or foretold.

With each advance in technology, and each generation’s conviction that they are better than those that came before and face an entirely new level of challenges, diplomacy’s death has been proclaimed or foretold. When Woodrow Wilson spoke of “open covenants openly arrived at” in 1918, democracy was said to now make diplomacy, that autocratic monarchical invention, an unnecessary anachronism. When information and communications technology made conversations across continents possible and facile from the eighties onwards, diplomats were said to be about to lose their relevance. When summit meetings between leaders, with their attractive possibilities of photo ops and image building (for leaders), became increasingly common in the nineties, we were told that diplomats would lose all agency.

And yet here we are, with more diplomats and diplomacy in a globalised world knit together by the same technologies that were supposed to kill off diplomacy.

II. Why is Diplomacy Still Alive?

Why are reports of diplomacy’s death premature? Why is diplomacy still alive and flourishing? Why do we complain about not having enough diplomats?

The primary reason must be that decisions are still made by people and that human beings do so through a process of conversation, negotiation, and discussion with other humans. The technology to replace that human element in decision making has yet to be deployed for the higher functions of the state involving issues of life and death, peace, and war. Politics is by, with, and for human beings, and the advent of democracy made it more so.

Politics is by, with, and for human beings, and the advent of democracy made it more so. To arrive at peaceful solutions to issues, and to build the institutions, laws, and norms to sustain them, diplomacy is the best way known to man.

To arrive at peaceful solutions to issues, and to build the institutions, laws, and norms to sustain them, diplomacy is the best way known to man.

Arriving at mutually acceptable solutions involves give and take, or bargaining, something that is best done in private. At its core, diplomacy is a private and personal art, for it involves getting others to do what one wants while giving them as little as necessary to make it worth their while to do so. If this sounds manipulative, it is no more or less so than most other political processes. In diplomacy too, it is the process of making the sausage that is messy, not the result, which is desirable and serves both sides’ interests in order to be durable.

III. Today’s World

We are today in a world between orders, not just in the geopolitical balance-of-power sense, but also in terms of technology. This is how it has been for most of history. The certitudes of the bipolar Cold War were really a historical anomaly. And this state of flux has increased the need for diplomacy. But sadly, the same political factors which make more diplomacy necessary also make it more unlikely. Great power rivalry and the rise of new authoritarian leaders basing their legitimacy on hyper-nationalism have made hotspots live and rekindled old disputes throughout maritime Asia. We now have leaders in the great powers who are less capable of the flexibility, and give and take that diplomacy requires, lest it affect their outsized image as strong, decisive, nationalist leaders. That is the paradox of our times for diplomats.

We now have leaders in the great powers who are less capable of the flexibility, and give and take that diplomacy requires, lest it affect their outsized image as strong, decisive, nationalist leaders. That is the paradox of our times for diplomats.

If anything, today’s world has made diplomacy more, and not less relevant. There are ever more topics, sectors, and scope for diplomacy, and the number and type of actors involved in diplomacy have expanded phenomenally in the globalised world that we have built in the last half century. We have created global transnational issues that require global transnational solutions like climate change, and new domains of contention like cyber space. We have expanded our definition of security to include many aspects of human activity and now speak of human security. As a result, diplomacy now includes not just the representatives of heads of state and government but of multilateral organisations, NGOs, and others in a host of fields requiring specialised knowledge and skills alongside that of negotiation and deal making. In other words, there is much more for diplomats to do now.

IV. Artificial Intelligence

What about technological change? Will the advent of generative artificial intelligence (AI) and the prospect of artificial general intelligence (AGI)[1] finally make Palmerston’s prophecy about the end of diplomacy come true?

Several foreign offices already use AI tools to support public diplomacy, to simulate negotiations, to game multilateral scenarios, and for management support (in postings etc.). Certain mechanical tasks like preparing briefs and drafting standard notes might be entrusted to AI tools. This is a rapidly evolving field. But so far, this is only one more step in the adoption of modern technologies to make existing tasks easier, as happened with telegraph, word processors, mobile telephony, and other past technical advances. It has not yet led to qualitative change in the fundamental functions of diplomacy. What AI has changed until now is how, and not what diplomats do. And that is unlikely to change until human nature does.

What AI has changed until now is how, and not what diplomats do. And that is unlikely to change until human nature does.

Even this change brings with it both risks and rewards and has its limits.

The risks include what we see around us in the proliferation of fake news and amplification of emotion and opinion in our public life. The new technologies, particularly ICT, bring risks to reputation. The verisimilitude of the ability to mimic the tone, language, and voice of leaders makes it much easier to mislead an adversary with less (rather than more) information than oneself. (Intelligence services survive on this conviction.) Sophisticated disinformation campaigns can sway elections in democracies and could affect decisions on questions of war and peace.

Each advance in communications and AI technology also brings a certain diminution in the diplomat’s agency. When communications relied on horses and ships individual diplomats wielded considerable power. As communications have gotten faster, power has shifted home, to headquarters, and the latitude that diplomats enjoy has shrunk. Diplomats now are more directly and constantly directed and supervised by their home offices. ChatGPT, for instance, could create content, and might replace the specialised knowledge that diplomats bring to decision making and the negotiating table, their strongest suit.

These two risks—to reputation and of diminished agency—are not new, but their speed and scale are. AI has already changed how we diplomats do our job. However, in the simulations that I have seen, and the use that my students make of ChatGPT so far, suggest that AI today still makes mistakes and relies on human expertise to be effective as a diplomatic tool. In a blind test, Foreign Policy magazine asked an undergraduate student and ChatGPT in June 2023 to write essays on Russia’s annexation of Crimea in 2014, and it was quite apparent which essay was written by the human being.[2] I use the product of ChatGPT in my courses by asking students to correct the errors in what the programme produces on a given topic.

At the same time, the complexity of the issues we deal with makes local knowledge and contacts more, not less important and redresses the balance somewhat in favour of diplomatic agency. The broader point is that the proliferation of backchannels, free lancers, NSAs, and intelligence officials who trespass regularly on diplomatic turf only proves how much diplomacy is needed today. If anything, the demand for diplomacy rises with crisis and uncertainty, as we face today.

Will AGI bring about qualitative change in diplomatic practice?

The immediate question must be can AI bargain? In any negotiation, intent, not capability is the core issue, and human intent, as any analyst or scholar will tell you, is the hardest thing to fathom or decipher. I suppose AGI could certainly bargain with itself or another AI. But can it do so with a human being? The day we trust a machine to do so and take the human out of the decision-making loop will be the day when AI will diplomacy forever. But that day is yet to come. Credibility is the diplomat’s ultimate calling card, what gets him in the door and makes his words count. And credibility is subjective. The choice of whether to grant it to AI or its successors is still ours. In the meantime, we have a powerful and useful new tool in AI to add to the armoury that human diplomats use to create desirable outcomes. Enjoy it.

The choice of whether to grant it to AI or its successors is still ours. In the meantime, we have a powerful and useful new tool in AI to add to the armoury that human diplomats use to create desirable outcomes.

V. Conclusion

Diplomats can still look forward to great lifetime employment, with both the joys and tribulations, intellectual and physical, that political processes involving other humans involve. For anyone who likes people, change, variety, travel, and intellectual challenge, diplomacy remains a profession with few rivals.

The post Diplomacy in a Changing World first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/diplomacy-in-a-changing-world/feed/ 0 899197
The Poor Should Control Carbon Emissions, But the Rich Must Eliminate Them http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-poor-should-control-carbon-emissions-but-the-rich-must-eliminate-them/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-poor-should-control-carbon-emissions-but-the-rich-must-eliminate-them http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-poor-should-control-carbon-emissions-but-the-rich-must-eliminate-them/#respond Thu, 30 Nov 2023 06:09:22 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=898929 If the world must achieve zero emissions by 2050, it’s impractical and unfair to require all countries to reach that goal simultaneously.

The post The Poor Should Control Carbon Emissions, But the Rich Must Eliminate Them first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The United Nations’ annual climate change conference, COP28, will begin on November 30, and this year’s focus is on the five-year global stocktake. Through this process, not only do we measure where we are, but, hopefully, also ratchet up efforts and official pledges to limit average global warming to 1.5 degrees Celsius. Unfortunately, as the U.N.’s 2023 Emissions Gap Report points out, we’re falling even further behind schedule — instead of lowering emissions, global emissions are still rising.

A number of international and expert bodies like the International Energy Agency and the Energy Transitions Commission have laid out plans to limit emissions. A widely publicised effort is the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change’s (IPCC) special report, which put out a stark timeline for the world to reach net zero emissions by 2050 in order to limit global temperature rise to 1.5°C. This galvanised many countries to announce plans to reach net zero emissions by 2050.

Unfortunately, there are two problems with these announcements. First, even if a country does bring its net emissions to zero by 2050 (and many are behind schedule), this says nothing about its cumulative emissions, which depend on the trajectory of the emissions curve. A less well-publicised statement from the IPCC report was that keeping temperature rise to under 1.5°C requires emissions to fall by 45% between 2010 and 2030, along the way to zero emissions by 2050.  Instead, global carbon dioxide emissions have risen by about 10% since 2010. Second, the report says little about apportioning the remaining carbon budget across nations.

Both issues come to the fore when we apply lenses of fairness and practicality. Which countries need to reduce emissions, by how much, and by when? Is “zero” the only thing poorer developing countries should be focused on today?

A fair pathway to net zero emissions

If the world must achieve zero emissions by 2050, it’s impractical and unfair to require all countries to reach that goal simultaneously. Countries that are poor and have low per capita emissions are not in a position to zero their emissions by 2050 because they must still grow their energy consumption, including from fossil fuels, to develop. Thus, achieving net zero global emissions by 2050 — or the equivalent allowed cumulative emissions — only works if high-emissions countries bring their emissions to zero sooner than 2050.

Instead of all countries following the same path to zero emissions, we need a framework that is fair and practical and recognises differences across countries. Poorer countries[1] should dramatically reduce most — but not necessarily all — of their prospective emissions as soon as possible, similar to how the Pareto 80/20 rule helps maximise bang-for-buck.

This is analogous to “flattening the curve,” a phrase popularised during the COVID-19 pandemic. Poorer countries can reduce emissions growth faster up front and then plateau their emissions, even if a small emissions tail lingers beyond the notional date of 2050, keeping the area under the curve the same (or even lower).

In contrast, high-emissions nations cannot leave an emissions tail as we don’t have the global carbon space. They can also afford to aggressively move to zero emissions by or even before 2050. Their efforts to reach zero emissions will help the poor by innovating and paying the early adopter premium for new technologies like green hydrogen and battery storage, the benefits of which would trickle down to everyone.

The reason we need such differentiated goals across countries is that it is much more expensive to eliminate rather than merely reduce emissions. Lowering emissions is significantly cheaper than getting rid of the last 10% or 20% of emissions within a sector (the so-called tail of emissions), even if it’s an “easy” sector to decarbonise like electricity.

The need for reliable electricity

Electricity is the most important and also the highest emissions sector in most developing countries. In looking to decarbonise this sector, the good news is that wind and solar are very cheap. However, the bad news is that this is only the case when one doesn’t need storage, which is expensive and will be required as wind and solar grow in share. On a per kilowatt-hour basis, storage is multiple times the cost of solar today[2] and it is also more expensive than producing electricity from fossil fuels (absent a carbon price).

While all countries are grappling with solar and wind’s well-known variability, developing countries have an additional problem: they lack sufficient alternative installed capacity that could provide a buffer to that variability. Rich countries have sufficient electricity capacity, but the poor still need to grow. In many African countries, for example, per capita electricity consumption is lower than that of a single refrigerator in the United States.

As developed countries expanded their renewable energy capacity, many of them also kept or even grew their natural gas electricity capacity, which acts like an insurance policy. Most developing countries lack such a buffer, and there is pressure, under “no carbon” mantras, to not finance fossil fuel generation in poor countries. A back-of-the-envelope calculation shows that if you were to supply the roughly 1 billion people who lack electricity connections or quality supply with 35 kWh/month per home, even with 100% coal-based electricity, this would only be equal to about 0.25% of today’s global emissions. And new grid supply wouldn’t be 100% coal — solar is far cheaper and able to meet at least a fraction of grid-based supply.

But before worrying about the hard-to-abate tail of emissions, poorer nations should aim to aggressively decarbonise, say, 70%-80% of upcoming electricity sector emissions. 100% decarbonisation would require significant electricity storage and grid overhauls, more so if we need to worry about the worst-case scenario of high summer heat with low wind for days on end. My team’s analysis of India’s power grid in 2030 shows that a disproportionate amount of storage capacity would be needed to ensure supply reliability for the brief periods of highest demand (assuming one couldn’t expand fossil fuel supply). Not worrying about eliminating the tail of electricity emissions can also allow the poor to prioritise the electrification of sectors like transportation and cooking that directly use fossil fuels today.

The right way to help

Developing countries will need help to decarbonise faster. Some zero-carbon projects are already bankable (viable) today, but more rapid decarbonisation will require paying a premium. The poor cannot afford this, and so the rich will need to step up support. At COP15 in 2009, rich countries pledged $100 billion per year of climate support by 2020, but the deadline was subsequently extended to 2025.

In addition to problems with timelines, there are concerns over the form of support. Climate support for the poor must be offered as grants or discounted loans, and not traditional funding for projects — like setting up a solar farm — that are already bankable under traditional funding. If climate experts ask for “additionality” when measuring carbon abatement (like not counting the preservation of a forest that was not going to be cut down anyway), we also need additionality in finance (or funding that wouldn’t have materialised otherwise). Such finance must also not allow for accounting tricks or double counting.

Market viability provides an interesting metric for action. In many countries, we’re not even doing what is financially viable today in terms of emissions reductions: e.g., we’re not scaling up wind and solar nearly fast enough, well before the point of requiring batteries. This requires attention to underlying issues such as counter-party risk (loss-making utilities), outdated grid management, hurdles for land acquisition, etc.

An emphasis on achieving “full zero” and “only zero” not only becomes a distraction but may also crowd out improvements in existing infrastructure that could raise efficiencies and lower pollution, such as cleaning up existing power plants. Such efforts could reduce local air pollution (a bigger worry today than carbon in many regions), and existing power plants could be retrofitted to be more flexible in their operations, which will be required for a future with a high penetration of intermittent renewables.

We can’t change the past, and this is one reason to focus on prospective emissions. If the rich enjoy the luxury of ignoring historical emissions (ideally, they shouldn’t, since “all carbon is equal”), they also need to accept that the poor will follow a phased approach, not just with emissions reductions before elimination, but, in some cases, a temporary rise in emissions. The poor can be even more aggressive up-front in return for breathing space to abate more difficult emissions down the road. If this means some growth in fossil fuel use by poor countries, this shouldn’t be denied under climate absolutism.

The post The Poor Should Control Carbon Emissions, But the Rich Must Eliminate Them first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-poor-should-control-carbon-emissions-but-the-rich-must-eliminate-them/feed/ 0 898929
Policy Analysis: Mine Closure in India http://stg.csep.org/blog/policy-analysis-mine-closure-in-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=policy-analysis-mine-closure-in-india http://stg.csep.org/blog/policy-analysis-mine-closure-in-india/#respond Thu, 23 Nov 2023 07:26:09 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=898878 In India, existing mine closure legislation lacks provisions to adequately address the socio-economic and cultural aspects, highlighting the need for an improved policy paradigm.

The post Policy Analysis: Mine Closure in India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Mining brings about socio-economic changes in the vicinity areas. Local communities adapt to these changes and may depend entirely on mining activities for their livelihood. Consequently, the closure of a mine can induce a high level of social tension. It can escalate into protests and agitations, jeopardising the ‘social license to operate’ for future mining endeavours (Rao & Pathak, 2009).  Mine closure is the formal process of planning and managing the decommissioning of a mine site, mitigating impacts, carrying out environmental rehabilitation, and eventually relinquishing the lease (Mine Closure Hub, 2022). It is a significant challenge faced by mining companies, governments, and communities across the globe.

In India, existing mine closure legislation lacks provisions to adequately address the socio-economic and cultural aspects, highlighting the need for an improved policy paradigm.

In India, existing mine closure legislation lacks provisions to adequately address the socio-economic and cultural aspects, highlighting the need for an improved policy paradigm. The Union government has also noted that the existing closure plan is technical and fails to address the rehabilitation of labourers and the social impacts of closure (Deoghoria, 2022). The current policy focuses on technical aspects like dismantling building structures, removing tailing materials, and decommissioning mining machinery. However, there is insufficient attention to transitioning the community from mining-dependent livelihoods to a post-mining economy.

The objective of mine closure is to minimise negative externalities, including environmental, physical, social, and economic impacts, while creating a suitable landform for future uses. Effective enforcement of mine reclamation policies, establishing financial mechanisms, and promoting sustainable mining practices in consultation with stakeholders and integrating global best practices are crucial to facilitating successful mine closure (Jyoti et al, 2023).

Regulations on Mine Closure in India

In 2003, the Mineral Concession Rules 1960 and the Mineral Conservation and Development Rules (MCDR) 1988 were amended to mandate all mining leaseholders to submit a ‘Progressive Mine Closure Plan’ (PMCP) prepared for five yearly periods as a part of the Mining Plan (Table 1) (Indian Bureau of Mines, 2011).  Additionally, a Final Mine Closure Plan (FMCP) must be submitted two years before the proposed closure of the mine. Approval and implementation of the FMCP are necessary for legally abandoning a mine site.

Table 1: Mine Closure Rules in MCDR[1] 2017

Source: MCDR 2017

The National Mineral Policy 2019 highlighted the significance of scientific mine closure in an orderly and systematic manner, focusing on restoring ecology and socio-economic aspects (Ministry of Mines, 2019). In 2022, the Indian Bureau of Mines (IBM) published a comprehensive manual for the appraisal of ‘Final Mine Closure Plan’ considering various factors such as sustainable waste disposal, topsoil, air and water quality management, handling of mineral rejects, disposal of mining machinery, tailing dam management, and the economic implications of mine closure (Indian Bureau of Mines, 2022). Additionally, the star-rating system of mines, overseen by IBM, assesses achievement in final or progressive mine closure and landscape restoration (Ministry of Mines, n.d).

Status of Mine Closure in India and the Gaps within

Dearth of Data

A significant challenge in assessing the closure status is due to a lack of publicly accessible information. Data on abandoned land extent, reserve status, timelines, costs, future potential, and measures by leaseholders and state government are lacking. Improper due diligence in monitoring the abandonment of mines exacerbates the transparent assessment of mine closure status, hindering the formulation of far-reaching policy propositions.

Government reports do not provide a comprehensive picture of the country’s mine closure situation. IBM identified 297 mine sites in India abandoned before the promulgation of the closure rules in April 2003, with 106 owned by PSUs, major corporations, and private companies needing reclamation. Of these, 24 have become operational, leaving 82 sites requiring attention. However, detailed information is missing for the remaining 191 sites from the initial identification of 297 abandoned sites (Indian Bureau of Mines, n.d).

Fund Utilisation

Post-2003, mining leaseholders were required to provide financial assurances. However, uncertainty exists regarding the utilisation of funds for reclamation activities. Regrettably, there is no effective mechanism to track and assess the utilisation of funds allocated for mine closure activities. Compared to Western Australia and Canada, the financial assurance required for mine closure in India is notably lower and does not effectively deter the defaulters. In Western Australia, 25% and in Quebec, Canada, 70% of the total restoration cost must be assured by the miners before starting the mining operations (McKinsyey&Company, 2014).  However, to increase the financial guarantees for mine closure in India, the sector has to be highly competitive and profitable to reduce any additional encumbrance on the small-scale mining companies.

Inadequate Consideration of Socio-Cultural Dimensions

The intricate relationships between indigenous communities and mined lands, as well as other institutional effects on the local economy, such as the outward migration of people and demographic changes, receive insufficient attention.

Mining activities and subsequent mine closure impact communities, their livelihoods, and the broader social fabric. However, the emphasis tends to be primarily placed on physical and environmental concerns, neglecting the socio-economic, political, cultural, and human well-being aspects. The intricate relationships between indigenous communities and mined lands, as well as other institutional effects on the local economy, such as the outward migration of people and demographic changes, receive insufficient attention. This lack of holistic consideration leads to long-term social and economic stagnation for decades after ceasing mining operations.

Comparing the Mine Closure Framework in India with International Standards

No mining company in India is a part of the International Council on Mining and Metals (ICMM). Incorporating its guidelines can make mine closure more effective and make India’s mining scenario more sustainable and attractive (Table 2) (International Council on Mining and Metals, 2019).  While all the rules and regulations are theoretically incorporated into the existing framework, the actual implementation of it at the ground level necessitates comprehensive scrutiny and evaluation.

Table 2: Comparison of ICMM’s Mine Closure Framework with the Indian Mine Closure Policy

Source: ICMM and IBM Guidelines

Policy Recommendations

Economic Diversifications

Diversifying the economy by promoting sustainable livelihood opportunities tailored to local should be encouraged. Broadening the scope of the current policy framework beyond providing mere compensations to facilitating alternate livelihood opportunities is imperative. Mining companies often undertake vocational training and capacity-building initiatives as part of their CSR activities. However, the focus must be given to the fact that these initiatives could yield tangible benefits and translate into actual employment opportunities.

Effective Land Repurposing

Land restoration should enable the resumption of agriculture, horticulture, and allied activities, focusing on decarbonisation and reinstating the region’s biodiversity with minimal landscape alteration. Introducing heterogeneous local species with medicinal, timber-yielding, and fruit-bearing capacity is vital to ensure perennial greening and a better survival rate.

The CAG report 2019 acknowledged some mine closure initiatives by Coal India Ltd. and its subsidiaries as good practices for green initiatives. For instance, Central Coalfields Ltd. established an eco-park with rainwater harvesting, drip irrigation, nurseries, mixed forestry, and vermicompost units. Closed open-cast mines were converted into lakes for rainwater harvesting, promoting pisciculture and groundwater recharge (Ministry of Coal, 2019). These successful case studies can be considered models to replicate the ecological restoration of mines for non-fuel minerals.

Interdepartmental Coordination and Stakeholder Engagement

Strong institutional support, multiple stakeholder engagement, industry-government collaboration, effective monitoring, and evaluation are prerequisites to execute environmentally and socially responsible mine closures in a time-bound and strategic manner. For example, Canada’s ‘National Orphaned/ Abandoned Mines Initiative (NOAMI)’ guided by representatives from the mining industry, governments, NGOs, and Aboriginal Canadians to provide recommendations for the improvement of abandoned and orphaned mines, exemplifies a unique multi-stakeholder endeavour to solve this complex industry challenge of national importance (Cunningham, 2017).

Comprehensive Inventory

There is a pressing need to develop an integrated and complete inventory of all abandoned or orphaned mine sites specific to non-fuel minerals across India.

There is a pressing need to develop an integrated and complete inventory of all abandoned or orphaned mine sites specific to non-fuel minerals across India. Essential information, such as the mining area’s extent, pertinent laws and regulations, physical, chemical, and geological properties, reserve status, socio-cultural attributes, cost-benefit estimates, future potential, and a user-friendly web-based mapping tool for site display, should be included to provide an enriched ‘state of knowledge’ to facilitate business opportunities within the realm of mining rehabilitation initiatives.

Integrating Social Transition

Integrating societal transition through inclusive and participatory involvement of the community, local NGOs, and CSOs is imperative to decide post-mining land uses and enhance the governance structure’s efficacy at all levels of implementation.

Additionally, site-specific accountability on mine closure should be given adequate attention by considering regional diversity. Moreover, mine closure is not a single-phase process, so multipronged strategies, long-term stewardship, and due diligence are crucial to attaining a seamless transition throughout the entire mining lifecycle rather than just at the end-of-life stage.

Mine closure is not a single-phase process, so multipronged strategies, long-term stewardship, and due diligence are crucial to attaining a seamless transition throughout the entire mining lifecycle rather than just at the end-of-life stage.

The author would like to thank Rajesh Chadha, Senior Fellow, Yashika Singh, Visiting Fellow, Karthik Bansal, Research Analyst, CSEP for their comments and inputs.

References

Cunningham, K. (2017, June). Canada’s National Orphaned/ Abandoned Mines Initiative. Bulletin Magazine, pp. 38-40. Retrieved from https://abandoned-mines.org/wp/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/NOAMI_JUN17-AUSIMM_Bulletin-2.pdf

Deoghoria, J. (2022, October 22). Comprehensive coal mine closure plan to include impact on human resource and society: Coal Secy. The Times of India. Retrieved from https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/business/india-business/comprehensive-coal-mine-closure-plan-to-include-impact-on-human-resource-and-society-coal-secy/articleshow/95020540.cms

Indian Bureau of Mines. (n.d). Abandoned Mine Sites. Retrievd from https://ibm.gov.in/IBMPortal/pages/Abandoned_Mine_Sites#:~:text=Through%20a%20special%20study%20at,sector%20companies%20requiring%20reclamation%20%2F%20rehabilitation.

Indian Bureau of Mines. (2011). Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 1988 (As amended up to 2nd August, 2011). Retrieved from https://ibm.gov.in/writereaddata/files/07102014115525MCDR%201988_02082011.pdf

Indian Bureau of Mines. (2022). IBM Manual for Appraisal of Final Mine Closure Plan (Submitted under Rule 24 & 25 of Mineral Conservation and Development Rules 2017). Retrieved from https://ibm.gov.in/writereaddata/files/167834780664098e1e5329bIBM_FMCP_Manual_30602022.pdf

International Council on Mining and Metals. (2019, February). Integrated Mine Closure. Good Practice Guide. (2nd ed.). Retrieved from https://www.icmm.com/en-gb/guidance/environmental-stewardship/2019/integrated-mine-closure

Jyoti, B., Pandey, S., Sivaranjani, S., & Panwar,V. (2023). Mine Closure Strategies and Concerns in India: A Review on Practices and Strategies. Indian Forester,149 (2). 184-196. 10.36808/if/2023/v149i2/169768. Retrieved from https://www.researchgate.net/publication/369559904_Mine_Closure_Strategies_and_Concerns_in_India_A_Review_on_Practices_and_Strategies

Mckinsey&Company. (2014). Putting India on the growth path: Unlocking the mining potential.(1-56) Presented at CII Global Mining Summit, 2014. Retrieved from https://www.mckinsey.com/~/media/mckinsey/featured%20insights/India/Putting%20India%20on%20the%20growth%20path/Putting%20India%20on%20the%20growth%20path.ashx#:~:text=The%20mining%20industry%20has%20the,to%20India’s%20GDP%20by%202025.

Mine Closure Hub. (2022). Sustaianable Minerals Institute. The University of Queensland. Retrieved from https://stories.uq.edu.au/smi/2022/csrm-mine-closure-hub/mine-closure-overview/index.html

Ministry of Coal. (2019). Report of the Comptroller and Auditor General of India on Assessment of Environmental Impact due to Mining Activities and its Mitigation in Coal India Limited and its Subsidiaries. Retrieved from https://cag.gov.in/uploads/download_audit_report/2019/Report_No_12_of_2019_Assessment_of_Environmental_Impact_due_to_Mining_Activities_and_its_Mitigation_in_Coal_India_Limited_and_its_Subsidiaries.pdf

Ministry of Mines. (n.d). SDF Star Rating of Mines. Retrieved from https://mines.gov.in/webportal/content/star-rating-of-mines

Ministry of Mines. (2019). National Mineral Policy, 2019. Retrieved from https://mines.gov.in/admin/storage/app/uploads/64352887bcfa41681205383.pdf

Ministry of Mines. (2022-23). Annual Report, 2022-23. Retrieved from https://mines.gov.in/admin/storage/app/uploads/6433da09a9f741681119753.pdf

Rao, P. M., & Pathak, K. (2009). Impacts of mine closure on the quality of life of the neighboring community. Eastern Journal of Psychiatry, 12, 10–15. Retrieved from https://www.ejpsychiatry.com/doi/EJP/pdf/10.5005/EJP-12-1–2-10

The post Policy Analysis: Mine Closure in India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/policy-analysis-mine-closure-in-india/feed/ 0 898878
BIMSTEC at 25: Fostering Sustainable Regional Cooperation http://stg.csep.org/blog/bimstec-at-25-fostering-sustainable-regional-cooperation/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=bimstec-at-25-fostering-sustainable-regional-cooperation http://stg.csep.org/blog/bimstec-at-25-fostering-sustainable-regional-cooperation/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 11:31:36 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=898079 Bhavyanshi Sinha's interview of Sreeradha Datta offers a comprehensive view of the current and future prospects of BIMSTEC as a regional initiative.

The post BIMSTEC at 25: Fostering Sustainable Regional Cooperation first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Bhavyanshi Sinha interviews Sreeradha Datta on her book, BIMSTEC: The Journey and the Way Ahead, published by Vivekananda International Foundation in 2021.

Founded in 1997, the Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC) brings together seven countries (Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Nepal, Sri Lanka, Thailand, and Myanmar) comprising 22 per cent of the world’s population and 3.8 per cent of the world’s GDP. Much of BIMSTEC’s focus has been on economic cooperation and transportation infrastructure in one of the world’s least integrated regions.

The sixth BIMSTEC summit is scheduled for November 2023 under the chairmanship of Thailand, the lead country for the connectivity sector. At the fifth BIMSTEC summit, member states adopted the BIMSTEC Master Plan for Transport Connectivity, comprising 267 flagship projects worth US$ 124 billion. About 50 percent to 61 percent of these projects are in the roads and road transportation subsector. The detailed financing proposal will become clearer during the implementation period. For the same, a study is ongoing with the support of Asian Development Bank (ADB). Thailand has committed to making the group’s efforts more tangible by focusing on road linkages between India, Myanmar, and Thailand and implementing the BIMSTEC Coastal Shipping Agreement, the Motor Vehicles Agreement, and the draft Agreement on Maritime Transport Cooperation.

In this timely book, scholars from across the region write about the achievements, impediments, and possible solutions to furthering connectivity between South and Southeast Asia via BIMSTEC. With chapters addressing significant issues such as sociocultural perspectives, trade, investment and energy, security and defence, the book offers a comprehensive view of the current and future prospects of BIMSTEC as a regional initiative. Experts from member states provide in-depth analyses and solutions to facilitate the initiatives listed under BIMSTEC’s main sector of cooperation. The policy recommendations acknowledge each member state’s level of development and suggest measures to enhance regional economic integration and infrastructure connectivity in tandem with greater security and other forms of cooperation.

Bhavyanshi Sinha (BS): In the book, you argue that “the assumptions of better relations only on grounds of economic, scientific and technological cooperation without political, ideological and strategic considerations will, at best, be insufficient” (p. 62). Do you think BIMSTEC has already achieved this maturity, despite failing at a free trade agreement and building basic economic interdependence in the Bay of Bengal region?

Sreeradha Datta (SD): BIMSTEC, despite its years, is not seen yet as a mature, functional organisation. Its ability to overcome political and strategic concerns to pursue economic goals and agenda has clearly remained limited. As is well known, BIMSTEC was dormant for a while and needed a strong push by India in 2016. The organisation has, since then, seen progress in certain sectors. The adoption of the Charter in the last summit at Colombo (2022) was significant. It is likely to adopt the BIMSTEC Bangkok Vision 2030 to build a ‘prosperous, resilient and open’ organisation at its next summit.

As is well known, BIMSTEC was dormant for a while and needed a strong push by India in 2016. The organisation has, since then, seen progress in certain sectors. The adoption of the Charter in the last summit at Colombo (2022) was significant. It is likely to adopt the BIMSTEC Bangkok Vision 2030 to build a ‘prosperous, resilient and open’ organisation at its next summit.

While the idea of regionalism and sub-regionalism receives support from all BIMSTEC members, their priorities do not converge. Further, the pandemic has had an unsettling effect on every member, causing them to refocus their national priorities. Alongside, this region has received increasing international attention—the Bay of Bengal, along with the Indo-Pacific, have risen in strategic importance. Given these evolving geo-strategic developments, members have been unable to ignore many of their inhibitions stemming from fears and apprehensions regarding the emerging alliances and their corresponding political and economic implications. Despite several studies highlighting the potential economic gains, the arguments have not been compelling enough for many to accept a free trade agreement and move towards greater economic interdependence. Individual economic needs and requirements are clearly varied among the members, and going by past trends, BIMSTEC will grow at a slow and incremental pace, and any immediate transformational move towards economic interdependence is doubtful.

BS: You mention that cyber security is a key area that requires attention at the regional level (p. 3). How might divergent national policies (for example, India’s ban on Chinese apps) effect cybersecurity cooperation within BIMSTEC, given other member states’ relatively positive bilateral relations with China? Where do you see the scope for more security cooperation?

SD: BIMSTEC members have different political systems with different bilateral engagements. Therefore, while there is convergence on a larger security understanding, putting in place norms and frameworks will take time. In addition, as previously witnessed during some high-level security meetings, members do not share similar security apparatus or concerns. It is increasingly being understood that without developing a common security framework, progress, even in other sectors, will be gradual at best and marginal at worst. A common vision of a stable global order is fundamental for building greater regionalism within BIMSTEC.

It is increasingly being understood that without developing a common security framework, progress, even in other sectors, will be gradual at best and marginal at worst. A common vision of a stable global order is fundamental for building greater regionalism within BIMSTEC.

Forging cooperation on cyber security among members with varied economic and technological levels and differing political systems will be fraught with challenges. Developing a response team for any cyber-attack and threat has been the best common minimum proposal at this point, given the differing stakes of member states. The conversations have begun, and convergences will eventually emerge after addressing the concerns of smaller members. Despite differing positions on China among the members currently, these differences can also be addressed through frank conversations to build a broader understanding. This process can be undertaken more effectively at the track-two level dialogues. Rather than being led by any member, initiatives such as these should be led by BIMSTEC and its institutional framework. Its Secretariat has to be empowered to take the lead in addressing the core issue of security and cooperative framework without which a successful BIMSTEC is unlikely.

BS: How can BIMSTEC member states coordinate their national infrastructure projects and regional connectivity projects under the BIMSTEC Master Plan for Transport Connectivity? What can be done to better integrate the national and regional levels of policy planning as suggested by the Asian Development Bank (ADB) report?

SD: While it may appear to be the simplest of the tasks to be undertaken by BIMSTEC, subregional experiences within South Asia have laid bare the inherent difficulties of such projects. Currently, the political crisis in Myanmar is one of the confounding factors stymying the process, but beyond that, a project like this clearly has many challenges. Though this project is backed by the ADB, given the huge number of tasks involved and the hardware and software requirements, each member will have to be fully invested in the idea and its implementation.

While all member countries were consulted in finalising the Master Plan, the level of interest among members is not similar. For greater efficiency, it is important that each member identify immediate, medium-, and long-term priorities within the overall framework of the Plan, which can then be factored in through discussions between experts from multilateral institutions and each member.

While all member countries were consulted in finalising the Master Plan, the level of interest among members is not similar. For greater efficiency, it is important that each member identify immediate, medium-, and long-term priorities within the overall framework of the Plan, which can then be factored in through discussions between experts from multilateral institutions and each member. Applying the hub and spoke model, specific task forces and focused groups may be able to identify and detail domestic, bilateral, and regional aspects and smoothen the process accordingly. Existing cross-border infrastructures may become the core for a larger cobweb to develop. For instance, the current India–Bangladesh transportation mechanism can be utilised to establish a large transport system in this part of the sub-region. Similarly, with its efficient port facilities, Colombo can establish functional engagement with ports in Bangladesh and other ports within BIMSTEC. Each member will need to prioritise specific aspects of the Master Plan to make incremental progress towards the larger goal.

BS: Your publications and research have consistently focused on the eastern part of South Asia, which is the current priority area of India’s Neighborhood First policy. But can India afford to build regional integration without equal focus on its western frontier, including through SAARC?

SD: Irrespective of BIMSTEC’s traction in recent years, SAARC remains a common reference point for all South Asian neighbours. For India, it is not an either-or issue vis-à-vis SAARC and BIMSTEC. Unfortunately, it has been perceived so, given the sharp political differences India has with Pakistan over its use of terror as a foreign policy tool towards India. Despite that, during the COVID-19 pandemic, India initiated a SAARC meeting to address some of the deep economic problems being faced by SAARC members. Pakistan could not share a common perspective with other SAARC members even on this humanitarian platform. Given Pakistan’s intransigent position and the political and economic crises it is currently facing, any change in its ways is unlikely. India desires to be part of a strong SAARC, but given contemporary political realities, that seems out of bounds presently.

As outlined in the SAARC charter, India has supported various sub-regional initiatives within SAARC. In addition, through similar other initiatives, New Delhi continues to provide new impetus for regionalism. Given the growing geo-strategic relevance of the eastern neighbourhood to its foreign policy trajectory, India will continue to focus on this area. India would have also expanded its interests on its western side if the political conditions were conducive. Without any breakthrough between India and its western neighbour, SAARC will, unfortunately, continue to underperform.

 

About the Author

Sreeradha Datta

Sreeradha Datta teaches International Affairs at OP Jindal Global University and is a Non-Resident Senior Fellow at the Institute of South Asian Studies, National University of Singapore. Previously, she was Senior Fellow at the Vivekananda International Foundation, heading the Neighbourhood Studies Centre. She has a Ph.D. from Jawaharlal Nehru University. She has been Director, Maulana Abul Kalam Azad Institute of Asian Studies, Kolkata and has held fellowships with the Manohar Parrikar Institute for Defence Studies and Analyses, among other institutions. Her recent works include Act East Policy and Northeast India, an edited volume titled BIMSTEC: The Journey and Way Ahead, and co-edited volume titled Bangladesh at 50: Development and Challenges. Her research interests include India’s foreign policy, regionalism and cross-border issues. Amongst other distinctions, she has been the recipient of international fellowships including at the German Institute of Global Affairs, Distinguished Indian Scholar Series at the University of Taiwan, and International Leadership Visitors Programme at the United States.

The post BIMSTEC at 25: Fostering Sustainable Regional Cooperation first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/bimstec-at-25-fostering-sustainable-regional-cooperation/feed/ 0 898079
Projecting Critical Mineral Needs for India’s Renewable Electricity Transition http://stg.csep.org/blog/projecting-critical-mineral-needs-for-indias-renewable-electricity-transition/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=projecting-critical-mineral-needs-for-indias-renewable-electricity-transition http://stg.csep.org/blog/projecting-critical-mineral-needs-for-indias-renewable-electricity-transition/#respond Thu, 17 Aug 2023 08:35:52 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=898047 For critical minerals, especially those with no known domestic resources, mineral-wise strategies are required to ensure their robust access for India’s manufacturing needs and climate change mitigation ambitions.

The post Projecting Critical Mineral Needs for India’s Renewable Electricity Transition first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Backdrop

India has made significant commitments to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and reach net zero by 2070. This clean energy transition is essential for climate change mitigation efforts, the country’s energy security, and environmental preservation. At the 26th Conference of Parties held in Glasgow, India presented five elements of its climate action strategy: installing a cumulative 500 GW non-fossil energy capacity by 2030; generating 50% of its energy requirements from renewable sources by 2030; reducing projected carbon emissions by one billion tonnes by 2030; reducing the carbon intensity of the economy by 45% by 2030, over 2005 levels; and achieving the target of net zero emissions by 2070.[1]

Several roadblocks to achieving these targets—as well as those for the net-zero goal—include accessing adequate investments, solving technical and operational challenges, and creating a just transition framework. Another imminent concern is ensuring resilient access to the requisite green technologies and raw materials necessary to manufacture them.

A World Bank report[2] highlights the mineral needs for various clean energy technologies and provides the global mineral demand projections until 2050. It states that “a low-carbon future will be very mineral intensive because clean energy technologies need more materials than fossil-fuel-based electricity generation technologies.” The report delineates the relative demand risks of cross-cutting minerals and concentrated minerals. Copper, chromium, and molybdenum are cross-cutting minerals used across various clean energy generation and storage technologies. These minerals face stable demand conditions. However, minerals like lithium, silicon, cobalt and manganese are concentrated only on one or two specific technologies and face higher demand uncertainty arising from future technological disruptions.

A 2021 IEA report[3] highlights that “the data shows a looming mismatch between the world’s strengthened climate ambitions and the availability of critical minerals that are essential to realising these ambitions.” The report adds that “while there is no shortage of resources worldwide, today’s supply and investment plans for many critical minerals fall well short of what is needed to support the accelerated deployment of solar panels, wind turbines, and electric vehicles.” Critical minerals, both primary and processed, are essential inputs in the production process of an economy whose supplies are likely to be affected due to the risks of non-availability or unaffordable price spikes.[4] Without access to these essential minerals, India’s, and the rest of the world’s, clean energy transition plans may face severe setbacks.

To understand the magnitude of the potential shortage of raw materials needed for India’s clean energy transition, the Centre for Social and Economic Progress (CSEP) is working on a paper that estimates the quantities of various critical minerals required to manufacture solar panels, wind turbines, battery energy storage systems, and grid infrastructure, in line with different energy transition scenarios to meet the net-zero emissions target. This paper extends CSEP’s earlier work[5] on projecting India’s mineral needs for green technologies. A new edition of Assessing the Criticality of Minerals for India, a precursor to this revised work on projections, was published in April 2023, which extended the earlier assessment of 23 minerals for India to 43, based on their economic importance and supply risks. It highlighted the minerals that were found to be the most critical for India’s economy.

In this blog write-up, we present our methodology and some of the preliminary findings on projecting the critical mineral needs for India’s clean energy transition.

Methodology

The steps followed to compute the critical mineral requirements for India’s green electricity transition are given in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Methodology for Projecting Critical Mineral Needs

For the electricity capacity scenarios, we rely on NITI Aayog’s India Energy Security Scenarios, 2047 (IESS), an open-source Excel-based tool that provides several energy policy scenarios and assesses the supply and demand of energy in the country till 2047.[6] Our study focuses on the renewable electricity capacity and required battery energy storage systems and grid infrastructure to facilitate the operation of the same.[7] We compute the annual addition in power capacity based on the scenario, accounting for the replacement of older decommissioned plants. We then examine the various technology options for each source and devise scenarios on technology trends based on available literature. Finally, the mineral intensities for each technology option for each electricity source are used to compute the mineral requirements. We also show how recycling reduces the need for virgin ores and metals, which may narrow the impending supply gap, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions.

We provide two or more alternate scenarios for each step in our methodology, each of which have an impact on the critical mineral requirements. The results indicate the total embedded mineral requirements in the respective sources, which may be produced in India or imported for processing, or embedded within the components for domestic assembly. The paper seeks to estimate the extent to which the technology supply chain will be indigenised over the next two decades, which would then provide estimates of the quantities of raw materials required.

Nevertheless, these preliminary findings indicate the magnitude of the critical minerals’ supply challenge ahead.

India’s Energy Transition Scenarios

India’s electricity generation mix has steadily shifted from fossil fuels to renewable sources.[8] Between 2019 and 2023, the capacity share of renewable energy sources (RES) increased from 22% to 30%, while the electricity generation share climbed from 9% to 13%.[9] However, while the shares of fossil fuels[10] in capacity and generation have dropped (to 57% and 73%, respectively), both have increased in absolute terms (Figure 2). India still relies on fossil fuels for its energy needs, with continued growth expected in coal power capacity till a likely peak between 2030 and 2035.[11] The remaining installed capacity comprises nuclear and large hydro sources, with respective shares of 2% and 11% in 2023.

Figure 2: Installed Capacity by Source

IESS provides users with four predefined scenarios and a fifth pathway for the net-zero transition. We use all five for our projections scenarios. The solar PV (including distributed solar PV) and wind (onshore and offshore combined) installed capacity scenarios are shown in Figures 3 and 4. Based on IESS, the installed solar and wind capacities in 2030 will likely be between 158-314 GW and 74-137 GW, depending on the chosen scenario. In the heroic effort scenario, around 49 GW would be needed from other non-fossil sources (such as small hydro and biomass) to reach the 500 GW target.

Figure 3: Solar PV Capacity Scenarios

Figure 4: Wind Capacity Scenarios

Mineral Projection Scenarios

Various scenarios have been considered to project India’s critical mineral needs for its clean electricity transition, such as for electricity capacity, lifespans of power stations, recycling rates, and future technology changes. The paper elaborates on the chosen scenarios and the rationale behind their selection.

Results

The following are excerpts from our preliminary results on the mineral requirements for solar panels, wind turbines, and battery energy storage systems. The mineral requirements are given in tonnes of metal for the five-year periods: from 2022-23 to 2026-27, up to 2042-43, and then to 2046-2047. The scenarios chosen are the net-zero emissions for electricity capacity and a base case for the rest. The demand projections for only select minerals are shown here, while the working paper will cover the various critical minerals required for the manufacture of clean energy technologies. The paper will also dive deeper into the results for select critical minerals and will include information on the mine production in order to contextualise the predicted mineral shortage. As many of these minerals are not found in India, there is an import dependence on them, in either their raw or processed forms. The pace of renewables capacity addition increases until the 2037-38–2041-42 period, reflecting the peak in mineral demand.

For solar panels, the demand for silicon and gallium is set to increase by 1.8 times in five years and 2.9 times in 15 years, compared to today’s requirements. In the base case for solar technologies, crystalline silicon (c-Si) cell solar panels remain dominant, so no major changes in the types of minerals are required. For wind turbines, zinc requirements are expected to rise 1.9 times in five years and 3.4 times in 15 years, over today’s levels, compared to the 2.8 and 5.4 times increase for neodymium (a rare earth element). The demand for minerals for the battery energy storage systems is set to pick up after 2027-28. Lithium and cobalt requirements would pick up 3.5 times within five years, and in 15 years, the increase would be 5.2 times higher than the 2027-28 levels.

Figure 5: Lithium Demand for BESS

Criticality Assessment

A critical minerals assessment quantifies the risks in the supply of minerals and their relative importance to the economy to identify the ones most vital to a country’s needs. This assessment typically underpins a multipronged strategy on securing resilient access to critical minerals. The most recent evaluation for India was undertaken by CSEP[12], and was one of the inputs to the Ministry of Mines report on the Identification of Critical Minerals[13]. Some mineral projections are shown in Table 1. The status of mineral production mentions if mining currently takes place in India, or if any resources/reserves[14] are available. The results of the CSEP criticality assessment (in terms of whether the mineral was found to have high economic importance, high supply risks, or both, that is, critical), and the Ministry of Mines report are also presented.

Table 1 Criticality and Projections of Minerals

Note: * indicates that the ratio is based on the requirements in 2037-38–2041-42 compared to 2027-28–2031-32.

The demand for critical minerals in the clean energy transition will rise manifold over the coming decades. Most of these minerals have been identified as critical by the CSEP and Ministry of Mines reports. For these minerals, especially those with no known domestic resources­­­­­­­­­­, mineral-wise strategies are required to ensure their robust access for India’s manufacturing needs and climate change mitigation ambitions.

The post Projecting Critical Mineral Needs for India’s Renewable Electricity Transition first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/projecting-critical-mineral-needs-for-indias-renewable-electricity-transition/feed/ 0 898047
Nepali Migrant Workers in India: A Rite of Passage to Adulthood http://stg.csep.org/blog/nepali-migrant-workers-in-india-a-rite-of-passage-to-adulthood/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=nepali-migrant-workers-in-india-a-rite-of-passage-to-adulthood http://stg.csep.org/blog/nepali-migrant-workers-in-india-a-rite-of-passage-to-adulthood/#respond Fri, 21 Jul 2023 11:02:40 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=897944 While Nepal has experienced significant political and social transformations, the economic conditions and precarity that force Nepali men to migrate in the first place have not changed.

The post Nepali Migrant Workers in India: A Rite of Passage to Adulthood first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Mahesh Kushwaha interviews Jeevan R. Sharma, Senior Lecturer in South Asia and International Development at the Department of Social Anthropology and Co-Director, Centre for South Asian Studies, University of Edinburgh, on his book, Crossing the Border to India: Youth, Migration, and Masculinities in Nepal, published by Temple University Press in 2018.

Nepal shares a long and open border with India. Though the 1950 Peace and Friendship Treaty between India and Nepal laid the foundation for the “unrestricted” cross-border movement of goods and people, the history of migration from Nepal to India predates the treaty. During the 18th century, Nepali workers migrated to India to work in tea plantations, on construction sites, and as porters in the colonial period. Most studies on the India–Nepal border and cross-border migration focus primarily on the economic aspects of the phenomenon, portraying the migration of Nepali workers to big Indian cities such as New Delhi, Mumbai, and Kolkata merely as a means to support their families back home.

Sharma’s book offers a more nuanced analysis of this migration, which he sees as “young men’s strategic responses to livelihood insecurities…shaped not just by wage differentiation and economic calculation but also by a complex set of gendered sociocultural considerations, particularly relating to ideas of modernity and masculinity” (p. 81). In other words, young men in the hills often see migrating to India as “a rite of passage to adulthood” (p. 87). It is a process that generates income for their families and elevates their masculinity and social status. Nevertheless, the process, which includes crossing the border, finding jobs, and adjusting to harsh living conditions in India, disciplines them into docile workers and often exposes them to different risks. This leads them to renegotiate their understanding of masculinity and engage in the consumption of modern goods, images, as well as substances and other risky behaviours.

Crossing the Border to India is the product of an ethnographic study conducted between 2004 and 2013, of migrant workers from Palpa, a hill district in Nepal’s mid-west. It has six chapters, where each chapter discusses a crucial element of the entire phenomenon of migration: the political economy of rural livelihoods, the history and culture of migration, factors shaping the decision to leave the hills, the process of crossing the border, the experiences of Nepali migrant workers in Indian cities, and their risky behaviours. At a point when cross-border connectivity and regional integration are picking pace, Sharma’s book provides a crucial perspective on the gendered notion of migration and invites further research on how it might change with new developments.

Mahesh Kushwaha (MK): The book is a fantastic account of the experiences of young Nepali men who migrate to Indian cities, both for economic reasons, and, if I may say so, in a quest for manhood. The fieldwork for the book, however, was undertaken almost a decade ago and in a different socio-political environment. How have trends and practices of cross-border migration changed over the last decade owing to recent socio-political transformations in Nepal? 

Jeevan R. Sharma (JS): I believe that despite recent social and political transformations in Nepal in the last decade and a half, the migration of Nepali men to India has continued and will continue in the future. There is a well-established culture of migrating for work in Nepal. While Nepal has experienced significant political and social transformations, the economic conditions and precarity that force Nepali men to migrate in the first place have not changed. Nepal’s political transformation has not meant much financial security or social and economic protection for the poor. I would go as far as to suggest that Nepal’s UN-supported peace process, the new constitution, and the restructuring of the state have failed to address fundamental questions pertaining to livelihoods, economic inequality, and security. This is, unfortunately, a paradoxical reality—Nepali men continue to migrate to work under precarious conditions in India and other overseas destinations in response to persisting uncertainties in their villages.

While Nepal has experienced significant political and social transformations, the economic conditions and precarity that force Nepali men to migrate in the first place have not changed.

I have continued with my fieldwork in the hills of Nepal and Indian cities, and I do not see any change in migration trends. If you look at the far-western, mid-western, and western hills in Nepal (the regions I am familiar with), migration to India remains a key project for households to secure their livelihoods. You can get a sense of this when you spend a few days in border towns like Sunauli/Bhairahawa, Nepalgunj, Mahendranagar, or Dhangadi on the Nepal side.

There are two key drivers that are likely to change the course of migration to India: first, the impact of new technologies on the future of work, i.e., the use of digital platforms is likely to shape the nature and availability of work for Nepali migrants, especially in the care sector, such as in domestic work, as security guards, or even in hotels and restaurants. The second is the impact of climate change, i.e., how changing weather conditions in Nepal will shape out-migration dynamics from the hills and the extreme heat in Indian cities will affect inbound migrant workers.

MK: A recurring theme in the book is Nepali migrants’ liminal status in India, where “they are treated neither as foreigners nor as citizens” (p. 119). This ambiguous political position exposes them to several vulnerabilities and limits them from accessing most official channels of protection. Given the long history of cross-border migration and strong bilateral ties, why do you think this issue persists, and how can it be addressed by the governments of the two countries?

JS: You are right. The liminal status of Nepali migrants speaks both to the political-economic inequality between Nepal and India as well as the discrimination faced by Nepali migrant workers due to the intersections of class and race. Having researched domestic low-income migrants in India, I must stress that many of the challenges faced by Nepali migrants are not unique to them; India’s domestic low-income migrants also face similar challenges. Some of this, particularly racial discrimination, is also shared by people from North-east India regardless of their class status, while others, particularly class-based discrimination, are also shared by other low-income internal migrants in India. Nepali migrant workers continue to struggle to find basic citizenship rights in India, which directly impacts their living and working conditions, their sense of dignity and justice, and their health and well-being.

Many of the challenges faced by Nepali migrants are not unique to them; India’s domestic low-income migrants also face similar challenges.

MK: In your book, you mention that migrants are often subject to “interrogation, extortion, frisking, ill-treatment, and humiliation” on both sides of the border (p. 101). You also discuss the centrality of “social networks” for Nepali migrants in India. Based on your observation, both while crossing the border and attending social gatherings in Mumbai during fieldwork, what roles do ethnicity, language, and the appearance of Nepali migrants play in their overall experiences?

JS: At the outset, I must make it clear that I have primarily worked with Nepali hill migrants who come from different caste and ethnic backgrounds and are poor. Discrimination and ill-treatment emanate from race and class. As soon as they cross the border, the border effect kicks off, and Nepali men get transformed into migrant workers (commonly referred to as bahadur, kancha (or kanchi), or gorkha). These identity markers are essential for their own social networks and solidarity, particularly while working and living in adverse conditions in Indian cities. While I would not go as far as to suggest that caste and ethnicity are not important among Nepali migrants, Nepali men from different castes and ethnicities do build ‘Nepali’ solidarities while living and working in Mumbai or Jalandhar.

MK: Despite “several conflicts and disputes between the two countries”, you highlight, “the border is not securitized like other borders…in South Asia” (p. 104). The 2015 border blockade caused by Madhesi protestors increased calls for revising the 1950 Peace and Friendship Treaty. Further, in recent times, there have been boundary rows between India and Nepal. Against this background, what are your thoughts on the future of the India­­–Nepal border? What impact would these developments have on cross-border migration?

JS: First, the Nepal-India border is unique. However, it is not necessarily an open border, particularly when you view it from the vantage point of poor migrants from Nepal (or in the other direction, for Indian migrant workers in Nepal).

I expect that both Nepal and India will work to ensure that the Nepal–India border remains open but will likely increase surveillance.

Second, the Nepal–India border has been securitised over the years. Any further regulation of the border would have a negative impact on Nepali migrants. During the COVID-19 pandemic–related lockdown, we saw the humanitarian crisis brewing at the border. I expect that both Nepal and India will work to ensure that the Nepal–India border remains open but will likely increase surveillance. Unfortunately, it is the poor migrants who will bear the brunt of any further surveillance and securitisation of the border—be it pandemic-related (HIV/AIDS, COVID-19, or any other future outbreak) or suspicions of smuggling or security threats.

MK: India has been pursuing several infrastructure connectivity projects and focusing on regional integration. Nepal is also looking to expand its railways and highways and connect them with Indian cities. What changes will these new developments bring to cross-border migration practices?

JS: The migration of Nepali men to different parts of India has a long history. Nepali migrants began to migrate in large numbers for work in Indian cities to mainly serve the Indian middle class as domestic workers, helpers, and security guards or as workers in hotels and restaurants. This addresses the demand for domestic work in Indian middle-class households where there is a need to cook, clean, mop floors, buy vegetables and groceries, take kids to school, wash cars, attend lifts in apartments, buy vegetables, wash dishes, deliver food, etc. As long as this type of work is available, there will be demand for Nepali migrant workers in Indian cities.

Infrastructure projects such as railways and roads are unlikely to alter migration patterns from Nepal significantly. However, these projects will certainly make it easier for migrant workers and their families to travel to India. The flow of Nepali migrants to India is shaped by familial and kinship networks. I believe that the availability of decent work, improved working and living conditions, greater citizenship rights such as safety and security, and improved ease of making remittances will make India an attractive destination.

Much will depend on the quality of work and decent working conditions in the Indian job market.

About the Author:

Jeevan R. Sharma is Senior Lecturer (Associate Professor) in South Asia and International Development at the Department of Social Anthropology and Co-Director of the Centre for South Asian Studies at the University of Edinburgh. He is Co-Editor of Himalaya and an Associate Editor of South Asia: Journal of South Asian Studies. He is the General Secretary of Britain Nepal Academic Council. Sharma is the author of Political Economy of Social Change and Development in Nepal (2021) and Crossing the Border to India: Youth, Migration and Masculinities in Nepal (2018).

The post Nepali Migrant Workers in India: A Rite of Passage to Adulthood first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/nepali-migrant-workers-in-india-a-rite-of-passage-to-adulthood/feed/ 0 897944
Cross-Cultural Connections Across South Asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/cross-cultural-connections-across-south-asia/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=cross-cultural-connections-across-south-asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/cross-cultural-connections-across-south-asia/#respond Thu, 08 Jun 2023 10:50:30 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=897728 Anindita Sinh interviews Lopamudra Maitra Bajpai, on her book, "India, Sri Lanka and the SAARC Region: History, Popular Culture and Heritage" and the unorthodox approach to interpreting culture and connectivity in South Asia.

The post Cross-Cultural Connections Across South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Anindita Sinh interviews Lopamudra Maitra Bajpai, on her book, India, Sri Lanka and the SAARC Region: History, Popular Culture and Heritage, published by Routledge in 2021.

In recent years, India’s foreign policy has prioritised establishing religious and cultural connections beyond its borders. Referring to the importance of cultural diplomacy initiatives, India’s External Affairs Minister, S. Jaishankar, emphasised the importance of soft power as being “beyond economics, beyond politics, and beyond [the] orthodox conventional parameters of strength and influence…We have seen in history, that very powerful countries, who have failed [on] the soft power front, and [have], therefore, met political reverses.”

In the book, Bajpai adopts an unorthodox approach to interpreting culture and connectivity in South Asia. Her 25 essays include accounts of historical ties kept alive through ‘soft’ connections such as oral traditions of storytelling, rituals, and symbols of popular culture, as well as ‘hard’ infrastructure connections such as railways, electricity poles, and architectural influences.

Bajpai provides multiple examples, such as the cowrie shells harvested in the Maldives, which became an essential cultural symbol and an “important part of economic history” (p. 19) in the region. They served as a major currency in West Africa, Bengal, Odisha, and later, Ceylon (present-day Sri Lanka). Narrative scroll paintings are another such example, having long served as a “medium of communication” (p. 94), connecting not only parts of India but also the larger regions of South and Southeast Asia. Such strands of historical connection depict not only the interdependence of the South Asian region but are also evidence of a common cultural and aesthetic space. Awareness about civilisational linkages, such as the ones highlighted in this book, help create cultural kinship and, in turn, serve as potential avenues for the promotion of cultural diplomacy to further political and strategic interests.

This book is based on the author’s experiences and ethnographic research during her deputation as Cultural Specialist (Research) at the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) Cultural Centre in Colombo, Sri Lanka. Relying on a visual anthropological account of non-traditional approaches, this book is a unique contribution to the literature on connectivity in South Asia. While primarily focusing on cultural flows between India and Sri Lanka, it also extends its scope to the region at large. It articulates and encapsulates aspects of “intangible cultural heritage” (p. 31) that have dominated this historically and socially complex region.

Anindita Sinh: You have discussed the importance of traditions such as kantha embroidery, woven dry grass mats, and masked dances across the South Asian region. How do you think awareness of these strands of connection can bring the region closer in present times and overcome the security-focused approaches that have come to dominate mainstream discussions on the region? 

Lopamudra Maitra Bajpai: I think, along with security, there has also been a considerable increase in activities and discussions centred around various aspects of popular as well as folk culture over the past few years in the region. There are books, films, music shows, dance programmes, and other such myriad representations, which also speak about the socio-cultural ethos of the region. These have also witnessed a growing participation among people from various parts of the region. Academic conferences, seminars, discussions, and talks also often contribute towards this as well.

An important conduit, in recent years, has been popular culture and, of course, social media. Let me remind you of a few examples from the very recent past, e.g., the Sri Lankan song, Manike Mage Hithe (by Yohani, Chamath Sangeeth, and Satheeshan in 2020) became such an instant hit across the entire Indian subcontinent that everyone, starting from film stars to college students, was not only grooving to the tune, but they were also creating their own dance steps. The song was re-sung by various artists across many regions in India and in different local languages, including Hindi, Bengali, and others. In 2022, the song was also featured in a Hindi film. Let me also mention a recent Hindi song, ‘Mera Dil Yeh Pukare Aaja’, from the 1954 film, Nagin. The song has become quite a rage in recent times, especially over social media. An interesting story traces the beginning of this popularity. A remixed version of the song was played sometime in December 2022 at a wedding in Pakistan. Someone at the wedding recorded the performance and uploaded it on social media. Subsequently, both the song and the dance steps became a rage among various age groups across South Asia.

Let me mention another example from popular culture—the film, Lunana: A Yak in the Classroom from Bhutan, was nominated for an Oscar in the Best International Feature category in 2022. The film traces the year-long transformative journey of a young Bhutanese teacher, Ugyen Dorji, who is played by the actor, Sherab Dorji. The film featured for months together in the ‘most watched’ list on popular OTT platforms and received accolades from many critics across both South Asia and other parts of the world. And last but not the least, there’s the Sri Lankan book, The Seven Moons of Maali Almeida by Shehan Karunatilakes, which won The Booker recently (2022). This has seen Karunarilakes being invited to literature festivals in India, Nepal, and Bangladesh, amongst others (throughout January–February 2023), speaking about the voice of Asian literature to a global audience.

These examples, along with many others like them, prove time and again that culture connects, in spite of political differences. What is also interesting to note is how deeply embedded each of these cultural channels are in the region from where they emerge. It is through these cultural bodies that the intangible cultural heritage of a region gets represented and gets, very sublimely, accepted in a very different cultural surrounding. Thus, these symbolisms are also part of an acculturation process. So, we have Bangladeshi kantha or sital pati mats being popular across the entire region of South Asia, while everyone knows and adores Sri Lankan sarees. Similarly, many things can be pointed out, including the onyx marble products and the leather and silver jewellery from Pakistan; the sarees, folk art productions, and various items made from seashells, beads, and different types of jewelleries, amidst the many other items from across India; the thangka paintings from Nepal and Bhutan; and many more. The list is almost unending. I believe, these are the connecting dots, which, through time, have been and will continue to further dialogue across the region, much beyond security-related queries and activities. This is an ongoing process and the basic significance of soft power. Its growing popularity and recognition in political discussions and approaches in the region also points to the same.

These are the connecting dots, which, through time, have been and will continue to further dialogue across the region, much beyond security-related queries and activities.

AS: Multinational submissions to UNESCO’s list of Intangible Cultural Heritage (ICH) are often given priority as they help promote awareness, pluralism, and cultural sensitivity. Miniature art shared between Azerbaijan, Iran, Turkey, and Uzbekistan is one such example. Given historical connections and cultural flows, do you see possible avenues for the same occurring between countries in South Asia? Would this promote institutional engagement as well as people-to-people contact in the region? 

LMB: There already is. Let me elaborate. In the list of ICH elements on the UNESCO list from India, there are already examples, which are shared with not only the greater region of South and Southeast Asia, but also, if we take diasporas into consideration, the world. The list of UNESCO’s ICH elements from India includes Buddhist and Vedic chanting; the Kalbelia, Chhau, and Koodiyattam dance forms; and festivals such as the Kumbh Mela, Ramman, Durga Puja, and Nowruz. Folk theatre and dance rituals such as Mudiyett, Ramlila, and Sankirtana are also part of UNESCO’s ICH as is the tradition of Yoga and the craft of brass and copper utensil-making. Amongst these, India shares the Nowroz festival with the exact same region as you mention in your question.

An important example is also Yoga, which is not limited by socio-cultural boundaries—the entire world participates not only on the International Day of Yoga, but otherwise as well. This has also led to the establishment of Yoga centres in all countries. There is growing awareness of the importance of maintaining a healthy body and mind, and this has immensely contributed to the popularity of Yoga.

There are many other elements of ICH in the official list from India, which are not merely shared by India alone, but also by the larger communities across diasporas. Durga Puja, which is not only a part of West Bengal in India, but is also greatly observed across Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Nepal, and other places across South and Southeast Asia. The Ramlila, Vedic and Buddhist chanting also share a similar ethos across many regions in South and Southeast Asia. Finally, I should add that they not only promote people-to-people contact, but institutional engagement as well, which can be seen in the various activities organised by governmental and non-governmental initiatives across the region. These engagements are vital for creating an understanding through official desks as they receive an important platform of expression.

AS: India’s soft power strategy has been linked with China’s growing presence in the region, including its cultural outreach. For example, China Radio International airs programmes in multiple regional languages such as Sinhala, Nepali, and Bengali. China also promotes cultural affinity through education and Buddhist linkages. Given this context, how do you think India can balance the cultural sensitivities of its neighbouring countries while simultaneously leveraging its soft power and historical linkages to improve relations in its neighbourhood? 

LMB: I think that India has already been doing this through the ages, and in fact, it is so prominent over the course of history that there is no need to assess it through any other lens — at least I believe this. Historically, India has been sharing various socio-cultural and religious aspects with not only South and Southeast Asia but across the regions of Asia, Europe, and Africa, especially through trading routes.

Historically, India has been sharing various socio-cultural and religious aspects with not only South and Southeast Asia but across the regions of Asia, Europe, and Africa, especially through trading routes.

These connections are well-known, as many of these continue to the present day. There have been many connections established over the course of history that still reverberate throughout the region. These include the sharing of Rabindranath Tagore’s music across the region, connections forged through the religious trails of Buddhism, or areas that are marked as the worshipping centres of Devi Shakti, among others. Various culinary delights, food items, spices, clothing, and other handloom products have traditionally connected the region. Similarly, one can never forget the formidable tagline— ‘Awaaz ke duniya ke doston’—by the very popular Ameen Sayani of Radio Ceylon and Cibaca (formerly Binaca) Geetmala, which was broadcast since 1952, mainly over Radio Ceylon and later over Vividh Bharti (AIR) for a total of 42 years. Similarly, there are numerous interesting examples. A lot of activities often take place, at present, as part of initiatives by governmental and non-governmental organisations centred around these elements. I think these all help in connecting the dots and keeping an ethos alive one that is not merely limited to any geographical area but spans the whole region.

ASHow was your experience in Colombo as a SAARC Cultural Specialist?

LMB: The experience at the SAARC Cultural Centre was educational as I got to interact with ambassadors, authors, academics, lawyers, poets, painters, dancers, and many other professionals from across all the eight SAARC member states. All the interactions were educational at various levels, and some of them also helped to foster friendships that continue till today. Many remain good friends and colleagues, and this has also helped me in my writing and research work over the last several years. There is something to learn from this, as I feel that education, arts, and seminars and discussions, among others, are good platforms to inculcate a sense of cooperation and understanding and also help to bring along a much-desired sense of friendship.

Education, arts, and seminars and discussions, among others, are good platforms to inculcate a sense of cooperation and understanding and also help to bring along a much-desired sense of friendshipkan. 

AS: What prompted you to write this collection of essays?

LMB: I have been working as an anthropologist even before I got deputed to the SAARC office, and one of my areas of focus is various narratives of heritage and popular culture. Apart from my work as an academic, I have also been a journalist at The Indian Express, and I still continue to write columns for international news websites like Newsin.Asia (which is based out of Colombo, Sri Lanka) and South Asia Monitor (which is based out of Delhi, India). I have always felt that the work of an academic is always very limited, as most function within the narrow confines of their disciplines. I had always wanted to share some of the vital knowledge from academia with the masses, and, thus, I have always strived to write on history, heritage, intangible cultural heritage (ICH), anthropology, and archaeology in various dailies and weeklies.

At present, my columns also follow the same pattern, and I explore these topics in the context of South Asia. Thus, while working at SAARC and receiving a research grant fellowship from the Indian High Commission in Sri Lanka, I felt that some of the areas of my work should be shared with a wider audience. I began to write about the history and heritage of Sri Lanka, especially in various Sri Lankan newspapers since 2017. Gradually, the areas of research expanded to include the larger area of South Asia. Thus, my section of columns grew in number, and over the years, I also began receiving notes and letters from various readers from across the world. Over time, these articles and the rising demand from my readers encouraged me to put all my work into a book and thus, this book was conceptualised. All the chapters are based on ethnographic and archaeological work and are supported by very valuable library work across many countries. This has all been a wonderful learning experience.

 

About the author:

Lopamudra Maitra Bajpai is an anthropologist, author, and international columnist. Her interests include history, popular culture and communication, and the intangible cultural heritage (ICH) of India and South Asia (especially oral traditions and narratives). She is a Senior Researcher at the Centre for Studies in Legal History at the National University of Juridical Sciences (NUJS) in Kolkata, West Bengal.

She has authored four books, and two more are expected to be released soon. These include Complete Translated Works of Upendrakishore Roy Chowdhury’s Tuntunir Boi and Golpomala (2024, Aleph Book Company [Rupa Publications Ltd]); Retelling of Indian Mythologies (2023, Aleph Book Company [Rupa Publications Ltd]); Folk Festivals and Beliefs of Radh Bengal: Understanding Through Ethnoarchaeology (2022, Indira Gandhi Rashtriya Manav Sangrahalaya (IGRMS) and Kaveri Books); India, Sri Lanka and the SAARC Region: History, Popular Culture and Heritage (2021, Routledge); The Owl Delivered the Good News All Night Long: Folktales, Legends and Modern Lore of India (2021, Aleph Book Company [Rupa Publications Ltd [ed.]]); and Stories of the Colonial Architecture: Kolkata–Colombo (2019, Doshor Publications).

The post Cross-Cultural Connections Across South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/cross-cultural-connections-across-south-asia/feed/ 0 897728
More of the same? India’s Strategic Balance http://stg.csep.org/blog/more-of-the-same-indias-strategic-balance/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=more-of-the-same-indias-strategic-balance http://stg.csep.org/blog/more-of-the-same-indias-strategic-balance/#respond Wed, 24 May 2023 09:49:57 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=897641 In this episode of the Hopkins Podcast on Foreign Affairs, Constantino Xavier discusses India’s foreign policy and its relationship with Russia.

The post More of the same? India’s Strategic Balance first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Nicole Rivas and Alexis Holewinski: So I want to begin the conversation with a broad view of India’s relevance in foreign policy discussions. So, what makes India a geopolitically important country today? Or why should we pay attention to India and what India is doing?

Constantino Xavier: I think there are two or three factors. Maybe the main reason is one that was in the news recently, which is India now is the most populous country in the world. So just by demography, this country weighs more than any other. It is a country that is growing in so many, different ways. It is a country where people want to have a greater say in world politics. It is a country that is increasingly entangled with regional and global affairs whether it’s on technology, health, migration and the huge Indian diaspora of around 20 million people around the world.

[Second] India’s location in Asia, which is now the world’s geoeconomic hub. The global economic focus is clearly shifting eastwards. If you look at the gravitational pull forces of the economy worldwide, this is where economies are growing, including new consumer markets, where countries are going through multiple [economic] revolutions. In India, that is still, in some ways, the manufacturing and industrial revolution. It’s also one in technology with India’s advanced digital payment services which, in many cases, are far more advanced than what consumers have in Europe or the United States.

[So] if you consider demography, the economy, and geography, you have three factors that explain why every decision-maker around the world, why every researcher around the world, but also why every citizen around the world should be looking more at India and realizing that its rise is irreversible. Whatever happens in this country will lead India to increasingly matter more in global affairs.

Whatever happens in this country will lead India to increasingly matter more in global affairs.

NR: We were also hoping to take a brief step back and understand how India got to this position that you’ve described. Soon after its independence in the late 1940s, India’s foreign policy became associated with the so-called non alignment movement. So could you explain what that history means for their foreign policy today, as well as what some of the guiding principles of India’s foreign policy are currently?

CX: Glad you asked that question because I think it is impossible to understand India’s possible future trajectories without understanding its past experiences, its past location, geography and history. And non-alignment is a big word, generally one of the first concepts that pop up when we think about Indian foreign policy. But let me unpack that a little bit.

I think factor number one is that India was colonized for over 400 years, from 1498, when the Portuguese showed up on India’s western shores, up to 1947, when Britain left back a variety of different polities in this region, including the Indian republic. So I think that is a factor that is structural, because that’s something that still weighs on the mindset of several policymakers, on the mindset of most Indian citizens, that this is a country that somehow used to be one of the central economies, one of the places for scientific and technological innovation, that attracted empires from around the worlds. And that was lost during the colonial period. And if you look at the percentage of GDP that was generated here in India between the 15th century and today, it’s a story of a declining trajectory, of [loss of] economic centrality that is being slowly restored.

So that explains why many Indians will tell you that they suffered under that period that was actually particularly beneficial towards the empires in Europe. And a narrative that now somehow the time for India has come as part of a larger time for Asia. That leads sometimes to a positive story of ‘we want to be independent.’ It also leads sometimes to negative stories of not wanting to be dependent on, or aligned with the West and, instead that ‘this is a time for payback.’ Or narratives such as ‘why are you telling us that we need to make decisions with the developed industrialized West on climate transition, after hundreds of years of unequal burden?’.

Non-alignment remains a conceptual code, a symbol for India to avoid alliances, strict treaties and relations where it has to somehow pre-determine and condition its future behavior.

But non-alignment remains a conceptual code, a symbol for India to avoid alliances, strict treaties and relations where it has to somehow pre-determine and condition its future behavior. India wants flexibility, India wants autonomy. Strategic autonomy is sometimes used to explain Indian non-alignment. But if you look at countries like Japan, Australia, who have formally allied with the US during the Cold War, if you look at other countries in the socialist camp that formally allied to the Soviet Union, India  doesn’t look at the world in that way. It wants to have maximum flexibility. It wants to be indispensable. It wants to be useful to all countries.

So the key is really how to achieve that balance, and that is not easy – when you are friend with everybody sometimes when you really need support there is no single, real and reliable friend. But that’s a different story, widely debated in India. But non-alignment means, in many ways, also multiple alignments. It’s today an India that is comfortable working with Russia. It’s an India that is also comfortable in deepening its convergence on technology, security, intelligence sharing, trade and other economic issues with the United States and the European Union at the same time. So rather than non-alignment, one might prefer the concept of multiple alignments, flexible alignments that India has pursued consistently since the 1950s through diversifying its partnerships. It’s an India that is comfortable with Australia as much as it is with Russia. And there are not too many other major powers in the world that can do this or are comfortable with this balance between opposing poles.

NR: I wanted to turn our conversation to India’s relationship with Russia. Before the Russian invasion of Ukraine, what had been the state of Russia-India relations and why has Russia been so important to Indian foreign policy?

India is keen to have a more multipolar world, one where there are different centers of economic and military power, one where there’s a distribution of capabilities, one that is not solely dependent on the United States

CX: Yes, the question about Russia is a tough one. Because it’s really not understood by many people, especially in the West, why Russia, as you rightly pointed out, remains so important for India. And I think the best way to explain it is maybe a combination of two or three factors. One is a very large geostrategic factor, which is, again, related to that issue of balance I mentioned before. India is keen to have a more multipolar world, one where there are different centers of economic and military power, one where there’s a distribution of capabilities, one that is not solely dependent on the United States, for example, as during much of the 1990s and 2000s, where we had the US as a sole superpower.

It’s also an India that is not comfortable with a bipolar structure with the US and China. India has a very difficult relationship with China. It’s the number one strategic concern based on a territorial dispute between both militaries that flared up again recently in 2020, with several casualties on both sides. So there is an active competition with almost strategic rivalry elements between China and India. So India has an interest in diversifying away from both a US-centric system and the US-China bipolar system.

And that’s where Russia matters, as a third or fourth pole. That’s also, by the way, why Europe and the European Union or France, Germany or the UK matter so much for India these days. That’s why India has also deepened its relations with Japan. That has flourished over the last 10 years. India and Japan today have formidably deep and expensive relations cooperating on infrastructure or technology, on hydrogen, on maritime security.

That’s also an India that is interested in the relationship with Australia. Some 10-15 years ago, India and Australia had a relatively decent but, frankly, not very positive and sometimes even hostile relationship. Today, they are working together in the Quad together with Japan and the US, as four democracies that have a certain like-mindedness on several issues, whether it’s multilateralism, the rule of law, sovereignty, and sea lines of communication. So, you see an India that looks at Russia from this wider angle of structural distribution and diversity of power.

A second and less abstract factor is, of course, India’s military dependence on Russia. India has a long history with Russia that dates back to the 1971 treaty with the Soviet Union. Much of India’s military hardware and software since the 1970s depended on Soviet Union, and then until today on Russian technology and supplies and maintenance. So you have that military angle that weighs strong from a security perspective for the Indian armed forces. The share of Russian supplies and equipment in the Indian Armed Forces has come down over the last 10 to 20 years, it used to be at something like 70%, but that has decreased significantly, especially in several critical areas. So there’s again, an example of Indian strategic diversification, in this case away from Russia.

There is a sense that there are core Indian national interests where Russia is still able to support India or, maybe more importantly, act as a spoiler that could complicate India’s foreign, economic and security policies.

And the last factor is, I would call it a strategic nostalgia for Russia that conditions future assessments, as a country that supported India in the past and at several crucial moments delivered where the US failed to, especially during the Cold War but also in the 2000s. The Soviet Union used its veto at some points to protect India from sanctions and condemnation at the United Nations Security Council. So that sort of focus and path dependence on Russia is still there and still matters, continues to weigh on the Indian strategic mindset. It is not just wishful thinking: there is a sense that there are core Indian national interests where Russia is still able to support India or, maybe more importantly, act as a spoiler that could complicate India’s foreign, economic and security policies. Especially a growing rapprochement with China.

NR: Right, and the Russian invasion of Ukraine that started in February of last year, and I’m wondering, how did India respond immediately after, especially because it relies on its military? It depends on it militarily?

CX: So I think the immediate reaction shocked many people in Europe and in the West, also Japan, Australia, because it was a reaction that was very neutral, very cautious, including an anodyne appeal to peace. There was no real condemnation of Russia. In fact, the word invasion or aggression is hardly used here in India and certainly not in official statements. So that was the main reaction, the immediate response, which has however shifted gradually over the last year. I think India has become more and more impatient with Russia’s behavior. It has become more and more understanding also of European concerns.

There are other risk situations in India’s neighbourhood that are facing the brunt of the geoeconomic churn and ripple effects of the war in Europe.

But the largest concern is really: what is the effect of this war on the global economy? That is front and center: how many people will be affected by rising energy prices, by inflationary pressures? And how many people in India and in the developing Global South and Africa, Latin America and Asia will be sliding back into poverty because of this war? How will this destabilize countries politically, as we saw in Sri Lanka? There are other risk situations in India’s neighbourhood that are facing the brunt of the geoeconomic churn and ripple effects of the war in Europe.

NR: And, during the 2022 Shanghai Cooperation Organization summit in Uzbekistan, Indian Prime Minister Modi told President Putin that “today’s era is not the era of war.” So what does Modi’s comments suggest here?

CX: I can’t think of too many leaders that, except when they’ve been directly affected and have direct interests at stake, say that this is an era of war. I think that’s something leaders say when they want to go to war, when there’s really a national aggression happening, for example, the Ukraine, of course. But this coming from Prime Minister Modi, I’m not surprised because he’s also coming from a very transactional approach that believes in cooperation based on economic interdependence. And I think the signal here is mainly towards Russia, following on the point I made earlier that if this war continues, we will all be worse off. President Putin may actually entrench himself, and Russia may survive and continue to thrive in some ways even, but the rest of the world is going to suffer.

But of course the Western camp interpreted this, obviously, as a strong message against President Putin. And vice-versa, President Putin and President Xi Jinping of China probably interpreted this more as an Indian signal that the West started this war. So I think that’s open to interpretation. And respective interpretations will tell you where people stand on this issue and why so many different parties often equally appreciate India’s position.

NR: Right, and even though we’re talking about Russia right now, kind of, as you mentioned, we can’t really talk about just one partner since India likes to have a diverse network of partners. So I want to bring China to this discussion. And China and India have long-standing territorial disputes. But India has concerns also about China’s aggressiveness in the Indo-Pacific. Given its frigid relationship with China, how has India responded to the growing Russia-China ties?

CX: China is now the predominant factor in India’s strategic thinking everywhere. That’s different from 10 years ago, as in the US, including under the late later stages of President Obama’s administration, when there was a larger consensus or at least still a predominant line of thinking that we need to work with in order to assimilate China into the international system. The thinking went that we need to be reasonable with China to engage in economic cooperation, we need to help China find a political place it’s comfortable with within the system. And most importantly, we also have a lot to gain from the rise of China. Let’s not forget that the American growth rates over the last few decades, even India’s growth rates, were heavily dependent on trading with China and the cheap manufacturing capacity of China since the 1990s. Now that thinking has changed. The system is coming apart.

And I think that has led to a fundamental shift in Indian strategic thinking, even if not as aggressively expressed as by the United States administrations, especially the Trump one. India has been a bit more cautious in terms of articulating it. But it’s equally, if not more, concerned about the way China has behaved. There will be still a few people who say that we somehow have failed at socializing China, and that we need to do more to bring them in.

India is trying to find out a way to change, not to isolate or undermine China, but by creating an environment that constrains China to be more responsive and constructive.

But the dominant line of thinking in New Delhi today, and I assume in Washington, too, is that China’s behavior has changed post 2012 on a variety of accounts. And therefore, we also have to adapt and respond accordingly to a new China, a different China in the way it operates abroad, a different China in the way it is structured internally. We saw the consolidation of power by President Xi Jinping, a very different Communist Party from 15 years ago, when there were certain experiments with liberalization. So China has changed. And therefore also India is trying to find out a way to change, not to isolate or undermine China, but by creating an environment that constrains China to be more responsive and constructive.

India certainly is concerned, to your question about drawing proximity between China and Russia. Because that limits India’s options. It forces India to side more with the US and Europe, and the US-led camp. So India would prefer a Russia that is a bit more autonomous, not dependent on support from China. My sense is that over the last few months, we see a growing convergence between Moscow and Beijing. And therefore India is also getting more worried about this diversification strategy and Russia’s role in it.

NR: Thus far, of course, we’ve talked pretty extensively about Russia, and how the Russian invasion of Ukraine has affected India-Russia relations. But I also wanted to bring the United States into our discussion a bit more fully. So how has India’s relationship with the US evolved since Russia’s invasion of Ukraine?

CX: I think there’s a clear, irreversible convergence between India and the United States today. This is, again, a relationship that isn’t that old in terms of its newest form of partnership since the 2000s. It warms up after 1999, still under President Bill Clinton, accelerates under Prime Minister Manmohan Singh in India and President Bush in the 2000s. Especially a landmark agreement, in the mid-2000s, on civil nuclear energy cooperation where the US worked very hard to open up an exceptional status for India, to access nuclear supplies and nuclear technology abroad. It worked India into various nuclear non-proliferation arrangements. When it tested its nuclear weapons in 1998, it was seen as a nuclear pariah, an alien to that system.

And in the 2000s, India and the US worked out a way in which India is sort of brought into a modified regime. That was a strategic tipping point because it created huge trust in India, paving the way for other, maybe far more important sectoral convergences. The US that 10, 20, 30 years ago before that, in the 70s and 80s, had been very close to Pakistan and China, started pivoting towards India and investing political capital to improve relations with India and gain its trust. And that has progressed systematically now over the last 20 years or so.

I think there are ups and downs like, for example, the Russia relationship, which is certainly a tension point today in India-US relations; the US has one view and India has a different view.

But despite these ups and downs, these occasional tensions, the larger structural trend is one of convergence. And you can see it in many areas, for example the range, amount and value of military equipment and technology that the US has transferred to India, you can see it in the agreements that the US has signed with India, where it is comfortable now in sharing advanced intelligence on a variety of issues and cooperate on military logistics.

Or you can see an economic relationship, with trade booming over the last 20 years. And now the US consistently being one of the top trade partners of India in the world. It is a relationship that you can also see working out at the civil society level. You see today India and United States crafting out a major technological partnership in upgrading their respective economies with new tools on data sharing on digital economies, on e-commerce, comfortable working on these issues to grow together at a civil society levels. Or you can see it if you ask today where Indian students are going to study. They’re going mostly to US universities.

China really brought the United States and India together and activated a lot of dormant areas that have huge potential for inter-democratic cooperation, which had been missed for decades.

And fundamentally, I’d say this boils down to a level of comfort, about similar models of political organization. Now, one could argue that the US and India were both democracies in the 1960s and 1980s and they still didn’t work with each other. That’s true. They were in different geostrategic camps, despite both being democracies. But once the structural convergence happened, mainly driven by the rise of China and a common concern about that, it has been facilitated by common values. So it’s almost as if China did India and the US a favor by rising. China really brought the United States and India together and activated a lot of dormant areas that have huge potential for inter-democratic cooperation, which had been missed for decades because of different security alignments and strategic interests.

NR: And you mentioned this immense progress that’s been made in US-India relations in the last 20 years. But earlier in the podcast, we also touched briefly, about progress that’s been made in India’s relationships with Australia and Japan. So today, India is part of the Strategic Security Dialogue alongside these three countries, that’s known as the Quad. And we were wondering how India’s role in the quad factors into its relationship with Russia?

CX: That’s a great question. If I recall correctly, when India’s External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar went to Moscow a few years ago, at some point he said something like the Indo-Pacific also has a place for you Russia. And by saying that he was really telling Russia that, listen, you don’t need to depend too much on China. Listen, you don’t need to play games with Europe to get America’s attention and recover global leverage. There is a cooperative, constructive field out there for you to fill in Asia, in particular, in the Indo-Pacific, beyond just the continental territorial heartland of Russia and China, Central Asia, Eurasia.

I think that tells you about the versatility of the Indian strategic mindset. It tells you that while India is comfortable working with the Quad, with three other fellow democracies which have a web of security alliance treaties (Japan, Australia, and the United States) India is the odd woman out as a non-aligned state that has not had a security alliance with the US or any of the other two Quad members. Yet this India is comfortable cooperating with those three nations. But it’s also an India that is sometimes also comfortable working with Russia and China in what’s called the RIC-level of cooperation, the Russia, India, China axis. It’s an India that is also comfortable working in the Shanghai Cooperation Organization, together with Russia, China, Pakistan, and Central Asian states.

It’s an India that is comfortable looking at different geographies and different sectors of interest and saying: on this issue in that region, today I am comfortable with x, y or z. And that may change the day after tomorrow.

So it’s an India that really is not feeling forced to choose sides. That may sometimes seem confusing to people that are traditionally used to alliances and the way the world operated for a long time. But did the world really always operate on firm alliances? I’m not sure if you look at the history, it’s full of partnerships that are polygamous, if you want, about relations that are open, inclusive and flexible and fluid, if you want to use some of the common popular terms applied to geopolitics. And that’s what India is doing. It’s an India that is comfortable looking at different geographies and different sectors of interest and saying: on this issue in that region, today I am comfortable with x, y or z. And that may change the day after tomorrow.

Sometimes India is comfortable working with Russia on certain issues, for example, Afghanistan. As the US pulled out dramatically from Kabul, and left the country in tatters after 20 years of a failed military intervention, India was deeply exposed to Afghanistan, where the Taliban rule—a radical Islamic movement with close ties to Pakistan. And there obviously, India had to look at Russia, which has important assets and presence in Afghanistan. In fact, unlike India, the US and many other countries, Russia did not close down its embassy in Kabul and remained operational in terms of its diplomatic and other ground presence. So again, that is I think the DNA of India’s strategic mindset. And that’s one that again, allows you to be very comfortable in the Quad despite China’s annoyance and concern.

China is constantly dismissing the Quad saying it doesn’t matter, it’s useless or it is a new Asian NATO alliance against China. Here again, I think India is confident enough to say, you know, you China are confident to work with Pakistan, you create platforms with Russia. We are comfortable to work with other countries on other issues. And not everything is and must be about China these days. In fact, one should ask oneself, why did India not have deeper relationships with Japan, Australia, and the US before, all countries that are democracies and have many shared values with India. Australia is almost a maritime neighbor of India, they share common interests in the eastern Indian Ocean region. Japan and India are two formidable economies with long civilizational ties, but never really tapped into that potential. So given this abnormal history, I think it’s quite natural to see India now finally exploring win-win cooperation with the United States and all these middle powers, not just only, but also because of China.

NR: As we, near the end of our discussion, I want to go back to something that you said earlier in our conversation, what you call the irreversible rise of India. And we’ve talked about how India seeks out partnerships that give it flexibility and strategic autonomy. And I kind of want to ask about the future of Indian foreign policy, especially as its set to host the G-20 summit that’s scheduled to be in September of this year. And for our listeners who may not know, the G-20 is a forum where heads of state from the world’s major economies meet annually to discuss global economic issues and facilitate international cooperation. So how does India’s role as the 20 23 G-20 President fit into this conversation? And does it lend Modi real opportunities for international leadership?

CX: Let me turn this around and rephrase this as, maybe, how does this lend Prime Minister Modi real opportunities for domestic leadership? And let me give you a very concrete example here in Delhi, where I live. This has been a deeply symbolic moment for India. You go to the streets you have posters everywhere, blasting that India is now the president of the G-20, almost as if presiding over of the world. Or that India is the mother of democracy leading and nurturing the world. You have events in all cities beyond Delhi, a variety of meetings on climate, on the development working group, on health, on the finance track. I think there’s around 300 or more events being held across this one-year presidency across the country.

So that’s the key message for the Indian electorate, for the Indian citizen, which is, in the end, what matters to any leader wishing to be reelected. And let’s not forget India will have elections national elections in 2024. And Prime Minister Modi and his party are seeking reelection for a third mandate. So in 2024, the Indian G-20 idea is to show case internally that India has attained reputation, has achieved status internationally, and sometimes we forget the importance of this domestic dimension of foreign policy. This is deeply relevant in a big country that is craving for recognition, craving for reparation, craving for historical correction, craving for international leadership opportunities, however symbolic, to show that it has achieved its rightful place.

Now coming to the international aspect, the most salient part of India’s G- 20 presidency. Its agenda has been deeply constrained and challenged by the Russia-Ukraine war. India could not ensure a joint declaration at the G-20 ministerial meeting that happened recently in Delhi because of the differences between the West and Russia and China. So it’s very difficult to be presiding over something that is fragmented as deeply as the world is today between these two camps in the G-20. But therefore, one niche that India has carved out for itself, is what India calls its capacity, its ambition to be a representative of the Global South, of the developing countries, of Latin America, Africa, and Asia.

And this Global South is not only a territorial and geographic construct. India has stressed that the Global South also lives in the US, a Global South that is also present even in the most advanced economies of Europe, that still suffer from inequality, in fact, where inequality levels are rising again, and there’s poverty in several pockets. So the Indian idea of the Global South is one about how do we empower the most destitute populations, the ones that are suffering the brunt of the Ukraine-Russia war, but also suffering the brunt of different legislative actions taken in the US and European economies that are protectionist, that are inflationary, that are affecting the called Global South.

Besides the G-20, India also hosted a different summit in January, which is called the Global South Summit. This included over 120 developing countries that virtually joined Prime Minister Modi in discussing their diverging interests. And how India during the G20 presidency can push these interests internationally, particularly, for example, on a just climate transition. If we want to achieve an equitable climate transition in developing economies, these countries need financial instruments.

India will try to find a bridging role, a representative role, between what we generally call the Global North and the Global South, reflecting efforts towards a more balanced and also sustainable world order.

India has been able to follow up on its Paris commitments in terms of de-carbonization. But the West and particularly the advanced economies have not been able to fulfill their pledges towards financing and transferring technology, for example, towards the greening of the economies in the developing world.

So there you will see on climate, but also in other areas like health, and broader financial systems and digital inclusion systems for the new economy, a big niche for India to play. It has begun by playing that already in the last few months. And you’ll see much more of this towards the September summit here in New Delhi, where India will try to find a bridging role, a representative role, between what we generally call the Global North and the Global South, reflecting efforts towards a more balanced and also sustainable world order.

Click here to listen to the podcast.

The revised and edited transcript is prepared by Mahesh Kushwaha, Research Intern, CSEP.

The post More of the same? India’s Strategic Balance first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/more-of-the-same-indias-strategic-balance/feed/ 0 897641
Mining Matters Episode 3: Underlining the Critical Role of Critical Minerals http://stg.csep.org/blog/897453/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=897453 http://stg.csep.org/blog/897453/#respond Fri, 21 Apr 2023 08:01:48 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=897453 Ranjan Mathai, Former Foreign Secretary of India, joins Ganesh Sivamani to discuss what India must do to secure its domestic and international supply chains of ‘critical minerals’.

The post Mining Matters Episode 3: Underlining the Critical Role of Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

‘Mining Matters’ is a part of the ‘In Dialogue’ series, hosted by the Non-Fuel Minerals and Mining research team led by Rajesh Chadha at the Centre for Social and Economic Progress, New Delhi. We invite experts from India and abroad to discuss how India’s mining sector can catalyse economic growth and development, ensuring fair and sustainable mining practices for the environment and affected communities.

In the third episode of Mining Matters, “Underlining the Critical Role of Critical Minerals”, Ranjan Mathai, Former Foreign Secretary of India, joins Ganesh Sivamani to discuss what India must do to secure its domestic and international supply chains of ‘critical minerals’. These are the raw materials required in manufacturing, particularly the green technologies needed to meet the country’s climate change mitigation goals.

All content reflects the individual views of the speakers. The Centre for Social and Economic Progress (CSEP) does not hold an institutional view on any subject.

The post Mining Matters Episode 3: Underlining the Critical Role of Critical Minerals first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/897453/feed/ 0 897453
An Indian View on ASEAN http://stg.csep.org/blog/an-indian-view-on-asean/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=an-indian-view-on-asean http://stg.csep.org/blog/an-indian-view-on-asean/#respond Thu, 23 Feb 2023 08:48:15 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=897149 This is an edited and revised adaptation of remarks by Shivshankar Menon from the E-Launch and Discussion of The State of Southeast Asia: 2023 Survey Report conducted by the ASEAN Studies Centre at the Institute of Southeast Asian Studies (ISEAS) – Yusof Ishak Institute, Singapore, on February 9, 2023.

The post An Indian View on ASEAN first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
This is an edited and revised adaptation of remarks by Shivshankar Menon from the E-Launch and Discussion of The State of Southeast Asia: 2023 Survey Report conducted by the ASEAN Studies Centre at the Institute of Southeast Asian Studies (ISEAS) – Yusof Ishak Institute, Singapore, on February 9, 2023.

 ASEAN has responded well to the Russian invasion of Ukraine. It has borne and mitigated the economic consequences effectively, and political responses have been restrained, recognising that there is little that third parties can do to solve the issue or to end the conflict caused by the invasion.

ASEAN has a good track record of changing and adapting to change. Historically, it was formed in difficult circumstances, and it has adapted to each subsequent geopolitical shift and change in Asia: after the Vietnam War, China-US rapprochement, now rivalry, the unipolar moment and the end of the Cold War, the global economic slowdown after 2008, and so on. In today’s tough times, ASEAN will likely change and evolve once again.

(Responding to a question) In the event of conflict in the Taiwan Strait, the international community’s response would not be the same as in the case of Ukraine. Conflict over Taiwan would not only be an issue of local order but one involving the dynamic heart of the world economy, in a geopolitical cockpit where all the major powers have significant interests, and where four nuclear weapon states (and two recessed nuclear weapon states) are in close proximity with conflicting interests.

The Ukraine conflict exacerbated economic and other trends that were already there before the Russian invasion — a global, particularly Chinese, economic slowdown, rising food and energy prices, US-Russia tensions, Russia-NATO differences on European order, and the question of Ukraine itself. In contrast, conflict over Taiwan would create new crises such as one in the semiconductor industry. More important, depending on the outcome, who wins, it could determine the survival of regimes in major powers, and it would change the geopolitical control of one of the world’s most important waterways and of the entire Indo-Pacific. Therefore, such a conflict would not remain a proxy war fought through surrogates and respecting certain limits to escalation, particularly nuclear, as Ukraine has done so far.

(When asked about ASEAN’s weight in the region) As for China-US competition for influence in the region, I think ASEAN has done well by balancing and hedging at the same time, and by not choosing sides. However, major power competition also opens up space for other powers like ASEAN. We know that China operates on a hierarchical view of the world and international order. So the bigger ASEAN can make itself, by showing more unity of purpose and action on regional issues, such as on Myanmar and on the South China Sea, the more seriously China will take ASEAN. As for the US which is looking for partners in Asia, again a more explicit and common political and security stance would complement ASEAN’s economic weight. Third countries in the region, such as India, would also welcome more ASEAN activism and would be happy to see it taking the lead on political issues.

Broader cooperation between ASEAN and Japan, the US, and EU would certainly make a significant impact in maintaining the rules-based international system. Just as ASEAN initiatives led to the East Asia Summit (EAS) and Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC), which have increased economic predictability, improved the climate and conditions for business, and provided forums for discussion of difficult issues.

There are several reasons why India’s standing and trust ratings among ASEAN nations have improved in recent times. One reason could be the deepening cooperation between India and ASEAN. While this is not enough to fully explain the improvement, it has contributed to it. India has also been behaving like other major powers in the region, but has not been as involved in ASEAN’s internal political issues. The changing role and nature of the Indian diaspora could be another factor.

The fear within ASEAN of becoming an arena for great power conflict also makes India’s behaviour as a responsible and predictable power on the international stage attractive. India’s strategic autonomy and its policy of not choosing sides, but seeking a third way, unaligned in today’s world between orders while working with all has been appreciated. Finally, India’s position as a source of growth in the post-pandemic world economy could also be contributing to the improvement in its standing among ASEAN nations. However, there is still a need for India to do more to improve these low numbers and fully realise the potential of this partnership.

 

For the original video discussion, please click here.

The post An Indian View on ASEAN first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/an-indian-view-on-asean/feed/ 0 897149
How India Budgets to Become a Leading Power http://stg.csep.org/blog/how-india-budgets-to-become-a-leading-power/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=how-india-budgets-to-become-a-leading-power http://stg.csep.org/blog/how-india-budgets-to-become-a-leading-power/#respond Wed, 08 Feb 2023 08:24:03 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896934 Constantino Xavier and Riya Sinha comment on the MEA Budget and how India can become a leading power in an increasingly uncertain, competitive and complex international arena.

The post How India Budgets to Become a Leading Power first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) remains among India’s least funded central ministries. Despite receiving its second-highest ever budgetary allocation this year (Rs. 18,050 crore, approximately US$ 2.2 billion), the last four years reflect an overall budgetary stagnation, with its total share wavering around 0.4 % of the total budget.

The MEA’s budgetary limitations reflect the risk of a growing gap between India’s declared foreign policy ambition to serve as a Vishwa Guru and its limited financial and institutional capacity

The MEA’s budgetary limitations reflect the risk of a growing gap between India’s declared foreign policy ambition to serve as a Vishwa Guru [the world’s guru] and its limited financial and institutional capacity to achieve such a role in practice. To become a leading power and pursue its strategies for an increasingly uncertain, competitive and complex international arena, the MEA requires a significant investment in its capacity to pursue Indian interests.

Commenting on the MEA’s budgetary allocation, in December 2022 the Parliament’s Standing Committee on External Affairs had noted that “we do not find such an allocation in consonance with the country’s rising aspirations and growing global stature.” It recommended the MEA budget to be doubled to 1% of the budget, or around Rs. 35,000 crore ($4.4 billion). Yet the 2023-24 budget estimates for the MEA include a feeble 4% increase. In line with the trend of recent years the budgetary actuals are likely to be revised downwards.

In its budgetary demands over the last two decades, the MEA has repeatedly articulated its capacity limitations but with very limited success. Any future budgetary effort will thus require top political sanction in order to overcome different bottlenecks, including institutional resistance from the Ministry of Finance and the popular perception that diplomacy is a lavish and dispensable affair. Unlike most other ministries, the MEA also has a positive track record of budgetary utilization, always above 96% of the revised budget estimates, including during the pandemic peak years of 2020 and 2021.

The MEA’s budget is critical for India to achieve three core foreign policy interests: 1) Economic and technical assistance to pursue interests in developing countries; 2) Training of expert decision-making cadres and adequate staffing of a growing network of diplomatic missions; and 3) Financial contributions to increase leverage at regional institutions and multilateral organizations, especially the United Nations.

  1. Economic and technical assistance to pursue interests in developing countries

Much attention is usually given to the MEA’s aid budget to developing countries, which comes mostly in the form of grants and are focused on India’s “South-South” principles of development cooperation, distinct from the OECD’s Development Assistance Committee (DAC) approach. Totalling approximately Rs. 6,000 Crore ($720 million), one-third of the MEA’s budgetary allocation is dedicated to grants, training, technical and other financial support for developing countries. Around half of this goes to India’s land and maritime neighbours in South Asia, where support for infrastructure projects in the energy and transportation sectors are aimed at deepening regional connectivity.

This financial assistance is not just about altruism: every Indian rupee of the MEA budget that goes to the region is part of strategic decision-making to return maximum dividends, as the current External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar explained in 2018:

“Every one of our neighbours today is pressuring us to invest in power, power transmission, supply diesel, build roads, getting railways in, [so] there is a connectivity demand [for India] in the neighbourhood … They expect us to do it. It is in our interest to do it. … We should not look for reciprocity, I think neighbours need to be handled generously in order to create a larger region which is in our interest. When I invest in a neighbour I am also investing in myself.”

As in preceding years, Bhutan continues to receive the lion share of this regional budget, with Rs. 2,400 crore ($300 m) in this year’s budget. This is indicative of India’s efforts to develop the hydropower sector there in order to develop a power market together with Nepal and Bangladesh and lower electricity prices for consumers in India and the sub-region. The massive budgetary support for Bhutan – approximately ten times of total Indian aid for all of Africa (Rs. 250 crore) – shows how India has embraced the idea of regional economic interdependence as a strategic objective.

The massive budgetary support for Bhutan – approximately ten times of total Indian aid for all of Africa (Rs. 250 cr) – shows how India has embraced the idea of regional economic interdependence as a strategic objective.

The MEA’s aid budget also includes significant amounts for Afghanistan (Rs. 200 crore, or $25 m), where Indian diplomacy has been able to continue several of its developmental and humanitarian projects despite not recognizing the new Taliban-led regime. Yet there is limited utility to read too much into country-wise trends: a decrease in this year’s allocation should not be interpreted as a commensurate decrease in political importance of that country for India compared to last year’s budget. In fact, a reduction can actually signal the successful completion of long-delayed and poorly implemented legacy projects dating back to the 1990s and 2000s.

This is the case with Myanmar, with a decreased budget allocation of Rs. 400 crore ($50 million), after a budgetary effort in recent years that completed most of the Kaladan multi-modal transit corridor and accelerated work on the India-Myanmar-Thailand highway. Both these infrastructure projects are part of India’s Act East policy and one of the reasons why India has remained engaged with the military regime after the 2021 coup.

Similarly, Indian assistance to Nepal has increased from Rs. 425 crore to 550 crore ($60 million) in this budget, after peaking at Rs. 750 crore in 2021-22. This reflects a successful trend of India completing much-delayed legacy projects in Nepal, including the Postal Highway in the Terai border region, as well as inaugurating new infrastructure in record time, before schedule, such as South Asia’s first cross-border petroleum products pipeline. This year’s increase signals India’s effort to implement new projects, including in the hydropower sector after the withdrawal of Chinese investments, new power transmission lines, a new railway line to connect with Kathmandu, and new border management infrastructure that mirrors the Integrated Check Posts (ICPs) on the Indian side.

Another interesting trend that is often missed in these MEA country-wise aid budget figures is the gradual shift from grants to lines of credit, whose financial effort mostly fall under the Ministry of Finance. The absorption of concessional interest rates by the Exim Bank is not always reflected in the MEA’s country-specific aid budget. Bangladesh, for example, has only been allotted Rs. 200 crore in this year’s budget but is one of the largest recipients of India’s lines of credit, including the first one in the defence sector.

There is also a broader trend of the MEA’s aid budget shifting away from large, grant-financed infrastructure projects in neighbouring countries, and towards smaller, more effective High Impact Community Development Projects (HICDP).

There is also a broader trend of the MEA’s aid budget shifting away from large, grant-financed infrastructure projects in neighbouring countries, and towards smaller, more effective High Impact Community Development Projects (HICDP), such as in the education sector in Nepal or more recently also with great success in the Maldives.

Finally, the MEA budget also includes several line items to respond first to its neighbours in cases of humanitarian disasters or other emergencies. For Sri Lanka, in particular, parallel to India’s total financial effort in 2022 estimated at around $4 billion, the MEA doubled its aid budget this year.

These resources are also important for India to expand its influence in these neighbouring countries, improve public perceptions and build leverage in various domains, including political and security cooperation. This may be one of the reasons why the MEA budget includes a massive line item of Rs. 4,162 crore ($500 million) of “special diplomatic expenditure” which is opaquely referred to as “expenditure on discretionary expenditure”.

  1. Training of expert decision-making cadres and adequate staffing of a growing network of diplomatic missions

The MEA’s budget is also important to allocate adequate resources to endow the IFS with the adequate human resources to protect and pursue India’s regional and global interests. The picture on training reflects a positive trend. In its 2017 review of the IFS, the parliamentary Standing Committee on External Affairs had expressed its “grave concern” at the budgetary capacity gap, noting that the MEA’s “training budget of the Ministry is already meagre and underutilization of this existing budget further undermines capacity addition at the Ministry.”

This year’s allocation of Rs. 21 crore ($2.5 million) to training is in line with a significant effort to maximize resources for training, including at the IFS probationer and mid-career levels and joint training with other civil and military services that will help bridge persistent organizational decision-making silos and accelerate coordinated decision-making. The training budget has now been wavering around Rs. 21-25 crore since having been almost doubled in 2019-20 for the first time since the 2000s.

Greater budgetary allocation is also required for an urgent expansion of the IFS, which is among the world’s most understaffed diplomatic services.

Besides the positive trend in training, greater budgetary allocation is also required for an urgent expansion of the IFS, which is among the world’s most understaffed diplomatic services, with around 1,000 IFS “A” officers representing India’s interest at the MEA headquarters in New Delhi, across Indian’s regional states, and at approximately 200 Indian missions overseas, including various multilateral agencies. India has approximately as many diplomats as Portugal or New Zealand, and far less than China or the United States. The intake of recent IFS batches increased since the 2000s but has stagnated at around 30-40 officers in recent years.

There have been positive developments to correct this gap, including the induction of new technologies that have led to a record expansion of passport services and e-visa system, lateral entry at the mid-career level, the hiring of expert consultants and also the deputation of military officers and other officers on special duty (OSDs) to various MEA divisions. Inter-ministerial coordination on foreign and security policies has also improved, including through a rapidly expanding, more diverse and empowered National Security Council Secretariat.

Yet there is still a manifest lack of expert resources, for example at the MEA’s Development Partnership Administration (DPA) which requires more budgetary capacity to attract technical experts from specialized government ministries and services to support project conceptualization and implementation abroad. As a Parliament standing committee report of 2017 notes, there is a need to “bring in more officers [to the MEA] with experience in the field of project management to suitably execute and man these [overseas] projects on a long-term basis.” Given that the MEA’s budgetary allocation for its Secretariat has doubled this year (Rs. 1,518 crore, or $180 million), this provides an opportunity to improve institutional capacity.

The MEA’s capacity gap is also apparent at the Joint Secretary-level for territorial divisions. These joint secretaries oversee the entire gamut of bilateral relations that have expanded and intensified in recent years, especially after Prime Minister Modi’s record number of overseas visits and formidable intensity of political engagements. The MEA’s Joint Secretary for Central Europe, for example, is the single nodal point of contact for the governments of 30 countries and to liaise with their diplomatic missions in New Delhi.

The gap also risks increasing as India opens new diplomatic missions and seeks to staff them appropriately. Since 2018, the Cabinet has sanctioned the opening of 23 new diplomatic missions, 18 of which in African countries. But 48 UN member states still don’t have an Indian representation, which is important for India’s ambitions to mobilize support for its quest to reform the United Nations.

The diplomatic network in the neighbourhood has also been expanding as part of India’s efforts to engage sub-national stakeholders beyond capital cities: over the last 20 years, India has opened or reopened thirteen new consulates in seven of its neighbouring countries, including in Hambantota and Jaffna (Sri Lanka), Sylhet and Khulna (Bangladesh), Sittwe (Myanmar) and Addu (Maldives, not yet operationalized).

This year’s allocation in establishment expenditure on embassies and missions overseas (Rs. 3,529 crore, $427 million) accounts for almost 20% of the total MEA budget but may require further expansion as India operationalizes and expands its diplomatic network abroad.

  1. Financial contributions to increase leverage at regional institutions and multilateral organizations, especially the United Nations

In line with its top-most diplomatic priority this year, the budget has reportedly allocated Rs. 990 Crore ($120 million) for the MEA to organize the G20 Presidency, though it is yet unclear under what budget item. This reflects India’s significant financial effort to ensure that its diplomatic outreach succeeds in reshaping the G20 and its ambition to “give voice” to the developing countries.  This year’s budget also makes continued contributions to various other multilateral and regional organizations, including a total allocation of Rs. 29 crore ($3.5 million) to the SAARC and BIMSTEC secretariats.

Of particular concern is the 50% reduction in the MEA’s budget allocated to the United Nations (UN), at Rs. 200 crore ($25 million). This means that India’s financial contribution to the entire UN system is even less than what it has been allocating to a soft power project like the Nalanda International University, in Bihar (Rs. 250 crore this year). This limited budget is poised to hinder India’s ambition and efforts to increase its influence at the UN, where its funding is outmatched by contributions from China and several other middle powers to the regular budget, as well as that of the various UN specialized agencies and peacekeeping operations.

Financing a rising global profile

In her budget address this year, India’s Finance Minister referred to India’s “rising global profile” as a result of a variety of domestic successes, including an emerging digital public infrastructure, the massive Covid vaccination drive and investment in frontier areas such as achieving the climate related goals, mission LiFE, and the National Hydrogen Mission.

None of these can be pursued without regional and global partnerships in an increasingly interdependent world. To sustain and further improve its global profile as a leading power, India will have to expand its budget to capacitate the MEA.

While the views expressed here are solely ours, we are grateful to several expert reviewers for their valuable feedback and to Nitika Nayar for her excellent research inputs.

The post How India Budgets to Become a Leading Power first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/how-india-budgets-to-become-a-leading-power/feed/ 0 896934
Beyond the Imphal and Kohima Campaigns: Japan and Northeast India http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-the-imphal-and-kohima-campaigns-japan-and-northeast-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=beyond-the-imphal-and-kohima-campaigns-japan-and-northeast-india http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-the-imphal-and-kohima-campaigns-japan-and-northeast-india/#respond Tue, 31 Jan 2023 11:24:31 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896895 In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Anindita Sinh interviews Mayumi Murayama on her book, Northeast India and Japan: Engagement through Connectivity, co-edited with Sanjoy Hazarika and Preeti Gill.

The post Beyond the Imphal and Kohima Campaigns: Japan and Northeast India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Anindita Sinh interviews Mayumi Murayama on her book, Northeast India and Japan: Engagement through Connectivity, co-edited with Sanjoy Hazarika and Preeti Gill and published by Routledge in 2022.

This book is an effort by Indian and Japanese scholars to not only fill the gap in scholarship with regard to the Northeast region (NER) but also improve Japanese scholarship on India and the region. Through a series of essays, this volume attempts to trace the connections between Japan and the NER from the legacies of the Second World War up to contemporary Japanese Overseas Developmental Assistance (ODA) projects in the region. It focuses on various aspects of connectivity ranging from economic engagements, infrastructure development projects, people-to-people interactions, and oral history narratives. Many of the topics covered in this collection, particularly those concerning Japan’s engagements with the NER, have been examined from a Japanese perspective for the first time.

Japan has become a major investor in the NER, focusing on improving connectivity, water supply, and hydroelectricity. It actively promotes sustainable development, especially under the India-Japan Act East Forum. The NER also holds strategic significance for Japan in realising its vision of a free, open, and inclusive Indo-Pacific. The book serves as a repository of economic and connectivity projects undertaken in the region and showcases the perspectives of the inhabitants of these borderlands. It casts the old relationship between Japan and the NER in a new light by exploring the “shared history” (p. xxvi) of the people of the NER and Japan. One of the significant contributions of this book is the guide to Japanese literature on the Battles of Imphal and Kohima in Chapter 13 by Kanako Sakai, Institute of Developing Economies, Japan External Trade Organization (IDE-JETRO). It lists relevant Japanese accounts of the interaction between Japan’s military personnel and local inhabitants in the NER during the War, with English translations of the titles and short summaries of these works.

Under India’s Neighbourhood First and Act East policies, the strategic location of the NER has been leveraged by New Delhi to engage not only with the immediate neighbourhood but also with ASEAN countries, and beyond, including Taiwan, Japan, and South Korea. Despite the growing importance of the NER in India’s foreign policy formulations, the situation on the ground remains vulnerable and remote, as intraregional connectivity remains low. Due to its proximity to India’s international borders and tense situations with neighbouring countries, cross-border infrastructure in the region continues to remain under-developed and the NER is characterised as a “buffer” (Izuyama, p. 40).

This collected edition brings together scholars who discuss what connectivity means for the people of the NER.

Anindita Sinh: As you highlight in your book, the NER is unique in terms of the Japan–India relationship as it is the only Indian region where “the Japanese Imperial Army fought alongside the Indian National Army against the British Army and the British Indian Army during WWII” (p. xx). How has this shared history influenced Japan’s perceptions of the region and its engagements?

Mayumi Murayama: For most of us in Japan, the Imphal and Kohima Campaigns or the Imphal Operation, as we call them, are quite familiar. They are a part of our bitter memories of the Second World War. Nevertheless, in current times, very few of us are aware of the exact locations of Imphal and Kohima. It is more than likely that they are mistaken as places in Myanmar (former Burma) instead of India. For the twelfth chapter of our book, I went through Japanese literature on the Imphal Operation, including analytical reports and memoirs written by individuals, as well as those compiled by some institutions, to see how people in India’s Northeast region were perceived and described. To my surprise, references to local inhabitants in Japanese writings were remarkably limited, except for some observations regarding their settlements and lifestyle, and the military’s limited interactions with the local populace to acquire food and labour, many a time forcibly. The absence is particularly conspicuous when compared with Japanese writings on Burma and Burmese people. The prime reason may be that the stay of Japanese soldiers in the NER was much shorter compared with their engagements in Burma, where some of them spent enough time to pick up local languages. It was only after the War, when Japanese veterans had visited the NER to collect the bones of their fellow soldiers that they realised that the people of the NER had been equally affected and they began to appreciate the generous cooperation extended by the latter.

One of the main objectives of my research was to shed light on the limited mutual perceptions we [Japan and NER] had in the past and to instate a foundation on which we can start building a shared future.

Answering your question, I would say that history was not shared by the people of both countries in the true sense. Keeping in mind current attempts to promote war tourism in the NER, also discussed in our book (Chapter 11), one of the main objectives of my research was to shed light on the limited mutual perceptions we had in the past and to instate a foundation on which we can start building a shared future.

AS: One of the primary aims of the book is to re-cast the policy and public imaginary of the NER, moving it away from the lens of securitisation and focusing on its socio-economic development. Given your previous work on human development in eastern South Asia to address illegal migration and economic backwardness, how can sub-regional cooperation mitigate these concerns and improve connectivity in the region?

MM: I first visited the NER in 2004. Until then, I had been conducting research solely on Bangladesh as I joined the Institute of Developing Economies (IDE), Japan, in 1984 as a graduate. Therefore, my perception of South Asia, especially India, was greatly influenced by the perceptions of the people of Bangladesh. A typical view there is that Bangladesh is India-locked: it has an inferior position compared to India, which acts as a big brother and not an elder brother, which connotes a caring character. When I listened to the views of the people of the NER — say, academics, businessmen, journalists, a young guide, whomever it may be — they echoed that the NER was Bangladesh-locked and thus, negatively affected by the country. This made me realise that my perceptions were coloured by stereotypical images of statehood and critiques of what central governments do and do not do. Similarly, when I heard what they said that the flood in Assam that year (2004) was due to the opening of a dam in Bhutan, I recalled the prevailing view in Bangladesh, which often attributes the causes of floods or drought to India.

The NER has faced many issues surrounding national security, ethnicity, migration, and development. Some are sceptical about the potential of cooperation across borders, and some are even against it. There are views that the free movement of goods or people may have a negative effect on the secured market, spaces, or opportunities of the people of the NER. After all, any cooperation, whether by government or private initiatives, is selective on where to be connected and where not to be. Nevertheless, to me, sub-regional cooperation in the eastern part of South Asia should bring more opportunities for the people and the states and countries to get to know each other. The idea that they have somewhat similar cultures, and a shared history seems to hamper fresh initiatives to get to know and learn from the other, who may have undergone different trajectories after the borders were redrawn.

AS: Bangladesh is an important actor in India’s eastern connectivity agenda. Not only is Japan significantly involved in the NER, but it also has close ties with Bangladesh. Based on your experience as a political advisor to the Japanese embassy in Dhaka as well as your prior research experience there, what lessons can the NER draw from Bangladesh to improve connectivity in the broader region?

MM: Bangladesh has been long recognised as one of the poorest countries in the world. This image still prevails in Japan, but the recent economic growth of the country, and its success as the second-largest manufacturer and exporter of ready-made garments, has started to draw the attention of the business sector of Japan and other countries. Such a remarkable transformation of Bangladesh was achieved primarily through the human resources of the country, both creative entrepreneurs and patient and diligent labour. The large population, once considered a cause of poverty, has now become an asset.

Similar to Bangladesh, human resources are one of the most promising endowments of the NER.

Compared with the NER, Bangladesh has fewer inhibiting factors. Nevertheless, similar to Bangladesh, human resources are one of the most promising endowments of the NER. However, this fact is hardly known outside of the NER. Thus, there remain untapped human resources, equipped with fluency in English and a global orientation. I can give you one example. There is an association based in a region of Japan. It was established in 2013 to promote cooperation with India. Now, they have established a strong network in Kerala, which was the native state of the Indian ambassador to Japan at the time. They send business missions to Kerala regularly. I met two young IT engineers from Kochi working in a Japanese IT company based in that region. People-to-people contacts are important to market the NER as a source of excellent human resources. In a small way, I try to introduce the NER whenever I get a chance to talk about India.

AS: As this book attempts to improve engagement between Japan and India through academic research, what views do Japanese scholars and analysts hold of South Asia? How are these perceptions different from those held of other regions in Asia, and is there a growing interest in Japan regarding the subcontinent?

If we compare research on India and China, the latter is much more directly related to the political and economic interests of Japan, and private think tanks and law firms are closely watching the country in addition to academia, while research on South Asia is more academic oriented.

MM: When IDE (where I work) was established in 1958 based on the combined interests of the government, business, and academia, India and China were the two most researched countries. In the following years, the countries and areas of our research expanded to Southeast Asia, Central Asia, the Middle East, Arica, and Latin American countries. The topics are varied and no single view about any country or region exists. However, broadly speaking, if we compare research on India and China, the latter is much more directly related to the political and economic interests of Japan, and private think tanks and law firms are closely watching the country in addition to academia, while research on South Asia is more academic oriented in broad fields including both social sciences and the humanities.

One of the bright signs in South Asian studies in Japan is that research on the NER is increasing. The first Japanese scholar who entered the NER after the War was Prof. Chie Nakane, a renowned social anthropologist. This was in 1954. After that, the region was closed to foreign scholars. It was after the 1990s that Japanese researchers started to do fieldwork in the region. Currently, there is a plan to produce an edited book on India’s NER in the area studies series of a Japanese publishing house. This series covers various countries of the world and some countries are discussed over more than one book, across different themes. India has four editions, including one focusing on the country from a caste perspective. I co-edited the Bangladesh edition and contributed articles to the Maldives edition. When the book is published, I hope India’s NER becomes a more familiar region for Japanese readers.

 

About the author

Mayumi Murayama serves as Executive Vice President of Japan External Trade Organization (JETRO) in charge of the Institute of Developing Economies (IDE-JETRO). Her research interests include industry, labour, gender, and youth issues as well as the regional relationship between India and Bangladesh. Some of her publications include Gender and Development: The Japanese Experience in Comparative Perspective, (editor), Globalization, Employment and Mobility: South Asian Experience, (co-edited with Hiroshi Sato), and ‘Borders, Migration and Sub-regional Cooperation in Eastern South Asia’, among others.

The post Beyond the Imphal and Kohima Campaigns: Japan and Northeast India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-the-imphal-and-kohima-campaigns-japan-and-northeast-india/feed/ 0 896895
New Economic Ways between South and Southeast Asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-economic-ways-between-south-and-southeast-asia/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=new-economic-ways-between-south-and-southeast-asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-economic-ways-between-south-and-southeast-asia/#respond Tue, 20 Dec 2022 11:14:52 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896799 The Sambandh blog looks at new approaches to strengthening trade and revitalising economic links between South Asia and Southeast Asia.

The post New Economic Ways between South and Southeast Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Bhavyanshi Sinha interviews Cecile Fruman and Nora Dihel on the report, Deepening Linkages between South and Southeast Asia, published by the World Bank in 2022.

Trade linkages between South Asia and Southeast Asia have grown nine-fold over the past two decades, rising from US$ 38 billion in 2000 to US$ 349 billion in 2018. However, despite this progress, there remains a significant untapped potential of economic integration within and between these two regions. The World Bank has highlighted that economic integration in South Asia remains at 5.6%, compared to 25.6% in the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) (p. 9).

The report looks at new approaches to strengthening trade and revitalising economic links between South Asia and Southeast Asia. It extends beyond intra-regional economic connectivity in South Asia and investigates its connectivity with Southeast Asia as reflected in various national policies, including India’s Act East policy, Thailand’s Look West policy, and the overall emphasis on increasing connectivity in the Bay of Bengal and the wider Indo-Pacific regions.

The report highlights the potential for trade and investment between South and Southeast Asia. Currently, South Asia imposes tariffs on imports from Southeast Asia that are three times as high as those levied on imports from South Asia. The report suggests that by reducing tariffs, South Asia could potentially increase trade to as much as 10.6% of the gross domestic product (GDP). The report also delves into the key barriers that restrict economic connectivity, including tariffs, non-tariffs (custom procedures, sanitary and phytosanitary measures, etc.), regulatory restrictions, and the absence of comprehensive trade agreements. Finally, the report studies two potential areas of trade cooperation between South and Southeast Asia—digital, and environmental goods and services. It argues that bringing these areas under a region-wide and investment-friendly regulatory regime would cut down costs and help both regions become hubs for the production of environmental and digital products.

The report uses novel data sets on services, investments, and migration and applies machine learning techniques to estimate the restrictiveness of barriers. It uses an economy-wide general equilibrium model that explicitly incorporates services and investments to provide a more complete picture of regional integration.

Bhavyanshi Sinha: India, under its Act East Policy, has undertaken various initiatives to increase its engagements with Southeast Asia. This includes a focus on development in India’s North-east Region, the Bangladesh–Bhutan–India–Nepal (BBIN) initiative, the Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC), and so on. What effects do such initiatives have on enhancing connectivity between these regions?

Cecile Fruman: India’s focus on the North-east Region and on BBIN connectivity has strong economic and developmental benefits for eastern South Asia and the broader Asia-Pacific region. The implementation of the BBIN Motor Vehicles Agreement (MVA) which will boost regional connectivity and trade remains a priority and was discussed at the top level between Bangladesh and India recently. The countries have finalised the enabling memorandum of understanding and are working on the passenger and cargo protocols that are essential to operationalise the MVA. Implementation of the MVA and full transport integration between Bangladesh and India would result in significant economic gains and can potentially increase the national income of Bangladesh by around 17% and that of India by 8%.

These gains would spread to landlocked Nepal and Bhutan as well as North-east India, giving these geographies shorter access to ports in India and Bangladesh and, ultimately, access to the broader Asia-Pacific region. A focus on BBIN connectivity will position the eastern subregion as a gateway for connecting South Asia to Southeast Asia and beyond.

A focus on BBIN connectivity will position the eastern subregion as a gateway for connecting South Asia to Southeast Asia and beyond.

There is also a strong emphasis on the scope for energy connectivity and cooperation in BBIN countries and beyond. Nepal already sells its surplus hydropower to India through the energy trade market, and it could expand to trading with Bangladesh via India. An integrated regional market will support green and resilient energy security in the subregion. The momentum behind the subregional electricity market can eventually be expanded further east to include ASEAN and Southeast Asian countries, but there is a fair amount of regulatory and infrastructural groundwork that needs to be done.

BS: While India was sceptical about joining the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP), it has become a member of the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF), though it has not signed up yet for the trade pillar. Given such competing geopolitical and economic blocs, how do you see the economic cooperation between South and Southeast Asia taking shape?

CF: The economies in South Asia and Southeast Asia are heterogeneous in size and structure, and so are their trade relationships; but the potential to trade more is considerable. India has a history of developing strong linkages with ASEAN countries. India–ASEAN ties have progressed over the past three decades, from the first sectoral dialogue partnership in 1992 to a full dialogue partnership in 1995. In the period between April 2021 and February 2022, the commodity trade between India and the ASEAN region amounted to more than US$ 98 billion, with Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Thailand, and Vietnam being the main trading partners.

Ties between India and Singapore are also robust. India received the largest foreign direct investment (FDI) inflows from Singapore in 2021–2022. East Asia also entertains economic linkages with other South Asian countries such as Nepal and Bangladesh, which send thousands of migrant workers to the region. There are also many cultural, religious, people-to-people, and tourism ties between South Asia and East Asia.

Regionally, economic cooperation between South Asia and Southeast Asia has been steadily on the rise. Trade linkages grew ninefold over the past two decades, from US$ 38 billion in 2000 to US$ 349 billion in 2018. But there is potential for much more. As per World Bank estimates, inter-regional integration, supported by the liberalisation of tariffs, non-tariffs, and FDI barriers, along with trade facilitation, can boost the GDP by 0.4% to 10.6% for South Asia and by 0.1% to 0.4% for Southeast Asia. The gains are much greater if these reforms are extended to third countries and intra-regionally.

Going forward, economic cooperation between both the regions will be guided not only by geopolitics, but also by emerging opportunities in areas such as digital technology, the services sector, and trade in environmental goods.

Going forward, economic cooperation between both the regions will be guided not only by geopolitics, but also by emerging opportunities in areas such as digital technology, the services sector, and trade in environmental goods. There are other avenues that have been triggered due to the pandemic, such as cross-border delivery of healthcare, telemedicine, disease surveillance, and education services. Many of these linkages will continue to be tapped at the bilateral and subregional levels and by strengthening and expanding some of the already existing free-trade agreements, such as the ASEAN–India Free Trade Agreement.

BS: One reason for low intraregional trade is the similar factor endowments in countries in South Asia, in terms of natural and human resources. In this context, what makes digital and environmental products different from conventional areas of trade such as agricultural produce and textiles? How important is the presence of differentiated factor endowments in these areas of trade?

Nora Dihel: There is a significant potential for intraregional digital trade. The presence of economies with dynamic Information Technology and Information Technology Enabled Services (ITES) sectors — such as India, Singapore, Malaysia, the Philippines, Thailand, Vietnam, Indonesia, Sri Lanka, and Bangladesh — indicates a strong potential for trade and investment in this sector. The availability of niche skills in tasks related to programming, data analytics, and database management, as well as the need for local customisation for large domestic markets, has led to the establishment of a tiered localisation structure within the ITES industry. The critical nodes are served by global development centres.

Looking ahead, there are already signs that in at least some of the more-developed South Asian and Southeast Asian economies, fifth-generation (5G) wireless technology will open up exciting possibilities for the development of new and innovative service solutions.

Smaller regional product clusters and regional delivery centres serve large national or regional markets. For example, the Philippines, with its large pool of English-speaking professionals, is an important global location for performing certain back-office and analytical tasks. Sri Lanka is another example, where the country has developed a niche for certain accounting services tasks. Looking ahead, there are already signs that in at least some of the more-developed South Asian and Southeast Asian economies, fifth-generation (5G) wireless technology will open up exciting possibilities for the development of new and innovative service solutions. Furthermore, automation and additive manufacturing (3D printing) are already impacting manufacturing sectors (for instance, the textiles and garments industry) by transforming production processes and the relative importance of inputs. The key implication for textile exporters such as Bangladesh is that they need to adopt these technologies to improve productivity and retain production. Future technologies, including improved artificial intelligence and deep-learning technologies, as well as increased uptake of blockchain, are developments that governments must consider when looking at the digital economy.

Green trade is critical for all countries in Asia to scale up climate change mitigation and adaptation efforts in order to maintain export competitiveness and diversify their export baskets. Greening traditional export sectors such as ready-made garments will be critical for countries to ensure worker health and maintain productivity. In addition, diversification to more environmentally sustainable exports that have less or no impact on the environment is also of great importance. To this end, reducing trade barriers to access environmental goods and services (technologies) to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and produce greener products is key to increasing the earnings for major export industries and foreign exchange earnings for all countries.

BS: The report states that weak logistics and infrastructure systems are one of the many issues that hamper investment potential in South Asia. How can the private sector be leveraged to complement existing efforts to increase connectivity?

ND: The report shows that weak logistics and infrastructure systems, fragility, and insecurity hamper South Asia’s investment potential. A trade agenda that includes trade facilitation reforms in addition to the liberalisation of goods, services, and investments can generate important gains. The private sector can play an important role in implementing such reforms. For example, our report highlights opportunities for improvements in sanitary- and phytosanitary-related infrastructure, including establishing accredited private-sector laboratories, reviewing mandatory standards, and using trade facilitation tools such as harmonisation, equivalence, and mutual recognition in the region.

 

About the author:

Cecile Fruman is Director, Regional Integration and Engagement in the South Asia Region (SAR). She is responsible for fostering collaborative activities amongst SAR countries and managing partnerships and engagements with the SAR and global development partners. Previously, Cecile was Senior Manager for Financial Intermediary Funds and Partner Relations in the Development Finance Vice-Presidency (DFi), where she oversaw a portfolio of Financial Intermediary Funds (FIFs) that disbursed in the order of $6 billion a year in grants for key global development priorities to multiple implementation agencies and coordinated the World Bank’s strategic engagement with development partners. Cecile holds an MBA from ESCP Europe, one of France’s top business schools, and furthered her studies at the University of Osaka in Japan.

 

Nora Dihel is a Senior Economist at the World Bank, Thailand. She is currently working on trade and regional integration in South Asia. Prior to joining the Bank, Nora worked in the Chief Economist Unit of the Directorate General for Trade of the European Commission and the OECD Trade Directorate. She has published extensively on the economic impact of services reforms, regional integration and South-South linkages. Nora has a Doctorate Degree in Economics from the Helmut Schmidt University, Germany.

 

The post New Economic Ways between South and Southeast Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-economic-ways-between-south-and-southeast-asia/feed/ 0 896799
Decoding the Pashtuns in the Afghanistan–Pakistan Region http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-the-pashtuns-in-the-afghanistan-pakistan-region/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=decoding-the-pashtuns-in-the-afghanistan-pakistan-region http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-the-pashtuns-in-the-afghanistan-pakistan-region/#respond Wed, 23 Nov 2022 07:14:40 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896705 Riya Sinha interviews Tilak Devasher, Member, National Security Advisory Board of India, and Consultant, Vivekananda International Foundation, on his fourth book, The Pashtuns: A Contested History.

The post Decoding the Pashtuns in the Afghanistan–Pakistan Region first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Riya Sinha interviews Tilak Devasher, Member, National Security Advisory Board of India, and Consultant, Vivekananda International Foundation, on his fourth book, The Pashtuns: A Contested History, published by HarperCollins in 2022.

The Pashtuns are an ethnic group in the Afghanistan–Pakistan region, spanning the Hindu Kush in the west to the Indus River in the east. Sometimes known as Pakhtuns, Pathans, or Afghans, the community has been in the news for decades. In the 1980s, the United States (US) and Saudi Arabia backed Pakistan’s support to the mujahideen to launch strikes against the Soviets in Afghanistan and in the Pashtun-dominated Federally Administered Tribal Areas. Two decades later, the same location was among the critical areas in the US “War on Terror”. After the US withdrawal from Afghanistan in 2021 and the return of the Taliban, the Pashtun debate has intensified, especially with respect to the contested Pakistan–Afghanistan border — namely, the Durand Line.

In his book, Devasher brings the focus back to the Pashtuns, the people at the centre of these political developments. He highlights the fact that the community is strategically important for India, Pakistan, the region, and the non-Pashtuns in Afghanistan. Therefore, it is important to “understand the key trends among the Pashtuns and their history” because a “superficial understanding and prescription has had and continues to have devastating consequences for the region” (p. xv). He highlights five attributes of the Pashtuns: first, their ability to show unity only when threatened by foreigners; second, the colonial depiction of their proclivity for conflict and warfare; third, the issue of Pashtunistan, or a state for the Pashtuns; fourth, their tribal identities vis-à-vis their Islamic identity; and finally, their dependence on foreign sources for revenue. Devasher argues that by understanding the strengths and weaknesses of the Pashtuns, the international community can play a greater role to bring development and peace to this ethnic group.

Based on an analysis of the historical and contemporary literature on the Pashtuns, his decades of experience working for the Government of India, and his specialisation as a veteran analyst on Pakistan, the book amalgamates historiography with current developments. It delves into the lives of Pashtuns and their relations with neighbouring countries and external powers over the past two centuries. Devasher concludes by proposing a road ahead, focusing primarily on strengthening the tribal decision-making structures (such as the loya jirgas), socio-economic development and building ownership among Pashtuns of all shades.

Riya Sinha: In the book, you emphasise that an understanding of two important forces, “Pashtun nationalism and Pashtun extremism,” and their potential combination is critical for peace and security in the region (p. xv). In addition to this, there is also an element of Islamic conservatism. How have these contradictions affected the region?

Tilak Devasher: The common thread linking Pashtun nationalism, extremism, and conservatism on both sides of the Durand Line is Pakistan and its insecurity. An Islamic identity was the catalyst for Pakistan’s creation. Thus, recognising any other identity such as Pashtun nationalism was, and continues to be seen, as an existential threat to its existence.

To weaken Pashtun nationalism, Pakistan exploited Islam and later pan-Islamism, since the late 1970s, by leveraging the conservatism of the deeply religious Pashtuns for use as cannon fodder to further its own security and foreign policy goals. For example, it supported only Islamist parties among the mujahideen. Such a policy required the subversion of the tribal structure, a process that began in the early 1970s and gathered momentum after the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979. In the process, Pashtun tribalism and conservatism that had provided stability was rent asunder and was replaced by an extremist structure that has bred terrorism and violence.

Pakistan’s support first to the mujahideen and then to the Taliban in Afghanistan largely solved the problem of Pashtun sub-nationalism within Pakistan. However, what Pakistan did not factor in was that while the nationalist threat diminished, the birth and growing strength of the Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) became a serious problem. Pashtun Islamism, especially after the rise of the Taliban, has become a formidable force and has the potential to lead to a major blowback in Pakistan. The real danger to Pakistan, of course, would be if the TTP were to take on the nationalist mantle. Early signs of this are now visible in their statements.

As a result, the region has been deeply affected because extremism has been strengthened, which has become a threat not only to Pashtun society but to Pakistan itself and the region. Insecurity and instability at this crossroads would radiate insecurity in the whole region, lead to a surge of refugees, an increase in drug trafficking, and provide space for global terrorists to incubate in ungoverned spaces.

RS: The status of women in Afghanistan, particularly their right to education, has been a contentious issue under the Taliban. You highlight the fact that Pashtun customs and cultural norms play a key role in the status of women and that “no political party or movement has raised the issue of cruel treatment of women in the Pashtun society” (p. 46). Do you think this is likely to change with the rising pressure from states and human rights groups as they link the much-needed aid to the upliftment of women?

TD: Most Pashtun women have remained suppressed by and bound to traditional practices in the name of either Islam or cultural norms, or both. According to journalist and author Geoffrey Moorhouse, no women in the world could be more jealously possessed by their menfolk than the Pashtun women. This is exemplified by the Pashtun proverb that there are only two places for a woman: the core and the gore, Pashto for the house and the graveyard, respectively.

Ghaffar Khan and his Khudai Khidmatgars (Pashtun non-violent resistance movement against the British in colonial India) did raise the issue of the cruel treatment of women in Pashtun society, and Ghaffar Khan did try to implement changes by setting a personal example and working for the empowerment of women. His movement did not succeed, primarily because neither the British nor the Pakistani state supported it. On the contrary, they opposed it. The present Pashtun society lacks an indigenous social reform movement that could take off from where the Khudai Khidmatgars left it.

Under Taliban 2.0, draconian restrictions on the freedom and movement of women have been reintroduced that are reminiscent of their 1990s rule.

Under Taliban 1.0 (1996–2001), the condition of women had severely deteriorated because of misogyny and violence. Under Taliban 2.0, draconian restrictions on the freedom and movement of women have been reintroduced that are reminiscent of their 1990s rule. They have used a disingenuous argument to justify stopping women’s education—the lack of funds. However, the international community is not buying this. It remains to be seen how long the Taliban can resist international pressure because this is one of the main demands for their international recognition and for sustained funding.

RS: No government in Afghanistan has accepted the Durand Line Agreement of 1893 demarcating the border between the then British India and Afghanistan. While Pakistan insists that the Durand Line is the de facto border, the Taliban regime has refused to accept this. Could you delve more into the legal and controversial issues behind the Durand Line? Do you think this matter has the potential to lead to a breakdown of relations between the Islamic Emirate of Afghanistan and Pakistan, especially as the latter is focused on fortifying the line to prevent migration?

TD: There are several controversial issues about the 1893 Durand Line Agreement signed between the Afghan Amir Abdur Rahman (Amir 1880–1901) and the British Foreign Secretary Sir Mortimer Durand.

First, it is indeed a mystery why the Amir signed the English version of the agreement, though he did not know that language. It remains unknown why the Persian version was not used even though Durand knew Persian and had agreed, in deference to the Amir’s desire, that the Persian text would be binding. The line itself was drawn on a small map that the Amir did not sign.

Second, the British themselves regarded the agreement as fixing only the limit of their respective spheres of influence rather than being a demarcation of sovereignty. Several British letters, communications, and statements testified to this. It was only around the Partition, in order to strengthen Pakistan’s borders, that this sphere of influence was converted into an international border.

Third, was the Durand Line signed in perpetuity? If it were to be valid in perpetuity, such a clause would have been mentioned in the agreement. That this was not done was quite possibly because the agreement only earmarked spheres of influence.

Fourth, the Anglo–Afghan treaty of 1921 that is used to validate the Durand Agreement gave both states the right to repudiate it within three years after a one-year notice. So how could a treaty that had a termination period validate the alleged permanence of the Durand Line Agreement?

After the formation of Pakistan in 1947, there was no formal agreement or ratification of the agreement or treaties pertaining to the Durand Line between Islamabad and Kabul.

Afghanistan, in fact, repudiated the various treaties signed with the British in a loya jirga held in July 1949. These included the 1879 Treaty of Gandamak, the Durand Line Agreement of 1893, the Anglo–Afghan Pact of 1905, the Treaty of Rawalpindi of 1919, and the Anglo–Afghan Treaty of 1921.

No Afghan government since 1949 has abandoned this standpoint. Even the Taliban, who were very close allies of Pakistan, did not recognise the Line—neither in the 1996–2001 period, nor since August 2021, till the time of the interview. On the contrary, the Taliban have called the issue unresolved and at places have even stopped Pakistan from constructing the fence.

This issue does have the potential for creating tensions between the Islamic Emirate and Pakistan, especially if the Taliban continue to disrupt the construction of the remaining portion of the fence.

RS: The presence of Al-Qaeda (AQ), Al-Qaeda in the Indian Subcontinent (AQIS), and Islamic State Khorasan Province (ISKP) in Afghanistan poses a difficult challenge not just for the US in the region but has significant security implications for India. In your assessment, what steps should India take to not only subvert this threat, but also maintain a working (if not diplomatic) relationship with the Taliban while bypassing Pakistan?

TD: This issue needs to be viewed in a larger perspective. India has had civilisational links with the Pashtuns going back to the Mahabharata and the Mauryas as well as the Buddhist and Hindu kingdoms in what is now Afghanistan.

In more recent times, India has provided Afghanistan with assistance of more than three billion US dollars for various people-friendly projects. There was much appreciation of Indian efforts across the board in Afghanistan. India would like to retain such goodwill at the level of the people of Afghanistan.

Whereas the presence of the AQ, AQIS, and ISKP in Afghanistan has significant security implications for India, it is fairly well known that Pakistan has relocated terrorists of India-focused groups such as the Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT) and Jaish-e-Mohammed (JeM) to ungoverned spaces, especially in eastern Afghanistan. The recent letter that Pakistan wrote to the Afghan authorities about the presence of Masood Azhar in Afghanistan bears testimony to this.

The Taliban, too, realise that India is the only country in the neighbourhood that could provide them humanitarian support, as long as India’s security interests are taken care of.

Given the stronghold of terrorists in Afghanistan, many of whom are Pakistan sponsored, India has to adopt requisite strategies. Apart from beefing up our own security grid, a direct working relationship with the Taliban could assist in meeting our security requirements. The Taliban, too, realise that India is the only country in the neighbourhood that could provide them humanitarian support, as long as India’s security interests are taken care of.

Hence, mutual interests could develop and that would lead to a direct working engagement without recognition of the Taliban regime.

RS: In the book, you mention that Pashtunistan has had one fundamental weakness— “lack of internal resources to pay for governance and defence” (p. xxviii). This has resulted in dependence on foreign sources of revenue and aid and, thereby, interference in domestic affairs. As the Taliban look for ways to unfreeze their assets in the US and scramble for funds, do you think their dependence on Pakistan will continue to increase? What role can India play?

Throughout history, Afghanistan has suffered from an inability to generate internal sources of revenue.

TD: Throughout history, Afghanistan has suffered from an inability to generate internal sources of revenue. Thus, Ahmad Shah Durrani raided India in the 18th century; 19th-century rulers got substantial subsidies and weapons from the British in exchange, of course, for territory and sovereignty; and the Musahiban in the 20th century leveraged the Cold War rivalry between the Soviet Union and the US to modernise Afghanistan’s military and develop its economy. The Communist People’s Democratic Party of Afghanistan (PDPA) depended almost entirely on resources from the Soviet Union; the Taliban 1.0 looked to Pakistan, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates; the governments of presidents Hamid Karzai and Ashraf Ghani were equally dependent on the US and other Western countries. Taliban 2.0 are now looking to unfreeze Afghan assets in the US. The downside of such an economic model has been the erosion of domestic legitimacy on the one hand and giving regional powers the opportunity to interfere for the sake of their interests, on the other.

Pakistan is not in a position to do the heavy lifting that is required to stave off a humanitarian crisis in Afghanistan. The Taliban knows this, and hence it is unlikely that their dependence on Pakistan would increase. In fact, the Taliban would be looking for other benefactors, especially India.

In reality, trade with its neighbours has been one of Afghanistan’s main economic activities. However, Pakistan has been blocking Indo–Afghan trade despite professing faith in geo-economics and connectivity. It allowed the transit of 50,000 tonnes of wheat donated by India to Afghanistan for humanitarian assistance with some amount of difficulty. It would be necessary for countries invested in the region to prevail on Pakistan to permit direct Indo–Afghan trade. This would reduce the likelihood of cross-border implications of a growing humanitarian crisis in Afghanistan.

 

About the author:

Tilak Devasher is the author of four widely acclaimed books on Pakistan: Pakistan: Courting the Abyss (December 2016); Pakistan: At the Helm (July 2018); Pakistan: The Balochistan Conundrum (July 2019); and now, The Pashtuns: A Contested History (September 2022).

He retired as Special Secretary, Cabinet Secretariat, Government of India, in October 2014. He is currently a member of the National Security Advisory Board (NSAB) and a consultant with the Vivekananda International Foundation. During his professional career, Mr Devasher served in Jammu and Kashmir, Delhi, and abroad. He specialised in security issues, especially pertaining to India’s neighbourhood. Post-retirement, he has continued to take a keen interest in such issues, with a special focus on Pakistan. Mr Devasher has taken to writing after superannuation. Apart from his books, he has written articles for a host of newspapers, magazines, and think tank journals. He is a regular contributor to the Indian Express and Tribune and contributes occasionally to India Today. He also appears frequently on TV talk shows.

The post Decoding the Pashtuns in the Afghanistan–Pakistan Region first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/decoding-the-pashtuns-in-the-afghanistan-pakistan-region/feed/ 0 896705
The Media in Afghanistan: Local Perceptions of Regional Players http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-media-in-afghanistan-local-perceptions-of-regional-players/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-media-in-afghanistan-local-perceptions-of-regional-players http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-media-in-afghanistan-local-perceptions-of-regional-players/#respond Thu, 10 Nov 2022 11:39:58 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896682 In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Nitika Nayar interviews Hazrat Bahar, on his book chapter, “Image of China in Afghan Media."

The post The Media in Afghanistan: Local Perceptions of Regional Players first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Nitika Nayar interviews Hazrat Bahar, on his book chapter, “Image of China in Afghan Media,” published in China and South Asia: Changing Regional Dynamics, Development and Power Play (ed. Rajiv Ranjan and Guo Changgang), Routledge, in 2022.

‘Telling China’s story well’ has become integral to China’s efforts to shape international opinion in support of its global ambitions. There has been a growing body of scholarship in South Asia that examines how China influences local institutions, including the media, to steer domestic narratives in a favourable direction to secure its interests. Much less attention, however, has been paid to how China is reported on and portrayed in these countries. Bahar’s research is a notable exception.

Using a framing conceptual framework to analyse media stories published by mainstream news outlets in Afghanistan, Bahar’s research examines how China is represented by the Afghan media. His findings are based on coverage of China by three news outlets, namely Pajhwok Afghan News (PAN), Hasht e Sobh (HeS), and The Kabul Times (KT), over one year between 2018 and 2019 – a time before the Taliban takeover of Kabul, when the democratic government in power still guaranteed press freedom.

His research finds that over one year, as many as 228 stories mentioned China directly or indirectly, and the tone of a majority of these (128 stories) was favourable, presenting China as “the second-largest economy cooperating with Afghanistan on peace, counterterrorism, trade, investment and infrastructure development” (p. 191). On the other hand, the 20 stories that carried an unfavourable tone mentioned the influence of China over Pakistan and its reluctance to put pressure on the latter to help bring peace and security to Afghanistan.

Notably, none of the unfavourable media stories highlighted significant irritants in the bilateral relationship, including project delays by Chinese state-owned companies in Afghanistan. Instead, these media outlets reflected the state’s official foreign policy on China as a ‘strategic partner’, and, in some cases, even buried reports investigating these delays to avoid any backlash.

As China expands its presence in India’s immediate neighbourhood across a range of new sectors, media is an important tool for policymakers to gauge how these countries perceive and respond to this new influence, and, moreover, how China leverages these local institutions to further its objectives in the region.

Nitika Nayar: In your research, you find that China has established working relations with media practitioners in Afghanistan since 2001. In return, how have local journalists, including the newspaper editors and owners you interviewed, responded to these efforts and come to perceive China in their personal capacity?

Hazrat Bahar: China, compared to other great powers, has maintained a lower profile in Afghanistan. Although China had affirmed the US invasion, it did not contribute militarily and financially. However, this does not mean that it did nothing. China was interested in the natural resources of Afghanistan, which it has also invested in, but it became hesitant when the security situation started worsening. For example, the Mes Aynak mine extraction project worth $ 2.9 billion awarded to two Chinese state-owned companies in 2008 has been delayed due to contractual disputes and security concerns. It maintained state-level engagement with the Afghan government while establishing relations with the Taliban, who were invited to Beijing in 2016 and 2021 to encourage them to start negotiations for a political settlement. This view of China playing a ‘not very active’ role was prevalent in Afghanistan. Local journalists were no exception. They perceived China as a neutral player when it came to Afghanistan, although China did share concerns about the long-term military existence of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) in Afghanistan.

[Local journalists] perceived China as a neutral player when it came to Afghanistan.

China invited and provided training to some journalists in Beijing; thus, they established a friendly relationship. Apart from that, some media outlets received financial support for producing and broadcasting media content, including Chinese language lessons, for example, Kabul News and Spogmai Radio. However, some journalists expected China to do more, particularly in forcing Pakistan to play a serious and realistic role in peace talks between the Taliban and Afghan government.

NN: Your chapter looks at coverage of China by mainstream news outlets that are predominantly located in Kabul and publish in the English language. How do the more provincial news outlets, including the vernacular press as well as other media forms (such as radio and television), cover China? How is their impact on shaping local perceptions and public opinion different from the mainstream outlets covered in your study?

HB: Local media, mainly radios, provide a great chunk of content to the local and rural population. And more than 70 percent of Afghans live in remote and rural areas. Since local media do not have much resources to produce media content, they were reliant on news produced by mainstream media. Most often, they copied and paraphrased such content. In other words, the coverage of mainstream and local media wasn’t very different from one another. When it comes to the impact of media, surveys show that a great number of people in Afghanistan receive news information through multiple media channels. Based on media effects theories, we can conclude that people exposed to media are impacted by its coverage. I should be cautious in generalizing what our study found; however, it can be stated that people (urban and rural) are impacted and such impact may not be very different at the central and provincial levels.

NN: Your study looks at news coverage between 2018 and 2019 and finds that the media reflected the Afghan state’s official policy on China during this time. Since the Taliban established an interim government in Kabul, the media landscape in Afghanistan has been increasingly regulated. How has coverage of China and also India and other regional players changed since?

HB: I have recently conducted 25 in-depth interviews with journalists who are in Afghanistan. Apart from that, I have also monitored and analysed news on prominent mainstream media. Findings show that freedom of media has been noticeably impacted following the collapse of the previous government in mid-August 2021, and critical reporting has been confined only to the involvement of the international community, or precisely, to NATO. The Taliban government has been imposing and implementing its new policy on media, and this has been more visible in local media compared to media in Kabul. Free media have been severely affected, however, media in Kabul are still in a better position compared to those in the provinces. Media practitioners have been warned and arrested for broadcasting sheer music let alone critically reporting current affairs in provinces, I have been told by multiple media owners. Local media don’t risk or can’t dare to question any wrongdoings of the Taliban government.

Findings show that freedom of media has been noticeably impacted following the collapse of the previous government in mid-August 2021, and critical reporting has been confined only to the involvement of the international community, or precisely, to NATO.

Regional players need to be differentiated. For example, China was and still is considered somehow a neutral player, India as pro-Islamic Republic of Afghanistan (the erstwhile civilian government in Afghanistan led by President Ashraf Ghani prior to the current interim government under the Taliban) although it has started normalizing its relationship with the Islamic Emirate of Afghanistan (IEA) under the Taliban, and Pakistan was and is pro-IEA. A great number of people, mainly supporters and sympathizers of the previous government, are sensitive about media reports focusing on or portraying Pakistan favorably. The media understand this point and are cautiously covering such issues; the official stance of the Taliban is different. To obtain political recognition, the Taliban are trying to establish relations with the international community including China and India. Since China had already established relations, though at a low level, with the Taliban, and given the current involvement of China and the Taliban, media coverage of China has been favourable. Criticism by China of the United States’ role in Afghanistan has been enthusiastically reported in Afghanistan. When it comes to India, my research finds no unfavourable coverage.

Reports of India providing wheat, extending assistance to earthquake-hit areas, reopening its embassy in Kabul, and the return of security cadres who finished their training in India have been positively reported [by the Afghan media].

In addition, reports of India providing wheat, extending assistance to earthquake-hit areas, reopening its embassy in Kabul, and the return of security cadres who finished their training in India have been positively reported. This is despite the fact that India and the Taliban had tense relations in the past. However, it seems the nature of their relations has been softening and changing, which surely affects media coverage as well.

NN: Your article focuses on how China is represented in Afghan media and news coverage. Given your time spent in Shanghai as a scholar, how has Afghanistan been portrayed by the Chinese media in return?

HB: Generally speaking, as per my observation, I did not notice extensive coverage and representation of Afghanistan particularly between 2018 to 2020. However, Afghanistan was mostly portrayed in context of issues concerning the United States, war, narcotics, natural resources, and the Belt and Road Initiative. Chinese media, in line with the country’s foreign policy, expressed that Afghanistan had been invaded; that the NATO involvement should have had a clear timeline; and that as neighbouring countries, the two could co-exist peacefully; Afghanistan has the potential to attract foreign investment only after its security is guaranteed. Chinese media, as always, strictly follow their state’s narrative and foreign policy.

 

About the author:

Hazrat Bahar is a Faculty Member in the School of Journalism at Shaikh Zayed University, Afghanistan, and Postdoctoral Fellow at Leipzig University, Germany. He has received a Ph.D. in Media and Communication from Shanghai University, China, and M.A. in International Relations from International University of Japan, Japan. His interests include the effects of social media, media in Afghanistan, and political communication.

E-Mail ID: bahar@iuj.ac.jp

Twitter: @hazratbahar

The post The Media in Afghanistan: Local Perceptions of Regional Players first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-media-in-afghanistan-local-perceptions-of-regional-players/feed/ 0 896682
It is Unfair to Push Poor Countries to Reach Zero Carbon Emissions too Early http://stg.csep.org/blog/it-is-unfair-to-push-poor-countries-to-reach-zero-carbon-emissions-too-early/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=it-is-unfair-to-push-poor-countries-to-reach-zero-carbon-emissions-too-early http://stg.csep.org/blog/it-is-unfair-to-push-poor-countries-to-reach-zero-carbon-emissions-too-early/#respond Thu, 27 Oct 2022 08:39:28 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896639 Rahul Tongia argues about the need to shift the conversation from futuristic Net-Zero ambitions toward practical and equitable emissions trajectories in this year's COP.

The post It is Unfair to Push Poor Countries to Reach Zero Carbon Emissions too Early first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Last year, climate action was all about declaring dates for achieving net-zero carbon emissions. At the 2021 UN’s climate change conference in Glasgow, COP26, India pledged that it would reach net-zero by 2070, a date just 10 years behind China, despite its per capita emissions being some 30 years behind China’s and only half the present world average. COP27 is just days away, but this year many countries are distracted with energy security issues, instead of upping their game for more aggressive emissions cuts.

This COP, we must shift the conversation from futuristic net-zero ambitions toward practical and equitable emissions trajectories. The rich and overall high emitters have to reduce emissions aggressively, while the low-emissions poor must lower their growth rate of emissions on a credible path toward zero.

Development from a very low base inevitably means the poor must increase their emissions in the short term. The good news is this should still fit within global emissions targets if high emitters reduce emissions quickly up front. Unfortunately, the push toward zero has been interpreted as a prohibition on public support for new unabated fossil fuel energy. This is both unfair and unviable.

DEVELOPING NATIONS NEED ENERGY, WHICH MAY REQUIRE A LITTLE FOSSIL FUEL

Developing countries are being asked to “leapfrog” to renewable energy (RE). However, if we don’t allow any new fossil fuel investments, then RE is difficult to scale because it’s intermittent. How do you meet the evening peak electricity demand with solar power? Batteries are still very expensive. Today’s optimal electricity grid design may maximize RE by relying on minimal fossil fuels for occasional peak needs. Batteries should soon be able to meet much or even most of the peaks cost-effectively, but if one designs for zero fossil fuel, then it’s very expensive.

The good news is that simply having some fossil fuel capacity doesn’t mean it will get used much – the marginal cost of RE (and a battery) is virtually zero, once built. As my research group modeled for India in detail, an optimal design focuses on high RE first, without worrying about storage just yet. The cost savings from not over-ambitiously getting down to zero carbon can be spent on accelerating up-front decarbonization, which lowers cumulative emissions.

For the poorest of the poor, the real need is electricity access, regardless of fuel. Sub-Saharan Africa is where most people lacking modern energy services live. Giving 250 million homes electricity connectivity, with 35 kWh/month usage (enough for a TV, refrigerator, and fan), even entirely from coal, would only be 0.25% of global emissions. And most new builds don’t rely on coal – solar is already far cheaper, at least for the daytime.

A push towards RE-only has created pressure to not finance natural gas in poorer countries, despite them being told for decades that natural gas was a bridge fuel to a cleaner future, and one that would avoid the use of coal. This pressure hurts not just energy security but also food security. Recently, there was global pushback against a natural gas fertilizer plant planned in Bangladesh that would be three times more efficient than older designs. This isn’t climate justice.

Developing regions want to minimize their use of fossil fuels, such as India’s ambition to achieve 500 GW of non-fossil electricity capacity by 2030. This would quadruple India’s current RE capacity (excluding hydropower), and more than double its current total installed capacity. But rising RE doesn’t mean switching off coal prematurely before viable alternatives emerge, more so because India’s cumulative emissions from all sources would still be modest. In reality, India’s 2019 per capita coal consumption was only half the world average when we adjust India’s tons consumed. This is because of its lower energy content per ton, which means lower emissions.  In contrast, India used only about 22% of the world average of oil and gas per capita.

Globally, total oil and gas emissions were 25% more than from coal, even after factoring in coal-based emissions from cement. Thus, it is inconsistent to focus disproportionally on lower coal use instead of lower total emissions. It is also inconsistent to focus on emissions created by new builds in developing regions, instead of emissions from already built infrastructure that is overwhelmingly in high-emissions regions.

The poor need more energy, and much of it will be clean energy which is already viable. It’s the last fraction of energy that is hard to keep fossil-free. It can be done – at a cost. That cost should disproportionally be borne by the rich, first as they go full zero and pay the early adopter premium, and second, through financial support for developing nations. The premium is important, not just to cover the cost of developing batteries, but also for green hydrogen to avoid industrial emissions.

Such support should be part of promised aid or concessional finance and certainly not more traditional debt. At COP15 in 2009, there was a pledge to provide $100 billion of annual climate support for the poor by 2020, but the form such support would take was never specified. Sadly, the pledged funds haven’t yet fully materialized, and the date has since been pushed back to 2023.

Many developing countries are asking for funds due to climate-related “loss and damage.” How much materializes remains to be seen. Regardless of what form it takes, all climate finance support should be flexible, allowing recipients to not just mitigate their emissions, but also pay towards adaptation and resilience.

PRESENT NET-ZERO PLANS ARE NOT JUST UNFAIR – THEY ARE INSUFFICIENT

The focus on “net-zero” also brings with it many other problems, including of accounting and fairness. Today’s offsets are often accounting tricks, whereby an entity helps avoid emissions elsewhere, often in a developing country, and claims that as negative for them. Financiers discussing offsets have repeatedly told me “All carbon is equal.”  John Kerry recently told African leaders “Mother nature does not care where those emissions come from”.

These physical realities miss several issues. First, if all carbon is equal, then we cannot ignore historically accumulated carbon. Second, when considering offsets, paying to avoid future emissions elsewhere doesn’t negate emissions – it simply avoids growth. Not to mention a lot of “carbon finance” is just a label. It’s often not additional money and, even worse, is routinely debt funding for things like solar projects which would find funding anyways. Third, avoiding all carbon isn’t equal. Cheaper low-hanging fruit like offsets in poorer countries must not absolve the rich from aggressively ending their emissions from hard-to-abate sectors like home heating, industry, and transportation. The recent U.S. Inflation Reduction Act was a step in this direction by focusing on increasing the supply and use of clean energy.

Keeping the world within 1.5°C maximum average temperature rise needs aggressive steps and while most countries are doing more than in the past, their targets don’t add up to staying within 1.5°C. Even worse, their policies and actions don’t match the targets. Countries like the UK and the United States tout lowered emissions, but that’s from a very high base, and they also benefited from a one-time shift from coal to cheap gas, which isn’t available to many poorer countries. Another issue is many developed nations import a large fraction of their emissions as embedded carbon, which doesn’t show up in national emissions accounting. The UK imported 41% of domestic emissions as embedded carbon in 2019, growing from 11% in 1990.

The rich already have saturated development: the cars, refrigerators, roads, and homes they need to build are mostly replacement stock, although they will also need infrastructure to support the clean energy transition. However, poorer countries’ growth needs are far more than just replacement of fossil fuels with zero-carbon infrastructure. Given such high growth can’t be met easily by zero-carbon solutions, their emissions will need to rise in the short run. But the poor’s rise in emissions will be less than the likely failure in reduction by high emitters in the coming decade.

RICH COUNTRIES MUST REDUCE THEIR EMISSIONS FASTER

Achieving net zero emissions by 2050 requires a 3.3% reduction each year from 2020, assuming a constant annual decline. However, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC)’s special report on staying within 1.5°C maximum average temperature rise stated we need a faster reduction up front: a 45% decline by 2030 from 2010 levels. Unfortunately, global fossil CO2 emissions grew by 10% from 2010 to 2019. Thus, in this decade, we need to accelerate the decline and also get to zero sooner to make up for the extra emissions in the previous decade. This means that to achieve the 1.5°C goal, the annual decline must be more than twice as fast as the IPCC report suggests. And the decline must be even greater from richer high-emitting countries.

Unfortunately, high emitters have collectively never reduced their emissions over a decadal timespan. The UK, the top performer out of the G7 countries, reduced its domestic CO2 emissions by 35% from 1990 to 2019. But this is only an 1.2% annual reduction, falling short by more than 2% annually compared to the 3.3% target. And this is ignoring imports of embedded carbon.

Not only do we need high emitters to aggressively reduce emissions, but buried in the details of the IPCC report and far less publicized is IPCC’s finding that virtually all pathways within a 1.5°C temperature rise or with limited overshoot also require significant Carbon Dioxide Removal (CDR). While planting trees is one technique, it doesn’t scale well, more so for developing regions where land pressures are higher. Plus, we have the risk of trees and their stored carbon going up in smoke with forest fires.

Many CDR plans involve literally sucking carbon dioxide out of the air for long-term storage, an expensive prospect through direct air capture. The volumes that must be removed are enormous. Taking a mid-range IPCC estimate, 500 Gt of CO2 removal means 10 Gt/year for the second half the century, or about a quarter of present annual emissions every year. This burden must also not fall on the low emitters of today, the poor, even if they represent a high­­­­­ share of global emissions post-2050. This is because the need for CDR is overwhelmingly due to over-emissions by today’s high emitters. Also, expectations of future CDR should not become a rationalization for not mitigating today.

WHAT DO DEVELOPING REGIONS NEED?

RE is already viable at large scale, but its deployment in many developing regions lags its potential. This is where developed countries can help through improved finance (especially cheaper capital). While many cross-border projects carry risks, some of the risks could either be shared by developed countries or mitigated by multilateral agencies who can provide counter-guarantees or other risk-reduction mechanisms.

At COP26, a coalition of financiers announced $130 trillion was available for the transition, but this money is the gross total funding pool, and not necessarily incremental money available to pay a premium for becoming carbon-free. The good news is that financial help as climate support is only required for the incremental cost of going green, akin to viability gap funding, and not all the costs.

In addition to finance, access to state-of-the-art technology is also important. While much of this may be owned by the private sector, government nudges and incentives can help.  As well as technology, countries need secure supply chains. Given many of the global minerals for clean energy are concentrated or controlled by a handful of countries, developing countries need help to ensure they aren’t last in line or forced to pay a premium. COVID-19 and Russia’s war in Ukraine showed how the poor became the last to get access to vaccines or global supply chains.

Growing RE is one part of the solution. But given existing fossil fuel plants in developing regions (especially new ones) aren’t going away any time soon, we need to make them cleaner, more efficient, and flexible. Unfortunately, a global finance model of “don’t touch any fossil fuel project” means a missed opportunity to reduce local air pollution and make the transition less expensive.

COP27 is an opportunity for countries to not just ratchet up their ambitions, but also give credence to their ambitions. We need aggressive targets for all countries – but the targets won’t be the same everywhere. Poorer countries already face the brunt of climate change, but they want to do their fair share of mitigation. They may even do some amount of unfair share. But this cannot mean climate absolutism.

The post It is Unfair to Push Poor Countries to Reach Zero Carbon Emissions too Early first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/it-is-unfair-to-push-poor-countries-to-reach-zero-carbon-emissions-too-early/feed/ 0 896639
Fresh Perspectives on Border Studies: A Regional Account http://stg.csep.org/blog/fresh-perspectives-on-border-studies-a-regional-account/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fresh-perspectives-on-border-studies-a-regional-account http://stg.csep.org/blog/fresh-perspectives-on-border-studies-a-regional-account/#respond Tue, 27 Sep 2022 09:42:24 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896527 If South Asia gets connected to Central Asia, three South Asian countries will reap maximum benefits - India, Pakistan, and Afghanistan.

The post Fresh Perspectives on Border Studies: A Regional Account first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Anushka Saxena interviews Dhananjay Tripathi, Chairperson, Department of International Relations at the South Asian University, on his book, Re-imagining Border Studies in South Asia, published by Routledge in 2021.

The book creates a foundational framework to explain why, despite being one of the fastest economically growing regions in the world, South Asia has yet to witness greater socio-economic integration by means of cross-border engagement and effective cooperation in regional governance. Using different frames and case studies across fourteen chapters, the book explains how borders and border regions in South Asia must play an integral role in transforming regional dynamics, while also creating scope for political peace and interdependent economic growth. A unique aspect of the book is that it lays equal emphasis on the significance of land and maritime borders, as well as internal and external borders and their dynamic nature.

This seminal and timely book does an excellent job at laying the theoretical and practical groundwork to understand the significance of borders for both state and non-state actors. From heavily influencing China’s current aggressive external policy towards its neighbourhood, to forming the psychological basis for the separation of identities across territorial lines, borders are not just “cartographic lines on the map,” but also have “histories of their own” (p. 43). At the same time, the authors within the book put an optimistic spin on the existence of cross-country differences by strategizing how borders can be used for negotiation and cooperation. This is evident from the case studies of energy connectivity in South Asia and the India-China transboundary water conflict, among others.

The book is divided into four sections, with chapters exploring theoretical frameworks for understanding border studies, regional connectivity and economy, border securitization, and the life and society of borderlands. In the Indian context, the detailed analyses presented by the book carry great contemporary relevance, whether on the issue of center-state relations extending to national borderlands, or on the blueprints for enhancing potential cross-border cooperation in the neighbourhood and beyond.

Anushka Saxena: The book argues that challenges to regionalism in South Asia, caused primarily due to the “waning of the liberal trade architecture” (p. 109), have stalled the overall economic integration and growth of the region. How can India drive up intraregional trade levels while balancing the drastic impact of factors such as disputes with Pakistan, an economic crisis in Sri Lanka, and the increasing protectionism in traditional markets of the West?

If South Asia gets connected to Central Asia, three South Asian countries will reap maximum benefits – India, Pakistan, and Afghanistan.

Dhananjay Tripathi: India is a big player in the region and the largest economy. It is certainly better placed to assist other South Asian countries. India positively and quickly responded to the crisis in Sri Lanka and extended support to other countries in the region like the Maldives. It is also willing to promote regional development, which explains its current strategy toward South Asia. While Indian efforts are essential, its small South Asian neighbours have apprehensions. It is popularly believed that India, due to its economic strength, may replace indigenous production in other South Asian countries. India needs to be sensitive to this, has to make bold decisions, and prioritize regional trade, but small countries too have to re-think such propositions. The liberal trading system will benefit everyone in the region, particularly when the West has started looking inwards. The recent economic growth in the region is a result of the successful integration of regional economies into the world. When there is no hesitation toward globalization, why is there a hesitation for regionalism? We have no easy answers to the India – Pakistan question but cooperation will benefit both. If South Asia gets connected to Central Asia, three South Asian countries will reap maximum benefits – India, Pakistan, and Afghanistan. We have to think in terms of geo-economics.

AS: Using examples of Haats on the India-Bangladesh border and settlements in the Thar Desert, the book argues that there exist informal economies and trading communities in India’s borderlands. They depict a stark picture of how borders are perceived and utilized so differently by local communities than by the union government. How can Delhi leverage local knowledge and understanding to articulate better policies on cross-border trade, or on the environmental protection of the borderlands?

South Asia is a unique region – we are politically divided, economically not so integrated, but socially and culturally close to each other.

DT: South Asia is a unique region – we are politically divided, economically not so integrated, but socially and culturally close to each other. This dichotomous character of South Asia is quite apparent in border regions. The border represents the territorial limit of a state and, therefore, is guarded militarily. At the same time, borders also exhibit artificiality where states use ample force to deter the movement of ordinary people, imposing the concept of citizenship. Still, in socially and culturally connected regions like South Asia, people always invent ways to interact with each other and exchange/trade goods. For a border studies scholar, the Border Haat is like an official acknowledgment of economic connections between communities divided by borders. Although operating under strict rules and state surveillance, the Border Haats are regarded as a success, particularly because of the significant impact it has on border communities. Tripura wanted to open more Border Haats for this reason. While, at present, it is difficult to accept that the national capitals of this region will prioritize border trade over traditional security issues, we have to rethink our long-term policies. The same is true for India-Pakistan, where the volume of informal trade is more than formal trade. These political divisions may persist in some form or another in the near future. However, the way to address this is to allow border trade and formalize it because we have failed to deter economic connection between border communities in all these years, despite our best efforts. Every country will benefit if border trade in South Asia is given legal sanctity and promoted by the governments.

[T]he Border Haat is like an official acknowledgment of economic connections between communities divided by borders

AS: India has water disputes with several of its neighbours. From facing China’s “hydro-hegemony” (p. 199) to engaging in complex negotiations over waters of the Indus and Teesta rivers with Pakistan and Bangladesh respectively, India has gained considerable experience in dealing with the securitization of water boundaries. In this light, what are some of the best practices for the Indian state in specific and other South Asian states embroiled in transboundary water disputes in general, to deal with the resultant security dilemma?

DT: Water, as we know, is a complex issue in South Asia. Thankfully, we have still not indulged in any significant conflict on the water issue. Even during the height of political tensions between India and Pakistan, at least the Indus water treaty remained untouched and functional. Thus, there has been a willingness on the part of South Asian countries to resolve critical water disputes amicably. India, indeed based on its own experience, can contribute to this understanding. Although the situation in South Asia has changed over the years, we also need better preparation to deal with the looming concern of climate change. The 2022 IPCC report regards South Asia as a vulnerable region. Climate change is a cross-border issue, and just like water sharing, requires patience and understanding to be dealt with. Here, India has to use its expertise to create a conducive environment, ensuring that South Asian countries cooperate on climate change issues.

AS: With globalization, there has been a transformation in how states and non-state actors understand borders. This is evident from the fact that the Internet has created a “virtual space distinct from (but interconnected with) geographical boundaries” (p. 230). In this regard, how must we interpret attempts to create “cyber-borders” in an age where both scholarly and policy debates are trying to draw a balance between the concepts of ‘national security’ and the ‘right to information’?

DT:  The ‘cyber border’ is a new reality, but a lack of awareness exists. Even in academic circles, there are fewer discussions on these new kinds of borders that exist virtually but nowadays govern our lives in a big way. Lately, we have noticed that the cyber world is getting territorialized, and big powers are quite determined to control this space. In this, it is imperative that the other medium and small world states also try to assert control in cyberspace, making it more complex in the future. With our massive dependence on the cyber world, it is now an integral part of the national security of any country. This chapter draws our attention to this subject in a specific context; nevertheless, it has enough references for an interested scholar to work on. Yes, with the securitization of cyberspace, states wanted to regulate it, even though it was assumed to be an open, borderless space. Any black-and-white answer at this stage to the question is a little tricky because things are still in their nascent stage and evolving. Although, I prefer a more open and borderless cyber world.

AS: Border studies is an emerging field in India. For example, the book rightly highlights that issues such as the India-Sri Lanka fishermen disputes or the center-periphery disparity deserve as much focus as the India-Pakistan or India-China border tensions. In this light, what steps do you think should be undertaken to enable a shift, or rather, a transformation in the academic approach to this growing field?

DT: A pertinent question. The study of borders in South Asia, particularly in India, is primarily viewed from the security perspective. The post-colonial and post-partition South Asia is still very fixated on the idea of territoriality and is politically unwilling to move beyond a very conventional understanding of borders. This conceptualization of borders in South Asia limits the research agenda. This is not good for a developing region like South Asia, which faces several development challenges. We must cooperate, promote regional trade, and adopt an overall forward approach. There is a need for research on themes like border connectivity, borderland communities, border economics, borders, and climate change, and certainly border security, thereby going beyond the traditional security issues. At present, there is also a lack of institutional support for Border Studies in South Asia. We must learn from China, which is consciously backing research on borders and from varied perspectives. This is essential even for India. We need a few dedicated departments on Border Studies in universities, and think tanks must also come forward to endorse Border Studies. We can contribute immensely to the field, provided it gets the necessary support and encouragement.

About the author:

Dhananjay Tripathi is an Associate Professor and Chairperson at the Department of International Relations, South Asian Univesity.

E-Mail ID: dhananajay@sau.ac.in.

 

 

 

 

 

Anushka Saxena is a former Research Intern in the Foreign Policy & Security Studies vertical at CSEP. She is a Master’s Student at the O.P Jindal Global University and a Research Intern at the Institute of Chinese Studies, New Delhi.

The post Fresh Perspectives on Border Studies: A Regional Account first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/fresh-perspectives-on-border-studies-a-regional-account/feed/ 0 896527
Follow-up Thoughts on India’s Grid 2030: A Glass Half Cloudy http://stg.csep.org/blog/follow-up-thoughts-on-indias-grid-2030-a-glass-half-cloudy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=follow-up-thoughts-on-indias-grid-2030-a-glass-half-cloudy http://stg.csep.org/blog/follow-up-thoughts-on-indias-grid-2030-a-glass-half-cloudy/#respond Thu, 25 Aug 2022 07:53:35 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896349 India should aggressively go down the RE path, but not focus on just RE. Energy efficiency, smart systems, energy security, local manufacturing, livelihoods, fiscal balances, etc. are all very important.

The post Follow-up Thoughts on India’s Grid 2030: A Glass Half Cloudy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Read the paper Balancing India’s 2030 Electricity Grid Needs Management of Time Granularity and Uncertainty: Insights from a Parametric Model.

Our recent study on India’s electricity grid in 2030 showed high renewable energy (RE) is cost-effective for India, even as variable RE (VRE), i.e., before considering storage. The link has a summary of findings. However, based on discussions or comments from multiple experts, a number of people seem to have chosen to catch only one interpretation of the plausible future grid in 2030 (or maybe not read all the gory details).

One could state RE is the answer, or one could state RE is helpful, but fossil fuels remain critical. Both views would be correct.  Another interpretation of our study would be that the optimality of storage with RE suggests the end of fossil fuels, but that is also incorrect. Under almost all scenarios, the output from coal plants will grow in the coming years. It’s only if both RE and storage grow, and many other assumptions align, including on modest demand growth and high RE output, do we see peak coal from electricity before 2030.  All such analyses are only for utility-based power (matching India’s NDC targets), but such a benchmark ignores captive power, which is overwhelmingly coal-based.

A key takeaway this note aims to emphasise is that assumptions matter, and variability and uncertainty are the key issues India’s grid will face in 2030.

A few factors are trends and constraints for a cost-effective electricity portfolio, regardless of uncertainty:

  1. RE’s and storage’s costs are declining;
  2. India has “enjoyed” the benefits of surplus coal capacity, which meets the peak even with rising variable RE (VRE, i.e., RE that isn’t dispatchable or “firm”). This has come at a cost;
  3. Most of the focus (and recent investment) has been on growing RE;
  4. Most planning has yet to consider system level issues, including time of day issues, in full.

It is incorrect to consider RE and coal as “either-or”. As we wrote before, it’s going to be a case of how do we manage both in a portfolio? The criteria or objectives aren’t just RE versus coal, but also issues of new builds versus existing, which location (which impacts coal’s marginal costs), and which time of day (solar is expensive in the evening if we add storage).

While RE is important and 450 GW appears cost-effective based on price trends, VRE isn’t enough. The study assumed very aggressive growth of RE – meeting the 450 GW target is itself a challenge, and also assumed forward looking high RE plant load factors (PLFs—also termed capacity utilization factors, or CUFs). If India doesn’t produce as much energy from RE as modeled in 2030, regardless of whether due to delayed capacity growth or the vagaries of generation based on a naturally varying resource (we only used one year [2019]’s data), the insufficiency of RE to meet rising demand would be even higher.  Simply put, the energy from very high RE barely meets rising demand even before we consider time of day constraints.  We also have enormous uncertainty in the trajectory for meeting 450 GW of RE by 2030.[1] If this grows in a CAGR style (growing more and more over time), as opposed to linearly (equally), then this could risk further shortfalls of supply for certain years before 2030.

On the cost front, no one knows how trends will (or won’t) continue over 10 years. We’ve already seen upticks in prices in recent years, blamed on COVID, supply-chain issues, China, and the war on Ukraine, not to mention Indian tariffs on selected imports. An issue that is not widely recognised—in terms of hardware (solar panels), in 2021 India enjoyed the cheapest installed hardware costs in the world. It’s only high costs of capital that prevent it from having the cheapest levelized costs of energy. But the question then becomes two-fold. First, how is hardware so cheap in India? Are panels used elsewhere superior in terms of quality? Second, if India enjoys such low-cost hardware, then does this mean its price reductions over time can’t be as good as the global average trend going forward?

These prices are just based on the current equilibrium. If we consider the enormous scale planned in India (and globally), issues of critical materials and land will grow.  On the other hand, technological and engineering breakthroughs may accelerate price improvements. However, we need to focus on Indian costs. We anticipate more manufacturing in India, but until the key factors (logistics, costs of capital, cost of electricity) improve, no amount of “cheap labour” will make Indian modules as cheap as those from the dominant supplier of today (China, historical supplier of 90% of India’s cells).  And if we rely on global innovation and price reductions, the rupee is likely to depreciate at a few percent per annum at the least. The Reserve Bank of India and experts believe the rupee is over-valued.  This makes the economics even more uncertain.

Out of fossil fuels, a coal plant has high fixed costs, ideal for not just firm (i.e., dispatchable) but so-termed baseload power. That entire concept will need to be revisited in a high RE future, where in the middle of the day coal’s output needs to come down to its technical limits. India’s RE plans are disproportionally solar-driven given its wind resources are not as good as parts of Europe or N. America (and the best sites are already taken, albeit with older technologies, ripe for repowering).

Batteries aren’t cheap, and will not be in the near future.  If they’re used as peakers, they can be cost-effective in a system that has coal – specifically, existing coal – filling in the evening and nighttime baseload.  It’s a myth to consider batteries as cheaper than coal. Recent “round the clock” (RTC) bids for power were not designed with storage as the key – they were oversized to produce the required availability, with surplus available for sale to third parties.  One has to be cautious of taking lithium pricing data like from BNEF that focus on automotive batteries. These are designed for much lower cycle life, and also lack an inverter. Even at $100/kWh total costs for a battery (with inverter), which is some years away, this costs over Rs. 4/kWh just for the storage, excluding the RE to charge the battery. More importantly, this number is the levelized cost of energy, assuming full usage (about 90 or 95%) every day. But a battery isn’t required in all time periods, so in other periods its value is much lower, equal to the fossil fuel it displaces at the margin.

One more point about the economics as analysed in our Grid 2030 study (and also a policy question that depends on markets or contracts). We assumed that all the RE being curtailed could be used at zero marginal cost by a battery to the extent it matches a daily charge/discharge cycle. This is correct from an aggregate system accounting (i.e., ignoring sunk costs) but it is not clear any practical transaction framework would necessarily operate this way.  It’s only under a framework of liquid, competitive markets (with clearing prices based on marginal costs) would the sale value of surplus RE become zero. But to a consumer (like a storage provider) the value isn’t zero, and one could also have contracts (including special PPAs, or power purchase agreements) that keep the value of all RE above zero. Thus, the economics of storage would be a bit higher than in the study. However, estimates indicate storage would still be cost-effective for meeting the residual (otherwise unmet) demand profiles as based on extrapolating planned (RE, nuclear, hydro) and existing (fossil fuel, less any retirements) capacity for 2030.

India’s grid can handle a fair amount of RE growth before we need major overhauls, massive transmission or storage. But it’s not too far away when VRE won’t be enough to meet demand. The real issue is figuring out why aren’t we growing VRE fast enough? It’s not because storage is too expensive since storage isn’t the bottleneck yet.

If we examine the national solar pipeline, the ambition and plans are far higher than the volumes that reach commercial closure. Top-down bids (especially by central entities, instead of state) are quite cost-competitive, but even after discovering a “low price”, we don’t have sufficient off-takers (states/discoms) willing to sign a power supply agreement or power purchase agreement.  This isn’t due to counter-party risk since supply bids have come in, but rather a reflection of where many states are – with surplus capacity and existing PPAs for much of the day, and visible-on-the-horizon shortfalls at times where solar won’t suffice.

Improving long-distance transmission helps overcome state-level limitations, but national limits will soon emerge. Transmission also doesn’t come free, even if today we are waiving such costs to RE developers. We’re also socializing or transferring other system level costs of high VRE such as impacts on other generators who have to ramp up and down more, or operate at part-load output, at inherently poorer efficiency. Other improvements to help grow RE will involve wholesale price signalling for time of day (and eventually consumer time of day signalling as well).

It seems premature to put all our eggs in the battery basket with a blanket edict “no more coal plants”. The high RE without storage model (i.e., VRE) makes sense, more so if prices stay as low as recent times, even without further major declines. It’s the “what beyond VRE” that is still murky. We should revisit the plans for RE+storage (and coal) every 2 years, based on updates to demand, technology trends, etc., while increasing domestic production of clean technologies.

Isn’t there a risk that waiting till 2024 to think of “more coal” may be too late (for example, if storage technologies don’t improve enough by then)? After all, it takes at least 4-5 years to build a coal plant. The right answer to this is to be ready to finish building under-construction coal plants “on time”, working backwards from when they might be needed. If we still need more coal plants, then building brownfield coal plants makes the most sense, i.e., at locations where more units were planned to be set up in phases. These locations already have coal logistics and transmission in place.  This framework can still be viable even if we don’t need so much coal capacity growth down the road – the newer (and more efficient) capacity can displace older (and dirtier/less efficient) coal plants. One downside to such plans is these may create distortions or a slightly uneven playing field across generators, but such issues can be dealt with through economic instruments, allowing us to first focus on resource adequacy. Resource adequacy also guides us to focus on having sufficient domestic coal – more mining won’t raise emissions – these would first displace more expensive imports.

China exemplifies the “both” approach. It is the world leader in clean technologies, but it still continues to use and even grow fossil fuel usage, especially coal. One thing that China has focused on recently is cleaning up its coal. Not only does it have stringent norms for air pollution from coal power plants, but it has also mandated an efficiency of 0.300 kg/kWh in terms of specific coal consumption by 2025. India’s specific coal consumption has been close to 0.62 kg/kWh, and 2022 appears worse. Even when we normalise for coal quality (energy per kg fuel), China would still only be about 0.4-0.45 kg/kWh based on Indian coal. We are far less efficient. We need to understand the reasons,[2] and fix these.

Like China, India should aggressively go down the RE path, but not focus on just RE. Energy efficiency, smart systems, energy security, local manufacturing, livelihoods, fiscal balances, etc. are all very important. And while we push forward with RE, we should also keep our options open for using domestically available fossil fuels at the highest efficiency and cleanliness. Ideally, this would be based on more intensive use of existing capacity, but even with a small amount of total growth if required.  India’s net-zero ambitions by 2070 should allow us sufficient time to grow RE and allied technologies, and gracefully phase down coal.

The post Follow-up Thoughts on India’s Grid 2030: A Glass Half Cloudy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/follow-up-thoughts-on-indias-grid-2030-a-glass-half-cloudy/feed/ 0 896349
Mining Matters Episode 2: Mining for Growth and Development – A Practitioner’s Perspective http://stg.csep.org/blog/mining-for-growth-and-development-a-practitioners-perspective/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=mining-for-growth-and-development-a-practitioners-perspective http://stg.csep.org/blog/mining-for-growth-and-development-a-practitioners-perspective/#respond Tue, 02 Aug 2022 06:34:20 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896282 Ganesh Sivamani discusses the Indian mining sector, and how it can become a catalyst for the country’s growth and development with Chanakya Chaudhary, Vice-President (Corporate Services), Tata Steel.

The post Mining Matters Episode 2: Mining for Growth and Development – A Practitioner’s Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

‘Mining Matters’ is a part of the ‘In Dialogue’ series, hosted by the Non-Fuel Minerals and Mining research team led by Dr Rajesh Chadha at the Centre for Social and Economic Progress, New Delhi. We invite experts from India and abroad to discuss how India’s mining sector can become a catalyst for economic growth and development, ensuring fair and sustainable mining practices for the environment and affected communities.

In the second episode of Mining Matters, “Mining for Growth and Development – A Practitioner’s Perspective”, Ganesh Sivamani discusses various issues relating to the Indian mining sector, and how it can become a catalyst for the country’s growth and development with Chanakya Chaudhary, Vice-President (Corporate Services), Tata Steel.

The post Mining Matters Episode 2: Mining for Growth and Development – A Practitioner’s Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/mining-for-growth-and-development-a-practitioners-perspective/feed/ 0 896282
Climate Change in Bangladesh: Global Players vs Local Activism http://stg.csep.org/blog/climate-change-in-bangladesh-global-players-vs-local-activism/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=climate-change-in-bangladesh-global-players-vs-local-activism http://stg.csep.org/blog/climate-change-in-bangladesh-global-players-vs-local-activism/#respond Mon, 04 Jul 2022 11:38:07 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896183 Social and ecological change in Bangladesh today has been profoundly shaped by colonialism and its legacies, so recognition of this helps us to better understand climate change today.

The post Climate Change in Bangladesh: Global Players vs Local Activism first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Niharika Mehrotra interviews Kasia Paprocki on her book, Threatening Dystopias: The Global Politics of Climate Change Adaptation in Bangladesh, published by Cornell University Press in 2021.

Bangladesh has long been ranked among the most climate-vulnerable countries in the world. For example, it is estimated that approximately 15 to 30 million Bangladeshis will need to migrate by 2050 as a result of rising sea levels. In Threatening Dystopias, Paprocki examines how the consequences of climate change are tackled both by local actors comprised of farmers, labourers and other civil society members, and by international actors including donors, research centers, policy-makers, and non-governmental organizations (NGOs).

Paprocki argues that due to the precarious climate situation in Bangladesh, a crisis narrative has been created by international actors, which uses Bangladesh as an “adaptation laboratory” (p. 973). The book captures how development in Bangladesh is now characterized by “a mandate for export-led growth and accompanying social and economic transitions” (p. 978). For example, the Bangladeshi government has advocated for an increase in shrimp aquaculture for export diversification, disregarding its effect on increased soil salinity that harms the environment. This also means shifting farmers’ livelihoods from traditional rice agriculture, which has in turn resulted in large-scale displacement of local communities. Through this case, Paprocki investigates how development further entrenches local and labor inequalities in urban sectors. On the other hand, the book also examines rural and political movements in the country and how they respond to these changes. In their activism, local actors fail to invoke the positionality of climate change by framing issues exclusively from a lens of historical inequalities. This roots local activism in the time of colonialism and the current local and international power hierarchies that they have translated into.

Using ethnographic and archival fieldwork, Paprocki presents us with an analytical framework to illustrate how climate change operates in a duality. On one hand, there are global actors petitioning for development strategies that breed inequality and on the other, local activists push to challenge inequality in the country without addressing climate change.

Niharika Mehrotra: The book points out the dangers of depoliticizing climate change especially by international climate justice organizations and NGOs. By integrating local politics and recognizing the political and social inequality that breeds climate change, this danger can be prevented. Could you elaborate on how donors and NGOs can go down this path?

Kasia Paprocki: The experience of climate change is mediated by existing power relations and social inequalities. That means that addressing those politics directly is necessary to pursue equitable climate action.

Many of the development agencies working to address climate change today (in Bangladesh and elsewhere) do so without addressing these power relations.

The contemporary development model in Bangladesh has shaped profound levels of social and economic inequality. This is characterized in part by the dispossession of farmers and agrarian workers who are increasingly pushed into cities where they may or may not find precarious work in construction, garments and other export industries. The promises of development in Bangladesh are not (and have never been) shared equally. Many of the development agencies working to address climate change today (in Bangladesh and elsewhere) do so without addressing these power relations. They claim to promote climate change adaptation or mitigation while leaving these existing power dynamics intact. In fact, they draw on precisely these unequal development models to imagine and promote climate change adaptation. But these inequalities are what has caused climate change in the first place, and what has made vulnerability to it so catastrophic in many parts of the world.

Instead of attempting to address climate change as somehow separate from these other dynamics, donors, NGOs and government policy-makers need to look directly at how climate change is entangled with these other politics. The unequal development models that have caused climate vulnerability cannot be the solutions to addressing it.

NM: The Bangladeshi Government seems to play a dual role where on the one hand, it advocates  fighting climate change on international fora yet on the other hand, commits to building a coal-fired power plant in Rampal in collaboration with the Indian Government. What does this contradiction tell us about how governments navigate the global geopolitics of climate change.

KP: Examining climate politics at multiple scales from Bangladesh offers an important lesson in how to think about the contradictions in global climate politics more generally.

Mainstream discourses on climate justice often seem to suggest that transferring funds from the Global North to the Global South will be sufficient for achieving it. If we allow our analysis of climate justice to operate only at this level of the nation-state, then we miss so much — both about the politics driving historic and continued emissions, as well as about what justice can look like in terms of how these changes are responded to in the present.

The Bangladeshi government and, in particular, the leaders who negotiate on behalf of the Bangladeshi state in global climate change negotiations, have been very effective at conveying this message that the impact of climate change is being experienced disproportionately by communities that hold the least responsibility for historic carbon emissions. The case these leaders make at the UN Conference of Parties on Climate Change and similar international fora is quite straightforward: countries like Bangladesh are owed reparations for the impact of climate change from countries of the Global North, because Bangladesh and other less developed countries have historically emitted the least carbon.

Basically, the argument here is that this inequality between nations should be the primary organizing principle of efforts to pursue climate justice through reparations and other forms of climate finance (including, for example, payments for “loss and damage”).

Yet when we start to think about what this vision of climate justice looks like at the local scale, we find that it is insufficient because it leaves inequality within states and local communities intact. Even while making demands for redistributive climate justice at the international scale, the Bangladeshi government continues to pursue a vision of development within the country that entails high levels of inequality, rampant agrarian dispossession, and even, as you noted, the scaling-up of energy systems powered by fossil fuels, as exemplified by the Rampal power plant. This contradiction is not an anomaly, it is inherent to mainstream visions of climate action around the world.

NM: This book uses interviews conducted with multiple stakeholders including NGOs, government officials, research centres, international donor foundations, as well as farmers, local activists, laborers and migrant workers. How do you think this multi-dimensional approach benefitted your argument.

KP: What I found in the course of interviewing this diverse set of actors was they not only interpreted ecological change differently (what is changing, why is it changing, and whether the changes are good or bad), but these competing interpretations of change shape the way in which climate change adaptation is planned for and pursued.

The people I worked with in coastal Bangladesh while conducting this research (farmers, local activists, labourers and migrant workers), who are often referred to as the victims of climate change or as climate migrants, do not refer to themselves this way.

Other scholars have written critiques of dominant climate discourses that question the narratives of major NGOs, donors and policy makers about climate crisis and adaptation. What I think is important about the approach I have taken in engaging with so many different actors is that, in addition to examining these dominant discourses, I also engage the perspectives of the people whose lives and livelihoods are the targets of their interventions but who see what is happening very differently. The people I worked with in coastal Bangladesh while conducting this research (farmers, local activists, labourers and migrant workers), who are often referred to as the victims of climate change or as climate migrants, do not refer to themselves this way. In fact, they often do not see climate change as a significant factor shaping their lives and livelihoods at all. Instead, they identify a range of other dynamics largely related to the political economy of development and agrarian change as the most important factors shaping their lives today.

So, by engaging with these groups that don’t expressly address themselves to climate change, but whose lives are profoundly shaped by these attempts to address it, the book offers a different perspective than many others. I think the key benefit is that it helps us to understand climate change and its impacts within a much broader context. It tells us that a myopic focus on climate change to the exclusion of a variety of other politics and histories that have shaped how it is experienced is really insufficient if what we are interested in is learning how to pursue more just futures for everyone.

NM: The framework adopted by Threatening Dystopias allows for us to integrate local activism with global climate justice. In the case of South Asia, the violent past of colonialism has also contributed to the climate crises. Given the disadvantageous history, how can the region bridge the gap between local activism and global climate justice in order to devise developmental strategies?

Social and ecological change in Bangladesh today has been profoundly shaped by colonialism and its legacies, so recognition of this helps us to better understand climate change today.

KP: What a brilliant question this is. My concern in the book is not only to identify problems with existing adaptation programs in Bangladesh, but to situate these in relation to a much broader global political economy of climate action and climate knowledge that shapes and is shaped by them. This requires looking not only at multiple geographic scales, but also multiple historical scales. Social and ecological change in Bangladesh today has been profoundly shaped by colonialism and its legacies, so recognition of this helps us to better understand climate change today.

Recently scholars such as Keston Perry and Olúfẹ́mi Táíwò have been writing about the need for climate reparations as a response to the disproportionate impact of climate change on formerly colonised communities. I think this is a really critical intervention in discussions of global climate justice. Recognition of the need for reparations for colonialism would be extraordinarily different from that for carbon emissions because it would denaturalize the vulnerability to climate change and direct attention to demands for alternative development models.

A lot of contemporary conversations about climate justice, as I noted above, discuss these disproportionate impacts as somehow accidental, without highlighting why countries of the Global South are so often more vulnerable to climate change. It is not accidental that Bangladesh is more vulnerable to the impacts of climate change. This vulnerability is the direct result of the colonial legacies that have shaped inequality in land and resource access, catastrophic infrastructure planning decisions, and contemporary economic development models that undermine agrarian livelihoods in favour of export-led urban growth.

The book demonstrates that much global climate justice activism is remarkably silent on these questions of colonialism and its contemporary reverberations, while most progressive activism taking place in Bangladesh today prioritizes local concerns around social and economic rights while rarely using the language of climate change. I think both of these scales of progressive activism have a lot to offer one another, and would benefit from speaking to each other more directly. Local activists in Bangladesh could contribute to and benefit from articulating how their concerns are part of this broader global political economy of development and adaptation. Likewise, global climate justice movements will only be successful if they are able to see and articulate how the experience of climate change is always mediated by existing power inequalities. Social movements working toward decolonisation and class, race, and gender justice in particular communities should be leading the way in shaping understandings of what climate justice could look like.

NM: The book points to many assumptions made by foreign NGOs on how only a particular pathway of development can help Bangladesh from its climate crisis. How does knowledge production by such actors effect the local realities of the region in terms of what is salvageable and what is doomed?

KP: One of the key points I make in the book is that these power dynamics not only shape ideas about what should be done about climate change, but they shape our very understandings of what is happening — what the physical impacts of climate change are and will be in Bangladesh.

This relationship between knowledge production and social and economic power leads to a collapse in understandings of the kinds of futures which are possible and those which are desirable. This leads to limited understandings of possible futures, because development agencies and policy makers are only able to see possibilities for those futures they already see as desirable. But who gets to decide what kinds of futures are desirable?

The result is that the physical landscape is actually transforming in the image of this very limited understanding of development. The coastal lands continue to be submerged under water as a direct result of development interventions that imagine urban futures as the only possibility for this region, undermining the possibilities for agrarian livelihoods.

Recently, Bangladeshi sociologist Anwar Hossen wrote an important article arguing that a decolonized Sociology within Bangladesh is necessary for pursuing climate justice. This is a call which is absolutely supported by my findings in the book. Climate justice demands not only more equitable distribution of climate funds, but also new ways of understanding environmental change that centre the concerns and priorities of marginalised communities who are most threatened by it.

Climate crisis in Bangladesh is not and has never been inevitable. It is produced by systems of power and resource distribution that long predate climate change itself. We can only see outside of this if we directly address these power dynamics that got us here in the first place.

 

About the author:

Kasia Paprocki is an Associate Professor in the Department of Geography and Environment at the London School of Economics and Political Science. Her work draws on and contributes to the study of the political economy of development and agrarian change with a focus in South Asia. Links to her other popular and academic publications are available at www.kasiapaprocki.com.

The post Climate Change in Bangladesh: Global Players vs Local Activism first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/climate-change-in-bangladesh-global-players-vs-local-activism/feed/ 0 896183
New Mining Techniques: Exploring the Deep Sea http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-mining-techniques-exploring-the-deep-sea/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=new-mining-techniques-exploring-the-deep-sea http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-mining-techniques-exploring-the-deep-sea/#respond Wed, 01 Jun 2022 10:24:16 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896030 Ishita Kapoor's blog explores the possibility of deep sea bed mining while also safeguarding the fragile ecosystem of ocean beds.

The post New Mining Techniques: Exploring the Deep Sea first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Deep seabed mining might be necessary to replenish the depleting resources under the earth’s surface. Additionally, the policies should be designed to cause the least damage to the ocean floor as the marine biological communities exist in a fragile ecosystem, and hence, the policies should try to maintain the same delicate balance.[1] In addition, the seabed holds trillions of dollars’ worth of minerals that the mining companies are planning to extract as polymetallic nodules. These are rich in critical minerals such as manganese, copper, nickel, and cobalt.[2]

Legal Framework for Marine and Maritime Activities

The United Nations Convention of Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) treaty was signed in 1982 in Jamaica, replacing the Geneva Conventions of 1958 regarding the territorial sea and the contiguous zone, the continental shelf, the high seas, fishing and conservation of living resources on the high seas. The UNCLOS provides the legal framework for marine and maritime activities[3] as well as distinguishes the maritime zones under various coastal states and the areas beyond the national waters. The UNCLOS was signed by about 200 countries, of which 168 have ratified it.[4]

The deep seabed is about 200mt below sea level. The section of the continent that lies beneath the shallow water areas are called the shelf sea.[5] Under the UNCLOS, the international waters are regulated by the International Seabed Authority (ISA), but the regulations on deep seabed mining have not yet been completed. While the regulation for exploration has been adopted, the exploitation regulations are still being developed.[6] The ISA had issued about 31 exploration contracts by May 2021 to private companies. However, exploitation contracts have not been awarded for mining areas beyond the national jurisdictions (ABNJ).[7]

Demand for Deep-sea Minerals

With the growing need for minerals for industrialisation, seabed mining is being discussed as a potential to meet the demand. Minerals such as cobalt, lithium, nickel, copper, vanadium and indium are critical to realise the transition to green technologies. Assumptions for growth in their demand are based on the future availability of energy-related technologies and their implication on metal demand and manufacturing.[8]

Environmental Externalities

Mining deep-sea minerals present various technological challenges such as extreme operating depth, offshore distance, high pressure, low temperatures and physical forces like waves, currents and winds. Moreover, deep-sea mining has lasting environmental impacts too. One of its negative externalities is a higher sedimentation rate clogging the feeding apparatus of organisms living on the seafloor. In addition, the discharge of tailings and effluent below the oxygen-minimum zone might change the environment in the area, causing negative impacts on the zooplankton species, deep-diving marine mammals and fish. Finally, the surface waters could be affected through bioaccumulation of trace metals and harm phytoplankton and marine animals.[9]

Proponents of seabed mining assert that extracting minerals from the deep ocean will inflict less environmental damage than surface mining. However, scientists worry that the sedimentation could cause widespread ecological damage and kill deep-sea fauna. Without appropriate regulations, seabed mining will erode the ocean’s capacity to provide essential ecological services.[10] Restoring the marine ecosystems in the post-mining scenario cannot be achieved completely. Additionally, there are gaps in the knowledge of the extent of damage caused by deep-sea mining to flora and fauna. The current uncertainty of the governance and regulations has made it more difficult to predict the scale of impact of mining.[11]

Plan for India

India has sponsored exploration contracts in the international seabed and has been active since the 1980s. India was the first of the registered investors following the adoption of UNCLOS.[12] In 2009, the National Institute of Oceanography in Goa and the ISA launched the Technical Assistance Programme for Marine Scientific Research (TAP-MAR). The goal was to support interdisciplinary research incorporating exploration, ecosystems, biodiversity and environment impact assessments.[13] The Centre for Marine Living Resources and Ecology (CMLRE), under the Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES), proposed the Deep Ocean Mission to explore resources and develop deep-sea technologies for sustainable use.[14] The Indian government has approved this mission, and it will be implemented in phases, with the first phase for three years, from 2021 to 2024. The mission has six major components:[15]

  • The development of deep seabed mining technologies and submersibles. The plan is to develop an integrated mining system for mining Polymetallic Nodules from about 6000 mt depth in the Indian Ocean. Continuous exploration of minerals will help India prepare for commercial exploitation following the International Seabed Authority’s code and rules.
  • The development of ocean climate-change advisory services to understand and future projections of important climate variables will support coastal tourism.
  • Technological innovations for exploration and conservation of deep-sea biodiversity with the main focus on sustainable utilisation.
  • Survey and exploration of multi-metal hydrothermal sulphides in the Indian Ocean.
  • Studying and designing an offshore Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) powered desalination plant.
  • Development of human capacity and enterprise in ocean engineering and biology.

Going Forward

Proper regulations and protection measures need to be established to ensure the least damage to the marine ecosystem. While the regulatory framework is important, it is essential to evaluate the enforcement of these measures.

The non-Convention members theoretically cannot mine in the ISA-administered areas, but there are limited global enforcement mechanisms to oversee it. Mandates should be binding on the mining companies to guarantee environmental protection and compensation for damage done through environmental impact assessments.[16]

[The author would like to thank Dr Rajesh Chadha, Senior Fellow, CSEP for his comments and inputs.]

The post New Mining Techniques: Exploring the Deep Sea first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-mining-techniques-exploring-the-deep-sea/feed/ 0 896030
Mining Matters Episode 1: Exploration – A Geologist’s Perspective http://stg.csep.org/blog/mining-matters-episode-1-exploration-a-geologists-perspective/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=mining-matters-episode-1-exploration-a-geologists-perspective http://stg.csep.org/blog/mining-matters-episode-1-exploration-a-geologists-perspective/#respond Mon, 30 May 2022 11:08:01 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=896021 In the first episode of Mining Matters, “Exploration – A Geologist’s Perspective”, Ishita Kapoor discusses various issues relating to exploration, auctions and sustainability, including the environment and affected communities, with Dr Nik Senapati, President of the Australia India Business Council in Queensland.

The post Mining Matters Episode 1: Exploration – A Geologist’s Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
‘Mining Matters’ is a part of the ‘In Dialogue’ series, hosted by the Non-Fuel Minerals and Mining research team led by Rajesh Chadha at the Centre for Social and Economic Progress, New Delhi. We invite experts from India and abroad to discuss how India’s mining sector can become a catalyst for economic growth and development, ensuring fair and sustainable mining practices for the environment and affected communities.

In the first episode of Mining Matters, “Exploration – A Geologist’s Perspective”, Ishita Kapoor discusses various issues relating to exploration, auctions and sustainability, including the environment and affected communities, with Dr Nik Senapati, President of the Australia India Business Council in Queensland. Dr Senapati is a geologist and has spent over 35 years in the mining industry with roles in exploration, operations, strategy and external relations including as the country head (MD) for Rio Tinto in India.

The post Mining Matters Episode 1: Exploration – A Geologist’s Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/mining-matters-episode-1-exploration-a-geologists-perspective/feed/ 0 896021
Sikkim and the Geostrategic Lessons from Himalayan History http://stg.csep.org/blog/sikkim-and-the-geostrategic-lessons-from-himalayan-history/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sikkim-and-the-geostrategic-lessons-from-himalayan-history http://stg.csep.org/blog/sikkim-and-the-geostrategic-lessons-from-himalayan-history/#respond Thu, 24 Mar 2022 11:56:49 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895784 The Indo-Sikkim Treaty of 1950 was a recognition of the fact that Tibet’s occupation by China had compromised India’s strategic interests and Sikkim had become of particular relevance to the future security of India.

The post Sikkim and the Geostrategic Lessons from Himalayan History first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Constantino Xavier interviews Preet Mohan Singh Malik, former diplomat, on his book, Sikkim: A History of Intrigue and Alliance, published by HarperCollins in 2021.

In his book, Malik reviews the history of the former kingdom of Sikkim leading up to its integration into the Indian Union, in 1975. This book makes a timely contribution to understanding the evolving geopolitical context in the Himalayas especially as the India-China border dispute flared up again in 2020-21, including incidents in Naku La, Sikkim, with implications for Nepal and Bhutan.

Based in part on archival records that Malik consulted at the former Indian Political Office in Gangtok, during his posting there between 1967 and 1970, the book reviews the pivotal role Sikkim played in the geo-strategic ambitions of different actors since the 19th century, including the British Raj, India, Tibet and China.

Malik’s book makes two central arguments. First, he posits that both imperial Britain and post-independent India failed to recognize the importance of an independent Tibet as a buffer state against China’s expansionist objectives. Malik contends that Prime Minister Nehru’s “romantic view of China” prevailed in the following decades and still gives “untrustworthy” China an advantage over India today (p. 248-51). The 1975 Sikkim merger is thus seen as a strategic exception to the rule that Malik presents as India’s tactical China policy.

Second, Malik argues against the view that “the [1975] merger was an engineered event by India” led by its newly formed external intelligence organization, the Research and Analysis Wing (RAW). His last chapter offers valuable insights into the strategy developed at the Prime Minister’s office to deal with the “overriding issue” in Sikkim, which he defines as “the need to accept the popular will and to bring immediate peace to the state that was of primary strategic and security importance to India” (p. xii). This is in line also with recent empirical findings on this episode by Zorawar Daulat Singh and Deep Pal.

“Sikkim: A History of Intrigue and Alliance” makes an important contribution to the resurgent literature on the history of Sikkim, and is part of a new Indian wave of scholarly and policy interest in the Himalayan region beyond just the narrow India-China geostrategic lens. If there is one thing that stands out in Malik’s exhaustive historical survey, it is that one cannot understand Sikkim and its future connectivity potential without the complex historical, religious, economic and political ties that it shares with its surrounding regions and countries.

Constantino Xavier: You argue that Prime Minister Jawaharlal Nehru’s “emotional attachment to his Asia Vision” failed to recognize Tibet as an independent state and buffer against China in the Himalayas (p. 191). With the benefit of hindsight, do you think that the 1975 annexation of Sikkim was a belated Indian attempt to compensate for the strategic “loss” of Tibet?

Preet Malik: Olaf Caroe’s [Foreign Secretary to the Government of India between 1939 and 1945] note focused on the strategic importance of Tibet to India’s security, reinforced by the [United Kingdom] War Department’s review of Indian interests in Tibet and their importance in India’s defence. Nehru was aware of the contents of Caroe’s note, including the suggestion that the British Government extend diplomatic recognition to Tibet, driving home its relevance to India’s security.

Sikkim’s geostrategic location grants ease of access to Tibet through Nathu La and Jelep La, both passes that overlook the Chumbi Valley. The Chinese occupation of Tibet eventually established the strategic importance of Sikkim to India’s security. Particularly, the locational advantage that this presents to India of commanding the heights overlooking the Chumbi Valley. Actions the Chinese indulged in during the Indo-Pak wars of 1965 and 1971, and the attempt to dislodge India from the passes overlooking the Valley in 1967 were strong pointers to the aggressive intent towards compromising India’s security, therefore confirming the importance of Sikkim to India’s security.

The Chinese have no respect for, or commitment to the treaties they have signed, resiling from them whenever it suited them. They clearly violated the 1890 Convention that had settled the borders between Sikkim and Tibet. More recently, they have tried to push India away from Naku La, which is an important security factor on North Sikkim’s border with Tibet. The Chinese will continue their attempt to dislodge India from the Himalayan heights that India occupies in Sikkim, to raise the threat to the Siliguri Corridor.

The merger, not the annexation of Sikkim with India, was largely the consequence of Indira Gandhi reversing the original policy of granting precedence to the interests of the ruler of Sikkim over the desire of most of its people to merge the state with India. The demand finally being accepted in 1975 had first been made in 1947 but Nehru had persuaded the Sikkim delegation to not press the issue. The people’s demand for representative democracy was repeated on several occasions. Finally, New Delhi relented and acceded to the demand for a merger.

The Indo-Sikkim Treaty of 1950 was a recognition of the fact that Tibet’s occupation by China had compromised India’s strategic interests and Sikkim had become of particular relevance to the future security of India.

The Indo-Sikkim Treaty of 1950 was a recognition of the fact that Tibet’s occupation by China had compromised India’s strategic interests and Sikkim had become of particular relevance to the future security of India.

CX: Arriving in Gangtok in 1967, you recall India’s concern at the time that China could “leverage Tibet to gain an advantage over India” including by “disrupting” India’s relations with Nepal, Sikkim and Bhutan (p. xiv). Fifty years later, does this assessment hold? Has China really used Tibet to undermine Indian interests in Nepal and Bhutan?

PM: The short answer is yes but with some essential qualifications. Nepal is a complex case. During the Qinq period [1644-1911], Nepal finally came to be treated as a tributary state of China. This encouraged Nepal’s attempts to bring China into its disputes with British India and to side with it. This trend of playing China against India to contain Indian influence in Nepal has continued, while Nepal has taken every advantage of the open borders policy that governs Indo-Nepal relations.

With Bhutan, it has been a different proposition. China has, in the past, viewed Bhutan from two angles: as space that its territory offers to settle for the Han Chinese migrants, and as a strategic asset describing it as ‘the southern gate of the Chinese Empire.’ This would bring them in contact with the plains of India. At the same time, the Chinese have tried to fish in the waters of the Assam tribal areas (today’s Arunachal Pradesh) attempting to take control over the area. It was to counter their attempts that the colonial administration established outposts right up to the Himalayan watershed eventually re-endorsed by the McMahon Line.

China has throughout had in mind the desire to exploit the geostrategic advantage that gaining influence over Bhutan could grant it further leverage in its relations with India. The main motivation is raising the profile of the security threat that the occupation by China of the Chumbi Valley provides it by pressuring Bhutan to give up its claims to the Doklam plateau. This would compromise India’s strategic interests in preserving the neutrality of that region in the context of containing the threat to the Siliguri corridor.

The other objective is part of China’s effort to reduce India’s influence in its backyard of South Asia. In Nepal, to an extent, they have succeeded. The effort is on in Bhutan to secure a similar competitive edge.

CX: In Sikkim, during the late 1960s, you witnessed how the Nepali-origin population began to mobilize against the absolutist rule of Palden Thondup Namgyal. Your book notes that these democratic demands played an important role in India’s decision to support regime change, ending the Chogyal monarchy in 1975. Why did India support the democratization of Sikkim, even while it continued to engage the conservative monarchies in neighbouring Nepal and Bhutan?

PM: The political developments in Sikkim were very different in nature and scope from what transpired in Bhutan and Nepal. When the colonial rule was coming to an end in Sikkim, political parties had already taken root and had evolved an agenda that covered two fundamental demands: a merger with India on par with the other Indian princely states, and control over agricultural land. The motivation was to be part of the constitutionally determined democratic governance that India was headed towards. There were several occasions in the post-1947 period where the people of Sikkim revolted against the arbitrary rule of the Chogyal with New Delhi having to intervene and restore order, including sheltering the ruler and his family.

This was certainly not an issue where Bhutan was concerned. The [Bhutan] ruler brought about political reforms in keeping with the changing times and established a democratic process that has suited the Bhutanese temperament. In the case of Nepal, New Delhi has had to deal with a far more complex political situation and has exercised influence largely through the political parties who eventually succeeded in throwing off the yoke of its monarchy.

But in all three cases, the China factor has certainly influenced India’s relationships. Developments in Sikkim over several decades eventually forced Delhi’s hands to bow before the demand of the people to the merger of Sikkim with India. The geostrategic importance of Sikkim within the India-Tibet complex of relations had been established during the British period itself. It logically followed through by strengthening India’s defence presence in direct consequence to China’s occupation of Tibet, as reflected in the India-Sikkim Treaty of 1950. With Bhutan, India had largely followed the course of action that effectively lay behind the signing of the Treaty of Punakha (1910) keeping China at bay while keeping away from interfering in its internal affairs, ensuring financial aid and an open relationship that would help Bhutan’s development.

CX: Chapter 18 of your book offers a fascinating account of how Prime Minister Indira Gandhi dealt with an increasingly unstable Sikkim in the early 1970s. You review her attempts to engage with the Chogyal, including by offering a revised treaty and appealing to political reforms, and you argue that merger was thus only the last option in India’s strategy. In what ways does this differ from other accounts that portray the 1973-75 process as “an engineered event by India,” driven by its intelligence service (p. xxi)?

PM: The suggestion that the merger of Sikkim with India was ‘an engineered event’ brought about by an intelligence service is a distortion of events. From 1947 onwards, there was a demand made by most of Sikkim’s demography to merge with India. It was Delhi’s decision and actions that were responsible for the ruler retaining his hold over the state and its people. Palden Thondup failed to understand that he had to share power in a realistic manner to gain the trust of the people to remain in power. He also failed to understand that if he persisted in a partisan approach that offended the majority, a time would come when India may no longer be able to defend him against the wishes of the people.

New Delhi’s Sikkim policy had obviously also factored in the Tibet equation and the threat to India’s security, including to the Siliguri Corridor, that China’s presence in Tibet had created. There was the additional factor that China was fishing in Sikkim’s dark waters with statements that would support the design of the Chogyal, and his limited group of supporters led by the Study Group, to reduce India’s footprint. In that respect, the Chinese attempt to directly threaten India’s presence in Sikkim, both during the Indo-Pak wars of 1965 and 1971 and directly in the autumn of 1967 along the Nathu La and Jelep La sectors of Sikkim, only reinforced the strategic significance of Sikkim to India’s security.

The events of 1973-75 that led to the merger in 1975 of Sikkim with India were a culmination of the struggle that the people of Sikkim had waged against the Sikkim durbar since 1947, it was not a singular development.

The events of 1973-75 that led to the merger in 1975 of Sikkim with India were a culmination of the struggle that the people of Sikkim had waged against the Sikkim durbar since 1947, it was not a singular development. The intelligence agencies for obvious reasons played a supportive role in providing the essential intelligence that helped confirm the events as they developed in Sikkim, but the decision to reverse the policy of shoring up the Chogyal was a purely political decision taken by Prime Minister Indira Gandhi.

She incidentally expressed a degree of reservation over her father, Prime Minister Nehru’s policy towards the Himalayan States. In fact, the first shot that was fired by her projecting a change in policy was when she endorsed the suggestion made to her by her Principal Secretary, P. N. Haksar that: “‘Sanction behind any political framework has to be the people if the framework is to prove durable.’ And till ‘such time that the PM had made up her mind, she should not see the Chogyal.’”

This was in 1972 and it makes clear that the wishes of the [Sikkim] people were to be granted a priority towards any settlement that was worked out. This was not an intelligence operation, but a political decision where the intelligence agencies were involved to serve its aim. The aim was not what India had encouraged but was one that circumstance had created. What Prime Minister Indira Gandhi did was to change course and accept the desire of the people. If this had been a forced act engineered by an intelligence operation the peace that followed the merger and the security of governance that has been the norm since the merger would have been unsustainable. The act would have been questioned by the Sikkim people, leading to non-cooperation with Delhi. Instead, today we see a democratically elected government in place in Gangtok that is meeting the socio-economic developmental aspirations of the people of Sikkim.

CX: The recent meeting of Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh (RSS) chief Mohan Bhagwat with the Dalai Lama has attracted much attention and speculation. Do you see any advantages for India to revise its stance on Tibet today, or would this just add to the complications and tensions with China?

The prevailing reality is that China is today in a position of total dominance in Tibet having changed both the demographic structure and the way of life that defined Tibet till 1950.

PM: This is a basic foreign policy issue. The ideal situation would of course have been one with Tibet as an independent state with a dynamic treaty relationship with India and with settled frontiers with both India and China. History, unfortunately, took a different turn when China established its presence in Tibet by the force of conquest based on a false narrative that Tibet was an integral part of China since the Yuan dynasty period, distorting the Priest-Disciple relationship by granting it a colonial interpretation. The prevailing reality is that China is today in a position of total dominance in Tibet having changed both the demographic structure and the way of life that defined Tibet till 1950. Delhi has, for all practical purposes, kept the relations with the Dalai Lama within a kind of religious-cultural bubble where China’s sensitivities have been kept in mind. In the process, even the most visible violations of the human rights of the Tibetans including the attempt to Sinicise Tibetan Buddhism have been ignored on the altar of improved relations with China.

The policy followed by Prime Minister Modi has shown a clear lack of consistency. He had invited the Tibetan Prime Minister in exile, the Honourable Lobsang Sangay, to his swearing-in ceremony in 2014, putting out the fig leaf that the invite was by the BJP. Then, as he felt that his relations with Xi Jinping were warming up, he issued a governmental diktat shunning official contact as the Dalai Lama celebrated his 60th anniversary in exile in India. Subsequently, as the relations with China nose-dived when it aggressed against the LAC in the Ladakh region, Prime Minister Modi officially wished the Dalai Lama on his birthday, which may suggest a possible fresh look upon the One China policy that India has so far followed.

The policy on Tibet is obviously tied into the prevailing situation that defines Sino-Indian relations. The dilemma remains how far can India go towards challenging the Chinese attitude of pressurizing India? One clear way would be to take a position on China violating human rights and the Tibetan way of life, going along with a multilaterally driven condemnation. Next, it can join the global movement that is pushing against any role for China in the determination of the next Dalai Lama insisting that the time-honoured system of locating the incarnation should follow Tibetan Lamaist forms and traditions. This would of course raise Chinese hackles but it could bring greater purpose to the dialogue on border issues, forcing China to accept that settling the Tibet-India border would be a meaningful way to improve relations between the two Asian neighbours.

 

About the author:

Preet Mohan Singh Malik has been a member of the Indian Foreign Service since 1962. He was posted in Gangtok from October 1967 to April 1970 at the political office for India to Sikkim and Bhutan. He has also served as India’s ambassador to Bahrain, Cuba, and Myanmar, and as high commissioner to Tanzania with concurrent accreditation to the Seychelles and Malaysia, with concurrent accreditation to Brunei. He has worked at the permanent missions of India to the European office of the United Nations (UN) in Geneva where he was also a delegate to the Disarmament Conference and on the governing body of the International Labour Organization. He was a deputy permanent representative at the UN Mission in New York. He specialized in economic diplomacy, covering both bilateral and multilateral areas. He was a member representing the Ministry of External Affairs, of both the Foreign Investment Promotion Board and the steering committee on economic reforms chaired by the principal secretary to the prime minister (1992–95).

The post Sikkim and the Geostrategic Lessons from Himalayan History first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/sikkim-and-the-geostrategic-lessons-from-himalayan-history/feed/ 0 895784
In Dialogue with Jaimini Bhagwati on “The Geoeconomic Effects of the Russia-Ukraine War” http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-dialogue-with-jaimini-bhagwati-on-the-geoeconomic-effects-of-the-russia-ukraine-war/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=in-dialogue-with-jaimini-bhagwati-on-the-geoeconomic-effects-of-the-russia-ukraine-war http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-dialogue-with-jaimini-bhagwati-on-the-geoeconomic-effects-of-the-russia-ukraine-war/#respond Thu, 17 Mar 2022 08:28:09 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895718 Jaimini Bhagwati, Distinguished Fellow, CSEP, and former Indian Foreign Service officer, talks to Constantino Xavier, Fellow, CSEP about the impact of the Russia-Ukraine crises on India's economic interests in the short and medium term.

The post In Dialogue with Jaimini Bhagwati on “The Geoeconomic Effects of the Russia-Ukraine War” first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

In the second episode of In DialogueJaimini Bhagwati, Distinguished Fellow, CSEP, and former Indian Foreign Service officer, talks to Constantino Xavier, Fellow, CSEP about the impact of the Russia-Ukraine crises on India’s economic interests in the short and medium term, from rising oil prices and inflation to bypassing sanctions on Russia. 

The conversation assesses how the war may affect India’s position in various financial systems, including a possible currency exchange arrangement with Russia, as well as long term possibilities for India to ensure resilient supply chains for trade and a more self-reliant defence industry in cooperation with other strategic partners. Based on Amb. Jaimini Bhagwati’s experience as ambassador to Brussels and London, the dialogue also sheds light on how Europe’s activist response to the crisis and EU-India relations, including the planned free trade deal, may get affected.

The post In Dialogue with Jaimini Bhagwati on “The Geoeconomic Effects of the Russia-Ukraine War” first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-dialogue-with-jaimini-bhagwati-on-the-geoeconomic-effects-of-the-russia-ukraine-war/feed/ 0 895718
New Narratives from the North-East: Domestic Politics and Regional Implications http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-narratives-from-the-north-east-domestic-politics-and-regional-implications/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=new-narratives-from-the-north-east-domestic-politics-and-regional-implications http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-narratives-from-the-north-east-domestic-politics-and-regional-implications/#respond Tue, 15 Mar 2022 08:43:42 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895708 Jahnavi Mukul's interview of Sanjoy Hazarika sheds light on the historical perspective and political developments in the North East India by exploring the overarching question of the NER’s difference with the rest of India.

The post New Narratives from the North-East: Domestic Politics and Regional Implications first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Jahnavi Mukul interviews Sanjoy Hazarika, International Director of the Commonwealth Human Rights Initiative, on his book, Strangers No More: New Narratives from India’s Northeast, published by Aleph in 2018.

Twenty-eight years ago, Hazarika’s critically acclaimed book on India’s North-East Region (NER), Strangers of the Mist, shed light on the factors behind conflict in the region. In Strangers No More, Hazarika takes on a historical perspective to go over the key developments in the region’s politics by exploring the overarching question of the NER’s difference with the rest of India. The book has an issue-based approach, rather than a chronological one, highlighting critical moments in the NER and the effect of national politics on the region. He covers a wide range of issues, such as insurgency, life in the border towns, and ideological differences across the region. Hazarika also connects the lived experiences of people in the NER with those of people living in neighbouring countries, including Bangladesh, Bhutan, and Myanmar.

The book focuses on engagement and acceptance of the NER within the idea of what India is. It argues for building and strengthening connections between the states of NER as well as with the rest of India.

Divided into nine chapters, Hazarika uses accounts of his travels across the NER and conversations with people from the region to bring out the micro effects of regional and national politics. His professional experience of being a go-between the government and various political groups in the NER, and his role in the Justice Jeevan Reddy Committee (appointed by the union government in 2004 to review the Armed Forces Special Powers Act) makes the book rich in its narrative account.

Strangers No More is an important work on charting the politics of the NER. It reinforces the need to maintain peace in the region, especially given its geopolitical importance in India’s ‘Act East’ policy. It provides crucial perspectives on the value of forging connections between communities within the region which is the critical foundation to development and peace in the NER.

Jahnavi Mukul: In your book, you mention that the North-East region (NER) has “longer borders with its neighbours than it has with [the rest of] India” (p. xvi). Nearly 96% of its borders are with other countries and only 4% is with the rest of India. Given this disparity, how do North-Eastern states perceive their domestic counterparts that are geographically more distant, in comparison to their immediate neighbours situated just across the border? Is there a deeper connect with the neighbouring countries than with India?

Sanjoy Hazarika: The north-east is not very well connected even within itself. The states are linked to each other but often do not have strong relations. In the region, relationships are defined more by communities than by states. Many communities are trans-state, and they live across state boundaries. This also happens across international borders. The relationship with the rest of India has become stronger and this is changing the approach of people in the region. This is because you no longer see the region just as a geographical-political block but in terms of people with real issues. So, although you have kin across borders in Myanmar as well as in Tibet, Bangladesh, Nepal and Bhutan, these relationships are not as strong as those spanning inter-state borders. Inter-state relations are stronger due to historical, sociological, and cultural reasons. The need for land and livelihoods is among the drivers of this process.  Kinship ties are strong in these matters, as is intermarriage, migration and settlement in borderlands where communities have a shared culture and outlook.

JM: In your book, you mention a shift whereby the NER has become a “migrant-producing region” from a “migrant-receiving area” (p.276). Has this new trend helped change the states’ hostile perception of ‘outsiders’ and if so, how can it be used to improve relations with neighbours such as Bangladesh, for example by promoting people-to-people connectivity?

After decades of advocacy, Delhi closed the last gap in rail connection between Tripura and Bangladesh so that goods can move to the Chittagong port [and so] for the first time since 1965, […] people and goods from the NER can reach the sea.

SH: In my conversations with people on this topic, I have always emphasised the importance of engagement. Migration leads to engagement with the host communities. In the past twenty to thirty years, more people from the region are connecting more with (the rest of) India because they are moving for economic reasons, livelihoods and education, or marriage and other relationships. This is extremely important. However, the engagement has not been fully embraced yet. New Delhi is trying to embrace the North-East but I think that the approach of people in the region and many communities is akin to engagement. It’s a daily engagement with the country’s different cultures, languages and even food. It is a process of negotiating constant hurdles and challenges: does the autowallah or the sabziwalla fleece you because of your looks, does the landlord charge you more because he thinks you can pay more?  Do the police take your complaints seriously or do they brush them aside? But apart from that, there’s the conundrum of migration politics.

What gets lost in the rhetoric is that the current government has been pursuing policies akin to its predecessor to improve connectivity especially with Bangladesh. After decades of advocacy, Delhi closed the last gap in rail connection between Tripura and Bangladesh so that goods can move to the Chittagong port. This means that for the first time since 1965, technically speaking, people and goods from the NER can reach the sea. And Bangladeshi goods and people on visas can come to North-east India, instead of slipping over informally. This is how better economic and cultural ties can be built through people to people exchanges of musicians and artists, members of parliament, scholars, lawyers and journalists, representatives of grassroots organizations, sports teams and business groups.

Bangladesh is the land for business opportunities, it has a bustling economy, and it has seen the fastest growth from low to middle-level economy countries. Bhutan is too small and Myanmar is always either in a crisis or shut to the world. There is a lot of rhetoric and politics over Bangladesh and Bangladeshis, especially in Assam and other parts of the region. Nonetheless, engagement is crucial to promote connectivity and change perceptions. There’s a simple fact: you can’t wish seemingly inconvenient neighbours away. You have to figure out how to engage with them and mutually profit from that engagement.

“[The region’s] engagement [with neighbouring countries] is crucial to promote connectivity and change perceptions.

JM: Given India’s renewed focus on its eastern neighbourhood through policies such as ‘Act East’ and the NER’s proximity to these neighbours, how has New Delhi’s perception of the region changed from the ‘Look East’ policy of the 1990s to the ‘Act East’ policy now, especially since your last book ‘Strangers of the Mist’ came out in 1994? Have such policies by the Union Government, which elevate the role of the NER in India’s foreign policy, translated to any substantial changes in dealing with the region beyond its mainland gaze?

SH: New Delhi’s perception may have changed but the NER’s perception of New Delhi is still fundamentally similar to what it was years ago. I think there’s a point to be made here, which is that perceptions are made by policies and changes to policies as well as what is applied on the ground.

There are changes on the ground, such as infrastructural changes but not all of it is benefitting the region. Decisions are often taken which are sought to be rammed down the throat. For instance, the concept of palm oil plantation. This would benefit only an elite population and lead to high damage to ecosystems. These are not very nuanced in their approach. Whether it is one party in power or another, some of the approaches are similar. For example, the concept of big is good. Big infrastructure, big dams. These do not take into account the voices of the people.

Unless you involve people [from the region] and include them in the process of growth, they will continue to look upon these developments as something that does not involve them.

I think that is where a lot of the problem continues to arise, develop, and stay. Unless you involve people [from the region] and include them in the process of growth, they will continue to look upon these developments as something that does not involve them. The one size fits all approach does not work. For example, even in the Himalayas, there is so much difference. Uttarakhand is so different to the Eastern Himalaya. The communities are different, the cultural and political context is different as is the social and economic context.

If you look at ‘Act East’ and ‘Look East,’ these are phrases and visions. How does one ‘Act East’ if their neighbour does not want them to come? Since February [2021], there is a virtual lockdown in Myanmar due to the coup. In that case, there is not a lot that can be done. Your success also depends on your neighbours.

Policies also depend on internal context and what drives growth and relationships internally. Take border clashes between states in the NER, for example: Assam and Mizoram. This sends a signal to anyone who wants to come in and invest in the region. The supply chains are global. The impact might be local but is also felt beyond it. When there is a lockdown in one place, it blocks the supply chains right down the line. Even after it becomes functional, you have still lost a number of days, if not lives.

[T]he ‘Act East’ policy needs to have the north-east states working with each other, within the region.

Therefore, I think the ‘Act East’ policy needs to have the north-east states working with each other, within the region. There have been several seminars and workshops which have been going on since the 1990s, and there is some implementation on the ground. However, you are stuck at the borders, certainly on the eastern front with Myanmar. In Bangladesh, the relationship is much better than in the past, but now Bangladesh has a reaction to what is happening over here. Ideas are not closed by borders. Ideas leap across borders. You can give it any name or any policy, but ultimately it comes down to how inclusive it is and how much is possible to strategize and move at any particular time.

JM: With a new focus on cross-border connectivity projects, investments and developmental projects are pouring into the Northeast and transforming its physical and socio-economic landscape. This also brings many challenges that accompany development, such as the loss of indigenous wildlife and environmental degradation. These concerns are shared by other developing countries in the region undergoing fast-paced development often difficult to sustain, including Bangladesh. In what ways can north-eastern state governments work with their counterparts in neighbouring countries to solve these common regional challenges?

SH: Environmental issues are a huge subject. Let us take the issue of river waters. There is something called the International River Waters Convention, which is not a binding treaty, but a convention. None of the countries of South Asia or even China are party to that convention. There is an element of sharing in river waters, especially in the NER. The Brahmaputra is the largest river, and it goes to three countries: Tibet in China, North-East in India, and Bangladesh. However, there are close to fifty rivers that flow into the Brahmaputra. These are big or medium-sized rivers. None of these are small. They cannot be classified as tributaries either. They are rivers on their own. For example, Teesta, Meghna, Lohit, and Dibang. This water flows to the sea and the only thing governments can seem to do with it, whether it is in India or Bangladesh and China, is to build dams.

Rivers need, like human beings, a certain equanimity, a certain basic survival level. If you construct dams on rivers, you will kill them. This is because a dam is just humans trying to control the river and by extension, nature. If China and India continue to build hundreds of dams, it affects lives downstream. Not just human life, but the life of all creatures living side-by-side. This is something we are unable to understand well. There are sudden surges and sudden bursts in the rivers. This will continue to get worse. Communities do not understand how the government is dealing with this. In their own way, they are trying to adapt to a very difficult situation.

It is certainly difficult to work on with Myanmar because they are not doing anything there. In Bangladesh, there is an opportunity to work together, particularly to enable better river flows. The construction of dams affects Bangladesh in the end. If India builds dams in Arunachal and the Chinese build dams in Tibet, it will impact Bangladesh, the last on the line before the water flows into the Bay of Bengal.

India and Bangladesh need to work together, particularly because we have good relations. We have constructed a polluting set of power stations, in Bangladesh in the Delta, which is impacting the mangrove forests and the tiger population there, apart from the human population. There is a need to walk the talk. These issues are far greater than just a dam here or generating energy security for one nation. It is about how countries live together by taking care of their part of the world, in more ways than just generating power and making sure that they are okay while the environment is damaged very deeply.

If you look at the North-East, it is a place where there is an exploitation of natural resources, human resources and an extraction of opportunities for growth that lie within the region.

JM: You played an important role as an intermediary between the Union Government and various local political groups in north-eastern states, for example, to facilitate peace talks between the former and National Socialist Council of Nagaland (Isak-Muivah) in Nagaland, and your work in the Justice Jeevan Reddy Committee. Given your experience, what are the stakes for New Delhi to help resolve the current conflict in Myanmar, particularly given its proximity to states in the NER? Are there any lessons it can draw from its past role in mediating conflict between domestic states in the NER?

SH: I do not think New Delhi can take a mediating role in Myanmar because the Burmese do not like interference in their internal matters. We have been connected to various insurgent groups for many years. They have been our listening posts for Burma and its domestic developments, as well as for China and Chinese interests in Burma.

India would much rather have a stable Burma which is not necessarily democratic. I think that is frankly how it is because stability in another country matters more than the types of freedoms we speak of.

Peace and stability do not necessarily mean the restoration of democracy. India dealt with the military government in Myanmar for many years before Aung San Suu Kyi came to power. It will continue to deal with another one, no matter how brutal it is. The important thing about the recent Myanmar exodus into the North-East is that it is from the border states of Myanmar into the region. Few from the interior regions will cross into India. It is primarily those communities that have kin on the other side, in terms of natural affinity and connections, shared heritage and geography, which will come.

The union government gave the direction that people should be turfed out of the region. However, the Chief Minister of Mizoram said these are our people and if we are a democracy, we must welcome them and take care of them on humanitarian grounds. More people have come in the past few months because there has been a surge of refugees. Mizos and people on the Manipuri border are being very generous in addressing these issues. They reacted to the union government’s edict not to allow Burmese refugees in by opening their homes, setting up camps and providing food, provisions and shelter, and raising funds locally for their succour and sustenance. In other words, they stepped in where the government failed to respond with humanity.

We saw the same story in Manipur. The Mizoram Chief Minister wrote to the Prime Minister that his government was not going to turn people in distress away and that India as a democracy should welcome them in a humanitarian gesture. The state stood up to New Delhi for the rights of nationals of a different country. That is an amazing act of moral statesmanship and leadership that bigger states, who are picking on poor and vulnerable groups and individuals, would do well to heed. Often the union government does not show the same generosity to people who are suffering such as the Rohingyas, over a million of whom have taken refuge in Bangladesh and only approximately 20,000 – a much smaller number – are registered with the UNHCR here.

People who live in the region or have a stake in it are interested in living peacefully and with goodwill towards each other in order to prosper. I think there has been so much ill-will caused by conflict in the state and communities or movements and suspicion between people. There is now scope for this goodwill and for efforts to reduce this prejudice which we see even in other areas. I think that needs to be the priority for all of us in terms of the region and its connection with the mainland.

About the author:

Sanjoy Hazarika, human rights activist, scholar, author, journalist and filmmaker, is currently International Director of the Commonwealth Human Rights Initiative (CHRI), New Delhi. He is the author of several books, including most recently, Strangers No More: New Narratives from the North East (2018), a successor to his acclaimed, Strangers of the Mist (1994). He is a columnist and commentator on rights issues, conflict, migration and development-related issues in the North East and its neighbourhood.

He is currently working on two new books, including a travelogue. Earlier, he was Founder- Director of the Centre for North East Studies and Policy Research at Jamia Millia Islamia and has launched C-NES which pioneered the boat clinics on the Brahmaputra. Hazarika’s documentaries include river journeys, films on the endangered Gangetic Dolphin, and the impact of conflict on women in the region.

The post New Narratives from the North-East: Domestic Politics and Regional Implications first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/new-narratives-from-the-north-east-domestic-politics-and-regional-implications/feed/ 0 895708
In Dialogue with Shivshankar Menon on the Russia-Ukraine War http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-dialogue-with-shivshankar-menon-on-the-russia-ukraine-war/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=in-dialogue-with-shivshankar-menon-on-the-russia-ukraine-war http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-dialogue-with-shivshankar-menon-on-the-russia-ukraine-war/#respond Mon, 07 Mar 2022 09:28:10 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895683 In the first episode of In Dialogue, Shivshankar Menon, Distinguished Fellow, CSEP, and former NSA, talks to Constantino Xavier, Fellow, CSEP, about the ongoing Russia-Ukraine crisis, India’s stand, and the implications in the Indo-pacific region.

The post In Dialogue with Shivshankar Menon on the Russia-Ukraine War first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
As the Russia-Ukraine crisis escalates, countries are reassessing their responses. For India, the ongoing situation poses a particular challenge for her geo-strategic calculus as New Delhi remains close to Moscow and is also a part of the QUAD with the U.S., Australia and Japan.  In the first episode of In Dialogue, Shivshankar Menon, Distinguished Fellow, CSEP, and former National Security Advisor (NSA), talks to Constantino Xavier, Fellow, CSEP, about the ongoing Russia-Ukraine crisis, India’s stand, and the implications in the Indo-Pacific region.

The post In Dialogue with Shivshankar Menon on the Russia-Ukraine War first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-dialogue-with-shivshankar-menon-on-the-russia-ukraine-war/feed/ 0 895683
India’s China Conundrum: Learning from the Past? http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-china-conundrum-learning-from-the-past/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-china-conundrum-learning-from-the-past http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-china-conundrum-learning-from-the-past/#respond Wed, 09 Feb 2022 08:43:37 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895611 Tibet today has ceased to be a factor in India-China relations and India can no longer leverage its past relationship with Tibet for resolution of the present problem with China .

The post India’s China Conundrum: Learning from the Past? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Shruti Jargad interviews Avtar Singh Bhasin on his new book, Nehru, Tibet, and China, published by Penguin Random House India in 2021.

Bhasin’s voluminous collection ‘India-China Relations 1947-2000: A Documentary Study’ and the ten-volume compilation of India-Pakistan documents are a treasure trove for any Indian foreign policy student.  In this new book, Bhasin builds on his meticulous reading of archival materials that remain largely inaccessible, including some of the Nehru Papers. He provides his interpretation on the reasoning behind the decisions made by top leaders that culminated in the 1962 India-China war.

The book aims to dispel notions of Chinese betrayal in the minds of the Indian public. Bhasin argues that the skewed narrative and secrecy over the archival documents obscure costly policy judgments that Prime Minister Nehru made. While Nehru was aware that India would come face-to-face with China upon the Communist takeover of Tibet, he was adamant in his belief that “there was no chance of any military danger to India arising from any possible change in Tibet” (p. 45). Bhasin notes that the Prime Minister also bet on his long-held notion of Asian solidarity where “China and India would play a dominant role” (p. xxvi). The book argues that the contradictions in his policy were revealed when Nehru let go of several opportunities to discuss the border question, in 1954, at the time of signing the Tibet Trade Agreement, and again in 1960 during the Delhi Summit with Chinese Premier Zhou Enlai. Instead, when signs of border conflict emerged, Nehru made unilateral moves and launched the forward policy even without sufficient defence capabilities.

This book presents more light on extensive archival materials that are important to understand how India dealt with China in the past, and how that shapes contemporary India-China relations. Bhasin’s perspective concentrates on the pitfalls in the foreign policymaking process six decades ago, including the lack of preparedness on the border and keeping the public in the dark about the actual situation. At present, when China remains India’s most significant foreign policy challenge and with the border conflict flaring up since 2017, these historical issues are, once again, relevant.

Shruti Jargad: In your book, you highlight the contradictions in Nehru’s China policy (p. 72). Presently, on the one hand, India is confronted with an unresolved boundary and increased Chinese transgressions, but on the other hand, China continues to serve as its largest trading partner.  Is this a ‘contradiction’? How can India balance its economic interests with the new political reality?

A.S. Bhasin: The present situation is a legacy of the past. After the boundary question was frozen during the visit of Rajiv Gandhi in 1988, the bilateral relations moved towards trade and other areas. Given the price advantage, Indian industrialists found it economical to trade with China as compared to other markets resulting in increased dependence on China. Similarly, the price advantage of Chinese consumer goods resulted in a phenomenal surge in their imports too.  Chinese import from India as compared to its exports throughout have remained at a substantial lower level resulting in a huge imbalance in trade. For instance, despite the pandemic and adversarial relations in the eight months (January to August) of the current year (2021), China’s exports to India are $58 billion as against India’s exports of $19.85 billion. Unless Indian industry and business diversify or develop indigenous sources, the imbalance and dependence on China would continue and this contradiction is unlikely to go away any time soon.

SJ: In your chapters, you note China’s dealings with Myanmar, Russia, and Nepal (p. 251). More recently, it has also signed an agreement with Bhutan to speed up border negotiations. Why has China been willing or able to resolve historical border disputes with its other neighbours, except India?

 

ASB: Peaceful borders between neighbours are the product of negotiated agreements by adjusting rival claims, interests and ambitions at points where they adjoin. China had a boundary problem with all its neighbours till the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1991 giving way to the birth of many countries. The borders of new countries were settled largely to their mutual satisfaction thereafter. It should be noted that all these countries then were in a much weaker position than China. With Vietnam, it fought a war, lost and then resolved its differences on the borders and settled its boundary.  China however, managed to create an impression generally of its reasonable attitude towards the boundary question. However, the dispute with India remains like a sore thumb. Prime Minister Nehru on 20 November 1951 had declared in Parliament that our maps show that “the McMahon Line is our boundary and that is our boundary, map or no map.” Later Girija Shankar Bajpai, as Governor of Bombay and earlier Secretary General in the Ministry of External Affairs had said “since China had never accepted the McMahon Line, the frontier question could be hardly regarded as settled”.

The unilateral alteration of the international border and insistence that even if it was not demarcated, it was understood by usage and custom… has since [Nehru] remained the bane of the India-China territorial problem.

In the western sector, where the Ladakh border adjoins Aksai Chin, in the Survey of India maps, it was shown as “undefined”. Nehru had said it was “defined chiefly by long usage and custom.” Later, he ordered replacement of old maps with new maps showing this part of the international border as “defined” with a new line drawn unilaterally and made it non-negotiable. The unilateral alteration of the international border and insistence that even if it was not demarcated, it was understood by usage and custom and hence there was no need for any fresh demarcation, has since remained the bane of the India-China territorial problem. The recently promulgated Chinese Boundary law would make a difficult problem much more difficult to resolve.

SJ: In 1959, when taken into confidence by Nehru about deteriorating relations with China, USSR leader Khrushchev had advised India to ‘settle borders by give and take’ (p. 300). Later in 1962, you assert that Nehru’s letter ‘practically outsourced the defence of India to the US’ (p. 304). In the current context, what role do external actors such as the United States and Russia play in the recent flare-up at the border?

ASB: In the fifties and sixties, the border question was essentially bilateral and the Soviet advice in 1959 was only friendly and private since ambassador KPS Menon had raised it with Khrushchev. As far as the United States was concerned, it only responded to Indian request for assistance in 1962. Essentially, there was no foreign intervention of any kind nor any foreign country took any public position on the conflict.

Presently, the Indian problem with China has assumed international dimensions. China now suffers from hubris and considers itself a “super power” and has run into problems with many countries on one count or the other—with the United Kingdom on Hong Kong, with Australia on trade, with Japan on the ownership of Senkaku Island in East China sea, with Southeast countries on the South China Sea, and the United States on its projection of military power. The world is now much more inter-connected than in the sixties and countries do take position on any issue which threatens the peace generally anywhere. This is how the international community today reacts where ever and whenever any threat to peace is perceived.

SJ: ‘China continued to nibble at India’s borders without raising too much concern in Delhi. There were scattered incidents at Walong, Shipki La and so on’ (p. 214). Do you think Chinese aggression on the border since 2017 is a leaf out of the 1962 rulebook?

Since Nehru had declared India’s border sacrosanct and not open for discussion, China adopted the strategy of nibbling on the borders to make India aware that there was a border dispute which needed a settlement.

ASB: I do not think so. China, after occupation of Tibet had two objectives, to end India’s special rights and privileges in Tibet and then make India settle its borders with Tibet which had become China’s border. After India had been squeezed out of Tibet in 1954, it was time for China to work on the borders. Since Nehru had declared India’s border sacrosanct and not open for discussion, China adopted the strategy of nibbling on the borders to make India aware that there was a border dispute which needed a settlement. Now there is no doubt about the dispute and hence, infringements are with a specific purpose which China may have in any particular incident.  The borders then were also not manned as they are now, and there is immediate response to any infringement.

SJ: You mention that post-colonial borders reflect “vagaries and irrationalities of history” (p. 327) but at the same time allude to the importance of “agreed, well defined, delineated and demarcated borders” (p. 193). What do you think are the preconditions for India and China to move from border disengagement to the boundary question?

ASB: The narrative in the sixties that led to the conflict in 1962 and which the successive governments have followed meticulously was that China had stabbed India in the back. It has, since then, got firmly implanted in the minds of the people of India. Resolution of any dispute requires give and take. Unfortunately, any compromise with the held position now would create a hue and cry in the country, that peace is being bought at the cost of national honour. The first and foremost requirement is to correct the skewed understanding of our own people and convince them about their flawed understanding of those events, by opening the archives. The debate that is unleashed today in the media by ill-informed experts on the basis of half backed facts, leaves the TV-driven public more confused than any wiser. Access to archives would lead to well-informed debate in the country and the public would be ready to accept any solution by give and take. Once this process has been successfully completed, the ground would be prepared for discussions with China to arrive at settlement, by give and take.

The Chinese, by the promulgation of the new Boundary Law, are seeking to reverse their earlier held position of settlement by the quid pro quo principle: China accepting the McMahon Line if India accepted Chinese occupation of Aksai Chin.

The Chinese, by the promulgation of the new Boundary Law, are seeking to reverse their earlier held position of settlement by the quid pro quo principle: China accepting the McMahon Line if India accepted Chinese occupation of Aksai Chin. Since then, it has signed several agreements on peace and tranquillity to maintain peace and status quo on the borders, which it must honour.

SJ: In several chapters, you mention India gave up not only the special rights in Tibet that were inherited from the British but also long-standing cultural and diplomatic ties in an attempt to appease China. What is the role of Tibet in India-China bilateral relations in the present-day context? Can India still leverage its historic trade and cultural ties with Tibet today?

Tibet today has ceased to be a factor in India-China relations and India can no longer leverage its past relationship with Tibet for resolution of the present problem with China.

ASB: The simple answer is, Tibet has no role to play in Sino-Indian relations generally or in the settlement of the boundary question. Tibet today has ceased to be a factor in India-China relations and India can no longer leverage its past relationship with Tibet for resolution of the present problem with China.

About the author:

Avtar Singh Bhasin retired from the Ministry of External Affairs in 1993 after three-decade of service as head of the Historical Division.  Since then, he has taken to academic research.  He was Senior Fellow at the Indian Council of Historical Research and an Honorary Fellow at the Institute of Contemporary Studies of the Nehru Memorial Museum and Library.  He has produced several studies on South Asia. His publications include a series, each in five volumes on India’s relations with Sri Lanka, Bangladesh and Nepal and another ten-volume study on Pakistan. His last attempt in this series was a five-volume a study of India’s Relations with China, 1947-2000 which is the forerunner for the present book. He also published for the Ministry of External Affairs an annual series titled-India’s Foreign Relations from 2002 to 2013. His other books are (i) Some Called it Partition, Some Freedom, (ii) India in Sri Lanka, Between Lion and the Tigers, and (iii) India-Pakistan: Neighbours at Odds.

The post India’s China Conundrum: Learning from the Past? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-china-conundrum-learning-from-the-past/feed/ 0 895611
Ladakh’s Transformation from a Connecting Bridge to a Borderland http://stg.csep.org/blog/ladakhs-transformation-from-a-connecting-bridge-to-a-borderland/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=ladakhs-transformation-from-a-connecting-bridge-to-a-borderland http://stg.csep.org/blog/ladakhs-transformation-from-a-connecting-bridge-to-a-borderland/#respond Thu, 03 Feb 2022 11:15:07 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895588 The Sambandh blog attempts to understand the complex history of Ladakh and its transformation from being a bridge between the plains of India and Central Asia, to becoming a deeply contested and heavily guarded territory between China and India.

The post Ladakh’s Transformation from a Connecting Bridge to a Borderland first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Antara Ghosal Singh interviews Dr. Kyle Gardner on his book, “The Frontier Complex: Geopolitics and the Making of the India-China Border, 1846-1962,” published by Cambridge University Press, 2021.

The book provides a comprehensive history of Ladakh’s encounter with the British Empire and describes the process of transformation of this “historical entrepôt” (p. 25), wherein the former “crossroads of commerce and cultural exchange” (p. 20) have been reduced to a modern, disputed borderland. It examines how the pre-colonial understandings of space and territory differed from the colonial state’s geopolitical vision of the world, where geography played the key role in state formation, rationalizing natural objects like mountains and rivers and using them as political tools (p. 5). It further narrates how the imperial state’s failure to demarcate the border became a troubled legacy for post-colonial nation-states, in this case India and China, which inherited the ideas of territory, border security and transformed the borders into “objects of existential significance” (p. 3).

At a time when India and China are locked in critical political and military stand-offs in Eastern Ladakh, the book is a must read to understand the complex history of Ladakh and its transformation from being a bridge between the plains of India and Central Asia, to becoming a deeply contested and heavily guarded territory between China and India.

Antara Ghosal Singh: In the book you have explored the idea of “multiple modes of seeing space for the precolonial inhabitants of Ladakh…” (p. 27) – like material, cosmological, political, and linguistic – and have argued that the “pre-colonial conception of space was more pluralistic than the subsequent political conception of space” (p. 28). How did you develop this “modes of seeing” concept?

Kyle Gardner: One of the aims of the book is to show how the colonial British encounter with the Himalayas brought about dramatic changes in conceptions of political space, not just in terms of Ladakh, but across South Asia and the broader postcolonial world. When the British created the princely state of Jammu & Kashmir in 1846, they set about attempting to define its territorial limits. In so doing, the boundary-making principles and practices they developed and applied were often at odds with local understandings of space, political or otherwise.

Having studied Ladakh’s history and lived there prior to delving into the colonial archives, I had a general sense of the lenses through which Ladakhis had historically conceived of the space they inhabited. These historical conceptions of space included, for instance, cosmological aspects tying together local deities and the landscape (mountains, streams, glaciers, or even trees). The spaces produced by these cosmological dimensions could overlap with, but remained distinct from, political conceptions of space tied to local rulers or monasteries and to tributary or customary relations between neighbouring polities.

I detailed four “modes of seeing” in my first chapter. Cosmological, material, political, and linguistic ties connected precolonial Ladakh to the broader Himalayan world, to Tibet, Central Asia, and the plains of India. I decided to focus specifically on the spatial aspect of these categories because, at its most abstract, the book examines the transformation of political space through colonial frontier and border making practices and ideas. This schema is, of course, not to say that precolonial Ladakhis didn’t see what we might see today in Ladakh (i.e. a mountain), but to suggest that the colonial encounter was – among many things – a conflict between different ways of conceiving of space and that the colonial “vision” was often at odds with a more complex Ladakhi one.

AGS: You discussed local challenges to the colonial state’s “static and enclosed vision of territory” (p. 158) in Ladakh, where “borderlines drawn on paper were often irrelevant to the lived experience of moving populations” (p. 177). Despite local opposition, the colonial map-making project succeeded eventually. What were its implications for local communities living in the borderlands and how did they respond to its impact?

KG: I’m not sure I would describe colonial map-making, at least in Ladakh, as having been particularly successful. The dispute between India and China today over the Aksai Chin is at least in part a result of incomplete and contradictory attempts by the British to survey and map the arid, uninhabited region now bisected by the Line of Actual Control. When, in 1954, Jawaharlal Nehru unilaterally decided to have India’s Himalayan borders marked as definite, he was enshrining a territorial claim that rested on limited surveys, most prominently a single “traverse survey” by William Johnson in 1865 that depicted a neat crescent of mountains that satellite images would later show does not exist. But in a practical sense the British attempts to define a border mattered very little for those who lived in the region or traversed the would-be frontier.

While the triennial trade mission from Leh to Lhasa known as the ‘Lopchak’ continued past 1947, the last trip, in 1950, consisted of only 4 people—a sign that the trade between Ladakh and Tibet was dying even before the Chinese occupation of Tibet severed ties.

British aspirations to cultivate trade through Ladakh to Central Asia and Tibet were eventually replaced with fears about unwanted “trans-frontier men” crossing into India, although they weren’t particularly effective at deterring local traffic. Trade declined in the first half of the 20th century, but this was driven by changing economic relations within Central Asia and the opening of new routes to Tibet as much as by limited policing of the imperial frontier. While the triennial trade mission from Leh to Lhasa known as the ‘Lopchak’ continued past 1947, the last trip, in 1950, consisted of only 4 people—a sign that the trade between Ladakh and Tibet was dying even before the Chinese occupation of Tibet severed ties.

Colonial policies rarely interfered in the everyday lives of Ladakhis. When they did, it was often in the form of disputes over where taxes were owed. This was most evident among those who moved between Ladakh and Tibet, usually pastoralists or traders who were sought by one local governor or another for unpaid taxes or duties. There are a number of these cases in the colonial record, which provide a window into the problem of defining the frontier in eastern Ladakh. There, on the high-altitude Changthang Plateau, the geographical border-making principles used by the British in much of the Himalaya could not be effectively applied. But apart from those instances of jurisdictional uncertainty, the full impact of the colonial map-making project was only felt after 1947, when the government of India inherited maps that were in some cases literally borderless. But this did not affect border communities until a de facto borderline was imposed on the region after 1962.

AGS: Do you think the present state of the border between the Republic of India and the People’s Republic of China is more a result of actions taken by these two states in the last 70 years, or due to actions by the 19th and 20th century Englishmen in the subcontinent and Tibet?

KG: This is a difficult question because both sets of actors had major, but very different, roles to play. The current state of tensions along the disputed border is most directly the result of actions taken on the part of the leaders of the Republic of India and the People’s Republic of China in the decade or so that preceded the 1962 war. Those decisions, by Jawaharlal Nehru, Zhou Enlai, and their many subordinates, have ossified in subsequent decades. But many of the conditions for those actions taken between Indian independence and the 1962 war stretch back into the colonial era.

Historians love counterfactuals, and in one scenario or another it is quite possible to imagine Zhou and Nehru agreeing to jointly demarcate the border in the 1950s, particularly in the aftermath of the agreement on Tibet signed in 1954 and the resulting goodwill that it generated. Ambassador Nirupama Rao’s recent book vividly highlights the degree to which India had leverage over China in the early 1950s and it might have been possible for Nehru and Zhou to agree to mutually define the shared border. But Nehru chose not to raise the issue forcefully, in part because India inherited a set of assumptions about its territory from the British, whether outlined in treaty, marked on maps, or assumed “by custom.” By taking Tibet by force, China had a weaker claim to its political legitimacy in the Himalayas than India did, but that also pushed China to exert more aggressive administrative control, which proved militarily advantageous for them.

But your question also raises that quintessential historical debate: what drives history – people or processes? And, of course, the simple answer is both. But on balance, I’d say that processes and structures have more durable effects. On the Indian side, the decisions that Nehru took towards China rested on certain structural assumptions about the territorial and legal claims that India inherited form the British. The actions taken by the British in the 19th and early 20th centuries constrained the actions that the Republic of India and the People’s Republic of China could take post-1947, but did not wholly determine them.  Nehru and Zhou, and subsequent leaders, could have pushed to mutually demarcate the border. And the choice to do so remains, even if the historical inertia now in place does make that choice significantly harder.

AGS: The India-China border crisis of 2020 is playing out in Ladakh. You bring out vividly how the securitisation of the frontier that the British began has been continued incessantly by both India and China leading to a crisis situation. How can policy-makers course correct and reverse these trends set in motion by the colonial government? Can India leverage its relations with local communities living in the borderlands to counter China in the current context?

KG: The securitization of the frontier that began during the colonial period certainly was accelerated after independence, and particularly after the war in 1962. However, even before 1962, India and China were jockeying for influence among Himalayan borderland communities, a process described as “shadowing” by the historian Bérénice Guyot-Réchard. She used the term, drawn from the parliamentary system practice of having “shadow” governments, to describe the historical dynamics between India and China along the northeastern border in present-day Arunachal Pradesh. Once it consolidated power in Tibet, China had certain advantages over India, both infrastructurally and geographically—holding the high ground of the Tibetan Plateau.

India’s democratic values are its greatest policy asset when it comes to better incorporating borderland communities into its body politic.

In general, India has treated the Himalayan populations it governs far better than China has treated those within Tibet. But India continues to struggle in the northeast, as we’ve recently witnessed in Nagaland. From a policy perspective, Delhi should be wary of continuing to apply laws, such as the Armed Forces Special Powers Act (AFSPA), that promote the image of the Indian military as occupiers. Even if India continues to secure its territory, if borderland communities come to see Delhi as essentially an occupying or otherwise oppressive force, it will have failed to bring these communities into the fold of the republic. That is China’s great policy failure in Tibet: it controls the territory, but it has turned the Tibet Autonomous Region (TAR) into a deeply repressive police state in order to do so. India’s democratic values are, frankly, its greatest policy asset when it comes to better incorporating borderland communities into its body politic.

AGS: Your research makes use of distinct local and linguistic sources from pre-colonial Ladakhi archives. How significant are these regional archives to improve our understanding of Ladakh and move beyond the conventional, security-driven narratives on borderlands?

If we want to better understand the histories of India’s borderlands, we need to encourage local scholarship and ensure that local archives are funded, preserved, and kept accessible for scholars.

KG: The short answer is that local archives and local scholars are essential to understanding the histories of borderlands. Given that the focus of much of my book was on the colonial period, I necessarily drew heavily from the British colonial archive, which is voluminous and relatively well preserved in both the National Archives of India in Delhi and various state archives. Sources from the erstwhile princely state of Jammu & Kashmir, many in Persian and Urdu, also exist in archives in Jammu, Srinagar, and Leh, though in smaller volumes than the British records. Local Ladakhi sources are even less plentiful, especially when compared to the mountains of English-language sources. But they are extremely important. These include monastery records, documented oral traditions, religious biographies (rnam thar), and of course the royal chronicles of Ladakh – the la dwags rgyal rabs. If we want to better understand the histories of India’s borderlands, we need to encourage local scholarship and ensure that local archives are funded, preserved, and kept accessible to scholars. As you rightly note, we need to go deeper than the standard narratives on borderlands, which too often ignore the rich, varied, and complex histories of these communities.

About the author:

Dr. Kyle Gardner is a Non-Resident Scholar at the Sigur Center for Asian Studies, George Washington University. His first book, The Frontier Complex: Geopolitics and the Making of the India-China Border, 1846-1962, was published by Cambridge University Press in January 2021.

The post Ladakh’s Transformation from a Connecting Bridge to a Borderland first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/ladakhs-transformation-from-a-connecting-bridge-to-a-borderland/feed/ 0 895588
Union Budget 2022-23: Key Takeaways by CSEP Scholars http://stg.csep.org/blog/union-budget-2022-key-takeaways-by-csep-distinguished-fellows/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=union-budget-2022-key-takeaways-by-csep-distinguished-fellows http://stg.csep.org/blog/union-budget-2022-key-takeaways-by-csep-distinguished-fellows/#respond Tue, 01 Feb 2022 10:11:40 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895558 Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman presented the Union Budget 2022-23 on February 1. CSEP scholars Rakesh Mohan, Montek Singh Ahluwalia, Vikram Singh Mehta, and Jaimini Bhagwati analyse the Budget and reflect on some of the key takeaways. 

The post Union Budget 2022-23: Key Takeaways by CSEP Scholars first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman presented the Union Budget 2022-23 on February 1 and said that the Indian economy is estimated to grow at 9.2% in the coming year. Budget 2022-23 focused on the crucial areas of inclusive development, productivity enhancement, energy transition, climate action and financing investments.

CSEP scholars Vikram Singh Mehta, Rakesh Mohan, Montek Singh Ahluwalia, Jaimini Bhagwati and Rajesh Chadha analyse the Budget and reflect on some of the key takeaways.

Rakesh Mohan, President and Distinguished Fellow, CSEP

 

Montek Singh Ahluwalia, Distinguished Fellow, CSEP

 

Vikram Singh Mehta, Chairman and Distinguished Fellow, CSEP

 

Jaimini Bhagwati, Distinguished Fellow, CSEP

Rajesh Chadha, Senior Fellow, CSEP

 

The post Union Budget 2022-23: Key Takeaways by CSEP Scholars first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/union-budget-2022-key-takeaways-by-csep-distinguished-fellows/feed/ 0 895558
Jungle Passports: Navigating the India-Bangladesh Borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/jungle-passports-navigating-the-india-bangladesh-borderlands/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=jungle-passports-navigating-the-india-bangladesh-borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/jungle-passports-navigating-the-india-bangladesh-borderlands/#respond Tue, 25 Jan 2022 07:18:04 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895531 The Sambandh blog explores the mobility and the equilibrium surrounding the lives of the Muslim and Garo Christian communities in the volatile India - Banladesh border zones.

The post Jungle Passports: Navigating the India-Bangladesh Borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Jahnavi Mukul interviews Malini Sur, Senior Lecturer in Anthropology, Western Sydney University, on her book, Jungle Passports: Fences, Mobility, and Citizenship at the Northeast India-Bangladesh Border, published by the University of Pennsylvania Press in 2021. 

The introduction of the Citizenship Amendment Act and National Register of Citizens in 2019 has brought to the fore questions about unauthorised Bangladeshi migration and created a sense of otherness,especially in states like Assam in Northeast India. In Jungle Passports, Sur closely attends to the judicial trials of suspectedBangladeshi foreigners and their struggles for legitimacy in Assams Foreigners Tribunals (pp.14, pp.145-169).  

Her book carefully follows the construction of Indias new border fence with Bangladesh exploring the lives and livelihoods of border societies. The primary objective of Indias new barrier is to control unauthorized Bangladeshi migration into India and smuggling. Instead of taking Indias new border infrastructure as an end in itself, Sur shows how roads, maps, rice, cattle, garments and identity documents functioned as fences in this region since the 19th century. States labelled the inhabitants of this borderland as rude savages,and frontier land-hungry peasants,and marked them as spies and traitors (p.13). Jungle Passports shows how people traversed difficult terrains and uncertain climates to sustain their livelihoods and maintain kinship relations.  

In Jungle Passports, Sur explores the mobility and the equilibrium surrounding the lives of the Muslim and Garo Christian communities in these ever-volatile border zones. Six historical and ethnographic chapters provide deep insights into how borders acquire different meanings and how border societies do not fit into the neat divisions of sovereignty, citizenship, and border governance. This book is a must-read to understand border policies and infrastructural developments that affect the everyday lives of people on the margins of Northeast India and Bangladesh. 

 Jahnavi Mukul: Your book showcases how communities along borders have adapted to political limitations and do not necessarily defy state authorities. In terms of a comparative outlook, are there border control systems around the world that have successfully been able to prevent loss of life and livelihood around mobility?

Mobility [across the India-Bangladesh borderlands] is a fundamental attribute of life as people’s claim on land historically precedes present-day national boundaries.

Malini Sur: The similar societies living along the IndiaBangladesh border have been separated by colonial and post-colonial boundaries, including the stretches that cut across Northeast India. This borderland comprises societies that are diverse in religious, ethnic, and political composition. For more than two hundred years, societies in this region have resisted the imposition of state rule through armed struggles while simultaneously using the border to make a living. Here, mobility is a fundamental attribute of life as peoples claim on land historically precedes present-day national boundaries. Suspicions inform border lives and livelihoods as people maintain kinship, farm, and trade under the gaze of bureaucrats, politicians, and heavily armed troops. While the violence, deaths, and killings along the USMexico, PalestineIsrael, and North AfricaEurope might make more headlines, the IndiaBangladesh border also has a long history of militarization.

Border walls and fences are projects of national governance and rule. They aim to keep out undocumented migrants, control border residents and contain political dissidence. But as Peter Andreas reminds us, even robust infrastructures, such as those that divide the U.S.-Mexico border, and border enforcement function as political and symbolic gestures; nation-states struggle to reduce smuggling and unauthorized migration. Not only along the US-Mexico border but globally, border policies spiral dangerous and risky ways of moving people and commodities, and in turn, more militarization. Even as people along the India-Bangladesh border resist and rebel and others refuse to accept state policies surrounding trade and movement, I show how mobility and border-crossings are far more than just a way to circumvent state authorities in peoples lives.

JM: Is there a way for India to reconcile what seems conflicting, such as to protect what it deems sensitive like cows, and simultaneously also grant space to communities on the border to facilitate their daily activities?

MS: Since the 19th century, Hindu nationalists have mobilised cows as a sacred and nationalist symbol while agrarian and pastoral communities rely on cows to make a living. India has one of the highest cattle populations in the world and is among the top five exporters of carabeef globally. The bovine economy is central to low caste Hindu and Muslim cattle workers, butchers, tanners, and others whose lives and livelihoods revolve around the care and killing of these animals. Even after the imposition of a new border with the Partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947, the states of East Pakistan and India and borderland communities had an implicit understanding that cows were a commodity. In times of scarcity and territorial raids, these animals were even more precious as border resources. In Jungle Passports, I have foregrounded the entwining and tension between the sacred and the commodity to show how cattle traffic shapes how people experience prosperity and hunger and determines who will live and who will die. 

Today, electoral politics in India encourage cow vigilantism and violence that impacts the lives and livelihoods of the most powerless people in this commodity value chain. The stakes are high and politically vitiated. But we must also bear in mind that the consumption of beef as both food and ritual is culturally specific and states like Meghalaya, Manipur, Nagaland, and Mizoram do not ban beef. Politicians and communities in Northeast India frequently protest Indias national policies on beef. Given Indias diverse communities, respecting cultural specificities is a good place to start.  

JM: One of the most fascinating aspects of the book is the description of the kinship relations between Garo Christian women and border troops. What is also particularly interesting to read is the way these women are not considered as threats by the Indian Border Security Forces. What role does gender and ethnicity play in creating a perception of certain groups being a danger to territorial integrity?

Gender, ethnicity, and religion determine how Indian and Bangladeshi troops perceive border residents … [for example,] banter between troops and women border-crossers help normalise a heavily militarized border.

MS: Gender, ethnicity, and religion determine how Indian and Bangladeshi troops perceive border residents. It is not only relationships of trust and reciprocity but also banter between troops and women border-crossers that help normalise a heavily militarized border. For far too long, nationalist politics has assumed that all undocumented border-crossings are aimed at taking over Indias territory. The Northeast IndiaBangladesh borderland, where indigenous societies make moral claims to shared resources and mobility but not to land as political territory, challenges the taken for granted assumptions about unauthorised migration.

I was especially interested in the life-worlds of borderland Garo matrilineal societies where women have taken a lead in social and economic life, often out of compulsion in contexts of conflicts and scarcity. I have shown how East Pakistan and later Bangladeshs state national projects of recovery and protection did not extend to include indigenous Garo women who were geographically and socially remote. These women have mobilized border resources and taken risks to circumvent national policies and the control of borders. They continue to challenge gendered norms and hierarchies within the Garo community in Bangladesh and mobilize kinship through their participation in trans-border trade. It is not that border troops do not allow male mobility at all, but politics and media in India and Bangladesh demonise the border-crossings of Muslim and Garo men as infiltratorsand bootleggers respectively, and this impacts all, including the actions of border troops.

JM: Does the ethnic composition of border communities affect the way their issues are discussed at the governmental level on the Indian and Bangladeshi sides, and what do these communities feel about the effectiveness of these governmentsefforts to control their cross-border mobility? 

MS: Yes, the issues that communities face, including obtaining permission to attend to their farms located across the border, visit families, attend feasts, travel for pilgrimage and religious occasions, partake in small-scale trading, and even to seek hospitalization depend upon their social location and the goodwill and whims of the border troops. Border enforcement policies are experienced via the military outposts where the troops reside.  

In the border zone that I studied, Bengali Muslim householders who live close to the border in Bangladeshs chars (river islands) belong to Bangladeshs dominant ethnicity (Bengali) and religion (Islam). In these chars, smuggled cattle are legalizedand Bangladeshi troops work in close cooperation with villagers. Just across the border from them, in a very similar landscape in Assam, rural societies comprising Muslims of Bengali origin who depend upon the border for a living are treated with suspicion by the Indian state as they are an untrusted religious minority. In Assam, their presence is controversial on account of ethnicity and language; they are suspected to be unauthorized Bangladeshi migrants and older settlers who grabbed land when Bengal and Assam were provinces in British India. Since 2015, the National Register for Citizensimplemented in the state of Assam aimed to detect unauthorized Bangladeshi migrantswith the intention of addressing questions of land loss, language, and ethnic conflicts but has further compounded problems and human misery.

Despite national mandates that demand a clear division between military and civilian spaces, and restricted contact, dependencies straddle demarcated sites [along the borderland between the state of Meghalaya and Bangladesh].

Along the borderland that is divided between the state of Meghalaya in Northeast India and Mymensingh and Netrokona districts in Bangladesh are Garo families who are today Indian and Bangladeshi citizens respectively. Suspected to be communists and persecuted for being non-Muslims, Garo families who came to be displaced from East Pakistan and later Bangladesh crossed the border and relocated to present-day Meghalaya. In Meghalaya, Indian troops have had long-standing relationships of trust and reciprocity with the mostly Christian Garos, also recruiting them for trans-border espionage. Despite national mandates that demanded a clear division between military and civilian spaces and restricted contact, dependencies straddle demarcated sites. Rather than being fleeting, or superficially transactional, such reciprocities were essential to social and moral life in a remote borderland. However, Garo villagers also came to be displaced by Indias border fence construction and were paid little compensation, measured only in terms of the land parcels they lost. In Bangladesh, Christian priests and village elders have relationships of trust with border commanders, especially for the release of undocumented travellers. On account of armed dissident groups seeking refuge in this zone and the increase in abductions, there is far more scrutiny and surveillance; old relationships of trust are gradually eroding on the Indian side.

JM: In Jungle Passports, you locate four elements (ecology, infrastructure, exchanges, and mobility) to foreground life and loss in the borderland. Can you elaborate on this further for us?

Borders shape peoples experience ofrisk andtime as they recalibrate the violence perpetrated by nation-states,and in turn,people reshape the border as vibrantcentres of relationality and exchange.

MS: When I first started my fieldwork in the region, I was seeking to explore questions surrounding undocumented labour migration. But soon the complexity and diverse worldviews of this borderland challenged my assumptions about national citizenship and transnational belonging. As an anthropologist seeking to understand societies on their own terms, I refrained from imposing easy categories and instead worked from the ground up. The four elementsinfrastructure (fences, roads, border posts, and associated construction but also rice and cows); ecology (forests, hills, rivers, animal-human relationships); exchanges (trade, banter and smuggling); and above all mobility (movement between and across of goods, people, and animals)form an enmeshed force of lifewhich Jungle Passports illustrates. Set against violence and militarization, I bring questions of vitality andthe political salience of bordersto bear upon scholarly understandings on mobility. Borders shape peoples experience ofrisk andtime as they recalibrate the violence perpetrated by nation-states,and in turn,people reshape the border as vibrantcentres of relationality and exchange.

About the author:

Dr. Malini Sur is Senior Lecturer in Anthropology and Sociology at Western Sydney University. She is an environmental and socio-cultural anthropologist with research interests in India, Bangladesh and Australia. She studies agrarian borderlands, cities and the environment. A first line of inquiry is concerned with infrastructures, transnational flows, and identities. The second explores the relationship that degraded air and mobility has to urban space. She also investigates the afterlives of natural disasters, shifting ecologies, air pollution, and climate change in Asia and more recently in Australia. She studies these themes historically and in productive dialogue with human rights discourses, along with keen attention to visual representation.

The post Jungle Passports: Navigating the India-Bangladesh Borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/jungle-passports-navigating-the-india-bangladesh-borderlands/feed/ 0 895531
From Insurgent Group to Interim Government: Taliban’s Legitimacy and Governance in Afghanistan http://stg.csep.org/blog/from-insurgent-group-to-interim-government-talibans-legitimacy-and-governance-in-afghanistan/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=from-insurgent-group-to-interim-government-talibans-legitimacy-and-governance-in-afghanistan http://stg.csep.org/blog/from-insurgent-group-to-interim-government-talibans-legitimacy-and-governance-in-afghanistan/#respond Tue, 18 Jan 2022 13:37:19 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895515 India is surrounded by neighbours increasingly confronted by conflict and civil war. Understanding how rebel groups build legitimacy and come to govern large civilian populations is critical for New Delhi to craft suitable and innovative policy responses.

The post From Insurgent Group to Interim Government: Taliban’s Legitimacy and Governance in Afghanistan first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Nitika Nayar interviews Dr. Niels Terpstra, on his paper, “Rebel Governance, Rebel Legitimacy, and External Intervention: Assessing Three Phases of Taliban Rule in Afghanistan,” published in Small Wars and Insurgencies, Volume 31 (6), in 2020.

With the recent capture of Kabul by the Taliban on August 15, the situation in Afghanistan is precarious, with civilian protests against the interim government, challenges mounted by anti-Taliban groups, and in-fighting within an increasingly factionalised Taliban. This volatile situation has also revived the debate on the ideology of the Taliban, the extent of its popular support and legitimacy, as well as the interim cabinet’s capacity to provide stability and development.

Based on fieldwork in Kunduz province and Kabul between 2013 and 2018, Terpstra’s research helps us understand the origins and renewed rise of the Taliban. He examines three key phases: the pre-1996 insurgency after the Soviet withdrawal; the period when the Taliban proclaimed the Islamic Emirate of Afghanistan (1996 – 2001); and the post-2001 insurgency. By tracing the historical trajectory of the Taliban movement, Terpstra provides deep insights into how insurgents were able to gain influence among civilians and establish territorial control by leveraging different sources of “pragmatic and moral legitimacy” (p. 1147).

The Taliban’s ability to create a “relatively safe and stable environment” (p. 1162) by efficiently settling disputes through its “shadow judiciary” (p. 1157) and restoring order and security, accorded the rebel group much of its pragmatic legitimacy. Further, it derived moral legitimacy from religious sources and narratives about foreign ‘enemy’ forces. As a result, the insurgency was able to set up a parallel administration comprising provincial and district governors, judges, police, and intelligence commanders, as well as a system of taxation. In many districts, therefore, the seeds were already sown for a new Taliban state.

Terpstra’s work makes important new empirical and conceptual contributions to the discipline of conflict studies in South Asia and helps dispel notions of the “‘failed state’ paradigm” (p. 1144). It explains how even during conflict, complex networks exist between rebel groups and civilians that help maintain some level of social and political order. From Myanmar to Afghanistan, India is surrounded by neighbours increasingly confronted by conflict and civil war. Understanding how rebel groups build legitimacy and come to govern large civilian populations is critical for New Delhi to craft suitable and innovative policy responses.

Nitika Nayar: Your research notes that post 2001, the Taliban have made certain course corrections and learned from past strategic miscalculations. For example, there has been a greater focus on “their brand” and messaging (p. 1160). We have seen similar tactics play out on the international stage, where the group has welcomed western journalists to present itself in a new, reformed avatar in its bid to gain international legitimacy. With a ground assessment from your fieldwork that dates back as recent as 2018, what are your expectations of Taliban 2.0? Apart from their new political savvy, do you see any substantive elements of change in their administration?

Niels Terpstra: In some ways, we observe history repeating itself, but important changes should be noted too. Taking over a state’s bureaucracy and territory is a different task from governing it. After the Taliban’s first capture of Kabul in 1996, the state infrastructure was largely destroyed, its wealth looted, and many public service professionals had fled the country.  Back then, running the state apparatus was new to the Taliban and it was a daunting task for these religiously schooled fighters from the countryside to do so effectively. They had none, or very limited administrative knowledge or expertise. Hence, the Islamic Emirate of Afghanistan (IEA)’s starting point was a small economy and a weak administration. The deplorable economic situation was intensified by international sanctions.

Currently, the Taliban clearly have more experience in governing the country because of their 1990s regime and the fact that they had already been governing significant parts of the country locally over the past decade.

Currently, the Taliban clearly have more experience in governing the country because of their 1990s regime and the fact that they had already been governing significant parts of the country locally over the past decade. They have become more political savvy indeed, in terms of using technology strategically and in their external communications. This is, however, not to say that the Taliban’s ideology has changed substantively. We see a somewhat stronger state apparatus but similar problems in terms of finance and technocratic capabilities. Finally, their focus in the first months has been on maintaining internal cohesion and less on an effective response to the country’s impending economic and humanitarian crises, with the general population as the main victim of this.

NN: After the capture of Kabul by the Taliban, there have been ensuing operations by the resistance movement and other anti-Taliban insurgent groups in the country. In such a situation, do you see the possibility of “parallel hierarchies” propping up across Afghanistan, which may be governed by such groups and perhaps also by competing factions within the Taliban?

NT: This certainly is a possibility, particularly for the anti-Taliban groups. In certain ways, the frame through which we looked at state-insurgent dynamics until the take-over has now flipped. As the Taliban have come to form the central government, it potentially faces similar problems like any other incumbent government. It can experience escalating factionalism within its own ranks, but it can also face stronger resistance by other armed groups. An example of this, is the way in which the Islamic State – Khorasan Province (ISKP) has continued to stage attacks. The Taliban as an insurgency was already fighting ISKP for a few years but – in a way – it remained a ‘bystander’ to ISKP attacks in Kabul, for example. It has now assumed the task of maintaining security and preventing these attacks to take place across Afghanistan, including Kabul and other bigger cities. The prevention of more and excessive attacks by ISKP is something the population will – rightfully – expect from them, but it is very doubtful if the Taliban will be able to deliver it.

NN: In your article, you argue that the Taliban spun the narrative of foreign ‘enemy’ forces on Afghan soil to boost its legitimacy among civilians and justify its territorial control. How was the Taliban’s own proximity to external actors, such as those in Pakistan, perceived by the different civilian groups you interviewed and did this impact its influence during the insurgency? If local Afghans made distinctions between foreign enemy forces and friendlier ones, are there any lessons for countries in the region as they devise their outreach strategies to engage critical intelligence assets on the ground, and civilians affected by the current humanitarian crisis?

NT: In the article, I show that the ‘foreign enemy frame’ was one of the elements in the Taliban’s narrative during the post-2001 insurgency. As social scientists, we know that the classification of ‘foreign’ and ‘non-foreign’ is partly factual but should at the same time be seen as a political social construct and a matter of framing. We also know from the conflict studies literature that these political social constructs and framing processes can work effectively to mobilize combatants and non-combatants during armed conflict. Social processes that take place during armed conflict may further harden the boundaries of these categories and/or identities.

The ‘good’ Taliban were seen [by civilians] as indigenous and more acceptable because they are considered to have local, ethnic, or tribal ties [whereas] the ‘bad’ Taliban were seen as ‘foreigners’ and in several cases, as excessively influenced by Pakistan.

What came up in my study and other research on the topic is the distinctions that some civilians employed to classify different types of Taliban that ruled their communities. One often heard distinction between the ‘good’ and ‘bad’ Taliban. The ‘good’ Taliban came from the community, from close by. These were seen as indigenous and more acceptable because they are considered to have local, ethnic, or tribal ties. The ‘bad’ Taliban were seen as ‘outsiders’ or ‘foreigners’, and in several cases, seen as excessively influenced by Pakistan, or Pakistani intelligence services more specifically. This example does not do justice to the complexities and particularities at different localities, but the distinction between ‘foreign’ and opposite categories is politically significant.

For the humanitarian responses it remains crucial that countries in the region put the well-being of civilians centre-stage, regardless of anything else. I am obviously aware of regional interests and how this involves complex decisions and choices. However, I cannot emphasize enough that the provision of essential services for the civilian population requires our full attention. Humanitarian access remains challenging but continued efforts are direly needed. A steady, light, and balanced involvement is necessary.

NN: Apart from your fieldwork in Afghanistan, a common thread seen across your other research on rebel governance is how the presence of international troops has a counter-productive effect on insurgent groups, boosting their popularity among civilians. You point out a similar trend in the civil war in Sri Lanka, where the Indian Peace Keeping Force (IPKF) had an impact on the legitimacy of the Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam (LTTE). There has been much discussion on the limitations of international forces used as instruments for state-building. Is the deployment of military force still a valid option for countries seeking to secure interests beyond their borders?

The bigger the footprint during the military deployment, the bigger the power vacuum will be with a sudden, or even a gradual, withdrawal.

NT: Yes, a few lessons can be drawn, though we must factor in that any deployment of military force by other countries should be assessed in its own specific time and place and bound by unique contextual factors. The first lesson is to carefully plan and dedicate sufficient thought to possible exit strategies. Both in the withdrawal of the IKPF in Sri Lanka in 1990 and in the withdrawal of international forces in 2021, we observe a power vacuum that was left behind. The bigger the footprint during the military deployment, the bigger the power vacuum will be with a sudden, or even a gradual, withdrawal. Simply adding more troops, as happened in Afghanistan during ‘the surge’, therefore, can undermine a successful exit strategy. It has been a complete turn-around from spending over a trillion dollars to a complete withdrawal. Following Rory Stewart, my advice is steadier, lighter, and more balanced involvement. Second, the Afghanistan experience teaches us that legitimacy matters. A technocratic so-called ‘a-political’ approach to state-building neglects the inherent political tensions that foreign interventions create. Just like Iraq, the international intervention in Afghanistan created ‘winners’ and ‘losers’, and we know that losers often become spoilers in the process of achieving peace and stability.

NN: Through fieldwork and ethnographic research, your article brings forth a new, bottom-up approach to understand the local experiences of conflict. As we see recent scholarship on South Asia increasingly uses similar methodologies to better understand insurgency, does this new approach have any limitations on findings, and what advice would you have for emerging scholars aspiring towards a nuanced understanding of conflict in South Asia?

NT: I certainly see the value of doing fieldwork and ethnographic research. In conflict studies, we must be able to bridge analyses on the micro, meso, and macro level. What the rebel governance literature and the contentious politics literature more generally have shown us, is that meso level analyses provide explanations that had remained ‘unseen’ from a macro or micro perspective only. Naturally, regional dynamics matter for our understanding of how the Taliban recently came to power, but at the same time we should pay attention to how the Taliban had already been governing large swaths of territory for nearly a decade. In this insurgent-civilian relationship, many good academic and policy-relevant research questions can be asked for all kinds of insurgencies throughout South Asia. About five years ago, for example, I remember that my research questions about rebel governance did not resonate well with foreign policymakers. They were mainly interested in ‘good governance’ of the Afghan state. The ways in which insurgencies govern and attempt to gain legitimacy in competition with the incumbent government are, however, crucial as we have now observed with the Taliban take-over. My advice, therefore, is to bridge different levels of analysis and different sources of data as much as possible.

About the author:

Niels Terpstra is Assistant Professor at the Utrecht School of Governance (USG) and Advisor at USG Consultancy. His research focuses on questions about governance, legitimacy, security, various forms of violence, insurgency, terrorism, and international relations. As policy advisor he advises and evaluates public organisations.

Academically, Niels has published articles and book chapters with publishers like Taylor & Francis, Cambridge University Press, Wolters Kluwer, and Routledge. In 2018 he was invited by the US Embassy in the Hague to participate as expert in an IVLP program on counterterrorism in the United States. Furthermore, he became a fellow of the Hofvijverkring in the Hague. Niels was awarded a national NWO grant for a four-year PhD research project about governance and legitimacy in conflict-affected areas. In 2013, Niels received the J.C. Baak MA thesis prize for research on the enhancement of peaceful societies, awarded by the Royal Holland Society of Sciences and Humanities.

Over the past years, Niels was involved in research and advisory projects for the Netherlands Ministry of Justice and Security, the Ministry of Foreign Affairs, and peace organization PAX, and the Universität der Bundeswehr München.

Email: N.M.Terpstra@uu.nl

The post From Insurgent Group to Interim Government: Taliban’s Legitimacy and Governance in Afghanistan first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/from-insurgent-group-to-interim-government-talibans-legitimacy-and-governance-in-afghanistan/feed/ 0 895515
The Kashmir Back Channel 2004 – 2007: Prospects for India-Pakistan Negotiations http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-kashmir-back-channel-2004-2007-prospects-for-india-pakistan-negotiations/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-kashmir-back-channel-2004-2007-prospects-for-india-pakistan-negotiations http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-kashmir-back-channel-2004-2007-prospects-for-india-pakistan-negotiations/#respond Wed, 17 Nov 2021 07:18:37 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895305 India and Pakistan have, in the past, entered a dialogue process in the wake of intensely violent periods. The Kashmir talks that began in 2004 are an example.

The post The Kashmir Back Channel 2004 – 2007: Prospects for India-Pakistan Negotiations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Riya Sinha interviews Dr. Happymon Jacob on his new paper, The Kashmir Back Channel: India-Pakistan Negotiations on Kashmir from 2004 to 2007, published by the Institute for the Study of Diplomacy (2021), Georgetown University.

In February 2021, India and Pakistan announced a ceasefire along the Line-of-control (LoC) in Jammu and Kashmir. It was speculated that back-channel diplomacy led to the ceasefire talks between the military commanders of both countries. High-level political meetings, especially between conflicting states, do not simply occur in the spur of the moment. They are preceded by a series of back-channel talks or diplomatic discussions to probe interest and set out an agenda.

In the last seven decades, India and Pakistan have made several attempts to settle the Kashmir dispute and improve bilateral relations, albeit with little success. In this recent paper, Jacob focuses on the India-Pakistan back-channel negotiations that took place between 2004 and 2007. These talks represented a breakthrough after a volatile period of relations between both countries. Shortly before, India and Pakistan had fought the Kargil War in 1999 and, in 2001, Pakistani terrorists attacked the Indian parliament.

Jacob makes a case that the negotiations conducted during these three-and-a-half years should be seen “as a new approach for conflict resolution between the two rivals” (p. 3). He provides insights on the factors that influence back-channel negotiations, including personalities (leadership, interlocutors, and negotiators), internal political developments, and external pressures (in this case, the United States’ intervention in Afghanistan). While the consensus eventually collapsed, Jacob maintains that the 2004-2007 back-channel diplomacy was a “unique experiment”, where the negotiators dealt with some of the most sensitive issues, including on Kashmir, in creative ways (p.23).

The paper is an important contribution to the field of conflict resolution and peacebuilding. By breaking down the nuances of back-channel diplomacy, it creates a template for future talks, not just between India and Pakistan, but also to address other “historically rooted conflicts in South Asia” (p.23). This is important for both practitioners engaged in such talks, as well as scholars seeking to better understand them.

Riya Sinha: You mention in the paper that “backchannel diplomacy derives its legitimacy from unambiguous political will” (p. 10). However, you also note that “secrecy” is essential for such talks (p. 11). Can backchannel talks be isolated from political optics, especially in the case of India and Pakistan, where there is a tendency for governments to gain credibility at the cost of one another?

Happymon Jacob: By political will, I mean here the political sanction of the leadership (Prime Ministers of India and Pakistan) for backchannel negotiations. Backchannel diplomacy is undertaken when normal diplomatic processes are unable to deliver on a major bilateral issue such as finding a resolution to a protracted and politically sensitive conflict. So, the essential purpose of the backchannel dialogue is to take the process out of the routine channels and attempt to resolve it using a more personalised and discreet channel, often directly reporting to the leaders of the respective governments.

There are several reasons why secrecy is essential in backchannel negotiations. Today, no serious negotiation on a major conflict can be conducted purely on the merit of the facts keeping the political and media pressures away, except perhaps in backchannel negotiations. Therefore, given that backchannel talks are typically held outside the normal diplomatic channels, secrecy helps in ensuring that ‘spoilers’ (I use this word with a strictly technical intent) such as opposition parties, adverse media commentary etc. do not actively subvert the talks while they are still on. Finally, secrecy also helps in ensuring that the talks do not become a victim to the inter-departmental rivalry within the government.

What is striking about the 2004-2007 backchannel was that while there was a great deal of media speculation about the existence of the backchannel itself, details of which were not known to the outside world.

So, unless they are reasonably isolated from political optics and media attention, backchannel talks are unlikely to survive and succeed. What is striking about the 2004-2007 backchannel was that while there was a great deal of media speculation about the existence of the backchannel itself, details of which were not known to the outside world. Ideally, therefore, backchannel talks should become public knowledge only when they succeed (or fail, for that matter) and when the time comes to rally the larger public around a potential agreement (if the talks were about arriving at a certain agreement on a conflict).

So, to answer your question, backchannel talks can and should be isolated from political optics if their intended objectives are to be achieved.

RS: The Karachi Agreement of 1949, signed under the office of the United Nations (UN), created the India-Pakistan boundary in Kashmir called the ‘Ceasefire Line’ (CFL). However, the Suchetgarh Agreement of 1972 delineated the ‘Line of Control’ (LoC) in Jammu and Kashmir (J&K), effectively renaming the CFL as LoC and making the presence of the UN in Kashmir irrelevant. Do you think that removing the agency of the UN from the Kashmir dispute resulted in any improvements in the conflict?

HJ: To the extent that the United Nationals Military Observer Group on India and Pakistan (UNMOGIP) was not involved in the post war negotiations in 1972 and the territorial status quo ante bellum was not reinstated in J&K after the 1971 war (unlike after the 1965 war), the UNMOGIP, at least from the Indian point of view, became irrelevant in J&K since 1972. However, UNMOGIP continues to be present in J&K and Pakistan continues to report violations of the ceasefire to the UN body which the UNMOGIP sends to its headquarters in New York even though those reports are never published. Put differently, UNMOGIP has de jure authority in J&K, not de facto.

The Indian side considers the Simla Agreement, which made the UNMOGIP’s role in Kashmir irrelevant, a major diplomatic victory over Pakistan. Although it indeed was a diplomatic victory for India, doing so has not improved the situation on the ground in Kashmir. Prior to 1972, local territorial disputes between India and Pakistan were settled by the UNMOGIP. Today such disputes lead to firing and loss of lives. The pre-1972 presence of the UN group on the CFL had also functioned as a deterrent against ceasefire violations. In that sense, the presence of UNMOGIP and the resultant peace on the CFL was most conducive for the local population that live close to the line on either side of J&K. Given the absence of any such deterrence today, Ceasefire Violations (CFVs) have caused untold damage to the civilian population on either side. There was terrorist infiltration from Pakistan into the Indian side of Kashmir in those decades, but I wonder if the UNMOGIP could check such infiltration if it were to be actively present on the LoC today.  In the end, however, I think the presence of the UNMOGIP in J&K today is a redundant exercise.

RS: You mention, rather positively, that the US War on Terror in Afghanistan enabled Pakistani President Parvez Musharraf to make a “virtue out of necessity” and pursue talks with India (p.9). However, in a recent book, Adrian Levy and Cathy Scott-Clark argue that Pakistan only needed the ceasefire to keep its pact with the US and never intended to settle for a peace deal that was favourable to Delhi. What is your take on this?

HJ: President Parvez Musharraf’s offer of talks with India on Kashmir, assurance that the Pakistani soil wouldn’t be used for terrorism against India and the bold statement that it is time to think beyond the UN resolutions on Jammu and Kashmir, may have been, at least initially, a result of indirect American pressure on Pakistan in the wake of the US’ war on terror. I do not know if the argument made by Levy and Scott-Clark is a statement of fact or an opinion. But even if their argument is right that it was a tactical ploy by Pakistan to buy time, there is overwhelming evidence to show that the Kashmir backchannel assumed a life of its own. There is little evidence to show the contrary. As a matter of fact, over the years, the Pakistani side became more serious about the Kashmir deal than the Indian side. For Musharraf, it was also a legacy issue – he wanted to go down in history as someone who resolved the Kashmir issue rather than as a military dictator.

RS: Earlier this year, we heard the news that the announcement of a ceasefire by Indian and Pakistani military chiefs was preceded by secret talks brokered by the United Arab Emirates (UAE). What are your thoughts about the role of third countries, whether US, UK, China or any other, in the resolution of the Kashmir dispute?

HJ: With regard to the role played by external powers during the 2004-2007 backchannel negotiations, there is some evidence to show that the US and UK were keen on a deal between India and Pakistan on Kashmir and encouraged the two sides to stay the course on the negotiations. As for China, I have not seen evidence to suggest that it had a role to play.

But in general, I am deeply sceptical about the role of third countries in the resolution of the Kashmir dispute. Both the US and UK appear to favour a peaceful resolution of conflicts between India and Pakistan; US due to its strategic interests in the region, and UK since it views itself as having a historical responsibility to help build peace in the subcontinent. However, any active intervention or advocacy by even well-meaning countries such as these might prove to be detrimental to the cause of conflict resolution as India is opposed to any such intervention.

Chinese neutrality on the Kashmir question appears to have undergone a major change in the recent years especially after New Delhi’s decision to reorganise J&K in August 2019.

As for China, Beijing has for a long time adopted a neutral stance on the dispute stating that it is a bilateral matter between India and Pakistan. Chinese neutrality on the Kashmir question appears to have undergone a major change in the recent years especially after New Delhi’s decision to reorganise J&K in August 2019. Since then, China’s stance on Kashmir has been anything but neutral, and its statements since 2019 indicate that it views itself as a party in the territorial conflict over the erstwhile princely state of J&K. In any case, China has been in possession of territory that formerly belonged to the princely state and as a result, it has been a party to the larger territorial conflict, a reality that has become sharper now.

In the recent past, especially last year, the Gulf states also played a role in facilitating conflict resolution between the two sides. The UAE has admitted to have played a key role in facilitating, and not mediating, a ceasefire between India and Pakistan earlier this year. UAE’s ambassador to the United States, Yousef Al Otaiba, claimed that his country had facilitated the discreet meetings between Indian and Pakistani intelligence chiefs. India, under the Modi government, has grown close to the UAE over the years. UAE’s facilitating role in this context needs to be read along with its warming of relations with Israel, another close friend of India in the region. UAE and Bahrain had signed the Abraham Accords in 2020 thereby normalising the diplomatic relations with Israel. Given the withdrawal of the American troops from Afghanistan, many of these states in West Asia are also keen that South Asia in general and Afghanistan in particular do not witness more turmoil and extremism which perhaps explains their interest.

The increasing role of the regional actors in defusing the Indo-Pak conflicts or facilitating peace between them is a new phenomenon outcomes of which are still not fully understood. Previously, the mediatory role was played mainly by the USA or even Russia. Today, many more players are on the scene willing and able to take up that role.

RS: You write that “the various aspects of the backchannel diplomacy provide a useful template to negotiate politically challenging and historically rooted conflicts both in South Asia and elsewhere” (p. 23). Do you see any prospects of revival of talks between India and Pakistan, especially given the current situation in Afghanistan and the recent meeting between the Taliban and India in Doha?

HJ: I am an optimist. I am of the opinion that the Kashmir deal negotiated between Indian and Pakistani diplomats during the 2004-2007 period is not dead – it can be revived as the template for a resolution as and when the political leadership on either side decide that they need to do something about the conflict. Kashmir is the mother of all conflicts between India and Pakistan – there is, to my mind, no getting away from that fact. Someday, it will need a resolution, a resolution that doesn’t change the existing borders. If non-alteration of the existing borders is the starting point of any future solution to Kashmir, the 2007 formula is a great template and a variation of this can be adopted by the two sides.

India and Pakistan have, in the past, entered a dialogue process in the wake of intensely violent periods. The Kashmir talks that began in 2004 are an example.

One is unsure how the Afghan situation will play out in the months and years ahead just as there is little clarity on how the situation in Afghanistan will impact on potential talks on Kashmir – it could either encourage such talks or discourage them. The current situation, in that sense, may hold little clue to what might happen in future. What is clear, though, is that India and Pakistan have, in the past, entered a dialogue process in the wake of intensely violent periods. The Kashmir talks that began in 2004 are an example. Since the Kargil war of 1999 till November 2003 when a ceasefire was agreed to by India and Pakistan in Kashmir, the situation between the two sides was tense. As I write in the paper, in December 2001, Pakistan-based terrorists carried out an attack at the Indian Parliament, killing seven security personnel and endangering the lives of Indian parliamentarians. This led to a mass mobilization of Indian troops along the border, codenamed Operation Parakram. The military build-up did not lead to a war, but the operation brought close to a million battle-ready soldiers eyeball-to-eyeball on the Indo-Pak border. Bilateral tension persisted through 2002 because of another terror strike against an Indian military facility in J&K even as ceasefire violations continued to rise on the LoC. In July 2003, there was another audacious terrorist attack on the Indian Army’s leadership in Jammu. And yet, in the wake of all this violence and tension, India and Pakistan decided in 2004 to start a peace process and appointed interlocutors to find a solution to Kashmir.

So I wouldn’t be too surprised if two future governments of India and Pakistan decide to hold talks on Kashmir.

About the contributor:

Dr Happymon Jacob is Associate Professor of Diplomacy and Disarmament at the School of International Studies, Jawaharlal Nehru University (JNU). Prior to joining JNU in 2008, he held teaching positions at the University of Jammu in J&K and Jamia Millia Islamia University, New Delhi; and research positions at the Centre for Air Power Studies, Delhi Policy Group, and Observer Research Foundation.  Dr Jacob is an elected member of the Pugwash Council since 2013. He is the author of Line on Fire: Ceasefire Violations and India-Pakistan Escalation Dynamics (Oxford University Press, 2019), and Line of Control: Traveling with the Indian and Pakistani Armies (Penguin Viking 2018). His concurrent engagements with the Indian media include a column with The Hindu and hosting of weekly video show on national security on The Wire.In.

The post The Kashmir Back Channel 2004 – 2007: Prospects for India-Pakistan Negotiations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-kashmir-back-channel-2004-2007-prospects-for-india-pakistan-negotiations/feed/ 0 895305
Ethnic Rebellion: Armed Struggle in Myanmar’s Borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/ethnic-rebellion-armed-struggle-in-myanmars-borderlands/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=ethnic-rebellion-armed-struggle-in-myanmars-borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/ethnic-rebellion-armed-struggle-in-myanmars-borderlands/#respond Thu, 21 Oct 2021 10:36:09 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895230 Riya Sinha interviews David Brenner on the dynamics of conflict and explores how to engage with EAOs (Ethnic Armed Organisations) in constructive ways in the Myanmar borderland.

The post Ethnic Rebellion: Armed Struggle in Myanmar’s Borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Riya Sinha interviews Dr. David Brenner, author of Rebel Politics: A Political Sociology of Armed Struggle in Myanmar’s Borderlands, published by Cornell University Press in 2019.

2021 has been another fragile year for Myanmar’s democracy. On February 1, Military Chief Min Aung Hlaing staged a coup to overthrow the elected government led by Daw Aung San Suu Kyi’s National League for Democracy (NLD). Six months later, the military chief declared himself the Prime Minister of a newly formed caretaker government. Protests have erupted far and wide in the country, and the military’s crackdown on protestors has invited global condemnation. Domestically, this has also led to the mobilisation of many ethnic armed organisations (EAOs) previously operating only in the borderlands, against the military junta and in support of the pro-democracy movement.

Myanmar faces one of the world’s longest-running civil wars. Since it gained independence in 1948, Myanmar’s borderlands have remained war-torn with intermittent periods of war and peace. Several EAOs are active in Myanmar, with the two largest ones operating along the eastern and northern borderlands. On the country’s eastern border (with Thailand), the Karen National Union (KNU) has been active, whereas the Kachin International Organisation (KIO) has been involved in heavy fighting with Myanmar’s military in the northern borderlands (with China). In 2011, a seventeen-year-old ceasefire between the KIO and the Tatmadaw (Myanmar’s military) collapsed, leading to a resumption of violence.

Brenner’s book investigates the reasons for war and peace in Myanmar’s borderlands since 2011, through in-depth ethnographic research. By focussing on EAOs, it embraces a shift from the conventional, Western understanding of Myanmar centred around its civil-military relations. Brenner argues that this macro view makes ethnic conflict in the borderlands look like an aberration in the country’s movement towards democracy. However, the scale, strength, and organisational discipline with which these EAOs operate warrants changing the focus of analysis of Myanmar’s domestic politics. Brenner’s research contributes to the studies on political violence that reject the notion that civil wars are binary conflicts, conducted between a monolithic state and non-state actors.

His book dives deep into the horizontal and vertical ties within rebel groups and explains how the changing politico-economic environment affects their struggle for authority within organised movements. It is based on six years of research, including nine months of fieldwork in the borderlands controlled by the KNU and KIO.

The book tries to deconstruct the dynamics of conflict and explores how to engage with EAOs in constructive ways. Brenner argues that a significant reason for the continuation of armed conflict is the limited control Myanmar’s government exerted over the country’s armed forces. He further maintains that the Tatmadaw generals have long profited from the perpetuating conflict and will not simply give up their sources of power and wealth.

Riya Sinha: In chapter 2, you mention that the contemporary geopolitical strategies such as China’s “Look South” and India’s “Look East” policies are focused on increasing connectivity through infrastructure construction by making Myanmar a “land bridge” (p. 30). However, these policies do not consider the unstable nature of Myanmar’s borderlands. Should external actors engage with the non-state elements, particularly those who maintain quasi-state structures, while planning such projects, especially in politically weak states like Myanmar? What impact will the engagement (or the lack of it) have on the future of connectivity projects?  

David Brenner: Of course, external actors need to consider the actual political realities in Myanmar and other places of fragmented statehood. And they already do. China is particularly pragmatic about this and maintains working relations with various Ethnic Armed Organisations (EAOs) in Myanmar, i.e., the ethnonational rebel movements that have fought for greater autonomy from the central state for many decades.

China coordinates with EAOs on a variety of matters, not least the governance of transnational security concerns such as crime, drugs, public health, and of course, conflict on its lengthy land border with Myanmar. But China has also had to become more realistic with regards to her infrastructure ambitions that affect Myanmar’s borderlands, large parts of which are under the de-facto control of EAOs or heavily contested.

China has also had to become more realistic with regards to her infrastructure ambitions that affect Myanmar’s borderlands, large parts of which are under the de-facto control of EAOs [Ethnic Armed Organisations] or heavily contested.

Compare for instance the Shwe pipelines with the Myitsone hydropower dam project. China built the Shwe pipelines to circumvent the Strait of Malacca by transporting oil and gas from Africa and the Middle East from a port in Myanmar’s Rakhine State to China’s south-western Yunnan province. The pipelines run through northern Shan State, which has seen severe fighting between multiple EAOs and the Myanmar military. Despite this, the pipeline has not come under attack. It does not threaten the immediate interests of any of the warring parties, all of whom rely on good relations with China in one form or the other.

In comparison, China’s plan to construct a large hydropower station on the Myitsone confluence in Kachin State has stalled for over ten years, even though Myitsone is in an area under the de-facto control of the Myanmar state. The reasons for this are multi-faceted, including a country-wide civil society campaign against the dam that pressured the government to suspend the project. That said, a major obstacle to building the dam has been the fierce resistance of local Kachin people, including the Kachin Independence Organisation (KIO). Like other EAOs, the KIO relies on good diplomatic relations with China. The movement also operates in northern Shan State’s pipeline corridor. But dependencies are mutual. While the pipeline does not affect the KIO’s interests, Myitsone is seen as a matter of survival by the KIO’s constituency. This suggests that engaging with EAOs in matters that affect their territories and constituencies is imperative for any external actor.

Caption: The Chinese border photographed from KIO-controlled territory in 2014: A newly-built Chinese toll station lays abandoned while Chinese workers fortify the border wall after a 17-years long ceasefire between the KIO and the Myanmar military broke down. Source: David Brenner.

RS: Ethnic movements have transnational networks that get intertwined with similar conflicts across the border. You mention an intriguing example of how the Naga rebellion fighting the Indian government operates cross-border from Myanmar and how the Kachin rebels use their ties to Assam and Naga rebel movements to enter India’s higher education system (p. 38). What drives this cooperative relationship between the cross-border rebel movements?

DB: There are multiple drivers. More commonly discussed is the fact these connections provide a great resource, from educational opportunities in neighbouring countries to the regional black markets, including for arms, and to cross-border sanctuaries for armed mobilisation. That said, it is important to recognise that the transborder relations between EAOs in Myanmar and similar movements in the northeast of India are motivated by more than pure strategic rationale.

In the case of the Naga movement(s), the transborder nature of conflict is not least to do with the nature of the border.  The border between India and Myanmar is – as so often – a relic from colonial days, dividing populations who self-identify as Naga. Many Naga nationalists whom I met on the Myanmar side therefore contest its legitimacy. Moreover, there are feelings of solidarity between minoritized and marginalized ethnic nationality populations across borders. Their experiences might differ from India to Myanmar. Yet, there is a wealth of commonalities, too. Some populations also feel related by kin, as for instance people who identify as Naga, Chin and Kachin.

We can only understand the politics of rebellion in Myanmar’s borderlands when historicising them in relation to the wider borderworld that they are part of.

In fact, we can only understand the politics of rebellion in Myanmar’s borderlands when historicising them in relation to the wider borderworld that they are part of. The formation of Naga and Kachin nationalist movements did not only materialise vis-à-vis the Indian and Myanmar states. These movements also formed as part of a wider nationalist awakening amongst minoritized ethnic nationalities in Asia, whose experiences of marginalisation and demands for autonomy resonated with each other. The work of Mandy Sadan – leading expert on the Kachin and historian of non-state histories between India, Myanmar, and China – is a great resource for anyone wanting to gain a deeper understanding of this.

Caption: Myanmar army (Tatmadaw) soldiers show a heavy presence at the Naga New Year’s Celebrations in Nanyun, in the Naga Self-Administered Zone of the Sagaing Region on the border of Myanmar to India, in January 2018. Source: David Brenner.

RS: How did the changing geopolitics after the 1990s (end of the cold war) in Southeast Asia, particularly the change in China and Thailand’s regional interests, enable the Myanmar state to consolidate its presence in the northern and eastern borderlands? 

DB: Changing outlooks of both China and Thailand were important enabling factors for increased state consolidation in Myanmar’s borderlands. Both neighbouring countries directly supported two of the oldest and strongest armed resistance movements in Myanmar throughout the Cold War. Maoist China was the main supporter of the Communist Party of Burma (CPB), an insurgency that comprised of Burman cadres but mobilised heavily amongst ethnic minorities in Shan State. By contrast, anti-communist Thailand supported the Karen National Union (KNU) to guard against the communist threat from Myanmar. In fact, many EAOs in Myanmar were divided into pro-capitalist and pro-communist camps during the Cold War.

With the end of the Cold War both China and Thailand lost interest in directly supporting non-state armed groups in Myanmar … [which led to] a rapid rapprochement between Myanmar with China and Thailand, and a surge of cross-border economic activities.

With the end of the Cold War both China and Thailand lost interest in directly supporting non-state armed groups in Myanmar (at least to the same degree). Both neighbours rather sought profit from Myanmar’s economic potential, including its natural riches, strategic geography, and promising export market for their own produce. This led to a rapid rapprochement between Myanmar with China and Thailand, respectively and a surge of cross-border economic activities. The latter included booming transborder trade as well as strategic infrastructure projects. Former allies thus turned into nuisances for both China and Thailand.

Thailand, for instance, built the Yadana pipeline through the southeast of Myanmar to extract and transport gas from the Andaman sea to Thailand in cooperation with the Western oil companies Total and Chevron. The territory through which the pipeline runs, however, was under the control of the KNU. To build the pipeline, the Myanmar army displaced many Karen communities living in the corridor and committed many atrocities. The KNU had to withdraw from the corridor, not least because of Thai pressure.

In addition, Myanmar ended its self-imposed economic isolation of the Cold War and liberalised its border economies. The quickly expanding official border trade undercut large parts of the transborder smuggling networks, which had long been a key source of revenue for border-based armed movements. Lastly, expanding economic interactions in the borderlands provided opportunities to turn battlefield enemies into business partners through extensive ceasefire politics. While these factors did not lead to uncontested state control, they nevertheless enabled unprecedented territorialisation of state power.

Caption: Smuggling of palm oil at the Moei River which forms the border between Thailand and Myanmar in 2013. Source: David Brenner.

RS: A political economy approach enabled the Myanmar state to co-opt the Kachin International Organisation (KIO) rebel leaders by offering economic incentives. This approach rendered the Myanmar-China border peaceful between the 1990s and 2011 (p.103). However, you have shown in the book that this ceasefire capitalism has also led to renewed conflicts and that economic development cannot ensure the end of a civil war (p. 108). What lessons can be drawn from the ceasefire’s failure between the KIO and Myanmar’s military – the Tatmadaw – for ending civil wars?

DB: Yes, the same geo-economic forces that led to greater state consolidation in Myanmar’s borderlands, also renewed resistance amongst a variety of EAOs. The reason for this, in my opinion, is twofold.

Many EAO [Ethnic Armed Organisations] grassroots and local communities did not benefit from the ceasefire economies that have been unleashed since the 1990s… while they did not have to flee war, they were for instance displaced by the rapidly expanding and highly destructive resource economies.

Firstly, ceasefire capitalism – a term coined by political ecologist Kevin Woods – hardly equals inclusive economic development. Many EAO grassroots and local communities did not benefit from the ceasefire economies that have been unleashed since the 1990s. The KIO makes for an instructive case in this regard. While some of their individual leaders became rich through the mutual exploitation of natural resources and other business activities, the fate of many local communities did not improve, at least not to the same extent. Surely, an end to fighting bettered the immediate humanitarian situation of many people in Kachin State who endured decades of war. This was one of the main reasons for the KIO to sign their ceasefire in 1994. Nevertheless, ceasefire capitalism did not bring about peace, security, or development for many local communities. In fact, it produced new insecurities. This was particularly so in rural areas, where many people faced continued displacement. While they did not have to flee the war, they were for instance displaced by the rapidly expanding and highly destructive resource economies, such as the Jade mines in Hpakant.

Secondly, and a key implication of my study, economic development is no shortcut for solving political conflicts. Despite the excesses of ceasefire capitalism, many people’s lives did of course also improve. During the ceasefire, people in urban areas often had more secure livelihoods than before. In KIO-controlled areas, the KIO also used the pause in fighting and increased revenues to build infrastructure, including roads, bridges, and hydropower stations. It also expanded its public goods provision, for instance in the realm of health and education. That, nevertheless, ceasefire capitalism produced a lot of resentments amongst the movement’s rank-and-file. This was mainly because this arrangement did little to address the underlying political demands of its constituency, centred around genuine autonomy in a federal union.

Caption: A depleted goldmine in Kachin State. Heavy use of mercury to loosen the gold from stones left behind an inhospitable environment due to soil and water pollution. Source: David Brenner

RS: Your study demonstrates that understanding the workings of power and authority inside a rebel group (micro-level dynamics) can explain the broader instances of war and peace in a region (macro-level dynamics). Can this approach support other states dealing with ethnic conflicts in enabling predictability of a political process? If yes, how?

DB: I hope that my comparative study of the KIO and the KNU in Myanmar can inform other contexts, too. I developed my book’s conceptual framework and wider theoretical arguments between my own empirical fieldwork and studies of rebellion elsewhere. So, while I believe that historical context is of huge importance for understanding the specificities of any conflict, I also think that there are fruitful conversations between different contexts.

Two of the points that my study highlight seem of particular relevance for conflict resolution. Firstly, rebel movements are often highly heterogeneous actors that can span over an extensive social network with differently positioned factions. Secondly, many rebel movements are deeply embedded in their wider social context. In fact, the very success of many guerrilla organisations depends on how they achieve durable relations with local communities. This implies that the strategic decisions and overall positioning of rebel groups – about going to war, or negotiating ceasefires, peace negotiations, etc. – cannot be reduced to the decision making of individual leaders or a uniform leadership group. Rather they are the outcomes of multifarious and often contentious relations between differently placed actors.

This framework also suggests that one particularly important axis of analysis for understanding the trajectory of rebel movements is the vertical relations between rebel leaders and their grassroots, including rank-and-file members and the wider activist networks, and constituent communities. In other words, upwards pressures from rebel grassroots matter, even though the degree to which this is the case surely differs from movement to movement. To negotiate and implement peaceful settlements to conflict then means ensuring a maximum degree of inclusivity towards concerns amongst different parts of such heterogenous movements.

Caption: A leadership meeting of the KNU in 2013. The KNU comprises of a wealth of different governing bodies, institutions, organisations, and perspectives. Its strategies are the outcome of often contentious negotiation processes. Source: David Brenner.

RS: Your research methodology for the book has brought out some very interesting insights. You use ethnographic enquiry in conflict and security studies – a discipline that traditionally relies on a bird’s eye view. How can this methodology support development of research in similar disciplines?

DB: I believe that it’s important to understand people on their own grounds, or at least try to do this as much as possible. For instance, in the scholarship on civil wars, I believe that this is key for addressing one of the most fundamental questions, which is —why do people take up arms against the state? This is surely hard to explain. Given the military superiority of most state armies, the likelihood of success is usually rather slim. For the same reason, the likelihood of dying is very high.

While many theories seek to address this fundamental question, the birds-eye perspective of political science and related disciplines such as international relations are usually ill-suited for doing so. On the one hand, this is to do with a lack of data that informs theory-building about rebellion because there are very few studies that build on close-range research with rebels themselves. On the other hand, it is because the available paradigms, which are informed by limited data, limit our perspective of what counts as legitimate data in the first place. The commitment to methodological individualism and rational-choice theory in many parts of the political sciences has been particularly restrictive in this respect, privileging statistical data from the World Bank over the lyrics of revolutionary songs.

What we end up with in this respect, is what the Subaltern Studies scholar Ranajit Guha has called the “prose of counterinsurgency” in his critique of historiographies of peasant insurrection in colonial India: we deduce people’s motivations to rise up against the state from the data and reasoning collected by state institutions. To understand rebellion and resistance, and a wealth of other social phenomena, however, we need to focus on people’s lived realities in their social contexts. In the borderlands of Myanmar – as in many other places – this means to first shed ourselves from the Westphalian common-sense, which legitimises the state and criminalises non-state resistance despite all evidence that states have been one of the biggest sources of violence and insecurity throughout history.

Caption: A soldier of the Kachin Independence Army (KIA), the armed wing of the KIO, in frontline camp of the Kachin War. Source: David Brenner.

RS: Considering the ongoing democratic crisis in Myanmar wherein the Tatmadaw has seized control since February this year, where do you see Myanmar’s transition from the decades-old civil war heading?

DB: The Tatmadaw did actually not seize control. It has tried to seize control. While it ousted the democratically elected government, it has failed to exert control over large parts of society, state, economy, and territory. Seven months after the military coup, resistance is still widespread, including the civil disobedience campaign, such as labour strikes in the private sector and civil service, and popular boycotts of products and services from military companies. This is despite the lethal force with which the military has tried to coerce the people into submission.

The atrocities committed by security forces against peaceful protesters have also pushed more and more activists to take up armed struggle against the military junta. Self-defence units, known as People’s Defence Forces (PDF), have mobilised across the country. They seek to protect their communities from state violence but also attack military and police units and sabotage their infrastructure. The civil war has thus spread from the country’s borderlands to literally everywhere in Myanmar. PDF attacks have also hit the military’s heavily-fortified capital of Naypyidaw.

In some instance we’ve also seen PDF forces fighting side-by-side with EAOs. In fact, some EAOs explicitly support the pro-democracy movement in Myanmar, including training and equipping PDF units. Others, however, are cautious and hedge their bets in the current situation. This is not least because EAOs and their ethnic nationality constituencies have made dire experiences with the Burman pro-democracy movement in the past. The success of armed resistance thus partly lies in continuing to forge stronger unity between different forces.

That said, I don’t believe that either side can win this conflict on the battlefield. After all, the Tatmadaw has withstood seventy years of rebellion. But I also don’t think many people necessarily believe in a military victory, at least from conversations with my contacts and friends in Myanmar. It rather is about changing the junta’s calculus by making the generals understand that forcing people into submission through naked violence is simply not going to work.

Caption: KIO-produced assault rifles – which are modelled on the Chinese Type 81 version of the Kalashnikov – symbolise the sophisticated capabilities that some armed resistance forces have developed in their decades-long struggle against the Myanmar military. Source: David Brenner

About the contributor:

Bio: Dr David Brenner is Lecturer in Global Insecurities in the Department of International Relations at the University of Sussex, where he teaches and researches on issues of conflict, development, and security. His work is informed by extensive fieldwork in Myanmar’s restive borderlands. David is author of Rebel Politics: A Political Sociology of Armed Struggle, which was published with Cornell University Press’s Southeast Asia Program in 2019. You can follow his work on Twitter @DavBrenner.

The post Ethnic Rebellion: Armed Struggle in Myanmar’s Borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/ethnic-rebellion-armed-struggle-in-myanmars-borderlands/feed/ 0 895230
Paradiplomacy in Northeast India: Assam Acts East http://stg.csep.org/blog/paradiplomacy-in-northeast-india-assam-acts-east/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=paradiplomacy-in-northeast-india-assam-acts-east http://stg.csep.org/blog/paradiplomacy-in-northeast-india-assam-acts-east/#respond Mon, 11 Oct 2021 10:04:35 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895182 Hazarika’s Paradigms of Paradiplomacy in the Northeast is pioneering in shedding light on the paradiplomatic efforts made by these North-eastern states, with a particular focus on Assam.

The post Paradiplomacy in Northeast India: Assam Acts East first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Nitika Nayar interviews Obja Borah Hazarika, Assistant Professor, Dibrugarh University, on her book, Paradigms of Paradiplomacy in Northeast India: Assam’s Cross-border Concerns and Engagements, published in January 2021.

Traditionally perceived as landlocked and insurgent-ridden, India’s Northeast region is witnessing a geoeconomic transformation. Under its ‘Act East’ policy, New Delhi increasingly looks at the Northeast as a conduit of connectivity owing to its advantageous location as the region straddles India’s borders with Bangladesh, Bhutan, Myanmar and China.

Hazarika’s Paradigms of Paradiplomacy in the Northeast is pioneering in shedding light on the paradiplomatic efforts made by these North-eastern states, with a particular focus on Assam. In the book, “paradiplomacy” refers to the involvement of sub-state actors or constituent units, including regional governments, in “influencing decisions on foreign and non-domestic matters; pursuing political, socio-cultural and economic ambitions abroad”, and engaging on issues that have an external or cross-border angle (p.5). Divided into six chapters, the book offers a comprehensive overview of the various strategies undertaken by the state government of Assam to exert influence on issues that affect its developmental prospects and encompass an external dimension. This involved setting up institutional mechanisms within the state, such as the “Act East Policy Affairs” (AEPA) department and the “Invest Assam” Foundation.

Assam’s paradiplomatic efforts also include hosting an increasing number of international delegations and its first-ever global investor’s summit, “Advantage Assam” in 2018 to attract foreign investments. The book examines these initiatives and also details how the state government was directly involved in the processes preceding the ratification of India’s historic Land Boundary Agreement with Bangladesh.

In bringing to the fore the different paradigms of Assam’s paradiplomacy, Hazarika’s research helps draw important lessons for the future of India’s more decentralised, federally cooperative and sub-national foreign policies. Featuring comparative case studies from other countries, it prescribes regional paradiplomacy championed by the neighbouring Chinese province of Yunnan as a model worth emulating. The book envisions an elevated international role for Assam and more broadly, the Northeast to enhance connectivity and deepen relations with India’s eastern neighbours in South and Southeast Asia.

 

Nitika Nayar: In 2017, the Government of Assam established the Act East Policy Affairs (AEPA) Department to institutionalise its paradiplomacy and assert a role for Assam in India’s ‘Act East’ policy. But you note that the department has largely been unsuccessful in enhancing Assam’s influence on New Delhi and its neighbourhood policies (p. 61). How can Guwahati be more effective, for example by working together with other Northeastern states to promote their interests in regional initiatives like BIMSTEC or BCIM-EC?

Obja Borah Hazarika: The states of the Northeast can only (to the most extent) support the policies of New Delhi when it comes to such trans-boundary connectivity projects as they are mainly funded and initiated by the Centre [Union government]. However, once these projects are completed, states can play a big role in preparing their people to leverage the benefits of such connectivity projects and trade activities. It is a common refrain among critics of these projects that the Northeast will become merely a gateway, land-bridge and route for the passage of trade goods from the mainland to the ASEAN nations and vice-versa, without any such tangible benefits accruing to the states as they are ill-equipped to provide necessary human resource to make the most of these projects. This is one area which the states of the Northeast can initiate under an umbrella body, say the North East Democratic Alliance (NEDA) or similar bodies that have a directional push by the Centre.

States can play a big role in preparing their people to leverage the benefits of such connectivity projects and trade activities.

The thrust can be on collecting, documenting, and understanding what Prof. Arjun Appadurai, renowned scholar of anthropology calls the “aspirations” of the people, especially of communities that reside immediately alongside the connectivity infrastructure and are involved in sectors associated with information, technology, trade, and farming. The government can develop the capacities of these communities as per their cultural and economic aspirations, so that they can take advantage of the new trans-boundary infrastructure being built by the state.

The capacity to aspire also needs to be developed and for that, the people, especially marginalized sections, need to be provided basic opportunities in education, livelihood and interactions so that they can best exercise their right to aspire and participate in the connectivity projects envisaged in and around their habitats and occupations. It is also necessary to bear in mind that the people may aspire to be left alone, and may not want any state-led intervention or variations in their lifestyles demanded by these changes in their areas.

States can also prepare impact assessments of connectivity projects on the population and take appropriate holistic measures, such as those of redressal in case of displacement and other kinds of adverse impact that may emerge out of these projects.

NN: Your book suggests how the political dimensions of ‘competitive federalism’ may have unfairly disadvantaged the Northeast’s development prospects. You note instances where other Indian states have been prioritized over Assam by the center when distributing investments pledged by foreign governments and that Assamese leaders point to “unfair treatment being meted out to the states of the Northeast”(p. 135). Further, even within Assam, paradiplomatic efforts have been largely centered around Guwahati, skewing development in other remote areas within the state. What paradiplomatic initiatives can be adopted under what you call the “region-state approach” (p. 204) to ensure more equitable development of the Northeast?

OBH: The region-state approach addresses issues of regions such as the Northeast, which share more borders with foreign countries than with their own fellow states. They have deeper historical, economic, and cultural connections with countries across the international border than with the rest of their nation. The Northeast and the neighbouring geographically contiguous areas in Myanmar, Bangladesh, and China are natural economic zones, making them quintessential region states. Dr. Kenichi Ohmae, Japanese organizational theorist and expert on global strategy, describes these region-states as “natural economic zones. They may or may not fall within the geographic limits of a particular country.”

So, we need the governments of constituent units bordering each other in the region-state of Myanmar, Bangladesh, China, and Northeast India to work together on issues impacting them, in consonance with the overall policies of their respective central governments.

The focus should be on the Northeastern states working together with their counterparts in neighbouring countries to solve common regional problems.

Ohmae also contends that, “the nation-state has become an unnatural, even dysfunctional, unit for organizing human activity and managing economic endeavour in a borderless world.” In practice therefore, the focus should be on the Northeastern states working together with their counterparts in neighbouring countries to solve common regional problems. However, this must be within the overall framework established by their respective central governments, given their security concerns.

Paradiplomatic activities can focus on fostering trans-border cooperation and exchanges in education, culture, sports, agriculture, health and medical tourism, library and museum studies, combined endeavours in tourism and hotel management. This can also include exchanges of best practices to promote ecological security and other components that come under the larger rubric of soft power and common subjects covered under the state lists of the respective countries (for example, the state list has 66 entries under schedule VII in the Indian constitution).

NN: In your book, the paradiplomacy of China’s Yunnan province is prescribed as a comparative case study for the Northeast – both regions are landlocked and share unique geographical proximity to Southeast Asian economies. However, while Beijing granted Yunnan the autonomy to pursue its international ambitions, New Delhi has not extended the same privileges to its North-eastern states. What lessons can New Delhi draw from China’s example of Yunnan to overcome its security vs development conundrum in the region?

OBH: Several. While concerns over security issues cannot be immediately overcome, there are other areas in which Northeast states can be encouraged to take on a leadership role, especially in those sectors that pertain to development.

As pointed out by Dr. Nimmi Kurian, a scholar of Asian borderlands and regionalism at the Centre for Policy Research, New Delhi can start by letting Northeast states host working groups on BCIM-Economic Corridor and BIMSTEC on regional governance issues, such as disaster management, customs cooperation, and regulation of passenger and cargo vehicular traffic. It can emulate the flagship role that Beijing provides to Yunnan in hosting the Greater Mekong Sub-region Working Groups on a range of regional governance issues, such as environment, tourism, and agriculture.

Greater autonomy can be provided to the Northeast to facilitate networked governance in sub-regional Asia. Kurian points to the existence of networks such as the Asian Environmental Compliance and Enforcement Network (AECEN), South Asian Biosphere Reserve Network (SeaBRNet), Asian Network of Sustainable Agriculture and Bioresources (ANSAB), Freshwater Action Network South Asia (FANSA), Himalayan Conservation Approaches and Technologies (HIMCAT), and South Asian Network on Environmental Law (SANEL).

In these networks, leadership and involvement of appropriate government departments of the Northeast should be encouraged by the Centre as they are geographically better positioned to make a difference.

To cash in on the benefits of paradiplomacy, Beijing has deployed provincial authorities in its western, land-locked provinces to pursue  subnational diplomacy: Yunnan in China’s southwest in the Greater Mekong Sub-region (GMS) and Xinjiang Uighur Autonomous Region in China’s northwest in the Central Asia Regional Economic Cooperation (CAREC).

Similar initiatives could be undertaken by New Delhi, such as designating states of the Northeast to participate in sub-regional endeavors, including BIMSTEC and BCIM-EC for example, to enhance their autonomy and position them to achieve the aims envisioned under these groups.

Before becoming a party to the GMS in 1992, Yunnan was “required to report to Beijing in case it sought to launch any external projects” but soon, it initiated and hosted several large-scale projects, such as the Lancing-Mekong shipway, the Kunming-Bangkok Highway, and the customs clearance facilitation without any advance reporting to Beijing.

Such ease of doing trans-boundary business would help and go a long way in bolstering paradiplomacy. The Ministry of Development of North Eastern Region (DONER) could play an active role in facilitating such initiatives, allowing the Centre to have an overarching presence in such state-led initiatives while letting the constituent units take the reins.

Special thrust programs such as Beijing’s Western Development Program in 1999 helped the growth of Western provinces like Yunnan. Similar programs by the Centre aimed at the development of the Northeast could help create a mission and vision dedicated to promoting and supporting the development of the Northeast through economic integration with neighbouring countries. While the Act East policy does have a Northeast component, the emphasis still remains on boosting overall ties with ASEAN countries. This makes it pertinent to have a dedicated Northeast Development program as a sub-unit of the Act East policy.

The bottom line is there is a need to provide more autonomy to the states of the Northeast for pursuing economic, cultural, educational, and other outreach with the border nations.

The bottom line is there is a need to provide more autonomy to the states of the Northeast for pursuing economic, cultural, educational, and other outreach with the border nations. This can be enabled by the central government funding the development of human resources and infrastructure in the region to enable them to leverage the benefits from such outreach.

NN: Your book highlights the commercial interests at play that push Assam and China to engage with one another. Assam was among the first Indian states to exemplify pandemic-related paradiplomacy as it procured PPE kits directly from China (p. 72). Several Chinese provinces and cities, in turn, have also wished to establish direct linkages with the region owing to its geostrategic location (p. 81). Despite these reciprocal interests, the Northeast has often suffered as a pawn in New Delhi’s conflicting economic and security strategies toward Beijing. Can the region carve its development route and pursue economic paradiplomacy with China?

OBH: Yes! To prevent China from dominating investments or other paradiplomacy related activities in the Northeast, the states in the Northeast can opt for a multi-pronged outreach where they invite or try to attract investments from several countries including those from the United States, Japan, and other powers – a kind of a non-aligned paradiplomacy can be practiced. In this way, the constituent units could gain by maximizing their options. Since the constituent units are not bound by international diplomacy at the same level as the capitals, they can continue to pursue economic and other engagement and outreach in as many countries as possible.

The states in the Northeast can opt for a multi-pronged outreach where they invite or try to attract investments from several countries including those from the United States, Japan, and other powers – a kind of a non-aligned paradiplomacy can be practiced.

Moreover, a non-aligned paradiplomacy would also not irk New Delhi as much since a multi-country outreach would mean diversified investment and involvement from many external powers. So the best bet will be to pursue China but also as many other countries as possible. This would attract the best investments and create a competitive atmosphere for prospective investors. At the same time, it would also allay any consternations of the Centre, which may not be comfortable with one country emerging as the single or most important player in the paradiplomacy outreach of the geopolitically sensitive Northeast.

NN: The Northeast’s conducive geography and proximity to the markets of ASEAN nations have nurtured its economic paradiplomacy with neighbouring countries, such as Bangladesh, Bhutan, Myanmar, and China. What are the views and perceptions from Assam and other Northeastern states on the central government’s recent protectionist measures, such as pulling out of RCEP or decoupling from China by way of restricting imports and investments?

OBH: Broadly, there are two views in the Northeast or among those who write on the Northeast. One is that it would do the region a great disservice if its borders are opened for trade or other such activities as i) the Northeast is not ready to leverage the opportunities given its poor human resource development and economic preparedness; ii) it would allow insurgents to use these routes to bolster their activities; iii) it would flush the region with cheap goods from its neighbours; and iv) it would make the region easier to be ambushed in case of national security crises between India and China, among others.

The other group holds that the routes and historical passages – waterways, railways, and roads – need to be rebuilt and opened for use to provide a much-needed infrastructural boost. This could turn the Northeast into one of the region’s most flourishing epicenters of growth, as in the yesteryears before the politics of colonial powers destroyed such linkages and turned it into a landlocked periphery. This in turn, had thwarted its economic prosperity and unleashed certain backwardness in the region.

Concerning the Centre’s policies on RCEP and restricting imports and investments, the arguments from the Northeast are the same as they have been about the overall prospects for the region under the Act East policy, where there are two schools of thought. One which decries this as being detrimental for the development of the region, and the other supporting it as being in the best interest of the states.

NN: Your book elucidates the story behind the ratification of the historic Land Boundary Agreement between Bangladesh and India in 2015, which was facilitated by the active involvement of the states of Assam and West Bengal. This is an exemplar of a bottom-up approach, where state governments were able to exert influence and help resolve a long-standing dispute between India and its neighbour. How can Northeastern states like Nagaland, Manipur, or Mizoram encourage India to take on a more activist role when it comes to the current conflict in Myanmar?

OBH: Regarding the coup in Myanmar, the states of the Northeast, with Mizoram in the lead, have been taking a very active role on the Chin refugees who are seeking shelter in India. The central government had issued formal orders to the states not to accept any more refugees and to send back those who had fled to India. The government of Mizoram, and to some extent Manipur, have not done so.  There are over 9000 Chin refugees in Mizoram, who fled the country as a result of political persecution and are being provided shelter by the Government of Mizoram and other bodies. The Chief Minister of Mizoram has written to the Centre asking for aid to help them provide relief to the refugees.

The entire Chin refugee episode highlights how the Northeast states and the central government may at times disagree on what to do regarding a trans-boundary issue. While for Mizoram’s Chief Minister it makes sense to provide shelter to a population seen as kindred by the people of Mizoram, this sentiment does not resonate in New Delhi as the military in Myanmar may interpret this move as India condemning the coup or worse, supporting the dissidents. This would be detrimental to overall India-Myanmar relations, which would provide greater space for China to increase its already overwhelming presence in Myanmar.

The Chief Minister’s party in Mizoram is part of the NEDA [includes the BJP] and by leveraging the coalition, the state could pressurize the Centre to accommodate its interests instead of going it alone. Moreover, the states facing this exodus can combine their efforts in relaying to the Centre the matters that impact their political calculations as well as socio-cultural milieu, which may have implications for their prospects in the next round of elections.

NN: How do research institutions and universities in the Northeast, such as the Dibrugarh University where you teach, view the growing emphasis on connectivity in the region? How are these perspectives different from the conventional geostrategic narratives espoused in New Delhi?

OBH: At the research level, there has been an emerging thrust to study local communities along the borders of the Northeast and neighbouring countries in the universities based in these states. These studies are imperiled when there is any crisis in the neighbourhood or if the relations (including communication, transportation, institutional cooperation) between the region and these countries are not well-developed. For example, several academics and scholars who are working on paradiplomacy and border studies may need to rework their original objectives given the coup in Myanmar. My own student researchers are impacted. One is carrying out her work on two communities which live along the Indo-Myanmar border and the other on the BCIM-EC. Given the instability on the border, both had to add more document-based sources in lieu of fieldwork.

So, from the research point of view, there is a need to increase connectivity as well as keep channels open despite a change in regime or the political fortunes of countries in the neighbourhood. Strong academic exchanges are being encouraged by universities on both sides of the border. This would help build educational bridges and lasting links that may withstand changing bilateral ties or regimes in neighbouring countries.

Overall, there are concerns in the Northeast including in its universities that the Centre ought to take into account the consequences of events in Myanmar, of dams being built by China, or any other issues with possible trans-boundary ramifications for the Northeast. Instead of looking at these issues as irritants in overall bilateral ties, the human element should be factored into the plans to combat the adverse impacts of such dams, floods, or coups especially by carrying out in-depth impact assessments by Northeastern states in tandem with the Centre. These should include the voices of the people and consider the local ecosystems, as well as factor in the cultural practices and kindred ties that may play a role in the aftermath of any trans-boundary issue.

 

Bio:

Obja Borah Hazarika is Assistant Professor in the Department of Political Science at Dibrugarh University, Assam. She completed her PhD on ‘The Strategic Dimensions of the Look East Policy, 1991-2013’ from Dibrugarh University in 2017.

Email:

obja11@gmail.com

The post Paradiplomacy in Northeast India: Assam Acts East first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/paradiplomacy-in-northeast-india-assam-acts-east/feed/ 0 895182
The Indian Ocean and Sri Lanka’s Emerging Maritime Identity http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-indian-ocean-and-sri-lankas-emerging-maritime-identity/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-indian-ocean-and-sri-lankas-emerging-maritime-identity http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-indian-ocean-and-sri-lankas-emerging-maritime-identity/#respond Mon, 27 Sep 2021 13:11:38 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895106 The blog explores Sri Lanka’s non-aligned strategy over the years, and the country’s multipronged approach to secure its interests.

The post The Indian Ocean and Sri Lanka’s Emerging Maritime Identity first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Saneet Chakradeo interviews Chulanee Attanayake, Research Fellow at the Institute of South Asian Studies, National University of Singapore, on her edited volume, Maritime Sri Lanka: Historical and Contemporary Perspectives, published by World Scientific in January 2021.

Historically, the Indian Ocean has been a uniquely strategic and important region in world politics. Studies have shown how the region has been integrated through trade and culture, while also being central to India’s security interests.

In recent times, in the backdrop of great power competition, the Indian Ocean Region (IOR) is gaining particular attention as the new “pivot” of world politics. How do littoral states in IOR look at this struggle playing out on their turf? What role do they see for themselves going ahead?

Located at the centre of this geography, Sri Lanka is an ideal case to study this dynamic. Despite being central to the country’s strategic narratives historically, the Indian Ocean has lost its importance within Sri Lanka’s broader external outlook in recent times due to domestic and regional circumstances. However, after the end of the civil war in 2009, there has once again been a clear push towards integrating greater maritime sensitivities in the country’s outward strategy. Attanayake’s edited volume compiles scholarly assessments of the questions posed to Sri Lanka in this new era of competition.

With sections exploring historical perspectives on Sri Lanka’s place in IOR, its economic and security considerations, and external perceptions of the region, the volume covers a wide range of issues that define the key geopolitical challenges faced by the country today. Attanayake’s own chapter focuses on the features of Sri Lanka’s non-aligned strategy over the years, and the country’s multipronged approach to secure its interests.

Saneet Chakradeo: You note that after the end of the civil war in 2009, Sri Lanka has been trying to construct an “Indian Ocean identity” alongside its “South Asian identity”, to rebrand itself as a maritime nation (p. 302). Is this pivot towards establishing a dual identity the right approach to diversify Sri Lanka’s interests in the region?

Chulanee Attanayake: Yes. Let me explain why.

First and foremost, Sri Lanka always had a maritime identity due to its geographical positioning. As an island nation, its connectivity with the rest of the world and its outside engagements have been through the Indian Ocean, which has always been integral to every aspect of Sri Lanka’s economic, political, and social life. And Sri Lanka has used this identity to its advantage.  Even in its initial years post-independence, Sri Lanka’s Indian Ocean identity was an integral part of its strategic, security, and political narrative.

With the emergence of the long drawn out domestic conflict during …….[the Sri Lankan civil war], the Indian Ocean faded away from Sri Lanka’s narrative and its South Asian identity became stronger.

With the emergence of the long drawn out domestic conflict during …….[the Sri Lankan civil war], the Indian Ocean faded away from Sri Lanka’s narrative and its South Asian identity became stronger. This could also be a reflection of other changes in the region. With the emergence of the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) as a regional mechanism for connectivity, and with India’s [increased] engagement in Sri Lanka’s domestic political affairs, Sri Lanka’s South Asian identity took priority in policy making. For so many years, Sri Lanka was recognized as a conflict-prone country in the region.

Understandably, Sri Lanka wants to change this narrative. So, with the end of the war, successive governments have emphasised reclaiming its Indian Ocean identity. This is also a result of the changing geopolitics in the region. The Indian Ocean is taking centre stage in global affairs. Its sea lanes of communication are becoming the fulcrum of global supply chains. Every country, including India, is looking to expand its connectivity beyond the South Asian subcontinent. In this backdrop, it only makes sense for Sri Lanka to aspire for the same.

This [pivot towards a dual identity] will definitely be advantageous for Sri Lanka due to the opportunities to better connect with the fast-growing Indian subcontinent, and the Indian Ocean region. Therefore, I agree that this is the right approach for the country.

SC: In recent years, increasing Chinese engagement in Sri Lanka has prompted speculation about Colombo aligning with Beijing to nullify India’s strategic influence in the region. However, in your chapter, you state that Sri Lanka is “neither balancing nor bandwagoning with one player or the other” (p. 171). How has Sri Lanka’s “multipronged” approach helped in maintaining its strategic autonomy?

CA: Sri Lanka, in my opinion, has always followed a multipronged approach in dealing with the rest of the world. It has successfully hedged between the West, the East, and India in order to realise its foreign policy ambitions. Speculations of Sri Lanka aligning with Beijing have gained prominence over the past decade due to increased Chinese engagement with the region. However, one must understand the context within which this engagement has happened.

With the end of the war, Sri Lanka required massive funding to accelerate delayed infrastructure development, and to reconstruct conflict affected areas. The government strongly believed that only with the upgrading of infrastructure could fast economic growth be achieved. During this time, however,  Sri Lanka’s traditional donors withdrew from funding such infrastructural needs alleging human rights and humanitarian violations.

Instead, many of the multilateral financial institutions did not fund the kind of infrastructure the country required. Incidentally, China gained WTO membership during this period and expanded its outreach to many geographical areas it was not previously active in. China had the financial capability to do that as well. This was also the time when the global financial crisis paralysed economies in the West. So, the West too did not have the interest or the capacity to provide the needed financing. As a result, China saw an opportunity. However, one must note that China’s funding to Sri Lanka is comparatively low compared to other South Asian countries.

Sri Lanka has used India and China’s competition to its advantage by offering competitive projects to the two countries.

China’s entry has been a catalyst for India’s turn towards Sri Lanka. If you look at the statistics on India’s development assistance and investments in Sri Lanka, there is a clear upward trajectory after China increased its engagements. And you will see that Sri Lanka has used India and China’s competition to its advantage by offering competitive projects to the two countries. I have explained this in my book chapter. Another journal article I co-authored recently, titled “Navigating the Sino-Indian power struggle in the Indian Ocean: the case of Sri Lanka” clearly shows this pattern.

It [China’s increased presence] has also helped Sri Lanka to maintain its strategic autonomy as it need not rely on one country over the other to ensure its security objectives and national interests anymore.

SC: You mention how Sri Lanka’s engagement in the Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA) and the Indian Ocean Maritime Affairs Cooperation (IOMAC) has allowed Colombo to express its interests and concerns openly (p. 302). Do multilateral platforms provide small countries like Sri Lanka a voice they would otherwise lack in an asymmetric bilateral relationship?

CA: Yes, definitely. Despite realism, in theory, stating that every nation state is equal, in realpolitik, small countries have unique challenges. Due to their limited economic and political power, their ability to challenge a great power is limited. Multilateral platforms, thus, provide small countries with a collective voice. There, they can find partners who share similar interests and concerns and can express their voice as a group.

SC: Southeast Asia has been a prominent battleground of great powers with a tussle between the US and China on their turf being a primary concern for ASEAN member states. For Sri Lanka, what lessons can be drawn from how Southeast Asia has manoeuvred this rivalry?

CA: Southeast Asian countries have been using strategic hedging as a policy option to manoeuvre great power rivalry and realise their interests. In order to successfully make use of strategic hedging, it is important for the country to stay neutral with everyone and make friends with all. This is a lesson Sri Lanka can learn from ASEAN.

In order to successfully make use of strategic hedging, it is important for the country to stay neutral with everyone and make friends with all. This is a lesson Sri Lanka can learn from ASEAN.

SC: Sri Lanka often views Singapore as a model for small countries in terms of achieving the most out of their strategic location and economic performance. Given your familiarity with Singapore, what do you think is the country’s perception of Sri Lanka and its role in the Indian Ocean?

CA: Sri Lanka and Singapore are small states which have been historically connected. They have similar characteristics, including plural and heterogeneous societies. Both are considered small states from a geostrategic perspective and are placed among powerful players, making their strategic and foreign policy challenges similar to each other. However, their post-independence journeys have been unique and the different opportunities and challenges that both countries have experienced have resulted in making them the nation states they are today.

Both Sri Lanka and Singapore view each other as important partners in the Indian Ocean region. Singapore views Sri Lanka as having greater potential in harnessing Blue Ocean opportunities in IOR. Sri Lanka has advanced human development indicators including high literacy rates which has led to skilled labour. Thus, Singapore views Sri Lanka to be a country with an abundance of opportunities.

SC: You have spent a lot of time in China as part of your academic and professional endeavours, and your previous book covers an in-depth review of the Sino-Sri Lankan bilateral relationship. How did your time in China help with your understanding of the country’s international outlook?

CA: I think the more you understand a culture, the easier it is to understand its policies. In a practical context, a state or a government’s behaviour is determined by many aspects, including its historical experiences, cultural beliefs and systems, and its socio-cultural fabric. My stay in China helped me to see China beyond what we read in international media. I got to mingle with the Chinese people and observe their behaviour, expectations, and aspirations. It changed my understanding of China, and it helped me to better understand China’s policies.

The Chinese are proud of their history. They do not want to experience another “century of humiliation”. So, in my understanding, the Chinese people would want to see if they are being accepted and treated as an equal in the international system. Their international outlook reflects this. Their policies are formed by placing China at the centre of the world.

Chinese people aspire for a life that is economically stable and comfortable. They trust their government and the party, and their policies. In this context, the Chinese Communist Party has the responsibility to provide this economic and social development for its people.

About the contributor:

Bio:

Chulanee Attanayake is a Research Fellow at Institute of South Asian Studies (ISAS), National University of Singapore. She obtained her PhD from Central China Normal University in Wuhan, China. Prior to joining ISAS, she served as the Director (Research) of Institute of National Security Studies Sri Lanka – the national security think-tank under the Ministry of Defence, Sri Lanka. Her research areas include China and South Asia, Politics and Geopolitics in the Indo-Pacific, and Sri Lanka’s Foreign Relations.

Email:

chulanee@nus.edu.sg

The post The Indian Ocean and Sri Lanka’s Emerging Maritime Identity first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-indian-ocean-and-sri-lankas-emerging-maritime-identity/feed/ 0 895106
Balancing India’s electricity grid in 2030: A detailed, granular analysis under uncertainty http://stg.csep.org/blog/balancing-indias-electricity-grid-in-2030-a-detailed-granular-analysis-under-uncertainty/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=balancing-indias-electricity-grid-in-2030-a-detailed-granular-analysis-under-uncertainty http://stg.csep.org/blog/balancing-indias-electricity-grid-in-2030-a-detailed-granular-analysis-under-uncertainty/#respond Fri, 17 Sep 2021 08:47:48 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=895030 India has some of the most aggressive RE targets in the world. How can we offer solutions to balance the electricity grid and osupply and demand?

The post Balancing India’s electricity grid in 2030: A detailed, granular analysis under uncertainty first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

DOWNLOADS

UPDATE – The final and updated study has been published in the Journal, Transactions of the Indian National Academy of Engineering, August 2022. Click here for the summary and downloading.

Balancing the electricity grid is a complex issue with millions of nodes, where supply and demand have to match continuously in real time.  Varying demand was traditionally met by over-engineering “firm” supply, but the rise of variable renewable energy (RE, like wind and solar) makes supply itself both variable and uncertain. India has some of the most aggressive RE targets in the world – to reach 450 GW by 2030 (from about 100 GW installed today).  India’s overwhelmingly dominant form of supply, coal, is under environmental—and economic—pressure, and its growth is slowing down to the extent that capacity might plateau in some years.

Because electricity has two aspects—energy (kilowatt-hours) and capacity (kilowatts)—and given the importance of time of day of supply and seasonality, CSEP (then Brookings India) built the first public portal for real-time 5-minute analysis of all-India demand and supply fuel-wise (carbontracker.in).[1]  Using data from this tool, we built a national-level 30-minute resolution despatch model (grid balancing) for India spanning 2021 to 2030, under a range of assumptions of fuel costs, capital costs, growth of demand, etc.  The study highlights findings and details as part of the study “Granular Time of Day Analysis of Balancing the Indian Electricity Grid in 2030”.

We tackle a range of questions such as:

  1. How much RE is feasible, and are there risks of “too much” RE, which would lead to curtailment?
  2. Does India need more coal-based power? Does it need to build more coal power plants?
  3. What supply (fuel) options make the most sense for new capacity going forward? This isn’t just a function of their economics but also issues like system security and managing volatility or uncertainty.
  4. Are batteries the answer in the short term or longer-term? How should they be thought of for planning?
  5. What are the factors that matter for grid planning and policy?

We find that not only is high RE possible, it is also usually the most cost-effective solution, even if there is measurable surplus RE leading to curtailment (throwing it away). However, even projected very high RE isn’t sufficient to meet all the incremental demand for power, even with extensive storage (which is very expensive).

Not only is high RE possible, it is also usually the most cost-effective solution, even if there is measurable surplus RE leading to curtailment (throwing it away).

The analysis suggests a multi-pronged strategy for India:

  1. Focus on matching demand and supply.
    This helps reduce the growth of the peak, which is much more important for planning than average demand. Peak should focus on “net demand,” which is demand minus RE (treated like negative demand).  Storage is a tool in the arsenal, but more cost-effective solutions remain combinations of control/planning (like solar pumps) and pricing signals that reflect grid surplus or scarcity.
  2. Utilize existing capacity to the extent feasible.
    India has a temporary surplus of electricity, to the extent that it has concerns over stranded and non-performing assets. The flip side of this generation capacity is the ability to meet incremental demand simply by paying the marginal or fuel costs. As demand rises, within this decade the surplus will exhaust, perhaps as soon as within the next four to five years under a range of assumptions on capacity growth as well as load profiles. At the point where India cannot meet demand through existing capacity or even planned new capacity (RE as well as hydro or nuclear), it will have to further add new capacity.  This is not only expensive in general, but it is especially expensive if used with a low capacity utilization factor (CUF, also called Plant Load Factor, or PLF) to meet the peak.
  3. Increase system nimbleness.
    The above points emphasize the transformation of the existing grid from a heavily centralized costs-plus system where adding capacity was always the best solution, and costs were simply passed through to consumers. In addition to time-of-day pricing, the grid needs vastly greater coordination across states and regions. The larger transformation towards a Smart Grid will increase not just granular visibility but also provide instruments and mechanisms for peak load management such as through Demand Response.
  4. Change pricing signals for choosing new generation capacity.
    Most importantly, “cheap electricity” shouldn’t be measured by levelized cost of energy (LCOE) which ignores both time of day aspects as well as system-level costs. It is a reality that as the share of RE rises in a system, its marginal value declines, and its marginal cost of integration rises. India’s Central Electricity Authority (CEA) estimated integration costs in 2017 to be as high as 1.5 Rs./kWh based on then costs, while varying values of RE are highlighted in a framework that shows a ladder of competition between coal and RE, where one shouldn’t simply compare LCOEs but also factor in fixed versus marginal costs (especially given the surplus of existing coal plants), location, and time of day.

LCOE is an especially poor tool that applies only on an energy basis for individual plant costs, and is inferior to metrics that focuses on system-wide (portfolio level) costs for instantaneous matching of capacity with demand. As an example, there are a number of publications that state that not only are battery costs falling, the total costs are also low because we can blend a battery with RE. Such publications state, for example, if RE is Rs. 2/kWh, and a battery is Rs. 8/kWh (LCOE), given we only need 25% of the RE to be stored in a battery, that means we have 2 + 25%*8 = 2+2 = 4 Rs./kWh for the total costs. This is incorrect given we might need just 25% battery on an energy basis, but we need double or triple the average battery size to meet the peak demand for part of the time. This larger-sized battery isn’t wasted during off-peak hours, but its value is much lower, simply equal to the marginal cost of alternatively avoided generation. In the short run we might manage with energy-basis blending of storage with RE, but in the very short run we don’t even need storage at all. The real challenge occurs as and when we reach very high levels of RE and simultaneously need to meet incremental peak demand.

Selected Study Details

There are a number of studies looking at prospective grid balancing in India, including by NREL, TERI, Prayas, and CSTEP.  While some are much richer spatially, going down to the state or even power plant level, a key difference is that we do not use simulated data for supply and demand curves by time of day but instead use actual 2019 data as a starting base. We also cover a very wide range of uncertainty not just across capital costs, foreign exchange escalation rates, discount rates, etc. but also for how RE grows over time and in what ratio of solar:wind – we do not assume government targets as a base. More importantly, we segregate battery costs between energy and capacity, and do not simply assume a “4-hour battery,” i.e., $200/kWh = 0.25 kW output for 4 hours at $50/kW.

While this study is not a full-blown optimization model, we can find lowest cost solutions with optimal despatch by having a wide portfolio of generation choices as well as potential fuel mixes for future growth. Given we only focus on national data, we simplify the system to assume perfect transmission and coordination, which gives results as a bounding exercise.  Any grid congestion, local bottlenecks, or plant-specific outages would only make things harder than the optimal based on a national analysis. Our focus is less on any specific cost number for comparison across fuel choices but rather on trends and key factors that are robust regardless of assumptions.

A few key findings and insights include:

  1. There is significant uncertainty in supply and demand as well as prices, and assumptions matter significantly. These include uncertainty in load profiles, capital costs, finance costs, share of solar:wind, etc.  We start with the expectation that the PLF of solar and wind in the future will be higher than in the past, but year-on-year variations will be very critical, more so for wind.  A forthcoming paper by Schwarz & Tongia shows wind output in regions of India can change by over 30% different across years. Even hydropower depends measurably on the monsoon and climate patterns, which are shifting due to climate change.
  2. Even with a high PLF, new RE is unlikely to be sufficient to meet upcoming demand through 2030. Not only is the target of 450 GW by 2030 a stretch, even if this is met, it wouldn’t meet the incremental demand rise of, say, 5.25% after we account for system curtailment, storage losses, incremental transmission losses, etc.  Some of the gap would have to be met from existing but under-utilized capacity, perhaps even fossil fuel assets. This is a calculation for 2030, which doesn’t consider the trajectory of growth for RE. Would it be equally spread out – 350 GW of RE growth means 35 GW/year over ten years? Alternatively, would it take more time to scale up, following a more typical increasing growth (CAGR – compound annual growth rate)?
  3. The current system suffices due to surplus capacity, but this surplus will end in a few years. By when it would exhaust depends on not just load growth or RE growth but also on what happens to the existing coal fleet. Will all coal plants get pollution control equipment, or will some retire before their end of capable life? This analysis doesn’t segregate completion of existing under-construction coal plants as a cheaper option given the lack of data on remaining costs. If we assume all new coal capacity to be brownfield or greenfield, coal is not cost-effective at least through 2030 due to low expected PLFs, by when alternatives will likely be even more cost-effective (or caps on carbon emissions may grow). If we assume much of the under-construction coal power plant capacity gets built, some of it may only displace or replace older plants.  Even with a net increase of 25 GW over 2019’s capacity before a plateau, that’s only about a 12% increase, which would be a small fraction of a percent of present global carbon dioxide emissions.
  4. If the objective is “no new coal”, there is a need to make existing plants much more flexible. The ability to lower coal plant output is a key factor for system costs due to curtailment of RE driven not by lack of electricity demand but by limitations on lowering the output from coal power plants. Such coal plants are often needed for peak evening duty cycles when solar output is zero, and we assume the system doesn’t plan for daily start-stops of coal plants (which is very expensive).
  5. Adding any new capacity regardless of type (coal, gas combined cycle, gas open cycle, combustion engines, RE+batteries, etc.) to meet upcoming unmet demand will be expensive due to its low PLF. The good news is that much of the planned RE growth doesn’t need a battery – a little curtailment is still cost-effective.
  6. “Surplus RE” being curtailed doesn’t match well with batteries needed for meeting peak demand due to seasonality issues. If we do choose storage with RE for future supply, it will need relatively predictable and incremental RE, probably new solar. But if we weren’t able to growth capacity to meet the 450 GW RE target, separate new RE for storage will also be difficult unless we are able to pay a premium for such power.
  7. Storage isn’t the panacea many people believe.  Beyond economic issues of LCOE we highlighted previously, right-sizing batteries is a complex issue, e.g., for use as a seasonal speaker.
  8. It is cheaper to blend storage and RE with an option like limited-use biodiesel. This allows a smaller battery focused on energy requirements instead of sizing the battery for occasional peaks. While biofuels have land use implications, the land requirements for a small volume of power to come from biofuels are much smaller than proposed transportation biofuel blending requirements.

The post Balancing India’s electricity grid in 2030: A detailed, granular analysis under uncertainty first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/balancing-indias-electricity-grid-in-2030-a-detailed-granular-analysis-under-uncertainty/feed/ 0 895030
One Year of CSEP: Essential Reading on Economic Growth and Finance http://stg.csep.org/blog/one-year-of-csep-essential-reading-on-economic-growth-and-finance/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=one-year-of-csep-essential-reading-on-economic-growth-and-finance http://stg.csep.org/blog/one-year-of-csep-essential-reading-on-economic-growth-and-finance/#respond Fri, 10 Sep 2021 10:47:41 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894967 On the one-year anniversary of CSEP, we bring you eight essential readings on the Indian economy.

The post One Year of CSEP: Essential Reading on Economic Growth and Finance first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The Centre for Social and Economic Progress was formed with a commitment to conduct research and analysis on urgent and critical policy issues. One important focus area of our research is the Indian economy where we examine aspects related to growth, finance and development.

The Indian economy’s performance in the recent quarters has been robust, but the output is lower than pre-pandemic levels. The record jump in exports in the construction and manufacturing sector indicates a promising revival and could also increase employment creation. On the other hand, the rising inflation, which often surges above the permissible limit of 6 per cent, poses a serious challenge for policymakers.

At CSEP, we have been closely analysing rapidly changing macro scenarios and monitoring evolving policy actions to help mitigate economic disruptions.

On the one-year anniversary of CSEP, we bring you some of our papers and other features on the Indian economy.

[Visit the link below to access the feature and click on the image above the text box to read the full paper.]
Essential Reading on Economic Growth and Finance

The post One Year of CSEP: Essential Reading on Economic Growth and Finance first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/one-year-of-csep-essential-reading-on-economic-growth-and-finance/feed/ 0 894967
Leveraging India’s Northeast Region for Regional Connectivity http://stg.csep.org/blog/leveraging-indias-northeast-region-for-regional-connectivity/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=leveraging-indias-northeast-region-for-regional-connectivity http://stg.csep.org/blog/leveraging-indias-northeast-region-for-regional-connectivity/#respond Thu, 02 Sep 2021 13:05:11 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894926 Riya Sinha interviews Sanjay Kathuria and Priya Mathur on the changing scenario of the Northeast Region (NER) of India.

The post Leveraging India’s Northeast Region for Regional Connectivity first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Riya Sinha interviews Sanjay Kathuria and Priya Mathur on their co-edited book, Playing to Strengths: A Policy Framework for Mainstreaming Northeast India, published by The World Bank in 2020.

In the last few years, India’s Northeast Region (NER) has regained policy priority. The region is the gateway for India’s Act East Policy as its strategically significant location acts as the bridge between South Asia and Southeast Asia. The eight landlocked states of the region – Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Mizoram, Meghalaya, Manipur, Tripura, Sikkim, and Nagaland – share a 5,812 Km border with five neighbouring countries, Bangladesh, Bhutan, China, Myanmar, and Nepal.

For several decades after India’s independence, the NER remained geographically isolated from the mainland, connected only via the 22-km narrow Siliguri corridor. As a result of this isolation, the NER lagged in economic growth. However, the scenario is changing today. Several developmental and connectivity projects are being implemented in the NER, including some supported by external partners such as Japan and other International Financial Institutions (IFIs). Such projects include the development of urban transportation, cross-border roads and railways, and inland waterways, connecting the region to Bangladesh and Myanmar.

Sanjay Kathuria and Priya Mathur’s book is an important contribution to the scholarship on regional connectivity and the NER. Across four chapters, it identifies constraints both at the policy and the ground level in the region by analysing connectivity, logistics, product standards, and infrastructure. It further focuses on the NER’s strengths in various sectors, including agriculture and services such as medical tourism, and identifies high-impact value chains within a sector to create more opportunities for women and other vulnerable groups.

Playing to Strengths: A Policy Framework for Mainstreaming Northeast India consists of four chapters authored by experts in different domains of connectivity. A must-read for development practitioners, the book contains several important policy takeaways for the NER’s development prospects within the wider region sometimes called “East South Asia.”

Riya Sinha: Till the 1950s, India’s NER enjoyed geo-economic centrality and strong connectivity through robust infrastructure, including railway lines and inland waterways. However, the region became geographically isolated thereafter, and this reflected in slow growth. What happened, and how are things changing now?

Sanjay Kathuria and Priya Mathur: Post-1947 history created conditions that stifled NER’s development as it became geographically isolated, connected to the rest of India only through the narrow Siliguri Corridor. Once in the forefront of India’s development, NER gradually began to lag behind other regions, including other comparable hill states in India. The importance of distance is reflected in the higher prices faced by consumers in NER. Compared with West Bengal, the nearest Indian state with a seaport, the NER faces 60 percent higher prices in rural areas and 30 percent higher prices in urban areas.

Over the past decade, connectivity agreements with Bangladesh and accelerating infrastructure investments in NER and its neighbours have begun to reduce the subregion’s economic isolation.

In every state in NER, the average time to reach the nearest city has been cut down from more than three hours in 2000 to one hour in 2015.

Other global trends are also very favourable for NER. These include growing incomes, leisure spending, and consumer awareness in India and neighbouring countries; a rising preference for fresh, healthful, safe, environmentally friendly, and socially responsible products; and the growing role of services in manufacturing, which is increasing demand for skilled resources.

Together, these developments can help NER showcase its strengths in agriculture and services. In fruits and spices, NER has an above-average share of cropped area, higher than the all-India average. NER’s female adult literacy and female labour force participation rates are much higher than those for all-India, and in NER, the share of the tertiary sector in gross state domestic product (GSDP) has been at or above the median for all states in India. In addition, many of the crops are grown in organic or near-organic conditions; the air is fresh; and nature is bountiful.

RS: The book highlights that the growth in NER’s strengths lies in agriculture and services. These sectors can potentially create more job opportunities for women and the poor in the region. What role can better cross-border connectivity play in harnessing this sector, for example, with the emerging Bay of Bengal and ASEAN economies?

SK and PM: NER can leverage its strengths in agriculture, such as fruits, vegetables, and spices, and services, such as education and medical services, to step up its growth. However, this will require a different approach to doing business. Existing product value chains in NER are geared towards serving local and price-conscious consumers. In such traditional value chains, only a fraction of the price reaches women and the poor, and is largely appropriated by others, for example, intermediaries and processors in horticultural products, and doctors and hospitals in medical services. The report identifies examples of new high-impact value chains that can create more job opportunities with greater appropriable margins for women and the poor, as their contribution to value creation is greater. For example, fresh fruits and vegetables for quality-conscious consumers in the fruits and vegetables sector; and long-duration complex medical services clustered in Guwahati (Assam) as the hub, with other cities in NER and neighbouring countries acting as spokes, in medical tourism.

Better cross-border connectivity and cooperation with neighbours can play an important role in the development of high-impact value chains, which can create win-win opportunities for both NER and neighbours such as Bangladesh, which shares a long border with NER.

First, Bangladesh can serve as a key proximate market for NER products, while Bangladeshi consumers can gain through access to a greater variety of products. Already, for instance, fresh horticultural products from NER reach Bangladesh, with informal exports far exceeding formal exports. In services such as medical tourism, Bangladesh could be an important market for NER, given Bangladesh’s current position as the largest source of medical tourists to India, and its geographic and cultural proximity to NER.

Second, Bangladeshi firms can help NER value chains and businesses scale up, while availing growth opportunities themselves. They would benefit from access to a greater variety of possibly cheaper inputs, as well as access to NER markets for finished products. For example, horticultural produce from NER could provide inputs for Bangladesh’s vibrant food-processing industry, while processed foods could be exported to NER and beyond, with transit through NER; this is already taking place. They could even invest in processing plants in NER, sourcing some inputs locally, and then sell in NER as well as re-export to Bangladesh—PRAN foods of Bangladesh has already set up a plant in Tripura. Investment in NER can also serve as a learning ground for Bangladeshi firms.

Third, Bangladesh and NER can both gain from improved scope and efficiency of logistics and logistics service firms. Movement through Bangladesh and use of Bangladeshi ports can improve NER’s access to markets, reducing transportation costs and time, and making NER products more competitive. At the same time, NER value chains can create business opportunities for Bangladeshi logistics providers. For greater efficiency gains, governments could consider opening the logistics services market in NER to Bangladeshi operators and vice versa.

RS: Investments in improving connectivity and upgrading product quality standards and procedures are necessary steps to link India’s NER to regional and global value chains. However, in themselves, they do little to upgrade product quality and are not sufficient to exploit trading opportunities. What interventions can be made to address this issue?

SK and PM: NER is waking up to improved connectivity as well as greater trading opportunities. Such opportunities are likely to be accompanied by increased pressure on producers from consumers, buyers, and regulators to upgrade the safety and quality of their products. First, the growth of income and awareness is creating a growing segment of discerning consumers who are demanding high-quality products. Second, growing access to regional markets will help NER’s producers to better access global value chains, which tend to use more stringent quality standards to coordinate their trade and satisfy distant customers. Third, regulators in India and other countries in the region are moving toward upgrading food safety and control by tightening legislation and improving the currently often lax and unsystematic enforcement.

In NER, production and trading structures are primarily traditional, dominated by small units and atomistic value chains exercising little vertical coordination.

These structures are not conducive to upgrading quality. The demand for safer and higher-quality products is currently restrained by low incomes and poor connectivity to international markets. Niche products for discerning consumers are developing, although their volumes remain very small.

Value chain interventions, especially in horticultural value chains, are critical for upgrading product quality in NER. NER’s products often suffer from quality problems that will not be solved by focusing on investments in standards and related procedures but by improving production and trading practices. The development of services such as standards, testing, and certification would have the greatest chances of success if they were integrated into broader value chain development projects that also address production and trading practices. The latter is critical to producing a high-quality product and maintaining its quality until it reaches the consumer.

RS: In February 2021, the EAM S. Jaishankar visited Guwahati (Assam) with the Japanese Ambassador to review the progress of a Japanese-funded water supply project. How can India’s relations with other countries be leveraged further to cooperate in the development of the NER?

SK and PM: Countries like Japan can be crucial partners to help develop the NER. Japan has for long played an important role in the development of infrastructure in NER, partly because of its technological and financial strength, but also because its close political ties with India allow it to explore such investments in a sensitive region such as NER.

Ideally, this infrastructure investment should be complemented by Japanese FDI in areas that we have identified as NER’s strengths, such as horticulture and services. Japanese consumers could be the initial target of the output for such ventures. In terms of services, high income Japanese tourists could be attracted by the NER’s open spaces, golf courses, and Buddhist heritage, among other things. Nurses from the NER could be a boon for Japan’s ageing population and NER’s young and educated population could provide significant inputs into Japan’s creative services, including the “Cool Japan” policy initiative.

In time, as business and tourist traffic develops, there might even be scope for a direct air connection between Guwahati and Tokyo, but this will require development of sufficient demand.

Other countries in the NER’s periphery could also become important customers, in due course, especially for horticulture and services such as medical and education tourism.

Moreover, there are some countries, further off, that can play a role akin to Japan, including Korea, Australia and Singapore, among others. The Government of India and the NER states could together do some concerted promotion of the NER as an investment destination in these countries.

RS: While the NER boasts abundant natural and workforce resources, private sector participation in the NER has been very low due to high costs. What role can International Financial Institutions (IFIs) such as the World Bank, Asian Development Bank, Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank, play in supporting private sector participation in the region?

SK and PM: The IFIs have some unique strengths which make them an important partner in subregional and cross-border development. These can be grouped around identification, convening, financing, and staying power.

Let’s start with identification. This means rigorous analysis of the issue being examined, informed by local contexts and unique global experience of IFIs, on the nature of the problem, possible solutions, cost-benefit analysis of different approaches, and prioritisation of actions. Nowadays, IFIs usually undertake such analysis in collaboration with local partners, which is a mutually beneficial arrangement and strengthens the overall product.

Convening is a highly underestimated activity. When there is a lack of trust between countries, IFIs can convene meaningful bilateral or subregional meetings, informed by their own expertise on the subject. We have personally witnessed how such dialogues convened by the World Bank, riding on its reputation as an honest broker, resulted in important breakthroughs in cross-border economic relationships.

Of course, IFIs bring financing to the table, although this is less important than it used to be in the past. Even so, financing for connectivity projects in the NER can be important because of the long loan maturity periods and technical expertise that informs project preparation. The latter can help build capacity of different stakeholders involved and generate positive spillovers for subsequent projects.

Finally, IFIs have staying power, beyond political cycles and private sector time horizons. Sometimes, projects can be complex and/or politically sensitive, especially if they have a cross-border angle to them. In such cases, even governments can sometimes lose patience and give up. A great example is the World-Bank-backed CASA-1000 project, which supports sustainable electricity trade between the Central Asian countries of Tajikistan and the Kyrgyz Republic and the South Asian countries of Afghanistan and Pakistan. This project was ten years in the making. It is doubtful if anyone other than the IFIs could have pulled this off.

The underlying vision that informs the IFI approach is to support the private sector, i.e., back activities that can help create a conducive framework for private sector investment and sustainable job creation.

RS: You have worked extensively on regional integration in South Asia. What is your assessment of the progress made over the last decade in improving regional connectivity? What are the threats to its progress and how can they be overcome?

SK and PM: The answer to this question can take at least a book chapter! But let’s take a crack at it. Broadly speaking, South Asia’s western and eastern fronts are moving at quite different speeds, as we know.

On the eastern side, where one can include Bangladesh, Bhutan, India and Nepal (BBIN), as well as Sri Lanka, things are moving swiftly, especially in the last 3-5 years. The bedrock of this movement is the steady progress in the multi-faceted Bangladesh-India relationship. The NER can be a major beneficiary of this progress.

We believe that if there can be greater emphasis now on soft measures, such as operationalising the BBIN Motor Vehicle Agreement, addressing non-tariff barriers, etc., it would complement the infrastructure investments.

On the western front, there has been backsliding in trade linkages. Tensions between Pakistan and India, and Pakistan and Afghanistan, have resulted in a virtual ban on trade in the former case, and, in the latter case, frequent closures of the all-important border trading points, including Torkham and Chaman. On Afghanistan-India trade, the long-running dispute on transit trade via Pakistan continues to be a source of friction between all three countries, but especially between Afghanistan and Pakistan. At the same time, Pakistan is implementing a massive connectivity project as part of the China Pakistan Economic Corridor. However, the extent to which CPEC can help connect Pakistan and its neighbours depends entirely on the softer side of the equation, such as transit trade agreements, where there has been no progress.

 

About the contributors:

Sanjay Kathuria is a Senior Visiting Fellow at CPR. He is also a Non-Resident Senior Fellow at the Institute of South Asian Studies in the National University of Singapore; Adjunct Professor, Georgetown University; and Visiting Faculty, Ashoka University. Earlier, he was a Lead Economist at the World Bank in Washington DC. Dr Kathuria is one of the leading thinkers and commentators on economic integration in South Asia and the economic development of the region. For 27 years at the World Bank, he worked in South Asia, Latin America and the Caribbean, and Eastern Europe, including field assignments in New Delhi and Dhaka.

Priya Mathur has been working in development as an economist. Currently, she works with the World Bank on international trade and regional integration, global value chains, and entrepreneurship. She has also worked in the private sector as a strategy consultant with the Boston Consulting Group. In that role, she has worked with firms in telecommunications and in banking and asset management.

 

Read other blogs in the Sambandh Scholars Speak series here.

The post Leveraging India’s Northeast Region for Regional Connectivity first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/leveraging-indias-northeast-region-for-regional-connectivity/feed/ 0 894926
Still Non-Aligned? Sri Lankan Politics and Foreign Policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/still-non-aligned-sri-lankan-politics-and-foreign-policy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=still-non-aligned-sri-lankan-politics-and-foreign-policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/still-non-aligned-sri-lankan-politics-and-foreign-policy/#respond Wed, 04 Aug 2021 09:57:00 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894670 How Sri Lanka's internal politics and socio-economic changes under the Rajapaksas-led government inform Colombo's foreign policy

The post Still Non-Aligned? Sri Lankan Politics and Foreign Policy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Constantino Xavier interviews Asanga Abeyagoonasekera on his book, Conundrum Of An Island: Sri Lanka’s Geopolitical Challenges, published by World Scientific in 2021.

Abeyagoonasekera served as the Founding Director General of the National Security Think Tank under Sri Lanka’s Ministry of Defence, until January 2020. He has been a prolific writer, with various books and articles that examine the critical link between the country’s domestic transformation and its geostrategic posture.

Conundrum of an Island is, therefore, not a typical foreign policy book, that merely looks at Sri Lanka’s external challenges in isolation.  Instead, Abeyagoonasekera’s analysis in five chapters invites us to understand the decision-making transmission belt in both directions: how under the Rajapaksas-led government internal politics and socio-economic changes are disrupting Sri Lanka’s traditional foreign policy, for example on human rights or embracing China’s Belt and Road Initiative; and vice-versa, how an increasingly competitive geoeconomic order is informing Colombo’s decisions on infrastructure financing from Japan or security cooperation with India and the United States.

The book surveys these dynamics in detail, across sectors, including Sri Lanka’s security sector reforms, the regulatory context of foreign direct investment, and the role of multilateralism in South Asia and the Indian Ocean region. It offers readers a rare insight on how Sri Lanka is observing, debating and addressing a moment of transition and turbulence in the regional order.

The book is a timely and relevant contribution, especially to understand the dynamics behind a recent parliamentary bill clearing the US$1.4 billion investment for China Harbour Engineering Company to build and operate the Colombo Port City on a 99-year lease. This was in stark contrast with the Sri Lankan government’s decision to drop out of a trilateral, inter-governmental agreement with India and Japan to develop a container terminal in the same port.

Constantino Xavier: You compare Sri Lanka’s geostrategic position to that of England and Japan, highlighting the potential of your island-state’s Indo-Pacific centrality. But you are also concerned that Sri Lankans have “become prisoners of location, increasingly defined by external spheres of influence from powerful nations.” (p. 108). What can Colombo do better to preserve its strategic autonomy?

Asanga Abeyagoonasekera: In the book, I revisit the work of the geopolitical thinker Nicolas J. Spykman and his Rimland theory, which explains the significance of the rimland in the present context. This is a time when the United States (US) and China have drawn mental maps connecting oceans and continents to the Indo-Pacific and the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) strategies. The United Kingdom (UK) and Japan, as two geostrategic offshore islands of significance, have played a major role in global politics of the last century. However, the Atlantic-Pacific axis of power has shifted to the Indo-Pacific due to China’s rise in this century.

Sri Lanka is geographically located at the outer crescent of the rimland, facing the Indian Ocean to the south and the Indian subcontinent to the north. It is at an important geostrategic location, close to the Sea Lines of Communications (SLOCS) through which China’s energy and trade demands are catered to. Additionally, proximity to India gives Sri Lanka further importance due to India’s interests in the Indian Ocean.

Sri Lanka’s conundrum is that it has failed to reach a balance in its foreign policy, and this directly impacts our internal instability.

Sri Lanka has subscribed to both the Indo-Pacific and China’s BRI, promising a ‘neutral’ foreign policy posture. Its successive governments have rhetorically claimed a ‘neutral’ and ‘balanced’ foreign policy with non-aligned principles but have failed to translate rhetoric into action due to China’s strategic inroads in the nation.

In the book, I discuss the Chinese sphere of influence in length and comparatively assess Indian and American influence in the island nation. Sri Lanka’s conundrum is that it has failed to reach a balance in its foreign policy, and this directly impacts our internal instability. Sri Lanka must follow the rules-based order and maintain its foreign policy balance.

CX: Your book argues that India is following an American line against China in South Asia, something you describe as “buck-passing tactics used by the US on India” (p. 70). Is this the overall perception in Sri Lanka today, that there is a joint US-India policy in the region targeting China and curtailing Colombo’s decision-making freedom?

AA: In the book, I refer to the realist school of thinking and the work of John Mearsheimer who popularized the concept of “buck-passing”. Mearsheimer explains that buck-passing “is essentially about who does the balancing, not whether it gets done.” Every power in history has buck passed. In the present context, in Asia, the US quietly encourages nations like Japan and India to build up their militaries in order to check China. My analysis is that the more the US buck-passes, the more India can balance and control an assertive China. It is a good thing to buck-pass and it should be seen as a positive trend.

Sri Lanka, just like India, has followed a non-aligned foreign policy in the past. Many non-aligned nations did not care for geopolitics until ‘surprise’ external forces threatened them. India, in 1962, faced a surprise attack by China and subsequently received US assistance to curb the assault and end Chinese aggression.

Similarly, US presence and assistance has helped many nations in South Asia. With multiple military agreements between the US and India, and now the Maldives, a stronger US presence is visible in the Indian Ocean, which will help maintain balance and sustain a ‘rules-based order’.

CX: Beyond the increasingly competitive US-India-China triangle, what role do you see for other middle powers like Japan, the European Union, ASEAN or Australia in Sri Lanka? Haven’t President Gotabaya Rajapaksa and Prime Minister Mahinda Rajapaksa already achieved a fine balance by diversifying relations with all these actors in recent years? 

AA: When Secretary Mike Pompeo was in Colombo, he asked Sri Lanka to align with the US and adhere to its Indo-Pacific values. And when senior Ambassador Yang Jiechi visited last October, he asked Sri Lanka to align with China and deepen its involvement in the BRI. Sri Lanka is being given a binary choice between the US and China. In this environment, I recommend focusing our energy towards middle powers.

There is so much Sri Lanka can do in terms of trade and security with middle powers like Japan, Australia, and the EU. A relatively small island like Sri Lanka should not be pressured to choose between great powers, and without working with middle powers, we will get carried away and spend more time contemplating these binaries.

We [Sri Lanka] should work with both great powers while also adhering to the values we have treasured in our foreign policy such as our commitment to the Law of the Sea, the Indian Ocean zone for peace, a rules-based order, and democracy.

Sri Lanka cannot afford to disengage from China nor from the US.  During the Mahinda Rajapaksa era, we signed a strategic partnership with China along with other agreements and we have a rich bilateral relationship with Beijing now being our largest trading partner. In the same way, our largest export market is the US and the US-Sri Lanka bilateral relationship is essential to sustain our democratic model of governance, which we have benefited from.

We should work with both great powers while also adhering to the values we have treasured in our foreign policy such as our commitment to the Law of the Sea, the Indian Ocean zone for peace, a rules-based order, and democracy. The problem is, unlike in the past, we have not articulated our position when extra-regional powers have failed to adhere to international norms and law. Sri Lanka should remodel its passive foreign policy to be more active and vibrant. We are not bound to accept Huawei 5G, or give away a special zone with extra jurisdictional rights such as in Colombo Port City.

Read more in this series | Partition and Pragmatism in India-Pakistan Relations

CX: On regional connectivity, you recommend that “India, rather than seeing China’s BRI [Belt and Road Initiative] as a threat, should move away from this policy and join the BRI just like all her neighboring countries.” (p. 70). Based on Sri Lanka’s experience with the BRI, what factors should India consider?

AA: Today, many nations prefer to bandwagon with China due to their weak economic conditions and multiple loans. Chinese loans require more transparency, and their projects require sound business models to generate revenue. Sri Lanka should avoid ‘ghost airport’ business models. It should also keep in mind the long-term strategic view on whether Chinese-financed infrastructure is leveraged for both civil and military use, such as in Djibouti.

Apart from Bhutan, India is the only South Asian nation that is not part of the BRI. It has two clear concerns: the China Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC), which passes through Pakistan occupied Kashmir (PoK), and the expansion of China’s strategic presence in the region through non-transparent funding. My assessment is that both concerns are justified, but China has ignored India’s objections and there’s nothing that India can do to slow down CPEC. Through CPEC, China is trying to connect the Middle East to its western provinces of Xinjiang.

India will need to be involved in the BRI to address these concerns. However, India will need to bring in a serious security dimension to its strategic long-term assessment of the BRI. Three key BRI projects – CPEC, Hambantota/Port City, and the Myanmar Economic Corridor – surround India geographically.

India’s absence from the BRI is also a major drawback to other countries in the region. India actively engaging with the BRI can help tackle important issues such as transparency/debt repayment concerns, China’s take over of Hambantota port, the multiple debt to equity swaps, and the granting of extra-jurisdictional powers such as with the Colombo Port City, which is a clear loss of sovereignty for Sri Lanka. Certain South Asian nations in the BRI do not have the capacity and the muscle to defend their projects and to assess their business models.

India correctly observed that connectivity initiatives in the BRI must follow principles of financial responsibility to avoid projects that would create an unsustainable debt burden for nations.

Staying away from the BRI serves India no purpose. India correctly observed that connectivity initiatives in the BRI must follow principles of financial responsibility to avoid projects that would create an unsustainable debt burden for nations. So how is India going to do this by being absent? India can balance the BRI by carving trade routes that can be beneficial for it, both economically and strategically.

CX: Sri Lanka is the current chair of BIMSTEC, an organisation you describe as playing a growing security and even military role for regional cooperation in the Bay of Bengal. Doesn’t this go against BIMSTEC’s economic and connectivity mandate? Will it not further deepen suspicions about what you call “hegemonic” India among smaller states like Sri Lanka or Nepal? 

AA: The answer is clearly no. BIMSTEC should include security issues in its agenda, a vital area of cooperation for all countries in the region. As I assess in the book, South Asian nations have common security threats, especially when it comes to internal stability, terrorism and even elections. Across the region, election outcomes are often impacted through violence. It points to the absence of a regional security architecture in South Asia.

We can build trust by discussing these concerns. India’s Monroe doctrine in South Asia is similar to the behaviour of all large powers in their geographical vicinity, including the US, Russia, and China. However, there is a serious trust deficit between India and Sri Lanka due to underinvestment in many areas, including security. We need to institutionalise these relations. For example, an India-Sri Lanka security or defence cooperation agreement can be proposed that covers submarine port calls, alleviating Indian fears every time a Chinese submarine visits Colombo port.

We need to build trust at different levels and institutionalise, including through BIMSTEC but not only. The recent tri-lateral between India-Sri Lanka-Maldives is a good example.

My book discusses the Easter Sunday terror attack [of 2019], where India warned the Sri Lankan authorities multiple times beforehand. But why was such vital intelligence ignored? The reason is clear now: according to the Presidential Commission of Investigation (PCOI) report, the head of State Intelligence Services says that Indian intelligence was not intelligence, just information. So, the strength of Indian intelligence was reduced to mere information in Sri Lanka due to Colombo’s trust deficit.

So how do we work in such a heavily politicised environment? My answer is to build trust at different levels and institutionalise, including through BIMSTEC but not only. The recent tri-lateral between India-Sri Lanka-Maldives is a good example of regional security cooperation.

CX: Sri Lanka implemented its first free trade agreement with India more than twenty years ago. But negotiations for an expanded economic partnership, also including services and investments, have stalled in recent years. What needs to happen for this to finally advance? 

AA: Over the years, successive Sri Lankan governments have adopted an inward, nationalist economic position. We talk a lot about regional integration but in practice we follow a protectionist agenda, which has slowed down our bilateral trade. Sri Lankan nationalists have been apprehensive of India taking over service sector jobs and overall control of the economy. I believe these are all politically motivated claims with no rationale. Some leftist political parties are part of the government coalition, and their nationalist voices have been a concern to the government.

This rhetoric of trade unions is controlled to a degree by political forces, which has often led us astray from the progressive path. The trade unions go to sleep when the Chinese request extra-jurisdictional power for their [Colombo] port city project. No trade unions talk of sovereignty when it comes to Chinese projects. This is unacceptable. When it comes to Free Trade Agreements (FTAs) with India or Singapore, Sri Lanka is far from taking a more open posture due to these nationalist political sentiments. Sri Lankan leadership should discard these inward policies and open up, if we want to fulfill our economic vision of becoming South Asia’s Singapore. Nations like India and Japan can help Sri Lanka if it practices more open and progressive economic policies.

CX: Does the Tamil issue remain an irritant in India-Sri Lanka relations, giving China an advantage? Is India just using devolution to preserve strategic leverage or to appease domestic electorates, especially in Tamil Nadu?

AA: I believe India’s concern for Sri Lanka’s minorities is genuine. The Tamilian concern has been there for decades and has not been adequately addressed. Many majoritarian ultra-nationalists see India to have imposed devolution on Sri Lanka. This is an incorrect view, and I think devolution was a solution we required long before 1988, and India only tried to assist Sri Lanka to achieve this goal and create stability.

China states it is only here [in Sri Lanka] for economic development and not to interfere in domestic politics. But the Chinese Communist Party’s engagement with the Sri Lanka Podujana Peramuna (SLPP), the Rajapaksa’s political party, is an example of direct involvement in domestic politics, as reflected during the 2018 constitutional crisis. China is not concerned about Sri Lanka’s human rights, and this was clearly stated by Chinese Defence Minister Wei Fenghe in his recent visit. Sri Lanka should sustain its democratic values and address human rights concerns and, on these issues, as a democracy, India has a broader role than China in Sri Lanka.

Read other blogs in the Sambandh Scholars Speak series here. 

About the Expert: 

Asanga is an International Security and Geopolitics Analyst and Strategic Advisor from Sri Lanka. He has led two government think tanks providing strategic advocacy on Foreign Policy and Defence in Sri Lanka. Asanga is the Senior Advisor for security and geopolitics to the Leader of the Opposition in the Sri Lankan Parliament. He was the Founding Director-General of the National Security Think Tank under the Ministry of Defence (INSSSL) until January 2020. Before this, he has served as the Executive Director at the Foreign Policy think tank (Kadirgamar Institute LKIIRSS). He was the Advisor to Minister of External Affairs from 2011-2015. His new book on Sri Lanka’s geopolitical challenges, Conundrum of an Island (2021), was published by World Scientific, Singapore). It was endorsed by Walter Russell Mead as a “useful text to understand emerging dynamics of the Indo-Pacific”. Asanga is the author of ‘Sri Lanka at Crossroads’ (2019) and ‘Towards A Better World Order’ (2015). He is a keen commentator on geopolitics, intranational relations and South Asian security matters and has written extensively and published in international journals and think tanks.

He served as a Visiting Professor for Geopolitics and Global Leadership (NKU, USA), Visiting Lecturer for International Security (Colombo University, Sri Lanka), International Political Economy (University of London in Colombo RIC).

Email: asangaaa@gmail.com Twitter: @AsangaAbey

 

The post Still Non-Aligned? Sri Lankan Politics and Foreign Policy first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/still-non-aligned-sri-lankan-politics-and-foreign-policy/feed/ 0 894670
Nepal’s Turn to China: Opportunities and Challenges http://stg.csep.org/blog/nepals-turn-to-china-opportunities-and-challenges/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=nepals-turn-to-china-opportunities-and-challenges http://stg.csep.org/blog/nepals-turn-to-china-opportunities-and-challenges/#respond Tue, 27 Jul 2021 09:09:02 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894629 Amish Raj Mulmi on his new book, All Roads Lead North: Nepal’s Turn to China, and how Nepal views its northern neighbour

The post Nepal’s Turn to China: Opportunities and Challenges first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Antara Ghosal Singh interviews Amish Raj Mulmi on his book, All Roads Lead North: Nepal’s Turn to China (Context, 2021).

Breaking away from the ‘India-first perspective’ and refuting various western dogmas regarding China, the book provides a rare Nepali perspective on the history of human connectivity in the Himalayas and South Asia. It provides valuable insights into how Nepal’s northern neighbour has affected the lives of ordinary Nepalese since the 1950s and how Nepal’s view of China has evolved with time.

The book is many things at the same time. It is history; it is an interesting collection of rare personal accounts and anecdotes of people in the Himalayas; it has shades of journalistic reportage; and it has geopolitics—particularly the competition between China and India in South Asia, the evolving role of the United States in the subcontinent, and most importantly, the agency exercised by smaller South Asian nations like Nepal.

In the book, Amish demonstrates how prosperity has started percolating through Nepal’s northern border due to increased Chinese engagements, but with riders. He surveys Nepal’s growing closeness with China on the one hand and the various insecurities in the relationship on the other, including concerns over the prevailing power asymmetry, apprehensions regarding debt traps, and frustration over a slower pace of cooperation than what Nepal desires.

However, notwithstanding such concerns, Amish argues that China remains Nepal’s ultimate ray of hope to bring radical economic transformation and eventually extricate Nepal from India’s economic hold. Amish says that thanks to China, Nepal is now dreaming of better infrastructure, more trade and improved standard of living. He, therefore, infers that all roads for Nepal now lead north, and going forward it will be Nepal’s task to ensure a smooth ride.

Perceptive and refreshing, this book is an important read to understand how India’s neighbouring nations approach China and perceive its presence in the subcontinent, which is in sharp contrast to India’s own outlook and experience of China.

Antara Ghosal Singh: One of the key highlights of the book is the extensive fieldwork that you conducted in some of the remotest parts in the Himalayas along the China-Nepal border, tracking the movement and exchange of people, goods, and ideas in the region. How similar/dissimilar are the dynamics at the Nepal-China border and the Nepal-India border?

Amish Raj Mulmi: As my research along the Nepal-India border is limited, let me break down the answer in two parts.

Similarities: The Nepali borderlands on both the north and the south are witness to a historical process of marginalization by the ruling hill elite. The demographics of both the border areas are also similar in that in both regions, dominant ethnicities share familial and socio-cultural ties with populations across the border, despite restrictions on the northern border.
Dissimilarities: Apart from the radically different geography (Himalaya vs Indo-Gangetic Plains for the most part), the Nepal-India border has always been historically more open to migration, cultural interactions, and cross-border commerce and trade (perhaps the terrain itself is one of the reasons how cross-border interactions have been shaped). Beyond China’s unilateral determinants on the northern border that led to the securitisation of the Himalaya and restrictions on movement across borders, including on traditional practices of transhumant pastoralism, the northern border is also witnessing infrastructural upgrade      in many parts for the first time in their history, often in an attempt to connect better to China. One recent example is the road-building effort in northern Gorkha region, which will connect the Samagaun region to Tibet.

Tibetan exiles will find it extremely difficult to hold any sort of political events in Nepal from hereon.

AGS: Your book deals at length with the issue of Tibetan refugees in Nepal in the context of deepening ties between China and Nepal. How have closer relations between Nepal and China impacted the free flow and movement of Tibetans across the Himalayas and what does the future hold for them?

ARM: The movement of Tibetan exiles into Nepal has been heavily restricted post 2008, when anti-Beijing Olympics protests were held in Nepal. While there are no exact figures, we can get a sense from some numbers: Until 2008, almost 2,200 refugees crossed over into Nepal annually; in 2013, only 171 did. Similarly, in 2015, only 85 refugees applied for an exit permit to India, less than a tenth of the 1,248 who applied in 2010. While Nepali officials often correlate the drop in numbers to rising economic opportunities in Tibet and the ‘declining fervour of the Dalai Lama’, stringent border control measures by both sides – with China aiding Nepali security agencies in kind – have made it more difficult for Tibetans to cross over.

The new Nepal-China agreements over border management and mutual legal assistance practices have raised new fears about further controls over political and cuural expression within the residing Tibetan exile community in Nepal. The deportation of a Tibetan-American in June 2019 also raises new questions about whether Nepal is willing to deport foreign citizens on China’s request. Similarly, if the US decides to refocus on the Tibet question post the new Tibet Policy Support Act, which also assigns funds to Tibetan communities in Nepal, Tibetan exiles may find themselves caught in the global contest between Washington and Beijing. What is certain is that Tibetan exiles will find it extremely difficult to hold any sort of political events in Nepal from hereon.

Nepal’s China dilemma lies in exploring the relationship beyond the current government-to-government ties it is founded on, as well as in expanding its own state control in the Himalayan borderlands, where China has actively started dealing with local authorities to disburse aid.

AGS: In the book, you mention how on the one hand, Nepal longs for the ‘gift of development’ like in nearby Tibet and hopes for prosperity to percolate through its northern borders, but on the other hand, there are various insecurities in Nepal over its asymmetric relationship with China, where mostly Chinese interests and concerns prevail, with Nepal having very little say or bargaining power. Can we call this Nepal’s China dilemma?

ARM: As with any small country-big country dynamic, the Nepal-China relationship is also asymmetric. Nepal’s China dilemma lies in exploring the relationship beyond the current government-to-government ties it is founded on, as well as in expanding its own state control in the Himalayan borderlands, where China has actively started dealing with local authorities to disburse aid. But there is also a dissonance in how the relationship has been shaped by political ties, best seen in Nepal’s official rejection of China’s alleged border encroachment in Humla in September 2020 even before a field inspection had been carried out. Further, Nepal’s limited bargaining power with China continues to be highlighted by repeated closure of the border points at Rasuwagadhi and Tatopani post the Covid-19 pandemic.

Rasuwagadhi border, Nepal. Credit: Amish Mulmi

 

AGS: You have written about how the BRI in Nepal has been making comparatively slower progress than expected, with no large-scale investment flowing in, except for some small, opaque investments restricted to sectors such as tourism. You refer to a conversation between Nepal’s energy minister and the Chinese ambassador, where the former raised this pressing issue (p. 187).  Why is it that despite the hype over China-Nepal camaraderie, China does not make large scale investments in Nepal?


ARM: There are two sides to the story of large Chinese investments in Nepal. The first is Nepal’s own limited capacity to negotiate and execute large deals, which are often beset by political delays and dilemmas. This is best seen in the cancellation of the two mega-hydropower projects of Budhi Gandaki and West Seti, wherein the contracts for both were awarded to Chinese companies, but were eventually cancelled. Further, Nepali economic planners have not been very open to foreign investment either; the minimum threshold for foreign investment in all sectors is NRs. 50 million, which is not practical for all sectors.

The other factor is to enquire about China’s economic ambitions in Nepal—how it views the Nepali market, and whether large-scale investments have the potential to give returns or not. While a few G2G deals, such as the Pokhara international airport, a USD 215 million project that is being funded by a soft loan from the China EXIM Bank and is being built by China CAMC Engineering, are underway, the Chinese private sector has been seen to invest in sectors where returns are possible. One example is the Hongshi-Shivam Cement joint venture between a Chinese and a Nepali company, which is predicated on a construction boom within Nepal; other cement companies have similarly upped production to meet rising demand. This has led to a drastic decline in Nepal’s cement imports.

However, if exports to India’s populous northern market is the goal, India-China bilateral ties play an equal role in determining any investments. For instance, India’s new power import policy says it will not import power from projects that have investments from a third country that borders India, which many have interpreted as targeting Chinese investments in hydropower projects. Similarly, the much-vaunted Tibet-Kathmandu railway is also predicated on getting access to Indian markets, as suggested by a former Chinese ambassador to Nepal, who wrote, ‘It would be insufficient if only China and Nepal can benefit from the China-Nepal railway. It would be best if the railway can connect to India’s railway network. This way, Nepal can become the transit point between the Chinese mainland and the Indian subcontinent.’ [translation mine]

 

AGS: You write about the various expectations that Nepal has from its relationship with China (p.217-218) like rapid economic transformation, capability to rise up to India etc., but also wonder if these match with the Chinese expectations from its relations with Nepal. Is there an expectation mismatch between China and Nepal?

ARM: There is indeed a mismatch in expectations on both sides. For the most part since 2008, China has articulated its goals well in Nepal – even if they haven’t been pronounced publicly. It has engaged the Nepali establishment to restrict Tibetan activities and reduce cross-border movement widely; it has been more publicly visible than in previous years, aligning with its goal of becoming a global power as well as increasing people-to-people contact in its neighbourhood; it has been successful in getting Nepal to align with its views on Tibet, Hong Kong, Xinjiang and the Covid-19 pandemic; and its influence is now visible in regular people’s lives too beyond just the corridors of power, through the rise in Chinese tourists, increasing number of Nepalis studying in China, and with highly visible aid projects such as the Kathmandu Ring Road expansion project.

Nepal’s bilateral ties, not just with the two neighbours but with other nations as well, have hinged on the political leadership’s decision-making skills, which have often fallen short.

But Nepal’s expectations that China would enable (and also fund for the large part) its own infrastructural growth and development projects have been hindered by its own capacity deficits, and the inability to negotiate deals beyond those motivated by political decisions. Nepal’s bilateral ties, not just with the two neighbours but with other nations as well, have hinged on the political leadership’s decision-making skills, which have often fallen short. A recent example has been the failure in procuring Covid-19 vaccines – Kathmandu has not been able to convince Delhi about resuming Covishield exports, despite paying upfront for them; the acquisition process for the Sinopharm vaccines have been mired in difficulties arising out of Nepal’s own procurement rules, and there are reports that Nepal has signed a deal for 4 million doses after signing a non-disclosure agreement about the price. Although China recently stepped in with an additional grant of 1 million doses (in addition to the 800,000 gifted earlier), Nepal is struggling to procure more vaccines from any other country.

Here, the key question is how the Nepali political leadership has come to understand foreign policy goals and ambitions. One instance of how it does so is in the recent change in regulations for appointing ambassadors, who no longer have to be graduates. Further, of the 11 recent ambassadorial appointees, only two were career diplomats, while the rest were political appointees. For example, a retired schoolteacher with familial ties to the prime minister’s foreign relations advisor has been appointed as ambassador to Denmark; in her own words, diplomacy is a ‘new field’ for her.

AGS: Regarding China’s desperate attempts to prevent a split in the NCP [Nepal Communist Party] in the past months, you write, “Nepal’s politics and its politicians are a quagmire. Its leaders play each other and its neighbours constantly in the struggle for power. India had long waded into the puddle, played the game and lost. Now it’s China’s turn,” (pg. 213). How similar or dissimilar are China and India in terms of engagement with Nepal’s internal politics?

ARM: China, till the fall of monarchy, had limited engagements in Nepal, viewing the palace as a permanent establishment in the country. It was after the republic that China began to engage with parliamentary parties, including the Maoists, but only when the latter came above ground (here, one must recall China had not been too pleased with the Maoists during the civil war, calling them ‘bandits’ who besmirched Mao’s name).

India, on the other hand, has engaged widely with Nepali parliamentary parties as well as other arms of the establishment such as the Army since 1950, when a revolution overthrew the autocratic Rana dynasty. India’s perceived support to the Nepali Congress during the latter’s armed insurrection against the monarchy was one of the reasons why the monarchy remained wary of Indian interests in the country. Post-1990, and especially after the 2006 agreement that brought the Maoists to the political mainstream, India’s role in Nepali politics has been continuously affirmed.

India has been familiar with the cacophony of domestic politics in the country, and played its cards well by keeping in mind its interests and engaged with Oli, who has been one of the primary drivers of anti-Indian nationalism in Nepal.

In recent times, however, both India and China have faced setbacks in Nepal – India in 2015, and China in 2020. The 2015 ‘unofficial’ blockade made Delhi extremely unpopular in the country, and together with India’s previous history of supporting an anti-Maoist coalition and what Kathmandu perceived as Delhi’s interference in its constitution-making process, forced the Kathmandu establishment to look towards China to break away from India’s economic monopoly over Nepal.

China, similarly, faced a setback after the split in the NCP despite tremendous investments such as the 2019 state visit by Xi Jinping, establishing fraternal ties between CCP and NCP, and NCP cadre being trained in Xi Jinping Thought. China had perhaps invested all its eggs in the NCP basket, believing Nepali Communists to be the primary political force in the country. However, India picked up the pieces and engaged with Prime Minister (former) K.P. Oli at a time when he was isolated within his party and despite the 2020 Kalapani controversy. [Editor’s note: On July 12, 2021, Nepal’s Supreme Court ruled that President Bindya Devi Bhandari’s decision to dissolve the House of Representatives on K.P.Oli’s recommendation was unlawful and installed Sher Bahadur Duba as the new Prime Minister of Nepal.]

Here, one could suggest that China still had to come to terms with the vagaries of democratic politics, especially in countries like Nepal where no single political force commands widespread support. On the other hand, India has been familiar with the cacophony of domestic politics in the country, and played its cards well by keeping in mind its interests and engaged with Oli, who has been one of the primary drivers of anti-Indian nationalism in Nepal.

 

About the Expert:

Amish Raj Mulmi’s writings have been published in The Himalayan Arc: Journeys East of South East (HarperCollins India, 2018) and Best Asian Speculative Fiction (Kitaab, 2018). He has written for, among others, Al Jazeera, Roads and Kingdoms, Himal Southasia, India Today, The Kathmandu Post and The Record. He is a consulting editor at Writer’s Side Literary Agency, and has previously worked for Juggernaut Books and Hachette India. He is from Pokhara. This is his first book.

 

Header image: China customs station under construction. Credit: Amish Mulmi.

 

The post Nepal’s Turn to China: Opportunities and Challenges first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/nepals-turn-to-china-opportunities-and-challenges/feed/ 0 894629
Partition and Pragmatism in India-Pakistan Relations http://stg.csep.org/blog/partition-and-pragmatism-in-india-pakistan-relations/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=partition-and-pragmatism-in-india-pakistan-relations http://stg.csep.org/blog/partition-and-pragmatism-in-india-pakistan-relations/#respond Thu, 15 Jul 2021 06:42:26 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894574 In Pallavi Raghavan's new book, we find out how a history of India-Pakistan cooperation 70 years ago matters to foreign policy now

The post Partition and Pragmatism in India-Pakistan Relations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars Speak, Constantino Xavier interviews Pallavi Raghavan, Assistant Professor of International Relations at Ashoka University, on her book “Animosity at Bay: An Alternative History of the India–Pakistan Relationship, 1947–1952” published by HarperCollins, 2020.

How does a history of India-Pakistan cooperation seventy years ago matter to foreign policy today? Pallavi Raghavan’s book is anchored in a central, counterintuitive finding: she explains how despite the violent partition of 1947 forged through animosity and war, the two states also worked together, from protecting minorities and evacuee properties to managing cross-border rivers and trade.

Even today, despite extreme rhetoric and a new low in India-Pakistan relations, this history matters: In 2020, Delhi and Islamabad exchanged information on a devastating locust infestation to protect their farmers; their health experts met to cooperate against the COVID-19 pandemic; and their diplomats agreed to establish the cross-border Kartarpur corridor for Sikh pilgrims.

Using a formidable range of new archival materials up to the early 1950s, Dr. Raghavan corrects the biased histories that have portrayed partition as having been driven irrationally by Kashmir, ideology, or religion. Even in a context of political hostility and conflict, her book shows how both sides also engaged in pragmatic dialogue. Indian and Pakistani leaders mobilised different identity groups through inflammatory rhetoric, but their bureaucrats and technocrats cooperated to find policy solutions that were politically acceptable.

“Animosity at Bay” is an invaluable contribution to India’s new diplomatic histories and to understand how the drama of ideological politics can obfuscate the silent scenes of pragmatic policymaking. It also shows how the ghosts of the 1947 partition still shape contemporary South Asia and the multiple national fault lines that fragment the subcontinent.

Constantino Xavier: Your book describes the hostile but also mutually constitutive state-making processes of India and Pakistan in the first years after independence. 75 years later, do you still see both countries depending on each other as a nemesis to foster their distinctiveness? 

Pallavi Raghavan: The mutually constitutive aspect of India-Pakistan relations is a permanent feature: but the question is what direction it takes. What you’ve got with India and Pakistan are two nation-states that are the product of artificially drawn colonial boundary lines; tense equations of centre-province relations because of a weak nation-state project; and two state structures that are attempting to entrench themselves more securely into a complex society, often competing with different, older traditions of governance. In the face of this kind of uncertainty, there will always be a willingness to cooperate if it offers dividends for a more finalised nation-state project; or, conversely, a willingness to raise the rhetoric against the other, if they face more threats to their already fragile existence.

You’ve got two governments that will only cooperate if it gives a stronger face to their own centralising tendencies. Achieving this, as anyone who has looked at the last few years’ worth of headlines will know, is a bloody, bleak, and ultimately deeply unfair project.

But while in the 1950s there was a greater willingness to cooperate in favour of a more imaginative translation of the nation-state project, which was more conciliatory toward a provincially defined identity, I think now this tendency is changing. So you’ve got two governments that will only cooperate if it gives a stronger face to their own centralising tendencies. Achieving this, as anyone who has looked at the last few years’ worth of headlines will know, is a bloody, bleak, and ultimately deeply unfair project.

I also think there is a danger that the ideology of this government poses in thinking about civilisational rather than state-based terms, which affects the nature of decision-making on foreign policy. Many would agree that this government has come closer to pushing these limits than any before. I think the more the sentiment of a ‘Hindu first’ ideology is allowed to drive decision-making in foreign relations, the further the elements of the bargain that was struck in 1947—and 1950—will erode.

 

CX: In parallel to post-independence political tensions and violence, you describe how Indian and Pakistani bureaucrats silently worked in the background to cooperate on cross-border flows, from refugees to water and trade. In the following decades, and even today, why has the manoeuvring space for diplomatic and technocratic engagement reduced?  

PR: I guess to some extent we should remember that the space for manoeuvring on cross-border flows has not entirely disappeared: fields such as water and trade do see a relatively sustained interest in dialogue, even if not always successful. I also think the nature of the environmental and health related crisis to South Asian populations will propel both governments, howsoever unwillingly, into a halting process of cross-border consultation and dialogue.

The argument increasingly offered by the government in the past two decades to reject provincial levels of cross border contact (as, for instance, the case of the oxygen supply to Punjab from Pakistan) is often based on the grounds that the national self-interest is better served if we don’t commit to ad hoc cross-border provincial agreements. In the book, for instance, I argued that it was the engineers of Eastern Punjab who really willed the contours of the agreement forward. Whether they would have the same space for decision-making on the national level at the present moment is less clear. What we’re looking at, therefore, is the diminishing space of the province to offer inputs on cross- border relations. The debates of the 50s are relevant because they help us to probe the question: How and by whom is the national interest constituted, and is this the only way it can be defined? And are other conceptualisations of national interest and security possible, which were relatively more conducive to cross border partnerships and exchange?

CX: Your book leaves out the Kashmir dispute, which you argue has received disproportionate attention in the literature and is overrated as a determinant of India-Pakistan hostility.  Am I right to assume that you see Kashmir more as a symptom of, rather than the primary cause for differences and conflict between both countries?

PR: Well, I would hesitate to go that far: I think the question of Kashmir has provoked many serious differences, and to merely call it a ‘symptom’ of the overall framework of the bilateral relationship reduces its seriousness. But I think a better way of thinking about this is to say that the Kashmir issue is also a symptom of the weaknesses of the nation-state framework in South Asia as a whole. What we’re also seeing in this discussion is a contestation of different people’s versions of what the ideals of nation-statehood ought to be.

The limitations of India’s and Pakistan’s nation-state project is, in a sense, the deeper cause of the Kashmir dispute. What has happened at the current moment is a combination of the challenges of decolonisation—which is that post-colonial states tend to consolidate around their majorities and artificial boundary lines with the help of authoritarian rulers who use the apparatus of the colonial state to their advantage. Secondly, there is a corresponding discarding of old regionalist frameworks when dealing with the challenges of the India-Pakistan question. While what the fifties had reflected in some ways were leaders who were willing to adapt and innovate methods of nation- statehood in South Asia, the 2000s are about losing that attempt at innovation.

What the fifties had reflected in some ways were leaders who were willing to adapt and innovate methods of nation- statehood in South Asia, the 2000s are about losing that attempt at innovation.

CX: You teach at Ashoka University: based on your interactions with your students, how do you observe younger Indians engaging with the history of partition? Is there more pragmatism now to work on regional cooperation and integration in South Asia, or are new generations paradoxically even more emotional and nationalist?

PR: As it happens, this past semester, I taught a course on the Global History of Partition: We compared the experiences of Partition in Ireland, India, and Palestine. This threw up a variety of fascinating questions about the processes by which ‘nation-making’ is done; and how the idea of the nation is, in a sense, manufactured rather than being an immutable, fixed truth.

I think there is a greater willingness and curiosity amongst undergraduate students to probe the myth-making around partition experiences further: to not accept at face value the links that are drawn between the ‘wrongs’ of partition, and the nature of the nation-state today. Instead, they are willing to probe the sleights-of-hand that goes into the shaping of the idea of the nation.

As the scholarship on the historical nature of the shaping of India’s region starts taking on more volume, I think students will examine the worth of regional networks in South Asia further. They will ask, more critically: Has the nation- state framework provided us with sufficient benefits or not? And, given the way in which it’s often conjured on the basis of an artificial equation, should we also examine other, more grounded, stronger frameworks which may be able to provide better answers?

 

CX: There are recent indications of new backchannel discussions and a possible thaw in India-Pakistan relations. Looking back at the 1947-1951 period you studied, what advice would you give to each side today, to increase the prospects of a successful normalisation between both countries?

PR: What made the 1950s more successful as a phase in the India-Pakistan relationship was an attempt at engaging with and accommodating regional identities, rather than their forcible silencing: the latter spells danger, not only to their relationship, but also to what holds together national integration. I’m not denying that this government has made its own attempt at reaching a better equation with Pakistan—the recent ceasefire agreements is a good example of this. But the question to be asked is: with the degree of coerced centralization that is in play these days, a stable outcome of bilateral talks more or less likely?

Obviously, the world that India and Pakistan are looking at the moment seems more divisive than the 1950s: for one thing, the question of the very real dangers posed to the territory of India from China didn’t have to be grappled with in as concrete ways as compared to today; or the exact distribution of the spoils of Afghanistan because of the American withdrawal wasn’t up for discussion in 1949. The ceasefire arrangements of the past couple of months are a clear demonstration that both governments do have the capacity to reach surprising accommodations in the face of threats to the national self- interest.

But I think real normalization comes with a settlement that all stakeholders can say they’ve signed up for. The stable equilibrium that actors in the 50s were seeking with regard to bilateral relations, by finding arrangements that guaranteed the interests of minorities: that kind of balance is conspicuously absent in this government. In a sense, what this also implies is that a broader agenda to the cross- border relationship beyond that or merely ‘security issues’ must be part of the mainstream dialogue. In many ways these kinds of issues were thrashed out in the greatest detail in the aftermath of partition.

 

CX: Your book is based on new archival materials. Looking at those historical sources, as well as other methodologies, what other aspects of India-Pakistan relations deserve closer study today?

PR: This is an exciting time to be engaged in the history of South Asia’s internationalist history, which has thrown up a wealth of brilliant insights about how and why an archivally grounded study of decision- making in South Asia leads to a slightly differentiated diagnoses of its international relations that what would have otherwise been the case. One particularly exciting new area of interest in South Asia’s diplomatic history is the analysis of how the mix of the personal, with the ideological, and structural, shapes the making of different world-views, and their contribution to the shaping of India’s internationalist thinking: Vineet Thakur’s new book is an excellent example of this.

I’ve also found it useful to engage with the wealth of exciting new research into the contingencies in the process of border making, and the differences in the meanings they acquire for imperial and post- colonial governments. Good examples of this also include Sanjib Baruah’s recent book about the interconnections between the ‘frontier’ identity of the North East, and the making of the Indian nation-state; and the work of Elisabeth Leake, and Martin Bayly. Lastly, I also think it’s important to have a clear understanding of how and why different provincial actors have a stake in shaping the relationship; indeed, the relationship can even be a product of provincial identities, rather than national ones. For example, Ilyas Chatta’s book on cross-border trade in Punjab, or Uttara Shahani’s work on Sindhi linguistic movements would provide us with greater insights into the elements that constitute the relationship. I think they serve to further flesh out the question: what exactly does the ‘national’ consist of, and why?

 

Pallavi Raghavan is Assistant Professor of International Relations at Ashoka University. Her book, ‘Animosity at Bay: An Alternative History of the India- Pakistan Relationship’ was published in 2020.

Email: pallavi.raghavan@ashoka.edu.in

 

 

The post Partition and Pragmatism in India-Pakistan Relations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/partition-and-pragmatism-in-india-pakistan-relations/feed/ 0 894574
In India-Bhutan Borderlands, An Informal Exchange Rate System Thrives http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-india-bhutan-borderlands-an-informal-exchange-rate-system-thrives/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=in-india-bhutan-borderlands-an-informal-exchange-rate-system-thrives http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-india-bhutan-borderlands-an-informal-exchange-rate-system-thrives/#respond Mon, 14 Jun 2021 07:20:40 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894414 In this edition, Saneet Chakradeo interviews Ankur Sharma on the parallel currency market in India-Bhutan borderlands

The post In India-Bhutan Borderlands, An Informal Exchange Rate System Thrives first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of Sambandh Scholars SpeakSaneet Chakradeo interviews Ankur Sharma, PhD scholar in International Relations at South Asian University, on his article “Analysis of a Parallel Informal Exchange Rate System in Indo-Bhutanese Border Towns,” published in the Journal of Borderland Studies, 2019.   

According to the International Monetary Fund (IMF), nine countries currently maintain an exchange rate anchored to a single currency other than the US Dollar and the Euro. Five of these have conventional pegged arrangements: three with the South African Rand (SAR: Eswatini, Lesotho, and Namibia) and two with the Indian Rupee (INR: Bhutan and Nepal). 

While Bhutan and Nepal follow a fixed exchange rate system with India, multiple reports have pointed to the existence of an informal system, primarily based on market values, in the border towns of India and its two northern neighbours.  

In his article, Ankur Sharma studies this informal currency exchange rate system and the underlying dynamics of its coexistence with the official market rate in the borderland regions of India and Bhutan.  Through fieldwork in the towns of Jaigaon, India and Phuentsholing, Bhutan, he uses a unique “Narrative Analysis” methodology to understand the reasons for the existence of this parallel informal system.  

As per the author, the reasons to use this methodology were manifold. While quantitative analysis is a preferred research method in economics, it is restricted by the confidentiality of transactions in the parallel market and the absence of reliable data. Additionally, parallel currency markets generally involve several intermediaries who are physically present in the market on a daily basis, making the actual size of the market difficult to determineConsequently, interviewing stakeholders – traders, merchants, and residents in the border towns – was the only means available for establishing causation, particularly due to the lack of reliable alternative sources. 

The article takes an important step towards a comparative analysis of border towns by studying the South Asian region in contrast to the previous studies on similar systems of coexisting currency markets in the border towns of South Africa and its neighbours. It proposes a replicable methodology to undertake similar studies that can enhance our understanding of informal exchange rate systems, especially in South Asia.

Saneet Chakradeo: In your article, you explain how the Indian Rupee and the South African Rand are used as currency pegs by the two countries’ respective neighbours. What explains the presence of parallel informal exchange rate systems in border-towns of India and its neighbours, but not in South Africa’s neighbourhood 

Ankur Sharma: India has followed a bilateral format of currency arrangements with Bhutan and with Nepal, while the Southern African countries have engaged in a multilateral format. Eswatini, Lesotho, and Namibia have pegged their currency to the South African Rand and these four countries are also members of Common Monetary Area (CMA). The policies of the CMA and their evolution over decades is what differentiates the situation in Southern Africa from the Indian neighbourhood. Research within the field of economics provides several causative factors which lead to parallel informal currency exchange markets. While these factors have been mitigated by the policies of the CMA in Southern Africa, they continue to prevail in the Indo-Bhutanese scenario. 

A transaction without a commission forms an inconsequential parallel currency exchange system with a 1:1 exchange rate. However, it is when a commission is taken that an informal parallel exchange rate is formed. The primary reason for its existence is the acceptance of the Bhutanese Ngultrum (BTN) by Indian traders and their inability to legally convert it into Indian Rupees within India. This allows for the space to be filled by unauthorised commission-based exchange agents as seen recently, when the Jaigaon Police seized around INR 9.10 Lakh (around USD 12,500) from just one local pan shop owner who was engaged in an INR-BTN exchange.  

 Official currency exchange counters have been a major demand of local traders especially in Jaigaon, a facility which is easily available in South African border regionsThe South African neighbourhood is not marked by the complete absence of such activities, but it differs in its scale when contrasted with the Indian neighbourhood. Nonetheless, the Bhutanese government and India House (Indian Embassy in Bhutan) have been receptive to the grievances of borderland citizens, and the Bhutanese government, in particular, has been proactive in assisting Indian traders with their currency conversion needs.  

SC: The article mentions the idea of fronting, referred to in an interviewee to describe currency swap transactions of the Bhutanese Ngultrum and the Indian Rupee in the Indo-Bhutanese border towns. What exactly is fronting and what is its causal relationship with informal exchange rates in border towns? 

AS: I personally became aware of ‘fronting’ during the initial research work for this article and it was the interaction with the borderland population during my fieldwork that helped me understand its role in borderland towns and their currency exchange markets. The interviewee had defined fronting as a process, whereby, a Bhutanese who has a license to operate a business in Bhutan and an Indian who seeks to invest and/or operate a business in Bhutan, collude by having the license holder illegally lease the license to the investor for a commission, thereby acting as their “front”.  Fronting as an illegal activity generates earnings mainly in BTN, which is then routed through informal markets located in the border towns and exchanged into INR. The commission of the agents and this cross flow of currency forms a parallel exchange rate system in which the value of INR is mostly appreciated over BTN.  

However, after the article was published in 2019, there have been a few developments. The Bhutanese parliament has now included fronting within the penal code, whereby if it takes place between a Bhutanese and a non-Bhutanese individual, it will be graded as a felony of fourth-degree. This was in response to recommendations from The National Council’s Legislative Committee in Bhutan, who were alarmed by the widespread nature of fronting in the border towns and its spread to other parts of Bhutan. Fronting became further evident during the Covid-19 pandemic when the border between India and Bhutan was closed. This caused most of the shops and businesses in Phuentsholing that were illegally operated by Indians to remain closed while Bhutanese operated shops remained open. 

 

The Jaigaon-Phuentsholing border market area. Credit: Ankur Sharma

The Jaigaon-Phuentsholing border market area. Credit: Ankur Sharma

 

SC: You begin your introduction to the parallel informal exchange rate system citing the case of the India-Nepal border as well but go on to focus on the Indo-Bhutan borderlands. Can the inferences from your study be applied to India-Nepal and other border areas?   

AS: The Indian Rupee and the Nepali Rupee are pegged at 1:1.60 since 1993. There are numerous newspaper reports that confirm the existence of informal variations in the exchange rate occurring within the Indo-Nepal borderlands.  

believe further studies are required to engage with this topicwhich would either substantiate or contradict the causal inferences I have asserted in the article. Each causal inference is specific to the Indo-Bhutan borderlands, and once the inferences are corroborated through similar cases, the inferences could be considered as causal mechanisms that are representative of other borderlands. 

I do recommend South Asian policy makers and scholars to reflect on the study and engage in comparative research with works from Southern and Western African borderland regions. As I also mention in the article, a comparative study of Indian and South African borderlands and their currency markets is a potential step forward. 

SC: Based on your fieldwork in the India-Bhutan borderlands, is there anything in particular, that struck you as interesting and warranted further research? 

The Jaigaon-Phuentsholing route was considered not to have much commercial importance, yet that same route today is seen as the gateway to Bhutan and handles the bulk of the trade between the two countries. 

ASArchival research about the Indo-Bhutanese borderland is definitely something that can add value to scholarship on the topic. Current literature on Indo-Bhutanese border that utilises archival sources is primarily focused on two aspects – tracing the historical cartographic processes undertaken by the British while finalising the border and analysing security related issues post the Doklam crisis. However, it is the people’s history, a ‘spatial turn’ that centers the borderland population, which requires a deep dive into the archives. It is an under-researched topic, especially when compared to similar work on India’s borders with PakistanBangladesh, and Myanmar. 

A declassified document from the Ministry of External Affairs historical division disclosed that Bhutan requested India to cede some areas in Jaigaon in the early 1970s, as it considered the shanty town which has mushroomed in neighbouring Jaigaon as an eyesore and a risk from the point of view of law and order. India, however, politely declined the request. As per earlier government sources, the Jaigaon-Phuentsholing route was considered not to have much commercial importance, yet that same route today is seen as the gateway to Bhutan and handles the bulk of the trade between the two countries. Substantial credit for this is owed to the small but robust Marwari business community in Jaigaon. This unique history of the Indo-Bhutanese borderland that utilises Indian and Bhutanese archives and engages with contemporary narratives will be compelling to study in the future.    

 (Photo credits for all images: Ankur Sharma)

About the Expert

Ankur Sharma is pursuing his Doctorate from the Department of International Relations, South Asian University, New Delhi. He is undertaking research on the interaction and the future trajectories among South Asian border towns. He is currently a researcher with the Border Studies in South Asia initiative. He is a co-recipient of the Dr. Ambedkar Award from the Ministry of Social Justice & Empowerment. He can be reached at ace292@gmail.com and at @SincerelyAnkur on twitter. 

 

The post In India-Bhutan Borderlands, An Informal Exchange Rate System Thrives first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/in-india-bhutan-borderlands-an-informal-exchange-rate-system-thrives/feed/ 0 894414
Partitions and the Periphery: India, Burma, and Patkai borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/partitions-and-the-periphery-india-burma-and-patkai-borderlands/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=partitions-and-the-periphery-india-burma-and-patkai-borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/partitions-and-the-periphery-india-burma-and-patkai-borderlands/#respond Thu, 27 May 2021 11:11:51 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894367 In this edition, Nitika Nayar interviews Bérénice Guyot-Réchard on her recent work on India and Burma's 'unfinished partition'.

The post Partitions and the Periphery: India, Burma, and Patkai borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Nitika Nayar interviews Bérénice Guyot-Réchard, Associate Professor in Contemporary International History at King’s College London on her article, “Tangled Lands: Burma and India’s Unfinished Separation, 1937–1948,” published in the Journal of Asian Studies (2020).

Partitions in South Asia have long suffered from the perils of centralised, monolithic policies, fixated on defence and security. Post the February 1 military coup in Myanmar and the ensuing security crackdown, India’s northeastern states have seen an influx of Burmese refugees. This demonstrates how transnational communities living in the borderlands are resilient to nation-state driven conceptions that were employed to separate India and Burma in the wake of independence.

In view of this, Guyot-Réchard’s research sheds light on how the top-down approach to a seemingly self-evident partition between India and Burma discounted its implications for the marginalised Naga, Zo, and Kachin communities inhabiting the Patkai borderlands.

The Patkai borderlands were a ‘fluid, connected’ (p 3) transnational geographical space with a ‘diverse human landscape’ (p 2) strategically positioned between India, Burma, Tibet, and China. Their untraversed geography, coupled with dynamic ethnographic flows, complicated the settlement of a boundary between India and Burma. Historically, the region was relegated to an inconvenient territorial patchwork in the India-Burma division of 1937. It was galvanized into a military front line between the Allies and invading Japanese forces in 1942 during the Second World War, and subsequently perceived as an important buffer zone against Chinese expansionism. The protracted attempts to delimit this region were further exacerbated by the competing self-interests of the colonial officials at the centre and frontiers, as well as the expansionist ambitions and administrative concerns of the interim governments in Delhi and Rangoon and their provincial counterparts.

Guyot-Réchard delves into regional archives to bring to the fore the various boundary proposals and correspondences that transpired between various actors. The article makes a compelling case to account for the historically erased experiences of local inhabitants in these borderlands.

The recent refugee influx in India shows how notwithstanding the grand imperialist experiment of delimiting their homeland, cross-border familial and ethnic ties in the Patkai continue to prevail long after the partition between India and Burma. While New Delhi has been insistent on deporting the refugees, border states such as Mizoram have offered support, exposing the dichotomy between a top-down imposition of boundaries and the experiences of those living in borderlands.

At this juncture, a decentralised and inclusive approach to the region and its history is crucial. This is particularly relevant as New Delhi seeks to leverage the Northeast as a strategic conduit of connectivity with Myanmar and Southeast Asia under the ‘Act East’ policy. Revisiting the India-Burma partition from the lens of the those living in the periphery and extricating their narratives from historical amnesia, is therefore a fundamental step forward.

Nitika Nayar: Your article disputes the nation-state driven logic of the Patkai partition between India and Burma from the 1930s onwards. For local inhabitants, this unleashed an “unfinished and pain-ridden separation,” (p. 3) which you also describe as an “imposition” (p. 5). But you also describe Indian and British lines of thinking that pushed for a bottom-up, consultative process involving the Nagas and other Patkai groups. How did these proposals for a more flexible India-Burma border look like, and are they relevant today?

Bérénice Guyot-Réchard: In 1944-45, at the end of the Second World War, colonial frontier officials met to discuss what to do with the borderlands straddling India and Burma: the Patkai highlands. Divided piecemeal during the British Empire’s expansion, the region was a hodgepodge of administrative jurisdictions. Officials had always found it hard to manage it. Its borders were unclear and administration, problematic. More importantly, the Patkai was home to a variety of people—Zos, Nagas, Kachins, for instance—with strong connections with one another. Colonial boundaries marginalised them and pulled them apart from one another.

Why do I resurrect these forgotten boundary proposals? Because they remind us that there’s nothing natural about the division between India and Burma.

With the Allies hurtling towards victory, and India and Burma towards independence, frontier officials decided to make the Patkai’s map look right, so to speak. They proposed re-arranging its political configuration to bring each tribe (as they called local communities) under a single administration. Some favoured keeping the region as a single unit under the British Crown; the majority proposed some form of ties between the Patkai and India.

These new proposals took the Zos, Kachins, or Nagas’ lives and connections into account. But let’s not mistake them as a project that would give people control over their destiny in the era of decolonisation. Frontier officials advocating this administrative and boundary shake-up thought they were acting in the interests of the Patkai’s inhabitants; yet, they did so in a paternalistic way that reduced them to people too “primitive” (read, “innocent”) to speak for themselves. In any case, from the colonial authorities’ standpoint, the bigger issue was how to consolidate the Patkai into a buffer protecting India from a resurgent China. By and large, people were not consulted, let alone treated as the primary stakeholders—yet there were, in some areas at least, intense political mobilisations and discussions around a post-colonial future among the inhabitants.

Why do I resurrect these forgotten boundary proposals? Because they remind us that there’s nothing natural about the division between India and Burma. No matter how problematic the proposals were, they uncover the violence that came with the imposition of national borders during decolonisation—especially for places like borderlands, which are often the home of minority people.

That said, I’m doubtful that these plans for the Paktai would have solved anything, in and of themselves. You mention “a more flexible” India-Burma border in your question, but that is precisely what colonial officials in 1944-45 didn’t consider. The goal was to change the location of the border, partly by acknowledging ethnic configurations…but mostly to make it more efficient for the state’s enterprise. These frontier officials thought that the Patkai’s “very silly boundaries” (as one of them called them) could be fixed by finding the “right location” for them. They didn’t see that the very idea of a border as a fixed, dividing line was the problem. The violence and suffering Naga, Kachin, or Zo people have experienced since is partly due to this blindness. In that sense, the relevance of these old proposals lies not with their specific suggestions, but in reminding us of the limits of territorial, border-centric thinking.

NN: Your article reveals the complex human landscape of Patkai’s transnational borderlands, partitioned between two newly created independent nations. The current violence at the border between Assam and Mizoram, or the continued demands to partition Manipur show how delimitation in India’s Northeast remains a contentious issue also at the domestic level. What lessons does the Patkai partition hold for today’s internal border delineation attempts?

BGR: When we talk of “partition” we think of the creation of India and Pakistan, and secondarily of the fate of Punjab and Bengal. But Assam too (to use a shorthand for the north-eastern parts of India in 1947) was partitioned. In fact, it was partitioned repeatedly. First with Sylhet’s so-called “transfer” to East Pakistan, then, over the 1960s and 1970s, with the creation of Nagaland, Meghalaya, Mizoram, and Arunachal Pradesh.

No other part of India has experienced partition more often, in recent times, than what we now call the Northeast. Time and again, the Brahmaputra Valley and the surrounding highlands have been subjected to attempts to “right-size” them— socially, territorially, and politically. Creating new territorial entities (not just new states, but also autonomous districts) is a way to protect the Indian state’s perceived security interests. The goal is to placate demands for change, notably by co-opting restive local elites.

No other part of India has experienced partition more often, in recent times, than what we now call the Northeast. Time and again, the Brahmaputra Valley and the surrounding highlands have been subjected to attempts to “right-size” them— socially, territorially, and politically.

So, the “Northeast” we see on the map was not just created through multiple divisions; it is the very manifestation of partition as a process. In South Asia at least, this logic becomes self-fulfilling: as an attempt to fix deep-rooted political, identity, and socio-economic issues, partition ends up creating the conditions of its own reproduction.

Hence the recurring tensions we’re witnessing among and within Indian states in the Northeast. Arunachal, Assam, Manipur, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland, and Tripura may be nicknamed the “Seven Sisters”, but their policemen are capable of shooting the inhabitants of a neighbouring state, and people in Assam of blocking all access to Arunachal (as happened in 2014 for instance), all in the name of retaliating against “encroachment”. Meanwhile, there are calls for yet more states to be carved out from the Northeast, from Bodoland to eastern Nagaland. That’s not necessarily because there is a strong, popular demand for them, but because creating new political entities has become the overarching logic by which state-society relations operate in this part of India.

But we need to look across the international border, at Myanmar, as well. The military coup and brutal crackdown that’s happened on the other side of the Patkai have once again put many people on the move in these borderlands, desperate for safety. From Delhi’s perspective, they are refugees who might create problems for India-Burma relations. But from the standpoint of Mizo people, for instance, the Chins finding refuge in Mizoram are kin, but kin that have been left estranged by a colonial/post-colonial border. The Patkai’s upheavals remind us that partition is a self-generative process—and that ways of thinking that privilege territory at the expense of people in the end risk running into a self-defeating circle.

NN: In another article, you recount in great detail the Patkai’s political and socio-economic transformation as a key front line during the Second World War. One lasting outcome was the construction of the Ledo (Stillwell) Road connecting India to Burma and Kunming, in China. Today, India’s concerns about China are, once again, driving investments in the borderlands to increase connectivity with Myanmar and Southeast Asia. Can we say that the development of the Patkai borderlands has been a function of New Delhi’s national security and strategic concerns?

BGR: Yes, and this way of thinking has shaped Delhi’s engagement with north-eastern India since independence. The region is simultaneously seen as the “sentinel of the nation”, protecting India from invasion from the east (in classic buffer fashion), but also as a weak link through which subversion could occur. Note, by the way, that the very name of “Northeast” is just a direction, not a word with local historical and cultural meaning.

The language of national security and strategy is also deployed by state governments, from Assam to Tripura, to induce Delhi to grant them a bigger budget and other forms of support. Already in 1950, when Bishnuram Medhi, Assam’s Chief Minister, was petitioning Delhi to dispense his state from welcoming Bengali refugees, he presented them as a national security risk and Assam as India’s security bulwark.

One thing has changed: today’s strategic concerns are just as much about trade opportunities as about military threats. The Ledo Road, built with so much loss of life it was nicknamed A Man A Mile Road, fell into disrepair shortly after the Second World War ended in the China-India-Burma Theatre. For good reason: independent India did not see it, or these borderlands generally, as a link to China, Tibet, and Burma (this was largely due to sheer ignorance of the region and its history). Instead, Nehru and his Cabinet saw the Ledo Road as a conduit for all sorts of threats, from Chinese military invasion to infiltration by Burma-based Communists to smuggled weapons and drugs. Here lies the whole dilemma with roads: they provide access, but to all sorts of things, good and bad.

Today, however, ‘geo-economics’ are just as big as geopolitics. The world’s economic centre of gravity is shifting east, in no small part because of East and Southeast Asia’s booming economies. The Northeast’s historical role as a transregional hub between India, China, Tibet, and Southeast Asia is re-emerging. Would India benefit from embracing that dimension of the region, which was long buried by the effects of partition, the imposition of national borders, and violence? Or would the building of roads intensify internal and external threats?

Delhi continues to hesitate, I think. And this is why, in part, we have yet to see grandiose plans for an India-Myanmar-Thai Highway come to life. But even if they materialise, treating the India-China-Burma borderlands primarily as “on the way to” other places, rather than as places in their own right, whose inhabitants have their own history, needs and aspirations, can only end badly.

Treating the India-China-Burma borderlands primarily as “on the way to” other places, rather than as places in their own right, whose inhabitants have their own history, needs and aspirations, can only end badly.

NN: In contrast to India and Pakistan, why have South Asia’s other partitions received such limited attention in scholarship?

BGR: There are multiple reasons for this. First, the partition of Bengal and Punjab dwarfs the others in the size of the territory divided up, the slapdash drawing of the border, and the scale of the migration, violence, and trauma it generated. The “further shores of partition”, from regions like Sindh that experienced their own traumatic forms of displacement to less directly affected ones like the South of India, have largely been afterthoughts, until relatively recently (see Ansari, 2005;  Shahani, 2021).

The other problem is that our mental maps act as a straitjacket. Today, we treat India/South Asia and Southeast Asia as separate, neatly delimited, culturally distinct entities. We forget how intertwined they were, not only in regions like the Patkai but through oceanic spaces like the Bay of Bengal. It’s only recently that scholars have started asking, “can we think of the imposition of exclusive citizenship regimes or migration control between India, Burma and Malaya, following independence, as processes of partition in their own right?” To study disruption, dislocation, or partition, and dis-integration, we first need to see space and place differently (see Amrith, 2015).

Finally, in the case of the India-Burma border, our inattention to its repeated partitions is linked to the Patkai’s marginalisation within India and Myanmar’s public life, and the scholarship written about these two countries. All this to say, there’s so much more to do!

NN: As India renews its focus on promoting connectivity in the region, what, according to you, are the other unexplored, historical dimensions of the India-Myanmar border worth examining?

BGR: I hope that research on the Northeast will not just be driven by current-day concerns, especially if these concerns are determined by the Indian or Burmese centre. Otherwise, the “otherisation” and marginalisation of the India-Burma borderlands will continue.

I’m convinced there’s far more to do to recover the experiences of the Second World War in the Patkai and to study how that war bled into later conflicts in the region, notably with the Indian and Burmese centre. (This is where the battles of Imphal and Kohima took place, after all.) We also need more accounts of how the Patkai’s diverse people approached decolonisation, independence, partition, and the transition to post-colonial, national borders. I’ve attempted this in my own work and others have done so too. Jangkhomang Guite, Joy Pachuau, Mandy Sadan and Lydia Walker are only a few of them. (I also want to mention Bianca Son-Suantak, who had shown the way with her history of the Zo people before her untimely death.) But this is just a start. The most exciting thing is that there are new generations of scholars from the Northeast and in the Northeast—with linguistic skills, cultural awareness, and local engagement I can only dream of— who are pushing for it (see Guite, 2010; Son-Doerschel, 2013; Sadan, 2013; Pachuau, 2014; and Walker, 2019).

It may well get harder to do research in Burmese archives after the Myanmar coup, but that shouldn’t stop us. Writing “deep” histories of these borderlands, histories centred on its people, is essential. We live in a time where the oppression of minorities in the region, from the Chakmas to the Rohingyas, is enabled by manipulations of the past that benefit from scant historical research. Historians have a real responsibility here.

NN: You observe that both London and New Delhi generally agreed that “India’s security required a strong, united Patkai as a buffer against China.” (p. 9) What is the historical track record of buffer zones or states in preventing or managing inter-state conflict in the region you studied, in the Himalayas? Is this line of thought outdated today?

BGR: First, we need to recognise the colonial baggage that the words “buffer” or “cordon sanitaire” carry. These concepts were central to the way British Indian authorities understood space, and how they sought to control it in order to keep India under control. Afghanistan (which didn’t have control over its foreign affairs between the late nineteenth century and 1919) or Tibet (whose autonomy from Qing China the British encouraged, even as they kept it isolated) are examples of that.

That imperial logic of the buffer may have worked for a time, but I’d argue it held within it the seeds of its own destruction. Despite attempts to gain international recognition, forge diplomatic relations, and reform internally, Dalai Lama-ruled Tibet ended up woefully unprepared and diplomatically isolated when Communist China launched its annexation drive in 1949.

Tibet also shows the destructive nature of “buffer thinking” for the people who inhabit these places. To speak of a buffer is to effect one of the most immediate, sweeping acts of erasure; it creates a space not just out of place, but out of time, whose people are at best silhouettes, at worst invisible. This is very clear with Arunachal Pradesh. Its people might as well be ghosts when one reads standard accounts of Sino-Indian conflict.

So, whatever angle you take, it seems to me that the idea of buffer needs to change. My conviction is that the solution lies in recognising the fundamental reality of the India-Burma (and China) borderlands as places that people call home. At a time of climate change, when these very borderlands host some of our greatest hopes—large water resources, huge levels of biodiversity, indigenous forms of knowledge on the environment and sustainability—but also the risks associated with them, doing so seems more essential than ever.

My conviction is that the solution lies in recognising the fundamental reality of the India-Burma (and China) borderlands as places that people call home.

NN: Going beyond the National Archives of India, your research also explores the uncharted records in north-eastern states such as Arunachal Pradesh. How significant are these regional archives to debunk our conventional understanding of these borderlands?

BGR: They are crucial. Not that there’s nothing to be found in Delhi or Yangon. A lot of their documents have yet to be mined. But researching borderlands solely through centrally held archives poses multiple problems. First, there’s the issue of optics. For a century and a half at least, the Himalayas and the Patkai have been looked at from the outside, as objects of central surveillance, control, or charity. Bypassing regional archives risks furthering this tradition.

It also makes us less capable, as historians, of understanding dynamics specific to these regions (or indeed driven by them), weakening our grasp of the complex interplay of centre-region dynamics. The study of Sino-Indian relations is a case in point. Reams of books and articles have been published on why China and India went to war in 1962. My work in the archives of Arunachal Pradesh revealed, contrary to conventional wisdom, that the conflict stemmed just as much from China and India’s contest for authority and legitimacy over Himalayan people as from military one-upmanship. And this contest had much to do with borderlanders’ own actions, and the relative bargaining power they had vis-a-vis Indian and Chinese officials (see Guyot-Réchard, 2017).

The treasure trove I found in the Arunachal Pradesh State Archives is not an exception, by the way. The Northeast’s archives, both governmental and private, hold reams of material that would benefit from study. True, they can be poorly catalogued and breaking into pieces. But local archivists are doing a tremendous effort, often with little support from above or recognition from the scholarly community, to preserve them and enable their consultation. I especially want to mention the work of Kime Ampi and Nani Soli at the Arunachal Pradesh State Archives Itanagar, and the team once led by Jishnu Baruah at the Assam States Archives. Shadow States and my other work certainly couldn’t have seen the light of day without their expertise and generosity.

I want to end on this: we need more histories about the Northeast told from the Northeast. This starts with regional archives (including private ones, even more starved for funds and flying under the radar, like the Nanda Talukdar Library in Guwahati or the visual material gathered by Joy Pachchuau and Willem van Schendel for their wonderful book, The Camera as Witness). But it also means nurturing, training, funding, and enabling new generations of historians from the Northeast itself.

About the Expert

Bérénice Guyot-Réchard is a historian of South Asia and the Indian Ocean and is currently Associate Professor in contemporary international history at King’s College London. Her work focuses on the legacies of decolonisation on the world as we know it today, particularly in terms of international politics. She has written extensively on Sino-Indian relations and on the strategic borderlands between India, Tibet and Burma, most notably in Shadow States: India, China and the Himalayas, 1910-62 (Cambridge University Press, 2016). She is currently working on the geopolitics of the Indian Ocean since 1945 and on post-colonial India’s practice and imagination of diplomacy, while retaining her foothold in the Patkai and the Himalayas. Email: berenice.guyotrechard@kcl.ac.uk

 

 

 

 

The post Partitions and the Periphery: India, Burma, and Patkai borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/partitions-and-the-periphery-india-burma-and-patkai-borderlands/feed/ 0 894367
Upstream-downstream politics: South Asia’s water discourse http://stg.csep.org/blog/upstream-downstream-politics-south-asias-water-discourse/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=upstream-downstream-politics-south-asias-water-discourse http://stg.csep.org/blog/upstream-downstream-politics-south-asias-water-discourse/#respond Mon, 17 May 2021 08:44:19 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894341 In this edition, we interview Sunil Amrith on his book Unruly Waters: How Mountain Rivers and Monsoons Have Shaped South Asia’s History.

The post Upstream-downstream politics: South Asia’s water discourse first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Riya Sinha interviews Sunil Amrith on his book Unruly Waters: How Mountain Rivers and Monsoons Have Shaped South Asia’s History, first published in December 2018.

Compared to identity politics, water as a source of geopolitical tension in South Asia has received scant attention. On the one hand, the Indus Water Sharing Treaty (1960, India-Pakistan) and the Ganges Water Sharing Treaty (1996, India-Bangladesh) are examples of sustained water cooperation in the region; on the other, treaties such as the one concerning Teesta River and Feni River (India-Bangladesh) remain to be concluded despite decades of discussions. During the recent Prime Ministerial-level talks between India and Bangladesh, while both countries were able to move forward on matters of trade and connectivity, no conclusion could be reached on water-sharing agreements.

Ten Himalayan rivers sustain one-fifth of the global population across the Indian subcontinent and China. These ten rivers are the Tarim, the Amu Darya, the Indus, the Irrawaddy, the Salween, the Mekong, the Yangzi, the Yellow River, the Ganges, and the Brahmaputra. Water has connected civilisations and impacted culture and politics in the region, leading to attempts over its control and management.

In Unruly Waters, Amrith turns to history to highlight South Asia’s vulnerability to climate change. He places water at the heart of cultural and political transformations in India, arguing that the demographic weight of India and China is an outcome of the control of water rather than a fact of nature (p 5). He departs from the traditional view of water as a resource and highlights the effects of institutions, technologies, and economic pressures on water. Even as the book offers readers a history of water management in different eras, it emphasises that water control can never be purely technical or scientific, or done through one national model. Local histories and culture, too, play an important role in facilitating our understanding of the climate and mountains that shape Asia.

The book is extensively researched and based on archives collected from the United Kingdom, World Bank Group, and the national and state archives in India. It places the reader between the past and the future, necessitating a deeper inspection of how an unequitable and unsustainable race towards constructing water control infrastructure in the Himalayas can leave millions vulnerable.

Riya Sinha: To think of Asia as an ‘integrated climatic system’ (p 108) is to provide an alternative understanding of connectivity in the region. Do you think that due to a higher focus on physical border infrastructure, such as fences, roads, railways etc., states have overlooked the impact of water on regional connectivity?

Sunil Amrith: I think the key to the paradox in your question lies in the fact that the kind of regional connectivity that water provides, has not been the kind of connectivity that modern states and economies rely on—that is to say regular, predictable, and ordered connectivity. British colonial officials and Indian engineers alike saw South Asia’s climate and its rivers as untamed and somehow “wild” (hence the title of my book, “Unruly Waters”). What followed, especially from the late nineteenth century, was a long quest to try to bring water under orderly control through a programme of massive infrastructural engineering.

Yet there always remain important ways in which water connects. One is imaginative: rivers, and the monsoon itself, have long been central to the fabric of people’s spiritual geographies, or the ways they imagine how distant places are connected. These imaginations may—though they do not always—transcend borders. Another way that water connects, especially in an era of accelerating climate change, is through shared risk. At a moment when a sense of solidarity and regional cooperation are vital in the face of environmental crisis, it may be helpful to remember both of these aspects of connectivity

Taking a long-term view, I think we can see there has been a century-long tug between the confidence that water could be brought under control by infrastructure, and a sense—expressed by environmentalists, of course, but even by more cautious engineers and planners—that this is bound to be a losing battle; or at least that “victory” would have many unwanted consequences.

RS: In John Eliot’s Climatological Atlas for India (1906) the maps were limited to British India, despite acknowledgement of the oceanic and inter-continental linkages in climate change. How do such colonial limitations of record-keeping affect the way we think about connectivity in the subcontinent today?

SA: There were two key motivations for the development of climate science in India in the nineteenth century. The first was imperative to understand, and ideally to forecast, extreme weather—especially cyclones. A lot of this was connected with the interests of shipping, in an era when India’s exports were commercially vital to British power. A lot of the earliest data through which scientists began to piece together the patterns of the monsoon were ship’s logs. The second imperative, which grew more urgent as the British colonial state intervened ever more in Indian agriculture, was the need to understand longer-term patterns of average rainfall, the average dates of monsoon onset, and the periodicity of drought. After the massive famines of the 1870s and 1890s, the latter concern prevailed, particularly as steam ships, which began to dominate through those same decades, were less dependent than sailing ships on the winds, and more able to withstand storms.

Telegraphic communication allowed British meteorologists to begin to track storms in “real time,” as we would say now. And the maps of these storms were truly trans-regional, linking the Bay of Bengal with the South China Sea. However, the search for the patterns and regularity of India’s climate—as in Eliot’s atlas—focused much more on the Indian subcontinent as a bounded region. Remember that this took place alongside a whole raft of other changes, all of which cemented the idea of India as a bounded territory and economy (Manu Goswami wrote an excellent book on this called Producing India)—these changes included the infrastructure of the railway, and the colonial government’s statistic apparatus.

I think here, again, we are faced with a paradox: on the one hand, colonial record-keeping allowed, for the first time, the scale of climatic connections to emerge, and the early work of British Indian meteorologists played an important role in the eventual discovery of the El Nino phenomenon (which happened in the 1960s). On the other hand, the colonial state’s way of gathering data also made India appear, more and more, as a self-contained territory, losing sight of those interconnections.

RS: In Chapter 4, you refer to William Hunter’s observation that ‘natural frontiers became synonymous with the security of the realm’ (p 111). Furthermore, you highlight that the ‘data concerning the hydraulics of the Himalayan rivers are a closely guarded secret” (p 321). Compared to other regions globally, why is water treated as a security issue in South Asia rather than a facilitator of connectivity?

Partition divided both of India’s great river basins, the Indus and the Ganga, and so control over water has—from the outset, in 1947—been seen in relation to national sovereignty.

SA: I think a lot of the answer lies in geopolitics. India was central to British power in the world, and in the nineteenth century the colonial state was obsessed with (real or imagined) threats to British primacy in India—in particular from the Russians overland, but also from other European powers at sea. Hunter and others saw water as a strategically important resource. The security-oriented view of water, which you identify in your question, dates back from that moment in the 1870s or 1880s. But I think this was hugely intensified by Partition, and more broadly by the contested borders of the postcolonial settlement across Asia. Partition divided both of India’s great river basins, the Indus and the Ganga, and so control over water has—from the outset, in 1947—been seen in relation to national sovereignty. The Indus Treaty, signed in 1960, has attempted to hold potential conflicts at bay, with not insignificant success, though it always seems fragile. More recently, the Himalayan rivers have become the focus of security-related concerns. One of the things that surprised me most, when I was researching Unruly Waters, is how recent a development this is. Back in the 1950s and 1960s, even top-secret correspondence within the Indian MEA dismissed the possibility that water could become a source of conflict with China. Only with the technological, economic, and demographic shifts of the 1980s did it become viable to engineer the upper reaches of the Himalayan rivers, and thus for those mountain rivers to become a strategic flashpoint.

RS: In the Bay of Bengal region, plans are now afoot to use inland waterways and coastal shipping as eco-friendly modes of transportation. Yet, these involve high environmental risks, for instance in the Sundarbans. Do you think this mode of transportation is sustainable in the region? How can regional institutions prioritise environmental issues in development projects?

We should not see connectivity, in and of itself, as positive or negative. The questions we should be asking are: connectivity for what purpose, and in whose interests?

SA: There is no question that inland waterways have been neglected across the region for most of the period since independence; they have been given much less emphasis in policymaking than showpiece infrastructural projects like highways. Yet they have long been central to the livelihoods of fishing communities and many others. Plans to develop them now, however, come with huge ecological risks to already fragile environments. We should not see connectivity, in and of itself, as positive or negative. The questions we should be asking are: connectivity for what purpose, and in whose interests? One recent report suggests that 97% of water traffic between India and Bangladesh is for the transportation of fly ash: a highly toxic by-product of coal production. In 2020, at least five ships carrying fly ash capsized in the Bengal delta, devastating marine life, and creating hazardous conditions for local communities. To the extent that waterway development aims towards furthering such dangerous trades—the transport of fly ash from India to Bangladesh is a perfectly legal but highly unethical form of toxic waste dumping—both ethical and environmental considerations suggest caution.

RS: Supported by public, private, and multilateral institutions, more than five hundred dams have been planned in the Himalayan region of Nepal, India, Bhutan, Pakistan, and China (p 300). This renders the lower riparian areas, particularly in North-east India and Bangladesh, vulnerable. Why have investments in dam building increased in recent years despite the public knowledge about their negative impact?

SA: We saw with the tragic, but all too predictable, dam collapse in Uttarakhand earlier this year that dam projects proceed recklessly, with little heed to the repeated warnings of environmentalists, judges, and above all local people. Soon after the disaster, the chief minister of the state was quick to point out that he hoped it would not encourage people to take an “anti-development” stance. Ever since the rise of environmental movements across South Asia in the 1970s, government officials and corporate leaders have sought to discredit their concerns as “anti-development”. Even to this day, large dams retain some of the symbolic power that they gained in the 1950s, when Nehru called them the “new temples of India”.

The values that should guide water policy, especially in light of climate change, are humility, precaution, and equity.

 

One of the things that makes the situation in the Himalayas so fraught with danger is that almost every country in the region is pursuing the same brand of reckless development, often in a competitive way. And if you follow their financing, these projects are also connected across borders. Both Indian and Chinese interests are very much involved with such projects throughout the region.

I think the fundamental problem is one of technological hubris: we have never shaken the mid-twentieth century faith that technology would ultimately master nature, despite the mounting toll of evidence that this can never be the case. Across the region, the environmental movement’s longstanding emphasis on the importance of respect for local voices and local ecology, has never been more relevant. I think the values that should guide water policy, especially in light of climate change, are humility, precaution, and equity.

 

About the expert

Sunil Amrith is the Renu and Anand Dhawan Professor of History at Yale University, and current Chair of the South Asian Studies Council. He is the author of four books, including Unruly Waters (2018) and Crossing the Bay of Bengal (2013). Amrith is a 2017 MacArthur Fellow, and recipient of the 2016 Infosys Prize in Humanities. Email: sunil.amrith@yale.edu

 

 

 

 

 

The post Upstream-downstream politics: South Asia’s water discourse first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/upstream-downstream-politics-south-asias-water-discourse/feed/ 0 894341
Deconstructing China’s infrastructure investments in Nepal http://stg.csep.org/blog/deconstructing-chinas-infrastructure-investments-in-nepal/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=deconstructing-chinas-infrastructure-investments-in-nepal http://stg.csep.org/blog/deconstructing-chinas-infrastructure-investments-in-nepal/#respond Tue, 11 May 2021 12:51:24 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894335 In this edition, we interview Galen Murton, and Austin Lord, on their article, ‘Trans-Himalayan power corridors: Infrastructural politics and China’s Belt and Road Initiative in Nepal’

The post Deconstructing China’s infrastructure investments in Nepal first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Samar SJB Rana interviews Galen Murton, and Austin Lord, on their article, ‘Trans-Himalayan power corridors: Infrastructural politics and China’s Belt and Road Initiative in Nepal’, published in Political Geography in 2019.

The relationship between Nepal and China has traditionally focused more on Chinese security concerns and Nepal’s adherence to the ‘One China policy’ than on cross-border infrastructure and economic ties. But, the economic embargo at the Nepal-India border in 2015 prompted Nepal to seek options other than India, with China already expressing its interest in developing physical infrastructure projects in Nepal. Since then, China and Nepal have engaged on matters related to connectivity. In 2017, Nepal signed the framework for nine projects under the Chinese Belt and Road Initiative (BRI). The BRI gained further salience in 2019 after the 2nd Belt and Road Forum (BRF), which established the ‘Nepal-China trans-Himalayan Multi-Dimensional Connectivity Network’.

In their article, Galen Murton and Austin Lord examine the perceptions of various Nepali and Chinese stakeholders and actors to understand the infrastructural diplomacy of Nepal’s northern frontier. Out of the 15 northern districts of Nepal that border China, the authors use Rasuwa and Gorkha to conceptualise the ‘trans-Himalayan power corridor’, a series of planned Chinese development projects pertaining to hydropower generation, border infrastructure, and road expansion.

Through ethnographic research, the article analyses how locals in the borderland have anticipated and perceived investment from China. The indigenous people of Nepal’s borderlands have been historically neglected and marginalised, but increased Chinese investment in Rasuwa is bringing new development opportunities. On the other hand, the authors also highlight the uncertainty associated with China’s promised investments in Nepal, as illustrated in the cancellation of the much-expected Budhi Gandaki Hydropower Project. Their research traces the rapid transformation of a landlocked Himalayan region, and what used to be one of Asia’s most peripheral and isolated land borders.

Samar SJB Rana: Your article conceptualises ‘power corridors’ in Rasuwa and Gorkha and their ‘process of co-construction’ which outlines the perceptions of myriad Nepali and Chinese actors on Chinese projects. How do these actors and projects challenge simplistic narratives about the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) and China’s politics of leverage? 

Galen Murton: Up to this point, there has been no shortage of analyses of the BRI related to grand strategy narratives and the tremendous financial commitments that Beijing has made to its international development agenda. While these kinds of studies are indeed important, part of our effort has been to examine the ways in which BRI programs are experienced and impact local communities at more grounded scales. By looking at the BRI through ethnographically informed and geographically situated lenses, one finds that Belt and Road projects are anything but unilateral enterprises and much more than strategic vectors for China to relocate surplus capital and amass soft power. To be sure, this is indeed going on, but in the case of Nepal – and obviously more places than we can count – BRI investment and development is negotiated, received, and leveraged to accomplish local tasks at a range of scales.

From long-anticipated village electrification schemes to nationalistic priorities to access seaports beyond India, Nepali actors have successfully embraced BRI projects to ‘do development differently’ across the country. While much ink has been spilled attending to great power asymmetries and potential debt entrapments of BRI programs, since 2016 we have tried to point out that in the case of Nepal – like many other places – “it is important to see how a small state like Nepal can in fact use China to support its own state-making agenda, instead of just the other way around.” (Murton, Lord, & Beazley. 2016).

From long-anticipated village electrification schemes to nationalistic priorities to access seaports beyond India, Nepali actors have successfully embraced BRI projects to ‘do development differently’ across the country.

SSJBR: In the article, you explain the difficulties in implementing the Budhi Gandaki Hydropower Project due to Nepal’s internal political struggles and the larger geopolitics at play. Why has this project struggled to gain momentum compared to the Rasuwa-Kyirong power corridor and what larger problems with BRI projects in Nepal does it signify?

Austin Lord: For the past several years, the Budhi Gandaki HPP has remained in a suspended state – largely due to COVID-19 and ongoing political contestation within Nepal, but also due to communication breakdown with the Chinese contractor, China Gezhouba Group Company Ltd. (CGGC). As one spokesperson for Nepal’s Ministry of Water Resources, Energy, and Irrigation recently told journalist Ramesh Bhushal: “We have tried to communicate with the company in the past few months, but it hasn’t responded clearly. We can neither say the company is out, nor it’s in. It is between somewhere and nowhere.” As the project remains stalled, neither plans for the resettlement of project-affected communities nor follow-on development dreams can be guaranteed. This mega project was intended to be completed in 2022, and yet it has hardly even begun.

There are several material and technical differences between the two “power corridors”, which we describe in the paper. Firstly, the Budhi Gandaki megaproject is the keystone of an imagined corridor, whereas construction in the Rasuwa corridor emerged from a constellation of interrelated and mid-sized projects, which provided momentum and infrastructure for one another. One should also note that CGGC, in particular, has an uneven track record in Nepal, as it has already failed to complete several other hydropower projects on time – most notably the Chameliya HPP but also the Trishuli 3A. Right now, the relative scale of the Budhi Gandaki HPP and the fact that the contract was awarded to a single entity, in this case CGGC, means that it is all or nothing.

It is hard to say if the liminal status of the Budhi Gandaki HPP might foretell of any challenges with the BRI portfolio in Nepal. As we argued in our article, it’s important to look beyond geopolitical headlines and instead evaluate and analyse each proposed project individually in the context of national politics, sub-national questions of political economy, and situated development struggles. However, one key takeaway here is that BRI projects, like many other infrastructure and development programs, can also be shaken by unexpected disasters like the 2015 earthquake and COVID-19. This is particularly important in the Himalayan region, where seismicity, geohazards, and climate change are ever present risks.

It’s important to look beyond geopolitical headlines and instead evaluate and analyse each proposed project individually in the context of national politics, sub-national questions of political economy, and situated development struggles.

SSJBR: During PM Oli’s visit to China in 2018, both countries vowed to expedite projects through the Karnali, Gandaki, and Koshi corridor. With the idea of trilateral connectivity between Nepal, China, and India being proposed previously, can Nepal ever become a ‘land-bridge’ between India and China? 

Galen Murton: The prospect of Nepal becoming a land bridge between China and India is a compelling infrastructural imaginary. That is not to say that such an imaginary is a fantasy or a far-off dream, but rather that the infrastructural basis to realize such a plan is incredibly ambitious and complex. On the one hand, third-country transit makes perfect sense: you have Nepal, the proverbial yam between two boulders, as a landlocked country sandwiched between the two largest populations on earth with rapidly expanding economies and growing consumer appetites. Sea routes from the manufacturing centres of eastern China to the ports of eastern India take weeks of passage via the Malacca Straits; alternatively, overland travel from Guangzhou to Calcutta by way of railroads through central Tibet and down through Nepal presents an expedient, if questionably viable, second option.

To be clear, it is that passage down or up through Nepal which is so complicated and uncertain. Not only does the infrastructure development to move massive quantities of goods at scale through the Himalaya range demand unprecedented feats of engineering innovation, but the objective hazards of seismically active geological landscapes makes this kind of transit route particularly problematic. As journalist Anil Giri explained in The Kathmandu Post, a couple years ago, early projections for just a 120-km stretch of railroad through Nepal may well require 90-95% of the track to run through tunnels and over bridges. For anyone who has travelled by road in Nepal, or paid attention to the frenetic construction of more highways and feeder roads throughout the country, the prospect of a railroad through this region appears remote. But that is not to say it is impossible!

SSJBR: The study uses the case of Chinese infrastructure projects in Nepal to highlight the need for greater nuance and specificity when interpreting bilateral BRI negotiations. How different or similar is Nepal’s case from other South Asian countries such as Bangladesh and Sri Lanka? 

Galen Murton: Nepal’s experiences with BRI development are very different from those of Bangladesh and Sri Lanka, and distinct to anywhere else in South Asia for that matter. Let’s start with attention to Nepal’s geography in both political and physical terms. Kathmandu’s relationship with Beijing is decidedly different from that of Dhaka or Colombo; Maoist and Communist leadership matters, as does longstanding frustration with the heavy-handed influence of Delhi in Nepal’s internal affairs. While leadership in Bangladesh and Sri Lanka certainly have their own highly complex relations with the Chinese Communist Party (CCP), as well as BJP and Indian Congress parties, the power geometries are very different. Relations between Beijing and Islamabad and Thimphu, respectively, are also at such different scales to Kathmandu (as well as to one another), that we don’t need to get into it here. Physically, Nepal also presents a different kind of proximity to China that is not the same in the case of Bangladesh or Sri Lanka; indeed, China shares no land border with either of those countries. Finally, BRI investment projects in Sri Lanka (if not Bangladesh) are conspicuously stained with the negativity of debt and accusations of Chinese land grabbing and entrapment; no such precedent or dynamic exists in Nepal, or at least not at the same scale as the Hambantota port debacle.

BRI investment projects in Sri Lanka (if not Bangladesh) are conspicuously stained with the negativity of debt and accusations of Chinese land grabbing and entrapment; no such precedent or dynamic exists in Nepal, or at least not at the same scale as the Hambantota port debacle.

This is not to say that Chinese loans and investments to Nepal have not yet or will not eventually transform into debt relations; of course, what happens down the road remains to be seen. But with that being said, the current nine BRI projects in Nepal are, first and foremost, shaped by very different configurations of geopolitical relations, and, second, operate at a different scale compared to many neighbouring countries across South Asia. This is what I have elsewhere called the ‘infrastructural relations’ that increasingly characterise Nepal-China politics today (Murton, 2020).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 About the experts

Galen Murton is an Assistant Professor of Geographic Science in the School of Integrated Sciences at James Madison University in Harrisonburg, Virginia. A human geographer with broad research and teaching interests in the politics of international development. In 2018-19, he completed the project Road Diplomacy: International Infrastructure and Ethnography of Geopolitics in 21st Century Asia as a Marie S. Curie Fellow in the Institute for Ethnology at Ludwig Maximillian University of Munich. He has co-authored multiple journal special issues and edited volumes related to infrastructure development and the Belt and Road Initiative, including ‘China’s Belt and Road Initiative: Views from the Ground’ (Political Geography, 2020) and Highways and Hierarchies: Ethnographies of Mobility from the Himalaya to the Indian Ocean (Amsterdam University Press, 2021). Galen received his PhD (Geography) from the University of Colorado Boulder, his MA (Law and Diplomacy) from the Fletcher School at Tufts University, and his BA (Religion) from Middlebury College. In addition to teaching courses on globalization, development, and critical cartography, Galen likes to conduct fieldwork with his students in the mountain ranges of Highland Asia as well as North America. Contact info: murtongb@jmu.edu | Google Scholar

 

Austin Lord is a PhD Candidate and Lecturer in the Department of Anthropology at Cornell University. His research focuses on disasters and aftermaths, political ecologies of water and energy, questions of time and temporality, lived experiences of environmental uncertainty and climate change, and the construction of environmental knowledge in the Himalayan region. Austin’s dissertation focuses on the afterlives of disaster in the Langtang Valley of Nepal, where a massive co-seismic avalanche occurred during the 2015 Gorkha earthquake. Drawing from over five years of research and volunteer work, his work carefully examines the ways that the Langtang pass conceptualise recovery, resilience, and uncertainty as they seek to rebuild their lives in the wake of an unthinkable disaster. His scholarship has been published in Economic Anthropology; Cultural Anthropology; Political Geography; WIREs Water; Modern Asian Studies; Environment and Planning D: Society and Space; Himalaya: The Journal of the Association for Nepal and Himalayan Studies; Eurasian Geography and Economics; Proceedings of the ACM on Human-Computer Interaction (CSCW), and Limn. Austin also holds a Master of Environmental Science (MESc) from Yale University and a B.A. in Economics and Studio Art from Dartmouth College. Contact info: al947@cornell.edu |GoogleScholar

Featured Photo: Galen Murton, February 2016.

Samar SJB Rana was a Research Intern with Foreign Policy and Security Studies, CSEP.

 

The post Deconstructing China’s infrastructure investments in Nepal first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/deconstructing-chinas-infrastructure-investments-in-nepal/feed/ 0 894335
India-Pakistan relations and Indian think tanks http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-pakistan-relations-and-indian-think-tanks/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-pakistan-relations-and-indian-think-tanks http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-pakistan-relations-and-indian-think-tanks/#respond Mon, 12 Apr 2021 06:47:39 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894190 In this edition, we interview Stuti Bhatnagar on her book “India's Pakistan Policy: How Think Tanks Are Shaping Foreign Relations.”

The post India-Pakistan relations and Indian think tanks first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Supriya Ravishankar, intern, Foreign Policy & Security, interviews Stuti Bhatnagar on her book “India’s Pakistan Policy: How Think Tanks Are Shaping Foreign Relations”, published by Routledge India in August 2020.

The relationship between Indian think tanks and the government, and their influence on foreign policy has been a rather understudied topic. In her book, Bhatnagar examines the role think tanks play as foreign policy actors by focusing her study on India’s foreign policy towards Pakistan. She takes up the India-Pakistan “Composite Dialogue” (CD) as her main case study.

The CD was formalised in 2004 and it continued up to 2013, with only a few episodes of disruption in between. It remains the longest and one of the most significant efforts undertaken to normalise the relationship between India and Pakistan. The process involved discussions on various issues that have traditionally been areas of contention between both countries. These include territorial disputes over Jammu and Kashmir and Siachen, as well as issues such as cross-border terrorism and drug trafficking. A significant component, however, was to install institutional mechanisms that would help facilitate friendly exchanges between both countries. This occurred through the setting up of official working groups to discuss each issue separately.

The book critically analyses the role of think tanks in the CD by putting forth both their contributions as well as their failures. The author reveals how some Indian think tanks acted as echo chambers by replicating the government narrative during the CD process. The book also takes a look at how the government can curb the ability of think tanks to choose subjects of study and research by controlling channels of funding.

At the same time, the book also highlights the strengths of think tanks and the positive role they played as peacebuilders. For example, the Centre for Dialogue and Reconciliation (CDR) was established to conduct research into specific subjects that had a bearing on Indo-Pak relations, such as the causes of militancy or trade relations. Subsequently, CBMs helped address the “trust deficit” between both countries which in-turn helped create a more liberal visa regime. In fact, the period of 2003-2007 saw a significant increase in people-to-people exchanges with an increased number of visas being processed by Indian missions in Pakistan. This enabled think tanks to establish Track Three interactions between civil society members, including media persons and artists.

Understanding the intricacies of India’s foreign policy towards Pakistan, one of its most important neighbours, is crucial to the stability and integration of the South Asian region. Three wars (and the threat of a nuclear one), cross-border terrorism, recurring border skirmishes, and the deadlock on the Kashmir issue have hindered the process of establishing lasting peace in the region.

Supriya Ravishankar: In the book, you mention that the Composite Dialogue (CD) between India and Pakistan, initiated in 2004 to deescalate tensions, was a “critical juncture” for understanding the potential that think tanks hold as foreign policy actors (p. 8). Could you explain how Indian think tanks contributed to the CD process and what could they have done with more autonomy?

Stuti Bhatnagar: The Composite Dialogue (CD) was certainly encouraging for Pakistan studies projects in various think tanks in India. Think tank contributions to the debate on India’s policy towards Pakistan was aided by the format of the CD that allowed for engagement with different stakeholders such as students, academics, bureaucrats, defence officials, and the wider civil society.

Think tanks contributed to the CD process in two significant ways. As I argue in the book, they were involved in coordinative discourse building. At one level, think tanks were involved, in consultation with government committees, in the engagement with policy ideas, and as key stakeholders in the dialogue process, both at the official and back-channel levels. At another level, they played an active role in promoting government policy and changes instituted as part of the CD, including the wide array of Confidence Building Measures (CBMs), and the opening of cross-border trade and travel in Jammu and Kashmir, among others. To give a few examples, policy discourse considered at defence policy think tanks, for instance, at the Institute for Defence Studies and Analyses (IDSA) and the Centre for Land and Warfare studies (CLAWS), elaborated on the nuclear CBMs adopted within the CD, the relevance of the Armed Forces Special Powers Act (AFSPA), and other operational counter-insurgency strategies in Jammu and Kashmir (J&K), adding significantly to the public discourse on these complicated issues. Think tanks including IDSA, Observer Research Foundation (ORF), and Institute of Peace and Conflict Studies (IPCS) also conducted feasibility studies on the adopted CBMs at the behest of the Ministry of Defence and the Ministry of External Affairs.

The role of think tanks was particularly useful as there were limited avenues for insights into government policy, particularly on issues of defence policy. Yet, despite their interests, Indian think tanks do depend a great deal on government support, funding, and patronage. Many of the cross-border initiatives organised by think tanks even required formal government approvals. Foreign funding itself is dependent on government permissions, which can make it quite challenging for think tank policy ideas to see any traction. More importantly, the sensitive nature of India-Pakistan relations and the predominant national security narratives restrict alternative policy ideas from think tanks. Therefore, these policy ideas articulated during the CD period were not sustained and as government attention towards the peace process waned, so did think tank interest.

The impact of think tanks on either sustaining or mending relations between India and Pakistan depends on what the formal policy agenda is.

SR: You have put forth in your book the reactions of ORF and the Centre for Policy Research (CPR) to then-President Parvez Musharraf’s proposal for a phased withdrawal of troops along the Line of Control in Kashmir. ORF called it a “well-crafted and cleverly worded war game” and B. G. Verghese from CPR termed it as “public rhetoric meant for domestic consumption” (p.94). What do you think is the impact of think tanks on either sustaining or mending relations of animosity between India and Pakistan?

SB: I think, to a large part, the impact of think tanks on either sustaining or mending relations between India and Pakistan depends on what the formal policy agenda is. As I said before, there was robust engagement with India-Pakistan dialogue at think tanks during the CD process, yet the policy ideas from think tanks were restricted to specific initiatives rather than an articulation of any paradigmatic shift in India’s position on Pakistan. Policy agendas on Pakistan have remained the domain of the Indian state. This is also due to the structural environment of Indian think tanks, their membership patterns as well as their linkages with the formal policy making establishment.

In a way, as I describe in detail in the book, in institutionalising and funding think tanks, the Indian government has engaged in consensus-building on policy directions on Pakistan. There has been a constant restatement of the policy message on Pakistan via different formats and products. While this has, at one level, enabled think tanks to have a place in the policy process, it has also somewhat restricted the adoption of alternative narratives. Dominant discourse on Pakistan, therefore, emphasised threats to national security and perpetuated government narratives on Pakistan, Kashmir, Siachen, and nuclear doctrines. It also side-lined alternative conceptualisations on resolution of key conflicts.

Government think tanks also did not engage adequately with issues of trade and people-to-people contact. The similarity in viewpoints with the defence and foreign policy community emphasised the Indian government position on Kashmir that argued for a continued military presence in the region. Non-government think tanks were able to expand the academic understanding of India-Pakistan issues, and as proximity to the government became distant, the ability of think tanks to suggest policy alternatives was more visible. However, these think tanks were unable to have better inputs into policymaking. They are often relegated to the status of “bleeding heart” organisations, especially when relations between India and Pakistan are combative. Thus, think tanks do have a role to play, albeit a restricted one.

Dominant discourse on Pakistan, therefore, emphasised threats to national security and perpetuated government narratives on Pakistan, Kashmir, Siachen, and nuclear doctrines. It also side-lined alternative conceptualisations on resolution of key conflicts.

SR: Chapter 6 of your book focuses on how peacebuilding think tanks “significantly expanded the discourse on Pakistan to include civil society and women’s perspectives” (p.128). Do you think these organisations play a more important role in establishing cooperative relations between India and Pakistan than think tanks focused on mainstream security issues?

SB: Peacebuilding think tanks have a fundamentally different institutional character than think tanks that focus primarily on mainstream security issues. Established in post-liberalised India, their research agendas have been more independent of government direction, and in addition to policy enquiry, the advocacy and training component is significant, particularly on projects dedicated to conflict resolution, peacebuilding, and training for peace. With regard to cooperative relations between India and Pakistan, peacebuilding think tanks responded actively to the government’s efforts to create a peace constituency to further its economic aims through the CD.

Beyond promoting the government agenda, peacebuilding think tanks also challenged the defence establishment’s militarist approach by highlighting Kashmiri grievances and the need to build cross-border networks involving civil society, women, and the youth as stakeholders in processes of conflict resolution. Think tanks, including IPCS and the Delhi Policy Group (DPG) considered, for instance, dynamics such as the need for fair elections and good governance. Contrary to the focus on law and order evident in defence policy think tanks, peacebuilding think tanks emphasised the continuing radicalisation of young Kashmiris in J&K, deliberated on preventive measures for further radicalisation, and recommended rule of law reforms in police-community relations. Even smaller think tanks such as Women in Security, Conflict Management and Peace (WISCOMP), and the Centre for Dialogue and Reconciliation (CDR) gave special attention to women’s empowerment and gender-based violence in the context of armed conflict in J&K.

I do believe peacebuilding think tanks were more effective in establishing cross-border networks, which were crucial for deepening economic links. Together, they reflected an increased tolerance for alternative approaches on Kashmir that went beyond national security concerns, yet their policy impact was restricted. While they are more independent of government direction, they lack government patronage and resources as they depend primarily on foreign funders. Therefore, their efforts towards the Indo-Pak relationship could not be sustained, and very often these think tanks moved towards adopting “more palatable” research agendas that were not in conflict with the formal bureaucracy. These think tanks were particularly sensitive to a change in India’s foreign policy after the Mumbai attacks and particularly since 2014, significantly restricting their policy relevance and impact.

Peacebuilding think tanks were more effective in establishing cross-border networks, which were crucial for deepening economic links.

SR: You categorize think tanks as being oriented towards either peacebuilding or national security. What role do organisations working on economic policy have on India’s relations with the neighbourhood?

SB: Organisations working on economic policy should have an impact on India’s relations with the neighbours. However, in my research, I did not find a very robust engagement on this level, at least during the CD period. Organisations such as CPR and the Research and Information System for Developing Countries (RIS) have considered economic policy, but the RIS did not particularly focus on India-Pakistan relations. Foreign policy think tanks, however, in particular the CPR and ORF, and to some extent the IPCS, did engage with the policy initiatives along the Line of Control (LoC) that facilitated cross-border trade. For instance, the IPCS promoted the conceptualisation of cross-LoC trade as an economic CBM that enabled trade beyond the Kashmir valley and recommended expanding the list of goods that were permitted for trade and providing banking facilities in place of the barter system that had been in use. The focus on India-Pakistan trade and its potential advantages towards the broader relationship was also considered by studies at the Indian Council for Research on International Economic Relations (ICRIER). I think there has to be a more sustained engagement with economic policy, particularly focusing on South Asian dynamics at think tanks in India. So far, it remains limited.

SR: Can the lack of access and funding explain why peacebuilding is no longer a primary area of interest for think tanks today, the way it was during the CD, or are there other factors in play?

SB: Yes, to a large extent, although broader political dynamics are also at play here. There were several challenges to the CD process and think tank interest – an overdependence on top-down leadership, a lack of bureaucratic support, and the reluctance of the defence establishment to think beyond law and order in Kashmir. Multi-track efforts could also not be sustained for various reasons, though there does seem to be an effort to revive them now.

At the think tank level, several structural constraints, external and internal, restricted their autonomy and ability to effectively interject in the policy process. While external funding provided the opportunity to develop alternative ideas, the same process also significantly restricted the influence of think tanks, particularly those that emphasised peacebuilding. The strict legal framework that exists for the regulation of think tanks in receipt of foreign donations limited the autonomy of think tanks. Think tanks are also dependent on information produced by government agencies for their programme development and they require constant state support for institutional relevance and to organise cross-border initiatives – many of which became difficult in the post-2014 era.

Though economic links expanded in Kashmir, at the broader level they continued to be limited, and the civil society linkages established by the CD process were not deep enough to constitute a tangible peace constituency with Pakistan, particularly after the 2008 Mumbai attacks.

Also, though economic links expanded in Kashmir, at the broader level they continued to be limited, and the civil society linkages established by the CD process were not deep enough to constitute a tangible peace constituency with Pakistan, particularly after the 2008 Mumbai attacks. The attacks re-empowered a national security elite within defence think tanks, the MoD, and the armed forces who insisted on using a military strategy to resolve the Kashmir conflict and control Pakistan. Newer think tanks that developed in the post-2008 environment, the Vivekananda International Foundation (VIF) and the India Foundation (IF), for instance, reflected the cynicism with regards to peacebuilding, and agreed with the government’s emphasis on a militaristic strategy to combat terrorism and the active use of force towards civil unrest in Kashmir. All of these political compulsions as well as structural constraints of think tanks themselves contributed to an environment wherein peace with Pakistan was not the preferred policy option.

 

 

 

About the author:

 

Stuti Bhatnagar is a Sessional Academic with the University of New South Wales, Sydney and an adjunct fellow at the University of Adelaide. She also serves as an Executive Officer – South Asian Studies Association of Australia and as the Social Media Editor for South Asia: Journal of South Asian Studies. With a PhD in politics and international relations from the University of Adelaide, she specialises in Indian foreign policy, especially the role and rising influence of think tanks in India. Her recent book is titled, India’s Pakistan Policy: How Think Tanks Are Shaping Foreign Relations, (Routledge India).

She can be reached at stuti.bhatnagar@unsw.edu.au

 

The post India-Pakistan relations and Indian think tanks first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-pakistan-relations-and-indian-think-tanks/feed/ 0 894190
Sustaining trade routes in the Himalayan borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/sustaining-trade-routes-in-the-himalayan-borderlands/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sustaining-trade-routes-in-the-himalayan-borderlands http://stg.csep.org/blog/sustaining-trade-routes-in-the-himalayan-borderlands/#respond Tue, 09 Feb 2021 06:44:14 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=893861 In this edition, Riya Sinha interviews Dr. Tina Harris, Associate Professor of Anthropology, University of Amsterdam, on her book chapter, “The Mobile and Material in Himalayan Borderlands.”

The post Sustaining trade routes in the Himalayan borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Riya Sinha interviews Dr. Tina Harris, Associate Professor of Anthropology, University of Amsterdam, on her book chapter, “The Mobile and Material in Himalayan Borderlands,” published in The Art of Neighbouring: Making Relations Across China’s Borders (ed. Martin Saxer and Juang Zhang) in 2017.

The economic geography of the Himalayan borderlands is shifting. In the 19th and 20th centuries, goods moved from India to Nepal and Tibet. With the introduction of new technologies, advancement of border infrastructure, and change in the geo-political environment, the trade route started to shift in the 21st century, now mostly with Chinese goods crossing the Himalayan region into the subcontinent. This has led to new investments in border areas to revive the old trading routes and gain strategic leverage. In 2019, for example, China’s President Xi Jingping announced the Trans-Himalayan Multi-Dimensional Connectivity Network (THMCN) with Nepal to create an economic corridor as part of its Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).

Viewed from a nation-state level, borders are categorised either as fixed or mobile. This includes infrastructure that either facilitates or contains cross-border movements and is most often guided by the political environment. For instance, on one hand, there is an emphasis on creating border infrastructure such as India’s new Integrated Check Posts (ICPs) to facilitate the faster movement of goods and people across borders. Two other examples are the sub-regional Bangladesh-Bhutan-India-Nepal Motor Vehicles Agreement (BBIN-MVA) or the bilateral protocols to revive the Himalayan and Gangetic waterways as international trade routes.

On the other hand, there is an increasing investment in border fencing to contain free movement, particularly with laser-fencing along the India-Nepal border or the development of the Comprehensive Integrated Border Management System (CIBMS) along the India-Bangladesh border. However, all these fixed and mobile initiatives are driven by states, without often taking into cognisance the lived realities of the border regions.

In her chapter, Dr. Tina Harris analyses borders from a bottom-up perspective, that is, how borders are dealt with at the local level. Through extensive fieldwork in the Himalayan borderlands (2005 – 2007), she examines the use of border roads in the region by local traders. She relies on three historical and ethnographic case studies from the China-India and China-Nepal borderlands. First, the British Trade Marts in Tibet in the 20th Century (roads); second, technological advancements in moving of goods across the borders (vehicles); and, finally, re-opening of the Lipu Lekh, Shipki la, and Nathu la border passes between India and China (land).

Dr. Harris demonstrates that while the opening and closing of borders is decided by the state, the ability of local traders to navigate and circumvent these policies is what sustains cross-border movements. She argues that the shift in Asian economic geographies – particularly with the current rise of a China-driven economy – is ‘steered’ by the traders’ skill to negotiate three elements of trade: the roads, vehicles, and the borderlands (p. 162). Thus, in order to facilitate cross-border trade, it is important to examine the relationship between two factors: first, the mobile, that is, goods, vehicles, and people; and second, the fixed, including roads, land, and rail, that allow these movements to take place.

Riya Sinha: Your chapter focuses on three features of the China-India and China-Nepal border regions, namely, roads, vehicles, and land.  Could you elaborate on how development of border infrastructure affects cross-border connectivity and established networks?

Tina Harris: One of the things that I find most fascinating about studying border infrastructure is that material changes that may seem mundane or even boring at first glance – say for example the construction of a small footbridge, the obstruction of a road, or the introduction of a new vehicle – can fundamentally change the geography of the immediate surroundings, and in turn significantly impact local livelihoods.

A new fence or a washed-out road can mean that social and economic networks that have lasted for decades, even centuries, become blocked – sometimes temporarily, sometimes more permanently. But what is more curious is how these infrastructural changes – whatever the size or impact – do not simply cut off or affect established networks. They simultaneously produce new and sometimes unexpected connections.

For instance, I’ve looked at how the Himalayan wool trade in the mid-20th-century was impacted by the American embargo on Chinese goods in the 1950s. During this time, the international trade in Tibetan wool, which was controlled for a long time by a few elite Tibetan families and brought down through India, slowed down considerably. While you would think that this would cut-off cross-border trade networks, it actually provided opportunities for other traders – especially those who were less elite – to forge new routes and connections across the region, when it came to supplying goods from Europe and India to Tibet during the 1950s and 1960s.

RS: You speak of how, in the 20th century, “the struggle between the British and Tibetans over construction of the border, its roads, its marts, and its goods, was a struggle over power” in the Himalayan region (p. 152). Do you think this argument can be extended to China’s current effort to increase infrastructure investment in the Himalayan region, particularly in Nepal?

TH: I think you can extend the argument in some ways. While I was interested in looking at how 20th-century British construction in the borderland was about the assertion of British territorial control through the establishment of, say, telegraph-wires, you might say that there is a similar developmental push when it comes to Chinese investment in roads and rail along the borders of Nepal. The difference, however, is that it is – to some extent – more welcome [today].

While investment in infrastructure and development in Nepal is not new, specifically Chinese investment has intensified over the past 5-10 years. This has happened in a specific conjuncture post-2015 earthquake where Nepal was in an extremely difficult position, and where some of the Chinese projects were seen as ‘successful’ compared to investment by other countries in previous infrastructural projects.

While my work in the chapter is mostly historical, Galen Murton and Nadine Plachta have written about these exact contemporary processes in a forthcoming 2021 piece for the BRI Handbook called “China in Nepal: On the Politics of Belt and Road Initiative Development in South Asia,” and there is already a lot of very interesting analysis being done on Sino-Nepal BRI-related investment featured on your blog.

RS: You tend to humanise Himalayan connectivity by emphasising on the role of traders in determining the future of cross-border infrastructure and interactions. From a bottom-up perspective, what role can the traders play in influencing policy decisions to make the cross-border routes both profitable and sustainable?

TH: There is a wide diversity of traders from many different backgrounds in the Himalayas; some who trade and even barter daily necessities along local routes, and others who have massive warehouses and agents all over the world. So, the role traders can play really depends on the specific traders and the specific policy decisions that need to be made.

However, while ‘bigger’ traders can sometimes influence policy decisions through their economic or political connections, there is a lot to be said for the role of ‘smaller’ traders who conduct regular trade along more limited cross-border routes. They are the ones who are often in touch with the daily needs and concerns of the local inhabitants; they know about seasonal fluctuations for instance, or which areas are prone to landslides during the monsoon. In my opinion, these intimate daily experiences are crucial – alongside local participation and agency – in order to think through what kind of infrastructure (if any at all) is both environmentally sustainable and best for accommodating the wide variety of socio-economic needs along these routes.

I once met with some traders in Sikkim who said that a team of urban planners came all the way from Delhi and quickly wrote up a report about a border road without consulting more than one person who lived in the town that it passed through. According to the traders, the planners were unfamiliar with the region; they were not in tune with the intricacies of the land, nor with the needs of the inhabitants who lived along the many smaller arteries of the route. In addition, I think that some of the traders are also very aware of the imbalance in trade along cross-border roads – there are permissions and trade permits given for some groups and not others, infrastructure that is built up much better on one side and not on the other. These imbalances can create significant inequalities and tensions on a local cross-border level. These complex on-the-ground nuances need to be sensitively understood and taken into account, before plans are translated into policy.

RS: India, Nepal, and Bhutan are investing in building cross-border integrated check posts (ICPs) to regulate trade and travel. Do you think that the Himalayan states have adopted a security-oriented approach to control cross-border networks rather than to increase regional connectivity?

TH: Yes, I do. Many of the recent reports about the introduction of these ICPs seem to be couched in rhetoric about efficient and systematic connectivity, or facilitating seamless, smooth trade connections. But border regulation is really about letting some things or people in, while keeping other things or people out.

I think a useful question to ask about cross-border connectivity and control is, who really benefits from these check posts? What and who are they for, actually? If we look at cross-border networks from a micro-level perspective, traders certainly want connections to be facilitated so they can continue to trade. But if they are being promised smooth access to their counterparts on the other side, and the reality of the border checkpoint doesn’t live up to these expectations, what is happening instead?

While these integrated check posts are said to facilitate trade, they are also about securitisation, control, identification – what other scholars have likened to a sort of ‘performance’ in the name of sovereignty. So yes, I am sceptical about the connectivity rhetoric. ICPs and other kinds of border check posts tend to do the opposite; they serve to strengthen and consolidate state power.

RS: You rely on oral narratives and historical accounts from your fieldwork in India, Tibet, and Nepal as a methodology for your research. How can this methodology be further used to encourage research on South Asian connectivity?

TH: I find that oral and historical narratives of people’s experiences along cross-border routes are extremely important, mainly because they can provide perspectives that bring more depth or even contradict what we think we know about geopolitical change in the region. We often talk about historical events or ruptures that are marked by single dates – for instance, the Sino-Indian War of 1962. Such an event has been described as ‘completely cutting off trade connections’ – but the reality was much more gradual; some of the older traders who lived in the Himalayan borders during that time said that nothing really shifted until well into the mid-1960s, and in fact some of them profited greatly during this time.

There are so many other accounts of connectivity, however. I imagine that people have elderly relatives and friends who have important stories about living in borderlands, stories that are often obscured by national(ist) narratives, particularly, accounts that indigenous groups find important to share. I’ve realised that I’m not really the right person to be doing this kind of work or telling these stories from my perspective. I believe that there are a number of young local scholars out there, from the region, who can take this methodology and research much further, and I would love to see more of it.

About the Expert

Dr. Tina Harris,

Associate Professor, Department of Anthropology

University of Amsterdam

Email: c.h.harris@uva.nl

Bio: Tina Harris is Associate Professor of Anthropology, University of Amsterdam, and the Director of the Moving Matters research group at the Amsterdam Institute for Social Sciences. She works on topics such as infrastructure, borderlands, and mobilities, particularly in the Himalayas. Her current research projects focus on understanding issues in aviation through an ethnographic perspective, such as tensions that emerge between international standard procedures and the local experiences and practices of pilots and air traffic controllers.

The post Sustaining trade routes in the Himalayan borderlands first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/sustaining-trade-routes-in-the-himalayan-borderlands/feed/ 0 893861
Infrastructure across the India-Nepal borderlands: A photo-essay http://stg.csep.org/blog/infrastructure-across-the-india-nepal-borderlands-a-photo-essay/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=infrastructure-across-the-india-nepal-borderlands-a-photo-essay http://stg.csep.org/blog/infrastructure-across-the-india-nepal-borderlands-a-photo-essay/#respond Tue, 19 Jan 2021 09:20:09 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=893706 This visual essay covers fieldwork and findings on how land acquisition and related challenges have delayed strategic infrastructure projects.

The post Infrastructure across the India-Nepal borderlands: A photo-essay first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India has been investing significantly in border infrastructure in its neighbourhood, including roads, railways, and waterways, in a bid to increase connectivity and revive old linkages. Approximately Rs. 10,000 crore have been spent on infrastructure building in the last four years. However, a number of these projects continue to face significant delays in implementation. In Nepal, 73 percent of India’s total development assistance goes into building infrastructure projects.

To understand the causes of these delays, we visited Janakpur and Biratnagar in Nepal in early February 2020 to assess the progress on two India-funded projects: The Postal Highway Project and the Jogbani-Biratnagar railway line. This visual essay covers some of our fieldwork and our findings on how land acquisition and related challenges have delayed these strategic infrastructure projects.

Land acquisition has been one of the most persistent challenges in the completion of regional infrastructural projects. While the case studies were from Nepal, the findings are broadly applicable to other infrastructure projects in the region delayed due to access to land. Our recent study, When Land Comes in the Way: India’s Connectivity Infrastructure in Nepal, delves deep into the issue and suggests policy reforms for overcoming such challenges at three levels: the Indian Government, the Nepal Government and bilaterally between the two.

Biratnagar: The railway line and the Integrated Check Post

At the India-Nepal border area in Biratnagar, Indian Public Sector Enterprise IRCON is building a railway line connecting Jogbani in Bihar, India, to the industrial area of Biratnagar in Nepal. Once operational, this 13 km railway line will significantly cut transportation costs for trade between Nepal and the Indian seaports of Kolkata and Haldia.

We arrived on a sunny February morning to enquire about the causes of delay in completion of this railway line. Based on the India-Nepal 2010 agreement for development of railway infrastructure, the Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) for this project was signed nearly ten years ago in February 2011. We met a number of stakeholders involved in the project, from key officials in Kathmandu to local engineers and the project-affected people (PAP). They informed us that the multi-year delay in this 13 km railway project in Biratnagar was on account of land acquisition.

While a railway engine is yet to ply on this track, villagers residing nearby use this track for cross-border agricultural activities and livestock grazing. “All we ask for is a proper bridge or underpass to take our livestock to the other side (India) for grazing,” says a local villager, who considers the railway track a hindrance to his everyday activity. Most villagers we spoke to seemed unaware of the transformation and opportunities that this project could bring to the area.

 

The Nepal Customs Yard in Biratnagar has been built for clearance of goods arriving via rail. Construction was completed by IRCON in late 2019, after missing several deadlines due to land acquisition issues.

Local villagers use the railway track for moving across the border for agricultural activities.

Along the Jogbani-Biratnagar railway track, a villager takes cattle for grazing into India, while few others use the track as a resting spot.

Just a few meters to the West of the railway line is the Jogbani-Biratnagar Integrated Check Post (ICP). A wide, four-lane road leads us to the ICP where we see petroleum trucks entering from India. The ICP was inaugurated virtually just a few weeks prior to our visit by India’s Prime Minister Narendra Modi and Nepali Prime Minister K. P. Oli. This marks the second successfully-built ICP between India and Nepal after the one at Raxaul-Birgunj. Close to the trade gate, a security officer refers to the no-man’s land in the local parlance, “The area between the two trade gates is called Dus Gajja (10 yards).” A few petroleum trucks are crossing the checkpost. The paradox of the India-Nepal border is visible here: there are uniformed customs, police and immigration guards controlling and regulating the cross-border movement of trucks at this gate, but just a few meters away villagers and cattle freely cross the border, with just a lonely border pillar marking the imaginary line.

The trade gate of the Jogbani-Biratnagar Integrated Check Post. Petroleum is the major commodity imported by Nepal from here.

A border pillar separating Indian and Nepali territory in Biratnagar. Many villagers move freely across this border pillar for everyday activities.

Janakpur: The Hulaki Rajmarg (Postal Highway)

The Hulaki Rajmarg or Postal Highway Project accounts for the largest share of India’s total development assistance to Nepal. It runs parallel to the India-Nepal border. The project to construct 605 kms of this road began in 2006 with the preparation of a detailed project report by an Indian PSE called RITES. The construction of the highway and the Terai roads began in 2010. The total cost of this project was estimated to be approximately US$153 million.

As we travelled along one of the sectors of the Postal highway in Janakpur, a number of issues came to the fore. Land acquisition has been one of the major issues delaying the completion of this highway. This issue was further compounded by gaps in the detailed project report (DPR) that led to incorrect road alignment in a few sectors. As a result, only 10 percent of the road construction was completed by 2015.

Realising the need for a change, both the Indian and Nepali government decided to revise the MoU in 2016, moving from an India-funded-India-implemented modality to an India-funded-Nepal-implemented one. India’s National Highway Infrastructure Development Cooperation Limited (NHDCL) replaced RITES as project consultants. The 2016 MoU also mandated that 90 percent of encumbrance-free land should be available before initiation of civil works.

In Janakpur, to our surprise, the so-called “highway” was much narrower than we had imagined reading official documents: it ranges between just 7 and 15 metres in width, varying at different stretches. We are told that to avoid delays, contractors built roads on stretches where land was available and left the other rough patches of undeveloped land in-between

As of March 2020, only 7 out of 14 packages of the Postal highway and the Terai roads have been completed. The Indian and Nepali governments have formally agreed to take over the seven remaining packages.

A stretch showing complete and incomplete parts of the Postal road being built by India and Nepal.

Opening the borderlands

The India-Nepal border is often referred to as being exceptionally open and an example of the special relationship between both countries. On paper, the 1950 Indo-Nepal Treaty of Peace and Friendship, and other bilateral trade and transit arrangements regulate cross-border movements. During our fieldwork, we observed that the border is often practically invisible, more of an imaginary line cutting across villages and communities.

But do cattle, petty trade and other local movements make for a truly open border in a digital age of regional connectivity and interdependence? Can we speak of an open border in 2021 if there is no modern road, rail and other transportation infrastructure to cross it? Can we call this border open if it closes overnight, or if it takes a container truck approximately two days to clear paper-based customs?

The India-Nepal borderlands we visited are at the cusp of a momentous transformation, stuck between their medieval past and a modern future. India and Nepal are now pushing ahead and developing large-scale connectivity infrastructure, whether through integrated check posts or new rail and road links. The projects we visited reflect Indian and Nepali efforts to massively upgrade their borderlands connectivity infrastructure. Such disruption naturally faces several challenges, including from local communities and complex land acquisition processes that we survey in our paper. New Delhi and Kathmandu will have to cooperate more closely to address these irritants and bring the borderlands to the 21st century.

The post Infrastructure across the India-Nepal borderlands: A photo-essay first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/infrastructure-across-the-india-nepal-borderlands-a-photo-essay/feed/ 0 893706
2020 reading list: Scholars at CSEP recommend http://stg.csep.org/blog/2020-reading-list-scholars-at-csep-recommend/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=2020-reading-list-scholars-at-csep-recommend http://stg.csep.org/blog/2020-reading-list-scholars-at-csep-recommend/#respond Wed, 30 Dec 2020 11:44:32 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=893571 We have curated a list of non-fiction must-reads, handpicked by our scholars, here at the Centre for Social and Economic Progress. Happy reading!

The post 2020 reading list: Scholars at CSEP recommend first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
As this historic, infamous, pandemic year ends, leaving the world drastically changed from when it began, looking-back and regaining our understanding of our changed realities becomes pertinent. To that end, and to better equip ourselves to face the new year, we have curated a list of non-fiction must-reads, handpicked by our scholars, here at Centre for Social and Economic Progress. Ranging from commentaries on the policy world to contextualising India’s relationship with the world, as well as climate change and lessons from the pandemic, take a look at what captured the attention of our scholars this year, and find your own end-of-the-year-reads, as we head into the new year, with food for thought!

Shivshankar Menon

The Loss of Hindustan; the Invention of India

by Manan Ahmed Asif

This is a fascinating exploration of political identity in the Indian subcontinent before the coming of the Europeans, when Asif says there was a shared understanding of being Hindustani. The story he tells is of how the European understanding of India in religious and caste terms replaced the earlier understanding of Hindustan as a home for all faiths. As we struggle through yet another reinterpretation and contestation over our contemporary political identity, this book should open our minds to the multiple possibilities and opportunities ahead of us.

China’s Good War; How World War II Is Shaping a New Nationalism

Rana Mitter

This book about the radical reinterpretation of China’s World War II experience in today’s People’s Republic is an excellent example of the political uses of history in China, which has a long tradition, and of the reinvention of tradition and even identity. History, nationalism and collective memory—and their interplay—come together in Mitter’s masterly telling. As China steps out into the world with growing power and agency, she reinterprets the past to support the idea of China as a creator and protector of the international order. The past as recalled and told is indeed prologue to the future in China’s case.

Time’s Monster; History, Conscience and Britain’s Empire

Priya Satia

I have often wondered how people who considered themselves good, moral, and god-fearing citizens perpetrated the monstrous crimes and atrocities that built and maintained the exploitative and violent British Empire. Satia’s book is the first satisfactory attempt to explain this phenomenon that I have seen. She demonstrates the role of the historical imagination in founding and enabling colonialism. And please do not think that what she tells us is only true of the past. Like all good history, this book makes one see the present differently.


Gazing Eastwards; Of Buddhist Monks and Revolutionaries in China

Romila Thapar

I have saved the best for last. This diary of the months that Romila Thapar spent in China in 1957 as a research assistant studying the Buddhist murals and sculptures in Dunhuang and Maijishan on the Silk Routes, where Indian and Chinese cultures intermingled, is fascinating in her perceptive observations of a China on the cusp of revolutionary change. She met Mao and Zhou, visited the major Chinese cities, and talked to academics, monks and ordinary people, enjoying a degree of access that has never since been repeated. The book is a useful reminder of the past that India and China shared, and that there is more to life than the focus on military and strategic affairs that fills the negative contemporary narrative on India and China. This is a book to savour.

Vikram Singh Mehta

A Promised Land
by Barack Obama

A perfect example of why one “should read nothing but biographies for that is history without theory” (I forget who said this). Beautifully written, A Promised Land is not just a catalogue of interesting public events leading first to Obama‘s dramatic run-up to the Presidency and then the twists and turns of securing the support of Congress for the financial bail-out in the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, as well as the less successful efforts to pass Obamacare. It is also a description of the man behind the decisions, what motivated him, how did he reconcile good policy with good politics, while not compromising the principles that drove him to seek public office.

India figures marginally and not in language that would make us proud. Manmohan Singh receives praise as a wise and honest man, Sonia as a woman of dignity, and Rahul as lacking in depth or substance. The one sentence description of Rahul is damning.

It is a long book and at times the details surrounding American domestic issues are avoidable for a non-American reader, but it is a great read. Especially for those who wish to understand the complexities of policy formulation and the role of individuals in navigating policies through the hardware of democratic institutions.

Ten Lessons for a Post-Pandemic World
by Fareed Zakaria

While the lessons, by themselves, may not be profoundly original, the language is outstanding. Every sentence reads well. What is interesting is the way Fareed weaves history and contemporary developments to provide insights into the world that was pre-COVID and the world that will be. Many of the lessons are relevant for all decision-makers, “people should listen to experts – and experts should listen to people”, “what matters is not the quantity of government but the quality” etc.

Have a wonderful holiday season and let us hope that 2021 buries 2020 well and truly into the past.

Sahil Gandhi

The Narrow Corridor

Daron Acemoglu and James Robinson

Acemoglu and Robinson present an interesting premise to explain why liberty has thrived only in a handful of nation-states and societies. They state that in the absence of a State, societies tend to create a “cage of norms” that is antithetical to liberty. These societies are also unable to provide critical services such as a free and fair justice system and other public goods that benefit the general public. A strong State with adequate capacity is essential for ensuring rule of law and providing public goods. However, in the absence of a strong countervailing force provided by the civil society, there is a strong chance that the unchecked State – which is referred to as a Leviathan – ends up becoming despotic and quashes individual liberty. Hence, the authors argue, liberty flourishes in the narrow corridor where a strong State can uphold the rule of law and a strong civil society is able to shackle the State to prevent it from turning despotic.

The authors provide examples from societies around the world, such as Europe, China, India, and across time to buttress their argument. It’s a great way to learn about the evolution of state capacity, economic history, and the role of social groups in civic life in places we may not have known much about before. One may or may not agree with this single, sweeping explanation to explain how some modern societies have emerged, but it will certainly give the reader a lot to think about.

Rahul Tongia

Debt: The first 5,000 years

David Graeber

I would recommend almost everything by the late LSE anthropologist David Graeber. Many people do not realise that he was the one to coin a term that has been taken-up by protests worldwide: “the 1%”. While this is probably his most acclaimed scholarly work, he also has other groundbreaking views, like in his book Bullshit Jobs.

This book is a historical and cultural examination of not just debt but also the concepts of money and credit. Graeber shows that, contrary to popular belief, most societies didn’t have formal barter systems that evolved into money but had credit systems, often based heavily on relationships.

More importantly, as Graeber often writes about in his other works as well (especially in Utopia of Rules), a lot of formal systems are about power structures. He lays out the strong case that the so-called market isn’t a societal construct that allows them freedom away from the government but is one deeply embedded into the government as well as rules and norms. It’s more than a coincidence that the rules and norms reinforce power structures.

A very nice follow-on discussion is a short essay on the future of capitalism based on a discussion between Graeber and Piketty. Once you’re interested in rethinking concepts of money and debt, it’s worth reading about Modern Monetary Theory (MMT), especially Stephanie Kelton’s The Deficit Myth: Modern Monetary Theory and the Birth of the People’s Economy. A very nice short essay on this issue by Richard Murphy, shows taxes aren’t about raising capital to do government’s spending – they are independent! Read Macroeconomics, money and post-Brexit recovery, all in one Twitter thread.”

Short Circuiting Policy: Interest Groups and the Battle Over Clean Energy and Climate Policy in the American States (Studies in Postwar American Political Development)

Leah Stokes

While the title suggests a very American focus, the larger premise remains more widely applicable, which is that clean energy and climate policy aren’t merely technical or even economic issues, but political ones, and ones where there are stakeholders who would be impacted asymmetrically by the energy transition. One could apply a lens of winners and losers for the transition and extrapolate many of the insights towards international positions and negotiations.

More than just the theoretical descriptive analysis of the past, the book also shows pathways of bottom-up action which appear to be as important, if not more, than just top-down international or national level policy efforts.

There are certainly some aspects that would appeal more to readers interested in the United States. Of course, what the United States does is extremely important for the world, not just because of the scale of impact from the largest GDP in the world but also because of its geopolitical and signaling aspects.

There are many other good books on the vast topic that is climate change. A unique one is a compilation of essays and poems by leading women thinkers and scholars, All We Can Save: Truth, Courage, and Solutions for the Climate Crisis.

Anit Mukherjee

Fateful Triangle: How China Shaped U.S.-India Relations During the Cold War

Tanvi Madan

Dr. Madan’s meticulously researched book on the India-U.S.-China triangle is one of the highlight publications of this year. She spent the better part of a decade conducting archival research across three continents and has come up with a very readable account untangling perhaps the most central geopolitical relationship of this century. Her book establishes China’s role, both in facilitating and inhibiting, the US-India relationship from 1949 to 1979. This is a welcome departure from most historical accounts of the US- India relationship which are over-determined by their obsession with the ‘Pakistan factor.’ In doing so, she reinterprets many aspects of India’s foreign policy including Nehru’s view on China and the pragmatic roots of Non-Alignment. This book is an invaluable resource not just for students and analysts but also for Indian and American policymakers as they grapple with forming a stronger relationship for our time.

Constantino Xavier 

Animosity at Bay: An Alternative History of the India-Pakistan Relationship, 1947-1952

Pallavi Raghavan

How does a history of India-Pakistan cooperation seventy years ago matter to foreign policy today? Pallavi Raghavan’s book explains how despite the violent partition of 1947, the two states also worked together thereafter, from protecting minorities and evacuee properties to managing cross-border rivers and trade.

Even today, despite extreme rhetoric and a new low in India-Pakistan relations: in 2020, Delhi and Islamabad exchanged information on a devastating locust infestation to protect their farmers; their health experts met to discuss regional responses to the COVID-19 pandemic; and their diplomats agreed to establish the cross-border Kartarpur corridor for Sikh pilgrims.

Using a formidable range of new archival materials up to the early 1950s, Raghavan corrects the biased histories that have portrayed partition as being driven irrationally by Kashmir, ideology, or religion. Even in a context of political hostility and conflict, she shows how both sides – especially bureaucrats and technocratic elites – also engaged in pragmatic dialogues, collaborating to find policy solutions that were politically acceptable.

This book is an invaluable contribution to India’s new diplomatic histories and to understand how the drama of ideological politics can obfuscate the silent scenes of pragmatic policymaking.

The India Way: Strategies for an Uncertain World

  1. Jaishankar

While there is only one S. Jaishankar suggested by the title of the book – the strategist – its pages reveal a trinity of Jaishankars: the scholar, the diplomat, and the politician. Jaishankar, the Ph.D. scholar from Jawaharlal Nehru University, shows up in his commanding references to history and theory, from Japan’s Meiji restoration to Europe’s balance of power and Asia’s multipolarity. This book may not be deeply footnoted but it speaks clearly to the academic community.

Then there is Jaishankar, the diplomat, engaged in “forging convergences and managing divergences.” His chapters on India’s convergences with Japan and divergences with China respectively, reflect his contrasting experiences in Tokyo and Beijing, as well as his tenure as Foreign Secretary. This helps understand Delhi’s different postures towards these two fellow Asian civilizations.

Finally, there is Jaishankar, the politician. He dismisses India’s strategic past as an accumulation of dogmas with a defensive mindset. After 2014, the minister proclaims, India is now more realist, “more Bharat.” His chapter on India’s native strategic culture in the Mahabharata is clearly an attempt “to capture Indian nationalism in policy terms.”

With the help of time and scholarship, we will be able to discern whether there really is a new “India way” to international affairs, from trade negotiations to the use of force. Until then, we are left with this elegant and useful book to understand how the current External Affairs Minister sees India on its way to navigate an uncertain world where “the shelf life of old normals has expired.”

Rajesh Chadha

Trading for Development in the Age of Global Value Chains: World Development Report 2020

Caroline Freund and Aaditya Mattoo (World Bank) and Pol Antras (Harvard University)

The release of the World Development Report 2020, in November 2019, incidentally, coincided with the beginning of the COVID-19 crisis. It states, “GVCs can continue to boost growth, create better jobs, and reduce poverty provided that developing countries undertake deeper reforms and industrial countries pursue open, predictable policies.” It further states that “GVCs can boost trade, incomes, jobs and prosperity” and “national policies can boost GVC participation”. China has been the most dominant player regarding its integration in the Global Value Chains (GVCs). However, the year 2020 has brought to the fore fragility and risks of dependence on China. There has been intense discussion about diversifying the fractured GVCs with many multinational enterprises considering shifting their production platforms away from China. India could have participated actively in GVCs but did not. Indian industry, as well as the government, have been quite keen to play a significant role. India needs to adopt policies enabling active participation in GVCs.

CSEP Recommends

Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?

Edited by: Rahul TongiaAnurag Sehgal, with Puneet Kamboj

Listed in Bookauthority’s top Energy Policy reads globally for 2021, this anthology is amongst the most comprehensive in-depth accounts of India’s energy needs in a changing energy eco-system. Across 18 chapters, various experts look at numerous aspects of the future of energy transition in India, away from coal.

Want to know more? Read this extended blog that summarises many issues and insights from the book, here: https://csep.org/blog/future-of-coal-in-india-smooth-transition-or-bumpy-road-ahead/

The post 2020 reading list: Scholars at CSEP recommend first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/2020-reading-list-scholars-at-csep-recommend/feed/ 0 893571
Beyond binaries: The coming together of Indian non-profit and for-profit organisations http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-binaries-the-coming-together-of-indian-non-profit-and-for-profit-organisations/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=beyond-binaries-the-coming-together-of-indian-non-profit-and-for-profit-organisations http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-binaries-the-coming-together-of-indian-non-profit-and-for-profit-organisations/#respond Mon, 28 Dec 2020 10:24:17 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=893545 The study looks at the evolving dynamics of the civil society/non-profit sector and examines variations in governance, changes in funding etc. which influence positive outcomes, while also looking at what constitutes positive outcomes.

The post Beyond binaries: The coming together of Indian non-profit and for-profit organisations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The civil society/non-profit organisation (CSO/NPO) space in India has undergone major changes during the last decade, and more so over the last five years. Some of these changes have happened as a consequence of broader social-political-economic shifts. Others have been triggered by the entry of corporates in the development space after the Indian government introduced Section 135 in the Companies Act, mandating that 2% of average net profits made during the three immediately preceding fiscal years must be spent on Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities. The amendment, passed in 2013, brought together for-profit and not-for-profit organisations that were traditionally not used to working together. In this changed context, conversations around measurement and impact, and governance have taken on a new dimension. A new study from the Centre for Social and Economic Progress attempts to explore these shifts and understand how these two vastly different sectors are trying to find the unique synergy to work together.

The year 2020 brought along its own set of challenges – first the pandemic and then the sudden changes announced by the government in the FCRA Act.[1] It may be too early to predict the long-term effects of these events, but they will certainly have implications for the state of CSOs/NPOs. Consequences in the short term are already being felt. While the CSO sector mobilised and responded to the challenges thrown up by COVID-19, it also saw a sudden cut-back or shift in CSR funding. The money has been moving to the PM CARES Fund or directly to COVID-19 relief efforts. Availability of funds for COVID-19 related activities increased, but many organisations, especially smaller ones, are reported to have seen a sudden drop in overall funding for the year. Many of these changes are likely to not be temporary and could provoke deeper structural shifts.

At CSEP, our researchers will study the evolving dynamics of the CSO/NPO sector and examine factors that influence positive outcomes. There are many types of governance structures in this space. Each organisation has some level of flexibility to create its own unique governance model. We will look at how different organisations define good governance and which factors ensure that an organisation is well-governed.

There are several other important questions: What constitutes impact? How do you measure it? Would it include factors that are easily measurable, such as number of toilets built or people provided skill trainings, or is it the long term, at times intangible, changes (such as increase in household incomes or reduction in violence against women) that define the success of projects? We will look at the relationship between organisational governance and impact, whether the two are linked. According to preliminary conversations with experts, there is adequate recognition of the need to track both. However, that which is tangible and is easily measured garners more favour.

Achieving targets and approaching a project with a set goal in mind could be leading to a devaluation of the immeasurable changes that take place when you serve the community.

We also want to assess how funding patterns have changed over the years and how organisations have adapted accordingly. Funding trends have changed radically over the last five-ten years. Money flows in from various sources like individual donors, corporations and philanthropies – both Indian and foreign.  Each kind of donor comes with their own preferences, approach to work and ideas of governance. How have changes in funding led to changes in the NGO sector’s strategies, processes and cultures is another area of enquiry for us.  

Through in-depth interviews with experts in this space, we aim to get the leaders’ insights into the changes and how they think of the future trends. We will supplement the qualitative enquiry with quantitative analysis using targeted surveys of CSOs/NPOs in India. We will analyse the survey responses to understand the shifts occurring within the sector (with a focus on funding, impact and governance), including the changes caused by COVID-19 and the recent FCRA amendments. Our study attempts to make a thorough assessment of these shifts, identify the best practices and offer a framework for understanding impact and good governance. 

The rapid churning in the social sector over the last decade has been most significant, and we hope that our research advances the conversation in terms of making the most of these changes – building for the future, without giving up the strong foundations and rich legacy of voluntary work in the country.

Online Survey powered by SoGoSurvey
Provided by SoGoSurvey

The post Beyond binaries: The coming together of Indian non-profit and for-profit organisations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/beyond-binaries-the-coming-together-of-indian-non-profit-and-for-profit-organisations/feed/ 0 893545
Buddhism and the India-China rivalry in the Himalayas http://stg.csep.org/blog/buddhism-and-the-india-china-rivalry-in-the-himalayas/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=buddhism-and-the-india-china-rivalry-in-the-himalayas http://stg.csep.org/blog/buddhism-and-the-india-china-rivalry-in-the-himalayas/#respond Thu, 19 Nov 2020 08:42:31 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=885942 Himalayan geopolitics is defined by a complex web of political and cultural ties among the diverse sects of Buddhism.

The post Buddhism and the India-China rivalry in the Himalayas first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Kanishkh Kanodia, an intern with the Foreign Policy and Security team at CSEP, interviews Ambassador. P. Stobdan, on his book “The Great Game in the Buddhist Himalayas” published in October 2019 by Penguin Random House India. 

Recent events along the Line of Actual Control (LAC) have prompted a re-evaluation of the multiple irritants in the Sino-Indian relations. An essential one among them is the question of Tibetan exiles who escaped the Chinese government’s political crackdown in 1959 to seek refuge in India.

In ‘The Great Game in the Buddhist Himalayas’, Stobdan centers Tibet and Tibetan Buddhism at the heart of India and China’s quest for dominance over the Himalayas to argue for a realignment of India’s Tibetan policy, away from US policy goals. The author, a former Indian diplomat and a resident of Ladakh, draws from his personal experiences as a Buddhist and his visits to Tibet to argue that New Delhi has failed in leveraging Tibet to fulfil its policy objectives vis-à-via China. His critique points to a broader shortcoming – India’s lack of comprehension of the political and religious forces in the Himalayas that has compromised its strategic position in the region.

The book contains a detailed and nuanced profile of Buddhism in the Himalayas – from Ladakh to Arunachal – to highlight the complex web of political and cultural ties among the diverse sects of Buddhism. It explains the tensions among the different sects of Tibetan Buddhism and its impact on the geopolitics of the Himalayan region and Sino-Indian relations. It also prompts a deeper introspection of how India should recraft its Himalayan and Tibet policies to suit its strategic goals.

Kanishkh Kanodia: Your book talks of Prime Minister Modi’s China policy post the Wuhan summit as resetting Sino-Indian ties and ‘altering the game of using Tibet for leverage against China’ (pp. 224). How have recent events between India and China reshaped ties and the Tibetan leverage you talk of? 

Stobdan: I think Prime Minister Modi genuinely tried to reset India’s ties with China through the Wuhan process that began in May 2018. It was a top-bottom approach to build trust with the top Chinese leadership. I suspected that the idea was to address the two key inter-related issues – boundary and Tibet – that have fundamentally ruined India and China’s relationship since the late 1950s.

The expectation was that India, under PM Modi, would seek to modify some of India’s moribund policies including Tibet’s issue that New Delhi has indirectly used as a pressure point by allowing the Dalai Lama to shape the course of India–China relations. In doing so, India was simply pursuing U.S. goals vis-à-vis China. But the nature of Washington’s Dalai Lama card had been to prudently use him to gain greater diplomatic and economic leverage in Beijing. Washington, and not New Delhi, enjoyed a greater say on Tibet against China even in terms of offering a mediator’s role between China and the Dalai Lama.

India, after the Wuhan talks, ably altered the game of using Tibet for leverage against China rather than simply getting played by the agenda pursued by others.

The Modi government probably learnt from Western proclivities. So, India, after the Wuhan talks, ably altered the game of using Tibet for leverage against China rather than simply getting played by the agenda pursued by others. We can see from recent events that the nature of India’s playing the Tibet card has changed.

KK: You extensively explain how the power of the “traditional spirit of Sino-Tibetan relations” (pp.238) and the deepening of China’s commercial interests in Tibet have ameliorated the relationship between them. Do such cultural and economic links overshadow the deep-seated political tensions that exist in Sino-Tibetan relations?

PS: Tibet was never an advanced region in the Western sense, but Tibetans were never poor economically. Under the Chinese system, Tibet has proven its economic vitality. There isn’t much poverty there. The region is relatively rich – the reason for China to hold on to its control. In fact, China has brought about lots of modernity in Tibet that has perhaps changed the region. At the same time, Tibetans still cling to their old Tibetan rituals and customs. Undoubtedly, the Dalai Lama is still revered as a god-king by the people.

One cannot underestimate the deeply embedded ties between the Tibetan and Chinese religions, cultures, and belief systems. They share a history of at least 300 years of mutual assimilation and acculturation (Sinification) process that lasted until the communists took over China in 1949. In fact, during the Qing period (1644–1912), China formally adopted the Mongol-style sponsorship of Tibetan Lamaism and patronised the Gelugpa sect as China’s official religion – the institution of the Dalai Lama and his Ganden Phodrang authority was its core.

The Mongol-Tibetan-Manchu trio shared a common bond established through a celestial order. The spirit of this traditional convivial relationship among them would have continued had the Communists not taken over China in 1949. The current political tension only revolves around the differences between the Dalai Lama and the Communist Party of China.

KK: The Dalai Lama’s 2017 visit to Tawang is mentioned as a significant and controversial event in the book. Would you consider the visit to be an astute strategic calculation by India to deter China? 

PS: I am not sure whether the Dalai Lama’s visit to Tawang in 2017 was a part of any strategic calculation. It was perhaps more a tactical move by India to simply use him as a pressure point to settle scores with China, especially to retaliate for the way Beijing had tried to block the listing of Masood Azhar on the UN terror list, prevented India’s entry to the Nuclear Suppliers Group, pressed ahead with the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) project in Pakistan-occupied Kashmir, adopted an unyielding stance on the boundary issue, and so forth.

The Dalai Lama’s 2017 Tawang visit also took place against the backdrop of President Trump’s two-day summit with President Xi Jinping held on April 6 and 7 at Mar-a-Lago. The expectation was that Trump would push Xi to the edge on human rights and the Tibet issue. However, the talks were overshadowed by discussions on trade and tariffs. Before the Dalai Lama’s visit, the U.S. Ambassador Richard Verma also visited Tawang, which irked the Chinese.

KK: You talk of how India’s scepticism forced the Karmapa to seek exile in a different country and stress on the importance of his return (pp. 152-171). How will that change India’s policy towards Tibet? 

PS: The Karmapa institution is very important for India because his sect – the Kagyu – holds a predominant position in the Indian Himalayas. There have been lots of controversies about the 17th Karmapa, Ogyen Trinley Dorje, ever since he landed in India in January 2000. Many believed his escape from Tibet was facilitated by the Chinese for the purpose of him getting a hold of the “sacred black hat” lying in Rumtek Monastery, Sikkim. But the key issue is how the Karmapa fits into the India-China-Tibet contestation and his utility as a geopolitical object. The general impression has been that the Karmapa is the second-most important Tibetan figure after the Dalai Lama.

In 2001, the Karmapa said he would not return to Tibet until the Dalai Lama did. But after 18 years, the Karmapa suddenly disappeared from India in May 2017. He was later found to be staying in New Jersey’s Wharton State Forest area. We do not know of the reason behind his fleeing from India, but in a video message in March 2018, telecast from the U.S, the Karmapa made some stunning revelations. In a 37-minute long “special message”, he narrated, among other things, the difficulties he faced in India, especially the restrictions placed on his movements by Dharamshala and the Indian government. He virtually lived a prisoner’s life in Gyuto monastery under tight surveillance and was kept away from the main Kagyu masters. He confessed to having run into “disharmony and disagreement” with the Indian government that caused some suspicions to the point of him being labelled a “Chinese spy.” For him, the 18 years of “hassled life” in India were disappointing.

The Karmapa’s unwillingness to return has caused a serious hit on the Central Tibetan Administration’s plans. His failing to show up has also exposed the rifts among the Tibetans.

Dorje, the `17th Karmapa, referred to attempts being made to push him into playing a political role against his wish and the interests of Karma Kagyu unity. From his perspective, the Karmapas have historically acted as spiritual rather than political leaders. One might ask the question of why and who was pressing him to take up a political role. His confession also came on the heels of new developments relating to the Tibetan issue, both inside and outside Tibet. It uncovered many hitherto unknown issues related to Tibetan affairs in exile, especially about the discord among Tibetans living in India, including schisms and differences within major Tibetan sects.

Since then, there have been many other developments. There were reports of his talks with the Indian government about his coming back. Not surprisingly, both New Delhi and Dharamshala seemingly tried their best, though in vain, to persuade him to return. Observers speculate that the Karmapa may not return to India as he obtained the Commonwealth of Dominica’s passport in 2018. The Karmapa’s unwillingness to return has caused a serious hit on the Central Tibetan Administration’s plans. His failing to show up has also exposed the rifts among the Tibetans.

Now that Ogyen Trinley Dorje may not return to India, one can conjecture whether he might go to Tsurphu monastery in Tibet – his seat. This would fit into Beijing’s succession plan. For example, in a situation of conflict over two different reincarnations of the next Dalai Lama, Beijing will have two Tibetan stalwarts, the 17th Karmapa and the 11th Panchen Lama, Gyaincain Norbu, to be the 15th Dalai Lama. The Karmapa’s institution is nearly three centuries older than the Dalai Lama’s – China knows this would matter in esoteric-driven politics.

There is a strong and distinct traditional and sectarian difference between Ladakh (Western Himalayan) Buddhism and Tibetan Buddhism along with political undertones.

KK: Ladakh and Tibet have had a long history of common culture, heritage, and traditions. Do you believe the historical linkages between the two regions can be revived despite their political distinction? 

PS: Ladakh has been an old bastion of Indian Buddhism since the days of Kushanas (2nd-3rd Century BC). However, from the 10th-11thcentury onwards, Tibetan-style Lamaism began to strongly influence Ladakh, which continues to remain strong, especially in the central and eastern parts of Ladakh. Yet, there is a strong and distinct traditional and sectarian difference between Ladakh (Western Himalayan) Buddhism and Tibetan Buddhism along with political undertones. I think that the historical and political fault lines or the conflicting interests are too strong for the two regions to seek any form of a common political destiny. If any, the direct beneficiary of such an outcome will be China – something India and the U.S. should avoid.

 

About the expert

Amb P. Stobdan is a well-known strategic affair expert and one of the foremost experts in India on Inner Asian affairs.

He has served as Director/First Secretary at the Embassy of India in Almaty (Kazakhstan). He also served as Joint Director in National Security Council Secretariat (NSCS), Government of India. He also served as the Director/Professor of the Centre for Strategic & Regional Studies in J&K. Until 2012, he was India’s Ambassador to the Republic of Kyrgyzstan.

Ambassador Stobdan is currently the President of the Ladakh International Centre, Leh. He is also a leading columnist. His latest book includes ‘India and Central Asia: The Strategic Dimension’, published by KW Publishers in January 2020.

Email: pstobdan@gmail.com

 

The post Buddhism and the India-China rivalry in the Himalayas first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/buddhism-and-the-india-china-rivalry-in-the-himalayas/feed/ 0 885942
India-Bhutan hydropower cooperation: Perceptions and politics http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-bhutan-hydropower-cooperation-perceptions-and-politics/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-bhutan-hydropower-cooperation-perceptions-and-politics Wed, 11 Nov 2020 07:14:27 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=885861 There is growing public concern in Bhutan regarding India’s increasing development cooperation in the country over the last few years.

The post India-Bhutan hydropower cooperation: Perceptions and politics first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Saneet Chakradeo interviews Udisha Saklani and Cecilia Tortajada on their article “India’s Development Cooperation in Bhutan’s Hydropower Sector: Concerns and Public Perceptions”, published in Water Alternatives, Vol. 12(2), p 734-759, 2019. 

In June 2020, India and Bhutan signed the concession agreement for the 600MW Kholongchhu hydroelectric project, making it the first 50:50 joint venture between the two countries, as opposed to the government-to-government agreements of the past. Speaking on the development, India’s Foreign Minister S. Jaishankar called the hydropower sector “the most visible symbol of the mutually beneficial bilateral cooperation” between India and Bhutan.

Although the concession agreement marked a significant step in the relationship, it came after the project witnessed significant delays since being finalized in 2008, as a part of India’s commitment to help Bhutan create a total of 10,000 MW of installed capacity by 2020.

Moreover, there have been growing public concerns in Bhutan regarding India’s increasing development cooperation in the country over the last few years. The beginning of the 21st century brought many structural changes to Bhutanʼs economy and polity, contributing to a growing public engagement in the country, including public debates on Indian assistance to Bhutan. Indian grants and loans have been directed largely towards energy and infrastructure development, with the resulting development of hydropower, construction, and energy-intensive industries. Consequently, as of July 2017, Bhutan’s debt to India for the three major ongoing projects at the time – Mangdechhu, Punatsangchhu 1 and 2 stood at approximately ₹12,300 crores, accounting for 77% of the country’s total debt and 87% of its GDP. In March 2017, The World Bank reported Bhutanʼs external debt to GDP ratio as 99%, making it one of the ten most indebted among the 73 low-and-middle-income International Development Association countries.

In this context, Udisha Saklani and Cecilia Tortajada, in their article, survey India’s development cooperation in Bhutan and its changing public perceptions. While offering insights into the importance of development cooperation in Indo-Bhutan relations, the article uses the bilateral relationship as a case to propose possible lessons for India in managing its development cooperation with its smaller neighbours. As climate concerns assume greater relevance in shaping bilateral relations in the region, the authors suggest prudent measures for India’s energy diplomacy in the neighbourhood.

Saneet Chakradeo: Your article analyses India’s development cooperation with Bhutan, especially in the hydropower sector, and how the Bhutanese perceive it. While the official discourse on development cooperation is framed around strong commercial interests and mutual benefit, how differently do the Bhutanese people view India’s growing development aid to the country?

Saklani and Tortajada: India and Bhutan have been engaging in hydropower cooperation since the 1980s and for the most part, this relationship has been hailed as a “win-win” cooperation by both the governments. The two neighbouring countries have historically shared a strong relationship built on cultural and political closeness with India ‘guiding’ Bhutan’s defence and foreign policy until 2007. However, the political and economic conditions in both countries have changed significantly, particularly in the new millennium.  Bhutan has made a significant shift from absolute monarchic rule to a constitutional democratic system of governance, while India has accelerated its development assistance programme with a dedicated focus on infrastructure-building.

As compared to an earlier time, public awareness and opinion in Bhutan regarding Indian investment policies have generated much debate and discussion – and not all of it is positive.

Our paper relies on government documents and media reports in India and Bhutan, as well as official narratives in New Delhi and Thimpu in order to understand the changing views and perspectives of the relationship between the Indian development assistance programme and the relative maturity of Bhutan’s energy generation strategy that relies solely on hydropower construction and trade. We find that as compared to an earlier time, public awareness and opinion in Bhutan regarding Indian investment policies have generated much debate and discussion – and not all of it is positive. This is because of concerns regarding the environmental impact of large hydropower infrastructure and on allowing foreign capital and labour in a small country that is heavily dependent on hydropower revenues (following the “all eggs in the same basket” argument raised by some critics).

We propose that if India has plans to expand its presence in Bhutan through future hydropower projects and other investments, it must engage with an enlarged group of stakeholders, rather than using purely formal diplomatic channels, and complement its efforts with a Track II diplomatic engagement strategy that involves non-state actors such as citizen groups, NGOs, and the private sector to quell any rising apprehensions with regard to its bilateral cooperation with Bhutan.

SC: Your article mentions that the policy discourse in Bhutan has shifted towards re-strategizing the country’s energy policy, with a call to review investments in hydropower, as well as planning for the long-term sustainability of Bhutan’s energy sector. Given emerging climate change concerns and Bhutan’s ‘middle path’ approach to development, how significant is the challenge to maintain and improve energy cooperation between the two countries in the near future? 

S&T: Bhutan seemed like an excellent case study to analyse the Catch-22 situation of choosing between economic growth and preservation of socio-natural capital (often imagined to be mutually exclusive goals). The Bhutanese leadership has traditionally followed a development path that relies on principles of moderation to achieve developmental goals without making large compromises on Bhutan’s environment, its aspirations for self-sufficiency in energy production, and its sovereign rights. The concept of Gross National Happiness (GNH) is a reflection of this thinking in Bhutan’s highest policy circles. Given the rising public debt of hydropower construction due to loans, increasing project delays making hydropower much less profitable than its theoretical value, and climate change risks such as glacial outbursts (GLOF) and altered availability of water which affects hydropower generation, the situation can quickly become precarious.

This is a difficult challenge for any lower or middle-income country – all the more for Bhutan which is landlocked and sandwiched between two Asian giants, India and China, that are often embroiled in diplomatic standoffs, territorial conflicts and geopolitical rivalry. For countries to continue engaging in energy cooperation, it is vital to recognize a greater role of science in water diplomacy and use of non-structured, flexible mechanisms for interaction which keeps negotiation open-minded, fluid and in certain cases, even altruistic given the unequal risks and costs of climate and environmental change on individual countries. It is imperative for parties to give top priority to trust and value creation through recognition of ambiguity, different types of uncertainties and entrenched complexities in relation to water sharing and energy development and trade.

SC: You have previously written about how India’s long-term transboundary energy collaboration with Bhutan is different from other countries in the region. Can the India-Bhutan energy relationship be replicated for improving cooperation in the region?

S&T: We have argued that India and Bhutan share a unique partnership, where trust has played a very important role, rather than a representative or replicable model of diplomacy. Bhutan’s economy is closely linked to India through a combination of Indian grants, loans, revenue earned from export of hydroelectricity, and trade in other commodities such as food, fuel, iron and steel, plastic etc. India generously funded Bhutan’s first two five-year development plans (1961-66 and 1966-71) in entirety and continues to contribute to Bhutan’s development vision through sharing of monetary resources and expertise, particularly in the energy sector. Similarly, Bhutan has remained cognizant of Indian’s security and strategic interests in the region against the backdrop of tensions with China. Such mutual gestures have helped seal a strong friendship between the two countries.

Despite the uniqueness of the bilateral relationship, there are some lessons that are useful for Indian diplomacy and for partnerships in South Asia. First, given India’s position as a dominant economic and military power in South Asia, it must accelerate its development cooperation programme and facilitate cross-border flows to match its discursive and strategic positioning. With China’s rapidly growing influence in South Asia (supported by projects such as the Belt and Road Initiative) and strong economic capabilities to give out cheap loans and grants to resource-strapped countries, it is natural for other countries in the region to expect India to hike up its support for meeting their infrastructure and development needs and enhance mutual benefits of economic engagement.

Second, India must focus on bridging the gap between what it promises and what is ultimately delivered. In the first phase of hydropower construction in Bhutan, the Indian government and public sector companies successfully initiated and completed projects in a timely manner. However, the second phase of construction (post-2007) has been a more underwhelming experience with several delays in project implementation and the resultant cost overruns which have become the greatest area of concern for partner countries. It is important for India to develop its reputation as a reliable partner that is capable of executing projects in an efficient manner.

Third, India must invest in enhancing its public diplomacy in neighbouring countries. Cultural-historical linkages and sustained close relationship with Bhutanese political leaders have helped India maintain a strong image in Bhutan. So far, Indian companies, labour, expertise and construction material have supported majority of hydropower activity in Bhutan leading to concerns about jobless growth and squeezing of opportunities for Bhutanese stakeholders. Some critics argue that Bhutanʼs hydropower potential belongs not only to the national government but also to the people of Bhutan.

A greater thrust on improving communication channels with other stakeholders such as entrepreneurs, media, scholars, and the general public will go a long way in generating positive outcomes for India.

In this scenario, India must make a greater effort to project itself as a development partner that cares about the larger welfare of the Bhutanese population, and not just movement of Indian capital, procurement of contracts and relationship with the Bhutanese political elites. Given the rapidly changing face of diplomacy and the landscape of international development, a greater thrust on improving communication channels with other stakeholders such as entrepreneurs, media, scholars, and the general public will go a long way in generating positive outcomes for India and reducing the space for suspicion and mistrust between the two partner countries. As recent events show, even in the case of Bhutan, it is becoming increasingly important for India to widen its public outreach to consolidate trust, support and solidarity, both through monetary efforts under its development cooperation programme and by opening up pathways for more equal negotiations with the smaller countries.

 

About the experts

Udisha Saklani is a public policy analyst and a doctoral student in Human Geography at the University of Cambridge. Her PhD project focuses on transboundary cooperation in water and energy in the Himalayas.

Email: us267@cam.ac.uk

University profile: https://www.geog.cam.ac.uk/people/saklani/

 

Dr.Cecilia Tortajada is a Senior Research Fellow at the Lee Kuan Yew School of Public Policy, National University of Singapore. The focus of her work is on impacts of global changes on water resources, environment and food.

Email: Cecilia.tortajada@nus.edu.sg

University profile: https://lkyspp.nus.edu.sg/our-people/faculty/tortajada-cecilia

 

 

 

The post India-Bhutan hydropower cooperation: Perceptions and politics first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
885861
Reforms in the mining sector: Comments and recommendations http://stg.csep.org/blog/reforms-in-the-mining-sector-comments-and-recommendations/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=reforms-in-the-mining-sector-comments-and-recommendations http://stg.csep.org/blog/reforms-in-the-mining-sector-comments-and-recommendations/#respond Fri, 25 Sep 2020 08:56:03 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894832 The Ministry of Mines issued a notice on proposed reforms in the mining sector under nine different categories. This blog piece gives recommendations and suggestions in response to these reforms as well as additional comments on making the mining sector a catalyst for economic growth and development.

The post Reforms in the mining sector: Comments and recommendations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
On August 24, 2020, the Ministry of Mines, Government of India, had issued a Notice on proposed reforms in the mining sector under nine different categories. The last date of submitting comments and suggestions was September 3, 2020. Our recommendations are as follows.

1. Increasing mineral production and employment generation by redefining the norms of exploration of mineral blocks and ensuring seamless transition from exploration to production

Why should exploration be the primary responsibility of the Geological Survey of India (GSI), Mineral Exploration Corporation Limited (MECL), and state Departments of Mines and Geology (DMGs)? These institutions may work on publishing the baseline data. The Ministry of Mines accepts that the process takes time and is ridden with uncertainties. Further, the exploration of minerals has its own geological idiosyncrasies. The respective mining companies / junior experts can undertake such exploration activities relatively efficiently, thus saving precious resources. Why can’t mining companies, juniors, in particular, do this as a profit-making business enterprise? In an efficient business model, the explorers may not need funding from NMET. NMET may not have sufficient resources to compensate the exploration companies. The exploration budget of India is very small compared to other successful mining jurisdictions.

2. Resolving legacy issues to move towards an auction only regime for allocation of mineral resources

Amendments in Sections 10A(2)(b) and 10A(2)(c) don’t make a convincing case. These have been subject to a debate around why appropriate actions were missing. An active and robust policy could have helped grant Prospecting Licences (PLs) and Mining Leases (MLs) well within the allocated period. The logic of the exploration expenditure incurred is somewhat fragile, given that it might lead to lengthy legal battles with regards to the amount which had been spent by respective companies. Even if such estimates can be agreed to, there wouldn’t be reimbursement of the present value of the lost prospective future income stream. There is a need to revisit the treatment of legacy cases.

3. Removing the distinction between captive and non-captive mines

Removing the distinction between captive and merchant mining is a welcome step. A level playing field will allow merchant miners to become more competitive and innovative, resulting in cheaper downstream products and a boost to exports. However, it is not clear why captive miners can sell only 50% of the total mineral excavated in the previous year. The captive miners or merchant miners in collusion with downstream plants can lead to market price distortions. The prices declared by the Indian Bureau of Mines (IBM) need to be fair, objective, and transparent, to ensure that revenues to the exchequer are not hit. Another factor is how can the high auction bids, sometimes above 100%, be economically justified in the backdrop of efficient operations of the mines.

4. Developing a transparent mineral index

Transparency in estimating the mineral index of non-fuel minerals such as that for coal would lead to efficient allocation of resources with adequate returns to the exchequer. The prices have to be determined in the open market and computed as rigorously as for the coal index.

5. Clarify the definition of illegal mining

Illegal mining has to be discouraged through appropriate punitive actions.

6. Rationalise stamp duty

A step in the right direction.

7. Amendments to DMF Rules

Building and rebuilding tangible assets, such as medical care facilities, education centres, and transport links are useful for long-term socio-economic development of mining-affected communities. For short-term gains, the focus should also be given to skill development, to ensure income security for the affected districts.

8. Bringing unused mineral blocks into production to generate employment

A step in the right direction.

9. Review of the functioning of NMET

An autonomous NMET would be able to execute the tasks assigned to it. However, it will not have enough resources to meet India’s exploration needs.

Additional Comments[2]

The National Mineral Policy (2019)[3] (NMP) provides a vision of how India should implement future policy to accelerate the growth of the production of non-fuel minerals. The Indian government has set multi-pronged targets to advance socio-economic growth in India. The NMP states: “The outcomes expected from these policy proposals are, an increase in the production of MCDR (Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 2017) minerals (in value terms) by 200% in 7 years; and on the other hand, reduce the trade deficit in minerals sector by 50% in 7 years.”[4] Other related targeted expectations include: to make India a US$5 trillion economy by 2024-25; to increase India’s exports from US$500 billion in 2018 up to US$1000 billion by 2024, and doubling farmers’ income by 2022-23 (from its 2015-16 level). These targets seem more distant now that the fifth bi-monthly Monetary Policy Statement of the RBI (December 5, 2019) states that India is likely to grow by only 5% in 2019-20. All the subsectors of the economy have taken growth hits.

The NMP unambiguously states that exploration, extraction, and management should add to the country’s economic development by boosting domestic industry (Make in India) and reducing import dependence. It assures a regulatory environment that is conducive for “ease of doing business with simpler, transparent and time-bound procedures for obtaining clearances”, along with the security of tenures with rights of transferability of concessions. The Indian Bureau of Mines (IBM) and the State DMGs would be the regulatory agencies through e-governance and IT-enabled monitoring along the mining chain. The state would facilitate and regulate exploration and mining activities, collect taxes, and provide infrastructure. Incentives shall be provided to private entities to invest in state-of-the-art technology. The policy also mentions “an endeavour to auction mineral blocks with pre-embedded statutory clearances”.  However, it would be pertinent to review and suggest alternative methods of allocation that are objective, fair, and transparent.

The government agencies would continue to perform the tasks of survey and exploration and encourage the private sector to undertake exploration activities. Public funds shall be used to explore areas that lack private investments due to uncertainty.

Efforts shall be made to prospect and explore minerals where India has the geological potential, but low resource and reserve base. These include “energy-critical minerals, fertiliser minerals, precious metals and stones, strategic minerals and other deep-seated minerals which are otherwise difficult to access and for which the country is mainly dependent on imports.”

A much-needed single regulatory authority has been envisioned in the policy: “A unified authority in the form of an inter-ministerial body under Ministry of Mines, with members like Ministry of Coal, Ministry of Earth Sciences, MoEF&CC, Ministry of Tribal Affairs, Ministry of Rural Development, Ministry of Panchayati Raj, Ministry of Steel, including state governments, shall be constituted to institutionalise a mechanism for ensuring sustainable mining with adequate concerns for the environment and socio-economic issues in the mining areas, and to advise the Government on rates of royalty, dead rent etc.” It will be ideal if the authority executes its work to facilitate optimum utilisation of mineral resources.

NMP 2019 states: “Under the ‘Make in India’ initiative, the Government of India aims to increase the share of the manufacturing sector in the economy. This national initiative requires a holistic development of the mineral sector on a sustainable basis to fulfil the demand of downstream industries dependent on mineral/ore supply.”

Finally, “The success of this national mineral policy will be critical in propelling India on to a loftier development trajectory. Successful implementation of this policy and shall be ensured by achieving a national consensus among various key stakeholders and their commitments to fulfil its underlying principles and objectives.”

The recent set of Atmanirbhar reforms of the mineral sector announced by the Finance Minister under the Part-4 of post-COVID-19 stimulus package are likely to give a significant boost to the exploration of all the minerals, including critical minerals.[5]

While attention needs to be paid to efficient exploration and allocation of leases to all non-fuel minerals, critical minerals including the rare-earth elements (REEs) need focused attention. KABIL should consult with private sector players, from mining as well as manufacturing, to seek useful and practical suggestions for becoming self-reliant in critical minerals and downstream products now, and in future.

As recommended by the DST-CEEW study, a not-for-profit National Centre for Mineral Targeting (NCMT) should be set up, exploration and R&D in mining and mineral processing technologies should be enhanced, and due consideration should be given to the strategic acquisition of mines abroad and signing of diplomatic and trade agreements.

While exploration and extraction of critical minerals are essential, it can be accomplished commercially only when the entire value chain is developed simultaneously, from exploration to mining, to extraction, and product development. Investors should be incentivised to make risky investments with the assurance of the security of title and tenure.

Improving the post-leasing clearance mechanism is one of the most important reforms for making mining activity efficient. Instead of getting separate environmental and social clearances, the evaluation may be done based on one integrated impact assessment, viz. environment and social impact assessment report (ESIA). This comprehensive report would factor in the environment, forest and biodiversity, and the local community aspects of the mining project under consideration.[6]

In a previous piece, we argued that to become “a globally competitive and self-reliant sustainable mining hub, India must ensure mineral security for the 21st century, provide inter-generationally optimum resources to the states’ exchequers and adequate returns to the mining companies, rely on state-of-the-art technology and create additional jobs, while ensuring environmental sustainability and welfare of the affected communities.”[7] It is only then that the mining sector can become a real catalyst for growth and development.

 

The post Reforms in the mining sector: Comments and recommendations first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/reforms-in-the-mining-sector-comments-and-recommendations/feed/ 0 894832
India needs to strengthen, not dilute, environmental assessments http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-needs-to-strengthen-not-dilute-environmental-assessments/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-needs-to-strengthen-not-dilute-environmental-assessments http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-needs-to-strengthen-not-dilute-environmental-assessments/#respond Mon, 07 Sep 2020 00:44:01 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894833 The Indian government’s proposed EIA draft has been criticised for diluting the environment assessment process. What are good international precedents that India can follow?

The post India needs to strengthen, not dilute, environmental assessments first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Setting up development projects is an essential activity for an economy. Development projects including roads, ports, airports, dams, manufacturing units, power generation, irrigation, mining activities, among others, are crucial for growth and development. While these projects add to the national income and jobs, they also have a potentially harmful impact on the environment, including air, water, forests, soil, and ecology, which, in turn, can adversely affect local communities. Therefore,  it is essential to conduct a comprehensive Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) of the benefits and costs of a project at the stage of its conception to safeguard the environment as well as the livelihood and health of local communities.

On April 11, 2020, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) published and sought comments on a draft Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2020, which was widely criticised as diluting already weak environmental protections. The notification proposes exemptions to a certain category of projects, post facto clearances, reducing the public consultation process, among other things. In the light of this move, we take a closer look at the global good practices around environment assessment and the way forward for India.

Global Context

The United States introduced the Environment Impact Assessment protocol through its the National Environmental Protection Act (NEPA) in 1969 and became the first country to have done so. The UN Conference on the Human Environment, held in Sweden in June 1972, focused on international environmental issues. Consequently, the UN Environment Programme (UNEP) was set up in December 1972, to coordinate global efforts towards sustainability and to safeguard the natural environment.

A substantive body of literature has emerged on good practices for assessing the environmental impact of a forthcoming development project. Joseph et al. (2015) provide an overview of good practices in environmental assessment.[1] There has been an impressive advance in the knowledge and practice of environmental impact assessment methodologies. However, there are still some deficiencies that need attention.  These deficiencies include the lack of information on appropriate structure of the environment assessment appeal process, contextual factors regarding the application of the proposed practices in specific settings, and verification of links between processes and desired outcomes. The paper provides a summary of good environment impact assessment practices and evaluates them through a survey of experts and practitioners working for the development of oil sands in Canada.

Arnold and Hanna (2020) of the Canadian International Resources and Development Institute (CIRDI), University of British Columbia, provide a detailed account of the best practices in environmental assessment using case studies and application to mining.[2] The paper highlights the need to provide comprehensive information for all development impacts, including legitimate engagement with stakeholders and proactive environmental management. The participatory process should create a complete understanding of the economic, social, health and biophysical effects of the development project. The ways of mitigating any negative impacts need to be identified and implemented.  Positive engagement with communities builds trust between public, regulators and the developers. The future of research on environmental assessment requires its integration with cumulative effects and strategic evaluations.

The Intergovernmental Forum on Mining, Minerals and Sustainable Development (IGF), International Institute for Sustainable Development (IISD) has published a document on Guidance for Governments on improving legal frameworks for Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) (2020).[3] The environmental and social impacts of mining projects are not adequately evaluated before the mining activity commences. Such oversights can have negative repercussions on the mining companies, communities, and the government, resulting in disputes. ESIA should aim to provide a clear roadmap for a beneficent mining activity for the mining companies as well as local communities.

The UN Environment Programme report (2018) provides a global review of the legislation on assessing environmental impacts.[4] It considers the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) and the Strategic Environment Assessment (SEA) to be highly relevant for achieving the Sustainable Development Agenda for 2030. The report outlines an overview of the current status of the EIA and SEA legislation across a select group of countries. It reviews the significant steps, viz. 1) Screening; 2) Scoping and Impact Analysis; 3) Review of the EIA/SEA report; 4) Decision-making; 5) Follow-up and Adaptive Management and 6) Public Participation. The critical findings and trends convey some important messages. While some countries have been strengthening the EIA process, there has been weakening observed in some other countries. The acceptance of the legal requirements of SEA has been slow. Many of the national legislations have taken legal approaches to the EIA process, without taking into consideration the issues of strategic planning. While the public participation requirements are included in the EIA process, the meetings are held at the scoping and review stage. Very few countries include provisions for indigenous communities.

The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement (RFCTLARR) Act was enacted in India in 2013. The Social Impact Assessment (SIA) was made mandatory. SIA is not conducted as a part of EIA, but only at the time of land acquisition for development projects.

Draft Environment Impact Assessment Notification 2020 – Key Criticisms

India had participated in the Stockholm Conference. Discussions on environmental conservation in India commenced since 1972. The Environment (Protection) Act of India was introduced in May 1986 to provide protection and improvement of the environment. This Act later led to the announcement of the first Environment Impact Assessment notification in January 1994, mandating compulsory Environmental Clearance for setting up new projects and expanding existing ones. This notification was followed by multiple amendments and a revised EIA legislation in September 2006.  The period after that witnessed numerous modifications.

The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) published a draft Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2020 (EIA Notification, 2020) on April 11, 2020, in the Gazette of India, which would replace EIA Notification, 2006, and its subsequent amendments. As per the norms, a period of 60 days was given for public consultation on the draft EIA Notification. Subsequently, this period was extended to June 30 due to the COVID-19 pandemic and lockdown. Following a petition in the Delhi High Court, the public consultation deadline for the draft notification was extended to August 11.[5]

The draft EIA Notification, 2020, has been scrutinised in the Indian media, with claims that the new provisions dilute the already weak environmental regulations. Some former bureaucrats spoke out against the notification, and more than 60 bureaucrats co-signed a letter sent to the MoEF&CC and PMO urging for the draft notification to be reconsidered.[6] The signatories comprised of retired bureaucrats, from both central and state governments, including a Former Secretary, Ministry of Environment & Forests. Various environmental organisations, NGOs and other stakeholders have also spoken out against the notification.

The criticisms of the Draft EIA Notification, 2020 can be summed up into four broad points:

  1. Exempting specific projects from preparing an EIA
  2. Formalising ‘post-facto’ clearances
  3. Reducing the efficiency of the public hearing process
  4. Reducing the requirements for compliance monitoring

1. Exempting specific projects or activities from preparing an EIA

Projects classified as ‘B2’ will not be required to prepare an EIA, and will only need to develop an Environment Management Plan (EMP). (Sections 10 (2) and (3)) [7]

Projects undergoing a modernisation of up to 25% increase in production capacity will not be required to revise the EIA report. (Section 16(1))

Forty cases are listed in the draft notification of projects that do not require a prior-Environmental Clearance (prior-EC) or prior-Environmental Permission (prior-EP). (Section 26) Examples of these cases include the extraction of ordinary clay or sand by manual mining, to prepare pots, lamps, toys, earthen tiles, etc.; extraction or sourcing or borrowing of ordinary earth for roads, pipelines, etc.; Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Power projects, Solar Thermal Power Plants and development of Solar Parks, etc.; coal and non-coal mineral prospecting; and maintenance dredging.

2. Formalising ‘post-facto’ clearances

The draft notification provides for cases in which the projects have started operation without a prior-EC. If the Appraisal Committee is satisfied that the project can be run sustainably, then there is a path for the project to obtain an EC through the payment of remediation and fines legally. (Section 22)

The Appraisal Committee may also recommend that the project be closed, along with other actions such as remediation. The relevant authority (State / UT government or pollution control board) may then initiate action under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986. (Appendix XV)

3. Reducing the efficiency of the public consultation process

Public consultation is not required for Category A and B1 project expansions or modernisation if the capacity increase is less than 50%. Additionally, there is an exemption of public consultation for multiple other projects, including some linear projects (such as roads and pipelines) in Border Areas[8] and projects concerning national defence and security or other strategic considerations. (Section 14 (2))

In preparation for the public hearings, only a summary of the EIA report needs to be provided in the regional language of the State or Union Territory. In contrast, the full draft EIA report will need to be written in English. (Section 14 (3))

The public consultation process may be waived if the Regulatory Authority believes that it is not possible to conduct the public hearing in case the local communities are not able to express themselves freely. (Section 14 (8))

The public has a notice period of a minimum of twenty days to furnish their responses to the draft EIA report. This duration is shorter than the previous norm of thirty days. (Appendix 1 (7) 7.1(ii))

4. Reducing the requirements for compliance monitoring

While the previous regulation required the project proponents to submit compliance reports twice every year, the draft notification proposes that compliance reports need to be submitted annually. (Section 20 (4))

Uncovering cases of non-compliance of EC commitments is time-sensitive. One way of uncovering non-compliance is through the compliance reports that the project proponents must submit every year. Fines are levied for not submitting the yearly report on time, and it takes three consecutive years of no submissions before the project’s EC is automatically revoked. (Section 20 (5))

The communities affected by projects are important stakeholders as they would be directly impacted by environmental mismanagement. The draft notification does not have a provision for the public to report violations or non-compliance of the agreed-upon EIA. (Section 22(1) and Section 23(1))

The Way Forward

The issue of exemption of some projects from the requirement of preparing an EIA report is critical for environmental protection. The exempted projects pose a risk to the environment. Thorough due diligence needs must precede before granting such an exemption.

There is some well-researched literature in the context of the good global practices for Environmental Impact Assessments, highlighted in the first section of this note. It is crucial to adopt the best practices in the interest of the long-term sustainability of growth and environment.

The EIA process can seek inputs and guidance from various disciplines, including public policy planning, risk management, administrative law, environmental policy and megaproject planning (Joseph et al., 2015).[9]

A “meaningful public participation” should be integral to preparing an EIA process and should “occur early and be sustained throughout the process”. A forward-looking EIA strategy should ensure that stakeholders are involved in the EIA decision-making process well in advance, and opportunities should be given for “information sharing and problem solving” (Arnold and Hanna, 2020).[10]

The Intergovernmental Forum on Mining, Minerals and Sustainable Development (IGF), International Institute for Sustainable Development underscores the importance of stakeholder and community engagement grievance mechanisms in the monitoring process, which can help in avoiding conflicts between communities and companies (IISD, 2020).[11] Very few countries include provisions for indigenous communities (UNEP, 2020).[12]

The Minister for Environment, Forest, and Climate Change has taken note of public criticism. He spoke on August 10 saying, “How can a draft notification [referring to the draft EIA Notification, 2020] be protested? It’s still a draft. We’ve received several suggestions after soliciting comment for nearly 150 days as opposed to the norm of 60 days. We will consider these and after that a final notification will be prepared.”[13]

We hope that the government will take into consideration the points raised during the public consultation process as well as pay heed to the suggestions from international good practices when it revises the draft notification.

The post India needs to strengthen, not dilute, environmental assessments first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-needs-to-strengthen-not-dilute-environmental-assessments/feed/ 0 894833
India’s energy transition: Coal is down but not out http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-energy-transition-coal-is-down-but-not-out/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-energy-transition-coal-is-down-but-not-out http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-energy-transition-coal-is-down-but-not-out/#respond Mon, 07 Sep 2020 00:20:28 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=894831 The coal transition is already underway. There may be a lot of uncertainty, but what is even more certain is that the future will not look like the past – and it shouldn’t. The future should be cleaner, more inclusive, more efficient, and more secure, not to mention cost-effective.

The post India’s energy transition: Coal is down but not out first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Future of Coal in India

Order the Book

First published 2020 by Notion Press and Brookings India, ISBN: 978-1-64828-845-6, © 2020

Watch the panel discussion and launch

A new book, Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?, edited by Rahul Tongia and Anurag Sehgal, with Puneet Kamboj, examines all aspects of coal’s future in India, covering the below questions (and more) in greater detail.

Why is India’s coal consumption rising while almost all countries are phasing out coal?

India’s coal consumption is the second largest in the world after China’s but when we normalize it per capita, India’s consumption in 2019 was measurably below the world average. This is if we measure in tons, and if we further normalize this by the quality of coal (calorific value) then Indian consumption is close to half the world average. In addition, given limited heating requirements and relatively low ownership of cars, coal use dominates overall energy. Thus, it is the low base of energy consumption per capita that drives rising coal consumption.

Global snapshot of coal, 2019: Top 10 Producers and Respective Consumption

(references and methodology for the table can be found at Table 1.1 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

 

India has some of the world’s most ambitious renewable energy plans, but unlike many other countries such as the UK or the US, it hasn’t found too many traditional alternatives such as natural gas. It’s for these reasons that while other countries may be ready to phase out coal, India’s first target should be accelerating the plateau time period for coal.

The picture is starker when we consider cumulative carbon use or carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions. While India isn’t the main “culprit” for climate change, it does have high growth ahead, and thus is very serious about limiting its emissions. It also faces disproportional impacts of climate change, and needs to focus on both mitigation and adaptation.

Solar bids are down to Rs. 2.36/kWh, while coal-based power is much more expensive. Why are people still discussing coal if it’s being sunset?

Different countries have their own trajectories relating to choices of energy supply. Given coal dominates primary energy in India, and about three quarters of coal is used for electricity production, the rise of renewable energy such as wind and solar slows down any growth of coal. But these won’t be enough to eliminate coal.

Not all electricity is fungible. The location and especially time of day really matter. Inexpensive renewable energy (RE) is when we compare options based on the Levelized Cost of Energy (LCOE), which combines fixed and variable costs under assumptions over the lifespan, including discount rates. This is only for variable RE (VRE), which means the output depends on the available resource such as the wind or sunlight. Given the fact that the present peak demand in the Indian electricity grid occurs in the evening, it’s not an apples to apples comparison examining the price of VRE solar with coal or any other supply that is considered firm or despatchable.

Ladder of competitiveness for RE ‘versus’ coal

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.7 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

In addition to such differences, a very key but subtle point is the difference between total costs and variable costs. On one hand, RE has no fuel costs. Thus, once built, it easily could be considered “must run”, subject to grid constraints. On the other hand, given we have a surplus of coal generation capacity, from a utility perspective the question becomes should we pay for the total costs of RE or the incremental (fuel) costs of coal, more so because the capital costs of the existing plant are already an ongoing obligation under a power purchase agreement?

Delivered coal costs vary heavily by location. Transport costs are amongst the highest in the world because the Indian Railways, India’s largest civilian employer, overcharges coal to offset under recovery of passenger fares.  This is seen in the very low passenger to freight pricing (fare-to-freight) ratio shown below.  This is one reason the Plant Load Factor (PLF) of pit head coal power plants is very high.

Fare-to-freight ratio (average passenger fares per km versus average freight per tonne-kilometre charges) for railways across countries

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.14 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

In addition to overpaying for passengers, coal also pays to society through the Rs. 400/tonne “coal cess” as well as royalties, GST, etc. Plus a fraction of CIL profits combe back as dividends, plus income taxes, and many of these have grown markedly between 2005-06 and 2016-17.  On the other hand, coal also does have significant environmental and social externalities which aren’t properly priced in. Thus, it’s a very tricky calculation to only examine LCOE.

Importantly, even if we have only RE growing in the power sector, we will still have lots of coal in operation in 2030.  India’s growing energy demand means that the unprecedented targets for RE growth are unlikely to meet all demand by 2030.  This is simply based on energy balancing, before we tackle the much more vexing challenge of meeting all demand at each hour of the day – solar at some point needs a battery.

The translation between energy and capacity isn’t linear.  Even if we stopped building more coal power plants, except, perhaps, ones under construction, the coal-based electricity output could still grow measurably because the utilization of existing plants is low enough to leave lots of headroom for growth. There are plans to improve the efficiency of the coal fleet, which should slightly offset this possible growth.

Isn’t it the case India has cheap coal because the government subsidizes it? Isn’t the true cost much higher?

It is misleading to say coal is subsidized. It may not be charged equal to its externalities, but it doesn’t receive any net subsidy. In fact, it pays in to the exchequer or society in cash terms as discussed above, and also shown below (levies, portion of railways, and taxes/dividends from CIL).

Components of prototypical delivered coal prices – miner, levies, and railways transportation

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.13 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

Prices are low compared to much of the world but on a per unit energy basis (instead of per tonne) they’re not as low. And these mostly cover the costs –after all, CIL is, in aggregate, profitable, even though specific subsidiaries sometimes lose money.  This is one reason that coal pricing has numerous cross-subsidies and distortions that need to be addressed.  Otherwise, distortions will propagate through the chain to electricity producers and eventually consumers.  For example, the winning power plant isn’t necessarily one that’s more efficient – it just has contracts (and/or a favorable location, avoiding transport costs) that get it cheaper coal at a notified price (under a Fuel Supply Agreement). The figure below shows such a distorted chain for electricity, with green nodes representing low cost pathways, and red nodes showing example expensive pathways.

Differentiations and distortions in coal flows for the power sector

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.19 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

What would happen if the government decreed they are phasing out coal in, say, 5 years? Maybe combined with breakthroughs in clean energy (RE, batteries, etc.)

While availability of alternatives and energy security is a global phenomenon, this often manifests itself in terms of pricing. If alternatives to coal were cheaper, these would accelerate rapidly, and to some extent they are, especially for VRE. But phasing out coal either means an alternative has become more cost-effective or society is willing to pay the premium for phasing out coal. This is a larger policy debate both within and across countries.

It may be more important to not focus on absolutes but the trajectory and pathway. This helps us recognize that a complete shutdown of coal, if that were the goal, would start with a slowdown of growth (which was already happening even before COVID), followed by a plateau. However, these transitions usually take multiple years if not decades.

On the other hand, policy and operational focus should be on better utilizing existing resources in a cost-effective and cleaner manner. It’s important to note that coal is India’s swing producer. When you switch on a fan or plug in an electric vehicle, it’s coal generation that, on average, increases to meet demand. Renewable energy is never waiting for demand – it’s use it or lose it. While hydropower can easily go up and down in output, the aggregate annual output is monsoon dependent. Given India lacks inexpensive natural gas, this doesn’t appear to be short-term answer, and nuclear power has struggled to grow capacity in a cost-effective manner. This is one reason such a decree is unlikely but what the government can do is sharpen frameworks to accelerate cleaner options within a portfolio approach.

The main challenge is that coal operates in an entrenched ecosystem. Managing winners and losers, who face direct financial implications, is a challenge for any future energy policy. In some cases, one may have to revisit or enhance financial support for regions, states, or subsets of society.

By when would battery prices fall enough to displace coal for electricity?

Even at the oft-discussed $100/kWh cost for a battery, there remains a non-trivial impact for electricity, heavily dependent on duty cycle and O&M costs (for example, do these need air-conditioning for Indian conditions?). A sample calculation is shown in the figure.

Battery cost with a solar panel

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 11.4 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

An easier hurdle for batteries is to become cost-effective for mobility applications like electric vehicles, where the competition is with imported petroleum.  Even this is a few years away for certain applications (especially individual four wheelers). In contrast batteries are already viable for public transport, fleets, and other niches today. Cost-effective batteries for doing bulk timeshifting of renewable energy isn’t the short-term expectation but the good news is it doesn’t have to be. First, there are already enough niches in which batteries can be viable today and gradually scale. Second, there are immediate value-adding scenarios for batteries that aren’t focused on bulk commodity electricity time-shifting but rather specialized applications such as ancillary services (services that keep the grid stable).

Without trying to pick a specific number, it’s probably in the mid-2020s that battery prices, coupled with RE, would likely fall enough to become a meaningful option to compete with firm power from coal. What’s more important is the possibility that any surplus coal capacity in India may be exhausted by then and thus India would have to figure out what type of new power plants makes sense to invest in – would it be only RE or possibly something else?

What are alternatives to coal for non-electricity use?

While electricity dominates coal use, coal is a vital input for multiple industries including steel, cement, bricks, etc. Alternatives to coal depend heavily on the sector and what coal offers. If it’s only process heat, there are alternatives such as natural gas that could provide energy (we assume we’re talking about high temperatures which cannot be obtained from electricity which could be more easily produced from renewables). In the longer term, hydrogen is another option, especially if it’s created using renewable energy.

On the other hand, coal provides more than just energy in the cement and steel sectors. Thus, any transition away from coal may take time and instead a short-term focus should be on improving the efficiency of the processes. Instead of just thinking about the energy, the entire process, including final product, should be re-examined. For example, instead of considering what fuel to fire brick kilns with, a superior alternative is to move away from clay bricks to ash-based bricks, which can also utilize waste ash from coal combustion. There is already about a billion tonnes of waste ash lying in ash ponds at coal power plants.

Can’t we use clean coal?

While “clean coal” is an oxymoron to some, a better phrase is cleaner coal. “Cleaner” recognizes that there is a spectrum along which coal-based processes can reduce their impacts and externalities. Clean isn’t just about visible pollution but also about water and, of course, greenhouse gas emissions (especially carbon dioxide). One of the best options is improving the efficiency of coal utilization which reduces all forms of externalities.

The holy grail of clean coal has been carbon capture and sequestration, or CSS (alternatively, carbon capture, utilization, and sequestration). However, CCS economics appear challenging not only because of the capital cost requirements or oversight challenges because of the energy efficiency penalties.

How do we clean up our power plants?

The government has issued world-class emission standards for coal power plants but India is far behind schedule in implementation. The technologies are available, especially for particulate matter and sulfur (SOx) emissions, and even NOx emissions have several choices that should be compatible with Indian high ash coal. The real challenge is one of economics and aligning regulations. The total cost is estimated in the order of Rs. 0.30-0.50/kWh, depending heavily on expectations of usage (high utilization plants will find lower costs). Regulators have clarified that these would be treated as a change in law and thus passed on to consumers.

We don’t need to just clean up our power plants, but the entire energy system – see below for more on this.

What innovation is missing to make the sector sustainable?

While battery technologies are critical to scaling renewable energy beyond the VRE stage, there are a vast range of innovations that impact utilization efficiency, transportation (including loading and unloading rail wagons), etc. Instead of just thinking of innovations in one aspect, we need innovations not just across the entire chain but at a systems level that improve interactions between components and stakeholders. Importantly, this means not just technology-based innovations but also innovations in market design, business models, and regulations.

“If you can’t solve a problem, make it larger” – this adage encourages us to solve not only the energy production problem but also issues of security, cost effectiveness, social impact and welfare, etc.  This is one reason the US is considering a Green New Deal, that isn’t just about clean energy but inclusivity, employment, resilience, etc.

Such a lens would encourage not just supply side but also demand side solutions as well as digital and smart grids in electricity.  One way for the government to encourage innovation is to provide the right signaling, instead of mandating top-down targets. If the real goal is cleaner energy (rather, sustainable human development), then simply focusing on adding more solar panels (or EVs, or other solution) isn’t optimal as it risks crowding out alternatives including efficiency, public transport, etc.

One of the key gaps towards making the larger sector (energy, not coal) more sustainable is the lack of an integrated energy policy, which bridges not just fuel types but also geographies and jurisdictions, not to mention ministries outside the multiple energy related ones (environment, housing, railways, highways, etc.). The last gap isn’t new innovation or even new ideas but enforcement of existing norms and regulations be it in terms of efficiency, emissions, etc.

Should the government privatize or split up CIL? How should coal be regulated?

For any change in policy, in this case being considered for the supply side, the first question becomes what is the objective function? Is the private sector to bring in capital or to bring in efficiency? Coal India is already profitable and many mines already harness private sector efficiency through contracting (via MDOs – mine developers and operators).

Coal India limited, the world’s largest coal miner (through its subsidiaries), is already listed on the bourses in the government stake has been steadily falling over time. However, it remains a public sector enterprise or unit (PSU).  CIL is not just entrenched but also a positive force in many underdeveloped coal bearing regions and has extensive Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) mandates. One hopes that as the private sector grows (especially given commercial mining has been opened up), they would not weaken social, labour, and environmental norms in the name of cost-efficiency.

The good news is that opening up mining to commercial miners is unlikely to increase carbon emissions since it is demand that dictates how much coal will get consumed. The first displacement will likely not be of CIL per se but of expensive imports, which were well over 200 million tonnes in FY 2018-19.

Coal in India by supplier

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.8 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

Competition to CIL is a better option than trying to create competition within CIL by splitting up the subsidiaries into separate competing companies. The first reason is because of the locational spread across subsidiaries – transport costs are very high. The second reason, as the below figures show, is because the differences between the subsidiaries and their relative (non-) profitability have less to do with management capabilities for inefficiency than with legacy reasons (high use of underground mining) or poor stripping ratios in selected regions (subsidiaries).

Financials and output spread across CIL subsidiaries (FY 2018)

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.10 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

 

Factors determining the cost structure spread across CIL subsidiaries

 

(references and methodology for the figure can be found at Figure 1.11 –  Future of Coal in India: Smooth Transition or Bumpy Road Ahead?)

 

Given expectations of a larger non-CIL (plus SCCL) role in coal production domestically, the government should plan for holistic regulations or even an independent Coal Regulator. Here, the focus shouldn’t just be on creating a level playing field for the private sector but also monitoring CIL for performance. CIL isn’t a statutory monopoly but is a de-facto monopoly. While they don’t charge monopoly prices, they do exert market power downstream in terms of contracts that consumers often have no choice but to sign (the alternatives are expensive).

What are some of the biggest challenges of the coal sector?

There’s not just one but multiple energy transitions underway. More than just the rise of renewable energy we also have changes in market structure/competition, digitalization, rise of edge-based energy (like rooftop solar), etc.  The challenge isn’t simply managing such a transition but making it a just transition.  If India was historically worried about social welfare redistribution across energy policy, this challenge will only become heightened by the transitions.

Who are existing winners and losers of coal is an important question even before we consider newer or exacerbated winners and losers under the transition. It’s unfortunate that regions that supply coal are often underdeveloped, and land remains a deep social problem in terms of rights, access, and livelihoods.

The challenge isn’t simply based on location but also structural across the ecosystem. A power plant that is not just near coal but has contract giving them notified price coal (under a Fuel Supply Agreement, or FSA), which is cheaper, as well as a power purchase agreement (PPA) with the utility, is vastly better off than a merchant power plant buying more expensive coal through e-Auctions or even imports and then trying to sell power on a power exchange.

As widely accepted, cleaning up coal (rather, all energy use) is important for India, which in 2019 was home to six of the 10 most polluted cities in the world. The challenge isn’t awareness or even source apportionment – the challenge is one of implementation of policies that face local or state resistance, often on economic or livelihood grounds.

Many of these challenges come back to historical silo-based regulations and poor signaling. Decades of scarcity meant the solution to India’s energy problems was always “more”. This is no longer true.  Not only has the supply-side picture improved dramatically, demand elasticity versus GDP is also falling, due to both structural changes in the economy (the rise of the services sector) as well as energy efficiency.

In fact, overcapacity due to poor signaling has meant stranded assets in the coal power sector, which have led to disproportional risk in the banking sector coming from power plants. Another important example of poor signaling is how the majority of power in the country (about 90%) treats all electricity the same regardless of location, time of day, predictability, dispatchability, ramping capability, etc., that too under rigid, static, power purchase agreements. FSAs and PPAs may ostensibly give cheaper energy, but they don’t always, and they also create many other distortions, such as making capital costs of coal plants locked in. Ultimately, these instruments transfer risk, instead of reducing risks. And consumers pay for all of these.

How would we address some of the challenges?

Some of the challenges may require a big bang approach while others might be addressed gradually or incrementally. Efficiency improvements are a no-brainer, but they also will not be enough. Regardless of the specifics, almost all challenges require the same ingredient: political will.

A few of the specific areas where this needs to be applied are:

  • Disrupting the status quo with entrenched winners who resist change;
  • Finding better instruments than cross subsidies and attendant distortions, including, for example, by raising passenger fares for railways or finding explicit budgetary support, or rationalizing electricity consumer pricing (maybe via Direct Benefit Transfers);
  • Encouraging more competition and flexibility across stakeholders instead of relying on static and rigid contracts;
  • Enforcing pollution standards, beginning with making emissions data public;
  • Moving towards holistic regulation of carbon such as through a carbon tax (or, alternatively, an emissions trading scheme).

The coal transition is already underway. There may be a lot of uncertainty, but what is even more certain is that the future will not look like the past – and it shouldn’t. The future should be cleaner, more inclusive, more efficient, and more secure, not to mention cost-effective.

 

The post India’s energy transition: Coal is down but not out first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-energy-transition-coal-is-down-but-not-out/feed/ 0 894831
Reviving energy cooperation in South Asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/reviving-energy-cooperation-in-south-asia/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=reviving-energy-cooperation-in-south-asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/reviving-energy-cooperation-in-south-asia/#respond Sun, 06 Sep 2020 16:59:19 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=884670 Mirza Sadaqat Huda’s book offers unique insights into addressing the underlying problems in regional energy cooperation.

The post Reviving energy cooperation in South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Saheb Singh Chadha interviews Dr. Mirza Sadaqat Huda on his book “Energy Cooperation in South Asia: Utilising Natural Resources for Peace and Sustainable Development”, published in April 2020 by Routledge.

Recent developments in South Asian energy security such as the India-Nepal petroleum products pipeline and the India-Bhutan joint venture hydroelectric project have revived conversations on energy cooperation in the region. While these projects are a welcome development, like many others before, they have experienced logistical, bureaucratic, or political delays.

In this context, Mirza Sadaqat Huda’s book offers unique insights into addressing the underlying problems in regional energy cooperation. Based on his Ph.D. thesis at the University of Queensland, the book uses four case studies (the Tipaimukh Dam, the Turkmenistan-Afghanistan-Pakistan-India (TAPI) Pipeline, the Myanmar-Bangladesh-India (MBI) Pipeline, and the Bhutan-Bangladesh-India-Nepal (BBIN) sub-regional grouping) to layout four distinct frameworks for energy cooperation, offering learnings on how challenges of a similar nature can be overcome in future projects.

Saheb Chadha: Your book describes India as a “hydro-hegemon” in the chapter on BBIN cooperation. Could you elaborate on the term and how it has contributed to distrust among India’s neighbours?

Mirza Huda: The term hydro-hegemony is used to describe a situation where power disparities between members of a shared river basin results in the maintenance of the status quo on water allocation. More powerful members of shared river basins, such as Egypt in the Nile and Turkey in the Euphrates-Tigris Basins use a range of strategies, such as coercion, resource capture, and inequitable treaties to control water resources.

In South Asia, India has used its relative advantage in military and economic power to dominate regional interactions on water sharing. Historically, India has only agreed to cooperate on a bilateral level on water issues, despite Nepal and Bangladesh’s preference for multilateral, basin-wide cooperation on the Ganges-Brahmaputra-Meghna Basin (GBM). Some analysts have argued that India has preferred to engage bilaterally in order to maximise on disparities in size and power.

Due to the politicised nature of interactions on water sharing, the focus of existing bilateral agreements is on establishing sovereign rights over water, rather than the collective development of shared resources. This reductionist approach cannot address climate change and extreme weather events, which is set to drastically change the ecology of the GBM Basin. During my fieldwork in Nepal I spoke to several policymakers who argued that the political and ecological repercussions of India’s hydro-hegemonic policies can undermine the development of BBIN hydroelectric projects.

In my book, I have proposed an Environmental Peacebuilding framework for informing the planning processes of BBIN hydroelectric projects. I argue that policies conceptualised from an environmental peacebuilding framework can resolve some of the environmental challenges to BBIN hydroelectric projects and have a transformative impact on regional politics by incentivising integration and reducing conflicts.

I suggest a policy mechanism by which the ‘high politics’ of energy security can be linked to the ‘low politics’ environmental cooperation, thereby facilitating energy security, multilateral river basin management, and peacebuilding. Since the 2018 guidelines of the Indian power ministry have formalised multilateral cooperation on electricity trade, hydroelectric cooperation can be an important entry point towards integrated river basin management of the GBM.

SC: You suggest a ‘peace-building approach’ to energy diplomacy that engages both energy security and conflict resolution imperatives. How do you think this differs from the current practice of diplomacy in the region?

MH: South Asia’s regional geopolitics is determined by the conflation of identity, politics, and international borders. Almost every conflict in South Asia – be it the Kashmir issue, the Kalapani dispute, or deadly confrontations between Bangladeshi citizens and the Border Security Force (BSF) of India are rooted in the region’s messy borders. Due to the history of the partition, borders are both a physical and social construct, looming large in domestic-level ethnic and religious conflicts. Transnational energy projects would thus engage with multiple social and ideational issues rooted in South Asia’s borders.

Before implementing cross border infrastructure projects, policymakers should identify the direct and indirect objectives of these initiatives. In my opinion, the goal of cross-border infrastructure in a conflictual region like South Asia should not be confined to the enhancement of energy security. We must also perceive energy projects as mechanisms of conflict resolution. In other words, energy projects should be deliberately designed to facilitate integration and peacebuilding. In my book, I argue that currently, cross-border energy projects are perceived only as conduits of resources that are vital to national security. I call this the ‘national security approach to energy diplomacy’.

In the last seven years, India’s renewed enthusiasm for regional energy cooperation in South Asia has led to concrete progress on multiple cross-border energy projects. However, New Delhi’s enthusiasm for South Asian integration after years of neglect has been marked by a paradoxical assertion of hard borders and ethno-nationalism, which creates significant concerns for the sustainability of cross-border energy projects. The regional repercussions of India’s Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA), and the continuation of insurgencies in Pakistan and Afghanistan have contributed to the entrenchment of ultra-nationalism and ethnic and religious cleavages.

SC: Your book highlights the potential of extending the Turkmenistan-Afghanistan-Pakistan-India (TAPI) pipeline, such as TAPI-B to Bangladesh, as well as keeping the interests of local communities and other external powers in mind. Do you feel this might complicate negotiations and perhaps stall progress?

MH: An increased number of stakeholders can indeed create complexity in an energy project. However, in security-obsessed South Asia where elite actors dictate discourses on development, it is fundamental that a broader group of stakeholders are involved in the cross-border energy projects. In my book, I have argued that one of the fundamental challenges to the realisation of the TAPI pipeline is that existing policy discourse has focused almost exclusively on the national security interests of the four countries involved in the project. This limited perspective has perpetuated the orthodox, defence-centric perception of energy and undermined the realisation of pipeline projects.

In security-obsessed South Asia where elite actors dictate discourses on development, it is fundamental that a broader group of stakeholders are involved in the cross-border energy projects.

Interview respondents from India and Pakistan told me that the ‘securitisation’ of pipelines is one of the fundamental challenges to their implementation. In my book, I suggest a framework for de-securitising the TAPI pipeline, which takes into account the interests of regional countries, extra-regional powers, international organisations and most importantly, that of local community members. Firstly, I argue that the TAPI can be deliberately designed to converge the interests of regional countries and external powers. I suggest a number of policy interventions that can be undertaken to encourage inclusive cooperation between state-level actors, energy companies, and institutions. Secondly, I undertake a comparative analysis of the Baku-Tbilisi-Ceyhan Pipeline (BTC) to identify ways by which the interests of local communities that live along the route of the TAPI can be addressed via socio- economic programmes and effective social and environmental governance. This can reduce the explicit emphasis on the physical security of the pipeline by including human security concerns within the project’s blueprint. My conclusion is that taking into account a broader group of stakeholders can create a shift in the perception of the TAPI from a defence and security realm to that of inclusive cooperation.

SC: The construction of a Chinese pipeline in the same region as the Myanmar-Bangladesh-India (MBI) pipeline raises questions about resource constraints for a second pipeline. Does this also impose any political constraints, due to the Sino-Indian competition in South Asia?

MH: Finite resources are not only an impediment to the revitalisation of the MBI but can also impede the TAPI. China has been very successful in constructing pipelines in Myanmar and Central Asia. Technological developments and the discovery of new reserves can increase the supply of available resources in these regions. However, geopolitical conflicts between India and China, as exemplified by the tragic incident in Ladakh, can complicate transnational energy projects. Some South Asian policymakers I spoke to suggested that cooperation between India and China on securing international energy resources can result in economic benefits for both countries. Unfortunately, the political repercussions of the COVID 19 pandemic and territorial conflicts between India and China will prevent any substantial cooperation between the two countries on energy in the near future.

SC: In your chapter about the Tipaimukh dam, you outlined the feasibility of the ‘Cooperative Security Approach’ and ‘Share the resources’ model. Postcolonial states, including South Asian countries, tend to prize the resources in their territory and their ownership over them. How much of a challenge is this mindset in reducing the ‘Sovereignty Based Approach’ and ‘Divide the resources’ model?

MH: South Asia as a region must collectively address climate change and energy insecurity. Yet, a regional approach to these critical challenges is undermined by resource nationalism. For decades, bilateral agreements on water in the region have only focused on dividing resources. Collective action on resource development has been mentioned almost as afterthoughts in these agreements and has never seen concrete implementation. In my book, I argue that for South Asia to transition from dividing to sharing resources, there needs to be a change in the way resources are conceptualised and how costs and benefits are shared.

One of the persistent issues that I encountered in my research is that people in a particular region or country are unhappy if local resources are used to generate energy in another area. To address this issue, politicians must change the way they communicate key messages to their citizenry regarding natural resources. In my book, I argue that politicians often talk about the total cost of resources, but not the total benefits that can be derived from exploiting these resources. For example, in the early 2000s, political discourse on energy security in Bangladesh focused almost exclusively on the total amount of gas reserves in the country. This led to resource nationalism, resulting in the shelving of a gas trade deal between India and Bangladesh. However, instead of discussing the total cost of gas reserves, if politicians and wider intelligentsia in Bangladesh discussed the potential benefits from the exploitation of these reserves towards poverty alleviation and socio-economic development, it could have led to broader consensus on the need for regional cooperation on energy.

Of course, such messages need to be followed up by the development of benefit-sharing mechanisms as well as resettlement and rehabilitation plans for those who stand to be adversely affected by energy projects. While I use the example of gas trade, similar communication strategies and benefit and compensation policies can create broader consensus on the need to collectively harness the hydroelectric potential of South Asia’s rivers. Overall, astute political leadership is fundamental to creating broad consensus on ecological interdependence in South Asia.

About the expert

sadaq31Dr. Mirza Sadaqat Huda is a Postdoctoral Research Fellow at the OSCE Academy in Bishkek. Currently, his research focuses on the Belt and Road Initiative, the politics of renewable energy in Asia and global climate governance. Dr. Huda’s analysis has been published in Energy Policy, Geoforum, Water International and Energy Research and Social Science. He is an Australian citizen and has previously worked as a Postdoctoral Fellow at the Nanyang Technological University and has held research appointments at the University of Queensland and Griffith University.

Email: mirzasadaqathuda@gmail

The post Reviving energy cooperation in South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/reviving-energy-cooperation-in-south-asia/feed/ 0 884670
Why India’s push for private-sector coal mining won’t raise carbon emissions http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-indias-push-for-private-sector-coal-mining-wont-raise-carbon-emissions/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=why-indias-push-for-private-sector-coal-mining-wont-raise-carbon-emissions Mon, 20 Jul 2020 05:34:26 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=884216 After decades of public-sector dominance, and controls that relegated the private sector to minority status in coal mining, India recently launched commercial coal mining via coal mine auctions. Proponents argue this will help bring in not just more capital and improved technology, but also improve the quality of production and output; critics worry this will lock in India to more coal. In fact, that concern doesn’t hold up, because changes in who mines won’t determine how much coal is consumed. It is demand for coal, especially for electricity, that determines coal’s future in India. While coal use is winding down in much of the world, India still foresees some growth of coal-based […]

The post Why India’s push for private-sector coal mining won’t raise carbon emissions first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
After decades of public-sector dominance, and controls that relegated the private sector to minority status in coal mining, India recently launched commercial coal mining via coal mine auctions. Proponents argue this will help bring in not just more capital and improved technology, but also improve the quality of production and output; critics worry this will lock in India to more coal. In fact, that concern doesn’t hold up, because changes in who mines won’t determine how much coal is consumed. It is demand for coal, especially for electricity, that determines coal’s future in India.

Rahul Tongia
Rahul Tongia is a Fellow with Brookings India in New Delhi. His work focuses on technology and policy, especially for sustainable development.

While coal use is winding down in much of the world, India still foresees some growth of coal-based power, even though renewable energy (RE) now represents virtually all the new capacity in recent years. India’s very ambitious renewable energy targets are relatively easy to manage in terms of cost-competitiveness and grid integration in the first phase, with 175 gigawatts of renewable energy planned by 2022, or about 20% of demand. But subsequent growth will require changes to the grid and to storage technologies, which are expensive today. Unlike the United States, which found cheap shale gas to displace coal, India only has coal available for so-called firm or baseload power in the short run, before storage technologies mature. Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s recent announcement regarding a focus on post-COVID self-reliance included the reforms allowing commercial private-sector mining.

Energy security was always a driver for India’s domestic coal production, but shortfalls in production lead to imports of over 200 million tonnes (MT) of coal annually, second only to China. Coal India Limited (CIL), the public-sector enterprise that is the world’s largest coal miner (producing about 600 MT annually), is responsible for some 85% of domestic production, but its output has often missed production targets.

Commercial coal mining was not allowed until now, and there was only limited private-sector mining for so-termed captive mining, which was by end-users like power plants or steel factories. Now that commercial coal mining will be allowed, India will have a greater capacity to meet existing demand through domestic production.

Why improved coal mining won’t drive up demand

Cheaper domestic coal will not ultimately raise the competitiveness of coal-based power, even though it will mean fewer expensive imports. The final price of coal delivered to power plants has three components: the price the miner charges, government taxes (which includes royalty payments and levies), and transportation costs. Indian taxes are amongst the highest in the world, used to buttress state and central government budgets, and can be almost as high as the notified price for low-grade coal to power plants. This includes a 400 rupees per tonne “coal cess,” a pseudo-carbon tax amounting to between $3-4 per ton of carbon dioxide. Transportation is also very expensive, as Indian Railways — the dominant mode — overcharges coal transporters by at least 31% to subsidize passengers.

The new private-sector mining would only impact miner prices, and that too only by a small amount. Coal India Limited prices are regulated, averaged out across almost all mines by grade of coal (calorific value), regardless of the cost of mining, and kept low for power plants. Costs of mining vary by a factor of 5 or 6 depending on the location, but most new growth is from inexpensive mines where the coal is near the surface and mine sizes are large. These mines already operate efficiently, often through private-sector contractors, termed mine developers and operators (MDOs). This suggests that the expected efficiency gains by private-sector competitive mining would be a tiny fraction of total delivered costs of coal, which include transportation and taxes.

Importantly, any new mine will take years to develop, even if the developer is willing to take on the risks from the broader energy transition. The 2015 big-bang auctions for private-sector captive mines led to a frenzy of aggressive bids, and even irrational prices driven by extreme scarcity. But subsequent bids, albeit for captive mines, have fizzled (and in some cases have been cancelled due to lack of interest).

The question becomes: Who will bid on these new mines? Global appetite is especially unknown, more so if bids leave little value on the table, as happened in 2015, under a bidding process that focused on maximizing exchequer revenues. Those bids led to large volumes on paper, but little actual production of coal.

Marginally cheaper coal won’t spur more coal-based electricity, especially since power prices are expected to rise as plants must retrofit to meet stringent emissions norms. The key factor is the cost of electricity, and renewable energy is winning that battle right now. However, industry has fewer alternatives to coal in the short term, more so given limited availability of cheap natural gas.

Better coal isn’t in conflict with a broader energy transition

As part of India’s transition to low-carbon energy, private coal mining will be useful at two levels. First, competition for fuels enables meaningful competition for electricity, which can then spur greater clean energy sources. Second, having a third party mine coal could mean less “lock-in” compared to a situation where the mine is restricted to a particular power plant through captive mining norms, which involves a lot of sunk costs.

India needs to clean up its coal instead of wishing it away.

India needs to clean up its coal instead of wishing it away. Most improvements need to be in consumption, not production. Coal power plants have delayed cleaning up their emissions to the new norms by five years, more than double the original timeframe, and have asked for further waivers citing the COVID-19 pandemic. But there’s even less regulation of smaller users of coal, such as brick kilns, which are also located much closer to population centers.

Commercial coal mining should become a test case for higher environmental, labor, and social standards, especially if it brings greater scrutiny, transparency, and global best practices, including coal washing. The government recently scrapped 2014 mandates for washing coal for coal that is transported long distances. This wasn’t because washing wouldn’t help for India’s poor quality (i.e., high ash) coal, just that it was being done badly.

Thanks to renewable energy but also energy efficiency and structural shifts in the economy, the growth rate for Indian coal has already slowed down, and clean energy is only getting cheaper. It’s worth emphasizing that despite being the second largest consumer of coal in the world (though consuming less than a quarter of China’s coal in 2019), Indian per capita coal consumption is only 71% of the world average. When we factor in the low quality of coal — effectively, less carbon per tonne — India’s per capita coal carbon emissions are under two-thirds of the world’s average.

While much of the world is talking of phasing out coal, India’s short-term focus is on peaking coal as soon as possible. Coal accounts for just under half of India’s commercial primary energy and will take time to phase out. The flip side is that India doesn’t have as much oil and gas consumption. So when the United Kingdom — with coal down to 3.3% of primary energy use in 2019 — wants to “end coal” soon, it won’t reduce carbon emissions much. Even a green energy pioneer like Germany used over four times India’s coal, per capita, in 2019, even though coal is only 17.5% of Germany’s primary energy.

India’s decarbonization journey will look different than other countries. Instead of concern over recent coal mining reforms, the world can help India’s transition, offering cheap global finance and access to clean technology, including technology to clean up coal. India is showing reforms and leadership, not just in coal but also in renewable energy. The world doesn’t want India to go down the same carbon development path as China — but it would be unfair, and grossly unrealistic, to expect India to become so dramatically green to make up for over-emissions by the rest of the world.

The post Why India’s push for private-sector coal mining won’t raise carbon emissions first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
884216
Bhutan’s democratic transition and ties to India http://stg.csep.org/blog/bhutans-democratic-transition-and-ties-to-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=bhutans-democratic-transition-and-ties-to-india Wed, 08 Jul 2020 05:09:11 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=884213 In this edition, Dr. Constantino Xavier interviews Dr. Sonam Kinga on his book “Democratic Transition in Bhutan: Political Contests as Moral Battles” published in October 2019 by Routledge India. The Himalayan kingdoms of Nepal, Sikkim, and Bhutan offer comparative insights on how traditional Hindu and Buddhist monarchies have witnessed different political fates. Bhutan, in particular, stands out as an extraordinary and successful example of royal, top-down, and managed democratization during the 2000s. Based on his Ph.D. dissertation at the University of Kyoto, in Japan, Dr. Sonam Kinga’s deeply researched book argues that, beyond foresight of a progressive leader, the Bhutanese […]

The post Bhutan’s democratic transition and ties to India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Dr. Constantino Xavier interviews Dr. Sonam Kinga on his book “Democratic Transition in Bhutan: Political Contests as Moral Battles published in October 2019 by Routledge India.

The Himalayan kingdoms of Nepal, Sikkim, and Bhutan offer comparative insights on how traditional Hindu and Buddhist monarchies have witnessed different political fates. Bhutan, in particular, stands out as an extraordinary and successful example of royal, top-down, and managed democratization during the 2000s.

Based on his Ph.D. dissertation at the University of Kyoto, in Japan, Dr. Sonam Kinga’s deeply researched book argues that, beyond foresight of a progressive leader, the Bhutanese monarchy also succeeded because its dynastic legitimacy was derived from a modern (and not feudal) contract with the Bhutanese people, in 1907. The book rejects the simplistic accounts of a sudden change in 2007, when the fourth king abdicated in favour of his son and a directly elected parliament, under a new democratic constitution.

Kinga’s ethnographic method is eclectic and personal, since he was deeply involved in the democratisation process and an elected member of the Council, the parliament’s upper house, between 2008 and 2013. His detailed case studies offer important insights into Bhutan’s rapidly changing socio-economic, political, and foreign policy dimensions, with growing implications for India that are not always appreciated.

Q1. Your book reviews Bhutan’s “exceptional” democratisation process, triggered by the Fourth King’s “critical decision of leadership” in 2005 (p. 21). But you also recognise that democratisation “has begun the transformation of socio-political relationship in Bhutanese society at multiple levels” (p. 270). Has this also manifested through political populism and nationalism in Bhutan?

Bhutan did not experience the kind of nationalism that spread in Europe or in Afro-Asian countries. There are two important reasons. One, Bhutan had been fortunate to have the benefit of enlightened leadership rooted in our society and in the “nation.” Nationalism in Europe generally expressed in movements against monarchical regimes, which were in existence for hundreds of years.

On the contrary, the Bhutanese monarchy is new, having been founded in 1907 when monarchies elsewhere began to disappear. It was also founded based on the modern idea of popular consent and written contract. Moreover, it became the agency of progress and modernisation.

Two, Bhutan was never colonised. Therefore, the formation of its national identity did not take place within the context of freedom struggles or wars of independence. It took place within a specific geographic zone and cultural space with strong Buddhist influences. Bhutanese nationalism, if we can call that, expressed in fighting series of Tibetan invasions from the north for over a century, British in the South and more recently the illegal immigrants and Indian militants in 1990s.

The transformation of socio-political relationship has been driven less by nationalism and more by the political space and opportunities that democracy provides. However, political populism had begun to manifest as political leaders project persona over policies, frame elections as contests for the humble against the powerful, and subtly play ethnic and religious cards to garner votes. Nonetheless, there has been a move to more mature politics in recent years.

Q2. You speak of the crisis in the early 1990s, separating between “genuine Bhutanese Nepalis” and “illegal immigrants” from Nepal (pp. 16-17). Have Bhutan’s new democratic institutions helped to accommodate ethno-linguistic and religious diversity?

The new democratic institutions have built upon and broadened existing political spaces for accommodating representation of diverse ethnic mix of Bhutanese society. Today, the five southern districts with significant population of Nepali ethnicity are well-represented in the local and central governments as well as in the parliament.

For example, two of the four municipal governments have elected mayors, who are Bhutanese of Nepalese ethnicity. In the present National Assembly, nine MPs are of Nepalese ethnicity, two of whom are cabinet ministers. Likewise, MPs of Nepalese ethnicity have served as ministers in both the first and second governments. In the National Council today, four among the 20 elected members are of Nepalese ethnicity. In both cases, they constitute nearly 20% of elected members.

No one could imagine only a few years ago that anyone from a remote highland nomadic community could become a minister. That happened in 2018! We have also seen women being given cabinet positions after 2008 although we need to see more of them in government.

Q3. India assisted in the 2007 mock elections, by offering electronic voting machines and also sending observers, including its Deputy Election Commissioner. Was this pure goodwill, or do you think India also had a strategic interest in Bhutan’s successful democratisation?

Bhutan enjoys a very special relationship with India. This has been nurtured carefully by leaders from both sides over the decades. Of course, there are occasionally irritants of varying nature and proportion, and the times demand that we deal with them with greater sensitivity and sophistication.

It was Bhutan who invited observers not only from India but other countries and international organisations during the mock as well as actual elections held in 2007/2008, 2013, and 2018. The success of democracy in Bhutan is of interest not only to India but to the global community who have experienced in recent years the receding of democracy and the rise of populism. Bhutan’s peaceful transition to democracy in a historically unprecedented manner and the successful consolidation of democratic institutions and values in the last decade must be situated and appreciated within the larger context of regional and global developments of our times.

India’s strategic interest in Bhutan precedes the introduction of democracy. Bhutan’s geographic location between two Asian giants and the nature of the relationship between them gives it strategic importance beyond its demographic and geographic size.  The success of democracy in Bhutan must translate to greater political stability, economic prosperity, and inter-ethnic harmony. A sovereign, peaceful, stable, and progressive Bhutan is of interest to India’s geo-strategy.

Q4. Your fascinating analysis of the 2013 DPT convention shows how there is growing anxiety about Bhutan’s reliance on India. More recently, your parliament rejected a regional motor vehicle agreement and also raised fees for Indian tourists. Will this hinder Bhutan’s connectivity initiatives with India and the region?

We cannot generalise the perception of one political party as a representative view of the entire nation. However, there are growing anxieties, particularly among the younger generation. Bhutan depends a lot on India for goods and services as well as investments. But this has not been a one-way traffic. India also benefits from its investments in Bhutan in ways that are both tangible and intangible. Realising the goal of self-reliance has been Bhutan’s policy for a long time. A self-reliant and self-sufficient Bhutan will still prioritise its special relationship with India.

A self-reliant and self-sufficient Bhutan will still prioritise its special relationship with India.

For example, Bhutan’s physical connectivity with the rest of the world is through India. Hence, rejection of the motor vehicle agreement was not a rejection of the idea or need for connectivity. There were concerns about the exponential increase in traffic on Bhutan’s limited road infrastructure as well as environmental impacts. On the other hand, we cannot forget that Bhutan’s parliament has also ratified many Bills and conventions that concern India and Bhutan.

The raising of Sustainable Development Fee for regional tourists including Indians has been done to ensure that Bhutan’s time-tested tourism policy of high value, low volume is upheld. Its intent as well as the manner in which it was done has been respected by the government and people of India. The fee that has been introduced is very nominal compared to the one that other international tourists pay. On the other hand, tourism is only one among other arrangements and practices which are in place to enhance people to people connectivity between Bhutan and India.

About the expert:


Dr. Sonam Kinga works at the Royal Research and Advisory Council in Thimphu. He teaches Bhutan’s Political History at the Royal Institute of Governance and Strategic Studies located in Bhutan. He was a Visiting Professor at the Graduate School of Asian and African Area Studies at Kyoto University in Japan (2019), from where he had earlier obtained his Ph.D. He also had been a Visiting Research Fellow at the Institute of Developing Economies (IDE) in Tokyo (2002).

He participated in the parliamentary elections during Bhutan’s historic transition to democracy in 2008. He represented the eastern district of Tashigang in the National Council for two five-year terms. During his tenure as Member of Parliament, he served as both the Deputy Chairperson and Chairperson of the National Council.

His research interest includes Bhutanese history, oral literature, state-society relations and democratic politics. His works include Changes in Bhutanese Social Structure published in 2002 by IDE in Japan, Polity Kingship and Democracy published by Bhutan’s Ministry of Education in 2009 and Democratic Transition in Bhutan published by Routledge in London and New Delhi in 2019.

Email: sonamkinga@gmail.com

The post Bhutan’s democratic transition and ties to India first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
884213
Mughal empire and the making of a region: Locating South Asia in early modern international order http://stg.csep.org/blog/mughal-empire-and-the-making-of-a-region-locating-south-asia-in-early-modern-international-order/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=mughal-empire-and-the-making-of-a-region-locating-south-asia-in-early-modern-international-order http://stg.csep.org/blog/mughal-empire-and-the-making-of-a-region-locating-south-asia-in-early-modern-international-order/#respond Wed, 01 Jul 2020 12:30:11 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=885843 In this edition, Sofia Shehana Basheer interviews Dr. Manjeet S. Pardesi on his recent work on South Asian international history. The paper titled “Mughal Hegemony and the Emergence of South Asia as a “Region” for Regional Order-building” was published in the European Journal of International Relations, Vol. 25(1) in 2019. Regions have become a focal point in the study of international relations since the Cold War. In this paper, Dr. Manjeet Pardesi tracks the emergence of South Asia as a region to the practices under the Mughal state. By bringing Asian perspectives to the scholarship of early modern international history, […]

The post Mughal empire and the making of a region: Locating South Asia in early modern international order first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition, Sofia Shehana Basheer interviews Dr. Manjeet S. Pardesi on his recent work on South Asian international history. The paper titled “Mughal Hegemony and the Emergence of South Asia as a “Region” for Regional Order-building” was published in the European Journal of International Relations, Vol. 25(1) in 2019.

Regions have become a focal point in the study of international relations since the Cold War. In this paper, Dr. Manjeet Pardesi tracks the emergence of South Asia as a region to the practices under the Mughal state. By bringing Asian perspectives to the scholarship of early modern international history, the paper counters the belief that ‘South Asia’ emerged as a product of colonization and decolonization and locates the process to the Mughal system, thus opening new debates into the origin and crystallization of “regions”.

Dr. Pardesi’s argument relies on the examination of various aspects of the Mughal rule that produced a hierarchical order in South Asia that was embedded and emulated in the later histories of the region.

Mughal territory under Aurangzeb in the 17th century. Source: ‘Historical Atlas of the Muslim Peoples’, by R. Roolvink (Harvard University Press, 1957, pp. 32-33), Retrieved from Columbia University.

  1. Your recent article[1] locates South Asia’s emergence as a region under the Mughal rule. What implications does it have on our understanding of South Asia’s role in the global order after the 16th century? 

There were three “international systems” in early modern Eurasia (~1500—1750): Europe, East Asia, and Islamicate Asia. My articles in Security Studies and the European Journal of International Relations focused on the Mughal Empire in Islamicate Asia in an attempt to contribute to International Relations (IR) theory. I argued that the Mughals had established a hierarchical regional order in South Asia, and that it was co-constituted with the “deep rules” and practices of warfare, great power management, diplomacy, and political economy.

At the same time, the Mughals dealt with the two other major powers of the Islamicate world (the Safavid and Ottoman Empires) as equals (or peers) even as they were engaged in the status competition. By contrast, the Mughals considered all other polities (whether in South Asia or beyond) as “lesser” entities. At least one important reason behind such Mughal attitudes was related to the fact that the Mughal economy was one of the two largest economies of the early modern world (with Ming-Qing China being the other).

While the Mughals consciously emulated some of the state-making practices of the Safavids and the Ottomans, they enjoyed structural trade surpluses with them (and with the rest of the Islamicate world). However, Islamicate Asia was not Mughal-centric (unlike East Asia that was Sinocentric) because the Ottomans and the Safavids continued to remain major empires (or peers in the Mughal worldview).

Along with Mughal practices of warfare, diplomacy, and great power management, commerce transformed South Asia into a cohesive geopolitical unit or “region.

At the same time, the Mughal Empire’s status as the dominant land power in South Asia as well as its structural trade surplus with the European powers (in the Indian Ocean) meant that the Mughals did not consider them as peers or equals.

In other words, I demonstrate that in the early modern period, there existed an asymmetric relationship between the Mughals and the Europeans in favor of the former. Another significant implication of my work is that South Asia’s post-Mughal rulers, the British, learned about the geopolitics of the region – including the strategic contours of the region – after consciously studying Mughal statecraft.

The British order in South Asia was built upon Mughal foundations. In fact, the British even emulated certain Mughal practices. For example, analogous to the Mughal quest to limit (and sever) the “extra-regional” geopolitical influence of the Ottomans and Safavids from South Asia, the British also tried to limit Russian and French influence in the subcontinent.

2. Given today’s politically partitioned South Asia, what do you think about the present and the future of regional integration in South Asia? 

As a home to multiple polities, contemporary South Asia is similar to early modern South Asia. For most of the pre-Mughal millennium, different South Asian polities were geopolitically and economically oriented towards different parts of the Afro-Eurasian world (rather than towards each other).

While the Mughals may have been the largest of such polities in early modern South Asia, they had to share the geopolitical space with the Deccani Sultanates (like Bijapur and Golconda), and with other smaller entities even after the conquest of the Deccani Sultanates. Nevertheless, buoyed by the Mughal economy, South Asia did develop very close economic interconnections through overland and maritime trade, and through financial links.

Along with Mughal practices of warfare, diplomacy, and great power management, commerce transformed South Asia into a cohesive geopolitical unit or “region.” As such, there are no easy lessons to be drawn for contemporary South Asia as Mughal hegemony was an outcome of multiple factors including conflict. Furthermore, contemporary South Asia is one of the least “integrated” economic regions in the world.

However, an important implication of my argument is that “regions” do transform over time. China’s emergence as a major South Asian power today (economically and strategically) as well as India’s Look/Act East strategy and the idea of the “Indo-Pacific” being championed by Japan and the United States (and others) means that we need to remain open to the possibility that the “regional” unit of analysis may no longer be limited to “South Asia” as a “larger Asia” seems to be emerging (with interconnections on land and by sea).

Of course, none of this means that India should ignore its immediate neighbors in South Asia. However, it does mean that we need to pay more attention to processes that form (and transform) regions over time (if by “regions” we mean the sites of international order-building).

3. What do you think about cultural approaches in strategic conceptions of the region, for example, when India underlines “civilizational ties” based on religion, etc.?

Regions – as I conceptualise them – emerge out of the interaction between leaders’ cognitive-priors, the politico-military interaction capacity in the system, and strategic geography. (Economic power can transform politico-military interaction capacity, while technology can overcome the limits of geography). Of course, it is possible that leaders’ perceptions (or cognitive priors) are based on what they think of as shared cultural and civilizational ties.

However, I believe that unless backed by politico-military interactions (or sustained economic interactions), purely cultural-civilizational conceptualisations are unlikely to generate “regions” (that matter for order-building). For example, during the Cold War, Europe had two distinct regional orders – Western Europe (led by the United States) and Eastern Europe (led by the former Soviet Union) – even as the two Europes shared a common civilizational substratum.

Indeed, these twin orders in Europe were completely transformed as geopolitical/economic factors changed with the end of the Cold War. Finally, it is also important to remember that culture and civilization are very difficult to define. Furthermore, most cultures and civilizations do overlap and share attributes with neighboring cultures and civilizations (for example, like India itself does with Iran on the one hand and with Southeast Asia on the other).

4. One of your academic interests is to depart from the Eurocentric historical narratives of international relations to enrich the discipline with Asian experiences. How will this decentering impact our understanding of South Asia’s role in global history?

This initiative – often referred to as “Global IR” – is relatively new. For now, my research focuses on contributions to theory-development based on South Asia and Asia’s historical experiences. For example, in my papers above I tried to explain why the Mughal hierarchy in South Asia was conflict-prone even as other scholars have argued that Sinocentric hierarchy in East Asia was relatively peaceful. In other words, I tried to show that hierarchy can take different forms in practice as opposed to making specific points related to South Asia’s historical role in global history.

We need more theoretical and empirical scholarship on South Asia in different periods of global history, including comparisons across time and with different world regions, before we can make any specific claims. I am currently working on a paper on ancient India (~600 BCE – 300 CE) where I am trying to argue that the “international order” was distinct from both, “anarchic” balances of power (typically associated with Europe) and “hierarchies” of various types (whether Mughal or Sinic).

In other words, the international order in South Asia looked very different in different periods of South Asian history. Indeed, there may be periods when South Asia cannot be taken to be the default site of order-building (as in the pre-Mughal millennium or in the coming Indo-Pacific/“larger Asia”). Given the often-noted cliché of India as a diverse land, this diversity of international orders in Indian history may be one of India’s biggest contributions to IR theory.

While it is important to de-center Eurocentric narratives of IR, the aim is not to replace them with Indo-centric or Asia-centric narratives. Instead, the aim is to develop IR theory by drawing upon global histories, and to eventually contribute to polycentric narratives of global history.

About the expert
Manjeet S. Pardesi is a Senior Lecturer in the Political Science and International Relations Programme and Asia Research Fellow at the Centre for Strategic Studies at Victoria University of Wellington. He obtained his PhD in Political Science from Indiana University, Bloomington (IUB). His research interests include international relations in global history, great power politics, strategic rivalries, Asian security, and Indian foreign policy. He has an MSc in Strategic Studies from the Institute of Defence and Strategic Studies (now the S. Rajaratnam School of International Studies or RSIS), Nanyang Technological University (NTU), Singapore. He obtained his BEng (Electrical & Electronic) from NTU as well. He is currently the Managing Editor of the journal Asian Security(June 2018—May 2021). He is a co-editor of The Oxford Handbook of India’s National Security(Oxford,2018) and India’s Military Modernization: Challenges and Prospects (Oxford, 2014). His articles have appeared in European Journal of International Relations, Security Studies, Survival, Asian Security, Australian Journal of International Affairs, Commonwealth & Comparative Politics, International Studies Perspectives, Nonproliferation Review, Air & Space Power Journal(of the United States Air Force), The Fletcher Forum of World Affairs, World Policy Journal, India Review, Defense and Security Analysis, and in several edited book volumes.
Email: (manjeet.pardesi@vuw.ac.nz)

[1]   Pardesi, M. S. (2019). Mughal hegemony and the emergence of South Asia as a “region” for regional order-building. European Journal of International Relations, 25(1), 276–301. https://doi.org/10.1177/1354066118761537

The post Mughal empire and the making of a region: Locating South Asia in early modern international order first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/mughal-empire-and-the-making-of-a-region-locating-south-asia-in-early-modern-international-order/feed/ 0 885843
Conflict, conservation, and cooperation across the India-Bhutan border http://stg.csep.org/blog/conflict-conservation-and-cooperation-across-the-india-bhutan-border/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=conflict-conservation-and-cooperation-across-the-india-bhutan-border http://stg.csep.org/blog/conflict-conservation-and-cooperation-across-the-india-bhutan-border/#respond Mon, 22 Jun 2020 11:48:34 +0000 https://csep.org/?post_type=blog&p=885834 In this edition of our blog series, Umika Chanana interviews Dr. Anwesha Dutta on her article “Forest becomes frontline: Conservation and counter-insurgency in a space of violent conflict in Assam, Northeast India” published in Political Geography Vol. 77, 2020. In the article [1], Dr. Anwesha Dutta construes the evolution of separatist movements that stimulates the unbridled extraction of forest resources, impacting the lives and livelihood of the local population, and also constructing headway for militarised conservation, especially across the trans-boundary region of India and Bhutan. The area is susceptible to conflict and violence (concurrent to environmental conservation) and the reserve forests in […]

The post Conflict, conservation, and cooperation across the India-Bhutan border first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of our blog series, Umika Chanana interviews Dr. Anwesha Dutta on her article “Forest becomes frontline: Conservation and counter-insurgency in a space of violent conflict in Assam, Northeast India” published in Political Geography Vol. 77, 2020.

In the article [1], Dr. Anwesha Dutta construes the evolution of separatist movements that stimulates the unbridled extraction of forest resources, impacting the lives and livelihood of the local population, and also constructing headway for militarised conservation, especially across the trans-boundary region of India and Bhutan. The area is susceptible to conflict and violence (concurrent to environmental conservation) and the reserve forests in the sensitive space across the borderland act as a constant site of collision between ethnic communities and state actors. The article highlights that the maximum number of plantation drives have been carried out by the Ecological Task Force in the sensitive region of Manas, on the brink of the Indo-Bhutan border. Counter-insurgency operations that materialise in the region of dense forests have vast implications on flora and fauna, shaping uncertainty over landscape connectivity in the two countries.

Source: Forest Cover Map of Assam, Volume II, State of Forest Report, 2019, Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Government of India.

Q1. The article outlines the long-drawn experience of reserved forests with respect to counter-insurgency operations across semi-porous borders with Bhutan. Having conducted extensive research and looked at the region in different phases, pre- and post-conflict, to what extent do you think open borders with Bhutan affect the movement of insurgents across forests?

I first went to Bodoland Territorial Autonomous Districts (BTAD) for four weeks in 2009 during my master’s studies and have continued to work there since. Clearly, the reserved forests- spanning from India to Bhutan- emerged as central to the processes of conflict, conservation, displacement, and rehabilitation. Over the years, a lot of academic and policy work has focused on aspects of ethnic and political violence,  issues of land and demographics, displacement and so on. But the study of India-Bhutan borderlands as a space of history, shared connections, everyday forms of mobility and its role in the ongoing conflict remains to be undertaken. My research, mainly drawing on long term interactions with forest dwellers within the reserved forest in the Indo-Bhutan borderlands, found that in the heydays of the conflict in the 1990s till the early 2000s, there was quite some movement of insurgents from India into Bhutan.  One is aware of operations – Rhino, Bajrang, and All Clear in the 1990s and 2000s- used to flush out insurgents. Conversations with locals revealed that insurgents still moved across borders since it was difficult for armed forces to recognize them. I was often told that they were farmers by day and insurgents by night, or that the armed forces were foreign to the land and hence unable to distinguish between locals and insurgents. Indeed, the porous forested borders affect mobility to a large extent.

Q2. In the article, you have pointed out that the insurgents are embroiled in illegal smuggling of timber and poaching activities to fund insurgency operations whilst using forests as pathways to their bases in Bhutan. How does cross-border co-operation cater to these concerns in insurgency affected areas?

The role of insurgents in forms of illegal timber smuggling and poaching has lessened over the years, especially since the creation of BTAD in 2003 and more so in recent years. This is also due to several cross-border operations between India and Bhutan, and increased patrolling and vigilance in the border areas by the Indo-Tibetan Border Force (ITBP), among others. However, the caveat to this is that often local communities who collect timber/firewood for subsistence are equated with organized syndicates operating in these areas. An interesting but obvious observation was that extractive activities increased during the times of ethnic conflict since (as I also mention in my paper) counter-insurgency continues to be a priority rather than conservation, especially during episodes of violence.

What distinguishes the Indo-Bhutan border from other borders of India with China, Pakistan, Bangladesh, etc. is the longue durée of friendly relation between India and Bhutan. In the aftermath of ethnic clashes in 2014, I was staying at the circuit house in Kokrajhar and I remember that almost every day Bhutanese officials came down for meetings with Indian officials. Moreover, this borderland scape is also characterized by the existence of informal people to people networks, civil society presence through the Indo-Bhutan Friendship Association chapter on the Indian side. These, to a large extent, address the concerns and help frizzle cross-border tensions- if and when they arise.

Q3. The Trans-boundary Manas Conservation Area (TraMCA) is an India-Bhutan collaboration to bolster regional connectivity for effective management of the ecosystem. Based on your fieldwork, in what ways do initiatives such as the TraMCA help preserve biodiversity?

The TraMCA is indeed a good initiative conservation-wise, although it could do more to go beyond classical conservation approaches, and in making it more participatory through the inclusion of local communities. What I have also worked on, lately, is the trans-boundary water sharing between India and Bhutan through a century-old irrigation system called the jamfwi (in Bodo). There are several rivers that flow down from Bhutan into India and there are no state-provided irrigation projects in the reserved forests. Through people-to-people networks, aided by local NGOs including officials on the Bhutanese side, those residing within reserved forests now have access to water. This is also part of Oxfam’s transboundary water-sharing project. Till now, there is no formal water-sharing agreement between India and Bhutan, which makes the existing informal system precarious and uncertain. Therefore, I am in favor of transboundary resource sharing and biodiversity conservation initiatives, which are more likely to succeed on this particular borderland due to the Indo-Bhutan Friendship Treaty of 1949, which was updated in 2007. This called for the expansion of economic relations and co-operation in the fields of culture, education, science, and technology. Although biodiversity and environment are vital components, that could be added to this treaty.

Q4. Your groundwork explores multifaceted roles played by state and non-state actors vis-à-vis reserved forests. How do you think your findings have wider implications in the geographically strategic location of the northeast that shares its borders with Bhutan, Bangladesh, and Myanmar?

We know that weather, water, silt, and animals are all notorious border flouters and the efforts to often enclose them forcibly has undermined the very interdependent and interconnected function of societies, ecologies, and earth systems. The Himalayan resource frontier has been conceptualized as “multi-state nations” or “multi-state margins”, indicating that geopolitics has anthropogenic impacts on local environmental integrity by slicing it into different national pieces (sovereign territories).  My work brings together the assemblage of myriad actors residing in these borderlands who are impacted by everyday forms of counter-insurgency and conservation. The particulars of India-Bhutan borderlands encompassing cross border co-operation (involving communities, state and the civil society organization) shows that borderlands need not always be anxious spaces. Lessons could be learned in ways of fostering not just human forms of trans-border engagements, rather, trans-boundary biodiversity projects should be as much about people as species (plant and animals). Towards this end, my research brings to fore the notion of ‘violent environments’ and applies it to spaces in which the politics of conservation is embedded in a larger context of violent conflict, in a borderland context.

About the expert
Anwesha Dutta is a post-doctoral researcher based out of Chr. Michelsen Institute, Bergen Norway. Her doctoral research used a political ecology approach to study the intersection between ethnic conflict and conservation on the India-Bhutan borderlands in Assam, India. She is currently working on multiple projects – equity sharing in wildlife conservancies in Kenya, political ecology of river-bed sand mining in India, and an ethnography of frontline forest staff in Kaziranga National Park, Assam.

Contact: anwesha.dutta@cmi.no
Photo credit: Anwesha Dutta

[1] Anwesha Dutta, “Forest becomes frontline: Conservation and counter-insurgency in a space of violent conflict in Assam, Northeast India”, Political Geography, Volume 77, March 2020, https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0962629819300460

The post Conflict, conservation, and cooperation across the India-Bhutan border first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
http://stg.csep.org/blog/conflict-conservation-and-cooperation-across-the-india-bhutan-border/feed/ 0 885834
COVID-19 is an opportunity to clean up India’s coal power plants http://stg.csep.org/blog/is-covid-19-an-opportunity-to-clean-up-indias-coal-power-plants-faster/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=is-covid-19-an-opportunity-to-clean-up-indias-coal-power-plants-faster Mon, 15 Jun 2020 06:39:10 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=852327 The arrival of COVID-19 in India led to a lockdown requiring 1.3 billion people to stay at home. Economic activity, at least in the first two versions of the lockdown, almost came to a standstill. By many standards, this was the world’s strictest lockdown. Total demand of grid electricity between March 25 and April 24 of this year sharply decreased by around 25% in comparison to the demand for the same period in the previous year. The electricity demand for this time period was 1,14,808 GWh in 2019 vs 85,994 GWh in 2020. Figure 1 below shows the average daily […]

The post COVID-19 is an opportunity to clean up India’s coal power plants first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The arrival of COVID-19 in India led to a lockdown requiring 1.3 billion people to stay at home. Economic activity, at least in the first two versions of the lockdown, almost came to a standstill. By many standards, this was the world’s strictest lockdown. Total demand of grid electricity between March 25 and April 24 of this year sharply decreased by around 25% in comparison to the demand for the same period in the previous year. The electricity demand for this time period was 1,14,808 GWh in 2019 vs 85,994 GWh in 2020. Figure 1 below shows the average daily demand met curves for these periods. We see how the demand met has changed for the lockdown period, compared to earlier times.

Figure 1. Average daily Demand met curves

faf

Source: Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker: https://carbontracker.in/

Lower emissions from lower coal use

On the supply side, the brunt of this fall in demand was almost entirely borne by the coal power plants, with the average coal generation decreasing to 86 GW between March 25 and April 24, 2020. On comparison with the last year for the same period, when the average coal generation was 116 GW, this accounts for a 29% decrease. The peak instantaneous coal generation in this period was 110 GW, in comparison to last year’s 132 GW. On the other hand, renewable energy (RE) being ‘must run’, it continued to run at full capacity (though there might have been marginal curtailment at noon). For balancing the RE, hydropower played an even more important role as the coal capacity online decreased. The lockdown, thus, gave us a glimpse of a high RE future, where hydropower will play a critical role (at least till cheap and scalable storage becomes commercially available). For the 9 minutes lights off event on April 5, hydropower again emerged as the primary resource for grid balancing. Hydropower’s role in these recent events has led to a renewed interest in it among scholars and the power industry.

With the decrease in coal generation, the carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions from electricity generation also decreased. The power sector CO2 emissions between March 25 and April 24, 2020 were 32% less than the same time period last year. Now, as demand as well as coal generation increase as the lockdowns have eased, there is an increase in emission levels.

With the ease in lockdown measures, demand has slowly increased from April to May. For May 2020, the highest instantaneous demand (measured as grid-level load met) was around 165 GW. Compared to May 2019, when the highest demand was 182 GW, this is a decrease of 17 GW. This figure however does not take into account the organic growth in demand each year. Assuming a conservative growth rate of 3%, this would roughly come to 5.4 GW. Thus, the peak demand right now is at least 22.4 GW lower than it would have been in a business-as-usual scenario. Almost all the incremental supply under lockdown is from coal.

Opportunity to clean up faster

To comply with the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC) norms for coal power plant emissions, the retrofitting of Flue Gas Desulphurisation (FGD) systems in the coal power plants to decrease their Sulphur Oxides (SOx) emissions is scheduled to be largely concentrated for the years 2021 and 2022, with minimal retrofitting planned in 2020 and preceding years. However, given that the power demand is lower now, and plants are in shutdown, it would be possible for coal plants to undergo FGD upgrades now. Similarly, any Particulate Matter (PM), Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP) upgradation could be preponed with minimal disruption, compared to the earlier plan where retrofitting in the future could clash with growing demand. Stated another way, there is no reason to “take offline” plants per se – they’re already offline today.

COVID-19 came as a surprise and the measures taken by the government were sudden and much needed. However, the present first wave of COVID-19 in India  might not be the last. There might be a second and/or a third wave as we have seen with previous global pandemics like the Spanish flu. This could again lead to lockdowns and a drop in electricity demand, further leading to coal plants decreasing their outputs and many shutting down. Any such lockdown period will be another important window for power plants to carry out FGD and other emission related upgrades. However, to achieve this would require agile planning as well as availability of capital to the generators, which has always been a challenge, more so during the present times. This process should also allow learning, both technological and in procurement. The latter, really, is the key to getting the private sector to be aggressive in pricing cheaper solutions – the crash in solar prices was largely driven by efforts on bidding.

India has had a very ambitious target for RE. However, with COVID-19 and the accompanying financial crunch, there might be a delay in that transition, leading to an increased dependence on coal (at least in the short term). In such a case, it becomes increasingly important that the FGD and other emission related upgrades are carried out at the earliest, and COVID-19 might just have provided the power sector with that opportunity.

Note– All calculations mentioned in the above piece are based on data from Carbontracker and might differ from the official data by a few percentage points. The Carbontracker and several related studies are supported by the Shakti Sustainable Energy Foundation.

The post COVID-19 is an opportunity to clean up India’s coal power plants first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
852327
Interpreting the India-Nepal border dispute http://stg.csep.org/blog/interpreting-the-india-nepal-border-dispute/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=interpreting-the-india-nepal-border-dispute Thu, 11 Jun 2020 10:08:15 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=843737 On May 8, India’s defence minister virtually inaugurated a new 80 km-long road in the Himalayas, connecting to the border with China, at the Lipulekh pass. The Nepali government protested immediately, contending that the road crosses territory that it claims and accusing India of changing the status quo without diplomatic consultations. Among the many escalatory moves since then, Nepal deployed police forces to the region, summoned the Indian ambassador in Kathmandu, and initiated a constitutional amendment to formalise and extend its territorial claims over approximately 400 sq km. India, on the other hand, has conveyed its openness to a dialogue […]

The post Interpreting the India-Nepal border dispute first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
On May 8, India’s defence minister virtually inaugurated a new 80 km-long road in the Himalayas, connecting to the border with China, at the Lipulekh pass. The Nepali government protested immediately, contending that the road crosses territory that it claims and accusing India of changing the status quo without diplomatic consultations.

Among the many escalatory moves since then, Nepal deployed police forces to the region, summoned the Indian ambassador in Kathmandu, and initiated a constitutional amendment to formalise and extend its territorial claims over approximately 400 sq km. India, on the other hand, has conveyed its openness to a dialogue but does not seem to share Nepal’s sense of urgency: its initial statement agreed to a dialogue, but only after the COVID-19 crisis.

Over one month later, the bilateral crisis seems to now be stuck in a stalemate, a worrisome trend in otherwise friendly India-Nepal relations. Dr. Constantino Xavier, Fellow, Brookings India, answers some of the key questions on the crisis, the possible factors that escalated the dispute, the geostrategic context, and ways to de-escalate towards a solution.

41414

Why did India build this road through territory claimed by Nepal?

India has been in effective possession of this territory for at least sixty years, although Nepal claims it conducted a census there in the early 1950s and refers to the 1815 Sugauli Treaty as legitimising its claims. But India’s new road, up to the Lipulekh pass, is not an unprecedented change in the status quo. India has controlled this territory and built other infrastructure here before, besides conducting its administration and deploying military forces up to the border pass with China.

The region is of strategic importance, and the new road is now one of the quickest links between Delhi and the Tibetan plateau. In a 2015 statement, China also recognised India’s sovereignty by agreeing to expand trade through the Lipulekh pass. Finally, this is also an important route for thousands of Hindus who trek across the border with China every year to visit the sacred Mount Kailash. Given recurrent military tensions with China, the future potential of trade, and the religious symbolism of the region, India will certainly continue to exercise civilian and military control.

Is there any reason for the timing of the Indian announcement on May 8?

If you believe in one of Kathmandu’s many conspiracy theories, the timing was part of a secret Indian ploy to support Prime Minister Oli. His government faced a severe internal political crisis in late April and the Indian announcement threw him a sudden lifeline: opposition forces immediately rallied to support his escalatory moves against India, including the proposal of a constitutional amendment.

Most likely, however, the reality is less flattering: Nepal may not even have figured in India’s decision to time the announcement on May 8. Unless part of a larger signaling game directed at China, the Indian defence minister was probably more interested in scoring a domestic success by bringing good news during the lockdown period. Even if warned about the negative repercussions this could have on relations with Nepal, Indian decisionmakers clearly did not factor this in. From the perspective of maintaining good India-Nepal relations, any other timing would have been better than May 8.

Did Nepal’s negative reaction catch India by surprise?

The Indian government may have weighed the pros and cons and decided to go ahead despite predictable opposition from Nepal. But according to Shishir Gupta, “New Delhi was surprised when Kathmandu protested over the road.” This is possible, but difficult to believe: any observer of Nepali domestic politics would have easily predicted that the Indian announcement was poised to embolden Prime Minister Oli and fuel a cross-partisan, nationalist opposition against India.

The timing of the announcement may have thus been reflective of miscommunication, lack of coordination or even different assessments by India’s defence, security and diplomatic establishments. It is also possible that an over-confident Delhi thought it would be able to “manage” Nepal and was then caught by surprise by the gravity of the anti-India uproar in Kathmandu.

Why has this border dispute become so politically charged in Nepal?

In line with democratisation and competitive nationalism, Nepal’s foreign policy is becoming increasingly politicised. The dispute with India has been lingering for years and Delhi’s diplomatic establishment and Nepal watchers were well aware that the issue could blow up anytime. In order to look ahead and repair, revise and revive the bilateral relationship, we must first understand why and how this dispute flared up. It may be tempting to start on a clean slate, but future visions will remain void if both sides don’t learn from past mistakes.

The Indian road was not built overnight and the Nepal government was surely aware and monitoring the situation in Kalapani over the preceding months and years. The issue had come up in November last year, when India announced its new political map, after the revocation of Article 370: as for many decades before, the Indian map continued to include territories claimed by Nepal, but this time the government in Kathmandu took it up officially and publically.  It also became a popular issue in Nepal, with the hashtag #BackOffIndia trending on social media.

For the beleaguered Nepali prime minister, India’s May 8 announcement thus fell like a gift from heaven as he faced his worst internal crisis since coming to power, in 2017. He was swiftly able to mobilise public opinion, play up nationalist sentiments against India, get his internal party rivals on board, and divert attention from his failed ordinances and challenges to contain the pandemic.

Are domestic politics hindering Nepal’s foreign policy?

Nepal has one of the world’s youngest populations and, especially after India’s implicit support for the 2015 blockade on the landlocked country, anti-Indian sentiments have been running high. This offers a new generation of Nepali politicians a powerful fuel to mobilise the electorate.

This is one of the reasons why Nepal chose not to attend a multilateral BIMSTEC counter-terrorism exercise hosted by India, in 2018. Delhi had then expressed its disappointment, especially about the Nepali government caving in to popular reservations about BIMSTEC as an anti-China military alliance driven by India. Similarly, the Nepali Communist Party has also created obstacles to the implementation of a United States-sponsored MCC grant that will upgrade Nepal’s electricity transmission system and connect it to the Indian power grid. Only China has been spared from such Nepali political protests, which is paradoxical given that Beijing has hardly delivered on any of its many BRI promises.

Nepal’s foreign policy establishment has embraced an ambitious and forward-looking agenda of external balancing and diversification in recent years, especially under the leadership of its Foreign Minister, Pradeep Gyawali. His participation in the Fourth Indian Ocean Conference, held in the Maldives in 2019, reflects Kathmandu’s widening geostrategic horizons, seeking to place Nepal as a critical connectivity hub between China, South Asia and the Indian Ocean region.

Did China engineer this border dispute between India and Nepal?

No, the border dispute between India and Nepal was brewing for many months and years, so it is unreasonable to blame China for creating the crisis. The counter-factual is clear: even if we hypothetically imagined China away, Prime Minister Oli and Nepali nationalists would always have reacted negatively to the Indian road announcement. For many years, Delhi was well aware that the issue was prone to politicisation in Nepal.

India’s Chief of Army Staff, however, suggested that Nepal may be bringing up the issue “at the behest” of a third party, alluding to China. Whether India has concrete intelligence backing this up or not is less of an issue than the effect of his words in Kathmandu, suggesting that there was no merit in Nepali’s repeated and persistent demands to discuss the issue diplomatically, at least since the late 1990s. This was also contrary to India’s Ministry of External Affairs statement recognising that there is a dispute and that both parties would proceed, as agreed, to sort this out through a diplomatic dialogue.

All this does not mean that Beijing has not supported or further instigated Kathmandu to take on a more assertive position, especially against the backdrop of the China-India military standoff in Ladakh. This could have contributed to the severity of the India-Nepal crisis. But we simply don’t know enough about the China factor, and it is thus simplistic, if not outright harmful to call Prime Minister Oli’s government “pro-China” or reflexively “anti-India” because of his party’s communist credentials.

Is China’s political influence in Nepal harming Indian interests?

We know from other recent crises in the region, for example in the Maldives in the aftermath of the 2017-18 Doklam crisis, that China rarely shies away from an opportunity to use India’s neighbours as proxies, especially when its relations with Delhi are tense. Nepal and several other Indian neighbours are young democracies, developing new institutions in a political transition that can be instable, as we see in Myanmar. But Beijing’s authoritarian system and appeal is growing and may hinder further democratisation, undermine the rule of law, or curtail critical media and academic independence.

India has always seen a more democratic Nepal as being in its interest, leading to greater stability and inclusiveness, especially towards minorities in the Madhes. In 2006, after returning his ambassadorial post in Kathmandu, then Foreign Secretary Shyam Saran emphasised that “stability in Nepal is in the best interests of India” and that “democracy in Nepal is the best guarantee of such stability.”

As China’s political influence grows in Nepal, Beijing may have, at least indirectly, encouraged Prime Minister Oli to take a bolder stance against India during the current crisis. Recent examples show how China reportedly mediated between different factions to keep the CPN in power, how it put pressure on critical reporting in the Nepali media, and how it promoted the authoritarian governance model of China’s Communist Party. But often it is also Nepali’s self-censorship and over caution that has the greatest effect, seeking to please China even when Beijing doesn’t really care that much and defers to Delhi.

By playing the China balancing card as a last resort, Nepali leaders often hope to get Delhi to pay attention to festering problems that Indian diplomacy neglects or forgets about. This is a risky game because it raises alarm bells in Delhi, especially in the security and strategic establishments, which are quick to step in and tend to resort to coercive tools that can further escalate the dispute. It is also risky because it assumes China is always willing to extend indefinite support to Nepal at the cost of its relations with India.

Could this crisis have been prevented?

Yes. The border dispute has been addressed through several official channels since the 1990s, as observed by former Indian ambassador Jayant Prasad. The dispute has roots going back to the 1950s, as detailed in a deeply researched essay by Sam Cowan. Besides Kalapani, there is also a second dispute with India in the Susta river border region. While not well known, there is also a possible issue at the Eastern tri-junction with China and the Indian state of Sikkim.

Both governments agreed during Modi’s 2014 visit to discuss the issue through Foreign Secretary level talks. Nepal alleges that it tried twice to convene such talks since then, and received no positive response from Delhi. In December, there were also reports of India brushing the issue under the carpet, even allegedly refusing to receive a special envoy to discuss the dispute.

At the root of the issue may also be differing interpretations of what exactly warrants a diplomatic dialogue. On the one hand, in Nepal’s maximalist perspective, this should cover all territories it claims, now also including Limpyadhura. The thinking in Kathmandu goes that if India conveys its own territorial claims in official maps, does it have any legitimacy to pressure Nepal not to come up with its own? On the other hand, in India’s minimalist perspective, perhaps reflecting why it delayed dialogue, the issue is seen to be more of a technical nature, focused on delimitation, boundary pillars etc. The current crisis has exposed the extent to which both countries’ interpretations clash and the different levels of priority.

Does this dispute reflect a deeper problem in India-Nepal relations?

Yes, the current border dispute reflects a growing structural problem in India-Nepal relations. C. Raja Mohan thus identifies the territorial dispute as “merely a symptom of the structural changes unfolding in the external and internal context of the bilateral relationship.”

As I argued in 2017, Delhi and Kathmandu need to work hard to keep their relationship stable, even if not special. For example, India can no longer afford to focus on its past Cold War policies of right of first refusal. No longer an Indian satellite or exclusive sphere of influence, as it is often depreciatively described in Delhi, Nepal has been embracing a policy of strategic diversification to reduce its dependence on India and enhance its non-aligned autonomy.

The rising presence of China across the Himalayas, especially after the BRI, forced India to recalibrate its policy towards Nepal. Delhi has begun shifting the emphasis away from geostrategic denial and insulation towards greater economic delivery and connectivity. This has been a tough adjustment, beginning in the 2000s, but with many Indian actors pushing in different directions. Some in India still look at twenty-first century Nepal through a nineteenth century colonial prism: as a buffer state with limited sovereignty, where India’s resources should be focused on political engineering and cultivate assets to topple a pro-China “puppet government.”

There is no better example of the larger problem in India-Nepal relations than the tragic fate of the report prepared by the Eminent Persons Group (EPG) from both countries. The EPG was mandated in 2015 by Prime Minister Modi and former Nepali Prime Minister Deuba to assess the state of bilateral relations and come up with major recommendations, whether on the 1950 Treaty or the open border.

Submitted in 2018, the EPG report has still not been accepted: sources initially noted that Prime Minister Modi had not found the time, but by now it is obvious that Delhi is uncomfortable with some of the non-binding, expert recommendations that it had commissioned itself. Such lack of confidence and openness to reassess the fundamentals of the relationship has transmitted negative signals to Nepal.

Does this crisis reflect a failure of India’s Neighbourhood First policy?

No, it is rather simplistic to assume that this crisis reflects a failure of India’s regional strategy. On Nepal, in particular, the successes have been astonishing since the 2015 course correction, after the blockade. After 2017, in particular, Prime Ministers Modi and Oli engaged at the highest level on multiple occasions and developed a direct, political and personal link that India-Nepal relations were often lacking, maybe since the 1980s.

Most importantly, driven by a new logic of interdependence and connectivity, India invested in upgrading its cross-border infrastructure and economic assistance: there are now new rail and road links, an electronic cargo system for Nepali goods to transit via Indian ports, inland waterway navigation plans, and a new cross-border pipeline for petroleum products. These are just some examples of the many achievements of India’s new connectivity strategy, focused on delivering more, better and faster to support the development objectives of Nepal and other neighbours. Unfortunately, these silent successes rarely make it to the headlines in Delhi or Kathmandu.

India’s new approach to Nepal has been gaining ground, especially in diplomatic circles, in different line ministries, in cross-border states/regions, and among a new generation of business and civil society stakeholders on both sides. But it still remains a secondary approach and work in progress. The traditional approach, focused on security, military and other geostrategic factors, continues to prevail, especially in moments of crisis and tension such as now.

As I argued in 2017, it will take some time for India to de-addict itself from the temptations of micromanaging Nepal’s internal politics. Delhi’s proactive engagement of the Nepal Communist Party (NCP) majority led by Prime Minister Oli was a welcome development, reflecting new pragmatism and a focus on delivery and connectivity. It is important for Delhi to realise that Kathmandu politics matters, but that different governments will come and go, all proclaiming an “India first” policy even while balancing with Beijing and others. India will continue to have its friendly political preferences in Nepal, but it should never forget that only its interests are permanent.

Why has India not yet taken the initiative to defuse tensions and begin a diplomatic dialogue?

India’s silence is the greatest cause for concern for the future of bilateral relations and is creating natural uneasiness in Kathmandu. After indirectly indicating its displeasure at the politically charged environment in Nepal, India has largely remained silent. The optics of the Indian ambassador in Kathmandu being summoned also conveyed India’s discontentment: the envoy simply “stated” Delhi’s position and handed over a public declaration of the MEA’s spokesperson.

One month later, we have still not seen any significant de-escalatory move from Delhi, and that betrays clear intent, especially in a context of friendly relations marked by a positive phone call between both leaders in early April. Silence speaks volumes and the relationship may now be in for a deep freeze. We do not know the exact reasons why, but it certainly transpires that Delhi does not feel comfortable to address the issue at this point or in the current context.

In recent weeks, India received the United States special representative for Afghanistan, held a virtual leaders’ summit with Australia, and participated in a border meeting with China to resolve the dispute in Ladakh. So it is certainly not for lack of time or interest that nobody in Delhi has yet found the time to talk to Nepal.

Does this mean India has lost confidence in Prime Minister Oli?

It is possible that this affected Delhi’s trust in Prime Minister Oli, especially given how long this dispute has played out and that both leaders have still not talked to each other. Whether it is because of his relations with China, his politicisation of the dispute, his jibes at India’s national symbols, or any other possible reason, it certainly looks like Delhi may now be less confident in Prime Minister Oli. This does not mean India will interfere to support any political alternative, despite what may circulate in Kathmandu’s many conspiracy corridors.

The reality, once again, is less flattering. Delhi may simply not care, having made its displeasure clear and now willing to wait it out. This would mean that India may now see Prime Minister Oli as more of a problem, rather than part of the solution to improve bilateral relations. Trust and direct communication is critical for India, and previous India-Nepal crises have generally flared up when Delhi picks up signals of anti-India rhetoric, a politically hostile environment, and extra-regional involvement – normally China. This would reflect a worrisome disruption in bilateral relations and, most importantly, a possible end to the strong personal and positive rapport both prime ministers have developed in recent years.

Are both sides really interested in a dialogue?

Not necessarily. Nepali analysts often overestimate the importance of their country in India’s foreign and security policies, or read too much into its allegedly “strategic” outlook. Not everything is planned in detail: Delhi’s decisionmaking, even on next-door Nepal, can be quite confusing and contingent. With many other urgent issues taking precedence in India, whether the COVID-19 pandemic at home or the military standoff with China, Nepal may simply not be a priority.

India’s calculation may be that it can afford to wait this out, watching how Kathmandu’s politics play out. This would be in line with the old colonial Raj tradition of “masterly inactivity.” On the other hand, Prime Minister Oli is unlikely to just get on a call with India without any significant assurance that he can present as a political victory at home, even if only to save face. So we may be in for a prolonged stalemate. As a Hindustan Times edit points out, however, this stasis may end up hurting Nepal more than India.

Will India ever give up control over the territory claimed by Nepal?

Unlikely and certainly not under any compulsion. Nepali nationalists may like to believe that passing a constitutional amendment, roping in the support of China or internationalising the issue at the United Nations will force India to back down. But it is doubtful that any realist in Kathmandu, especially Prime Minister Oli, is under the illusion that Delhi will cave in to any such demands or coercion. This is why despite all of its political rhetoric and pressure, the Nepali government has always continued to emphasise the importance of a diplomatic dialogue.

This crisis thus reflects that it is not easy for Prime Minister Oli, or any other Nepali leader, to have its cake and eat it too: having opened the pandora’s box of Nepali nationalism and anti-India rhetoric, it will be difficult to force that genie back into the bottle of policy pragmatism that is required to earn India’s trust.

Are there any possible solutions to this dispute in the long term?

Even after political trust is restored and diplomatic dialogue begins, whether in a few days, months or years, both sides will have to compromise. The border dispute has now turned into a permanent political irritant between both countries. The status quo privileges India, which is in comfortable control of the territory. India may choose to stall and brush the issue under the carpet again, but not without significant damage to its interests and influence in Nepal.

The sooner India settles this dispute with Nepal, the lesser the chances for China to get involved. Beijing has chosen to remain quiet this time, but its future calculation may change. The Kalapani dispute between India and Nepal is also an almost perfect mirror case of the 2017 Doklam crisis between China and Bhutan, where India stepped up and deployed its military forces to restore the status quo ante.

As noted by Dinesh Bhattarai, a former Nepali diplomat, the border dispute “looks minor, but allowing it to fester is likely to sow the seeds of immense competition and intense rivalry in the sensitive Himalayan frontier with far-reaching geopolitical implications.” Similarly, Indian scholar and Nepal expert S. D. Muni cautions that, sooner or later, the dispute “will be exploited by the third parties to their advantage.”

The historical, technical and cartographic claims from both sides will probably lead to a dead-end, with never-ending, clashing interpretations about river alignments and other contentious criteria. Assuming that there is political buy-in from the leadership on both sides, the only workable solution is to seek some form of co-management or shared sovereignty for the disputed territory.

There are many bold possibilities: maybe there could be joint deployment of military and police forces, as during the 1960s on the Nepal-China border. Given the trade potential, both countries could also consider establishing a special economic zone. Finally, it is in the interest of both that Indian and Nepali pilgrims can use the improved infrastructure in the Kalapani region to reach Mount Kailash.

Hostile states have been able to find such innovative solutions in other parts of the world and, at one point, India and Pakistan were close to finding solutions for Siachen or to make borders irrelevant in Kashmir.  Based on their history of friendly relations and driven by pragmatism, it should not be difficult for India and Nepal to think out of the box and find a practical solution. Delhi and Kathmandu could lead the way to liberate the subcontinent from the sovereignist, nationalist and territorial logic that continues to leave everyone in the region worse off.

The post Interpreting the India-Nepal border dispute first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
843737
Interview: On India’s neighbourhood, regional institutions and Delhi’s policy space http://stg.csep.org/blog/interview-on-indias-neighbourhood-regional-institutions-and-delhis-policy-space/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=interview-on-indias-neighbourhood-regional-institutions-and-delhis-policy-space Tue, 09 Jun 2020 08:29:18 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=834180 Q. Given your expertise in South Asia, by making use of the framework established within comparative politics how do you make sense of India’s South Asian policies in recent times? To what extent does it differ for various regional settings such as BIMSTEC, BBIN, and SAARC? Constantino Xavier: The big puzzle that we all face is why are institutions and regional organisations in this region, South Asia so weak? I think that the recent response to the COVID-19 crisis in South Asia reflects that. We’ve been talking a lot about the South Asian Association of Regional Cooperation (SAARC) over the […]

The post Interview: On India’s neighbourhood, regional institutions and Delhi’s policy space first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Q. Given your expertise in South Asia, by making use of the framework established within comparative politics how do you make sense of India’s South Asian policies in recent times? To what extent does it differ for various regional settings such as BIMSTEC, BBIN, and SAARC?

Constantino Xavier: The big puzzle that we all face is why are institutions and regional organisations in this region, South Asia so weak? I think that the recent response to the COVID-19 crisis in South Asia reflects that. We’ve been talking a lot about the South Asian Association of Regional Cooperation (SAARC) over the last few weeks, but if you look closer, the various funds, online meetings, and conferences and initiatives that Prime Minister Narendra Modi and India have been pushing for are not actually SAARC initiatives.

SAARC is a regional organisation that has its headquarters and Secretariat in Kathmandu and it has only been marginally involved in crafting a response to this regional crisis over the last weeks. That becomes even more apparent if you look at other regions such as the European Union (EU), which recently announced a €500 billion economic stimulus planned for their member states.

The Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) has had its problems over the last few weeks but has certainly more of a coordinated approach compared to South Asia, and even the African Union (AU) has had very interesting responses to this crisis, coordinated across Africa.  So, sometimes people have a problem with institutions and here in Delhi, you often hear this – why do regional organisations even matter when we can do everything bilaterally; this is some sort of Western idea that works across the European Union but doesn’t work here.

If you look at the literature on international organisations, historical institutionalism, neo-functionalism, regimes theory, and multilateralism, this goes back to the 1940s and 50s, but I think it is still very timely and it tells you that institutions don’t replace state sovereignty and independence but support state action by bringing a variety of states in a certain region together to overcome collective action problems.

So, in the end, if you cooperate through institutions, everyone should be better off because institutions offer a forum for experts to meet, to share information, to share data for instance during the COVID-19 crisis, to set an agenda, to develop best practices, to train together in terms of preparing for example for disaster management, or to set the terms of trade, if you’re looking at economic regional cooperation. Therefore, you work on low politics first, which means technical issues like trade and transportation, and generally leave high politics such as security, defence, and military towards the end. The EU, for example, today is still not strong enough to have a joint diplomatic and military approach to most issues.

So why has this institutionalised integration process not worked in South Asia? Three factors stand out. First, the Indian geographic, economic, demographic pre-dominance. India is the central state, so it makes it more difficult for other states to work with India as they are suspicious of its intentions more than that of any other state in South Asia. Second, the India-Pakistan dispute, which has derailed SAARC several times and continues to do so. And third, the post-colonial sovereign status- focussed approach to international politics in this region, where security weighs heavily and issues like trade interdependence are generally neglected.

There are good news and bad news with regard to institutions in the region. The good news relating to your question is that we started in the 1980s with SAARC, which is a top-down intergovernmental regional organization. In the 1990s, we saw the emergence of the Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC), which actually began as a sub-regional cooperation organisation, which means that it is becoming closer to focus on technical areas and economics rather than SAARC, which is always driven as a political leaders forum and top-down inter-state organisation, and conversely less of a technical cooperation system.

And these days, as you rightly mentioned, we have something called the BBIN (Bhutan, Bangladesh, India, Nepal) initiative which goes back again to the late 1990s. It has picked up steam since 2014, and is an even more flexible instrument of cooperation between these four states, focussed very specifically on water, transportation, and energy. So on these three areas you have a very focussed cooperation between experts, which not surprisingly has been leading to a variety of successes.

The bad news is that, despite all this, there is this consistent focus and obsession with Pakistan, especially in India. You have very little investment in the international institutions, in terms of the budgetary allocations, the deputation of Indian experts to the secretariat in Dhaka, for example for BIMSTEC. Finally, while I have argued that the region’s relative importance has increased in India’s foreign policy priorities, at the same time you have a persistent focus on bilateral shortcuts and what I call bilateralism, which I think is undermining the multilateral logic of regional cooperation through institutions.

3

Dr. Constantino Xavier (1st from R), previously a fellow at Carnegie India, at the launch of his paper, “Bridging the Bay of Bengal: Towards a Stronger BIMSTEC,” at the BIMSTEC Secretariat, in Dhaka, March 2018, in the presence of H.E. Foreign Minister of Bangladesh, Mr. Abul Hassan Mahmood Ali (2nd from R).

Q. Dr. Xavier, in your recent paper you’ve mentioned that South Asia and neighbourhood studies have been neglected for decades at Indian universities and that the annual growth rate of foreign students from the neighbourhood has decreased from 30% to 9% in the last 7 years. India is losing its attractiveness, which poses a challenge for India’s regional connectivity. Meanwhile, China is a new destination attracting students from South Asia, including India’s close allies like Nepal and Sri Lanka. What do you think are the reasons for this and how can the academic community collectively address the challenge? What changes do you see in India vis-à-vis China’s political behaviour in terms of promoting regional studies?

Constantino Xavier: Let me start this time with some good news. I think this project, your podcast series, is also the outcome of students who study at South Asian University here in Delhi which is a SAARC initiative dating back to 2010. In just ten years, this has created a new sense of regional studies, which is very welcome. Recently, I have noticed in several private universities in India a rising number of students from Nepal, Sri Lanka, etc. So, there is good news and certainly the best news, which I’ve been saying with some irony, for India’s focus on South Asia and the neighbourhood has been China’s new presence in India’s neighbouring countries.

Unfortunately, it took the quite sudden and grand entry of China on a variety of dimensions, such as diplomatic, economic, military cooperation, which is unprecedented in the region, for Delhi and the larger ecosystems of government, think tanks, academia to start looking again at this immediate first ring of neighbouring states beyond just Pakistan. When I speak of the neighbours here, I think, we have certainly taken a lot of attention and time to focus on Pakistan continuously and we still do here in Delhi but unfortunately, that is not the same for countries like Afghanistan, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh, Myanmar, Sri Lanka, and the Maldives.

So, in many ways, this is good news but there persists a knowledge gap and four factors explain how we’ve reached this point:  First, we have had excellent scholars on South Asia until today but they are all 60 years old and plus, so there is a generational gap in Indian academia where I think, you’ve had Prof S.D. Muni on this podcast too, for example. He is a brilliant expert on the domestic dimensions of Nepal and Sri Lanka. You have had bureaucrats who’ve served in these countries and know them in and out. If you look at the number of correspondents that newspapers like The Times of India used to have up until the 1970s in countries such as Burma, Sri Lanka, and Nepal, it was impressive. Today, you can count and see that maybe with the exception of The Hindu in Sri Lanka, there is no full-time correspondent in these neighbouring countries, which reflects this neglect.

Second, it is also a normal generational development. For instance, in the India-Nepal relationship, the first elected Prime Minister of Nepal, Bishweshar Prasad Koirala and many in his prominent family, the Koiralas, grew up and went to school in Patna, Bihar. General S.K. Sinha who went on to become India’s ambassador to Nepal in 1990 had known these Nepali families and leaders for decades, which represents very close ties across Bihar, India, and especially the Madhesh, in Nepal. Naturally, as Nepal modernised, diversified its options, democratised you’ve had a diversification and these ties with India alone are less important today. Similarly, in Sri Lanka, you had the whole Tamil movement in the 1950s and 1960s with the federal party where people like Chelvanayakam, who were deeply tied to Tamil Nadu in terms of their education, their upbringing, their intellectual engagements – that also has weakened overall today. Finally, if you look at the communist movements in Burma in the 1940s and 50s, many had studied at Indian universities, especially in Kolkata. There were deep ties and they are not as deep today as they used to be.

Third, there has been a traditional reliance in India to look at its neighbourhood through the instruments of politics and security. You could take these neighbouring countries for granted because they had very few meaningful relations with other countries beyond India. China was not very present in Nepal even up to the 2000s, the United States had limited presence and was very conditioned by India. In many ways, this was India’s turf and you could take this for granted and when you take these satellite countries for granted, then you obviously don’t invest in them and it becomes an area that is not very interesting for example, for a diplomat to grow in their career or for a scholar to become more reputable in Indian academia.

And finally and I think, the most important reason, is economic detachment and that’s the reason why South Asia has been neglected systematically at least until the 1990s. If you do not have an economic interest in your neighbouring countries, you will not invest in the logic of interdependence, of cross-border infrastructure, of knowing your neighbour country beyond that high-level political knowledge and diplomatic and security relations. So that past economic autarky explains why India is actually very disconnected until today from its neighbouring countries.

It’s a paradox that you don’t have a single passenger railway link today connecting India to Nepal. It’s a paradox that whereas up to the 1960s you had more than a dozen railway links between India and East Pakistan, today you only have four with Bangladesh, and there were only two until ten years ago. You had direct flight connections between North-eastern or south Indian cities and respectively Burma and Ceylon up to the 1970s, and you don’t have any of these anymore, reflecting the abysmal air connectivity in the region.

So there is a whole new interest now thanks to China, but also because of economic interest in India with a new, modern, open market- oriented economy since the 1990s, which brings in various new incentives, both geostrategic and economic, to reconnect with these countries. That is, fortunately, leading to a very interesting debate across India and the region on what the terms of connectivity and the new region in South Asia should be.

42

The launch of Brookings India’s Sambandh Regional Connectivity Initiative, and release of the first policy brief from the initiative, ‘Sambandh as Strategy: India’s New Approach to Regional Connectivity.’ (From L to R): Rohan Samarajiva, Founder, LIRNEAsia, Sri Lanka; Tariq Karim, Former High Commissioner of Bangladesh to India; Devirupa Mitra, Deputy Editor and Diplomatic Correspondent, The Wire; Swarnim Wagle, Former Vice Chairman, National Planning Commission, Nepal; Anasua Basu Ray Chaudhury, Senior Fellow, ORF Kolkata Chapter; Constantino Xavier, Fellow, Foreign Policy & Security Studies, Brookings India.

Q. We would like to hear your closing remarks and there’s one question that we ask every speaker who comes on the podcast. So, from your respective vantage points how do you view the alignment or disagreement between academic scholars and policymakers in International Relations and practice of diplomacy?

Constantino Xavier: Yes we have some gaps between different constituencies that are trying to shape public policy and are working towards the improvement of society and knowledge production. But at the same time, I’m often concerned by this competitive idea that different industries and segments work in isolation and against each other in many ways. I like to see us all working towards the same objective, and complement each other. It is as if there are different wavelengths and modes of approaching similar problems and issues.

You have four different wavelengths that work not necessarily in harmony, nor should they, but that are all necessary: that is the government which has one wavelength, working on a daily basis, with an urgent and specific understanding of how to approach and solve policy issues. Second, you have journalists, who play a very important role in allowing professors, scholars, think-tankers to access information. Without them, many on the foreign policy beat covering the Ministry of External Affairs and other agencies every day, half of my own work would not be possible.

Third, you have experts in civil society, private sector companies, industries, businesses, NGOs across different sectors who are domain specialists in a variety of issues such as energy, health, defence or migration. They are the real sectoral experts, even if some take on an activist mode, whether for profit or ideology, that is fine as long as it is clear. Finally fourth, you have academics and scholars at universities who have the deepest insights with the luxury of exploring the complexity of a certain issue, do a deep dive which none of us – I’m at a think tank for example – can afford to do because of other constraints.

These are four complementary approaches, and we all need each other. I look at myself at a think tank and what we do is try to facilitate, translate some of these issues and put these different wavelengths in some form of a joint setting, where we can communicate with each other, exchange ideas and shape each other. It is in the interest of the government to benefit from what an academic is doing and similarly, it should be in the interest of a journalist, but also an academic and think-tanker to be connected to understand what and why the government is doing something.

In some cases, if you get the chance, based on your knowledge and ability to translate it to the real world of practice, you can also have impact and improve public policies with evidence-based expertise, whether that comes from studying archival records and maps on the Himalayas or from analysing daily mass data trends in India’s electricity generation, distribution and consumption.  In India we have now a fascinating evolving architecture of this knowledge production, which is all being shaped and still developing – so despite what you may hear, Delhi is a good place to be in these days, if you wish to have impact and be part of the change in whichever direction you deem best.

 

The post Interview: On India’s neighbourhood, regional institutions and Delhi’s policy space first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
834180
Linking border-making and sovereignty in postcolonial South Asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/sambandh-blog-linking-border-making-and-sovereignty-in-postcolonial-south-asia/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sambandh-blog-linking-border-making-and-sovereignty-in-postcolonial-south-asia Thu, 28 May 2020 10:39:26 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=811445 In this edition of the Sambandh blog, Riya Sinha interviews Dr. Elisabeth Leake and Dr. Daniel Haines on their article, Lines of (In)Convenience: Sovereignty and Border-Making in Postcolonial South Asia, 1947-1965, published in the Journal of Asian Studies. The article combines archival history methodology with conceptual insights from political geography and critical international relations. Through two case studies – the Durand Line between Pakistan and Afghanistan and the India-Pakistan ceasefire line in Kashmir – the article demonstrates that during the 1950s and 1960s, the political elites in South Asia exercised sovereignty in border areas through centre-led border policies that rejected […]

The post Linking border-making and sovereignty in postcolonial South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of the Sambandh blog, Riya Sinha interviews Dr. Elisabeth Leake and Dr. Daniel Haines on their article, Lines of (In)Convenience: Sovereignty and Border-Making in Postcolonial South Asia, 1947-1965, published in the Journal of Asian Studies. The article combines archival history methodology with conceptual insights from political geography and critical international relations. Through two case studies – the Durand Line between Pakistan and Afghanistan and the India-Pakistan ceasefire line in Kashmir – the article demonstrates that during the 1950s and 1960s, the political elites in South Asia exercised sovereignty in border areas through centre-led border policies that rejected competing authorities and were often in conflict with local specificities of the inhabitants.

Q: In the article [1], you refer to border-making as a ‘top-down’ process wherein the state’s attempt to impose sovereignty over a territory contradicts with the lived realities of borderland inhabitants. What are the differences in the post-colonial state’s and the residents’ vision of a borderland and why did they emerge so?

A: For many states that gained independence from empires in the twentieth century, one of their first priorities was to establish political legitimacy – among their neighbours and the international community, as well as their citizens. Across the world, but especially in South Asia, securing borders was a key way of doing this. A clear border distinguished a state from their neighbours and created a geographical arena for nation-building. In contrast, many communities in borderlands had lives and livelihoods that historically sprawled across ambiguous imperial frontiers – before decolonisation, they had no need to see themselves as belonging either to one country or the other. Their social, political, and economic relationships were rooted in local and regional networks that did not necessarily correspond to the new borders. Their daily practices consequently came up against the state’s attempts to delineate its authority. Our article speaks to a key issue in the twentieth century: not all people assumed that ‘the nation-state’ would come to define national and international politics. This was something that developed over the mid-twentieth century, and borders were a key part of this.

313

Q: The article compares the ‘inherited’ Durand boundary line between Afghanistan and Pakistan, and the ‘artificial’ ceasefire line that divides the erstwhile princely state of Jammu and Kashmir. Beyond militarisation, what attempts were made by Pakistan to establish sovereignty? How did Pakistan’s approach differ in both areas?

A: Pakistan used economic development and governing initiatives to establish state authority and develop relationships with local populations. In Pakistan-administered Kashmir,[2] Karachi/Islamabad influenced governance by ‘loaning’ civil servants to the local government. The Pakistan government also built the Mangla Dam near Mirpur, which strengthened infrastructural links between Kashmir and West Pakistan, and promoted small-scale development projects for agriculture and forestry. Development was also important along the Durand Line, where the government built local industries and infrastructure. They believed that ‘if the economic standard of the tribesmen is raised, they will be less susceptible to temptation’ from Afghanistan – and more loyal to Pakistan. Pakistan successfully outcompeted the Afghan government in development, which had fewer resources, yet took only limited steps to integrate the region politically. Instead, they left a system of ‘tribal’ government in place while continuing to rely on collective punishment, systems which have only begun changing recently. In both these regions, governance was, and has been, simultaneously weaker yet more authoritarian than elsewhere in Pakistan.

Q: Many states in the Indian subcontinent seek to undo colonial-era injustices in the creation of modern nation-states and this is a major cause of insecurity in the region. Do you think that the imaginations of borderlands have evolved over-time in the subcontinent with the operationalisation of the border-haats between India-Bangladesh or the cross-line of control trade and travel in Jammu and Kashmir by India and Pakistan?

A: The legal and moral justifications that state elites have applied to different borders in South Asia have changed over time. Similarly, certain borders have become more or less important depending on regional relations. None of South Asia’s national leaders have ever had a single, coherent ‘border logic’ – they have always acknowledged that different borders in the region have different functions, and in turn, deserve different policies. Perhaps what’s more significant is that while some border stretches remain contested, even more borders, both of the colonial era and post-1947, are largely acknowledged and respected for the majority of the time. Even if some of these borders remain legally disputed, in practice they continue to function as dividers between nation-states. But borders also serve as useful flashpoints in time of conflict. Closing a border provides a clear way for state elites to demonstrate that they take a conflict seriously. The operationalisation of borders – when people and goods can or cannot cross a border – has just helped to make regional tensions more visible.

Q: You delve extensively into archival research as a methodology. How did you overcome the biases in the political rhetoric of India, Pakistan and Afghanistan between 1947-65? What lessons would you like to share for budding scholars conducting archival research?

A: We were lucky enough to be able to work in government archives in India, Pakistan, the US and the UK for this article, helping us triangulate information despite the biases that officials in each government had. Because border issues are still sensitive for India and Pakistan and documents remain classified, the Western archives were essential for understanding the histories of those areas. The security situation in Afghanistan made research there impossible, and our sources for Afghan perspectives had to be teased out from materials gathered across all of the archives (the National Archives of India proved particularly useful).

If you want to conduct archival research, be prepared to spend time getting to know how information was recorded. A lot of diplomatic reporting in the 1950s-60s was quite formulaic, so with experience, you learn to quickly find the information you need. But remember that government reports and letters were written by individuals, who had their own points of view, and archives record arguments and contradictions as well as decisions. A lot of US and Indian documents have been made available online, which should help scholars pursue future research.

About the Experts:

Elizabeth LeakeElisabeth Leake is Associate Professor of International History at the University of Leeds, UK. Her first book, The Defiant Border: The Afghan-Pakistan Borderlands in the Era of Decolonization, 1936-65, explores the ongoing significance of the Durand Line in regional and international relations. She is currently writing a new international history of the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan.

Contact: e.leake@leeds.ac.uk

 

 

 

 

Daniel HainesDaniel Haines is Senior Lecturer in Environmental History at the University of Bristol, UK. He has published two books about dam-building and river-water disputes in India and Pakistan, including Indus Divided: India, Pakistan and the River Basin Dispute, and is currently writing a political history of earthquakes in colonial India.

Contact: daniel.haines@bristol.ac.uk

 

The post Linking border-making and sovereignty in postcolonial South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
811445
India and Bangladesh: Border enclaves and ‘acts of belonging’ http://stg.csep.org/blog/sambandh-blog-india-and-bangladesh-exchanging-border-enclaves-re-connecting-with-new-citizens/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sambandh-blog-india-and-bangladesh-exchanging-border-enclaves-re-connecting-with-new-citizens Tue, 12 May 2020 07:49:33 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=805277 For decades, India-Bangladesh relations were marred by the question of a comprehensive settlement of the land boundary between both countries, an important aspect of which included facilitating the belated exchange of border enclaves. These were pockets of land embedded entirely in the foreign territory of its neighbour complicating the state’s administrative control over the enclave and its residents, who in turn, were essentially ungoverned and disconnected from their respective home states for almost seventy years. In some cases, the structure was further complicated with the existence of counter-enclaves and counter-counter-enclaves, wherein the enclave of one state was entrapped by the […]

The post India and Bangladesh: Border enclaves and ‘acts of belonging’ first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
For decades, India-Bangladesh relations were marred by the question of a comprehensive settlement of the land boundary between both countries, an important aspect of which included facilitating the belated exchange of border enclaves. These were pockets of land embedded entirely in the foreign territory of its neighbour complicating the state’s administrative control over the enclave and its residents, who in turn, were essentially ungoverned and disconnected from their respective home states for almost seventy years. In some cases, the structure was further complicated with the existence of counter-enclaves and counter-counter-enclaves, wherein the enclave of one state was entrapped by the enclave of the other, and so on. The 2015 Land Boundary Agreement served a historic role in advancing the exchange of 111 enclaves (17,160.63 acres) from India to Bangladesh and reciprocatively, the latter transferred 51 enclaves (7,110.02 acres) to India. In addition, the choice of citizenship in either country was offered by states to enclave residents. 

In his article[1], Md. Azmeary Ferdoush traces the history of erstwhile Indian border enclaves presently part of Bangladeshi territory. In doing so, Ferdoush captures the lived experiences of its residents long-neglected by the states involved, exploring their various ‘acts of belonging’ to the host state through the concepts of spatial socialization, social memory, and regional identity, which ultimately came to influence their choice of citizenship in Bangladesh over resettlement in their home country.

In this edition of our blog series on issues related to India’s neighbourhood connectivity, Nitika Nayar interviews Azmeary Ferdoush on his article “Acts of Belonging: The choice of citizenship in the former border enclaves of Bangladesh and India” published in Political Geography Vol. 70, 2019.

1

Source: Annexure II, India & Bangladesh Land Boundary Agreement, Ministry of External Affairs, Government of India

Q. In contrast to most reports that underscore isolation of enclave residents by their home country, Tin-Bigha corridor is a case in point where Bangladesh used infrastructure to connect with its enclave residents in Dahagram-Angarpota, India. How did such initiatives by the home country complicate the choice of citizenship amongst enclave residents? Post-2015, what potential does this corridor serve in connectivity initiatives between both countries?

A. Well, the connection with Dahagram-Angorpota through the Tin-Bigha corridor has been a significant one for both Bangladesh and India since the 1974 Land Boundary Agreement (LBA). The LBA laid the paperwork for the Corridor as both parties agreed that Dahagram-Angorpota would not be exchanged as Bangladesh would give up its claim on the half of Berubari. The LBA also included that India would lease the Corridor to Bangladesh for perpetuity. Both these factors (the Corridor and Dahagram-Angorpota being exempt from the exchange) significantly influenced the idea and rhetoric of citizenship, and the sense of belonging of the Dahagram-Angorpota residents (Cons 2016). Unlike most of their counterparts in other enclaves, their identity and sense of belonging to the home country were not blurred. However, such sense and identity were not born in a vacuum. The Corridor became a center of territorial conflict and stimulus for nationalistic feelings in Bangladesh and India. Both local and national politicians depicted the opening of the Corridor as a puncture in India’s sovereign power, while their counterparts in Bangladesh used the same event to intensify nationalistic feelings by depicting India as a ‘hostile neighbour’ (Ferdoush 2019). Such opposing stands regarding the Corridor and eventually a connection with the ‘mainland’ through the Corridor instead of blurring, I would say, made the choice of citizenship relatively straightforward for the Dahagram-Angorpota residents.

The Corridor has been played as a pawn by politicians both pre- and post-2015. However, post-2015, the Corridor has been overwhelmingly depicted as a symbol of cooperation and friendship as the Modi government’s broader geopolitical vision of ‘Look East’ is at stake. On the other side, the Hasina government uses the Corridor and the exchange as a territorial win over its mighty neighbor. Thus, we could expect the Corridor and the enclave exchange being played in the future connectivity initiatives as well.

1

A group of former Indian enclave residents inside Bangladesh taking their agricultural products to a local Bangladeshi market. The corn field and the vehicle are inside a former Indian enclave while the picture was taken standing on Bangladesh. Photo credit: Azmeary Ferdoush.

Q. Some reports claim high estimates of enclave residents wanting to resettle in India who, for various reasons, were either overlooked by officials administering the survey or threatened by parties in Bangladesh. To what extent, was the ‘choice’ of citizenship in the host country exercised freely by enclave residents?

A. I was not surprised at all seeing the low number of enclave residents opting to move to India and none to Bangladesh. Although the Indian government expected a huge number of enclave residents from Bangladesh to move to India and allocated budget for that, to their surprise, less than a thousand people finally moved from Bangladesh to India. Popular media had predicted that a large number of people from the Indian enclaves inside Bangladesh would accept Indian citizenship simply because of economic opportunities. However, scientific studies had already predicted that there were lower chances for people to move, instead, they would stay where they were (Jones 2010Cons 2016). I also found similar scenarios during my fieldwork and engage with this issue in detail in a paper (Ferdoush 2019). I had even met a few former enclave residents who first opted to move to India and then changed their decisions. Their choice would make more sense once we historicize the process. First, right after 1947 until late the 1960s, enclave residents took advantage of their unique territorial arrangements and swapped lands with their counterparts to settle in the state of their preference. Second, they had developed deep connections with the ‘host-land’ either by marrying or by other means such as buying lands. Third, by the time enclaves were finally exchanged, most of them were second or third generation (young)-adults. Thus, their sense of belonging was strongly influenced by the host state (due to a lack of connection to the home state). Consequently, I view the low number of people moving to India from Bangladesh not as a result of administrative glitch or intimidation but as an ontological choice.

3

The sign-post marking the Bangladesh office of the India-Bangladesh Enclave Exchange Coordination Committee (IBEECC) that led a coordinated movement across borders in demand of the exchange of former enclaves. Photo Credit: Azmeary Ferdoush.

Q. The conflicting Centre-State relations in India contributed to delays in the enclave exchange and subsequent development of its newly acquired territory. Having visited its Bangladeshi counterparts pre-and post-exchange, what are the factors influencing infrastructure development and naturalisation of the new citizens?

A. The key, I would say, lies in the question itself. To a great extent, the structure of the government influenced the (non)infrastructural development or, in other words, the state-making process in these enclaves. The central government is not the ultimate authority when it comes to local affairs in India. In contrast, Bangladesh is not a union, and all the decisions trickle down from the center to the local. Thus, state-making was quicker and relatively less complicated once these enclaves came under the state jurisdiction in Bangladesh. On top of this, there were numerous steps taken by the government of Bangladesh, both formal and informal, to incorporate its ‘new citizens’. An example of the formal arrangement could be a special and quicker arrangement to register enclave lands by the Ministry of Land. Contrary, informal arrangements range from verbal instructions for prioritising enclave residents from higher authorities to easier access to field-level officials.

2

Immediately after the enclaves were exchanged, the government of Bangladesh arranged a special census from October 5 to 14, 2017 to include the former enclave residents within the national statistics; a well-recognized mechanism of governmentality and state-making. Photo credit: Azmeary Ferdoush.

Q. Your field study recollects the history of border enclaves and experiences of its residents long-neglected as a subject of inquiry in the Social Sciences, especially in discourses on nationalism, border studies, and migration. According to you, what are the other aspects of the India-Bangladesh border worth studying?

A. I believe the Bengal borderland, as many have demonstrated (Cons 2016Ghosh 2017Jones 2012Samaddar 1999Shahriar et al. 2017Shewly 2013Sur 2018Van Schendel 2005Whyte 2002), is a productive yet surprisingly under-studied site. While most of the well-known studies focus on the partition, rhetoric of nationalism and the role of religion, the Bengal borderland is a fecund ground for studying cross-border mobilities, sovereignty, migration, gender, refugee camps, statelessness, belonging, bureaucracy, violence, cooperation, defiance, trafficking, smuggling and many more. I am also optimistic as the new generation of scholars keep digging the ground and bring unheard stories from the Bengal borderland, which slowly but surely, is placing Bangladesh-India border as one of the sites of interest within the broader social-science literature.

5

A pillar marking the border of Bangladesh and India. The picture was taken from Bangladesh side while the pond and drying clothes are in India. Indian border fence is visible in the background, further right. From the pillar to the border fence marks the Indian ‘no-man’s land’. Photo credit: Azmeary Ferdoush.

[1] Md. Azmeary Ferdoush, Acts of Belonging: The choice of citizenship in the former border enclaves of Bangladesh and India, Political Geography, Volume 70, April 2019, Pages 83-91, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.polgeo.2019.01.015

 

7Azmeary Ferdoush is a postdoctoral researcher in Geography at the University of Oulu, Finland. He studies, broadly, the way man-made ideas of borders and bounded spaces affect human mobility and vice versa. His research interests include, but are not limited to, borders, enclaves, (non)citizenship, nationalism, state, qualitative methods, South Asia, and the Arctic.

Azmeary’s current project explores the way regional changes and transformation processes take place in the Arctic with an emphasis on Arctic Finland and its adjacent regions, which is funded by the Eudaimonia Institute at the University of Oulu.

Azmeary was awarded the prestigious East-West Center Graduate Degree Fellowship to pursue his doctoral studies in Geography at the University of Hawaiʻi at Mānoa, USA. In his dissertation research, Azmeary studied the choice of citizenship, experiences of (non)citizenship, and state-making processes in the former Bangladesh-India border enclaves.

Email: azmeary.ferdoush@oulu.fi

Cover Photo Description: A pillar marking the boundary of a Bangladeshi enclave inside and Indian enclave inside Bangladesh. Such enclaves are known as double-enclaves. To the left of the pillar is a Bangladeshi enclave while the right side is a former Indian enclave and the background beyond is mainland Bangladesh. CreditAzmeary Ferdoush.

The post India and Bangladesh: Border enclaves and ‘acts of belonging’ first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
805277
District Mineral Foundation funds can help COVID-19 hit mining areas http://stg.csep.org/blog/district-mineral-foundation-funds-crucial-resource-for-ensuring-income-security-in-mining-areas-post-covid-19/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=district-mineral-foundation-funds-crucial-resource-for-ensuring-income-security-in-mining-areas-post-covid-19 Wed, 06 May 2020 10:36:03 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=804111 The Prime Minister of India held a meeting on April 30, 2020 to consider reforms in the mines and coal sector to jump-start the Indian economy in the backdrop of COVID-19. The mining sector, which is a primary supplier of raw materials to the manufacturing and infrastructure sectors, is being considered to play a crucial role for the resurgence of the economy post the lockdown and in the coming years. While several reforms are being mulled over to boost mining businesses, the Centre and the state Governments also need to consider boosting local livelihoods. In the context of mining districts, […]

The post District Mineral Foundation funds can help COVID-19 hit mining areas first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The Prime Minister of India held a meeting on April 30, 2020 to consider reforms in the mines and coal sector to jump-start the Indian economy in the backdrop of COVID-19. The mining sector, which is a primary supplier of raw materials to the manufacturing and infrastructure sectors, is being considered to play a crucial role for the resurgence of the economy post the lockdown and in the coming years.

While several reforms are being mulled over to boost mining businesses, the Centre and the state Governments also need to consider boosting local livelihoods. In the context of mining districts, the District Mineral Foundation (DMF) funds can be used for prioritising livelihood generation and creating local jobs. The Prime Minister in the latest meeting has also discussed the scope of improving “community development activities” through the fund.[1]

 

DMF was instituted in March 2015, under the Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Amendment Act 2015. It has been conceptualised as a benefit-sharing mechanism with mining-affected communities, recognising them as partners in natural resource-led development. Set up as a non-profit trust in all mining districts of India, DMF comes with the precise objective to ‘work for the interest and benefit of people and areas affected by mining’, through a participatory process. In September 2015, the Centre further aligned DMF with the Pradhan Mantri Khanij Kshetra Kalyan Yojana (PMKKKY) scheme, to implement various developmental projects and welfare programmes in mining-affected areas using DMF funds.[2]

Livelihood and income generation is a key issue that DMFs need to focus on for mining-affected communities across the country. This has been emphasised through the MMDR Amendment Act 2015 and the respective State DMF Rules developed under it, as well as the PMKKKY scheme. The emphasis comes in three ways.

Firstly, considering the fact that mining-related activities lead to significant displacement and loss of livelihoods in these areas, the law specifically notes that people who have lost their land rights (including user and traditional rights) due to mining or whose livelihood has been affected by such activities, constitute DMF beneficiaries. Secondly, one of the defined objectives of PMKKY is to ensure long-term sustainable livelihood for the people affected by mining. Finally, following the PMKKKY guidelines, livelihood and skill development have been recognised as ‘high-priority’ issues under all state DMF Rules on which districts must invest adequately.

Besides regulatory prerogative, the economic situation in the mining districts also clearly point out why income generation and creation of diverse livelihood opportunities should be a focus of DMFs. For example, in most of the mining districts, particularly in the rural areas where most mines are located, the income level among the local population is extremely low. As per socio-economic caste census of the Government of India, in a majority of these districts, 80 to 90% of the rural households have the highest earning member getting below Rs. 5,000 per month (Table 1: Distribution of household earnings in rural areas of some top mining districts). What adds to the low-income levels is the income uncertainty, as more than 50% of the workforce comprise of manual and casual labourers in these districts. Poverty and uncertainty of income also undermines the access to adequate food, proper healthcare, education and all such basic needs.

Table 1: Distribution of household earnings in rural areas of some top mining districts

State

District

Households having monthly income of highest earning household member less than Rs. 5,000 (%)

Households having monthly income of highest earning household member between Rs. 5,000 to10,000 (%)

Households having monthly income of highest earning household member more than Rs. 10,000 (%)

Odisha

Keonjhar

90.6

5.2

4.2

Sundargarh

89.8

5.4

4.8

Jharkhand

West Singhbhum

53.8

37.3

8.9

Chatra

83.2

11.8

5.0

Chhattisgarh

Dantewada

94.7

3.1

2.2

Korba

91.3

4.4

4.3

Rajasthan

Bhilwara

82.5

11.8

5.5

Chittorgarh

84.0

10.5

5.5

Madhya Pradesh

Singrauli

86.5

9.9

3.6

Satna

82.3

11.7

6.0

Telangana

Karimnagar

78.8

17.0

4.2

Khammam

74.6

21.4

4.0

Karnataka

Bellary

72.0

20.3

7.7

Gulbarga

47.5

30.9

21.6

Maharashtra

Yavatmal

74.9

15.9

9.2

Chandrapur

79.7

10.6

9.7

Source: Socio economic caste census, 2011, Government of India

Neglected so far, livelihood investments must now be a priority for DMFs

Despite the mandate to improve livelihood and income among communities in the mining-affected areas, DMFs in almost all mining states have failed to make the required investments on this extremely important sector so far. For instance, in most of the top mining states, the funds earmarked for livelihood and skill development are negligible compared to the total cumulative accrual of DMF funds (Table 2: Allocation of DMF funds for skill development and livelihood in top mining states). The allocation towards this account for only 0-4% of total allocations for various developmental works in these states. [3]

Table 2: Allocation of DMF funds for skill development and livelihood in top mining states

State

Total DMF accrual

(Rs. Crore)

Allocation for livelihood and skill development

(Rs. Crore)

Odisha

9,772

196.0

Jharkhand

5,305

0

Chhattisgarh

5,115

456.3

Rajasthan

3,628

0

Madhya Pradesh

2,938

No information available

Telangana

2,790

80.0

Karnataka

1,885

62.0

Maharashtra

1,791

48.0

Source: Ministry of Mines, Government of India, DMF fund status up to February 2020 and State Government mining departments. [4]

The course must now be corrected. As policymakers at the Centre and state levels discuss relief measures for the poorest and reviving their income, they have an opportunity to strengthen implementation of key programs like PMKKKY and DMF to improve the ground situation. For this, the Centre and respective state governments need to provide clear directions to all districts.

With more than Rs. 36,858 crores in DMFs across the country, the potential of this fund is enormous for improving socio-economic conditions of local communities in the mining districts. As we start a new financial year, it is also the time for DMFs to start planning and budgeting for the 2020-2021. The law requires DMFs to undertake such annual planning considering the situation on the ground and capturing the need and aspirations of local communities.

For DMFs in all districts, much attention must be paid to skill development and providing other resource support for sustainable income generation. This, as noted earlier, is also enshrined in the third objective of PMKKKY and a priority component of all State DMF Rules.[5] Considering the potential of local skills and resources, employment opportunities can be improved through multiple means. For example, incentivising livelihood opportunities around local resources such as forest products can be helpful as many of the mining areas are rich in forests. In fact, the Government of India last week announced raising of minimum support price (MSP) for 49 varieties of minor forest produces, including wild honey, tamarind, mahua flowers and seeds, lac, sal leaves etc., in view of circumstances arising out of Covid-19.[6] DMF funds can further be used to support market linkages for these produces and their products to ensure better economic value for the goods. Besides, agro and horticulture-based industries should be developed which will be relevant to the knowledge and skills of the local people. Providing support to women self-help groups (SHGs) on micro enterprises such as poultry farming, dairy, sericulture, handicrafts, handlooms, etc. will also be important to improve women participation in the workforce. At the same time creating a workforce for various occupations including health care givers through proper training will be crucial for supporting income as well as bridging resource gaps in primary healthcare.

DMFs in various states and districts cannot afford to put the issue of livelihood in the backseat anymore. Given the urgency of the economic situation the states and districts must shore-up investments towards this.

With reviewers’ inputs from Prof Rajesh Chadha, Program Director, Natural Resources, Brookings India.

 

[1] Official website of Shri Narendra Modi, Prime Minister of India, April 30,2020, PM Modi hold a meeting to discuss ways to boost coal and mining sector, as available from https://www.narendramodi.in/prime-minister-narendra-modi-holds-a-meeting-to-discuss-ways-to-boost-coal-mining-sector-549490

[2] Srestha Banerjee, April 6, 2020, Utilising District Mineral Foundation funds to fight the COVID-19 crisis in India: Current and future opportunities, as available from https://www.brookings.edu/blog/up-front/2020/04/06/utilising-district-mineral-foundation-funds-to-fight-the-covid-19-crisis-in-india-current-and-future-opportunities/

[3] Srestha Banerjee et al, 2018, People First: District Mineral Foundation (DMF), Status Report 2018, Centre for Science and Environment, New Delhi.

[4] The sector specific allocation data was collected by the author during research in December 2019, for contribution to the report District Mineral Foundation (DMF): Implementation Status and Emerging Best Practices, Centre for Science and Environment, New Delhi, as available from https://www.cseindia.org/dmf-implementation-status-and-emerging-best-practices-10057

[5] Ministry of Mines, Government of India, Order dated September 16, 2015, Pradhan Mantri Khanij Kshetra Kalyan Yojana (PMKKKY), as available from https://mines.gov.in/writereaddata/UploadFile/PMKKKY%20Guidelines.pdf

[6] Ministry of Tribal Affairs, Government of India, order dated May 1, 2020, as available from https://pibphoto.nic.in/documents/rlink/2020/may/p20205101.pdf

The post District Mineral Foundation funds can help COVID-19 hit mining areas first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
804111
How India-China rivalry affects secondary state behaviour in South Asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/sambandh-blog-how-does-the-india-china-rivalry-affect-secondary-state-behaviour-in-south-asia/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sambandh-blog-how-does-the-india-china-rivalry-affect-secondary-state-behaviour-in-south-asia Tue, 28 Apr 2020 08:33:03 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=802292 Saneet Chakradeo interviews Rohan Mukherjee and Darren Lim on their article “Hedging in South Asia: balancing economic and security interests amid Sino-Indian competition” published in International Relations of the Asia-Pacific, 2019. Q. In your article [1], you write on the concept of hedging, which describes the behaviour of secondary states amidst competition between two regional powers. While most scholars have written about hedging in the context of the U.S.-China rivalry in Southeast and Northeast Asia, your article studies the effects of growing competition between India and China in the South Asian region. How would you compare your argument of secondary […]

The post How India-China rivalry affects secondary state behaviour in South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Saneet Chakradeo interviews Rohan Mukherjee and Darren Lim on their article “Hedging in South Asia: balancing economic and security interests amid Sino-Indian competition” published in International Relations of the Asia-Pacific, 2019.

Q. In your article [1], you write on the concept of hedging, which describes the behaviour of secondary states amidst competition between two regional powers. While most scholars have written about hedging in the context of the U.S.-China rivalry in Southeast and Northeast Asia, your article studies the effects of growing competition between India and China in the South Asian region. How would you compare your argument of secondary state behaviour in South Asia in the context of the India-China rivalry with traditional notions of hedging?

A. We define hedging as a secondary state’s strategy of pursuing contradictory policy choices or ambiguous security alignment with major powers. A small country makes a foreign policy judgment that going “all in” with a major power to the exclusion of others whether that’s China or the United States in East Asia, or China or India (or the U.S.) in South Asia is not an optimal strategy. This is not only because having positive relations with both major powers can bring benefits, but also because alienating one might result in specific punishments.

Hedging behaviour across both regions is actually quite consistent. In the words of former Sri Lankan foreign minister Mangala Samaraweera, governments adopt an “omni-directional” foreign policy, trying to be friends with everyone and alienating no one.

There are, however, two differences between East and South Asia. First, across East Asia several states have military alliances with the United States, which anchor them far more within Washington’s orbit in the security domain. This limits the extent to which they can cooperate with Beijing on security matters and typically puts a ceiling on how close bilateral relations with China can get.

Second, several states in East Asia have maritime territorial disputes with China, which are also direct points of contention. This leads to a broader point sometimes a government will face a policy decision that is “zero-sum” in the sense that any decision will necessarily alienate one power and please the other. In such cases hedging is very difficult, as the government will inevitably be seen as picking sides. In South Asia however, there are simply fewer of these zero-sum cases or otherwise sources of more direct conflicts of interest. Governments generally appear to be succeeding in balancing warm ties with both major powers and indeed playing them off against each other.

Q. Your article uses Sri Lanka and the Maldives as test cases for your theory. How applicable do you think is your argument for other secondary states in South Asia such as Nepal and Bangladesh?

A. We picked Sri Lanka and the Maldives as test cases because they are the most likely countries where we might observe hedging behaviour. Although in absolute terms Chinese investment in Bangladesh is much higher and investment in Nepal falls in between the Maldives and Sri Lanka, the share of external debt in gross national income is much higher in Sri Lanka and the Maldives. Significant portions of these debts are owed to China. Therefore, the dynamic of a secondary state caught between two major powers is likely to be stronger in these two cases.

We find in both cases that either due to pressure from India or due to domestic backlash against Chinese investment, the governments of the Maldives and Sri Lanka have adopted a hedging strategy toward China and India in order to preserve their autonomy. In Sri Lanka’s case there is the additional problem of failed infrastructure projects, which then leads to the acquisition of strategic assets such as ports by China, an act that threatens Sri Lanka’s autonomy.

These dynamics are certainly present in the cases of Nepal and Bangladesh as well. Both countries have witnessed domestic protests against land acquisition for China-funded infrastructure projects, such as the Banshkhali power plant in Bangladesh and road-building in districts of Nepal bordering China. Consequently, both have fostered positive ties with India as a hedge against over-dependence on China. India for its part possesses some levers of influence over landlocked Nepal through the control of overland trade routes. In Bangladesh’s case, New Delhi’s approach has been to compete with China through investments of its own, enabling Dhaka to benefit substantially from playing the major powers off against each other.

The net result is that substantial Chinese investment does not automatically put small South Asian states in Beijing’s pocket.

Q. You have previously written on the security dimension of Chinese economic statecraft in South Asia [2]. How does China’s rising economic presence in the region affect India’s strategic relationship with its neighbours?

A. India has historically relied upon deep political, cultural and societal ties to exercise a high degree of influence over South Asian states. However, Beijing has very deep pockets, and has used state-backed financing, marketed in recent years as the Belt and Road Initiative, to offer the types of large-scale infrastructure projects that these countries are crying out for, and that India simply does not have the resources to match. Building roads, ports and power plants can win you a lot of support, both among political elites and the mass public, and can translate into the types of policy influence that would draw regional governments out of India’s orbit.

However, our research highlights the challenges China faces in using finance as a primary tool of engagement. First, large scale infrastructure is difficult to do. Projects can be delayed or fail to deliver a reasonable rate of return, they can cause harmful side-effects such as environmental damage, and they can cause or worsen local corruption. Voting publics see these missteps and not only punish their elected leaders, but typically see China in a poorer light as a result.

Thus, while China’s economic engagement is affecting the foreign policy alignments of India’s neighbours to some extent, in our judgment, this is unlikely in the foreseeable future to result in a radical realignment of the strategic balance in the region.

Second, India’s neighbours still value their relationships with New Delhi, and this has constrained the degree of security cooperation in return for China’s economic largesse. This is particularly true in Sri Lanka, where the government refused Chinese money to build an aircraft maintenance facility at Trincomalee because of Indian sensitivities, and continues to insist that the controversial Hambantota Port will never be securitised, despite high levels of debt and economic underperformance.

Thus, while China’s economic engagement is affecting the foreign policy alignments of India’s neighbours to some extent, in our judgment, this is unlikely in the foreseeable future to result in a radical realignment of the strategic balance in the region.

Q. Do you see any relation between the hedging behaviour of South Asian states and their incentives to either enhance or ignore regional institutions like SAARC or BIMSTEC?

A. Hedging essentially involves pursing a policy, e.g. closeness with China, as well as its opposite, e.g. closeness with India/the United States. In this manner, it is a mix of contradictory policy choices that smaller states adopt in the context of major-power competition for influence. Multilateral institutional cooperation, especially of an economic and technical nature, is not strictly the opposite of engagement with either India or China.

South Asia remains a very poorly integrated region in economic terms. Multilateral initiatives to harmonise regulations, develop last-mile trade infrastructure, and facilitate the movement of goods and people can actually help a smaller state seeking economic benefits from cooperating with India and China. These states may therefore invest in regional institution-building to better reap the benefits of economic engagement.

However, multilateral institutions are not innocent of power politics. More powerful states tend to have higher negotiating power and hence exercise greater influence in institutions. Therefore, regional institutions where China is not a member, such as BIMSTEC and SAARC, can be vehicles for Indian influence in setting regional standards for trade, investment, and other forms of cooperation. In theory, therefore, a smaller state may invest in these institutions as a hedge against bilateral Chinese influence, or it may ignore these institutions as a hedge against multilateral Indian influence.

Our argument suggests that, all else being equal, if the benefits and costs of cooperation with China are rising, states will hedge by leaning towards India in various ways, including investing in regional institutions where India plays a prominent role. But all else is rarely equal: SAARC, for example, does not match our expectations, for reasons unrelated to the logic of hedging.

Ultimately, given the extent of complications within South Asia, regional institutions are at best incidental to the hedging strategies of smaller states.

[1] Darren J Lim, Rohan Mukherjee, Hedging in South Asia: balancing economic and security interests amid Sino-Indian competition, International Relations of the Asia-Pacific, Volume 19, Issue 3, September 2019, Pages 493–522, https://doi.org/10.1093/irap/lcz006

[2] Darren J. Lim & Rohan Mukherjee (2019) What Money Can’t Buy: The Security Externalities of Chinese Economic Statecraft in Post-War Sri Lanka, Asian Security, 15:2, 73-92, DOI: 10.1080/14799855.2017.1414045

About the experts:

1Rohan Mukherjee is an Assistant Professor of Political Science at Yale-NUS College, Singapore. Email: rohan.mukherjee@yale-nus.edu.sg

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2
Darren Lim is a Senior Lecturer in the School of Politics and International Relations at the Australian National University, and co-host of the podcast, Australia in the World.

Email: darren.lim@anu.edu.au

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The post How India-China rivalry affects secondary state behaviour in South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
802292
Are slums more vulnerable to the COVID-19 pandemic: Evidence from Mumbai http://stg.csep.org/blog/are-slums-more-vulnerable-to-the-covid-19-pandemic-evidence-from-mumbai/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=are-slums-more-vulnerable-to-the-covid-19-pandemic-evidence-from-mumbai Thu, 16 Apr 2020 11:42:02 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=800010 India has been highly susceptible to the spread of pandemics. The 1918 pandemic caused devastation across the country, with an excess mortality of 4.5%. While a century has passed since then, the present conditions of dense living and a weak public healthcare system makes the possibility of the rapid spread of the current COVID-19 pandemic and heavy loss of life very real. Crowded and poorer areas, where it is difficult for people to safeguard themselves against getting infected, are likely to see worse outcomes. The case of New York City, where poorer neighbourhoods saw disproportionately more deaths and cases, attests […]

The post Are slums more vulnerable to the COVID-19 pandemic: Evidence from Mumbai first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
India has been highly susceptible to the spread of pandemics. The 1918 pandemic caused devastation across the country, with an excess mortality of 4.5%. While a century has passed since then, the present conditions of dense living and a weak public healthcare system makes the possibility of the rapid spread of the current COVID-19 pandemic and heavy loss of life very real. Crowded and poorer areas, where it is difficult for people to safeguard themselves against getting infected, are likely to see worse outcomes. The case of New York City, where poorer neighbourhoods saw disproportionately more deaths and cases, attests to this. The situation is going to be similar, if not worse, for cities in developing countries like India.

Slums constitute 17% of urban households in India; in Mumbai itself, they make up 42% of the households. Slums in Mumbai are extremely crowded often with many people staying in a single room. These areas also lack necessary amenities like private toilets and availability of clean water, making it easy for outbreaks to spread. Ideally, examining the relationship between slums and COVID-19 outbreaks would involve looking at the number of infected cases within and around slums. However, this data has not been made available. Therefore, we undertake a spatial analysis based on the location of Containment Zones within the city.

The Ministry of Health, Government of India has described a ‘Containment Zone’ as a “defined geographic area” where a “large outbreak” of positive COVID-19 cases are found and which is, therefore, sealed by the government. While there is no specification about the threshold number of cases in an area to declare it a Containment Zone, a “large outbreak” indicates that the number of cases in the containment zones must be high.

This concept forms the backbone of the ‘Containment Plan for Large Outbreaks’ of the Ministry of Health, which aims to geographically confine the disease by enforcing strict physical distancing norms, geographic quarantine, active surveillance, increased testing, isolation of positive cases and contact tracing. In a Containment Zone, no outdoor activities are allowed by the authorities.[1]

Containment Zones in Mumbai

On March 31, 2020, the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM) declared 141 Containment Zones in the city. By April 5, this number had increased to 243 in the Greater Mumbai area. As of April 14, at 5 pm IST, the number of Containment Zones was 490. This article uses spatial data released by the MCGM for 490 Containment Zones, using their epicenters for the analysis.

Figure 1 shows the locations designated as epicenters of Containment Zones. Each Containment Zone designated as an orange or red zone covers a radius of a certain distance around the containment epicenter.[2] The blue markers indicate that the containment areas are individual structures that have COVID-19 cases. We do not have the precise classification for demarcating a zone as red or orange. MCGM has stated that red zones are “severe” and orange zones are “less severe”.

Figure 1. Epicentre of COVID-19 Containment Zones in Mumbai as of April 14, 2020

4

Source: Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai

To see whether Containment Zone epicenters are within or around slums, we overlay these on a layer of slum areas, as demarcated by various government authorities in Mumbai. One of the first cases of COVID-19 in a slum in Mumbai was identified on March 23 in Bainganwadi in the M-East Ward. Since then, many Containment Zones have been created in the slums of Mumbai.

Figures 2 and 3 show specific cases where the epicenter of a containment zone is close to or inside a slum area. Figure 2 depicts the case of Dharavi, where 47 cases were found (as of April 13, 2020[3], of which five have since died. Dharavi has four epicenters of red Containment Zones, one individual structure within the slum, and one in close proximity.

Figure 2. Epicentres of COVID-19 Containment Zones in and around Dharavi

2

Note: The blue shapes in the map represent slums. Source: Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai for Containment Zones.

Figure 3 shows the epicentres of Containment Zones in Jogeshwari a slum cluster in the north west suburb of Mumbai. This area has six epicentres of red Containment Zones, one epicentre of orange Containment Zones, and one individual structure.

Figure 3. Epicentre of COVID-19 Containment Zones in and around Jogeshwari

3

Note : The blue shapes in the map represent slums. Source: Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai for Containment Zones.

While Dharavi has been in the limelight, Table 1 shows that most of Mumbai’s Containment Zones are close to slums. The distance has been calculated from the epicenter of the Containment Zone to the outer boundary of the nearest slum. Table 1 shows that around 30% of Containment Zone epicenters are within a slum. The orange and red Containment Zones, that have epicenters outside of a slum, could still partly pass through slums depending on their radii and distance to the nearest slum.

Table 1. Distance between Epicentres of Containment Zones and Nearest Slum

tab3

Figure 4 shows the frequency distribution of the number of Containment Zones (whose epicenters lie outside of slums) and distance to nearest slums.

Figure 4. Distribution of Distance from Epicentres of Containment Zones to the Nearest Slum

4

Source: Authors’ calculations

The maximum distance between the epicenter of a Containment Zone and the nearest slum is 800 meters.

Caveats

These findings must be read with a few caveats. First, the population density in Mumbai which is upwards of 26,000 persons per square kilometer is generally high. We do not have the exact figures on densities within slums, and the maps do not convey how overcrowded the slums are. Mumbai also has the highest number of cases in the state of Maharashtra, and hence, a larger number of Containment Zones. Secondly, the data we have used is till April 14. The spread of the disease is rapid and the situation may change considerably between then and the time that this analysis is published. The Indian Council of Medical Research has been conservative about its testing strategy and number of tests. This means that we do not have an accurate idea of the actual spread of the disease; the number of infected cases and Containment Zones must be considered to be a lower bound of the number and spread of COVID-19. Finally, as mentioned above, we do not have a continuous measure of the number of cases within the Containment Zones, only a graded classification.

Next Steps

Our analysis reveals that several of the existing Containment Zones in Mumbai are within or very close to slums. The reason for this phenomenon is likely to be difficulties in maintaining social distancing or hygiene standards and shared communal facilities including toilets. There are clear policy implications for this. One hypothesis is that the lack of secure property rights given to slum dwellers holds them back from getting better access to amenities and housing, which reduces their ability to safeguard themselves against rapidly spreading infections. We would like to derive lessons for policy by studying whether the slums that are regularised have fewer outbreaks of COVID-19 infections.

Takeaways for policymakers

Slums in Mumbai have a number of disadvantages built into their fabric, and are witnessing a high number of COVID-19 cases, which makes these areas and their residents far more vulnerable than other urban clusters. It also points to the obvious limitations of the strategies that have widely and successfully been used elsewhere to combat the pandemic. Anecdotal evidence suggests that there is a lack of adherence to social distancing since people live in crowded quarters, lack of provision of clean water for hand washing, and a lack of availability of good quality masks – people resort to using just handkerchiefs to avoid pushback from the police. It is critical for policymakers to implement alternative and innovative measures to prevent further outbreaks in these areas which is home to millions of vulnerable and poor households.

[1] https://www.mohfw.gov.in/pdf/3ContainmentPlanforLargeOutbreaksofCOVID19Final.pdf

[2] Earlier reports stated that Containment Zones were 3 kilometers in radius. However, this is likely to have changed since then.

[3] https://www.indiatoday.in/india/story/4-new-covid-19-cases-including-one-death-in-dharavi-1666347-2020-04-13

 

The authors would like to thank Shreya Deb and Kadambari Shah for their comments.

 

The post Are slums more vulnerable to the COVID-19 pandemic: Evidence from Mumbai first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
800010
The road from India to Nepal: Development assistance and connectivity projects http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-road-from-india-to-nepal/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-road-from-india-to-nepal Wed, 15 Apr 2020 13:26:10 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=799774 Regional connectivity in South Asia faces challenges that are unique to the region. According to a recent Policy Brief under our regional connectivity initiative, Sambandh, South Asia is arguably the least connected region in the world. Nepal is unique owing to various factors ranging from its terrain, its strategic location as the common neighbour of powers like China and India, as well as its own interests, economy and bureaucratic constraints.  In order to understand the caveats to regional connectivity between India and Nepal better, and assess the state of infrastructure projects between the two countries, as well as the obstacles that their progress faces, […]

The post The road from India to Nepal: Development assistance and connectivity projects first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Regional connectivity in South Asia faces challenges that are unique to the region. According to a recent Policy Brief under our regional connectivity initiative, Sambandh, South Asia is arguably the least connected region in the world. Nepal is unique owing to various factors ranging from its terrain, its strategic location as the common neighbour of powers like China and India, as well as its own interests, economy and bureaucratic constraints.  In order to understand the caveats to regional connectivity between India and Nepal better, and assess the state of infrastructure projects between the two countries, as well as the obstacles that their progress faces, Research Associate Riya Sinha recently embarked on a field trip to Nepal. In a new episode of the podcast, States of Anarchy, she discusses her findings and insights with Hamsini Hariharan.

Listen to the podcast

Edited excerpts from the podcast: 

Hamsini: Did you know that it’s cheaper for some countries in South Asia to trade with Brazil rather than with each other? It’s true! Connectivity in South Asia is often held ransom to infrastructure and bureaucratic inefficiency and border issues. Let’s take the example of Nepal. Nepal receives a huge bulk of India’s developmental aid and much of it is devoted to connectivity like roads, railways, and even air links. Connectivity is very important because Nepal is a mountainous landlocked country and the relations  between Nepal and India have been fraught with complications over the last couple of years. So, what has the Indian government done in Nepal? What are the nuts and bolts of infrastructure projects in South Asia? How does local bureaucracy affect larger projects in connectivity? My guest for today was recently on a field trip to Nepal. Riya Sinha is a Research Associate with Brookings India, she works on regional integration in South Asia particularly in the areas of trade, investment, and building supply chains. We caught up on connectivity between India and Nepal and spoke about her recent trip to the postal road which cuts across the Terai region in Nepal.

 

Hamsini: Hi Riya, Welcome to the states of Anarchy, thank you for joining me.

Riya: Thank you for having me here, Hamsini.

Hamsini: So, when we think about India and Nepal relations, since independence there have been a lot of issues concerning the goodness of people to people relations, but also those involving friction over infrastructure projects. On a very broad level, how do you think relations between India and Nepal have evolved since independence? 

Riya: Well, in South Asia particularly, India and Nepal share a very unique relationship. If I had to specify the major contours of the relationship, I would bring it down to four points. First, it is guided by treaties, mainly cemented by the Indo-Nepal peace and friendship treaty of 1950. After this would be trade and transit, because 98% of Nepal’s transit trade takes place through India and 65% of Nepal’s total trade is with India. So, there is a lot of dependency. The third thing is people-to-people connectivity that comes from geographic and cultural ties. I was mentioning to you before that we have a lot of Nepali students who study in India. During my recent field trip to Nepal, we noticed a lot of migration patterns between the plains of Nepal and the Northern areas of India. Apart from that, there’s a lot of labor migration from Nepal to India and some from India to Nepal, but the latter figures aren’t as much as from Nepal to India. The last thing that guides the relationship is development co-operation. Nepal is, in some years second and some third, highest recipient of development co-operation from India. In 2018-19, it was more than a thousand crores. While these four factors essentially describe the relationship between India and Nepal, they are also the points of issues. 

1

Jogbani-Biratnagar Integrated Check-Post (ICP). It was built with Indian assistance and inaugurated on 21 January 2020. Picture credit: Constantino Xavier

Hamsini: Yeah, like with the Indo-Nepal Friendship Treaty that has brought a lot of friction.

Riya: Yes, there have been frictions over the same. They (the governments) established the eminent person group in 2016 because they wanted revision of treaties, and not only the Indo-Nepal friendship Treaty but others as well. Nepal is looking for another route to transit from India and fairly so because transit from Nepal’s cargo from Indian ports of Kolkata takes about 20 days, which adds to the logistics cost for Nepal, it makes goods much more expensive in Nepal than what they should be. The geographic proximity also brings security concerns, we have a porous border with Nepal which may be used for illicit activities, anti-India activities and might turn out to raise security issues, especially concerning China. The factors that bind India and Nepal are also matters of concern and that makes the whole relationship very unique.

Hamsini: Since the 1990s, when the famous Gujral Doctrine came in, the relations have taken an upturn, or would you say that you can’t just characterise relations as good or bad? How would you characterise relations in the last 20 years? 

Riya: There have been good instances as well as bad. In certain aspects, the relationship needs more work from both the Nepali government and New Delhi. In the last 10 years, if I have to specify, 2006 was one of the most favorable years for India-Nepal relationship. We were signing a lot of agreements, engaging in development projects, but after that, particularly in 2015, after the earthquake and the blockade imposed, there was a period where Indo-Nepal relations faced downturn and that has not worked in the favour of India, so far. 

Hamsini: India also does this with the neighbourhood, where with any country, the idea of China playing an influential role has also become something that India is worried about and this is true for Nepal. As you said earlier, Nepal wants alternatives for sea-ports as it is much more expensive for them to send air cargo and other stuff through Indian ports. So, it’s very natural that they are looking for alternatives and China can provide those alternatives, but do you think that this is the reason for the relationship to come to the fore? 

Riya: Any sovereign country would not like interference from any other country no matter how good the bi-lateral relations are. Nepal is looking for options so that it is not completely dependent on one country i.e. India. Looking for transit ports via China, while at the macro-level might sound really good, but at the micro-level, it’s difficult to implement, because it is going to be a very expensive process which is not economically feasible for Nepal, to develop that kind of transition point from Tibet and to the seaports in China. It is much cheaper and much more efficient for Nepal to access Indian ports. That said, because the option exists, the Indian government needs to give more push to reforming and paying heed to Nepal’s concerns for infrastructural development and reduction of logistics cost as these are the major areas of concern.

2

Biratnagar Railway Line for the project is being constructed with technical and financial assistance of the Government of India to facilitate cargo movement. Picture credit: Riya Sinha

Hamsini: Let’s understand the China aspect a little later, but as you majorly work on connectivity, I remember reading your report, which highlighted that South Asia is possibly one of the least connected regions all over the world and that connectivity has declined since colonial times rather than increased. Do you agree with this statement or do you think there is more to it? 

Riya: We can’t quantify it in the same manner as in those times as the volume of goods and services was much lesser and the connectivity was more, relatively. But now, we have more access, more treaties in place and agreements to facilitate connectivity. In those terms, it is not enough what we are doing right now. How is it that we haven’t been able to achieve our potential? There are two reasons for it. First, despite SAARC (South Asian Association of Regional Cooperation), the whole integration process has been marred by Indo-Pak relations. SAARC hasn’t been able to move forward and has been unable to deliver because of that. Secondly, there has been an inherent political mistrust between the different South Asian countries, and after 2014, there have been attempts to address that at some levels but various instances between Indo-Pak, SAARC summits being cancelled, India-Nepal blockade; the distrust is coming back again and what is working right now is bilateral and sub-regional mechanisms rather than a regional cooperation mechanism that existed.

Hamsini: Okay, so when we say “connectivity” we are talking about roads, railways, and sea-ports. Is there something more to “connectivity” or are these the major infrastructure avenues?

Riya: Oh no! There is much more to connectivity. Many scholars segregate it into hard and soft connectivity indicators. While you have something like trade, investment, and infrastructure these have to be complemented with the softer connectivity indicators i.e. people to people connectivity, visa relaxations; we don’t have a liberal South Asia Visa regime. We have the largest visa office in Dhaka, but why do we need a Visa office in the first place? Why can’t the travel and connectivity be the same as in ASEAN (Association of South East Asian Nations) or EU (European Union)?

Hamsini: That is completely fair, whenever I travel to South East Asia, I look at the separate ASEAN queue and whenever I travel around in South Asia, you still have to go through the same bureaucratic procedure that you would have to go elsewhere and you would think that we’ve come further now. You would think that relations would be better to facilitate that.

Riya: Relations are getting better but only at the bilateral level. India-Bangladesh relaxed the VISA regime in 2013, India-Maldives did the same in 2017, so it’s happening at the bilateral level but not at the regional level, as it should have. We talk about trade, and one of the recommendations that most of the reports quote are, the lack of people to people connectivity. But, what does it entail and how is it developed? It is developed through the exchange of students, promotion of tourism and various other softer factors.

India-Nepal Border Pillar in Biratnagar

India-Nepal Border Pillar in Biratnagar. Picture credit: Riya Sinha

Hamsini: As you said earlier, since 2014 there has been a conscious attempt to reach out to our neighbors, such as in PM Modi’s swearing-in ceremony, where all the heads of the state of SAARC countries were invited. But again those multi-lateral arrangements have always been at the behest of Indo-Pak relations in South Asia. Do you think the way forward would be only to look at the bilateral or sub-regional initiatives and that is the pattern which is here to stay? 

Riya: It’s a pattern that should be encouraged. Dr. S. Jaishankar (Foreign Minister of India) recently stated, “SAARC or any other medium” and any other medium implies if SAARC is not working, other connectivity arrangements can also be tried, such as BBIN, BIMSTEC, etc. but let’s keep moving forward.

Hamsini: Yes, before you go, we were talking about this earlier, before we began this podcast, we said that IR sounds very fancy on paper and podcast. However, when you go to the field, the situation could be vastly different from what you imagine it to be. So you’ve been traveling for 1-2 years, particularly to Nepal, what are some of your first impressions from when you went to Nepal to see the state of connectivity?

Riya: That’s tough to put together because Nepal is a country in transition. So, when you travel to Kathmandu, you see one type of infrastructural development project and then suddenly you are in the Madhes region – the Terai region – which is vastly different, and it’s visible that there is a need for infrastructural development in terms of the roads, rail, and airports, even within Nepal. Presently, they do have air services connecting to the smaller provinces, but the airports are in bad condition and they require infrastructural upgrade. India can make a more consistent effort in providing the needful to Nepal, rather than having a reactionary approach. For instance, if China announces in the future or as it has in the past, to have a rail project to Kathmandu, then India ended up announcing a rail project from Raxaul to Kathmandu, which was a reactionary approach. India should take a lead in the infrastructural development in Nepal in line with its capacity to develop. 

 

Postal highway in Janakpur, Nepal

Partially completed stretch of the Hulaki Rajmarg or Postal highway in Janakpur. Picture credit: Riya Sinha

Hamsini: What exactly are the connectivity projects that India’s been working on in Nepal? 

Riya: So, India has been working majorly on infrastructural projects in Nepal. It is involved in the development of ICPs (Integrated Check Posts), these are the freight and passenger transfer points between India and Nepal. Currently, there are four ICPs in India and Nepal, these are Raxaul-Birgunj, Jogbani-Biratnagar, Sunauli and RupaiDiha, roads and railways. The border roads are being developed by the Ministry of External Affairs, some of it is being developed by departments of roads in Nepal with an MOU with India. Apart from this, there are rail projects, there is the Jogbani-Biratnagar rail extension project right now, Janakpur-Jayanagar, Bardiwas rail project is under development and almost near completion. The Raxaul- Birganj-Kathmandu railway link is in the pipeline as is the extension of the Raxaul-Birganj railway link to Kathmandu. Very recently, one of the largest hydropower projects i.e. Arun-3. India and Nepal have completed the financial closure of the project. India is going to fund 70% of the cost of the project. 

Hamsini: So, these are the whole host of projects excluding the ones India has worked on in the past? 

Riya: Yes, some are the extension of the past projects and some are new. India does a variety of projects under the umbrella of small development projects concerning schools and ambulances in Nepal.

Hamsini: When you look at the whole ambit of projects that India does, Indian capacity, as we know to carry out a lot of infrastructural projects is limited in the sense, so how would you say that these projects have been carried out in Nepal and what were the roadblocks that they’ve faced, if they’ve faced any or what problems did they run into? 

Riya: It’s a very unique case of infrastructural projects that I have noticed in my last visit to Nepal. The hydropower projects have been completed without any major issue whereas road projects, such as the postal road, hasn’t been completed in the last 15 years. The postal road runs across the Terai region of Nepal from east to west, and India is developing approximately 300 km of the total road, and the rest of three hundred is being developed by Nepal. This has been under development since 2006. This case study is a specific example of how development projects should be conducted in the neighboring countries, as any project should start with the preparation of the detailed project report, in this case when the MoU (Memorandum of Understanding) was signed between the Government of India and the Government of Nepal. A public sector company called RITES had conducted the Detailed Project Report (DPR). From (the date of) RITES conducting the DPR and being appointed as the consultant for the whole project, the ground level reports say that only 10 % of the project has been completed in the next two years because of the issues in the DPR and after that, the DPR was revised and was given to a Nepali consultant. Following which the Nepali consultant prepared the DPR, the third one was prepared by a body called NHIDCL which is under the Ministry of Road and Highways, Government of India. From making three DPRs to not being able to implement the projects, there has been a lot that is lacking from the Indian side as well on how technical projects should be conducted in a sensitive area. 

Hamsini: Why were the three DPRs needed? What was the problem with the first two?

Riya: The problem was that it was conducted by an Indian consultant who did not understand Nepal as well as a Nepali consultant would. So, you have a group of researchers going from India and conducting a feasibility study, preparing a report and giving it back. So, there were some alignments which were not correct for the road, as a result, no progress could be made on that particular road for the next two years. Only 10% was completed i.e. out of 300km they were able to make only 30km in the first two years. The second DPR is still being referred to by the NHIDCL but they are also conducting their own DPR in certain stretches where the second DPR is not reliable, as whenever they have to re-align the road, it’s essential to prepare a separate DPR. So, the projects lack implementation due to neglect in conducting a proper DPR, it shows what is lacking in the approach. Ideally, the DPR should have been prepared by Indian and Nepali consultants in a joint venture. That could have saved time, could have the right alignment in place, and avoided a lot of other issues that came up relating to alignment, land acquisition, and the discontent in the local population. Because, if alignment A was given in the first part, then why is alignment B given in the second part? It is very interesting to note that every time an Indian project is announced in Nepal the rate of land escalates adjacent to the site of the project. So, in this case, when alignment A was selected, the rate of land escalated near alignment A. As a result, the locals who had to give up their land, started demanding higher compensation. When alignment B was chosen, there was discontent amongst the people residing adjacent to alignment A, as they had already escalated the cost and had made preparations and decisions without getting remunerations for the same. So, there was a lot of local resistance due to which the project got delayed. 

Hamsini: Whenever a project gets announced, what are the series of steps that it goes through? So, you first have the MoU that is signed followed by DPR conducted either by the government or external consultant and later it goes for construction. Are there are any other steps that it goes through?

Riya: Yes, there is a tendering process after that, where you invite tenders from the local contractors for the construction of the project. For example, in the case of a postal road project after 2016, it was decided that both Indian and Nepali contractors would construct the project in a joint venture. So, most of the stretches of the roads are being constructed by both Indian and Nepali contractors in collaboration. 

Hamsini: What is the present status of the postal road project that has taken fifteen years to complete?

Riya: Current situation can be explained by first categorising the small packages that the road has been divided into which equates to 14. The road is divided into the packages for development purposes between different stretches, for instance, one can be 17km whereas the other can be 20km. This is how the packages are divided. Out of 14, four have been completed. Two cannot be completed due to issues such as alignment, land acquisition, and the road passing over a canal, which cannot be fixed. This is again a loophole in the DPR because there was no early projection of the same and this is one of the significant causes of further delay. The other 8, are in progress and should be completed by May, this year. Hopefully!

Hamsini: Do you think that it has gotten impetus over the last couple of years or has connectivity and construction always been this slow for Indian projects?

Riya: As I’ve mentioned before, some of the projects have been completed in time and some have been slow. With this particular road, for instance, there were a lot of political implications because the postal highway is very close to the Indian border. Even within Kathmandu, there was reluctance in developing this road, or giving priority to road development as I’ve mentioned there were issues related to land acquisition. Land acquisition is not unique only to this project but has played a key role in causing a delay in other projects as well. During our recent field trip, we noticed that there was ADB (Asian Development Bank) funded road project and there were certain electric poles that were part of the road that they had to clear out, which requires coordination between the department of roads in Nepal, and the electricity department in Nepal. The Department of Roads asked their contractors to remove the electric poles and put it on another side and any fee that was due, they paid to the electricity department, so the latter would not have to issue separate tenders and hire contractors, which would be a longer process. The same procedure was not adopted for the postal road, and when we went along the postal roads, electric poles were there in the middle of the road, and every authority that we had met in Kathmandu or in the provinces had said the electricity department is not cooperating. So, there is a selective approach to some Indian projects and some multi-lateral funded projects. This is where there needs to be more trust-building between both Governments of India and Nepal in terms of the completion of the project, because again there is a cost factor that is involved. If the initial cost of construction was 800 crores (Nepalese Rupees), due to the delays, the cost has been escalated by a 100 crores (Nepalese Rupees). 

 

Hulaki Rajmarg or Postal highway in Janakpur, Nepal

Completed part of the Hulaki Rajmarg or Postal highway in Janakpur. Picture Credit: Constantino Xavier

Hamsini: It’s interesting to note the bureaucratic wrangling between the two Nepali stakeholders and how at the end of the day the outcome of that is, India appears to be unable to go through with projects. Because what are the Indian factors in it, right? They could have put pressure on the Ministry but it wouldn’t be able to work with all the stakeholders because, at the end of the day, it is a domestic issue between the two Nepali bureaucratic agencies. Land acquisition is not a problem that is particular to Nepal and is common to South Asia. But how do you work with land acquisition for a foreign-funded project, in this case, with India? Who is in charge of figuring out the land acquisition process? 

Riya: In the MoU, it was specified that 90% of the land should be available before the start of construction. The Government of Nepal is responsible for land acquisition and payment of any compensation to the project affected families. That’s the case across the board. Project implementer is not responsible for the payment of compensation whereas it is the beneficiary government’s responsibility to give land for the particular project. This is where some of the Indian projects have faced issues, such as the postal road project. However, there is also the Jogbani-Biratnagar Integrated Check Post that was completed, and during my visit, two weeks ago, I noticed that while the check-post was not as big as the other ICPs across South Asia, the authorities had additional land adjacent to the check post to keep a scope for expansion. This highlights that the project was carried out in a planned manner and reflects the interest of the government to develop that ICP because there were a lot of petroleum products that pass through the ICPs and that is one of the major imports of Nepal from India. It was beneficial in that sense. The same attitude needs to be translated to other projects, specifically to the postal road project. 

Hamsini: How have Chinese infrastructure projects, particularly in Nepal worked, as we talk about alternatives, how have those projects worked?

Riya: Frankly, I haven’t come across Chinese infrastructure projects in Nepal yet, that have been completed. There have been talks of developing hydropower projects so that they have alternatives and they don’t have to completely depend on India. Similarly, for this Lhasa-Kathmandu rail project, but I haven’t come across any implemented project between China and Nepal. The case is that even when China states that it wants to develop infrastructural projects in Nepal, it wants Nepal to be the gateway to South Asia. We need to think what will China gain from building a project in Nepal, other than transit the goods? Nepal is a very small market for China. For China, giving a grant of billions of rupees to develop a rail link all across the mountains, building tunnels, breaking mountains to reach Kathmandu is more expensive and it doesn’t have a good return on investment. We have to look at it from that perspective that what does China gain from building this particular infrastructural project and this is why, while there have been multiple announcements, China doesn’t want to give a grant to Nepal and so far, no projects have been implemented. 

Hamsini: That’s good to know because we often pit Indian and Chinese infrastructure and connectivity projects side by side and therefore, it’s important to know the developments are in the primary stage. 

Riya: This is specific to Nepal. The case is very different in Sri Lanka. If one visits Colombo, one can easily spot Chinese infrastructural projects. Similar is the case with Pakistan, where Chinese projects are built in Islamabad, Lahore; the Beijing-Islamabad friendship underpass all across the city. China has been actively implementing projects in India’s neighbourhood, but Nepal is an anomaly for China. That said, I think India should take a step and efficiently build infrastructure projects in Nepal because that is the need of Nepal right now. While China is providing that push to India, for instance, as mentioned earlier when the Birgunj-Kathmandu rail link was announced, but India shouldn’t wait for the push in terms of the threat of China entering into Nepal. That should come from India, for maintaining good relations with Nepal.

Hamsini: Does India have the capacity to carry out a lot of these infrastructural projects? So, even while India is a member of AIIB (Asian Infrastructural and Investment Bank), it is also the biggest borrower from the bank. There always seems to be a mismatch as to what India wants to do and what it can do.

Riya: The projects that I’ve seen so far, India has underdeveloped on these projects e.g. in case of Postal road project, the entire highway is 7m wide which is extendable up to 15m but they don’t possess land up to 15m in case of every package. So, one lane is 3.5m, as the highway is two-lane, the width is 7m.Mahendra Highway, which is the main east-west highway in Nepal, is 25m in width and is developed by the government of Nepal. From this, an inference can be drawn, that India is underperforming while building the projects in Nepal. 

Hamsini: What exactly is a two-lane highway? Most roads in India are broader than 7m. Two-lane highway sounds like the road behind my street! 

Riya: When I was traveling on the road that was my first reaction too! Presently, you might not have enough traffic to move on the road but what happens when you do? That is not enough. Although the Government of India had asked for a 15m wide road, due to land acquisition issues, 90% of the land wasn’t available before starting the project. As a result, the Indian contractors had to work on a 7m width that existed. 

Hamsini: So, scalability is a problem in developing such projects? On your field trip to Nepal, what did you think of the local sentiment, particularly after the blockade, the Nepal earthquake in 2015, and what was seen as Indian interference to amendments in the Nepali Constitution? What was your assessment of the sentiment on the ground towards the projects in India?

Riya: Yes, scalability is a major problem. It is different when you speak to people from Kathmandu, and when you speak to people living in the Terai region or Madhes region. The sentiments differ. While in the Madhes region, there was a sense of appreciation for the Indian projects, in Kathmandu they are apprehensive of India’s intentions over these projects. For instance, when I met the government officials, I was repeatedly asked, is that all you’re visiting for? So, there is a sense of suspicion, for the lack of a better word. 2015 was not the first blockade imposed by India, it is the third. Back in the 1980s there was a 15-month long blockade, which gave rise to a very anti-India sentiment amongst the Nepali people as India’s involvement was perceived as interference in a sovereign country’s domestic affairs. The postal road is an anomaly, as it was imagined and designed very differently, and the output is different from what it was supposed to be, in terms of quality of the road and various other factors. There were coordination problems, issues with the contractors and various other factors but the output has not been what was envisioned when the MoU was signed. While in the Madhes region, the project was perceived to be the lifeline of the region, in Kathmandu the sentiment varies as they expect India to do more than what it is doing right now. If India wants to shape the sentiments in its favor, it has to deliver on the projects. The 2015 blockade has affected Nepali people. From a laborer to a taxi driver, they would say while India and Nepal have more cultural relations, speak the same language, even use Indian currency, what the Indian government did back in 2015 was wrong. Even though PM Modi has made an effort to reach out to Nepal, reaching out has to be substantiated with efficient delivery on projects. For instance, I was talking to one of the project directors in Nepal and he mentioned that when PM Modi visited Nepal in 2014, he announced a particular grant for the government of Nepal. Different departments of the government allocated the money for different projects before receiving the grant, but the money never came in! This kind of disappointment must be avoided in the future, and India needs to build its capacity to effectively deliver on developmental projects.

Hamsini: Yeah, in that sense, when carrying out any infrastructural project, wouldn’t it make more sense to conduct DPRs before signing the MoU and announcing a project? Wouldn’t you carry out the feasibility study before the projects are announced? 

Riya: So, the postal road feasibility study was carried out before the MoU was signed but the issue wasn’t when the DPR was conducted rather it was that the Indian contractors didn’t possess enough knowledge about the Nepali terrain. It’s hard to expect the consultants to visit the site for ten days and figure out the problems on the field, however, the case is very different when a local contractor gets engaged in the same project and there is a joint venture between both the consultants for a DPR. This could have been dealt with in a much more holistic and comprehensive manner by gauging the ground level reality and then summarising it into a detailed project report.

Hamsini: Did you find that there was cognizance amongst the Indian bureaucrats and Indian policymakers about the gaps in capacity and how to overcome them?

Riya: Yes, there is an awareness about how much the Indian government and the policymakers can perform and what the capacity to deliver on certain projects is, and you can see that there have been certain changes that have been taking place as a result. For example; various ministries such as Ministry of External Affairs, or Ministry of Commerce have been appointing consultants for various projects, and the development partnership administration division in the MEA, particularly, has been streamlining the way it handles projects. So, there is an increasing awareness and regular meetings are taking place between the bureaucrats and the consultants for real-time updates on the projects. This sort of re-thinking is happening within the government and a collaborative approach between the public and private sector is taking place, which is good news for our development projects.

6

Part of the Janakpur-Yadukuha stretch of the Hulaki Rajmarg or Postal Highway where construction is pending due to land acquisition issues. Picture Credit: Constantino Xavier

Hamsini: Do you think that the projects which are being carried out now are substantially different from what India used to carry out 10-15 years ago? 

Riya: In terms of scale, yes! India’s capacity to deliver has improved from what it was doing ten-fifteen years ago. Indian waterways are the best-quoted example, as it has been in the pipeline since the 1980s but it is only now that we have National Waterway-1 and substantial development over the Ganga stretch. There have also been pilot projects and movement has taken place in recent years on a number of connectivity projects compared to ten years ago. 

Hamsini: We speak about sub-regional initiatives such as BBIN, BIMSTEC, etc, do you think that in the future this is going to continue? Do you think these are going to play a big role, and how do you think their role in the region is changing? With SAARC, there was a move to revive it but it hasn’t materialised. How do you think the evolution of connectivity projects and sub-regional initiatives will take place?

Riya: The limitation with SAARC is that it will be held hostage given the Indo-Pak relations. There have to be lessons learned from SAARC, so that other regional or sub-regional organisations can work effectively. BIMSTEC has been increasingly promoted as a security organisation that can work against the wishes that the member states have for BIMSTEC; there is an increasing need to focus specifically on the functional areas of BIMSTEC as well as the bureaucratic capacity, so that it can deliver. Right now, the regional integration amongst (the BIMSTEC) countries is not very different from what it is in SAARC. We have to employ lessons from SAARC to BIMSTEC otherwise it will again be another regional organisation that is unable to deliver effectively and efficiently. 

Hamsini: How do you think connectivity projects between India and Nepal, and widely within South Asia will evolve over the next couple of years? Do you think that there is a speeding-up on how much importance is given to them or will the status quo continue?

Riya: If you look at the joint statements between PM Modi and his counterparts in the South Asian region, connectivity has been recognised as a priority area. We have started delivering on a lot of connectivity projects, a lot of connectivity projects have been shaping up in the region because of Indian assistance. And third countries are also being involved, the key example being the Colombo port terminal being built by India and Japan. This kind of a new approach to connectivity projects as well as emphasising the need for it, is something that is going to continue for the next few years. Even within the government, there is an increasing push for ease of doing business within the region and there is a focus on mapping the time and cost of trade. This is something that’s going to continue and will work more fruitfully for the regional connectivity projects.

Hamsini: From your fieldwork and your research in the area do you have any policy recommendations specifically and widely for Indian connectivity projects?

Riya: There has to be a lot more coordination between both governments, better capacity building that India must engage in with the neighboring countries. It’s already doing it through the ITEC programs but there is much more that needs to be done, because at the ground level there have been persistent implementation gaps which enhances the need of capacity building of the beneficiary country, in terms of not just supporting in implementation of the project but sustaining the projects that have been completed. That’s the exercise that India must be focussing on for the next set of connectivity projects.

Hamsini: If someone is interested in relations between India and Nepal or in connectivity. Do you have any books or resources that you can recommend for them?

Riya: For South Asian connectivity, I would recommend, “A Glass Half Full” by Dr. Sanjay Kathuria from the World Bank, which is one of the most comprehensive reports on South Asian regional connectivity. Something that we’re doing in Brookings India, led by our fellow, Dr. Constantino Xavier, is a program called Sambandh: Regional Connectivity Initiative that maps connectivity between India and its neighbors on a set of varied hard and soft indicators. We have a set of 52 indicators that use data to assess where we currently stand in various sectors, such as trade, education connectivity, tourism, electricity, migration, aid, and official visits of the leaders of the region to other countries in the region. These are some of the analyses that we will be coming out within the next few months, which will help policymakers, researchers, and scholars prioritise the connectivity areas in terms of what’s working and what’s not working. We talk about neighborhood first, increasing connectivity within the region but do we know what the contours of the specific policies are, what are the limitations of these policies, which areas they are or aren’t working in? This is what the Sambandh Initiative addresses. For example, if the level of student connectivity is declining but the level of tourism is increasing then that is a good indicator and is something that India should focus on. We are trying to come up with a set of forty plus policy briefs as part of the initiative within the next few months.

 

With contribution from Umika Chanana, Intern, Foreign Policy and Security Studies.

The post The road from India to Nepal: Development assistance and connectivity projects first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
799774
India and Myanmar: The role of domestic calculations in the boundary agreement of 1967 http://stg.csep.org/blog/sambandh-blog-india-and-myanmar-the-role-of-domestic-calculations-in-the-boundary-agreement-of-1967/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sambandh-blog-india-and-myanmar-the-role-of-domestic-calculations-in-the-boundary-agreement-of-1967 Mon, 13 Apr 2020 10:20:26 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=799172 In this edition of our blog series on issues related to India’s neighborhood connectivity, Nidhi Varma interviews Avinash Paliwal, on his recent work “A Cat’s Paw of Indian Reactionaries”? Strategic Rivalry and Domestic Politics at the India–China–Myanmar Tri-Junction published in Asian Security, 2020.  Avinash is the Deputy Director of the South Asia Institute and Lecturer in Diplomacy and Public Policy at SOAS University of London. He specialises in South Asian strategic affairs and is currently working on a post-independence strategic history of India’s immediate east. He is the author of My Enemy’s Enemy: India in Afghanistan from the Soviet Invasion to the US Withdrawal (New […]

The post India and Myanmar: The role of domestic calculations in the boundary agreement of 1967 first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In this edition of our blog series on issues related to India’s neighborhood connectivity, Nidhi Varma interviews Avinash Paliwal, on his recent work “A Cat’s Paw of Indian Reactionaries”? Strategic Rivalry and Domestic Politics at the India–China–Myanmar Tri-Junction published in Asian Security, 2020. 

Avinash is the Deputy Director of the South Asia Institute and Lecturer in Diplomacy and Public Policy at SOAS University of London. He specialises in South Asian strategic affairs and is currently working on a post-independence strategic history of India’s immediate east.

He is the author of My Enemy’s Enemy: India in Afghanistan from the Soviet Invasion to the US Withdrawal (New York: Oxford University Press, 2017). 

Q. In your recently published article, [1] you argue that geopolitical factors of inter-state competition between India and China do not adequately explain India’s approach to its boundary with Myanmar. Domestic factors (Mizo insurgency and Naga separatism) may have been more important in determining India’s foreign policy stance. Can you briefly tell us how domestic factors better explain India’s approach to the Boundary Agreement of 1967?

A. The significance of, and fluctuations in, India’s relations with China often impart a sense that New Delhi’s foreign-policy vis-à-vis neighbour such as Myanmar is influenced mostly by its rivalry with Beijing. Though true to some extent, the unpacking of cases such as the signing of the India-Burma Boundary Agreement in 1967 complicates this picture. Arguably, given India’s territorial disputes with China, formalising the Burma boundary should have been high priority. Still, it took India two decades after independence, and five years after a border war with China, to broach the subject with Rangoon.

The reasons for such timing are grounded in India’s domestic politics and national security imperatives. More than India’s rivalry with China, it was the outbreak of the Mizo insurgency in 1966, coupled with an ongoing Naga insurgency, which pressed India into action to resolve its boundary dispute with Burma. The insurgencies were potent enough to make India, bigger of the two countries, to willfully cede territory to Burma if required. Such a move was inconceivable at a time when the defeat of 1962 was fresh and losing territory could result in severe political damage for a government in New Delhi.

Given India’s territorial disputes with China, formalising the Burma boundary should have been high priority. Still, it took India two decades after independence, and five years after a border war with China, to broach the subject with Rangoon.

Yet, a combination of worsening security situation and a requirement for India to assert its administrative presence (Burmese military routinely crossed the porous border into India) and demonstrate its distribution potential in its northeastern frontier regions, pushed India to formalise the boundary. In fact, such was Delhi’s urgency to sign the agreement that it ended up losing territory near Moreh in Manipur not out of will, but due to last-minute technical errors by its map-makers.

Simultaneous worsening of Sino-Burmese relations during this period –due to Mao’s interventionist Cultural Revolution and the ensuing anti-Chinese riots across Burma– enabled General Ne Win to positively reciprocate to India’s boundary formalisation requests. But it also meant that Burma, which had settled its own boundary dispute with China in 1961, let go of its territorial demands at the China-India-Burma tri-junction in Arunachal Pradesh, making an erstwhile three-party territorial dispute into a decisively India-China issue.

[more-blog-posts]

Q. Your related work [2] analyses New Delhi’s refusal to consult with state governments when negotiating its border in the east. How much of this approach is inherited from its colonial past? And did it ultimately backfire on New Delhi?

A. I found India’s decision to not consult state governments before reaching out to Rangoon to formalise the boundary somewhat counter-intuitive. After all, if it was domestic political and security drivers that informed the timing of Delhi’s outreach, then why alienate stakeholders whose welfare India sought to advance in the first place, and whose lives were to be affected by the boundary agreement? At the heart of this question is the element of continuity between India and Burma’s colonial past to its then postcolonial present. Both countries’ inheritance and unquestioning acceptance of a boundary drawn by colonial authorities for administrative convenience meant that they also accepted the associated costs.

In practice, this meant that Delhi would not alter the boundary as demanded by stakeholders in the Northeast. In Manipur, for instance, various groups sought the accession of the Kabaw Valley to India. This issue had raged since 1834 when the valley was ceded to Burma in its entirety to placate anti-imperial protests–only creating anti-imperial sentiment in Manipur, as it bereaved the kingdom access to large tracts of teak-forests. Most communities straddling across the boundary viewed it as an unfair colonial imposition that either divided ethnic kin or deprived them of their rightful resources. These grievances, which became rooted in local cultures, carried through in the post-independence period. 

Prime Minister Indira Gandhi’s decision to not consult state governments was meant to avoid the derailment of the boundary formalisation due to expected local opposition. In doing so, India continued with the colonial tradition of bypassing local demands for national (previously imperial) needs, but did so in a postcolonial manner i.e. by invoking the Constitution of India that allocated foreign policy to the Union List. As late as 1974, when Survey of India officials recommended state-level involvement in the demarcation process, the Ministry of External Affairs shot down the idea arguing: “it is not necessary to obtain approval or enter into detailed discussion with State Governments on frontier question which are central responsibility.”

In the immediate term, such lack of consultation did not backfire as India succeeded in signing the agreement and demarcating the boundary. But, the ensuing protests across Manipur, Nagaland, Assam, and later Mizoram, ensured that India could never translate the agreement into a boundary treaty as envisioned. The agreement also fed into grievances about India’s ‘colonial’ approach towards the Northeast and became a strong narrative plank within various insurgent movements. Unfortunately, despite the Northeast’s steady (if not even) political and economic integration with India over the decades’ resentment over the boundary persists till today. 

Q. You are currently working on a book project which focuses on India’s larger foreign policymaking processes towards Myanmar since Independence. You have previously worked extensively on India and Afghanistan. Why is it increasingly relevant to study India’s neighborhood and the South Asian region?

A. Of the many reasons to study India’s neighborhood and the South Asian region –lack of systematic scholarship and the region’s rich sociological landscape– the most important reason for me is to unpack the contradictions of contemporary India. To better understand, for instance, how a country that has long advocated external non-interference in sovereign affairs, navigates interventionism in a region where it enjoys dominance. Or, more recently, to revisit long-standing assumptions such as India’s preference for a unipolar South Asia, in the light of its willing engagement with external powers such as the US and Japan to counter increasing Chinese influence in the region. 

My research on India’s role in Afghanistan made me realize how important it is to delve into case specifics to truly understand the gravity of South Asian geopolitics on global affairs.

Far from being at the periphery of the global system, as viewed during the Cold War wherein Europe was considered pivotal, South Asia is currently at the center of unfolding global processes. Be it great power competition with the rise of China, connectivity projects, nuclear politics, religious extremism and nationalism, experience of and debates around climate change, creation of economic production hubs, or the use and abuse of new technologies, India and its neighborhood is witnessing extremes across this spectrum. Extremes that will not just shape the present and future of nearly 1.9-billion people in the subcontinent, but of the world altogether. To make sense of how these issues may pan out in the future, dedicated study of India and its region –I would include the entire Indian Ocean Region in this, not because it’s “India’s Ocean”, but because it cannot be imagined and understood without India– is imperative and urgent.

My research on India’s role in Afghanistan made me realise how important it is to delve into case specifics to truly understand the gravity of South Asian geopolitics on global affairs. For instance, India has played an active, if not central, role in shaping the contours of war and peace in Afghanistan–and will continue to doing so in the future. Similarly, research on India’s approach towards Myanmar has sensitised me to the explanatory limits of high-geopolitics and meta-narratives such as Sino-Indian competition and the Act East Policy (AEP) respectively. The AEP, often viewed in conjunction with the new construct of the Indo-Pacific, is just as good as the evolving ground-realities in Northeast India, Myanmar, and Bangladesh will permit it to be; and how New Delhi and other interested world capitals will deal with these realities.

Picture1hAbout the expert: Avinash Paliwal is Deputy Director of the South Asia Institute and Lecturer in Diplomacy and Public Policy at SOAS University of London. He specialises in South Asian strategic affairs and is currently working on a post-independence strategic history of India’s immediate east. He is the author of My Enemy’s Enemy: India in Afghanistan from the Soviet Invasion to the US Withdrawal (New York: Oxford University Press, 2017)
He can be contacted at ap88@soas.ac.uk

 

 

[1] Avinash Paliwal (2020) “A Cat’s Paw of Indian Reactionaries”? Strategic Rivalry and Domestic Politics at the India–China–Myanmar Tri-Junction, Asian Security, 16:1, 73-89, DOI: 10.1080/14799855.2018.1551884

[2] Avinash Paliwal (2019) “How many miles make an inch?” Centre-state relations and the 1967 India-Burma Boundary Agreement, India Review, 18:5, 596-612, DOI: 10.1080/14736489.2019.1703368

The post India and Myanmar: The role of domestic calculations in the boundary agreement of 1967 first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
799172
Utilising District Mineral Foundation funds to fight the COVID-19 crisis in India: Current and future opportunities http://stg.csep.org/blog/utilising-district-mineral-foundation-funds-to-fight-the-covid-19-crisis-in-india-current-and-future-opportunities/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=utilising-district-mineral-foundation-funds-to-fight-the-covid-19-crisis-in-india-current-and-future-opportunities Mon, 06 Apr 2020 09:44:15 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=797879 In wake the of the growing COVID-19 crisis and the strain on healthcare resources, India’s finance minister Nirmala Sitharaman on March 26 announced that District Mineral Foundation (DMF) funds can be used by state governments to augment healthcare. This includes supplementing healthcare facilities, screening and testing requirements, and any other support that might be required. The announcement that DMF funds will be a component of the government’s coronavirus relief package has generated a lot of discussion. In the light of this discussion, it is important to look at what the DMF funds were meant for and how they can be […]

The post Utilising District Mineral Foundation funds to fight the COVID-19 crisis in India: Current and future opportunities first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
In wake the of the growing COVID-19 crisis and the strain on healthcare resources, India’s finance minister Nirmala Sitharaman on March 26 announced that District Mineral Foundation (DMF) funds can be used by state governments to augment healthcare. This includes supplementing healthcare facilities, screening and testing requirements, and any other support that might be required.

The announcement that DMF funds will be a component of the government’s coronavirus relief package has generated a lot of discussion. In the light of this discussion, it is important to look at what the DMF funds were meant for and how they can be used effectively.

DMF was instituted exactly five years ago, in March 2015, through an amendment to India’s central mining law, the Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act (MMDR Amendment Act 2015). It has been conceptualised as a benefit-sharing mechanism with mining-affected communities, recognising them as partners in natural resource-led development. Set up as a non-profit trust in all mining districts of India, DMF comes with the precise objective to ‘work for the interest and benefit of people and areas affected by mining’, through a participatory process. It was also aligned with the important the Pradhan Mantri Khanij Kshetra Kalyan Yojana (PMKKKY) scheme, that was launched in September 2015 to implement various developmental projects and welfare programmes in mining-affected areas with DMF funds.

The funds of DMF trust come through a contribution from mining companies operating in the district. Companies are required to pay 30% equivalent of the royalty amount for leases granted before 2015, and 10% for leases granted after that through auction mechanism. This must be paid for the lifetime of their operation. In just a five-year period, the cumulative accrual in DMF trusts is nearly Rs. 35,925 crores, as per available information with the Ministry of Mines. Government estimates suggest that about Rs. 6,000 crores are likely to be collected by DMFs annually. The DMF fund, therefore, is the largest non-tagged, non-plan money available for the benefit of some of India’s poorest and marginalised populations living in mining areas. The money is to be spent on improving human development indicators through investments in sectors such as healthcare, education, women and child development, improving sustainable livelihood and income opportunities in these areas and ensuring long-term security of the mining-affected communities. These have been identified as ‘high priority’ issues for DMF spending by the centre as well as state governments under the law.

Despite opportunities, the utilisation of funds in most states has been low. As per the Ministry of Mines, only Rs. 12,414 crores have been spent as of January 2020, which is only about 35% of the total amount.

On March 28, the Ministry of Mines issued directives on the proportion of DMF funds that can be used by state governments to fight the COVID-19 crisis. The amount has been capped at 30% of funds left unused with DMFs. Given the unspent amount is Rs 23,511 crore for all DMFs in the country, the maximum amount for COVID-19 roughly translates to more than Rs.7,000 crores. For top mining states like Odisha, the collective amount available is more than Rs. 2,000 crores (Table 1).

Table 1: Potential DMF funds to fight COVID-19 in some top mining states as per central government directives

State name

Total DMF collection (Rs. cr)

Unspent DMF fund

(Rs. cr)

Amount can be utilised for COVID-19

(Rs. cr)

Odisha

9,501

6,707

2,012

Jharkhand

5,181

2,772

832

Chhattisgarh

4,980

1,622

487

Rajasthan

3,514

2,766

830

Madhya Pradesh

2,864

2,012

604

Telangana

2,774

2,282

685

Karnataka

1,842

1,522

457

Maharashtra

1,728

1,120

336

Source: Ministry of Mines, Government of India, DMF fund status up to January 2020.

While DMF administration comes under the aegis of districts and states, the Ministry of Mines has issued these directions under Section 20 of the MMDR Amendment Act. The letter issued by the Ministry of Mines to all state Chief Secretaries clarifies that such power has been exercised by the government in line with the emergent national interest to combat the COVID-19 pandemic.

The logistics of the DMF fund use are still being figured out by most states and districts as the situation is still unfolding. The centre’s directions broadly specify that DMF funds should be used for COVID-19 in those districts where at least one COVID-19 positive patient has been detected. As per official sources from states such as Chhattisgarh and Tamil Nadu, the state governments may issue some directions to districts in the coming days depending on the local situation.

Opportunities to use DMF funds effectively

DMF funds can be utilised to scale up healthcare intervention across states, particularly at the local level. While the disease clusters are still concentrated in the cities and major town centres, the reverse migration of labourers to rural areas gives reason for concern of community transmission. Given the poor status of healthcare resources in most of rural and remote areas, taking early measures is critical.

For example, most of these districts have a severe shortfall of primary healthcare services such as the primary healthcare centres (PHCs) or community health centres (CHCs). As per district health officials, in most areas, these facilities already operate at twice their capacities [i]. Additionally, there is a serious issue with access to these healthcare facilities. For example, according to the Brookings India Health Monitor (2018 estimates), in Odisha’s Keonjhar district, only 4% villages have a PHC within 5 kilometer (km) radius, and only 3% villages have access to a CHC within 10 km radius. Similarly, in Jharkhand’s West Singhbhum district, only about 14% of villages have PHCs within a 5 km radius.

Given this, there have been clear concerns about how DMF funds were being spent in the mining areas. Between 2016-2018, the trends were problematic. Barring few, in most states and districts, a primary focus of expenditure has been on physical infrastructure, including major roads. Expenditure in ‘high priority’ sectors such as healthcare, women and child development, livelihood support, has been grossly sub-optimal as compared to the need. For example, in Jharkhand, until 2018, healthcare sector accounted for only 0.22% of the total spending, in Chhattisgarh 7.8% and in Odisha about 15% (largely owing to one major hospital in Keonjhar) [ii].

However, over the past year there has been some revised focus on healthcare resources. As per information from officials, media sources and advertisements, some districts are trying to bridge the gap in healthcare staff and service delivery. These include districts like Keonjhar, Sundargarh, West Singhbhum, Chatra, Bijapur, Dantewada etc. A primary measure has been hiring doctors as well as trying to reach out to remote areas through mobile health service delivery systems such as mobile medical units, motorbike ambulances etc.

The DMF funds now can be crucial for these districts. The money can be used to procure testing equipment, personal protective equipment (PPE) for healthcare workers, train frontline workers and increase capacity of ASHA (accredited social health activists) workers in these areas, engage paramedical staff on contractual basis, pay volunteers from local non-profits and village groups to improve community outreach on COVID-19 do’s and don’ts.

Keonjhar district has just sanctioned Rs. 7.5 crores towards such efforts. As per district sources, this will be used for upgradation of primary healthcare facilities in the district, establishment of isolation facilities, procure PPEs, train healthcare staff to combat COVID-19 and hire additional resources as required [iii].

The districts and states also should take this as a lesson to improve the healthcare situation, particularly in the rural areas. While the preparedness for emergencies is important, the overall strengthening of rural healthcare is critical to provide sustained care to the country’s poorest and most marginalised citizens. Healthcare must be a major component of DMF plan in the coming years.

In the coming days, the districts may also consider providing direct cash transfers to poor families in these areas, particularly to labourers whose livelihood has been affected by the measures to contain the disease. The overall DMF fund available with states and districts provides substantial scope. However, a proper system to do this needs some consideration. There are emerging concerns about direct benefit transfer (DBT), as it depends on the Jan Dhan-Aadhaar-Mobile (JAM) architecture, which allows direct transfer of government-sanctioned welfare funds to bank accounts of the beneficiaries. However, many people in rural areas, particularly migrant laborers, do not have bank accounts.

As the COVID-19 situation keeps evolving, proper mechanisms of utilisation of relief funds to tackle the health crisis, as well as to provide economic support to some of the poorest will be critical. The fight, as many experts are predicting, is a long haul.

[i] Srestha Banerjee et al, 2018, People First: District Mineral Foundation (DMF), Status Report 2018, Centre for Science and Environment, New Delhi

[ii] ibid

[iii] https://orissadiary.com/district-mineral-foundation-approves-7-5-cr-rupees-to-fight-carona-decease-in-kendujhar-district/

 

The post Utilising District Mineral Foundation funds to fight the COVID-19 crisis in India: Current and future opportunities first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
797879
The early days of a global pandemic: A timeline of COVID-19 spread and government interventions http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-early-days-of-a-global-pandemic-a-timeline-of-covid-19-spread-and-government-interventions/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-early-days-of-a-global-pandemic-a-timeline-of-covid-19-spread-and-government-interventions Thu, 02 Apr 2020 09:14:42 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=795778 The COVID-19 pandemic has sent shockwaves throughout the global economy. Some economies have been affected more severely than others. It started with a few deaths in Wuhan, China, with the earliest reported case on November 17, 2019. By December 31, 2019, when the Chinese authorities first reported it to the World Health Organization (WHO), it was already a full-fledged outbreak. From the outbreak in Wuhan, the virus took different times to reach the borders of different countries, depending on various factors such as connectivity and proximity to the Chinese city. Within different countries, the virus spread through the population at […]

The post The early days of a global pandemic: A timeline of COVID-19 spread and government interventions first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
The COVID-19 pandemic has sent shockwaves throughout the global economy. Some economies have been affected more severely than others. It started with a few deaths in Wuhan, China, with the earliest reported case on November 17, 2019. By December 31, 2019, when the Chinese authorities first reported it to the World Health Organization (WHO), it was already a full-fledged outbreak. From the outbreak in Wuhan, the virus took different times to reach the borders of different countries, depending on various factors such as connectivity and proximity to the Chinese city. Within different countries, the virus spread through the population at varying speeds depending on a range of factors such as cultural and behavioural responses of the community, population density, average household size, among others. This pattern has led to substantial variation in the preparedness of countries and their responses to the crisis. In this article, we trace the timeline of the spread of COVID-19 in the early days [i] to different countries and their proactiveness in implementing some common social distancing measures.

When tackling a virulent virus like COVID-19, early interventions are crucial to stay ahead of the disease and we restrict our analysis to the first few hundred cases. We use COVID-19 data from Johns Hopkins CSSE repository [ii] and data on a few commonly used government interventions from the Oxford COVID-19 government response tracker [iii]. It is important to note that we use the earliest date for the strictest interventions and not advisories or cautionary notes sent by the governments since advisories can easily be ignored by the citizens.

thumbnail_Screenshot

Japan, South Korea and the United States confirmed their first case of COVID-19 approximately three weeks after the reported outbreak in China. From then on, disease progression within these countries varied quite a bit. While it took 42 days to reach 100 confirmed cases in the U.S., Japan reached that number in 31 days and South Korea in 29 days. Subsequently, the rate of progression increased drastically in South Korea and the U.S., and relatively less rapidly in Japan. Japan’s early success can partly be attributed to early social distancing measures like closure of schools until April and targeted testing of clusters [iv]. South Korea first cancelled all public events, then imposed an international travel ban even before the 100th case was reported. South Korea embarked on developing their own test and adopting a policy of stringent testing following by contact tracing [v]. As of March 29, the U.S. has over 140,000 confirmed cases while South Korea has over 9,000 confirmed cases and Japan has over 1,800 confirmed cases.

Singapore and France both reported their first confirmed case 23 and 24 days from the outbreak and both countries reached 100 confirmed cases in 37 and 36 days, respectively. Singapore promptly instituted an international travel ban around the same time as their first confirmed case, followed by a very strict screening and quarantine measures [vi]. France, in contrast, instituted only screening measures for international travellers a few days later and a ban on public events around the same time that its confirmed cases rose to 100. Other social distancing measures were instituted much later. The number of confirmed cases in Singapore rose more slowly than France, with Singapore reporting 844 confirmed cases and France reporting over 40,000 confirmed cases as of March 29.

India reported the first confirmed case 29 days after the outbreak around a month after the report of the outbreak around the same time as Italy, the U.K., Spain and Belgium. Italy was more proactive than India in instituting international travel controls. Yet, Italy confirmed 100 cases in another 23 days compared to India’s 45 days. India started taking social distancing measures like closing workplaces and schools before reaching 100 confirmed cases. But public gatherings were still occurring in Italy, the most crucial of which turned out to be a football match [vii]. As of March 29, India had over 1,000 confirmed cases while Italy had over 97,000 confirmed cases. The U.K., Spain, Belgium also confirmed their first cases around the same time as India and Italy but have not been as proactive about policies. The result of their delay can be seen in the number of their confirmed cases now. As of March 29, the U.K. had over 19,000 confirmed cases, Spain had over 80,000 confirmed cases and Belgium had over 10000 confirmed cases.

Iran presents a cautionary tale, with its first confirmed case around 50 days since the report of the outbreak. It took only seven days to reach 100 confirmed cases, the shortest time taken by any country. A combination of political factors, one of which was the country’s parliamentary election (on February 21), led to Iran delaying the cancellation of public events [viii] . The social distancing measures turned out to be too late as the virus spread rapidly through the population infecting another 100 people in one day and so on. As of March 29, Iran has over 38,000 confirmed cases with a death toll of over 2000. Austria, Netherlands and Switzerland all confirmed their first case 56 days from the outbreak. All three countries have taken social distancing measures but only after the number of cases rose significantly. Austria currently has over 8,000 confirmed cases while Switzerland and Netherlands have over 10,000 confirmed cases.

As we look back at the early days of the spread of the pandemic, countries that were proactive in taking strict steps prohibiting social gathering, such as Singapore and South Korea, managed to bring the pandemic under control swiftly. The lessons learned from these severely affected nations will prove to be particularly useful for African nations where the number of cases of COVID-19 are starting to rise. These countries should immediately take stringent measures relating to international travel and social distancing.

Notes

[i] We focus our analysis on the early days of the pandemic leading up to 600 confirmed cases or more because we want to look at the proactive of government responses.

[ii] https://coronavirus.jhu.edu/map.html

[iii]https://www.bsg.ox.ac.uk/research/research-projects/oxford-covid-19-government-response-tracker

[iv] https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-51663182

[v] https://www.wired.co.uk/article/south-korea-coronavirus

[vi] https://theconversation.com/why-singapores-coronavirus-response-worked-and-what-we-can-all-learn-134024

[vii]https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/sports/football/top-stories/game-zero-spread-of-virus-linked-to-champions-league-match/articleshow/74817915.cms

[viii] https://foreignpolicy.com/2020/03/24/how-iran-botched-coronavirus-pandemic-response/

The post The early days of a global pandemic: A timeline of COVID-19 spread and government interventions first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
795778
COVID-19 | Does India have enough doctors? An analysis of growing COVID-19 patients and existing medical capacity http://stg.csep.org/blog/covid-19-does-india-have-enough-doctors-an-analysis-of-growing-covid-19-patients-and-existing-medical-capacity/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=covid-19-does-india-have-enough-doctors-an-analysis-of-growing-covid-19-patients-and-existing-medical-capacity Fri, 27 Mar 2020 15:05:36 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=792216 Coronavirus cases are quickly increasing across the globe, with just 580 reported cases (on January 22, 2020), in the span of a few weeks, the total number of confirmed COVID-19 cases have increased to over half a million across the world. The surge in coronavirus cases has crippled health systems in many countries, primarily due to shortage of hospital beds, manpower and equipment (personal protective equipment, ventilators etc). Countries affected by this severe problem responded in different ways. China built hospitals with thousands of temporary beds in a short period, while the United Kingdom urged community members to volunteer with […]

The post COVID-19 | Does India have enough doctors? An analysis of growing COVID-19 patients and existing medical capacity first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Coronavirus cases are quickly increasing across the globe, with just 580 reported cases (on January 22, 2020), in the span of a few weeks, the total number of confirmed COVID-19 cases have increased to over half a million across the world. The surge in coronavirus cases has crippled health systems in many countries, primarily due to shortage of hospital beds, manpower and equipment (personal protective equipment, ventilators etc). Countries affected by this severe problem responded in different ways. China built hospitals with thousands of temporary beds in a short period, while the United Kingdom urged community members to volunteer with the National Health Service to tackle the problem.

The supply of essential resources (like manpower, protective gear) can be inelastic in the short term. However, this pandemic has revealed that one way to handle the increasing demand for healthcare is to ‘flatten the curve’. This is essentially achieved by social distancing which slows down the spread of disease and provides a much-needed breathing space to the health system (which has limited resources) to deal with rising number of patients. In other words, the purpose of these kind of interventions is to suppress and delay peak morbidity to ensure that the healthcare sector is not overwhelmed. However, for India, which aspects of the healthcare sector can be truly binding constraints in the short-run? 

India confirmed its first case of COVID-19 on January 30, and in less than eight weeks the total number of cases has increased to 705 [1]. In our previous blog, we described how the limited number of hospital beds and ventilators is a serious concern for India. If the number of cases continue to rise at this pace, then temporary beds will be needed. There are already suggestions about converting hotel rooms and train coaches into make shift temporary hospital wards [2].However, an absolutely binding constraint in the healthcare sector is that of doctors. A doctor takes approximately 6 to 12 years to acquire the necessary qualifications. Thus, the total stock of doctors in a country cannot be increased quickly in the short run. In this article, we look at India’s growing number of COVID-19 patients and compare it with the existing capacity of doctors, in order to forecast when India will face capacity limits in terms of available doctors to treat hospitalised COVID-19 patients.

We use data on confirmed COVID-19 patients from the official statistics of the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare. The Government of India announced a nation-wide lockdown for three weeks, starting from March 25. The expectation is that this will slow down the disease transmission. In an optimistic scenario, this will lead to a doubling of cases at a slower pace, which we assume to be after every seven-days in our main analysis. We do a back-of-the-envelope calculation using a seven-day cycle where we extrapolate the number of confirmed cases for the next few weeks. Following existing epidemiology studies, we predict that the true cases are likely five-times the number of confirmed cases. Out of these, approximately 15% of cases will require hospitalisations [3]. We compare this number with the total capacity of the health system in terms of patients who can be treated by doctors available in India.

We use the number of total registered doctors from the National Health Profile 2019. Out of these, we assume that around 80% are available (on account of many doctors who might have migrated or retired), which includes doctors of all specialties including cardiologists, surgeons, general medicine etc. We consider three possible scenarios:

  • Scenario 1 where only 1% of the total number of available doctors are dedicated to treating COVID-19 patients,
  • Scenario 2 where 5% of the doctors are treating COVID-19 patients, and
  • Scenario 3 where 10% of the doctors are treating COVID-19 patients.

We assume that each doctor has the capacity to treat 12 hospitalised COVID-19 patients [4]. Thus, we arrive at a capacity constraint of treating 110,850 patients in Scenario 1; 554,249 patients in Scenario 2 and 1,108,499 patients in Scenario 3. Comparing our projections of hospitalised patients following the seven-day cycle with these capacity constraints, we conclude that India will reach the capacity constraint for doctors between May 14-21, 2020 under Scenario 1, between June 4-11, 2020 for Scenario 2, June 11-18, 2020, for Scenario 3.

 

graph_F

We also provide results for alternate situations where we assume that the doubling of cases doesn’t slow down and follows a three-day cycle or a five-day cycle.

If we look at state-wise variation, different states will hit their capacity constraint in terms of doctors available to treat COVID-19 patients at different points of time. For example, Kerala with the highest number of COVID-19 patients as of now will be stretched in terms of doctor capacity by May 7, under Scenario-1. A similar analysis for Maharashtra, Karnataka & Uttar Pradesh reveals that doctors will be overburdened by May 21 (under Scenario-1) due to rising number of people who will require hospitalisation for treatment of COVID-19. In the short run, doctors from other specialities can also be mobilised to treat COVID-19 patients. To account for that, we have modelled two additional scenarios where 5% and 10% of doctors are treating COVID-19 patients. In fact, NITI Aayog has recently published a call for doctors to volunteer to treat COVID-19 patients [5].

Admittedly, the number of qualified trained doctors cannot be increased in the short-run. A complementary policy would be to train paramedical workers to conduct less skill-intensive tasks like routine check-ups, blood pressure monitoring etc., to take some of the load off the trained doctors. Unfortunately, COVID-19 pandemic does not stop patients suffering from other ailments from needing hospitalisation or even outpatient healthcare services. During this time, more patients, especially non-urgent ones, should be encouraged to use telemedicine services as much as possible. In this regard, NITI Aayog has recently published guidelines for practitioners to provide healthcare using telemedicine [6].

Notes:

[1] Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, cases as of 26.03.2020 at 3PM. https://www.mohfw.gov.in/

[2] BusinessToday article: https://www.businesstoday.in/sectors/auto/coronavirus-mahindra-maruti-ventilator-production-plan-reminds-of-world-war-ii/story/399302.html

[3] We have taken 15% as the projected hospitalisation rate for India. This number is 20% for China, where the older population was affected disproportionately higher. (Wu, Z., & McGoogan, J. M. (2020) “Characteristics of and important lessons from the coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19) outbreak in China: Summary of a report of 72,314 cases from the Chinese Center for Disease Control and Prevention.” JAMA).

[4] Karnataka’s Corona Task Force highlighted the need for 800 doctors to treat 9600 ICU patients (1 doctor per 12 patients). Anecdotal evidence also suggests that 10-15 patients are looked after by a single doctor. https://www.newindianexpress.com/states/karnataka/2020/mar/25/state-needs-to-gird-up-for-80k–cases-needs-4800-ventilators-2121251.html

[5] https://niti.gov.in/call-doctors-work-volunteers-covid-19-outbreak

[6] https://www.mohfw.gov.in/pdf/Telemedicine.pdf

 

The post COVID-19 | Does India have enough doctors? An analysis of growing COVID-19 patients and existing medical capacity first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
792216
COVID-19 | Is India’s health infrastructure equipped to handle an epidemic? http://stg.csep.org/blog/is-indias-health-infrastructure-equipped-to-handle-an-epidemic/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=is-indias-health-infrastructure-equipped-to-handle-an-epidemic Tue, 24 Mar 2020 07:33:19 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=790922 With growing number of coronavirus cases in India (and worldwide), policymakers have sprung into action – more information is being disseminated about preventive measures such as hand washing and not touching the face. Social distancing has been suggested as a tool to “flatten the curve”, or in other words, prevent the health system from being overburdened. Although the number of COVID-19 cases are still low in India, experts have warned against community spread of the disease which will lead to rapid and huge increase in demand for health facilities. Private healthcare is expensive and unavailable for many poor households in […]

The post COVID-19 | Is India’s health infrastructure equipped to handle an epidemic? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
With growing number of coronavirus cases in India (and worldwide), policymakers have sprung into action – more information is being disseminated about preventive measures such as hand washing and not touching the face. Social distancing has been suggested as a tool to “flatten the curve”, or in other words, prevent the health system from being overburdened. Although the number of COVID-19 cases are still low in India, experts have warned against community spread of the disease which will lead to rapid and huge increase in demand for health facilities. Private healthcare is expensive and unavailable for many poor households in India which leaves public healthcare facilities as the only available option for them. For patients who are found to be COVID-19 positive, isolation wards are needed; additionally, for critical cases, intensive care is needed. Currently, almost all suspected cases of coronavirus are referred to government hospitals and it’s important to assess where we stand in terms of medical capacity to provide necessary healthcare to the affected individuals. 

In this piece we focus on availability of government hospital beds[1] for major states in India. Using data from National Health Profile–2019, we observed that there are 7,13,986 total government hospital beds available in India. This amounts to 0.55 beds per 1000 population[2,3]. The elderly population (aged 60 and above) is especially vulnerable, given more complications which are reported for patients in this age group. The availability of beds for elderly population in India is 5.18 beds per 1000 population. In the heatmaps below, we show the state-level variation in availability of government beds in India.

 

Fig1_2

We observe that many states lie below the national level figure (0.55 beds per 1000 population)[4], these include Bihar, Jharkhand, Gujarat, Uttar Pradesh, Andhra Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, Haryana, Maharashtra, Odisha, Assam and Manipur. These 12 states together account for close to 70% of the total population in India. Bihar has an acute shortage of government hospital beds with just 0.11 beds available per 1000 population. Some states do better on this metric such as West Bengal (2.25 government beds per 1000) and Sikkim (2.34 government beds per 1000). The capital city of Delhi has 1.05 beds per 1000 population and the southern states of Kerala (1.05 beds per 1000) and Tamil Nadu (1.1 beds per 1000) also have better availability of beds. The scenario is pretty similar when the analysis is done for just the elderly population: Northeastern states do far better than others; southern states also have higher number of beds available for elderly population for example, Kerala (7.4), Tamil Nadu (7.8), Karnataka (8.6) while northern and central states have relatively low availability of government beds for elderly population.

The availability of government beds is abysmally low in India, and an epidemic like coronavirus can very quickly complicate the problem even further. An estimated 5-10% of total patients will require critical care in form of ventilator support. In a worst-case scenario, according to one estimate at least, we may end up with 2.2 million cases in India[5] by May 15, which implies that we will need 110,000 to 220,000 ventilators. We have no official figures on the number of ventilators available in the public sector, however ,we arrive at an estimated figure using the number of hospital beds available 7,13,986 total government beds, out of which 5-8% are ICU beds (35,699 to 57,119 ICU beds)[6]. Assuming that 50% of these ICU beds have ventilators, we arrive at an estimate of 17,850 to 25,556 ventilators in the country. Even in the best-case scenario where all ICU beds are equipped with ventilators, we have a maximum of ~57k ventilators to cater to a growing number of COVID-19 patients. Clearly, the growing demand for ventilators is going to outstrip the limited supply really soon. 

While demand is being kept down by behavioural interventions such as social distancing etc, supply of beds and critical care equipment like ventilators needs to be quickly ramped up. In this regard, the government has already banned the export of critical care medical equipment. Additionally, excess capacity in private healthcare can be strategically used by the government and emergency plans of setting up hospital beds in army camps should be executed as soon as possible. 

Footnotes:

[1]Total number of government hospital beds include Central Government, State Government and Local Government bodies (PHCs are also included in the number of hospitals).

[2]Population figures have been used as of year 2019. Decadal population growth rate was calculated using Census data from 2001 and 2011 and a linear projection was used to arrive at population figures for year 2019. 

[3]Figures for Andhra Pradesh and Telangana have been combined together under the entries for Andhra Pradesh. 

[4] World Bank data reports 0.7 beds per 1000 for India for year 2011 which includes inpatient beds available in public, private, general, and specialized hospitals and rehabilitation centers. 

[5]“Predictions and role of interventions for COVID-19 outbreak in India”, published in Medium on March 22nd by COV-IND-19 Study Group.

[6] Yeolekar, M. E., and S. Mehta. “ICU care in India-status and challenges.” JOURNAL-ASSOCIATION OF PHYSICIANS OF INDIA 56, no. R (2008): 221.

The post COVID-19 | Is India’s health infrastructure equipped to handle an epidemic? first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
790922
Fuzzy frames: Mobile borders versus rigid boundaries in India’s neighbourhood http://stg.csep.org/blog/fuzzy-frames-mobile-borders-versus-rigid-boundaries-in-indias-neighbourhood/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fuzzy-frames-mobile-borders-versus-rigid-boundaries-in-indias-neighbourhood Fri, 20 Mar 2020 11:44:28 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=785564 In the first of our blog series on issues related to India’s neighbourhood connectivity, Nidhi Varma interviews Mirza Zulfiqur Rahman, Visiting Research Associate, Institute of Chinese Studies, Delhi on his recent work in antiAtlas Journal “Informal Markets and Fuzzy Flows in Fragile Border Zones.” Q: In your article,[1] you examine the differences between how fragile borders are perceived by states and residents, with a focus on the India-Bangladesh border. You say, ‘the borders of the state are reproduced through the structure of the market itself’. At the national level, the state views the border as a rigid and fixed one, […]

The post Fuzzy frames: Mobile borders versus rigid boundaries in India’s neighbourhood first appeared on CSEP.

]]>

In the first of our blog series on issues related to India’s neighbourhood connectivity, Nidhi Varma interviews Mirza Zulfiqur Rahman, Visiting Research Associate, Institute of Chinese Studies, Delhi on his recent work in antiAtlas Journal “Informal Markets and Fuzzy Flows in Fragile Border Zones.”

Q: In your article,[1] you examine the differences between how fragile borders are perceived by states and residents, with a focus on the India-Bangladesh border. You say, ‘the borders of the state are reproduced through the structure of the market itself’. At the national level, the state views the border as a rigid and fixed one, while, at the local level, the border is a “mobile” one. How should a sovereign state deal with and define these “fuzzy frames”?

A:The challenges faced by the sovereign state in dealing and defining these ‘fuzzy frames’ have to be seen in context of the distinction between the perspectives concerning linear boundary markers/border fences, and of meandering borderlands. The official ‘border haats’ between India and Bangladesh are an excellent case in point, where you essentially require a border fence to be constructed first along specific border pillars, and then regulate the fence through gates, manned by the Border Security Force and the Indian Customs, opening up to a ‘border haat’ infrastructure. The informal markets, on the other hand, pre-date the formation of the modern nation-states of India and Bangladesh, and signify local networks of exchange, flow of goods, community interactions and negotiations across borders.

A fuzzy yet functional framing of the mobile border sits at the edges of the multiplicity of border layers, between state anxieties of control, authority and calculation of rigid fixed borders, and local community specificities inhabiting the meandering borderland spaces while fully recognising nation-state sovereignty. The official securitised ‘border haats’, are seen as rupturing traditional informal market spaces and cross-border community interactions, making for sensitive spaces, exclusionary permit and regulatory systems, in an otherwise bustling vibrant market space.

Q: You’ve studied the India-Bangladesh border in extensive detail, do you see any similarities in other border areas, such as along the India-Myanmar border, and the local exchange networks that are, for example, present in Manipur (Moreh)?

A: Yes, the entire India-Bangladesh border is interspersed with such networks of local exchanges, including in Assam and Tripura, India-Bhutan border in Assam and Arunachal Pradesh, India-Myanmar border in Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, Manipur and Mizoram. The fulcrum of such local exchange networks, does not rest alone along the international boundary line as we may commonly understand, but across internal borders and spaces within Northeast India and within local exchange networks of Bangladesh, Bhutan and Myanmar as well. Given the relatively smaller scale at which local networks of exchanges operates in these borderlands, the critical mass is generated within a framework of functional market linkages, production, traditional trading routes, inter-community relations, which converge at the international borders.

It is the selective focus and attention of the nation-state that makes border towns such as Moreh central to the imagination of connectivity between Northeast India and its proximate international neighbourhood. However, the imagination of borderland communities operates at multiple levels across the national and regional spaces, such as the Pangsau Pass (Stilwell Road) and Zimithang in Arunachal Pradesh, Lungwa in Nagaland and Champhai in Mizoram. Any regional connectivity architecture will have to factor in the multiplicity and convergence of local networks and routes.

Q: From your reading of the area, do local communities along the border of Meghalaya, given their shared history with cross-border communities, feel more closely aligned to the cultures of bordering Bangladesh than they do to the rest of India?

A: The local communities inhabiting these borderlands in Northeast India, to my mind, are uniquely positioned to serve as strong ‘cultural connectors’ in any future regional connectivity architecture within India’s neighbourhood diplomacy. I use the term ‘cultural connectors’ to describe cultural drivers at the borderlands which can contribute towards enhancing the content of public diplomacy by nation-states across international borders. Some examples of cultural drivers are ethnic commonalities and shared cultural worldviews and aspirations of connectivity across national and international borders. Cultural connectors lays emphasis on shared ‘soft’ cultural frames of reference as opposed to the ‘hard’ securitised and strategic frames of reference that usually define exchanges and interactions across nation-state borders.

The imagination and deployment of cultural connectors within the larger strategic and bilateral public diplomacy between nation-states act as alternative catalysts, and this holds true of India’s Look/Act East Diplomacy. A number of cultural connectors in Northeast India are waiting to be tapped by India’s neighbourhood diplomacy in an innovative manner. This is however been plagued by a historical reluctance to trust local actors and traditional patterns of governance in Northeast India by New Delhi to take an active part in India’s foreign policy decision-making, which needs rethinking.

 

Q: In the article, your use of images at/of the border as the central focus of the narrative is unique. Why was this element important for you to include? What can you tell us about the fieldwork involved for this project?

 

A: The use of images becomes critical in being able to convey the unique context and specificity of the borderlands and its communities. The images are deployed as metaphors to depict certain core themes, and enable the research study to make space for the contrasting perspectives on the market, for instance, by local communities and national actors and agencies. The images serve as characters by themselves and are interwoven in the article to lend context to the multiple spaces and actors and holds the narrative of the article together. It offers a visual ethnography of the borderland by positioning the view garnered of and by the local communities present in these market spaces, as well as of the exchanges that take place across national borders. Overall, the use of images provides a well-rounded methodological approach to border studies.

The fieldwork involved for this project involved several visits over successive years to the informal border markets, official ‘border haats’, and the villages and other market spaces around it. A lot was learnt from how the informal markets operated, of being able to navigate the multiple layers of control and authority, and being sensitive to local aspirations and their networks of trust.

 

IMG_7926About the expert: Mirza Zulfiqur Rahman holds a PhD in Development Studies from the Department of Humanities and Social Sciences, Indian Institute of Technology (IIT), Guwahati, Assam. His areas of interests include research on Northeast India, mainly on issues relating to transboundary water sharing and hydropower dams, roads and connectivity infrastructures, conflict and insurgency, peace building, development politics, migration and cross border exchanges. His research specialisation is on border studies in Northeast India and transboundary water sharing and management issues between China, India and Bangladesh.

 

He is currently a Visiting Research Associate, Institute of Chinese Studies, Delhi. He can be contacted at mirzalibra10@gmail.com.

 

Cover Photo Credit: Mirza Zulfiqur Rahman.

 

 

 

The post Fuzzy frames: Mobile borders versus rigid boundaries in India’s neighbourhood first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
785564
How to hasten the energy transition in the developing world http://stg.csep.org/blog/how-to-hasten-the-energy-transition-in-the-developing-world/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=how-to-hasten-the-energy-transition-in-the-developing-world Fri, 24 Jan 2020 15:10:14 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=672623 Emerging economies are expected to experience the highest growth in energy demand in the coming decades, mostly because they are starting from a low or modest base. This means their future energy trajectories must be at an intersection of inclusive, affordable, and sustainable growth. However, for all the potential that advanced energy technologies (AET) offer for speeding up the energy transition, their application in developing countries will not be the same as in developed regions. This isn’t just about affordability; issues of political economy, the role of government, regulation and markets (or lack thereof) are all significant barriers to integrating and […]

The post How to hasten the energy transition in the developing world first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
Emerging economies are expected to experience the highest growth in energy demand in the coming decades, mostly because they are starting from a low or modest base. This means their future energy trajectories must be at an intersection of inclusive, affordable, and sustainable growth.

However, for all the potential that advanced energy technologies (AET) offer for speeding up the energy transition, their application in developing countries will not be the same as in developed regions. This isn’t just about affordability; issues of political economy, the role of government, regulation and markets (or lack thereof) are all significant barriers to integrating and scaling AET. Aligning technology and its possible disruptions with more immediate needs that go beyond carbon such as access, inclusivity, local air pollution and consumer choice will make for faster adoption and improvement.

Developing regions differ from more developed nations in three key ways:

1) Energy demand will grow: As an example, India’s per capita electricity consumption will likely double by 2030, but that would still be below today’s global average. In contrast, demand in many developed regions has plateaued or is falling.

2) Ability to pay is much lower: Per capita incomes are much lower in developing regions. If new technologies are “expensive,” they will be unaffordable.

3) Current systems are heavily centralized: Traditional regulation hasn’t worked well. In a number of regions, basic access to energy is limited, and many suppliers are loss-making. In fact, counter-party risk is one of the biggest challenges for providers of AET as well as traditional suppliers. The flipside is that many consumers are subsidized – but subsidies aren’t always well-targeted, and can often lead to inefficient consumption patterns.[more-blog-posts]

Where do AET fit in?

While the whole world is focusing on new energy technologies such as better solar panels, batteries and hydrogen systems, who is innovating for needs such as solar cooling for agricultural products, cleaning up wood-based cooking (with attendant indoor air pollution, which is much worse than outdoor pollution in places), or small electric and hybrid vehicles for local transportation? Riding the global innovation wave will only take developing regions so far.

We should view advanced technologies on two levels. First, they can help us do what we did before much more efficiently. Second, they can help us transition to new frameworks that weren’t feasible before, such as peer-to-peer energy networks or real-time pricing. The latter is where the real value lies but such changes will take time.

Recommendations for accelerating AET in developing regions

1) Sharpen the AET value proposition beyond a narrow, traditional return on investment. This means thinking societally, and looking for co-benefits like reduced air pollution, reliability or avoiding diesel back-up power. It’s better to price negative externalities than to pick technology winners.

2) Set up proper energy pricing and signalling. For electricity this includes time-of-day pricing that recognizes that not all power is the same; location, time of day and predictability all matter. This also helps reduce tensions caused by disruption, such as consumer solar power squeezing traditional distribution companies who lose “paying customers” (also known as the utility death spiral).

3) Move to a smart(er) grid. A smart grid enables more flexible and nimbler operations, both of which are key to renewable energy-heavy (RE) systems. A subtle need within this (and all AET) is the use of modular, open standards.

4) Plan infrastructure for state-of-the-art and forward-looking designs. If much of local distribution companies’ (LDC) infrastructure is yet to be built, it should be state-of-the-art and ultra-energy-efficient. Appliances are the lowest hanging fruit for such a push.

5) Innovate on financing AET and the energy transition. LDCs often have high capital costs, which hinder take-up of the most energy-efficient but more capital-intensive technologies. Improving utility risk profiles can help unleash cheaper global capital. Governments should help consumers buying cutting edge “green” solutions or ultra-efficient appliances by making the lowest available interest rates accessible.

6) Build human capacity. While more energy-related staff may be required in general, it isn’t just traditional engineers that energy systems need, or even economists, but IT and security experts, systems-level planners, modelers and behavioral specialists.

As we scale AET, we must be mindful not just of political economy, but also social welfare redistribution. All changes create winners and losers. Instead of ignoring these trade-offs, we should make them transparent so we can devise the best instruments for managing redistribution. Instead of giving free electricity in the name of the poor, we could give direct benefit transfers (DBT) solutions like India is doing (powered by an advanced biometric IT solution for fraud prevention). This is an example where segregated subsidies with properly priced energy instead of traditionally subsidized electricity gives consumers an incentive to save energy.

In developed regions, consumers take energy for granted. They don’t want to change their lifestyles much, especially when the potential savings are perhaps just a dollar or two a month. In contrast, many energy consumers in developing regions are deeply engaged with their energy supply due to its relatively high cost and often poor quality. If we tell people, for example, that a smart grid could not just save them a dollar or two, but prevent outages, they’d be very interested.

AETs are an ongoing process and will take learning and multiple iterations to scale. Maybe we’ll get the equivalent of “cold fusion”-style breakthroughs, but we don’t need to wait for those we aren’t even harnessing existing AET sufficiently. What we do need are policies that enable frameworks which incentivize, accelerate and scale innovation because the innovation is already happening.

The post How to hasten the energy transition in the developing world first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
672623
Sustainable and inclusive growth in South Asia http://stg.csep.org/blog/sustainable-and-inclusive-growth-in-south-asia/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sustainable-and-inclusive-growth-in-south-asia Mon, 25 Nov 2019 07:00:16 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=624837 On November 4, 2019, Brookings India hosted the International Monetary Fund (IMF) for a panel discussion around reforms based on inclusive and sustainable growth in South Asia with a particular focus on India. The IMF paper, titled “Is South Asia Ready for Take Off? A Sustainable and Inclusive Growth Agenda“, was presented and launched at the discussion. The second presentation focused on the key takeaways from the paper, “Reigniting Growth in Low-Income and Emerging Market Economies: What Role Can Structural Reforms Play?” The three discussants for the event were Dr. Anne-Marie Gulde, Deputy Director, Asia Pacific Department, IMF, Mr. A […]

The post Sustainable and inclusive growth in South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

]]>
  • On November 4, 2019, Brookings India hosted the International Monetary Fund (IMF) for a panel discussion around reforms based on inclusive and sustainable growth in South Asia with a particular focus on India.
  • The IMF paper, titled “Is South Asia Ready for Take Off? A Sustainable and Inclusive Growth Agenda“, was presented and launched at the discussion. The second presentation focused on the key takeaways from the paper, “Reigniting Growth in Low-Income and Emerging Market Economies: What Role Can Structural Reforms Play?”
  • The three discussants for the event were Dr. Anne-Marie Gulde, Deputy Director, Asia Pacific Department, IMF, Mr. A K Bhattacharya, Editorial Director of the Business Standard; and Dr. Mudit Kapoor, Associate Professor of Economics at Indian Statistical Institute, Delhi Centre. The session was moderated by Dr. Rahul Tongia, Fellow, Brookings India.
  • The road towards growth and reforms

    The first paper focused on key reform themes that can support sustainable and inclusive growth in South Asia growth that is job-rich and environment-friendly. The second paper undertook a more general analysis using cross-country data from Emerging Markets and Developing Economies (EMDEs). It focused on broad themes of structural reforms that can accelerate convergence and boost growth.

    The presentation was followed by Dr. Kapoor’s insights, focused on the macroeconomics of unbalanced growth. He stated that, theoretically, if a government decides to subsidise a constant productivity sector from returns of an exponentially productive sector growth will have to be sacrificed. He quoted that these goals growth and cross-subsidisation were essentially incompatible. In his view, a good example of this situation is the government’s promise of doubling agricultural income while aiming for 8-10% growth. On the topic of bolder and safer reforms, Dr. Kapoor observed that while reforms have to be a part of the wider political agenda, they cannot ignore the people they impact this also makes reforms reasonable from a political lens

    The second discussant, Mr. Bhattacharya focused his comments on the timing, extent, and impact of reforms with the degree of crisis in India’s context. He observed that reforms have worked best for India amid deep crisis. Today India may not be in a crisis, but the current growth slowdown is alarming. He noted that a 5% growth in one quarter triggered the government to cut corporation tax for the first time in 17 years. Bhattacharya argued, “Research should focus on gauging the extent of the importance of political economy in charting a model that produces both more reforms and more growth”. He concluded by stressing upon the importance of education and skilling in the context of India as a services giant.

    Dr. Anne-Marie noted that India’s growth can be boosted by product and labour market-lead reforms. She observed that what holds back an increase in agricultural productivity in India is closely related to the rest of the economy addressing the structural problems will also facilitate the issue of agriculture. On the question of political will around reforms, she observed that it is essentially a question of consensus. International experience shows that it is easier to form consensus when the economy is in a bad shape. However, the growth impact of reforms is the greatest when they are introduced in a healthy economy. In India’s context, she said that while 5% growth is not a crisis, it is an opportune time to use it as a wake-up call to develop consensus and introduce reforms.  On India being a services giant, Gulde noted that while this strategic advantage should be maintained, 130 million youth will enter the labour force in India by 2040, hence, it is essential to develop and support the manufacturing sector. She underlined the need for a multi-pronged policy that takes cognizance of India’s diverse needs. Since India has a well-developed internal market with a growing middle class, the demand aspect should not be a problem. However, several factors keep manufacturing from growing, most of which are low-hanging fruits once addressed, this could unleash manufacturing sector growth in India.

    Paper 1: Is South Asia Ready for Take Off? A Sustainable and Inclusive Growth Agenda.

    Launched at Brookings India, the paper was prepared under the supervision of Anne-Marie Gulde-Wolf. Dr. Goretti introduced the paper by providing context on historical growth in South Asia (India, Bangladesh, Nepal, Sri Lanka, Maldives, and Bhutan), where a real take-off is witnessed in the late 1980s and early 1990s after economic liberalisation. India and Bangladesh had development paths similar to other ASEAN countries, but not as dramatic as China and Korea. It is also pertinent to discuss the dramatic drop in poverty levels in the region. This trend is the most striking in India, Bangladesh, and Nepal. Hence, the impact of reforms on the populations of these countries has been significant. Sustained reform efforts are therefore the way to transforming millions of lives.

    1

    2

    Listed under are the key findings of the paper:

    (i) The big question is how to deliver job-rich growth in the region. South Asia accounts for a fifth of the global population with a median age of under 27 years. According to United Nations population prospects, over 150 million youth will enter the labour force by 2040 in South Asia. Hence, the emphasis on jobs is particularly relevant.

    3

     

    (ii) Growth strategies in India’s neighbourhood have either been export-oriented or manufacturing-led, neither of which is very relevant in the current scenario. A balanced solution involves increasing agricultural productivity in South Asia. This will release funds for investment in other dynamic sectors of the economy whilst reducing rural distress.

    4

    (iii) A key recommendation was to rely on services as a key driver of growth. In India’s context, the sector has yielded a remarkably high pay-off vis-a-vis the manufacturing sector. However, its pay out is significantly lower in terms of job creation.

    5

    (iv) Hence, it is vital to also expand the manufacturing sector. South Asia relies very little on manufacturing, both in terms of value-added and exports. Average exports account for all of 8% of GDP, this average is pulled up by Bangladesh with a manufacturing production of 14% of GDP. Further, there is significant scope to advance manufacturing from a quality standpoint. A focus on labour mobility together with skill upgradations shall expand manufacturing in the region.

    6

    (v) Making policy space for reforms is critical for South Asia. There is a pressing need to expand revenue space, accelerate fiscal consolidation, and lower public debt to create space for critical spending. State-owned banks play a key role in the region for financing both public and private investment. But excessive reliance on state-owned banks can induce inefficiencies and lead to resource misallocations.

    (vi) Governments must supportprivate entrepreneurship by further liberalising trade and opening up to foreign direct investment (FDI). Progressive strides have been made in this, particularly in India. However, average tariff rates remain high when compared to the rest of the world. In addition to this, many important non-tariff barriers such as caps and complex approval systems have resulted in a much slower integration of the region with the global value chain, especially when compared to China and other peers in the region.

    (vii) Other important factors are: improving infrastructureboth in terms of availability and quality; being mindful of sustainability; investing in people by improving education and skills; leveraging digital technology and closing costly gender gaps.

    The impact of reforms has been estimated for three reform scenarios: reduction of goods tariff to zero, non-tariff barriers in the trade of services reduced by 30%, and reduction in FDI restrictions in line with global standards. The combined effect of these reform efforts would result in substantial productivity gains. Under this reform scenario, India’s real GDP is projected to grow by 20% over the next 20 years. This translates to an addition of Rs. 100 trillion to India’s economy by 2040. Importantly, this will significantly impact the standard of living (WEO estimates) the real GDP per capita is projected to increase to 40,000 USD.

    7

    The paper also estimates the impact of such reform-led growth on the rest of the world, South Asia, and specifically on the neighbouring countries of Sri Lanka and Bangladesh. The impact is estimated to be over 3% of real GDP in Sri Lanka and Bangladesh because of enhanced productivity due to technology transfers. It would also result in India contributing 15% of the global growth. If all countries in the region follow the same reform agenda, then the region’s contribution to global growth could accelerate to 45%. In the absence of these reforms, centred on India’s current baseline, the country is projected to grow at 6% in the long run. If the reforms are implemented, the long-term growth projection goes up to 6.5%. A down-side scenario, computed for a situation where India fails to exploit the demographic dividend, results in a medium long-term growth projection of 5%.

    To conclude, recent elections in most South Asian economies offer a propitious window of opportunity to accelerate the reform agenda and respond to the recent slowdown in growth. Clear communication on the benefits of the reforms and prioritization based on their expected macro-structural impact are key to building reform momentum. Additionally, stronger social safety nets are especially important to support the most difficult structural reforms, notably to labour markets, minimizing their distributional impact on the most vulnerable segments of the population, and promoting strong and inclusive growth. To ensure that the region’s growth path remains as strong and as sustainable, new policies and initiatives need to remain mindful of fiscal, financial, and environmental risks.

    Paper 2: Reigniting Growth in Emerging Market and Low-Income Economies: What Role for Structural Reforms?

    This paper looks at the macro-economic impact of structural reform in a wider set of countries the Emerging Markets and Developing Economies (EMDEs). Some lessons from this more general analysis apply to South Asia and, hence, it is a natural continuance to the first paper. It was presented by Dr. Giovanni Melina, Economist, IMF.

     

     

    8

    I) The paper starts with the observation that the speed of convergence of per capita GDP in EMDEs remains slow. It accelerated between 1998 and 2007, but it has stalled in the last decade with wide cross-country heterogeneity. There is an increased fraction of countries that have started to diverge. While South Asia has maintained a good speed of convergence there is still ample scope for reforms-led growth.

    The questions that then arise are:

    (a) What is the average impact on growth and jobs of structural reforms in the areas of (i) domestic finance; (ii) external finance; (iii) trade; (iv) product market; (v) labour market; and (vi) governance?

    (b) How do the effects of reforms vary across countries and time, and why?

    9

    (II) The first question is answered by the finding that the average impact of major historical reforms is sizeable, although it often materializes gradually. A package of major reforms in each area may raise GDP per capita by over 7% over the next 6 years in an average EMDE. This essentially means a doubling of the speed of convergence of an average EMDE addressing the second question. However, these average effects hide important sources of heterogeneity.

    10

    Conditioned on level of governance, the chapter finds that countries with the largest effects are those which also exhibit strong governance and smaller in countries with weak governance. In terms of governance, South Asia scores below or at the median. Hence, there is ample potential of gains by packaging reforms in key areas along with governance reforms.

    11

    Output effects are found to be larger in countries with a high level of informality. Reforms typically lower the level of informality, that is, they boost formalisation. South Asia scores medium-high on the index of informality hence, there are big gains to be unlocked from the boost to formalisation.

    12

    III) The key finding of the analysis is that unless implemented in the election year, the political cost of reforms is negligible and statistically insignificant in terms of both vote share of ruling coalition and probability of re-election. The paper suggests that reforms need to be implemented within the first two years of an elected government’s mandate. To conclude, there is a clear case to push structural reforms in South Asia.

    The post Sustainable and inclusive growth in South Asia first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    624837
    Performance of the Supreme Court and tenure of Chief Justices of India: An observational analysis (1950 to 2019) http://stg.csep.org/blog/performance-of-the-supreme-court-and-tenure-of-chief-justice-of-india-an-observational-analysis-1950-to-2019/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=performance-of-the-supreme-court-and-tenure-of-chief-justice-of-india-an-observational-analysis-1950-to-2019 Tue, 22 Oct 2019 13:18:41 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=619731 This is a tentative and an exploratory analysis to assess the productivity of the Supreme Court of India (SC) under different Chief Justices of India (CJI) in terms of accomplished adjudications, which is its core function. In particular, we study the number of judgements passed by the apex court per day during the tenure of a CJI and its relationship with the proportion of tenure days when at least one judgement was passed by the SC. Our analysis is for the time period of January 26, 1950, until the September 2, 2019. It is important to mention upfront that important […]

    The post Performance of the Supreme Court and tenure of Chief Justices of India: An observational analysis (1950 to 2019) first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    This is a tentative and an exploratory analysis to assess the productivity of the Supreme Court of India (SC) under different Chief Justices of India (CJI) in terms of accomplished adjudications, which is its core function. In particular, we study the number of judgements passed by the apex court per day during the tenure of a CJI and its relationship with the proportion of tenure days when at least one judgement was passed by the SC. Our analysis is for the time period of January 26, 1950, until the September 2, 2019. It is important to mention upfront that important questions regarding jurisprudence, quality of judgement and independence of judiciary are beyond the scope of this paper.

    Some key observations: 

    1. Over this period, the Supreme Court of India has had 46 Chief Justices. We analyse the tenure of each CJI to study the productivity of the apex court and how it varied across CJIs.
    2. The Indian Parliament increased the number of Judges in the Supreme Court of India from 8 in 1950 to 11 in 1956. This was further increased to 14 in 1960, 18 in 1978 and 26 in 1986.
    3. Accomplished adjudications (Judgements passed): A total of 51,534 judgements have been passed by the SC during this 69-year period. The lowest number of judgements, 48, were passed during the tenure of CJI Amal Kumar Sarkar, who was in office from March 16, 1966 to June 29, 1966. The highest number of judgements, 7069, were passed by the SC during the tenure of CJI K G Balakrishnan who was in office from January 14, 2007 to May 12, 2010. The average number of judgements passed during the tenure of a CJI is 1120 and the standard deviation [SD] was 1311.
    4. Length of tenure: There is significant variation in the length of tenure of a CJI. CJI Kamal Narain Singh was in office from November 25, 1991 to December 12, 1991, a total of 17 days. CJI Y V Chandrachud, on the other hand, was in office from February 22, 1978 to July 11, 1985, a total of 2696 days (or a little over seven years). The mean tenure of a CJI was approximately 552 days and the standard deviation was approximately 503.
    5. Number of judgements passed per day: We find variations in the number of judgements passed per day by the SC under tenure of a CJI. For example, during the tenure of CJI H J Kania, who was in office from January 26, 1950 to November 6, 1951, a total of 649 days, the SC passed a total of 128 judgements at the rate of approximately 0.20 (128/649) judgements per day of his tenure. At the other end of the distribution is the tenure of CJI K G Balakrishnan. He was in office for 1214 days, when a total of 7069 judgements were passed by the SC at the rate of approximately 5.82 (7069/1214) judgments per day. The average ‘Number of Judgements Passed by the SC per day’ over tenures of all CJIs during the period of the study was 2.24 with SD of 1.35. We present the results for each CJI in Figure 1.
    6. Proportion of ‘Judgement days’: Next, we analyse the variations in the proportion of tenure days when at least one (one or more) judgements were passed by the SC during a CJI’s tenure. For example, during the tenure of CJI Y V Chandrachud who was in office for 2696 days, there were 1106 days when at least one judgement was passed by the SC. Therefore, the proportion of ‘judgement days’ during CJI Y V Chandrachud’s tenure was approximately 0.41 (1106/2696). This means that 41% of days under his tenure saw at least one accomplished adjudication by the Supreme Court of India. The remaining 59% days under his tenure saw no accomplished adjudication by the SC. We call this variable ‘Proportion of Judgement Days’ under a CJI. The average proportion of Judgement Days across all CJIs was 0.45 and the SD is 0.12. This is presented in Figure 2.

    Figure 1: Number of Judgements Passed by SC per Day under Each CJI

    Accelerating_Fig-1-01

    Figure 2: Proportion of Judgement Days to Total Days in CJI Tenure

    2

    7. Productivity of Supreme Court of India: To understand the dynamics of productivity (narrowly defined as the total number of judgements passed per day by the SC), we scrutinise the relationship between number of judgements passed per day by the SC (under a given CJI) and the proportion of judgment days when at least one judgement was passed by the SC (under a given CJI). We present this relationship in Figure 3.

    Figure 3: Productivity Increasing with Proportion of Judgement Days

    3

    In order to derive this relationship, we ran the following regression:

     

    formula 1

    What does the above relationship mean? The observed relationship between the number of judgements passed per day by the SC under a CJI and the proportion of judgement days under that CJI means the following:

    a) Number of judgements passed per day by the SC under a CJI is increasing at an increasing rate with the proportion of judgement days under that CJI. The implications of this can be illustrated with the help of an example. Consider two CJIs (say CJIA and CJIB), both of whom have the same length of tenure, say 100 days. If the proportion of judgement days under CJIA was 0.5, while for CJIB it was 0.6 (so 20% higher than CJIA)– then the empirical relationship in Figure 3 would imply that the expected number of judgements passed per day by SC under CJIA would be approximately 2.7, while it would be much higher at 4.7 judgements per day under CJIB. That is, the number of judgements per day under CJIB would be approximately 74% higher than number of judgements per day under CJIA.

    b) We also compute the elasticity (Ꜫ) between total number of judgements passed by SC per day and the proportion of judgement days in the tenure of a CJI. We define elasticity (Ꜫ) as the percentage change in total number of judgements passed by SC per day if there was a 1% increase in the proportion of judgement days in the tenure of a CJI. From the observed relationship we compute the following:

    formula 2

    For example, we compare CJIA and CJIB who have the same length of tenure but differ in terms of the proportion of judgement days in their tenure. If the proportion of judgement days under CJIA is 0.5 while for CJIB it is 0.6, then a 1% increase in the proportion of judgement days under CJIA would imply an increase of approximately 2.8% in the total number of judgements passed by SC per day of tenure of the CJIA; while for CJIB, this increase would be approximately 3.4%. This implies that the elasticity is increasing with the proportion of judgement days under a CJI.

    c) Based on this robust empirical relationship, we compute a counterfactual from the data: how many more total judgements would have been passed by the SC, if the proportion of judgement days were increased by 10%, given the existing lengths of CJI tenure? Our analysis reveals that approximately 14,359 additional judgements would have been passed by the SC if the proportion of judgement days increased by a mere 10%. This amounts to an increase of approximately 28% of the total SC judgements passed in the lifespan of the apex court since 1950.

    d) We do not find a statistically significant relationship between bench strength (in terms of total number judges) and the number of judgements per day.

    Conclusion

    We analyse publicly available data for the Supreme Court of India to study the variations in its productivity over time under different Chief Justices of India. For reasons of data availability, this analysis is narrow in scope and limited to quantitative measures of productivity of the apex court. We define productivity using number of judgements per day and the proportion of judgement days under a given CJI. This productivity is likely to vary by the quantum of cases at the Supreme Court. Unfortunately, this data is not available, therefore, we standardise it only by the tenure length. While the number of Justices and the number of cases have changed substantially over time, it is interesting to note that the relationship does not vary linearly over time, and moreover, there is no significant relationship between bench strength and number of judgements per day. For example, the court productivity from 1990-2010 improved as compared to 1980 but declined after 2010. The empirical analysis reveals that number of judgements per day is primarily influenced by proportion of judgement days under a given CJI, there was no evidence that increased bench strength has any significant impact on number of judgements per day. The objective of this study is to initiate a set of broader empirical research and discussions to gain greater insights into the judicial administrative ecosystem of the apex court. These can contribute to informed and constructive interventions and needed judicial reforms in the country.

    Data Source: India Kanoon website https://indiankanoon.org/. We also compared the number of SC judgements listed on the India Kanoon website with number of judgements listed on the Supreme Court website at https://sci.gov.in/judgments to determine the accuracy of the data. We could not find any discrepancy between the two websites for the random checks performed.

     

    The post Performance of the Supreme Court and tenure of Chief Justices of India: An observational analysis (1950 to 2019) first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    619731
    Women’s Reservation Bill: What can India learn from other countries? http://stg.csep.org/blog/womens-reservation-bill-what-can-india-learn-from-other-countries/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=womens-reservation-bill-what-can-india-learn-from-other-countries Fri, 18 Oct 2019 12:12:06 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=619176 Globally, women remain vastly underrepresented in local and national politics. As of 2018, according to the Inter Parliamentary Union, only 24%[i] of parliamentarians are women. Can public policy, in general, and affirmative action, in particular, result in political inclusion of women? Data from the International Institute for Democratic and Electoral Assistance, Stockholm (IDEA) shows that an increasing number of countries around the world have introduced some sort of affirmative action for women in public office. Besides reserving a minimum number of seats in elected national and state offices, gender-based quotas can also be introduced in candidate lists. While both forms […]

    The post Women’s Reservation Bill: What can India learn from other countries? first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Globally, women remain vastly underrepresented in local and national politics. As of 2018, according to the Inter Parliamentary Union, only 24%[i] of parliamentarians are women. Can public policy, in general, and affirmative action, in particular, result in political inclusion of women? Data from the International Institute for Democratic and Electoral Assistance, Stockholm (IDEA) shows that an increasing number of countries around the world have introduced some sort of affirmative action for women in public office.

    Besides reserving a minimum number of seats in elected national and state offices, gender-based quotas can also be introduced in candidate lists. While both forms of quotas can be legislated, the later can also be taken up by individual parties by amending their party constitutions. This blog seeks to highlight how quotas designed differently result in differential results.

    Ravi and Sandhu (2014) study the case of Pakistan and South Africa to highlight contrasting international experiences:

    Case 1: Quota at national assembly level | Pakistan’s experience and early warning signs

    Starting from the Philippines in the early 1990s, a number of nations, including India’s neighbours Pakistan and Bangladesh, enacted legislations to reserve seats in their Parliaments to ensure female political inclusion.

    However, while reservation increases the number of female candidates nominated by parties, they are almost exclusively concentrated amongst reserved seats. This implies that parties would then, more exclusively, tend to field male candidates in general seats.  A similar trend has been witnessed in Pakistan, where after 2002, 17% of the seats in the National Assembly were reserved for women.

    In her work, Huma Yusuf, Pakistani policy analyst and columnist, found that while the aggregate level of female candidates contesting elections from general seats has gone up to 108 (2013) from 76 (2008), only 36 of them contested through a political party. Two major political parties, the Pakistan People’s Party and the Pakistan Muslim League (Q) gave fewer tickets to women contestants for general seats in 2013 compared to 2008. In conclusion, in the absence of a rich pool of women candidates, reservation policy would accomplish little more than tokenism.

    Case 2: Quota in candidate lists | South African Experience and Strong Positive Externalities 

    Alternatively, starting from Argentina, in the early 1990s, a number of nations including neighbouring Nepal, adopted a minimum quota in party candidate lists.  Quotas as high as 50% of the candidate list have been passed in countries like France, Korea and Nepal, among others. Countries like Argentina, Mexico and Costa Rica, have legislated party quotas and have over 36% female representation in their national legislatures. However, similar levels of female representation have been achieved by countries like South Africa, Sweden and Germany through voluntary (non-legislated) quotas by political parties. South Africa serves as an excellent example with women comprising 44.8% of its current National Assembly.

    In South Africa, the country’s biggest political party, the African National Congress (ANC), started discussions on quotas for women in 1991. By 1994, 35.7 %of representatives elected by ANC were women. This resulted in the National assembly having 25% representation by women. By the election in 2009, the ANC committed to increasing representation to 50% and this translated into the South African National Assembly having a 49.2% female representation.

    This triumphant feat was achieved by a single party voluntarily opting for such quota, the ripple effects of which, further resulted in a significant positive externality on the opposition parties. While in 1994, women constituted 14.2%of the opposition, by 2009 this composition had doubled to 31% percent.

    This, of course, underlines the significance of women’s movements within the parties. Women’s quota in the ANC largely emerged from the women’s movement within the ANC. The ANC’s Women League proactively brought together a number of organisations to create a charter to address issues important to women. The league continues to play an increasingly important role in the ANC.

    Takeaways for India:

    In a national context, India performs far worse compared to the global average of 22%[ii] (as of 2014) with only 11.42% women in its national assembly (2014-19) [iii].  While India lags behind, it has the advantage to learn from global experience. It has the benefit to improve upon both design and implementation of such a quota to achieve more efficient outcomes. In determining which of the two systems of reservation works better, IDEA summarises that, “in almost all political systems, no matter what electoral regime, it is the political parties, not the voters that constitute the real gatekeeper to elected offices.”

    Hence, Indian political parties must realise their critical role as gatekeepers in women’s political participation. Fundamental reforms at the party level will serve as a necessary and strategic compliment to the Women’s Reservation Bill. Even if the bill is derailed further, it should not stop political parties from making internal structures more conducive to women entering politics. These measures will ensure that the passing of the bill does not translate to mere tokenism and results in true empowerment of the Indian women.

     

     

     

    [i] https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/sg.gen.parl.zs

    [ii] https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/sg.gen.parl.zs

    [iii] https://eci.gov.in/files/file/2812-participation-of-women-candidates-in-poll/

    The post Women’s Reservation Bill: What can India learn from other countries? first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    619176
    The persistence of memory: The burden of Alzheimer’s disease in India http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-persistence-of-memory-the-burden-of-alzheimers-disease-in-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-persistence-of-memory-the-burden-of-alzheimers-disease-in-india Fri, 20 Sep 2019 10:14:55 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=612913 Between 2001 and 2011, India’s elderly population increased from 70 million to 104 million (Census estimates). In 2011, the population over 60 years of age comprised 8.6% of the total population. With falling population growth rates this share is only expected to increase further in the coming decades. As the population ages, the burden of geriatric diseases will start to feel heavier. Of all the geriatric diseases, India is perhaps most underprepared to tackle the burden of degenerative diseases like dementia (memory loss). This is due to a lack of awareness compounded by a dearth of specialists in geriatric diseases. […]

    The post The persistence of memory: The burden of Alzheimer’s disease in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Between 2001 and 2011, India’s elderly population increased from 70 million to 104 million (Census estimates). In 2011, the population over 60 years of age comprised 8.6% of the total population. With falling population growth rates this share is only expected to increase further in the coming decades. As the population ages, the burden of geriatric diseases will start to feel heavier. Of all the geriatric diseases, India is perhaps most underprepared to tackle the burden of degenerative diseases like dementia (memory loss). This is due to a lack of awareness compounded by a dearth of specialists in geriatric diseases.

    Alzheimer’s disease is the most common form of dementia characterised by progressive degeneration of cognitive abilities. Its symptoms range from forgetfulness in its early stages to loss of speech and immobility in its late stages. However, Alzheimer’s differs from other geriatric diseases in that its early symptoms are often confused with that of old age and its onset is often missed. According to the Dementia India Report 2010 by the Alzheimer’s and Related Disorders Society of India (ARDSI), there were around 3.7 million Indians with dementia in 2010 with the number projected to rise to 7.6 million by 2030. A general awareness about Alzheimer’s disease remains low throughout the country and even lower in rural and underdeveloped areas. There is an urgent need to increase awareness about dementia in general, and about the early symptoms of Alzheimer’s disease in particular. Family members and primary care physicians are best placed to recognise these early symptoms and hence, a national awareness campaign targeted towards them is likely to have the most effect.

    Even within the field of medicine, research in dementia and related diseases remain low. Most of our existing knowledge and estimates of the incidence of dementia come from small regional case studies. Similar to the burden of other non-communicable diseases, there is likely to be considerable heterogeneity across the states in the prevalence of dementia brought about by lifestyle and food habits. A thorough pan-India investigation into the current incidence and burden of dementia and Alzheimer’s is the need of the hour. There is also a need to provide genetic testing services for the Alzheimer’s gene (APOE-e4) and fund clinical trials. For a disease like Alzheimer’s, whose risk-factors are genetic, lifestyle, and environmental, we need to conduct clinical trials specific to India and not rely on those conducted in developed countries. Better knowledge of risk-factors is likely to influence patients and family-members to seek healthcare early and allow physicians to detect dementia early.

    Alzheimer’s disease imposes both economic and non-economic costs beyond that on the patient as family members still provide the bulk of the caregiving. The ARDSI 2010 report estimated the total societal costs from dementia to be 147 billion INR in 2010 with a projected threefold increase by 2030. In addition to direct cost of treatment e.g. cost of medication and physicians, the bulk of these economic costs stem from informal care through loss of wages and income through absenteeism from work or withdrawal from labour force by family members. Long-term care also imposes a psychological toll on the caregiver. In the absence of reliable formal care facilities, the burden of care is borne disproportionately by women. Thus, there exists an untapped market for reliable institutional care – both short-term and long-term care for Alzheimer’s disease patients. The establishment of care centres will transfer the burden from the family members to trained professionals as well as lead to job-creation. This would obviously require substantial investment up-front on training healthcare workers to recognise and cater to the needs of dementia patients. The National Program for Health Care of the Elderly under the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare aims to bridge some of the gaps in the landscape of geriatric care in India through the setting up of Regional Geriatric Care Centres. However, a focus on dementia and Alzheimer’s disease is missing. Currently this gap is being filled by NGOs such as ARDSI who provide certification courses on dementia care. With an increasingly aging population, investments made in training healthcare professionals is likely to pay for itself as demand for these services is only going to increase.

    If India is to stay ahead of the curve and prepare for the needs of an aging population, a clearly defined public health strategy with a significant focus on research into degenerative diseases and investment in the training of healthcare personnel is much needed.

    The post The persistence of memory: The burden of Alzheimer’s disease in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    612913
    Women’s Political Participation and Development http://stg.csep.org/blog/womens-political-participation-and-development/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=womens-political-participation-and-development Wed, 04 Sep 2019 12:32:49 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=610365 On July 29th, 2019, Brookings India hosted Sonia Bhalotra for a Development Seminar on Women’s Political Participation and Development. She presented two co-authored papers, “Women Legislators and Economic Performance” (2018)[1] and “Maternal Mortality and Women’s Political Participation” (2018)[2]. The two discussants for the event were Atishi, leader of Aam Aadmi Party and a noted figure in the education sector, and Mudit Kapoor, Associate Professor of Economics at Indian Statistical Institute, Delhi Centre. The first paper discussed how there are no costs, in terms of loss of economic efficiency attached to greater female political representation in a competitive electoral system. The second […]

    The post Women’s Political Participation and Development first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    On July 29th, 2019, Brookings India hosted Sonia Bhalotra for a Development Seminar on Women’s Political Participation and Development. She presented two co-authored papers, “Women Legislators and Economic Performance” (2018)[1] and “Maternal Mortality and Women’s Political Participation” (2018)[2]. The two discussants for the event were Atishi, leader of Aam Aadmi Party and a noted figure in the education sector, and Mudit Kapoor, Associate Professor of Economics at Indian Statistical Institute, Delhi Centre.

    The first paper discussed how there are no costs, in terms of loss of economic efficiency attached to greater female political representation in a competitive electoral system. The second paper highlighted allocated efficiency associated with women representatives in countries that have gender-based quotas in their legislatures, and the reduction of incidence of Maternal Mortality.

    The presentation of these papers was followed by Atishi’s insights as a political leader. She pointed out that a female politician cannot rely on intrinsic motivation alone. A more holistic view will entail an understanding of the underlying power structures in political parties. She also noted how strategic motivation (re-election) is an essential part of a democratic system. In her experience, she found that the underlying reason for rent-seeking while in office was the need for cash for re-election.

    She summarised that if the ultimate objective of strategic motivation was re-election, then it would be important to understand voter preferences. Does the electorate respond to high quality governance and delivery of social and public goods such as schools and hospitals, or do these matters not find traction in the electorate and mostly responds to cash pay-outs? It is essential to understand this demand side mechanism to forge any changes in the political landscape.

    The second discussant, Mudit Kapoor, pointed out that the subjugation of women has been pervasive over time. He argued that the worst form of slavery is not when it is explicit but when it is implicit, that is, one manipulates the other into complying. He quoted esteemed philosophers Francois Fendon (1687) & Adam Smith (1776)- to show how even enlightenment era thinkers thought a woman’s place was strictly within the domestic sphere and should not have access to too much knowledge. Kapoor concluded that in terms of gender quotas, certain human rights are  ends in themselves.

    Summary details and key insights of the two papers presented by Bhalotra are presented below:

    Women legislators raise economic performance

    Raising the share of women in India’s state legislative assemblies is not only likely to lead to better representation of women’s and children’s concerns in policy-making, it is also likely to lead to higher economic growth.

    Research suggests that women favour redistributive policies and thus, have tolerance for higher taxes. This could make it plausible that, at least in the short to medium term, women politicians are less effective than men at promoting economic growth. Using comprehensive data for 4265 state assembly constituencies for the period of 1992 to 2012, the study shows that the opposite is  true women legislators not only clock in greater growth, they also lead to more efficient development outcomes.

    This study overcomes two challenges that arise in answering the question of whether women politicians are good or bad for growth. These are:

    1. a) Constituency-level data on economic activity not being available. To resolve this, the authors use satellite imagery of night luminosity which, previous work shows, is a proxy for economic performance. It was found that it is positively associated with GDP at the state level.
    2. b)The challenge for research seeking to estimate causal effects of electing women is that constituencies where women win elections tend to be systematically different from those that elect men in ways that may be correlated with economic performance. In other words, differences between male and female legislators may spuriously reflect differences in voter preferences.

    To address this challenge the authors use a previously ratified statistical approach that involves comparing male and female legislators who win against the other gender by a narrow vote margin. The results emerge from a thought experiment that asks how economic growth in a constituency would change if a male leader were replaced by a female leader, all other factors being the same.

    Key insights from the paper:

    1. Women legislators in India raise economic performance in their constituencies by about 1.8 percentage points per year more than male legislators.  This means that when average growth is seven percentage points, the growth premium associated with female legislators is about 25%. To understand the mechanisms underlying this striking finding, the study explored differences between male and female legislators in:
    • Corruption
    • Efficiency
    • Motivation

    Each of the listed factors has been associated with economic growth in developing countries. The study found evidence in favour of women in each case.

    1. Male legislators are about three times as likely as female legislators to have criminal charges pending against them when they stand for election. The study estimated that this can explain about one fourth of the difference in growth between male and female-led constituencies.
    2. When the authors buttress this result with estimates of actual corruption in office, measured as the rate at which legislators accumulate assets while in office, we find that this is ten percentage points lower per year among women than among men. These findings line up with experimental evidence that women are more fair, risk-averse, and less likely to engage in criminal and other risky behaviour than men.
    3. Since economic infrastructure is an important input to growth in developing countries, the study analysed MLA performance in implementation of PMGSY, the massive federally-funded village road construction program. Authors find that male and female politicians are equally likely to negotiate federal projectsfor road building in their constituencies. However, women are more likely to oversee completion of these projects. The share of incomplete road projects is 22 percentage points lower in female-led constituencies. 
    4. Finally, separating the sample into swing and non-swing constituencies, we find that women legislators only perform better than men in non-swing constituencies.In swing constituencies, where electoral uncertainty is greater, elected men appear to exert more effort to improve economic growth. One interpretation of this is that men exhibit political opportunism while women display more intrinsic motivation. 
    5. Even if gender differences in tendencies towards corruption are intrinsic, if opportunities for corruption decline with development, it may be that women are especially effective relative to men at producing growth in less developed countries. On the other hand, to the extent that women are intrinsically more motivated in public-facing occupations such as politics, they may out-perform men in many environments.

    Raising women’s political participation leads to faster maternal mortality decline

    Using event study design in a cross-country dataset, the authors examine the impact of gender quotas (instead of competitive elections in the first paper) on Maternal Mortality Rate (MMR). The hypothesis is that MMR is stubbornly high because it is a low policy priority. In terms of the Millennium Development Goals, the global community failed to meet the goal on MMR. The Sustainable Development Goals are more ambitious, and hence, there is a need for focused policy interest in the area.

    Interestingly, the decline in MMR, beginning in the 1990s, is coincided by an increase in women’s representation in Parliaments. After the Beijing Convention of 1995, 21 developing countries made reservations for women in their national legislatures. This abrupt change of quotas is used to capture the causal effect on MMR.

    Key insights from the paper:  

    1. The authors estimate that the introduction of quotas for women in parliament, results in a 9% to 12% decline in maternal mortality. For lower MMR we require trained birth assistance, pre-natal care, and lower teenage pregnancies. As soon as gender quotas are implemented, the authors find a structural break in the following indicators:
      1. Increase in skilled birth attendance (8% to 10%)
      2. Increase in pre-natal care utilisation (6% to11%)
      3. Decline in birth rate
      4. Increase in girls’ education
        It’s critical to point out that these indicators show improvement without a parallel change in GDP, health expenditure or developmental assistance for health.

        2. Without any changes in the allocated resources, either one of the two mechanisms can be at play allocative efficiency (effective targeting of women with no loss in targeting men) versus a substitution effect (more resources for women at the cost of health expenditure on men). With further analysis, substitution effect is ruled out as the authors find that there is no variation in male mortality or that of targeting gender neutral diseases. The authors conclude that women policy makers are more effective in targeting women’s health, that is, allocative efficiency is at play.

    1. The authors find reinforcing evidence from the period in which the United States experienced rapid declines in maternal mortality. The historical decline made feasible by the introduction of antibiotics was significantly greater in states that had longer exposure to women’s suffrage.

    Hence, gender quotas can be used as an effective policy tool to meet SDG goals on gender equality and MMR.

    [1] Baskaran, T., S. Bhalotra, B. Min, Y. Uppal. 2018. Women Legislators and Economic Performance. IZA Discussion Paper 11596, Bonn.

    [2] Bhalotra, S.R., Clarke, D., Gomes, J. and Venkataramani, A., 2018. Maternal mortality and women’s political participation.

    The post Women’s Political Participation and Development first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    610365
    Assessing gender in the North East http://stg.csep.org/blog/waiting-for-an-equal-world-gender-in-the-north-east/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=waiting-for-an-equal-world-gender-in-the-north-east Mon, 02 Sep 2019 10:19:30 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=610063 On July 19, 2019, Brookings India hosted a Development Seminar on gender in the North East, under its Property Rights Initiative and Gender Secretariat Initiative, which is a platform for developing and discussing research that fuels impact on policy related to gender in India. Patricia Mukhim, veteran journalist and editor of Shillong Times, and a Padma Shri awardee, presented key insights from her book, Waiting for an Equal World: Gender in the North East, and discussed lesser known aspects of matriliny in Meghalaya. Simi Malhotra, Director of the Centre for North East Studies and Policy Research, Jamia Millia Islamia, Namita […]

    The post Assessing gender in the North East first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
  • On July 19, 2019, Brookings India hosted a Development Seminar on gender in the North East, under its Property Rights Initiative and Gender Secretariat Initiative, which is a platform for developing and discussing research that fuels impact on policy related to gender in India.
  • Patricia Mukhim, veteran journalist and editor of Shillong Times, and a Padma Shri awardee, presented key insights from her book, Waiting for an Equal World: Gender in the North East, and discussed lesser known aspects of matriliny in Meghalaya.
  • Simi Malhotra, Director of the Centre for North East Studies and Policy Research, Jamia Millia Islamia, Namita Bhandare, award-winning journalist with nearly 30 years of reporting experience, and Karuna Nundy, Supreme Court advocate and international lawyer were the discussants. The panel discussion was chaired and moderated by Dr. Shamika Ravi, Research Director, Brookings India.
  • In attendance were academics, public policy experts, bureaucrats, representatives of implementation agencies and advocacy groups.
  • The other side of matriliny in Meghalaya

    Patricia Mukhim opened her presentation by dispelling several myths about the overly romanticised concept of matriliny in Meghalaya. She pointed out that women in a matrilineal society are not necessarily better off and nor are they naturally empowered.  Mukhim highlighted a number of stark statistics such as 53% teenage pregnancies in Meghalaya (third only to 61% in Mizoram & 64% in Goa). Given the matrilineal organisation of the society, she highlighted the plight of young pregnant-drop-out girls who by default have to support and run their families single-handedly; she pointed out that often such girls are abandoned and their children land up on the streets.

    Dr. Malhotra used folktales set in matriarchal Meghalaya to bring out the social anxieties around an alternative form of family organisation. She said, “it’s important to pay attention to the incipient messages which are embedded in folktales of how gender itself is coded within the narrative rapporteurs which come from the north east”. Namita Bhandare bought to the table a number of key statistics that highlighted poor political participation of women in the Northeast.  Karuna Nundy spoke about the need to have consultative, essentially representative, methods of policy formulation. Dr. Shamika Ravi focused on the key aspects of public policy in the Northeast, including education, health, property rights, political participation and developmental spending.

    Some of the key insights from the panel discussion are presented under:

    1. Political participation

    Even though Northeastern states witness equal electoral participation by women in terms of voters (Table 1), the same does not translate into either rich candidature of women or elected representatives (Table 2 & Figure 1). Even in matriarchal Meghalaya, while women volunteers are extensively used for canvassing, they are not encouraged to participate in politics as candidates.

    Table 1: Political Participation of Women as Electors and Voters

    State/Union Territories Year Of Last General Elections Registered Women Electors (%) Women Votes Polled (%) Women Votes Polled As % Of Registered Women Elector
    Arunachal Pradesh 2014 50.10% 49.80% 78.9
    Assam 2016 48.26% 51.15% 90.38
    Manipur 2017 51.03% 51.83% 87.99
    Meghalaya 2018 50.41% 50.68% 87.23
    Mizoram 2018 50.98% 50.65% 80.09
    Nagaland 2018 49.22 49.50% 86.08
    Sikkim 2014 48.55% 47.15% 81.4
    Tripura 2018 49.15% 49.16% 90.4

    Source: Election Commission of India
    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    Table 2: Women as Candidates and Elected Representatives

    State/Union Territories Year of Last General Elections % of Women Contestants % Seats Won By Women
    Arunachal Pradesh 2014 3.87 3.3
    Assam 2016 8.55 6.34
    Manipur 2017 4.13 3.33
    Meghalaya 2018 8.86 5
    Mizoram 2018 8.61 0
    Nagaland 2018 2.65 0
    Sikkim 2014 9.09 9.4
    Tripura 2018 8.08 5

    Source: Election Commission of India
    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    Figure 1

    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    While Mizoram has never elected a female member Parliament, perhaps the starkest example of the lack of female representation comes from Nagaland that has failed to elect a single female MLA in 55 years of statehood. Rano Shaiza, a member of United Democratic Party, was the first and only woman in this state who was elected to Lok Sabha in 1977. Recent years have witnessed widespread violence in Nagaland over the government’s decision to introduce 33% reservation for women in civic body polls.

    Further, within matrilineal Meghalaya, traditional socio-political institutions like the Dorba-Shnong (village council) do not allow women to become village heads the Rangbah-Shnong (headman) can only be a man. There is a clear disconnect between the matrilineal space of a house and that of public institutions of governance.

    The panel was of the opinion that perhaps the solution lies is North Eastern women coming together as a voting blocks that support women candidates. Malhotra said that, “the paternalistic baggage of ethnicity, and hence the ethnic divide within the north eastern states, has been an impediment in this direction.  At the grassroots level, the women’s movement in the north east and associated synergies and outlets of solidarity have to be explored”.

    1. Landlessness

     The youngest daughter of the family, the Ka Khadduh, inherits all ancestral property. This shows up in survey data like the NFHS-4 where a greater percentage of Meghalayan women indicate ownership of land than the average Indian woman (Table 3). However, increasingly the non-inheriting daughters find preference in the marriage market. This indicates bad health of the social institution as well as that of the defined property rights. An asset is truly empowering when its innate value is economically transactable, and in the absence of property rights, this feature of liquidity in assets is inherently missing.  

    Table 3: Percentage Landlessness by Gender

    States/ Union Territories  Women Men
    Arunachal Pradesh 0.5 0.22
    Assam 0.55 0.21
    Manipur 0.63 0.45
    Meghalaya 0.58 0.53
    Mizoram 0.85 0.7
    Nagaland 0.75 0.4
    Sikkim 0.79 0.25
    Tripura 0.66 0.55
    All India 0.72 0.5

    Source: NFHS 4
    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    The socio-economic caste census conducted in 2011 revealed that 76% of rural Meghalaya is landless. A matrilineal order of society implies that land is owned by women, which leads us to conclude that landlessness in growing amongst women as well.

    A cadastral survey is the need of the hour a tribal society is built around equitable resource sharing and egalitarian social constructs, but in terms of distribution of real assets, this no longer holds true.

    1. Common property rights

    On a related note, there is a need to define common property rights as well. There is ample international evidence around extractive governance and poor institutional health in resource-rich lands. Mukhim discussed how there is rampant extraction of coal and limestone mines in Meghalaya. However, in recent years, in the absence of well-defined common property rights, even water sources have been privately leased out. Apart from the market distortion and poor equilibrium such a setting leads to, it causes needless increase in drudgery for women who have to go fetch water from distant sources.

    1. Access to credit

    Women in the Northeast not only extensively participate in the labour force compared to rest of India but also tend to own their enterprises (Table 4 and 5). Access to credit becomes a key factor in the success and growth of their micro and medium enterprises. 

    Table 4: Labour Force Participation Rate by Gender

    States/UTs Female Male
    Arunachal Pradesh 53.2 75.5
    Assam 26.7 75.3
    Manipur 47.7 76.5
    Meghalaya 53.6 77
    Mizoram 60.4 77
    Nagaland 59.6 74.1
    Sikkim 55.6 78.1
    Tripura 54.4 83.3
    India 27.4 75.5

    Source: Fifth Annual Employment -Unemployment Survey, Labour Bureau, Ministry of Labour & Employment
    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    (2015-16); Note: 1. The rate is according to Usual Principal & Subsidiary Status Approach (ps+ss); 2. Total includes transgender.

    Table 5: Distribution of Proprietary Establishments by Gender of Owner

    States/UTs Male Female % Female
    Arunachal Pradesh 76 97 56%
    Assam 59434 29841 33%
    Manipur 11275 45586 80%
    Meghalaya 1689 2014 54%
    Mizoram 1402 917 39%
    Nagaland 2646 2119 44%
    Sikkim 414 292 41%
    Tripura 9445 1143 11%
    India 1406873 396118 22%

    Source: Sixth Economic Census (2014), Ministry of Statistics & Programme Implementation
    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    Mukhim noted that of the 4.6 crore population of Northeastern states, only 22 lakh have access to microcredit, mostly concentrated around Assam. Table 6 shows the linkages of self-help groups with banks rural and co-operative. It is clear that compared to the rest of India, the Northeast is substantially lagging behind.

    Table 6: Linkages of Self Help Groups: Loans

    States/ UT’s Number of Self Help Groups Per Lakh Women linked to Regional Rural Banks Number of Self Help Groups Per Lakh Women linked to Co-operative Banks
    Arunachal Pradesh 2 5
    Assam 70 0.77
    Manipur 18 0
    Meghalaya 4 0.58
    Mizoram 22 3.5
    Nagaland 1.5 0
    Sikkim  0 2
    Tripura 5.6 3
    All India 85 34

    Source: NABARD as of 31st March 2017
    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    Financial inclusion is an important policy lever that has shown the ability to translate into tremendous socio-economic impact. Bangladesh is a worthy example that policymakers should try replicating and tailoring it to the needs of the tribal Northeast.

    1. Development and governance institutions

    Ten percent of all developmental spending of central ministries was earmarked for the development of the Northeast. Ravi noted that the Ministry of Development of Northeast Region (M-DONER) and the Northeast Council should look at each state in the Northeast as a separate entities in order to develop nuanced development plans tailored to the states’ individual needs.

    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura and Mizoram are governed under Schedule 6 of the Constitution of India. The tribal areas of these states have been constituted as autonomous districts. Each autonomous district has a district council consisting of 30 members, of whom four are nominated by the Governor and the remaining 26 are elected on the basis of adult franchise. Each autonomous district has a separate regional council. The regional and district council administer the area under their jurisdiction and make laws on certain specified matters like land, forest, canal water, shifting cultivation, village administration, inheritance of property, marriage and divorce, social customs and so on.  All such law requires the assent of the governor. [1]

    “When the provisions of the 73rd Amendment (Panchayati Raj Institutions) on the powers, scope of function and financial support for the exercises of the powers and discharge of the responsibilities by the Panchayat bodies are compared with those attached to the District Councils under the Sixth Schedule, it is found that while the District Councils have several regulatory powers subject to state government control, the Panchayats are in more advantageous position in respect of developmental functions”, notes legal researcher Dipanjan Roy Chaudhury.[2]

    The slow pace of development of the Northeast and the lack of female representation in district councils is a troubling trend. Rethinking how to harmonise the idea of a gender representative village/district councils that allow for the developmental function of Gram Panchayats through Gram Sabhas is advised.

    1. Crimes and Unregulated Tourism

    Incidence of crimes against women (CAW) in the Northeast has closely followed the all-India rate of incidence of CAW. In the calculation of CAW, we have considered registered cases of rape, kidnapping and abduction, dowry deaths, cruelty by husband and his relatives, assault with intent to outrage modesty and insult to the modesty of women. Further, we have calculated incidence by using mid-year population estimates of state-wise female population provided by the Registrar General of India. These population estimates are also used by the National Crimes Records Bureau.

    Author calculations: Shamika Ravi

    Figures include: Rape, Kidnapping and Abduction, Dowry Deaths, Cruelty by husband and his relatives, assault with intent to outrage modesty and insult to the modesty of women

    We can clearly see that Assam has a very high incidence of CAW per lakh women. However, seeing how the seven states of Northeast combined incidence of CAW closely map the all-India incidence, we find that women are no safer in these tribal/ matriarchal settings. There is a clear case for improving the law and order situation.

    Further, Ms. Mukhim noted that given the remote and scenic nature of these states, there is a case for increasing state GDP through tourism, by developing clear policies around the sector. So far the sector remains unregulated and a number of negative social spill-overs have been reported. In other words, to boost the tourism sector, there is a need to improve the law and order situation as well as put a leash on unregulated tourism.

    [1] Lakshmikant, M. “Indian Polity.” (2017).

    [2] https://www.asthabharati.org/Dia_Jul%2005/dip.htm

    The post Assessing gender in the North East first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    610063
    The Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-brookings-india-electricity-and-carbon-tracker/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-brookings-india-electricity-and-carbon-tracker Wed, 28 Aug 2019 11:14:53 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=research&p=609518 The Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker is a near-real-time tracker that shows electricity generated by source (e.g. Renewable, Thermal) at a national level. It also shows total electricity-based CO2 emissions every five minutes and CO2 emissions per kWh. Additionally, it displays the moving averages for each generation source, as well as a wide variety of summary statistics and analysis. Read the Discussion Note. Until now, national electricity generation data was only available on a daily basis, as energy (kWh). This tracker focuses on capacity (kW) over time, which makes it possible to draw patterns and inferences about electricity generation […]

    The post The Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker is a near-real-time tracker that shows electricity generated by source (e.g. Renewable, Thermal) at a national level. It also shows total electricity-based CO2 emissions every five minutes and CO2 emissions per kWh. Additionally, it displays the moving averages for each generation source, as well as a wide variety of summary statistics and analysis. Read the Discussion Note.

    Until now, national electricity generation data was only available on a daily basis, as energy (kWh). This tracker focuses on capacity (kW) over time, which makes it possible to draw patterns and inferences about electricity generation in the country for planning and policy purposes. For example, it helps us see Carbon Intensity of the grid at a granular time-varying level, thus identifying time instances when the grid is the “greenest”, or the relative contribution of (and thus value of) different types of generators at different times.

    Learn more about our launch here. Visit the Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker here: https://carbontracker.in/

    For instructions on how to use the Tracker, data sources, methodology, limitations, please see the FAQ section on the Tracker website

    We are grateful to the Shakti Sustainable Energy Foundation for supporting this research.

     

    The post The Brookings India Electricity and Carbon Tracker first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    609518
    Missing women patients: Gender discrimination in access to healthcare http://stg.csep.org/blog/missing-women-patients-gender-discrimination-in-access-to-healthcare/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=missing-women-patients-gender-discrimination-in-access-to-healthcare Thu, 08 Aug 2019 07:29:14 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=606150 Gender discrimination in access to healthcare has not been systematically studied in India or many other developing countries. This is primarily due to a lack of reliable data. In this paper, we use extensive data collected on clinical appointments from a large public-funded tertiary care hospital with a robust hospital information system to study the level and extent of gender discrimination in access to healthcare. We used data on clinical appointments from 2,377,028 outpatients to analyse the likelihood of a male patient visit compared with a female patient visit to the hospital and its variation with respect to distance from […]

    The post Missing women patients: Gender discrimination in access to healthcare first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Gender discrimination in access to healthcare has not been systematically studied in India or many other developing countries. This is primarily due to a lack of reliable data. In this paper, we use extensive data collected on clinical appointments from a large public-funded tertiary care hospital with a robust hospital information system to study the level and extent of gender discrimination in access to healthcare. We used data on clinical appointments from 2,377,028 outpatients to analyse the likelihood of a male patient visit compared with a female patient visit to the hospital and its variation with respect to distance from the hospital and the age of the patient.

    Previous studies on gender discrimination in developing countries have largely focused on the excess mortality of female patients as seen in low population ratios of women to men to explain the issue of missing women. This paper furthers these studies by assessing gender discrimination experienced by women in access to healthcare. There have been a handful of small sample studies on gender bias in access to healthcare in select patient groups or for specific medical conditions; however, this study uses extensive data across a wide spectrum of patient groups and medical conditions to examine the  gender discrimination in access to healthcare.

    The objective of the study was to investigate gender discrimination in access to healthcare and its relationship with the patient’s age and distance from the healthcare facility. The observational study was based on outpatient data from the All India Institute of Medical Sciences, a large referral hospital in New Delhi, India.

    The researchers used estimates from the logistic regression to compute sex ratios (male/female) of patient visits with respect to distance from the hospital and age. Missing female patients for each state a measure of the extent of gender discrimination were computed as the difference in the actual number of female patients who came from each state and the number of female patients that should have visited the hospital had male and female patients come in the same proportion as the sex ratio of the overall population from the 2011 census.

    Of 2377028 outpatient visits, excluding obstetrics and gynaecology patients, the overall sex ratio was 1.69 male to one female visit. Sex ratios, adjusted for age and hospital department, increased with distance. The ratio was 1.41 for Delhi, where the facility is located; 1.70 for Haryana, an adjoining state; 1.98 for Uttar Pradesh, a state further away; and 2.37 for Bihar, the state furthest from Delhi. The sex ratios had a U-shaped relationship with age: 1.93 for 0–18 years, 2.01 for 19–30 years, and 1.75 for 60 years or over compared with 1.43 and 1.40 for the age groups 31–44 and 45–59 years, respectively. The study estimates that there were 402,722 missing female outpatient visits from these four states, which is 49% of the total female outpatient visits for these four states.

    The study’s findings reveal gender discrimination in access to healthcare, which was worse for female patients who were in the younger and older age groups, and for those who lived at increasing distances from the hospital.

    Read the Research Paper: Missing female patients: An observational analysis of sex ratio among outpatients in a referral tertiary care public hospital in India

    The post Missing women patients: Gender discrimination in access to healthcare first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    606150
    From the iPhone to Huawei: The new geopolitics of technology http://stg.csep.org/blog/from-the-iphone-to-huawei-the-new-geopolitics-of-technology/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=from-the-iphone-to-huawei-the-new-geopolitics-of-technology Wed, 31 Jul 2019 13:46:54 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=603525 In meetings in various international capitals this summer from a gathering of defense ministers in Singapore to a meeting of economic policy heavyweights and CEOs in Paris discussions frequently revolved around the impact of technology. Of course, technological developments have long had implications for the global economy and international security, whether the advent of gunpowder or the railways, or the mastery of radio or nuclear fission. But with the “return of history” we may also be witnessing a return after an anomalous period of positive-sum progress of the geopolitics of technology. The scale and speed of this technological change makes […]

    The post From the iPhone to Huawei: The new geopolitics of technology first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    In meetings in various international capitals this summer from a gathering of defense ministers in Singapore to a meeting of economic policy heavyweights and CEOs in Paris discussions frequently revolved around the impact of technology. Of course, technological developments have long had implications for the global economy and international security, whether the advent of gunpowder or the railways, or the mastery of radio or nuclear fission. But with the “return of history” we may also be witnessing a return after an anomalous period of positive-sum progress of the geopolitics of technology. The scale and speed of this technological change makes it difficult to completely internalize the opportunities and challenges that lie ahead for the world’s major powers.

    Essentially, different approaches to technological development, and specifically the use of data, threaten to divide the world and shape the contours of geopolitical competition, contributing further to the securitization of technological competition. Instead of a “clash of civilizations,” we could be in for a “clash of automations.”

    The iPhone era

    The past two to three decades may well have been an aberration. They were marked by an acceleration of globalization: the faster, cheaper, and more efficient flow of goods, people, capital, information, and energy. This period witnessed rapid advances in broadband and satellite telecommunications, accelerated microprocessor speeds, more efficient energy use, the evolution of global financial markets, and the dispersal of manufacturing supply chains. The apotheosis of this world was the iPhone.

    But there was an inherent compromise at the heart of the iPhone era of globalization. The United States and other advanced economies remained world leaders in innovation, deriving benefits from the resulting intellectual property and their marketing power. Meanwhile, actual manufacturing of these products shifted to lower income countries, notably China, and also parts of East and Southeast Asia. Lower cost services software development, research, and back-end work were outsourced to places like India. The global economy grew and everyone benefited, even if some such as China, the United States, and India benefited more than others.

    The next wave of technologies 

    But the new era of technologies, many of which are already emerging, may not simply build upon these developments rather, in counterintuitive ways they may in fact undermine the globalizing effects of earlier breakthroughs. To date, many new developments are simply buzzwords to most consumers, so it is important to break down what the new set of technological developments will encompass. They can be grouped into six broad areas. The combinations of these technologies may well form the basis of what some have described as the Fourth Industrial Revolution.

    • Computing and storage, both of which will increasingly migrate to remote servers (the “cloud”), bringing down the cost and increase the scale of data storage. This could have potential implications for security and communications, especially features such as distributed record-keeping (blockchain) and new developments in data storage.
    • Telecommunications, specifically the developments of a fifth generation (5G) of infrastructure, which may operate up to 20 times faster than existing systems, with low latency (delay in data communication). This will enable a vast array of applications, including driverless cars and machine-to-machine communications.
    • Artificial intelligence, specifically machine learning, which involves fast and accurate pattern recognition by feeding vast troves of data to computers in order to “teach” them. This can then be applied to language, visual imagery, and other domains to resemble a form of intelligence.
    • Automation, including the online integration of physical objects: cyber physical systems (CPS) or the “internet of things” (IoT). Think health monitors, remotely-managed factory robots, or internet-enabled security systems.
    • Manufacturing, including in materials, optics, sensors, and additive manufacturing (“3D printing”).
    • Energy, particularly renewable and mobile energy sources and smarter management systems.

    When combined, these changes are already beginning to affect every aspect of globalization. The emerging sectors in which this will be felt directly by consumers include social media for information, financial technologies (“fintech” e.g. digital payments) for capital flows, e-commerce (both wholesale and retail) for goods trade, e-services (including peer-to-peer businesses, automation, and digital identification) affecting mobility and social services, and changes to the sourcing and management of energy. Most “unicorns” start-ups valued at over $1 billion would fall in one or more of these domains. Consider QQ, Stripe, Rakuten, Oyo, or Tesla. Today’s tech giants are already investing heavily in future technologies from which start-ups are benefiting: Google in machine learning, Samsung in 5G, Amazon and Alibaba in automation, and so forth. [more-blog-posts]

    Three approaches to data

    Underlying most although not all of these changes will be a simple philosophical choice: Who will own, control, and manage users’ data? Access to data will ultimately determine the quality of products and market share. Decisions on whether private companies, the state, or users themselves have ownership over individuals’ data will have tremendous implications for the future of the global economy and for geopolitics.

    Broadly, three different approaches to this issue have emerged. In the United States, major companies like Facebook, Netflix, Google, and Amazon retain access to vast amounts of consumers’ data which they have successfully monetized. This reflects a culture in which private sector-led innovation predominates, with a focus on research and development, design, and marketing. This model has allowed the U.S. tech sector to retain its international competitiveness (the five most valuable publicly traded companies today are U.S.-based tech firms), although often at the expense of consumer rights and privacy.

    A second model is embodied by the European Union, in which citizen and consumer rights are given priority, even at the cost of companies’ competitiveness. The European Union’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), which gives individuals control of their personal data, best captures this ethos.

    The biggest change, however, is the emergence of a third model in China, defined by a form of state-backed technological competition in which the government has greater access to citizens’ data. When combined with a protected market and significant financial resources, Chinese firms such as Huawei, Tencent, Alibaba, ZTE, and Xiaomi are now able to compete with U.S. and European tech giants. In certain areas, digital payments and 5G, Chinese firms have surged ahead of competitors from other countries.

    Although all three models reflect a tendency to promote national champions based on the comparative advantages of U.S., European, and Chinese societies the dynamics that underpinned the iPhone phase of globalization is fraying. The likely outcome is a more fractured and competitive technological landscape. This could well mark the emergence of what one European economist recently called the “Huawei phase” of globalization: a phase that could in fact witness globalization’s retreat.

    The Re-Securitization of Technology

    The geopolitics of these emerging technological developments are already being felt. China continues to project the benefits of its model. Beijing is no longer content to restrict it to its own territory: For the continuing success of a firm like Huawei, it will have to be able to compete in the global marketplace.

    This is resulting in a backlash. Europe is opting to double down on its approach, and regulate tech companies into submission. By contrast, the United States has adopted a more confrontational attitude, including cracking down on exports of technology in 14 critical areas. 5G telecommunications an area in which U.S. firms are non-competitive has become a priority political issue for the White House, which has explicitly targeted Chinese companies such as Huawei. This is motivated less by concerns about spying, but rather by the belief that 5G will soon underwrite a wide array of critical infrastructure port management, transportation fleets, and electrical grids. Consequently, giving a foreign state-backed company access to the backbone of one’s economy is a non-starter. Other countries, such as Japan and Australia, have reached similar conclusions. As these decisions are already making clear, the re-securitization of technology is underway.

    The post From the iPhone to Huawei: The new geopolitics of technology first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    603525
    India 2024: A green India http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-2024-a-green-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-2024-a-green-india Fri, 17 May 2019 04:57:20 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=583814 India faces a variety of challenges related to energy and the environment. Here are several initiatives that the next government could contemplate early on in its term. Integrate Energy and Environmental Policy The various ministries currently engaged with energy and the environment should be collapsed into one omnibus Ministry of Energy and Environment. This will perforate the current siloed approach to energy policy and enable the new government to view the sector through an integrated and holistic lens. It could more easily track and evaluate the systemic implications of changes in any one or more component variable. Secondly, an “Energy and […]

    The post India 2024: A green India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    India faces a variety of challenges related to energy and the environment. Here are several initiatives that the next government could contemplate early on in its term.

    Integrate Energy and Environmental Policy
    The various ministries currently engaged with energy and the environment should be collapsed into one omnibus Ministry of Energy and Environment. This will perforate the current siloed approach to energy policy and enable the new government to view the sector through an integrated and holistic lens. It could more easily track and evaluate the systemic implications of changes in any one or more component variable. Secondly, an “Energy and Environment Security Act” should be passed at the earliest possible opportunity. The objective of such an act should be to bring energy and environment into the national narrative; to set out the road map for managing and mitigating the emergent challenge of balancing economic development and energy demands with the goal of environmental protection; and to mobilise public support for the policy and regulatory changes required to hasten the transition to a non-fossil fuel based energy system. Finally, energy data is scattered across various government departments. This hinders policy and investment. The new government should establish an integrated energy data centre, whose data should be regularly updated and made available to all players on commercial terms.

    Decarbonise
    Decarbonisation, demand management, and efficiency should be the watchwords of the new government’s energy policy. In this context, the focus should be on generating electricity from solar and wind, incentivising electric vehicles, curtailing diesel consumption in agriculture, enforcing standards and emission norms, redesigning buildings and factories to make them carbon neutral, and influencing behavioural change towards energy conservation. A multi-pronged thrust along these lines will weaken the current unhealthy relationship between economic growth, energy demand, and the environment. Additionally, the “clean energy fund” is currently funded through a cess on coal production. It is also managed by the Ministry of Finance.  The fund should be augmented through the issuance of “Green Bonds” and perhaps a clean energy tax. Its administration should be handed over to those with domain expertise. The reason for the former is to intensify research and development on clean energy technologies (e.g. battery storage, carbon capture and sequestration, hydrogen, coal gasification, modular nuclear reactors, etc.) and to fund the transmission and distribution infrastructure required for absorbing the flow of clean energy. The reason is to safeguard the funds from sequestration into the Consolidated Fund, to create the conditions for incubating innovation, and to forge international R&D and technology partnerships.

    Better Manage Resources
    The levers of oil policy are today in the hands of autocratic leaders. This “personalisation” of oil politics would not have been an issue in the past when oil was traded mostly against long-term supply contracts. But today against the backdrop of an integrated, liquid, and fungible market characterised by short-term flexible deals, this is of relevance especially for import-dependent countries like India. The local actions of leaders now have global, supply-related ramifications. The new government should, therefore, look to develop a specialised cadre of “energy diplomats.” It should contemplate lateral entrants at mid- and senior levels of government with relevant domain and international expertise. It should unshackle the energy public sector units from intrusive bureaucratic oversight to enable their management to respond with agility to unexpected market developments. And it should establish strong personal relations with the leaders of oil exporting states. At crunch time, the latter could well be the peg on which India’s supply security hangs.

    Close to home, India’s unattractive geology is the reason why the various bidding rounds for private sector investment in oil and gas exploration have not been a success. The new government should not stop this effort but it should consider three changes to the current contract terms. One, it should replace the current revenue sharing model with a production sharing model for new exploration. Two, it should link investment in the marginal and smaller discovered fields with access to the domestic retail market and remove the condition that only companies that have invested Rs. 2000 crores will be eligible for a marketing license. Three, it should contemplate bidding out Mumbai High and other major producing oil and gas fields to international players with proven enhanced oil recovery technologies. The current recovery rates of production from these fields are well below global average. Huge value add would accrue if our rates could be increased to global standards.

    Coal represents another major resource. Coal India Limited (CIL) is a major producer of coal but faces huge legacy issues (labour unions, mafia, politics, and organisation) which constrain its ability to fully and efficiently harness the country’s indigenous coal reserves. These issues cannot be addressed without first redrawing the contours of India’s political economy. The new government cannot, understandably, tackle these issues early on in its tenure. It can, however, resurrect an earlier decision to allow private sector companies into commercial coal mining. The consequent pressure of competition will bear positively on the performance of CIL.

    Finally, in India, natural gas has not realised its full potential. Four early initiatives should be contemplated. First, Gas Authority of India Limited (GAIL) should be unbundled into a monopoly gas pipeline company. It should be divested of its upstream (production and regasification) and downstream (petrochemicals) operations. These can be merged into one or more of the existing PSUs. Second, the “common access” principle must be fairly enforced. Every player, private or public, must have equal access to gas pipelines. Third, the price of gas should be determined on the basis of market principles. This principle should apply across the gas value chain, except pipeline tariffs which should be linked to return on capital. Fourth, the gas trading hub should be expeditiously established. Finally, concerns over contract sanctity and delays in the adjudication of disputes have been a major deterrent to investment in India’s energy sector. Special energy courts should be established to address these concerns.

    The post India 2024: A green India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    583814
    India 2024: An energised India http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-2024-an-energised-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-2024-an-energised-india Fri, 17 May 2019 04:33:48 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=583820 Providing affordable and accessible energy to every citizen while ensuring energy security has been the cornerstone of India’s energy policy. Over the years, this policy has been shaped by numerous socio-economic and political factors including the dichotomy between a nationalised Indian energy sector (upstream and downstream) and a more ‘liberated’ economy; centre-state relations; a rising middle class and ending energy and economic poverty. In recent years, technological changes and global developments on climate change have also played a role. Compared to India, most large nations faced the pressure of climate mitigation very late in their development path, meaning there is […]

    The post India 2024: An energised India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Providing affordable and accessible energy to every citizen while ensuring energy security has been the cornerstone of India’s energy policy. Over the years, this policy has been shaped by numerous socio-economic and political factors including the dichotomy between a nationalised Indian energy sector (upstream and downstream) and a more ‘liberated’ economy; centre-state relations; a rising middle class and ending energy and economic poverty. In recent years, technological changes and global developments on climate change have also played a role. Compared to India, most large nations faced the pressure of climate mitigation very late in their development path, meaning there is no proven pathway for development in climate change and sustainability that India can follow. How then can India direct its energy sector towards a low-carbon economy?

    Make Clear Plans While Deregulating
    Since India junked the central planning model, the ministries dealing with energy have put out several contradictory or competing targets and policies.  These include the scaling up of electric vehicles to 100% of new stock by 2030; expanding refinery capacity to 400 million tonnes by 2030; increasing coal production to one billion tonnes by 2020; and changing the Renewable Energy (RE) targets almost every year. The lack of clarity on decision making and coordination often led to backtracking of policies (like in the case of electric vehicles) or changing goal posts (like the case of rooftop solar installation). The central government needs to provide cues to the market in the form of constant, clear and concise policies and legislation within a multiple objectives framework. This will necessitate planning, preferably by one body that takes into account an energy-economy approach. Furthermore, environmental regulations need to be strengthened. At present levels of consumption and groundwater depletion, India is expected to become a water scarce country by 2030. Similarly, seven of the most polluted cities in the world are in India. India needs Right to Clean Air and Right to Clean Water Acts or a new policy on environmental issues that highlights their critical nature and treats them as national emergencies.

    At the same time, the central government has to play the role of a decision maker – making policy, framing legislation and arbitrating – but step away from energy production and distribution activities.  Currently, the central government ministries are involved in framing policies, administering them, adjudicating disputes, and implementing policies either directly or indirectly, using public sector units as a proxy in the coal, oil and gas and power sectors. However, continued government intervention despite the evolution of the energy sector and the economy has led to market distortions, promoted rent-seeking, and encouraged biases and inefficiency.

    Strengthen Independent Regulators
    Because a single institution makes laws, administers them, and also adjudicates disputes, certain sectors lack regulators (coal, railways, and the environment) while other areas are not empowered sufficiently (oil and gas). Even in cases like the power sector, where the regulatory commissions have extensive powers at the state and national level, their efficiency and track record are not very strong.  On coal, the environment, or the railways, the process is controlled by the relevant ministries or nationalised corporations and there is no forum for quasi-judicial recourse. In the oil and gas sector, the Directorate of Hydrocarbons (DGH) that oversees upstream activities does not have financial independence, falls under the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas, and is staffed by members who are on deputation from National Oil Companies (NOCs). In 2011, the Supreme Court of India noted that regulatory jobs are reserved for career bureaucrats. These factors impact governance of the sector as a whole and act as deterrent for competition. There is a need for an independent energy sector regulator in India, either for the entire sector or several regulators for issues like coal and the environment. Moreover, to ensure independence of these regulators (and empower existing ones), it is necessary that they retain control over their finances, organisation, and hiring process with minimal interference from ministries and the bureaucracy.

    Empower State Governments
    In the energy sector, India has been moving away from the cooperative federalism model and has vested more powers in the central government. This move has resulted in policies that embody the principle of one-size-fits-all or a top-down method of policymaking. This approach has been detrimental since getting land, water, and environmental approvals require the buy-in of state governments. Further, this has also impacted the capacity and talent in state government bodies (ministries and independent bodies) to efficiently execute a plan of action. Given income and socio-economic disparity between states in the country, it becomes necessary to empower states beyond financial outlays. For example, in the natural gas sector, state governments are not interested parties in the infrastructure planning process and have different priorities. This makes acquiring land for laying pipelines or building CNG stations more difficult. Similarly, air pollution needs to be tackled by state governments with the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC) only providing the adequate framework, incentives, and direction. The framework for the UDAY scheme becomes a viable case study where state governments were asked to act with appropriate directions and incentives from the central government, despite the legislative framework being drafted at the Ministry of Power.

     

    The post India 2024: An energised India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    583820
    India 2024: A sustainable India http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-2024-a-sustainable-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-2024-a-sustainable-india Fri, 17 May 2019 04:31:32 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=583816 How things change in five years. We have seen many positive steps, some with effort, some part of broader global trends.  Nearly all homes in India today have an electricity connection, and the prices of solar power have crashed to a level where newspapers talk of “grid parity.”  Carbon is a universal global concern, and India made a carbon reduction promise at the Paris Climate Summit that it is likely to keep. Going forward, government policies must focus on all the three aspects of sustainability: economics, environment, and equity. Sustainability isn’t just about “being green” or an elite construct, even […]

    The post India 2024: A sustainable India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    How things change in five years. We have seen many positive steps, some with effort, some part of broader global trends.  Nearly all homes in India today have an electricity connection, and the prices of solar power have crashed to a level where newspapers talk of “grid parity.”  Carbon is a universal global concern, and India made a carbon reduction promise at the Paris Climate Summit that it is likely to keep.

    Going forward, government policies must focus on all the three aspects of sustainability: economics, environment, and equity. Sustainability isn’t just about “being green” or an elite construct, even laypersons want improved energy access and affordability, and pollution impacts them the most.

    While all countries grapple with sustainability, India is different given its starting point: a large base, growing demand, but still modest use of modern energy.  Despite strides with schemes like Ujjwala, many rural homes still use biomass for cooking, and the per capita electricity consumption is still only a third the global average.  While business as usual will keep improving, it will not be enough to meet the often conflicting goals of cheaper, faster, and better.

    If years of under-supply and shortages of power are a thing of the past, then why are utilities not providing 24×7 power to all?  Of course, the obvious challenges will need to be addressed, such as the reduction of distribution company (Discom) losses such as theft, and moving to better emissions standards for vehicles.  But some challenges need a new direction and political will – we need to now focus not merely on yesterday’s problems but tomorrow’s.

    Improve Electricity Supply
    While no one is against the goal of 24×7 electricity supply how can it happen viably, and how can it be verified? Utilities and regulators must bite the bullet to buy sufficient power or those who are load shed more (the poor and rural users) end up worse off than urban dwellers, effectively a perverse reverse cross-subsidy.  Furthermore, digitalisation of the infrastructure – starting with real-time feeder monitoring – is required to verify supply. This does not require smart meters per se, which are helpful but will take time. Through improved planning and building system resiliency, an immediate step would be to end scheduled load-shedding, a precursor to ending unscheduled load-shedding. 

    Part of the challenge is that this is not a generation problem anymore. Instead, what is required is to incentivise the right power generation at the right time at the right price.  Not only is India relatively power surplus for now, the costs of renewable energy (RE) are quite low, especially compared to alternatives. However, RE, as used today is the low-hanging fruit of variable renewable energy (VRE), and at some point in a few years, we will need sufficient storage to handle so much RE.  Most demand remains in the evening peak.  Thus, time of day pricing is necessary to ensure not just that supply matches demand but that demand matches available supply. Time of day pricing should start with wholesale purchases before addressing concerns about retail supply, which will require massive metering upgrades.  In the long run, a higher RE system needs operational flexibility, which means more market mechanisms, instead of today’s static if not rigid power purchase agreements.

    Enhance Efficiency
    Cheap supply, even if from RE, is not as useful as lower demand, which also saves on infrastructure requirements, which is why efficiency matters.  While there are star ratings for appliances, buildings are an obvious laggard, and the gap is not just in norms but in enforcement.  Part of this is a supply problem. Although LED bulbs have been widely adopted, many efficient appliances are only sold as luxury or elite products. Lack of competitive and affordable choices is also why there is little clamour for electric vehicles: it is not just lack of charging infrastructure. In fact, the first significant users of electric vehicles in India are likely to be fleets and public transport, who can fend for themselves, or small vehicles that can manage with regular household charging, especially overnight. But without effort, that could mean more coal.

    Eliminate Distortions through Better Regulation
    India must use the next few years to undertake structural change for superior regulation and stakeholder incentives.  Traditional electricity was mostly regulated and costs-plus, with many distortions, including in fuel markets.  It is now time to remove distortions and enable more market-oriented competition.  The future will involve more digitally-enabled disruption from the edge: “Uberization” so to speak.  Instead of fighting this, India should embrace more distributed generators and storage, and demand shifting by end-users and third parties.  Many users do deserve support in the form of subsidies, but this should be applied judiciously only for lifeline usage, and technology can help enforce this.  If support continues in the form of cheap prices, consumers have no incentive to save energy. Instead they can be given separate subsidies, perhaps through direct benefit transfers (DBT). 

    Sadly, we can’t innovate ourselves out of our problems — solar or smart meters can help but are not enough to address systems-level issues. With all the solar pumpsets being implemented to solve Discom woes, at what point would we run out of water before we run out of power?

    Path Ahead
    Operational improvements should be accompanied by amendments to the Electricity Act 2003.  No-brainers include increasing the use of technology and ushering in new entrants.  There is also an opportunity to fix or tweak issues that need more clarity or options, especially relating to markets, competition, and structural separation of wires and retail. Given the complexities and tradeoffs, the processes must draw in more stakeholders, especially states and cities, not to mention technology providers and consumers.  We also need to embrace and take advantage of our heterogeneity – one size does not fit all.  Forward-looking utilities should be supported for ambitious targets, and even taking greater risks.

    When incrementalism isn’t enough, we have to consider a big bang.  We need clear measurable goals that are achievable but with effort.  If a utility is truly failing, it should face consequences, and there should be external oversight of many operations. After all, entire cities in the west go into receivership when they fail.

    Energy transitions take time, even though governments like to think in terms of five years. India has to play the long game.  The good news is India is likely to surprise critics by a faster thrust towards digitalisation, de-centralisation, and de-carbonising.  Smart grids and consumer engagement in the West are often viewed with indifference if not suspicion. In India, few people take electricity for granted.  Citizens are likely to embrace change if it makes their lives better.  We just need policies that can foster and accelerate positive change.

    The post India 2024: A sustainable India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    583816
    India 2024: A productive India http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-2024-a-productive-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-2024-a-productive-india Fri, 17 May 2019 04:30:14 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=583822 India’s policy default in the energy sector has been a focus on infrastructure addition with the goal of sufficiency. This made sense based on the deficits it was facing after Independence, especially in the electricity sector. Reliable and assured energy is also a prerequisite for robust industrial and manufacturing growth. But now, India has reached a situation of aggregate electricity surplus, and barring occasional upheavals, aggregate fuel security for the industrial sector. The emerging challenges in energy pertain to allocation, efficiency, and resolution between the multiple goals and consequent stresses the energy sector should address. These require a revamp of […]

    The post India 2024: A productive India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    India’s policy default in the energy sector has been a focus on infrastructure addition with the goal of sufficiency. This made sense based on the deficits it was facing after Independence, especially in the electricity sector. Reliable and assured energy is also a prerequisite for robust industrial and manufacturing growth. But now, India has reached a situation of aggregate electricity surplus, and barring occasional upheavals, aggregate fuel security for the industrial sector. The emerging challenges in energy pertain to allocation, efficiency, and resolution between the multiple goals and consequent stresses the energy sector should address. These require a revamp of the traditional approach to energy policy, which has viewed the system as supply-constrained as a starting point.

    Improve Energy Productivity and Valuation

    Historically, the demand side of the Indian energy scenario has not received the attention it deserves. Instead, the political agenda of energy has been limited to two broad metrics: affordability and supply infrastructure addition. India continues to face the mammoth challenge of shifting much of its rural populace to modern cooking fuels, and providing affordable and meaningful electricity for the energy and income poor. This shift to commercial energy will increase India’s energy and emissions profile such that the greenhouse gas emission intensity of India’s energy portfolio will rise by over 10% by 2030, notwithstanding the ambitious domestic targets on renewable energy.

    This means that the bulk of the onus of achieving emissions reductions (even beyond India’s nationally determined contribution) lies in energy productivity enhancing the GDP per unit of emitted greenhouse gases over time. The next government faces a sizeable opportunity to shift the focus towards efficiency and service delivery. The task will also involve work towards changing public mindset towards efficient provision of affordable and reliable energy services. A good example of this process was the ‘Give it Up’ campaign on LPG subsidy that emphasised the role of the well-off sections of society in becoming conscientious stakeholders in national development.

    However, currently, there are a number of gaps in valuing energy efficiency. A unit of energy saved will always be more valuable than a unit produced, due to technical losses. In industries and commercial enterprises where the energy prices are high enough to impact bottom-lines, energy efficiency investments are autonomous, yielding returns over a shorter payback period. For households, a combination of high sensitivity to front costs of appliances, coupled with unrepresentative pricing structures (especially for the densely consuming urban ‘middle class’) has resulted in only a very gradual uptake in energy efficiency. Even in agriculture, while most states decree free or one-time flat-rate based supply, the benefits are concentrated within the relatively well-to-do households owning sizeable farmland.

    Related to the above is the absence of adequate signalling to end-users about power costs during peak and off-peak times. This is coupled with the lack of direct load shifting or demand response options, except in agriculture, where supply hours are traditionally fixed to off-peak early morning hours. With high Renewable Energy (RE) penetration, demand response is the most cost-effective option to ensure efficient utilisation of clean energy, and must be pursued on priority. Therefore, the policy on energy valuation on users’ end must provide mechanisms to signal or adapt to the following differentials: the value of a unit saved versus a unit generated; capacities and motivations among different end users to invest in energy efficiency; and peak and off-peak power.

    Employ Meaningful Targets
    Successive Indian governments have set highly optimistic energy sector-related targets. From RE, to electric vehicles to even natural gas, the policy ambitions set by this government should be understood as intention signalling rather than hard targets. Even so, the targets themselves need to be revisited to become more meaningful and service-oriented. On electricity access, for example, the conversation (and targets) must shift towards expanding energy provision.

    Even for schemes such as Ujjwala, a mere headcount of beneficiaries is no indicator of the quality of service or the scheme’s success in causing rural customers to switch from non-commercial biomass to LPG. Deriving service-based targets that measure real and durable change is arguably much harder, as it requires a careful assessment of prevailing conditions or circumstances that act as enablers or otherwise. One such approach has been proposed by UN’s ‘sustainable energy for all’ in the context of tiered measurement of electricity access. This allows for measuring granular improvements along the arc of time rather than mere headcount variables at different points of time. For example, a solid indicator of meaningful access is if the electricity consumption profile of a newly electrified village indicates progressively more sophisticated and productive uses beyond lighting, fans, and charging, or if the hours of supply (including peak hours) show improvement.

    Manage Multi-Dimensional Priorities
    For every technology-policy choice, there is an alternative. Each alternative may impact several objectives in the energy sector differently: energy security, low-carbon, reliability, affordability, job creation, etc. When the government directly intervenes in picking a favourite option, how are these objectives accounted for? Top-down policies need a clear statement of vision and aims that can be evaluated against the stated rationale and expected outcomes. This helps to prevent a closing down of conversation related to alternate policy pathways that may score better on the multiple objectives.

    As an example, high electric vehicle (EV) future and a marriage of EV and RE may be some way down the line, contingent on multiple developments, and even then may turn out to be expensive. In the interim, how do we step up engine and fuel efficiency, public transport, CNG availability, last-mile mobility and complementary measures that enhance the future of safe, affordable, and sustainable transport in India? The amount of government support by way of subsidies and incentives to such measures must, therefore, align with the quantum of benefits accrued on the multiple objectives.

    Lastly, no sector is in greater need of smarter policies than thermal power plants reeling under the stressed asset build-up. So if the objectives are obtaining cleaner and flexible power at least cost, pollution norms should target aggregate outcomes rather than individual units.  Similarly, curbing the growth of coal import share in thermal generation requires concrete steps towards enhancement of domestic coal quality, allocation, and linkages, than simply trying to mine more coal.

    The grand challenges of the past are giving way to more nuanced and complex issues as India moves up the energy and development ladder. The incoming government faces a unique opportunity to ride on the ongoing transition, and change some of the archaic and arguably counter-productive notions and practices that have stalled energy policy in India. With the question of aggregate supply now largely resolved, issues of allocative efficiency and productivity should become the focus.

     

    The post India 2024: A productive India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    583822
    India 2024: A clean India http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-2024-a-clean-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-2024-a-clean-india Fri, 17 May 2019 04:29:42 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=583824 India continues to suffer from a number of systemic challenges, many dating back decades, when it comes to governance, the delivery of services, and financial sustainability. The next government should focus its efforts on a few areas. Cut Out Middlemen Today, a major scourge on governance in India – including in the energy sector – is the widespread presence of middlemen providing facilitation for a fee. They are visible outside transportation license authorities, electricity supply distribution offices, housing board offices, hospitals, and offices for registration of legal documents relating to land, housing, and loans. Additionally, the cost of legal documents […]

    The post India 2024: A clean India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    India continues to suffer from a number of systemic challenges, many dating back decades, when it comes to governance, the delivery of services, and financial sustainability. The next government should focus its efforts on a few areas.

    Cut Out Middlemen
    Today, a major scourge on governance in India – including in the energy sector – is the widespread presence of middlemen providing facilitation for a fee. They are visible outside transportation license authorities, electricity supply distribution offices, housing board offices, hospitals, and offices for registration of legal documents relating to land, housing, and loans. Additionally, the cost of legal documents is artificially inflated. The agricultural sector features middlemen facilitating loans from rural and cooperative banks, or private lenders giving high interest rates to farmers for fertilizers, seeds, and pesticides. Local markets are controlled by powerful lobbies and intermediaries, further affecting farmers. This cycle needs to be broken.

    A major reason is that application forms for many public services in India are formatted to British colonial-era designs and defy logic in terms of meaningless information and bewildering processes. Forms and documentation need to be simplified. Today, a range of disruptive technologies can eradicate the scourge of corruption and make daily life easier. The smart use of information technologies, data analytics, and artificial intelligence can now benefit from 4G mobile network connectivity, which enjoys wide reach.

    Reboot the Power Distribution Sector
    The Government at both the Central and State levels has over the decades initiated major schemes to improve the financial and operational health of electricity distribution companies (Discoms). They have had multiple objectives, such as improving operations and technology, financial & structural reforms, and enabling electricity access to villages, rural households, and families below the poverty line. The latest and most ambitious scheme is Uday, launched in 2015 with multiple objectives to achieve debt restructuring, operational efficiency, and the adoption of smart technologies. However, the trajectory of results over the last three years have not met expectations. There is a real danger that a large number of discoms will again require financial oxygen: or as some experts say, an Uday 2 scheme. With a payment backlog of nearly Rs. 3,600 billion by discoms to electricity generators, another crisis is on the horizon.

    To address this recurring challenge, the government should legislate the Electricity (Amendment) Bill 2014 and proposed Electricity (Amendment) Act 2018. It should address delays of agriculture subsidy payments to discoms by State Governments by ensuring a mechanism of timely direct benefit transfers (DBT) to the consumers from the Finance Commission’s state share. It should focus on checking and reducing losses due to theft of power, thus increasing revenues. Finally, it should integrate information and operations technologies, and create a Distribution Centre of Excellence at both the central and state level to ensure the implementation of the best practices drawn from entities that have a track record of excellent, consistent financial and operational performance results.

    Investigate Bankruptcy and Non-Performing Assets
    The last four to five years have seen a galaxy of examples – airlines, jewelry, pharmaceuticals, steel, power, shipping, and sugars – that have collapsed due to non-performing assets and the inability to pay back loans for various reasons. NPAs from the power generation sector alone comprise around 5.9% of the banking sector’s total outstanding advances of Rs. 4.73 trillion, according to the Economic Survey 2016-17. There is a common thread. Public and institutional funds have been squandered, resulting in the financial loss and erosion of investor confidence and the slowing down of economic growth with banks unable to lend funds to stimulate growth.

    It is in the public interest to understand how and why this came about, and why billions in taxpayer funds were put to such poor use. There are many reasons: pure business failures due to unforeseen or disruptive events, poor corporate governance and risk management practices, industry specific events, the mismanagement and diversion of funds, commodity cycle reversals, the adverse impact of central and state policy changes, trade conflicts between nations, and economic grouping re-alignments. The equation becomes very complex if one had to identify the combination, proportion, and relative importance of such reasons. A white paper would be beneficial in highlighting the inadequacies and remedies needed in certain areas, such as the role of due diligence by lending institutions, banks, auditors, and credit rating agencies; policy and operational oversight by the Reserve Bank of India and the central government; corporate governance; the adverse impact of policy changes; and uncontrollable ‘black swan’ events for which specific remedies may not be available. Finally, there should be an objective of establishing early warning systems at institutional and corporate levels so that failures are not repeated, but instead lessons can be learned.

     

    The post India 2024: A clean India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    583824
    Why women candidates are more likely to run as independents http://stg.csep.org/blog/women-leaders-in-indian-political-parties-2/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=women-leaders-in-indian-political-parties-2 Thu, 09 May 2019 09:30:21 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=581596 In a democratic polity, political representation is an inherent aspect of political participation. In this view, whether or not women are able to exercise political participation depends, to a large extent, on the terms of their inclusion and the extent to which the rules of the game enable or allow for their representation. Reservation is an affirmative action, aimed at political inclusion and encouraging participation of women in governance. Across the world, countries have introduced reservation or quotas for women as a means to counter entrenched socio-political structures that upheld male domination of politics. Understanding the facilitators and barriers to […]

    The post Why women candidates are more likely to run as independents first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    In a democratic polity, political representation is an inherent aspect of political participation. In this view, whether or not women are able to exercise political participation depends, to a large extent, on the terms of their inclusion and the extent to which the rules of the game enable or allow for their representation. Reservation is an affirmative action, aimed at political inclusion and encouraging participation of women in governance. Across the world, countries have introduced reservation or quotas for women as a means to counter entrenched socio-political structures that upheld male domination of politics. Understanding the facilitators and barriers to women’s leadership and exercise of political opportunities is an important issue within the larger landscape of women’s participation in politics.

    One way to examine this issue is to analyse the number of women who are given tickets to contest elections and the significance of women leaders within political parties. Using Ravi & Sandhu (2014)’s paper as a motivation, this blog aims to summarise and analyse the magnitude of women contesting elections using data from the Election Commission of India (ECI).

    ECI data from the 16th Lok Sabha Elections in 2014 shows that of the 8,251[i] candidates who contested the elections, only 668 a mere 8.1% were women. Of these, the Indian National Congress (INC) gave out 59 tickets while the Bharatiya Janata Party extended 37 tickets. Significantly, the largest share of female candidates contested the polls on independent tickets.

    In the 16th Lok Sabha elections, 134 tickets were extended to female candidates by national parties a marginal improvement over the 110 tickets that were extended in the 2009 General Elections. This number rose marginally to 141[ii] in 2014. Clearly, political parties are fielding significantly lower number of female candidates than the benchmark of 33%.

    One of the key findings of Ravi & Sandhu (2014) is that a large number of women candidates run on an independent ticket, due to the lack of party support a trend that has continued since 1989. The authors further analyse this lack of party support by looking at data on the number of tickets national and state parties extended to female candidates as a percent of the total candidates fielded. In their analysis of data from 1989-2009, they show that between 1991 and 1996, there was a spike in the participation of both total independents and women independents, but while the total increased by 93%, women independents increased by 175%. 1998 saw a sharp dip in independent candidature after the ECI increased the security deposit of candidates from Rs. 500 to Rs. 10,000. However, between every general election, the growth in women independents has been larger than independents in general.

    [interactive id=580951]

    In general, even when political parties in India set internal benchmarks or quotas to include women, they end up flouting their own rules. This indicates that internal party structures remain unsupportive of women’s political participation. One of the key failings is the lack of a pipeline effect. The absence of a nurtured talent pool of women candidates is the central piece missing from this puzzle. In the upcoming 2019 Lok Sabha elections, political parties such as the All India Trinamool Congress (TMC) and the Biju Janata Dal (BJD) have released candidate lists with 33% women, a welcome step in the right direction.

    Going forward, Indian political parties must realise their critical role as gatekeepers in women’s political participation. Fundamental reforms at the party level will serve as a necessary and strategic compliment to the Women’s Reservation Bill. Even if the Bill is derailed further, it shouldn’t stop political parties from making internal structures more conducive to women entering politics. Political parties must lower entry barriers for women in public life. In doing so, they will create a robust pipeline of future women leaders for India.

    [i] https://eci.gov.in/files/file/2841-state-wise-candidate-data-summary/

    [ii] https://eci.gov.in/files/file/2841-state-wise-candidate-data-summary/

    The post Why women candidates are more likely to run as independents first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    581596
    What India’s 65 million ‘missing women’ mean for the state of its democracy http://stg.csep.org/blog/what-indias-65-million-missing-women-mean-for-the-state-of-its-democracy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=what-indias-65-million-missing-women-mean-for-the-state-of-its-democracy Thu, 25 Apr 2019 10:06:36 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=580034 As the largest democracy in the world, India has boasted a consistent record of free and fair elections. A democratic government derives its legitimacy and power to implement policy from the “consent of the governed”. But if a significant chunk of the population is “missing”, does it reflect the true consent of the people? Using Ravi and Kapoor’s 2013 paper[1] as motivation, this blog presents the concept of ‘missing women’ in Indian democracy. The persistence of gender inequality which is embodied in “missing women“, a concept developed by economist Amartya Sen (1990, 1992),[2] is a common occurrence in China and […]

    The post What India’s 65 million ‘missing women’ mean for the state of its democracy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    As the largest democracy in the world, India has boasted a consistent record of free and fair elections. A democratic government derives its legitimacy and power to implement policy from the “consent of the governed”. But if a significant chunk of the population is “missing”, does it reflect the true consent of the people? Using Ravi and Kapoor’s 2013 paper[1] as motivation, this blog presents the concept of ‘missing women’ in Indian democracy.

    The persistence of gender inequality which is embodied in “missing women“, a concept developed by economist Amartya Sen (1990, 1992),[2] is a common occurrence in China and India. When you extend the concept to women missing from the electorate, it begs the question: are policies truly representative of the will of the women of this country, or are they in fact artificially skewed against them? If women are grossly under-represented in the Indian electorate, can policies enacted based on election outcomes be representative of their policy preferences?

    65 million women around 20% of eligible female voters are missing from India’s electorate, raising a question on how well their concerns are represented in democracy.

    Using Sen’s methodology, Ravi and Kapoor first compute the sex ratio of the electorate (those registered to vote) across all states in India over five decades. Then they choose the state that performs the best in terms of gender ratio of the electorate Kerala as a reference point and compute the missing numbers of the female electors across India. Their results estimate that over 65 million women around 20% of eligible female voters are missing from India’s electorate. This number has increased fourfold from 15 million (13% of the electorate) to 65 million (20% of the electorate) in the last 50 years. While a part of this inflation maybe due to the overall increase in population, the trend suggests that this phenomenon has disproportionately worsened over time.

    Another alarming finding from the study highlights that not only has the adverse sex ratio not improved, it has worsened in large states like Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, and Maharashtra. This implies that fewer women voice their opinion through elections. Going further, the authors find that with the exception of very few states such as Andhra Pradesh and Kerala, the sex ratio of the electorate is far worse than the general sex ratio of the population. This implies that women who are eligible voters are actually not registered in electoral rolls and remain “missing from the voters lists”. The difference adds up to millions when translated from percentages to absolute numbers in states like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar, where the differences in the ratios are as high as 9.3% and 5.7%, respectively.

    Research has established that the identity of lawmakers (or political representatives) has a significant bearing on policy agenda and direction; that ‘increasing the political representation of a group increases its influence on policy.’[3] What emerges from this phenomenon of missing women in India’s elections is a question mark over the representativeness of our elected politicians. Since politicians respond to the preferences of the existing electorate, the danger is that electoral competition will ensure that they end up choosing policies in favour of their average voters who happen to be male.

    This is a fundamental ‘market failure’ of democracy in India and has far greater and deeper implications. Even when politicians are not biased against women, their policies might be.  This is one of the key reasons for the perpetuation of gender-biased practices and policies election after election, government after government. True political representation of women cannot be ensured unless preferences of women get significant attention. The adverse sex ratio of the Indian electorate makes it impossible for women’s welfare to feature in political agendas and policymaking.

    True political representation of women cannot be ensured unless preferences of women get significant attention. The adverse sex ratio of the Indian electorate makes it impossible for women’s welfare to feature in political agendas and policymaking.

    Ravi and Kapoor argue that in the Indian context, competitive electoral processes is likely to undo the impact of any women’s reservation policy. Though both men and women have equal rights to vote, even in reserved constituencies male voters will far outstrip women, compelling women political candidates to choose policies that favour men in order to win. In such a setting, how can the Women’s Reservation Bill address the problem of gender bias in India? The authors suggest that policymakers should target constituencies with the worst gender ratios to be reserved for women.[4] However, even so, the authors argue that the bill will have not have a great impact due to the nature of electoral competition highlighted earlier. With or without women’s reservation, our competitive electoral processes will do little to promote gender-responsive policies. The larger problem rests in correcting the sex ratio in the population at all age groups. This will require innovative policy interventions from the government, but to a much larger extent this requires the Indian society to value its women.

    [1] Kapoor, M., & Ravi, S. (2013). Women voters in Indian democracy: A silent revolution. Available at SSRN 2231026.

    [2] Sen, Amartya. “More than 100 million women are missing.” The New York Review of Books 37, no. 20 (1990): 61-66.

    Sen, Amartya. “Missing women.” BMJ: British Medical Journal304, no. 6827 (1992): 587.

    [3] Osborne, Martin J., and Al Slivinski. 1996. “A Model of Political Competition with Citizen-Candidates.” Quarterly Journal of Economics, 111(1): 65–96.; Besley, Timothy, and Stephen Coate. 1997. “An Economic Model of Representative Democracy.” Quarterly Journal of Economics, 112(1): 85–114.

    [4] See more at “Why so few women in politics? Evidence from India” Kapoor and Ravi (2014).

    The post What India’s 65 million ‘missing women’ mean for the state of its democracy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    580034
    The four “I”s undermining democracy http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-four-is-undermining-democracy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-four-is-undermining-democracy Mon, 22 Apr 2019 17:23:15 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=579298 It will be an important year for democracy around the world. In April and May, India heads to the polls in what will be the largest organized political activity in history. Israel, Indonesia, and Ukraine just held very contentious elections while Spain, Australia, Canada, Tunisia, Argentina, Sri Lanka, and the European Parliament are set for important votes later this year. Meanwhile, the 2020 U.S. presidential campaign season is already underway. These electoral contests come at a tough time for democracy, not just because of notable instances of resurgent authoritarianism and populism, but also disruption and corruption in places like France, […]

    The post The four “I”s undermining democracy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    It will be an important year for democracy around the world. In April and May, India heads to the polls in what will be the largest organized political activity in history. Israel, Indonesia, and Ukraine just held very contentious elections while Spain, Australia, Canada, Tunisia, Argentina, Sri Lanka, and the European Parliament are set for important votes later this year. Meanwhile, the 2020 U.S. presidential campaign season is already underway.

    These electoral contests come at a tough time for democracy, not just because of notable instances of resurgent authoritarianism and populism, but also disruption and corruption in places like France, Brazil, South Africa, and the Philippines. But it would be premature to conclude that democracy is in crisis. Pessimists often forget the tumult that democracy in the United States, France, and India experienced in the 1960s and 1970s. Most large-scale assessments of democracy suggest stagnation in recent years rather than decline: Today, over two-thirds of people living in democratic societies are outside the West and in many countries in Africa, Asia, and Latin America democracy is broadening and deepening. And public opinion about democracy remains strong in India, Africa, and Northern Europe, even as skepticism is growing in the United States, Middle East, Japan, and Australia.

    But it is true that democracy is facing some sharp challenges everywhere. Specifically, four of them the four “I”s identity, inequality, information, and interference.

    First, consider the role of identity in contemporary politics. Whether in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, Germany, India, Indonesia, or Myanmar, the deepening of identity in political organization and discourse is becoming more pronounced, whether among religious majorities, ethnic minorities, or regions such as Scotland or Catalonia. This is occurring despite prior expectations that globalization would lead to great cosmopolitanism and the dilution of strong collective identities. In the United States, Europe, or Australia the question of identity is largely grounded in debates about immigration. In India or other post-colonial states such as Indonesia, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, or Kenya identity politics have deeper roots, and relate to the distribution of power among various sub-national groups. Nonetheless, a shared challenge that all democracies will have to face is how to negotiate political pluralism in a globalized world.

    A shared challenge that all democracies will have to face is how to negotiate political pluralism in a globalized world.

    A second shared challenge relates to inequality, especially real and perceived inequality of opportunity. Despite consistent economic growth in many parts of the world and improvements in human development indicators among most developing economies, the perception of growing inequality has tested the functioning of democracy. Populist nationalism is consequently interspersed with populist economic policies: Consider the interspersing of white nationalism in the United States with stagnant wages among blue collar workers. Economic malaise among youth or the aspirational middle class can also be exploited by populists. Finding ways to improve the semblance of equality of opportunity will be a common challenge among both developed and developing democracies, particularly with the advent of new technologies that could contribute to productivity increases and capital gains. These factors risk disproportionately benefiting wealthier investors at the expense of employment opportunities for the poor and middle class.

    The third shared challenge is the new information environment. Although the availability of information via digital telecommunications had been expected to bolster democracy, it has also paradoxically resulted in the undermining of democratic functioning. This appears to be the result of a number of factors, including online political echo chambers, misinformation (“fake news”), and increased political theater. Digital democracy has recreated elements of direct democracy, undermining the mechanisms for deliberation and compromise that are necessary for representative democracy to function. In India, for example, online propaganda has become a major battleground for democratic politics, but as in other countries, it risks compromising informed decisionmaking, one of the essential criteria of a functioning democracy.

    Finally, while less uniform, all democracies remain vulnerable to interference by external actors. This has become a particularly contentious issue in the United States and Europe. While a country like India has so far been relatively immune to external interference in its political processes thanks to an innovative Electoral Commission and tight controls on foreign involvement in academia and the media this phenomenon has started to be well documented in other more vulnerable countries, often through the use of economic leverage. In Sri Lanka, for example, a Chinese port construction firm made large payments towards the re-election campaign of President Mahinda Rajapaksa (who narrowly lost in 2015). Rajapaksa had earlier approved onerous Chinese lending terms for an unprofitable but strategically located port, and China offered to waive the resulting debt in exchange for equity in the project. Similar interference has been documented in other democratic systems, while various other forms of direct political interference have become hotly debated, whether in Washington, Paris, or Canberra.

    There are no easy solutions to these collective challenges. While identity politics can be managed in various ways it will require leadership and compelling narratives. But it cannot be entirely ignored, as cosmopolitan elites have been wont to do. Populist measures to address inequality tax hikes for the wealthy, stimulus packages, and job guarantees may provide seductively easy solutions that appeal to voters. But as the extreme example of Venezuela reminds us, such steps can be taken too far. Meanwhile, addressing misinformation opens up the Pandora’s box of censorship, which is difficult given various countries’ laws and norms concerning freedom of expression. And while electoral systems can be hardened against foreign interference, countermeasures can also result in subjective, arbitrary, or seemingly discriminatory decisions.

    For now, the democratic community could do more to cast a wider net and learn from each other’s experiences. In the near future, democracy won’t be the same. But all democratic polities, if they are to evolve, will have little choice but to learn and adopt best practices from each other.

    The post The four “I”s undermining democracy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    579298
    Teenage girls in India: Aspirations and reality http://stg.csep.org/blog/teenage-girls-in-india-aspirations-and-reality/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=teenage-girls-in-india-aspirations-and-reality Wed, 03 Apr 2019 11:47:29 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=575146 There are 80 million teenage girls in India. A clear understanding of their current realities and their aspirations is essential in order to design effective policies for them. However, a key impediment for data-driven policy design, in order to address the needs of teenage girls in India, is the absence of any representative survey. In order to address this gap, Naandi Foundation carried out the TAG (Teen Age Girls) Survey under the aegis of Project Nanhi Kali. Project Nanhi Kali supports girl children from under privileged families to complete ten years of basic schooling with dignity and safety.  The TAG Report 2018 presents data from […]

    The post Teenage girls in India: Aspirations and reality first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>

    There are 80 million teenage girls in India. A clear understanding of their current realities and their aspirations is essential in order to design effective policies for them. However, a key impediment for data-driven policy design, in order to address the needs of teenage girls in India, is the absence of any representative survey. In order to address this gap, Naandi Foundation carried out the TAG (Teen Age Girls) Survey under the aegis of Project Nanhi Kali. Project Nanhi Kali supports girl children from under privileged families to complete ten years of basic schooling with dignity and safety. 

    The TAG Report 2018 presents data from the TAG Survey on a number of aspects in the lives of teenage girls in India today. The survey not only captures baseline statistics on education and health but also, and uniquely so, aspirations of teenage girls. Survey respondents reported their aspirations on education, career, marriage, their ready access or the lack thereof to menstrual hygiene among other indicators that gauge their perceptions on safety and the idea of gender equality. Such data can help tweak program and policy design and, hence, aid in better-tailored service delivery.

    Rohini Mukherjee, Chief Policy Officer at Naandi Foundation, presented some of the key findings of the TAG survey at a panel discussion held at Brookings India. Differences by geography and economic status were explored and are briefly presented under:  

    1. 80.6% of the sample teenage girls are in school. However, if we further break the data by age we find that the enrolment ratios among old girls are not as encouraging as the group average.

    2. 95.8% of the surveyed girls were unmarried and, encouragingly, 73.3% of them aspired for marriage after the age of 21.

    3. A similar percentage, 70%, of girls report desire to pursue higher education. The goal of studying up to graduation emerges as a key variable affecting aspirations related to age at the time of marriage. An urban-rural split is clear with about 80% urban girls wishing to pursue higher education versus just about two-thirds of girls reporting a similar desire in rural areas.

    4. About 74% of the surveyed girls wished to work after studies. A ten percentage point difference by area type rural or urban comes up as an area of possible policy intervention.    

    5. An overwhelming percentage of young girls reported their aspiration to learn English. At a cursory level since English is a career enabling language, the aspirations to learn English can be understood to be a good proxy to gauge the willingness of girls to participate in the labour force.

    6. Similarly, a high percentage of the surveyed girls reported a desire to learn how to operate a computer. Again, digital skillsets are strong career enablers and indicate a desire to being self-sufficient among young teenage girls.

    7. About half the surveyed girls had healthy levels of haemoglobin while over 40% of girls have mild anaemia. Further, the non-anaemic status of a girl did not vary dramatically by wealth quintiles.

    8. More than half of the surveyed girls were found to be underweight. While 46.3% who had normal weight were similarly distributed across wealth quintiles.

    9. The report finds 54.4% of girls had access to menstrual hygienic management tools. However, in terms of wealth quintiles, we see massive variation. While 71.6% of the surveyed girls in the upper wealth quintile report access to MHM tools only 42.6% of girls in the lower wealth quintile report similar access. When inquired about reasons for not using MHM tools, about three-fifths of the surveyed girls reported that they couldn’t afford them and since the government does not provide them, they choose to stick to traditional methods.

     

     

    Reasons for not using hygienic materials during periods

    India (%)

     Cannot afford them/govt. not provided

    59.2

     Don’t know how to get them/not   available

    9.3

     Don’t know what sanitary napkins are

    7.2

     Parents/customs do not allow

    2.2

     Like using cloth/cloth pads

    19

     Others

    3.1

    10. Ten soft skills such as the ability to fill up forms, go to the police station, withdraw money from ATM’s among others were identified. Less than 30% of the girls reported the ability to send or receive emails, use social media and make documents on a computer. However, over 90% of the girls stated the ability to make and receive calls. Seeing how these skills are mostly in the domain of essential life skills in a contemporary context, perhaps, focus on building them should be an area of focused interest.

    The research team at Brookings India presented preliminary analysis on aspirations around one’s age of marriage. Key findings included a strong positive correlation between the historical age of marriage and current aspirations. This highlights the demonstration effect of existing norms that play a critical role in the development of personal preferences. In other words, we observe clear internalising of cultural norms. A critical factor that impacts these aspirations is the level of education of parents. Using the TAG survey, we found that girls with mothers who have completed their higher education aspire to get married at the age of 25.28 years versus a much younger aspired age of marriage of 21.67 years for girls with uneducated mothers.

    It is clear that aspirations are embedded in social and cultural realities. Analysis of TAG data shows that girls belonging to the highest wealth quintile aspire to get married by the age of 23.82 years versus 21.07 years of age for girls in the lowest wealth quintile. Further, girls from the Hindu and Muslim communities aspire, on average, to be married by the approximate age of 22 years while the surveyed Christian girls stated an aspired age of over 24 years. Other variables of interest are access to MHM tools, mobile phones, and toilets. In all these cases, aspired age of marriage went up with greater access.

    Dr. Farzana Afridi, ISI, who was a discussant at the event shared findings around her work on economic empowerment of women. Given how the education and working status of mothers have a strong demonstration effect on the aspirations of young girls this is an area of critical interest. Dr. Afridi highlighted that by the year 2011, only 20% of rural married women, between the age of 15-60 years, were a part of the labour force. This rate is a dismal 30% lower than unmarried women. While the workforce participation for unmarried urban women has improved by 11 percentage points over the period 1999-2011, that of married women has stayed stagnant over the past three decades. These findings bring out stark gender contrast when compared to men who have high and near constant participation rate of about 95%. In fact, if anything, married men have a higher rate of workforce participation.

    Factors like lack of asset ownership, low investment in human capital, absence of strong social networks, and gendered division of time can be intuitively identified as key structural barriers to workforce participation for married women. She highlighted that one of the core supply-side constraint’s, besides cultural norms, is the absence of care services. In fact, the marked move towards nuclear families has further exasperated opportunities for married women. Demand-side issues include the lack of safe access to place of work, lack of low-skill jobs that suit the requirements of not highly educated women, flexible working hours and, of course, the persistent wage gap. She concluded by highlighting the need for evidence on the relative effectiveness of interventions and policies that address the multidimensionality of this issue.

    Shubha Chakravarty, Senior Economist Social Protection and Labour Practice in South Asia at World Bank, was the second discussant at this panel. She highlighted that if the parents believe that it’s their duty to marry off their daughters then the sheer imperative of finding a good match would result in limitations in access to jobs. Hence, the structure of the marriage market in India results in many perverse outcomes in the area of economic empowerment of married women. Understanding these baseline structural barriers using rich methodologies to design future interventions should hence be a policy priority.

    The post Teenage girls in India: Aspirations and reality first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    575146
    Studying international relations in India http://stg.csep.org/blog/studying-international-relations-in-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=studying-international-relations-in-india Mon, 11 Feb 2019 08:42:34 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=563181 Thank you for asking me to the All India International and Area Studies Convention 2019. You have chosen an ambitious topic: “Ascending India: Reflections on Global and Regional Dimensions” and have a packed agenda in the next three days. I must confess to being a bit surprised at being asked to speak to this convention, and to be given the honour of a keynote address. The last time I was asked to the convention in 2013, I spoke in some detail about what I thought was wrong with IR studies in India. I spoke about the disconnect between theory and […]

    The post Studying international relations in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Thank you for asking me to the All India International and Area Studies Convention 2019. You have chosen an ambitious topic: “Ascending India: Reflections on Global and Regional Dimensions” and have a packed agenda in the next three days.

    I must confess to being a bit surprised at being asked to speak to this convention, and to be given the honour of a keynote address. The last time I was asked to the convention in 2013, I spoke in some detail about what I thought was wrong with IR studies in India. I spoke about the disconnect between theory and practice, about the apparent irrelevance and over-reliance on methodology and theory to the exclusion of fine work that could be done in the archives, and about what I saw as the absence of quality in Indian IR studies. I will not repeat what I said then as it lives forever on the web and you can google it if you are interested. But you can see why I am surprised to be asked back.

    When I spoke then in 2013 it was as a practitioner, as someone who was involved in actual diplomacy and international relations and could therefore be expected to be impatient with theory and would look for practical utility. Today I am on the other side, as I try to teach a course on geopolitics in a university and write and lecture, older but not necessarily wiser, closer and closer to my anecdotage.

    So what do I think today about IR studies? What have I learnt? Have I changed my opinion? Not fundamentally.  My views have evolved, as I have, in three important respects: I think I have a better understanding of the constraints on IR studies in India; I now think the problem is with how we teach IR; and, I am much more hopeful of IR studies on India than ever before. Let me explain.

    I now have a better appreciation of the constraints under which IR studies operate in India. One of the most obvious is the lack of proper archiving of contemporary Indian primary sources which, by the nature of our subject, are primarily with and from government. And the more interesting, or controversial the issue, the less likely government is to transfer its papers to the archives. But that situation changed in fits and starts in this century and there are treasures to be discovered in the National Archives today, and not just in the Nehru Memorial Museum and Library. Besides, as recent scholars have shown, there are treasures to be mined in state archives, in private papers, and in Russian and other archives abroad, all relevant to the study of India’s international relations. One recent example was the use of the Assam state government archives by a French scholar to write on development on both sides of the Arunachal Pradesh border in the fifties and early sixties.

    Secondly, I still believe that there is a lack of rigour and discipline in our IR studies that results in a situation where, with a few exceptions, the best work on India and the subcontinent is done by scholars, many of them Indians, outside our institutions. Let me give you a practical example of why I say so. In the last few years, I have received questionnaires from PhD scholars researching one or other aspect of recent Indian foreign policy. It is obvious from the questions that they have been drafted without reading through the available literature, and that they are not part of a thought out or academically rigorous scheme or plan. Instead, they are more in the nature of fishing expeditions, based on a reading of the newspapers, seeking opinions rather than data or facts, and claiming theoretical or methodological merit by using the latest fashionable jargon in IR studies elsewhere. I find this sad because, frankly, it reflects primarily on the quality of the guidance that they are getting, not on the students themselves, who are bright, motivated and first rate.

    There are honourable exceptions, as I said. But they are few and far between, and that is why conventions such as this are so necessary and important. This is a chance for us to introspect and to see how we can improve the quality of our understanding and teaching of our subject.

    Thirdly, that situation may be changing. For some years before and after independence, there was a body of Indian scholarship, much of it centred in the School for International Studies that has now become a part of JNU which contributed to global IR scholarship and that could hold its head up in the academic world. Today again, the work of younger Indian IR scholars is what we turn to if we wish to understand Indian foreign policy and the international relations of India and the subcontinent. We now have a new generation of younger scholars whose PhDs on India and the subcontinent are both methodologically sound and pioneering. Most of them are products of today’s globalised world, and not many trained in Indian institutions, but they have brought their scholarship home and they could represent the beginning of a new wave of Indian IR.

    Our goal should be to build Indian IR studies to a level where it measures up to international standards in the discipline. This is the minimum, the first step. If we are to study international relations we must be able to stand the quality test and be world class. This is essential if we are to achieve our real purpose, to devise the concepts and scholarship necessary for an understanding of India’s unique place and role in the world. In other words, ultimately to devise an Indian school of IR studies.

    Our goal should be to build Indian IR studies to a level where it measures up to international standards in the discipline.

    I find, now that I am teaching and traveling around universities, that my Indian students know a great deal about abstract IR theory, but do not see how it is connected to the life and the headlines around them. It is the reverse when I go to universities abroad. I think we forget when we teach that IR theory, like all theory in the liberal arts, is the product of a very specific, European or American, time and place, and an intellectual expression of a certain economic and political dominance. In the real world that we study, that situation of European or North American hegemony is rapidly changing. If IR theory is to be relevant to us in India, it will need to adapt and change too.

    Today we can see that the world which created IR theory as we know it now is rapidly fading. The center of gravity of the world economy and politics is returning to Asia. And that why it is time for us to think afresh and for ourselves again about India and its place in the world. Relevance is critical. What scholars produce in IR studies must be relevant to reality and practice. We are not a fundamental science like theoretical physics. We are not studying the fundamental laws of the universe but how people and their creations behave in international society, which itself is a man-made construct. IR is a social science and its best practitioners, from EH Carr to Robert Jervis to Mearsheimer and Walt all speak to the policy dilemmas and practice of states, leaders and nations of their day.

    One other point. Language is not just a tool but the tool. It not only affects your ability to communicate your ideas, and your clarity, but affects the way you think. Many of us seem to think that to be regarded as intelligent we should also be unintelligible. The use of abstract nouns leaves us wondering what is meant.

    Language is not just a tool but the tool. It not only affects your ability to communicate your ideas, and your clarity, but affects the way you think. Many of us seem to think that to be regarded as intelligent we should also be unintelligible. The use of abstract nouns leaves us wondering what is meant.

    If we are going to use terms like “Ascending India” then we should first have the means to think about them. Understand that implicit in terms like “Ascending India” are ideas of hierarchy and perception, both of which are hardly defined or measurable by agreed metrics or standard. This, in the popular mind, reduces IR to some macho contest between states, nations or leaders of who can throw a shot or missile furthest or can do the most damage to our planet and people.

    India is and has been an important player on the world stage with its own interests and will continue to be so. And yet, the purpose of our participation in the international community is not to see how many people we can outdo or do down. It is to uplift our own people, to improve their condition from the abject state that we were left in after two centuries of colonialism. That is not achieved at someone else expense. Instead, it requires us to work with others in international society to achieve and enabling environment for India’s transformation. To my mind Indian IR studies have a significant contribution to make to that goal.

    I have taken a great deal of your time telling you what you probably already know. Thank you for your patience.

    With these few words, let me wish the convention and all those participating in it success in taking Indian IR studies another step forward.

    The post Studying international relations in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    563181
    Oil and gas in an era of transition: The Indian story https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HgwqiIrZoYU&utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=oil-and-gas-in-an-era-of-transition-the-indian-story Fri, 11 Jan 2019 16:24:51 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=on-the-record&p=558240 558240 Maritime connectivity and security in the Indo-Pacific http://stg.csep.org/blog/maritime-connectivity-and-security-in-the-indo-pacific/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=maritime-connectivity-and-security-in-the-indo-pacific Wed, 09 Jan 2019 05:58:38 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=opinion&p=556557 Thank you for the kind invitation to address this august gathering in Bhubaneshwar today, and my Congratulations to Ambassador Lalit Mansingh and his colleagues at the Kalinga International Foundation on this wonderful new initiative. There are perhaps few better places than Odisha to discuss India’s growing role in world affairs. After all this was the historical site of the Mauryan Emperor Ashoka’s war against the Kalingas. It was after that conflict that Ashoka adopted his dhamma-his faith-grounded in Buddhism. Edicts to spread his philosophy were commissioned and displayed as far as today’s Afghanistan and Nepal and as far South as […]

    The post Maritime connectivity and security in the Indo-Pacific first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Thank you for the kind invitation to address this august gathering in Bhubaneshwar today, and my Congratulations to Ambassador Lalit Mansingh and his colleagues at the Kalinga International Foundation on this wonderful new initiative.

    There are perhaps few better places than Odisha to discuss India’s growing role in world affairs. After all this was the historical site of the Mauryan Emperor Ashoka’s war against the Kalingas. It was after that conflict that Ashoka adopted his dhamma-his faith-grounded in Buddhism. Edicts to spread his philosophy were commissioned and displayed as far as today’s Afghanistan and Nepal and as far South as Karnataka, and they appeared in different languages including Greek and Aramaic. Contrary to popular myth, these were not declarations of Pacifism. Rather, Ashoka’s edicts called for just and limited warfare, but they also elaborated upon norms regarding how to manage conflict. He made startling claims not just about sending missionaries but about links across the Hellenistic world, as far as today’s Greece and Libya. Indeed, Ashoka’s efforts may represent the first recorded attempt in history to establishing a liberal international order. In many ways India’s recorded engagements with the world can be traced to this region.

    Odisha is also proof that economics and security have always been deeply intertwined in Asia and Indian Ocean Region. European traders were initially drawn to India between the 15th and the 18th centuries by textile exports to finance the spice trade from South East Asia. The likes of Portugal and England established trading outposts- factories- along the East Coast of India. The first English outpost was in Masulipatnam in Andhra Pradesh, but their presence expanded to include such places as Pipili and Hariharpur in today’s Odisha not very far from Bhubaneshwar. The English and other Europeans tapped into existing networks established by Indian traders with South East Asia. The first East India Company vessel that arrived in Aceh found Bengali, Gujarati and Malabari traders already present. Pre- Existing trade networks already extended across a sizeable Indo- Pacific region, from Formosa to Vietnam, from Siam to Sumatra, from Malacca to the Malabar and from Gujarat to Hormuz.

    European traders were initially drawn to India between the 15th and the 18th centuries by textile exports to finance the spice trade from South East Asia.

    Today we are rediscovering this natural commercial and political links and the Indian ocean has grown in relative importance. It is now a major conduit for sea borne International trade- which has seen a four-fold increase since 1970- between the largest centres of economic activity in the Pacific and both sides of the Atlantic Ocean. Energy flows are particularly important, with about 40 percent of world oil passing through strategic checkpoints in and out of the Indian Ocean. The Ocean is also a valuable source of natural resources, accounting for 15% of the World’s fishing and significant mineral resources. This region is also important in its own right, home to two billion people in some of the fastest growing parts of the World: Southeast and South Asia, East and South Africa and West Asia.

    However, there are plenty of challenges, including natural and humanitarian disasters. Two of the most devastating disasters in recent decades were in the Indian Ocean: the 2004 Indian Ocean Tsunami, which killed 228,000 people and Cyclone Nargis in Myanmar which killed about 138,000. Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) operations have been required around the region, from Yemen to Sri Lanka and the Maldives to Bangladesh. Piracy in the Indian Ocean has been among the many other threats and led to about US $6 billion in annual losses to the shipping industry between 2010 and 2012. And there are growing concerns about security competition increasing exponentially, with the greater activity of China’s People’s Liberation Army- Navy (PLA-N) and its investment in potentially ‘dual use ‘port infrastructure- infrastructure that can be used for both civilian and military purposes in- such places as Djibouti, Gwadar, Hambantota, Kyaukpyu and the Maldives.

    India has consequently started to pay greater attention to the Indian Ocean. In decades past, there were famously attempts at creating a zone of peace, while the 1980s saw a considerable amount of Indian interventionism and gunboat Diplomacy in the region, including in Sri Lanka and the Maldives. But Indian efforts at regional leadership and engagement have received an added impetus over the past decade, in response to some of these new developments. The clearest articulation of India’s Indian Ocean policy was, perhaps, made by Prime Minister Modi in a speech in Mauritius in 2015. Explicitly and implicitly, he outlines a number of objectives, including securing the Indian Ocean against both non-state actors and growing naval competition, improving HADR responses, ensuring the equitable harnessing of natural resources, and taking fuller advantage of the economic opportunities on offer.

    Consequently, we have seen India assume a larger role as a security provider in the Indian Ocean region. These include, efforts at building capacity, improving interoperability and exchanging information with a number of security partners, not least the USA, Japan and Australia, but also several countries in South East and South Asia, the Gulf and Africa. With the more capable navies of the region, India’s co – operation on Anti-Submarine Warfare (ASW) and maritime domain awareness (MDA) have increased in recent years. India has entered into or operationalised logistics agreements with the USA, France, Singapore giving its navy greater reach. It provides equipment and technical support to a number of armed forces, including coast guard vessels to Mauritius, aircraft to Seychelles, and assistance to Myanmar. It conducts joint patrols and has navy to navy contacts with Indonesia and Thailand. India trains pilots of Sukhoi aircraft and Kilo class submariners from Vietnam. It has bilateral MDA arrangements with Sri Lanka and the Maldives that have persisted despite political differences. And, it has entered into a host of white shipping arrangements, allowing India to better monitor military activity and illicit shipping.

    The Indian Navy’s operational tempo has also increased. This extends to disaster reliefs following cyclones in Sri Lanka, Bangladesh and Myanmar, a water crisis in the Maldives and a civil conflict in Yemen. The Navy’s presence in South East Asia and the Western Pacific has also grown: in 2017, an Indian Naval vessel was East of Malacca Strait for over half of the year. The MILAN naval exercise is an Indian-hosted multilateral effort to build confidence and cooperation in the region. For many years, India has been engaging in counter piracy and counter-smuggling operations in the Gulf of Aden and the Western Indian Ocean. Year-round deployments in several zones are now a reality and the acquisition of maritime surveillance aircraft has enhanced India’s reconnaissance capabilities across the Indian Ocean while bringing down operational costs.

    Of course, much more needs to be done. India’s resources are still limited, and the naval budget in particular requires revisiting, given the relative importance of the maritime domain. Another area of urgent attention concerns maritime connectivity and infrastructure, including increased port capacity and restrictive cabotage policies. Despite recent growth, all of India’s ports still move only about one third the number of containers in Singapore. But, despite these limitations, which are being addressed, efforts are being underway for India to play a bigger role in the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Oceans from a political, economic and security perspective.

    India’s resources are still limited, and the naval budget in particular requires revisiting, given the relative importance of the maritime domain.

    The history of Odisha has a cautionary tale for us. As long as the Indian Ocean remained an open and competitive space, India was relatively secure. To punish the Portuguese for piracy, the Mughals would simply retaliate by limiting their activity on land, thus benefiting their competitors: the French, English, the Dutch and the Danes. But, as soon as England managed to establish an effective monopoly of maritime trade in the Indian Ocean following the Carnatic Wars with the French, it was able to translate its predominance to the control of the land. In just a few decades from the 1750s, British presence in India went from a few small garrisons to the direct governance and administrative control of Bengal, Bihar and several other regions. If there is a lesson to be drawn from history, it is that India today cannot afford to be complacent about the growing maritime cooperation in the Indian Ocean. Recognising the importance of the Indo- Pacific by expanding strategic horizons, prioritising the maritime sphere and playing a role in the balance of power is therefore necessary. This will require further investments in the Indian Ocean, improving connectivity and economic inter linkages, and deepening security partnerships with a variety of actors who share similar concerns.

    The post Maritime connectivity and security in the Indo-Pacific first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    556557
    “Heavy debts alone are not driving farmers to suicide” https://theprint.in/opinion/heavy-debts-alone-are-not-driving-farmers-to-suicide/168104/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=heavy-debts-alone-are-not-driving-farmers-to-suicide Mon, 24 Dec 2018 07:50:49 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=article&p=568923 568923 Around the halls: Brookings experts on what to watch at the COP 24 climate summit http://stg.csep.org/blog/around-the-halls-brookings-experts-on-what-to-watch-at-the-cop-24-climate-summit/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=around-the-halls-brookings-experts-on-what-to-watch-at-the-cop-24-climate-summit Thu, 29 Nov 2018 15:40:25 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=550123 The 24th Session of the Conference of the Parties (COP 24) to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) begins Monday, December 3, in Katowice, Poland. Normally the host plays a big leadership role. This is the third time Poland has physically hosted the COP more than any other country, except Germany (which hosts the climate change secretariat and pays an outsized share of the cost). Poland itself hasn’t been a big climate leader, Europe is distracted by Brexit and other dangers, the United States is planning to leave the Paris Agreement, and China and India are wary of too much exposure. Who […]

    The post Around the halls: Brookings experts on what to watch at the COP 24 climate summit first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    COP 24 The 24th Session of the Conference of the Parties (COP 24) to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) begins Monday, December 3, in Katowice, Poland. Normally the host plays a big leadership role. This is the third time Poland has physically hosted the COP more than any other country, except Germany (which hosts the climate change secretariat and pays an outsized share of the cost). Poland itself hasn’t been a big climate leader, Europe is distracted by Brexit and other dangers, the United States is planning to leave the Paris Agreement, and China and India are wary of too much exposure.

    Who will lead international efforts to combat climate change, and what should we expect at this year’s COP? Climate experts from across Brookings explain the key issues.


    Todd SternTodd Stern (@tsterndc), Senior Fellow in the Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate: The 2015 Paris Agreement was a landmark, the first universal and operational accord to guide the international response to climate change. The central challenge of the annual Conference of the Parties this year, taking place December 3 to 14 in Poland, is to complete the so-called “rulebook” of guidelines, procedures and rules needed to turn the Paris Agreement into a working regime, and to do this in a manner faithful to the delicate compromises that made Paris possible. The United States, of course, has been unable to play its usual leading role this year, but this is a handicap that can be overcome.

    An international agreement can’t contain climate change by itself. The clean energy transformation already underway needs to accelerate markedly in speed and scale, and that in turn will demand a step change in resolve among leaders and citizens around the world. But a successful, working Paris regime can help drive that change, strengthening norms and expectations, and holding countries’ feet to the fire through mechanisms like regular reporting and review of country efforts, five-year cycles to ramp up country action, and additional five-year cycles to take stock of global progress toward the Paris temperature and emission goals.

    A number of issues are on the table, relating to mitigation, reporting and review, finance, the global stock take, and markets, among other things. The most controversial issues tend to revolve around 1) how to manage the principle of differentiation among countries at different stages of development, without re-creating the old “firewall” structure between developed and developing countries, and 2) financial assistance. At this point, key country players pretty well know what the plausible “landing zones” for these issues are. If they keep their eyes on the prize, COP 24 can succeed.

    David Victor, Co-Chair, Energy Security and Climate InitiativeDavid G. Victor, Co-Chair of the Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate: Most observers are focusing on whether diplomats can sew up the final details on the “Paris Agreement Work Programme” also called the “rulebook.” When the Paris Agreement was finished to much fanfare back in 2015, many of the key details needed to put Paris into operation were left unfinished. Preparatory agreements in Bangkok produced a draft rulebook, of sorts, but disagreements are many and the text is sprawling. This year, in theory, is the deadline for ironing all that out.

    Rulebooks are important, but it is easy to over-state their relevance because the Paris process is, by design, decentralized it relies on countries and regions to take the lead with pledges of action and commitments to take the climate problem seriously. I’m looking to see whether serious leaders emerge in Poland that is, countries that demonstrate, through their own actions, that they are dealing with climate change and that their actions are creating norms for others to follow. Leadership is particularly important when it comes to the rulebook because I doubt that nearly 200 countries will reach useful consensus on all the elements of the rulebook. Some of the topics, like the content of national pledges and the mechanisms for reviewing those pledges which are the backbone to the decentralized process of governance agreed in Paris are just too controversial. Leaders need to show best practices and models.

    Victor: “Rulebooks are important, but it is easy to over-state their relevance.”

    Samantha Gross, Fellow, Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate, The Brookings InstitutionSamantha Gross (@samanthaenergy), Fellow in the Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate: The key goal at COP 24 is to complete the rulebook to implement the Paris Agreement. But this effort is taking place in a challenging environment. A number of important countries are looking inward right now, including the United Kingdom as it negotiates the Brexit process, and Brazil and Mexico as they inaugurate new, disruptive leaders. Other governments are turning away from their Paris Agreement pledges the United States is the extreme case, but Australia is not far behind. Multilateralism and international cooperation are a tough sell in a global environment where anti-establishment sentiment seems to be gaining ground. I also share others’ concern that the developed vs. developing country divisions will re-emerge in Katowice.

    Nonetheless, I find hope in action. As negotiators struggle to come to agreement on thorny issues like transparency, review, and finance, important technologies like wind, solar, and power storage continue to improve and drop in price. China’s clean energy investment hit a new high of $132 billion last year, according to Bloomberg New Energy Finance. Electric vehicle sales in the United States are up 35 percent over last year and electric vehicle sales in China are three times those in the United States. I’m more concerned with countries establishing supportive policy environments for energy transition within their borders and in the continued march of technological progress than in achieving a perfect agreement in Katowice. Ideally, best practices can emerge from forward-looking countries to be shared as the Paris process advances.

    Sahil Ali in Brookings IndiaSahil Ali, Associate Fellow in Brooking India; and Rahul Tongia (@drtongia), Fellow in Brookings India: If the tensions that prevailed at the Bangkok Climate Change Conference this year are anything to go by, we must be prepared for stickier disagreements over the details at Katowice. Whilst the former Annex 1 bloc, led by the EU, will stress on the rigor of the rulebook, developing nations may bring up “equity” and differentiated priorities and capabilities more strongly. America’s absence at brokering consensus gives the latter the moral upper hand.

    Rahul Tongia, Fellow, Brookings IndiaAs with all durable partnerships, it’s about commitment and compromise. A successful agreement will necessarily have to be one that upholds the spirit and integrity of the Paris Agreement. How much of the IPCC 1.5°C report influences the negotiating outcomes will be interesting to watch!

    As for India, it will resist capping absolute future emissions but emphasize its contribution and ambition, and demand more flexibility and support within the terms. For transparency, it will be well-served to clarify 1) the mitigating role of sinks in its nationally determined contributions and 2) the switchover from non-commercial biomass (highly polluting but carbon neutral) in various (primarily) rural applications to modern (emitting) fuels as necessary to its development strategy. In light of the stringent review and transparency system for the global order, much homework needs to be done to strengthen accounting, verification, and reporting of activity-wise greenhouse gases emissions domestically.

    While India has chiefly focused on decarbonizing its electricity with cheap renewable energy, deep decarbonization will need to go far beyond this low hanging fruit, necessitating structural and operational revamps in its energy ecosystem. Of course, this is true for all countries to varying extents, which is where viable and meaningful consensus on effort-sharing will have to be reached.[more-blog-posts]

    Nathan HultmanNathan Hultman (@natehultman), Nonresident Senior Fellow in the Global Economy and Development program: The upcoming U.N. climate conference provides an opportunity to advance global action on climate change in two important ways.

    The first opportunity and formal driver for the meeting is to implement a major element of the landmark 2015 Paris Agreement. The Paris Agreement itself was an innovation in how the world organizes around climate, rooted firmly in the ability of individual countries to set forth their own strategies for addressing climate change. Key to this strategy was the process of transparency and reporting and the resulting course corrections that such activities can facilitate through the levers of domestic and international politics. The key element for this year’s conference is agreeing on the “rulebook” for such transparency. While this discussion will be more technical than visionary, it will undergird an essential dimension of the Paris process, similar to how accounting standards are important for the smooth functioning of the global financial system.

    The second opportunity is broader: This conference is really the opening bell for a 2-year period of both top-down and bottom-up climate policy actions that will be critical for raising global climate ambition, with the end goal of realizing major new increases in climate commitments in 2020. After the success of the Paris Agreement and the subsequent challenges posed by reactions in key countries’ national politics, the world community is facing a moment of significant decision. In just the recent two months, global attention to the tight timeline for addressing climate change has been heightened via several major scientific reports and significant climate impacts such as the California fires. At the same time, a groundswell of bottom-up climate actions happening around the world notably in the United States, and bolstered by the recent election combined with continued dramatic decreases in clean energy costs are strong indicators of how to solve this problem. This conference is the beginning of that sprint to 2020, and encouraging all cities, states, businesses, countries, and other actors to set their sights on more rapid and thoroughgoing economic transformations.

    Timmons RobertsTimmons Roberts (@timmonsroberts), Nonresident Senior Fellow in the Global Economy and Development program: One key issue at COP 24 in Katowice is the finalization of the “rulebook,” created to clarify what countries must do to be in compliance with the Paris Agreement. Since Paris was essentially a voluntary pact where nations pledged what they thought would be possible in their “Nationally Determined Contributions,” the only real binding part was the need to report what each has actually done to fulfill those pledges. Therefore, a lot of attention will be paid to issues of transparency in reporting of climate actions by nations. This means both what a country does at home and what they do to help countries in the developing world.

    At home, rules have to be agreed upon about how much detail different groups of countries need to report on their actions to reduce emissions of greenhouse gases, and on their efforts to adapt to the impacts of climate change. But also and crucially, there are many details to be agreed upon about how countries report the amounts and types of financial support they provide in grants, loans and other ways they’ve “mobilized” private actions in developing countries.

    The politics on each of these areas of reporting are remarkably complex, and thorny. Watch for the re-emergence of old divisions between developing countries wanting clarity on what support is forthcoming so they can plan ahead, and developed nations being reticent to provide that information. Transparency on climate action and finance is fundamental for the Paris Agreement to work, and civil society will play a key role in pushing nations to be rigorous and hold each other accountable.

    Jeffrey Ball, Nonresident Senior Fellow, Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and ClimateJeffrey Ball (@jeff_ball), Nonresident Senior Fellow in the Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate: What happens unofficially on the sidelines of global climate conferences almost always is more important and interesting than what happens officially in the confabs themselves. That was true in 2009 in Copenhagen. It was true in 2015 in Paris. It almost certainly will be true this month in Katowice, Poland.

    The climate negotiators’ impassioned speeches in these international gatherings tend to be long on rhetoric about a coming environmental crisis, but their negotiations, often behind closed doors, tend to be short on meaningful steps to confront it. The lower-key discussions among industry lions tend to matter more because they’re about what really will determine whether the world curbs climate change: private money. Study after study has concluded that massive amounts of private investment will have to shift in a greener direction if the world is to seriously slash carbon emissions. Government policy and spending are important mostly to the extent they accelerate that shift in private capital.

    Ball: “Study after study has concluded that massive amounts of private investment will have to shift in a greener direction if the world is to seriously slash carbon emissions.”

    The official negotiations in Katowice will clarify how serious countries are in implementing and ultimately in toughening the relatively weak pledges they made in Paris to constrain their emissions. To be sure, that signal will matter. But what I’ll be watching for in Poland (from afar, alas) is what the players with the good suits and the deep pockets say and do. If the heads of sovereign-wealth funds, pension funds, insurance companies, and other institutional investors fly away from Poland having resolved or been pushed to significantly intensify the decarbonization of their portfolios, Poland will have done something for the planet. If they don’t, the climate conference will have been little more than ceremonial.

    Colette D. Honorable, Nonresident Senior Fellow, Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate, The Brookings InstitutionColette D. Honorable (@CHonorableEsq), Nonresident Senior Fellow in the Cross-Brookings Initiative on Energy and Climate: The table is set for COP 24. This conference is poised to be the most significant gathering of nations focused on collective climate action since the Paris Agreement. This convening will allow all countries to assess how they “measured up” with the goals or pledges made in 2015. More importantly, COP 24 will give all participating countries an opportunity to renew their respective commitments to climate goals.

    On the eve of the Poland conference, the EU and United States have heightened the awareness of the need for urgent climate action in meaningful ways. This week European Commissioner for Climate Action and Energy Miguel Arias Canete announced EU’s goals to reduce emissions by 45 percent by 2030, and 60 percent by 2050. Many other countries have stepped forward to renew their commitments ahead of COP 24 as well.

    Meanwhile, here in the United States, we were thankful for the administration’s issuance of the Fourth Annual Climate Assessment on November 23, which thoroughly and unequivocally addressed the dire impacts of unaddressed climate change on our citizens, society, and the environment. The report predicts that, among other devastating impacts, the U.S. economy will lose billions over time if these impacts are not addressed, shrinking the economy by as much as 10 percent if warming continues at its current pace.

    Separately, the U.N. Environmental Programme recently announced that global emissions of carbon dioxide actually rose in 2017, for the first time in three years. Taken together, these actions and reports speak to the importance of what must occur after COP 24. The leaders at COP 24 should motivate policy makers and decisionmakers in countries around the world, state legislatures and city councils, mayors and local communities, boardrooms of global corporations, and beyond to renew their efforts. In order to achieve meaningful outcomes, an unprecedented level of coordination must occur among policymakers, lawmakers, global corporate leaders, and consumers.

    We must decide, as Canete said, if we want to be “front movers” or “followers.”

    Amar BhattacharyaAmar Bhattacharya, Senior Fellow in the Global Economy and Development program: COP 24 provides an important opportunity to shift the discussion on climate finance away from burden sharing to a new partnership to deliver on the ambitions of the Paris Agreement. Climate finance has been at the heart of the climate negotiations since its inception. The agreement to provide an additional $100 billion per year in climate finance at COP 15 at Copenhagen in 2009 brokered by President Obama led to the breakthrough in climate negotiations that paved the way for the Paris Agreement. This commitment was reaffirmed and embedded as a central part of the Paris Agreement.

    Consequently, there has been a lot of focus on the delivery of the $100 billion commitment. Progress on multilateral climate funds has been mixed: The Climate Investment Funds launched after Copenhagen while modest in scale have had a very successful track record; the aim of establishing the Green Climate Fund as the principal climate financing mechanism has not materialized; and more recently, there has been a very successful replenishment of the Global Environment facility. The main development has been a large step increase in climate finance by the multilateral development banks, as a result of which the $100 billion commitment will likely be met.

    It is now time to shift the focus to the larger task of mobilizing the trillions that will be needed for sustainable infrastructure, as well as for adaptation and preservation of natural capital, in order to deliver on the Sustainable Development Goals and the climate goals. We need an enhanced partnership based on a new understanding of climate action. Climate action is not separate from but an integral part of growth and development strategies. As the latest report of the Global Commission on the Economy and Climate has underscored, the benefits of climate action are greater than ever before and the costs of inaction continue to mount. The challenge is to unlock investments in sustainable infrastructure and mobilize the finance that can realize the growth opportunity of the 21st century. The bulk of the financing will have to come from domestic resources and the private sector. The challenge for the international community is to ensure that international public finance from the multilateral development banks and multilateral climate funds is of sufficient scale and used most effectively to catalyze the overall volumes of finance that will be needed.

    The post Around the halls: Brookings experts on what to watch at the COP 24 climate summit first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    550123
    Connecting India: How roads, teledensity and electricity have improved over time http://stg.csep.org/blog/connecting-india-how-roads-teledensity-and-electricity-have-improved-over-time/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=connecting-india-how-roads-teledensity-and-electricity-have-improved-over-time Tue, 30 Oct 2018 12:07:15 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=545283 Connectivity is a prime factor in determining livability, employment and growth in a country. In this view, a well-connected India provides the prospect of a better India from better access to services to better livelihoods and opportunities. Setting out to understand how connectivity in India had improved over time, we decided to track advances in three basic pillars of infrastructure and access – Roads, Teledensity and Electricity. In doing so, we relied on open-source government data to understand trends across time and states (and, where possible, districts). The literature on the connection between all three pillars of infrastructure and economic […]

    The post Connecting India: How roads, teledensity and electricity have improved over time first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Connectivity is a prime factor in determining livability, employment and growth in a country. In this view, a well-connected India provides the prospect of a better India from better access to services to better livelihoods and opportunities. Setting out to understand how connectivity in India had improved over time, we decided to track advances in three basic pillars of infrastructure and access – Roads, Teledensity and Electricity. In doing so, we relied on open-source government data to understand trends across time and states (and, where possible, districts).

    The literature on the connection between all three pillars of infrastructure and economic growth is well-documented. Research shows that accessible and equitable infrastructure has long-term economic benefits. It can raise economic growth and productivity while having significant positive spillovers in increasing access to labour markets and reducing transaction costs.

    Roads link producers to markets, workers to jobs, students to schools and patients to hospitals. The poorer a country is, the greater is the need for transport to support development. Findings across studies confirm the simple beliefs better transport leads to better economic outcomes (Berg et al, 2015). Historically, infrastructure-building coincided with periods of rapid economic growth in Western Europe, Japan, China and the United States (Banerjee, Duflo & Qian 2012, Pradhan et al 2013). Similar results have also been found in the Indian context (Sahoo, Dash (2009), Donaldson 2018). To analyse time-trends on road transport networks, we relied on data from the Ministry of Statistics & Program Implementation (MOSPI).

    Teledensity in rural India in 2001 was 0.93 per cent; in 2014, this number reached 44.01 per cent. The expansion of mobiles and telephones has uniquely positioned India as one of the biggest telecom markets in the world so much so that teledensity has emerged as an important parameter to assess inclusivity, growth and development across states. As the push for Digital India continues, states that are uniquely positioned with strong rural and urban penetration of telephones and mobiles stand to gain the most. In analysing teledensity data, we relied on estimates from MOSPI and Data.gov.in.

    While trying to understand electricity access over the years, we had trouble finding credible government indicators that were disaggregated at least at a state-level to do a comparative analysis. Given this, we decided to use night-lights or luminosity data from NASA. The link between luminosity and economic activity has long been established. For countries with poor data, night-lights have been particularly useful in estimating the level of economic activity and gross domestic product (GDP). In fact, a study measuring rural electrification in India found that luminosity measures derived from satellite data were surprisingly accurate for measuring rural electrification, even at the village level and using simple statistical tools (Dugoua, Kennedy, Urpelainen 2018).

    The Status of Connectivity in India

    Roads:

    As per data obtained by MOSPI, road connectivity in the form of road length consistently increased in the period between 2009 and 2015. In 2009, the total road length in India was 44,71,510 kilometers, as compared to 54,72,144 kilometers in 2015. Beyond metrics of basic road length, we also analysed road density, defined as the number of kilometers of road per 100 square kilometers of land. Across road density as well, we see a consistently upward trend between 2009 and 2015, particularly in the period following 2012. We see the most notable increase in the expansion of rural roads, where we see nearly a 41 per cent increase between 2009 and 2015. Out of all states, Bihar, Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh and Assam stand out the most, with road connectivity improving significantly in the six-year period examined, especially between 2012 and 2013.

     

    1

    2

    Teledensity:

    Our analysis of teledensity data for a 12-year period between 2009 and 2017 for the states available also showed an upward trend.  Teledensity grew by a whopping 136 per cent between 2009 and 2017. While Delhi remains a top performer given the size and population of the state, a trend analysis shows massive improvements in the states of Jammu & Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh. Assam, Bihar and Madhya Pradesh lag behind the states for which data was analysed and available in terms of teledensity.[1]

    3

    4

    Electricity:

    Given the paucity of data on electricity access over time, we relied on using night-lights and luminosity data collected by NASA. Night-lights data comprises of data on energy emitted or reflected back from the surface of the earth to the sky. This is captured across all regions of the world by NASA and made available on their website. The data remains the most disaggregated of all three parameters studied, as it is available at the district level and for the longest time period, a timeframe of more than 20 years, from 1992 to 2013. Monthly nightlights data is also available from April 2012 to March 2018 and was also analysed. Overtime, we see luminosity in India substantially increased. Interestingly, a simple heat map analysis also shows that luminosity tends to correlate with economic activity where the areas of Delhi, Maharashtra and Gujarat show much brighter lights than states such as Odisha, Rajasthan and Madhya Pradesh.

    5

    While relying on single yardsticks of measures has limitations, such time-trends have the potential to show progress, no matter how basic or rudimentary. Though our analysis is fairly limited by the availability of government data and on the reliance of open-source data, such a time-series analysis is increasingly relevant in today’s India as basic infrastructure becomes a front and center policy issue.

    [1] Data for all North-Eastern states (except Assam,) Jharkhand, Uttarakhand was not available in an aggregate format for the years considered.

    Bibliography:

    1.      Berg, Claudia N.; Deichmann, Uwe Klaus; Liu, Yishen; Selod, Harris. 2015. Transport policies and development (English). Policy Research working paper; no. WPS 7366; Paper is funded by the Knowledge for Change Program (KCP); Paper is funded by the Strategic Research Program (SRP). Washington, D.C.: World Bank Group.

    2.      Banerjee, A., Duflo, E., & Qian, N. (2012). On the road: Access to transportation infrastructure and economic growth in China (No. w17897). National Bureau of Economic Research.

    3.      Pradhan, R. P., & Bagchi, T. P. (2013). Effect of transportation infrastructure on economic growth in India: the VECM approach. Research in Transportation Economics, 38(1), 139-148.

    4.      Sahoo, P., & Dash, R. K. (2009). Infrastructure development and economic growth in India. Journal of the Asia Pacific economy, 14(4), 351-365.

    5.      Donaldson, Dave. 2018. “Railroads of the Raj: Estimating the Impact of Transportation Infrastructure.” American Economic Review, 108 (4-5): 899-934.

    6.      Dugoua, E., Kennedy, R., & Urpelainen, J. (2018). Satellite data for the social sciences: measuring rural electrification with night-time lights. International Journal of Remote Sensing, 39(9), 2690-2701.

    The post Connecting India: How roads, teledensity and electricity have improved over time first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    545283
    Increasing private practitioner engagement with tuberculosis http://stg.csep.org/blog/increasing-private-practitioner-engagement-with-tuberculosis/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=increasing-private-practitioner-engagement-with-tuberculosis Fri, 12 Oct 2018 07:40:20 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=541978 Tuberculosis is an infectious disease that is most prevalent in South Asia. It is caused by the bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis and primarily affects the lungs. A small fraction of infected individuals develop symptoms and the capability of transmission. In 2015, India accounted for 2.2 million of the 9 million tuberculosis cases in the world. Out of these 2.2 million cases, an estimated 300,000 deaths were caused by tuberculosis. More than a million estimated tuberculosis cases are treated and diagnosed in the private sector. India accounted for 2.2 million of the 9 million tuberculosis cases in the world. Out of these […]

    The post Increasing private practitioner engagement with tuberculosis first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Tuberculosis is an infectious disease that is most prevalent in South Asia. It is caused by the bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis and primarily affects the lungs. A small fraction of infected individuals develop symptoms and the capability of transmission. In 2015, India accounted for 2.2 million of the 9 million tuberculosis cases in the world. Out of these 2.2 million cases, an estimated 300,000 deaths were caused by tuberculosis. More than a million estimated tuberculosis cases are treated and diagnosed in the private sector.

    India accounted for 2.2 million of the 9 million tuberculosis cases in the world. Out of these 2.2 million cases, an estimated 300,000 deaths were caused by tuberculosis.

    In our recent development seminar, Sarang Deo, an associate professor of Operations Management at the Indian School of Business, discussed the formulation, results and outcomes of a pilot study he conducted in order to increase private practitioner engagement with tuberculosis. At present, most private practitioners refer patients to the public sector for TB engagement; however, it takes a considerable amount of time for practitioners to discern that their patient is, in fact, experiencing symptoms of TB. This delay in diagnosis, and further delay in referral, allows for the rapid transmission of tuberculosis. In order to meet the Ministry of Health’s goal of TB eradication by 2025, it is imperative that the private sector is quick with the diagnosis, and the treatment.

    Deo shared insights from the Private Provider Interface Agency (PPIA), a model developed and tested, under which private practitioners were provided free usage of Gene Xpert (a relatively new device that more accurately diagnosis TB than previous methods), patients were provided free drugs, and information on  is recorded by NGOs. This interface was implemented in two urban areas of Maharashtra: Mumbai and Pune by PATH and World Health Partners. Deo’s findings suggest that PPIA reduced diagnosis time by 43 percent for less than fully-qualified practitioners and 30 percent for fully-qualified practitioners.

    Through the offering of Gene Xpert (GX), Deo is also able to measure how new technologies are incorporated into the private sector. He finds positive trends in the percentage of practitioners that utilise GX, but he also finds that practitioners are likelier to start treatment on a negative result from GX than from a positive one. This indicates that although the new technology spreads at a decent pace, trust in it is relatively low.

    Lastly, Deo uses the cost of the experiment to extrapolate the cost of the program if it was scaled to the national level. He estimates that the government would have to double its expenditure on TB to handle twice the number of patients. His estimated cost per case in the private sector is not significantly different that the government’s current expenditure of cost per case.

    The discussant of the event, Anand Ranganathan – Associate Professor at JNU’s Centre for Molecular Biology, followed the presentation by bringing up the importance of the utilisation of GX due to its lower false positive/false negative rate. He then explained his research which sought out perfect protein matches used by bacterium like Mycobacterium Tuberculosis in order to infiltrate human cells. Ranganathan’s research will probably lead to more methods to diagnose, treat, and vaccinate the human body against diseases like TB and Malaria, but as Deo’s research showed, incorporation of new better practices can be slow.

    Through the seminar, Deo highlighted the importance of engaging the private sector in order to eradicate tuberculosis, the strength of his proposed Private Provider Interface Agency, the relatively fast adoption rate of new technologies, and low trust in new technology. If India is to defeat tuberculosis, engaging the private sector should be its priority.

     

    The post Increasing private practitioner engagement with tuberculosis first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    541978
    India’s strategic landscape: An assessment http://stg.csep.org/blog/indias-strategic-landscape-an-assessment/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indias-strategic-landscape-an-assessment Fri, 05 Oct 2018 09:00:06 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=opinion&p=540597 In trying to assess the strategic environment in which India finds itself in 2018, it may be useful to make eight broad observations. One, the Indian economy is growing. In 2018, according to the International Monetary Fund, India surpassed France to have the world’s sixth largest gross domestic product (GDP). In the coming year, India is expected to overtake the United Kingdom to have the fifth largest GDP. Even assuming a slowdown in annual growth, India is on track to become the world’s third largest economy by 2030 or thereabouts. This is not to suggest that India’s economic future will […]

    The post India’s strategic landscape: An assessment first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    In trying to assess the strategic environment in which India finds itself in 2018, it may be useful to make eight broad observations.

    One, the Indian economy is growing. In 2018, according to the International Monetary Fund, India surpassed France to have the world’s sixth largest gross domestic product (GDP). In the coming year, India is expected to overtake the United Kingdom to have the fifth largest GDP. Even assuming a slowdown in annual growth, India is on track to become the world’s third largest economy by 2030 or thereabouts. This is not to suggest that India’s economic future will be seamless. According to its own government’s Economic Survey, India faces daunting challenges when it comes to the quality of its human capital, including healthcare, education and employability; agricultural productivity and modernisation; and administrative reforms including law and order. Nonetheless, despite these challenges, the difference between a $1 trillion economy, which India was in 2007, a $2.5 trillion economy today and a $4.5 trillion economy by 2030-2035 will have significant strategic implications.

    Even assuming a slowdown in annual growth, India is on track to become the world’s third largest economy by 2030 or thereabouts.

    Two, Donald Trump’s election as US president has – contrary to many expectations – accelerated strategic convergence between the United States and India. This applies to his South Asia strategy (focused on Afghanistan and Pakistan) and the free and open Indo-Pacific strategy. Both approaches, as articulated in the White House’s National Security Strategy, find resonance in India and align broadly with New Delhi’s preferences. We have therefore seen an acceleration in maritime cooperation from the Joint Strategic Vision for the Asia-Pacific and Indian Ocean Region agreed to by President Barack Obama and Prime Minister Narendra Modi in 2015, to the joint statement between Trump and Modi in 2017. In real terms, this has manifested itself in the elevation of the 2+2 Dialogue to the cabinet level, which will be held in 2018 for the first time, and the activation of a logistics supply agreement between the two militaries. Cooperation has also accelerated with various US allies, including Japan, as on an infrastructure working group, with Australia on bilateral naval exercises and the resurrection of a working-level quadrilateral dialogue, as well as with Europe, especially France, with whom India’s security dialogue and cooperation has deepened significantly over the past two years.

    Three, India and China have not had a reset in relations, despite the informal Wuhan Summit between Modi and President Xi Jinping. Differences remain wide, as on the boundary disputes, issues of sovereignty and sustainability concerning China’s Belt and Road Initiative (which India has boycotted), on a trade deficit which has widened to $52 billion per year, and on matters of global governance. Contrary to widespread reports, the Wuhan Summit had been under consideration for almost a year, and neither India nor China made significant concessions to each other.

    India and China have not had a reset in relations, despite the informal Wuhan Summit between Modi and President Xi Jinping.

    Four, India has had little choice but to pay greater attention to its neighbourhood. The demands on India have increased, and China is now providing considerable competition for influence. As such, India has significantly increased its aid and lines of credit ($7.7 billion to all countries last year) in an effort to stimulate private sector investment in the region. The largest recipient of Indian credit approvals has been Bangladesh. There has also been an extra push on regional connectivity, with the biggest change in the exchange of electrical grids. Regional institutions, beyond the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC), are also being reconsidered, including informal groupings and a long-moribund Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC) involving Myanmar and Thailand.

    Five, the Indian Ocean has increased in strategic importance for India. In 2017, the Indian Navy began year-round deployments in seven zones in the Indian Ocean, from the Gulf of Aden to the Straits of Malacca. India also entered into a maritime agreement with Singapore and initiated or activated defence agreements with France, the United States and Oman. This network of arrangements theoretically gives India access to ports and refuelling/replenishment facilities across the Indian Ocean from Réunion and Djibouti to Duqm, Bahrain and Singapore. The fact that an Indian Navy frigate could be refuelled in the Sea of Japan by an American vessel, as happened last year, is an indication of the tangible benefits of such arrangements to the operational reach of the Indian military.

    Six, India will have to continue building upon the momentum in ties with the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN). In January 2018, India hosted all ten ASEAN leaders in New Delhi for its Republic Day celebrations. Security cooperation with ASEAN member states is actually proceeding at a fast pace, albeit from a very low base in many instances. Today, India participates in regular training and exercises with several regional militaries, provides technical assistance and conducts coordinated naval patrols. The closest security relations are with Singapore, followed by Vietnam and Myanmar, and lately Thailand, Indonesia and even Malaysia. However, despite these improvements, India’s economic and commercial connectivity with Southeast Asia is lacking and progressing only slowly. A number of efforts are underway to improve this – including the India-Myanmar Thailand trilateral friendship highway – but so far indications are that change will be incremental.

    India will have to continue building upon the momentum in ties with the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN).

    Seven, India-Pakistan relations are on hold, as they have been since July 2016, and are likely to remain so. This is for five reasons: the recent Pakistani general elections, Indian general elections in 2019, Indian concerns and Pakistani confidence as a result of the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor, a continuing stalemate in Afghanistan, and political developments in the Indian state of Jammu and Kashmir. At the same time, India is continuing its state-building efforts in Afghanistan. Of particular significance is the fact that the air freight corridor between the two countries has helped to make India the second largest destination of Afghanistan’s legal exports and, with almost 40 percent share, it may soon surpass Pakistan to become Afghanistan’s largest export destination.

    Eight, India will have to continue balancing diverse interests in West Asia. Iran remains important for Indian connectivity to Central Asia and Afghanistan via the port of Chabahar and the International North-South Transportation Corridor. India’s relations with the Gulf Arab states have seen more significant improvement, particularly with the United Arab Emirates, Saudi Arabia and Oman. This appears to be, in part, a consequence of the drop since 2011 in oil prices, the excesses of the Arab Spring, and concerns about the reliability of the United States. All of these factors have slightly increased India’s importance in the region’s strategic and economic calculus. For India, these countries are important because they host a sizeable Indian diaspora, provide the bulk of India’s imported oil and natural gas, and provide some security assets and occasional intelligence. Finally, India-Israel relations have become more visible and public after return visits by the two countries’ presidents and prime ministers over the past two years. Israel is a major defence supplier to India.

    Overall, the developments of 2017 and 2018 suggest a great deal of strategic flux from an Indian standpoint. But these are also regional and global circumstances that India is monitoring closely and attempting to respond to appropriately within its capabilities.

    The post India’s strategic landscape: An assessment first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    540597
    Understanding India, its energy needs and ambitions, and the global implications for carbon emissions http://stg.csep.org/blog/understanding-india-its-energy-needs-and-ambitions-and-the-global-implications-for-carbon-emissions/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=understanding-india-its-energy-needs-and-ambitions-and-the-global-implications-for-carbon-emissions Tue, 18 Sep 2018 15:19:16 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=537426 At least one newspaper headline this year declared that renewable energy in India is now cheaper than coal and that coal is surely on its way out. However, recent research from my Brookings colleague Samantha Gross and me shows that the transition will not be nearly as smooth as some imagine. Renewable energy will be increasingly important in India, but cannot entirely displace coal in the short run. India’s energy strategy is important for any global discussion about lowering carbon emissions. Most current plans focus on the low-hanging fruit of “cheap renewable energy.” However, scaling renewable energy even further towards […]

    The post Understanding India, its energy needs and ambitions, and the global implications for carbon emissions first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    At least one newspaper headline this year declared that renewable energy in India is now cheaper than coal and that coal is surely on its way out. However, recent research from my Brookings colleague Samantha Gross and me shows that the transition will not be nearly as smooth as some imagine. Renewable energy will be increasingly important in India, but cannot entirely displace coal in the short run.

    India’s energy strategy is important for any global discussion about lowering carbon emissions. Most current plans focus on the low-hanging fruit of “cheap renewable energy.” However, scaling renewable energy even further towards deep decarbonization of India’s energy system is a much harder task, and will require a host of technical, policy, and regulatory improvements.

    India’s ambitious plans

    Even before COP21 in Paris, India announced a very ambitious renewable target: installing 175 gigawatts (GW) of renewable capacity by 2022, a quadrupling of renewable energy capacity in just seven years. India’s motivations for this ambitious target are varied: It is seeking global leadership in combating climate change, energy security, drawing more (and newer) sources of capital, and simply more electricity at lower prices.

    How has India done? Remarkably well in absolute terms. Solar makes up the lion’s share of the capacity target, at 100 GW. In 2017, India added almost 10 GW of solar, the second-highest capacity addition in the world (although far behind China’s 53 GW). Nevertheless, India has not added capacity fast enough to keep pace with its target.

    Grid-scale solar generation now draws more investment than new coal plants. Although observers cite lack of financing as a limitation, it is unlikely to be the fundamental bottleneck. Counterparty risk from India’s mostly insolvent utilities is the biggest challenge. Consumer-owned “rooftop” solar installation is way behind its 40 GW target, with only about 2.5 GW of capacity installed. This isn’t for lack of roofs or sunshine instead rooftop solar threatens to deprive local utilities of their best customers, and the utilities thus resist such deployments.

    India has used bidding to draw out fierce competition and lower solar and wind prices, down to 2.44 Indian rupees per kilowatt-hour (kWh) (about 3.5 U.S. cents per kWh). But these prices cannot be compared directly to those for fossil fuel generation, since renewable energy is not “dispatchable” it is available only when the sun shines or the wind blows.[more-blog-posts]

    “Too much” capacity?

    For decades, India’s electricity system suffered from power shortfalls. However, in the last few years that problem has decreased, due to changes in both demand and supply.

    Electricity demand is now growing at a slower rate than gross domestic product (GDP). The increasing share of the services sector of the economy contributed to slower demand growth, as did rising energy efficiency. The remarkable government bulk procurement program for LED bulbs reduced their costs by an order of magnitude in just a few years and distributed hundreds of millions of efficient bulbs.

    On the supply side, coal-fired power capacity grew dramatically, at 12.7 percent compound annual growth rate from fiscal year 2011 to fiscal year 2017, double the growth of demand for electricity, leaving India with more than sufficient generation capacity. This surplus of coal-fired capacity makes it difficult for states to build new renewable generation to meet the targets, since they have to pay for the coal plants they have already built. Additionally, solar energy is not available to meet peak electricity demand, which is mostly in the evening.

    Renewable energy is not explicitly subsidized to lighten the cost burden. However, in many cases renewable energy receives implicit subsidies for land and the system-level costs that renewable energy creates are socialized across other generators. The Central Electricity Authority estimates that these costs could be as high as 1.5 Rupees/kWh (over 2 US cents/kWh) for some states today.

    Deep Decarbonizing

    “Deep decarbonization” is a nebulous term, but it generally means extensive reductions in carbon emissions, exceeding current government targets. India’s 2022 targets are impressive, but don’t change the global story. Can India continue or accelerate its renewable energy plans?

    The good news: India will meet the goals it set forth in its Nationally Determined Contribution under the Paris Agreement even if it is somewhat delayed in reaching its 2022 renewable energy target.

    The bad news: Renewable energy is only inexpensive when it can be readily absorbed into the grid when it is available. When the share of renewable energy is much larger, the intermittent nature of wind and solar energy becomes a greater challenge. At this point, a more advanced grid and technologies to store electricity become very important. However, storage technologies are not economically viable today.

    If India aims for deeper decarbonization over time, policymakers need to think beyond renewable energy supply. A few policy rethinks include:

    • Better frameworks for electricity Variability is the hallmark of renewable energy, requiring a flexible grid in technical and contractual terms. Pricing that recognizes the time of day when power is supplied would be a great first step. Today, only about 3 percent of power is purchased through power exchanges that reflect supply and demand conditions, the rest is purchased through power purchase agreements that treat all power the same, regardless of its variability.
    • Smart(er) Grids Smart grids are more than just smart meters. The future grid will allow demand to react to variable renewable energy supply. When solar generation creates surplus power in the middle of the day, load must shift to such time periods. For example, load from agricultural pump-sets can be easily shifted in time, but other loads may require more significant efforts.
    • Energy Efficiency If carbon reduction (or saving money) is the goal, energy efficiency needs more attention and funding. Unlike capital investments in generation, there is no regulated rate of return for efficiency investments. Buildings pose an incentives challenge. New buildings will be part of the capital stock for decades, but builders often care little about the occupants’ energy costs. The housing sector is also complex and plagued with corruption. Although regulations on paper sound good, enforcement is a major gap.
    • Co-benefits Cleaner energy is welcome, but market penetration of cleaner technologies, including electric vehicles, will accelerate when they provide additional benefits, including energy security, employment, and reduction in local air pollution. Unfortunately, many of these co-benefits aren’t recognized or internalized in planning processes at the central, state, or municipal levels.
    • Global support An influx of global capital would increase funding and lower interest rates. India needs more than transfer of current renewable energy technology it also needs innovative regulation and business models. Global lessons learned can help.

    India should be lauded for its efforts at becoming greener, despite the development pressure it faces. However, there are limits to how fast India can decarbonize and even heroic efforts in India will not be enough to the change the global emissions trajectory. But every step helps, especially India-sized steps. India and the world need to be aware of the financial and political challenges as they plan an energy transition beyond just adding more solar panels.

    The post Understanding India, its energy needs and ambitions, and the global implications for carbon emissions first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    537426
    Using technology to improve the efficacy of school feeding programmes http://stg.csep.org/blog/using-technology-to-improve-the-efficacy-of-school-feeding-programmes/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=using-technology-to-improve-the-efficacy-of-school-feeding-programmes Thu, 02 Aug 2018 07:47:20 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=531011 Heralded as the world’s largest school feeding programme, the Mid-Day Meal Programme in India reaches out to over 120 million children in over 1.26 million schools. State governments, along with funding from the national government, supply free lunches to children in primary and upper primary classes on working days in government schools. However, anecdotal evidence of inept service delivery suggest that the programme is fraught with leakages and corruption. Leakages in government service delivery often come either in the form of corruption, or poor accounting practices which lead to inefficiencies in the way benefits reach the intended beneficiaries. Due the […]

    The post Using technology to improve the efficacy of school feeding programmes first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Heralded as the world’s largest school feeding programme, the Mid-Day Meal Programme in India reaches out to over 120 million children in over 1.26 million schools. State governments, along with funding from the national government, supply free lunches to children in primary and upper primary classes on working days in government schools. However, anecdotal evidence of inept service delivery suggest that the programme is fraught with leakages and corruption.

    Leakages in government service delivery often come either in the form of corruption, or poor accounting practices which lead to inefficiencies in the way benefits reach the intended beneficiaries. Due the inherent information asymmetries prevalent in public provision, poor implementation of programmes could lead to erosion of public trust in government policies. Since revamping entire systems of public provision are very costly for governments, cheaper solutions such as the use of technology or the creation of incentives can help improve monitoring and supervision of government programmes.

    Leakages in government service delivery often come either in the form of corruption, or poor accounting practices which lead to inefficiencies in the way benefits reach the intended beneficiaries.

    Investigating the roll-out of a state-wide adoption of an Interactive Voice Response Systems (IVRS) on the functioning of the Mid-Day Meal Programme in Bihar, Sisir Debnath of the Indian School of Business presented his research for a Development Seminar at Brookings India in New Delhi. Given that a key challenge top-tier programme administrators face in the delivery of the mid-day meals is the reliance on the beneficiary estimates provided by mid-level delivery system administrators, the IVRS was implemented by the Bihar state government with the purpose of improving this very challenge through a full-automated platform that called one school teacher in every school every day to record the provision of a mid-day meal. This way data could be collated and re-verified on how many schools served the lunches and beneficiary take-up information would be accessible to the public through a web interface. The sample for the main analysis of roughly 6,000 observations was drawn from two sources: government accounts of Mid-Day Meal Programmes and a list of schools from the Annual Status of Education Report (ASER) database (which is collected by an Indian nongovernmental organisation, Pratham). яндекс

    The aim of the Mid-Day Meals (MDM) Programme was to increase both attendance and micronutrients consumed by children. Debnath showed how accountability for several recipients of funding or benefits can be traced to a few managers. The managers at each node rely on quarterly reports of performance to renew funding. Debnath outlines the ineffectiveness of having several steps of bureaucracy in reaching targeted recipients. Instead he shows that the IVRS, which bypasses many of these steps, is far more effective in holding school administration accountable for the quality and delivery of mid-day meals.

    The aim of the Mid-Day Meals (MDM) Programme was to increase both attendance and micronutrients consumed by children.

    Debnath’s research verified that there are indeed greatly inflated reports of meal provision, and that an automated call to the headmasters or teachers at a school, randomly selected, actually helps cross-tabulate official reports. The Mid-Day Meal Programme started in 1995 and served the purposes of increasing attendance, improving child nutrition, besides preventing children dropping out of school and resorting to child labour. At the time, beneficiaries of mid-day meals received raw uncooked grains, that nonetheless aided them; but more recently, an additional step to provide cooked meals has been undertaken, incurring  ‘conversion costs.’

    Funding of the mid-day meal is contingent on the number of enrollees per school. Impressively, for this study, there were 70,000 headmasters, 99 per cent of whose mobile phones were registered and available for the IVRS calls. There were five allotted teachers per school in the sample and of the calls made during the study, roughly 80 per cent were completed.

    Control states for this study included the neighbouring states of Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh, Chattisgarh, and Odisha. Ninety per cent of the schools in these states claimed to provide meals in the control states, while the rate of provision in Bihar was around 60 per cent, far lower than the Annual Work Plan Budget (AWPB) reports of the government of nearly perfect compliance. Following the implementation of IVRS in 2012, the ASER data showed a leap in meal provision, with gradual decay in the years following. AWPB data, counterintuitively, showed a drop in provision around 2012 from perfect compliance.

    Using the ASER data showed that mid-day meals were significantly more likely to be provided following 2012; and that meals were more likely to be cooked on the day of a surprise visit, likely owing to IVRS monitoring. However, when tests were conducted to compare ASER data with AWPB data, similarity in reporting in some areas but discrepancies in others were seen. Measures such as rice lifted from the warehouse were used as a proxy for resource allotment and estimates were built by looking at the effect in the post period minus the effect in the pre-period, added to the baseline measure.

    A secondary result, using ASER data, was that while attendance increased following IVRS monitoring of mid-day meals, enrollment dropped. IVRS and the government’s quarterly progress reports (from the Mid-Day Meal Programme) when compared showed that while enrollment numbers aligned, beneficiaries’ numbers seemed inflated in the quarterly progress reports. The authors are now expanding their analysis to empirically test improvement in test scores and health outcomes in public schools that served meals as well as a heterogeneity analysis.

    Debnath was able to independently assess that the IVRS helped reduce leakages, increased school attendance and improved the quality and quantity of meals per capita. While Debnath’s results have various policy implications, the impact that low-cost technological innovations and adjustments can have on other areas of government programmes that have similar delivery channels such as the public distribution system must be explored.

    Technology-driven or enabled reform initiatives at the state level can succeed in improving delivery of important public services and the need to reform existing information channels and data gathering must be improved at every level, if not strengthened through technology.

     

     

    The post Using technology to improve the efficacy of school feeding programmes first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    531011
    India rising: Soft power and the world’s largest democracy http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-rising-soft-power-and-the-worlds-largest-democracy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-rising-soft-power-and-the-worlds-largest-democracy Tue, 17 Jul 2018 11:34:34 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=article&p=528532 Arguably, few phrases are as misused in international relations as “soft power.” When he coined the term, Joseph Nye captured the important and (at the time) poorly-studied phenomenon in international affairs of “getting others to want the outcomes that you want,” predicated on the attractiveness of one’s culture, political values, and foreign policy. As the world’s largest democracy that is also home to the world’s largest number of impoverished people, India is variously described as a model soft power or a country that makes remarkably poor use of it. For some, its rich culture and democracy stand in contrast to […]

    The post India rising: Soft power and the world’s largest democracy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Arguably, few phrases are as misused in international relations as “soft power.” When he coined the term, Joseph Nye captured the important and (at the time) poorly-studied phenomenon in international affairs of “getting others to want the outcomes that you want,” predicated on the attractiveness of one’s culture, political values, and foreign policy. As the world’s largest democracy that is also home to the world’s largest number of impoverished people, India is variously described as a model soft power or a country that makes remarkably poor use of it. For some, its rich culture and democracy stand in contrast to other authoritarian and revisionist great powers, and indeed many Indian leaders speak positively about the country’s soft power potential. By contrast, as implied by its absence from The Soft Power 30 Index, India evidently does not yet benefit as much from international awareness, positive associations, or investments in cultural diplomacy as many other countries.

    In reality, the picture is mixed. Indeed, there are many ways in which India fares poorly in terms of elements of national attraction. It has a widespread (and often justified) reputation for corruption, endemic poverty, and hostility to business. Reports in the international media of pollution in urban areas, child labour, and violence against women have also detracted expatriates, tourists, businesspeople, and other visitors. At the same time, India’s associations have started to change over the past quarter century from a land of poverty and Mother Theresa to a source of software programmers and techies.

    As the world’s largest democracy that is also home to the world’s largest number of impoverished people, India is variously described as a model soft power or a country that makes remarkably poor use of it.

    However, despite these contrasting trends, there are several reasons that may explain why India fares worse on objective metrics of soft power than it perhaps should. Firstly, any measure of soft power that compares countries on a per capita basis is bound to favour developed states over developing ones such as India. India may be home to more top 30 unicorns (billion dollar start-ups) than any country other than the United States and China, but its digital penetration remains low, with millions still without access to electricity, let alone basic digital technologies. Similarly, India has more UNESCO World Heritage sites than all but five other countries and more public policy think tanks than any country outside the United States, China, and United Kingdom, but still fares poorly on tourism and education on a per capita basis.

    Secondly, India rates badly on any measure of state-driven cultural diffusion rather than more organic and natural private sector and citizen-led efforts. For example, India’s national airline – Air India – is in such woeful shape that the government struggles to find buyers or investors. But four of the fastest growing airlines in the world by aircraft orders (Indigo, SpiceJet, GoAir, and Jet Airways) are Indian, all privately owned and operated. Indeed, most Indian cultural diffusion to overseas audiences – from yoga to Bollywood – has occurred without the involvement of the Indian government, which has made only belated attempts at reclaiming these phenomena as national contributions. In a similar vein, the Indian government has made no more than modest efforts at promoting the study of Hindi abroad in large part because of its linguistic diversity at home. Recent efforts at doing so have been controversial and hotly debated within India.

    Thirdly, there are Indian contributions that are not necessarily associated with the country. The most successful export of India’s largest car manufacturer Tata Motors is Jaguar Land Rover, manufactured primarily in Britain. To give a very different example, Buddhism has hundreds of millions of adherents around the world but very few in its birthplace in India. While Buddhism has become indigenised in such places as Japan, Thailand, Sri Lanka, and Mongolia, India has only recently made efforts at appealing to these countries as the fount of Buddhism, by facilitating pilgrimages and sponsoring religious renovations, in China and Myanmar.

    Finally, in many cases India’s appeal is to others in the developing world rather than to high-value or prestige markets. For example, despite their many evident shortcomings, India’s universities continue to attract a large number of students from across the developing world, including Nepal, Afghanistan, and Africa. Indian food is popular around the world but is often seen as a cheap eat rather than worthy of a Michelin-starred fine dining experience. Indian popular films may not be rewarded at the Academy Awards or at Cannes but have massive followings in China, Central Asia, and the Middle East. There are recent signs that Indian culture may be moving up the value chain: consider the establishment of luxury Taj Hotel properties in Boston, San Francisco, and London, or the New Delhi fine dining establishment Indian Accent opening up a branch in New York City in 2016.

    Despite the evident shortcomings – both in terms of actual soft power and in ways in which metrics capture India’s soft power capabilities – India has a reasonably good track record of leveraging its culture, political values, and foreign policy for national objectives. In the 1950s, India benefited from significant aid from both the United States and Soviet Union. Democrats in the US Congress saw India as a darling of the developing world even as Soviet leaders perceived the country as a foothold for their engagement outside the Communist bloc. India benefited in very real terms from these associations and relationships, resulting in the establishment of the Indian Institutes of Technology, which formed the backbone of India’s software boom in the 1990s, and the Green Revolution in the 1960s that helped make the country agriculturally self-sufficient.

    There was also a strong moral streak in India’s external engagement during the Cold War, helped in part by its self-perception as a pluralistic but postcolonial democracy. In 1959, it was in India that the Dalai Lama sought refuge, and the presence of the Tibetan spiritual leader and his followers in India continues to attract visitors and supporters from around the world.

    Similarly, India’s principled boycott of South Africa for its racist Apartheid policies won it respect from post-colonial states across Africa. In 1971, despite overwhelming opposition from the US and United Nations, India created international acceptability for its intervention in East Pakistan (which resulted in the independent state of Bangladesh) by calling attention to the morality of its actions. It was assisted in no small part by the appeal of Indian culture among the likes of former Beatles member George Harrison, who organised a sold out concert for Bangladesh in New York’s Madison Square Garden that featured Eric Clapton and Bob Dylan, and helped bring acceptability to India’s military intervention and creation of an independent state. India’s soft power appeal manifested itself even after the end of the Cold War. In the 1990s, India was brought into Asian institutions by the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), who saw the appeal of its growing economy and democratic values. Similarly, in the 2000s, the US worked to gain India an international waiver from nuclear sanctions, effectively recognising it as a de facto nuclear weapon state, a process that was enabled by mostly positive associations of India as a democracy, growing market, and responsible steward of nuclear weapons. Even more recently, governments and dissidents in India’s neighbouring countries – from Bangladesh and Nepal to the Maldives and Afghanistan – turn to India for assistance in conducting free and fair elections, drafting their constitutions, and developing welfare schemes.

    As these examples suggest, the metrics of soft power – particularly those that capture state-led efforts, high-end cultural exports, or per capita capabilities – may understate India’s record of utilising its soft power for national objectives. India has found soft power to be a necessary but insufficient ingredient in its engagement with the world. As a democracy with a rich culture and a modicum of principle in its international engagement, it has often benefited in real, tangible ways from its soft power. Clearly though, it has its work cut out in better projecting its culture and values to international audiences. As India builds upon a range of ongoing political and diplomatic efforts – from improving its ease of doing business rankings, unveiling its Incredible India tourism campaign, getting International Yoga Day recognised by the United Nations, or investing in Buddhist diplomacy – we can expect its soft power to gradually grow.

    To read the full report, please click here.

    The post India rising: Soft power and the world’s largest democracy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    528532
    The ascent of Artificial Intelligence: How will AI change the nation-state? http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-ascent-of-artificial-intelligence-how-will-ai-change-the-nation-state/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-ascent-of-artificial-intelligence-how-will-ai-change-the-nation-state Tue, 17 Jul 2018 07:14:28 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=528493 Do machines make mistakes? How often and at what cost? When can we truly trust machines? From SIRI to self-driving cars, Google’s search algorithms to autonomous weapons and drones, the past few decades have witnessed some of the fastest, almost meteoric, rises in Artificial Intelligence (AI). Today, as different nation-states make choices around data, AI is shaping the privacy rights and governance rhetoric. Conversely, the “data” policies that nation-states form are also shaping the type of AI that emerges. With this backdrop, Vasant Dhar, Professor, Stern School of Business, New York University, discussed the ascent of Artificial Intelligence and its […]

    The post The ascent of Artificial Intelligence: How will AI change the nation-state? first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Do machines make mistakes? How often and at what cost? When can we truly trust machines? From SIRI to self-driving cars, Google’s search algorithms to autonomous weapons and drones, the past few decades have witnessed some of the fastest, almost meteoric, rises in Artificial Intelligence (AI). Today, as different nation-states make choices around data, AI is shaping the privacy rights and governance rhetoric. Conversely, the “data” policies that nation-states form are also shaping the type of AI that emerges.

    With this backdrop, Vasant Dhar, Professor, Stern School of Business, New York University, discussed the ascent of Artificial Intelligence and its uses and implications for nation-states during a Development Seminar at Brookings India. Anna Roy, Industry Advisor at the NITI Aayog, offered her perspective on India’s Artificial Intelligence policies and presented a future-focused discussion on what India can do to harness the power of AI.

    Most AI systems today are based on supervised and reinforced learning, where learning happens through exposing the AI system to tens of thousands of illustrative examples. This has led to a stage where the world is shifting from a time where people wrote programs to a time where machines are learning to write codes for themselves. This can be illustrated through the simplest examples of driverless cars – how machines (for example, cars) learn (for example, driving) instead of being programmed to do so.

    Machines are now capable of taking inputs directly from the environment and this has interesting implications for humans. Similarly, machines are now starting to learn the relationship between variables based on data and are able to predict future behaviour. But the catch is, machines make mistakes. More importantly, after these mistakes have been made, machines cannot explain their behaviour that caused them to fault. This causes us to question, When should we trust machines?

    Most AI systems today are based on supervised and reinforced learning, where learning happens through exposing the AI system to tens of thousands of illustrative examples.

    Using his model of AI and trust, Dhar spoke about how problems can be evaluated based on the cost of error. Autonomous vehicles for example have high predictability but also a high cost of error. However, as AI advances and times change, dynamics of trust change, where predictability might go up and the cost of error might come down or vice-versa.

    The goal for AI professionals hence becomes trying to move most things to the automation frontier where the risk appetite to trust machines exists as does the need to innovate and invest in AI.

    At the heart of all AI opportunity lies one inherent word: Data.  Data is the source of all information and managing such massive volumes of data remains a challenge for many countries. While algorithms are free, data are expensive and proprietary. Countries like India are hence at crucial stages in their histories, where windows of opportunity for harnessing large amounts of data exist and policy pushes on effective and efficient data utilisation can make or break the future of AI. In this view, policy around data is set to shape future nation-states.

    Interestingly, four emerging models of data use have evolved around the world. These include:

    • Data as an asset: The focus of the U.S. has traditionally been on monetising data, as seen by examples of internet giants such as Google, Amazon, Facebook, etc. The flipside of this has been how the same internet giants are now beginning to resemble nation-states themselves. This trend poses difficulty for the policy and regulation of data as threats of data being used to manipulate opinions rises.
    • Data as a risk: The focus in the European Union and countries like Japan has been on how to pre-empt misuse of data. The challenges around such a policy lie mainly around the enforcement of regulations.
    • Data for state control: The focus of the Chinese nation-state, for example, has been how to use link data and use it for surveillance. This line of argument leads us to question the stringent assumptions we hold about state control itself and whether there exists a trade-off between privacy and the increasingly real benefits of such centralised data.
    • Data for inclusion: The focus of a country like India, for example, has been largely on empowerment and inclusion via consent and liberty of when people choose to share or not share their data. It also goes by the term “Data Fiduciary” where the state sees immense value in leveraging AI to enhance state capacity for basic services, digital as well as public.

    Anna Roy, industry advisor at NITI Aayog, focused her presentation on various issues that surround AI in India from research and innovation to the issues of ethics and equity. Given how the use of data for policy purposes has driven narratives around privacy and rights, AI offers interesting solutions. Focussing on five identified sectors that could greatly benefit from AI, namely agriculture, health, education, urbanisation and mobility, she framed recommendations for India, including the importance of research in AI, skilling people for AI, accelerating the adoption of AI and ethics and security for AI.

    As machine-learning and artificial intelligence, undoubtedly delivers on its hype by creating innovative and valuable solutions for organisations and governments, there are enough success stories out there to encourage and develop AI systems. However, failures also abound, which have implicit implications for policy and nation-states. While, training and skills development are vital for any AI endeavour and initiative, governments will need to formulate policies that won’t just shape the future of the data and AI but of governance and governing in itself.

     

     

    The post The ascent of Artificial Intelligence: How will AI change the nation-state? first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    528493
    The World Cup exposes the limits of globalization http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-world-cup-exposes-the-limits-of-globalization/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-world-cup-exposes-the-limits-of-globalization Tue, 10 Jul 2018 19:58:49 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=527463 International soccer, often known around the world as football, is undoubtedly a beneficiary and a symbol of globalization. Over 70 percent of players at this year’s FIFA World Cup play professionally for clubs outside their native countries. Chinese sponsors have shelled out $835 million on the event, contributing more than a third of its advertising revenue despite China not qualifying for the tournament. In many ways, the transnational nature of soccer has helped diminish differences and prejudice: Two decades after the Nigerian-born Polish star Emmanuel Olisadebe was subjected to monkey sounds and bananas thrown at him by his own fans, […]

    The post The World Cup exposes the limits of globalization first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    International soccer, often known around the world as football, is undoubtedly a beneficiary and a symbol of globalization. Over 70 percent of players at this year’s FIFA World Cup play professionally for clubs outside their native countries. Chinese sponsors have shelled out $835 million on the event, contributing more than a third of its advertising revenue despite China not qualifying for the tournament. In many ways, the transnational nature of soccer has helped diminish differences and prejudice: Two decades after the Nigerian-born Polish star Emmanuel Olisadebe was subjected to monkey sounds and bananas thrown at him by his own fans, Nigeria’s Ahmed Musa who thrived at the club CSKA Moscow characterizes playing in Russia as “playing at home.” Meanwhile, Egypt’s Mohammed Salah who celebrates each goal for his club Liverpool by kneeling in prayer was voted 2018 player of the year in England, just as the British government grapples with thorny questions of immigration and Islamophobia.

    However, amid these feel-good stories, there are plenty of signs that nationalism, ethnic tensions, and racial prejudice are alive and well in international soccer. This year’s World Cup has been no exception. While the tournament has fortunately been immune to the worst excesses of tribalism, several incidents reveal the limitations of its globalizing influence.

    Divisions, revealed

    Questions of nationalism were already manifest in the run-up to this year’s tournament. Last year, Spain defender Gerard Pique was booed by his national team’s fans for his outspoken support of Catalonian independence. During the last European Championship in 2016, Russian and English soccer hooligans fought in the streets of Marseille. In response, Russian President Vladimir Putin initially indulged in taunts (“I don’t know how 200 fans could hurt several thousand Englishmen.”) before the Russian government belatedly distanced itself from the violence, mindful of its responsibilities as 2018 World Cup hosts.

    In addition to stoking nationalism, soccer has a long history of bringing out some of the worst in ethnic and religious stereotypes. For example, opposing fans of traditionally Jewish soccer clubs Tottenham Hotspur in England or Ajax in the Netherlands have been known to make hissing sounds that are supposed to mimic gas chambers. In Germany, certain soccer hooligan groups reportedly cooperate with neo-Nazi groups, including on weapons training.

    To their credit, soccer authorities have acknowledged racism as being a major problem, and have taken some steps to address it. But casual racism nonetheless continues. Last year, the star of France’s team, Antoine Griezmann, posted a picture of himself online dressed as a Harlem Globetrotter for a 1980s themed party, complete with blackface. Following the predicable outrage, Griezmann swiftly deleted the picture and made a perfunctory apology. The controversy was all the more striking given that Griezmann plays for one of the most racially and ethnically diverse national teams in Europe, to the extent that French far-right leader Jean-Marie Le Pen once called it “not a real French team.”[more-blog-posts]

    Fans have been as guilty of insensitivity as players themselves. Mexico’s advancement to the second round of this year’s World Cup was a direct result of South Korea’s defeat of Germany. Many Mexicans, wishing to express their gratitude to South Korea, posted pictures of themselves online with their eyes pulled to their sides. Although these fans may not have intended to offend, their racial stereotyping of Asians was apparent.

    Beyond questions of race, ethnic and national demonstrations have been on occasional display during this World Cup. In a group stage match, two Swiss players of Kosovar descent made an Albanian nationalist gesture while playing Serbia, recalling the ethno-religious conflicts that scarred the Balkans in the 1990s. That Switzerland has one of the most diverse squads in the tournament composed of five African-born and three Balkan-born players, as well as seven second-generation immigrants only contributed further to the incident’s many ironies. And while he quickly distanced himself from his comments, Croatian defender Domagoj Vida who played for many years with Dynamo Kiev celebrated his country’s quarterfinal victory over hosts Russia by shouting “Glory to Ukraine,” a slogan associated with anti-Russian protests.

    Proceed with caution

    If a key question of our times is whether the forces of globalization or nationalism will prevail, international soccer could well be the canary in the proverbial coalmine. There are certainly many reasons to take comfort in the World Cup as a celebration of globalization. But there has also been enough to dent the widespread assumption that globalization would lead inevitability to greater cosmopolitanism, tolerance, and understanding. If international players part of a rarefied elite that travels the globe, speaks multiple languages, and plies its trade in several countries can fall back so easily on nationalism or racial stereotypes, perhaps it is time to dismiss with gauzy notions of inevitable universalism.

    The post The World Cup exposes the limits of globalization first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    527463
    Embarrassment of riches? The rise of RE in India and steps to manage “surplus” electricity http://stg.csep.org/blog/embarrassment-of-riches-the-rise-of-re-in-india-and-steps-to-manage-surplus-electricity/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=embarrassment-of-riches-the-rise-of-re-in-india-and-steps-to-manage-surplus-electricity https://www.brookings.edu/?p=522671 Does India have ‘too much’ electricity capacity? Every electricity grid operates in a balance between supply and demand, usually with a slight surplus of capacity to meet eventualities and uncertainty too much surplus becomes expensive. Surplus has two sides: either the demand is lower than projected, or supply is higher than required in equilibrium. However, it is critical to differentiate between surplus capacity (measured in kilowatts or gigawatts) and surplus energy (measured in kilowatt-hours or “units”). One can easily have surplus energy on average without having surplus capacity all the time there may be periods of surplus capacity at some […]

    The post Embarrassment of riches? The rise of RE in India and steps to manage “surplus” electricity first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Does India have ‘too much’ electricity capacity? Every electricity grid operates in a balance between supply and demand, usually with a slight surplus of capacity to meet eventualities and uncertainty too much surplus becomes expensive. Surplus has two sides: either the demand is lower than projected, or supply is higher than required in equilibrium. However, it is critical to differentiate between surplus capacity (measured in kilowatts or gigawatts) and surplus energy (measured in kilowatt-hours or “units”). One can easily have surplus energy on average without having surplus capacity all the time there may be periods of surplus capacity at some times of day or locations.  Renewable Energy (RE) creates particularly acute issues for the grid since it is both variable as well as likely available only at specific times.

    India’s gross electricity capacity is much higher than the demand. For decades, India faced chronic shortfalls of power, manifesting as load-shedding and unmet demand.  For a change, shortfalls have fallen dramatically and there is talk of “surplus” power.  Official data say chronic shortfall of power fell to 0.7 per cent on an energy basis in 2016-17 a remarkable achievement with forecasts of a surplus in 2018.  So why is there still load-shedding?  There is a methodological flaw with how shortfalls are calculated, but more importantly, load-shedding is often an economic issue where state utilities (the distribution companies, or DisComs) are not buying sufficient power because they are cash strapped and bleeding money.

    Even though RE, specifically wind and solar, has zero marginal costs (use it or lose it), sometimes other plants cannot be backed down quickly enough, or must operate at a minimum level. This means curtailing (throwing away) RE.

    Not only is renewable energy growing remarkably already India had the second-highest solar capacity addition in the world in 2017 the targets of 175 gigawatt (GW) by 2022 require an annual growth of well over 25 per cent. This target is top-down, set by the central government, and doesn’t incorporate much (if any) feedback by DisComs on how much power of what type is needed by that year. An additional challenge has been that in recent years (FY 2011-17), coal-based capacity has grown at over 12 per cent annually, double the growth rate of power demand. This creates a lot of overhang that impacts grid economics.

    RE makes other supply back down, but eventually may need to be curtailed

    Economics aside, at a technical level, “how much RE can the grid handle?” is a complex question that depends heavily on what else is on the grid – RE’s variability inherently needs other sources to act  as balancing supply, and the ideal sources (hydro and gas) are constrained in their growth potential in India. At low levels of RE, grid integration is easy, but all RE creates system-level costs, which are often hidden or absorbed by the rest of the ecosystem. A Central Electricity Authority (CEA) study estimates that such costs as of today are almost Rs 1.5/kWh, or more than half of recent RE bids.

    Grid operators, specifically, load-despatchers, optimise the grid for economic savings based on technical constraints including which plants can operate when, transmission congestion, etc. Even though RE, specifically wind and solar, has zero marginal costs (use it or lose it), sometimes other plants cannot be backed down quickly enough, or must operate at a minimum level. This means curtailing (throwing away) RE.

    The targeted 175 GW of RE is disproportionately concentrated in a handful of states. Karnataka today already has almost 5 GW of solar and more of wind, far ahead of its targets. In contrast, the maximum load served is only about 10.2 GW, and during the monsoon (and thus windy period) demand can fall to some 6.5 GW. The entire systems planning has to shift from one of managing scarcity to managing surplus, at least for parts of the day or year.

    The 175 GW of RE planned by 2022 would represent more RE supply than net demand for multiple states, necessitating transmission to other states. As RE further grows, even adding infinite transmission capacity to ship power from anywhere to anywhere won’t help if the national demand is lower than aggregate supply. Either viable storage technologies are required or RE will need to be curtailed. It’s worth mentioning that while one can plan for average levels of transmission or storage or curtailment, variations in demand and grid constraints etc. mean curtailment may be required even at lower-than-theoretical levels. In the long run, a stronger grid, cheap storage, and the ability to shift load to match supply conditions will all help reduce, if not avoid, curtailment. However, any system designed for zero curtailment only is likely to be a higher cost solution than an optimal portfolio design that allows for multiple scenarios and options of dealing with so-called excess supply.

    Managing the surplus: Steps to help RE scale

    While finance is a key need for growing RE, grid integration is another key pillar required for it to scale. One active area of effort is strengthening RE prediction capabilities, through RE monitoring centres (REMCs). Ultimately, it will have to address the largest challenge, counter-party risk stemming from loss-making DisComs (distribution companies, or utilities). Before we get there, there are three specific steps India can take to help properly plan RE’s growth and its management.

    1. Mandate capture of data on RE curtailment along with reasons why

    Today, there is no aggregation of curtailment information, in part because it can turn commercially contentious.  Just like California mandates and publishes curtailment data regularly, all RE curtailment in India should be categorised across two dimensions: technical versus economic, and local versus system/grid-level. (California’s categorisation is more complex, but reflects market conditions that can lead to self-curtailment). If we see the experience from California in 2017, a mature market with excellent grid stability, we find that excess supply regularly pushed wholesale market prices into negative territory, and curtailment, predominantly of solar, was measured in the thousands of megawatts.

    Note that curtailment can mostly be operationalised for utility-integrated, grid-scale RE. Rooftop solar is unlikely to become curtailed, and certainly self-use can’t be captured, but it then puts pressure elsewhere as net demand falls.

    This step isn’t just an academic accounting exercise, it will have implications for payments. If an RE generator is backed down, contracts in India have historically been set up such that generators don’t get paid for energy not delivered.  If they are backed down and don’t deliver for no fault of their own, they should be compensated for this, as draft regulations from MNRE indicate.

    1. Create frameworks to compensate curtailment

    More than just capturing data on curtailment, India needs fair yet efficient frameworks for sharing the burden of curtailment. For coal-based plants, variable costs all vary, so there is an easier mechanism for determining the merit order.  With solar plants, all of them have identical (zero) marginal costs.

    If one only applied a technical efficiency yardstick to choose which power plant(s) to curtail, based on grid congestion, transmission implications, etc., then it’s entirely possible a small subset would be disproportionately curtailed.  In contrast, as Michael Davidson recounts in a talk at Brookings India, in recent years China chose to “spread the pain“.  Socialising such costs may be a valid mechanism for minimising the impact on selected plants.

    In the long run, a stronger grid, cheap storage, and the ability to shift load to match supply conditions will all help reduce, if not avoid, curtailment.

    1. Capture and disseminate RE generation data with granularity

    Assuming RE is treated as must-run, and is never backed down, it is still important to know how much was actually produced when (and where). This is distinct from the need for tighter predictions. Consumers with rooftop solar and other RE developers want to know what to expect in terms of system performance, which impacts their economics, but the grid really needs to know what is happening not just for economic reasons but for operational ones as well.

    While capturing information on rooftop installations is hard, information on larger deployments (aka grid-scale) should be captured into a centralised system. Only recently has CEA started compiling data of aggregate RE production in a month – a step forward, but nowhere near enough. Of course, this same mandate of capturing time-granular production data should apply to all sources of power (with historical data, a dashboard isn’t enough!). If commercial and security reasons prevent plant-level data, then at the least aggregated data should be captured and disseminated.

    1. Stop treating all units of power the same, i.e., introduce time-of-day (ToD) pricing

    Once we revamp our power system operations and policy to meet capacity shortfalls at certain times of day, instead of generic energy shortfalls, the first tool we need is signalling for different grid conditions, especially by times of day. Most Indian power is transacted based on power purchase agreements (PPAs), which treat all power the same, whereas power differs as far as time of day (ToD), predictability, ability to ramp, etc. are concerned. As RE rises, the entire system will need more flexibility, something traditional PPAs don’t offer.

    While the transition to more market-oriented systems will take time (not to mention the challenge of how to handle legacy contracts), signalling must vary for different grid conditions to enable the right kind of power. Peaking power, or only operating a few hours a day at most, will inherently be more expensive than baseload coal or opportunistic RE. But we have to enable such power. Such signalling can also drive storage solutions, smart grids, and dynamic load management. E.g., if electric vehicles are coming soon, not only should their demand be spread out and match grid supply conditions (“off peak”), these should ideally match RE’s output periods so they don’t demand more coal.

    Ultimately, ToD will have to extend to retail consumers, which will take time and appropriate metering infrastructure.  Even here, it’s easier to extend ToD to bulk consumers, who use disproportional power, e.g., in BESCOM (the utility in and around Bengaluru, Karnataka), about 11,000 such high-tension consumers account for almost half the consumption. A starting point remains ToD for power procurement (purchases) by utilities from generators.

    The post Embarrassment of riches? The rise of RE in India and steps to manage “surplus” electricity first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    522671
    Transition to electric vehicles in Karnataka and India: What’s real, possible and missing in the ecosystem http://stg.csep.org/blog/transition-to-electric-vehicles-in-karnataka-and-india-whats-real-possible-and-missing-in-the-ecosystem/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=transition-to-electric-vehicles-in-karnataka-and-india-whats-real-possible-and-missing-in-the-ecosystem Tue, 29 May 2018 11:04:42 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=518934 The recent policy push for electrifying mobility in India has spurred a host of national and sub-national policies, private sector investment in technology and infrastructure, and business models piloted or deployed in the electric vehicles (EV) segment. Many plans are based on targets or manufacturing, and there are few conversations about holistic views of EVs, including the grid. Brookings India organised a roundtable discussion in Bengaluru on May 7, 2018, where experts from industry, academia, non-governmental organisations, and utilities, along with government were present (including the additional chief secretaries of energy and of industry, Government of Karnataka). To accommodate EVs […]

    The post Transition to electric vehicles in Karnataka and India: What’s real, possible and missing in the ecosystem first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The recent policy push for electrifying mobility in India has spurred a host of national and sub-national policies, private sector investment in technology and infrastructure, and business models piloted or deployed in the electric vehicles (EV) segment. Many plans are based on targets or manufacturing, and there are few conversations about holistic views of EVs, including the grid.

    Brookings India organised a roundtable discussion in Bengaluru on May 7, 2018, where experts from industry, academia, non-governmental organisations, and utilities, along with government were present (including the additional chief secretaries of energy and of industry, Government of Karnataka).

    To accommodate EVs into the system, advanced planning and targeted interventions are required at urban development, manufacturing, technology investment, and consumer behaviour levels. Brookings India has a paper on the problem in the specific context of implications for the electricity grid in case of large scale EV transition. Karnataka has specifically led this space in terms of manufacturing and employment, innovative start-ups offering EV taxi services to service clusters, procurement of electric buses and being the first state to have an EV policy in India.

    To accommodate EVs into the system, advanced planning and targeted interventions are required at urban development, manufacturing, technology investment, and consumer behaviour levels.

    Background Paper

    At the roundtable we also presented and discussed our findings in the form of a paper from our ongoing study on the impact of EVs on the grid at the national level. A few key points from the paper include:

    1. The electricity grid impact of EVs has two dimensions that need to be understood separately: the energy requirement (expressed in kilo-watt hours (kWh) or higher) and the instantaneous demand (kilo-watt (kW) or higher) at any given point of time. Even with 100 per cent EV sales across private and fleet vehicular categories, electricity demand on account of inter-state travel will be around 100 billion kWh by 2030, which is about 4 per cent of the projected electricity demand. On the other hand, the instantaneous impact on the power grid can be tens of times higher, depending on when the users plug in and the use of fast-charging technologies.
    2. While generation capacity at a national level may be present, many bottlenecks will be local, especially at the feeder or distribution transformer level.
    3. There are broader ecosystem issues that need further study, including grid-signalling (including time-of-day pricing for electricity), valuing pollution reduction, charging infrastructure, and finances. More than half the retail cost of petrol is taxes, which would need to be covered via other means if we move to EVs. It is unlikely one can (or should) tax electricity at the same rate.

    Identifying opportunities and bottlenecks

    The Brookings India discussion in Bengaluru focused on three main threads: manufacturing, systems-level issues, and future unknowns and risks.

    At a risk of over-simplification, there are three parts to an EV: the battery, the electronics and electrical systems, and the rest of the vehicle. India already has significant manufacturing skills and capacity for the rest of the vehicle. Batteries are a tough challenge since India today lacks the resources supply chain for specialised materials, including lithium and cobalt, and China is a world leader in this space, not necessarily based on state-of-the-art but on the scale of manufacturing. A competitive solution to this may take time to emerge. This leaves the electrical and electronics portion for innovation and scaling. One possible new option is the creation of modular platforms, which can separate the battery from other components, all of which could be mixed and matched. This has the additional benefit of allowing not just customisation but the possibility to achieve scale without necessarily having a single mega-sized facility. This could even allow for a larger number of small- to medium-scale factories across India.

    Another challenge that needs to be addressed head-on is the lack of systems-level coordination. EVs aren’t just about manufacturing, and require, as a start, coordination with the grid.  Solutions like fast-charging, which reduce consumers’ range anxiety and can also allow cost savings through smaller battery packs, mean a higher stress on the grid. While the short-run impacts are likely to be manageable, long-term solutions will require time-of-day pricing to ensure synergy instead of conflict between EVs and the grid. There is also the related issue of when the EV plug in for charging, if it is during night times when coal-based power is available, it will be worse greenhouse gases-wise compared to internal combustion engines.

    A lot of effort needs to focus on early adopters, especially fleet vehicles, as well as understanding future technologies and change. Much of tomorrow’s infrastructure is yet to be built and digital systems are growing rapidly. Transitioning from niche to mass-markets are a function of consumer preferences and availability of options that meet their needs and expectations.

    Experience in ‘budget’ electric two-wheeler and car segments has shown how under-powered and lower range vehicles hurt long-run market growth as they don’t necessarily cater to the basic aspirations of the buyers. Financing of EVs is still a bottleneck as since they are a new item on the list of the book-keepers, their depreciation and residual value are not well established like conventional vehicles.

    Such issues will resolve over time, and are second order to the broader challenge of providing a cost-effective and quality product with a reasonable payback period.

    The post Transition to electric vehicles in Karnataka and India: What’s real, possible and missing in the ecosystem first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    518934
    Artificial intelligence and data analytics in India http://stg.csep.org/blog/artificial-intelligence-and-data-analytics-in-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=artificial-intelligence-and-data-analytics-in-india Thu, 17 May 2018 11:00:21 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=516888 Advances in artificial intelligence and data analytics are propelling innovation in many parts of the world.[1] China, for example, has committed $150 billion towards its goal of becoming a world leader by 2030.[2] And while the United States government is investing only $1.1 billion in non-classified AI research, its private sector is spending billions in fields from finance and healthcare to retail and defense.[3] This is transforming a number of different sectors.[4] Yet India is playing catch-up in these vital areas. It devotes only 0.6 percent of GDP to R&D, well below the 2.74 percent in the United States and […]

    The post Artificial intelligence and data analytics in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Advances in artificial intelligence and data analytics are propelling innovation in many parts of the world.[1] China, for example, has committed $150 billion towards its goal of becoming a world leader by 2030.[2] And while the United States government is investing only $1.1 billion in non-classified AI research, its private sector is spending billions in fields from finance and healthcare to retail and defense.[3] This is transforming a number of different sectors.[4]

    Yet India is playing catch-up in these vital areas. It devotes only 0.6 percent of GDP to R&D, well below the 2.74 percent in the United States and 2.07 in China.[5] Its limited investment has slowed innovation and put the country at an economic disadvantage. PricewaterhouseCoopers estimates that worldwide, AI will “increase global GDP by $15.7 trillion, a full 14%, by 2030.” But of this, $7 trillion is likely to accrue to China, $3.7 trillion to North America, and only $957 billion to India.[6]

    In the last three years, India has attracted less than $100 million in AI-oriented venture capital financing.[7] According to writer Ananya Bhattacharya, “the sector is dominated by American firms like Accenture, Microsoft, and Adobe, which have their innovation centres here [in India]. Home-grown efforts on the academic, business, and investor fronts are few.”[8] Seventy percent of the AI research in the nation occurs in non-Indian firms. As an illustration, in looking at research publications, 62 percent of it comes from Google and IBM employees working in India and “there is only one Indian company in the top 10.”[9]

    There is growing AI interest, however, as India starts to invest additional resources and deploy new AI applications. This year, the national government has doubled its investment in its innovation program known as Digital India to Rs3,063 crore (or $477 million) in order to fund advances in AI, machine learning, and 3-D printing.[10] The Ministry of Commerce and Industry has developed an AI Taskforce to develop policies that encourage innovation in these areas. Its recent report emphasized the need for greater investment, more AI research, revamping of school curricula, and additional innovation by the private sector.[11]

    As a sign of the increased activity level, AI applications are emerging in a number of different areas that show considerable promise:

    Finance

    Fraud and corruption are major challenges for financial institutions and governmental overseers. A report by PricewaterhouseCoopers found that

    “large financial bodies such as payment regulators handle billions of transactions each day across different channels such as ATM withdrawals, credit card payments, and e-commerce transactions. Advanced analytical techniques and ML [machine learning] algorithms, combined with human expertise allow institutions to flag transactions as potentially fraudulent at the time of occurrence and hence contain the damage as early as possible.”[12]

    These become particularly relevant given the recent discoveries of major fraudulent transactions in several large public and private sector banks in India. AI and ML techniques can be employed to create early warning systems and minimize human errors.

    Healthcare

    Advanced software helps health providers assess symptoms, diagnose disease, and plan appropriate treatments. According to writer Prakash Mallya, “the healthcare industry is relying on AI to fine-tune the accuracy of medical predictions and choose a fitting line of treatment.”[13] AI is a way to improve the quality of care while also containing medical costs. Beyond diagnosis and treatment, AI techniques and ML algorithms can also fine-tune interventions in public health policy across the country. There are large variations in the disease burden and demand for care across states of India, as well as across districts within large states such as Uttar Pradesh. The government can design real-time health interventions targeting specific populations, which is critically needed in Indian health policy.

    Manufacturing

    AI offers the hope of improving supply chain management and resource utilization. Both of these factors are vital for manufacturing and movement up the value chain. Factories and warehouses have difficulty managing logistics and forecasting the need for particular products. Software can help track supplies and make sure companies have what they need to make their products.[14] This is particularly important given the long term strategic role of the manufacturing sector for job creation and raising overall productivity in the economy.

    Crime Prediction

    Indian authorities are using AI developed abroad to anticipate crime and intervene before it happens. For example, an Israeli company called Cortica is working with the Best Group “to analyze the terabytes of data streaming from CCTV cameras in public areas. One of the goals is to improve safety in public places, such as city streets, bus stops, and train stations.” The firm is “looking for ‘behavioral anomalies” that signal someone is about to commit a violent crime.”[15] Given the various security risks that India faces, application of AI and ML can be instrumental in maintaining law and order as well as neutralizing extremist threats across states of the country.

    Precision Agriculture

    Farmers are seeking to deploy AI to increase crop yields. Using sensors that measure soil temperature and moisture, these software systems identify the ideal time for planting and harvesting, and help farmers make efficient use of pest control and fertilization. Suhas Wani, Director of the International Crop Research Institute notes “sowing date as such is very critical to ensure that farmers harvest a good crop. And if it fails, it results in loss as a lot of costs are incurred for seeds, as well as the fertilizer applications.”[16] The usage of AI is also potentially significant in weather insurance, where accurate estimates of local weather conditions are instrumental in designing insurance policies for agriculture and other industries.

    Based on these examples, it is clear India needs to encourage greater AI investment, see more support from government agencies, make it possible for private firms to develop novel applications, reform education programs in order to generate better AI training, and encourage the venture capital community to invest in India. Adoption of these actions would help India expand its GDP and build greater economic prosperity in the future.


    [1] Darrell M. West, The Future of Work: Robots, AI, and Automation, Brookings Institution Press, 2018.

    [2] Paul Mozur, “China Sets Goal to Lead in Artificial Intelligence,” New York Times, July 21, 2017, p. B1.

    [3] Greg Brockman, “The Dawn of Artificial Intelligence,” Testimony before U.S. Senate Subcommittee on Space, Science, and Competitiveness, November 30, 2016.

    [4] Darrell M. West and John R. Allen, “How Artificial Intelligence is Transforming the World,” Brookings Institution report, April 24, 2018.

    [5] Darrell M. West, “How the Innovation Economy Leads to Growth,” A Hearing of the Joint Economic Committee of the U.S. Congress, April 25, 2018 and Ananya Bhattacharya, “India Hopes to Become an AI Powerhouse By Copying China’s Model,” Quartz, February 13, 2018.

    [6] PricewaterhouseCoopers, “Sizing the Prize: What’s the Real Value of AI for Your Business and How Can You Capitalize?” 2017 and Rekha Menon, Madhu Vazirani, and Pradeep Roy, “Rewire for Growth: Accelerating India’s Economic Growth with Artificial Intelligence,” Accenture, 2017.

    [7] Ananya Bhattacharya, “India Hopes to Become an AI Powerhouse By Copying China’s Model,” Quartz, February 13, 2018.

    [8] Ananya Bhattacharya, “India Hopes to Become an AI Powerhouse By Copying China’s Model,” Quartz, February 13, 2018.

    [9] Smita Sinha, “Where Artificial Intelligence Research in India is Heading,” Analytics India, March, 2018.

    [10] Ananya Bhattacharya, “India Hopes to Become an AI Powerhouse By Copying China’s Model,” Quartz, February 13, 2018.

    [11] Artificial Intelligence Task Force, “Report of the Artificial Intelligence Task Force”, The Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Government of India, March, 2018.

    [12] Arnab Basu and Sudipta Ghosh, “Advance Artificial Intelligence for Growth: Leveraging AI and Robotics for India’s Economic Transformation,” PriceWaterhouseCoopers, April, 2018, p. 13.

    [13] Prakash Mallya, “India Wants to Go All in on AI, But Must First Tackle Shortage of Talent and Data,” Forbes, January 2, 2018.

    [14] Arnab Basu and Sudipta Ghosh, “Advance Artificial Intelligence for Growth: Leveraging AI and Robotics for India’s Economic Transformation,” PriceWaterhouseCoopers, April, 2018, p. 13.

    [15] John Quain, “Crime-Predicting A.I. Isn’t Science Fiction. It’s About to Roll Out in India,” Digital Trends, April 11, 2018.

    [16] Microsoft, “Digital Agriculture: Farmers in India Are Using AI to Increase Crop Yields,” undated.

    The post Artificial intelligence and data analytics in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    516888
    Brookings India consortium brings together researchers analysing National Family Health Survey IV http://stg.csep.org/blog/brookings-india-consortium-brings-together-researchers-analysing-national-family-health-survey-iv/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=brookings-india-consortium-brings-together-researchers-analysing-national-family-health-survey-iv Wed, 02 May 2018 09:09:34 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=514222 The National Family Health Survey 2015-16 conducted by the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare provides information at an individual, household, district, state, and country level about various metrics related to health. The survey’s 800,000+ household observations are appropriately weighted by the International Institute of Population Sciences to provide accurate statistics at each unit of analysis. As the fourth iteration of the NFHS series, the survey builds provides state information on infant and child mortality, the practice of family planning, maternal and child health, reproductive health, and utilisation of health and family planning services by both expanding the range of […]

    The post Brookings India consortium brings together researchers analysing National Family Health Survey IV first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The National Family Health Survey 2015-16 conducted by the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare provides information at an individual, household, district, state, and country level about various metrics related to health. The survey’s 800,000+ household observations are appropriately weighted by the International Institute of Population Sciences to provide accurate statistics at each unit of analysis.

    As the fourth iteration of the NFHS series, the survey builds provides state information on infant and child mortality, the practice of family planning, maternal and child health, reproductive health, and utilisation of health and family planning services by both expanding the range of variables that are recorded, and also increasing the size of the sample to make values representative at a district level.  For the first time in history, India has information on district-level arthropometric measures, non-communicable diseases, HIV prevalence, health insurance prevalence, and many other metrics.

    The consortium brings together scholars across many institutions, to produce high-quality papers and policy briefs in a timely manner to inform health policy in India.

    Based on the NFHS-4 survey, Brookings India has created a consortium of scholars across many institutions, to produce high-quality papers and policy briefs in a timely manner to inform health policy in India. The Brookings India NFHS-4 Consortium aims to highlight public health research from different specialisations including economics, demography, nutrition, data analytics and machine learning and management. The common research agenda is to inform real time health policy making through empirical evidence based on the NFHS surveys.

    The broad topics of research covered include infant, child, and adult mortality; adult and child nutrition; maternal and child health coverage; non-communicable diseases; as well as big data analytics from the NFHS-4.

    On April 24, 2018, Brookings India, in partnership with NITI Aayog, the government’s think-tank, conducted the first in a series of workshops under this consortium, where affiliated scholars presented their initial findings. Brookings India will organise a series of workshops and seminars by researchers in collaboration with government bodies including the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, NITI Aayog and selected state governments (and their health missions).

    Based on a “Call for papers” in March 2018, scholars were selected into the Brookings India NFHS-4 Consortium. Below is the list of selected scholars, the organisations they are affiliated with and their research topics.

    • Prevalence of Hypertension; Mudit Kapoor, Ambuj Roy; Indian Statistical Institute, All India Institute of Medical Sciences
    • Public Health Infrastructure Gap and Health Outcomes; Shamika Ravi, Dhruv Gupta; Brookings India
    • Machine Learning and Data Mining Techniques in Analysis of Public Health Data; Debarka Sengupta; Indian Institute of Information Technology
    • Early Life Exposure to Crop Burnings: Effects on Child Health; Prachi Singh; Indian Statistical Institute
    • Interpreting Child Malnutrition: Evidence from NFHS 4; SV Subramanian; Harvard University
    • Explaining Changes in Childhood Nutrition (Working Title); Sunaina Dhingra; Delhi University
    • Role of Private Sector on Cesarean C-Sections: Evidence from NFHS 4; Ambrish Dongre, Mitul Surana; Indian Institute of Management (Ahmedabad)
    • Socio-economic Inequalities in Food Consumption and Dietary Diversity among children in India: Evidence from NFHS-4; Sutapa Agrawal, William Joe, SV Subramanian; The India Nutrition Initiative, Delhi University, Harvard University
    • Institutional Births and Immunization Coverage: in India Next Steps for Universal Coverage; SV Subramanian, William Joe, Sunil Rajpal, Rakesh Kumar; Harvard University, Delhi University
    • What Poor Women Want for Healthcare?; Mudit Kapoor, Shamika Ravi, Ambuj Roy, A.K. Shiva Kumar, SV Subramanian; India Statistical Institute, Brookings India, All India Institute of Medical Sciences, UNICEF, Harvard University
    • Progress and inequalities in infant and young child feeding practices in India between 2006-2016; Purnima Menon, Phuong Hong Nguyen, Rasmi Avula, Lan Tran Mai; International Food Policy Research Institute, FHI360
    • Son “Meta” Preference and “Unwanted” Girls; Arvind Subramanian, Abhishek Anand, Sowmya Ganesh, Siddharth Hari, Navneeraj Sharma; Chief Economic Advisor (Government of India)
    • Economic gains and improvements in sanitation, women’s status and health services explain most of the improvement in stunting in India over the past decade (2006-2016); Purnima Menon, Phuong Hong Nguyen, Derek Headey; International Food Policy Research Institute
    • Progress and challenges of maternal and child anemia in India 2006-2016: Insights from two rounds of National Family Health Surveys; Purnima Menon, Phuong Hong Nguyen, Samuel Scott, Rasmi Avula, Lan Mai Tran; International Food Policy Research Institute, FHI360
    • Childhood wasting in India manifests early in life and is mainly explained by maternal and household deprivation: Insights from the 2015-2016 National and Health Family Survey; Purnima Menon, Phuong Hong Nguyen, Derek Headey, Rasmi Avula, Melissa Young, Reynaldo Martorell, Lan Mai Train; International Food Policy Research Institute, Emory University, FHI360

    [more-blog-posts]

    The post Brookings India consortium brings together researchers analysing National Family Health Survey IV first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    514222
    Manufacturing jobs: Implications for productivity and inequality http://stg.csep.org/blog/manufacturing-jobs-implications-for-productivity-and-inequality/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=manufacturing-jobs-implications-for-productivity-and-inequality Tue, 01 May 2018 09:34:48 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=513924 Declining shares of manufacturing jobs in overall employment have been a concern for policymakers for years in advanced and some developing economies. This concern stems from the widely held belief that manufacturing plays a unique role as a catalyst for productivity growth and income convergence and a source of well-paid jobs for less-skilled workers. Economist Bertrand Gruss from the International Monetary Fund (IMF) presented his findings on manufacturing activity and employment since the 1970s at a Brookings India Development Seminar on April 23, 2018. Economists Montek Singh Ahluwalia and Ajit Ranade then discussed his findings, while economist and Chairman of […]

    The post Manufacturing jobs: Implications for productivity and inequality first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Declining shares of manufacturing jobs in overall employment have been a concern for policymakers for years in advanced and some developing economies. This concern stems from the widely held belief that manufacturing plays a unique role as a catalyst for productivity growth and income convergence and a source of well-paid jobs for less-skilled workers. Economist Bertrand Gruss from the International Monetary Fund (IMF) presented his findings on manufacturing activity and employment since the 1970s at a Brookings India Development Seminar on April 23, 2018.

    Economists Montek Singh Ahluwalia and Ajit Ranade then discussed his findings, while economist and Chairman of the Prime Minister’s Economic Advisory Council, Bibek Debroy, gave the keynote address; Brookings India Research Director Shamika Ravi moderated the discussion.

    Betrand Gruss’s chapter is part of the World Economic Outlook report, a compendium of projections about the world economy in the near and medium context, published biannually by the IMF. Gruss’ chapter looked at the stylised facts related to manufacturing activity and employment since the 1970s and revisited the evidence on inequality and poverty concerns due to the decline in manufacturing jobs.

    In the past five decades, the share of manufacturing jobs has been drastically declining in advanced economies. This trend does not hold in the context of developing economies – where it has remained primarily flat (leaving out China that stands as an exception, where manufacturing employment has shown an upward trend). The implications of the reduced share of manufacturing in employment has been much debated, with researchers and policymakers focusing on two questions: does it hinder overall growth and does it raise inequality?

    Productivity and income has historically appeared to slow once factors of production begin to shift from manufacturing to services. This becomes worrisome when the evidence from emerging economies is studied. As employment shares shift from agriculture to services, they typically bypass the traditional industrial and manufacturing sectors. While there remains no consensus on whether an expanding service sector necessarily weighs on economy-wide productivity growth, the question on whether declining manufacturing hinder overall growth remains open-ended.

    Consensus has been building amongst the academic and policy community around the premise that the disappearance of “high-quality” manufacturing jobs has led to worsened income inequality in advanced economies. Under the premise that less-skilled workers traditionally earned higher wages in manufacturing than in services, as economies shifted away from manufacturing, the shift of displaced manufacturing workers went towards low-skill and low-wage jobs in the service sector. This may have contributed to “hollowing out” of the income distribution and higher earnings inequality.

    A striking feature of structural transformation is the expansion of the service sector. The share of services in global employment has increased by about 16 percentage points since the 1970s. In advanced economies, this has largely been due to the flip side of the decline in manufacturing employment; in developing economies it mostly reflects a shift of labor from agriculture. Employment in non-market services (government, education, health) expanded rapidly in the group of advanced economies, contributing about one-third of the overall expansion in service employment since 1970. In developing economies, employment in market services contributed the lion’s share of the overall increase in service employment, with particularly large expansions in trade, construction and hotels and restaurants.

    In India, labour productivity tends to score very high in the service sector and relatively low in the agriculture sector.

    Gruss uses micro-level data from 20 advanced economies and studies labour income from household level surveys since the 1980s. Due to data limitations he looks at labour earnings and wages from industry as a whole, however manufacturing in most cases constitutes as much as two-thirds of industry. He finds that average gross wages remain higher for higher skilled jobs and labour inequality remains lower in industry as opposed to in services – however even in this sample, country-specific factors matter a lot.

    He then looks at how the shift of workers between industry and services affects the distribution of labour income. He does this stylised exercise assuming that all manufacturing jobs lost since the 1980s correspond to middle-skilled workers who moved to low-skill and low-wage jobs in services. He finds countries with a relatively high degree of earnings inequality within the service sector tend to have high inequality within the industrial sector as well. So changes in aggregate inequality in advanced economies may not necessarily be due losses of manufacturing jobs.

    Ajit Ranade, Chief Economist at the Aditya Birla Group, brought an Indian perspective to this global phenomenon saying in India while inequality has indeed been getting worse over the years, the contribution to inequality by manufacturing jobs migrating elsewhere is not as grave as it has been made out to be.

    In India, the manufacturing sector remains more egalitarian where the spread of earnings within manufacturing is not as unequal as financial services or other service sectors. One of the policy implications for India is that the transition from agriculture to services depends on the international tradability of services. Therefore, trade and immigration barriers have important ramifications on the future of jobs. Further, in today’s day and age there is a blurred line between what constitutes as a service versus manufacturing.

    [more-blog-posts]

    As a word of warning, Ranade stated that, any industrial sectors that would be characterised under manufacturing could actually be very heavily service-oriented, and any report should keep this in mind.

    Former deputy chairman of the Planning Commission Montek Singh Ahluwalia said while labour productivity in some sectors is comparable to manufacturing, in India, services are a residual sump of excess labour. While he considers the distinction between market and non-market service a good way to analyse the intra-sector differences, he said a similar distinction ought to be drawn in the manufacturing sector as well. In a diverse country like India, manufacturing includes a diverse mix of high-end product manufacturing to low-skilled employment generation.

    Hence, a lot of the inequality that we see in India is due to within-sector differences rather than cross-sector differences.

    Policy priorities for India hence involve focusing on skill development efforts to employment opportunities. The evidence-base for skill development programme impacts needs to be built extensively and the cross-fertilisation of ideas from other countries must be promoted.

    For example – Singapore as a country has had a very good track record of promoting impactful skill development. India could learn much from the lessons abroad.

    Reforms that boost productivity in all sectors should be separable from arguments that reduce employment. Policymakers need to design policies that understand the distinction between these two issues and while one might have a spillover effect on another, policy priorities should be clear.  So while displacement lies at the heart of this debate, the bottom line lies in promoting and pursuing overall high economic growth.

    Bibek Debroy echoed Ranade’s point about how modern manufacturing is implicitly often capital-intensive and is therefore unlikely to produce the kind of direct jobs.

    From a policy point of view, inequality in terms of the distribution in consumption expenditure doesn’t hold as much importance in the Indian context as does spatial or geographic inequality, he said. This refers to differences amongst states, districts and villages. As the radius of development expands to include more and more villages, inequalities between large and small villages is increasing, causing an impact on sectoral employment.

    As India prepares to create employment for its rapidly increasing working age population, the automation of production processes and move towards capital intensive production threaten employment for the low-skilled workforce. This has important implications on inequality and productivity which India must be mindful of as it progresses towards high middle economy status.

     

    The post Manufacturing jobs: Implications for productivity and inequality first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    513924
    Regulating a Digital Economy: An Indian Perspective http://stg.csep.org/blog/regulating-a-digital-economy-an-indian-perspective/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=regulating-a-digital-economy-an-indian-perspective Wed, 25 Apr 2018 12:11:33 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=508605 The “fourth industrial revolution” which has been characterised by end-to-end digitalisation has led to unprecedented increases in connectivity and data flows. By 2017, Asia had the largest number of internet users in the world, with 1.9 billion people online. Joshua Meltzer, Senior Fellow, Global Economy and Development at the Brookings Institution, spoke about regulating the digital economy at a Brookings India Development Seminar on April 20, 2018. In 2014 cross-border data flows were 45 times larger than in 2005, raising global gross domestic product (GDP) by approximately 3.5 per cent, equivalent to $2.8 trillion dollars in 2014. According to the […]

    The post Regulating a Digital Economy: An Indian Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The “fourth industrial revolution” which has been characterised by end-to-end digitalisation has led to unprecedented increases in connectivity and data flows. By 2017, Asia had the largest number of internet users in the world, with 1.9 billion people online.

    Joshua Meltzer, Senior Fellow, Global Economy and Development at the Brookings Institution, spoke about regulating the digital economy at a Brookings India Development Seminar on April 20, 2018.

    In 2014 cross-border data flows were 45 times larger than in 2005, raising global gross domestic product (GDP) by approximately 3.5 per cent, equivalent to $2.8 trillion dollars in 2014. According to the World Bank, it is expected that a 10 per cent increase in internet penetration in the exporting country would lead to a 1.9 per cent increase in exports. In fact, in the U.S. alone internet and data use increased GDP by 3.4-4.8 per cent, as per estimates of the United States International Trade Commission.

    In India, the digital economy is expected to contribute $550bn-$1tr in GDP by 2025, and add 1.5-2 million jobs by 2018 through its Digital India initiative.

    The economic opportunities from technologies such as cloud computing, big data and the internet of things are also not limited to the IT sector but are economy-wide, including in sectors such as manufacturing and agriculture, Meltzer argued based on his working paper “Regulating for a digital economy: Understanding the importance of cross-border data flows in Asia”.

    Over 40 per cent of India’s goods and services exports consist of software services and IT-enabled services (ITES) from financial analysis, accounting, medical transcription to the provision of applications for smartphones. Cross-border data flows remain vital for India’s exports of services.

    Governments, however, are increasingly introducing measures that restrict data flows.

    In order to build the digital economy, India will need to determine a fit-for-purpose regulation especially in privacy, consumer protection, intellectual property and financial regulation.

    Cross-border data flow restrictions can take one of several forms, from restrictions on data being transferred outside national borders and requiring prior consent for global transfers. According to a study by Bauer et al, the cost of proposed and enacted data localisation measures in India would reduce its GDP by 0.1 per cent.

    Meltzer argued that restrictions on cross-border data flows harm both the competitiveness of the country implementing the policies and other countries that rely on that data from those countries.

    In India, a few examples of government regulations and rules include the Information Technology Rules (2011) that limits cross-border transfer of sensitive personal data. The National Data Sharing and Accessibility Policy (2012) which requires government data be stored in India, particularly for cloud providers. The Companies (Accounts) Rules (2014) which requires backups of financial information, if stored overseas, to be stored in India. The National Telecom M2M roadmap (2015) which requires gateways and app servers that serve Indian customers to be located in India.

    Data flow restrictions are enacted with several goals in mind – from protecting citizens’ personal privacy, to ensuring national security and protecting local businesses. The capacity to move large quantities of data seamlessly and rapidly across borders can undermine domestic regulatory standards in areas such as privacy and consumer protection.

    Meltzer argued that such data restrictions limit access to digital commerce networks and online resources and the ability of businesses to synthesise large data sets, on a wider scale they affect business models, reduce productivity, innovation as well as business competitiveness by forcing businesses to invest in lower quality data facilities.

    So, while this wave of digitisation has massive economy wide positive impacts, data localisation could have massive economic costs, he added.

    Meltzer recommended that the realisation of legitimate regulatory goals such as privacy and security must happen alongside maximising the economic and trade opportunities cross-border data flows offer. The focus for regulators needs to be using existing technologies to harness economy-wide benefits.

    Robust domestic privacy laws that manage risks and maximise opportunities and the proper enforcement of security protocols through laws offer a way of ensuring data restrictions don’t negatively impact businesses and trade flows.

    At the centre of all of this lies building a trustworthy environment where mutual assistance is offered and data-sharing agreements and contracts are negotiated bilaterally and multilaterally. In essence, government backdoors that erode trust in the internet must be avoided under any circumstances.

    The discussants during the seminar provided unique perspectives and critiques to some of Meltzer’s arguments.

    Former diplomat Asoke Mukerji spoke about how interdependent countries were when it came to data flows. He focused on how in addition to maximising the impact of data flows for economic growth, India also needs to look at data and its flow in terms of its socio-economic sustainable development goals, anchored in its inclusive “Sabka saath, Sabka vikas” policy.

    The focus of data and data flows in India remains as much on the citizen as on the market, he said.

    Bringing an aspect of human nature as well as the issue of the concentration of data in the hands of a few private players, Mudit Kapoor, associate professor at the Indian Statistical Institute, warned of the pitfalls of this free market of digital data flows.

    He pointed out that flow of data is distinct from flow of goods and services across borders. This is largely due to the inter-relationship between industry and security concerns of each country. Given the asymmetry in data-sharing rules between companies and government agencies across the world, we are likely to over-simply the true and complex nature of international data flows by treating it like any other commodity or services.

    Kapoor also highlighted the markets for fake news and the limited capacity of the governments to regulate such markets. These can have phenomenal implications on institutions in democratic countries.

    Avik Sarkar, OSD of the Data Analytics Cell at NITI Aayog, spoke about the digitisation efforts of the government, giving examples of how machine-learning, artificial intelligence and big data analytics could help bring about profound impacts on policies and programmes, especially those in health and early disease prevention.

    In order to build the digital economy, India will need to determine a fit-for-purpose regulation especially in privacy, consumer protection, intellectual property and financial regulation. The big push needs to be from the top, ensuring governments at all levels – national, state and local — go digital and consider the delivery of services through digital technologies.

    Overall the vibrant debate on this forum and many alike on cross-border data flows in India remains a part of a larger global discussion on the need for an international framework to provide predictability, security and stability of cyberspace.

     

    The post Regulating a Digital Economy: An Indian Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    508605
    Is inflation dead? Development Seminar challenges conventional wisdom on declining inflation prices http://stg.csep.org/blog/is-inflation-dead-development-seminar-challenges-conventional-wisdom-on-declining-inflation-prices/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=is-inflation-dead-development-seminar-challenges-conventional-wisdom-on-declining-inflation-prices Wed, 18 Apr 2018 13:31:18 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=506678 Inflation in the U.S. has averaged 1.9 per cent between 1996 and 2009 while mean inflation rate in 21 advanced economies (AE), excluding the U.S., has averaged some 25 basis points lower than that. During a Brookings India Development Seminar, Surjit Bhalla, member of the Prime Minister’s Economic Advisory Council and Chairman, Oxus Research & Investments, argued that while much had been said about inflation decline since 2007, in reality it had set in around the mid-1990s. Based on a chapter of his new book The New Wealth of Nations, the seminar shed light on trends in inflation in advanced […]

    The post Is inflation dead? Development Seminar challenges conventional wisdom on declining inflation prices first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Inflation in the U.S. has averaged 1.9 per cent between 1996 and 2009 while mean inflation rate in 21 advanced economies (AE), excluding the U.S., has averaged some 25 basis points lower than that. During a Brookings India Development Seminar, Surjit Bhalla, member of the Prime Minister’s Economic Advisory Council and Chairman, Oxus Research & Investments, argued that while much had been said about inflation decline since 2007, in reality it had set in around the mid-1990s.

    Based on a chapter of his new book The New Wealth of Nations, the seminar shed light on trends in inflation in advanced and developing economies with a special focus on India. Sajjid Chinoy, Chief India Economist at JP Morgan, served as the discussant for the seminar.

    Conventional wisdom has dictated several determinants and causes of inflation. Most notable among these have been fiscal deficits, output gaps, crude prices, demography and dependency ratios. However, there is little evidence that supports many of these claims. Data, for example, shows that inflation decline coincided with the world’s largest increase in oil prices (point to point). However, in the decade of 1998-2008, when oil prices went up by a factor of 7, from $14.4 a barrel in 1998 to an average $100/barrel in 2008 and then a peak of $140 in 2008, inflation declined consistently and continuously.

    Given this, while inflation experiences vary across the world, according to Bhalla, two trends can explain the advent of declining inflation worldwide – the first in the 1970s in the wake of the OPEC and second, with the advent of “unlimited supply of skilled labour.”

    Dependency ratios and changes in demography explain some of declines in world inflation. When we look at declining shares of working age population across advanced economies, we see consistencies alongside structural declines in inflation. However, the most consistent explanation for the decline in inflation is the large increase in college graduates in the rest of the world compared to such supply in the West (advanced economies). To capture the influence of global labour supply, Bhalla constructed the simplest of all supply variables, the supply of college-educated labour in advanced economies relative to the supply in the rest of the world (also called the USSL or unlimited supply of skilled labour).

    Drawing from Arthur Lewis’ classic 1954 paper that spoke about the unlimited supply of unskilled labour constraining unskilled wages in developing economies from rising much above the subsistence wage, Bhalla looked at world trends over the last 20 years. He found something analogous to Arthur Lewis’ findings: there is an excess supply of skilled labour, and that is preventing the real wage from rising in the developed world.

    Labelled as “Arthur Lewis meet Gary Becker”, this model presents a thought-provoking and ingenious approach to explaining the inflation slowdown. It highlights a very different, and heretofore underappreciated, dimension of globalisation: the injection of highly-skilled labour versus the conventional wisdom of low-skilled labour, technology and capital.

    A similar story exists in the Indian context. When Bhalla tested the Reserve Bank of India’s quarterly model of inflation with output gap, oil price inflation, repo rate, rural wage growth, and lagged consumer price index (CPI) inflation as independent variables, he found none of the variables to be significant at the 10 per cent level, except lagged inflation.

    While he did not get into the supply of college graduates in India, he did test some conventional wisdom about the determinants of Indian inflation.

    Bhalla expanded the conventional model to include minimum support prices and found statistically significant results. Expanding the model further, he found that procurement prices and rural wage growth were the two most important determinants of Indian inflation over time, with the impact of procurement prices diminishing with time, especially over the last three years.

    Sajjid Chinoy offered to expand this current model to include core rather than headline inflation, accounting and controlling (if necessary) for structural breaks as well as using an “augmented Phillips Curve” approach, controlling for inflations expectations and slack.

    So while the reasons for inflation slowdown in the world and India maybe manifold and while there may not be consensus on which variables are determining this trend, Bhalla’s views leave us with much food for thought.

    The post Is inflation dead? Development Seminar challenges conventional wisdom on declining inflation prices first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    506678
    How to solve issue of rising non-performing assets in Indian public sector banks http://stg.csep.org/blog/how-to-solve-issue-of-rising-non-performing-assets-in-indian-public-sector-banks/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=how-to-solve-issue-of-rising-non-performing-assets-in-indian-public-sector-banks Thu, 01 Mar 2018 11:25:54 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=494266 The Indian banking system is beleaguered with non-performing assets (NPAs). According to the Reserve Bank of India’s Financial Stability Report of December 2017, they currently stand at 10.2 per cent of all assets, while stressed assets, which are believed to be NPAs in effect, stand at 12.8 per cent. Related frauds amount to INR 612.6 billion in the last five financial years and governance failures on account of integrity and competence issues plague the banking system. Brookings India recently organised a roundtable in Mumbai on NPA resolution; participants ranged from a former Deputy Governor of the RBI, to bankers from […]

    The post How to solve issue of rising non-performing assets in Indian public sector banks first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The Indian banking system is beleaguered with non-performing assets (NPAs). According to the Reserve Bank of India’s Financial Stability Report of December 2017, they currently stand at 10.2 per cent of all assets, while stressed assets, which are believed to be NPAs in effect, stand at 12.8 per cent. Related frauds amount to INR 612.6 billion in the last five financial years and governance failures on account of integrity and competence issues plague the banking system.

    Brookings India recently organised a roundtable in Mumbai on NPA resolution; participants ranged from a former Deputy Governor of the RBI, to bankers from public and private sectors, asset reconstruction companies to rating agencies, IMF representatives to financial journalists and academics. In a wide-spanning discussion, a few key themes emerged: the privatisation and governance of public sector banks, the governance and regulatory practices of the RBI and reengineering of banking practices.

    i) Public Sector Banks:

    Public Sector Banks (PSBs) constitute over 70 per cent of the banking system and are in a state of crisis. Participants believed that fundamental reforms tended to happen when crisis hit and this was an opportune moment for such reforms and expressed optimism that this was likely under this government.

    • Privatisation: Nationalisation of banks in the 1970s was undertaken by then Prime Minister Indira Gandhi. The “original sin” as it was called, was considered necessary at the time, given the collusion between industry and finance then. South Korea is another example where state-owned banks have disciplined chaebols, rather than capitulating to political pressure. PSBs have led to a financial deepening in the country. That said, the umbilical cord connecting the PSBs to politicians and bureaucrats, which in turn stems from the ownership structure of PSBs, has led to  several inefficiencies including (i) disempowered boards, (ii) muted incentives for senior management to effect organisational change, (iii) cloning of PSBs and the resultant systemic risks due to continual bureaucratic meddling, (iv) external vigilance enforcement causing paralysed decision-making, on the one hand, and widespread frauds and endemic corruption, on the other hand, (v) opacity at various levels, as well as (vi) distortions in human resource management. Diversified market ownership could bring market discipline to PSBs. Options for privatisation include the following:
      • Bank Holding Company structure: The bank holding company (BHC) structure recommended by the P.J. Nayak Committee, among others, involves divesting the government’s shareholding to below 52 per cent and routing it through a holding company. This one level of distance would not help unless the BHC was itself professionally managed.
      • Sovereign Wealth Fund: Rather than the proceeds of privatisation going to the Consolidated Fund of India, a sovereign wealth fund could be created which is professionally managed. This could help “trickle down” good governance practices to PSBs.
      • Hive off social sector lending vehicle: The political economy of privatisation remains complex, at least in part because of social sector lending programmes routed through PSBs. Accordingly, it may be useful to consider hiving off all agricultural and social sector lending into a separate entity which may be government owned and controlled and allow the corporate lending part of the PSBs to be privatised. There is an economic rationale for this as well. PSBs (and indeed all banks) are required to lend 40 per cent of their assets to “priority sectors.” Priority Sector Lending (PSL) is deemed unprofitable for several banks leading to a “PSL drag.” On the other hand, microfinance non-banking finance companies (NBFC MFIs) have a cap on their earnings margins. Accordingly, the decoupling of PSL and market lending may allow market distortions in both these sectors to be corrected.
      • Recapitalise, Reform and then privatise: PSBs in their current state of impaired balance sheets are unlikely to find any takers. By the same token, recapitalising PSBs repeatedly creates moral hazard issues. Recapitalisation and governance reform can enhance market valuations of PSBs and should lead to a path for privatisation without accusations of “selling off the family silver.”
      • Single Big Bank? The idea of a single large PSB mimicking the Life Insurance Corporation of India model in the insurance space may be considered, but such an entity could create serious distortions, such as moral hazard stemming from the too-big-to-fail syndrome, with the next biggest bank being on-fourth its size.
      • “Bad Bank”: The idea of a single bad bank where the NPAs of all PSBs may be transferred as a silver bullet to clean up PSB balance sheets must be rejected. Currently, 11 of 21 listed PSB banks are under RBI’s prompt corrective action framework and simply consolidating all NPAs would create an additional level of complexity.

    The umbilical cord connecting public sector banks to politicians and bureaucrats, which in turn stems from the ownership structure of these banks, has led to several inefficiencies.

    • Governance reforms: Privatisation is, however no panacea. There are multiple other governance reforms that must be undertaken in PSBs.
      • Nayak Committee: Should privatisation not be on the table, the government should back the recommendations of the Nayak Committee. Presently, only lip service is being done to them by way of example, the Bank Boards Bureau (BBB) uses the nomenclature of the Nayak Committee but none of its substantive governance reforms have been implemented. For example, all the governance functions including selection of bank chairpersons continues to be controlled by the Ministry of Finance.
      • Role, purpose and business strategy: PSBs suffer from a severe identity crisis and require business, not just financial, restructuring. They do not operate as commercial banks and do not have a coherent business strategy or vision. The Ministry of Finance must ascertain whether this is the best use of public money. It is crucial to clarify the role and purpose of PSBs and for them to concentrate on specific regions or business segments. By way of example, it is unclear why certain PSBs have branches in South Africa, why a Punjab-based PSB has branches in the North-East. The need for existence of each PSB must be clear and its business and expansion should follow that. This would also force an evaluation of whether PSL lending has been effective.
      • Term lengths: The terms of bank chairpersons must be elongated in order to effect meaningful changes and to hold them accountable. Presently, it is observed that as the Chairpersons of State Bank of India (SBI) change, there is an NPA “bloat”- the outgoing chairperson tends to backload NPAs, which obscures the situation of PSB bank balance sheets. (For instance, SBI posted a loss of INR 24 billion in the last quarter on account NPA provisioning). Terms of chairpersons should align with the life of the loan, which would allow defaults to be detected and penalties to be meted out as required.
      • Professionalise, Incentivise – Incentives for PSB personnel must be significantly augmented. The SBI chairman’s salary is equal to that of a fresh business graduate in an MNC bank. Better incentive structures will attract better talent.[more-blog-posts]
      • Penalise for wrongdoing: Although vigilance mechanisms exist, lax enforcement means that wrongdoing is rarely penalized. For instance, the Chairman of Syndicate Bank who was bribed by the promoters of Bhushan Steel was in jail for barely a few months and has not been convicted as yet.
      • Rotation of staff: The Punjab National Bank fraud demonstrates the extent of operational and risk management failures in PSBs. Improvements to HR practices can help mitigate egregious behavior like frauds. For instance, PSBs tend to man the business verticals with the brightest talent and less competent staff in the inspection and supervision roles. If officers are rotated in these roles, this could not only strengthen the supervision of banks, it would also mean that staff on the business development side have experience in supervision and inspection and will therefore self-regulate better.
      • Credit appraisal, monitoring: Basic principles of credit appraisal and monitoring are obviated in PSBs and must be sharpened, to diagnose defects of capital, business purpose and character.

    Public sector banks suffer from a severe identity crisis and require business, not just financial, restructuring.

    ii) RBI governance and regulation

    The RBI as a regulator has had qualified success in the face of structural impediments, including limited control over PSBs. RBI’s internal governance as well as its regulation of NPAs needs improvement.

    • Subsidiarisation: The RBI may consider the Bank of England model of subsidiarising its prudential regulatory and supervision functions (the Prudential Regulatory Authourity and the Financial Conduct Authority). However, the recognition that lost synergies from such separation contributed to the global financial crisis demands caution.
    • Strengthening supervisory capacity: RBI lacks supervisory capacity to conduct forensic audits and this must be strengthened with human as well as technological resources.
    • Preventing Evergreening: RBI regulations have permitted banks to “ever-green” and in effect delay the recognition and therefore resolution of NPAs. RBI regulations must take away incentives of banks to kick the can down the road and “extend and pretend”. This has led to a seizure of new lending and the caving in of credit culture. The recent RBI circular does remove such incentives by ending all other schemes such as CDR that allowed evergreening, which would lead to fewer delays in provisioning. This in turn, would require the recapitalisation of PSBs, which must not be carried out without the reforms set out above.

    iii) Reengineering of banking systems

    • Secondary Market: A vibrant secondary market for NPAs is crucial. The lack of transparency in price of the assets is holding this back, as is the lack of autonomy in PSBs and the fear of vigilance action.
    • Concurrent Audit: There is a real rot in the internal and concurrent audit systems of banks. The latter is intended to red flag risks in real time, but has failed and must be shored up.
    • Diagnostics for willful default: Banks need better permanent diagnostics to get to the bottom of willful defaults. This can happen though (a) market intelligence; (b) funds flow analysis; and (c) financial analysis. Most promoters do not have sufficient “skin in the game” and rely entirely on bank borrowing.
    • Using technology for maker-checker: Currently, the maker-checker systems require human intervention and are therefore prone to capture and corruption. The use of Artificial Intelligence for the supervision of financial transactions could prevent financial fraud. In addition, linking Core Banking Systems (CBS) with Finacle technology (as recently required by RBI) is crucial.
    • Combine with low tech – ears on the ground: Business intelligence must use traditional means- speaking to people in the industry; supplier and customers can be an invaluable source of financial information.

    iv) Bright Spots

    Amidst the gloom, the functioning of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Code) is cause for optimism. The Code was passed an implemented in 13 months, which is faster even when compared to Singapore’s amendments to its insolvency law. The Code is also being implemented in full speed- 50 per cent of all NPAs are currently being resolved through the Code, another 25 per cent will soon be. The judiciary has been following the (very tight) timelines prescribed by the Code.

    The post How to solve issue of rising non-performing assets in Indian public sector banks first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    494266
    Aid wars: U.S.-Soviet competition in India http://stg.csep.org/blog/aid-wars-u-s-soviet-competition-in-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=aid-wars-u-s-soviet-competition-in-india Thu, 01 Mar 2018 07:29:24 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=494243 The issue of development aid has significant contemporary relevance. Today, many longstanding donor countries like the United States debate the efficacy of aid, while new donors such as China and India explore the possibility of using economic assistance for political purposes. As David Engerman, Professor of History at Brandeis University, shows in his new book The Price of Aid, development politics can have significant – often unintentional and undesirable – effects for both donor and recipient countries. Much of Engerman’s narrative focuses on India, and explores how different domestic constituencies used the two superpowers to advance their own economic and […]

    The post Aid wars: U.S.-Soviet competition in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The issue of development aid has significant contemporary relevance. Today, many longstanding donor countries like the United States debate the efficacy of aid, while new donors such as China and India explore the possibility of using economic assistance for political purposes. As David Engerman, Professor of History at Brandeis University, shows in his new book The Price of Aid, development politics can have significant – often unintentional and undesirable – effects for both donor and recipient countries.

    Much of Engerman’s narrative focuses on India, and explores how different domestic constituencies used the two superpowers to advance their own economic and political objectives. Among the individuals who played important roles were the statistician P.C. Mahalanobis and Homi Bhabha, who headed India’s atomic energy programme. Both courted the United States and Soviet Union at the same time, and tried to advance their personal ambitions along with their broader objective of furthering India’s development.

    India, particularly initially, was deeply ambivalent about aid, but saw utility at various points of time.

    The campus of Mahalanobis’s Indian Statistical Institute (ISI) in Calcutta hosted such Cold War figures as U.S. Vice President Lyndon B. Johnson, Cuban revolutionary Che Guevara, and Soviet statesman Alexei Kosygin, as well as three of the first four winners of the Nobel Prize in Economics. Meanwhile, Bhabha used his direct contacts with Washington to Moscow (even hosting delegations from the two countries at the same time in February 1960) to sidestep Indian government agencies such as the Planning Commission and the Cabinet.

    Similar development politics played out in other sectors such as agriculture, oil, and defence. India tried to be – in the words of the prominent Polish economist Michal Kalecki – the “clever calf that suckles from two cows.” But instead India incurred significant costs in the process in the form of donor leverage. Nor was there a significant improvement in India’s economic condition.

    Following the second Five Year Plan in 1956, India’s foreign exchange reserves collapsed, and the country required loans from a consortium led by the United States and the World Bank.

    India, particularly initially, was deeply ambivalent about aid, but saw utility at various points of time. The freedom struggle had made India inclined towards import substitution and pessimistic about the prospects of exports. Various ministries felt differently about this, leading to sharp differences about the benefits of foreign assistance within the Cabinet.

    Even technical assistance was viewed with a great deal of scepticism: the assistance that contributed to the Green Revolution was perceived in some quarters as an excuse to increase U.S. fertiliser exports to India.

    Later, some of India’s objections to foreign assistance diminished because of strategic considerations. For example, an agreement for Soviet MiG combat aircraft was concluded with the mistaken belief that it would help deter China.

    At other points, India was dragged into the domestic politics and economics of the superpowers.

    Once he began to harbour presidential ambitions, Senator John F. Kennedy reached out to India and advocated increased aid to the country to appease the left wing of the Democratic Party, for whom India was a darling.

    Similarly, U.S. food aid to India was often a product of oversupply rather than altruism. All the while, U.S. and Soviet officials spoke the common language of helping to “put India on its own two feet.”

    But just as development aid had unexpected and significant consequences for India, Engerman argues that the aid policies of the United States and Soviet Union were both primarily defined by the India experience. Essentially both Washington and Moscow learned about the politics and economics of development aid – the potential and the pitfalls – from the process of dealing with India.

    This was reflected in the changing nature of U.S. aid to India. U.S. assistance began with community development programs in the early 1950s, when technical assistance trainers were sent to Indian villages.

    India was the largest recipient of U.S. community development assistance during this time. But while big on rhetoric and goodwill, it was accompanied by relatively little financial assistance (just 6 cents per beneficiary per year).

    In the early 1960s, India asked the Kennedy Administration for funds that were unlinked to projects in order to finance imports, so called “free money.” But instead, as the Cold War heated up, aid became increasingly linked to outcomes and was subject to narrower U.S. conditions, such as on family planning, food aid, and reduced Indian criticism of the Vietnam War.

    In other words, project aid initially meant to develop the Indian economy gradually evolved to programme aid whose express purpose was to shape Indian policy. The changing nature of U.S. assistance increased donor leverage and therefore presented new challenges to the Indian policy-making community. Among other consequences, it helped ensure that very little technological transfer took place.

    Similarly, the Soviet approach to economic cooperation in the developing world began with India in the 1950s and was largely driven by Indian conditions. Over time, it eventually assumed a very different character from U.S. aid.

    Washington and Moscow learned about the politics and economics of development aid – the potential and the pitfalls – from the process of dealing with India.

    During the visit of Soviet leader Nikolai Khrushchev to India, the U.S.S.R. pulled off something of a coup with an agreement to support a steel plant in Bhilai in Madhya Pradesh. This was the first plan of Soviet assistance outside the Communist Bloc, and represented a move away from the relative economic isolationism of the Stalin years.

    Ironically, India had sought Japanese and West German assistance before turning to the Soviets, and even the Soviet project at Bhilai benefited from components and services provided by Western companies.

    The shock of the Bhilai announcement forced the United States to increase its support for India, but the Soviet Union soon ran into problems as its own economic growth began to slow. Gradually, Moscow discovered that it had an advantage over the United States in being more open to industrial licensing, which meant that military assistance to India came to predominate.

    This was accelerated by the U.S. cut-off of military support during the 1965 India-Pakistan War. Yet, over time, as the technological gap between the United States and Soviet Union widened, India found that the over-dependence on Soviet military assistance put it at a disadvantage.

    [more-blog-posts]

     

    The post Aid wars: U.S.-Soviet competition in India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    494243
    Commercial coal mining in India: A possible but not irrefutable game changer http://stg.csep.org/blog/commercial-coal-mining-in-india-a-possible-but-not-irrefutable-game-changer/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=commercial-coal-mining-in-india-a-possible-but-not-irrefutable-game-changer https://www.brookings.edu/?p=494234 The recent Cabinet decision to open up coal mining to commercial miners, who will now have the freedom to sell coal in the open market, is an interesting development. For decades since its nationalisation, the public sector Coal India Limited (CIL) has dominated coal production in India, producing some 82 per cent of Indian domestic coal (figures from financial year 2014-15), and becoming the largest coal miner in the world by production. CIL is also the single largest employer in the mining sector in India, and the only one allowed to sell coal in the market (besides Singareni Collieries Company […]

    The post Commercial coal mining in India: A possible but not irrefutable game changer first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The recent Cabinet decision to open up coal mining to commercial miners, who will now have the freedom to sell coal in the open market, is an interesting development.

    For decades since its nationalisation, the public sector Coal India Limited (CIL) has dominated coal production in India, producing some 82 per cent of Indian domestic coal (figures from financial year 2014-15), and becoming the largest coal miner in the world by production.

    CIL is also the single largest employer in the mining sector in India, and the only one allowed to sell coal in the market (besides Singareni Collieries Company Limited or SCCL, the second-largest producer but an order of magnitude smaller in size).

    With this latest development, decision-makers expect private players to bring in competition along with private investment, technology adoption and international best practices.

    There are three key questions to consider with this decision:

    • Is this needed? What are the specific objectives for allowing new entrants? If they produce output, is that growth or displacement of other miners? If it is the latter, will the produce by “superior” in terms of cost, environmental impact, etc.?
    • Will global players want to come in? This has two main components – the opportunity (linked to point 1) and the rules of the game (linked to point 2).
    • What do we need to think through to make this a success? More than just the rules of the game for coal miners, which are critical, what else matters at an ecosystem level?

    As of the financial year 2016-17, 34 of Coal India Limited’s mining projects were delayed, mainly due to problems in getting forest clearances and land acquisition.

    A number of these issues are complex, and the long-term future of coal demand is evolving due to energy transitions towards cleaner fuels, but immediate reactions to these three issues above suggest the need for clarity or need to take action on the below points (a non-exhaustive list):

    • What type of projects are planned and where? Greenfield projects take extensive time, and are also subject to process and bureaucratic challenges, especially relating to environmental clearances and land (often secondary land, not the mine itself). If we assume all the best mines are already producing, these are then more likely remote or higher-effort (more overburden removal) mines.
    • Are the mines of the right size? Global players focus on economies of scale with large mechanisation. Their preference, if not requirement, is for mines much larger than the majority of mines India and even CIL-operated blocks.
    • How prepared are the mine documents? If technical details are not clear, proper valuation is difficult, raising risks.
    • What is the allocation process? The default has been auctions, but the experience of previous rounds has ranged from “irrational exuberance” to ignoring them. Even auctions have a lot of options, and the unnecessary complexity in the past has not helped (e.g., the reverse + forward bids for the power sector).
    • Streamlining process bottlenecks. As of the financial year 2016-17, 34 of CIL’s mining projects were delayed, mainly due to problems in getting forest clearances and land acquisition. Gathering the necessary approvals and licences from various authorities (local as well as central) will be a far higher challenge for private entities.
    • Creating a level-playing field. Public sector units (PSUs) have been given allocations, and there has been another process for the private sector to bid for captive In addition to this are distortions between thermal coal for power and non-power users. If the input cost structures are different, this leaves little room for output competitiveness just on the basis of efficiency. At the extreme, it may reduce interest in mining.All of these issues can be considered a subject of coal pricing complexities. Regulated rate of return is one option. Markets are another. They are both justifiable and used around the world. What is much harder is when both operate together. Instead of the best of both worlds, we risk the worst of both worlds, e.g., through cherry-picking.
    • What about the buyer and transporter? While part of the worry about coal plants depends on power sector dynamics, issues of contracts, power purchase agreements, and linkages (Fuel Supply Agreements) need improvements, without which we may end up having a non-level-playing field.
    • Policy consistency and removing subjectivity. Too many projects in coal and allied fields have faced commercial challenges due to what is ostensibly “change in law.” Some changes are technical, leading to improved products or process, but these have a cost that ultimately is borne by some stakeholder in the value chain. Some changes are simply contractual or legislative, and at the very least, they must reflect holistic planning.

    Changing norms after the fact is contentious in India, and when this happens with commercial bids and projects often ends up in the courts. We suggest spending more time in planning, with open-ended multi-stakeholder consultation, displacing the model of execute first and details later. Like many things, the devil is in the details.

    So much discussion, of course, focuses on what happens if this does not work or fails? Maybe we also need a separate discussion on what happens if it works? Schumpeter reminds us about creative destruction – maybe positive, but with its own heartache, winners, and losers.

    [more-blog-posts]

    The post Commercial coal mining in India: A possible but not irrefutable game changer first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    494234
    Is future planning of electricity grid keeping India’s pace of development in mind? http://stg.csep.org/blog/is-future-planning-of-electricity-grid-keeping-indias-pace-of-development-in-mind/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=is-future-planning-of-electricity-grid-keeping-indias-pace-of-development-in-mind https://www.brookings.edu/?p=494230 A seminar and discussion at Brookings India recently focused on the impact of electrification on the electricity demand growth and also included insights from global experiences and the possible policy implications for India. Key speaker at this event was Johannes Urpelainen of Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies and Founding Director of the Initiative for Sustainable Energy Policy (ISEP). Urpelainen discussed insights from global and Indian electrification efforts, with a focus on Asian countries. As of 2016, 80 per cent of India’s population was electrified as compared to 55 per cent in 2001. This growth in electrification was highest […]

    The post Is future planning of electricity grid keeping India’s pace of development in mind? first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    A seminar and discussion at Brookings India recently focused on the impact of electrification on the electricity demand growth and also included insights from global experiences and the possible policy implications for India. Key speaker at this event was Johannes Urpelainen of Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies and Founding Director of the Initiative for Sustainable Energy Policy (ISEP). Urpelainen discussed insights from global and Indian electrification efforts, with a focus on Asian countries.

    As of 2016, 80 per cent of India’s population was electrified as compared to 55 per cent in 2001. This growth in electrification was highest as compared to other Southeast Asian, Sub-Saharan Africa and other developing countries. It was mainly driven by the extension of grid in contrast to some of the Sub-Saharan African countries where electrification was mainly achieved by distributed generation. India has undertaken massive strides in household-level wiring for electrification in the last few years.

    Key insights and discussion

    Energy Ladder

    There are several assumptions-based energy economic models for estimating electricity demand in a country. However, these models tend to underestimate the demand growth with the gain in electricity access. More specifically, they are not good at predicting when there could be a sharp jump in demand based on appliance and device ownership.

    Evidence from Haiti, Kenya, Uganda and even from India shows that household electricity access starts from a very basic level of electricity consumption with a simple load of lighting (which itself is decreasing due to LEDs) and a charging point. Studies show that underlying economic distributions help predict how much coincidence there might be in jumps in demand.

    Rural electrification in China started in 1949 from zero to 68 per cent of rural households electrified in 1968 even before the start of economic reforms there.

    Given that India has a large base of relatively poor at various stages of development, this suggests a large latent and unmet demand for electricity. The geographical distribution of these demands and associated level and pace of development can pose a significant challenge to the grid if the supply planning does not take these factors into account.

    Evidence from China and others

    China is important for two reasons.  First, it is one of the only countries of a scale relevant to India. Second, it has successfully pursued almost 100 per cent household electrification, faster than any other country adjusting for scale. Rural electrification in China started in 1949 from zero to 68 per cent of rural households electrified in 1968 even before the start of economic reforms there.

    In the next two decades, by 1997, almost all (97 per cent) rural households were electrified.

    The electrification process was mainly driven by the distributed small hydro systems, and later these distributed systems were connected to make a national grid.

    The per capita electricity demand in rural areas of China increased from 168 kWh in 1993 to 404 kWh in 2002. The main driver for this increased demand was the rising level of income which led to a higher share of appliance ownership. Washing machine ownership share among the rural population of China rose to 37.3 per cent in 2004 from 9.1 per cent in 1990.

    Vietnam’s electrification story also shows a similar trend. With no rural electrification in 1975 because of the infrastructure destruction linked to the Vietnam war, the country reached 50 per cent national electrification in 1996 and 96 per cent in 2009.

    During this period, the country’s per capita electricity demand increased to nearly 300kWh in 2009 starting from a negligible base in 1975. Relatedly, in 2008, 83 per cent of Vietnam’s rural population had a colour television, 75 per cent had a fan and 55 per cent had rice cookers.

    These two case studies of rural electrification of China and Vietnam emphasise that with higher levels of income and reliable service, appliance ownership increases, thus leading to higher demand for electricity.

    Discussion video and speaker’s bio

    The post Is future planning of electricity grid keeping India’s pace of development in mind? first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    494230
    Facebook Chat on India-US relations http://stg.csep.org/blog/facebook-chat-on-india-us-relations/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=facebook-chat-on-india-us-relations Tue, 27 Jun 2017 06:08:33 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=opinion&p=419595 Q: Dhruva, according to you which sectors will be the focus of the India-U.S. dialogue? Dhruva: Thanks for your question. The India-U.S. agenda is very broad, and will remain so. In the official meetings this weekend a lot will come up, including trade, immigration, security, etc. I suspect the meeting between Modi and Trump will be more focused, and on the positive elements, in a bit to set a positive tone. Thus, strategic affairs (Indian Ocean, Afghanistan), defence ties, possibly energy could be discussed, as well as how much India is investing in the U.S. and creating jobs. Q: Wouldn’t […]

    The post Facebook Chat on India-US relations first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Q: Dhruva, according to you which sectors will be the focus of the India-U.S. dialogue?

    Dhruva: Thanks for your question. The India-U.S. agenda is very broad, and will remain so. In the official meetings this weekend a lot will come up, including trade, immigration, security, etc. I suspect the meeting between Modi and Trump will be more focused, and on the positive elements, in a bit to set a positive tone. Thus, strategic affairs (Indian Ocean, Afghanistan), defence ties, possibly energy could be discussed, as well as how much India is investing in the U.S. and creating jobs.

    Q: Wouldn’t you consider Afghanistan a sore point given that the US has very recently woken up to the fact that India is a responsible stakeholder and should have a say in the future of Afghanistan?

    Dhruva: There has been a lot of ambivalence on the part of the U.S. about India’s role in Afghanistan, which swings between concern (believing that India’s presence creates insecurities in Pakistan and justifies that country’s support for terrorist groups) and complaints that India is not doing enough. The pendulum has swung quite clearly onto one side now, and the U.S. has become more outspoken about welcoming India’s civilian and military support. The level of coordination between Washington and New Delhi on Afghanistan has also increased. The past is the past, and while there were sharper differences before, it’s now an area of growing convergence and cooperation.

    Q: Kenneth Juster’s possible appointment as US Ambassador to India is being seen as a reprimand to him for his pro-globalization views. Although he is the right man to have in New Delhi, would he have enough capital to argue India’s case for more jobs and better defense cooperation?

    Dhruva: Good question. No one is doubting that Juster is qualified and capable. He has a private sector background, worked on defense export controls in the Bush administration, understands international economics and has a strategic bent. But if he’s leaving the White House under a cloud, it might not augur well for his clout within the system. Still, on balance, he’s probably a better pick than many other ambassadorial choices that have been made to other countries (who are often donors), even if his views may not always be on the same page as the Trump Administration’s.

    Q: What are the ramifications of US approving the deal to sell India 22 drones in the backdrop of Modi visiting Washington?

    Dhruva: Drones are one technology that India has been seeking for some time, but has been complicated by concerns and sensitivities in the U.S. Congress. Unmanned drones are seen as an important step to much more complex systems. It’s a technology that India has a lot of uses for, including counter-terrorism and reconnaissance.

    Q: How will Modi deal with conventional issues like the H1B1 visas. A conventional issue that recent PMs haven’t had to deal with.

    Dhruva: I’m not sure this makes sense for Modi to bring up in a one-on-one meeting with Trump, for a number of reasons. One is this falls as much to the U.S. Congress, as it requires legislative changes. Two, it is as likely to provoke a harsher response as lead to a productive outcome. So while officials on both sides will discuss it, and have been over the past several months, it’s unlikely to be raised at the highest levels.

    Q: Would the ongoing Russia investigation have any tangible impact on the talks?

    Dhruva: It certainly has weakened Trump’s position domestically, and it could be that he’ll be politically embattled for some time. But India’s position is that it has to deal with whoever is in power in the United States today, and that is Trump. Support for India is, however, broad, and there will be engagements with other elements in Washington as well, including Vice President Pence, members of the cabinet, and the U.S. Congress, which has long had a moderating influence on India policy (for better and for worse!).

    Q: Under Trump what is future of US pivot to Asia strategy and role of India in it , knowing Trump seems to be closer to China than any partner or ally, or middle power alliance time has come. Can India and US still think of taking bilateral trade to $500 billions once John Kerry talked about, or now we shall see a US asking what you can do for us. India has an ambitious climate change target can we fulfill without US, knowing GCF fund of $100 billion annual now look impossible. Can we make a strategic alliance without economic co-operation, knowing a strong military only possible if one has strong domestic economy? TPP was one such move to not just challenge China in terms of military might but also hit them on their economy.

    Dhruva: The U.S. pivot to Asia is closely affiliated with Trump’s predecessor, Barack Obama. While not calling that, he has hinted at a bigger military role in Asia, including through increases in the budget. At the same time, he has withdrawn from the Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP) which the Obama administration saw as the economic linchpin of the pivot. Much will now hinge on the Trump administration’s approach to China, which is still in flux. Modi will probably seek some kind of clarity on that front. Trade is problematic for a number of reasons, but there is less of an appetite for trade deals in most countries than in the past. On climate, Modi has indicated a willingness to go forward with India’s targets, regardless of the U.S. withdrawal. Given the decreased costs of clean energy and decreased costs of capital, Indian emissions will continue to decelerate, and emissions from the US are likely to go down even further.

    Q: Will climate be on agenda considering the US withdrawal from the Paris agreement, citing India and China as reasons? If it is discussed, should India justify the disparity in the targets which were to be achieved by the agreement?

    Dhruva: The U.S. has made its position clear on climate change by withdrawing form Paris. A few caveats: many state governments and U.S. corporations that are major emitters have not followed suit. Similarly, the Indian government – specifically, Modi and External Affairs Minister Sushma Swaraj – have made India’s position clear. I’d be surprised if climate change is brought up in person by Modi with Trump, unless Trump brings it up first and Modi clarifies what India’s position is (which is that it’s not contingent upon billions of dollars from America). The economics of clean energy and renewables – and financing mechanisms – have changed so much in the past couple of years as to make emissions targets more achievable. It’s quite likely that U.S. emissions will continue to fall despite Trump’s withdrawal from Paris.

    Q: Will there be any announcement on F16 deal as few online reports mentioned that LM will manufacturer F16 only if it wins contract ?..Can we also expect any mention of Pak sponsored terrorism in the Joint Statement ?..Finally, what can we expect from H-1B visa issue..

    Dhruva: (1) I’d be sceptical of some of the news reports you’ll see about defence deals. The single engine fighter tender is still open and there is a process. The recent announcement in Paris was meant only to make one particular bid more attractive, and should not be seen as a sign of an imminent contract. (2) There will 100% be a mention of terrorism in the joint statement, since it’s a high priority for both governments. I’d be surprised if Pakistan is mentioned, given the U.S. position, but as in years past, it is quite possible that Pakistan-based groups will be mentioned specifically. If Pakistan is mentioned, it would be a very strong signal on Washington’s part. (3) I’ve addressed the H-1B issue in another answer: it involves the U.S. Congress and is politically sensitive. While Indian and U.S. officials will be discussing it (and have over the past several months) I don’t see any wisdom in Modi raising it with Trump.

    Q: Trump govt is preparing its strategy for Afghanistan. What would be the US expectation from India in this regard? What India would be able to provide?

    Dhruva:  India is already a major provider of civilian assistance to Afghanistan. It is the 5th largest aid provider, it has built the Salma Dam and Afghan parliament, it’s trained 4000 Afghan security force officers, and there are 16,000 Afghan students in India. It is important for India to highlight its contributions, and not just to Trump. Beyond that, the question is what can India do to support security efforts in Afghanistan. I suspect providing military hardware (beyond four second-hand helicopters) could be on the table, and increased training. But Indian troops in Afghanistan may be a step too far. Troop numbers are no longer much of an issue – the U.S. presence has dwindled and the ANSF has built up over time. But highlighting extant Indian efforts, and perhaps increased military assistance in the form of equipment and training may be in the offing.

    Q:  How will Modi deal with the fact that Trump singled out India and China as the ‘freeloaders’ of the Paris Accords?

    Dhruva:  External Affairs Minister Sushma Swaraj did respond to that, and the Indian government has made it clear that Trump’s view is mistaken – India’s participation in the Paris Accord is not contingent about “billions and billions and billions of dollars,” as Trump said. I doubt climate change cooperation will feature prominently in the face-to-face meeting between Modi and Trump, but further cooperation on energy – including U.S. gas exports to India – could very well come up, as a potentially beneficial deal for both countries.

    Q: What can we expect from the joint statement of Modi and Trump!!

    Dhruva: Much of that is being hammered out in the days and hours before Modi and Trump meet on Monday. We could be in for some surprises. Areas of natural convergence will feature: terrorism, freedom of navigation, Afghanistan. Lot of the usual language about the importance of each country for the other. I’d keep a particular eye out for something on the Indian Ocean region. On bilateral issues, perhaps defense and energy. But the real question is how much detail the two sides will go into. Sweeping statements are one thing, but more detail on any of these matters would be a positive.

    [related-posts]

    The post Facebook Chat on India-US relations first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    419595
    Growing the U.S.-India economic relationship: The only way forward http://stg.csep.org/blog/growing-the-u-s-india-economic-relationship-the-only-way-forward/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=growing-the-u-s-india-economic-relationship-the-only-way-forward Thu, 22 Jun 2017 19:21:17 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=419089 The June 26 White House meeting between Prime Minister Narendra Modi of India and United States President Donald Trump will be an opportunity to reaffirm America’s commitment to deeper bilateral economic ties and to signal support for India, an economic and demographic powerhouse in Asia. While starkly different, the two leaders are both strong nationalists, with Modi pushing a “Make in India” agenda while Trump is all about “America First.” Can they find common ground and advance their agendas to mutual advantage? We think it’s possible, if they play their cards astutely. Under both Republican and Democratic administrations, U.S.-India relations […]

    The post Growing the U.S.-India economic relationship: The only way forward first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The June 26 White House meeting between Prime Minister Narendra Modi of India and United States President Donald Trump will be an opportunity to reaffirm America’s commitment to deeper bilateral economic ties and to signal support for India, an economic and demographic powerhouse in Asia. While starkly different, the two leaders are both strong nationalists, with Modi pushing a “Make in India” agenda while Trump is all about “America First.” Can they find common ground and advance their agendas to mutual advantage? We think it’s possible, if they play their cards astutely.

    Under both Republican and Democratic administrations, U.S.-India relations have improved significantly over the past 10 years. Today the two countries have a $115 billion two-way trading relationship, growing foreign direct investment, and an increasingly shared vision of the region’s strategic outlook that has bolstered bilateral defense interests.

    Yet the bilateral trade relationship is modest at best. To put things in perspective, bilateral trade relationship between South Korea and U.S. is two times bigger by volume than that between India and the U.S., while Korea’s GDP is 40 percent smaller than India’s. China, with a similar population to India’s, conducts bilateral trade with the U.S. that is six times larger.[more-blog-posts]

    In fact, the U.S.-India economic relationship, while improving, remains contentious. America has long taken exception to India’s relatively high tariff rates, ineffective intellectual property rights protection, and the frequent intransigence of Indian negotiators at the World Trade Organization.

    In addition, Trump’s view of bilateral trade deficits as evidence that the U.S. is losing means that the America’s trade deficit with India will likely be a starting point for how the administration approaches U.S.-India trade.

    India has its gripes with the U.S. as well, the most high profile one being access for Indian nationals to H1B visas. It would be difficult to expect any immediate progress on this issue while the administration’s approach to immigration remains unsettled.

    The current impasse on some of these larger bilateral trade and labor issues should not preclude making inroads in other areas that are ripe for cooperation.

    India is one of the few countries in Asia where Trump’s decision to pull the U.S. out of the Trans-Pacific Partnership agreement was greeted with some relief

    In fact, India is one of the few countries in Asia where Trump’s decision to pull the U.S. out of the Trans-Pacific Partnership agreement was greeted with some relief, which presents an opportunity to forge a new trade and investment relationship with India.

    Trump and Modi should use their inaugural meeting to initiate small confidence building steps and set aside larger, more intractable issues.

    Both leaders seem comfortable pushing investment in infrastructure rather than the more indirect, outcomes that trade agreements deliver. Many of Modi’s economic priorities to grow India’s manufacturing sector and tackle India’s enormous infrastructure needs would benefit from U.S. investment and services exports. For his part, Trump could offer U.S. support for Modi’s goals by promoting U.S. investment in Indian infrastructure and manufacturing. This could be the basis for a broader deal encompassing measures to further streamline India’s recent initiative to reduce foreign investment restrictions.

    How to grow jobs is another shared focus for both leaders. According to a McKinsey report, India needs to create 115 million new non-farm jobs by 2022. Both leaders see developing their manufacturing sector as one way forward. These goals are not in conflict, as India is largely focused on developing manufacturing jobs in parts of the supply chain, which is different from the U.S. focus on the domestic manufacturing sector. In addition, India’s growing middle class which is expected to double to over half a billion people by 2025 will provide a new market for U.S. exports of manufactured products. Both sides can make progress here by improving market access for their respective manufactured goods. Cooperation around skills development in India and tackling certain concerns related to better enforcement of intellectual property rights in India would benefit both countries.

    Trump and Modi should establish a joint mechanism to address bilateral trade issues, with regular meetings of senior officials as well as a commitment to ensure new market access outcomes by the end of this year. Agreeing to seek common ground around the recognition of standards might also be a way of reducing trade friction over time.

    Deepening the two countries’ bilateral trade and investment relationship will take commitment and time, with inevitable setbacks that will require each side to view the economic relationship in a broader geopolitical context. Ultimately, America’s longer-term strategic goals in Asia will be advanced if the U.S. has the foresight to cultivate a prosperous, confident, and democratic India.[more-blog-posts]

    The post Growing the U.S.-India economic relationship: The only way forward first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    419089
    Trump’s Paris Agreement withdrawal: What it means and what comes next http://stg.csep.org/blog/trumps-paris-agreement-withdrawal-what-it-means-and-what-comes-next/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=trumps-paris-agreement-withdrawal-what-it-means-and-what-comes-next Thu, 01 Jun 2017 13:02:34 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=407212 Today, President Donald Trump announced that he will withdraw the United States from the landmark Paris Agreement on climate change. It was adopted in 2015 by 195 nations, with 147 ratifying it including the United States, which is the world’s second largest greenhouse gas emitter. Experts offer their analyses on what the decision could mean and what comes next. William Galston: President Trump’s advisers may have suggested that withdrawing from the Paris climate accord would be a popular move. This is what they told him about the firing of FBI Director James Comey, and he seems to have believed it. […]

    The post Trump’s Paris Agreement withdrawal: What it means and what comes next first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Today, President Donald Trump announced that he will withdraw the United States from the landmark Paris Agreement on climate change. It was adopted in 2015 by 195 nations, with 147 ratifying it including the United States, which is the world’s second largest greenhouse gas emitter. Experts offer their analyses on what the decision could mean and what comes next.

    William Galston: President Trump’s advisers may have suggested that withdrawing from the Paris climate accord would be a popular move. This is what they told him about the firing of FBI Director James Comey, and he seems to have believed it. This could become yet another self-inflicted wound, because vast majorities of Americans want to remain in the Paris accord, including many of Trump’s own supporters.

    In a survey of registered voters taken just weeks after the 2016 election, 69 percent said that the United States should participate in the agreement. This figure included 86 percent of Democrats, 61 percent of Independents, and 51 percent of Republicans. By a margin of 40 to 34 percent, even a plurality of self-described conservative Republicans backed the agreement.

    The administration has argued that the Paris Agreement is “unfair” because large polluting countries such as India and China are not required to do anything until 2030. The voters don’t buy this argument. Two-thirds of them 79 percent of Democrats, 56 percent of Independents, and 51 percent of Republicans say that the United States should reduce its greenhouse gas emissions regardless of what other countries do.

    This piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: Paris Agreement enjoys more support than Donald Trump 


    Samantha Gross: The Trump administration’s decision to withdraw the United States from the Paris Agreement is a huge foreign policy blunder that will reverberate through our relationships with our allies. During the negotiation process, the United States pushed to make the agreement flexible to bring all countries on board and to keep them in the fold even if their situations and priorities changed. This flexibility means that our withdrawal would be completely unnecessary the administration could have remained party to the agreement while still pursuing its policy goals.

    Abdicating U.S. responsibility in climate change mitigation and the coming clean energy transition is likely to make other international negotiations more challenging, particularly with respect to trade. Our withdrawal also opens up a geopolitical space in climate leadership that may or may not be filled. The United States was a crucial force in bringing the Paris Agreement to fruition, especially in bringing China into the fold. Chinese President Xi Jinping expressed strong support for the Paris Agreement, and globalization in general, in his keynote address in Davos this January. Might China be looking to fill the leadership role that the United States is vacating?

    Finally, the United States has been the major voice pushing for transparency and verification of compliance with nations’ stated goals, or Nationally Determined Contributions, throughout the process that led to the Paris Agreement. The measurement and reporting portions of the agreement are to be negotiated and put into place from now through 2020. U.S. leadership in this process will be sorely missed and implementation of the agreement may suffer in our absence.

    Read more: Far from the White House, the energy industry remains focused on climate 


    Nate Hultman: The decision itself is a major error. The loss of American leadership hurts the ability of the international community to reach our scientifically grounded, global, long-term goals for reducing emissions to safer levels, and the president’s choice to lead the country back toward a 19th century energy economy will likely prove to be ill-conceived and bad for the American economy.

    The decision also goes against the advice most of the country’s business elite. In his justification of the withdrawal, Trump cast Paris a nonbinding structure to encourage international action on climate as an unfair and heavily oppressive deal, and as the fount of phantasmagorical ills such as joblessness, economic stagnation, and trainloads of cash en route to a tricky cabal of conspirator states, including our allies. None of these claims is true or based on reputable analysis. To emphasize just two points, in contrast to Trump’s assertions, the structure of Paris means that nobody else dictates what the U.S.’s own goals should be, and China and India have indeed made significant commitments to emissions reduction and clean energy, which they are likely to meet or even exceed.

    The piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: The galvanized world response to Trump’s Paris Agreement decision 


    Mark Muro: My take is at once crestfallen and cautiously optimistic.

    Without doubt Trump’s withdrawal of the United States from the Paris Agreement represents a tragic, rash error in judgment. In diplomatic and moral terms, the withdrawal represents a willful abdication of America’s leadership role in the world. And as a business mistake, the decision means the U.S. will miss out on some the $1.4 trillion global business opportunity that the global low-carbon economy represents. That the limited binding force of the agreement is nil makes the whole drama unnecessary and therefore even more distressing.

    With that said, I believe that progress will continue. Internationally, other leaders maybe India, maybe China will assert themselves to fill the vacuum created by U.S. retreat.

    Domestically, the problem isn’t so much the withdrawal from Paris as the more general problem of Trump’s efforts to actively dismantle U.S. climate policy at the federal level. And here, while there is much to worry about, including draconian cuts to the entire suite of clean energy innovation and deployment programs, there are real grounds for compensatory optimism. Ambitious state-level policies will continue to support the transition to a cleaner energy system. And for that matter, so will the increasingly impressive efforts of municipalities and businesses. Beyond that, there are signs that state and local actions may ratchet up as federalism allows states and cities to push back against federal irresponsibility and fill some gaps, even if their efforts are no substitute for a cohesive national stance.

    To that extent, at least for the near term, the largest problem isn’t the withdrawal from the Paris Agreement. It’s President Trump and continued climate denialism in Washington.

    Read more: Clean energy’s shifting reality: Venture capital recedes, but what’s next 


    Timmons Roberts: Why would the Trump administration take on this hail of criticism from home and abroad? Elsewhere, I’ve argued that Paris is not an “America second- or third-” agreement, as EPA Director Scott Pruitt has claimed. To the contrary, it is non-binding and has no enforcement mechanism if countries don’t meet their emissions targets. Trump has wavered on a number of other issues, but climate change was apparently one of the few where he wanted to stick to his campaign promise. Most explanations of this so far have been inadequate, and the issue needs serious investigation.

    As with all Trump administration decisions, it is difficult to attribute causation, but the fact that the Paris Agreement is even being disputed, and the huge political capital expended by the White House to pull out, for me boils down to a two-decades-long campaign by the oil, coal, and gas industries. These actors started sowing the seeds of doubt about the overwhelming scientific consensus on climate change with a 1997/1998 effort in response to the Kyoto Protocol. Fossil fuel corporations have spent billions of dollars on the effort since then.

    The case of Trump’s withdrawal from Paris provides an opportunity to understand the way industries are influencing politics and policy in our country, and what it means for our democracy. I would speculate that this past weekend’s letter from U.S. Senator Jim Inhofe (R-Okla.) along with 21 colleagues, and Ted Cruz’s both of which provided cover for Trump’s decision were both almost certainly written and orchestrated by fossil fuel companies, their industry organizations, or the PR firms they hire. As if to confirm this, in the past two weeks the Competitive Enterprise Institute ran 70 ads calling for the United States to leave Paris, over all major media outlets in D.C. The American Petroleum Institute has a $244 million a year budget to influence policy. There are many other fossil fuel firms and groups at work. These private voices creating distraction and delay on the existential problem of our time were heard by our leader, drowning out those of the majority of Americans who support American engagement with the rest of the world in solving this issue.

    Read more: Trump dumps Paris: Now what? 


    Todd Stern: It succeeds where every effort before, for some 20 years, had come up short. It breaks new ground in numerous ways, articulating a long-range goal to drive global efforts, creating a bottom-up structure for ambitious national action, outlining a continually renewing set of commitments, bridging the differences between developed and developing countries, establishing a hybrid legal structure. And it did this all in the context of an agreement that is not just a statement of shared global principles, but a joint undertaking in which all countries are expected to do their part to shape the global economy in a productive and sustainable manner.

    The idea that it is rational to support climate action but reject Paris does not, in fact, make sense. The idea that an agreement materially different from Paris could win the consensus support of countries everywhere is a fiction. Paris is an imperfect, but nonetheless remarkable agreement. It needs to be defended, supported and implemented.

    The piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: Why the Paris Agreement works 


    Vinod Thomas: The Trump administration’s decision to pull out of the agreement flies in the face of all this reality. (The only other two non-participants are Syria, who is in a civil war, and Nicaragua, who actually wanted a stronger agreement). The decision is against the U.S.’s own economic and geopolitical interests. It also shirks responsibility for the country’s share of the carbon footprint driving everyone’s fortunes.

    Sri Lanka’s floods and India’s heatwaves are stark reminders of the needed priority for disaster resilience in national programs. But for these programs to have any chance of success, climate mitigation, especially by the biggest emitters, must take center stage.

    The piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: The climate crisis 


    Rahul Tongia, with a view from India: India’s current views on climate change have little to do with the United States, or any other country. In the past, issues of “who’s to blame” underpinned all negotiations. The current leadership is focused on growth and action, and, in fact, treats sustainability (especially growing renewable energy, or RE) as “an article of faith.” Whatever calculations India has on its NDCs remain independent of U.S. actions, and there are virtually no immediate or direct negative implications for India, and there are no global carbon prices to jump or fall.

    Some may argue that India is no longer bound to undertake undue or heroic efforts, but with falling prices for clean tech, it’s possible that much of India’s actions are more market driven than a costly choice just to “do the right thing.” In fact, it’s possible that any reduction in U.S. clean tech deployment may make more technology and funding available for India. Global funding remains attractive for India, and almost all the RE India is deploying is by the private sector. India welcomes global capital for its scale and low interest rates.

    India and the United States collaborate extensively on energy and clean energy, including through the U.S.-India Clean Energy Finance Task Force, which also draws in the private sector through complementary mechanisms. These efforts will likely continue as India represents an enormous (and now even more important) market for U.S. suppliers. The energy market is far more vibrant in India as overall demand is still growing by some 6-7 percent annually, and RE is targeted to grow by 25 percent annually, based on Indian plans announced even before the Paris Accord.

    Is the United States leaving a vacuum? Numerous analysts talk of Chinese leadership, in which case India may not publicly embrace them, despite the fact that Chinese manufacturing fuels much of Indian solar panels (no solar cells are made in India, just assembled in to panels in India). India is also positioning itself as a sustainability leader, with Prime Minister Modi spearheading the International Solar Alliance (ISA) at Paris. Again, this effort benefits from U.S. support, but isn’t dependent on it.

    Before we examine how India could react, we’d first need to ask why it would react. Given its actions and plans are domestically driven, it’s hard to make a case for “retaliation.” Leaving aside any theoretical but unlikely formal measures, it’s even unlikely India would join any global bottom-up efforts to counter “Make in America” with “Don’t Buy American.” Indian consumers don’t directly buy so many “Made in USA” products. What they do buy often no immediate alternative, especially in the IT world, with the “big five” of consumer tech Google, Apple, Microsoft, Amazon, and Facebook all being American. Notably, these companies are quite “green” in their energy purchases.  Perhaps the world may evolve towards corporate differentiation on carbon, instead of national frameworks, which, like city and state efforts in the United States, might be a way forward to reducing global carbon emissions. Any consumer backlash would likely be more symbolic than impacting the bottom line, though it might hurt selected American companies more than others, especially where alternatives exist.

    So does the U.S. withdrawal mean nothing for India? It may impact posturing, and even some amount of mindset, especially below the national leadership, but it will likely have less impact on on-ground activities. India may even double down on its efforts.

    Read more: The future of electric vehicles in India 


    David Victor: Now that the United States is leaving the Paris Agreement, what’s next for international cooperation on climate change?

    Some foreign policy analysts suggest that other countries will also head for the exit. I suspect the opposite will happen. For most countries, Paris does not require that they do much beyond what they were planning anyway. Despite the bold goal of stopping warming well below 2 degrees above pre-industrial levels a goal that never could be met Paris has always been about process. Countries make pledges for the efforts they will undertake and then periodic reviews check to see what is working and not. Over time, this process would make deeper cooperation easier. Chuck Sabel, a law professor at Columbia, and I have been calling this experimentalist governance of climate change. Countries, firms, and NGOs are committed to do something about global warming, but nobody really knows what will work and scale policy experiments and learning are essential. And Paris was designed to achieve just that.

    America’s exit isn’t good news for Paris, despite what some people have argued. America almost always plays a key role in building effective international institutions. Without America, leadership is diffused and harder to muster. The list of things left undone in Paris remains very long, and leadership is essential to turning the Paris framework into something truly effective. But the American exit is not fatal to the process. Indeed, the U.S., China, France, and others designed Paris so that it would be highly flexible able to change in response to new realities, even the exit of the world’s most powerful nation. Even if the U.S. formally stayed inside the Paris agreement the lack of support for the process from the president on down has severely undermined the country’s ability to lead. Events like the recent G-7 meeting which on climate and much else has now become the G6+1 will become more common.

    This piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: America exits the climate stage


    Philip Wallach: A moment like this was, unfortunately, always a foreseeable possibility. Paris’s non-binding structure was chosen in large part to allow President Obama to sign without seeking Senate approval, which everyone understood he would be unlikely to get for any climate treaty given the abysmal relationship he had with Republicans during his second term. Climate activists in the United States largely wrote off the possibility of winning Republican support for any climate policy, deeming the task near-impossible. Instead they and the administration adopted a strategy that sought to circumvent the GOP, which they presumed could be treated as a manageable, if yippy, minority for years to come. They were wrong and the Paris Agreement is now suffering the consequences.

    The decision to withdraw will be endlessly analyzed, and many observers will inevitably focus on the interpersonal dramas of the Trump White House. But the truth is that this moment is mostly a function of party, rather than anything distinctive about Trump or his advisors. All of the leading Republican candidates for the presidency signaled their hostility to the Obama administration’s Paris pledge, and Republican legislators have largely maintained their opposition as their party has come into a position to follow through on its anti-Paris talk. Had Hillary Clinton won the presidency in 2016 but lost it in 2020, many of the same dynamics might have played out in 2021. If the United States is to achieve a more politically sustainable national climate policy, it will have to run through Republicans rather than around them.

    This piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: An America not in Paris 


    Rebecca Winthrop and Christina Kwauk: As the world reels from the news that the U.S. intends to pull out of the global Paris Agreement, there are still reasons to hope that our children can inherit a healthy planet. Paul Hawken, the well-known environmentalist, has a plan. His recent book is called Drawdown: The Most Comprehensive Plan Ever Proposed to Reverse Global Warming and it does just what the subtitle suggests. Under his coordination, researchers and scientists around the globe spent the last three years modeling what it would take to reduce carbon emissions or sequester carbon from the atmosphere. The book presents 100 proven interventions to immediately begin to stem the tide of climate change.

    The good news is that the most effective intervention is not even in the Paris Agreement. Empowering girls and women through a combination of education and family planning is the number one thing the world can do to address climate change, ahead of switching to solar energy, wind energy, or a plant-rich diet. Investing in both girls’ education around the globe and enabling women access to contraception and reproductive healthcare would result in 120 gigatons of carbon reduced by 2050, a staggering amount compared to the 90 gigatons that could be reduced by better management of harmful chemical refrigerants like chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs).

    This piece is excerpted from a longer blog post, read more: Concerned about the Paris Agreement? There’s still home through girls’ education

    The post Trump’s Paris Agreement withdrawal: What it means and what comes next first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    407212
    Dhruva Jaishankar on how the H-1B visa controversy will affect India http://stg.csep.org/blog/dhruva-jaishankar-on-how-the-h-1b-visa-controversy-will-affect-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=dhruva-jaishankar-on-how-the-h-1b-visa-controversy-will-affect-india Wed, 01 Feb 2017 18:17:33 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/dhruva-jaishankar-on-how-the-h-1b-visa-controversy-will-affect-india/ https://twitter.com/ABCNews24/status/826396780057079808 Brookings India Fellow for Foreign Policy Dhruva Jaishankar spoke to ABC News on the future of Indian workers on highly skilled visas (H-1B) in the US under President Donald Trump. Mr Jaishankar said: “There has been a lot of criticism of this programme within the US, irrespective of Donald Trump, including in the US Congress on both the Republican and Democratic side. “We could have expected, regardless of Trump’s election, questions being raised and a possible scaling back of the programme. That being said, I will be very surprised if the programme is completely scrapped. So while I expect […]

    The post Dhruva Jaishankar on how the H-1B visa controversy will affect India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    https://twitter.com/ABCNews24/status/826396780057079808

    Brookings India Fellow for Foreign Policy Dhruva Jaishankar spoke to ABC News on the future of Indian workers on highly skilled visas (H-1B) in the US under President Donald Trump.

    Mr Jaishankar said: “There has been a lot of criticism of this programme within the US, irrespective of Donald Trump, including in the US Congress on both the Republican and Democratic side.

    “We could have expected, regardless of Trump’s election, questions being raised and a possible scaling back of the programme. That being said, I will be very surprised if the programme is completely scrapped. So while I expect we can see some scale back of the programme, I don’t think we’ll see its complete abandonment.”

    This video first appeared in ABC News 24, on 31 January 2017. Like other products of the Brookings Institution India Center, this video is intended to contribute to discussion and stimulate debate on important issues. The views are of the participant(s). Brookings India does not have any institutional views.

    The post Dhruva Jaishankar on how the H-1B visa controversy will affect India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    366461
    Australia-India relations: poised for take off http://stg.csep.org/blog/australia-india-relations-poised-for-take-off/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=australia-india-relations-poised-for-take-off Thu, 12 Jan 2017 14:57:10 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/australia-india-relations-poised-for-take-off/ Relations between India and the United States before the redefining changes of the past two decades were possibly best summarised in the title of a book by the American diplomat Dennis Kux: Estranged Democracies. But that phrase could just as easily have applied, more recently, to India and Australia. Despite their having much in common (pluralistic, Westminster-style democracies; Commonwealth traditions; Indian Ocean coasts; and strategic positions on East Asia’s periphery), relations between India and Australia were for decades defined by their differences. But a recent visit to Australia (I spent a week in three cities as a guest of the […]

    The post Australia-India relations: poised for take off first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Relations between India and the United States before the redefining changes of the past two decades were possibly best summarised in the title of a book by the American diplomat Dennis Kux: Estranged Democracies. But that phrase could just as easily have applied, more recently, to India and Australia. Despite their having much in common (pluralistic, Westminster-style democracies; Commonwealth traditions; Indian Ocean coasts; and strategic positions on East Asia’s periphery), relations between India and Australia were for decades defined by their differences. But a recent visit to Australia (I spent a week in three cities as a guest of the Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, talking to senior government officials, military officers, academics, economists, and journalists) was enough to suggest that the circumstances are ripe for a qualitative upgrade in relations between New Delhi and Canberra.

    An important overall factor is the state of Australia itself. In a world still coming off the relative highs of 1991-2008, Australia is not at all badly placed. Australian democracy may be messy but there remains, for now, a general consensus on the benefits of immigration, free trade, a broad social safety net, and the merits of the US alliance. To be sure, some of these are being tested around the margins. Immigration, in particular, appears to be an increasingly fraught issue. However, it helps that the economy is in rude health. Australia can draw further comfort in its having a small, well-educated population, strong services and agriculture sectors, and vast natural resources. These attributes serve to make it an attractive partner, particularly for other like-minded countries in the Indo-Pacific. Australia may remain a middle power for the foreseeable future, but it is nicely poised to punch above its weight for years to come.

    That said, there is an evident tension between Australia’s strategic establishment (largely confined to a bubble in Canberra) and the business community. For some, China’s importance as a trade partner and immigration trends point to a recalibration of its international relations away from the United States and the West, and there are certainly some such pressures from Australian business. Yet for the Australian strategic community, the importance of the US alliance remains an article of faith.  In fact, intelligence arrangements (more than other alliance considerations) and two-way investment (rather than trade) are possibly truer indicators of the importance of the US for Australia.

    But this dichotomy is becoming increasingly muddied. Concerns about Chinese cyber espionage  (particularly of intellectual property) as well as worries about Chinese political influence have sown doubts in the minds of some erstwhile proponents of closer ties with Beijing, including some in the business community. On the other hand, Donald Trump’s election victory has raised questions about the reliability of the United States as an ally. On balance, while the basic tension between Australia’s security and commercial impulses is unlikely to be resolved any time soon, it is not nearly as sharp as it is sometimes made out to be.

    In this context, Australia’s relations with India (along with Japan) have the potential to assume greater prominence. Australia-India relations have come a long way from a low point around six to eight years ago. In 2008, the Kevin Rudd government pulled out of the ‘Quad’ security partnership with India, Japan, and the United States, creating lasting doubts about Australia’s commitment to plurilateral security. Australia also had in place a uranium ban on India, which remains a non-signatory to the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty. Between 2008 and 2010, attacks on Indian students and taxi drivers received considerable attention in the Indian media, colouring Indian public perceptions of Australian society. But today, Australia’s strategic orientation has been clarified by a series of defence white papers, the uranium ban has been lifted, and Australia remains a preferred destination for Indian university students looking to go overseas.  Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s 2014 visit also helped turn a new leaf on the relationship. The basis for improved ties is certainly stronger, and Australia – despite much self-criticism about not having invested enough in relations with India – has in fact done better than most in cultivating New Delhi.

    The question, then, is where can Australia play a meaningful role in India’s ongoing transformation, to mutual benefit? Australia already plays an outsized role as a provider of tertiary education for Indians. It is also natural that. as India’s economy grows and its infrastructure needs increase, commodity exports from Australia will rise. Indeed, Australia’s position as a major exporter of liquefied natural gas is underappreciated. But identifying areas beyond natural resources and education where Australia can play an oversized role in India’s development remains a challenge. Given Australia’s own limitations in manufacturing and defence technology, boosting agricultural productivity remains one possibility.

    On the strategic side, the challenge involves jointly finding ways to engage and cooperate in the Indian Ocean to mutual benefit. Australia’s naval investments, particularly in submarines, give it significant maritime reach in the Indian Ocean, where the entirety of its submarine fleet is based. However, existing multilateral mechanisms such as the Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA) and ASEAN-based entities are unwieldy and inadequate. Instead, smaller groupings that can help ensure shared objectives in the Indian Ocean region (possibly involving some combination of the United States, Japan, Indonesia, France, and South Africa, as countries with the requisite means and capabilities) may be necessary. And rather than exercises and operations, which could be expensive and politically sensitive, information sharing and enhanced military-to-military engagement in smaller multilateral groupings might be a useful and productive way forward.

    This blog first appeared in The Interpreter, on 10 January 2017. Like other products of the Brookings Institution India Center, this blog is intended to contribute to discussion and stimulate debate on important issues. The views are of the author(s). Brookings India does not have any institutional views.

    The post Australia-India relations: poised for take off first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    366476
    It’s time to resuscitate the Asia-Pacific Quad http://stg.csep.org/blog/its-time-to-resuscitate-the-asia-pacific-quad/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=its-time-to-resuscitate-the-asia-pacific-quad Mon, 09 Jan 2017 16:08:46 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?p=354476 2016 was quite a year. The Middle East continued its violent downward spiral; a failed coup in Turkey erased the last vestiges of democracy in that country; the new president of the Philippines launched a bloody, nation-wide vigilante war on drugs; North Korea conducted its fifth nuclear test, and its biggest to date; and China was deemed in flagrant violation of international law, a judgement it rejected with no real consequences. The European Union, already facing an existential crisis, was buffeted by the influx of refugees, secessionism by the United Kingdom, rising political populism, a continuing sovereign debt crisis, a […]

    The post It’s time to resuscitate the Asia-Pacific Quad first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    2016 was quite a year. The Middle East continued its violent downward spiral; a failed coup in Turkey erased the last vestiges of democracy in that country; the new president of the Philippines launched a bloody, nation-wide vigilante war on drugs; North Korea conducted its fifth nuclear test, and its biggest to date; and China was deemed in flagrant violation of international law, a judgement it rejected with no real consequences. The European Union, already facing an existential crisis, was buffeted by the influx of refugees, secessionism by the United Kingdom, rising political populism, a continuing sovereign debt crisis, a low-intensity war to its immediate east, and high-profile terrorist incidents in Brussels, Nice, and Berlin. Afghanistan’s long-running conflict continued its slide into negligence by the world’s powers, while Pakistan’s security establishment intensified its policy of regular terrorist attacks against Indian military facilities. And, of course, the United States sprung the biggest surprise of all with the election of Donald Trump, a man of no prior political experience and uneven temperament who has questioned every underlying principle of the Washington Consensus.

    The new year is thus a sobering moment to take stock of the international order, whose benefits to peace, security, development, and public welfare around the world are too often taken for granted. Indeed, the United States, China, Russia, United Kingdom, and other major powers almost seemed to be in a race to the bottom over the past year in presenting their credentials as responsible global leaders. Moreover, international institutions whether the United Nations, European Union, Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), or NATO showed themselves to be incapable or ill-equipped to deal with some of the chief global challenges.

    There are no quick and easy fixes to stemming this tide, but modest steps can be taken around the margins. An important indeed, singular objective now should be to preserve a stable balance of power in the Indo-Pacific, the vast strategic space which is home to 60 percent of the world’s population and an even higher proportion of its economic growth. This region remains a possible flashpoint for great power conflict, most notably between China and the United States. A further erosion of the Asian order would also have terrible consequences for the international economy at a moment of particular vulnerability.

    Four amigos

    Against this backdrop, one minor but important corrective might be a resuscitation of an informal grouping of democratic maritime powers in the region, with a focus on both the Indian and Pacific Oceans. The obvious candidates include the United States, India, Japan, and Australia (or “Quad”). The four countries collectively launched ad hoc operations to provide relief following the devastating Indian Ocean tsunami in 2004. In Manila in 2007, the prime ministers of India, Japan, and Australia met with then U.S. Vice President Dick Cheney on the sidelines of the ASEAN Regional Forum, marking the first Quadrilateral summit. Later that year, the four countries along with Singapore held a large multilateral naval exercise in the Indian Ocean that involved over 25 ships and 20,000 personnel. China, which saw the exercises as part of a containment strategy, registered diplomatic protests with all four capitals.[more-blog-posts]

    Beijing’s expression of displeasure had an immediate effect. In early 2008, the new government of Kevin Rudd in Australia made it clear that it would not participate in future quadrilateral activities, apparently in deference to Chinese sensitivities. This, combined with the fall of Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe (who was seen as the progenitor of the concept), the end of George W. Bush’s presidential tenure, and opposition from Indian Prime Minister Manmohan Singh’s political allies, seemed to doom the idea of the Quad for good.

    But the rationale for a similar arrangement today is even greater and the political circumstances are also more favorable. Having returned to power, Abe has radically reformed Japan’s national security structures. India’s Prime Minister Narendra Modi has been diplomatically active and has prioritized a closer partnership in the Indo-Pacific with the United States and Abe’s Japan. For many years, questions remained about Australia’s commitment and inclination, colored by Rudd’s unilateral decision to withdraw from the Quad. But while the Australian economy remains heavily reliant on resource exports to China, Canberra is not under any illusions about its strategic orientation. In fact, developments in the South China Sea and Indian Ocean seem to have hardened the resolve of Australia’s security establishment. There is also a case for including more countries into an emerging soft security architecture for the region, including possibly Indonesia and the Philippines.

    Today, of course, the big question mark surrounds Washington. Trump and his advisors have sent contradictory signals. On the one hand, a skepticism of overseas commitments and the unfamiliarity of some of his advisors with Asian security matters might make the region appear a lower priority for the incoming administration. On the other hand, the recent row with China over Taiwan and a commitment to increase military spending and American naval capabilities mean that Trump might be more favorably-disposed towards such burden-sharing arrangements than his predecessor Barack Obama.

    There is, of course, a risk that China would read any such activities as evidence of containment or encirclement. But deferring to Chinese sensitivities has done little over the past eight years to moderate Beijing’s assertiveness, whether in the East or South China Seas, or in the Indian Ocean. At best, greater transparency about the nature of any security activities and continuous dialogue with China about how its rise can continue in a manner that reassures others in its periphery might help mitigate the security dilemma.

    Moreover, the emergence of a plurilateral security architecture in the Asia-Pacific (whether quadrilateral or otherwise) should not be mistaken for an Asian NATO, or any such collective security organization. It would be a grave error for Beijing to see it as such, not least because its opposition would be self-fulfilling and could realize its worst fears. Additionally, any “hard” security arrangement resembling an alliance would run counter to the wishes of its participants, particularly India, which sees security treaties as undermining its sovereignty and thus unnecessarily constraining. Instead, any such arrangement would serve the valuable purpose of facilitating an exchange of information and viewpoints among leaders of the major democratic Indo-Pacific powers in an increasingly uncertain world. That alone is a reason for its resurrection.[newsletter]

    The post It’s time to resuscitate the Asia-Pacific Quad first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    354476
    If State Elections were General http://stg.csep.org/blog/if-state-elections-were-general/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=if-state-elections-were-general Tue, 13 Dec 2016 11:09:46 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=opinion&p=552776 On December 11, the results of five Indian state elections – in Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Telangana, and Mizoram – were announced. These will be the last state elections before the 2019 Indian general election, about which speculation will now begin in earnest. Predicting national elections is a notoriously difficult exercise; the last three defied many expectations. Given that media commentators project every state election as a trendsetter for national politics, a simple exercise to start thinking about next year’s outcome involves transposing the results of every state election over the past five years onto a national election map. Basically, […]

    The post If State Elections were General first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    On December 11, the results of five Indian state elections – in Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Telangana, and Mizoram – were announced. These will be the last state elections before the 2019 Indian general election, about which speculation will now begin in earnest. Predicting national elections is a notoriously difficult exercise; the last three defied many expectations. Given that media commentators project every state election as a trendsetter for national politics, a simple exercise to start thinking about next year’s outcome involves transposing the results of every state election over the past five years onto a national election map. Basically, this means taking the number of seats a party won in the last election in each state, dividing it by the total number of seats in the state legislature, and multiplying that number by the Lok Sabha seats representing that state.

    Crunch the numbers in this manner, and it brings up the following results: the BJP drops some 103 seats and its allies another 7, giving the BJP a total of 179 and its National Democratic Alliance (NDA) coalition about 207 seats. (For context, no winning party won more seats than that in five general elections between 1996 and 2009.) The Congress would certainly gain in this calculation – particularly in Gujarat, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh – but would make only about 107 seats total. Along with its allies, the Congress-led United Progressive Alliance (UPA) would have 163 seats. This would represent a big increase from 2014, but is still over 40 short of their competitors. Other regional parties, led by the All India Trinamool Congress, All India Anna Dravida Munnetra Kazhagam, Biju Janata Dal, Telugu Desam Party, and Telangana Rashtra Samiti would be among the largest contributors to 172 seats for third parties and independents.

    Now, the caveats. These numbers offer a useful starting point, but should definitely not be interpreted as a prediction, for at least four reasons. The first is that Indian voters have historically distinguished between state-level and national-level issues when they voted, and parties will campaign on very different concerns and personalities. A particularly good example of this was the fact that the 2008 Uttar Pradesh elections – won convincingly by the Bahujan Samaj Party (BSP) – was followed shortly thereafter by a strong showing by the Congress in that state in the 2009 general election. A second reason is that enough time has elapsed from several state elections, notably in Bihar, Delhi, Maharashtra, and Uttar Pradesh, to suggest that they could have little bearing on the next general election.

    The third reason is that both pre-poll and post-poll alliances will alter calculations, sometimes significantly. How the likes of the BSP, TDP, and others position themselves will make a meaningful difference, as would campaign strategies between allies. Finally, state election results disproportionately favour state parties and smaller political movements, who are more likely to be crowded out in a general election when fewer and larger seats are at stake. Nonetheless, despite these important considerations, a simple transposition of recent state election results on a national electoral map provides a basic starting point for anticipating what is in play in the run up to the 2019 elections.

    Disclaimer: All opinion pieces reflect the views of individual scholars. Brookings India takes no positions or institutional view. 

     

    election-01

     

    The post If State Elections were General first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    552776
    “Modi government has been hardening stance against Pakistan for a few months now” http://stg.csep.org/blog/modi-government-has-been-hardening-stance-against-pakistan-for-a-few-months-now/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=modi-government-has-been-hardening-stance-against-pakistan-for-a-few-months-now Thu, 22 Sep 2016 21:56:41 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/modi-government-has-been-hardening-stance-against-pakistan-for-a-few-months-now/ Brookings India Foreign Policy Fellow Dhruva Jaishankar was part of a panel discussion on NDTV on the next steps for India post the Uri attacks where 18 Indian Army soldiers were killed. Anchor: Politics does guide the decisions of all governments everywhere in the world. You can’t divorce politics from governance. How much is the BJP vulnerable to being a victim its own rhetoric from the past, from having promised a stronger response in the aftermaths of a terror attack than, say, the Manmohan Singh government did?  We do have operations from the past that have gone wrong or not yielded results (Operation […]

    The post “Modi government has been hardening stance against Pakistan for a few months now” first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Brookings India Foreign Policy Fellow Dhruva Jaishankar was part of a panel discussion on NDTV on the next steps for India post the Uri attacks where 18 Indian Army soldiers were killed.

    Anchor: Politics does guide the decisions of all governments everywhere in the world. You can’t divorce politics from governance. How much is the BJP vulnerable to being a victim its own rhetoric from the past, from having promised a stronger response in the aftermaths of a terror attack than, say, the Manmohan Singh government did? 

    We do have operations from the past that have gone wrong or not yielded results (Operation Parakram where 1800 soldiers died). Where do you see these options which are more than the routine diplomatic offenses but short of war.

    Dhruva Jaishankar: You can turn the argument on its head: the BJP has much more political capital on the question of national security. Prime Minister Narendra Modi in particular does. In 2008 when Manmohan Singh was the Prime Minister and there were a spate of terrorist attacks leading up to the Mumbai attacks, elections were round the corner, a government that was accused of being weak on national security and we you saw the then Prime Minister and his government take a position in the aftermath of the terrorist attacks for which he got a lot of criticism for, and yet it did not lead to a negative outcome for the Congress in the 2009 elections.

    The current government is some ways is relatively more immune to public pressure on this issue.

    The turning point for the government was now now, it was a few months ago when Pakistan tried to take advantage of the Kashmir situation. After the Quetta bombings, for the first time the Prime Minister did not send/tweet his condolences to the people of Pakistan, and also the reference to Balochistan in the Independence Day speech. So you see a series events where this government has been hardening its position [against Pakistan].

    This video first appeared on NDTV, on Wednesday, 21 September 2016. The views are those of the author(s). Brookings India does not have any institutional views.

    The post “Modi government has been hardening stance against Pakistan for a few months now” first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    366606
    Indian Ocean region: A pivot for India’s growth http://stg.csep.org/blog/indian-ocean-region-a-pivot-for-indias-growth/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=indian-ocean-region-a-pivot-for-indias-growth Mon, 12 Sep 2016 20:59:53 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/indian-ocean-region-a-pivot-for-indias-growth/ “[Matsya said] ‘I have saved you from this cataclysm’ [and Manu] set about his work of creating all beings in proper and exact order.”  –The Mahabharata, iii.186 The Indian Ocean matters today, arguably more than ever. It is a major conduit for international trade, especially energy. Its littoral is vast, densely populated, and comprised of some of the world’s fastest-growing regions. The Ocean is also a valuable source of fishing and mineral resources. And yet its governance and security are under constant threat of being undermined, whether by non-state actors such as pirates, smugglers, and terrorists, or by furtive naval […]

    The post Indian Ocean region: A pivot for India’s growth first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    “[Matsya said] ‘I have saved you from this cataclysm’ [and Manu] set about his work of creating all beings in proper and exact order.” 

    –The Mahabharata, iii.186

    The Indian Ocean matters today, arguably more than ever. It is a major conduit for international trade, especially energy. Its littoral is vast, densely populated, and comprised of some of the world’s fastest-growing regions. The Ocean is also a valuable source of fishing and mineral resources. And yet its governance and security are under constant threat of being undermined, whether by non-state actors such as pirates, smugglers, and terrorists, or by furtive naval competition between states.

    The Indian Ocean basin is of particular importance for India, as the region’s most populous country and geopolitical keystone. Although India has long been preoccupied with continental considerations, it has recently begun to re-evaluate its priorities. India’s Indian Ocean Region strategy which is only just taking shape conforms closely to global priorities for preserving the Ocean as a shared resource: an important channel for trade, a sustainable resource base, and a region secure from heightened military competition, non-state actors, and catastrophic natural disasters. Achieving these objectives will require further investments in capacity, greater transparency and confidence-building measures, and enhanced institutional cooperation.

    Strategic Crucible

    The Indian Ocean is important for three reasons. First, it enjoys a privileged location at the crossroads of global trade, connecting the major engines of the international economy in the Northern Atlantic and Asia-Pacific. This is particularly important in an era in which global shipping has burgeoned. Today, the almost 90,000 vessels in the world’s commercial fleet transport 9.84 billion tonnes per year. This represents an almost four-fold increase in the volume of commercial shipping since 1970.[1]  The energy flows through the Indian Ocean are of particular consequence. Some 36 million barrels per day equivalent to about 40 per cent of the world’s oil supply and 64 per cent of oil trade travel through the entryways into and out of the Indian Ocean, including the Straits of Malacca and Hormuz and the Bab-el-Mandeb.[2]

    But the Indian Ocean is more than just a conduit for commerce. The Ocean’s vast drainage basin is important in its own right, home to some two billion people. This creates opportunities, especially given the high rates of economic growth around the Indian Ocean rim, including in India, Bangladesh, Southeast Asia, and Eastern and Southern Africa.  However, the densely populated littoral is also vulnerable to natural or environmental disasters. Two of the most devastating natural disasters in recent memory occurred in the Indian Ocean rim: the 2004 tsunami that killed 228,000 people, and Cyclone Nargis that hit Myanmar in 2008 and took 138,300 lives.[3]

    Finally, the Indian Ocean is rich in natural resources. Forty per cent of the world’s offshore oil production takes place in the Indian Ocean basin.[4]  Fishing in the Indian Ocean now accounts for almost 15 per cent of the world’s total and has increased some 13-fold between 1950 and 2010 to 11.5 million tonnes. Aquaculture in the region has also grown 12-fold since 1980. Although global fishing is reaching its natural limitations, the Indian Ocean may be able to sustain increases in production. Mineral resources are equally important, with nodules containing nickel, cobalt, and iron, and massive sulfide deposits of manganese, copper, iron, zinc, silver, and gold present in sizeable quantities on the sea bed. Indian Ocean coastal sediments are also important sources of titanium, zirconium, tin, zinc, and copper. Additionally, various rare earth elements are present, even if their extraction is not always commercially feasible.[5]

    The challenges of securing the free passage of trade and energy, ensuring the sustainable and equitable exploitation of fishing and mineral resources, and managing humanitarian assistance and disaster relief (HADR) operations would be daunting enough even if the Indian Ocean was not so contested. Beginning in 2005, pirates operating mostly from Somalia began to hijack commercial ships with alarming regularity, with such incidents peaking in 2010. Following global attention and the growing notoriety of Somali piracy, a series of steps were taken by industry and various governments. These included naval operations, transnational coordination, and security measures taken by the shipping industry. These developments resulted in a sharp drop in incidents in 2012. Nonetheless, as late as 2012, maritime piracy was costing the global economy between $5.7 and $6.1 billion, the bulk of which was borne by industry.[6]  Non-state actors such as pirates are not the only entities contesting the Indian Ocean. With an eye on securing trade routes, resource rights, and commercial interests, the naval forces of maritime states in the Indian Ocean region and beyond are becoming increasingly active.

    India’s Importance in the Indian Ocean

    The Indian Ocean holds particular importance for India, as the littoral’s most populous country. Indeed, for the rest of the Ocean’s littoral states, and even those outside the region, India’s leadership role will be important in determining the strategic future. India is geographically located at the Ocean’s centre, and has over 7,500 kilometres of coastline. “India is at the crossroads of the Indian Ocean,” Prime Minister Narendra Modi declared in a speech in Mauritius in 2015. “The Indian Ocean Region is at the top of our policy priorities.”[7] The Ocean has long been a key determining factor of India’s cultural footprint, with people, religion, goods, and customs spreading from India to Africa, the Middle East, and Southeast Asia and vice-versa.  India’s approach after independence was initially defined by the British withdrawal from east of Suez and Prime Minister Indira Gandhi calls for a zone of peace.[8] Only after the late 1990s, under the BJP-led government of Prime Minister Atal Behari Vajpayee and the Congress-led government of  Manmohan Singh, did the possibilities of openings in and around the Indian Ocean come to be seriously contemplated.[9]

    Today, 95 per cent of India’s trade by volume and 68 per cent of trade by value come via the Indian Ocean.[10]  Additionally, 3.28 million barrels per day or nearly 80 per cent of India’s crude oil requirement is imported by sea via the Indian Ocean. Taking into account India’s offshore oil production and petroleum exports, India’s sea dependence for oil is about 93 per cent, according to the Indian Navy.[11] India is also the fourth-largest importer of liquefied natural gas (LNG), with about 45 per cent coming by sea.[12]

    Moreover, India is heavily dependent on the resources of the Indian Ocean. India captured 4.1 million tonnes of fish in 2008, placing it sixth in the world and its fishing and aquaculture industries employ some 14 million people.[13] Fisheries and aquaculture industries are also a major source of exports. India’s maritime exports grew 55 times in volume between 1962 and 2012 and fisheries exports now account for Rs. 16,600 crore or about $2.5 billion.[14]

    Mineral resource extraction is also important. In 1987, India received exclusive rights to explore the Central Indian Ocean and has since explored four million square miles and established two mining sites. In 2013, the Geological Survey of India acquired a deep-sea exploration ship Samudra Ratnakar from South Korea, boosting its survey capabilities.[15] In 2014, the International Seabed Authority issued licenses for the Indian Ocean ridge, opening up new opportunities for deep seabed mining. This region is estimated to have massive reserves of manganese, as well as cobalt, nickel, and copper, all of which are scarce on Indian soil. However, such deep-sea exploration will require further investments in remotely operated vehicles and processing facilities.[16]

    Finally, there is a strong security dimension to India’s engagement with the Indian Ocean, beyond traditional naval considerations. One of the worst terrorist attacks in recent Indian memory the 2008 assault on Mumbai in which 164 people were killed was perpetrated by terrorists arriving by sea. Smuggling, illegal fishing, and human trafficking are all also major concerns.[17] The revelations about the A.Q. Khan network has highlighted the need for greater vigilance concerning the proliferation by sea of weapons of mass destruction – and even possible interdiction.[18] And while piracy has declined noticeably in the Indian Ocean since 2013, due in part to the efforts of countries like India, it could once again prove a threat to Indian commerce.[19]

    India has also been playing a more active role in humanitarian and disaster relief operations. These have often focused on rescuing citizens of India from conflict zones, although India has helped citizens of many other countries in the process. A recent example in the Indian Ocean region is Operation Raahat in Yemen.[20] Indian efforts have also extended to disaster relief in other countries, including assistance to Indonesia and Sri Lanka following the 2004 tsunami, to Myanmar after Cyclone Nargis, to Bangladesh after Cyclone Sidr, and to Sri Lanka after Cyclone Roanu. Relative to other countries in the region, India has advantages in terms of capabilities. These include better maritime domain awareness, and military equipment in the form of transport aircraft, helicopters, and support vessels that can help deliver food, water, and medical supplies.[21]

    Securing Shared Interests

    An overview of the importance of the Indian Ocean and India’s priorities indicates a close alignment between Indian and global interests. The Indian Ocean can, as some have argued, be India’s ocean.[22] But that need not come at the expense of others. The shared interests relating to the region are essentially five-fold: (i) preserving freedom of navigation for commercial shipping, (ii) sustainably and equitably harnessing the Indian Ocean’s natural resources, (iii) establishing protocols for enhancing disaster prevention and relief as well as search and rescue operations, (iv) countering piracy, terrorism, smuggling, and illegal weapons proliferation, and (v) managing international naval competition.

    These overlap with India’s objectives, as outlined by Indian Prime Minister Modi in 2015 under the banner of SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in the Region). “Our goal,” he said, “is to seek a climate of trust and transparency; respect for international maritime rules and norms by all countries; sensitivity to each other`s interests; peaceful resolution of maritime issues; and increase in maritime cooperation.”[23]  India’s Indian Ocean policy, he said, would be based on building up India’s own capabilities, helping regional partners with capacity building, collective action, sustainable development, and cooperation with non-Indian Ocean region actors to ensure greater transparency, rule of law, and the peaceful resolution of disputes. He also laid out the objective of integrated maritime security coordination between India, Sri Lanka, the Maldives, Seychelles and Mauritius, initiated in 2011 as a trilateral India-Sri Lanka-Maldives arrangement.[24] India’s security efforts in the Indian Ocean have already begun to take concrete shape with the transfer of the Indian-made patrol vessel Barracuda to Mauritius, the deployment of P-8I aircraft to Seychelles for surveillance of its exclusive economic zone, the agreements to develop connectivity infrastructure on Assumption Island in Seychelles and Agaléga in Mauritius.[25]

    In the near future, collective steps will need to be taken to prevent unnecessary and possibly ruinous maritime competition in the Indian Ocean. Greater Indian and international efforts must be made to ensure transparency concerning naval activity and the development of potential dual-use facilities, which can be used for both civilian and military purposes.[26] Indian leadership will also be necessary if international coordination and cooperation is to improve, whether on sustainable resource extraction, humanitarian measures, or Indian Ocean governance. Some institutions have already been established with these objectives in mind. India has thrown its weight behind the Indian Ocean Naval Symposium, which has 35 members and seeks to “increase maritime co-operation among navies” of the Indian Ocean littoral states. Meanwhile, the Indian Ocean Rim Association which has traditionally emphasised maritime security, trade, cultural promotion, tourism, and fisheries, but has recently diversified into resource management and governance involves 21 states.[27] (See Figure 1)

    But questions will need to be answered concerning the adequacy of these institutions for addressing the region’s many challenges, and relatedly more resources should be devoted to these efforts. For all the region’s stakeholders, this will require greater financial outlays, which in turn necessitates a greater appreciation of the importance of the Indian Ocean for collective interests. This is slowly changing. “We recognize that there are other nations around the world with strong interests and stakes in the region,” Prime Minister Modi said in Mauritius in 2015. “India is deeply engaged with them.”[28] By instilling an appreciation of the importance of the maritime domain, key steps can be taken to advance global interests in the Indian Ocean.

    [1] Jan Hoffmann, “Review of Maritime Transport 2015,” Presentation at Multi-Year Expert Meeting on Transport, Trade Logistics and Trade Facilitation, 16 October 2015; Amit A. Pandya, Rupert Herbert-Burns, and Junko Kobayashi, “Maritime Commerce and Security: The Indian Ocean,” The Henry L. Stimson Center, February 2011, p. 36.

    [2] “World Oil Transit Chokepoints,” U.S. Energy Information Administration, November 2014.

    [3] “Indian Ocean Tsunami: Then and Now,” BBC News, 25 December 2014; “Myanmar: Cyclone Nargis 2008 Facts and Figures,” International Federation of the red Cross and Red Crescent Societies, 3 May 2011.


    [4] World Factbook, Central Intelligence Agency, 2016.


    [5] David Michel, Halae Fuller, and Lindsay Dolan, “Natural Resources in the Indian Ocean: Fisheries and Minerals,” in David Michel and Russell Sticklor, eds., Indian Ocean Rising: Maritime Security and Policy Challenges (Washington: Stimson Center, 2012), pp.104-105.


    [6] Jonathan Bellish et al., “The Economic Cost of Somali Piracy,” Working Paper, Oceans Beyond Piracy, One Earth Future Foundation, 2012.


    [7] “Text of the PM’s Remarks on the Commissioning of Coast Ship Barracuda,” NarendraModi.in, March 12, 2015.


    [8] Selig Harrison and K. Subrahmanyam, eds., Superpower Rivalry in the Indian Ocean; Indian and American Views (New York: Oxford University Press, 1989).


    [9] David Scott, “India’s ‘Grand Strategy’ for the Indian Ocean: Mahanian Visions,” Asia Pacific Review, Vol. 13, Issue 2, 2006, pp. 97-129.


    [10] Annual Report 2015-2016, Ministry of Shipping, Government of India, p. 4.


    [11] “Indian Maritime Security Strategy,” Indian Navy, Government of India, January 2016, p. 25.


    [12] “Indian Petroleum and Natural Gas Statistics,” Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas, Government of India, 2014-2015, p.10.


    [13] The State of World Fisheries and Aquaculture (Rome: Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, 2010), p. 13, “About Indian Fisheries,” National Fisheries Development Board, 25 July, 2016.


    [14] “Export Trends,” Central Institute of Fisheries Technology, Indian Council of Agricultural Research, 2013.


    [15] Abhijit Singh, “India’s ‘Deep-Sea Mining’ Capability Gets a Fillip,” IDSA Comment, Institute for Defence Studies and Analyses, 1 November, 2013.


    [16] Richard Mahapatra and Anupam Chakravartty, “Mining at Deep Sea,” Down to Earth, 15 September 2014.


    [17] Aditi Chatterjee, “Non-Traditional Maritime Security Threats in the Indian Ocean Region,” Maritime Affairs, Vol. 10, Issue 2, 2014, pp. 77-95.


    [18] William J. Broad, David E. Sanger, and Raymond Bonner, “A Tale of Nuclear Proliferation:How Pakistani Built His Network,” The New York Times, February 12, 2014.


    [19] Angana Guha Roy, “Indian Navy’s Anti Piracy Operations,” Indian Council of World Affairs, 5 March 2012.


    [20] Amit Agnihotri, “Yemen Crisis: India Gets Evacuation Request from 26 Countries,” India Today, April 7, 2015; Vijay Sakhuja, “India’s Yemeni Evacuation,” Indian Defence Review, Vol. 30, No. 2, April-June 2015.


    [21] Sarabjeet Singh Parmar, “Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) in India’s National Strategy,” Journal of Defence Studies, Institute for Defence Studies and Analyses, Vol. 6, No. 1, January 2012, pp. 91-101.


    [22] David Brewster, India’s Ocean: The Story of India’s Bid for Regional Leadership (Abingdon: Routledge, 2014).


    [23] “Text of the PM’s Remarks on the Commissioning of Coast Ship Barracuda,” NarendraModi.in, March 12, 2015.


    [24] P.K. Ghosh, “Maritime Security Trilateralism: India, Sri Lanka, and the Maldives,” Strategic Analysis, Vol. 38, No. 3, May 2014, pp. 283-288.


    [25] C. Raja Mohan, “Modi and the Indian Ocean: Restoring India’s Sphere of Influence,” ISAS Insights No. 277, Institute of South Asian Studies, National University of Singapore, 20 March 2015.


    [26] Christopher D. Yung, Ross Rustici, Scott Devary, and Jenny Lin, “‘Not an Idea We Have to Shun’: Chinese Overseas Basing Requirements in the 21st Century,” China Strategic Perspectives, No. 7, Institute for National Strategic Studies, National Defense University, October 2014; “Asia Maritime Transparency Initiative,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, 2016.


    [27] Balakrishna Pisupati, “Redefining SAGAR in Indian Ocean,” The Hindu, 26 May 2015.


    [28] “Text of the PM’s Remarks on the Commissioning of Coast Ship Barracuda,” NarendraModi.in, March 12, 2015.

    This article was first published for the Indian Ocean Conference 2016. Like other products of the Brookings Institution India Center, this report is intended to contribute to discussion and stimulate debate on important issues. The views are those of the author(s). Brookings India does not have any institutional views.

    The post Indian Ocean region: A pivot for India’s growth first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    366620
    “Trump’s anti-trade rhetoric does not create an opening for India” http://stg.csep.org/blog/trumps-anti-trade-rhetoric-does-not-create-an-opening-for-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=trumps-anti-trade-rhetoric-does-not-create-an-opening-for-india Tue, 26 Jul 2016 14:10:39 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/trumps-anti-trade-rhetoric-does-not-create-an-opening-for-india/ In an interview to The Quint on July 22, Foreign Policy Fellow Dhruva Jaishankar offered a comprehensive analysis of the U.S. Presidential election campaign, and the ramifications of the election for India and the rest of the world. The current state of affairs in the Republican and Democratic Parties He started with an analysis of the Republican National Convention, whose main takeaways appear to be the continuing division among party elites regarding Trump’s candidacy, and the unprofessionalism of the Trump campaign (as evidenced by Ivanka Trump’s speech, which was rather disconnected from issues dear to the Republican platform, and Melania […]

    The post “Trump’s anti-trade rhetoric does not create an opening for India” first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    In an interview to The Quint on July 22, Foreign Policy Fellow Dhruva Jaishankar offered a comprehensive analysis of the U.S. Presidential election campaign, and the ramifications of the election for India and the rest of the world.

    The current state of affairs in the Republican and Democratic Parties

    He started with an analysis of the Republican National Convention, whose main takeaways appear to be the continuing division among party elites regarding Trump’s candidacy, and the unprofessionalism of the Trump campaign (as evidenced by Ivanka Trump’s speech, which was rather disconnected from issues dear to the Republican platform, and Melania Trump’s allegedly plagiarized speech).

    By contrast, the Democratic Party seems much more united around Hillary Clinton’s candidacy, in spite of her unfavorable ratings among the broader electorate. It is likely that the upcoming Democratic National Convention will strengthen Clinton’s position in the presidential race, conveying the message that she is the responsible candidate with the best resume to become President.

    Trump’s foreign policy

    The discussion then moved on to an assessment of Trump’s foreign policy, which revolves around four main themes, i.e. immigration, the wind-down of alliance commitments, a negative assessment of the consequences of international trade (as seen in Trump’s criticism of NAFTA), and the perception that the world is getting less and less safe and that only a strong man like Trump might counter this trend. So, the leitmotiv of Trump’s foreign policy is the return of American isolationism, which would be unsettling for US allies, forcing them to reconsider defense budgets and deployments. Isolationism would also result in a reduction of American military presence abroad, in an attempt to reduce costs. However, Mr. Jaishankar noted that the economics of Trump’s troop withdrawals do not quite add up: it is unclear whether the United States would really save money by withdrawing troops from foreign bases and deploying them back home, as Trump indicated. So, isolationism would not result in a demilitarisation of the United States, but in a remilitarisation of the homeland.

    Trump has relied on a small pool of relatively unknown experts to draw his foreign policy vision: this has helped him project the image that he, unlike Hillary Clinton, is an outsider to the establishment a central theme in his campaign.

    In an attempt to appraise the consequences of a Trump presidency for India, Mr. Jaishankar uncovered Trump’s mixed attitude towards the country, often characterised by a combination of admiration for the country’s economic performance and fear that this will eventually challenge US dominance. With regards to Trump’s anti-immigration rhetoric, Jaishankar maintained that even if this has not targeted the highly-skilled immigration that comes from the country, India should still be wary of such rhetoric and attempts to turn to ethnicity or religion-based systems to restrict migration, as these might eventually affect the country.  Moreover, plans to raise trade barriers would badly affect India, whose largest trading partner in goods and services together happens to be the United States. So, Trump’s anti-trade rhetoric mainly targeting Mexico, Japan, and China does not create an opening for India.

    Evaluating whether India should fulfill possible American demands for more active involvement in the international arena, in the guise of a military intervention abroad, Mr. Jaishankar said that this is a purely domestic issue, and that its outcome should be borne out of a domestic debate on the capacity of the Indian public to absorb casualties in a foreign theater. Mr. Jaishankar then added that if India wishes to become a major power, it should be willing to take some risks.

    As for India’s expectations from the United States, Mr. Jaishankar, quoting a recent Brookings India publication on India-U.S. relations, said that tighter cooperation on counterterrorism and intelligence sharing, energy, intellectual property and higher education will be essential to strengthen bilateral ties. Whether Trump would be willing to do so remains an open question.

    With respect to U.S.-India relations and Pakistan, Mr. Jaishankar noted that letting India deal with Pakistan on its own something Trump seems to have hinted at would harm India, as it would deprive the country of the leverage that comes from support from the United States.

    As for the impact of a Trump presidency on Pakistan, reducing the aid the US disburses to Pakistan a process that has been ongoing since 2012 at least, when the U.S. started reducing military aid would not necessarily result in the US gaining more leverage, as Pakistan can now rely on a more active and trustworthy patron, i.e. China. Moreover, any attempt to cut off aid would be used as evidence of American unreliability in Pakistan, as was the case in 1965 and 1990.

    Moving on to Trump’s attitude towards Muslims, the presidential hopeful seems to be reinforcing the post-9/11 notion that the United States’ is hostile to the Muslim world. This is certainly fanning anti-American sentiment, but much of the damage to the United States’ reputation in the Muslim world had been done before Trump’s rise.

    Like other products of the Brookings Institution India Center, this report is intended to contribute to discussion and stimulate debate on important issues. The views are those of the author(s). Brookings India does not have any institutional views.

    The post “Trump’s anti-trade rhetoric does not create an opening for India” first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    366698
    India-U.S. | Looking back: Highs, lows, and steady progress http://stg.csep.org/blog/india-u-s-looking-back-highs-lows-and-steady-progress/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=india-u-s-looking-back-highs-lows-and-steady-progress Sat, 04 Jun 2016 05:18:58 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu/?post_type=research&p=421335 India and the United States have come a long way since 2008, the year that Barack Obama was elected U.S. President. Earlier that same year, Indian Prime Minister Manmohan Singh took the unusual step of putting the future of his government on the line over a matter of foreign policy – specifically, a civilian nuclear agreement with the United States. Dr. Singh barely survived a vote of no confidence in the Lok Sabha, India’s lower house of parliament. History might have proceeded very differently had he failed. The years between 1998 and 2008 had been heady ones for India-U.S. relations. […]

    The post India-U.S. | Looking back: Highs, lows, and steady progress first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    India and the United States have come a long way since 2008, the year that Barack Obama was elected U.S. President.

    Earlier that same year, Indian Prime Minister Manmohan Singh took the unusual step of putting the future of his government on the line over a matter of foreign policy – specifically, a civilian nuclear agreement with the United States. Dr. Singh barely survived a vote of no confidence in the Lok Sabha, India’s lower house of parliament. History might have proceeded very differently had he failed.

    The years between 1998 and 2008 had been heady ones for India-U.S. relations. Following a brief period of U.S.-led sanctions following India’s 1998 nuclear tests, the two sides made efforts to turn a new page in their relationship. Indian Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee was swift in trying to assuage some of Washington’s concerns and described the two countries as “natural allies.” An intense period of negotiations on India’s nuclear status culminated in the historic visit of U.S. President Bill Clinton to India in 2000. Meanwhile, American concerns over Y2K – the Millennium bug – gave a boost to India’s nascent software industry, helping it to evolve into a global presence. The two countries were soon talking about collaboration on ballistic missile defence (BMD) and India went so far as to seriously contemplate sending troops to Iraq in 2003 to support the U.S.-led state-building efforts in that country. In 2005, the two countries signed a ten year defence framework agreement, and laid out the terms for a civilian nuclear agreement that would bring India into the global nuclear mainstream. Philip Zelikow, then Counselor at the U.S. State Department, said blandly that the United States’ “goal is to help India become a major world power in the 21st century…We understand fully the implications, including military implications, of that statement.” Two years later, India and the United States – along with Australia, Japan, and Singapore – held large-scale multilateral naval exercises in the Bay of Bengal.

    Initially, the post-2008 era looked likely to belie some of the more enthusiastic predictions that resulted from these developments. Just months before Barack Obama’s election, the United States experienced a financial crisis that had severely negative repercussions for its economy and affected its global credibility. In the aftermath, Washington made attempts at reaching an accommodation with a more confident China on Asian and global issues, much to India’s chagrin. U.S. counterterrorism imperatives in Afghanistan and Pakistan also defined the new administration’s approach to India’s neighbourhood, side-lining some of New Delhi’s concerns.

    It was not just the United States that was economically weakened and distracted. After an initial resurgence following the Global Financial Crisis, India’s economy too began to slow, with growth tumbling between 2010 and 2012. Fiscal profligacy, bad loans, corruption scandals, and policy fluctuations deterred investment, and India adopted a more cautious approach in many of its foreign dealings, including with the United States. The low point arguably came in late 2013, when the detention of an Indian deputy consul general in New York by U.S. authorities resulted in a nasty public spat between the two governments. The incident, and its handling, was perhaps more of a symptom than a cause of the poor state of relations.

    The last two years have seen a gradual upswing, with particularly important strides on the security dimensions of the relationship. For Washington, the partnership with India is now an integral element of the U.S. rebalance to Asia. For New Delhi, the U.S. is a major source of technical, technological, and financial support to assist in India’s domestic transformation. India is also less shy about considering opportunities to enhance the strategic partnership. Consultations and cooperation in Asia have improved, corresponding to a clearer alignment of interests, although differences remain on many issues in South Asia and the Middle East. Yet for all the progress, the relationship still requires continuous tending in order to overcome hurdles and manage divergences. This will be particularly important as India, the United States, and the world experience important political, economic, social, and technological transitions over the coming years.

    NOTE: Hover your mouse on these interactive graphs for detailed figures

    Data compiled by Neha Aggarwal, Dhruva Jaishankar, Shruti Godbole, and Aditya Sharma. Sources: U.S. Department of Commerce, U.S. Energy Information Administration, Indian Space Research Organisation, Ministry of Commerce and Industry (India), Ministry of Tourism (India), Mint, Petersen Institute for International Economics, Stockholm International Peace Research Institute, The Wall Street Journal, and Zinnov.
    Notes: ‘Present’ data is from 2015, except R&D centres (2013); Indian goods exports, Indian FDI to US, Indian student, and U.S. tourist data (2014); and Indian satellite launch data, which includes planned launches for 2016-2017. Figures for U.S. defence exports are in 1990 U.S. dollars.

    Related Articles: A Crash Course in India-US Ties as Modi Prepares for Washington which appeared in Quint on 07th June 2016; The US and India: A Complex “Partnership” which got aired on KCRW on 8th June 2016

    The post India-U.S. | Looking back: Highs, lows, and steady progress first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    421335
    What China’s rise means for India http://stg.csep.org/blog/what-chinas-rise-means-for-india/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=what-chinas-rise-means-for-india Fri, 04 Mar 2016 10:18:12 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu?p=109246&preview_id=109246 As a rising power, China is determined to have an independent say in the economic, political, and security order around her and in the world. What does China’s rise mean for India?

    The post What China’s rise means for India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    China’s economic achievements in the last three decades of 10 percent-plus GDP growth have inspired awe around the world. We all know the consequences—the accumulation of hard power in all its forms, China as the world’s manufacturing workshop, the trillion dollar foreign exchange surpluses, the ability to determine commodity prices in world markets, the presence of China in most global value and production chains, and so on. The speed and scale of China’s transformation are astonishing. As a rising power, meanwhile, China is determined to have an independent say in the economic, political, and security order around her and in the world.

    What does China’s rise mean for India?

    Complicating the scene

    Absent drastic modifications in Chinese or U.S. behavior—which I consider unlikely—the rise of China promises an extended period of political and security instability in Asia and the Pacific. There will be no quick recovery for the world economy, and security competition between the United States and China will remain the principal contradiction, as Mao would have said. The assertive China that we have seen since 2008 is here to stay for the foreseeable future. Security dilemmas between China and Japan; China and India; China and Vietnam; and others will intensify.

    The assertive China that we have seen since 2008 is here to stay for the foreseeable future.

    In other words, the environment in which India pursues its interests will get more complex. And the very complexity of the situation in the Asia-Pacific gives India a choice of partners and collaborators to work with in the pursuit of its interests.

    An assertive China is unlikely to seek an early settlement of the ongoing border dispute with India. Fifty years of stability on the border suggests that give and take on the status quo is most logical. But China’s other interests—its relationship with Pakistan, suspicions about Tibet, and desire to maintain levers in the relationship with India—suggest that a border settlement is not a Chinese priority at present. (Nor, for that matter, does it seem to be a priority of the present government in New Delhi.)

    China’s other priorities—religious extremism and terrorism in Xinjiang, overland access to the Indian Ocean, keeping India in check, a window on Western arms technology, the Chinese commitment and presence in Pakistan Occupied Kashmir—have made Pakistan even more crucial to China’s purposes. Pakistan’s game is to suck India into confrontation, thus establishing Pakistan’s utility to those who feel the need to balance India’s rise (including China, the United States, and others). Today, Russia sells arms to Pakistan, the United States supplies arms and discusses Pakistan’s nuclear weapons and Afghanistan’s future with it, and China has committed $46 billion to an economic corridor and Gwadar in Pakistan. Each of these represents an increased commitment to Pakistan which is an order of magnitude bigger than ever before. India asks the West to refrain from supporting Pakistan, but countries will act according to their own interests. So long as Pakistani terrorism is not a threat to them, they will not expend blood or treasure eliminating Pakistan origin terrorism for India.

    China, meanwhile, remains dependent on the Indian Ocean and has suspicions about India-U.S. defense cooperation and strategic coordination. Taken together, all these factors make it likely that China will keep the border issue alive as a lever in its relationship with India. Nevertheless, the overall salience of the border in the relationship has diminished considerably, now that the Border Peace and Tranquility Agreement of 1993 and subsequent confidence-building measures have stabilized the status quo.

    Room to work together

    Bilaterally, China is now India’s largest trading partner in goods, while the two compete for global markets. Today, over 11,000 Indian students study in China, and there are mechanisms to deal with issues like trans-border rivers, the trade deficit, and others.

    On several global issues in multilateral forums—such as the World Trade Organization and climate change negotiations—the two have worked together, each in pursuit of its own interests. So prospects are good, overall—both bilaterally and by working together on the world stage.

    Fundamentally, the relationship is simultaneously cooperative and competitive. That duality is clear in terms of core national interests. Both countries have an interest in improving on the existing security and economic order. This is why India has been among the founders of the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank and New Development Bank. But the two compete in the periphery they share, hence India’s hesitation on the One Belt, One Road initiative and its sensitivity about Chinese military presence in the Indian Ocean littoral. And neither thinks the other has accepted its territorial integrity.

    Maritime security is a good example of that duality. Both countries have a common interest in keeping sea lanes of communication open, but each will oppose any attempt by the other to control the seas and straits through which these sea lanes pass.

    India, China, and the world

    In this situation, the rest of the world can only be a limited enabler in India-China relations, using India-China competition for their own purposes. Ultimately the relationship is a critical one that will determine both countries’ futures, and they alone can determine its trajectory. Today we seem to be entering a new phase in the relationship, and I hope we will be successful in smoothly attaining a new equilibrium.

    [T]he terms in which foreign and security policy are discussed in China and India…have become much more shrill.

    In the short term, the cooperative-competitive pattern will likely continue. One troubling development, however, is the rise to power in both countries of conservative, authoritarian centralizers. Some of the national leaders who have risen to power since 2012 have little experience of central government and foreign policy, and hold strong ideological predispositions to nationalist and even chauvinist rhetoric. While they have been careful in their public utterances, the terms in which foreign and security policy are discussed in China and India (as well as Japan), have become much more shrill. Anti-foreign views, jingoistic slogans, intolerant ideas, and downright bad manners are now more common. These would not matter in normal times, but governments are under stress now—and leaders could seek external release from internal difficulties.

    Another risk in India-China relations comes from the mutual gap between perception and reality. The China that I see described in Indian commentary bears little resemblance to the China that I have worked with, lived in, and seen on my visits. The same is true of Chinese perceptions of India, though to a lesser degree. The problem has become more acute recently, and narratives of inevitable conflict can be self-fulfilling prophecies.

    Needless to say, I am convinced that we are at a moment of opportunity for India-China relations. This is due to the rapid development of both countries in the last thirty years, to what they have achieved bilaterally, and to the evolution of the international situation. It would benefit each country’s core interests to work with the other.

    Note: This post is adapted from a speech delivered at the National Law University in Delhi on November 19, 2015.

    The post What China’s rise means for India first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    109246
    Priorities for India’s health policy http://stg.csep.org/blog/priorities-for-indias-health-policy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=priorities-for-indias-health-policy Tue, 26 Jan 2016 15:50:00 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu?p=97360&preview_id=97360 India’s health care sector is poised at a crossroads, and the direction taken now will be critical in determining its trajectory for years to come. In a recent Brookings India paper on the Indian government’s health care policy, Shamika Ravi and Rahul Ahluwalia argue that it should prioritize expanding and effectively delivering those aspects of health that fall under the definition of "public goods."

    The post Priorities for India’s health policy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    India’s health care sector is poised at a crossroads, and the direction taken now will be critical in determining its trajectory for years to come. In a recent Brookings India paper on the Indian government’s health care policy, we argue that it should prioritize expanding and effectively delivering those aspects of health that fall under the definition of “public goods'” for example, vaccination, health education, sanitation, public health, primary care and screening, family planning through empowering women, and reproductive and child health.

    These are all aspects of health with significant externalities and thus cannot be efficiently provided by markets. Large gains in the nation’s health, and particularly the health of the poorest and most marginalized, can be made with this limited focus. As just one estimate, a 2010 World Bank study showed that India lost 53.8 billion USD annually in premature mortality, lost productivity, health care provision and other losses due to inadequate sanitation.

    Not about the money: Reforming India’s management systems

    Importantly, these gains can come very cost effectively, as demonstrated by India’s neighbors Bangladesh and Sri Lanka, which spend less as a percentage of GDP on health than India, but have better outcomes. It is not an expansion in spending that is critical for improving health outcomes. Instead, India needs to set appropriate goals and reform the public health care sector’s governance and management systems so that it is able to deliver on those goals. Evidence gathered globally and within India suggests that without good governance, additional spending would be worth little. One potential model to adopt is to set up publicly owned corporations at the state level that can take over the existing state health infrastructure and health delivery operations, thus permitting greater flexibility in management than the government’s notoriously inefficient and hidebound administrative systems.

    India needs to set appropriate goals and reform the public health care sector’s governance and management systems so that they are able to deliver against those goals.

    Where secondary and tertiary care are concerned, we believe that the government’s role should be to provide a different public good sensible and responsive regulation that allows a health care market to develop. The government’s regulatory mechanism will need to address issues of information asymmetry between doctors and patients, for which we recommend government action to supplement market solutions for doctor discovery and quality appraisal that are already springing up. Hospital accreditation, increased importance for patient safety standards and guidelines, standardized, and, in time, mandated, Electronic Medical Records are all measures that will go toward ameliorating market failures that arise from information asymmetry in health care. Increased focus on patient safety in medical curriculums will help, but providing regulation that balances the twin objectives of improving monitoring, reporting and prevention of adverse events while disincentivizing the events themselves will be a key challenge for regulators.

    Addressing the shortage of qualified medical professionals

    Human resource expansion in health care is an area where transparent and responsive government regulation on the supply side is a public good of fundamental importance. The paucity of qualified health workers in India is well documented. The distribution, too, is skewed – the public health system, particularly in rural areas, is very short of qualified personnel. As many as 18 percent of government Primary Health Centers (PHCs) were entirely without doctors, and many others faced shortages. One promising way forward is offered by Indian state Chhattisgarh’s experience with a 3 year long medical training course. While the course was shut down in a few years after opposition from doctors, its graduates were hired as Rural Medical Assistants (RMAs) in PHCs. A Public Health Foundation of India (PHFI) study in 2010 evaluated PHCs across the state, focusing on diseases and conditions that PHCs most need to treat. They found that PHCs run by RMAs were just as good as those run by regular MBBS doctors in terms of provider competence, prescription practices and patient and community satisfaction. Practitioners with training in traditional medicine can also be potentially mainstreamed into such roles. Such avenues toward overcoming the shortage of medical personnel in rural areas must be explored.

    As many as 18 percent of government Primary Health Centers (PHCs) were entirely without doctors, and many others faced shortages.

    Health care financing is another area where government can play a large role. Medical insurance has proved to be a poor model for financing health care. It faces several theoretical pitfalls and has been one of the major factors behind the expensive and unsustainable healthcare system in the U.S. One approach that circumvents the adverse selection and moral hazard issues of medical insurance is that of introducing Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs). MSAs can be encouraged by tax deductions that would apply if the accounts were used to pay for medical expenses, and equity concerns can be alleviated by direct payments for those that cannot pay for themselves.

    These methods can help us accomplish the task of building a health care system that places its principal public spending focus on making and keeping large swathes of our population healthy, and its principal regulatory focus on creating an efficient market for health care.

    The post Priorities for India’s health policy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    97360
    All eyes on Pakistan’s commitment to peace in the region http://stg.csep.org/blog/all-eyes-on-pakistans-commitment-to-peace-in-the-region/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=all-eyes-on-pakistans-commitment-to-peace-in-the-region https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/all-eyes-on-pakistans-commitment-to-peace-in-the-region/ WPS Sidhu argues that Pakistan walking away from the Ufa Agreement talks will be seen as Pakistan walking away from terrorism talks This interview first appeared on CNN-IBN channel. Watch the full discussion here. Key highlights This government is not going to allow Pakistan to meet Kashmir separatists on its own Pakistan pulling away from these talks will be seen as them walking away from terrorism talks At this stage of the talks, Pakistan cannot negotiate about the preamble of the Ufa agreement itself Calling off of these talks is part of a much bigger global geo-political dance that India and […]

    The post All eyes on Pakistan’s commitment to peace in the region first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    WPS Sidhu argues that Pakistan walking away from the Ufa Agreement talks will be seen as Pakistan walking away from terrorism talks

    This interview first appeared on CNN-IBN channel. Watch the full discussion here.

    Key highlights

    • This government is not going to allow Pakistan to meet Kashmir separatists on its own
    • Pakistan pulling away from these talks will be seen as them walking away from terrorism talks
    • At this stage of the talks, Pakistan cannot negotiate about the preamble of the Ufa agreement itself
    • Calling off of these talks is part of a much bigger global geo-political dance that India and Pakistan have done for years
    • US withdrawal from Afghanistan will put the pressure back on terrorism for Pakistan
    • Important to find out if Pakistan’s engagement with Hurriyat has actually advanced the cause of Kashmir or not
    • There has been a certain degree of continuity in Indo-Pak relations, but this government’s message is more firm

    What do you think is the reason for this tough stand taken by the Indian Foreign Minister? Do they also want to show somewhere that there has been no climbdown by the Indian side?
    Absolutely. There’s a fundamental element here that we need to keep in mind: India and particularly this government is changing the nature of the conversation. From now on this is going to be the new normal. In the past the governments may have allowed the Hurriyat to meet, but this government is certainly not going to allow that. We’ve seen evidence of that going forward and that is very much the new normal.

    Even if Pakistan pulls out at this stage India would have already succeeded in very clearly making this summit about terrorism that Pakistan walked away from. India has been saying for weeks that it’s got dossiers that it wants to share and today, the Pakistani National Security Advisor reciprocated that by saying they also had dossiers to share. This has really become about terrorism, something that Pakistan also signed on to, but is now walking away from.

    If India is setting the tone here and saying this is the new normal, you cannot bring Kashmir on the table, you cannot talk to any separatist before India, than how can the Pakistani side going to reply? How are they going to accept these conditions in future?
    This is part of the reason why you’re seeing the kind of response that you are from Pakistan because they see a narrowing window of opportunity. With the US withdrawal from Afghanistan, there is really a declining role of Pakistan in stabilising the reason. With that support gone they’re going to feel increasing pressure on many of these other issues, particularly on terrorism. It’s ironic, because had they been wise they might have seen this as part of a long drawn-out process but in fact they’re really trying to put so much pressure on just one of many interactions that there’s almost a hint of desperation.

    There has also been a lot of pressure on Pakistani Prime Minister Nawaz Sharif, when he attended Prime Minister Modi’s swearing-in ceremony, he faced a lot of criticism back home and a lot of that pressure still exists. Is this a result of that pressure?
    Certainly. We’ve heard that soon after the Ufa statement the Pakistani side and leadership was walking away very deliberately from it, that’s not surprising, and this is part of the challenge of the India-Pakistan relationship, which is why in some ways Ufa was a very useful step forward because it had a step-by-step approach, and had the Pakistani leadership wanted to take that on they would have may well have been able to create some space for them going forward, but given all of the pre-talks talks the atmosphere has been so vitiated that even if the talks were to happen, the biggest achievement would be that they actually happened, not what the outcome was.

    (The Ufa Agreement took place in the Russian city of Ufa on the sidelines of the BRICS and Shanghai Cooperation Organisation summits, where India and Pakistan agreed that they have a collective responsibility to ensure peace and promote development. Both leaders condemned terrorism in all its forms and agreed to cooperate with each other to eliminate this menace from South Asia.)

    Was External Affairs Minister giving out a message to Pakistan that don’t be too hopeful that we’ll talk to you in New York?
    Certainly. It would be presumptive on the part of Pakistan that there’s going to be a meeting in New York when there wasn’t one in New Delhi, which so much effort went into. That was a very not-so-subtle message on the part of Sushma Swaraj, but also I think you can see a certain degree of desperation on the part of Pakistan to say, if that’s not the case then we’ll pass it on to the United Nations, knowing very well that India already has raised a couple of issues in the UN Counter-Terrorism Committee which was absolutely blocked by China. So this is certainly part of a much bigger global geo-political dance of which this is really one step.

    Do you also get a sense that this is desperate attempt by Pakistan to keep the issue of Kashmir alive, and that is why they keep bringing back the Hurriyat even though India wants to keep them at arm’s length, and this is something that Pakistani foreign policy really thrives on.
    There’s an element that both sides have overreacted a bit on this issue. There have been meetings in the past and they’ve gone on without much publicity but in fact this time around because there’s been such a hullabaloo about it that there’s been much more publicity. But also on the Pakistan side, I know they also want to make the point about Kashmir being a disputed territory but I think it is worth for them also to ask whether in fact their engagement with the Hurriyat has actually advanced the cause of Kashmir or not, and if it hasn’t then they’re actually doing a disservice to the cause of Kashmir than the other way around. Obviously all these years they have been meeting with the Hurriyat leaders but what has come of that? Perhaps they need to expand their engagement to meet with other Kashmiri leaders as well beyond the Hurriyat. Perhaps this is one of the things that the Pakistani establishment should think about a bit more as well.

    In this particular instance, you can see how vicious this situation has become that ironically India is actually offering a way out to Pakistan by detaining the Hurriyat leaders so they cannot meet. What better reason could the Pakistani side have? They could say, we tried but we couldn’t meet. You save face. They’re not even doing that. They’re making it much of an more an issue of fundamental rights, which is ironic given the number of cases of people who’re running around free in Pakistan.

    Is there also discomfort with this National Security Advisor level meeting at the Pakistani establishment now? Are they looking for a way out? Is there also a feeling within the Pakistani government and the Pakistani Army that the Ufa agreement was a  big mistake for them?
    Absolutely. If you look at the Ufa agreement, in the operational points, three of them directly relate  to terrorism; the fifth point, which nobody is talking about, is actually to expedite the Mumbai case, which as you know as been one key contentious issue between India and Pakistan.

    When the National Security Advisor Sartaj Aziz points to that phrase of “all outstanding issues” he’s actually talking about the preamble and that’s something even a third secretary knows is not what you negotiate about. It’s the operational paragraphs [that you can now talk about]. So it’s a bit puzzling, to say the least.

    There was big consternation that India for one had a very strong case and that they were going to be meticulous about presenting it and that they [Pakistan] did not quite know how to respond except perhaps to bring forward some dossiers of their own.

    There’s been a lot of talk about Dawood Ibrahim lately. Do you get a sense that the 26/11 trial has taken a back seat?
    Perhaps yes, it certainly might be more of a distraction. That’s one of the perils, if you like, of an independent media; they follow the story where they takes them. But one of the elements which seems to have lost out in this is the progress, or lack of it, of the Mumbai trials and that’s something certainly that the government should or was likely to bring up in these talks going forward.

    How different is today’s situation with Pakistan compared to the past?
    There’s certain degree of continuity that you see in India-Pakistan relations, which has had its ups and downs irrespective of which government has been in power. And indeed, some governments which were seen as being more open to a reconciliation with Pakistan were less successful. They were not even able to make one visit etc. But I think what this particular government is trying to do is change that narrative. On the one hand, leave the door open for negotiations, but on the other hand, also draw a pretty strong hard redline on terrorism. Now that’s in theory. In practice, a lot more needs to be done, particularly on managing the border on the Indian side itself, being more effective in actually countering infiltrators as they’re coming through. But the bottomline is terrorism will not be tolerated any more and if the resumed dialogue is to resume it will only happen if there is a concrete forward movement on terrorism. This, by the way, was also the stand of the previous government. So we have seen a certain degree of continuity except that perhaps the firmness of the message is much more evident under this government.

    What’s the road ahead for Indo-Pak relations after these talks are called off?
    Given the changes in the geopolitical and the global scenario Pakistan is going to start to feel more and more pressure on its role as Terror Central and that’s going to become slightly more critical for all of the friends of Pakistan, which will find it much more difficult to try and support Pakistan’s intransigence when India is actually reaching out to deal with it on a subject which Pakistan says is also of primary concern to it.

    Will Pakistan be increasingly isolated at the global level?
    Yes, particularly given the US pull out from Afghanistan, and the fact that even the Afghan government which started with reaching out to Pakistan with a hand of friendship is now starting to reconsider. Even China is now stepping into the whole negotiations with Afghanistan directly, partly because it feels that Pakistan may not necessarily be able to deliver.

    There is going to be more of a spotlight and Pakistan’s argument that it is as much a victim of terror should actually be a rationale for it to engage with a country which is also concerned about Pakistan being a victim of terror.

    The post All eyes on Pakistan’s commitment to peace in the region first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    367141
    Watching how Modi’s UAE visit translates on ground http://stg.csep.org/blog/watching-how-modis-uae-visit-translates-on-ground/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=watching-how-modis-uae-visit-translates-on-ground https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/watching-how-modis-uae-visit-translates-on-ground/ WPS Sidhu outlines important issues to watch in India-UAE relations, from investments to countering terrorism, Indian workers rights and diplomacy in the Middle East region. Watch the full interview on CNN-IBN here. The bottomline is, first, the amount of investment that comes into India. We know the UAE has one of the biggest sovereign funds in the world, and if Prime Minister Narendra Modi can convince them to invest some of that in India, that will be a very important marker. It’ll be critical to see how much comes through there. There’s also talk of a strategic partnership. We need to see […]

    The post Watching how Modi’s UAE visit translates on ground first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    WPS Sidhu outlines important issues to watch in India-UAE relations, from investments to countering terrorism, Indian workers rights and diplomacy in the Middle East region.

    Watch the full interview on CNN-IBN here.

    The bottomline is, first, the amount of investment that comes into India. We know the UAE has one of the biggest sovereign funds in the world, and if Prime Minister Narendra Modi can convince them to invest some of that in India, that will be a very important marker. It’ll be critical to see how much comes through there.

    There’s also talk of a strategic partnership. We need to see how that translates actually on the ground particularly in the context of counter-terrorism.

    We also know that there have been issues related to Indian workers in the region and how those are going to be resolved and addressed. I think that’s also going to be marker for measuring how successful this trip will be.

    India has been one of the few extra-regional countries which has had amicable relations with almost all the countries in the Arab world, but also, if you like, in the non-Arab world, particularly Iraq, and increasingly with Israel. It’s really been able to manage that relationship extremely well, evident in the steady flow of oil and also broadly in the safety and security of its citizens there. It would be an endorsement to the fact that the Arab world remains very critical, very important, and even as the Arab world is undergoing fundamental transitions, one message might be that India is now willing to step in more and engage in a different way as these countries are starting to undergo quite significant transformation right across the Arab world.

    This is just the start of the foray into the region. There are key other visits that are forthcoming: Iran as well as Israel. And how India manages all of these contested relations would very much be like walking between the raindrops. It’s going to be almost impossible to do because at some point all of these relationships overlap with a lot of concern about these other countries and how India would manage that and create its own space vis a vis each one of them, which is critical for India in its own way, will be an absolute feat of diplomacy.

    The post Watching how Modi’s UAE visit translates on ground first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    367161
    UAE visit part of Modi’s Look East, Link West strategy http://stg.csep.org/blog/uae-visit-part-of-modis-look-east-link-west-strategy/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=uae-visit-part-of-modis-look-east-link-west-strategy https://www.brookings.edu/?p=5850&preview_id=5850 WPS Sidhu would like to wait and watch out the India-UAE cooperation on counter-terrorism is actually going to play out This interview first appeared on 17 August 2015 on CNN-IBN. Watch the full interview here. What is your assessment of the India-UAE counter-terrorism cooperation talks? In many ways it is unprecedented but we will need to see how it is operationalised. In the past there were always statements of very close counter-terrorism cooperation, but now we know the different sets of challenges including recruitment of Indians into ISIS, for example. Even if there is a desire on both sides to […]

    The post UAE visit part of Modi’s Look East, Link West strategy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    WPS Sidhu would like to wait and watch out the India-UAE cooperation on counter-terrorism is actually going to play out

    This interview first appeared on 17 August 2015 on CNN-IBN. Watch the full interview here.

    What is your assessment of the India-UAE counter-terrorism cooperation talks?
    In many ways it is unprecedented but we will need to see how it is operationalised. In the past there were always statements of very close counter-terrorism cooperation, but now we know the different sets of challenges including recruitment of Indians into ISIS, for example. Even if there is a desire on both sides to work more closely together on counter-terrorism, the nature of the terrorist threat itself is changing. The question remains whether this strategic partnership is just going to play catch up or will actually be able to pre-empt some of the challenges that both the countries are likely to face.

    With the UAE, our obsession in the past has revolved around Dawood, the D-Company, the underworld links etc. but if you look at this joint statement, Mr Modi tries to take it to a different level, ISIS included.
    In that sense it is looking at it much more strategically. I’m not in any way discounting the value or the unprecedented nature of this particular strategic partnership and the joint statement. Where I reserve my judgment would be on how it plays out. Is there capacity in India to actually have this of joint cooperation and what are the pluses and minuses. We know that in some areas the UAE is certainly way ahead in some of the kind of abilities that they have. To what degree is that kind of cooperation going to play out in reality is one thing that I’d like to see.

    Politically why is this visit important, both internationally and domestically, for the Prime Minister?
    Although the Modi government has highlighted Neighbourhood First as the first priority, and then Act East as the second dimension, but Link West is a very important component that was missing in this grand scheme of things. In my opinion, I don’t think the three of them actually add up to a whole and stand to its own logic, but nonetheless all three are important elements, and that’s why the approach to West Asia was long overdue and we were already hearing pronouncements about outreach to Israel, for example.

    Certainly the region has been very keen to engage much more closely with India. There have been a number of high-level visits, the latest by the Iranian Foreign Minister recently. It was important in India to reciprocate if it was to be taken seriously in terms of the Link West.

    If you’ve seen the pattern of Prime Minister Modi’s visits, he’s rarely done single country visits, except in the immediate neighbourhood. This gives the impression that perhaps he could not go to other countries because they were not ready to engage or receive at that strategic level that has become a hallmark of Prime Minister Modi’s visits. For example, he was very keen to go to Saudi Arabia, but for some reasons that didn’t work out.

    Every international visit has got a domestic constituency. The Biharis in the UAE, for instance.
    I’m not quite sure what is the percentage of Biharis working in the Middle East, and particularly in the UAE, and it’s not insignificant. That’s an important element to keep in mind as well. Certainly there are domestic components to this, which a Prime Minister and a politician like Mr Modi would be very aware of.

    A large chunk of his speech was about terrorism. An Indian Prime Minister in the Arab world saying that there’s no difference between the good Taliban and the bad Taliban, saying that there are countries which practice terrorism and part of state policy.
    Let’s not forget that within the Arab world, there are countries are quite uncomfortable with the distinction that some of other countries are making, like Qatar, for example, which have negotiations in supporting the conversations with the Taliban. There is a nuance there. But he’s certainly playing in to some of that concern as well because UAE has been extremely cautious and successful about countering the ISIS threat. There’s a recognition right there. He knew he would get a very sympathetic ear to that perception.

    What’s your opinion about the economic engagement, since the Crown Prince of the UAE has promised Rs 4.5 lakh crore of investment in India.
    We need to see when and how it’s going to come through, and what is the capacity of India to actually absorb that.

    About the speech itself, at 60 minutes, it’s probably one of the shortest speeches by Mr Modi. We just heard him speak for 90 minutes in his Independence Day speech. Secondly, there is a missing component on foreign policy in the Independence Day speech and we heard it today.

    There is a bit of a contradiction between on the one hand celebrating, rightly, the breakthrough framework agreement with the Nagas through negotiations, but on the other hand also saying no negotiations with terrorists. You could make a distinction between cross-border terrorists and militants within the country, but he didn’t quite do that.

    The post UAE visit part of Modi’s Look East, Link West strategy first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    367168
    How great power competition has changed http://stg.csep.org/blog/how-great-power-competition-has-changed/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=how-great-power-competition-has-changed Mon, 04 May 2015 08:00:00 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu?p=59863&preview_id=59863 Power is now more evenly distributed in the international system. As a result, there is rising geopolitical competition among great powers. Shivshankar Menon lays out the several consequences of this increased competition.

    The post How great power competition has changed first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    It is a cliché to say that we are at a moment of transformation in the international situation. Change is inevitable and constant so the cliché always has enough truth to give it legs. But the important question is what kind of change are we seeing, and specifically, how are relations among great powers changing?

    A few bits of background are important to the story:

    • The last 25 years have seen a redistribution of economic power among the world’s great powers on a scale and rate that is probably unprecedented in history. This process accelerated after the global financial crisis of 2008. China, which was one-eighth the size of the U.S. economy 25 years ago, but is now roughly the same size in purchasing power terms. And several other countries have also shown consistently high rates of growth—India, for instance, has posted over 6 percent gross domestic product growth for more than 30 years and over 8 percent in the first decade of this century. The other side of this phenomenon is the relative decline of the rest of the West, the United States excluded, whose share in global output has dropped.
    • The shift in economic power has not been painless for anyone. Since 2008, every major power has undergone some form of deep internal economic readjustment: The United States is transitioning to an energy and innovation economy; China is seeking domestic sources of future growth in consumption; India is preoccupied with building infrastructure, urbanization and industrialization; Japan and Western Europe are trying to rediscover sources of economic growth while aging; Russia seeks to adjust to new energy market conditions and an ageing and shrinking population; and so on. 
    • The trend is less evident but similar in politics. In the military and technological domains U.S. predominance continues. But at the same time new technologies have empowered small groups and individuals, and function as force multipliers for non-state actors like terrorists, further eroding the state’s monopoly on violence. The combination of economic crises, the social and political fragility they have induced, and new technologies, has created instability and geopolitical shifts.
    • As a consequence, even very powerful states find it difficult to translate military dominance and battlefield superiority into lasting or effective political outcomes and arrangements. We only have to look around us to see multiple examples—Iraq, Afghanistan Syria, Libya, Yemen, and Ukraine. The result is a series of local wars and prolonged conflicts around the world.

    In sum, power is now more evenly distributed in the international system. As a result, there is rising geopolitical competition among great powers. But the nature of the competition is limited by two significant factors: their domestic preoccupations and their dependence on each other for economic growth. Conflict is therefore most acute along the periphery of great powers that are least integrated into the Western-led political order.

    Rising geopolitical competition usually happens through proxies rather than direct confrontation Ukraine, North Africa, and the Middle East are examples. The East China Sea is currently the only area of direct confrontation between two major powers. Competition among great powers has extended to the sea lanes that carry the world’s energy and trade and is visible in the naval buildup by all the major powers that we see today—a buildup over the last ten years which is unmatched in scale in history.

    At the same time, the prospect of conventional war between major powers remains low—victory in a major war is no longer a meaningful objective for any major power.

    The Consequences

    We should expect several consequences of the growing geopolitical competition among great powers:

    • Following Edward Luttwak, we will give war a chance. In a series of regional crisis after crises, the great powers neutralize each other and avoid the hard political work needed to solve the crisis. Expect Libya, Syria, and other crises to continue to fester.
    • The great powers’ ability to make systemic changes in the world order will remain in considerable doubt. For all the need to restore geopolitical balance where it has been upset, as in the Middle East, or to create a new open inclusive security architecture in the Asia-Pacific, there is no great power or group of great powers stepping forward to restore or create balance or to negotiate the balance of interests in troubled regions. On international issues, the level of productive cooperation among great powers is at an all-time low as demonstrated by the declining efficacy of the United Nations and other multilateral institutions. On global issues like climate change and trade talks, great powers are pursuing ad-hoc and regional pacts rather than the global solutions that confident major powers sought in the past.
    • Regional powers will have more space to pursue their own ambitions, and take matters into their own hands. The fact that power is more evenly distributed among states, and even within states, means that the major powers’ ability to enforce peace or stabilize conflict is also limited. In cases like Yemen and Afghanistan, the major powers have no alternative but to relying on regional or local powers. Where there is no agreement among the regional powers as in Syria, the major powers are unable to impose their will or even agree on desirable outcomes. 

    In sum, great power relations have deteriorated considerably in the last few years. While there are limits to how bad they can become, there are also limits to their ability to produce international outcomes on urgent issues.

    The post How great power competition has changed first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    59863
    The Iran deal: Implications for U.S.-India relations http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-iran-deal-implications-for-u-s-india-relations/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-iran-deal-implications-for-u-s-india-relations Tue, 28 Apr 2015 15:30:00 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu?p=59850&preview_id=59850 Should the deal with Iran on nuclear non-proliferation be concluded this summer, it would also vindicate India’s preference for diplomacy over military action to address contentious issues, particularly in the Middle East.

    The post The Iran deal: Implications for U.S.-India relations first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    The Iran deal or the “Parameters for a Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA) Regarding the Islamic Republic of Iran’s Nuclear Program”, to use the wordy official title has primarily been measured in the number of centrifuges and evaluated in terms of Tehran’s ‘break-out’ timeline to build a nuclear weapon. While this is, doubtless, the crux of the JCPOA, the yet-to-be-signed agreement is equally significant for U.S.-Iran relations, the future of the Middle East as well as India-U.S. relations, and New Delhi’s geopolitical future.

    The Iran deal is of salience to the United States and the world for several reasons. At the very least, it would ensure a non-attack guarantee for Iran not only by the United States, but also its estranged allies, Israel and Saudi Arabia; neither is likely to risk a military option as long as the deal is in place. It would also vindicate India’s preference for diplomacy over military action to address contentious issues, particularly in the Middle East.

    More expansively, it raises the possibility for normalizing the relations between Washington and Tehran that have been estranged since the 1979 Islamic Revolution. Indeed, this prospect makes the U.S. opening to Iran as significant as the U.S. opening to China in 1972 (with Oman playing the backchannel role that Pakistan performed vis-à -vis China), and holds the same potential to change world order and India’s role in it.

    For India, the deal holds several lessons and implications for its relations with both Tehran and the United States. Until now, India’s friendly relations with Iran and refusal to adhere to sanctions imposed by the United States were a hurdle to the growing Indo-U.S. strategic partnership. In fact, India’s opposition to U.S. sanctions on Iran might have been one unspoken element for slow progress on the U.S.-India nuclear agreement. Thus a deal, especially if it leads to lifting of sanctions, might also advance U.S.-India relations by removing one area of disagreement.

    Second, a U.S.-Iran rapprochement might allow India to work with both Tehran and Washington to stabilize Afghanistan (just as they had done in 2001 to 2002, when all three, plus Russia, supported the Northern Alliance). Moreover, an alternative route through Iran would allow for greater Indian engagement with Afghanistan in coordination with the United States.

    One indication of this might be the collaboration between Washington, New Delhi, Tehran, and Kabul to jointly develop Iran’s Chabahar port, which is strategically significant as an entrepot in providing access to Afghanistan. However, the lifting of sanctions might on the one hand reduce Iran’s enthusiasm for India’s participation in the Chabahar project, and on the other, bring in competitors with deeper pockets, like China, who can easily outspend India’s puny $85 million initial investment in the port project.

    Third, for New Delhi, the deal underlines the crucial leadership role of the United States in achieving breakthroughs and holding its allies opposed to the deal in check. Indeed, in 2003, the Europeans were unable to reach an agreement with Iran because the United States was uninterested and had labelled Iran a member of the ‘axis of evil.’

    As India seeks to reshape the existing nuclear order through membership in the various nuclear and missile related export control regimes, it will be vital for New Delhi to work closely with Washington and leverage U.S. leadership in achieving its objectives.

    Fourth, while the deal will also allow India to increase oil imports from Iran (which had dropped to zero), it will also mean greater competition from other countries, particularly U.S. allies, like Japan and South Korea, as well as China. Moreover, increased oil imports from Iran will also skew the bilateral balance of payments against India with little prospects of improving them.

    Finally, while sanctions compelled India to walk a diplomatic tightrope between Iran and the United States, the lifting of sanctions will witness New Delhi trying to walk between raindrops as it seeks to strengthen relations with Israel and Saudi Arabia on the one hand, (both of whom are vehemently opposed to the deal) and Iran on the other.

    While it remains to be seen if a final nuclear agreement will be signed in July especially as Iran’s supreme leader, Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, cautioned that there was “no guarantee” of a deal there is a growing recognition of Tehran’s legitimate role in contributing to the future of the Middle East and, possibly, even the evolving world order.

    This is evident in Pakistan’s overtures to engage Iran in resolving the Yemen conflict diplomatically, much to the chagrin of Islamabad’s patrons in Riyadh, who are seeking a military resolution. Clearly, Tehran’s voice will now resonate louder in the region.

    The post The Iran deal: Implications for U.S.-India relations first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    59850
    No Imminent Renewables “Death Spiral” for India’s Utility Companies, but Other Challenges Are Looming http://stg.csep.org/blog/no-imminent-renewables-death-spiral-for-indias-utility-companies-but-other-challenges-are-looming/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=no-imminent-renewables-death-spiral-for-indias-utility-companies-but-other-challenges-are-looming https://www.brookings.edu?p=56867&preview_id=56867 Rahul Tongia explains the challenges facing utility companies in India from distributed generation of renewables and a tiered pricing system in need of reform.

    The post No Imminent Renewables “Death Spiral” for India’s Utility Companies, but Other Challenges Are Looming first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Much has been written about the death spiral U.S. and some European utilities face because of the rise in renewable energy production and use. With high if not saturated energy demand, and the falling costs of renewables, more and more end users, especially higher-end consumers, are opting for distributed renewable generation. This reduces their grid demand (if not cutting the cord completely). This hurts the utilities’ sales, which then have a smaller consumer base to pay for the shared infrastructure, which raises costs, which prompts more people to leave the grid, and so on.

    Whether true or exaggerated, a corollary question for India and other emerging economies yet to reach 100  percent electrification and supply is can they leapfrog to a renewables-centric grid? The answer is no, at least not in the foreseeable future. Even in the West, few solutions are 100 percent decentralized; the grid still provides back-up and stability.

    Pricing Is a Greater Challenge than Renewables

    While a renewables-driven utility death spiral isn’t likely soon in India, there are other spirals and challenges India faces. For starters, demand is nowhere near saturation. With a quarter or more of rural homes unelectrified, and most electrified homes facing supply outages (dubbed “load-shedding”), demand will grow, perhaps 6-8 times before reaching a semblance of saturation.

    Indian utilities face different threats, beyond the well-known issue of losses, theft, and shortfalls in supply. With low prices for small consumers (based on a tiered tariff structure), much of the latent demand is not profitable for utilities; and the remote and rural consumers are the most expensive to wire. Worse, their household demand comes during the evening peak, when supply is tight. Socially important pushes for universal electrification strain utility finances. If utilities were to implement time-of-day consumer pricing to help incentivize peak generation, this would raise the peak tariff. However, renewables, especially solar, would not be able to compete as easily at such hours.

    Competition spirals and viability challenges come not from renewables, but from broader electricity pricing challenges. Simple “cost of generation” comparisons miss the fact that not all generation is equal. Retail prices in India are disconnected from the cost of generation (procurement by distribution utilities) not just because of average cost pricing, but also because procurement itself lacks time of day pricing. Lack of mark-to-market pricing (where the last transaction sets the price for all units, even in the past at different prices, such as with stocks,) means that state owned generation costs (averaged out, including older and cheaper units) come out cheaper than virtually all new plants, further diminishing the pressure on many retail consumers to shop elsewhere for power.

    This also means that electricity prices will rise faster than inflation. While fuel, labor, and other commodity costs may go up “just” by inflation, the average electricity procurement cost is low due to older and cheaper plants. However, newer plants are all measurably more expensive than average procurement costs, regardless of whether public or private (imported coal or liquid fuel plants are just extreme examples of this). A hypothetical example (ignoring losses): a 10 percent growth in procurement from entirely “expensive” new generation (say, 50 percent more expensive than the average) pushes the average price increase above inflation (of perhaps 7 percent) by another 3.9 percent. This is even before pricing in peaking power, which is inherently expensive. The answer isn’t necessarily to move to mark-to-market pricing – such a step would raise procurement costs overnight – but at least the marginal costs must be accounted for and signaled to generators and procurers.

    Decisions for Utilities: Face the Music and Plan Ahead

    Pressure on prices includes the fact that distribution utilities are bleeding money; a 2012-13 annual accounts filing by a major Indian distribution utility showed that over 97 percent of its total revenues (including non-operations revenues) was spent on procuring power. That leaves very little for operations, maintenance, salaries, let alone capital investment, R&D, or profitability.

    Pressures from renewables are not the key problem, since such private generation also faces high wheeling charges or, in some cases, official cross-subsidy charges. Instead, pressure comes from today’s cross-subsidies across consumer categories and tiered consumption, where over-paying commercial and industrial consumers have maximum incentive to leave the system (either legally or illegally), further straining the rest of the system.

    There are other spirals and pressures on utilities, such as privatization or franchising operations in urban areas, which might be the only viable geographies that private entrants want to enter. This will leave the rest of the utility with lower-revenue consumers.  

    Facing such pressures, and just struggling to keep the lights on, renewables aren’t very high on utility executives’ minds. For now. But over time, the renewable energy-driven utility death spiral will also reach India. But by then, battery and smart grid technologies would have matured further, forcing even greater transformations on utility business models and regulations. India needs to become transparent in its electricity accounting, to enable greater efficiency, encourage diverse and qualitatively different generators, and offer incentives to save energy both overall and at the peak. With some effort, India can move to a virtuous cycle, with better electricity supply leading to a growth in GDP, paying for improved supply, and so on.

    The post No Imminent Renewables “Death Spiral” for India’s Utility Companies, but Other Challenges Are Looming first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    56867
    Smart Grids in India: Separating Hype from Hope http://stg.csep.org/blog/smart-grids-in-india-separating-hype-from-hope/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=smart-grids-in-india-separating-hype-from-hope https://www.brookings.edu?p=56785&preview_id=56785 Rahul Tongia discusses why Smart Grids in India have become a distinct possibility, instead of a science experiment, and why they can succeed now.

    The post Smart Grids in India: Separating Hype from Hope first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Why Indian Smart Grids Make Sense

    What are Smart Grids? There is no single technology or design, but these are a general term for the transformation of the power grid using digital communications and control to enable functionalities such as increased awareness, resiliency, flexibility, efficiency, and enhanced renewables integration.  Definitions and functionalities abound, but for India, the killer apps are likely to be different.  In the West, labor costs for meter reading and connections/disconnections have been one driver, in addition to pressures due to renewable energy and electric vehicles, as well as concerns on handling the peak on aging infrastructure.  In India, the short-term needs include reduction of losses (both technical and financial) and keeping the grid in balance (especially given shortfalls).  Focusing on these applications, and viable price points, will make or break Smart Grids in India. 

    Theft reduction is important, but the scope, on average, may be about 13-15 percent, without grid upgrades to reduce technical losses (which are higher than in comparable countries).  In contrast, the demand is expected to grow several hundred percent over the coming decades.  Today’s challenge is meeting the peak load, due to which outages (feeder level “load-shedding”) are common, and load management will be very important for a power-deficit nation.  Instead of load-shedding, can all consumers not be guaranteed a minimum supply (e.g., 100 watts or 200 watts, enough for lights and a fan), even during deficit periods? If they want more, they could then pay a small surcharge (with regulatory approval).

    It’s important to recognize that Smart Grids are only a means to an end, an enabling infrastructure (one could provide 50 watts or 300 watts as “lifeline” if one wished).  You also don’t need a Smart Grid to cut down theft.  In a few Indian utilities, professional operations and political will have worked. But Smart Grids make it much easier to reduce leakage.  It’s not as if the utility doesn’t know what is going on and where. But now one can have irrefutable data, instead of ad hoc and assumption-based calculations. 

    Why Smart Grids Can Now Succeed in India

    Today, Smart Grids in India have become a distinct possibility, instead of a science experiment.  The new Narendra Modi government has announced a vision for 100 Smart Cities.  Importantly, over the last five years, India has moved ahead from “What is a Smart Grid?” to “What does it mean for India?” (partially answered) to “How do we do it?” Yes, there has been hype (e.g., the cover of a business magazine showing the Badshah [emperor] of Bollywood,  Amitabh Bachchan, with a Smart Meter), but there has been consistent (even if sometimes slow) steps towards Smart Grids, including the recent National Smart Grid Vision and Roadmap

    The technology has also improved over the last few years with standards for many components.  While ongoing, such efforts have led to solutions that take far less customization than before.  It’s not an off-the-shelf solution (yet) but price-performance points are now becoming interesting, even for a price-sensitive nation like India (where the median household electricity bill is only a few US$/month).   India’s IT skills are also world-class, and labor costs are low. In France, the national utility’s pilot showed smart meter installation costs of over 40 euros! 

    Probably the greatest reason these can work is a willingness to change – people are sick of business-as-usual.  The government recognizes the issue of utility losses (many billions of dollars per year), and consumers hate losing power and paying for back-up power (also to the tune of billions of dollars per year).  This has an impact on GDP growth reportedly of several percent.  In the U.S., to save a dollar or two per month, consumers may not get that excited (what I call the “Smart Grid Slice of Pizza Syndrome”), but in India, if you tell consumers that with modest modifications to their usage patterns, they can save Rs. 50/month (with time of day pricing), or avoid outages, many will jump at it.  Modest? They already face extreme (involuntary) engagement with the grid – most lose power weekly if not daily, and expensive back-up power only covers part of their load.

    Costs, alternatives, and options

    “If you think education is expensive, try ignorance” – Derek Bok.

    Certainly a Smart Grid has costs, but what are the alternatives? Load-shedding is artificially cheaper (as utilities avoiding buying costly peaking power) but this just passes the burden on to consumers.  Just imagining smart meters as avoiding meter reading costs (which are low in India) is a false comparison, or rather, can be considered Parmenides Fallacy (comparing the future to the present, instead of alternative futures).  With a smart grid, not only is meter reading far more accurate, one can get load profiling, outage detection, theft detection, time of day pricing, and congestion planning as well. 

    To end load-shedding, one option that has worked well is the “Gujarat Model” which included rural feeder separation (which itself has costs).  However, some of the other states that tried something similar achieved less stellar results.  This is because of inherent differences in consumer profiles, availability of supply (generation), and sheer political will.  A smart grid isn’t an alternative to that – it is the next step where separation and granularity isn’t just at a feeder level, but can be down the household level. 

    Recommendations for India’s Smart Grids

    1)     
    Focus on consumers (and utilities), their needs, and think bottom-up

    Smart Grids work when you get the design right. They fail when consumers don’t want them.  Consumers need carrots (e.g., no more load-shedding) and not just sticks (e.g., theft detection). Engaging consumers need to require the Internet or even a fancy in-home display – one could use mobile phones and text messages (SMSes), which are ubiquitous in India.


    Too much of Indian smart grids today are top-down driven, if not vendor/consultant driven.  Utilities have their hands full trying to implement the Flagship R-APDRP program, which can be considered a pre-cursor to Smart Grids.  Both efforts need to synergize to avoid duplicated or wasted effort. 


    2)     
    Improved if not innovative financing and accounting

    1. Innovative doesn’t mean convoluted Wall Street-type instruments, just improved granularity and accuracy. Instead of average costs, one has to account for marginal costs and time of day costs.  
    2. Use societal cost benefit analyses (CBA) for proving the business case of Smart Grids, instead of utility Return on Investment (ROI).  If a Smart Grid ends load-shedding, as of now the utility doesn’t benefit financially, but the consumer saves on back-up power.  A ROI will not capture this, but a CBA will. 
    3. Consumers today pay for electricity meters – can they pay for a smart meter? A modern digital meter can cost about Rs. 1,000 (almost $20), so can they cover the incremental estimated Rs. 1,000 for a simple smart meter? This isn’t the full system cost, but the utility could cover shared infrastructure, telecoms, data center, analytics, and more.  This is akin to the telecom concept of houses with tails, where the last hop optical fiber costs are borne by the household, in exchange for a network this can simply plug in to. 

    Is this fair? First, if the utility buys the smart meter, ultimately it charges the consumer down the road. Second, regarding affordability, in most urban areas, the most basic of homes costs many hundreds of thousands of rupees (in Mumbai, there are single-room slums that builders have paid Rs. 10,000,000 for).  This cost is a small price to pay for improved electricity.


    3)     
    Learn, try, innovate

    If anyone says they have a perfect, ready smart grid at the Indian price point, with modularity, interoperability, security, and other important features, then either they’re unaware, or trying to sell you something.  Smart grids need effort, and the 14 nationally supported Pilot Projects are a step toward rollouts. Better pilots would differentiate between learning and deployment pilots.  India also needs innovation to handle communications and other challenges, not to mention usability and consumer engagement needs. An in-home display is available, but too expensive (if not complex) today.  The government is planning a Smart Grid Mission, which can help drive both funding and policy. Importantly, the real challenge is not at the center but with the states, which are resource-constrained, both in skilled manpower and cash.  

    Challenges with Smart Grids remain, including relating to the technology, especially communications.  Rural areas have limited cellular (data) coverage, and urban areas are cellular congested, and RCC-type dense construction with apartments doesn’t help in urban areas.  But these are surmountable. 

    Probably the single biggest challenge is one of mindset.  To a utility, nothing looks cheaper than load-shedding. But it should be disallowed.  We can and should be granular.  We already differentiate consumers and tariffs. But now we can do it smartly, in a transparent, equitable, and efficient manner. 

    Smart grids have been described as a work in progress, a journey, with different utilities worldwide at different levels of implementation.  If these are tough to get right in developed regions, do Smart Grids make sense for India, which is still struggling to keep the lights on (and provide access)?  Smart Grids can and should look different in different places, and an Indian Smart Grid becomes not only an option but, likely, an inevitable transformation of the grid.  Why? Because business as usual just will not meet India’s aspirations in terms of speed, economics, and sustainability. 

    The post Smart Grids in India: Separating Hype from Hope first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    56785
    Why Renewable Energy Is Harder in India than in Other Countries http://stg.csep.org/blog/why-renewable-energy-is-harder-in-india-than-in-other-countries/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=why-renewable-energy-is-harder-in-india-than-in-other-countries https://www.brookings.edu?p=56800&preview_id=56800 Rahul Tongia discusses the challenges of renewable energy sources in India and offers recommendations to help better integrate renewables into the grid.

    The post Why Renewable Energy Is Harder in India than in Other Countries first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Challenges of Renewable Energy Sources: Global Plus India-specific


    Renewables in India are different from renewables deployed in the U.S., Europe, etc. and understanding these differences is key to viable policies. The triad of “usual” challenges of renewables remains in India, such as (1) intermittency/variability; (2) location-specific potential (concentrated in areas sometimes away from consumers or the grid; and (3) higher costs. However, there are specific differences and needs that demand deeper analysis for the long-run viability of renewable energy. Making renewables viable for producers is easy pay them enough but can the rest of the system handle that? Because of pricing subsidies as well as high losses (both technical and commercial, i.e., theft), utilities already lose on average about a rupee, if not more, per kilowatt hour sold.

    One of the typical calculations that power systems operators do is estimate how much renewable power the grid can handle. Typical figures from elsewhere are in the range of 20-30 percent , with more requiring significant investments in transmission or peaker plants. India is different because its grid is very weak and unstable, and instead of having a reasonable reserve margin (typically 15-20 percent in the west), there is a shortfall in the grid, officially in the range of 5 percent or so, but actually much higher. Even the Grid Code is modest, recommending (but not mandating) only a 5 percent margin.  The grid is kept afloat through massive “load-shedding” (feeder-level cutouts of supply). Such load shedding even impacts options like rooftop solar, since grid-tie inverters are designed to switch off during outages or faults, for safety reasons. But if the grid is down so much, then the economics of rooftop solar takes a massive hit due to non-supply of power.

    There are other technical reasons why the Indian grid is weak, including lack of ancillary services (systems designed to keep the grid stable, instead of just pricing kilowatt-hours), and even a lack of time-of-day pricing for bulk procurement of power. There are few peaker plants (which would operate only some 5-10 percent of hours in a year), since there isn’t sufficient incentive for these. Without incentives for plants that can ramp up (or down) quickly but may not get used much, how will the grid handle 20 percent renewables? Even worse, the types of plants capable of fast ramping are limited in near-term growth in India hydropower (due to land and social/environmental challenges) and natural gas (due to supply constraints).


    What Is the Problem You’re Trying to Solve with Renewables?


    Germany is touted as a model for rooftop solar programs. India gets some 20+ percent more sunlight, and labor costs are lower. But that would only bring the cost of such systems down from about Rs. 20/kWh to perhaps Rs. 13/kWh, still some four times higher than the average household tariff. Much more importantly, Germany and other countries are solving an energy (kWh) problem India is still working to solve the capacity (kW) problem. Solar does not contribute in the evening, which is when India’s peak demand occurs (driven by lots of small residential and commercial users). Thus, even if India adds 20 GW of solar, it still needs 20 GW of additional capacity to meet its peak, and the picture is almost as bad for wind because of its strong seasonality.

    This is also one reason why renewables aren’t a panacea for rural electrification. Beyond the issue of the evening peak, most optimal renewables (except solar) are village-scale, if not larger, not household. One still needs a last-mile connection. At that point, the grid becomes more attractive (given it reaches the vast majority of villages already), especially as demand grows rapidly once a household is electrified.


    Renewables Are Vital and Worth Supporting, but Need Honest Accounting and Extensive Planning


    Where are renewables headed? They will certainly grow, especially because of support mechanisms (for more background information, see my chapter on Renewables in India, commissioned for the Economist Intelligence Unit’s special report on Energy in India). The national government has immense support mechanisms, from a dedicated Ministry to various Missions and Programmes, but do consumers support renewables? Will they pay a higher price for them? Or, are they just too concerned with lack of access/supply?

    There is another dimension, one that impacts policies – the role of the state-level distribution utilities (which are the real decision-makers when it comes to renewables). In almost all states, the steps utilities have taken toward renewables have been top-down imposed, whether through state policy, or regulatory requirements, or even a renewables portfolio obligation (RPO). Talking to many utilities, they ask a tough question: Why should I encourage an unpredictable and non-dispatchable source of power that costs much more than my average supply costs, but offers a Plant Load Factor (PLF, aka capacity utilization factor) close to 20 percent (coal plants easily operate at 75-80 percent PLF)? Of course, utility cost calculations are based on them having older and “cheaper” generation stations in the state, which offset the costs of more expensive “external” power (whether from Central Generation Stations like NTPC or private producers).

    When we factor in the price of new generators, especially coal (which is often imported), renewables don’t look as expensive anymore. Plus, the cost of fossil fuels is only rising, not to mention subsidies or preferences given to fossil fuels, let alone costs of externalities such as pollution or even carbon. This is why, among other reasons including large scope for growth, employment, and perhaps exports, renewables should be pursued.


    Recommendations


    To help integrate renewables better into the grid, a few recommendations for India include:

    (1)    Move toward time-of-day pricing for bulk supply, including peak pricing (this is easier than consumer time-of-day pricing, and can come first).

    (2)    Enhance storage solutions and deployments.

    (3)    Improve measurements, predictions, and analysis for wind and solar generation, including data sharing.

    (4)    Begin ancillary services in the grid.

    (5)    Deploy smart grids to make demand more dynamic and grids robust.

    (6)    Improve planning and accounting for renewables (rather, all generation), factoring in their burden on the rest of the grid such as transmission congestion.

    Renewables have been called the energy source of the future. With proper effort and planning, that future can start much sooner.

    The post Why Renewable Energy Is Harder in India than in Other Countries first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    56800
    The Concept of Strategic Balance: Relevance and Reality – An Asian Perspective http://stg.csep.org/blog/the-concept-of-strategic-balance-relevance-and-reality-an-asian-perspective/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-concept-of-strategic-balance-relevance-and-reality-an-asian-perspective https://www.brookings.edu//research/the-concept-of-strategic-balance-relevance-and-reality-an-asian-perspective/ Introduction: The concept of strategic balance was developed by the two superpowers in the context of East-West nuclear contestation during the Cold War. It was primarily inspired by the advent of nuclear weapons, though it also drew on the unique history, particularly of the two world wars and the massive destruction suffered by major powers. Strategic balance was premised on three interlocking concepts: First, the elaboration of nuclear deterrence with the objective of preserving a no nuclear war scenario between the nuclear weapon states; the superpower allies and others accepted this, sometimes reluctantly. Second, the management of deterrence among major […]

    The post The Concept of Strategic Balance: Relevance and Reality – An Asian Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Introduction:

    The concept of strategic balance was developed by the two superpowers in the context of East-West nuclear contestation during the Cold War. It was primarily inspired by the advent of nuclear weapons, though it also drew on the unique history, particularly of the two world wars and the massive destruction suffered by major powers.

    Strategic balance was premised on three interlocking concepts:

    First, the elaboration of nuclear deterrence with the objective of preserving a no nuclear war scenario between the nuclear weapon states; the superpower allies and others accepted this, sometimes reluctantly.

    Second, the management of deterrence among major power and their allies through a number of bilateral (US-Soviet agreements), plurilateral (NATO, Warsaw Pact and CSCE) and multilateral (United Nations Security Council) institutions as well as arms control (SALT, START etc.) and, if necessary, even disarmament (ABM and INF)

    Finally, the construction of a non-proliferation regime (Atoms for Peace, NPT etc.) to preserve the nuclear deterrence order, strategic balance and prevent new challengers. There was very little faith that strategic balance and related stability could be preserved at the nth country level.

     

    Post-Cold War:

    However, in the post-Cold War era this traditional concept of strategic stability began to erode on account of at least three factors:

    First, the collapse of the Soviet Union also meant that its ability to keep up with the US and maintain strategic stability was severely compromised. This was coupled with the inability to fundamentally transform the relationship with Russia from an adversarial to that of a quasi-ally. At the same time the US also sought absolute security, instead of mutual insecurity, which further weakened strategic stability.

    Second, the quest for absolute security also led the US and its allies to put greater emphasis on defence rather than deterrence. A related factor was the diminishing role of nuclear weapons and the enhancement of conventional capabilities over the nuclear arsenal. This became possible at the end of the Cold War on account of technical, financial and managerial capabilities.

    Third, the emergence of a number of nuclear armed and nuclear capable countries, particularly outside the East-West framework and notably in Asia (China, DPRK, India, Israel, Pakistan), also challenged the traditional notion of strategic balance and strategic stability in three ways.

     

    The Asian Challenge:

    First, the geopolitics of Asia in general and South Asia in particular (common disputed borders, short distances blurred the distinction between strategic and tactical) meant that strategic balance and stability could not be easily adopted even if there was such a desire.

    Second, none of these countries really bought into the strategic stability concept either in terms of doctrine (no-first use), weapons (both qualitative and quantitative) and deployment (de-alerted status).

    Finally, there was a belated and limited effort to incorporate these countries into the nuclear order, which meant that they had to fend for themselves. Also, unlike the East-West context, where the US buttressed bilateral arrangements with plurilateral ones, in Asia, Washington confined itself to bilateral arrangements.

     

    The Three ‘No’s’:

    Today Asia in general and South Asia (China, India and Pakistan) in particular is characterized by three ‘no’s’ which have a direct impact on the traditional concept of nuclear strategic balance and stability:

    First, no no nuclear buildup policy. Instead, Asia is witnessing qualitative and quantitative enhancement in nuclear weapons and delivery systems. In contrast to European nuclear weapon states the South Asian countries are developing a nuclear triad. Part of this is on account of low base.

    Second, no arms control experience and reluctance to engage in this endeavour.

    Third, no bilateral, regional or global architecture to manage relations and preserve a no nuclear war scenario. Although India and Pakistan have some elements of a bilateral architecture, it is still not fully implemented.

     

    Way Forward:

    South Asia (China, India and Pakistan) have at least two possible ways forward: cooperation or confrontation. If its follows the latter then the experience will be more like the East-West scenario of nuclear build-up. If it follows the former then it might be more like the European experience.

    WPS

    However, in reality South Asia is likely to see a muddling through approach, with a series of ad-hoc and informal arrangement which are more de-facto than de-jure. In this transformation the US will play a crucial role and should also be considered an Asian power.

    The central question for us to consider is: can the de-facto arrangements work in the long term or will they have to be converted into some form of de-jure arrangement? If so, where and how will this de-jure arrangement be established? What role will European powers play in this process?

     

    This talk was delivered at the Contemporary Grand Strategy Colloquium on 10 April 2014.

    The post The Concept of Strategic Balance: Relevance and Reality – An Asian Perspective first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    367636
    Contemporary Geopolitics http://stg.csep.org/blog/wps-sidhu-on-contemporary-geopolitics/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=wps-sidhu-on-contemporary-geopolitics Tue, 01 Apr 2014 17:18:04 +0000 https://www.brookings.edu//opinions/wps-sidhu-on-contemporary-geopolitics/ Senior Fellow WPS Sidhu made presentations at The Université Paris I (Panthéon-Sorbonne), as part of the teaching and research multidisciplinary project set up around the “Institut des Etudes sur la guerre et la paix,” an international Chair devoted to the study of contemporary geostrategic issues. The three lectures  focused on: Nuclear Disorder in the 21st Century Nuclear order in the 20th century was based on three crucial and interdependent pillars: first, the possession of nuclear weapons by major powers; second, the construction of a bilateral, plurilateral and multilateral architecture to, on the one hand, manage relations between major powers and, […]

    The post Contemporary Geopolitics first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    Senior Fellow WPS Sidhu made presentations at The Université Paris I (Panthéon-Sorbonne), as part of the teaching and research multidisciplinary project set up around the “Institut des Etudes sur la guerre et la paix,” an international Chair devoted to the study of contemporary geostrategic issues. The three lectures  focused on:

    Nuclear Disorder in the 21st Century

    Nuclear order in the 20th century was based on three crucial and interdependent pillars: first, the possession of nuclear weapons by major powers; second, the construction of a bilateral, plurilateral and multilateral architecture to, on the one hand, manage relations between major powers and, on the other, to preserve the order by preventing the wider proliferation of nuclear weapons beyond them; third, the establishment of informal regimes to buttress the formal institutional structures. This carefully crafted nuclear order has come under growing strain from both within and without and has led to nuclear disorder in the 21st century. What are the principal factors behind the present nuclear disorder and can it be redressed? This lecture seeks to address these questions.

    Proliferation challenges in Asia

    Asia – stretching from the east of Suez to the Pacific Ocean – is the locale of six states with nuclear weapon (China, DPRK, India, Israel, Pakistan, and Russia) and a state with potential nuclear weapon capabilities and, possibly, intentions (Iran). Asia is also the venue of the fastest qualitative and quantitative proliferation of nuclear weapons. It is also the region with the least institutional arrangements to manage relations between nuclear-armed states. These developments have a direct impact on not only strategic stability in the region but also on strategic stability at the global level. How exactly will the proliferation challenges in Asia threaten regional and global strategic stability and what can be done to address them? This lecture will explore these questions.

    India’s Strategic Vision for the 21st Century

    India – the world’s largest liberal democracy and rising power – has undergone three strategic shifts in the 21st century. First, it has moved from being a traditional military power to a nuclear-armed and growing economic powerhouse with development as its central focus. Second, it has transformed from a regional power to a global player with stakes in every existing and emerging global institution. Third, India has also shifted from its traditional policy of non-alignment to a more pragmatic policy of multi-alignment. Along with this India has also articulated the outlines of a radically new Panchsheel policy. What are the primary drivers behind India’s strategic vision for the 21st century and how does New Delhi plan to manifest this vision? What impact will India’s strategic vision have on regional and global strategic stability?

    The post Contemporary Geopolitics first appeared on CSEP.

    ]]>
    367675